Confusing Words from Metzger

Question 1

ἐρῶ

Answer 1

I shall say

(ἔλεγον), ἐρῶ, εἶ\πον ορ εἶ\πα, εἴρηκα, εἴρημαι, ἐρρέθην ορ ἐρρήθην

Question 2

ἔτι

Answer 2

still, yet, even, again

yet, still, Mt. 12:46; still, further, longer, Lk. 16:2; further, besides, in addition, Mt. 18:16; with a compar. yet, still, Phil. 1:9

Thayer's Definition
yet, still
of time
of a thing which went on formerly, whereas now a different state of things exists or has begun to exist
of a thing which continues at present 1a
even, now
with negatives 1a
no longer, no more
of degree and increase
even, yet
besides, more, further

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἔτι [ῐ],

Adv.:

I of Time,

1 of the Present, yet, still, ἔ. μοι μένος ἔμπεδον Il. 5.254; ἔ. τυτθὸν ἐόντα 6.222; εἰ Ζεὺς ἔ. Ζεύς S. OC 623; ἔτ’ ἐκ βρέφεος ever since babyhood, AP 9.567 (Antip.); ἔ. καὶ νῦν Il. 1.455; ἔ. καὶ ἐκ παρόντων v.l. in Th. 7.77; ἔτ’ ἂν ἐκ τῶνδε θεὸς χρῄζων θείη A. Ch. 340; ἔ. καὶ νυνί Pl. Smp. 215d; νῦν ἔ. ζεῖ A. Th. 708 (lyr.), cf. Ag. 818.

2. of the Past, mostly with impf., ἀήθεσσον γὰρ ἔτ’ αὐτῶν Il. 10.493, cf. Hdt. 9.102, Th. 5.111, etc.: with aor., Pl. Prt. 310c, etc.; ἔ. πρότερον, πρόσθεν, Th. 8.45, Pl. Sph. 242d: with the sense, already, γεγονέναι ἔ. οὐχ ἧττον ἢ εἶναι Id. Men. 93a.
3. of the Future, yet, longer, ἄλγε’ ἔδωκεν.. ἠδ’ ἔ. δώσει Il. 1.96, cf. 5.465: c. opt., ἔ… φιλέοι Od. 15.305: c. imper., μή τις ἔ… ἔστω 2.230; hereafter, A. Pr. 907, S. El. 66, Ar. V. 758 (anap.), etc.
4. with a neg., no longer, οὐδὲ.. ἔ. παρέμειναν D.H. 5.46; v. οὐκέτι, μηκέτι.

II

1. of Degree, still, besides, ἐς δεκάτην γενεὴν ἕτερόν γ’ ἔ. βόσκοι another (and another and so on), Od. 14.325; ἔτ’ ἄλλο Hes. Op. 157, cf. 11.6.411, Od. 11.623, S. Ant. 218, etc.; τίν’ οὖν ἔτ’ ἄλλον..; A. Ch. 114; πρὸς τοῖσδ’ ἔ., πρὸς τούτοις ἔ. (cf. προσέτι), S. Ph. 1339, Ar. Nu. 720 (anap.); ἔ. τε and besides, nay more, Pl. Phdr. 279a; ἔ. τοσόνδε this further point, Id. Tht. 184b; ἔ. δὲ καί Th. 1.80, etc.; πρῶτον μὲν.., ἔπειτα δὲ.., ἔ. δὲ.. X. An. 6.6.13; ἔ. καί alone, τά τε εἴδωλα, ἔ. καὶ τὰ γεγραμμένα Pl. Sph. 239d; ἔτι καὶ ἔ. ἀεί Theol.Ar. 30.
2. freq. to strengthen a Comp., ἔ. μᾶλλον yet more, Il. 14.97, 362; μᾶλλον ἔ. Od. 18.22; ἔ. καὶ μ. Pi. P. 10.57; καὶ ἔ. καὶ μᾶλλον Ael. NA 16.24; ἔ. πλέον Hdt. 7.6; πλέον ἔ. Th. 1.80; παῖς τε κἄτι τοῦδ’ ἀνούστερος A. Pr. 987; πότμῳ τῷ νῦν.. κἄτι τοῦδ’ ἐχθίονι S. OT 272, cf. El. 559, 1189.
3. with the Posit., ἔ. ἄνω yet higher up, X. An. 7.5.9; ἔ. μάλα Ar. Pax 53, 462, Ra. 864. (Skt. áti ‘beyond’, Lat. et, Goth. ip ‘but’, ‘however’.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἔτι, adverb, as yet, yet, still;

1. of time;
   a. of a thing which went on formerly, whereas now a different state of things exists or has begun to exist: added to a participle, Matthew 27:63; Luke 24:6, 44; Acts 9:1; Acts 18:18; 2 Thessalonians 2:5; with the gen absolute: ἔτι (δέ) αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος, Matthew 12:46; Matthew 17:5; Matthew 26:47; Mark 14:43; Luke 8:49; Luke 22:47; add, Luke 9:42; Luke 24:41; John 20:1; Acts 10:44; Romans 5:8; Hebrews 9:8; with a finite verb, Hebrews 7:10; transposed so as to stand at the beginning of a sentence: ἔτι γάρ Χριστός ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν … ἀπέθανε, Romans 5:6; cf. Winers Grammar, § 61, 5, p. 553 (515); (Buttmann, 389 (333)); with another notation of time, so that it may be translated even (cf. Latinjam): ἔτι ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός, Luke 1:15 (ἔτι ἐκ βρεφεος, Anthol. 9, 567, 1; ἔτι ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς, Plutarch, consol. ad Apoll. 6, p. 104 d.).
   b. of a thing which continues at present, even now: Mark 8:17 R G; Luke 14:22; Galatians 1:10; 1 Corinthians 15:17; with νῦν added, 1 Corinthians 3:2 (L WH brackets ἔτι); farther, longer (where it is thought strange that, when one thing has established itself, another has not been altered or abolished, but is still adhered to or continues): Romans 3:7; Romans 6:2; Romans 9:19; Galatians 5:11.
   c. with negatives: οὐ … ἔτι, οὐκ ἔτι, no longer, no more, Luke 16:2; Luke 20:36; Luke 21:1, 4; Luke 22:3; ἵνα μή ἔτι lest longer, that … no more, Revelation 20:3; οὐ μή ἔτι, Revelation 3:12; Revelation 18:21-23; οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν ἔτι, nobody, nothing more, Matthew 5:13; Hebrews 10:2 (see μηκέτι, οὐκέτι).
2. of degree and increase; with the comparative, even, yet: Philippians 1:9; Hebrews 7:15 (Winers Grammar, 240 (225)). of what remains (yet): John 4:35; John 7:33; John 12:35; John 13:33; Matthew 19:20; Mark 12:6; Luke 18:22; of what is added, besides, more, further: ἔτι ἅπαξ, Hebrews 12:26f; ἔτι ἕνα ἤ δύο, Matthew 18:16; add, Matthew 26:65; Hebrews 11:32; ἔτι δέ yea moreover, and further (Latinpraeterea vero), Hebrews 11:36 (Xenophon, mem. 1, 2, 1; Diodorus 1, 74; cf. Grimm on 2 Macc. 6:4); ἔτι δέ καί (but or) yea moreover also (Latinpraeterea vero etiam), Luke 14:26 R G T L marginal reading; Acts 2:26; ἔτι τέ καί and moreover too (Latininsuperque adeo), Luke 14:26 L text Tr WH; Acts 21:28 (cf. Buttmann, § 149, 8; Winers Grammar, 578 (537) note).

Question 3

ἐγγίζω

Answer 3

ἐγγιῶ, ἤγγισα, ἤγγικα, -, -

come near, draw near

pr. to cause to approach; in NT intrans. to approach, draw near, Mt. 21:1; Lk. 18:35; met. to be at hand, Mt. 3:2; 4:17; μέχρι θανάτου ἐγγιζειν, to be at the point of death, Phil. 2:30; from Hebrew to draw near to God, to offer Him reverence and worship, Mt. 15:8; Heb. 7:19; Jas. 4:8; used of God, to draw near to men, assist them, bestow favors on them, Jas. 4:8

to bring near, to join one thing to another
to draw or come near to, to approach

ἐγγίζω,

aor. ἤγγισα Arist. (v. infr.): pf. ἤγγικα LXX Ezekiel 7:4(7), Matthew 3:2 : (ἐγγύς): —

I bring near, bring up to, τῇ γῇ τὰς ναῦς Plb. 8.4.7; τὰ φιλήματα τοῖς χείλεσι Ach.Tat. 2.37; τινὰ πρός τινα LXX Genesis 48:10.

II mostly intr.,

1. approach, Arist. Mir. 845a20; τινί Plb. 18.4.1: c. gen., τῆς Αἰτωλίας Id. 4.62.5, etc.; πρὸς τὸν θεόν LXX Exodus 19:21; εἰς θάνατον ib. Job 33:22; ἕως ib. Si. 37.30(33); μέχρι θανάτου Philippians 2:30; to be imminent, ἤγγικεν ἡ παρουσία τοῦ Κυρίου James 5:8 : also, c. gen., approximate to, Phld. Herc. 1457.4.
2. to be next of kin, LXX Leviticus 21:3.

III c. inf., to be on the point of doing, ναοῦ -οντος συμπεσεῖν IG 12(1).1270.8 (Syme).

ἐγγίζω; imperfect ἠγγιζον; Attic future ἐγγιω (James 4:8 (Alexander Buttmann (1873) 37 (32); with § 13, 1 c.)); 1 aorist ἤγγισα; perfect ἤγγικα (ἐγγύς); in Greek writings from Polybius and Diodorus on; the Sept. for נִגַשׁ and קָרַב.

1. transitive, to bring near, to join one thing to another: Polybius 8, 6, 7; the Sept., Genesis 48:10; Isaiah 5:8.
2. intransitive, to draw or come near, to approach; absolutely, Matthew 21:34; Luke 18:40; (); ; Acts 7:17; Acts 21:33; Acts 23:15; (Hebrews 10:25); perfect ἤγγικε, has come nigh, is at hand: ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ, Matthew 3:2; Matthew 4:17; Matthew 10:7; Mark 1:15; Luke 10:11; with the addition ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, Luke 10:9; ἡ ἐρήμωσις, Luke 21:20; ἡ ὥρα, Matthew 26:45; ὁ παραδιδούς με, Matthew 26:46; (Mark 14:42 (where Tdf. ἤγγισεν)); ὁ καιρός, Luke 21:8; ἡ ἡμέρα, Romans 13:12; τό τέλος, 1 Peter 4:7; ἡ παρουσία τοῦ κυρίου, James 5:8. Construed with the dative of the person or the place approached: Luke 7:12; Luke 15:1, 25; Luke 22:47: Acts 9:3; Acts 10:9; Acts 22:6; ἐγγίζειν τῷ Θεῷ (in the Sept. used especially of the priests entering the temple to offer sacrifices or to perform other ministrations there, Exodus 19:22; Exodus 34:30; Leviticus 10:3, etc.): to worship God, Matthew 15:8 Rec., from Isaiah 29:13; to turn one’s thoughts to God, to become acquainted with him, Hebrews 7:19; ὁ Θεός ἐγγίζει τίνι, God draws near to one in the bestowment of his grace and help, James 4:8. Followed by εἰς and the accusative of the place: Matthew 21:1; Mark 11:1; Luke 18:35; Luke 19:29; Luke 24:28; (followed by πρός with the dative, Luke 19:37, see Buttmann, § 147, 28; others regard this as a pregnant construction, cf. Winer’s Grammar, §§ 48, e.; 66, 2 d.); μέχρι θανάτου ἤγγισε, to draw nigh unto, be at the point of, death, Philippians 2:30 (ἐγγίζειν εἰς θάνατον, Job 33:22); with an adverb of place, ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει, Luke 12:33. (Compare: προσεγγίζω.)

Question 4

παραγίνομαι

Answer 4

(παρεγινόμην), -, παρεγενόμην, -, -, -

to come, arrive, be present; to appear

pluperfect, παραγεγόνει (3 sg), to be by the side of; to come, approach, arrive, Mt. 2:1; 3:13; Mk. 14:43; Lk. 7:4; seq. ἐπι, to come upon in order to seize, Lk. 22:52; to come forth in public, make appearance, Mt. 3:1; Heb. 9:11

τo be present, to come near, approach
to come forth, make one’s public appearance

παραγίνομαι; imperfect 3 person plural παρεγίνοντο (John 3:23); 2 aorist παρεγενόμην; from Homer down; the Sept. for בּוא; (properly, to become near, to place oneself by the side of, hence) to be present, to come near, approach : absolutely, Matthew 3:1 (but in edition 1 Prof. Grimm (more appropriately) associates this with Hebrews 9:11; Luke 12:51 below); Luke (); ; John 3:23; Acts 5:21f, 25; Acts 9:39; Acts 10:32 (R G Tr marginal reading brackets), ; ; 1 Corinthians 16:3; followed by ἀπό with the genitive of place and εἰς with the accusative of place, Matthew 2:1; Acts 13:14; by ἀπό with the genitive of place and ἐπί with accusative of place and πρός with the accusative of person Matthew 3:13; by παρά with the genitive of person (i. e. sent by one (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 365 (342))), Mark 14:43; by πρός τινα, Luke 7:4, 20; Luke 8:19; Acts 20:18; πρός τινα ἐκ with the genitive of place, Luke 11:6; by εἰς with the accusative of place, John 8:2; Acts 9:26 (here Lachmann ἐν); ; by ἐπί τινα (against, see ἐπί, C. I. 2 g. γ. ββ.), Luke 22:52 (Tdf. πρός). equivalent to to come forth, make one’s public appearance, of teachers: of the Messiah, absolutely, Hebrews 9:11; followed by an infinitive denoting the purpose, Luke 12:51; (of John the Baptist, Matthew 3:1 (see above)). equivalent to to be present with help (R. V. “to take one’s part]”], with a dative of the person 2 Timothy 4:16 L T Tr WH. (Compare: συμπαραγίνομαι.)

Question 5

εἶπον

Answer 5

I said (talking ape)

(ἔλεγον), ἐρῶ, εἶ\πον ορ εἶ\πα, εἴρηκα, εἴρημαι, ἐρρέθην ορ ἐρρήθην

Question 6

ἐπί

Answer 6

(gen. ) over, on, at the time of, when; (dat.) on the basis of, at, on, in, while; (acc.) on, to, against, across, while, for, over
(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Acts 11:28; Rom. 1:10; ἐπ᾿ ἀληθειας, really, bona fide, Mk. 12:32; (2) with the dat., upon, on, Mt. 14:8; Mk. 2:21; Lk. 12:44; close upon, by, Mt. 24:33; Jn. 4:6; in the neighborhood or society of, Acts 28:14; over, of authority, Mt. 24:47; to, of addition, besides, Mt. 25:20; Eph. 6:16; Col. 3:14; supervening upon, after, 2 Cor. 1:4; 7:4; immediately upon, Jn. 4:27; upon, of the object of an act, towards, to, Mk. 5:33; Lk. 18:7; Acts 5:35; against, of hostile posture or disposition, Lk. 12:52; in dependence upon, Mt. 4:4; Lk. 5:5; Acts 14:3; upon the ground of, Mt. 19:9; Lk. 1:59; Phil. 1:3; Heb. 7:11; 8:6; 9:17; with a view to, Gal. 5:13; 1 Thess. 4:7; (3) with the acc., upon, with the idea of previous or present motion, Mt. 4:5; 14:19, 26; towards, of place, to, Mt. 3:13; 22:34; towards, of the object of an action, Lk. 6:35; 9:38; against, of hostile movement, Mt. 10:21; over, of authority, Lk. 1:33; to the extent of, both of place and time, Rev. 21:16; Rom. 7:1; near, by, Mt. 9:9; about, at, of time, Acts 3:1; in order to, with a view to, for the purpose of, Mt. 3:7; Lk. 7:44

upon, on, at, by, before
of position, on, at, by, over, against
to, over, on, at, across, against

ἐπὶ

δ’ οὔατ’ ἀλεῖψαι ἑταίρων Od. 12.47; ἐπ’ οὔατα πᾶσιν ἄλειψα ib. 177; κηρὸν.. ὅν σφιν ἐπ’ ὠσὶν ἄλειψ’ ib. 200; ὁπόταν.. λεαίνῃ ἐπαλείφουσα τὰ τραχυνθέντα Pl. Ti. 66c; ἐ. χρόαν ἐτέραν ἐφ’ ἑτέραν Arist. Sens. 440a9: prov., τοὺς τοίχους τοὺς δύο ἐ. ‘run with the hare and hunt with the hounds’, Paus. 6.3.15: —

1. Pass., τὸ ἐπαλειφθέν Pl. Ly. 217c; ἐπαλήλιπται ὁ κύτταρος Arist. HA 555a6; χρυσὸς ἐπαληλιμμένος J. AJ 17.10.2.
2. metaph., from anointing athletes, prepare for contest, stir up, irritate, τινὰ ἐπί τινα Plb. 2.51.2; ἐ. τινάς τινι set them upon him, D.L. 2.38; μέθυσμα ἐ. θυμούς Ph. 1.680; so perh. in physical sense, irritate, Hp. Mul. 1.99, Epid. 5.20.

ἐπί (before a rough breathing ἐφ’ (occasionally in manuscripts ἐπ’; see e. g. Psalm 145:3 ()), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ’ ἐλπίδι, Acts 2:26 L; Romans 8:20-21Tdf.); see ἀφειδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (except Αἴγυπτον Acts 7:10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.s text) before some other words, see the Proleg., p. 94f; cf. Winers Grammar, § 5, 1 a.; Buttmann, p. 10), a preposition (from the Sanskrit local prefix ἀρι; Curtius, § 335), joined to the genitive, the dative, and the accusative; its primary signification is upon (Latinsuper; (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 374 (350) note)).

A. with the genitive (cf. Winers Grammar, § 47, g.; Buttmann, 336 (289));

I. of place; and
1. of the place on which;
a. upon the surface of (Latinin orsuper with the abl., German auf with the dative); after verbs of a biding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπί κλίνης, Matthew 9:2; Luke 17:34; ἐπί τοῦ δώματος, Matthew 24:17; Luke 17:31; ἐπ’ ἐρημίας (cf. on a desert), Mark 8:4; ἐπί τῶν νεφελῶν, Matthew 24:30; Matthew 26:64; ἐπί (τῆς) γῆς, Matthew 6:10; Matthew 9:6; Matthew 23:9; Matthew 28:18; Luke 21:25; Acts 2:19, and very often; ἐπί τῆς θαλάσσης, on (the surface of) the sea, Matthew 14:25 R G; 26 L T Tr WH; Mark 6:48 (49); Revelation 5:13, and, according to the interpretations of many, John 6:19; but cf. Baumg.-Crusius at the passage (per contra, cf. Lücke at the passage; Meyer on Matthew, the passage cited) (Job 9:8; βαδίζειν ἐφ’ ὕδατος, Lcian. philops. 13; ἐπί τοῦ πελαγους διαθεοντες, v. h. 2, 4; (Artemidorus Daldianus, oneir. 3, 16); on a different sense of the phrase ἐπί γῆς θαλάσσης see 2 a. below (Winer’s Grammar, 374 (351))); ποιεῖν σημεῖα ἐπί τῶν ἀσθενούντων, to be seen upon the bodies of men, externally, (on the sick (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 375 (351))), John 6:2; ἐκάθισα and κάθημαι (καθέζομαι) ἐπί, Matthew 19:28; Matthew 23:2; Matthew 24:3; Matthew 25:31; Matthew 27:19; John 19:13; Acts 20:9; Revelation 9:17, etc.; ἔστην, ἕστηκα ἐπί, Luke 6:17; Acts 21:40; Revelation 10:5, 8; where parts of the body are spoken of: ἐπί χειρῶν, Matthew 4:6; Luke 4:11; ἐπί τῆς κεφαλῆς, John 20:7; 1 Corinthians 11:10; Revelation 10:1 R G (others, accusative); ; σινδόνα ἐπί γυμνοῦ, Mark 14:51; ἐπί τοῦ μετώπου (or μετώπων), Revelation 7:3; Revelation 9:4; Revelation 13:16 (Rec., others, accusative); Revelation 14:9.
b. Like the preposition ἐν (see the exposition under the word ἐν, I. 7, p. 212{a}), so also ἐπί with the genitive is used after verbs expressing motion to indicate the rest following the motion; thus after βάλλειν, Mark 4:26; Matthew 26:12; σπείρειν, Mark 4:31; τιθέναι, John 19:19; Acts 5:15; (Luke 8:16 L T Tr WH); ἐπιτιθεναι, Luke 8:16 (R G); καθιεναι, Acts 10:11; πίπτειν, Mark 9:20; Mark 14:35; ἐπιγράφειν, Hebrews 10:16 R G; ἑλκύειν, John 21:11 R G; ἔρχεσθαι, Hebrews 6:7; Revelation 3:10; (anatellein], Luke 12:54 T Tr marginal reading WH); γενόμενος ἐπί τοῦ τόπου (cf. our having arrived on the spot), Luke 22:40 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, p. 376 (352) and see below, C. I. 1 b. at the end). κρεμαν τινα ἐπί (Hebrew עַל תָּלָה, Genesis 40:19; Deuteronomy 21:22, etc.), for which the Latin hassuspendere ex,de,a, andalicui, Acts 5:30; Acts 10:39; Galatians 3:13.
c. figuratively used of that upon which anything rests (like our upon) (cf. Winers Grammar, 375 (351); Buttmann, 336 (289); Ellicott on 1 Timothy as below): ἵνα σταθῇ ἐπί στόματος etc. (עַל־פִּי יָקוּם, Deuteronomy 19:15), resting on the declaration, etc., Matthew 18:16; 2 Corinthians 13:1; more simply ἐπί μαρτύρων, 1 Timothy 5:19; in the adverb phrase ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (on the ground of truth), see ἀλήθεια, I. 1. (c. akin is its use (with a personal or a reflexive pronoun) to denote dependence, as in λογιζέσθω ἐφ’ (others ἀφ’ which see II. 2 d. aa.) ἑαυτοῦ, 2 Corinthians 10:7 T Tr WH (for himself, i. e. apart from and independently of others; R. V. with himself); cf. Kühner, 2:432; Liddell and Scott, under the word A. I. 1 d.)
d. figuratively used of things, affairs, persons, which one is set over, over which he exercises power; Latinsupra, our over (cf. below, B. 2 b. and C. I. 2 e.): ἐπί πάντων, Romans 9:5; Ephesians 4:6 (where ἐπί, διά and ἐν are distinguished); καθίστημι τινα ἐπί τίνος, Matthew 24:45; Matthew 25:21, 23; Luke 12:42; Acts 6:3 (Genesis 39:4, 5; 1 Macc. 6:14 1 Macc. 10:37, etc.; Plato, rep. 5, p. 460 b., etc.); δίδωμι τίνι ἐξουσίαν ἐπί τίνος, Revelation 2:26; ἔχω ἐξουσίαν ἐπί τίνος, Revelation 20:6; βασιλεύειν ἐπί τίνος, Matthew 2:22 R G Tr brackets; Revelation 5:10; ἔχειν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ βασιλέα, Revelation 9:11; ἔχειν βασιλείαν ἐπί τῶν βασιλέων, Revelation 17:18; ὅς ἦν ἐπ’ τῆς γάζης, who was over the treasury, Acts 8:27; ὁ ἐπί τοῦ κοιτῶνος, he who presided over the bedchamber, the chamberlain, Acts 12:20 (Passow, i., 2, p. 1035a gives many examples from Greek authors (cf. Liddell and Scott, under the word A. III. 1; Lob. ad Phryn., p. 474; Sophocles Lexicon, under the word); for examples from the O. T. Apocrypha see Wahl, Clavis Apocr., p. 218a).
e. of that to which the mental act looks or refers: λέγειν ἐπί τίνος, to speak upon (of) a thing, Galatians 3:16 (Plato, Charm., p. 155 d.; legg. 2, p. 662 d.; Aelian v. h. 1, 30;scribere super re, Cicero, ad Att. 16, 6;disserere super, Tacitus, ann. 6, 28; cf. Winers Grammar, 375 (351); (Buttmann, 336 (289))).
f. of one on whom an obligation has been laid: εὐχήν ἔχειν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ, have (taken) on themselves a vow, have bound themselves by a vow, Acts 21:23 (WH text ἐφ’ ἑαυτῶν (see ἀπό, II. 2 d. aa.)).
2. used of vicinity, i. e. of the place at, near, hard by, which (German bei,an);
a. properly, κόλπος ὁ ἐπί ποσιδηιου, Herodotus 7, 115; ἐπί τῶν θυρῶν (Acts 5:23 L T Tr WH) (1 Macc. 1:55; (Plutarch, G. Gracch. 14, 3, p. 841 c.)); cf. Matthiae, ii., p. 1366 § 584; Passow, under the word, p. 1034b; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, I. 1 a., at the end). But the examples of this signification adduced from the N. T. (with the exception of Acts, the passage cited) (and most of those from Greek authors also) are such as to allow the rendering of ἐπί by super also, over or above (so Winer’s Grammar, 374f (351)): ἐπί τῆς θαλάσσης at the sea, upon the shore, or above the sea, for the shore overhung the sea, John 6:19 (?(cf. 1 a. above)); (Exodus 14:2; Deuteronomy 1:40; 1 Macc. 14:34 1 Macc. 15:11; Polybius 1, 44, 4; cf. the FrenchBoulogne sur mer,Chalons sur Marne (English Stratford on Avon), etc.; ἐπί τοῦ ποταμοῦ Ezekiel 1:1; (Xenophon, an. 4, 3, 28); ἐπί τοῦ Ιορδάνου, 2 Kings 2:7); ἐσθίειν ἐπί τῆς τραπέζης τίνος (German über Jemands Tische essen (cf. English over one’s food, over one’s cups, etc.)), food and drink placed upon the table, Luke 22:30 cf. Luke 22:21; συκῆν ἐπί τῆς ὁδοῦ, a fig tree above (i. e. higher than) the way, Matthew 21:19.
b. before, with the genitive of a person, in the presence of one as spectator, or auditor (Winers Grammar, 375 (351); Buttmann, 336 (289)): Matthew 28:14 (L Tr WH marginal reading ὑπό); Mark 13:9; Acts 24:19, 20; Acts 25:9; Acts 26:2; 1 Corinthians 6:1, 6; 2 Corinthians 7:14; 1 Timothy 6:13 (some bring this under II. below; see μαρτυρέω); ἐπί τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος, Acts 25:10.
c. ἐπί τοῦ (Rec. τῆς) βάτου at the bush, i. e. at the place in the sacred volume where the bush is spoken of, Mark 12:26 (see ἐν, I. 1 d.).
II. of Time when; with the genitive of a person in the time or age of a man (in the days of); at the time when an office was held by one; under the administration of (cf. Winers Grammar, 375 (352); Buttmann, 336 (289)): Mark 2:26; Luke 3:2; Luke 4:2; Acts 11:28; (1 Macc. 13:42 1 Macc. 14:27 (for other examples in which this phrase is equivalent to in or of the reign etc. of, and is preceded by a specification of the year etc., see B. D. American edition, p. 651 note{b}); 2 Macc. 8:19 2Macc. 15:22; for numerous examples from Greek writings see Passow, i., 2, p. 1035, floss fully in Liddell and Scott, under the word, A. II.)). with the genitive of a tiring, at the time of any occurrence: ἐπί τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος, at the time of the deportation to Babylon, Matthew 1:11; (on Luke 12:54 T Tr marginal reading WH see δυσμή); of the time when any occupation is (or was) carried on: ἐπί τῶν προσευχῶν μου, Latin in precibus meis, at my prayers, when I am praying, Romans 1:10 (9); Ephesians 1:16; 1 Thessalonians 1:2; Philemon 1:4. of time itself, ἐπ’ ἐσχάτων and (according to another reading) ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν (literally, at the end of the days): 2 Peter 3:3; Hebrews 1:2 (1) (for the Hebrew הַיָמִים בְּאַחֲרִית, Genesis 49:1; Numbers 24:14; Jeremiah 37:24 (); Micah 4:1; Daniel 10:14); ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου, Jude 1:18 L T Tr WH; (τῶν χρόνων, 1 Peter 1:20 L T Tr WH).
B. with the dative, used of place (Winers Grammar, 392f (366f); Buttmann, 336f (289f)); and

1. properly;
   a. of the place where or in which (Latinin with the abl., German auf with the dative) (English on, etc.), where continuance, position, situation, etc., are spoken of: ἐφ’ ᾧ (L text T Tr WH ὅπου) κατέκειτο, Mark 2:4; λίθος ἐπί λίθῳ (λίθον T Tr WH), Mark 13:2; ἐπί πίνακι, Matthew 14:8, 11; Mark 6:25; ἐπί τοῦ κραββάτοις, Mark 6:55; ἀνακλῖναι πάντας ἐπί τῷ χόρτῳ, Mark 6:39; ἐπέκειτο ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, lay upon it, John 11:38; ἐφ’ ἵπποις, Revelation 19:14.
   b. of the place in which (Latinin with the abl., German auf with the accusative), after verbs expressing motion toward a place, to denote a remaining in the place after the motion (English upon, at, etc.): βάλλειν λίθον ἐπιτινι, the dative of person, John 8:7 Rec.; οἰκοδομεῖν, Matthew 16:18; ἐποικοδόμειν, Ephesians 2:20; ἐπιβάλλειν, Matthew 9:16 (Luke 5:36 ἐπιβάλλειν ἐπί τί); ἐπιρράπτειν, Mark 2:21 (where L T Tr WH have ἐπί with the accusative); ἐπιπίπτειν, Acts 8:16.
   c. of the place above which (Latinsuper, German über (English over)): ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, over his head, Luke 23:38 (for which Matthew 27:37 ἐπάνω τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ).
   d. of the place at, or by, or near which: ἐπί θύραις and ἐπί τῇ θύρα, Matthew 24:33; Mark 13:29; Acts 5:9 (and often in Greek writings; cf. Passow, under the word, p. 1037a; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, B. I. 1 a.; cf. A. I. 2 a. above)); ἐπί τῇ προβατικῇ, John 5:2; ἐπί τῷ ποταμῷ, Revelation 9:14; ἐπί τῇ στοά, Acts 3:11; ἐπ’ (L T Tr WH παῥ) αὐτοῖς ἐπιμεῖναι, Acts 28:14.
2. Metaphorically;
   a. of that upon which any action, effect, condition, rests as a basis or support; properly, upon the ground of; and α. of that upon which anything is sustained or upheld: ζῆν ἐπί τίνι, to sustain life on (by) a thing, Matthew 4:4 (where L Tr, the second time, ἐν; (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 389 (364) note)); Luke 4:4 (Deuteronomy 8:3 for עַל חָיָה; Plato, Alcib. 1, p. 105 c.; Plutarch, de cup. divit. 7, p. 526 d.; Alciphron, epistles 3, 7, etc.); συνιέναι ἐπί τοῖς ἄρτοις, to understand by reasoning built upon the loaves, Mark 6:52 (cf. Winers Grammar, 392 (367); Buttmann, 337 (290)). β. of that upon which anything rests (our upon): ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι (see in ἐλπίς, 2), supported by hope, in hope (cf; Winer’s Grammar, § 51, 2f.), Acts 2:26; Romans 4:18; 1 Corinthians 9:10 (differently in ε. below); to do anything ἐπί τῷ ὀνόματι τίνος, relying upon the name i. e. the authority of anyone (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 393 (367)): ἐλεύσονται ἐπί τῷ ὀνόματι μου, appropriating to themselves the name of Messiah, which belongs to me, Matthew 24:5; Mark 13:6; Luke 21:8 (in which passage λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμί ὁ Χριστός is added by way of explanation); βαπτίζεσθαι ἐπί (L Tr WH ἐν) τῷ ὀνόματι Χριστοῦ, so as to repose your hope and confidence in his Messianic authority, Acts 2:38; δέχεσθαι τινα ἐπί τῷ ὀνόματι μου, to receive one because he bears my name, is devoted to my authority and instruction, Matthew 18:5; Mark 9:37; Luke 9:48. to do anything upon the name of Christ, his name being introduced, appeal being made to his authority and command: as κηρύσσειν, διδάσκειν, etc., Luke 24:47; Acts 4:17, 18; Acts 5:28, 40; δύναμιν ποιεῖν, δαιμόνια ἐκβάλλειν, using his name as a formula of exorcism (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 393 (367)), Mark 9:39; Luke 9:49 (WH Tr marginal reading ἐν). γ. of that upon which as a foundation any superstructure is reared: νομοθετεῖσθαι, Hebrews 7:11 (ἐπ’ αὐτῇ, for which L T Tr WH have ἐπ’ αὐτῆς); ; after verbs of trusting, believing, hoping, etc.: ἀρκεῖσθαι ἐπί τίνι, 3 John 1:10; παρρησιάζεσθαι, Acts 14:3; πεποιθέναι, Matthew 27:43 L text WH marginal reading; Luke 11:22; Luke 18:9; Mark 10:24 (T WH omit; Tr marginal reading brackets the clause); 2 Corinthians 1:9; Hebrews 2:13; πιστεύειν, Luke 24:25; Romans 9:33; Romans 10:11, etc.; ἐλπίζειν (see ἐλπίζω) (cf. C. I. 2 g. α. below). δ. of the reason or motive underlying words and deeds, so that ἐπί is equivalent to for, on account of (Winers Grammar, 394 (368); Buttmann, 337 (290)): Matthew 19:9 R G T Tr WH text; Luke 5:5 (ἐπί τῷ ῤήματι σου, at thy word, German auf; (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 48, c. d.; in reliance on)); Acts 3:16 (WH omit); (L Tr marginal reading have the genitive); ; 1 Corinthians 8:11 (ἀπολλυσθαι ἐπί τίνι, German zu Grunde gehen über etc. (cf. Winers Grammar, 394 (368) note, but L T Tr WH read ἐν)); Philippians 3:9; after αἰνεῖν, Luke 2:20; δοξάζειν, Acts 4:21; 2 Corinthians 9:13 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 381 (357)); μαρτυρεῖν, Hebrews 11:4; εὐχαριστεῖν etc. to give thanks for, 1 Corinthians 1:4; 2 Corinthians 9:15; Philippians 1:5; 1 Thessalonians 3:9. ἐφ’ ᾧ (equivalent to ἐπί τούτῳ, ὅτι for that, on the ground of this, that) because that, because, Romans 5:12 (on the various interpretations of this passage see Dietzsch, Adam und Christus. Bonn 1871, p. 50ff); 2 Corinthians 5:4 (Rec.st ἐπειδή); Philippians 3:12 (ἐφ’ ᾧ — ὁ σατανᾶς — οὐκ ἴσχυσε θανατῶσαι αὐτούς, Theophilus of Antioch ad Antol. 2, 29, p. 138, Otto edition; ἐφ’ ᾧ Γενναδιον ἔγραψεν, for the reason that he had accused Gennadius, Synes. epistle 73; cf. Hermann ad Vig., p. 710; the better Greeks commonly used ἐφ’ οἷς in the same sense, cf. Winers Grammar, 394 (368); (Fritzsche or Meyer on Romans, the passage cited; Ellicott on Philippians, the passage cited)). Used especially after verbs signifying a mental affection or emotion, where we also often say over (for examples from Greek writings see Passow, i. 2, p. 1039b; Krüger, § 68, 41, 6; (cf. Winers Grammar, 393 (368)
   c. )): as ἀγαλλιαν, Luke 1:47; χαίρειν, Matthew 18:13; Luke 1:14; Luke 13:17; Romans 16:19, etc.; χαρά ἔσται, Luke 15:7; χαράν (Rec. χάριν) ἔχω, Philemon 1:7; παρακαλεῖν, παρακαλεῖσθαι, 2 Corinthians 1:4; 2 Corinthians 7:13; 1 Thessalonians 3:7; κλαίειν, Luke 19:41 R G; κοπετόν ποιεῖν, Acts 8:2; κόπτεσθαι, Revelation 18:9 (T Tr WH text the accusative); ὀδύνασθαι, Acts 20:38; ὀλολύζειν, James 5:1; στυγνάζειν, Mark 10:22; συλλυπεῖσθαι, Mark 3:5; μετανοεῖν ἐπί, to grieve over, repent of, 2 Corinthians 12:21; σπλαγχνίζεσθαι, Matthew 14:14 G L T Tr WH; Mark 6:34 R G; Luke 7:13 (Tdf. the accusative); μακροθύμειν, Matthew 18:26 (Tr the accusative), 29 (L Tr the accusative); Luke 18:7 (see μακροθυμέω, 2); James 5:7; ὀργίζεσθαι, Revelation 12:17 (Lachmann omits ἐπἰ; ἐκπλήσσεσθαι, Matthew 7:28; Mark 1:22; Luke 4:32; Acts 13:12; διαταράσσεσθαι, Luke 1:29; ἐξίστασθαι, Luke 2:47; θαμβεῖσθαι, Mark 10:24; θάμβος, Luke 5:9; Acts 3:10; θαυμάζειν, Mark 12:17; Luke 2:33; Luke 4:22; Luke 9:43; Luke 20:26; Acts 3:12; καυχᾶσθαι, Romans 5:2; ἐπαισχύνεσθαι, Romans 6:21; παραζηλουν and παροργίζειν τινα ἐπί τίνι, Romans 10:19. ε. of the rule, or condition (Winers Grammar, 394 (368)

d. ): ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι, a hope being held out or given, Romans 8:20; Titus 1:2 (differently in β. above); ἐπί δυσίν … μάρτυσιν, on condition that two witnesses testify to the matter in question (at (the mouth of) two etc.; cf. Winer’s Grammar, 392 (367)), Hebrews 10:28; ἐπί νεκροῖς, equivalent to ὄντων νεκρῶν (in the case of the dead), if anyone has died, Hebrews 9:17. ζ. of the purpose and end (unto, for; Winers Grammar, 394 (368)
e. ): ἐπ’ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ, to worship and profess his name, Acts 15:14 Rec.; καλεῖν τινα ἐπί τίνι, Latinad aliquid, Galatians 5:13; 1 Thessalonians 4:7 (ἐπί ξένια, Xenophon, an. 7, 6, 3; cf. Winer’s Grammar, as above); κτισθεντε ἐπί ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς, Ephesians 2:10; φρονεῖν ἐπί τίνι to take thought for a thing, Philippians 4:10; ἐφ’ ᾧ (by a later Greek impropriety for ἐπί τίνι, cf. Winers Grammar, § 24, 4; (Buttmann, § 139, 59; but on the extreme doubtfulness of this alleged use of ὅς in direct questions, see present T. D. Woolsey in the Bibliotheca Sacra for Apr. 1874, p. 314ff)) πάρει; for what purpose art thou come? Vulg. ad quid (others,quod)venisti? Matthew 26:50 R (but G L T Tr WH ἐφ’ ὁ, see C. I. 2 g. γ. αα. below) (Theoph. ἐπί ποιῶ σκόπω; cf. Herodotus 7, 146 πυθόμενος, ἐπ’ ὁισι ἦλθον; (but the view of many ancient expositors which explains the passage by an aposiopesis: that for which thou hast come — do is thoroughly established by Dr. Woolsey, as above)). of the issue or undesigned result: λογομαχεῖν ἐπί καταστροφή τῶν ἀκουόντων, 2 Timothy 2:14; (τοῖς ἐπί ὠφέλεια πεποιημενοις ἐπί βλάβη χρῆσθαι, Xenophon, mem. 2, 3, 19). εε. of the pattern or standard (A. V. after; Winer’s Grammar, 394 (368) f.): καλεῖν τινα ἐπί τῷ ὀνόματι τίνος, to call one after the name of another, Luke 1:59 (Nehemiah 7:63 (Winer’s Grammar, 410 (382))); ἐπί τῷ ὁμοιώματι τίνος after the likeness of a thing, Romans 5:14.

b. of that over which one is placed, for its care or administration: ἐπί τοῖς ὑπάρχουσι τινα καθιστάναι, Luke 12:44 (cf. A. I. 1 d. above (also C. I. 2 e. below); Lob. ad Phryn., p. 474f; Bernhardy (1829), p. 249; (Winers Grammar, 393 (367)
a. )).

e. used of a hostile aim, against (for examples from Greek writings from Homer down, see Passow, i. 2, p. 1036a; (cf. Liddell and Scott, under the word, B. I. 1 c.; Winers Grammar, 392 (367); Buttmann, 337 (290))): Luke 12:52f; θλῖψις γενομένη ἐπί Στεφάνῳ (Στεφάνου, L Tr marginal reading), Acts 11:19 (A. V. about).
d. of that to which anything is added (so that it is, as it were, upon it); in addition to; over and above (Winers Grammar, 393 (367f)
b. ): 2 Corinthians 7:13 (L T Tr WH ἐπί δέ τῇ παρακλήσει ὑμῶν (but L T Tr WH ἡμῶν) περισσοτέρως κτλ., but in addition to the comfort given (us) by you, we rejoiced the more exceedingly etc. (A. V. in etc. (of condition))); κερδαίνειν τί ἐπί τίνι, Matthew 25:20, 22 R G; ἔχειν λύπην ἐπί λύπη, Philippians 2:27 Rec. (Euripides, Iph. T. 197 φόνος ἐπί φόνῳ, Troad. 596 ἐπί δ’ ἀλγεσιν ἀλγεα, Sophocles O. C. 544 ἐπί νόσῳ νόσον; (cf. Meyer on Philippians, the passage cited; but G L T Tr WH give the accusative, see C. I. 2 e. below)); προστιθεναι ἐπί, Luke 3:20; ἐπί πᾶσι τούτοις, besides all this, Luke 16:26 (L marginal reading T Tr marginal reading WH ἐν; see ἐν, I. 5 e., p. 211a); Ephesians 6:16 (L text T Tr WH ἐν (and there is no τούτοις); see ἐν, as above); Colossians 3:14 (Sir. 37:15; 1 Macc. 10:42; (classic examples in Wetstein (1752) on Luke, the passage cited)); add also Hebrews 8:1 (see Lünem. at the passage); Hebrews 9:10; 1 Corinthians 14:16.

e. of that which is connected as an adjunct (especially of time) with the principal matter under consideration (in German generallybei, i. e. at, on, etc.) (Winer’s Grammar, 392 (367)): ἐυχαριστο τῷ Θεῷ μου ἐπί πάσῃ τῇ μνεία ὑμῶν, at every mention of you, as often as I call you to mind, Philippians 1:3 (but see Meyer, Ellicott, Lightfoot at the passage, and under the word πᾶς, I. 2); σπένδομαι ἐπί τῇ θυσία, while engaged in (busied over) the sacrifice, Philippians 2:17; ἐπί συντέλεια τῶν αἰώνων, Hebrews 9:26; ἐπί τῇ πρώτη διαθήκη, Philippians 2:15; σπείρειν and θερίζειν ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις, so that blessings attend, i. e. bountifully, freely, 2 Corinthians 9:6; ἐπί πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκη, 1 Thessalonians 3:7; ἐπί τῷ παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν while your anger lasts, Ephesians 4:26; ἐπί τούτῳ meanwhile, i. e. while this was going on ((?), upon this), John 4:27.
f. of the object of an action, and α. where the German usesan (English on (nearly equivalent to to)): πράσσειν τί ἐπί τίνι, Acts 5:35 (like δραν τί ἐπί τίνι, Herodotus 3, 14; Aelian n. an. 11, 11); cf. Bernhardy (1829), p. 250 bottom; (but see Buttmann, 337 (290)); ὁ γέγονεν ἐπ’ αὐτῇ, Mark 5:33 (T Tr WH omit; L brackets ἐπί); ἀναπληροῦσθαι, Matthew 13:14 Rec. β. where the German saysüber, (English upon, of, concerning), after verbs of writing, speaking, thinking: γεγραμμένα ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, John 12:16 (Herodotus 1, 66); προφητεύειν, Revelation 10:11; μαρτυρεῖν, R G T Tr text WH text (see μαρτυρέω, a.) (δόξα ἐπί τῇ εὐσέβεια, an opinion about, on, piety, 4 Macc. 5:17 (18)).
C. with the accusative (Winers Grammar, § 49,1.; Buttmann, 337f (290f));

I. of place;
1. properly;
a. of the place above, over, which, our up on, on to: after verbs signifying motion and continuance, ἐλθεῖν, περιπατεῖν ἐπί τά ὕδατα, Matthew 14:28f; ἐπί τήν θάλασσαν, Matthew 14:25 L T Tr WH, 26 R G (πλεῖν ἐπί Πόντον, Homer, Odyssey 1, 183); ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπί τήν γῆν, Matthew 15:35; ἐπί τό στῆθος τίνος, John 21:20; ἀνακλιθῆναι ἐπί τούς χόρτους, Matthew 14:19 R G; κατοικεῖν ἐπί πᾶν τό πρόσωπον (L T Tr WH παντός προσώπου (cf. πᾶς, I. 1 c.)) τῆς γῆς, Acts 17:26; καθῆσθαι, Luke 21:35; ἦλθε λιμός ἐφ’ ὅλην τήν γῆν, Acts 7:11; σκότος ἐγένετο ἐπί πᾶσαν τήν γῆν, Matthew 27:45. over i. e. along: εἱστήκει ἐπί τόν αἰγιαλόν, Matthew 13:2 (Winers Grammar, 408 (380); differently in d. below).
b. of motion to a place whose surface is occupied or touched (German auf with the accusative), upon, unto, etc.; after verbs of going, coming, ascending, descending, falling, etc.: πορεύεσθαι ἐπί τήν ὁδόν, Acts 8:26; Acts 9:11; ἐπί τάς διεξόδους, Matthew 22:9; προέρχεσθαι, Acts 20:13 (here Tr WH marginal reading προσέρχεσθαι); φεύγειν, Matthew 24:16 (where L Tr WH text εἰς); ἐξέρχεσθαι, Luke 8:27; ἐξιέναι, Acts 27:43; ἐπιβαίνειν, Matthew 21:5; ἀναβαίνειν, Luke 5:19; Luke 19:4; Acts 10:9; Revelation 20:9; καταβαίνειν, Luke 22:44 (L brackets WH reject the passage); Revelation 16:21; ἀπέρχεσθαι, Luke 23:33 (L Tr WH ἔρχεσθαι); πίπτειν ἐπί τούς πόδας, Acts 10:25; ἐπί πρόσωπον, to fall upon the face, Matthew 17:6; Matthew 26:39; Luke 5:12; Luke 17:16; 1 Corinthians 14:25; Revelation 7:11. After verbs of placing, leading, bringing, building, laying, throwing, etc.: τιθέναι, Matthew 5:15; Luke 11:33; ἐπιτιθεναι, Matthew 23:4; Luke 15:5; Acts 15:10, etc.; τιθέναι τά γόνατα ἐπί, Acts 21:5; οἰκοδομεῖν, Matthew 7:24, 26; Luke 6:49; Romans 15:20; ἐποικοδόμειν, 1 Corinthians 3:12; θεμελιοῦν, Luke 6:48; βάλλειν, John 8:59; Revelation 2:24; Revelation 14:16; Revelation 18:19; ἐπιβάλλειν, Luke 5:36 (ἐπιβάλλειν ἐπί τίνι, Matthew 9:16); ἐπιβάλλειν τάς χεῖρας ἐπί τινα, Matthew 26:50, etc. (see ἐπιβάλλω, 1 a.); ἐπιρρίπτειν, Luke 19:35 and tropically 1 Peter 5:7; ῥαπίζειν, Matthew 5:39 (L T Tr text WH εἰς); τύπτειν, Luke 6:29 (Tdf. εἰς); ἀναβιβάζειν, Matthew 13:48 (not Lachmann text); ἐπιβιβάζειν, Luke 10:34; κατάγειν, Luke 5:11; σωρεύειν, Romans 12:20; διδόναι, Luke 7:44; Luke 19:23; Revelation 8:3; ἀναφέρειν, 1 Peter 2:24; κρεμαν, Matthew 18:6 (L T Tr WH περί); γράφειν, Revelation 2:17; Revelation 3:12; Revelation 19:16; ἐπιγράφειν, Hebrews 8:10. After verbs which include another verb signifying motion, or transfer, or entrance into (where German usesauf orüber; our on, to, etc.): ἀνατέλλειν, Matthew 5:45; βρέχειν, ibid.; πνεηιν, Revelation 7:1 (here we see the difference between ἐπί with the genitive to blow over a thing, German über, and ἐπί with the according to blow on a thing, to come blowing upon it, German einen anwehen,wehend auf einen kommen); (apparently nearly the same view of the distinction between the cases is take, by Thiersch § 274, 6; Hermann on Euripides, Alcest. 845. But Krüger (sec. 68, 40, 3), Kühner, (ii. § 438, L 1 b.), others, regard ἐπί with the accusative as denoting merely movement toward a place, while ἐπί with the genitive involves the idea of actual or intended arrival; cf. Liddell and Scott, under the word, A. I. 1. Still others hold the two expressions to be substantially synonymous: e. g. Alexander Buttmann (1873) Gram. § 147 (p. 417 English translation); Matthiae, § 584; Passow, p. 1034a; — especially in the N. T., see Winers Grammar, 409f (382); 408 (381) note; Buttmann, 338 (291). On the variations of case with this preposition in the Rev. cf. Alford on ); διασωθῆναι ἐπί τήν γῆν, Acts 27:44.
c. It is used of persons over whom anything is done, that thereby some benefit may accrue to them (German über with the dative) (Winer’s Grammar, 408 (381) note): ὀνομάζειν τό ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ ἐπί τινα, to name the name of Jesus (as a spell, a magic formula) over one, namely, that help may come to him from that name, Acts 19:13; προσεύχεσθαι ἐπί τινα, James 5:14.
d. As εἰς (which see C. 2, p. 186a), so ἐπί also stands after verbs of rest and continuance (Buttmann, 337f (290f); Winer’s Grammar, § 49, 50:1): καθεύδειν ἐπί τί, Mark 4:38; στῆναι, Revelation 11:11; σταθῆναι ἐπί τί, Revelation 12:18 (Revelation 13:1); ἑστηκεναι, John 21:4 (ἐπί τόν αἰγιαλόν L T Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading; otherwise where many are spoken of; see a. at the end, above); Revelation 14:1; καθῆσθαι, John 12:15; Revelation 4:4; Revelation 6:2 (Rec. dative); (L T Tr WH text genitive); ; κεκαθικεναι, καθίσαι, Mark 11:2; Luke 19:30; John 12:14; Revelation 20:4; καθίσεσθαι, Matthew 19:28; σκηνουν, Revelation 7:15; κεῖσθαι, 2 Corinthians 3:15; κατακεῖσθαι, Luke 5:25 T Tr WH; εἶναι ἐπί τό αὐτό, to be together, assembled, in the same place: Luke 17:35; Acts 1:15; Acts 2:1, 44 — to come together, of sexual intercourse, 1 Corinthians 7:5 G L T Tr WH; συνελθεῖν ἐπί τό αὐτό have convened, come together, to the same place, 1 Corinthians 14:23 (L text ἐλθεῖν); simply ἐπί τό αὐτό namely, ὄντες, together, Acts 3:1 (but L T Tr WH (so R. V.) connect ἐπί τήν α. here with Acts 2:47); 2 Samuel 2:13 (cf. Buttmann, 338 (291)).
e. used of motion or arrival into the vicinity of a place (not to the place itself); near; to, as far as; (German an,bei,zu,hin …zu): ἐπί τό μνημεῖον (or μνῆμα), Mark 16:2; Luke 24:12 (L Tr brackets; T omits; WH reject the verse), 22,24; ἐπί τούς ἀναβαθμούς, Acts 21:35; ἔρχεσθαι ἐπί τί ὕδωρ, Acts 8:36; ἐπί τήν πύλην, Acts 12:10; ἐπιστηναι ἐπί τόν πυλῶνα, Acts 10:17; καταβαίνειν ἐπί τήν θάλασσαν, John 6:16, etc., etc.; with the accusative of a person to, near to one: John 19:33; Acts 25:12; 2 Thessalonians 2:1; Revelation 16:14; especially to judges, kings, etc., equivalent to to their tribunal: Matthew 10:18; Luke 12:58; Luke 21:12; Luke 23:1; Acts 9:21; Acts 16:19. also in pregnant construction after verbs of sitting, standing, etc.: καθῆσθαι ἐπί τό τελώνιον, Matthew 9:9; Mark 2:14; ἑστηκεναι ἐπί, Revelation 3:20; Revelation 15:2; ἐπιστηναι ἐπί, Acts 10:17; Acts 11:11; ἐπί τήν δεξιάν on the right hand, Revelation 5:1.
f. of mere direction toward a terminus (so that the terminus itself is not reached): πορεύεσθαι ἐπί τό ἀπολωλός, to recover it (where we say after), Luke 15:4; ἐκτείνειν τάς χεῖρας ἐπί, against one, to take him, Luke 22:53; toward one, in pointing him out, Matthew 12:49; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐπί λῃστήν, to take a robber, Matthew 26:55; Mark 14:48; Luke 22:52, cf. Luke 14:31.
2. It is used metaphorically,
a. with the accusative of a person after verbs of coming, falling, bringing, etc. α. of evils befalling (falling ‘upon’) one, and of perturbations coming upon the mind: τό αἷμα τίνος (the penalty for slaying him) ἥκει or ἔρχεται ἐπί τινα, Matthew 23:35; Matthew 27:25; ἐπάγειν τό αἷμα τίνος ἐπί τινα, Acts 5:28; ἔρχεσθαι and ἥκειν ἐπί τινα, of other evils, John 18:4; Ephesians 5:6; Revelation 3:3; after γίνεσθαι, Luke 1:65; Luke 4:36; Acts 5:5; ἐπέρχεσθαι (ἐπεισέρχεσθαι L T Tr WH), Luke 21:35; ἐπιπίπτειν, Luke 1:12; Acts 13:11 (L T Tr WH πίπτειν); (L Tr πίπτειν); Romans 15:3 (from Psalm 68:10 ()); Revelation 11:11 (Rec. πίπτειν); ἐπιστηναι, Luke 21:34. β. of blessings coming upon one: after ἐρχεσται, Matthew 10:13; ἐπιπίπτειν, of a trance, Acts 10:10 (L T Tr WH γίνεσθαι); ἐπισκηνουν, 2 Corinthians 12:9; ἔφθασεν and ἤγγικεν, ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς (upon you namely, from heaven (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 407 (380) note)) ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ, Matthew 12:28; Luke 10:9; Luke 11:20. the Holy Spirit is said at one time ἐπί τινα ἐκχεῖσθαι, Acts 2:17; Acts 10:45; Titus 3:6; at another, ἀποστέλλεσθαι (or ἐξαποστέλλεσθαι T Tr WH), Luke 24:49; again, ἐπέρχεσθαι, Acts 1:8; once more, καταβαίνειν, Mark 1:10 (L text T Tr WH εἰς); Luke 3:22; John 1:33; ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπί τινα, Acts 1:26; after words of rest and continuance: χάρις ἦν ἐπί τινα, Luke 2:40; Acts 4:33; ἐπαναπαύεσθαι, Luke 10:6; the Holy Spirit is said at one time ἐπί τινα μένειν, descending upon one to remain on him, John 1:32f (Buttmann, 338 (291)); and again ἀναπαύεσθαι, 1 Peter 4:14.
b. of one upon whom anything is imposed, as a burden, office, duty, etc.: τήν μέριμναν ἐπιρρίπτειν ἐπί Θεόν, 1 Peter 5:7; συντελεῖν διαθήκην ἐπί τινα, to put a covenant UPON one, to be kept by him, Hebrews 8:8, (in Psalm 82:6 () פ עַל בְּרִית כָּרַת … is to make a covenant AGAINST one).
c. of that to which anything is added (English upon (nearly equivalent to after)): λύπη ἐπί λύπην, Philippians 2:27 G L T Tr WH (Psalm 68:27 (); Ezekiel 7:26; (especially Isaiah 28:10, 13; cf. Latinsuper in Livy 1, 50; 22, 54 etc.); see above, B. 2 d.); (so some take οἶκος ἐπ’ οἶκον, Luke 11:17, Buttmann, 338 (291); see οἶκος, 2); ἐπικάλειν ὄνομα ἐπί τινα (see ἐπικαλέω, 2 (and Buttmann, 338 (291))), to call (put) a name upon one, Acts 15:17; James 2:7.
d. of the number or degree reached; Latinusque ad (Winer’s Grammar, § 49, 50:3 a.): ἐπί σταδίους δώδεκα, Revelation 21:16 (Rst T Tr WH text, genitive) (Xenophon, mem. 1, 4, 17; an. 1, 7, 15; Polybius 3, 54, 7; Song of the Three 23); ἐπί τρίς, Vulg. per ter, for three times, thrice: Acts 10:16; Acts 11:10 (so εἰς τρίς, Herodotus 1, 86; Xenophon, an. 6, 4, 16. 19; Cyril 7, 1, 4 etc. (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 422 (394))); ἐπί πλεῖον more widely, to a greater degree, further, the more (differently below, II. 1): Acts 4:17; (Acts 20:9 WH marginal reading); 2 Timothy 2:16; 2 Timothy 3:9; ἐφ’ ὅσον, forasmuch as, inasmuch as, (differently II. 1 below): Matthew 25:40, 45; Romans 11:13.
e. of care, power, control over anything (German über with the accusative) (Winer’s Grammar, § 49, 1. 3 b.) (cf. above, A. I. 1 d. and B. 2 b.): βασιλεύειν ἐπί τινα (Hebrew עַל מָשַׁל), Luke 1:33; Luke 19:14, 27; Romans 5:14; ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, Acts 7:10; καθίστημι, Hebrews 2:7 R ((from Psalm 8:7), L Tr WH brackets); ἐπί τόν οἶκον αὐτοῦ namely, ἐστι, Hebrews 3:6; ἱερέα μέγαν ἐπί τόν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ namely, καθεστηκοτα, Hebrews 10:21; κατιησταναι δικαστήν ἐπί, Luke 12:14 (ἄρχοντα, Xenophon, Cyril 4, 5 at the end); ἐξουσία, Luke 10:19; Revelation 6:8; Revelation 16:9; Revelation 22:14; φυλάσσειν φυλακάς, Luke 2:8; of usurped dignity: ὑπεραίρεσθαι ἐπί πάντα λεγόμενον Θεόν, 2 Thessalonians 2:4 cf. Daniel 11:36f (others refer the use in Thessalonians, the passage cited to g. γ. ββ. below). Akin to this is the expression πιστός ἐπί τί (because fidelity is as it were spread over the things intrusted to its care), Matthew 25:21.
f. of the end which the mind reaches or to which it is led; Latinad, to, unto: ἐπιστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι ἐπί τινα, especially to God, Luke 1:17; Acts 9:35; Acts 11:21; Acts 14:15; Acts 26:20; Galatians 4:9; 1 Peter 2:25.
g. of direction toward a person or a thing; α. after verbs of trusting and hoping (German auf, upon; see above, B. 2 a. γ.): after ἐλπίζειν, 1 Peter 1:13; 1 Peter 3:5 R G; 1 Timothy 5:5 (and often in the Sept.); πιστεύειν, Acts 9:42; Acts 11:17; Acts 16:31; Acts 22:19; Romans 4:24; πιστός, Hebrews 6:1; πεποιθέναι, Matthew 27:43 (where L text WH marginal reading ἐπί with the dative).β. of the feelings, affections, emotions, German über, over: κόπτομαι, Revelation 1:7; Revelation 18:9 (R G L WH marginal reading with the dative); κλαίω, Luke 23:28; Revelation 18:9; εὐφραίνεσθαι, Revelation 18:20 (G L T Tr WH with the dative). unto, toward, Latinerga: σπλαγχνίζομαι, Matthew 15:32; Mark 8:2; Mark 9:22; (μακροθυμέω, Matthew 18:26 Tr, 29 L Tr); χρηστός, Luke 6:35; χρηστότης, Romans 11:22; Ephesians 2:7. γ. of the direction of the will and action; αα. of purpose and end (Winer’s Grammar, § 49, l. 3 d.): ἐπί τό βάπτισμα αὐτοῦ, to receive his baptism, Matthew 3:7; ἐπί θεωρίαν ταύτην, Luke 23:48; ἐφ’ ὁ πάρει, Matthew 26:50 G L T Tr WH (see above, B. 2 a. ζ.); where aim and result coalesce: ἐπί τό συμφέρον, Hebrews 12:10. ββ. of things done with hostility; against: after ἀποτομία, Romans 11:22; ἀναστῆναι, Mark 3:26; ἐγείρεσθαι, Matthew 24:7; Mark 13:8; Luke 21:10; ἐπεγείρειν διωγμόν, Acts 13:50; μερισθῆναι, Matthew 12:26; Mark 3:24f; ἐπαίρειν τί ἐπί, John 13:18; μάρτυρ, 2 Corinthians 1:23; μαρτύριον, Luke 9:5; ἀσχημονεῖν, 1 Corinthians 7:36 (εἰς τινα, Dionysius Halicarnassus, 2, 26); μοιχᾶσθαι, Mark 10:11; τολμᾶν, 2 Corinthians 10:2; βρύχειν ὀδόντας, Acts 7:54. γγ. of that to which one refers in writing or speaking (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 49, 50 l. d.): after λέγειν, Hebrews 7:13; ὁ οὖν μακαρισμός … ἀκροβυστίαν, namely, λέγεται (Winers Grammar, 587 (546), cf. Buttmann, 394 (338)), Romans 4:9; προφητεία, 1 Timothy 1:18; on Mark 9:12f see γράφω, 2 c. δδ. upon, i. e. in reference to; for: after βάλλειν κλῆρον, Mark 15:24; John 19:24; cf. Fritzsche on Mark, p. 686 (who compares Psalm 21:19 (), and remarks that an Attic writer would have said ἐπί τίνι).
II. of Time (Winer’s Grammar, § 49, l. 2);
1. of time during or for (`for the space of’) which (German auf,während): ἐπί ἔτη τρία, Luke 4:25 (R G T WH marginal reading); ἐπί ἡμέρας πλείους, Acts 13:31; add also Acts 16:18; Acts 17:2; Acts 18:20; Acts 19:10; Hebrews 11:30, etc., and often in Greek writings from Homer down; cf. Passow, under the word, p. 1044 (Liddell and Scott, under the word C. II.); ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον for so long time as, Romans 7:1; 1 Corinthians 7:39; Galatians 4:1; and simply ἐφ’ ὅσον as long as (differently in I. 2 d. above), Matthew 9:15; 2 Peter 1:13; ἐφ’ ἱκανόν long enough, for a considerable time, Acts 20:11; ἐπί πλεῖον somewhat long, too long (differently in I. 2 d. above): Acts 20:9 (not WH marginal reading, see as above); .
2. about, toward (German gegen): ἐπί τήν αὔριον on the morrow, Luke 10:35; Acts 4:5; ἐπί τήν ὥραν τῆς προσευχῆς, Acts 3:1; ἐπί τό πρωι< Mark 15:1 (R G); rarely so in Greek writings, as Arrian exp. Al. 3, 18, 11 (7) ἐπί (others ὑπό) τήν ἕω.
D. In Composition ἐπί denotes:

1. continuance, rest, influence upon or over any person or thing: ἐπίγειος, ἐπουράνιος, ἐπιδημέω, ἀπαναπαύομαι, etc.
2. motion, approach, direction toward or to anything: ἐπακούω, ἐπιβοάω, ἐπιβλέπω, ἐπεκτείνω, etc.
3. imposition: ἐπικαθίζω, ἐπιτίθημι, ἐπιβιβάζω, ἐπιβαρέω, ἐπιγράφω, ἐπιρρίπτω, ἐπιτάσσω, etc.
4. accumulation, increase, addition: ἐπεισαγωγή, ἐπισυνάγω, ἐπισωρεύω, ἐπικαλέω (by a cognomen), etc.
5. repetition: ἐπαιτέω, ἐπαναμιμνῄσκω, etc.
6. up, upward: ἐπαίρω, ἐπανάγω, ἐπαφρίζω, etc.
7. against: ἐπιβουλή, ἐπανίστημι, ἐπίορκος, ἐπιορκέω, etc.
8. superintendence: ἐπιστάτης.

Question 7

κατά

Answer 7

prep. with: (1) acc. according to, corresponding to, with reverence to, just as; used distributively with numerals and places; in; for; for the purpose of; at, about, (of time); on, upon, along, through, to, toward; off, opposite, near, bordering on; with, by means of, because of; (2) gen. against; down, down from; throughout; by (of oaths); over (of authority)

down from, Mt. 8:32; down upon, upon, Mk. 14:3; Acts 27:14; down into; κατὰ βάθους, profound, deepest, 2 Cor. 8:2; down over, throughout a space, Lk. 4:14; 23:5; concerning, in cases of pointed allegation, 1 Cor. 15:15; against, Mt. 12:30; by, in oaths, Mt. 26:63; with an acc. of place, in the quarter of, about, near, at, Lk. 10;32; Acts 2:10; throughout, Lk. 8:39; in, Rom. 16:5; among, Acts 21:21; in the presence of, Lk. 2:31; in the direction of, towards, Acts 8:26; Phil. 3:14; of time, within the range of; during, in the course of, at, about, Acts 12:1; 27:27; distributively, κατ᾿ οἶ\κον, by houses, from house to house, Acts 2:46; kata; duvo, two and two, 1 Cor. 14:27; καθ᾿ ἡμέραν, daily, Mt. 26:55; trop., according to, conformable to, in proportion to, Mt. 9:29; 25:15; after the fashion or likeness of. Heb. 5:6; in virtue of, Mt. 19:3; as respects, Rom. 11:3; Acts 25;14; Heb. 9:9
τά κ. τινα one’s case or circumstances
κ. τά αὐτά so, in the same way
κ. ἐμέ my
κ. τὸ αὐτό together (ACT.14:1)
κ. τί how (LUK.1:18)

(gen.) against, contrary to, opposed; down, throughout; (acc.) in, by, with, in accordance with, for
Definition:
down from, Mt. 8:32; down upon, upon, Mk. 14:3; Acts 27:14; down into; κατὰ βάθους, profound, deepest, 2 Cor. 8:2; down over, throughout a space, Lk. 4:14; 23:5; concerning, in cases of pointed allegation, 1 Cor. 15:15; against, Mt. 12:30; by, in oaths, Mt. 26:63; with an acc. of place, in the quarter of, about, near, at, Lk. 10;32; Acts 2:10; throughout, Lk. 8:39; in, Rom. 16:5; among, Acts 21:21; in the presence of, Lk. 2:31; in the direction of, towards, Acts 8:26; Phil. 3:14; of time, within the range of; during, in the course of, at, about, Acts 12:1; 27:27; distributively, κατ᾿ οἶ\κον, by houses, from house to house, Acts 2:46; kata; duvo, two and two, 1 Cor. 14:27; καθ᾿ ἡμέραν, daily, Mt. 26:55; trop., according to, conformable to, in proportion to, Mt. 9:29; 25:15; after the fashion or likeness of. Heb. 5:6; in virtue of, Mt. 19:3; as respects, Rom. 11:3; Acts 25;14; Heb. 9:9

Question 8

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

Answer 8

who, which, whatever, whoever
who, which, what, that

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

gen. οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dat. pl. οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: forms, gen. ὅου (prob. replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ’ ὀλεῖται Il. 2.325, h.Ap. 156; ὅου κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον Od. 1.70 (elsewh. οὗ Il. 7.325, al., never οἷο); fem. ἕης Il. 16.208 (perh. imitation of ὅου; elsewh. only ἧς 5.265, al.); dat. pl. οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in Hom.): — Pron. used, as demonstr. by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Art. ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases. as a Relat. by the side of the Art. ὅ, ἥ, τό (v. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c): — this demonstr. and Relat. Pron. must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Skt. Relat. yas, yâ, yad, Lith. jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she, it).)

DEMONSTR. PRON., = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that; also, he, she, it:

I Homeric usage: this form only occurs in the nom. masc. and neut. ὅς, ὅ, and perh. nom. fem. ἥ and nom. pl. οἵ, the other cases being supplied by ὁ, ἡ, τό (ὅ, ἡ, τό); most codd. have ἥ in Il. 17.551, Od. 24.255, al., and this (as also οἵ) can be referred equally to either (on the accent v. ὁ, ἡ, τό): with γάρ or καί, ὃς γὰρ δεύτατος ἦλθεν 1.286; ἀλλὰ καὶ ὃς δείδοικε Il. 21.198; ὃ γὰρ γέρας ἐστὶ θανόντων Od. 24.190, Il. 23.9, cf. 12.344: freq. used emphatically in apodosi, mostly with οὐδέ or μηδέ before it, μηδ’ ὅν τινα γαστέρι μήτηρ κοῦρον ἐόντα φέροι, μηδ’ ὃς φύγοι Il. 6.59, cf. 7.160, Od. 4.653: after a part., εἰς ἕτερον γάρ τίς τε ἰδών.., ὃς σπεύδει (for ὅστις ἂν ἴδῃ, ὃς σπεύδει) Hes. Op. 22.

II in later Gr. this usage remained in a few forms:

1 at the beginning of a clause, καὶ ὅς and he, Hdt. 7.18, X. Smp. 1.15, Pl. Phd. 118, Prt. 310d; καὶ ἥ and she, καὶ οἵ and they, Hdt. 8.56, 87, Pl. Smp. 201e, X. An. 7.6.4.

2. ὃς καὶ ὅς such and such a person, Hdt. 4.68: — here also the Art. supplied the obl. cases.
3. ἦ δ’ ὅς, ἦ δ’ ἥ, said he, said she, v. ἠμί.
4. in oppositions, where it sts. answers to the Art., Λέριοι κακοί· οὐχ ὁ μέν, ὃς δ’ οὔ.. Phoc. 1; ὃς μὲν.., ὃ δὲ.. Mosch. 3.76; ὃ μὲν.., ὃς δὲ.., ὃ δὲ.., ὃς δὲ.. Bion 1.81; so τῷ μὲν.., ᾧ δὲ.., ᾧ δὲ.. AP 6.187 (Alph.); ὃ μὲν.., ὃ δὲ.., ὃ δὲ.. (neut.) Matthew 13:8; ἂ μὲν.., ἃ δὲ.. Heraclit. 102, Archyt. ap. Stob. 3.1.110; ὧν μὲν.., ὧν δὲ.. Philem. 99; πόλεις ἃς μὲν.., ἃς δὲ.. D. 18.71 (as v. l.): so in Dor. dat. fem. as Adv., ᾇ μὲν.., ᾇ δὲ.. Tab.Heracl. 1.81; ἐφ’ ὧν μὲν.., ἐφ’ ὧν δὲ.. Arist. EN 1109a1: very freq. in late Prose, Arr. Epict. 3.25.1, etc.: also answering to other Prons., ἑτέρων.., ὧν δὲ.. Philem. 31.6; ἐφ’ ᾧ μὲν.., ἐπὶ θατέρῳ δὲ.. Arist. HA 564a21, etc.

RELAT. PRON., who, which. — By the side of the simple Relat., ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (in Hom. also ὁ, ἡ, τό), we find in common use the compd. forms ὅστε, ὅστις and ὅτις, ὅσπερ and ὅπερ, ὅς γε (q. v.).

USAGE of the Relat. Pron. (the foll. remarks apply to ὅς γε, ὅσπερ, ὅστε, ὅστις, as well as to ὅς, and to ὁ, ἡ, τό as relat.):

I in respect of CONCOR D. — Prop. it agrees in gender and number with the Noun or Pron. in the antec. clause. — But this rule admits of many exceptions:

1 the Relat. mayagree with the gender implied, not expressed, in the antec., φίλον θάλος, ὃν τέκον αὐτή Il. 22.87; τέκνων, οὓς ἤγαγε E. Supp. 12: so after collective Nouns, the Relat. is freq. put in pl. in the gender implied in the Noun, λαόν.., οὕς.. Il. 16.369; στρατιάν.. τοιαύτην.., οἵ τινες.., τὸ ναυτικόν, οἵ.., Th. 6.91, 3.4; πλήθει, οἵπερ.. Pl. Phdr. 260a; esp. after the names of countries or cities, Τηλέπυλον Λαιστρυγονίην ἀφίκανεν, οἳ.. (i. e. to Telepylos of the Laestrygonians, who..) Od. 23.319; τὰς Ἀθήνας, οἵ γε.. Hdt. 7.8. β’ ; Μέγαρα.., οὓς.. Th. 6.94: it also may agree with the Noun or Pron. implied in an Adj., Θηβαίας ἐπισκοποῦντ’ ἀγυιάς, τάν.. the streets of Thebes, which.., S. Ant. 1137 (lyr.); τοὺς Ἡρακλείους παῖδας, ὃς.. the children of Heracles, who.., E. HF 157; τῆς ἐμῆς ἐπεισόδου, ὅν.. of me whom.., S. OC 731; τὸν ἥμισύν ἐστ’ ἀτελὴς τοῦ χρόνου· εἶθ’ ἧς πᾶσι μέτεστι.., where ἧς agrees with ἀτελείας implied in ἀτελής, D. 20.8.

2. when the antec. Noun in sg. implies a class, the Relat. is sts. in pl., ἦ μάλα τις θεὸς ἔνδον, οἳ.. ἔχουσιν (for τις θεῶν, οἵ..) Od. 19.40; κῆτος, ἃ μυρία βόσκει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη one of the thousands, which.., 12.97; αὐτουργός, οἵπερ.. one of those who.., E. Or. 920: rare in Prose, ἀνὴρ καλός τε κἀγαθός, ἐν οἷς οὐδαμοῦ σὺ φανήσει γεγονώς D. 18.310, cf. Lys. 1.32.
3. reversely, the sg. Relat. may follow a pl. antec., where the relat. clause refers to each individual; but in this case ὅστις or ὃς ἄν is mostly used, ἀνθρώπους τίνυσθον, ὅ τις κ’ ἐπίορκον ὀμόσσῃ, for ἀνθρώπων τινά, ὅς κε.., Il. 3.279; πάντα.., ὅ τι νοοίης, i.e. anything which.., Ar. Nu. 1381: rarely ὅς alone, τὰ λίνεα [ὅπλα], τοῦ τάλαντον ὁ πῆχυς εἷλκε a cubit’s length where of.., Hdt. 7.36.
4. the Relat. is sts. in the neut., agreeing rather with the notion implied in the antec. than with the Noun itself, διὰ τὴν πλεονεξίαν, ὃ πᾶσα φύσις διώκειν πέφυκεν for profit’s sake — a thing which.., Pl. R. 359c, cf. Lg. 849d; τοὺς Φωκέας, ὃ σιωπᾶν εἰκὸς ἦν a name which.., D. 19.44; γυναῖκας, ἐφ’ ὅπερ.. women, for dealings with whom, E. Ba. 454.
5. with Verbs of naming, the Relat. freq. agrees with the name added as a predicate, rather than with the antec., ξίφος, τὸν ἀκινάκην καλέουσι Hdt. 7.54; τὴν ἄκρην, αἳ καλεῦνται Κληΐδες Id. 5.108, cf. 2.17, 124, etc.

II in respect of CONSTRUCTION. —

1. Prop., the Relat. is governed by the Noun or Verb in its own clause. — But it is freq. thrown by attraction into the case of the antec. (prob. not in Hom., ἧς in Il. 5.265, cf. 23.649, can be expld. otherwise), ἀπὸ παιδεύσιος, τῆς ἐπεπαίδευτο (for τῇ or τήν) Hdt. 4.78; freq. in Att., Th. 7.21, etc.: esp. where a Demonstr. Pron. is unexpressed, while the Relat. takes its case, οὐδὲν ὧν λέγω (for οὐδὲν τούτων ἃ λ.) S. El. 1048, 1220, etc.; ξὺν ᾧπερ εἶχον οἰκετῶν (for ξὺν τούτῳ ὅνπερ) Id. OC 334; ἀνθ’ ὧν ἂν ἐμοὶ δανείσῃς (for ἀντὶ τούτων ἅ..) X. Cyr. 3.1.34; πρὸς οἷς ἐκτήσαντο (for πρὸς τούτοις ἅ..) Pl. Grg. 519a, etc.: the Demonstr. Pron. sts follows, ἀφ’ ὧν ἐγένεσθε ἀγαθοί, ἀπὸ τούτων ὠφελεῖσθαι Th. 3.64, cf. D. 8.23,26. — This attraction is rare, exc. when the acc. passes into the gen. or dat. (v. supr.): sts. nom. is so attracted, οὐδὲν εἰδότες τῶν ἦν (for τούτων ἃ ἦν) Hdt. 1.78; ἀφ’ ὧν παρεσκεύασται (for ἀπὸ τούτων ἃ π.) Th. 7.67: also dat., ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς (for τούτων οἷς..) Pl. Grg. 509a. reversely the antec. passes into the case of the Relat., φυλακὰς δ’ ἃς εἴρεαι.., οὔτις (for φυλακῶν.. οὔτις) Il. 10.416; τὰς στήλας, τὰς ἵστα, αἱ πλεῦνες.. (for τῶν στηλῶν.. αἱ πλεῦνες) Hdt. 2.106: so also when the Noun follows the Relat. clause, it may be put in apposition with the Relat., Κύκλωπος κεχόλωται, ὃν ὀφθαλμοῦ ἀλάωσεν, ἀντίθεον Πολύφημον Od. 1.69, cf. 4.11, Il. 3.123, A. Th. 553, E. Hec. 771, 986, Hipp. 101, etc.
2. the Demonstr. Pron. or the Noun with an Art. is sts. transferred to the Relat. clause, Ἰνδὸν ποταμόν, ὃς κροκοδείλους δεύτερος οὗτος.. παρέχεται the river Indus, being the second river which.., Hdt. 4.44; σφραγῖδα.., ἣν ἐπὶ δέλτῳ τήνδε κομίζεις E. IA 156 (anap.); φοβούμεθα δέ γε.. δόξαν.., ὃν δὴ καὶ καλοῦμεν τὸν φόβον ἡμεῖς γε αἰσχύνην Pl. Lg. 647a.
3. the Relat. in all cases may govern a partit. gen., ἀθανάτων ὅς τίς σε.. any one of the immortals who.., Od. 15.35, cf. 25, 5.448, etc.; οἳ.. τῶν ἀστῶν Hdt. 7.170; οὓς.. βαρβάρων A. Pers. 475; ᾧ.. τῶν ἡνιόχων Pl. Phdr. 247b: freq. in neut., ἐς ὃ δυνάμιος to what a height of power, Hdt. 7.50; οἶσθ’ οὖν ὃ κάμνει τοῦ λόγου; what part of thy speech, E. Ion 363; ᾧπερ τῆς τέχνης ἐπίστευον in which particular of their art.., Th. 7.36; τὰ μακρὰ τείχη, ἃ σφῶν.. εἶχον which portion of their territory, Id. 4.109, etc.: rarely in such forms as ἕξουσι δ’ ἣν λάβωσιν ἐν ταφῇ χθονός (for ὃ χθονός) A. Th. 819 (χθόνα cj. Brunck).

III in respect of the Moods which follow the Relat.:

1. when the Relat. is equivalent to καί + demonstr. (ὅς = and he..) any mood may follow which may be found in independent clauses: ἦλθε τὸ ναυτικὸν τὸ τῶν βαρβάρων, ὃ τίς οὐκ ἂν ἰδὼν ἐφοβήθη; Lys. 2.34; ὁ δ’ εἰς τὸ σῶφρον ἐπ’ ἀρετήν τ’ ἄγων ἔρως ζηλωτὸς ἀνθρώποισιν· ὧν εἴην ἐγώ E. Fr. 672; ἐλπίς, ᾗ μόνῃ σωθεῖμεν ἄν Id. Hel. 815; εἰς καλὸν ἡμῖν Ἄνυτος ὅδε παρεκαθέζετο, ᾧ μεταδῶμεν τῆς σκέψεως to whom let us.., Pl. Men. 89e; ὃν ὑμεῖς.. νομίσατε which I would have you think.., Lys. 19.61: so the inf. in orat. obliq., ἔτι δὲ.. προσετίθει χρήματα οὐκ ὀλίγα, οἷς χρήσεσθαι αὐτούς (sc. ἔφη) Th. 2.13: for the inf. after ἐφ’ ᾧ τε, v. ἐπί B. 111.3.
2. after ὅς, ὅστις, = whoever, in collective hypothetical sense (= if A + if B + if C..), the same moods are used as after εἰ: pres. ind., τῷδ’ ἔφες ἀνδρὶ βέλος.. ὅς τις ὅδε κρατέει Il. 5.175; κλῦθι, ἄναξ, ὅτις ἐσσί Od. 5.445; δουληΐην.., ἥτις ἐστί (as we say) whatever it is, Hdt. 6.12; ὅ τι ἀνὴρ καὶ γυνή ἐστι πλὴν παιδίων all that are man and woman, Id. 2.60; Ζεύς, ὅστις ποτ’ ἐστίν A. Ag. 160 (lyr.): also after ὅς, ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὃς πενίῃ εἴκων ἀπατήλια βάζει Od. 14.157, etc. subj. with ἄν (κεν) or, in poetry, without ἄν: ξυνίει ἔπος ὅττι κεν εἴπω 19.378; οὐ δηναιὸς ὃς ἀθανάτοισι μάχηται Il. 5.407: — in such cases the opt. is used after secondary tenses, Τρῶας ἄμυνε νεῶν, ὅς τις φέροι ἀκάματον πῦρ 15.731, cf. Hes. Sc. 480; πάντας ἑξῆς, ὅτῳ ἐντύχοιεν,.. κτείνοντες Th. 7.29, cf. Pl. Revelation 21:1-27 a, etc. sts. opt. without ἄν after a primary tense, ὃν πόλις στήσειε, τοῦδε χρὴ κλύειν S. Ant. 666; after an opt., ἔρδοι τις ἣν ἕκαστος εἰδείη τέχνην Ar. V. 1431.

peculiar Idioms:

I

1 in Homer and correct writers, when two coordinate Relat. clauses were joined by καί or δέ, the Relat. Pron. was freq. replaced in the second clause by the demonstr. even though the case was changed, ἄνδρα.., ὃς μέγα πάντων Ἀργείων κρατέει καί οἱ πείθονται Ἀχαιοί (for καὶ ᾧ) Il. 1.78; ὅου κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον.. · Θόωσα δέ μιν τέκε νύμφη (for ὃν τέκε) Od. 1.70, cf. 14.85, etc.; and this sts. even without the demonstr. being expressed, δοίη δ’ ᾧ κ’ ἐθέλοι καί οἱ κεχαρισμένος ἔλθοι (for καὶ ὅς οἱ) 2.54, cf. 114; οὕς κεν ἐΰ γνοίην καί τ’ οὔνομα μυθησαίμην (for καὶ ὧν) Il. 3.235; ᾗ χαλκὸς μὲν ὑπέστρωται, χαλκὸν δ’ ἐπίεσται (nom. supplied) Orac. ap. Hdt. 1.47; ἃς ἐπιστήμας μὲν προσείπομεν.., δέονται δὲ ὀνόματος ἄλλου Pl. R. 533d.

2. the neut. of the Relat. is used in Att. to introduce a clause qualifying the whole of the principal clause which follows: the latter clause is commonly introduced by γάρ, ὅτι, εἰ, ἐπειδή, etc., ὃ δὲ δεινότατόν γ’ ἐστὶν ἁπάντων, ὁ Ζεὺς γὰρ.. ἕστηκεν κτλ. Ar. Av. 514, cf. D. 19.211, etc.; ὃ δὲ πάντων σχετλιώτατον, εἰ.. βουλευσόμεθα Isoc. 6.56; ὃ μὲν πάντων θαυμαστότατον ἀκοῦσαι, ὅτι.. Pl. R. 491b, cf. Revelation 18:1-24 c: also without any Conj., ὃ δὲ πάντων δεινότατόν ἐστι, τοιοῦτος ὢν κτλ. And. 4.16; ὃ δ’ ἠπάτα σε πλεῖστον.., ηὔχεις κτλ. E. El. 938: c. inf., ὃ δὲ πάντων δεινότατον, τὴν ἀδελφὴν ὑποδέξασθαι Lys. 19.33 (but ὑποδέξασθαι <δεῖ> is prob. cj.), etc.: — so also the neut. pl. ἅ may mean with reference to that which, ἃ δ'.. ἐστί σοι λελεγμένα, πᾶν κέρδος ἡγοῦ.. as to what has been said.., E. Med. 453, cf. Hdt. 3.81, S. OT 216, Ar. Eq. 512, etc.</δεῖ>
3. in many instances the Gr. Relat. must be resolved into a Conj. and Pron., θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, ὃς ἡμῖν οὐδὲν δίδως (= ὅτι σὺ) X. Mem. 2.7.13, cf. Lys. 7.23 codd., Pl. Smp. 204b, etc.: very freq. in conditional clauses, for εἴ or ἐάν τις, βέλτερον ὃς<> προφύγῃ κακόν, ἠὲ ἁλώῃ Il. 14.81, cf. Hes. Op. 327; συμφορὰ δ’, ὃς ἂν τύχῃ κακῆς γυναικός E. Fr. 1056; τὸ δ’ εὐτυχές, οἳ ἂν.. λάχωσι κτλ. Th. 2.44; τὸ καλῶς ἄρξαι τοῦτ’ εἶναι, ὃς ἂν τὴν πατρίδα ὠφελήσῃ Id. 6.14.
4. the Relat. freq. stands where we should use a final Conj. or the inf., ἄγγελον ἧκαν, ὃς ἀγγείλειε sent a messenger to tell.., Od. 15.458; κλητοὺς ὀτρύνομεν, οἵ κε τάχιστα ἔλθωσ’ that they may.., Il. 9.165: and freq. with fut. ind., πρέσβεις ἄγουσα, οἵπερ φράσουσι (v.l. φράσωσι) to tell.., Th. 7.25; πέμψον τιν’, ὅστις σημανεῖ E. IT 1209 (troch.), cf. X. HG 2.3.2, Mem. 2.1.14: so with fut. opt., ὀργάνου, ᾧ τὴν τροφὴν δέξοιτο Pl. Ti. 33c: also for ὥστε, after οὕτω, ὧδε, etc., οὐκ ἔστιν οὕτω μῶρος, ὃς θανεῖν ἐρᾷ (for ὥστε ἐρᾶν) S. Ant. 220, cf. Hdt. 4.52, E. Alc. 198, Ar. Ach. 737, etc.
5. ὅς is freq. used where we should expect οἷος, as μαθὼν ὃς εἶ φύσιν what thou art, S. Aj. 1259, cf. E. Alc. 640, Pl. Euthd. 283d, etc.
6. ὅς is sts. = ὅστις or τις in indirect clauses, γνώσῃ.. ὅς.. ἡγεμόνων κακὸς ἠδ’ ὅς κ’ ἐσθλὸς ἔῃσι Il. 2.365 (perh. felt as Relat.); ὃς ἦν ὁ ἀναδέξας, οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν I cannot tell who it was that.., Hdt. 6.124; γενομένης λέσχης ὃς γένοιτο.. ἄριστος Id. 9.71 (in 4.131, 6.37, 7.37, τί θέλει (θέλοι) has been conjectured for τὸ of the Mss.); so in Att., ἐγῷδ’ ὅς ἐστι, Κλεισθένης ὁ Σιβυρτίου Ar. Ach. 118, cf. 442, Av. 804, Pl. 59, 369, S. OT 1068, OC 1171; πέμπει πρὸς τὸν Κῦρον, εἰπὼν ὃς ἦν X. Cyr. 6.1.46, cf. D. 52.7; δηλώσας ὃς ἦν Arist. Po. 1452a26; γράψας παρ’ οὗ κομιούμεθα PCair.Zen. 150.11 (iii B. C.). later ὅς = τίς even in direct questions, ἐφ’ ὃ πάρει; Matthew 26:50; ἣν δοκεῖς; Arr. Epict. 4.1.120 (both dub.).
7. in exclamations, ὦ Ἡράκλεις, ἃ πέπονθα Men. Epit. 146. A a. the Relat. Pron. joined with Particles or Conjs.: I ὅς γε, v. ὅσγε.

ὅς, ἡ, ὁ, the postpositive article, which has the force of:

I. a demonstrative pronoun, this, that (Latinhic,haec,hoc; German emphaticder,die,das); in the N. T. only in the following instances: ὅς δέ, but he (German er aber), John 5:11 L Tr WH; (Mark 15:23 T Tr text WH; cf. Buttmann, § 126, 2); in distributions and distinctions: ὅς μέν … ὅς δέ, this … that, one … another, the one … the other, Matthew 21:35; Matthew 22:5 L T Tr WH; ; Luke 23:33; Acts 27:44; Romans 14:5; 1 Corinthians 7:7 R G; ; 2 Corinthians 2:16; Jude 1:22; ὁ μέν … ὁ δέ, the one … the other, Romans 9:21; (ὁ μέν … ὁ δέ … ὁ δέ, some … some … some, Matthew 13:23 L T WH); ὁ δέ … ὁ δέ … ὁ δέ, some … some … some, Matthew 13:8; ᾧ (masculine) μέν … ἄλλῳ (δέ) … ἑτέρῳ δέ (but L T Tr WH omit this δέ) κτλ., 1 Corinthians 12:8-10 ὁ μέν … ἄλλο δέ (L text T Tr WH καί ἄλλο), Mark 4:4; with a variation of the construction also in the following passages: ὁ μέν … καί ἕτερον, Luke 8:5; οὕς μέν with the omission of οὕς δέ by anacoluthon, 1 Corinthians 12:28; ὅς μέν … ὁ δέ ἀσθενῶν etc. one man … but he that is weak etc. Romans 14:2. On this use of the pronoun, chiefly by later writers from Demosth. down, cf. Matthiae, § 289 Anm. 7; Kühner, § 518, 4 b. ii., p. 780; (Jelf, § 816, 3 b.); Alexander Buttmann (1873) Gram. § 126, 3; Buttmann, 101 (89); Winer’s Grammar, 105 (100); Fritzsche on Mark, p. 507.
II. a relative pronoun who, which, what;
1. in the common construction, according to which the relative agrees as respects its gender with the noun or pronoun which is its antecedent, but as respects case is governed by its own verb, or by a substantive, or by a preposition: ὁ ἀστήρ ὅν εἶδον, Matthew 2:9; ὁ … Ἰουδαῖος οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος κτλ., Romans 2:29; οὗτος περί οὗ ἐγώ ἀκούω τοιαῦτα, Luke 9:9; ἀπό τῆς ἡμέρας, ἀφ’ ἧς, Acts 20:18; Θεός δἰ οὗ, ἐξ οὗ, 1 Corinthians 8:6, and numberless other examples it refers to a more remote noun in 1 Corinthians 1:8, where the antecedent of ὅς is not the nearest noun Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, but τῷ Θεῷ in 4; yet cf. Winer’s Grammar, 157 (149); as in this passage, so very often elsewhere the relative is the subject of its own clause: ἀνήρ ὅς etc. James 1:12; πᾶς ὅς, Luke 14:33; οὐδείς ὅς, Mark 10:29; Luke 18:29, and many other examples
2. in constructions peculiar in some respect;
a. the gender of the relative is sometimes made to conform to that of the following noun: τῆς αὐλῆς, ὁ ἐστι πραιτώριον, Mark 15:16; λαμπάδες, ἅ εἰσί (L ἐστιν) τά πνεύματα, Revelation 4:5 (L T WH); σπέρματι, ὅς ἐστι Χριστός, Galatians 3:16; add, Ephesians 1:14 (L WH text Tr marginal reading ὁ); ; 1 Timothy 3:15; Revelation 5:8 (T WH marginal reading ἅ); cf. Herm. ad Vig., p. 708; Matthiae, § 440, p. 989f; Winers Grammar, § 24, 3; Buttmann, § 143, 3.
b. in constructions ad sensum (cf. Buttmann, § 143, 4); α. the plural of the relative is used after collective nouns in the singular (cf. Winers Grammar, § 21, 3; Buttmann, as above): πλῆθος πολύ, οἱ ἦλθον, Luke 6:17; πᾶν τό πρεσβυτέριον, παῥ ὧν, Acts 22:5; γενεάς, ἐν οἷς, Philippians 2:15. β. κατά πᾶσαν πόλιν, ἐν αἷς, Acts 15:36; ταύτην δευτέραν ὑμῖν γράφω ἐπιστολήν, ἐν αἷς (because the preceding context conveys the idea of two Epistles), 2 Peter 3:1. γ. the gender of the relative is conformed not to the grammatical but to the natural gender its antecedent (cf. Winers Grammar, § 21, 2; Buttmann, as above): παιδάριον ὅς, John 6:9 L T Tr WH; θηρίον ὅς, of Nero, as antichrist, Revelation 13:14 L T Tr WH; κεφαλή ὅς, of Christ, Colossians 2:19; (add μυστήριον ὅς etc. 1 Timothy 3:16 G L T Tr WH; cf. Buttmann, as above; Winer’s Grammar, 588f (547)); σκεύη (of men) οὕς,Romans 9:24; ἔθνη οἱ, Acts 15:17; Acts 26:17; τέκνα, τεκνία οἱ, John 1:13; Galatians 4:19; 2 John 1:1 (Euripides, suppl. 12); τέκνον ὅς, Philemon 1:10.
c. In attractions (Buttmann, § 143, 8; Winer’s Grammar, §§ 24, 1; 66, 4ff); α. the accusative of the relative pronoun depending on a transitive, verb is changed by attraction into the oblique case of its antecedent: κτίσεως ἧς ἔκτισεν ὁ Θεός, Mark 13:19 (R G); τοῦ ῤήματος οὗ εἶπεν, Mark 14:72 (Rec.); add, John 4:14; John 7:31, 39 (but Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading ὁ); ; Acts 3:21, 25; Acts 7:17, 45; Acts 9:36; Acts 10:39; Acts 22:10; Romans 15:18; 1 Corinthians 6:19; 2 Corinthians 1:6; 2 Corinthians 10:8, 13; Ephesians 1:8; Titus 3:5(R G),; Hebrews 6:10; Hebrews 9:20; James 2:5; 1 John 3:24; Jude 1:15; for other examples see below; ἐν ἄρα ἡ οὐ γινώσκει, Matthew 24:50; τῇ παραδόσει ἡ παρεδώκατε, Mark 7:13; add, Luke 2:20; Luke 5:9; Luke 9:43; Luke 12:46; Luke 24:25; John 17:5; Acts 2:22; Acts 17:31; Acts 20:38; 2 Corinthians 12:21; 2 Thessalonians 1:4; Revelation 18:6; cf. Winers Grammar, § 24, 1; (Buttmann, as above). Rarely attraction occurs where the verb governs the dative (but see below): thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε Θεοῦ for κατέναντι Θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (see κατέναντι), Romans 4:17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for ἡ (others, ἥν, cf. Winers Grammar, 164 (154f) Buttmann, 287 (247))), Acts 24:21, cf. Isaiah 6:4; (ἤγετο δέ καί τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τέ πιστῶν, οἷς ἠδετο καί ὧν ἠπιστει πολλούς, for καί πολλούς τούτων, οἷς ἠπιστει, Xenophon, Cyril 5, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγώ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς, for οὐδείς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετύχηκα, Plato, Gorgias, p. 509 a.; Protag., p. 361 e.; de rep. 7, p. 531 e.; παῥ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν ληψει χάριν, for παρά τούτων, οἷς κτλ., Aeschines f. leg., p. 43 (117); cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Romans, i., p. 237; (Buttmann, § 148, 11; Winer’s Grammar, 163f (154f); but others refuse to recognize this rare species of attraction in the N. T.; cf. Meyer on Ephesians 1:8)). The following expressions, however, can hardly be brought under this construction: τῆς χάριτος ἧς ἐχαρίτωσεν (as if for ἡ), Ephesians 1:6 L T Tr WH; τῆς κλήσεως, ἧς ἐκλήθητε, Ephesians 4:1; διά τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς παρακαλούμεθα, 2 Corinthians 1:4, but must be explained agreeably to such phrases as χάριν χαριτουν, κλῆσιν καλεῖν, etc. ((i. e. accusative of kindred abstract substantive; cf. Winers Grammar, § 32, 2; Buttmann, § 131, 5)); cf. Winers Grammar, (and Buttmann, as above). β. The noun to which the relative refers is so conformed to the case of the relative clause that either αα. it is itself incorporated into the relative construction, but without the article (Buttmann, § 143, 7; Winer’s Grammar, § 24, 2 b.): ὅν ἐγώ ἀπεκεφάλισα Ἰωάννην, οὗτος ἠγέρθη, for Ἰωάννης, ὅν κτλ., Mark 6:16; add, Luke 24:1; Philemon 1:10; Romans 6:17; εἰς ἥν οἰκίαν, ἐκεῖ, equivalent to ἐν τῇ οἰκία, εἰς ἥν, Luke 9:4; or ββ. it is placed before the relative clause, either with or without the article (Winers Grammar, § 24, 2 a.; Buttmann, § 144, 13): τόν ἄρτον ὅν κλῶμεν, οὐχί κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος, 1 Corinthians 10:16; λίθον ὅν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη (for ὁ λίθος, ὅς κτλ.), Matthew 21:42; Mark 12:10; Luke 20:17; 1 Peter 2:7. γ. Attraction in the phrases ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας for ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας, ἡ (Winer’s Grammar, § 24, 1 at the end): Matthew 24:38; Luke 1:20; Luke 17:27; Acts 1:2; ἀφ’ ἧς ἡμρας for ἀπό τῆς ἡμέρας, ἡ, Colossians 1:6, 9; ὅν τρόπον, as, just as, for τοῦτον τόν τρόπον ὅν or ᾧ Matthew 23:37; Luke 13:31; Acts 7:28; (preceded or) followed by οὕτως, Acts 1:11; 2 Timothy 3:8. δ. A noun common to both the principal clause and the relative is placed in the relative clause after the relative pronoun (Winer’s Grammar, 165 (156)): ἐν ᾧ κρίματι κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε, for κριθήσεσθε ἐν τῷ κρίματι, ἐν ᾧ κρίνετε, Matthew 7:2; Matthew 24:44; Mark 4:24; Luke 12:40, etc.
3. The Neuter ὁ a. refers to nouns of the masculine and the feminine gender, and to plurals, when that which is denoted by these nouns is regarded as a thing (cf. Buttmann, § 129, 6): λεπτά δύο, ὁ ἐστι κοδράντης, Mark 12:42; ἀγάπην, ὁ ἐστι σύνδεσμος, Colossians 3:14 L T Tr WH; ἄρτους, ὁ etc. Matthew 12:4 L text T Tr WH.
b. is used in the phrases (Buttmann, as above] — ὁ ἐστιν, which (term) signifies: Βοανεργές ὁ ἐστιν υἱοί βροντῆς, Mark 3:17; add, ; Hebrews 7:2; ὁ ἐστι μεθερμηνευόμενον, and the like: Matthew 1:23; Mark 15:34; John 1:38 (), f (f); .
c. refers to a whole sentence (Buttmann, as above): τοῦτον ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός, οὗ … μάρτυρες, Acts 2:32; Acts 3:15; περί οὗ … ὁ λόγος, Hebrews 5:11; ὁ καί ἐποίησαν (and the like), Acts 11:30; Galatians 2:10; Colossians 1:29; ὁ (which thing viz. that I write a new commandment (cf. Buttmann, § 143, 3)) ἐστιν ἀληθές, 1 John 2:8; ὁ (namely, to have one’s lot assigned in the lake of fire) ἐστιν ὁ θάνατος ὁ δεύτερος, Revelation 21:8.
4. By an idiom to be met with from Homer down, in the second of two coordinate clauses a pronoun of the third person takes the place of the relative (cf. Passow 2, p. 552b; (Liddell and Scott, under the word B. IV. 1); Buttmann, § 143, 6; (Winer’s Grammar, 149 (141))): ὅς ἔσται ἐπί τοῦ δώματος καί τά σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ οἰκία μή καταβάτω, Luke 17:31; ἐξ οὗ τά πάντα καί ἡμεῖς εἰς αὐτόν, 1 Corinthians 8:6.
5. Sometimes, by a usage especially Hebraistic, an oblique case of the pronoun αὐτός is introduced into the relative clause redundantly; as, ἧς τό θυγάτριον αὐτῆς, Mark 7:25; see αὐτός, II. 5.
6. The relative pronoun very often so includes the demonstrative οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος that for the sake of perspicuity demons. pronoun must be in thought supplied, either in the clause preceding the relative clause or in that which follows it (Winers Grammar, § 23, 2; Buttmann, § 127, 5). The following examples may suffice:
a. a demons. pronoun must be added in thought in the preceding clause: οἷς ἡτοίμασται, for τούτοις δοθήσεται, οἷς ἡτοίμασται, Matthew 20:23; δεῖξαι (namely, ταῦτα), ἅ δεῖ γενέσθαι, Revelation 1:1; Revelation 22:6; ᾧ for ἐκεῖνος ᾧ, Luke 7:43, 47; οὗ for τούτῳ οὗ, Romans 10:14; with the attraction of ὧν for τούτων ἅ, Luke 9:36; Romans 15:18; ὧν for ταῦτα ὧν, Matthew 6:8; with a preposition intervening, ἔμαθεν ἀφ’ ὧν (for ἀπό τούτων ἅ) ἔπαθεν, Hebrews 5:8.
b. a demons. pronoun must be supplied in the subsequent clause: Matthew 10:38; Mark 9:40; Luke 4:6; Luke 9:50; John 19:22; Romans 2:1, and often.
7. Sometimes the purpose and end is expressed in the form of a relative clause (cf. the Latinqui forut is): ἀποστέλλω ἄγγελον, ὅς (for which Lachmann in Matt. has καί) κατασκευάσει, who shall etc. equivalent to that he may etc., Matthew 11:10; Mark 1:2; Luke 7:27; (1 Corinthians 2:16); so also in Greek authors, cf. Passow, under the word, VIII. vol. 2, p. 553; (Liddell and Scott, under B. IV. 4); Matthiae, § 481, d.; (Kühner, § 563, 3 b.; Jelf, § 836, 4; Buttmann, § 139, 32); — or the cause: ὅν παραδέχεται, because he acknowledges him as his own, Hebrews 12:6; — or the relative stands where ὥστε might be used (cf. Matthiae, § 479 a.; Krüger, § 51, 13, 10; (Kühner, § 563, 3 e.); Passow, under the word, VIII. 2, ii., p. 553b; (Liddell and Scott, as above)): Luke 5:21; Luke 7:49.
8. For the interrogative τίς, τί, in indirect questions (cf. Ellendt, Lex. Sophocles 2:372; (cf. Buttmann, § 139, 58)): οὐκ ἔχω ὁ παραθήσω, Luke 11:6; by a later Greek usage, in a direct question (cf. Winers Grammar, § 24, 4; Buttmann, § 139, 59): ἐφ’ ὁ (or Rec. ἐφ’ ᾧ) πάρει, Matthew 26:50 (on which (and the more than doubtful use of ὅς in direct question) see ἐπί, B. 2 a. ζ῾., p. 233b and C. I. 2 g. γ. αα., p. 235^b).
9. Joined to a preposition it forms a periphrasis for a conjunction (Buttmann, 105 (92)): ἀνθ’ ὧν, for ἀντί τούτων ὅτι — because, Luke 1:20; Luke 19:44; Acts 12:23; 2 Thessalonians 2:10; for which reason, wherefore, Luke 12:3 (see ἀντί, 2 d.); ἐφ’ ᾧ,.for that, since (see ἐπί, B. 2 a. δ., p. 233^a); ἀφ’ οὗ (from the time that), when, since, Luke 13:25; Luke 24:21 (see ἀπό, I. 4 b., p. 58{b}); ἄχρις οὗ, see ἄχρι, 1 d.; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Philippians 3:20 cf. Winers Grammar, § 21, 3; (Buttmann, § 143, 4 a.); ἕως οὗ, until (see ἕως, II. 1 b. α., p. 268{b}); also μέχρις οὗ, Mark 13:30; ἐν ᾧ, while, Mark 2:19; Luke 5:34; John 5:7; ἐν οἷς, meanwhile, Luke 12:1; (cf. ἐν, I. 8 e.).
10. With particles: ὅς ἄν and ὅς ἐάν, whosoever, if any one ever, see ἄν, II. 2 and ἐάν, II., p. 163{a}; οὗ ἐάν, wheresoever (whithersoever) with subjunctive, 1 Corinthians 16:6 (cf. Buttmann, 105 (92)). ὅς γέ, see γέ, 2. ὅς καί, who also, he who (cf. Klotz ad Devar. 2:2, p. 636): Mark 3:19; Luke 6:13; Luke 10:39 (here WH brackets ἡ); John 21:20; Acts 1:11; Acts 7:45; Acts 10:39 (Rec. omits καί); ; Romans 5:2; 1 Corinthians 11:23; 2 Corinthians 3:6; Galatians 2:10; Hebrews 1:2, etc.; ὅς καί αὐτός, who also himself, who as well as others: Matthew 27:57. ὅς δήποτε, whosoever, John 5:4 Rec.; ὅσπερ (or ὅς περ L Tr text), who especially, the very one who (cf. Klotz ad Devar. 2:2, p. 724): Mark 15:6 (but here T WH Tr marginal reading now read ὅν παρῃτοῦντο, which see).
11. The genitive οὗ, used absolutely (cf. Winers Grammar, 690 (549) note; Jelf, § 522, Obs. 1), becomes an adverb (first so in Attic writings, cf. Passow, II., p. 546a; (Meisterhans, § 50, 1));
a. where (Latinubi): Matthew 2:9; Matthew 18:20; Luke 4:16; Luke 23:53; Acts 1:13; Acts 12:12; Acts 16:13; Acts 20:6 (T Tr marginal reading ὅπου); ; Romans 4:15; Romans 9:26; 2 Corinthians 3:17; Colossians 3:1; Hebrews 3:9; Revelation 17:15; after verbs denoting motion (see ἐκεῖ b.; ὅπου, 1 b.) it can be rendered whither (cf. Winers Grammar, § 54, 7; Buttmann, 71 (62)), Matthew 28:16; Luke 10:1; Luke 24:28; 1 Corinthians 16:6.
b. when (like Latinubi equivalent toeo tempore quo,quom): Romans 5:20 (Euripides, Iph. Taur. 320) (but others take οὗ in Romans, the passage cited locally).

Question 9

ὅτι

Answer 9

that, since, because

that; because, since; for
Definition:
originally was the neuter of ὅστις, that, Mt. 2:16, 22, 23; 6:5, 16; often used pleonastically in reciting another’s words, Mt. 9:18; Lk. 19:42; Acts 5:23; as a causal particle, for that, for, because, Mt. 2:18; 5:3, 4, 5; 13:13; because, seeing that, since, Lk. 23:40; Acts 1:17

ὅτῐ,

ὅττῐ (both in Hom.):

Conj., to introduce an objective clause, that, after Verbs of seeing or knowing, thinking or saying; in Hom. freq. strengthd. ὅτι ῥα, and ὅτι δή: —

Usage:

I

1. when ὅτι introduces a statement of fact: in Hom. always with ind., the tense following the same rules as in English, ἤγγειλ’ ὅττι ῥά οἱ πόσις ἔκτοθι μίμνε πυλάων Il. 22.439. in Att., ὅτι takes ind. after primary tenses, ind. or opt. after secondary tenses, e.g. ἐνδείκνυμαι ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι σοφός Pl. Ap. 23b; ᾔσθετο ὅτι τὸ Μένωνος στράτευμα ἤδη ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ἦν X. An. 1.2.21, cf. 2.2.15, al.; ἔλεγον ὅτι οὐκ ὀρθῶς αἱ σπονδαὶ γένοιντο Th. 5.61, cf. Pl. Phd. 59e, etc.; ἠπείλησ’ ὅτι.. βαδιοίμην Ar. Pl. 88: the ind. is freq. retained in the same tense which the speaker used or would have used, ἠγγέλθη.. ὅτι Μέγαρα ἀφέστηκε news came that Megara had (lit. has) revolted, Th. 1.114; ἀποκρινάμενοι ὅτι πέμψουσι ib. 90: sts. opt. and ind. are found in the same sentence, ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, Ἀριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς.. εἴη X. An. 2.1.3; Περικλῆς.. προηγόρευε.. ὅτι Ἀρχίδαμος μέν οἱ ξένος εἴη.., τοὺς δ’ ἀγροὺς τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ καὶ οἰκίας.., ἀφίησιν αὐτὰ δημόσια εἶναι Th. 2.13, cf. Pl. Phd. 61b, etc.: also ὅτι.. and the acc. with inf. are found together, Th. 3.25, X. Cyr. 1.3.13.
2. when ὅτι introduces a conditional sentence, the Constr. after ὅτι is the same as in independent conditional sentences, εἴ τις ἔροιτο, καθ’ ὁποίους νόμους δεῖ πολιτεύεσθαι, δῆλον ὅτι ἀποκρίναισθ’ ἄν.. it is manifest that you would answer.., D. 46.12, cf. X. Mem. 1.6.12.

II

1. ὅτι is freq. inserted pleon. in introducing a quotation (where we use no Conj. and put inverted commas), λόγον τόνδε ἐκφαίνει ὁ Πρωτεύς, λέγων ὅτι ἐγὼ εἰ μὴ περὶ πολλοῦ ἡγεύμην.. Hdt. 2.115; καὶ ἐγὼ εἶπον, ὅ. ἡ αὐτή μοι ἀρχή ἐστι.. Pl. Prt. 318a, cf. 356a, 361a, etc.; even where the quotation consists of one word, ib. 330c, Men. 74b, 74c.
2. ὅ. is also used pleon. with the inf. and acc. (cf. ὡς B. I.I), εἶπον ὅτι πρῶτον ἐμὲ χρῆναι πειραθῆναι κατ’ ἐμαυτόν (which is in fact a mixture of two constrr.) Id. Lg. 892d, cf. Phd. 63c, X. HG 2.2.2, etc.; but ὅτι has freq. been wrongly inserted by the copyists, as if εἶπεν or λέγουσιν must be followed by it, as in Th. 4.37 (om. Pap.), X. Cyr. 5.4.1, etc.

III

1. ὅτι in Att. freq. represents a whole sentence, esp. in affirm. answers, οὐκοῦν.. τὸ ἀδικεῖν κάκιον ἂν εἴη τοῦ ἀδικεῖσθαι. Answ. δῆλον δὴ ὅτι (i.e. ὅτι κάκιον ἂν εἴη, or ὅτι ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει) Pl. Grg. 475c; cf. οἶδ’ ὅτι, ἴσθ’ ὅτι, οἶσθ’ ὅτι, S. Ant. 276, 758, Pl. Grg. 486a, etc.: hence arose the practice of using δηλονότι (q.v.) as Adv.
2. what we make the subject of the Verb which follows ὅτι freq. stands in the preceding clause, Αυκάονας δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ εἴδομεν, ὅτι.. καρποῦνται (for εἴδομεν, ὅτι Λυκάονες καρποῦνται) X. An. 3.2.23, cf. 3.2.29, etc. ὅτι sts.= with regard to the fact that, ὅτι.. οὔ φησι.. ὄνομα εἶναι, ὑποπτεύω αὐτὸν σκώπτειν Pl. Cra. 384c, cf. Prt. 330e, etc. οὐχ ὅ…, ἀλλὰ or ἀλλὰ καὶ.., οὐχ ὅ. ὁ Κρίτων ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ ἦν, ἀλλὰ οἱ φίλοι αὐτοῦ not only Crito.., but his friends, X. Mem. 2.9.8; more fully, οὐ μόνον ὅ. ἄνδρες, ἀλλὰ καὶ αἱ γυναῖκες Pl. Smp. 179b: so folld. by ἀλλ’ οὐδὲ.., ταύτῃ ἀδύνατα ἐξισοῦσθαι οὐχ ὅ. τὰ ἐν τῇ Εὐρώπῃ, ἀλλ’ οὐδ’ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ not only the powers in Europe, but.., Th. 2.97: οὐχ ὅ., not folld. by a second clause, means although, οὐχ ὅ. παίζει καί φησι Pl. Prt. 336d, cf. Grg. 450e, Tht. 157b; cf. ὅπως A. II. 2.
3. for ὅτι μή, v. ὅ τι 11.
4. as a causal Particle, for that, because, generally after Verbs of feeling, Il. 1.56, 14.407, al.; οὐδὲν ἐκπλαγείς, ὅτι.. εἶδες Jul. Or. 1.31a: but without such a Verb, ὃν περὶ πάσης τῖεν ὁμηλικίης, ὅτι οἱ φρεσὶν ἄρτια ᾔδη Il. 5.326, cf. 9.76, al.; μάλιστα δ’ αὐτοὺς ἐπεκαλέσαντο ὅτι τειχομαχεῖν ἐδόκουν δυνατοὶ εἶναι Th. 1.102, cf. And. 1.75, Aeschin. 3.231; so ὅτιπερ Th. 4.14. folld. by τί, ὅτι τί; why? (lit. because why?) D. 23.214; ὅτι τί δή; Ar. Pl. 136, Luc. Dem.Enc. 22; ὅτι δὴ τί μάλιστα; Pl. R. 343a; ὅτι δὴ τί γε; Id. Chrm. 161c; cf. ὁτιή.
5. seeing that, in giving the reason for saying what is said, γλαυκὴ δέ σε τίκτε θάλασσα.. ὅτι τοι νόος ἐστὶν ἀπηνής as is proved by the fact that.., Il. 16.35, cf. 21.488, Od. 22.36. [The last syll. is never elided in Att., prob. to avoid confusion with ὅτε: in Hom. ὅτ’ (ὅ τ’) prob. always represents ὅτε (ὅ τε): there are no examples of ὅττ’: hiatus after ὅτι is permitted in Com., Ar. Lys. 611, Ach. 516.]

ὅτι (properly neuter of ὅστις), a conjunction (from Homer down) (Latinquod (cf. Winers Grammar, § 53, 8 b.; Buttmann, § 139, 51; § 149, 3)), marking:

I. the substance or contents (of a statement), that;
1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the accusative and infinitive is used in Latin): ἀναγγέλλειν, Acts 14:27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts 9:27; εἰπεῖν, Matthew 16:20; Matthew 28:7, 13; John 7:42; John 16:15; 1 Corinthians 1:15; λέγειν, Matthew 3:9; Matthew 8:11; Mark 3:28; Luke 15:7; John 16:20; Romans 4:9 (T Tr WH omit; L brackets ὅτι); , and very often; προειρηκέναι, 2 Corinthians 7:3; before the ὅτι in Acts 14:22 supply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες (cf. Buttmann, § 151, 11); ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Corinthians 9:10; 1 John 2:12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Matthew 23:31; John 1:34; John 3:28; John 4:44; ὁμολογεῖν, Hebrews 11:13; δεικνύειν, Matthew 16:21; δηλουν, 1 Corinthians 1:11; διδάσκειν, 1 Corinthians 11:14. after ἐμφανίζειν, Hebrews 11:14; δῆλον (ἐστιν), 1 Corinthians 15:27; Galatians 3:11; 1 Timothy 6:7 (where L T Tr WH omit δῆλον (and then ὅτι simply introduces the reason, because (Buttmann, 358 (308) to the contrary))); φανεροῦμαι (for φανερόν γίνεται περί ἐμοῦ), 2 Corinthians 3:3; 1 John 2:19. It is added — to verbs of swearing, and to forms of oath and affirmation: ὄμνυμι, Revelation 10:6; ζῶ ἐγώ (see ζάω, I. 1, p. 270{a}), Romans 14:11; μάρτυρα τόν Θεόν ἐπικαλοῦμαι, 2 Corinthians 1:23; πιστός ὁ Θεός, 2 Corinthians 1:18; ἐστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοί, 2 Corinthians 11:10; ἰδού ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, Galatians 1:20; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Romans, ii., p. 242f; (Winers Grammar, § 53, 9; Buttmann, 394 (338)); — to verbs of perceiving, knowing, remembering, etc.: ἀκούειν, John 14:28; βλέπειν, 2 Corinthians 7:8; Hebrews 3:19; James 2:22; θέασθαι, John 6:5; γινώσκειν, Matthew 21:45; Luke 10:11; John 4:53; 2 Corinthians 13:6; 1 John 2:5, etc.; after τοῦτο, Romans 6:6; εἰδέναι, Matthew 6:32; Matthew 22:16; Mark 2:10; Luke 2:49; John 4:42; John 9:20, 24; Romans 2:2; Romans 6:9; Philippians 4:15f, and very often γνωστόν ἐστιν, Acts 28:28; ἐπιγινώσκειν, Mark 2:8; Luke 1:22; Acts 4:13; ἐπίστασθαί, Acts 15:7; νόειν, Matthew 15:17; ὁρᾶν, James 2:24; καταλαμβάνειν, Acts 4:13; Acts 10:34; συνιέναι, Matthew 16:12; ἀγνοεῖν, Romans 1:13; Romans 2:4; Romans 6:3, etc.; ἀναγινώσκειν, Matthew 12:5; Matthew 19:4; μνημονεύειν, John 16:5; — to verbs of thinking, believing, judging, hoping: λογίζεσθαι, John 11:50 L T Tr WH; after τοῦτο, Romans 2:3; 2 Corinthians 10:11; νομίζειν, Matthew 5:17; οἶμαι, James 1:7; πέπεισμαι, Romans 8:38; Romans 14:14; Romans 15:14; 2 Timothy 1:5, 12; πεποιθέναι, Luke 18:9; 2 Corinthians 2:3; Philippians 2:24; Galatians 5:10; 2 Thessalonians 3:4; Hebrews 13:18; πιστεύειν, Matthew 9:28; Mark 11:23; Romans 10:9; ὑπολαμβάνειν, Luke 7:43; δοκεῖν, Matthew 6:7; Matthew 26:53; John 20:15; ἐλπίζειν, Luke 24:21; 2 Corinthians 13:6; κρίνειν τοῦτο ὅτι, 2 Corinthians 5:14 (15); — to verbs of emotion (where in Latin now the accusative and infinitive is used, nowquod): θαυμάζειν Luke 11:38; χαίρειν, John 14:28; 2 Corinthians 7:9, 16; Philippians 4:10; 2 John 1:4; ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, Luke 10:20; συγχαίρειν, Luke 15:6, 9; μέλει μοι (σοι, αὐτῷ), Mark 4:38; Luke 10:40; — to verbs of praising, thanking, blaming (where the Latin usesquod): ἐπαινεῖν, Luke 16:8; 1 Corinthians 11:2, 17; ἐξομολογεῖσθαι, Matthew 11:25; Luke 10:21; εὐχαριστεῖν, Luke 18:11; χάρις τῷ Θεῷ, Romans 6:17; χάριν ἔχω τίνι, 1 Timothy 1:12; ἔχω κατά τίνος, ὅτι etc. Revelation 2:4; ἔχω τοῦτο ὅτι, I have this (which is praiseworthy) that, Revelation 2:6; add, John 7:23 (but here ὅτι is causal; cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 53, 8 b.); 1 Corinthians 6:7; — to the verb εἶναι, when that precedes with a demons. pronoun, in order to define more exactly what thing is or wherein it may be seen: αὕτη ἐστιν ὅτι (Latinquod), John 3:19; ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, 1 John 3:16; 1 John 4:9f, 13, etc.; περί τούτου ὅτι, John 16:19; οὐχ οἷον δέ ὅτι (see οἷος), Romans 9:6; — to the verbs γίνεσθαι and εἶναι with an interrogative pronoun, as τί γέγονεν ὅτι etc., what has come to pass that? our how comes it that? John 14:22; τί (L marginal reading τίς) ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι, Hebrews 2:6 from Psalm 8:5. τίς ὁ λόγος οὗτος (namely, ἐστιν), ὅτι, Luke 4:36; ποταπός ἐστιν οὗτος, ὅτι, Matthew 8:27; τίς ἡ διδαχή αὕτη, ὅτι, Mark 1:27 Rec.; add Mark 4:41.
2. in elliptical formulas (Buttmann, 358 (307); (Winer’s Grammar, 585 (544) note)): τί ὅτι etc., equivalent to τί ἐστιν ὅτι (A. V. how is it that), wherefore? Mark 2:16 R G L (others omit τί; cf. 5 below, and see ὅστις, 4); Luke 2:49; Acts 5:4, 9. οὐχ ὅτι for οὐ λέγω ὅτι, our not that, not as though, cf. Buttmann, § 150, 1; (Winer’s Grammar, 597 (555)); thus, John 6:46; John 7:22; 2 Corinthians 1:24; 2 Corinthians 3:5; Philippians 3:12; Philippians 4:11. ὅτι is used for εἰς ἐκεῖνο ὅτι (in reference to the fact that (English seeing that, in that”)): thus in John 2:18; (Meyer (see his note on 1 Corinthians 1:26) would add many other examples, among them John 9:17 (see below)); for ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, Romans 5:8; for περί τούτου ὅτι, concerning this, that: so after λαλεῖν, Mark 1:34; Luke 4:41 (others take ὅτι, in these examples and those after διαλογ. which follow in a causal sense; cf. Winer’s Grammar, as below (Ellicott on 2 Thessalonians 3:7)); after λέγειν, John 9:17 (see above); after διαλογίζεσθαι, Matthew 16:8; Mark 8:17 (after ἀποστέλλειν σπιστολας, 1 Macc. 12:7). See examples from classic authors in Fritzsche on Matthew, p. 248f; (Meyer, as above; cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 53, 8b.).
3. Noteworthy is the attraction, not uncommon, by which the noun that would naturally be the subject of the subjoined clause, is attracted by the verb of the principal clause and becomes its object (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 66, 5; B § 151, 1 a.); as, οἴδατε τήν οἰκίαν Στεφανᾶ, ὅτι ἐστιν ἀπαρχή, for οἴδατε, ὅτι ἡ οἰκία Στεφανᾶ, κτλ., 1 Corinthians 16:15; also after εἰδέναι and ἰδεῖν, Mark 12:34; 1 Thessalonians 2:1; so after other verbs of knowing, declaring, etc.: Matthew 25:24; John 9:8; Acts 3:10; Acts 9:20; 1 Corinthians 3:20; 2 Thessalonians 2:4; Revelation 17:8, etc.; ὅν ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι Θεός ὑμῶν ἐστι, for περί οὐ (cf. Luke 21:5) ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι, John 8:54.
4. As respects construction, ὅτι is joined in the N. T.
a. to the indicative even where the opinion of another is introduced, and therefore according to classical usage the optative should have been used; as, διεστείλατο … ἵνα μηδενί εἴπωσιν, ὅτι αὐτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός, Matthew 16:20; add, ; , etc.
b. to that subjunctive after ὀυτ μή which differs scarcely at all from the future (see μή, IV. 2, p. 411a; (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 508 (473))): Matthew 5:20; Matthew 26:29 (R G; others omit ὅτι); Mark 14:25; Luke 21:32; John 11:56 (where before ὅτι supply δοκεῖτε, borrowed from the preceding δοκεῖ); but in Romans 3:8 ὅτι before ποιήσωμεν (hortatory subjunctive (cf. Winers Grammar, § 41 a. 4 a.; Buttmann, 245 (211))) is recitative (see 5 below), depending on λέγουσι (Winers Grammar, 628 (583); Buttmann, § 141, 3).
c. to the infinitive, by a mingling of two constructions, common even in classic Greek, according to which the writer beginning the construction with ὅτι falls into the construction of the accusative with an infinitive: Acts 27:10; cf. Winers Grammar, 339 (318) N. 2; (sec. 63, 2c.; Buttmann, 383 (328)). On the anacoluthon found in 1 Corinthians 12:2, according to the reading ὅτι ὅτε (which appears in the Sinaiticus manuscript also (and is adopted by L brackets T Tr WH (yet cf. their note))), cf. Buttmann, 383f (328f).
5. ὅτι is placed before direct discourse (`recitative’ ὅτι) (Buttmann,sec. 139, 51; Winer’s Grammar, § 65, 3 c.; § 60, 9 (and Moulton’s note)): Matthew 2:23(?); ; Mark ( T Tr WH (see 2 above); but see ὅστις, 4); (cf. Buttmann, 237 (204)); Luke 1:61; Luke 2:23; Luke 4:43; Luke 15:27; John 1:20; John 4:17; John 15:25; John 16:17; Acts 15:1; Hebrews 11:18; 1 John 4:20; Revelation 3:17, etc.; most frequently after λέγω, which see II. 1 a., p. 373{a} bottom (Noteworthy is 2 Thessalonians 3:10, cf. Buttmann, § 139, 53.)
II. the reason why anything is said to be or to be done, because, since, for that, for (a causal conjunc.; Latinquod,quia,quom,nam); (on the difference between it and γάρ cf. Westcott, Epistles of John, p. 70);
a. it is added to a speaker’s words to show what ground he gives for his opinion; as, μακάριος etc. ὅτι, Matthew 5:4-12; Matthew 13:16; Luke 6:20; Luke 14:14; after οὐαί, Matthew 11:21; Matthew 23:13-15, 23, 25, 27, 29; Luke 6:24; Luke 10:13; Luke 11:42-44, 46, 52; Jude 1:11; cf. further, Matthew 7:13; Matthew 17:15; Matthew 25:8; Mark 5:9; Mark 9:38 (G Tr marginal reading omit; Tr text brackets the clause); Luke 7:47; Luke 23:40; John 1:30; John 5:27; John 9:16; John 16:9-11, 14, 16 (T Tr WH omit; L brackets the clause); Acts 1:5, and often; — or is added by the narrator, to give the reason for his own opinion: Matthew 2:18; Matthew 9:36; Mark 3:30; Mark 6:34; John 2:25; Acts 1:17; — or, in general, by a teacher, and often in such a way that it relates to his entire statement or views: Matthew 5:43; 1 John 4:18; 2 John 1:7; Revelation 3:10.
b. ὅτι makes reference to some word or words that precede or immediately follow it (cf. Winers Grammar, § 23, 5; § 53, 8 b.; Buttmann, § 127, 6); as, διά τοῦτο, John 8:47; John 10:17; John 12:39; 1 John 3:1, etc. διά τί; Romans 9:32; 2 Corinthians 11:11. χάριν τίνος; 1 John 3:12. οὕτως, Revelation 3:16. ἐν τούτῳ, 1 John 3:20. ὅτι in the protasis, John 1:50(); . It is followed by διά τοῦτο, John 15:19. οὐχ ὅτι … ἀλλ’ ὅτι, not because … but because, John 6:26; John 12:6.
III. On the combination ὡς ὅτι see ὡς, I. 3.
STRONGS NT 3754: ὅτι (interrog) [ὅτι (interrog) interrogative, i. e. ὁ, τί or ὁ τί, see ὅστις, 4 (and at the beginning).) ὅστις, 4 (and at the beginning).]

Question 10

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο

Answer 10

this; he, her, it

this, this one, these; (as object) him, her, it, them; with {1328} or {1650} it means for this reason
Definition:
this, this person or thing, Mt. 3:3, 9, 17; 8:9; 10:2; 24:34, et al. freq.; used by way of contempt, this fellow, Mt. 13:55; 27:47; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, this very thing, this same thing, 2 Cor. 2:3; 7:11; εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο, and elliptically, αὐτὸ τοῦτο, for this same purpose, on this account, Eph. 6:18, 22; 2 Pet. 1:5; καὶ οὗτος, and moreover, Lk. 7:12; 16:1; 20:30; καὶ τοῦτο, and that too, 1 Cor. 6:6, 8; tοῦτο μὲν τοῦτο δέ, partly partly, Heb. 10:33

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο,

gen. τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, etc.: the dual fem. never in Att., v. ὁ, ἡ, τό, init.: —
demonstr. Pron., this, common from Hom. downwds.

ORIGIN and FORMS: οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο prob. arose from a reduplication of the demonstr. ὁ, ἡ, τό with insertion of -υ- (= Skt. Particle u), e.g. ταῦτα fr. τα-υ-τα: Dor. gen. sg. fem. τούτας Philol. 11; nom. pl. τοῦτοι, ταῦται A.D. Synt. 111.23: the former occurs Sophr. 24, GDI 3045 B 6 (Selinus), SIG 339.16 (Rhodes, iii B. C.), etc., the latter is dub. in Sophr. 97, certain in SIG 241 B 117 (Delph., iv B. C.): in Boeot. all forms begin with οὑτ-, as gen. sg. neut. οὕτω Supp.Epigr. 3.359.11 (iii B. C.); acc. sg. fem. οὕταν Corinn. Supp. 2.80; acc. pl. neut. οὗτα SIG 1185.20 (Tanagra, iii B. C.), etc.: gen. pl. fem. Att. τούτων, Cret. ταυτᾶν Leg.Gort. 5.19; neut. ταύτων Michel 1334.10 (Elis, iv B. C.). — In Ion. sts. written ταότην, ταο̄τα, SIG 283.19 (Chios, iv B. C.), 46.7 (Halic., v B. C.), al. — In Att. οὗτος was freq. strengthd. by the demonstr. -ί, οὑτοσί, αὑτηί, τουτί, gen. τουτουί, dat. τουτῳί, acc. τουτονί; pl. nom. οὑτοιί, neut. ταυτί, etc., this man here: sts. a Particle is inserted between the Pron. and -ί, as αὑτηγί for αὑτηί γε, Ar. Ach. 784; τουτογί for τουτί γε, Id. V. 781, Av. 894, al.; ταυταγί for ταυτί γε, Id. Eq. 492, Pax 1057, al.; τουτοδί for τουτὶ δέ, Id. Pl. 227; τουτουμενί for τουτουὶ μέν, Id. Ra. 965. — In codd. the ν ἐφελκυστικόν is sts. added in the forms οὑτοσίν, οὑτωσίν, and οὑτοσίν is said to be Att. by A.D. Pron. 59.24, 82.11. [This ι is always long, and a long vowel or diphthong before it becomes short, as αὑτη ί, τουτω ί, οὑτοῐί, Ar. Nu. 201, Pl. 44, Ach. 40, etc.]

USAGE in regard to CONCOR D. οὗτος is freq. used as a Pron. Subst.:

1. hence neut. is folld. by gen., κατὰ τοῦτο τῆς ἀκροπόλιος Hdt. 1.84; εἰς τοῦθ’ ὕβρεως ἐλήλυθεν D. 4.37; εἰς τοῦθ’ ἥκεις μανίας Id. 36.48; ταῦτα τῶν μαθημάτων Pl. Euthd. 278b: but quite as freq. as Adj., in which case its Subst. commonly takes the Art., οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος. — But the Art. is absent, 1 always in Poets (exc. Od. 18.114), οὗτος ἀνήρ Il. 14.471, Od. 1.406, etc.: sts. also in Trag., A. Pers. 122 (lyr.), 495, S. Ph. 406, OC 471, 1177: once in an Inscr., τοπεῖα: τούτων τὰ ἡμίσεα τοπείων IG 22.1622.135 (iv B. C.).
2. sts. when the Noun is so specified that the Art. is not needed, ἐς γῆν ταύτην.., ἥντινα νῦν Σκύθαι νέμονται Hdt. 4.8; ταύτας ἃς οἱ πατέρες παρέδοσαν μελέτας Th. 1.85, cf. Pl. R. 449d, etc.; πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος, ὃν θρηνεῖς ἀεί S. El. 530.
3. when οὗτος is used in local sense, here, v. infr. c. 1.5.
4. when the Noun with which οὗτος agrees stands as its Predicate, αὕτη γὰρ ἦν σοι πρόφασις S. Ph. 1034; δικαστοῦ αὕτη ἀρετή [ἐστι ] Pl. Revelation 18:1-24 a: this exception extends to cases in which the Predicate is not so distinctly separated from the Subject, αἰτίαι μὲν αὗται προυγεγένηντο these were the grievances which already existed, Th. 1.66; ταύτην φήμην παρέδοσαν this was the report which.., Pl. Phlb. 16c: freq. with a Sup., κίνησις αὕτη μεγίστη δὴ.. ἐγένετο this was notably the greatest movement which.., Th. 1.1, cf. 3.113: with πρῶτος Id. 1.55, 98, 6.31, Luke 2:2.
5. when 3rd pers. is used for 2nd to express contempt, οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὑτοσὶ ἀνήρ, Pl. Grg. 467b, 489b, etc.

II

1. though οὗτος usu. agrees with the Noun that serves as Predicate, it is not rare to find it in the neut., μανία δὲ καὶ τοῦτ’ ἐστί E. Ba. 305; τοῦτο γάρ εἰσι.. εὔθυναι D. 19.82, etc.: and in pl., οὐκ ἔστι ταῦτα ἀρχή Aeschin. 3.13; ταῦτ’ ἐστὶν ὁ προδότης Id. 2.166: so with an explanatory clause added, τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν ὁ συκοφάντης, αἰτιᾶσθαι μὲν πάντα ἐξελέγξαι δὲ μηδέν D. 57.34.
2. so also with a Noun in apposition, τούτοισιν μὲν ταῦτα μέλει, κίθαρις καὶ ἀοιδή Od. 1.159; τούτου τιμῶμαι, ἐν πρυτανείῳ σιτήσεως Pl. Ap. 36e, cf. E. Fr. 323.3, etc.
3. the neut. also may refer to a masc. or fem. Noun, καρπὸν φορέει κυάμῳ ἴσον: τοῦτο ἐπεὰν γένηται πέπον κτλ. Hdt. 4.23, cf. X. An. 1.5.10, etc.
4. the neut. is also used of classes of persons, μελιτοπῶλαι καὶ τυροπῶλαι: τοῦτο δ’ εἰς ἕν ἐστι συγκεκυφός Ar. Eq. 854, cf. Pl. Lg. 711a; or of an abstract fact, οὐκ Ἰοφῶν ζῇ; — τοῦτο γάρ τοι καὶ μόνον ἔτ’ ἐστὶ λοιπὸν ἀγαθόν Ar. Ra. 73.

III with Prons.,

1 personal, οὗτος σύ, in local sense, v. infr. c. 1.5.

2. interrog., τί τοῦτ’ ἔλεξας; what is this that.. ? S. Ph. 1173 (lyr.), cf. Ant. 7; ποίοισι τούτοις; for ποῖά ἐστι ταῦτα οἷς [ἔχεις ἐλπίδα ]; Id. OC 388, cf. Ant. 1049; Νέστορ’ ἔρειο ὅν τινα τοῦτον ἄγει whom he brings here, Il. 11.612.
3. with οἷος, Od. 20.377, Pl. Phd. 61c.
4. possess., πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος this father of thine, S. El. 530, cf. X. An. 7.3.30.
5. demonstr., οὗτος ἐκεῖνος, τὸν σὺ ζητέεις, where ἐκεῖνος is the Predicate, Hdt. 1.32; τοῦτ’ ἔστ’ ἐκεῖνο E. Hel. 622, cf. Or. 804; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, v. αὐτός 1.7; τοῦτον τὸν αὐτὸν ἄνδρα this same man, S. Ph. 128. exceptionally, Διφίλου οὗτος ὅδ’ ἐστὶ τύπος IG 12(5).300 (Paros).
6. ἄλλος τις οὗτος ἀνέστη another man here, Od. 20.380. with Numerals, τέθνηκε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη these three years, Lys. 7.10c odd.; [ στρατείαν] ἑνδέκατον μῆνα τουτονὶ ποιεῖται for these eleven months, D. 8.2, cf. 3.4; τριακοστὴν ταύτην ἡμέραν Men. Epit. 27; ταύτας τριάκοντα μνᾶς D. 27.23, cf. Pl. Grg. 463b, etc.

SIGNIFICATION AND SPECIAL IDIOMS:

I

1. this, to designate the nearer, opp. ἐκεῖνος, that, the more remote, ταῦτα, like τὰ ἐνταῦθα, things round and about us, earthly things, Pl. Phd. 75e (v. l.); cf. ὅδε init.: but οὗτος sts. indicates that which is not really nearest, but most important, δεῖ.. τὸ βέλτιστον ἀεί, μὴ τὸ ῥᾷστον λέγειν: ἐπὶ ἐκεῖνο μὲν γὰρ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ βαδιεῖται, ἐπὶ τοῦτο δὲ κτλ. D. 8.72, cf. 51.3 and 18.
2. when, of two things, one precedes and the other follows, ὅδε prop. refers to what follows, οὗτος to what precedes, οὐκ ἔστι σοι ταῦτ’, ἀλλά σοι τάδ’ ἔστι S. OC 787, cf. ὅδε III. 2: freq., however, where there are not two things, οὗτος refers to what follows, Il. 13.377, Od. 2.306, etc.; οὔκουν.. τοῦτο γιγνώσκεις, ὅτι..; A. Pr. 379, etc.
3. οὗτος is used emphat., generally in contempt, while ἐκεῖνος denotes praise, ὁ πάντ’ ἄναλκις οὗτος, i.e. Aegisthus, S. El. 301; τούτους τοὺς συκοφάντας Pl. Cri. 45a; so D. de Coron. uses οὗτος of Aeschines, ἐκεῖνος of Philip; but οὗτος is used of Philip, D. 2.15, 4.3. of what is familiar, τούτους τοὺς πολυτελεῖς χιτῶνας, of the Persians, X. An. 1.5.8; οἱ τὰς τελετὰς.. οὗτοι καταστήσαντες Pl. Phd. 69c, cf. Men. 80a; τὸ θυλακῶδες τοῦτο the familiar bag-like thing, Thphr. HP 3.7.3, cf. 3.18.11, 4.7.1; οἱ τὰς κόρας ταύτας ὠνούμενοι τοῖς παισίν D.Chr. 31.153.
4. in Att. law-language, οὗτος is commonly applied to the opponent, whether plaintiff (as in Aeschin. 2.130) or defendant (as in Id. 1.1); so, in the political speeches of D., οὗτοι are the opposite party, 4.1, 8.7, etc.; but in the forensic speeches, οὗτοι freq. means the judges, the court, 21.134, 36.47.
5. much like an Adv., in local sense (cf. ὅδε init.), τίς δ’ οὗτος κατὰ νῆας.. ἔρχεαι; who art thou here that comest.. ? Il. 10.82; freq. in Att., τίς οὑτοσί; who’s this here? Ar. Ach. 1048; πολλὰ ὁρῶ ταῦτα πρόβατα I see many sheep here, X. An. 3.5.9 (as v.l.): with Pron. of 2 pers., οὗτος σύ ho you! you there! S. OT 532, 1121, E. Hec. 1280, etc.: and then οὗτος alone like a voc., οὗτος, τί ποιεῖς; A. Supp. 911,cf. S. Aj. 71, E. Alc. 773, Ar. Eq. 240, Nu. 220, al.: with a pr. n., ὦ οὗτος, Αἴας S. Aj. 89; ὦ οὗτος οὗτος, Οἰδίπους Id. OC 1627, cf. Ar. V. 1364: with voc., βέντισθ’ οὗτος Theoc. 5.76: — the fem. is rarer, αὕτη E. Med. 922; αὕτη σύ Ar. Th. 610. — This phrase mostly implies anger, impatience, or scorn.

II simply as antec. to ὅς, Od. 2.40, S. OT 1180, etc.: freq. following relat. clause, ἅ γ’ ἔλαβες,.. μεθεῖναι ταῦτα Id. Ph. 1247, cf. 1319, Ant. 183, 203, Pl. Grg. 469c.

III = τοιοῦτος, οὗτος ἐγὼ ταχυτᾶτι Pi. O. 4.26; σὺ τοίνυν οὗτος εὑρέθης D. 18.282, cf. 173. after a parenthesis, the Subject, though already named, is freq. emphat. repeated by οὗτος, οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Ἀριστέης.., οὐδὲ οὗτος προσωτέρω.. ἔφησε ἀπικέσθαι Hdt. 4.16, cf. 81 (s. v. l.), 1.146, Pl. Phd. 107d, etc. καὶ οὗτος is added to heighten the force of a previous word, ξυνεστῶτες.. ναυτικῷ ἀγῶνι, καὶ τούτῳ πρὸς Ἀθηναίους Th. 4.55, cf. Hdt. 1.147, 6.11, etc.; so οὐδὲ τούτου Aeschin. 2.100; v. infr. VIII.2. repeated, where for the second we should merely say he or it, τοῖσιν τούτου τοῦτον μέλεσιν.. κελαδοῦντες Ar. Ra. 1526, cf. Pl. La. 200d.

ταῦτα is used in some special phrases,

1 ταῦτ’, ὦ δέσποτα yes Sir (i. e. ἔστι ταῦτα, ταῦτα δράσω, etc.), Ar. V. 142, Pax 275, cf. Eq. III; so ταῦτα δή Id. Ach. 815; ταῦτά νυν Id. V. 1008; so also ἦν ταῦτα even so, true, E. Ph. 417.

2. ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ὑπάρξει so it shall be, Pl. Phd. 78a.
3. καὶ ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα so much for that, freq. in Att., as Pl. Smp. 220c.
4. ταῦτα at end of a formula in epitaphs, etc., prob. short for ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει or ὁ βίος ταῦτά ἐστιν, e.g. οὐδὶς (= -εὶς) ἀθάνατος: ταῦτα IG 14.420; Προκόπι ταῦτα ib.1824; χαίρεται (= -τε) ταῦτα ib.1479, etc.: similarly perh. in a letter, ἂμ μὴ πέμψῃς, οὐ μὴ φάγω, οὐ μὴ πείνω. ταῦτα POxy. 119.15 (ii/iii A. D.).

Adverbial usages:

1 ταῦτα abs., therefore, that is why.., Il. 11.694; ταῦτ’ ἄρα Ar. Ach. 90, Nu. 319, 335, 394, al., X. Smp. 4.55; ταῦτα δή A. Pers. 159, Pl. Smp. 174a; ταῦτ’ οὖν S. Tr. 550, Ar. V. 1358, etc.; αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἥκω, ἵνα.. Pl. Prt. 310e: τοῦτο is rare in this sense, τοῦτ’ ἀφικόμην, ὅπως.. εὖ πράξαιμί τι S. OT 1005; αὐτὸ γὰρ τοῦτο just because of this, Pl. Smp. 204a. πρὸς ταῦτα so then, therefore, prop. used in indignant defiance, A. Pr. 992, 1043, S. Aj. 971, 1115, 1313, OT 426, OC 455, etc.

2. καὶ ταῦτα, adding a circumstance heightening the force of what has been said, and that, ἄνδρα γενναῖον θανεῖν, καὶ ταῦτα πρὸς γυναικός A. Eu. 627: but mostly with a part., ὅς γ’ ἐξέλυσας ἄστυ.., καὶ ταῦθ’ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν οὐδὲν ἐξειδὼς πλέον S. OT 37, cf. Ar. Ra. 704, Pl. Phdr. 241e, etc.; or with a part. omitted, ἥτις.. τὴν τεκοῦσαν ὕβρισεν, καὶ ταῦτα τηλικοῦτος (sc. οὖσα) S. El. 614; so καὶ ταῦτα μέντοι Pl. Erx. 400b. καὶ ταῦτα anyhow, no matter what happens (or happened), ἐπεχείρησας, οὐδὲν ὢν καὶ ταῦτα you tried, but were no good anyhow, i.e. try as you might, Id. R. 341c, cf. Diod.Com. 3.5.
3. τοῦτο μέν.., τοῦτο δέ.. on the one hand.., on the other.., partly.., partly.., very freq. in Hdt., as 1.161, al.; τοῦτο μέν is sts. answered by δέ only, 4.76, S. Aj. 670, OC 440; by δὲ αὖ, Hdt. 7.176; by ἔπειτα δέ, S. Ant. 61; by ἀλλά, D. 22.13; by εἶτα, S. Ph. 1345; by τοῦτ’ αὖθις, Id. Ant. 165.
4. dat. fem. ταύτῃ, on this spot, here, ταύτῃ μὲν.., τῇδε δ’ αὖ.. Id. Ph. 1331; ἀλλ’ ἐὰν ταύτῃ γε νικᾷ, ταυτῃὶ πεπλήξεται Ar. Eq. 271, cf. Th. 1221. in this point, herein, μηδὲν ταύτῃ γε κομήσῃς Id. Pl. 572, cf. X. Hier. 7.12, etc. in this way, thus, A. Pr. 191, S. OC 1300, etc.; οὐ.. ταῦτ’ ἐστί πω ταύτῃ Ar. Eq. 843; ἀλλ’ οὔτι ταύτῃ ταῦτα E. Med. 365, cf. A. Pr. 511: antec. to ὥσπερ, Pl. R. 330c; to ὅπῃ, X. Cyr. 8.3.2; οὕτω τε καὶ ταύτῃ γίγνοιτο Pl. Lg. 681d; καὶ οὕτω καὶ ταύτῃ ἂν ἔχοι ib. 714d; ταύτῃ καλεῖσθαι, etc., like οὕτω κ., Sch. Pl. Smp. 215b.
5. ἐκ τούτου or τούτων thereupon, X. HG 3.1.6, Oec. 2.1; therefore, Id. An. 3.3.5.
6. ἐν τούτῳ in that case, Pl. R. 440c. in the meantime, Hdt. 1.126, Th. 3.72, X. Mem. 2.

οὔτοι

or οὔ τοι, Adv. indeed not, Il. 1.298, 515, 3.65, 4.29, Hes. Op. 759, etc.: in Att. freq. before protestations, οὔτοι μὰ τὴν Δήμητρα Ar. Pl. 64; οὔτοι.. μὰ τὸν Ἀπόλλω Id. V. 1366; οὔτοι μὰ τὴν Γῆν Id. Pax 188; μὰ τὸν Δί’ οὔτοι γε Id. Th. 34; μὰ τὸν Δί’ οὐ τοίνυν Id. V. 1141 (cf. τοίνυν) ; ἀλλ’ οὔτοι.. γε S. El. 137 (lyr.), etc.; οὔτοι δή Pl. Cri. 43d; οὔτοι δὴ.. γε Id. Euthphr. 2a, etc.; οὔτοι μὲν οὖν Id. Phdr. 271b; οὔτοι πότε never indeed, S. Ant. 522, etc.; οὔτοι ποτέ.. γε Id. OT 852; cf. οὔ τἄν, οὔ τἄρα. (οὔτοι is freq. confounded with οὔτι.)

ἀϋτή

[ ῡ], ἡ, (αὔω B) cry, shout, esp. battle-shout, war-cry, ἀϋτὴ δ’ οὐρανὸν ἷκεν Il. 2.153; ἀϋτή τε πτόλεμός τε 6.328; κίνδυνος ὀξείας ἀϋτᾶς Pi. N. 9.35: generally, γλώσσης ἀϋτὴν Φωκίδος A. Ch. 564; of the blast of the trumpet, Id. Pers. 395; of the creaking of the axle, Parm. 1.6. (ἀϝῡτά IG 9(1).868 (Corc.).)

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, demonstrative pronoun (cf. Curtius, p. 543), Hebrew זֶה, זֹאת, this; used:

I. absolutely.
1.
a. this one, visibly present here: Matthew 3:17; Matthew 17:5; Mark 9:7; Luke 7:44; Luke 9:35; 2 Peter 1:17. Matthew 9:3; Matthew 21:38; Mark 14:69; Luke 2:34; Luke 23:2; John 1:15, 30; John 7:25; John 9:8f, 19; John 18:21, 30; John 21:21; Acts 2:15; Acts 4:10; Acts 9:21; according to the nature and character of the person or thing mentioned, it is used with a suggestion — either of contempt, as Matthew 13:55; Mark 6:2; Luke 5:21; Luke 7:39, 49; John 6:42, 52; John 7:15; or of admiration, Matthew 21:11; Acts 9:21; cf. Wahl, Clavis apocryphor. V. T., p. 370.
b. it refers to a subject immediately preceding, the one just named: Luke 1:32; Luke 2:37 (R G L); John 1:2; John 6:71; 2 Timothy 3:6, 8, etc.; at the beginning of a narrative about one already mentioned, Matthew 3:3; Luke 16:1; John 1:41 (); ; Acts 7:19; Acts 21:24. this one just mentioned and no other: John 9:9; Acts 4:10 (ἐν τούτῳ); ; 1 John 5:6; such as I have just described, 2 Timothy 3:5; 2 Peter 2:17. καί οὗτος, this one just mentioned also, i. e. as well as the rest, Luke 20:30 R G L; Hebrews 8:3. καί τοῦτον, and him too, and him indeed, 1 Corinthians 2:2.
c. it refers to the leading subject of a sentence although in position more remote (Winers Grammar, § 23, 1; (Buttmann, § 127, 3)): Acts 4:11; Acts 7:19; Acts 8:26 (on which see Γάζα under the end); 1 John 5:20 (where οὗτος is referred by (many) orthodox interpreters incorrectly ((see Alford at the passage; Winers Grammar, and Buttmanns Grammar, the passages cited)) to the immediately preceding subject, Christ); 2 John 1:7.
d. it refers to what follows; οὗτος, αὕτη ἐστι, in this appears … that etc.; on this depends … that etc.: followed by ὅτι, as αὕτη ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία, ὅτι, 1 John 1:5; add, ; — by ἵνα, John 15:12; 1 John 3:11, 23; 1 John 5:3; 2 John 1:6; τοῦτο ἐστι τό ἔργον, τό θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα, John 6:29, 39f.
e. it serves to repeat the subject with emphasis: οὐ πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ, οὗτοι Ἰσραήλ, Romans 9:6; add, ; (L marginal reading οἱ τοιοῦτοι); Romans 7:10; Galatians 3:7; it refers, not without special force, to a description given by a participle or by the relative ὅς, ὅστις; which description either follows, as Mark 4:16, 18; Luke 8:15, 21; Luke 9:9; John 11:37; followed by a relative sentence, John 1:15; 1 Peter 5:12; — or precedes: in the form of a participle, Matthew 10:22; Matthew 13:20, 22; Matthew 24:13; Matthew 26:23; Mark 12:40; Luke 9:48 (ὁ … ὑπάρχων, οὗτος); John 6:46; John 7:18; John 15:5; 2 John 1:9; Acts 17:7; (and R G in Revelation 3:5); or of the relative ὅς, Matthew 5:19; Mark 3:35; Luke 9:24, 26; John 1:33 (here L marginal reading αὐτός); ; Romans 8:30; 1 Corinthians 7:20; Hebrews 13:11; 1 John 2:5; 2 Peter 2:19; in the neuter, John 8:26; Romans 7:16; 1 Corinthians 7:24; Philippians 4:9; 2 Timothy 2:2; or of a preceding ὅστις, Matthew 18:4; in the neuter Philippians 3:7. ὅσοι … οὗτοι, Romans 8:14; Galatians 6:12; also preceded by εἰ τίς, 1 Corinthians 3:17 (here Lachmann αὐτός); ; James 1:23; James 3:2; by ἐάν τίς, John 9:31; cf. Winers Grammar, § 23, 4.
f. with αὐτός annexed, this man himself, Acts 25:25; plural these themselves, Acts 24:15, 20; on the neuter see below, 2 a. b. etc.
g. As the relative and interrogative pronoun so also the demonstrative, when it is the subject, conforms in gender and number to the noun in the predicate: οὗτοι εἰσιν οἱ υἱοί τῆς βασιλείας, Matthew 13:38; add, Mark 4:15f, 18; αὕτη ἐστιν ἡ μεγάλη ἐντολή, Matthew 22:38; οὗτος ἐστιν ὁ πλάνος (German diese sind), 2 John 1:7.
2. The neuter τοῦτο a. refers to what precedes: Luke 5:6; John 6:61; Acts 19:17; τοῦτο εἰπών, and the like, Luke 24:40 (T omits; Tr brackets WH reject the verse); John 4:18; John 8:6; John 12:33; John 18:38; διά τοῦτο, see διά, B. II. 2 a.; εἰς τοῦτο, see εἰς, B. II. 3 c. β.; αὐτό τοῦτο, for this very cause, 2 Peter 1:5 (Lachmann αὐτοί); cf. Matthiae, § 470, 7; Passow, under the word, C. 1 a. at the end (Liddell and Scott, under the word, C. IX. 1 at the end; Winer’s Grammar, § 21, 3 note 2; Kühner, § 410 Anm. 6); μετά τοῦτο, see μετά, II. 2 b. ἐκ τούτου, for this reason (see ἐκ, II. 8), John 6:66; John 19:12; from this, i. e. hereby, by this note, 1 John 4:6 (cf. Westcott at the passage). ἐν τούτῳ, for this cause, John 16:30; Acts 24:16; hereby, by this token, 1 John 3:19. ἐπί τούτῳ, in the meanwhile, while this was going on (but see ἐπί, B. 2 e., at the end, p. 234a), John 4:27. τούτου χάριν, Ephesians 3:14. plural ταῦτα, John 7:4 (these so great, so wonderful, things); μετά ταῦτα, see μετά, II. 2 b. κατά ταῦτα, in this same manner, Rec. in Luke 6:23, and (others, τά αὐτά or ταῦτα). it refers to the substance of the preceding discourse: Luke 8:8; Luke 11:27; Luke 24:26; John 5:34; John 15:11; John 21:24, and very often. καθώς … ταῦτα, John 8:28.
b. it prepares the reader or hearer and renders him attentive to what follows, which tires gets special weight (Winer’s Grammar, § 23, 5): 1 John 4:2; αὐτό τοῦτο ὅτι, Philippians 1:6; τοῦτο λέγω followed by direct discourse, Galatians 3:17 (see λέγω, II. 2 d.). it is prefixed to sentences introduced by the particles ὅτι, ἵνα, etc.: τοῦτο λέγω or φημί followed by ὅτι, 1 Corinthians 1:12 ((see λέγω as above); 1 Corinthians 7:29); ; γινώσκεις τοῦτο followed by ὅτι, Romans 6:6; 2 Timothy 3:1; 2 Peter 1:20; 2 Peter 3:3; λογίζεσθαι τοῦτο ὅτι, Romans 2:3; after ὁμολογεῖν, Acts 24:14; after εἰδώς, 1 Timothy 1:9; ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι, 1 John 3:16, 24; 1 John 4:9f; τοῦτο, ἵνα, Luke 1:43; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Acts 9:21; Romans 14:9; 2 Corinthians 2:9; 1 Peter 3:9; 1 Peter 4:6; 1 John 3:8; διά τοῦτο, ἵνα, 2 Corinthians 13:10; 1 Timothy 1:16; Philemon 1:15; τούτων (on this neuter plural referring to a single object see Winers Grammar, 162 (153); (cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 41)), ἵνα, 3 John 1:4; ἐν τούτῳ, ἐάν, 1 John 2:3; ὅταν, 1 John 5:2; τοῦτο αὐτό, ἵνα, on this very account, that (see a. above (but others take it here as the accusative of object; see Meyer at the passage (for instances of αὐτό τοῦτο see Buttmann, § 127, 12))), 2 Corinthians 2:3; εἰς αὐτό τοῦτο, ἵνα, Ephesians 6:22; Colossians 4:8; ὅπως, Romans 9:17. In the same manner τοῦτο is put before an infinitive with τό for the sake of emphasis (Winers Grammar, § 23, 5; Buttmann, § 140, 7, 9, etc.): 2 Corinthians 2:1; before a simple infinitive, 1 Corinthians 7:37 (here R G prefix τοῦ to the infinitive); before an accusative and infinitive Ephesians 4:17; before nouns, as τοῦτο εὔχομαι, τήν ὑμῶν κατάρτισιν, 2 Corinthians 13:9, cf. 1 John 3:24; 1 John 5:4.
c. καί τοῦτο, and this, and that too, and indeed, especially: Romans 13:11; 1 Corinthians 6:6, L T Tr WH also in 8; Ephesians 2:8; καί ταῦτα, and that too, 1 Corinthians 6:8 Rec.; Hebrews 11:12; (so καί ταῦτα also in classical Greek; cf. Devar. edition Klotz i., p. 108; Viger. edition Herm., p. 176f; Matthiae, § 470, 6).
d. ταῦτα, of this sort, such, spoken contemptuously of men, 1 Corinthians 6:11 (cf. Sophocles O. R 1329; Thucydides 6, 77; Livy 30, 30; cf. Bernhardy (1829), p. 281; (Winers Grammar, 162 (153))).
e. τοῦτο μέν … τοῦτο δέ, partly … partly, Hebrews 10:33 (for examples from Greek anth. see Winers Grammar, 142 (135); Matthiae, ii., § 288 Anm. 2; (Kühner, § 527 Anm. 2)).
f. τουτ’ ἐστιν, see εἰμί, II. 3, p. 176{b}.
II. Joined to nouns it is used like an adjective;
a. so that the article stands between the demonstrative and the noun, οὗτος ὁ, αὕτη ἡ, τοῦτο τό (cf. Winers Grammar, § 23 at the end; Buttmann, § 127, 29): Matthew 12:32; Matthew 16:18; Matthew 17:21 (T WH omits; Tr brackets the verse); ; Mark 9:29; Luke 7:44; Luke 10:36; Luke 14:30; Luke 15:24; John 4:15; John 7:46 (L WH omit; Tr brackets the clause); ; Acts 1:11; Romans 11:24; 1 Timothy 1:18; Hebrews 7:1; Hebrews 8:10; (1 John 4:21); Revelation 19:9; Revelation 20:14; Revelation 21:5; Revelation 22:6. etc.; τοῦτο τό παιδίον, such a little child as ye see here, Luke 9:48; cf. Bornemann at the passage (who takes τοῦτο thus as representing the class, ‘this and the like;’ but cf. Meyer (edited by Weiss) at the passage).
b. so that the noun stands between the article and the demonstrative (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 548 (510)); as, οἱ λίθοι οὗτοι, the stones which ye see lying near, Matthew 3:9; Matthew 4:3; add, Matthew 5:19; Matthew 7:24 (L Tr WH brackets τούτους), (Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading αὐτῆς); Matthew 10:23, etc.; Mark 12:16; Mark 13:30; Luke 11:31; Luke 23:47; John 4:13, 21; John 7:49; John 11:9; John 18:29; Acts 6:13; Acts 19:26; Romans 15:28; 1 Corinthians 1:20; 1 Corinthians 2:6; 1 Corinthians 11:26; 2 Corinthians 4:1, 7; 2 Corinthians 8:6; 2 Corinthians 11:10; 2 Corinthians 12:13; Ephesians 3:8; Ephesians 5:32; 2 Timothy 2:19; Revelation 2:24, and very often — (which construction is far more frequent with Paul than the other (see Winer’s Grammar, as above)); it is added to a noun which has another adjective, ἡ χήρα ἡ πτωχή αὕτη, Luke 21:3; πάντα τά ῤήματα ταῦτα, Luke 2:19, 51 ((T WH L marginal reading omit; L text Tr marginal reading brackets ταῦτα); ἀπό τῆς γενεάς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης, Acts 2:40).
c. Passages in which the reading varies between οὗτος ὁ and ὁ … οὗτος: viz. οὗτος ὁ, Mark 14:30 L text T Tr WH; John 4:20 R L marginal reading; John 6:60 R G; John 7:36 R G; John 9:24 L WH Tr marginal reading; John 21:23 L T Tr WH. ὁ … οὗτος, Mark 14:30 R G L marginal reading; John 4:20 G L text T Tr WH; John 6:60 L T Tr WH; John vii 36 L T Tr WH; John 9:24 G T Tr text; John 21:23 R G; etc.
d. with anarthrous nouns, especially numerical specifications (Winer’s Grammar, § 37, 5 N. 1): τρίτον τοῦτο, this third time, 2 Corinthians 13:1; τοῦτο τρίτον, John 21:14 (Judges 16:15; δεύτερον τοῦτο, Genesis 27:36; τοῦτο δέκατον, Numbers 14:22; τέταρτον τοῦτο, Herodotus 5, 76). (The passages which follow, although introduced here by Prof. Grimm, are (with the exception of Acts 1:5) clearly instances of the predicative use of οὗτος; cf. Winers Grammar, 110 (105) note; Buttmann, § 127, 31; Rost § 98, 3 A.
c. α. following): τοῦτο πάλιν δεύτερον σημεῖον ἐποίησεν, John 4:54; τρίτην ταύτην ἡμέραν ἄγει, this is the third day that Israel is passing (but see ἄγω, 3), Luke 24:21 (κεῖμαι τριακοστην ταύτην ἡμέραν, this is now the thirtieth day that I lie (unburied), Lucian, dial. mort. 13, 3); οὐ μετά πολλάς ταύτας ἡμέρας (see μετά, II. 2 b. (Winers Grammar, 161 (152); Buttmann, § 127, 4)), Acts 1:5; οὗτος μήν ἕκτος ἐστιν αὐτῇ, this is the sixth month with her etc. Luke 1:36; αὕτη ἀπογραφή πρώτη ἐγένετο, Luke 2:2 L (T) Tr WH; ταύτην ἐποίησεν ἀρχήν τῶν σημείων, John 2:11 L T Tr WH.

Question 11

τίς, τί

Answer 11

who, what, which, why?

Who? What?, Mt. 3:7; 5:13; 19:27; equivalent to πότερος, Whether? which of two things? Mt. 9:5; Mk. 2:9; Phil. 1:22; Why? Mt. 8:26; 9:11, 14; τι ὅτι, Why is it that? Mk. 2:16; Jn. 14:22; What? as an emphatic interrogative, Acts 26:8; τι, How very! Mt. 7:14; in indirect question, Mt. 10:11

τίς, neuter τί, genitive τίνος, interrogative pronoun (from Homer down);

1. who, which, what? the Sept. τίς for מִי, τί for מָה;
   a. used adjectivally, in a direct question: τίς βασιλεύς, Luke 14:31; τίς γυνή, Luke 15:8; τί περισσόν, Matthew 5:47; τί σημεῖον, John 2:18, and many other passages. in an indirect question, 1 Thessalonians 4:2, etc.; τινα ἤ ποῖον καιρόν, 1 Peter 1:11; used instead of a predicate in a direct question, τίς (namely, ἐστιν) ἡ αἰτία, Acts 10:21; τίς καί ποταπή ἡ γυνή, Luke 7:39; add, Romans 3:1; 1 Corinthians 9:18, etc.; neuter, Matthew 24:3; Mark 5:9; in an indirect question with the optative, Luke 8:9; τίς followed by ἄν, John 13:24 R G; Acts 21:33 (R G); τί with the optative, Luke 15:26 (Tr WH add ἄν, so L brackets); Luke 18:36 (L brackets Tr brackets WH marginal reading add ἄν); with the indicative, Ephesians 1:18;
   b. used alone or Substantively: in a direct question, τίς ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυγεῖν; Matthew 3:7; Luke 3:7; Revelation 18:18, etc.; τίνος, Matthew 22:20, 28; Mark 12:10; τίνι, Luke 13:18; τινα, John 18:4, 7; τί θέλετε μοι δοῦναι; Matthew 26:15; τί in an indirect question, followed by the indicative, Matthew 6:3; John 13:12; 1 Corinthians 14:16; Revelation 2:7, 11, 17, and very often; followed by the aorist subjunctive, Matthew 6:25; Luke 12:11, etc.; followed by the optative with ἄν, Luke 1:62; Luke 6:11, etc. Emphatic words get prominence by being placed before the pronoun (Buttmann, § 151, 16): ὑμεῖς δέ τινα με λέγετε εἶναι, Matthew 16:15; Mark 8:29; Luke 9:20; καί ἡμεῖς τί ποιήσομεν (or ποιήσωμεν), Luke 3:14; οὗτος δέ τί, John 21:21 (cf.
   e. β.); add, John 1:19; John 8:5; John 9:17; Acts 19:15; Romans 9:19b (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 274 (257)),; ; Ephesians 4:9; James 4:12; examples from Greek writings are given in Passow, p. 1908b; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, B. I. 1 b.). A question is often asked by τίς as the leading word, when the answer expected is no one: Acts 8:33; Romans 7:24; Romans 8:33; Romans 9:19; Romans 10:16; Romans 11:34; 1 Corinthians 9:7; 2 Corinthians 11:29; Hebrews 1:5, 13. τίς εἰ μή, who … save (or but) (i. e. no one but), Mark 2:7; Luke 5:21; Romans 11:15; 1 Corinthians 2:11; Hebrews 3:18; 1 John 2:22; 1 John 5:5.
   c. two questions are blended into one: τίς τί ἄρῃ, what each should take, Mark 15:24; τίς τί διεπραγματεύσατο, Luke 19:15 (not Tr WH); ἐγώ δέ τίς ἤμην δυνατός κωλῦσαι τόν Θεόν; who was I? was I able to withstand God? Acts 11:17; cf. Winers Grammar, § 66, 5, 3; Passow, p. 1909{a}; Ast, Platonic Lexicon, iii., p. 394; Franz V. Fritzsche, Index ad Lucian, dial. deor., p. 164; the same construction occurs in Latin writings; cf. Ramshorn, Latin Gram., p. 567. τίς is joined with conjunctions: καί τίς, Mark 10:26; Luke 10:29; Luke 18:26; Revelation 6:17 (see καί, I. 2 g.); τίς ἄρα, see ἄρα, 1; τίς οὖν, Luke 10:36 (here T WH omit; L Tr brackets οὖν); 1 Corinthians 9:18. τίς with a partitive genitive: Matthew 22:28; Mark 12:23; Luke 10:36; Acts 7:52; Hebrews 1:5, 13; with ἐκ and a genitive of the class, Matthew 6:27; Luke 14:28; John 8:46; in an indirect question with the optative, Luke 22:23 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 41 b. 4 c.); with ἄν added, Luke 9:46.
   d. in indirect questions the neuter article is sometimes placed before the pronouns τίς and τί; see ὁ, II. 10 a. e. Respecting the neuter τί the following particulars may be noted: α. τί οὗτοι σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν; a condensed expression for τί τοῦτο ἐστιν, ὁ οὗτοι σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν; Matthew 26:62; Mark 14:60 (Buttmann, 251 (216) explains this expression differently); also τί τοῦτο ἀκούω περί σου; ((R. V.)) what is this (that) I hear of thee? (unless preference be given to the rendering, ‘why do I hear this of thee’ (see under β. below)), Luke 16:2; cf. Bornemann at the passage; (Winer’s Grammar, § 66, 5, 3). β. τί πρός ἡμᾶς; namely, ἐστιν, what is that to us? (Winers Grammar, 586 (545); Buttmann, 138 (121)), Matthew 27:4; John 21:22; τί ἐμοί καί σοι; see ἐγώ, 4; τί μοι etc. what have I to do with etc. 1 Corinthians 5:12; τί σοι or ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; (what thinkest thou etc.), Matthew 17:25; Matthew 22:17, 42; Matthew 26:66; John 11:56 (here before ὅτι supply in thought δοκεῖ ὑμῖν, to introduce a second question (R. V. What think ye? That he will not come etc.)). τί θέλεις; and τί θέλετε; followed by a subjunctive, our what wilt thou (that) I should etc.: Matthew 20:32 (here Lachmann brackets inserts ἵνα); Mark 10:51; Mark 15:12 (WH omits; Tr brackets θέλετε); Luke 18:41; 1 Corinthians 4:21; τί with the deliberative subjunctive: Matthew 6:31; Matthew 27:22; Mark 4:30 (here L marginal reading T Tr text WH πῶς); Luke 12:17; Luke 13:18; John 12:27; τί followed by a future: Acts 4:16 (where Lachmann’s stereotyped edition; T Tr WH ποιήσωμεν); 1 Corinthians 15:29; τί (namely, ἐστιν (Buttmann, 358 (307); Winer’s Grammar, § 64, 2 a.)) ὅτι etc., how is it that, etc. i. e. why etc., Mark 2:16 R G L; Luke 2:49; Acts 5:4, 9; τί γέγονεν, ὅτι etc. (R. V. what is come to pass that etc.), John 14:22; οὗτος δέ τί (namely, ἔσται or γενήσεται (Winers Grammar, 586 (546); Buttmann, 394 (338))), what will be his lot? John 21:21 (cf. Acts 12:18 τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο; Xenophon, Hell. 2, 3, 17 τί ἐσοιτο ἡ πολιτεία). τί equivalent to διά τί, why? wherefore? (Matthiae, § 488,8; Krüger, § 46, 3 Anm. 4; (Winer’s Grammar, § 21,3 N. 2)): Matthew 6:28; Matthew 7:3; Mark 2:7; Mark 11:3; Luke 2:48; Luke 6:41; Luke 12:57; Luke 24:38; John 7:19; John 18:23; Acts 14:15; Acts 26:8; Romans 3:7; Romans 9:19; 1 Corinthians 4:7; 1 Corinthians 10:30; 1 Corinthians 15:29; Galatians 3:19; Galatians 5:11; Colossians 2:20, and often. ἵνα τί or ἱνατί, see under the word, p. 305a. διά τί (or διατί (see διά, B. II. 2 a., p. 134b)), why? wherefore? Matthew 9:11, 14; Matthew 13:10; Mark 7:5; Mark 11:31; Luke 19:23, 31; John 7:45; John 13:37; Acts 5:3; 1 Corinthians 6:7; 2 Corinthians 11:11; Revelation 17:7, and often. εἰς τί, to what? to what end? to what purpose? Matthew 14:31; Matthew 26:8; Mark 14:4; Mark 15:34 (Wis. 4:17; Sir. 39:21). τί οὖν, etc. why then, etc.: Matthew 17:10; Matthew 19:7; Matthew 27:22; Mark 12:9; Luke 20:15; John 1:25; see also in οὖν, b. α.; τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, see ibid. τί γάρ; see γάρ, II. 5. γ. Hebraistically for מָה, how, how greatly, how much, with adjectives and verbs in exclamations (Winers Grammar, § 21 N. 3; cf. Buttmann, 254 (218)): Matthew 7:14 G L Tr; Luke 12:49 (on this see εἰ, I. 4 at the end), (Psalm 3:2; 2 Samuel 6:20; Song of Solomon 1:10; τί πολύ τό ἀγαθόν σου; Symm. Psalm 30:19).
2. equivalent to πότερος, ποτερα, πότερον, whether of two, which of the two: Matthew 21:31; Matthew 23:17 (here L τί; see below); ; Luke 22:27; neuter τί, Matthew 9:5; ( Lachmann, ); Mark 2:9; Luke 5:23; Philippians 1:22; cf. Ast, Platonic Lexicon, iii., p. 394 Matthiae, § 488, 4; Winer’s Grammar, 169 (159).
3. equivalent to ποῖος, ποίᾳ, ποῖον, of what sort, what (kind): Mark 1:27; Mark 6:2; Luke 4:36; Luke 8:9; Luke 24:17; John 7:36; Acts 17:19; 1 Corinthians 15:2; Ephesians 1:18f. Cf. Hermann on Viger, p. 731.
4. By a somewhat inaccurate usage, yet one not unknown to Greek writings, it is put for the relatives ὅς and ὅστις: thus, τινα (L T Tr WH τί) με ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι, οὐκ εἰμί ἐγώ (where one would expect ὅν). Acts 13:25; δοθήσεται ὑμῖν, τί λαλήσετε (λαλήσητε T Tr WH; L brackets the clausel, Matthew 10:19; ἑτοίμασον, τί δειπνήσω, Luke 17:8; (οἶδα τινας ἐξελεξάμην, John 13:18 T Tr text WH); especially after ἔχειν (as in the Greek writings): οὐκ ἔχουσι, τί φάγωσιν, Matthew 15:32; Mark 6:36; Mark 8:1f; cf. Winers Grammar, § 25, 1; Buttmann, 251 (216); on the distinction between the Latinhabeo quid and habeo quod cf. Ramshorn, Latin Gram., p. 565f.

Question 12

ὡς

Answer 12

as, that, how, about

as, like, even as, etc.

ὡς: —

Summary:

as ADVERB of Manner. ὧς and ὥς (with accent), so, thus. ὡς (without accent) of the Relat. Pron. ὅς, as. ὡς Relat. and Interrog., how. ὡς temporal, when. ὡς Local, where, ὡς,

as CONJUNCTION. various usages. ADVERB of Manner: ὥς, Demonstr., = οὕτως, so, thus, freq. in Hom., Il. 1.33, al.; ὢς εἶπ’ Sapph. Supp. 20 a. 11 (Epic style); in Ion. Prose, Hdt. 3.13, al.; rare in Att., and almost confined to certain phrases, v. infr. 2, 3; ὥς simply = οὕτως, A. Ag. 930, Th. 3.37, Pl. Prt. 338a; ἀλλ’ ὣς γενέσθω E. Hec. 888, al.

2. καὶ ὧς even so, nevertheless, Il. 1.116, al.; οὐδ’ ὧς not even so, 7.263, Od. 1.6, al., Hdt. 6.76; οὐδέ κεν ὧς Il. 9.386: the phrases καὶ ὧς, οὐδ’ ὧς, μηδ’ ὧς, are used in Trag. and Att., S. Ant. 1042, Th. 1.74, 7.74; also later, PCair.Zen. 19.10 (iii B. C., unaccented), UPZ 146.40 (ii B. C.), GDI 1832.11 (Delph., ii B. C.), IG 22.850.17 (iii B. C.); κἂν ὧς, εἴπερ μέλει σοι, ἀπόστειλόν μοί τινα POxy. 120.11 (iv A. D.); δουλεύων καθὼς καὶ ὧς GDI 2160 (Delph., ii B. C.); Thess. καὶ οὗς IG 9(2).234.1 (iii B. C.); for this phrase the accentuation ὧς is prescribed by Hdn.Gr.2.932, al., cf. A.D. Synt. 307.16, and is found in good Mss. of Homer; for the remaining uses under this head (Aa. 1, 3, 4) the accentuation ὥς is prescribed by the same grammarians.
3. in Comparisons, ὥς.., ὡς.., so.. as.., etc.; and reversely ὡς.., ὣς.., as.. so, Il. 1.512, 14.265, etc.; in Att., Pl. R. 530d; also ὥς τε.. ὣς.., as.. thus.., h.Cer. 174 - 6, E. Ba. 1066 - 8; οἷα.. ὥς Id. El. 151 - 5; ὥσπερ.., ὣς δὲ.. (in apodosi) Pl. Prt. 326d.
4. thus, for instance, Od. 5.129, h.Ven. 218; ὥς shd. be accented in Od. 5.121, 125. ὡς, Relat., as, Hom., etc.; prop. relat. to a demonstr. Adv., which is freq. omitted, κινήθη δ’ ἀγορὴ ὡς κύματα μακρὰ θαλάσσης, i. e. οὕτως, ὡς.., Il. 2.144 (φὴ Zenod.): it is relat. not only to the regular demonstr. Advs. ὥς (ὧς), τώς, ὧδε, οὕτως, αὕτως, but also to ταύτῃ, Pl. R. 365d, etc. We find a collat. Dor. form ὥ (q. v.); cf. ὥτε.

Usage:

I in similes, freq. in Hom., Il. 5.161, al.; longer similes are commonly introduced by ὡς ὅτε, ὡς δ’ ὅτε, ἤριπε δ’, ὡς ὅτε πύργος [ἤριπε] 4.462: ἤριπε δ’, ὡς ὅτε τις δρῦς ἤριπε 13.389, cf. 2.394; so later, Emp. 84.1, etc.; ὡς ὅτε θαητὸν μέγαρον, πάξομεν Pi. O. 6.2: ὡς ὅτε is rare in short similes, Od. 11.368: ὡς is folld. by indic. pres., Il. 9.4, 16.364: also by aor., 3.33 sq., 4.275, 16.823, al.; also by subj. pres. or aor., 5.161, 10.183, 485, 13.334 (sts. ὡς δ’ ὅτ’ ἄν, 11.269, 17.520); cf. ὥστε A: — the Verb is sts. omitted with ὡς, but may be supplied from the context, ἐνδούπησε πεσοῦσ’, ὡς εἰναλίη κήξ (sc. πίπτει) Od. 15.479, cf. 6.20; θεὸς δ’ ὣς τίετο δήμῳ Il. 5.78; οἱ δὲ φέβοντο.., βόες ὣς ἀγελαῖαι Od. 22.299: where ὡς follows the noun to which it refers, it takes the accent; so in Com., Ἀριστόδημος ὥς Cratin. 151, cf. Eub. 75.6; v. infr. H.

2. like as, just as, ὡς οὗτος κατὰ τέκν’ ἔφαγε.., ὣς ἡμεῖς κτλ. Il. 2.326, v. supr. Aa. 3.
3. sts. in the sense as much as or according as, ἑλὼν κρέας ὥς (i. e. ὅσον) οἱ χεῖρες ἐχάνδανον Od. 17.344; ὦκα δὲ μητρὶ ἔννεπον ὡς (i. e. ὅσα) εἶδόν τε καὶ ἔκλυον h.Cer. 172; τῶν πάντων οὐ τόσσον ὀδύρομαι.. ὡς ἑνός Od. 4.105; τόσον.. ὡς Il. 4.130; so in Trag., σοὶ θεοὶ πόροιεν ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω S. OC 1124; ὡς ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔστιν ὑμῶν ὅστις ἐξ ἴσου νοσεῖ Id. OT 60; in Prose, ὡς δύναται as much as he can, Democr. 278; τὸ ῥῆμα μέμνημαι ὡς εἶπε Aeschin. 3.72; ὡς μή = ὅσον μή, νέμεν ὅτι ἃν (= ἂν) βόλητοι ὡς μὴ ἰν τοῖ περιχώροι IG 5(2).3.9 (Tegea, iv B. C.); cf. Ab. 11.2 infr.
4. sts. after Comp., compared with, hence than, μᾶλλον πρέπει οὕτως ὡς.. Pl. Ap. 36d; ἅ γε μείζω πόνον παρέχει.. οὐκ ἂν ῥᾳδίως οὐδὲ πολλὰ ἂν εὕροις ὡς τοῦτο Id. R. 526c; οὐδενὸς μᾶλλον φροντίζειν ὡς.. Plb. 3.12.5, cf. 7.4.5, 11.2.9, Plu. Cor. 36: μᾶσσον ὡς is dub. in A. Pr. 629, and [ἢ] shd. perh. be inserted in Lys. 7.12,31; cf. ὥσπερ IV.

II with Adverbial clauses:

1 parenthetically, in qualifying clauses, ὡς ἔοικε, etc., Pl. Smp. 176c, etc.: in these cases γε or γοῦν is freq. added, ὡς γοῦν ὁ λόγος σημαίνει as at any rate the argument shows, Id. R. 334a; in some phrases c. inf., v. infr. B. 11.3. An anacoluthon sts. occurs by the Verb of the principal clause being made dependent on the parenthetic Verb, ὡς δὲ Σκύθαι λέγουσι, νεώτατον ἁπάντων ἐθνέων εἶναι (for ἦν) τὸ σφέτερον Hdt. 4.5, cf. 1.65; ὡς ἐγὼ ἤκουσα, εἶναι αὐτόν Id. 4.76; ὡς γὰρ.. ἤκουσά τινος, ὅτι.. X. An. 6.4.18 codd.; ἁνὴρ ὅδ’ ὡς ἔοικεν οὐ νεμεῖν (for οὐ νεμεῖ, ὡς ἔοικε), S. Tr. 1238.

2. in elliptical phrases, so far as.. (cf. supr. Ab. 1.3) ὡς ἐμοί Id. Aj. 395 (lyr.); so ὥς γε ἐμοὶ κριτῇ Ael. VH 2.41 and ὥς γ’ ἐμοὶ χρῆσθαι κριτῇ E. Alc. 801; ὡς ἐμῇ δόξῃ X. Vect. 5.2; ὡς ἀπ’ ὀμμάτων (sc. εἰκάσαι) to judge by eyesight, S. OC 15: esp. in such phrases as οὐκέτι πολλὸν χωρίον, ὡς εἶναι Αἰγύπτου Hdt. 2.8; οὐδὲ ἀδύνατος, ὡς Αακεδαιμόνιος for a Lacedaemonian, Th. 4.84, cf. D.H. 10.31; ὡς ἀνθρώποις Alcmaeon 1; φρονεῖ.. ὡς γυνὴ μέγα for a woman, S. OT 1078; πιστός, ὡς νομεύς, ἀνήρ ib. 1118; μακρὰν ὡς γέροντι.. ὁδόν Id. OC 20, cf. 385, Ant. 62, etc.; ὡπλισμένοι ὡς ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσιν ἱκανῶς X. An. 4.3.31; also with ἄν, μεγάλα ἐκτήσατο χρήματα, ὡς ἂν εἶναι Ῥοδῶπιν Hdt. 2.135 codd. (ἂν secl. Krüger, Ῥοδώπιος cj. Valck.): — for ὡς εἰπεῖν and the like, v. infr. B. 11.3.
3. ὡς attached to the object of the Verb, as, ἑωυτὸν ὡς ἐχθρὸν λυπέει Democr. 88; ἔλαβεν ἀμφοτέρους ὡς φίλους ἤδη X. Cyr. 3.2.25; ἐν οἰκήματι ᾧ ὡς ταμιείῳ ἐχρῆτο Pl. Prt. 315d. — For the similar usage of ὡς with Participles and Prepositions, v. infr. c.

III with Adverbs: with the Posit., ὡς ἀληθῶς truly, Pl. Phdr. 234e (cf. ἀληθής 111.1b: as if Adv. of τὸ ἀληθές) ; ὡς ἑτέρως in the other way, ib. 276c, D. 18.212 (Adv. of ὁ ἕτερος; v. ἕτερος v. 2) (v. infr. D. 1.1); ὡς ἠπίως, ὡς ἐτητύμως, S. El. 1438 (lyr.), 1452; ὡς ὁμοίως SIG 708.34 (Istropolis, ii B. C.), LXX 4 Maccabees 5:21; 4 Maccabees 5:1 Enoch 5.3, IG 7.2725.16 (Acraeph., ii A. D.); ὡς ἐναλλάξ Vett.Val. 215.9, 340.2; ὡς παντελῶς Id. 184.26; ὡς ἄλλως Isa 7.27, D. 6.32; ὡς ἐνδεχομένως PPetr. 2p.53 (iii B. C.); in ὣς αὔτως (v. ὡσαύτως) we have the Adv. of ὁ αὐτός, but the ὥς retains its demonstr. force, as does ὁ in Homer; ὡς ἀληθῶς, ὡς ὁμοίως, and ὡς παντελῶς may be modelled on ὣς αὔτως, with which they are nearly synonymous; so also ὡς ἑτέρως and ὡς ἐναλλάξ, which are contrasted with it. with Advbs. expressing anything extraordinary, θαυμαστῶς or θαυμασίως ὡς, ὑπερφυῶς ὡς, v. sub vocc.; ὡς is sts. separated by several words from its Adv., as θαυμαστῶς μοι εἶπες ὡς παρα’ δόξαν Pl. Phd. 95a; ὑπερφυῶς δὴ τὸ χρῆμα ὡς δύσγνωστον φαίνεται Id. Alc. 2.147c, cf. Phd. 99d. with the Sup., as much as can be, ὡς μάλιστα Th. 1.141, etc.: ὡς ῥᾷστα as easily as possible, A. Pr. 104; ὡς πλεῖστα Democr. 189; ὠς τάχιστα as quickly as possible, Alc. Supp. 4.15, etc.; more fully expressed, ὡς δυνατὸν ἄριστα Isoc. 12.153; ὡς ἐδύναντο ἀδηλότατα Th. 7.50; μαχομένους ὡς ἂν δυνώμεθα κράτιστα X. An. 3.2.6; ὡς οἷόν τε βελτιστον Pl. R. 403d; ὡς ἀνυστὸν κάλλιστα Diog. Apollon. 3: ὡς and ὅτι are sts. found together, where one is superfluous, ὡς ὅτι μάλιστα Pl. Lg. 908a; βοῦν ὡς ὅτι κάλλιστον IG 22.1028.17 (ii/i B. C.); v. infr. G. with Comp., ὡς θᾶσσον Plb. 1.66.1, 3.82.1. in the phrases ὡς τὸ πολύ, ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, Pl. R. 330c, 377b; ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον for the more part, commonly, ὡς ἐπὶ πλεῖστον Th. 2.34; ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πλῆθος, ὡς πλήθει, Pl. R. 364a, 389d; ὡς τὸ ἐπίπαν Hdt. 7.50, etc.; ὡς τὰ πολλά Ael. NA 12.17.

2. with Adjs., Posit., ὑπερφυεῖ τινι.. ὡς μεγάλῃ βλάβῃ Pl. Grg. 477d. with Sup., ὡς ἄριστοι τὰς φύσεις Id. Ti. 18d; ὅπως ὡς βέλτισται ἔσονται Id. Grg. 503a; ὡς ὅτι βέλτιστον Id. Smp. 218d. separated from the Adj. by a Pr, ὡς ἐς ἐλάχιστον Th. 1.63, cf. D. 18.246; ὡς ἐν βραχυτάτοις Antipho 1.18; ὡς ἐν ἐχυρωτάτῳ ποιεῖσθαι X. Cyr. 1.6.26, etc. Relat. and Interrog., how, μερμήριζε.. ὡς Ἀχιλῆα τιμήσειε Il. 2.3, cf. Pl. R. 365a; ἐβουλεύοντο ὡς.. στήσονται Hdt. 3.84, etc.; οἷα δεῖ λέγειν καὶ ὥς Arist. EN 1128a1; ὡς πέπραται how, i. e. at what price the goods have been sold, PCair.Zen. 149 (iii B. C.); so οὐκ ἔσθ’ ὡς.. (for the more usu. ὅπως) nowise can it be that.., S. Ant. 750; οὐκ ἔσθ’ ὡς οὐ.., Id. Ph. 196 (anap., Porson for οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως ου) ; οἶσθ’ ὡς πόησον; by a mixture of constructions for ὡς χρὴ ποιῆσαι or ὡς ποιήσεις, Id. OT 543, cf. Hermipp. 43, Men. 916; οἶσθ’ ὡς μετεύξει is f.l. in E. Med. 600 (μέτευξαι Elmsley); similarly, οἶσθα.. ὡς νῦν μὴ σφαλῇς S. OC 75.
3. ὡς ἂν ποήσῃς however (in whatever way) thou mayest act, Id. Aj. 1369, cf. Pl. Smp. 181a; αὐτῷ ὥς κεν ἅδῃ, τὼς ἔσσεται A.R. 3.350. Temporal, when, with past tenses of the indic., ἐνῶρτο γέλως.., ὡς ἴδον Il. 1.600: with opt., to express a repeated action, whenever, ὡς.. ἐς τὴν Μιλησίην ἀπίκοιτο Hdt. 1.17: rarely c. subj., to denote what happens under certain conditions, τῶν δὲ ὡς ἕκαστός οἱ μειχθῇ, διδοῖ δῶρον Id. 4.172, cf. 1.132; later, ὡς ἄν c. subj., when, PCair.Zen. 251 (iii B. C.), 1 Corinthians 11:34, etc.; ὥς κα Berl.Sitzb. 1927.170 (Cyrene); ὡς ἂν τάχιστα λάβῃς τὴν ἐπιστολήν as soon as.. PCair.Zen. 241.1 (iii B. C.), cf. LXX 1 Kings 9:13, John 3:8 : in orat. obliq. c. inf., Hdt. 1.86, 96, al.: expressed more forcibly by ὡς.. τάχιστα, some word or words being interposed, ὡς γὰρ ἐπετρόπευσε τάχιστα as soon as ever.., Id. 1.65; ὡς δὲ ἀφίκετο τάχιστα X. Cyr. 1.3.2: less freq. ὡς τάχιστα stand together, Aeschin. 2.22: but this usage must be distd. from signf. Ab.111.1c: folld. by demonstr., ὡς εἶδ’, ὣς ἀνεπᾶλτο Il. 20.424; ὡς ἴδεν, ὥς μιν ἔρως πυκινὰς φρένας ἀμφεκάλυψεν 14.294; also ὡς.., ἔπειτα 3.396; Κρονίδης ὥς μιν φράσαθ’ ὣς ἐόλητο θυμὸν ἀνωΐστοισιν ὑποδμηθεὶς βελέεσσι Κύπριδος Mosch. 2.74; the second ὣς is repeated, ἁ δ’ Ἀταλάντα ὡς ἴδεν, ὣς ἐμάνη, ὣς ἐς βαθὺν ἅλατ’ ἔρωτα Theoc. 3.41 (ὣς = εὐθέως, Sch.vet.), cf. 2.82; in Bion 1.40 the clauses with ὡς all belong to the protasIsa
4. ὡς appears to be f.l. for ἕως in ὡς ἂν αὑτὸς ἥλιος.. αἴρῃ S. Ph. 1330, ὡς ἂν ᾖς οἷόσπερ εἶ Id. Aj. 1117; cf. ὥσπερ 111.1: but in later Gr. = ἕως, while, ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε John 12:35-36; ὡς καιρὸν ἔχομεν Galatians 6:10, cf. Epigr.Gr. 646a5 (p.529); also until, τίθεται ἐπὶ ἀνθράκων ὡς ἀναξηρανθῇ PLeid.X. 89 B.; ἔα ἀφρίζειν τὴν πίσσαν ὡς οὗ ἐκλείπῃ ib.37B.; cf. EM 824.43 (conversely ἕως for ὡς final, v. ἕως (B) A. 1.4). Local, where, in dialects, Theoc. 1.13, 5.101, 103, IG 9(2).205.4 (Melitea, iii B. C.), SIG 685.63, al. (Cretan, ii B. C.), IG 12(1).736.5 (Camirus), GDI 5597.8 (Ephesus, iii B. C.).

ὡς as CONJUNCTION:

I with Substantive clauses, to express a fact, = ὅτι, that.

II with Final clauses, to express an end or purpose, = ἵνα, ὅπως, so that, in order that. III Consecutive, = ὥστε, so that. Causal, since, because. I with Substantive Clauses, with verbs of learning, saying, etc., that, expressing a fact, γνωτὸν.., ὡς ἤδη Τρώεσσιν ὀλέθρου πείρατ’ ἐφῆπται Il. 7.402, cf. Od. 3.194, etc.: in commands, προεῖπεν ὡς μηδεὶς κινήσοιτο X. HG 2.1.22: with Verbs of fear or anxiety, c. fut. indic., μηκέτ’ ἐκφοβοῦ, μητρῷον ὥς σε λῆμ’ ἀτιμάσει ποτέ S. El. 1427, cf. X. Cyr. 6.2.30; μὴ φοβοῦ ὡς ἀπορήσεις ib. 5.2.12, cf. D. 10.36; a sentence beginning with ὡς is sts., when interrupted, resumed by ὅτι, and vice versa, X. Cyr. 5.3.30, Pl. R. 470d, Hp.Ma. 281c; so ὡς with a finite Verb passes into the acc. and inf., Hdt. 1.70, 8.118: both constructions mixed in the same clause, ἐλογίζετο ὡς.. ἧττον ἂν αὐτοὺς ἐθέλειν.. X. Cyr. 8.1.25, cf. HG 3.4.27: after primary tenses (incl. historic pres.) ὡς is folld. by indic., after historic tenses by opt. (sts. by indic., both constructions in ὑπίσχοντο.. ἀμυνέειν, φράζοντες ὡς οὔ σφι περιοπτέη ἐστὶ ἡ Ἑλλὰς ἀπολλυμένη

ὡς (Treg. (by mistake) in Matthew 24:38 ὡς; cf. Winers Grammar, 462 (431); Chandler § 934, and references in Ebeling, Lex. Homer, under the word, p. 494b bottom), an adverbial form of the relative pronoun ὅς, ἡ, ὁ which is used in comparison, as, like as, even as, according as, in the same manner as, etc. (German wie); but it also assumes the nature of a conjunction, of time, of purpose, and of consequence. On its use in the Greek writings cf. Klotz ad Devar. 2:2, chapter xxxv., p. 756ff; (Liddell and Scott, under the word).

I. ὡς as an adverb of comparison;
1. It answers to some demonstrative word (οὕτως, or the like), either in the same clause or in another member of the same sentence (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 53, 5): οὕτως … ὡς, John 7:46 (L WH omit; Tr brackets ὡς etc.); 1 Corinthians 3:15; 1 Corinthians 4:1; 1 Corinthians 9:26; Ephesians 5:28, 33; James 2:12; οὕτως … ὡς ἐάν (T Tr WH omit ἐάν (cf. English as should a man cast etc.)) … βάλῃ, so etc. … as if etc. Mark 4:26; ὡς … οὕτως, Acts 8:32; Acts 23:11; 1 Corinthians 7:17; 2 Corinthians 11:3 (R G); 1 Thessalonians 5:2; ὡς ἄν (ἐάν) followed by subjunctive ((cf. ἄν, II. 2 a. at the end)) … οὕτως, 1 Thessalonians 2:7f; ὡς … οὕτω καί, Romans 5:15 (here WH brackets καί),18; 2 Corinthians 1:7 L T Tr WH; ; ὡς (T Tr WH καθώς) … κατά τά αὐτά (L G ταῦτα, Rec. ταῦτα), Luke 17:28-30; ἴσος … ὡς καί, Acts 11:17; sometimes in the second member of the sentence the demonstrative word (οὕτως, or the like) is omitted and must be supplied by the mind, as Matthew 8:13; Colossians 2:6; ὡς … καί (where οὕτω καί might have been expected (Winers Grammar, as above; Buttmann, § 149, 8 c.)), Matthew 6:10; Luke 11:2 (here G T Tr WH omit; L brackets the clause); Acts 7:51 (Lachmann καθώς); Galatians 1:9; Philippians 1:20 (see καί, II. 1 a.); to this construction must be referred also 2 Corinthians 13:2 ὡς παρών τό δεύτερον, καί ἀπών νῦν, as when I was present the second time, so now being absent ((cf. p. 317a top); others render (cf. R. V. marginal reading) as if I were present the second time, even though I am now absent).
2. ὡς with the word or words forming the comparison is so subjoined to a preceding verb that οὕτως must be mentally inserted before the same. When thus used ὡς refers a. to the manner (`form’) of the action expressed by the finite verb, and is equivalent to in the same manner as, after the fashion of; it is joined in this way to the subject (nominative) of the verb: Matthew 6:29; Matthew 7:29; Matthew 13:43; 1 Thessalonians 2:11; 2 Peter 2:12; Jude 1:10, etc.; to an accusative governed by the verb: as ἀγαπᾶν τόν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν, Matthew 19:19; Matthew 22:39; Mark 12:31, 33; Luke 10:27; Romans 13:9; Galatians 5:14; James 2:8; add, Philemon 1:17; Galatians 4:14; (here many (cf. R. V. marginal reading) would bring in also Acts 3:22; Acts 7:37 (cf.
c. below)); or to another oblique case: as Philippians 2:22; to a substantive, with a preposition: as ὡς ἐν κρύπτω, John 7:10 (Tdf. omits ὡς); ὡς ἐν ἡμέρα σφαγῆς, James 5:5 (R G; others omit ὡς); ὡς διά ξηρᾶς, Hebrews 11:29; add, Matthew 26:55; Mark 14:48; Luke 22:52; Romans 13:13; Hebrews 3:8; when joined to a nominative or an accusative it can be rendered like, (like) as (Latininstar, veluti): Matthew 10:16; Luke 21:35; Luke 22:31; 1 Corinthians 3:10; 1 Thessalonians 5:4; 2 Timothy 2:17; James 1:10; 1 Peter 5:8; 2 Peter 3:10; καλεῖν τά μή ὄντα ὡς ὄντα (see καλέω, 1 b. β. under the end), Romans 4:17.
b. ὡς joined to a verb makes reference to the ‘substance’ of the act expressed by the verb, i. e. the action designated by the verb is itself said to be done ὡς, in like manner (just) as, something else: John 15:6 (for τό βάλλεσθαι ἔξω is itself the very thing which is declared to happen (i. e. the unfruitful disciple is ‘cast forth’ just as the severed branch is ‘cast forth’)); 2 Corinthians 3:1 (Lachmann ὡς (περ)); generally, however, the phrase ὡς καί is employed (Winer’s Grammar, § 53, 5), 1 Corinthians 9:5; 1 Corinthians 16:10 (here WH text omits καί); Ephesians 2:3; 1 Thessalonians 5:6 (L T Tr WH omit καί); 2 Timothy 3:9; Hebrews 3:2; 2 Peter 3:16.
c. ὡς makes reference to similarity or equality, in such expressions as εἶναι ὡς τινα, i. e. ‘to be like’ or ‘equal to’ one, Matthew 22:30; Matthew 28:3; Mark 6:34; Mark 12:25; Luke 6:40; Luke 11:44; Luke 18:11; Luke 22:26; Romans 9:27; 1 Corinthians 7:7, 29-31; 2 Corinthians 2:17; 1 Peter 1:24; 2 Peter 3:8; ἵνα μή ὡς κατ’ ἀνάγκην τό ἀγαθο σου ἤ, that thy benefaction may not be like something extorted by force, Philemon 1:14; γίνεσθαι ὡς τινα, Matthew 10:25; Matthew 18:3; Luke 22:26; Romans 9:29; 1 Corinthians 4:13; 1 Corinthians 9:20-22 (in 9:22 T Tr WH omit; L Tr marginal reading brackets ὡς); Galatians 4:12; μένειν ὡς τινα, 1 Corinthians 7:8; ποιεῖν τινα ὡς τινα, Luke 15:19; passages in which ἐστιν, ἦν, ὤν (or ὁ ὤν) is left to be supplied by the reader: as ἡ φωνή αὐτοῦ ὡς φωνή ὑδατον, Revelation 1:15; ὀφθαλμούς, namely, ὄντας, Revelation 2:18; πίστιν namely, οὖσαν, Matthew 17:20; Luke 17:6; add, Revelation 4:7; Revelation 9:2, 5, 7-9, 17; Revelation 10:1; Revelation 12:15; Revelation 13:2; Revelation 14:2; Revelation 20:8; Revelation 21:21; Acts 3:22; Acts 7:37 (many (cf. R. V. marginal reading) refer these last two passages to a. above); , etc.; before ὡς one must sometimes supply τί, ‘something like’ or ‘having the appearance of’ this or that: thus ὡς θάλασσα, i. e. something having the appearance of (R. V. as it were) a sea, Revelation 4:6 G L T Tr WH; (so in imitation of the Hebrew כְּ, cf. Deuteronomy 4:32; Daniel 10:18; cf. Gesenius, Thesaurus, p. 648b (Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word, 2)); passages where the comparison is added to some adjective: as, ὑγιής ὡς, Matthew 12:13; λευκά ὡς, Matthew 17:2; Mark 9:3 (R L); add, Hebrews 12:16; Revelation 1:14; Revelation 6:12; Revelation 8:10; Revelation 10:9; Revelation 21:2; Revelation 22:1.
d. ὡς so makes reference to the quality of a person, thing, or action, as to be equivalent to such as, exactly like, as it were. German als; and α. to a quality which really belongs to the person or thing: ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, Matthew 7:29; Mark 1:22; ὡς μονογενοῦς παρά πατρός, John 1:14; add ((L T Tr WH in Matthew 5:48; Matthew 6:5, 16)); Acts 17:22; Romans 6:13 (here L T Tr WH ὡσεί); ; 1 Corinthians 3:1; 1 Corinthians 7:25; 2 Corinthians 6:4; 2 Corinthians 11:16; Ephesians 5:1, 8, 15; Colossians 3:12; 1 Thessalonians 2:4; 1 Timothy 5:1; 2 Timothy 2:3; Titus 1:7; Philemon 1:9, 16 (where cf. Lightfoot); Hebrews 3:5; Hebrews 6:19; Hebrews 11:9; Hebrews 13:17; 1 Peter 1:14, 19; 1 Peter 2:2, 5, 11; 1 Peter 3:7; 1 Peter 4:10, 15, 19 (R G); 2 Peter 1:19; 2 John 1:5; James 2:12; Revelation 1:17; Revelation 5:6; Revelation 16:21; Revelation 17:12, etc.; ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως namely, τρέχων, as one who is not running etc. 1 Corinthians 9:26; concisely, ὡς ἐξ εἰλικρινείας and ἐκ Θεοῦ namely, λαλοῦντες, borrowed from the neighboring λαλοῦμεν, 2 Corinthians 2:17; τινα ὡς τινα or τί after verbs of esteeming, knowing, declaring, etc. (Winer’s Grammar, §§ 32, 4 b.; 59, 6): as, after λογίζειν, λογίζεσθαι, Romans 8:36; 1 Corinthians 4:1 (where οὕτως precedes); 2 Corinthians 10:2; ἡγεῖσθαι, 2 Thessalonians 3:15; ἔχειν, Matthew 14:5; Matthew 21:26, 46 (but here L T Tr WH read εἰς (cf. ἔχω, I. 1 f.)) (τινας ὡς Θεούς, Ev. Nicod. c. 5); ἀποδεικνύναι, 1 Corinthians 4:9; παραβάλλειν (or ὁμοιουν (which see)), Mark 4:31; διαβάλλειν, passive, Luke 16:1; ἐλέγχειν, passive, James 2:9; εὑρίσκειν, passive, Philippians 2:7 (8). β. to a quality which is supposed, pretended, reigned, assumed: ὡς ἁμαρτωλός κρίνομαι, Romans 3:7; ὡς πονηρόν, Luke 6:22; add, 1 Corinthians 4:7; 1 Corinthians 8:7; 2 Corinthians 6:8-10; 2 Corinthians 11:15; 2 Corinthians 13:7; 1 Peter 2:12; frequently it can be rendered as if, as though, Acts 3:12; Acts 23:15, 20; Acts 27:30; 1 Corinthians 5:3; 2 Corinthians 10:14; 2 Corinthians 11:17; Colossians 2:20; Hebrews 11:27; Hebrews 13:3; ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δἰ ἡμῶν, namely, γεγραμμενης, 2 Thessalonians 2:2.
3. ὡς with the genitive absolute presents the matter spoken of — either as the belief of the writer, 2 Corinthians 5:20; 2 Peter 1:3; or as someone’s erroneous opinion: 1 Corinthians 4:18; 1 Peter 4:12; cf. Winers Grammar, § 65, 9; (Buttmann, § 145, 7; especially § 144, 22). In general, by the use of ὡς the matter spoken of is presented — either as a mere matter of opinion: as in ὡς ἐξ ἔργων namely, ὁ Ἰσραήλ νόμον δικαιοσύνης ἐδίωξεν, Romans 9:32 (where it marks the imaginary character of the help the Israelites relied on, they thought to attain righteousness in that way (A. V. as it were by works)); — or as a purpose: πορεύεσθαι ὡς ἐπί θάλασσαν, that, as they intended, he might go to the sea, Acts 17:14, cf. Meyer at the passage; Winers Grammar, 617 (573f) (but L T Tr WH read ἕως, as far as to etc.); — or as merely the thought of the writer: Galatians 3:16; before ὅτι, 2 Corinthians 11:21; — or as the thought and pretence of others: also before ὅτι, 2 Thessalonians 2:2: cf. Winers Grammar, as above; (Buttmann, § 149, 3; on ὡς ὅτι in 2 Corinthians 5:19 (A. V. to wit) see Winers Grammar, and Buttmann’s Grammar, at the passages cited (cf. Esther 4:14; Josephus, contra Apion 1, 11, 1 and Müller’s note; Liddell and Scott, under the word, G. 2; Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word, 7)); ὡς ἄν, as if, as though, 2 Corinthians 10:9 (cf. Winers Grammar, 310 (291); but cf. Sophocles Lexicon, under the word, 1, and see ἄν, IV.).
4. ὡς has its own verb, with which it forms a complete sentence;
a. ὡς with a finite verb is added by way of illustration, and is to be translated as, just as (Latinsicut, eo modo quo): Ephesians 6:20; Colossians 3:18; Colossians 4:4; 1 Peter 3:6; 2 Peter 2:1; 1 John 1:7; Revelation 2:28 () (this example is referred by some (cf. R. V. marginal reading) to 2 a. above); (here ὡς καί; the example seems to belong under 2 b. above). in phrases in which there is an appeal—either to the O. T. (ὡς γέγραπται), Mark 1:2 (here T Tr WH καθώς); ; Luke 3:4; Acts 13:33; or in general to the testimony of others, Acts 17:28; Acts 22:5; Acts 25:10; Romans 9:25; 1 Corinthians 10:7 R G (cf. ὥσπερ, b.). in phrases like ποιεῖν ὡς προσέταξεν or συνέταξεν, etc.: Matthew 1:24; Matthew 26:19; Matthew 28:15; Luke 14:22 (here T Tr text WH ὁ); Titus 1:5; likewise, Matthew 8:13; Matthew 15:28; Revelation 10:7; namely, γενηθήτω μοι, Matthew 26:39. in short parenthetic or inserted sentences: ὡς εἰώθει, Mark 10:1; ὡς ἐνομίζετο, Luke 3:23; ὡς λογίζομαι, 1 Peter 5:12; ὡς ὑπολαμβάνετε, Acts 2:15; ὡς λέγουσιν, Revelation 2:24; ὡς ἄν ἤγεσθε (R. V. howsoever ye might be led) utcunque agebamini (cf. Buttmann, § 139, 13; 383f (329); Winer’s Grammar, § 42, 3 a.), 1 Corinthians 12:2. ὡς serves to add an explanatory extension (and is rendered in A. V. how (that)): Acts 10:38; τήν … ὑπακοήν, ὡς etc. 2 Corinthians 7:15; τοῦ λόγου τοῦ κυρίου, ὡς εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Luke 22:61; τοῦ ῤήματος, ὡς ἔλεγεν, Acts 11:16 (Xenophon, Cyril 8, 2, 14; an. 1, 9, 11); cf. Bornemannt Schol. ad Luc., p. 141.
b. ὡς is used to present, in the form of a comparison, a motive which is urged upon one — as ἄφες ὑμῖν τά ὀφειλήματα ἡμῶν, ὡς καί ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν (R G ἀφίεμεν) κτλ. (for which Luke 11:4 gives καί γάρ αὐτοί ἀφίομεν), Matthew 6:12 — or which actuates one, as χάριν ἔχω τῷ Θεῷ … ὡς ἀδιαλεπτον ἔχω τήν περί σου μνείαν, 2 Timothy 1:3 (for the dear remembrance of Timothy moves Paul’s gratitude to God); (cf. John 19:33 (cf. II.
a. below)); in these examples ὡς has almost the force of a causal particle; cf. Klotz ad Devar. 2:2, p. 766; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, B. IV.; Winers Grammar, 448 (417)).
c. ὡς adds in a rather loose way something which serves to illustrate what precedes, and is equivalent to the case is as though (R. V. it is as when): Mark 13:34, where cf. Fritzsche, p. 587; unless one prefer, with Meyer, et al., to make it an instance of anantapodoton (cf. A. V. ‘For the Son of Man is as a man’ etc.); see ὥσπερ, a. at the end.
5. according as: Romans 12:3; 1 Corinthians 3:5; Revelation 22:12.
6. ὡς, like the German wie, after verbs of reading, narrating, testifying, and the like, introduces that which is read, narrated, etc.; hence, it is commonly said to be equivalent to ὅτι (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2, p. 765); but there is this difference between the two, that ὅτι expresses the thing itself, ὡς the mode or quality of the thing (hence, usually rendered how) (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 53, 9; (Meyer on Romans 1:9; cf. Liddell and Scott, under the word, B. I.)): thus after ἀναγινώσκειν, Mark 12:26 (where T Tr WH πῶς); Luke 6:4 (here Tr WH brackets ὡς; L text reads πῶς); μνησθῆναι, Luke 24:6 (L marginal reading ὅσα); θέασθαι, Luke 23:55; Ὑπομνῆσαι, Jude 1:5 (here ὅτι (not ὡς) is the particle), 7 (others regard ὡς here as introducing a confirmatory illustration of what precedes (A. V. even as etc.); cf. Huther, or Brückner’s DeWette, ad loc.); εἰδέναι, Acts 10:38; Romans 11:2; 1 Thessalonians 2:11; ἐπίστασθαί, Acts 10:28 (here many (cf. R. V. marginal reading) connect ὡς with the adjective immediately following (see 8 below)); ; ἀπαγγέλλειν, Luke 8:47; ἐξηγεῖσθαι, Luke 24:35; μάρτυς, Romans 1:9 (here others connect ὡς with the word which follows it (cf. 8 below)); Philippians 1:8.
7. ὡς before numerals denotes nearly, about: as, ὡς δισχίλιοι, Mark 5:13; add, Mark 8:9; Luke 2:37 (here L T Tr WH ἕως); ; John 1:39(40); (John 4:6 L T Tr WH); John 6:19 (here Lachmann ὡσεί); John 11:18; (John 19:39 G L T Tr WH); ; Acts 1:15 (Tdf. ὡσεί); John 5:7,(36 L T Tr WH); John 13:18 (yet not WH text); cf. καί, I. 2 f.), 20; John 19:34 (WH ὡσεί); Revelation 8:1 (כְּ, 1 Samuel 11:1; 1 Samuel 14:2, etc.); for examples from Greek writings see Passow, under the word, vol. ii., p. 2631b; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, E; Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word, 3).
8. ὡς is prefixed to adjectives and adverbs, and corresponds to the Latinquam, how, German wie (so from Homer down): ὡς ὡραῖοι, Romans 10:15; add, Romans 11:33; ὡς ὁσίως, 1 Thessalonians 2:10 (Psalm 72:1 ()); with a superlative, as much as can be: ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible (very often in secular authors), Acts 17:15; cf. Viger., Hermann edition, pp. 562, 850; Passow, 2:2, p. 2631b bottom; (Liddell and Scott, under Ab. III.).
II. ὡς as a particle of time;
a. as, when, since; Latinut, cum, (Winer’s Grammar, § 41 b. 3,1; § 53, 8): with the indicative, ὡς δέ ἐπορεύοντο, Matthew 28:8 (9); Mark 9:21 (Tr marginal reading ἐξ οὗ); Luke 1:23, 41, 44; Luke 2:15, 39; Luke 4:25; Luke 5:4; Luke 7:12; Luke 11:1; Luke 15:25; Luke 19:5, 29; Luke 22:66; Luke 23:26; Luke 24:32; John 2:9, 23; John 4:1, 40,( Tdf.); ; (cf. John 19:33 (see I. 4b. above)); ; Acts 1:10; Acts 5:24; Acts 7:23; Acts 8:36; Acts 9:23; Acts 10:7, 17, 25; Acts 13:25, 29 (Acts 13:18 WH text (see I. 7 above)); , (Homer, Iliad 1, 600; 2, 321; 3, 21; Herodotus 1, 65, 80; Xenophon, Cyril 1, 4, 4. 8. 20; often in the O. T. Apocrypha especially 1 Macc.; cf. Wahl, Clavis apocr. V. T., under the word, IV. e., p. 507f).
b. while, when (Latindum, quando): Luke 20:37; as long as, while, John ( Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading (cf. ἕως, I. 2)); ,(), L T Tr WH ((cf. ἕως, as above)); Luke 12:58; Galatians 6:10 (here A. V. as (so R. V. in Luke, the passage cited); T WH read the subjunctive (as we may have etc.); Meyer (on John 12:35; Galatians, the passage cited) everywhere denies the meaning while; but cf. Liddell and Scott, under the word, B. V. 2.; Lightfoot on Galatians, the passage cited).
c. ὡς ἄν, as soon as: with the subjunctive present Romans 15:24 (A. V. here whensoever); with the 2 aorist subjunctive having the force of the future perfect, 1 Corinthians 11:34 (R. V. whensoever); Philippians 2:23. (Cf. Buttmann, 232 (200); Winers Grammar, § 42, 5 a.; Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word 6.).
III. ὡς as a final particle (Latinut), in order that, in order to (cf. Glidersleeve in American Journ. of Philol. No. 16, p. 419f): followed by an infinitive ((cf. Buttmann, 244 (210); Winers Grammar, 318 (299); Krüger, § 65, 3, 4), Luke 9:52 L marginal reading WH); Acts 20:24 (3Macc. 1:2; 4 Macc. 14:1); ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, so to say (see εἶπον, 1 a.), Hebrews 7:9 (L marginal reading εἶπεν).
IV. ὡς as a consecutive particle, introducing a consequence, so that: so (according to the less frequent usage) with the indicative (Herodotus 1, 163; 2, 135; Winer’s Grammar, 462 (431)), Hebrews 3:11; Hebrews 4:3 (Hebrew אֲשֶׁר, Psalm 94:11 (); (but many interpretations question this sense with the indicative (the examples from Herodotus are not parallel), and render ὡς in Heb. the passages cited as (so R. V.)).

Question 13

ειδον εἶδον εἶδόν

Answer 13

I saw (an idol is something you can see)

Etymology[edit]
See εἴδομαι (eídomai).

Pronunciation[edit]
more ▼ 
IPA(key): /êː.don/ → /ˈi.ðon/ → /ˈi.ðon/
Verb[edit]
εἶδον • (eîdon)

to see, behold, perceive quotations ▼
(strengthened) to look at, observe quotations ▼
to see a person, to meet, speak with them quotations ▼
to see, experience, become acquainted with quotations ▼
to look at or towards quotations ▼
to see mentally, to perceive quotations ▼
to examine, investigate quotations ▼
Usage notes[edit]
All tenses besides the aorist are supplied by ὁράω (horáō) and ὄψομαι (ópsomai).

[edit]
εἴδομαι • (eídomai) (poetic)

to be seen, appear quotations ▼
(with infinitive) to appear, seem to do quotations ▼
(reflexive, with dative) to make oneself like quotations ▼
(intransitive) to be like, to look like quotations ▼
Usage notes[edit]
The aorist tense, εἶδον (eîdon, “I saw”), has a related but different meaning, and its second aorist middle form, εἰδόμην (eidómēn), contrasts with the first aorist middle of this verb, εἰσᾰ́μην (eisámēn).
The perfect tense, οἶδα (oîda, “I know”), functions as a present tense word with its own meaning.

Question 14

ἤ

Answer 14

or

either, or, than

ἤ

(A), also ἠέ (in signf. A. 11 ἤ (or ἠέ) folld. by ἦ (or ἦε), v. infr.), Conj. with two chief senses, Disj. (or) and Comp. (than).

DISJUNCTIVE,

1. or, ἐγὼ.. ἢ ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν Il. 2.231, cf. 397, 800, 4.142, 7.236, al.; θεόσυτος ἢ βρότειος ἢ κεκραμένη A. Pr. 116.
2. ἢ.. ἤ either.. or, ἢ νῦν δηθύνοντ’ ἢ ὕστερον αὖτις ἰόντα Il. 1.27, cf. 151, 5.484, etc.; so ἢ.. ἤτοι.. Pi. N. 6.4, Fr. 138; ἤτοι.. ἤ.. A. Ag. 662, S. Ant. 1182, Th. 2.40, etc. (in Classical Gr. the alternative introduced by ἤτοι is emphasized, later no distn. is implied, Romans 6:16; ἤτοι.. ἢ.. ἤ.. PTeb. 5.59 (ii B.C.)); ἤ repeated any number of times, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι ἢ τεὸν ἢ Αἴαντος ἰὼν γέρας ἢ Ὀδυσῆος Il. 1.138, cf. Od. 15.84, S. Ant. 707; ἤ is prob. wrongly accented in codd. of Il. 2.289, Od. 3.348, 19.109, v. ἦ Adv. 1.3: ἢ πόλις βροτός θ’ ὁμοίως A. Eu. 524 (lyr.) is exceptional.
3. or else, otherwise, εἰδέναι δεῖ περὶ οὗ ἂν ᾖ ἡ βουλή, ἢ παντὸς ἁμαρτάνειν ἀνάγκη Pl. Phdr. 237c; μή με λυπεῖτε, ἢ φεύξομ’ ἐκ τῆς οἰκίης Herod. 5.74; ζῶντα κακῶς λέγειν ἐκώλυσε.., ἢ τρεῖς δραχμὰς ἀποτίνειν ἔταξε Lex Sol. ap. Plu. Sol. 21, cf. 24, IG 12.94.10, Them. Or. 21.260a.

II in Questions or Deliberations in Disj. form(the accentuation is ἢ (ἠέ) folld. by ἦ (ἦε), Hdn. Gr. 2.24, al., A.D. Conj. 224.28):

1 Direct questions, introduced by ἢ (ἠέ), ἢ δολιχὴ νοῦσος ἦ Ἄρτεμις ἰοχέαιρα.. κατέπεφνεν; Od. 11.172; ἤ τι κατὰ πρῆξιν ἦ μαψιδίως ἀλάλησθε..; 3.72, cf. 1.408, 16.462, Il. 6.378, 15.735, 16.12, etc. without an introductory Particle, θεός νύ τις ἦ βροτός ἐσσι; art thou a goddess or a mortal? Od. 6.149, cf. 1.226, 4.314, 372, 643, 20.130, 21.194, Il. 10.63, 425, 534, 15.203: accented ἦ, Hdn.Gr. 2.145, al., but ἤ freq. in codd. of Hom. and always in codd. of later writers: ἤκουσας ἢ οὐκ ἤκουσας ἢ κωφῇ λέγω; A. Th. 202; ἄρτι δὲ ἥκεις ἢ πάλαι; Pl. Cri. 43a; κακουργεῖν δεῖ ἢ οὔ; ib. 49c; preceded by πότερον, πότερον δοκεῖ σοι κάκιον εἶναι, τὸ ἀδικεῖν ἢ τὸ ἀδικεῖσθαι; Id. Grg. 474c, etc.

2. Indirect questions, freq. epexegetic of a preceding question and identical in form with direct questions. εἴπ’ ἄγε,.. ἤ ῥ’ ἐθέλει.., ἦ ἀπέειπε.. Il. 9.674; ὄφρα δαῶμεν ἢ ἐτεὸν Κάλχας μαντεύεται ἦε καὶ οὐκί 2.300; διάνδιχα μερμήριξεν ἢ ὅ γε.. ἐναρίζοι ἦε χόλον παύσειεν 1.190; later with εἰ.. ἤ A. Ch. 890, Ag. 478, S. OC 80, etc.; πότερον or πότερα.. ἤ.. Id. Pers. 148, 352, Ag. 630, etc.; sts. εἴτε.. ἤ E. El. 897; ἢ.. εἴτε S. Aj. 177. without introductory Particle, οὐδέ τι οἶδα ζώει ὅ γ’ ἦ τέθνηκε Od. 11.464, cf. Il. 10.546, Od. 24.238.

COMPARATIVE,

1. than, as, after a Comp., Il. 11.162, etc.: after positive Adjs. which imply comparison, ἄλλος, ἕτερος ἤ.., S. OT 595, Tr. 835 (lyr.); ἐναντίος ἤ Pl. Grg. 481c; ἴδιόν τι πάσχειν πάθος ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι ibid.: after Advbs. or adverbial phrases, πλήν, πρίν, πρόσθεν, χωρίς (qq. v.), ἀλλά (v. ἀλλ’ ἤ) ; τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἤ.. Id. Cri. 44a (f.l. in Smp. 173a); ἐν τῷ πέμπτῳ καὶ δεκάτῳ ϝέτει ἀπὸ τῶ ποτεχεῖ ϝέτεος ἢ Ἀριστίων ἐφορεύει Tab.Heracl. 1.121; παρὰ δόξαν ἢ ὡς αὐτὸς κατεδόκεε Hdt. 1.79, cf. 8.4; διαφερόντως ἤ.. Pl. Phd. 85b; οὐδ’ ὅσον ἤ.. not so much as.., not more than.., Theoc. 9.21: after Verbs implying comparison, βούλεσθαι ἤ.. to wish rather than.., v. βούλομαι IV, αἱρέω B. 11.1b; so φθάνειν ἤ.. to come sooner than.., Il. 23.445, Od. 11.58; ἐπιθυμεῖν ἤ.. X. Cyr. 1.4.3; δέχεσθαι ἤ.. Lys. 10.21: less freq. after a word not implying comparison, δίκαιον ἡμέας ἔχειν.. (sc. μᾶλλον) ἤ περ Ἀθηναίους Hdt. 9.26; ἐμοὶ πικρὸς.. ἢ κείνοις γλυκύς S. Aj. 966 (s.v.l.); δεδικαιωμένος ἢ ἐκεῖνος Luke 18:14.
2. joining two Comparatives which refer to the same subject, πάντες κ’ ἀρησαίατ’ ἐλαφρότεροι πόδας εἶναι ἢ ἀφνειότεροι Od. 1.165; ταχύτερα ἢ σοφώτερα Hdt. 3.65; μανικώτεροι ἢ ἀνδρειότεροι Pl. Tht. 144b, cf. Ar. Ach. 1078.
3. rarely after a Sup., πλεῖστα θωμάσια ἔχει Αἴγυπτος ἢ ἄλλη πᾶσα χώρη Hdt. 2.35 (s.v.l.); πίθοιτό κεν ὔμμι μάλιστα ἢ ἐμοί A.R. 3.91.
4. ἢ οὐ is used when a neg. precedes, οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον ἐπ’ ἡμέας ἢ οὐ καὶ ἐπ’ ὑμέας Hdt. 4.118, cf. 5.94, Th. 2.62, etc.: after an implied neg., ὠμὸν.. πόλιν ὅλην διαφθεῖραι μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ τοὺς αἰτίους Id. 3.36.
5. freq. omitted with numerals after πλείων, ἐλάττων, μείων, ἔτη.. πλείω ἑβδομήκοντα v.l. in Pl. Revelation 17:1-18 d; οὐ μεῖον πεντακοσίους X. An. 6.4.24: sts. with an inf. or conditional clause, τί γὰρ ἀνδρὶ κακὸν μεῖζον ἁμαρτεῖν E. Alc. 879; τίς εὐπραξία σπανιωτέρα.., εἰ [δύναμις] πάρεστιν (for ἢ δύναμιν παρεῖναι); Th. 1.33.
6. pleon. with a gen., τίς ἂν αἰσχίων εἴη ταύτης δόξα, ἢ δοκεῖν.. Pl. Cri. 44c, cf. Lys. 10.28.
7. the Disj. and Comp. uses are found together in Il. 15.511 βέλτερον, ἢ ἀπολέσθαι ἕνα χρόνον ἠὲ βιῶναι, ἢ δηθὰ στρεύγεσθαι ἐν αἰνῆ δηϊοτῆτι better, either to die once for all or win life, than long to toil in battle. [ ἢ οὐ, ἢ οὐκ combine by Synizesis into one syll. in Trag. and Com., A. Pr. 330, S. Aj. 334, Ar. Lys. 128; so usually in , Od. 1.298, al.; ἢ αὐτός Hes. Fr. 194; ἢ εἰ Alex. 201.]

ἤ

(B),

1. an exclamation expressing disapproval, ἢ ἢ σιώπα Ar. Nu. 105; ἢ ἤ· τί δρᾶς; E. HF 906 (lyr.), cf. Suid.
2. to call attention, ποῦ Ξανθίας; ἢ Ξανθία where’s Xanthias? hi, Xanthias! Ar. Ra. 271.

ἤ, a disjunctive conjunction (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 53, 6). Used

1. to distinguish things or thoughts which either mutually exclude each other, or one of which can take the place of the other: or (Latinaut,vel);
   a. to distinguish one thing from another in words of the same construction: Matthew 5:17 (τόν νόμον ἤ τούς προφήτας), Matthew 5:36 (λευκήν ἤ μέλαιναν); Matthew 6:31; Matthew 7:16; Mark 6:56; Mark 7:11; Luke 2:24; Luke 9:25; John 7:48; John 13:29; Acts 1:7; Acts 3:12; Acts 4:7; Romans 1:21; Romans 3:1; 1 Corinthians 4:3; 1 Corinthians 5:10; 1 Corinthians 10:19; Galatians 1:10, etc.
   b. after an interrogative or a declarative sentence, before a question designed to prove the same thing in another way: Matthew 7:4, 9; Matthew 12:29; Matthew 16:26; Matthew 26:53; Mark 8:37; Luke 13:4; Luke 14:31; Luke 15:8; Romans 9:21; Romans 14:10; 1 Corinthians 6:16.
   c. before a sentence contrary to the one just preceding, to indicate that if one be denied or refuted the other must stand: Matthew 20:15 (i. e. or, if thou wilt not grant this, is thine eye etc.); Romans 3:29; 1 Corinthians 9:6; 1 Corinthians 10:22; 1 Corinthians 11:14 (Rec.); ; 2 Corinthians 11:7; ἤ ἀγνοεῖτε etc., Romans 6:3; Romans 7:1 (cf. Romans 6:14); ἤ οὐκ ὀικατε etc., Romans 11:2; 1 Corinthians 6:9, 16, 19.
   d. ἤ … ἤ, either … or, Matthew 6:24; Matthew 12:33; Luke 16:13; Acts 24:20; 1 Corinthians 14:6.
2. in a disjunctive question it corresponds to the Latinan afterutrum;
   a. preceded by πότερον, John 7:17; cf. Klotz ad Dev. 2:2, p. 574f; preceded by the interrogative μή, 1 Corinthians 9:8; preceded by μήτι, 2 Corinthians 1:17.
   b. without an intertog. particle in the first member of the interrogation: τί ἐστι εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν … ἤ εἰπεῖν, Matthew 9:5; Mark 2:9; Luke 5:23; add, Matthew 21:25; Matthew 23:17, 19; Matthew 27:17; Mark 3:4; Luke 7:19; Acts 8:34.
   c. ἤ … ἤ … ἤ, Mark 13:35.
3. as a comparative conjunction, than;
   a. after comparatives: Matthew 10:15; Matthew 11:22; Luke 9:13; Luke 16:17; John 3:19; John 4:1 (Tr marginal reading omits; WH brackets ἤ); Acts 4:19; Romans 13:11, and often. ἤ is lacking after πλείους followed by a noun of number: Matthew 26:53 T Tr WH; Acts 4:22; Acts 23:13, 21; Acts 24:11 (where Rec. adds ἤ); cf. Matthiae, § 455 note 4; Kühner, ii., p. 847; (Jelf, § 780 Obs. 1); Winers Grammar, 595 (554); (Buttmann, 168 (146)); Lob. ad Phryn., p. 410f.
   b. after ἕτερον: Acts 17:21.
   c. πρίν ἤ, before that, before, followed by accusative with an infinitive (cf. Buttmann, § 139, 35; Winer’s Grammar, § 44, 6, also, p. 297 (279)): Matthew 1:18; Mark 14:30; Acts 2:20 R G WH marginal reading; Acts 7:2; followed by the aorist subjunc, Luke 2:26 Tr text omits; WH brackets ἤ; R G (others ἕως); followed by present optative, Acts 25:16.
   d. after θέλω equivalent to to prefer: 1 Corinthians 14:19 (followed by ἤπερ, 2 Macc. 14:42); examples from Greek authors are given in Klotz ad Devar. 2:2, p. 589f; Winers Grammar, § 35, 2 c.; (Buttmann, § 149, 7); Kühner, ii., p. 841; (Jelf, § 779 Obs. 3).
   e. after οὐ: John 13:10 R G, where after οὐ χρείαν ἔχει the sentence goes on as though the writer had said οὐκ ἄλλου τίνος χρείαν ἔχει, (cf. Winers Grammar, 508 (478)).
   f. after positive notions, to which in this way a comparative force is given: after καλόν ἐστι (it is good … rather than) equivalent to it is better, Matthew 18:8; Mark 9:43, 45, 47; cf. Menander’s saying καλόν τό μή ζῆν, ἤ ζῆν ἀθλιως, and Plautus rud. 4, 4, 70 tacita mulier est bona semper, quam loquens; similar examples in the O. T. are Genesis 49:12; Psalm 117:8 (); Jonah 4:3, 8; Tobit 6:13 Tobit 12:8; Sir. 20:25 Sir. 22:15; 4 Macc. 9:1; also after λυσιτελεῖ (it is gain … rather than) equivalent to it is better (Tobit 3:6), Luke 17:2; after χαρά ἐστι (there will be joy … more than), Luke 15:7; see examples from Greek authors in Alexander Buttmann (1873) Gram. § 149, 7; (Buttmann, p. 360 (309)); Winer, Kühner, others, as above.
4. with other particles;
   a. ἀλλ’ ἤ, see ἀλλά, I. 10, p. 28a.
   b. ἤ γάρ, see γάρ, I. at the end c. ἤ καί (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 53, 6 note), α. or even, or also (Latinaut etiam,vel etiam): (Matthew 7:10 L T Tr WH); Luke 11:11 G L T Tr WH; Luke 11:12; Luke 18:11; Romans 2:15; 1 Corinthians 16:6; 2 Corinthians 1:13. β. or also (Latinan etiam) (in a disjunctive question): Luke 12:41; Romans 4:9.
   d. ἤπερ, than at all (Latinquam forte; German als etwa), after a comparitive (cf. Jelf, § 779 Obs. 5): John 12:43 (L ἤ περ, WH marginal reading ὑπέρ) (2 Macc. 14:42; Homer, Hesiod).
   e. ἤτοι … ἤ, either indeed (cf. Kühner, § 540, 5) … or: Romans 6:16 (Wis. 11:19; Herodotus and following).

Question 15

μαθητής, -οῦ, ὁ

Answer 15

a disciple

disciple, student, follower; a committed learner and follower, in the NT usually of Jesus Christ
Definition:
a disciple, Mt. 10:24, 42, et al.

μᾰθητ-ής, οῦ, ὁ,

learner, pupil, τῆς Ἑλλάδος Hdt. 4.77, Mosch. 3.95, etc.; of dancing, SIG 1094.6 (Eleusis, iv B. C.): freq. in Att. of the pupils of philosophers and rhetoricians, οὐ θέμις πλὴν τοῖς μ. λέγειν Ar. Nu. 140; οἱ Πρωταγόρου μ. Pl. Prt. 315a, al.; ἐμοὺς μαθητάς Id. Ap. 33a: c. gen. rei, τούτου τοῦ μαθήματος μ. a studento fit, Id. R. 618c; μ. ἰατρικῆς a student of medicine, ib. 599c; μ. περί τινος Id. La. 186e; apprentice, POxy. 725.15 (ii A. D.).

μαθητής, μαθητοῦ, ὁ (μανθάνω), a learner, pupil, disciple: universally, opposed to διδάσκαλος, Matthew 10:24; Luke 6:40; τίνος, one who follows one’s teaching: Ἰωάννου, Matthew 9:14; Luke 7:18 (19); John 3:25; τῶν Φαρισαίων, Matthew 22:16; Mark 2:18; Luke 5:33; Μωϋσέως, John 9:28; of Jesus — in a wide sense, in the Gospels, those among the Jews who favored him, joined his party, became his adherents: John 6:66; John 7:3; John 19:38; ὄχλος μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, Luke 6:17; οἱ μαθητοι αὐτοῦ ἱκανοί, Luke 7:11; ἅπαν τό πλῆθος τῶν μαθητῶν, Luke 19:31; but especially the twelve apostles: Matthew 10:1; Matthew 11:1; Matthew 12:1; Mark 8:27; Luke 8:9; John 2:2; John 3:22, and very often; also simply οἱ μαθηταί, Matthew 13:10; Matthew 14:19; Mark 10:24; Luke 9:16; John 6:11 (Rec.), etc.; in the Acts οἱ μαθηταί are all those who confess Jesus as the Messiah, Christians: Acts 6:1f, 7; Acts 9:19; Acts 11:26, and often; with τοῦ κυρίου added, Acts 9:1. The word is not found in the O. T, nor in the Epistles of the N. T., nor in the Apocalypse; in Greek writings from (Herodotus), Aristophanes, Xenophon, Plato down.

Question 16

οὕτως

Answer 16

thus

in this manner, thus, in the same way, likewise
Definition:
thus, in this way, Mt. 1:18; 2:5; 5:16; et al. freq.; ὃς μὲν οὕτως, ὃς δὲ οὕτως, one so, and another so, one in one way, and another in another, 1 Cor. 7:7; so, Mt. 7:12; 12:40; 24:27, 37, et al. freq.; thus, under such circumstances, Acts 20:11; in such a condition, viz., one previously mentioned, Acts 27:17; 1 Cor. 7:26, 40; and, perhaps, Jn. 4:6; in an ordinary way, at ease, like Latin sic, perhaps, Jn. 4:6

in this manner, thus, so

οὕτως,

and before a consonant οὕτω (but sts. οὕτως before a consonant, Ar. Av. 63, Pl. Grg. 522c, D. 23.34, PPetr. 2p.20 (iii B. C.), PTeb. 124.18 (ii B. C.), etc., and οὕτω before a vowel is found in Poets and Ion. Prose, v. fin.); in Att. strengthd. οὑτωσί Pl. Grg. 503d, etc.; οὑτωσίν Hdn.Gr. 1.509.2; v. οὗτος Α: —

I Adv. of οὗτος,

1. in this way or manner, so, thus: οὕτως is antec. to ὡς, Il. 4.178, Od. 4.148, etc.; in Att. also οὕτως ὥσπερ S. Tr. 475, etc.; ὥσπερ.., οὕτω καὶ.. X. Cyr. 1.4.21; ὡσαύτως, ὥσπερ.., οὕτω καὶ.. Pl. Ion 534a; also οὕτως, ὅπως.. S. Tr. 330, X. Cyr. 1.1.2; poet. also ὥστε.., οὕτω δὲ.. S. Tr. 116 (lyr.): οὕτως is freq. left out after ὡς, ὡς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐποίουν ταῦτα Th. 8.1, cf. Theoc. 7.45 sq. — In Prose, the relat. Pron. freq. follows instead of ὥστε, v. infr. III: when two modes are opposed, they are freq. expressed by οὕτω and ἐκείνως, τότε μὲν ἐκείνως, νῦν δ’ οὕτω Isoc. 12.172; οὕτω ῥᾷον ἢ ‘κείνως Pl. R. 370a, etc. — Sts. οὕτω or -ως refers to what follows, thus, as follows, οὕτω χρὴ ποιεῖν: ἐὰν.. X. An. 2.2.2; οὑτωσὶ δὲ λογίζεσθε D. 18.244; οὕτω πως ὑπείληφα ib.269; οὑτωσί πως folld. by a quotation, Pl. Ap. 28c; καὶ οὕτως even so, even on this supposition, Th. 1.10; οὐδ’ οὕτως Id. 2.76, 6.89, Lys. 1.14, v.l. in X. An. 4.8.3: strengthd. οὕτω δή Il. 2.158; οὕτω γὰρ δή τοι 15.201; οὕτω δή τι, v. infr. III; also οὕτω που so I ween, 2.116, Od. 9.262, etc.; οὕτω πῃ Il. 24.373; ὣς ὁ μὲν οὕτως ἐστὶ σόος so in this way is he saved, Od. 19.300: —

Phrases:

I

1. οὕτω δὴ ἔσται so it shall be, ratifying what goes before, 11.348; ἔσσεται οὕτως 16.31, etc.: in Prose οὕτως alone in answers, even so, just so, X. Oec. 1.9; so ἢ οὐχ οὕτως; — οὕτω μὲν οὖν Pl. R. 551b, etc.
2. emphat. with the imper., just, without more ado, ἔρρ’ οὕτως Il. 22.498, cf. 21.184, Od. 6.218, 17.447; but, οὕτω νῦν ἀπόπεμπε as you say, 5.146.
3. in wishes or prayers, so, i.e. if you grant my prayer, οὕτως ἔρως σοι.. τελεσφόρος γένοιτο E. Med. 714; οὕτω τί σοι δοίησαν αἱ Μοῦσαι.. τοῦτον.. δεῖρον Herod. 3.1; also in protestations, so, i.e. only if what I say is true, οὕτως ὀναίμην τῶν τέκνων, μισῶ τὸν ἄνδρ’ (as in Engl., so help me God, so mote I thrive, etc.) Ar. Th. 469, cf. Men. Epit. 530, Herod. 7. 25, Aristaenet. 2.13; οὕτω.. νομιζοίμην σοφός, ὡς.. Ar. Nu. 520.
4. in colloquial phrase, beginning a story, οὕτω ποτ’ ἦν μῦς καὶ γαλῆ there were once on a time.., Id. V. 1182; οὕτως ἦν νεανίσκος Id. Lys. 785; ἦν οὕτω δὴ παῖς Pl. Phdr. 237b.
5. οὕτω with gen., τούτων μὲν οὕτω so much for this, A. Ag. 950; οὕτω καὶ τῶν οἰκονομικῶν (v.l. τῷ -κῷ) so also of.., Arist. Pol. 1253b27; ὥσπερ Χαλκὶς.. τῆς Εὐβοίας.. κεῖται, οὕτω Χερρονήσου.. ἡ Καρδιανῶν πόλις as Chalcis in respect of Euboea.., so Cardia in respect of the Chersonese, D. 23.182; so οὕτως ἔχω τινός or περί τινος, v. ἔχω (A) B. II. 2; also for εἰς τοῦτο, οὕτω δὲ τάρβους.. ἀφικόμην E. Ph. 361 codd. (dub. l.).
6. ὁ οὕτω καλούμενος, ὀνομαζόμενος, the so -called.., τῶν Ῥιπαίων οὕτω καλουμένων Ael. NA 11.1; τοῦ καὶ ὀνομασθέντος οὕτω ῥήτορος Hermog. Id. 2.11; Ποταμὸς δῆμος οὕτω καλούμενος P., a deme of that name, Str. 9.1.22.
7. οὕτω, or οὕτω δή, freq. introduces the apodosis after a protasis, ἐπειδὴ περιελήλυθε ὁ πόλεμος.., οὕτω δὴ Γέλωνος μνῆστις γέγονε Hdt. 7.158, cf. 150, Th. 1.131, 2.12, 19, etc.; esp. after parts., ἐν κλιβάνῳ πνίξαντες, οὕτω τρώγουσι, i.e. ἐπειδὰν πνίξωσιν, οὕτω.., Hdt. 2.92, cf. 100; also οὕτω δή Id. 7.174; τὰ ἄλλα καταστρεψάμενος, οὕτως.. στρατεῦσαι ὕστερον Th. 3.96; εἰς τὰ σκληρότατα ἀποβλέποντες, οὕτως ἂν μᾶλλον συννοήσαιμεν Pl. Phlb. 44e, cf. Grg. 457d, 507e, Ap. 29b; so ἔπειτα οὕτως X. An. 7.1.4: so also after the gen. abs., ὡς.. τῶν ἡγεμόνων ὑμῖν μὴ μεμπτῶν γεγενημένων, οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε Th. 7.15, cf. X. Cyr. 1.6.11, An. 1.3.6, etc.

II

1. sts. in a really inferential sense, as we say so for therefore, S. Ant. 677; οὕτω δή Pl. Phd. 61b, etc. III to such an extent, so, so much, so very, so excessively, καλὸς οὕτω Il. 3.169; πρυμνόθεν οὕτως so entirely, A. Th. 1061 (anap.), cf. Th. 2.47, X. Cyr. 1.3.8; οὕτως τι Ar. Av. 63: freq. folld. by ὡς or ὥστε, Hdt. 1.32, X. An. 7.4.3, etc.: sts. the relat. ὅς takes the place of ὥστε, κρήνη οὕτω δή τι ἐοῦσα πικρή, ἣ.. κιρνᾷ (i. e. ὥστε κιρνᾶν) Hdt. 4.52; οὐκ ἔστιν οὕτω μῶρος ὃς θανεῖν ἐρᾷ S. Ant. 220; τίς δ’ οὕτως ἄνους ὃς..; Ar. Ach. 736, cf. D. 8.44; also δυσχείμερος αὕτη ἡ.. χώρη οὕτω δή τί ἐστι, ἔνθα (i. e. ὥστε ἐνταῦθα) τοὺς μὲν ὀκτὼ τῶν μηνῶν ἀφόρητος οἷος γίνεται κρυμός Hdt. 4.28: sts. no connecting Particle is used, αἱ [κεφαλαὶ] οὕτω δή τι ἰσχυραί, μόγις ἂν λίθῳ παίσας διαρρήξειας so excessively hard, you could scarcely break them, Id. 3.12.
2. with Sup. Adj., τῆς οὕτω μεγίστης ἐγχειρήσεως ἀποσφαλείς Zos. 5.19. sts., like αὔτως, with a diminishing power, so, merely so, simply, in Hom. always μὰψ οὕτω, Il. 2.120 (for without μάψ he always uses αὔτως), cf. Hdt. 1.5; μὴ διὰ μέθης.. ἀλλ’ οὕτω πίνοντας πρὸς ἡδονήν Pl. Smp. 176e, cf. Grg. 494e, Phdr. 235c, Tht. 147c, 158b, Thphr. Od. 67, etc.; ἐν συνουσίᾳ καὶ διατριβῇ οὕτως ἰδίᾳ D. 21.71, cf. 1.20; τοὺς ὀδόντας.. οὕτως ἂν τοῖς δακτύλοις αὐτοῖς.. παρατρίβειν, i.e. without a dentifrice, Diocl. Fr. 141; so οὕτω γε ἀπὸ στόματος Pl. Tht. 142d; οὕτω ποτέ Id. Ly. 216c; οὕτω πως D. 1.20; also, off-hand, at once, Pl. Grg. 464b, etc.; ἁπλῶς οὕτως Id. Lg. 633c; ἀλλ’ οὕτως ἄπει; so, without a word more.. ? S. Ph. 1067; ἢ στραφεὶς οὕτως ἴω; Id. Ant. 315, cf. E. Heracl. 374 (lyr.); ἐφεξῆς οὑτωσὶ καθεζόμενος D. 21.119; ὡς οὕτω γ’ ἀκοῦσαι at first hearing, Pl. Euthphr. 3b; so ὥς γε οὑτωσὶ ἀκοῦσαι Id. Ly. 216a; ἀκούειν μὲν οὕτως ἁπλῶς Id. Phlb. 12c; οὐ.. οὕτως ἄπει, = impune, E. Alc. 680. as Hebraism, οὕτως, = such a person (thing), οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδαμεν Mark 2:12, cf. LXX Genesis 29:26, Matthew 9:33, Luke 2:48, al. Position of οὕτω or οὕτως, mostly before the word which it limits, but in Poets sts. after, καλὸς οὕτω Il. 3.169; οὐδέ τι λίην οὕτω νώνυμός ἐστιν Od. 13.239; ἔρημος οὕτω, ἄγαν οὕτω, S. Ph. 487, 598: rarely at the end of a clause, Od. 18.255, Hdt. 7.170 (dub. l.): sts. separated from the word which it limits, οὕτως ἔχει τι δεινόν; S. Ph. 104; οὕτως ἐπὶ δεινὰς ἁρπαγάς Pl. R. 391d, cf. Th. 2.11; οὕτω δ’ ἦν ὁ Φίλιππος ἐν φόβῳ.., ὥστε.. D. 18.33. Prosody. The last syll. of οὕτω is short before a vowel in Il. 3.169, Od. 3.315. The ι of οὑτωσί is always long, v. οὗτος init.

οὕτω and οὕτως (formerly in printed editions οὕτω appeared before a consonant, οὕτως before a vowel; but (recent critical editors, following the best manuscripts (“Codex Sinaiticus has οὕτω but fourteen times in the N. T.” Scrivener, Collation etc., p. liv.; cf. his Introduction etc., p. 561), have restored οὕτως; viz. Treg. uniformly, 205 times; Tdf. 203 times, 4 times οὕτω; Lachmann 196 times, 7 times οὕτω (all before a consonant); WH 196 times, 10 times οὕτω (all before a consonant); cf. Tdf. Proleg., p. 97; WHs Appendix, p. 146f); cf. Winers Grammar, § 5, 1 b.; B. 9; (Lob. Pathol. Elementa ii. 218ff); cf. Krüger, § 11, 12, 1; Kühner, § 72, 3 a.), adverb (from οὗτος) (fr. Homer down), the Sept. for כֵּן, in this manner, thus, so:

1. by virtue of its native demonstrative force it refers to what precedes; “in the manner spoken of; in the way described; in the way it was done; in this manner; in such a manner; thus, so”: Matthew 6:30; Matthew 11:26; Matthew 17:12; Matthew 19:8; Mark 14:59; Luke 1:25; Luke 2:48; Luke 12:28; Romans 11:5; 1 Corinthians 8:12; 1 Corinthians 15:11; Hebrews 6:9; (2 Peter 3:11 WH Tr marginal reading); οὐχ οὕτως ἔσται (L Tr WH ἐστιν (so also T in Mark)) ἐν ὑμῖν, it will not be so among you (I hope), Matthew 20:26; Mark 10:43; ὑμεῖς οὐχ οὕτως namely, ἔσεσθε, Luke 22:26; ἐάν ἀφῶμεν αὐτόν οὕτως namely, ποιοῦντα, thus as he has done hitherto (see ἀφίημι, 2 b.), John 11:48; it refers to similitudes and comparisons, and serves to adapt them to the case in hand, Matthew 5:16 (even so, i. e. as the lamp on the lampstand); Matthew 12:45; Matthew 13:49; Matthew 18:14; Matthew 20:16; Luke 12:21 (WH brackets the verse); ; John 3:8; 1 Corinthians 9:24; likewise οὕτως καί, Matthew 17:12; Matthew 18:35; Matthew 24:33; Mark 13:20; Luke 17:10. οὕτως ἔχειν, to be so (Latinsic orita se habere): Acts 7:1; Acts 12:15; Acts 17:11; Acts 24:9. it serves to resume participles (Josephus, Antiquities 8, 11, 1; b. j. 2, 8, 5; see examples from Greek authors in Passow, under the word, 1 h.; (Liddell and Scott, v. I. 7)): Acts 20:11; Acts 27:17; but John 4:6 must not (with Winers Grammar, § 65, 9 at the end; Buttmann, § 144, 21) be referred to this head, see Meyer (and 5 d. below); on Revelation 3:5, see 5 c. below. It takes the place of an explanatory participial clause, equivalent to matters being thus arranged, under these circumstances, in such a condition of things (Buttmann, § 149, 1; cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 60, 5): Romans 5:12 (this connection between sin and death being established (but this explanation of the οὕτως appears to be too general (cf. Meyer ad loc.))); Hebrews 6:15 (i. e. since God had pledged the promise by an oath); equivalent to things having been thus settled, this having been done, then: Matthew 11:26; Acts 7:8; Acts 28:14; 1 Corinthians 14:25; 1 Thessalonians 4:17; 2 Peter 1:11; cf. Fritzsche, Commentary to Romans, i., p. 298. Closely related to this use is that of of οὕτως (like Latinita foritaque,igitur) in the sense of consequently (cf. English so at the beginning of a sentence): Matthew 7:17; Romans 1:15; Romans 6:11; Revelation 3:16 ((cf. Fritzsche on Matthew, p. 220); Passow, under the word, 2; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, II.)).
2. it prepares the way for what follows: Matthew 6:9; Luke 19:31; John 21:1; οὕτως ἦν, was arranged thus, was on this wise (Winers Grammar, 465 (434); Buttmann, § 129, 11), Matthew 1:18; οὕτως ἐστι τό θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ followed by an infinitive, so is the will of God, that, 1 Peter 2:15. before language quoted from the O. T.: Matthew 2:5; Acts 7:6; Acts 13:34, 47; 1 Corinthians 15:45; Hebrews 4:4.
3. with adjectives, so (Latintam, marking degree of intensity): Hebrews 12:21; Revelation 16:18; postpositive, τί δειλοί ἐστε οὕτως; Mark 4:40 (L Tr WH omit); in the same sense with adverbs, Galatians 1:6; or with verbs, so greatly, 1 John 4:11; οὕτως … ὥστε, John 3:16. οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως, it was never seen in such fashion, i. e. such an extraordinary sight, Matthew 9:33 (ἐφάνη must be taken impersonally; cf. Bleek, Synoptative Erklär. i. p. 406 (or Meyer at the passage)); οὐδέποτε οὕτως εἴδομεν, we never saw it so, i. e. with such astonishment, Mark 2:12.
4. οὕτως or οὕτως καί in comparison stands antithetic to an adverb or a relative pronoun (Winers Grammar, § 53, 5; cf. Buttmann, 362 (311)
   c. ): καθάπερ … οὕτως, Romans 12:4; 1 Corinthians 12:12; 2 Corinthians 8:11; καθώς … οὕτως, Luke 11:30; Luke 17:26; John 3:14; John 12:50; John 14:31; John 15:4; 2 Corinthians 1:5; 2 Corinthians 10:7; 1 Thessalonians 2:4; Hebrews 5:3; οὕτως … καθώς, Luke 24:24; Romans 11:26; Philippians 3:17; ὡς … οὕτως, Acts 8:32; Acts 23:11; Romans 5:15, 18; 1 Corinthians 7:17; 2 Corinthians 7:14; 1 Thessalonians 2:8; 1 Thessalonians 5:2; οὕτως … ὡς, Mark 4:26; John 7:46 (L WH omit; Tr brackets the clause); 1 Corinthians 3:15; 1 Corinthians 4:1; 1 Corinthians 9:26; Ephesians 5:28; James 2:12; οὕτως ὡς … μή ὡς, 2 Corinthians 9:5 (G L T Tr WH); ὥσπερ … οὕτως, Matthew 12:40; Matthew 13:40; Matthew 24:27, 37, 39; Luke 17:24; John 5:21, 26; Romans 5:12, 19, 21; Romans 6:4; Romans 11:31; 1 Corinthians 11:12; 1 Corinthians 15:22; 1 Corinthians 16:1; 2 Corinthians 1:7 R G; Galatians 4:29; Ephesians 5:24 R G; after καθ’ ὅσον, Hebrews 9:27f; οὕτως … ὅν τρόπον, Acts 1:11; Acts 27:25; ὅν τρόπον … οὕτως, 2 Timothy 3:8 (Isaiah 52:14); κατά τήν ὁδόν ἥν λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν οὕτω κτλ., after the Way (i. e. as it requires (cf. ὁδός, 2 a. at the end)) so etc. Acts 24:14.
5. Further, the following special uses deserve notice:
   a. (ἔχει) ὅς (better ὁ) μέν οὕτως ὅς (better ὁ) δέ οὕτως, one after this manner, another after that, i. e. different men in different ways, 1 Corinthians 7:7 (πότε μέν οὕτως καί πότε οὕτως φάγεται ἡ μάχαιρα, 2 Samuel 11:25).
   b. οὕτως, in the manner known to all, i. e. according to the context, so shamefully, 1 Corinthians 5:3.
   c. in that state in which one finds oneself, such as one is (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 465 (434)): τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως, Romans 9:20; οὕτως of those εἶναι, μένειν who remain unmarried, 1 Corinthians 7:26, 40; ὁ νικῶν οὕτως περιβαλεῖται viz. as (i. e. because he is) victor (others in the manner described in verse 4), Revelation 3:5 L T Tr WH.
   d. thus forthwith, i. e. without hesitation (cf. English off-hand, without ceremony, and the colloquial right, just): John 4:6; cf. Passow, under the word, 4; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, IV.; see 1 above; add John 13:25 T WH Tr brackets (cf. Green, Critical Notes at the passage))
   e. in questions (Latinsicine?) (English exclamatory so then, what): Mark 7:18 (German sonach) (others take οὕτως here as expressive of degree. In Matthew 26:40, however, many give it the sense spoken of; cf. too 1 Corinthians 6:5); οὕτως ἀποκρίνῃ; i. e. so impudently, John 18:22; with an adjective, so (very), Galatians 3:3. (But these examples, although classed together by Fritzsche also (Commentary on Mark, p. 150f), seem to be capable of discrimination. The passage from Galatians, for instance, does not seem to differ essentially from examples under 3 above.) f. In classical Greek οὕτως often, after a conditional, concessive, or temporal protasis, introduces the apodosis (cf. Passow, under the word, 1 h.; (Liddell and Scott, under the word I. 7)). 1 Thessalonians 4:14 and Revelation 11:5 have been referred to this head; Buttmann, 357 (307); (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 60, 5 (especially a.)). But questionably; for in the first passage οὕτως may also be taken as equivalent to under these circumstances, i. e. if we believe what I have said (better cf. Winer’s Grammar, as above); in the second passage οὕτως denotes in the manner spoken of, i. e. by fire proceeding out of their mouth.

Question 17

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅτι

Answer 17

whoever, whichever, whatever

who, whoever, whatever; someone, anyone, everyone; with {2401} a marker of time relationships: until, while
Definition:
whoever, whatever; whosoever, whatsoever, Mt. 5:39, 41; 13:12; 18:4; its use in place of the simple relative is also required in various cases, which may be learned from the grammars; ἕως ὅτου, sc. χρόνου, until, Lk. 13:8; while, Mt. 5:25

whoever, whatever, who

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι

(sts. written ὅ, τι to dist. it from ὅτι, that): Hom. has also the masc. collat. form ὅτις Od. 1.47, al. (also in Critias 2.9 and Ion. and Arc. Prose, Jahresh. 12.136 (Erythrae), IG 12(5).22 (Ios), 5(2).343.34 (Orchom. Arc.)) and the neut. ὅττι Od. 9.402, al., cf. ὄττι Alc. 45. —

In some forms only the second part is inflected, viz. gen. ὅτου Th. 1.23, al., ὅττεο Od. 1.124, later Ion. ὅτεο Jahresh. l.c., contr. ὅττευ Od. 17.121, ὅτευ ib. 421, Hdt. 1.7; Lesb. ὄττω Sapph. Supp. 5.3; dat. ὅτῳ Th. 1.36, al.; perh. also in Ion., Emp. 2.5, Democr. 99, Hp. VC 14; ὅτεῳ Od. 2.114, and as disyll., Il. 12.428, 15.664; so Hdt. 1.86, al., Democr. 100, Heraclit. 15, SIG 194.21 (Amphipolis, iv B. C.); Arc. ὀς[] έοι IG 5(2).262.14 (Mantinea, v B. C.); acc. ὅτινα Od. 8.204, 15.395; Delph. gen. ὅτινος IG 22.1126.37 (iv B. C.), also Berl.Sitzb. 1927.167 (Cyrene); Delph. dat. ὅτινι IG 22.1126.25; Cret. dat. sg. ὄτιμι Leg.Gort. 7.51, 8.7, al.: pl., nom. masc. Arg. ὄττινες Mnemos. 44.65 (iii B. C.); neut. ὅτινα Il. 22.450; gen. ὅτεων Od. 10.39, Hdt. 8.65, Att. ὅτων S. OT 414, X. An. 7.6.24 (cj.), Oec. 3.2 (cj.) (also in Hes. Fr. 238, Anaxag. 12, Hp. Aër. 21); dat. ὁτέοισι (ν) Il. 15.491, Hdt. 2.82, Att. ὅτοισι S. Ant. 1335, Ar. Eq. 758, ὅτοις S. Tr. 1119; acc. ὅτινας Il. 15.492, Aeol. ὄττινας Sapph. 12: in a few forms only the first part is inflected, Cret. gen. sg. ὦτι prob. in Leg.Gort. 1.5, 2.50, 11.50, al., GDI 4993 ii 10: neut. pl. ἄτι Leg.Gort. 2.47, al.: of the forms with double inflexion Hom. has only ὅν τινα Il. 2.188, al., ἥν τινα 3.286, al., οἵ τινες Od. 4.94, al., οὕς τινας Il. 4.240, al., ἅς τινας Od. 8.573; ᾧτινι first in Hes. Op. 31, ἧστινος A. Ag. 1358, ᾗ τινι δή Th. 8.87, οἷστισι Ar. Pax 1279: Att. Inscrr. have ἧστινος ᾗτινι along with masc. and neut. ὅτου ὅτῳ, and this rule holds with few exceptions in Trag. and Att. Prose before iv B. C.; ᾡτινιοῦν occurs in Lys. 1.37, etc.: ὅτῳ rarely as fem., E. IT 1071. —

I For the Ion. and form ἅσσα, Att. ἅττα, v. ἅσσα. — On the concord and construction cf. ὅς B. 1.1,3, 11.3, 111.2a,b: —

1. Radic. sense, any one who, anything which, whosoever, whichsoever; ὣς ἀπόλοιτο καὶ ἄλλος, ὅτις τοιαῦτά γε ῥέζοι Od. 1.47; ἀθανάτων ὅς τίς σε φυλάσσει 15.35, etc.: freq. without express antec., χαίρει δέ μιν ὅς τις ἐθείρῃ Il. 21.347; ἆσσον ἴτω ὅς τις δέπας οἴσεται 23.667: hence freq. in maxims or sentiments, οὐκ ἔστιν ὅ. πάντ’ ἀνὴρ εὐδαιμονεῖ Ar. Ra. 1217; μακάριος ὅ. οὐσίαν καὶ νοῦν ἔχει Men. 114; οὗτος βέλτιστος ἂν εἴη, ὅ… Lys. 3.4, etc.: freq. in such phrases as ὅστις εἶ, ὅστις ἐστί, v. ὅς B. 111.2; ἔστιν ὅ., freq. with a neg., οὐ γὰρ ἔην ὅς τίς σφιν.. ἡγήσαιτο Il. 2.687; οὐκ ἔστιν ὅτῳ μείζονα μοῖραν νείμαιμ’ ἢ σοί A. Pr. 293 (anap.), cf. 989, 1070 (anap.), etc.; εἰσὶν οἵτινες S. Fr. 354.5; οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐ.. everything, Hdt. 5.97, Th. 7.87: — in these phrases the case of ὅστις commonly depends on that of οὐδείς; but sts. the reverse, v. οὐδείς 1.2: also joined with Sup., τρόπῳ ὅτῳ ἂν δύνωνται ἰσχυροτάτῳ Foed. ap. Th. 5.23; ὅντινα ἀφανέστατον δύναιντο τρόπον Paus. 10.1.5: in Trag. and Att. sts. strengthd. by an antec. πᾶς, but only in sg., ἅπας δὲ τραχὺς ὅ. ἂν νέον κρατῇ A. Pr. 35, cf. Th. 8.90 (πάντες ὅσοι being commonly used in pl., not πάντες οἵτινες; but πᾶσιν.. ὅστις ἐρωτᾷ IG 12.410). II referring to a definite object, prop. only when a general notion is implied, Πολυκράτεα.., δι’ ὅντινα κακῶς ἤκουσε, not the man through whom, but one through whom.., Hdt. 3.120; τελευταῖόν σε προσβλέψαιμι νῦν, ὅστις πέφασμαι φύς τ’ ἀφ’ ὧν οὐ χρῆν may I see thee now for the last time, I who am one born from sinful parentage, S. OT 1184, cf. A. Pr. 38, Ag. 1065; but in quite definite sense, βωμόν, ὅστις νῦν ἔξω τῆς πόλεώς ἐστι Th. 6.3: sts. even with οὗτος or ὅδε as antec., Hdt. 1.167, 2.99, 6.47, E. Hipp. 943, Theoc. 8.87.
2. ἐφ’ ὅτῳ, = ἐφ’ ᾧτε, D.S. 16.4; so ἐφ’ ὅτῳ τε Delph. 3(2).236 (ii B. C.).

III

1. in indirect questions, Hom., etc., εἴπ’ ἄγε μοι καὶ τόνδε.., ὅς τις ὅδ’ ἐστί Il. 3.192, cf. 167, etc.; ἔσπετε νῦν μοι, Μοῦσαι, ὅς τις δὴ κτλ. who it was that.., 14.509; ξεῖνος ὅδ’, οὐκ οἶδ’ ὅς τις Od. 8.28: in dialogue, when the person questioned repeats the question asked by τίς, as οὗτος τί ποιεῖς; — ὅ τι ποιῶ; Ar. Ra. 198; ἀλλὰ τίς γὰρ εἶ; — ὅστις; πολίτης χρηστός Id. Ach. 595, cf. Pl. 462, Pl. Euthphr. 2c, etc.
2. rare and late in direct questions, ὅ τι ἐστὶ τὸ ἐμποδίζον; A.D. Adv. 140.12; ἀνθ’ ὅτου..; = why? Jul. 82p.109B. -C.; cf. ὅπως.

limited or made more indefinite by the addition of Particles:

1 ὅστις γε being one who (cf. ὅσγε), S. OT 1335, OC 810, Ar. Ra. 1184.

2. ὅστις δή (v. δή IV. 1), freq. used without any distinct relative force, θεῶν ὅτεῳ δή to some one or other of the gods, Hdt. 1.86; ὅτευ δὴ χρήματος δεησόμενον Id. 3.121; ᾗ τινι δὴ γνώμῃ Th. 8.87, etc.; also ὅ τι δήκοτε πρήξοντα Hdt. 6.134; ὅστις δήποτ’ ὤν Pl. Phdr. 273c; ὡς ἀπετύγχαν’ ὁτουδήποτε D. 19.167; ὁτῳδήτινι τρόπῳ PFay. 21.11 (ii A. D.); so ὁστισοῦν, ὁτιοῦν anybody (anything) whatsoever, Th. 4.16, Pl. Smp. 198b, etc.; μετὰ ὁτουοῦν τρόπου Th. 8.27; ὁτῳοῦν Pl. Tht. 175a; εἷς ὁστισοῦν any one person, Arist. Pol. 1286a31: freq. with neg., μηδ’ ἂν ὁστισοῦν τυγχάνῃ ὤν Pl. Euthphr. 5e, cf. Phd. 78d, etc.; οὐδ’ ὁτιοῦν not the least mite, nothing whatsoever, Ar. Nu. 344, Pl. 385; μηδοτιοῦν Thgn. 64: rarely, = whoever (whatever), as subject of a verb, ὁτιοῦν ἔτυχε τῶν ἐπὶ μέρους (v.l. ὅτι ἄν) Arist. Mu. 391a22. ὁστισδηποτοῦν D. 40.8, Aeschin. 1.164. so also ὅστις alone, Pl. Hp.Ma. 282d, etc.: with neg., μηδὲ οἵτινες none at all, X. HG 1.5.9; οὐδ’ ἧστινος ἂν ἀσχολίας τὸ πρᾶγμα προσεδεῖτο Plb. 9.14.6.
3. ὅστις ποτε whoever, A. Ag. 160 (lyr.), cf. Hdt. 8.65.
4. ὅστις περ (cf. ὅσπερ), mostly in neut., ὅ τι πέρ ἐστ’ ὄφελος Ar. Ec. 53, cf. Pl. R. 492e: in masc., D. 21.225.
5. ὅστις τε, where τε is otiose as in ὅστε, Il. 23.43, al. neut. ὅ τι used abs. as a Conj., v. ὅ τι. ἐξ ὅτου from which time, S. OC 345, Tr. 326, Ar. Nu. 528, X. Cyr. 8.2.16, etc.;
6. ἐξ ὅτου περ Ar. Ach. 596; ἀπ’ ὅτευ since.., Hdt. 1.7, cf. SIG 45.18 (Halic., v B. C.); so ἕως ὅτου until.., Luke 13:8.
7. from what cause, S. Tr. 671, E. Cyc. 639.

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὁ, τί (separated by a hypodiastole (comma), to distinguish it from ὅτι; but L T Tr write ὁ τί, without a hypodiastole (cf. Tdf. Prolog., p. 111), leaving a little space between ὁ and τί; (WH ὅτι); cf. Winers Grammar, 46 (45f); (Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch., p. 118f; WH. Introductory § 411)), genitive ὁυτινος (but of the oblique cases only the accusative neuter ὁ, τί and the genitive ὅτου, in the phrase ἕως ὅτου, are found in the N. T.) (from Homer down), compound of ὅς and τίς, hence, properly, anyone who; i. e.:

1. whoever, everyone who: ὅστις simply, in the singular chiefly at the beginning of a sentence in general propositions, especially in Matt.; with an indicative present, Matthew 13:12 (twice); Mark 8:34 (where L Tr WH εἰ τίς); Luke 14:27; neuter Matthew 18:28 Rec.; with a future, Matthew 5:39 (R G Tr marginal reading), ; , etc.; James 2:10 R G; plural οἵτινες, whosoever (all those who): with indicative present, Mark 4:20; Luke 8:15; Galatians 5:4; with indicative aorist, Revelation 1:7; Revelation 2:24; Revelation 20:4; πᾶς ὅστις, with indicative present Matthew 7:24; with future Matthew 10:32; ὅστις with subjunctive (where ἄν is lacking very rarely (cf. Winers Grammar, § 42, 3 (especially at the end); Buttmann, § 139, 31)) aorist (having the force of the future perfect in Latin), Matthew 18:4 Rec.; James 2:10 L T Tr WH. ὅστις ἄν with subjunctive aorist (Latin future perfect), Matthew 10:33 (R G T); ; with subjunctive present Galatians 5:10 (ἐάν T Tr WH); neuter with subjunctive aorist, Luke 10:35; John 14:13 (Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading present subjunctive); (Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading present subjunctive); with subjunctive present, John 2:5; 1 Corinthians 16:2 (Tr WH ἐάν; WH marginal reading aorist subjunctive); ὁ ἐάν τί for ὁ, τί ἄν with subjunctive aorist Ephesians 6:8 (R G); πᾶν ὁ, τί ἄν or ἐάν with subjunctive present, Colossians 3:17, 23 (Rec.; cf. Buttmann, § 139, 19; Winer’s Grammar, § 42, 3).
2. it refers to a single person or thing, but so that regard is had to a general notion or class to which this individual person or thing belongs, and thus it indicates quality: one who, such a one as, of such a nature that (cf. Kühner, § 554 Anm. 1, ii., p. 905; (Jelf, § 816, 5); Lücke on 1 John 1:2, p. 210f): ἡγούμενος, ὅστις ποιμανεῖ, Matthew 2:6; add, Matthew 7:26; Matthew 13:52; Matthew 16:28; Matthew 20:1; Matthew 25:1; Mark 15:7; Luke 2:10; Luke 7:37; Luke 8:3; John 8:25; John 21:25 (Tdf. omits the verse); Acts 11:28; Acts 16:12; Acts 24:1; Romans 11:4; 1 Corinthians 5:1; 1 Corinthians 7:13 (Tdf. εἰ τίς); Galatians 4:24, 26; Galatians 5:19; Philippians 2:20; Colossians 2:23; 2 Timothy 1:5; Hebrews 2:3; Hebrews 8:5; Hebrews 10:11; Hebrews 12:5; James 4:14; 1 John 1:2; Revelation 1:12; Revelation 9:4; Revelation 17:12; ὁ ναός τοῦ Θεοῦ ἅγιος ἐστιν, οἵτινες ἐστε ὑμεῖς (where οἵτινες makes reference to ἅγιος) and such are ye, 1 Corinthians 3:17 (some refer it to ναός).
3. Akin to the last usage is thai whereby it serves to give a reason, such as equivalent to seeing that he, inasmuch as he: Romans 16:12 (here Lachmann brackets the clause); Ephesians 3:13; (Colossians 3:5); Hebrews 8:6; plural, Matthew 7:15; Acts 10:47; Acts 17:11; Romans 1:25, 32; Romans 2:15; Romans 6:2; Romans 9:4; Romans 16:7; 2 Corinthians 8:10; (Philippians 4:3 (where see Lightfoot)); 1 Timothy 1:4; Titus 1:11; 1 Peter 2:11.
4. According to a later Greek usage it is put for the interrogative τίς in direct questions (cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 57; Lachmann, larger edition, vol. i., p. xliii; Buttmann, 253 (218); cf. Winer’s Grammar, 167 (158)); thus in the N. T. the neuter ὁ, τί stands for τί equivalent to διά τί in Mark 2:16 T Tr WH (cf. 7 WH marginal reading); (Jeremiah 2:36; 1 Chronicles 17:6 — for which in the parallel, 2 Samuel 7:7, ἵνα τί appears; Epistle of Barnabas 7, 9 [ET] ((where see Müller); cf. Tdf. Proleg., p. 125; Evang. Nicod. pars i. A. 14:3 p. 245 and note; cf. also Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word, 4)); many interpreters bring in John 8:25 here; but respecting it see ἀρχή, 1 b.
5. It differs scarcely at all from the simple relative ὅς (cf. Matthiae, p. 1073; Buttmann, § 127, 18; (Krüger, § 51, 8; Ellicott on Galatians 4:24; cf. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Handbook. to Modern Greek, Appendix, § 24); but cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opuscc., p. 182f, who stoutly denies it): Luke 2:4; Luke 9:30; Acts 17:10; Acts 23:14; Acts 28:18; Ephesians 1:23.
6. ἕως ὅτου, on which see ἕως, II. 1 b. β., p. 268b middle

Question 18

ὑπέρ

Answer 18

in behalf of, above

(acc.) above, beyond, more than; (gen.) for, in behalf of, for the sake of; in place of
Definition:
(1) gen., above, over; met. in behalf of, Mt. 5:44; Mk. 9:40; Jn. 17:19; instead of beneficially, Phlm. 13; in maintenance of, Rom. 15:8; for the furtherance of, Jn. 11:4; 2 Cor. 1:6, 8; for the realization of, Phil. 2:13; equivalent to περι, about, concerning, with the further signification of interest or concern in the subject, Acts 5:41; Rom. 9:27; 2 Cor. 5:12; 8:23; 2 Thess. 2:1. (2) acc., over, beyond; met. beyond, more than, Mt. 10:37; 2 Cor. 1:8; used after comparative terms, Lk. 16:8; 2 Cor. 12:13; Heb. 4:12. (3) in NT as an adv., in a higher degree, in fuller measure, 2 Cor. 11:23

in behalf of, for the sake of
over, beyond, more than
more, beyond, over

ὑπέρ [ῠ ],

also ὑπείρ, used by Hom. (metri gr.) only in the phrase ὑπεὶρ ἅλα (v. ὑπείρ); Arc. ὁπέρ (q. v.): in Aeol. replaced by περί (v. περί A. V): Pr governing gen. and acc., in Arc. also dat. (Cf. Skt. upaári ‘above’, Goth. ufar, O E. ofer ‘over’: — from it are formed the Comp. and Sup. ὑπέρτερος, -τατος, also Adv. ὕπερθεν, and Nouns ὑπέρα, ὕπερος.)

WITH GENIT.,

I of Place, over;

1 in a state of rest, over, above, freq. in Hom., βάλε.. στέρνον ὑ. μαζοῖο Il. 4.528; χιτωνίσκους ἐνεδεδύκεσαν ὑ. γονάτων not reaching to the knees, X. An. 5.4.13; ἕστηκε.. ὅσον τ’ ὄργυι’ ὑ. αἴης Il. 23.327; εἴθ’ ὑ. γῆς, εἴτ’ ἐπὶ γῆς, εἴθ’ ὑπὸ γῆς Thphr. Ign. 1; στῆ δ’ ἄρ’ ὑ. κεφαλῆς stood over his head as he lay asleep, Il. 2.20, Od. 4.803, al.; πασάων ὕ. ἥ γε κάρη ἔχει 6.107; ὑ. πόλιος, ὅθι Ἕρμαιος λόφος ἐστίν, ἦα 16.471; ὑ. κεφαλῆς οἱ ἐγίνετο διεξελαύνοντι over head, i. e. over the gateway, Hdt. 1.187; ὑ. τῆς ὀροφῆς IG 12.373.246; ὑ. τοῦ ἀγάλματος ib.264; ὄρος τὸ ὑ. Τεγέης Hdt. 6.105; τὰ ὑ. κεφαλῆς the higher ground, X. Ages. 2.20; Ἰονίας ὑ. ἁλὸς οἰκέων on the Ionian sea, i.e. on its shores, Pi. N. 7.65; λιμὴν καὶ πόλις ὑ. αὐτοῦ κεῖται Th. 1.46, cf. 6.4, D.C. 40.14: of relative geographical position, above, farther inland, οἰκέοντες ὑ. Ἁλικαρνησσοῦ μεσόγαιαν Hdt. 1.175; ἐξ Αἰθιοπίας τῆς ὑ. Αἰγύπτου Th. 2.48; τοῖς ὑ. Χερρονήσου Θρᾳξίν X. An. 2.6.2; ὑ. Μασσαλίας Plb. 2.14.8, cf. 5.73.3, al.: in Hellenistic Gr. the acc. is commoner in this sense, v. infr. B. I. of ships at sea, off a place, Th. 1.112, 8.95; ναυμαχίην τὴν ὑ. Μιλήτου γενομένην Hdt. 6.25; ὑ. τούτου (sc. Φαλήρου) ἀνακωχεύσαντες τὰς νέας ib. 116.

2. in a state of motion, over, across, κῦμα νηὸς ὑ. τοίχων καταβήσεται Il. 15.382; τὸν δ’ ὑ. οὐδοῦ βάντα προσηύδα Od. 17.575; πηδῶντος.. τάφρων ὕ. S. Aj. 1279; ὑ. θαλάσσης καὶ χθονὸς ποτωμένοις A. Ag. 576; ἐκκυβιστᾶν ὑ. [τῶν ξιφῶν ] X. Smp. 2.11.
3. over, beyond, ἐν Κρήτῃ εὐρείῃ τηλοῦ ὑ. πόντου Od. 13.257.

II metaph., in defence of, on behalf of, τεῖχος ἐτειχίσσαντο νεῶν ὕ. Il. 7.449; ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ὑ. Δαναῶν 1.444: generally, for the prosperity or safety of, τὰ ἱερὰ ὑ. τῆς Εὐβοίας θῦσαι IG 12.39.65, cf. 45.5; ἱερὰ θυόμενα ὑ. τῆς πόλεως X. Mem. 2.2.13; ἐπιτελεῖν τὰς θυσίας ὑ. τε ὑμῶν καὶ τῶν τέκνων UPZ 14.27 (ii B.C.); in dedications (always with reference to living persons), Σμικύθη μ’ ἀνέθηκεν.. εὐξαμένη.. ὑ. παίδων καὶ ἑαυτῆς IG 12.524, cf. 22.4403, 42(1).569 (Epid.); Ἀρτέμιδι Σωτείρᾳ ὑ. βασιλέως Πτολεμαίου Ἐπικράτης Ἀθηναῖος OGI 18 (Egypt, iii B. C.), cf. 365 (Amasia, ii B. C.), al.; ὑ. τῆς εἰς αἰῶνα διαμονῆς Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος ib.702.3 (Egypt, ii A.D.); ὑ. τῆς τύχης.. Ἀντωνείνου Σεβαστοῦ Εὐσεβοῦς ib.703.2 (Ptolemais, ii A.D.); ὑ. σωτηρίας τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν.. Ἀντωνείνου ib.706 (Egypt, ii/iii A. D.); εὑδόντων ὕ. φρούρημα A. Eu. 705; ὑ. τινὸς κινδυνεύειν, μάχεσθαι, βοηθεῖν, Th. 2.20, Pl. Lg. 642c, X. An. 3.5.6; ἧς ἔθνῃσχ’ ὕ. S. Tr. 708; ὑ. γῆς τῆς Ἀθηναίων ναυμαχέειν Hdt. 8.70; ὑ. τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἀμῦναι Pl. Lg. 692d; ἀμυνῶ ὑ. ἱερῶν καὶ ὁσίων Jusj. ap. Poll. 8.105; νῦν ὑ. πάντων ἀγών A. Pers. 405; ὑ. δόξης τελευτήσαντες D. 23.210, cf. Isoc. 6.93; πάνθ’ ὑ. ὑμῶν φανήσεται πράξας Χαβρίας, καὶ τὴν τελευτὴν αὐτὴν τοῦ βίου πεποιημένος οὐχ ὑ. ἄλλου τινός in your interests, D. 20.80, cf. 83; ὑ. τῆς Ἀσίας στρατηγήσας Isoc. 4.154; of things sought, ὑ. τοῦ νεκροῦ ὠθισμὸς ἐγένετο πολύς Hdt. 7.225; ἀφίκετο ὑ. γενεᾶς, ὑ. φωνᾶς, ὑ. τοῦ θησαυροῦ, IG 42 (1).121.10,42, 123.11 (Epid., iv B.C.); γίνωσκέ με πεπορεῦσθαι εἰς Ἡρακλέους πόλιν ὑ. τῆς οἰκίας UPZ 68.3 (ii B. C.); sts. even of the thing to be averted, ἱκέσιον λόχον δουλοσύνας ὕ. about slavery, A. Th. 111 (lyr.), cf. Aeschin. 3.10.

2. for, instead of, in the name of, ὑ. ἑαυτοῦ τι προϊδεῖν on his own behalf, Th. 1.141; ὑ. τινὸς ἀποκρίνεσθαι Pl. R. 590a; προλέγειν X. An. 7.7.3; ἐπεὶ οὖν σὺ σιωπᾷς, ἐγὼ λέξω καὶ ὑ. σοῦ καὶ ὑ. ἡμῶν Id. Cyr. 3.3.14, cf. S. El. 554; ὑ. Ζήνωνος πράσσων as Zeno’s representative, PSI 4.389.8 (iii B. C.); ἔγραψεν ὑ. αὐτῶν διὰ τὸ φάσκειν αὐτοὺς μὴ εἰδέναι γράμματα PGrenf. 2.17.9 (ii B. C.); θεάσασθε ὃν τρόπον ὑμεῖς ἐστρατηγηκότες πάντ’ ἔσεσθ’ ὑ. Φιλίππου as though by commission from P., D. 3.6; so in other dialects c. acc., v. infr. B. v.
3. in adjurations, with verbs of entreaty, entreat one as representative of another, τῶν ὕ. ἐνθάδ’ ἐγὼ γουνάζομαι οὐ παρεόντων, i. e. I entreat you as they would if they were here, Il. 15.665, cf. 660; then more metaph., by, λίσσομ’ ὑ. ψυχῆς (as you value your life) καὶ γούνων σῶν τε τοκήων 22.338, cf. 24.466; λίσσομ’ ὑ. θυέων καὶ δαίμονος.. σῆς τ’ αὐτοῦ κεφαλῆς καὶ ἑταίρων Od. 15.261; λίσσου’ ὑ. μακάρων σέο τ’ αὐτῆς ἠδὲ τοκήων A.R. 3.701; ὑ. ξενίου λίσσεται ὔμμε Διός in the name of Zeus, AP 7.499.2 (Theaet.); so Aeol. περ (v. περί A. V).
4. of the cause or motive, for, because of, by reason of, ἀλγέων ὕ. E. Supp. 1125 (lyr.); ὑ. παθέων Id. Hipp. 159 (lyr.); ἔριδος ὕ. Id. Andr. 490 (lyr.); of punishment or reward, for, on account of, τοῖσιν ἄγουσιν κλαύμαθ’ ὑπάρξει βραδυτῆτος ὕ. S. Ant. 932 (anap.), cf. Isoc. 11.39, Lys. 3.43, 4.20, 13.41,42, X. An. 1.3.4; ἀτῆθθαι ὑ. τῶ πατρὸς τὰ πατρώϊα the father’s property shall pay the fine for the father, Leg.Gort. 11.42; ἀποτεισάτω ὁ δεσπότης ὑ. τοῦ δούλου PHal. 1.198 (iii B. C.); τοῦτον (viz. a runaway slave) ὃς ἂν ἀναγάγῃ, λήψεται ὅσα καὶ ὑ. τοῦ προγεγραμμένου UPZ 121.24 (ii B. C.); τὸ κατεσκευασμένον ὑ. τῆς ἡμετέρας σωτηρίας Ἰσιδεῖον as a thank-offering for.., Sammelb. 3926.12 (i B. C.); ὑ. ὧν ἐτιμήσαμεν αὐτοὺς ταῖς μεγίσταις τιμαῖς Isoc. 9.57; ἀποδοῦναι χάριν ὑ. ὧν.. ἅπαντας ἀνθρώπους εὐεργέτησεν Id. 4.56; of payment, ἡμιωβέλιον ὑ. ἑκάστου IG 12.140.2; μέτρησον Ποσειδωνίῳ ὑ. Ἡρακλείδου on account of H., i.e. debiting H.’s account, PFay. 16 (i B. C.); μετρήσω ὑ. σοῦ εἰς τὸ δημόσιον for the credit of your account, PAmh. 2.88.22 (ii A. D.); ὑ. λαογραφίας Ostr.Bodl. iii 80 (i A. D.); ὑ. λόγου ἀννώνης Ostr. 1479 (iii A. D.); ὑ. ὧν ἔμαθεν καταβαλεῖν μισθόν Jul. Or. 3.126a, cf. Ael. NA 3.39.
5. ὑ. τοῦ μή c. inf., for the purpose of preventing or avoiding, ὑ. τοῦ μηδένα.. βιαίῳ θανάτῳ ἀποθνῄσκειν X. Hier. 4.3; ὑ. τοῦ μὴ ποιεῖν τὸ προσταττόμενον Isoc. 7.64, cf. 12.80; τὴν πόλιν ἐκλιπεῖν ὑπέμειναν.. ὑ. τοῦ μὴ τὸ κελευόμενον ποιῆσαι D. 18.204: also without μή, for the sake of, ὑ. τοῦτοῖς ἄλλοις ἐπιτάττειν ἐθέλειν ἀποθνῄσκειν to be ready to die for the sake of.., Isoc. 6.94; μὴ τοσαύτην ποιεῖσθαι σπουδὴν ὑ. τοῦ βλάψαι τοὺς πολεμίους ἡλίκην ὑ. τοῦ μηδὲν αὐτοὺς παθεῖν δεινόν Plb. 3.94.9, cf. 5.32.1, 5.86.8: this constr. is found also in signf. A. 111.

III concerning, ὑ. σέθεν αῐσχε’ ἀκούω Il. 6.524; κᾶρυξ ἀνέειπέ νιν ἀγγέλλων Ἱέρωνος ὑ. καλλινίκου ἅρμασι Pi. P. 1.32; Σκύθαι μὲν ὧδε ὑ. σφέων τε αὐτῶν καὶ τῆς χώρης τῆς κατύπερθε λέγουσι Hdt. 4.8; τὰ λεγόμενα ὑ. ἑκάστων v.l. in Id. 2.123; τοὺς ὑ. τοῦ αἰῶνος φόβους Epicur. Sent. 20; διαλεχθῆναι, ἀγορεύειν ὑ. τινός, Pl. Ap. 39e, Lg. 776e; περὶ μὲν οὖν τούτων τοσαῦτά μοι εἰρήσθω, ὑ. ὧν δέ μοι προσήκει λέγειν.. Lys. 24.4, cf. 21, 16.20; ὑ. οὗ.. ὁμολογῶ.. διαφέρεσθαι τούτοις D. 18.31; βουλευομένων ὑ. τοῦ ποίαν τινὰ [εἰρήνην ποιητέον ] Id. 19.94; ἔγραψάς μοι ὑ. τῶν καμίνων PCair.Zen. 273.2 (iii B. C.); ἐνεκάλουν ὑ. σύκων PSI 6.554.24 (iii B. C.); ἐπεδώκαμέν σοι ὑπόμνημα ὑ. τοῦ μὴ εἰληφέναι τὴν.. ὄλυραν UPZ 46.4 (ii B. C.); συλλαλήσαντες ὑ. τοῦ τὴν πόλιν ἐνδοῦναι τοῖς Ῥωμαίοις Plb. 1.43.1; θροῦς ὑ. τοῦ τὸν Λυκοῦργον ἐκπέμπειν talk of sending L., Id. 5.18.5, cf. 6; γνώμην ὑ. τῆς κοινῆς [δόξης ] Isoc. 6.93; ὑ. τῶν τούτου λῃτουργιῶν.. ὡδὶ γιγνώσκω D. 21.152; ἐκ τῶν ἐμφανῶν ὑ. τῶν ἀφανῶν πιστεύειν Jul. Or. 4.138b; with vbs. expressing emotion, ποίας.. γυναικὸς ἐκφοβεῖσθ’ ὕ.; S. OT 989; εἰ τὰ παρὰ σοὶ καλῶς ἔχει, θάρρει ὑ. ἐκείνων X. Cyr. 7.1.17; οὐδεὶς ὑ. μου δαιμόνων μηνίεται κατασφαγείσης A. Eu. 101 (approaching sense 11.1).

WITH ACCUS.,

I of Place in reference to motion, over, beyond, freq. in Hom., e.g. ὑ. ὦμον ἤλυθ’ ἀκωκή Il. 5.16, cf. 851; ἀλάλησθε.. ὑπεἰρ ἅλα Od. 3.73, cf. 7.135, al., A. Eu. 250, S. Ant. 1145 (lyr.); ὑ. τὸν δρύφακτον ὑπερτιθέμενοι Plb. 1.22.10: without such reference, ὑ. Ἡρακλείας στήλας ἔξω κατοικοῦσι Pl. Criti. 108e, cf. Jul. Or. 1.6d; τὰς κεφαλὰς ὑ. τὸ ὑγρὸν ὑπερίσχον Plb. 3.84.9; τῶν ὑ. τὸ Σαρδῷον πέλαγος τόπων Id. 2.14.6; ὑ. Μασσαλίαν Id. 2.16.1; λόφον κείμενον ὑ. τὴν ὁδόν Id. 2.27.5, cf. 3.47.2, al.; τῶν συριῶν ὑ. τὴν σκηνὴν οὐσῶν PHib. 1.38.7 (iii B. C.); οὐλὴ.. ὑ. ὀφρὺν δεξιάν PCair.Zen. 76.13 (iii B. C.); τὸ ὑ. τὸν ἔσχατον.. σπόνδυλον Sor. 1.102; ὑ. τὸν οὐρανόν Jul. Or. 4.135a.

II of Measure, above, exceeding, beyond, ὑ. τὸν ἀλαθῆ λόγον Pi. O. 1.28; ὑ. τὸ βέλτιστον A. Ag. 378 (lyr.); ὑ. ἐλπίδα S. Ant. 366 (lyr.); ὑ. δύναμιν Th. 6.16; μεγέθει ὑ. τοὺς ἐν τῇ νηΐ Pl. R. 488b; ὑ. ἄνθρωπον εἶναι Id. Lg. 839d, Luc. Vit.Auct. 2; ὑ. ἡμᾶς beyond our powers, Pl. Prm. 128b; ὑ. τὴν ἀξίαν E. HF 146; ὑ. τὴν οὐσίαν Pl. R. 372b; ὑ. τὸ ὕδωρ (cf. ὕδωρ 1.4) Luc. Pr.Im. 29. after Comp., than, δυνατώτεροι ὑ… LXX Jd. 18.26: so after Posit., τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς ὑ. αὐτόν better than he, ib. 3 Ki. 2.32.

2. of transgression, in violation of, ὑ. αἶσαν, opp. κατ’ αἶσαν, Il. 3.59, al.; ὑ. Διὸς αἶσαν 17.321; ὑ. μοῖραν 20.336; ὑ. μόρον (or ὑπέρμορον) ib. 30; ὑ. θεόν 17.327; ὑ. ὅρκια 3.299, al.

III of Number, above, upwards of, τὰ ὑ. δέκα μνᾶς [ξυμβόλαια ] IG 12.41.23, cf. 22.48, al.; ὑ. τεσσεράκοντα ἄνδρας Hdt. 5.64; ὑ. τετταράκοντα (sc. ἔτη) X. HG 5.4.13; ὑ. τὰ στρατεύσιμα ἔτη γεγονόσι Id. Cyr. 1.2.4; ὑ. ἥμισυ more than half, ib. 3.3.47. of Time, beyond, i.e. before, earlier than, ὁ ὑ. τὰ Μηδικὰ πόλεμος Th. 1.41; ὑ. τὴν φθοράν Pl. Ti. 23c. in some dialects, in sense A. 11.1,2, on behalf of, ὑ. τὰν πόλιν SIG 437 (Delph., iii B. C.), al., cf. IG 42(1).109iv113 (Epid., iii B. C.), 5(2).438-40,442 (Megalop., ii B. C.), 42(1).380,665 (Epid., i A. D.), IPE 4.71.10 (Cherson., ii A. D.); in sense A. 111, concerning, ἐπικράνθη μοι ὑ. ὑμᾶς LXX Ruth 1:13.

WITH DAT., only Arc., μαχόμενοι ὑ. τᾷ τᾶς πόλιος ἐλευθερίᾳ fighting for.., IG 5(2).16 (Tegea, iii B. C.).

POSITION: ὑπέρ may follow its Subst., but then by anastrophe becomes ὕπερ, Il. 5.339, Od. 19.450, al., S. OT 1444, etc. AS ADV., over-much, above measure, ὑπὲρ μὲν ἄγαν E. Med. 627 (lyr.); also written ὑπεράγαν, Str. 3.2.9, Ael. NA 3.38, etc.; cf. ὑπέρφευ: as a predicate, διάκονοι Χριστοῦ εἰσι; ὑπὲρ ἐγώ I am more [than they], 2 Corinthians 11:23.

IN COMPO S. ὑπέρ signifies over, above, in all relations, e. g.,

1 of Place, over, beyond, as in ὑπεράνω, ὑπέργειος, ὑπερβαίνω, ὑπερπόντιος.

2. of doing a thing for or in defence of, as in ὑπερμαχέω, ὑπερασπίζω, ὑπεραλγέω.
3. above measure, as in ὑπερήφανος, ὑπερφίαλος.

ὑπέρ (cf. English up, over, etc.), Latin super, over, a preposition, which stands before either the genitive or the accusative according as it is used to express the idea of state and rest or of motion over and beyond a place.

I. with the genitive; cf. Winer’s Grammar, 382f (358f).
1. properly, of place, i. e. of position, situation, extension: over, above, beyond, across. In this sense it does not occur in the N. T.; but there it always, though joined to other classes of words, has a tropical signification derived from its original meaning.
2. equivalent to Latinpro, for, i. e. for one’s safety, for one’s advantage or benefit (one who does a thing for another, is conceived of as standing or bending ‘over’ the one whom he would shield or defend (cf. Winer’s Grammar, as above)): προσεύχεσθε ὑπέρ τῶν …, Matthew 5:44; Luke 6:28 (T Tr marginal reading WH περί (see 6 below)); Colossians 1:3 L Tr WH marginal reading (see 6 below); (James 5:16 L Tr marginal reading WH text), 9; εὔχομαι, James 5:16 (R G T Tr text WH marginal reading); after δέομαι, Acts 8:24; and nouns denoting prayer, as δέησις, Romans 10:1; 2 Corinthians 1:11; 2 Corinthians 9:14; Philippians 1:4; Ephesians 6:19; προσευχή, Acts 12:5 (here L T Tr WH περί (see 6 below)); Romans 15:30; 1 Timothy 2:1, 2; εἶναι ὑπέρ τίνος (opposed to κατά τίνος), to be for one i. e. to be on one’s side, to favor and further one’s cause, Mark 9:40; Luke 9:50; Romans 8:31, cf. 2 Corinthians 13:8; τό ὑπέρ τίνος that which is for one’s advantage, Philippians 4:10 (but see ἀναθάλλω and φρονέω, at the end); ἐντυγχάνω and ὑπερεντυγχάνω, Romans 8:26 R G, 27,34; Hebrews 7:25, cf. Hebrews 9:24; λέγω, Acts 26:1 R WH text (see 6 below); μερίμνω, 1 Corinthians 12:25; ἀγρύπνω, Hebrews 13:17; ἀγωνίζομαι ἐν ταῖς προσευχαῖς, Colossians 4:12, cf. Romans 15:30; πρεσβεύω, Ephesians 6:20; 2 Corinthians 5:20; with a substantive: ζῆλος, 2 Corinthians 7:7; (Colossians 4:13 Rec.); πόνος, Colossians 4:13 (G L T Tr WH); σπουδή, 2 Corinthians 7:12; 2 Corinthians 8:16; διάκονος, Colossians 1:7; to offer offerings for, Acts 21:26; to enter the heavenly sanctuary for (used of Christ), Hebrews 6:20; ἀρχειρεα καθίστασθαι, Hebrews 5:1; after the ideas of suffering, dying, giving up life, etc.: Romans 9:3; Romans 16:4; 2 Corinthians 12:15; after τήν ψυχήν τιθέναι (ὑπέρ τίνος), in order to avert ruin, death, etc., from one, John 10:11; John 13:37f; of Christ dying to procure salvation for his own, John 10:15; John 15:13; 1 John 3:16; Christ is said τό αἷμα αὐτοῦ ἐκχύνειν, passive, Mark 14:24 L T Tr WH (see 6 below); Luke 22:20 (WH reject the passage); ἀπολέσθαι, John 18:14 Rec.; ἀποθνῄσκειν, John 11:50ff; ( L T Tr WH); Acts 21:13; Romans 5:7; of Christ undergoing death for man’s salvation, Romans 5:6, 8; Romans 14:15; 1 Thessalonians 5:10 (here T Tr WH text περί (see 6 below); 1 Peter 3:18 L T Tr WH text); γεύεσθαι θανάτου, Hebrews 2:9; σταυρωθῆναι, 1 Corinthians 1:13 (here L text Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading περί (see 6 below)); (of God giving up his Son, Romans 8:32); παραδιδόναι τινα ἑαυτόν, Galatians 2:20; Ephesians 5:2, 25; διδόναι ἑαυτόν, Titus 2:14; with a predicate accusative added, ἀντίλυτρον, 1 Timothy 2:6; τό σῶμα αὐτοῦ διδόναι, passive, Luke 22:19 (WH reject the passage), cf. 1 Corinthians 11:24; τυθῆναι (θυθῆναι, see θύω, at the beginning), 1 Corinthians 5:7; παθεῖν, 1 Peter 2:21; 1 Peter 3:18 (R G WH marginal reading; 4:1 R G); ἁγιάζειν ἑαυτόν, John 17:19. Since what is done for one’s advantage frequently cannot be done without acting in his stead (just as the apostles teach that the death of Christ inures to our salvation because it has the force of an expiatory sacrifice and was suffered in our stead), we easily understand how ὑπέρ, like the Latinpro and our for, comes to signify
3. in the place of, instead of (which is more precisely expressed by ἀντί; hence, the two prepositions are interchanged by Irenaeus, adv. haer. 5, 1, τῷ ἰδίῳ αἵματι λυτρωσαμένου ἡμᾶς τοῦ κυρίου καί δόντος τήν ψυχήν ὑπέρ τῶν ἡμετέρων ψυχῶν καί τήν σάρκα τήν ἑαυτοῦ ἀντί τῶν ἡμετέρων σαρκῶν): ἵνα ὑπέρ σου μοι διακονῇ, Philemon 1:13; ὑπέρ τῶν νεκρῶν βαπτίζεσθαι (see βαπτίζω, at the end), 1 Corinthians 15:29; (add, Colossians 1:7 L text Tr text WH text); in expressions concerning the death of Christ: εἷς ὑπέρ πάντων ἀπέθανεν (for the inference is drawn ἄρα οἱ πάντες ἀπέθανον, i. e. all are reckoned as dead), 2 Corinthians 5:14(15),15; add, 21; Galatians 3:13. (On this debated sense of ὑπέρ, see Meyer and Van Hengel on Romans 5:6; Ellicott on Galatians and Philemon, the passages cited; Wieseler on Galatians 1:4; Trench, Synonyms, § lxxxii.; Winer’s Grammar, 383 (358) note.) Since anything, whether of an active or passive character which is undertaken on behalf of a person or thing, is undertaken ‘on account of’ that person or thing, ὑπέρ is used
4. of the impelling or moving cause; on account of, for the sake of, any person or thing: ὑπέρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζοης, to procure (true) life for mankind, John 6:51; to do or suffer anything ὑπέρ τοῦ ὀνόματος Θεοῦ, Ἰησοῦ, τοῦ κυρίου: Acts 5:41; Acts 9:16; Acts 15:26; Acts 21:13; Romans 1:5; 3 John 1:7; πάσχειν ὑπέρ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, Philippians 1:29; ὑπέρ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ, 2 Thessalonians 1:5; στενοχωριαι ὑπέρ τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 2 Corinthians 12:10 (it is better to connect ὑπέρ etc. here with εὐδοκῶ); ἀποθνῄσκειν ὑπέρ Θεοῦ, Ignatius ad Rom. 4 [ET]. examples with a genitive of the thing are, John 11:4; Romans 15:8; 2 Corinthians 1:6; 2 Corinthians 12:19; ὑπέρ τῆς εὐδοκίας, to satisfy (his) good-pleasure, Philippians 2:13; with a genitive of the person, 2 Corinthians 1:6; Ephesians 3:1, 13; Colossians 1:24; δοξάζειν, εὐχαριστεῖν ὑπέρ τίνος (genitive of the thing), Romans 15:9; 1 Corinthians 10:30; ὑπέρ πάντων, for all favors, Ephesians 5:20; ἐυηξαρίστειν ὑπέρ with a genitive of the person, Romans 1:8 (here L T Tr WH περί (see 6 below)); 2 Corinthians 1:11; Ephesians 1:16; ἀγῶνα ἔχειν ὑπέρ with a genitive of the person Colossians 2:1 L T Tr WH (see 6 below); ὑπέρ (τῶν) ἁμαρτιῶν (or ἀγνοημάτων), to offer sacrifices, Hebrews 5:1, 3 (here L T Tr WH περί (see 6 below)); ; ἀποθανεῖν, of Christ, 1 Corinthians 15:3; ἑαυτόν δοῦναι, Galatians 1:4 R WH text (see 6 below).
5. Like the Latinsuper (cf. Klotz, HWB, d. Latin Spr. ii, p. 1497b; (Harpers’ Latin Dict. under the word, II. B. 2 b.)), it frequently refers to the object under consideration, concerning, of, as respects, with regard to ((cf. Buttmann, § 147, 21); examples from secular authors are given in Winer’s Grammar, 383 (358f)); so after καυχᾶσθαι, καύχημα, καύχησις (R. V. on behalf of): 2 Corinthians 5:12; 2 Corinthians 7:4, 14; 2 Corinthians 8:24; 2 Corinthians 9:2; 2 Corinthians 12:5; 2 Thessalonians 1:4 (here L T Tr WH εγ( (or εν() καυχᾶσθαι); φυσιουσθαι, 1 Corinthians 4:6 (others refer this to 4 above; see Meyer edition Heinrici (cf. φυσιόω, 2 at the end)); ἐλπίς, 2 Corinthians 1:7 (6); ἀγνοεῖν, 8 (here L T Tr WH marginal reading περί (see 6 below)); φρονεῖν, Philippians 1:7 (2 Macc. 14:8); ἐρωτᾶν, 2 Thessalonians 2:1; κράζειν, to proclaim concerning, Romans 9:27; (παρακαλεῖν, 1 Thessalonians 3:2 G L T Tr WH (see 6 below)); after εἰπεῖν, John 1:30 L T Tr WH (see 6 below); (so after verbs of saying, writing, etc., 2 Samuel 18:5; 2 Chronicles 31:9; Joel 1:3; Judith 15:4; 1 Esdr. 4:49; 2 Macc. 11:35); εἴτε ὑπέρ Τίτου, whether inquiry be made about Titus, 2 Corinthians 8:23; ὑπέρ τούτου, concerning this, 2 Corinthians 12:8.
6. In the N. T. manuscripts, as in those of secular authors also, the prepositions ὑπέρ and περί are confounded (cf. Winers Grammar, 383 (358) note; § 50, 3; Buttmann, § 147, 21; Kühner, § 435, I. 2 e.; Meisterhans, § 49, 12; also Wieseler or Ellicott on Galatians, as below; Meyer on 1 Corinthians 15:3 (see περί, the passage cited δ.)); this occurs in the following passages: Mark 14:24; (Luke 6:28); John 1:30; Acts 12:5; Acts 26:1; Romans 1:8; 1 Corinthians 1:13; 2 Corinthians 1:8; Galatians 1:4; Colossians 1:3; Colossians 2:1; (1 Thessalonians 3:2; 1 Thessalonians 5:10); Hebrews 5:3. (For ὑπέρ ἐκ περισσοῦ or ὑπέρ ἐκπερισσοῦ, see ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ.)
II. with the accusative (cf. Winers Grammar, § 49, e.); over, beyond, away over; more than;
1. properly, of the place ‘over’ or ‘beyond’ which, as in the Greek writings from Homer down; not thus used in the N. T., where it is always
2. metaphorically, of the measure or degree exceeded (cf. Buttmann, § 147, 21);
a. universally: εἶναι ὑπέρ τινα, to be above i. e. superior to one, Matthew 10:24; Luke 6:40; τό ὄνομα τό ὑπέρ πᾶν ὄνομα namely, ὄν, the name superior to every (other) name, Philippians 2:9; κεφαλήν ὑπέρ πάντα namely, οὖσαν, the supreme head or lord (A. V. head over all things), Ephesians 1:22; ὑπέρ δοῦλον ὄντα, more than a servant, Philemon 1:16; more than (R. V. beyond), Philemon 1:21; ὑπέρ πάντα, above (i. e. more and greater than) all, Ephesians 3:20a; ὑπέρ τήν λαμπρότητα τοῦ ἡλίου, above (i. e. surpassing) the brightness of the sun, Acts 26:13; more (to a greater degree) than, φιλεῖν τινα ὑπέρ τινα, Matthew 10:37 (examples from secular authors are given by Fritzsche at the passage); beyond, 1 Corinthians 4:6; 2 Corinthians 12:6; ὑπέρ ὁ δύνασθε, beyond what ye are able, beyond your strength, 1 Corinthians 10:13 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 590 (549)); also ὑπέρ δύναμιν, 2 Corinthians 1:8; opposed to κατά δύναμιν (as in Homer, Iliad 3, 59 κατ’ Αισαν, ὀυδ’ ὑπέρ Αισαν, cf. 6, 487; 17, 321. 327), 2 Corinthians 8:3 (where L T Tr WH παρά δύναμιν).
b. with words implying comparison: προκόπτειν, Galatians 1:14; of the measure beyond which one is reduced, ή῾ττασθαι, 2 Corinthians 12:13 (Winer’s Grammar, § 49 e.), (πλεονάζω, 1 Esdr. 8:72; περισσεύω, 1 Macc. 3:30; ὑπερβάλω, Sir. 25:11); after comparatives equivalent to than, Luke 16:8; Hebrews 4:12 (Judges 11:25; 1 Kings 19:4; Sir. 30:17); cf. Winers Grammar, § 35, 2; (Buttmann, § 147, 21).
c. ὑπέρ is used adverbially; as, ὑπέρ ἐγώ (L ὑπερεγώ (cf. Winers Grammar, 46 (45)), WH ὑπέρ ἐγώ (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 14, 2 Note)), much more (or in a much greater degree) I, 2 Corinthians 11:23; cf. Kypke at the passage; Winer’s Grammar, 423 (394). (For ὑπέρ λίαν see ὑπερλίαν.)
III. In Composition ὑπέρ denotes
1. over, above, beyond: ὑπεράνω, ὑπερέκεινα, ὑπερεκτείνω.
2. excess of measure, more than: ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ, ὑπερνικάω.
3. aid, for; in defense of: ὑπερεντυγχάνω. Cf. Viger. edition Hermann, p. 668; Fritzsche on Romans, vol. i., p. 351; (Ellicott on Ephesians 3:20).

Question 19

ἐγείρω

Answer 19

ἐγερῶ, ἤγειρα, -, ἐγήγερμαι, ἠγέρθην

to arise, wake, to stand from a prone or sleeping position; to heal, raise to life; to cause something to exist: raise up (give birth to) a child
Definition:
To arise, to stand from a prone or sleeping position. From this base meaning are several fig. extended meanings: to wake from sleep; to restore from a dead or damaged state: to heal, raise to life; to cause something to exist: raise up (give birth to) a child

To excite, arouse, awaken, Mt. 8:25; mid. to awake, Mt. 2:13, 20, 21; met. mid. to rouse one’s self to a better course of conduct, Rom. 13:11; Eph. 5:14; to raise from the dead, Jn. 12:1; and mid. to rise from the dead, Mt. 27:52; Jn. 5:21; met. to raise as it were from the dead, 2 Cor. 4:14; to raise up, cause to rise up from a prone posture, Acts 3:7; and mid. to rise up, Mt. 17:7; to restore to health, Jas. 5:15; met. et seq. ἐπή, to excite to war; mid. to rise up against, Mt. 24:7; to raise up again, rebuild, Jn. 2:19, 20; to raise up from a lower place, to draw up or out of a ditch, Mt. 12:10; from Hebrew, to raise up, to cause to arise or exist, Acts 13:22, 23; mid. to arise, exist, appear, Mt. 3:9; 11:11

to arouse, cause to rise
to arouse from sleep, to awake
to arouse from the sleep of death, to recall the dead to life
to cause to rise from a seat or bed etc.
to raise up, produce, cause to appear
to cause to appear, bring before the public
to raise up, stir up, against one
to raise up i.e. cause to be born
of buildings, to raise up, construct, erect

ἐγείρω,

Aeol. inf. ἐγέρρην Alc. Supp. 16.12, cf. Et.Gud. 157.48: impf. ἔγειρον Il. 15.594: fut. ἐγερῶ Pl. Epigr. 28 (cf. ἐξ-, ἐπ -): aor. ἤγειρα, ἔγ - Od. 15.44: pf. ἐγήγερκα Philostr. 16: plpf. - κειν J. AJ 17.7.4, D.C. 42.48: — Pass., Pl. R. 330e, etc.: fut. ἐγερθήσομαι Babr. 49.3 (also fut. Med. ἐγεροῦμαι dub. in Polyaen. 1.30.5): aor. ἠγέρθην Hdt. 4.9, etc.; Ephesians 3:1-21 pl. ἔγερθεν v.l. for ἄγ. in Il. 23.287: pf. ἐγήγερμαι v.l. in Th. 7.51: plpf. ἐγήγερτο Luc. Alex. 19: also, in pass. sense, poet. aor. ἠγρόμην (ἐξ -) Ar. Ra. 51; 3 sg. ἔγρετο, imper. ἔγρεο, Il. 2.41, Od. 23.5; 2 sg. subj. ἔγρῃ Ar. V. 774; opt. ἔγροιτο Od. 6.113; inf. ἐγρέσθαι (freq. written ἔγρεσθαι, as if from a pres. ἔγρομαι, cf. ἔγρω) ib. 13.124; part. ἐγρόμενος 10.50 (and late Prose, Iamb. Myst. 1.15): intr. pf. ἐγρήγορα (as pres.) Ar. Lys. 306, Pl. Prt. 310b, etc.: plpf. ἠγρηγόρη (as impf.) Ar. Ec. 32; 3 pl. ἐγρηγόρεσαν Id. Pl. 744; 3 sg. ἐγρηγόρει X. Cyr. 1.4.20: pf. 3 pl. ἐγρηγόρθασι Il. 10.419; imper. ἐγρήγορθε (v.infr. 11); inf. ἐγρήγορθαι ib. 67.

I Act.,

1. awaken, rouse, ἐ. τινὰ ἐξ ὕπνου 5.413, etc.; τοὺς δ’.. ὑπνώοντας ἐγείρει 24.344; ἐ. τινὰ εὐνῆς E. HF 1050 lyr.); simply, ἐ. τινά A. Eu. 140, etc.: metaph., τὰς τέχνας Theoc. 21.1.
2. rouse, stir up, Il. 5.208; ἐπεί μιν ἔγειρε Διὸς νόος 15.242; ἐγείρειν Ἄρηα stir the fight, 2.440, etc.; ἐ. μάχην, φύλοπιν, etc., 13.778, 5.496, etc.; Τρωσὶν θυμὸν ἐ. (v.l. ἀγεῖραι) ib. 510; ἐ. τινὰ ἐπὶ ἔργον Hes. Op. 20; ἔγειρε νῆα h.Ap. 408; ἐκδοχὴν πομποῦ πυρὸς ἐ. wake up the bale-fire, A. Ag. 299; λαμπάδας ἐ. Ar. Ra. 340: freq. metaph., ἐ. ἀοιδάν, λύραν, μέλος, θρῆνον, Pi. P. 9.104, N. 10.21, Cratin. 222, S. OC 1778 (anap.); μῦθον Pl. Plt. 272d; τὸ οὖς ἐ. ‘ prick up ‘ the ears, Plot. 5.1.12.
3. raise from the dead, νεκρούς Matthew 10:8; 1 Corinthians 15:42 (Pass.); or from a sick-bed, James 5:15.
4. raise, erect a building, Hyp. Fr. 103, Call. Ap. 64, OGI 677.3 (ii A. D.); ναόν John 2:19, cf. Luc. Alex. 10: — Pass., στῦλος ἐγηγερμένος Bito 66.5, cf. Plu. Alex. 19, Jul. Caes. 320c.

II Pass., with pf. Act. ἐγρήγορα,

1. wake, ἐγειρομένων ἀνθρώπων Od. 20.100, cf. Hdt. 4.9, etc.; ἔγρετο δ’ ἐξ ὕπνου Il. 2.41: metaph., ἐγειρόμενος εἰς ἐμαυτὸν ἐκ τοῦ σώματος Plot. 4.8.1: in pf., to be awake, ἐγρηγόρθασι Il. 10.419; ἐγρήγορθε stay awake ! 7.371, 18.299 (whereas ἔγρεο is wake up ! Od. 15.46); ἐγρήγορας ἢ καθεύδεις; Pl. Prt. 310b; πόλις ζῶσα καὶ ἐγρηγορυῖα Id. Lg. 809d; καὶ ἐφρόνει καὶ ἐγρηγόρει X. Cyr. 1.4.20, etc.; of things, ἐγειρομένου χειμῶνος arising, Hdt. 7.49: so metaph., τὰ ἐκ τοῦ βαρβάρου ἐγειρόμενα ib. 148; ἐγρηγορὸς φρούρημα A. Eu. 706; ἐ. τὸ πῆμα Id. Ag. 346, etc.
2. rouse or stir oneself, be excited by passion, etc., Hes. Sc. 176, D. 19.305: c. inf., ἐγηγερμένοι ἦσαν μὴ ἀνιέναι τὰ τῶν Ἀθηναίων they were encouraged to prevent the departure of the Athenians, v.l. in Th. 7.51.

III intr. in Act., arouse oneself, Aesop. 16b. in ἀμφὶ πυρὴν.. ἔγρετο λαός Il. 7.434, 24.789, ἔγρ. is for ἤγρ- (ἀγείρω); so in Maiist. 52.

ἐγείρω; future ἐγερῶ 1 aorist ἤγειρα; passive, present ἐγείρομαι, imperative 2 person singular ἐγείρου (Mark 2:9 Tr WH), Luke 8:54 (where L Tr WH ἔγειρε), 2 person plural ἐγείρεσθε; perfect ἐγήγερμαι; 1 aorist ἠγέρθην (cf. Buttmann, 52 (45); Winer’s Grammar, § 38, 1); 1 future ἐγερθήσομαι; middle, 1 aorist imperative ἐγεῖραι Rec.; but, after good manuscripts, Griesbach has in many passages and lately L T Tr WH have everywhere in the N. T. restored ἔγειρε, present active imperative used intransitively and employed as a formula for arousing; properly, rise, i. e. “Up! Come!” cf. ἄγε; so in Euripides, Iph. A. 624; Aristophanes ran. 340; cf. Fritzsche on Mark, p. 55; (Buttmann, 56 (49), 144f (126f); Kühner, § 373, 2); the Sept. generally for הֵעִיר and הֵקִים; to arouse, cause to rise;

1. as in Greek writings from Homer down, to arouse from sleep, to awake: Acts 12:7; (Mark 4:38 T Tr WH); passive to be awaked, wake up, (A. V. arise, often including thus the subsequent action (cf. 3 below)): Matthew 25:7; Mark 4:27; (ἀπό τοῦ ὕπνου, Matthew 1:24 L T Tr WH); ἐγερθείς with the imperative Matthew 2:13, 20; with a finite verb, Matthew 2:14, 21; Matthew 8:26; (Luke 8:24 R G L Tr marginal reading); ἐγείρεσθε, Matthew 26:46; Mark 14:42. Metaphorically, ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι, to arise from a state of moral sloth to an active life devoted to God, Romans 13:11; likewise ἔγειρε (Rec. ἐγεῖραι) arise, ὁ καθεύδων, Ephesians 5:14.
2. to arouse from the sleep of death, to recall the dead to life: with νεκρούς added, John 5:21; Acts 26:8; 2 Corinthians 1:9. ἔγειρε [Rec. ἐγεῖραι) arise, Mark 5:41; passive ἐγείρου, Luke 8:54 (R GT); ἐγέρθητι, arise from death, Luke 7:14; ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί, Matthew 11:5; Luke 7:22; Luke 20:37; 1 Corinthians 15:15, 16, 29, 32 (Isaiah 26:19); ἐγείρειν ἐκ νεκρῶν, from the company of the dead (cf. Winers Grammar, 123 (117); Buttmann, 89 (78)), John 12:1, 9; Acts 3:15; Acts 4:10; Acts 13:30; Romans 4:24; Romans 8:11; Romans 10:9; Galatians 1:1; Ephesians 1:20; Colossians 2:12; 1 Thessalonians 1:10; Hebrews 11:19; 1 Peter 1:21; passive, Romans 6:4, 9; Romans 7:4; 1 Corinthians 15:12, 20; John 2:22; John 21:14; Mark 6:16 (T WH omits; Tr brackets ἐκ νεκρῶν); Luke 9:7; (Matthew 17:9 L T Tr WH text); ἀπό τῶν νεκρῶν, Matthew 14:2; Matthew 27:64; Matthew 28:7 (νεκρόν ἐκ θανάτου καί ἐξ ᾅδου, Sir. 48:5; for הֵקִיץ, 2 Kings 4:31); ἐγείρειν simply: Acts 5:30; Acts 10:40; Acts 13:37; 1 Corinthians 6:14; 2 Corinthians 4:14; passive, Matthew 16:21; Matthew 17:23 (L WH marginal reading ἀναστήσεται); (Matthew 20:19 T Tr text WH text); ; Mark ( T WH (see above)); ; Luke 24:6 (WH reject the clause), ; Romans 4:25; 1 Corinthians 15:4, etc.
3. in later usage generally to cause to rise, raise, from a seat, bed, etc.; passive and middle to rise, arise; used a. of one sitting: ἐγείρεται (L Tr WH ἠγέρθη) ταχύ, John 11:29, cf. John 11:20; present active imperative ἔγειρε (see above), Mark 10:49 (not Rec.), cf. Mark 10:46; hence (like the Hebrew קוּם, Genesis 22:3; 1 Chronicles 22:19), in the redundant manner spoken of under the word ἀνίστημι, II. 1 c. it is used before verbs of going, etc.: ἐγερθείς ἠκολούθει (ἠκολούθησεν R G) αὐτῷ, Matthew 9:19; ἔγειρε (R G ἐγεῖραι) καί μέτρησον, Revelation 11:1.
   b. of one reclining: ἐγείρεται ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου, John 13:4; ἐγείρεσθε, John 14:31.
   c. of one lying, to raise up: ἤγειρεν αὐτόν, Acts 10:26; ἐγέρθητε arise, Matthew 17:7; ἔγειρε (see above) Acts 3:6 (L Tr text brackets); ἠγέρθη ἀπό τῆς γῆς, he rose from the earth, Acts 9:8; to (raise up, i. e.) draw out an animal from a pit, Matthew 12:11.
   d. of one ‘down’ with disease, lying sick: active, Mark 9:27; Acts 3:7; ἐγερεῖ αὐτόν ὁ κύριος, will cause him to recover, James 5:15; passive Matthew 8:15; ἔγειρε ((Rec. ἐγεῖραι, so Griesbach (doubtfully in Matt.)), see above) arise: Matthew 9:5; John 5:8; Acts 3:6 (T WH omit; Tr brackets).
4. To raise up, produce, cause to appear;
   a. to cause to appear, bring before the public (anyone who is to attract the attention of men): ἤγειρε τῷ Ἰσραήλ σωτῆρα, Acts 13:23 Rec.; ἤγειρεν αὐτοῖς τόν Δαυειδ εἰς βασιλέα, Acts 13:22 (so הֵקִים, Judges 2:18; Judges 3:9, 15); passive ἐγείρομαι, to come before the public, to appear, arise”: Matthew 11:11; Matthew 24:11, 24; Mark 13:22; Luke 7:16; John 7:52 (cf. Winers Grammar, 266 (250); Buttmann, 204 (177)); contextually, to appear before a judge: Matthew 12:42; Luke 11:31.
   b. ἐπί τινα to raise up, incite, stir up, against one; passive to rise against: Matthew 24:7; Mark 13:8; Luke 21:10.
   c. to raise up i. e. cause to be born: τέκνα τίνι, Matthew 3:9; Luke 3:8; κέρας σωτηρίας, Luke 1:69 (see ἀνίστημι, I c. ἐξανίστημι, 1); θλῖψιν τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου, to cause affliction to arise to my bonds, i. e. tire misery of my imprisonment to be increased by tribulation, Philippians 1:16-17L T Tr WH.
   d. of buildings, to raise, construct, erect: τόν ναόν, John 2:19f (so הֵקִים, Deuteronomy 16:22; 1 Kings 16:32. Aelian de nat. an. 11, 10; Josephus, Antiquities 4, 6, 5; Herodian, 3, 15, 6 (3rd edition, Bekker); 8, 2, 12 (5th edition, Bekker); Lucian, Pseudomant. § 19; Anthol. 9, 696. 1 Esdr. 5:43; Sir. 49:13; Latinexcito turrem, Caesar b. g. 5, 40;sepulcrum, Cicero, legg. 2, 27, 68). (Ammonius: ἀναστῆναι καί ἐγερθῆναι διαφέρει. ἀναστῆναι μέν γάρ ἐπί ἔργον, ἐγερθῆναι δέ ἐξ ὕπνου; cf. also Thomas Magister, Ritschl edition, p. 14, 10f. But see examples above. Compare: διεγείρω, ἐξεγείρω, ἐπεγείρω, συνεγείρω.)

Question 20

ἕως

Answer 20

until, as far as, up to,

can function as an improper prep., while, as long as, Jn. 9:4; until, Mt. 2:9; Lk. 15:4; as also in NT ἕως οὗ, ἕως ὅτου, Mt. 5:18, 26; ἕως ἄρτι, until now, Mt. 11:12; ἕως πότε, until when, how long, Mt. 17:17; ἕως σήμερον, until this day, to this time, 2 Cor. 3:15; as a prep. of time, until, Mt. 24:21; of place, unto, even to, Mt. 11:23; Lk. 2:15; ἕως ἄνω, to the brim, Jn. 2:7; ἕως εἰς, even to, as far as, Lk. 24:50; ἕως κάτω, to the bottom; ἕως ὥδε, to this place, Lk. 23:5; of state, unto, even to, Mt. 26:38; of number, even, so much as, Rom. 3:12, et al. freq.

ἕως

(B), εἵως, ἧος (v. sub fin.), Dor. ἇς, Aeol. ἆς (qq.v.), Boeot. ἇς IG 7.3303, al., and ἅως ib.2228, 3315. Relat. Particle, expressing the point of Time up to which an action goes, with reference to the end of the action, until, till; or to its continuance, while:

I until, till,

1 with Ind., of a fact in past time, θῦνε διὰ προμάχων, ἧος φίλον ὤλεσε θυμόν Il. 11.342, cf. Od. 5.123; ἕ. ἀπώλεσέν τε καὐτὸς ἐξαπώλετο S. Fr. 236, cf. A. Pers. 428, Pl. Chrm. 155c, etc.; for πρίν, μὴ πρότερον ἀπελθεῖν ἕως ἀποκατέστησε τὰ πράγματα D.S. 27.4: with impf. with ἄν in apodosi, of an unaccomplished action, ἡδέως ἂν Καλλικλεῖ διελεγόμην, ἕ. ἀπέδωκα I would have gone on conversing till I had.., Pl. Grg. 506b, cf. Cra. 396c.

2. ἕ. ἄν or κε with Subj. (mostly of aor.), of an event at an uncertain future time, μαχήσομαι.. ἧός κε τέλος πολέμοιο κιχείω till I find, Il. 3.291, cf. 24.183, A. Pr. 810, etc.: ἄν is sts. omitted in Trag., ἕ. μάθῃς S. Aj. 555; ἕ. κληθῇ Id. Tr. 148; ἕ. ἀνῇ τὸ πῆμα Id. Ph. 764: so freq. in later Gr., UPZ 18.10 (ii B. C.), PGrenf. 2.38.16 (i B. C.), Mark 14:32, Vett. Val. 68.18, etc.; ἕ. οὗ γένηται Gem. 8.32.
3. ἕ. with Opt. (mostly of aor.), relating to an event future in relation to past time, ὦρσε.. Βορέην, ἧος ὃ Φαιήκεσσι.. μιγείη caused it to blow, till he should reach.., Od. 5.386, cf. 9.376, Ar. Ra. 766, Pl. Phd. 59d; ἕως δέοι βοηθεῖν Th. 3.102, cf. Lys. 13.25: ἄν or κε is added to the Opt. (not to ἕως), if the event is represented as conditional, ἕ. κ’ ἀπὸ πάντα δοθείη till (if possible) all things should be given back, Od. 2.78; οὐκ [ἂν] ἀποκρίναιο, ἕ. ἂν σκέψαιο Pl. Phd. 101d, cf. S. Tr. 687 codd., Isoc. 17.15, IG 22.1328 (ii B.C.). in orat. obliq., ἔδωκεν.. ἕ. ἀνὴρ εἶναι δοκιμασθείην D. 27.5. by assimilation to an opt. with ἄν, [λόγον] ἂν διδοίης ἕ. ἔλθοις Pl. Phd. 101d.
4. c. subj. or opt., expressing purpose, in order that, Od. 4.800, 6.80, 19.367; πορεύου εἰς Διονυσιάδα.. ἕως τὸν ἐκεῖ ἐλαιῶνα ποτίσῃς PFay. 118.12 (ii A. D.); σπούδασον ἕως οὗ ἀγοράσῃ κτλ. POxy. 113.25 (ii A. D.); χρυσίον ἐδανισάμην ἕως ὅτε δυνηθῶ ἀγοράσαι ib. 130.13 (vi A. D.).
5. with Inf. in orat. obliq., ἐντειλάμενος διεκπλέειν ἕ… ἀπικνέεσθαι Hdt. 4.42: otherwise only in later Gr., ἕ. ἐλθεῖν ἐς.. LXX Genesis 10:19, cf. PLond. 1.131r251 (i A. D.), D.H. 9.4 (v.l.), Anon. ap. Suid.s.v. ἰλυσπώμενον.
6. with Advbs. of Time and Place, ἕ. ὅτε till the time when, c. ind., v.l. for ἔστε in X. Cyr. 5.1.25; ἕ. οὗ, f.l. for ἐς οὗ, Hdt. 2.143: freq. in later Gr., Gem.l.c., Matthew 1:25, etc.; ἕ. ὅτου ib. 5.25, etc.; ἕ. πότε; how long ? ib. 17.17, John 10:24; ἕ. τότε LXX Nehemiah 2:16; ἕ. ὀψέ till late, f.l.for ἐς ὀψέ, Th. 3.108; ἕ. ἄρτι 1 John 2:9; ἕ. ὧδε as far as this place, Luke 23:5. with Preps., of Time, ἕ. πρὸς καλὸν ἑῷον ἀστέρα AP 5.200; of Place, ἕ. εἰς τὸν χάρακα Plb. 1.11.14; ἕ. πρὸς τὸν Καύκασον D.S. 2.43; ἕ. ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν Acts 17:14.

II as Pr,

1 of Time, c. gen., until, ἕως τοῦ ἀποτεῖσαι until he has made payment, Lexap. Aeschin. 1.42, cf. LXX Genesis 3:19, etc.; ἕ. τελειώσεως Epicur. Ephesians 2 p.38U.; ἕ. ὡρισμένων χρόνων Phld. D. 1.7; ἕ. τινός for a time, Parth. 9.2, etc.; ἕ. τοῦ νῦν Matthew 24:21; ἕ. Ἰωάννου ib. 11.13. of Place, ἕ. τοῦ γενέσθαι.. up to the point where.. Arist. PA 668b2, cf. HA 630b27, Plb. 9.36.1; as far as, ἕ. Σάρδεων Ath.Mitt. 44.25 (Samos, iii B.C.); ἕ. τοῦ Ἀρσινοΐτου νομοῦ PTeb. 33.5 (ii B.C.); ἕ. Φοινίκης Acts 11:19 : so c. gen. pers., ἦλθον ἕ. αὐτοῦ Luke 4:42, cf. LXX 4 Ki. 4.22. of Number or Degree, ἕ. τριῶν πλοίων Docum. ap. D. 18.106; διδόναι ἕ. ταλάντων ἑκατόν LXX 1 Esdras 8:19(21); οὐκ ἔστιν ἕ. ἑνός ib. Psalms 13:3; οὐκ ἔχομεν ἕ. τῆς τροφῆς τῶν κτηνῶν PTeb. 56.7 (ii B.C.); ἐᾶτε ἕ. τούτου Luke 22:51; μαχοῦμαι ἕ. ζωῆς καὶ θανάτου OGI 266.29 (Pergam., iii B.C.); ἕ. μέθης Corn. ND 30.

2. rarely c. acc., ἕ. πρωΐ LXX Jd. 19.25; ἕ. μεσημβρίαν PLond. 1.131r346, 515 (i A.D.); ἕ. τὸ βωμῷ down to the word “” βωμῷ “”, Sch. Pi. O. 6.111.

III while, so long as, c. ind., ἧος ἐνὶ Τροίῃ πολεμίζομεν Od. 13.315, cf. 17.358, 390; ἕ. δ’ ἔτ’ ἔμφρων εἰμί A. Ch. 1026, cf. Pers. 710 (troch.); ἕ. ἔτι ἐλπὶς [ἦν ] Th. 8.40; ἕ. ἔτινέος εἶ Pl. Prm. 135d: in this sense answered in apodosi by τῆος, Od. 4.90, Il. 20.41; by τόφρα, Od. 12.327, Il. 18.15; by τόφρα δέ, 10.507; by δέ alone, 1.193, Od. 4.120 codd. ἕ. ἄν c. subj., when the whole action is future, οὔ μοι.. ἐλπίς, ἕ. ἂν αἴθῃ πῦρ A. Ag. 1435; λέγειν τε χρὴ καὶ ἐρωτᾶν, ἕως ἂν ἐῶσιν Pl. Phd. 85b; οὐδὲν ἔστ’ αὐτῷ βεβαίως ἔχειν ἕ. ἂν ὑμεῖς δημοκρατῆσθε D. 10.13. ἕως c. opt. in a Conditional relative clause, φήσομεν μηδὲν ἂν μεῖζον μηδὲ ἔλαττον γενέσθαι ἕ. ἴσον εἴη αὐτὸ ἐαυτῷ Pl. Tht. 155a. in Hom. sts. Demonstr.,= τέως, for a time, ἧος μὲν.. ὄρνυον· αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ.. Il. 12.141; ἧος μὲν ἀπείλει.. · ἀλλ’ ὅτε δὴ.. 13.143, cf. 17.727, 730, Od. 2.148; ἧος μὲν.. ἕποντο.. αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ.. Il. 15.277; all that time, Od. 3.126, cf. Hdt. 8.74. (ἕως, as iambus, only once in Hom., Od. 2.78; as a monosyll., Il. 17.727, dub.l. in Od. 2.148; when the first syllable is to be long codd. Hom. have εἵως or ἕως (never εἷος or ἧος, Ludwich WkP 1890.512, exc. ειος v.l. (PFay. 160) in Il. 20.41), 3.291, 11.342, al.; εἵως (or ἕως) is found even when the metre requires a trochee, 1.193, al.; comparison of Dor. ἇς (from Αος) with Att. - Ion. ἕως points to early Ion. Ηος (cf. Skt. yâvat ‘as great as, as long as, until’) and this should prob. be restored in Hom.; cf. τέως.)

ἕως, a particle marking a limit, and

I. as a conjunction signifying
1. the temporal terminus ad quem, till, until (Latindonee,usque dum); as in the best writings a. with an preterite indicative, where something is spoken of which continued up to a certain time: Matthew 2:9 (ἕως … ἔστη (ἐστάθη L T Tr WH)); (1 Macc. 10:50; Wis. 10:14, etc.).
b. with ἄν and the aorist subjunctive (equivalent to the Latin future perfect), where it is left doubtful when that will take place till which it is said a thing will continue (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 42, 5): ἴσθι ἐκεῖ, ἕως ἄν εἴπω σοι, Matthew 2:13; add, ; Mark 6:10; Mark 12:36; Luke 17:8; Luke 20:43; Acts 2:55; Hebrews 1:13; after a negative sentence: Matthew 5:18, 26; Matthew 10:23 (T WH omit ἄν); ; Mark 9:1; Luke 9:27; Luke 21:32; 1 Corinthians 4:5; with the aorist subjunctive without the addition of ἄν: Mark 6:45 R G; (here Tr marginal reading future); Luke 15:4; ( T Tr WH; L T Tr WH); 2 Thessalonians 2:7; Hebrews 10:13; Revelation 6:11 (Rec. ἕως οὗ); οὐκ ἀνἔζησαν ἕως τελεσθῇ τά χίλια ἔτη, did not live again till the thousand years had been finished (elapsi fuerint), Revelation 20:5 Rec. Cf. Winers Grammar, § 41 b. 3.
c. more rarely used with the present indicative where the aorist subjunctive might have been expected (Winers Grammar, as above; Buttmann, 231 (199)): so four times ἕως ἔρχομαι, Luke 19:13 (where L T Tr WH ἐν ᾧ for ἕως, but cf. Bleek at the passage); John 21:22; 1 Timothy 4:13; ἕως ἀπολύει, Mark 6:45 L T Tr WH, for R G ἀπολύσῃ (the indicative being due to a blending of direct and indirect discourse; as in Plutarch, Lycurgus 29, 3 δεῖν οὖν ἐκείνους ἐμμένειν τοῖς καθεστωσι νόμοις … ἕως ἐπανεισιν).
d. once with the future indicative, according to an improbable reading in Luke 13:35: ἕως ἥξει Tdf., ἕως ἄν ἥξει Lachmann, for R G ἕως ἄν ἥξῃ; (but WH (omitting ἄν ἥξῃ ὅτε) read ἕως εἴπητε; Tr omits ἄν and brackets ἥξῃ ὅτε; cf. Buttmann, 231f (199f)).
2. as in Greek writings from Homer down, as long as, while, followed by the indicative in all tenses — in the N. T. only in the present: ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστιν, John 9:4 (Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading ὡς); ἕως (L T Tr WH ὡς) τό φῶς ἔχετε, John 12:35f (ἕως ἔτι φῶς ἐστιν, Plato, Phaedo, p. 89 c.); (Mark 6:45 (cf.
c. above)).
II. By a usage chiefly later it gets the force of an adverb, Latinusque ad; and
1. used of a temporal terminus ad quem, until (unto);
a. like a preposition, with a genitive of time (Winers Grammar, § 54, 6; Buttmann, 319 (274)): ἕως αἰῶνος, Luke 1:55 Griesbach (Ezekiel 25:15 Alex.; 1 Chronicles 17:16; Sir. 16:26, Fritzsche; , etc.); τῆς ἡμέρας, Matthew 26:29; Matthew 27:64: Luke 1:80; Acts 1:22 (Tdf. ἄχρι); Romans 11:8, etc.; ὥρας, Matthew 27:45; Mark 15:33; Luke 23:44; τῆς πεντηκοστῆς, 1 Corinthians 16:8; τέλους, 1 Corinthians 1:8; 2 Corinthians 1:13; τῆς σήμερον namely, ἡμέρας, Matthew 27:8; τοῦ νῦν, Matthew 24:21; Mark 13:19 (1 Macc. 2:33); χήρα ἕως ἐτῶν ὀγδοήκοντα τεσσάρων a widow (who had attained) even unto eighty-four years, Luke 2:37 L T Tr WH; before the names of illustrious men by which a period of time is marked: Matthew 1:17; Matthew 11:13; Luke 16:16 (where T Tr WH μέχρι); Acts 13:20; before the names of events: Matthew 1:17 (ἕως μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος); ; Luke 11:51; James 5:7; ἕως τοῦ ἐλθεῖν, Acts 8:40 (Buttmann, 266 (228); cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 44, 6; Judith 1:10 Judith 11:19, etc.).
b. with the genitive of the neuter relative pronoun οὗ or ὅτου it gets the force of a conjunction, until, till (the time when); α. ἕως οὗ (first in Herodotus 2, 143; but after that only in later authors, as Plutarch, et al. (Winers Grammar, 296 (278) note; Buttmann, 230f (199))): followed by the indicative, Matthew 1:25 (WH brackets οὗ); ; Luke 13:21; Acts 21:26 (see Buttmann); followed by the subjunctive aorist, equivalent to Latin future perfect, Matthew 14:22; Matthew 26:36 (where WH brackets οὗ and Lachmann has ἕως οὗ ἄν); Luke 12:50 (Rec.; Luke 15:8 Tr WH); Luke 24:49; Acts 25:21; 2 Peter 1:19; after a negative sentence, Matthew 17:9; Luke 12:59 (R G L; Luke 22:18 Tr WH); John 13:38; Acts 23:12, 14, 21. β. ἕως ὅτου, αα. until, till (the time when): followed by the indicative, John 9:18; followed by the subjunctive (without ἄν), Luke 13:8; Luke 15:8 (R G L T); after a negation, Luke 22:16, 18 (R G L T). ββ. as long as, whilst (Song of Solomon 1:12), followed by the present indicative, Matthew 5:25 (see ἄχρι, 1 d. at the end).
c. before adverbs of time (rarely so in the earlier and more elegant writings, as ἕως ὀψέ, Thucydides 3, 108; (cf. Winers Grammar, § 54, 6 at the end; Buttmann, 320 (275))): ἕως ἄρτι, up to this time, until now (Vig. ed. Herm., p. 388), Matthew 11:12; John 2:10; John 5:17; John 16:24; 1 John 2:9; 1 Corinthians 4:13; 1 Corinthians 8:7; 1 Corinthians 15:6; ἕως πότε; how long? Matthew 17:17; Mark 9:19; Luke 9:41; John 10:24; Revelation 6:10 (Psalm 12:2f (f); 2 Samuel 2:26; 1 Macc. 6:22); ἕως σήμερον, 2 Corinthians 3:15.
2. according to a usage dating from Aristotle down, employed of the localterminus ad quem, unto, as far as, even to;
a. like a preposition, with a genitive of place (Winers Grammar, § 54, 6; Buttmann, 319 (274)): ἕως ᾅδου, ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Matthew 11:23; Luke 10:15; add, Matthew 24:31; Matthew 26:58; Mark 13:27; Luke 2:15; Luke 4:29; Acts 1:8; Acts 11:19, 22; Acts 17:15; Acts 23:23; 2 Corinthians 12:2; with the genitive of person, to the place where one is: Luke 4:42; Acts 9:38 (ἕως ὑπερβορεων, Aelian v. h. 3, 18).
b. with adverbs of place (Winers Grammar, and Buttmann, as in c. above): ἕως ἄνω, John 2:7; ἕως ἔσω, Mark 14:54; ἕως κάτω, Matthew 27:51; Mark 15:38; ἕως ὧδε, Luke 23:5 (cf. Winers Grammar, § 66, 1 c.).
c. with prepositions: ἕως ἔξω τῆς πόλεως, Acts 21:5; ἕως εἰς, Luke 24:50 (R G L marginal reading, but L text T Tr WH ἕως πρός as far as to (Polybius 3, 82, 6; 12, 17, 4; Genesis 38:1)); Polybius 1:11, 14; Aelian v. h. 12, 22.
3. of the limit (terminus)of quantity; with an adverb of number: ἕως ἑπτάκις, Matthew 18:21; with numerals: Matthew 22:26 (ἕως τῶν ἑπτά); cf. Matthew 20:8; John 8:9 (Rec.); Acts 8:10; Hebrews 8:11; οὐκ ἐστιν ἕως ἑνός, there is not so much as one, Romans 3:12 from Psalm 13:1 ().
4. of the limit of measurement: ἕως ἡμίσους, Mark 6:23; Esther 5:3, 6 Alex.
5. of the end or limit in acting and suffering: ἕως τούτου, Luke 22:51 (see ἐάω, 2); ἕως τοῦ θερισμοῦ, Matthew 13:30 L Tr WH text; ἕως θανάτου, even to death, so that I almost die, Mark 14:34; Matthew 26:38 (Sir. 4:28 Sir. 31:13 (Sir. 34:13); ; 4 Macc. 14:19).

Question 21

ὅταν

Answer 21

when, whenever; at once; as soon as

when, whenever, Mt. 5:11; 6:2; Mk. 3:11; Rev. 4:9, et al. freq.; in NT in case of, on occasion of, Jn. 9:5; 1 Cor. 15:27; Heb. 1:6

when, whenever, as long as, as soon as

ὅταν,

for ὅτ’ ἄν (ὅτε ἄν) as sts. in codd.:

I Adv.

1. of Time, whenever, with a conditional force, so as nearly to = ἐάν (v. εἰ B. II), referring to an indef. future (cf. ὅτε A. I. IC), Il. 1.519, etc.; also of events like ly to recur, 2.397, IG 12.97.9, etc.: also in ὅτε κεν Il. 1.567, 6.225: strengthd., ὅ. περ S. OC 301, Pl. R. 565a, 565d: repeated for rhet. effect, ὅ. ὡς ὑβρίζων, ὅ. ὡς ἐχθρὸς ὑπάρχων, ὅ. κονδύλοις, ὅ. ἐπὶ κόρρης D. 21.72. later causal, since, ὅταν.. ᾖ since it is, Arist. Mu. 395a19, cf. D.Chr. 7.105, Porph. Gaur. 11.2; in earlier examples the application to the particular case is less directly expressed, καὶ τοῦτο τυφλὸν ὅταν ἐγὼ βλέπω βραχύ this too (viz. my staff) is blind when I am (= when its owner is) short-sighted, E. Ion 744, cf. S. Aj. 137 (anap.), Pl. Sph. 241a, Din. 3.9.
2. never with ind. in early authors, exc. in Od. 10.410, ὡς δ’ ὅταν.. σκαίρουσι (s. v. l.); in 24.88, ὅτε κεν.. ζώννυνταί τε νέοι καὶ ἐπεντύνονται ἄεθλα; and in Il. 12.41, ὡς δ’ ὅτ’ ἂν ἔν τε κύνεσσι καὶ ἀνδράσι.. στοέφεται (ἔναντα κύνεσσι cj. Monro): but freq. in LXX with impf. ind., as ὅταν εἰσήρχετο Genesis 38:9, cf. Plb. 4.32.5, Mark 3:11 : also with aor. ind., LXX Exodus 16:3, Revelation 8:1 : with fut. ind., ὅταν ἕξουσι Apollod. Poliorc. 187.12; ὅταν ὄψεσθε (v.l. ὄψησθε) Luke 13:28 : with pres. ind., ὅταν δείκνυται Str. 12.3.27 (s. v.l.): generally, ὅταν supersedes ὅτε in Hellenistic Greek.
3. never with opt. in early authors, exc. in orat. obliq., where in orat. recta the subj. with ὅταν would have stood, as perh. A. Pers. 450 may be expld. (ὅτ’ ἐκνεῶν Elmsl.); ὅτε κεν folld. by ἵκοι, Il. 9.525.

II Special usages:

1. to introduce a simile, 10.5, Od. 5.394.
2. πρίν γ’ ὅ., = πρίν γε ἢ ὅ. (v. ὅτε A. 11.2), 2.374.
3. εἰς ὅτε κεν until such time as.., ib.99, 19.144.
4. ὅ. τάχιστα, Lat. cum primum, Ar. Th. 1205, X. Cyr. 4.5.33; ὅ. πρῶτον Pl. Ly. 211b. [ ὅτᾱν only in later Poetry, Lyr.Alex. Adesp. 37.17.]

ὅταν, a particle of time, compound of ὅτε and ἄν, at the time that, whenever (German dann wann;wann irgend); used of things which one assumes will really occur, but the time of whose occurrence he does not definitely fix (in secular authors often also of things which one assumes can occur, but whether they really will or not he does not know; hence, like our in case that, as in Plato, Prot., p. 360 b.; Phaedr., p. 256 e.; Phaedo, p. 68 d.); (cf. Winers Grammar, § 42, 5; Buttmann, § 139, 33);

a. with the subjunctive present: Matthew 6:2, 5; Matthew 10:23; Mark 13:11 (here Rec. aorist); ; Luke 11:36; Luke 12:11; Luke 14:12; Luke 21:7; John 7:27; John 16:21; Acts 23:35; 1 Corinthians 3:4; 2 Corinthians 13:9; 1 John 5:2; Revelation 10:7; Revelation 18:9; preceded by a specification of time: ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης, ὅταν etc., Matthew 26:29; Mark 14:25; followed by τότε, 1 Thessalonians 5:3; 1 Corinthians 15:28; equivalent to as often as, of customary action, Matthew 15:2; John 8:44; Romans 2:14; at the time when equivalent to as long as, Luke 11:34; John 9:5.
b. with the subjunctive aorist: equivalent to the Latinquando acciderit,ut with subjunctive present, Matthew 5:11; Matthew 12:43; Matthew 13:32; Matthew 23:15; Matthew 24:32; Mark 4:15f, 29 (R G), 31f; 13:28; Luke 6:22, 26; Luke 8:13; Luke 11:24; Luke 12:54; Luke 21:30; John 2:10; John 10:4; John 16:21; 1 Timothy 5:11 (here L marginal reading future); Revelation 9:5. equivalent toquando with future perfect, Matthew 19:28; Matthew 21:40; Mark 8:38; Mark 9:9; Mark 12:23 (G Tr WH omit; L brackets the clause), 25; Luke 9:26; Luke 16:4, 9; Luke 17:10; John 4:25; John 7:31; John 13:19; John 14:29; John 15:26; John 16:4, 13, 21; John 21:18; Acts 23:35; Acts 24:22; Romans 11:27; 1 Corinthians 15:24 (here L T Tr WH present), (where the meaning is, ‘when he shall have said that the ὑποταξις predicted in the Psalm is now accomplished’; cf. Meyer ad loc.); ; 2 Corinthians 10:6; Colossians 4:16; 1 John 2:28 (L T Tr WH ἐάν); 2 Thessalonians 1:10; Hebrews 1:6 (on which see εἰσάγω, 1); Revelation 11:7; Revelation 12:4; Revelation 17:10; Revelation 20:7. followed by τότε, Matthew 9:15; Matthew 24:15; Matthew 25:31; Mark 2:20; Mark 13:14; Luke 5:35; Luke 21:20; John 8:28; 1 Corinthians 13:10 (G L T Tr WH omit τότε); ; Colossians 3:4.
c. According to the usage of later authors, a usage, however, not altogether unknown to the more elegant writers (Winers Grammar, 309 (289f); Buttmann, 222f (192f); (Tdf. Proleg., p. 124f; WHs Appendix, p. 171; for examples additional to these given by Winers Grammar, and Buttmann, as above see Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word; cf. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Handbook to Modern Greek, Appendix, § 78)), with the indicative; α. future: when (Matthew 5:11 Tdf.); Luke 13:28 T Tr text WH marginal reading; (1 Timothy 5:11 L marginal reading); as often as, Revelation 4:9 (cf. Bleek ad loc.). β. present: Mark 11:25 L T Tr WH; Mark 13:7 Tr text; (Luke 11:2 Tr marginal reading). γ. very rarely indeed, with the imperfect: as often as, (whensoever), ὅταν ἐθεώρουν, Mark 3:11 (Genesis 38:9; Exodus 17:11; 1 Samuel 17:34; see ἄν, II. 1). δ. As in Byzantine authors equivalent to ὅτε, when, with the indicative aorist: ὅταν ἤνοιξεν, Revelation 8:1 L T Tr WH; (add ὅταν ὀψέ ἐγένετο, Mark 11:19 T Tr text WH, cf. Buttmann, 223 (193); but others take this of customary action, whenever evening came (i. e. every evening, R. V.)). ὅταν, does not occur in the Epistles of Peter and Jude.

Question 22

πάλιν

Answer 22

again

again, once more; furthermore; on the other hand
Definition:
pr. back; again, back again, Jn. 10:17; Acts 10:16; 11:10; again by repetition, Mt. 26:43; again in continuation, further, Mt. 5:33; 13:44, 45, 47, 18:19; again, on the other hand, 1 Jn. 2:8

anew, again
renewal or repetition of the action
again, anew
again, i.e. further, moreover
in turn, on the other hand

πάλῐν [ᾰ],

poet. also πάλι (q.v),

I Adv.

1 of Place, back, backwards (the usual sense in early ), mostly joined with Verbs of going, coming, etc.; π. χώρει Hdt. 5.72; π. ἐλεύσεται, κατελθεῖν, ἐπανέλθωμεν, A. Pr. 854, S. OC 601, Pl. Cra. 438a, etc.; κέλευθον ἥνπερ ἦλθες ἐγκόνει π. A. Pr. 962; δίκα καὶ πάντα π. στρέφεται E. Med. 412 (lyr.); δεῦρο σωθήσῃ π. Id. Ph. 725, cf. 1400; δόμεναι π. give back, restore, Il. 1.116, etc.; π. ἀποδοῦναι And. 2.23; π. ἀγκαλέσαι to call back, A. Ag. 1021 (lyr.): less freq. c. gen., π. τράπεθ’ υἷος ἑοῖο she turned back from her son, Il. 18.138; δόρυ Ἀχιλλῆος π. ἔτραπεν 20.439, cf. Od. 7.143: coupled with other Advbs., π. αὖτις ἔβαινον νηὸς ἐπὶ γλαφυρῆς 14.356, cf. Pi. O. 1.65; αὖ π. Od. 13.125; ἂψ π. Il. 18.280; π. εἶσιν ὀπίσσω Od. 11.149; π. φέρεσθαι ἐξοπίσω Hes. Th. 181; ἄψορρον π. S. El. 53; π. οἴκαδε, π. οἴκαδ’ αὖ, Ar. Lys. 792, Ra. 1486; π. αὖ Pl. Prt. 318e, etc.: with the Art., ἡ π. ὁδός E. Or. 125.

2. to express contradiction, π. ἐρέει gain say, Il. 9.56; π. ὅ γε λάζετο μῦθον took back his word, unsaid it, 4.357; opp. ἀληθέα εἰπεῖν, Od. 13.254; μηδέ τῳ δόξῃ π. let no one think contrariwise, A. Th. 1045: in Prose, contrariwise, Pl. Grg. 482d; π. αὖ Id. R. 507b; αὖ.. π. Id. Ap. 27d: in this sense sts. c. gen., τὸ π. νεότατος youth’s opposite, Pi. O. 10(11).87; χρόνου τὸ π. the change of time, E. HF 777 (lyr.); cf. ἔμπαλιν.

II of Time, again, once more, rare in Hom., Il. 2.276, cf. S. OT 1166, X. Mem. 1.6.11, etc.: freq. coupled with αὖ, αὖθις (q.v.); π. ἐξ ἀρχῆς Ar. Pax 997, etc.; π. καὶ π. Str. 17.1.3, Plu. 2.565d, Ael. VH 1.4; ἔγχει καὶ π. εἰπέ, π. π. Ἡλιοδώρας “” AP 5.135(Mel.): both senses (I and II) are appropriate in Od. 16.456, Pl. Prt. 322b, etc.

III in turn, S. El. 371, Ar. Ach. 342, Call. Dian. 87, etc.; π. ὁ Κῦρος ἠρώτα X. An. 1.6.7; π. ἀπαιτῶ Pl. R. 612d; again, πρῶτον μέν.. ἔπειτα π. Arist. Pol. 1289b29, etc. (In compos. πάλιν sts. means doubly, as in παλιμμήκης, παλίνσκιος.)

πάλιν, adverb, from Homer down;

1. anew, again (but the primary meaning seems to be back; cf. (among others) Ellendt, Lex. Sophocles, under the word, ii, p. 485);
   a. joined to verbs of all sorts, it denotes renewal or repetition of the action: Matthew 4:8; Matthew 20:5; Matthew 21:36; Matthew 22:1, 4; Mark 2:13; Mark 3:20; Luke 23:20; John 1:35; John 4:13; John 8:2, 8, 12, 21; John 9:15, 17; John 10:19; Acts 17:32; Acts 27:28; Romans 11:23; 1 Corinthians 7:5; 2 Corinthians 11:16; Galatians 1:9; Galatians 2:18; Galatians 4:19; 2 Peter 2:20; Philippians 2:28; Philippians 4:4; Hebrews 1:6 (where πάλιν is tacitly opposed to the time when God first brought his Son into the world, i. e. to the time of Jesus’ former life on earth); Hebrews 5:12; Hebrews 6:1, 6; James 5:18; Revelation 10:8, 11; πάλιν μικρόν namely, ἔσται, John 16:16f, 19; εἰς τό πάλιν, again (cf. German zum wiederholten Male; (see εἰς, A. II. 2 at the end)), 2 Corinthians 13:2; with verbs of going, coming, departing, returning, where again combines with the notion of back; thus with ἄγωμεν, John 11:7; ἀναχωρεῖν, John 6:15 (where Tdf. φεύγει and Griesbach omits πάλιν) (cf. John 6:3); ἀπέρχεσθαι, John 4:3; John 10:40; John 20:10; ἐισέρχεσθαι, Mark 2:1; Mark 3:1; John 18:33; John 19:9; ἐξέρχεσθαι, Mark 7:31; ἔρχεσθαι, John 4:46; John 14:3; 2 Corinthians 1:16; 2 Corinthians 12:21 (cf. Winers Grammar, 554 (515) n.; Buttmann, § 145, 2 a.); ὑπάγειν, John 11:8; ἀνακάμπτειν, Acts 18:21; διαπεραν, Mark 5:21; ὑποστρέφειν, Galatians 1:17; ἡ ἐμή παρουσία πάλιν πρός ὑμᾶς, my presence with you again, i. e. my return to you, Philippians 1:26 (cf. Buttmann, § 125, 2); also with verbs of taking, John 10:17; Acts 10:16 Rec.; .
   b. with other parts of the sentence: πάλιν εἰς φόβον, Romans 8:15; πάλιν ἐν λύπη, 2 Corinthians 2:1.
   c. πάλιν is explained by the addition of more precise specifications of time (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 604 (562)): πάλιν ἐκ τρίτου, Matthew 26:44 (L Tr marginal reading brackets ἐκ τρίτου); ἐκ δευτέρου, Matthew 26:42; Acts 10:15; πάλιν δεύτερον, John 4:54; John 21:16; πάλιν ἄνωθεν, again, anew (R. V. back again (yet cf. Meyer at the passage)), Galatians 4:9 (Wis. 19:6; πάλιν ἐξ ἀρχῆς, Aristophanes Plutarch, 866; Plato, Eut., p. 11 b. and 15 c.; Isoc. areiop. 6, p. 338 (p. 220, Lange edition); cf. Winer’s Grammar, as above).
2. again, i. e. further, moreover (where the subject remains the same and a repetition of the action or condition is indicated): Matthew 5:33 (πάλιν ἠκούσατε); Matthew 13:44 (where T Tr WH omit; L brackets πάλιν), ; ; Luke 13:20; John 10:7 (not Tdf.); especially where to O. T. passages already quoted others are added: Matthew 4:7; John 12:39; John 19:37; Romans 15:10-12; 1 Corinthians 3:20; Hebrews 1:5; Hebrews 2:13; Hebrews 4:5; Hebrews 10:30; Clement of Rome, 1 Cor. 15, 3f [ET] and often in Philo; cf. Bleek, Br. a. d. Hebrews 2:1, p. 108. 3. in turn, on the other hand: Luke 6:43 T WH L brackets Tr brackets; 1 Corinthians 12:21; 2 Corinthians 10:7; 1 John 2:8 (Wis. 13:8 Wis. 16:23; 2 Macc. 15:39; see examples from secular authors in Pape, under the word, 2; Passow, under the word, 3; (Ellendt as above (at the beginning); Liddell and Scott, under the word, III.; but many (e. g. Fritzsche and Meyer on Matthew 3:7) refuse to recognize this sense in the N. T.)). John uses πάλιν in his Gospel far more frequent than the other N. T. writings, in his Epistles but once; Luke two or three times; the author of the Rev. twice.

Question 23

μέλλω

Answer 23

(ἔμελλον ανδ ἤμελλον), μελλήσω, -, -, -, -

I am about to, am going to

to be about to, on the point of; to be destined, must; to intend to; (what is) to come, the future
Definition:
to be about to, be on the point of, Mt. 2:13; Jn. 4:47; it serves to express in general a settled futurity, Mt. 11:14; Lk. 9:31; Jn. 11:51; to intend, Lk. 10:1; participle μέλλων, μέλλουσα, μέλλον, future as distinguished from past and present, Mt. 12:32; Lk. 13:9; to be always, as it were, about to do, to delay, linger, Acts 22:16

to be about
to be on the point of doing or suffering something
to intend, have in mind, think to

μέλλω,

I impf. ἔμελλον and ἤμελλον (v. infr.), μέλλον Il. 17.278, Od. 1.232, 9.378, B. 12.164; , Ion. μέλλεσκον Theoc. 25.240, Mosch. 2.109: fut. μελλήσω D. 6.15, Matthew 24:6 : aor. ἐμέλλησα Th. 3.55, X. HG 5.4.65, etc., and ἠμ- (v. infr.): — Pass. and Med., v. infr. v. — Only pres. and impf. in Hom., Hes., Lyr., and Trag.: aor. only in Prose (exc. Thgn., v. infr.): the impf. ἤμελλον with long augm. is established by the metre in Hes. Th. 898, Thgn. 906, Ar. Ec. 597, Ra. 1038 (both anap.), A.R. 1.1309 (cf. Sch. ad loc.), Call. Del. 58: aor. 1 ἠμέλλησα Thgn. 259; ἤμελλον is not found in earlier Att. Inscrr., but occurs in Pap., as PPetr. 2p.146 (iii B. C.), Phld. Rh. 1.145 S. (but ἔμελλον Hyp. Ath. 7, Arist. Ath. 25.3). I to be destined or likely to, indicating an estimated certainty or strong probability in the present, past, or future (cf. Aristonic. ap. Sch. Il. 10.326, 11.817, 16.46,al.): a. c. pres. inf. (or its equivalent), of a probability in the present, ὅθι που μέλλουσιν ἄριστοι βουλὰς βουλεύειν where belike the best are holding counsel, Il. 10.326; ᾧ μέλλεις εὔχεσθαι to whom thou doubtless prayest, 11.364; μέλλεις δὲ σὺ ἴδμεναι doubtless thou knowest, Od. 4.200; τὰ δὲ μέλλετ’ ἀκουέμεν belike you have heard it, Il. 14.125, cf. Od. 4.94; οὕτω που Διὶ μέλλει ὑπερμενέϊ φίλον εἶναι Il. 2.116; ὄλβον δὲ θεοὶ μέλλουσιν ὀπάζειν methinks it is the gods who give wealth, Od. 18.19; εἰ δ’ οὕτω τοῦτ’ ἐστίν, ἐμοὶ μέλλει φίλον εἶναι you may be sure it is my good pleasure, Il. 1.564. b. c. aor. inf., of a probability in the past, μέλλω που ἀπεχθέσθαι Διὶ πατρί I must have become hateful to father Zeus, 21.83; κελευσέμεναι δέ σ’ ἔμελλε δαίμων a god must surely have bidden thee, Od. 4.274; πολλάκι που μέλλεις ἀρήμεναι you must often have prayed, 22.322; μέλλω ἀθανάτους ἀλιτέσθαι I must have sinned against the immortals, 4.377; ἄλλοτε δή ποτε μᾶλλον ἐρωῆσαι πολέμοιο μέλλω at any other time rather than this I may have drawn back.., Il. 13.777; μέλλει μέν πού τις καὶ φίλτερον ἄλλον ὀλέσσαι before now, no doubt, a man has lost.., 24.46, cf. 18.362; τοῦ δ’ ἤδη μέλλουσι κύνες ταχέες τ’ οἰωνοὶ ῥινὸν ἀπ’ ὀστεόφιν ἐρύσαι Od. 14.133; of a destiny in the past, ἔμελλεν οἷ αὐτῷ θάνατον.. λιτέσθαι he was fated to have been praying for his own death, Il. 16.46; ἐπεὶ οὐκ ἄρ’ ἔμελλον ἑταίρῳ κτεινομένῳ ἐπαμῦναι since I was (i.e. am) not destined to have succoured my comrade when they were slaying him, 18.98: c. pres. inf., οὐκ ἄρ’ ἔμελλες ἀνάλκιδος ἀνδρὸς ἑταίρους ἔδμεναι he was to turn out no helpless man whose comrades you ate, Od. 9.475. c. c. fut. inf., of a destin y or probability in the future, ἅ οὐ τελέεσθαι ἔμελλον which were not to be accomplished, Il. 2.36; τάχα δ’ ἀνστήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν ib. 694; ἐπεὶ οὐκ ἄρ’ ἔμελλον ἔγωγε νοστήσας οἶκόνδε.. εὐφρανέειν ἄλοχον 5.686, cf. 12.113, 22.356, Od. 13.293, 384; μέλλον ἔτι ξυνέσεσθαι ὀϊζυῖ πολλῇ 7.270; περὶ τρίποδος γὰρ ἔμελλον θεύσεσθαι they were to have run.., Il. 11.700, cf. E. HF 463; χρόνῳ ἔμελλέ σ’ Ἕκτωρ.. ἀποφθίσειν S. Aj. 1027; ἔμελλον ἄρα παύσειν ποθ’ ὑμᾶς τοῦ κοάξ Ar. Ra. 268; φεύγεις; ἔμελλόν σ’ ἆρα κινήσειν ἐγώ Id. Nu. 1301, cf. V. 460, Pl. 103, Ach. 347: c. pres. inf., καὶ γὰρ ἐγώ ποτ’ ἔμελλον ἐν ἀνδράσιν ὄλβιος εἶναι I had a chance of being, might have been.., Od. 18.138; μέλλεν ποτὲ οἶκος ὅδ’ ἀφνειὸς καὶ ἀμύμων ἔμμεναι, ὄφρ’ ἔτι κεῖνος ἀνὴρ ἐπιδήμιος ἦεν 1.232: c. aor. inf. (cf. infr. 11), οὐδεὶς ἂν οὐδὲ μελλήσειε γενέσθαι ἀγαθός Arist. EN 1105b11: with inf. understood, [ τὰ μὲν] πάσχουσι, τὰ δὲ μέλλουσι [πάσχειν ] A. Pers. 814; ἀλλ’ οὐχ οὑμὸς τοῦτο πέπονθεν βίος οὐ μὰ Δί’ οὐδέ γε μέλλει no, not likely ! Ar. Pl. 551; οὐδὲν.. οὔτε ἐπάθετε οὔτε ἐμελλήσατε Th. 3.55; οὔτ’ ἐμὲ ἀπέφηνεν ἡ βουλὴ οὔτ’ ἐμέλλησεν Din. 1.49. in εἰ clauses, εἰ μέλλει πόλις εἶναι if it is to be a city, Pl. Prt. 324e: c. fut. inf., εἰ ἐμέλλομεν.. ἀνοίσειν if we were to refer.., Id. Phd. 75b: c. aor. inf., εἰ μέλλομεν.. δηλῶσαι Id. Lg. 713a, cf. Smp. 184d, Plt. 268d, al.: so in part., τὴν μέλλουσαν οἰκήσεσθαι πόλιν καλῶς Arist. Pol. 1261a3, etc. in final clauses, ξυνεπιμέλεσθαι ᾗ μέλλει ἄριστα ἕξειν, = ᾗ ἄριστα ἕξει, Th. 8.39; εἴχομεν ἂν.. ἐπιστάτην λαβεῖν.. ὃς ἔμελλεν.. ποιήσειν Pl. Revelation 20:1-15 b, cf. App. Syr. 46, etc. in questions, the inf. being understood, τί οὐ μέλλω (μέλλεις, etc.); why shouldn’t I? why is it not likely that I should?, i. e. yes, of course, τὸν υἱὸν ἑόρακας αὐτοῦ; Answ. τί δ’ οὐ μέλλω (sc. ἑορακέναι); of course I have, X. HG 4.1.6; τί δ’ οὐ μέλλει, εἴπερ γε δρᾷ αὐτό; Pl. R. 605c; πῶς γὰρ οὐ μέλλει; Id. Phd. 78b, etc.; ἀλλὰ τί μέλλει; what (else) would you expect ? i. e. yes, of course, Id. R. 349d, Hp.Mi. 373d.

II to be about to, in purely temporal sense, c. fut. inf., Ἕκτορα δῖον ἔτετμεν ἀδελφεόν, εὖτ’ ἄρ’ ἔμελλε στρέψεσθ’ ἐκ χώρης Il. 6.515; ὁ μέν μιν ἔμελλε γενείου.. ἁψάμενος λίσσεσθαι (perh. pres. inf.), ὁ δ’ αὐχένα μέσσον ἔλασσε 10.454; ἄλεισον ἀναιρήσεσθαι ἔμελλε Od. 22.9, cf. Il. 23.544, 2.39, 6.52, 393; δειπνήσειν μέλλομεν, ἢ τί; Ar. Av. 464, cf. Eq. 931 (lyr.), Th. 2.8, etc.: c. pres. inf., τί μέλλεις δρᾶν; Ar. V. 1379, Th. 215, cf. Ec. 760, Ach. 493, Av. 498, al.; μέλλω μαίνεσθαι Lyr.Alex.Adesp. 1.23: more rarely c. aor. inf., παθεῖν A. Pr. 625; κτανεῖν S. OT 967 (nisi leg. κτενεῖν) ; ἀναλαβεῖν, λιπεῖν, θανεῖν, E. Or. 292, Heracl. 709, Med. 393; ἀπολέσαι, λαβεῖν, Ar. Av. 366, Ach. 1159 (lyr.); προσθεῖναι Th. 3.92; οὐδὲ ἐμέλλησαν οὐδὲ διενοήθησαν ἐνθέσθαι D. 35.19: Phryn. 316 wrongly condemns this constr. — The inf. is sts. omitted, τὸ μέλλειν ἀγαθά (sc. πράσσειν or πράξειν) the expectation of good things, E. Or. 1182, cf. IA 1118.

III to be always going to do without ever doing: hence, delay, put off, freq. in Trag. (also in Med. μέλλομαι, v. infr. IV fin.): in this signf. usu. folld. by pres. inf., S. OT 678 (lyr.), OC 1627, etc.; τοὺς ξυμμάχους.. οὐ μελλήσομεν τιμωρεῖν· οἱ δ’ οὐκέτι μέλλουσι κακῶς πάσχειν we shall not delay to succour our allies, for their sufferings are not being delayed, Th. 1.86: freq. with μὴ οὐ, A. Pr. 627, S. Aj. 540: with μή, τί μέλλομεν.. μὴ πράσσειν κακά; E. Med. 1242: rarely folld. by aor. inf., Id. Ph. 299 (lyr.), Rh. 673: inf. is freq. omitted, τί μέλλεις; why delayest thou ? A. Pr. 36, cf. Pers. 407, Ag. 908, 1353, S. Fr. 917, Th. 8.78, etc.; μακρὰ μ. S. OC 219 (lyr.); Ἄρης στυγεῖ μέλλοντας E. Heracl. 723; ἴωμεν καὶ μὴ μέλλωμεν ἔτι Pl. Lg. 712b; μέλλον τι.. ἔπος a hesitating word, which one hesitates to speak, E. Ion 1002; μέλλων σφυγμός a hesitating pulse, Gal. 8.653. part. μέλλων is used quasi-adjectivally, ὁ μ. χρόνος the future time, Pi. O. 10(11).7, A. Pr. 839, Arist. Top. 111b28: Gramm., ὁ μέλλων the future tense, D.T. 638.23, A.D. Synt. 69.28, etc.; ἡ μ. αὐτοῦ δύναμις his future power, Pl. R. 494c; μ. φυλάξασθαι χρέος Pi. O. 7.40; τὸν μ. βλαστόν (καρπόν codd.) Thphr. HP 4.15.1: esp. in neut., τὸ μέλλον, τὰ μέλλοντα things to come, the future, Pi. O. 2.56, A. Pr. 102, Th. 1.138, 4.71, Pl. Tht. 178e, etc.; opp. to what is simply future (τὸ ἐσόμενον), Arist. Div.Somn. 463b29, cf. GC 337b4; εἰς τὸ μέλλον (sc. ἔτος) Luke 13:9, cf. PLond. 3.1231.4 (ii A. D.), Plu. Caes. 14: — also in Med., τὰ ἰσχυρότατα ἐλπιζόμενα μέλλεται your strongest pleas are hopes in futurity, Th. 5.111: — but Pass. μέλλομαι, ὡς μὴ μέλλοιτο τὰ δέοντα that the necessary steps might not be delayed, X. An. 3.1.47; ἐν ὅσῳ ταῦτα μέλλεται while these delays are going on, D. 4.37: fut. μελλήσομαι dub. l. in Procop. Goth. 2.30: pf. part. μεμελλημένος, = μέλλων, σφυγμός Gal. 9.308.

μέλλω; future μελλήσω (Matthew 24:6; and L T Tr WH in 2 Peter 1:12); imperfect ἔμελλον (so all editions in Luke 9:31 (except T WH); John 6:6, 71 (except R G); (except T); (except L Tr); Acts 21:27; Revelation 3:2 (where R present); (except L Tr)) and ἤμελλον (so all editions in Luke 7:2; Luke 10:1 (except R G); ; John 4:47; John 12:33; John 18:32; Acts 12:6 (exe. R G L); (except R G); (except R G T); Hebrews 11:8 (except L); cf. references under the word βούλομαι, at the beginning and Rutherford’s note on Babrius 7, 15), to be about to do anything; so:

1. the participle, ὁ μέλλων, absolutely: τά μέλλοντα and τά ἐνεστῶτα are contrasted, Romans 8:38; 1 Corinthians 3:22; εἰς τό μέλλον, for the future, hereafter, Luke 13:9 (but see εἰς, A. II. 2 (where Grimm supplies ἔτος)); 1 Timothy 6:19; τά μέλλοντα, things future, things to come, i. e., according to the context, the more perfect state of things which will exist in the αἰών μέλλων, Colossians 2:17; with nouns, ὁ αἰών ὁ μέλλων, Matthew 12:32; Ephesians 1:21; ζωῆς τῆς νῦν καί τῆς μελλούσης, 1 Timothy 4:8; τήν οἰκουμένην τήν μέλλουσαν, Hebrews 2:5; τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς Matthew 3:7; τό κρίμα τό μέλλον, Acts 24:25; πόλις, Hebrews 13:14; τά μέλλοντα ἀγαθά, Hebrews 9:11 (but L Tr marginal reading WH text γενομένων); ; τοῦ μέλλοντος namely, Ἀδάμ, i. e. the Messiah, Romans 5:14.
2. joined to an infinitive (cf. Winers Grammar, 333f (313); Buttmann, § 140, 2), a. to be on the point of doing or suffering something: with an infinitive present, ἤμελλεν ἑαυτόν ἀναιρεῖν, Acts 16:27; τελευτᾶν, Luke 7:2; ἀποθνῄσκειν, John 4:47; add, Luke 21:7; Acts 3:3; Acts 18:14; Acts 20:3; Acts 22:26; Acts 23:27; with an infinitive passive, Acts 21:27; Acts 27:33, etc.
   b. to intend, have in mind, think to: with an infinitive present, Matthew 2:13; Luke 10:1; Luke 19:4; John 6:6, 15; John 7:35; John 12:4; John 14:22 Acts 5:35; Acts 17:31; Acts 20:7, 13; Acts 22:26; Acts 26:2; Acts 27:30; Hebrews 8:5; (2 Peter 1:10 L T Tr WH); Revelation 10:4; with an infinitive aorist (a construction censured by Phryn., p. 336, but authenticated more recently by many examples from the best writings from Homer down; cf. Winers Grammar, 333f (313f); Lob. ad Phryn., p. 745ff; (but see Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 420ff)): Acts 12:6 L T WH; Revelation 2:10 (βαλεῖν R G); ; with future infinitive ἔσεσθαι, Acts 23:30 R G.
   c. as in Greek writings from Homer down, of those things which will come to pass (or which one will do or suffer) by fixed necessity or divine appointment (German sollen (are to be, destined to be, etc.)); with present infinitive active: Matthew 16:27; Matthew 17:12; Matthew 20:22; Luke 9:31; John 6:71; John 7:39; John 11:51; John 12:33; John 18:32; Acts 20:38; Acts 26:22, 23; Hebrews 1:14; Hebrews 11:8; Revelation 2:10a; Revelation 3:10; Revelation 8:13, etc.; ἡλιάς ὁ μέλλων ἔρχεσθαι, Matthew 11:14; ὁ μέλλων λυτροῦσθαι, Luke 24:12; κρίνειν, 2 Timothy 4:1 (WH marginal reading κρῖναι); with present infinitive passive: Matthew 17:22; Mark 13:4; Luke 9:44; Luke 19:11; Luke 21:36; Acts 26:22; Romans 4:24; 1 Thessalonians 3:4; James 2:12; Revelation 1:19 (Tdf. γενέσθαι); Revelation 6:11; τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης, 1 Peter 5:1; with aorist infinitive: τήν μέλλουσαν δόξαν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι, Romans 8:18; τήν μέλλουσαν πίστιν ἀποκαλυφθῆναι, Galatians 3:23; used also of those things which we infer from certain preceding events will of necessity follow: with an infinitive present, Acts 28:6; Romans 8:13; with an infinitive future, Acts 27:10.
   d. in general, of what is sure to happen: with an infinitive present, Matthew 24:6; John 6:71; 1 Timothy 1:16; Revelation 12:5; Revelation 17:8; with an infinitive future ἔσεσθαι, Acts 11:28; Acts 24:15.
   e. to be always on the point of doing without ever doing, i. e. to delay: τί μέλλεις; Acts 22:16 (Aeschylus Prom. 36; τί μέλλετε; Euripides, Hec. 1094; Lucian, dial. mort. 10, 13, and often in secular authors; 4 Macc. 6:23; 9:1).

Question 24

ὅτε

Answer 24

when, while, after; as, as soon as

when, at the time that, at what time, Mt. 7:28; 9:25; Lk. 13:35, et al. freq.

when whenever, while, as long as

ὅτε,

also Cypr., Inscr.Cypr. 135.1 H., Dor. ὅκα, Aeol. ὄτα (qq. v.), Relat. Adv., formed from the Relat. stem ὁ- and τε (v. τε B), answering to demonstr. τότε and interrog. πότε; prop. of Time, but sts. passing into a causal sense (cf. ὁπότε). of Time, when, at the time when,

I Constr.:

1 with ind. to denote single events or actions in past time, with impf. or aor., when, Il. 1.397, 432, etc.: rarely with plpf., 5.392: the Verb is sts. to be repeated from the apodosis, Καλλίξενος δὲ κατελθών, ὅ. καὶ οἱ ἐκ Πειραιῶς (sc. κατῆλθον) X. HG 1.7.35: freq. in ellipt. phrases, πῇ ἔβαν εὐχωλαί, ὅ. δὴ φάμεν εἶναι ἄριστοι; whither are gone the boasts, [ which we made] when we said.. ? Il. 8.229: so after Verbs of perception and the like, ἦ οὐ μέμνῃ, ὅ. τ’ ἐκρέμω..; rememberest thou not [ the time] when.. ? 15.18, cf. 21.396, Od. 24.115, Ar. V. 354, Th. 2.21, etc.; ἄκουσα εὐχομένης ὅτ’ ἔφησθα.. Il. 1.397, cf. Pl. Lg. 782c; οὐδ’ ἔλαθ’ Αἴαντα Ζεύς, ὅ. δὴ Τρώεσσι δίδου.. νίκην Il. 17.627. with pres., of a thing always happening or now going on, 2.471; νῦν, ὅ… σοι ὀξέως ὑπακούω X. Cyr. 2.4.6; ᾔδεα μὲν γὰρ ὅ… Δαναοῖσιν ἄμυνεν, οἶδα δὲ νῦν ὅ. τοὺς.. κυδάνει Il. 14.71. rarely with fut., of a definite future, Od. 18.272.

2. with opt., to denote repeated events or actions in past time, ἔνθα πάρος κοιμᾶθ’, ὅ. μιν γλυκὺς ὕπνος ἱκάνοι whenever, as often as, Il. 1.610, cf. Od. 8.87, etc.; ὅ. δή Il. 3.216. sts. of future events which are represented as uncertain, in clauses dependent on a Verb in the opt. or subj., οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις.., ὅτ’ ἐν κονίῃσι μιγείης 3.55, cf. 18.465, 21.429, A. Eu. 726. ὅ. μή, in early authors always with opt., for εἰ μή, unless, except, save when, Il. 13.319, Od. 16.197, Arist. Pol. 1277a24: used by A.R. with subj., 1.245, 4.409.
3. with subj., only in and Lyr., Il. 4.259, 19.337, 21.323, etc., prob. in A. Ag. 766 (lyr.).

II Special usages:

1. in Hom. to introduce a simile, ὡς δ’ ὅτε as when, mostly with subj., Il. 2.147, 4.130, 141, 6.506, al.: sts. with ind., 16.364, 21.12: the Verb must freq. be supplied from the context, as in 2.394, 4.462.
2. in the phrase πρίν γ’ ὅτε δή.., ἤ is omitted before ὅτε, 9.488, 12.437, cf. Od. 13.322.

III ὅτε with other Particles,

1 ὅτ’ ἄν, ὅτε κεν, v. cross ὅταν.

2. ὅτε δή and ὅτε δή ῥα, stronger than ὅτε, freq. in Hom. and Hes., ὅτε δή Il. 5.65, al., Hes. Th. 280, al.; ὅτε δή ῥα Il. 4.446, al., Hes. Th. 58,al.; v. infr. IV. I; so ὅτ’ ἄρ’ Il. 10.540.
3. ὅτε τε (where τε is otiose, v. τε B. I) 2.471, 10.83, etc.
4. ὅτε περ even when, 5.802, 14.319, al., Hdt. 5.99, Th. 1.8, etc.; ὅτε πέρ τε Il. 4.259, 10.7. the proper correl.
5. Adv. is τότε, as ὅ. δὴ.., τότε δὴ.. 10.365; ὅ. δή ῥ’.., δὴ τότε 23.721; ὅ. δὴ.., καὶ τότε δὴ.. 22.208; ὅ. δή ῥα.., καὶ τότ’ ἄρ’ 24.31: for τότε we sts. have ἔπειτα, 3.221; αὐτίκα δ’, 4.210; δὲ.., 5.438; also νῦν.., ὅ… S. Aj. 710 (lyr.), etc.; μεθύστερον, ὅ… Id. Tr. 711; ἤματι τῷ, ὅ… Il. 2.743, etc.; so in Att., ἦν ποτε χρόνος, ὅ… Pl. Prt. 320c, cf. Phd. 75a, Hdt. 1.160.
6. elliptical in the phrase ἔστιν ὅ. or ἔσθ’ ὅ., there are times when, sometimes, now and then, ἔστι ὅ. Id. 2.120; ἔστιν ὅ. Pl. Phd. 62a; ἔσθ’ ὅ. S. Aj. 56 (v. infr. c).
7. ὅτε sts. has a causal sense, when, seeing that, mostly with pres. ind., Il. 16.433 (v.l. cross ὅ τε) ὅ. δή 20.29; and in Trag. and Att. Prose, as S. Aj. 1095, OT 918, Pl. Smp. 206b, R. 581e, Prt. 356c, Sph. 254b, etc.; so ὅ. γε Hdt. 5.92. ά: with pf. used as pres., S. Ph. 428, Ar. Numbers 34:1-29.
8. sts. where ὥστε would be more usual, οὕτω.. πόρρω κλέος ἥκει, ὅ. καὶ βασιλεὺς ἠρώτησεν Id. Ach. 647. ὁτέ Indef. Adv., sometimes, now and then, used like cross ποτέ at the beginning of each of two corresponding clauses, now.., now.., sometimes.., sometimes.. (not in early Prose, ὁτὲ μὲν.., ὁτὲ δὲ.. Arist. Pol. 1290a4, al.), ὁτὲ μὲν.., ἄλλοτε.. Il. 20.49s q.; ὁτὲ μὲν.., ἄλλοτε δ’ αὖ.. 18.599 sq.; ὁτὲ μέν τε.., ἄλλοτε δὲ.. 11.64; ὁτὲ μὲν.., ὁτὲ δ’ αὖτε.. A.R. 1.1270; ὁτὲ μέν τε.., ὅτ’ αὖ.. Id. 3.1300; ὁτὲ μὲν.., ποτὲ δὲ.. Plb. 6.20.8; ὁτὲ μὲν.., ὁτὲ δὲ.., καὶ ἄλλοτε.. D.L. 2.106; ὁτὲ μὲν.., πάλιν δὲ.. Arist. EN 1100a28; ἐνίοτε μὲν.., ὁτὲ δὲ.. Id. Mete. 360b3; ὁτὲ μὲν.., ἢ.. Id. Po. 1448a21 (s. v.l.): also reversely, ἄλλοτε μὲν.., ὁτὲ δὲ.. Il. 11.568; also ὁτὲ δέ in the second clause, without any correlative in the first, 17.178; S. joins ἔσθ’ ὅτε.., ὅτ’ ἄλλοτ’ ἄλλον Aj. 56; ὁτὲ δέ alone, at the beginning of a clause, X. Cyn. 5.8 and 20, 9.8 and 20.

ὅτε, a particle of time (from Homer down), when;

1. with the indicative (Winers Grammar, 296f (278f)); indicative present (of something certain and customary, see Herm. ad Vig., p. 913f), while: John 9:4; Hebrews 9:17; with an historical present Mark 11:1. with the imperfect (of a thing done on occasion or customary); Mark 14:12; Mark 15:41; Mark 6:21 R G; John 21:18; Acts 12:6; Acts 22:20; Romans 6:20; Romans 7:5; 1 Corinthians 13:11; Galatians 4:3; Colossians 3:7; 1 Thessalonians 3:4; 2 Thessalonians 3:10; 1 Peter 3:20. with an indicative aorist, Latinquom with pluperfect (Winers Grammar, § 40, 5; (Buttmann, § 137, 6)): Matthew 9:25; Matthew 13:26, 48; Matthew 17:25 (R G); ; Mark 1:32; Mark 4:10; Mark 8:19; Mark 15:20; Luke 2:21f, 42; Luke 4:25; 6:( L T WH), ; ; John 1:19; John 2:22; John 4:45 (where Tdf. ὡς), etc.; Acts 1:13; Acts 8:12, 39; Acts 11:2; Acts 21:5, 35; Acts 27:39; Acts 28:16; Romans 13:11 (than when we gave in our allegiance to Christ; Latinquom Christo nomen dedissemus (R. V. than when we first believed)); Galatians 1:15; Galatians 2:11, 12, 14; Galatians 4:4; Philippians 4:15; Hebrews 7:10; Revelation 1:17; Revelation 6:3, 5, 7, 9, 12; Revelation 8:1, etc.; so also Matthew 12:3; Mark 2:25; (John 12:41 R Tr marginal reading ὅτε εἶδεν, when it had presented itself to his sight (but best texts ὅτι: because he saw etc.)). ἐγένετο, ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν, a common phrase in Matthew, viz. Matthew 7:28; Matthew 11:1; Matthew 13:53; Matthew 19:1; Matthew 26:1. ὅτε … τότε, Matthew 21:1; John 12:16. with the indicative perfect, since (R. V. now that I am become), 1 Corinthians 13:11; with the indicative future: Luke 17:22; John 4:21, 23; John 5:25; John 16:25; Romans 2:16 (R G T Tr text WH marginal reading) (where Lachmann ἡ (others besides)); 2 Timothy 4:3.
2. with the aorist subjunctive: ἕως ἄν ἥξῃ, ὅτε εἴπητε (where ὅταν, might have been expected), until the time have come, when ye have said, Luke 13:35 (R G (cf. Tr brackets)); cf. Matthiae, ii., p. 1196f; Bornemann, Scholia in Lucae evang., p. 92; Winers Grammar, 298 (279); (Bernhardy (1829), p. 400; cf. Buttmann, 231f (199)).

Question 25

πῶς

Answer 25

how? in what way?; how!

interrogative particle, How? In what manner? By what means? Mt. 7:4; 22:12; Jn. 6:52; used in interrogations which imply a negative, Mt. 12:26, 29, 34; 22:45; 23:33; Acts 8:31; put concisely for How is it that? How does it come to pass that? Mt. 16:11; 22:43; Mk. 4:40; Jn. 7:15; with an indirect interrogation, how, in what manner, Mt. 6:28; 10:19; Mk. 11:18; put for τι, What? Lk. 10:26; put for ως, as a particle of exclamation, how, how much, how greatly, Mk. 10:23, 24

πῶς,

Ion. κῶς, interrog. Adv. of Manner, how? Il. 1.123, etc.; sts. to express displeasure, 4.26, S. OT 391, Ph. 1031, Tr. 192; to express astonishment or doubt, π. εἶπας; A. Pers. 798, S. El. 407, etc.; π. λέγεις; Id. Ph. 1407; π. φῄς; A. Ag. 268, E. El. 575; π. τοῦτ’ ἔλεξας; A. Pers. 793; π. τοῦτ’ εἶπες αὖ; Pl. Plt. 309c; also π. μὴ φῶμεν . .; surely we must, Id. Tht. 161e . in dialogue, to ask explanation, with a repetition of a word used by the previous speaker, δίκαια — Answ. π. δίκαια; S. OC 832; μὴ δίκαιος ὤν — Answ. π. μὴ δίκαιος; Id. Tr. 412; συμβολάς — Answ. π. συμβολάς; Alex. 143; πῶς alone, how so, π., ὅς γε . .; S. Ph. 1386 .

2. with a second interrog. in the same clause, π. ἐκ τίνος νεώς ποτε . . ἥκετε; how and by what ship . .? E. Hel. 1543; τί τἀμὰ — π. ἔχει — θεσπίσματα; ib. 873; π. τί τοῦτο λέγεις; how say you and what? Pl. Ti. 22b, cf. Tht. 146d, 208e, etc.
3. c. gen. modi, π. ἀγῶνος ἥκομεν; how are we come off in it? E. El. 751; π. ἔχει πλήθους ἐπισκοπεῖ Pl. Grg. 451c .
4. with Verbs of selling, how? at what price? π. ὁ σῖτος ὤνιος; Ar. Ach. 758, cf. Eq. 480; τὰ δ’ ἄλφιθ’ ὑμῖν π. ἐπώλουν; — Answ. τεττάρων δραχμῶν . . τὸν κόφινον Stratt. 13 .

II with other Particles, π. ἂν . .; π. κε(ν) . .; how possibly . .? π. ἂν ἔπειτ’ ἀπὸ σεῖο . . λιποίμην οἶος; Il. 9.437, cf. Od. 1.65, etc.; π. ἂν γένοιτ’ ἂν . . ποδῶν ἔκμακτρον; E. El. 534: so with indic., Il. 22.202, E. Alc. 96 (lyr.), etc. in Trag., π. ἄν c. opt. is freq. used to express a wish, O how might it be? i.e. would that it might . .! π. ἂν θάνοιμι; π. ἂν ὀλοίμην; etc., S. Aj. 388 (lyr.), E. Supp. 796 (lyr.), cf. Hipp. 208 (anap.), 345; rare in Com., Ar. Th. 22 (a trace of this usage appears in Hom., Od. 15.195 ): in later Prose, π. ἂν γένοιτο ἑσπέρα; LXX De. 28.67; also with aor. subj. (without ἄν ), π. κοιμηθῶ; M.Ant. 9.40; π. μή μοι μέγας λέων ἐπιφανῇ; Arr. Epict. 4.10.10; with pres., π. μὴ χρῄζω; M.Ant.l.c.

2. π. ἄρα . .; in reply, how then? π. τ’ ἄρ’ ἴω . .; Il. 18.188, cf. Od. 3.22, h.Ap. 19, 207 .
3. π. γὰρ . .; also in reply, as if something had gone before, [ that cannot be ], for how can . .? Il. 1.123, Od. 10.337, etc.; π. γὰρ κάτοιδα; S. Ph. 250, cf. 1383; v. infr. 111.1 .
4. π. δὲ . .; to introduce a strong objection, π. δὲ σὺ νῦν μέμονας, κύον ἀδδεές . .; Il. 21.481, cf. Od. 18.31; δόξει δὲ π .; A. Pr. 261 .
5. π. δή; how in the world? π. δὴ φῂς πολέμοιο μεθιέμεν; Il. 4.351, cf. 18.364, A. Ag. 543, etc.; also π. γὰρ δή . .; Od. 16.70; π. δῆτα . .; A. Ag. 622, 1211, Ar. Nu. 79, etc.
6. π. καὶ . .; just how . .? E. Hec. 515, Ph. 1354, etc.; π. δὲ καὶ . .; A. Pers. 721, v. καί B. 6; but καὶ π . . .; to introduce an objection, E. Ph. 1348, v. καί A. 11.2: hence καὶ π .; alone, but how? impossible! Pl. Alc. 1.134c, Tht. 163d, etc.
7. π. οὐ . .; how not so . .? i.e. surely it is so . ., π. οὐ δεινὰ εἴργασθε; Th. 3.66, cf. Ar. Nu. 398, D. 18.273 .
8. π. οὖν . .; like π. ἄρα . .; A. Supp. 297, 340, S. OT 568, etc.; π. ἂν οὖν . . with opt., A. Pers. 243, E. IT 98 .
9. π. ποτε . .; how ever . .? S. OT 1210 (lyr.), Ph. 687 (lyr.).

III πῶς folld. by several of the abovenamed Particles is freq. used in elliptical sentences, as,

1 π. γάρ; inserted parenthet. in a negative sentence, for how is it possible? how can or could it be? hence in emphatic denial, κἀγὼ μὲν οὐκ ἔδρασα, τοῦτ’ ἐπίσταμαι, οὐδ’ αὖ σύ· π. γάρ; Id. El. 911; οὐκ ἀπορῶν ( π. γάρ; ), ὅς γε . . D. 18.312, cf. 21.217, Pl. Sph. 263c, etc.; οὐδ’ ἐπὶ τὴν ἑστίαν καταφυγών ( π. γὰρ ἄν; ), ὅστις . . Lys. 1.27; π. γὰρ οὔ; how can it but be? i.e. it must be so, A. Ch. 754, S. El. 1307, Pl. Tht. 160c, al.; π. γάρ; (sc. ἄλλως ἔχει ) is so used in S. Aj. 279 .

2. π. δή; how so? A. Eu. 601, Ar. Nu. 664, 673, etc.; π. δῆτα; Pl. Grg. 469b; π. δαί; Ar. V. 1212 .
3. π. δ’ οὔ; like π. γὰρ οὔ; (v. supr. 1 ), Pl. Tht. 153b, R. 457a; π. δ’ οὐχί; S. OT 1015, Ar. Pax 1027; parenthetically, S. OT 567; π. δ’ οὐκ ἄν . .; A. Pr. 759 .
4. π. οὖν; how then? how next? E. Med. 1376, Hipp. 598, 1261, D. 19.124; π. οὖν ἄν . .; X. Mem. 1.2.64 .
5. π. δοκεῖς; parenthet., in conversation, how think you? hence (losing all interrog. force),= λίαν, wonderfully, Ar. Pl. 742, Nu. 881, Ach. 24; also π. οἴει σφόδρα Id. Ra. 54; cf. δοκέω 1.2 . π . in indirect questions for ὅπως, A. Eu. 677, S. Tr. 991 (anap.), Ar. Eq. 614, X. Mem. 1.2.36, etc.; ἐθαύμαζον ἂν π . . . ἔδεισαν IG 12(3).174.28 (Cnidus, Epist.Aug.); ζητηθήσεται π. ὅτι καὶ τοῦτο ἀληθές ἐστι S.E. M. 8.16 . in exclamations, ὦ π. πονηρόν ἐστιν ἀνθρώπου φύσις τὸ σύνολον Philem. 2; π. παραχρῆμα ἐξηράνθη . . ! Ev.Matthew 21:20; π. δυσκόλως . . ! Mark 10:23 .

πῶς (from the obsolete ΠΟΣ, whence ποῦ, ποῖ, etc. (cf. Curtius, § 631)), adverb (from Homer down);

I. in interrogation; how? in what way? — in a direct question, followed by a. the indicative, it is the expression α. of one seeking information and desiring to be taught: Luke 1:34; Luke 10:26; John 3:9; John 9:26; 1 Corinthians 15:35 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 266 (250)); πῶς οὖν, John 9:10 Tdf. (but L WH brackets οὖν), John 9:19; Romans 4:10. β. of one about to controvert another, and emphatically deny that the thing inquired about has happened or been done: Matthew 12:29; Mark 3:23; Luke 11:18; John 3:4, 12; John 5:44, 47; John 6:52; John 9:16; 1 John 3:17; 1 John 4:20; Romans 3:6; Romans 6:2; 1 Corinthians 14:7, 9, 16; 1 Timothy 3:5; Hebrews 2:3; καί πῶς, Mark 4:13; John 14:5 (here L text Tr WH omit καί); πῶς οὖν, Matthew 12:26; Romans 10:14 R G; πῶς δέ, Romans 10:14a R G L marginal reading, 14b R G T, 15 R G (on this see in b. below). where something is asserted and an affirmative answer is expected, πῶς οὐχί is used: Romans 8:32; 2 Corinthians 3:8. γ. of surprise, intimating that what has been done or is said could not have been done or said, or not rightly done or said — being equivalent to how is it, or how has it come to pass, that etc.: Galatians 2:14 G L T Tr WH; Matthew 22:12; John 4:9; John 6:52; John 7:15; πῶς λέγεις, λέγουσι, κτλ., Mark 12:35; Luke 20:41; John 8:38; καί πῶς, Luke 20:44; Acts 2:8; καί πῶς σύ λέγεις, John 12:34; John 14:9 (here L T WH omit; Tr brackets καί); πῶς οὖν, John 6:42 (here T WH Tr text πῶς νῦν); Matthew 22:43; πῶς οὐ, how is it that … not, why not? Matthew 16:11; Mark 8:21 R G L marginal reading; (R G T); Luke 12:56.
b. the deliberative subjunctive (where the question is, how that can be done which ought to be done): πῶς πληρωθῶσιν αἱ γραφαί, how are the Scriptures (which ought to be fulfilled) to be fulfilled? Matthew 26:54; πῶς φύγητε, how shall ye (who wish to escape) escape etc. Matthew 23:33; add, πῶς οὖν, Romans 10:14 L T Tr WH; πῶς δέ, Romans 10:14a L text T Tr WH; 14{b} L Tr WH; 15 L T Tr WH (Sir. 49:11); cf. Fritzsche on Romans, vol. ii., 405f c. followed by ἄν with the optative: πῶς γάρ ἄν δυναίμην; Acts 8:31 (on which see ἄν, III., p. 34b).
II. By a somewhat negligent use, occasionally met with, even in Attic writings, but more frequent in later authors, πῶς is found in indirect discourse, where regularly ὅπως ought to have stood; cf. Winers Grammar, § 57, 2 at the end; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, IV.).
a. with the indicative — present: Matthew 6:28; Mark 12:41; Luke 12:27; Acts 15:36; 1 Corinthians 3:10; Ephesians 5:15; Colossians 4:6; 1 Timothy 3:15; τό πῶς (on the article see ὁ, II. 10 a.); with the imperfect Luke 14:7; with the perfect, Revelation 3:3; with the aorist, Matthew 12:4; Mark 2:26 (here Tr WH brackets πῶς); Luke 8:36; Acts 9:27, etc.; after ἀναγινώσκειν, Mark 12:26 T Tr WH; how it came to pass that, etc. John 9:15; with the future: μέριμνα, πῶς ἀρέσει (because the direct question would be πῶς ἀρέσω;), 1 Corinthians 7:32-34 (but L T Tr WH ἀρέσῃ); ἐζήτουν πῶς αὐτόν ἀπολέσουσιν, how they shall destroy him (so that they were in no uncertainty respecting his destruction, but were only deliberating about the way in which they will accomplish it), Mark 11:18 R G (but the more correct reading here, according to the best manuscripts, including codex Siniaticus, is ἀπολέσωσιν ‘how they should destroy him’ (cf. Winers Grammar, § 41 b. 4 b.; Buttmann, § 139, 61; see the next entry)).
b. with the subjunctive, of the aorist and in deliberation: Mark 11:18 L T Tr WH; Mark 14:1, 11 (R G); Matthew 10:19; Luke 12:11; τό πῶς, Luke 22:2, 4; Acts 4:21.
III. in exclamation, how: πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστιν, Mark 10:24; πῶς παραχρῆμα, Matthew 21:20; πῶς δυσκόλως, Mark 10:23; Luke 18:24; with a verb, how (greatly): πῶς συνέχομαι, Luke 12:50; πῶς ἐφίλει αὐτόν, John 11:36.

Question 26

ἐκεῖ

Answer 26

there, in that place

there, in a place where
Definition:
there, in that place, Mt. 2:13, 15; to that place, Mt. 2:22; 17:20

there, in or to that place

ἐκεῖ

(not in Hom.), Aeol. κῆ Sapph. 51: Dor. τηνεῖ (q.v.): —

I

1. Adv. there, in that place, opp. ἐνθάδε, Th. 6.83; οἱ ἐ. S. El. 685, etc.; τἀκεῖ what is or happens there, events there, E. Fr. 578.5, Th. 1.90; redundant, οὗ ἦν ἐ. LXX 1 Samuel 9:10.
2. freq. as euphem. for ἐν Ἅιδου, in another world, κἀκεῖ δικάζει τἀμπλακήματα Ζεὺς ἄλλος A. Supp. 230, cf. Ch. 359 (lyr.), S. Ant. 76; εὐδαιμονοίτην, ἀλλ’ἐ. E. Med. 1073; εὔκολος μὲν ἐνθάδ’, εὔκολος δ’ ἐκεῖ Ar. Ra. 82, cf. Pl. Phd. 64a, al.; in full, ἐκεῖ δ’ ἐν Ἅιδου E. Hec. 418; οἱ ἐ. euphem. for the dead, A. Ch. 355 (lyr.), S. OT 776, Pl. R. 427b, Isoc. 14.61.
3. Philos., in the intelligible world, Plot. 1.2.7, 2.4.5, etc.

II with Verbs of motion, for ἐκεῖσε, thither, ἐ. πλέομεν Hdt. 7.147; ἐ. ἀπικέσθαι v.l. in Id. 9.108; ὁδοῦ τῆς ἐ. S. OC 1019; οἱ ἐ. καταπεφευγότες Th. 3.71, cf. Plb. 5.101.10; βλέψον δὲ κἀκεῖ Men. Epit. 103.

III rarely, of Time, then, S. Ph. 395 (lyr.), D. 22.38.

ἐκεῖ, adverb of place, there;

a. properly: Matthew 2:13, 15; Matthew 5:24, and frequent. In Luke 13:28; ἐκεῖ is not used for ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ followed by ὅταν (at that time … when etc.), but means in that place whither ye have been banished; cf. Meyer at the passage οἱ ἐκεῖ, namely, ὄντες, standing there, Matthew 26:71 (Tr marginal reading αὐτοί ἐκεῖ). It answers to a relative adverb: οὗ τό πνεῦμα, ἐκεῖ ἐλευθερία, 2 Corinthians 3:17 Rec.; Matthew 6:21; Matthew 18:20; Matthew 24:28; Mark 6:10; Luke 12:34; Hebraistically, where a preceding adverb or relative pronoun has already attracted the verb, ἐκεῖ is added to this verb pleonastically: Revelation 12:6 G T Tr WH (ὅπου ἔχει ἐκεῖ τόπον), Revelation 12:14 (ὅπου τρέφεται ἐκεῖ); cf. Deuteronomy 4:5, 14, 26; 1 Macc. 14:34, and what was said, p. 86{b}, 5 on the pronoun αὐτός after a relative.
b. by a negligent use common also in the classics it stands after verbs of motion for ἐκεῖσε, thither: so after ἀπέρχομαι, Matthew 2:22; μεταβαίνω, Matthew 17:20; ὑπάγω, John 11:8; ἔρχομαι, John 18:3; προπέμπομαι, Romans 15:24; cf. Lob. ad Phryn., pp. 43f, 128; Hermann on Sophocles Antig. 515; Trachin. 1006; Alexander Buttmann (1873) on Philoct. 481; Winers Grammar, § 54, 7; Buttmann, 71 (62) and 378 (324).

Question 27

ἐρῶ

Answer 27

I shall say (future of λέγω,

ἔλεγον), ἐρῶ, εἶ\πον ορ εἶ\πα, εἴρηκα, εἴρημαι, ἐρρέθην ορ ἐρρήθην

Question 28

ἀναβαίνω

Answer 28

ἀναβήσομαι, ἀνέβην, ἀναβέβηκα, -, -

I go up

to go up, rise
Definition:
to go up, ascend, Mt. 5:1; to climb, Lk. 19:4; to go on board, Mk. 6:51; to rise, mount upwards, as smoke, Rev. 8:4; to grow or spring up, as plants, Mt. 13:7; to spring up, arise, as thoughts, Lk. 24:38

ascend
to go up
to rise, mount, be borne up, spring up

ἀναβαίνω,

impf. ἀνέβαινον: fut. -βήσομαι: (for aor. 1 v. infr. B): aor. 2 ἀνέβην, imper. ἀνάβηθι, -βῶ, -βῆναι, -βάς: pf. -βέβηκα: — Med., aor. 1 -εβησάμην, Ephesians 3:1-21 -εβήσετο, v. infr. B: — Pass., v. infr. 11.2: —

I go up, mount, c. acc. loci, οὐρανόν, ὑπερώϊα ἀ. go up to heaven, to the upper rooms, Il. 1.497, Od. 18.302; φάτις ἀνθρώπους ἀναβαίνει goes up among, ib. 6.29; more freq. with Pr, ἀ. εἰς ἐλάτην, ἐς δίφρον, Il. 14.287, 16.657; rarely with ἀνά repeated, ἀν’ ὀρσοθύρην ἀ. Od. 22.132; after Hom., most. freq. with ἐπί, ἀ. ἐπὶ τὰ ὑψηλότατα τῶν ὀρέων Hdt. 1.131: c. dat., νεκροῖς ἀ. to trample on the dead, Il. 10.493: metaph., ἐπειδὴ ἐνταῦθα ἀναβεβήκαμεν τοῦ λόγου Pl. R. 445c.

II Special usages:

1 mount a ship, go on board, in Hom. mostly abs.; ἐς Τροίην ἀ. embark for Troy, Od. 1.210; ἀπὸ Κρήτης ἀ. 14.252; ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς Th. 4.44, etc.: metaph., ἀναβάσομαι στόλον I will mount a prow, Pi. P. 2.62.

2. mount on horse-back (cf. ἀναβάτης), ἀ. ἐφ’ ἵππον X. Cyr. 4.1.7, cf. 7.1.3: abs., ἀναβεβηκώς mounted; ἀναβάντες (abs.) ἐφ’ ἵππων ἐλάσαι 3.3.27; ἀ. ἐπὶ τροχόν mount on the wheel of torture, Antipho 5.40. c. acc., ἀ. ἵππον mount a horse, Theopomp.Hist. 2: — Pass., [ ἵππος] ὁ μήπω ἀναβαινόμενος that has not yet been mounted, X. Eq. 1.1; ἀναβαθείς when mounted, ib. 3.4; ἐν ἵππῳ ἀναβεβαμένῳ Id. Eq.Mag. 3.4, cf. 1.4.
3. of land-journeys, go up from the coast into Central Asia, Hdt. 5.100, X. An. 1.1.2; ἀ. παρὰ βασιλέα Pl. Alc. 1.123b. go up to a temple, PPar. 47.19, Luke 18:10; to a town, Matthew 20:18, al., cf. PLond. 3.1170b. 46 (iii A. D.), etc.; in curses, ἀ. παρὰ Δάματρα πεπρημένος GDI 3536.19 (Cnidus), cf. SIG 1180.9 (ibid.). ascend to heaven, Ascens.Isaiah 2:16.
4. of rivers in flood, rise, Hdt. 2.13; ἀ. ἐς τὰς ἀρούρας overflow the fields, Id. 1.193.
5. of plants, shoot up, ἐπὶ δένδρα X. Oec. 19.18; climb on sticks, Thphr. HP 8.3.2; generally, shoot, spring up, Matthew 13:7; of hair, X. Smp. 4.23.
6. in Att., ἀ. ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα, or ἀ. alone, mount the tribune, rise to speak, D. 18.66, 21.205, Prooem. 56; ἀ. εἰς τὸ πλῆθος, εἰς or ἐπὶ τὸ δικαστήριον come before the people, before the court, Pl. Ap. 31c, 40b, Grg. 486b; ἀ. ἐπὶ τὸν ὀκρίβαντα mount the stage, Id. Smp. 194b: abs., ἀνάβαινε Ar. Eq. 149; ἀνάβηθι Id. V. 963; of witnesses in court, Lys. 1.29.
7. of the male, mount, cover, ἀ. τὰς θηλέας Hdt. 1.192, cf. Ar. Fr. 329; ἀ. ἐπί Ph. 1.651, cf. Moer. 3: — Pass., Milet. 3.31 (a).6 (vi B. C.).
8. of age, δύο ἀναβεβηκὼς ἔτη τῆς ἡλικίας τῆς ἐμῆς two years older.., Ach. Tat.1.7.
9. ascend to higher knowledge, ἡ ἀναβεβηκυῖα ἐπιστήμη Simp. in Ph. 15.34, cf. 9.30; τὰ ἀναβεβηκότα generalities, Sor. 2.5.
10. c. acc., surpass, κάλλει τὴν πᾶσαν διακόσμησιν Lyd. Ost. 22.

III of things and events,

1. come to an end, turn out, Hdt. 7.10. θ; ἀπό τινος ἀ. result from, X. Ath. 2.17. ἀ. ἐπὶ καρδίαν enter into one’s heart, of thoughts, LXX 4 Ki. 12.4, Jeremiah 3:16; 1 Corinthians 2:9, cf. Luke 24:38.
2. come to, pass over to, ἐς Αεωνίδην ἀνέβαινεν ἡ βασιληΐη Hdt. 7.205, cf. 1.109. return to the beginning, of discourse, Democr. 144a; go back, ἀναβήσεται ἐπὶ τὰς κτίσεις τῶν προγόνων Hermog. Inv. 2.2. aor. ἀνέβησα in causal sense, make to go up, esp. put on shipboard, Il. 1.143, Pi. P. 4.191; so in aor. Med., νὼ ἀναβησάμενοι having taken us on board with them, Od. 15.475: rare in Prose, ἄνδρας ἐπὶ καμήλους ἀνέβησε he mounted men on camels, Hdt. 1.80.

ἀναβαίνω; (imperfect ἀνέβαινον Acts 3:1; future ἀναβήσομαι Romans 10:6, after Deuteronomy 30:12); perfect ἀναβέβηκα; 2 aorist ἀνέβην, participle ἀναβάς, imperative ἀνάβα Revelation 4:1 (ἀνάβηθι Lachmann), plural ἀνάβατε (for R G ἀνάβητε) Revelation 11:12 L T Tr (WH; cf. WHs Appendix, p. 168{b}); Winers Grammar, § 14, 1 h.; (Buttmann, 54 (47); from Homer down); the Sept. for עָלָה;

a. to go up, move to a higher place, ascend: a tree (ἐπί), Luke 19:4; upon the roof of a house (ἐπί), Luke 5:19; into a ship (εἰς), Mark 6:51; (Matthew 15:39 G Tr text; Acts 21:6 Tdf.); εἰς τό ὄρος, Matthew 5:1; Luke 9:28; Mark 3:13; εἰς τό ὑπερῷον, Acts 1:13; εἰς τόν οὐρανόν, Romans 10:6; Revelation 11:12 εἰς τόν οὐρανόν is omitted, but to be supplied, in John 1:51 (); , and in the phrase, ἀναβέβηκα πρός τόν πατέρα, John 20:17. (It is commonly maintained that those persons are figuratively said ἀναβεβηκέναι εἰς τόν οὐρανόν, who have penetrated the heavenly mysteries: John 3:13, cf. Deuteronomy 30:12; Proverbs 24:27 (); Baruch 3:29. But in these latter passages also the expression is to be understood literally. And as respects John 3:13, it must be remembered that Christ brought his knowledge of the divine counsels with him from heaven, inasmuch as he had dwelt there prior to his incarnation. Now the natural language was οὐδείς ἦν ἐν οὐρανῷ; but the expression ἀναβέβηκεν is used because none but Christ could get there except by ascending. Accordingly εἰ μή refers merely to the idea, involved in ἀναβέβηκεν of a past residence in heaven. Cf. Meyer (or Westcott) at the passage) Used of travelling to a higher place: εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, Matthew 20:17; Mark 10:32f, etc.; εἰς τό ἱερόν, John 7:14; Luke 18:10. Often the place to or into which the ascent is made is not mentioned, but is easily understood from the context: Acts 8:31 (into the chariot); Mark 15:8 (to the palace of the governor, according to the reading ἀναβάς restored by L T Tr text WH for R G ἀναβοήσας), etc.; or the place alone is mentioned from which (ἀπό, ἐκ) the ascent is made: Matthew 3:16; Acts 8:39; Revelation 11:7.
b. in a wider sense of things rising up, to rise, mount, be borne up, spring up: of a fish swimming up, Matthew 17:27; of smoke rising up, Revelation 8:4; Revelation 9:2; of plants springing up from the ground, Matthew 13:7; Mark 4:7, 32 (as in Greek writings; Theophrastus, hist. plant. 8, 3, and Hebrew עָלָה); of things which come up in one’s mind (Latinsuboriri): ἀναβαίνειν … ἐπί τήν καρδίαν or ἐν τῇ καρδία, Luke 24:38; 1 Corinthians 2:9; Acts 7:23 (ἀνέβη ἐπί τήν καρδίαν it came into his mind i. e. he resolved, followed by an infinitive), after the Hebrew אֶל־לֵב עָלָה, Jeremiah 3:16, etc. (Buttmann, 135 (118)). Of messages, prayers, deeds, brought up or reported to one in a higher place: Acts 10:4; Acts 21:31 (tidings came up to the tribune of the cohort, who dwelt in the tower Antonia). (Compare: προσαναβαίνω, συναναβαίνω).

Question 29

ὅπου

Answer 29

where

where, wherever; whenever
Definition:
where, in which place, in what place, Mt. 6:19, 20, 21; Rev. 2:13; whither, to what place, Jn. 8:21; 14:4; ὅπου ἄν, or ἐάν, wherever, in whatever place, Mt. 24:28; whithersoever, Mt. 8:19; Jas. 3:4; met. where, in which thing, state, etc., Col. 3:11; whereas, 1 Cor. 3:3; 2 Pet. 2:11

where, whereas

ὅπου,

Ion. ὅκου, Relat., indirect interrog., and indef. Adv. of Place, correlat. to ποῦ:

I

1. as a Relat., sts. c. gen. loci, τῆς πόλεως ὅπου κάλλιστον στρατοπεδεύσασθαι Pl. R. 415d, cf. Hdt. 2.172; ὅπου βούλοιτο τοῦ δρόμου X. HG 2.4.27; ἔσθ’ ὅπου in some places, A. Eu. 517 (lyr.), Fr. 302: standing for the Relat. Adj., μέλη, ὅπου (i. e. ἐν οἷς) χελιδὼν ἦν τις ἐμπεποιημένη Ar. Av. 1301: with other Particles, ὅκου δή somewhere or other, Hdt. 3.129; ὅπου ἄν wherever, with subj., IG 12.76.11, etc.; in Trag. the ἄν may be omitted, as ὅπου δ’ Ἀπόλλων σκαιὸς ᾖ, τίνες σοφοί; E. El. 972, etc. (never in Att. Prose): c. gen., ὅπου ἂν τύχῃ τῶν λεγομένων Pl. Prt. 342e; ὁπουοῦν anywheresoever, Id. Cra. 403c; ὅπουπερ c. opt., wherever, X. Cyr. 3.3.5; ὅπου ποτέ S. OC 12; ὁπουδάν, = ὅπου δὲ ἄν, anywhere, D.C. Fr. 109.21; ὁπουδήποτε, = ubicumque, Dosith.p.410 K.; ὁπουδηποτοῦν anywheresoever, J. Revelation 2:15.
2. in indirect questions, ὄφρα πύθηαι πατρός, ὅπου κύθε γαῖα Od. 3.16, cf. 16.306, S. OT 924, etc.: with Verbs of motion in pregnant sense, ὅκου ἐτράπετο, οὐκέτι εἶχον εἰπεῖν Hdt. 2.119; κεῖνος δ’ ὅπου βέβηκεν, οὐδεὶς οἶδε S. Tr. 40, v.l. in X. Cyr. 3.1.37, etc.: in many passages editors have in this sense restd. ὅποι, mostly from codd.; in repeating a question, ἡ Λακεδαίμων ποῦ ‘στιν; Answ. ὅπου ‘στίν; (do you ask) where it is? Ar. Nu. 214: c. gen., εἰδότες ὅκου γῆς εἴη Hdt. 4.150, cf. Pl. R. 403e.

II the strict local sense occasionally passes into,

1 a sense involving Time or Occasion, ὅ. τιν’ ἴδῃ Thgn. 922, cf. 999, X. HG 3.3.6; σιγᾶν θ’ ὅ. δεῖ καὶ λέγειν τὰ καίρια A. Ch. 582, cf. Eu. 277; οὐκ ἔσθ’ ὅ. there is no case in which, i.e. in no case. S. OT 448, Aj. 1069, E. HF 186, D. 3.35; so ἔστιν ὅ.; as a question, Id. 18.22.

2. of Cause, whereas, Hdt. 1.68, 4.195, Antipho 1.7; ὅ. γὰρ ἐγὼ.. ὁμολογῶ D. 21.205; ὅκου γε, Lat. quandoquidem or quippe, Hdt. 7.118; ὅπου γε X. Cyr. 2.3.11, etc. later as a demonstr. Adv., only in the phrase ὅ. μέν.., ὅ. δέ.. here.., there.., Plu. 2.427c, S.E. P. 1.53, etc.

ὅπου (from ποῦ and the relative ὁ) (from Homer down), where;

1. adverb of place,
   a. in which place, where; α. in relative sentences with the indicative it is used to refer to a preceding noun of place; as, ἐπί τῆς γῆς, ὅπου etc. Matthew 6:19; add, Matthew 6:20; Matthew 13:5; Matthew 28:6; Mark 6:55; Mark 9:44, 46 (which verses T WH omit; Tr brackets), 48; Luke 12:33; John 1:28; John 4:20, 46; John 6:23; John 7:42; John 10:40; John 11:30; John 12:1; John 18:1, 20; John 19:18, 20, 41; John 20:12; Acts 17:1; Revelation 11:8; Revelation 20:10. it refers to ἐκεῖ or ἐκεῖσε to be mentally supplied in what precedes or follows: Matthew 25:24, 26; Mark 2:4; Mark 4:15; Mark 5:40; Mark 13:14; John 3:8; John 6:62; John 7:34; John 11:32; John 14:3; John 17:24; John 20:19; Romans 15:20; Hebrews 9:16; Hebrews 10:18; Revelation 2:13. it refers to ἐκεῖ expressed in what follows: Matthew 6:21; Luke 12:34; Luke 17:37; John 12:26; James 3:16. in imitation of the Hebrew שָׁם אֲשֶׁר (Genesis 13:3; Ecclesiastes 9:10, etc.): ὅπου ἐκεῖ, Revelation 12:6 (G T Tr WH), 14 (see ἐκεῖ, a.); ὅπου … ἐπ’ αὐτῶν, Revelation 17:9. ὅπου also refers to men, so that it is equivalent to with (among) whom, in whose house: Matthew 26:57; (add, Revelation 2:13; cf. Winers Grammar, § 54, 7 at the end); in which state (viz. of the renewed man), Colossians 3:11. it is loosely connected with the thought to which it refers, so that it is equivalent to wherein (A. V. whereas), 2 Peter 2:11 (in the same sense in indirect question, Xenophon, mem. 3, 5, 1). ὅπου ἄν, wherever — with imperfect indicative (see ἄν, II. 1), Mark 6:56 (Tdf. ἐάν); with aorist subjunctive (Latin future perfect), Mark 9:18 (where L T Tr WH ὅπου ἐάν); Mark 14:9 (here too T WH ὅπου ἐάν); also ὅπου ἐάν (see ἐάν, II.), Matthew 26:13; Mark 6:10; Mark 14:14a (in both of the last two passages, L Tr ὅπου ἄν); with subjunctive present Matthew 24:28. β. in indirect questions (yet cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 57, 2 at the end), with subjunctive aorist: Mark 14:14b; Luke 22:11.
   b. joined to verbs signifying motion into a place instead of ὅποι, into which place, whither (see ἐκεῖ, b.): followed by the indicative, John 8:21; John 13:33, 36; John 14:4; John 21:18; (James 3:4 T Tr WH (see below)); ὅπου ἄν, where (whither) soever, with indicative present, Revelation 14:4 L Tr WH (cf. below), cf. Buttmann, § 139, 30; with subjunctive present, Luke 9:57 R G T WH (others, ὅπου ἐάν, see below); James 3:4 (R G L); Revelation 14:4 R G T (see above); ὅπου ἐάν, with subjunctive present, Matthew 8:19, and L Tr in Luke 9:57.
2. It gets the force of a conditional particle if (in case that, in so far as (A. V. whereas (cf. 2 Peter 2:11 above))): 1 Corinthians 3:3 (Clement of Rome, 1 Cor. 43, 1 [ET], and often in Greek writings; cf. Grimm on 4 Macc. 2:14; Meyer on 1 Corinthians 3:3; (Müller on the Epistle of Barnabas 16, 63).

Question 30

ὥστε

Answer 30

that, so that, with the result that; in order that, for the purpose of; therefore, thus, so, accordingly

so that, insomuch that
so then, therefore, wherefore

ὥστε, as Adv., bearing the same relation to ὡς as ὅστε to ὅς, and used by Hom. more freq. than ὡς in similes, when it is commonly written divisim, and is relat. to a demonstr. ὥς: sts. c. pres. Indic., Il. 2.459 sq., 12.421, 13.703: sts. c. aor., ὥς τε λέων ἐχάρη 3.23: sts. c. subj. pres. or aor., 2.474 sq., 11.67, 16.428, Od. 22.302: all three usages combined in one simile, with varied construction, Il. 5.136 - 9: — the verb is sts. omitted, λάμφ’ ὥς τε στεροπή 10.154: this usage of ὥστε is chiefly (Pi. uses ὧτε, q. v.), but it occurs in Alc. (?) 27 (prob.), B. 12.124 and sts. in Trag., κατώρυχες δ’ ἔναιον ὥστ’ ἀήσυροι μύρμηκες A. Pr. 452, cf. Th. 62, Pers. 424, Ch. 421 (lyr.), S. OC 343, Ant. 1033, Tr. 112 (lyr.).

II to mark the power or virtue by which one does a thing, as being, inasmuch as, like ἅτε, τὸν δ’ ἐξήρπαξ’ Ἀφροδίτη ῥεῖα μάλ’, ὥ. θεός Il. 3.381, cf. 18.518; ὥ. περὶ ψυχῆς since it was for life, Od. 9.423; ὥ. ταῦτα νομίζων Hdt. 1.8, cf. 5.83, 101, 6.94. as Conj. to express the actual or intended result of the action in the principal clause:

I mostly c. inf., so as or for to do a thing, twice in Hom., εἰ δέ σοι θυμὸς ἐπέσσυται, ὥ. νέεσθαι if thy heart is eager to return, Il. 9.42; οὐ τηλίκος.., ὥ. σημάντορι πάντα πιθέσθαι not of such age as to obey a master in all things, Od. 17.21; ῥηϊδίως κεν ἐργάσσαιο, ὥ. σε κεἰς ἐνιαυτὸν ἔχειν Hes. Op. 44; ὥ. ἀποπλησθῆναι (ἀποπλῆσαι codd.) τὸν χρησμόν Hdt. 8.96: freq. in Pi., O. 9.74, N. 5.1, 35, al.; also in Trag. and Att. after demonstratives, οὔπω τοσοῦτον ἠπατημένος κυρῶ ὥστ’ ἄλλα χρῄζειν S. OT 595, etc.; this constr. is found in cases where (as in Il. 9.42 supr. cit.) ὥστε seems superfluous; so after ἐθέλειν, Κύπρις.. ἤθελ’ ὥ. γίγνεσθαι τόδε E. Hipp. 1327; after ἔστι, for ἔξεστι, S. Ph. 656; after ψηφίζεσθαι, Th. 5.17; after ἐπαίρειν, E. Supp. 581; ἐπαγγελλόμενοι ὥ. βοηθεῖν Th. 8.86; after words implying request, δεηθέντες.. ὥ. ψηφίσασθαι Id. 1.119; πεῖσαι ὥ. συγχωρῆσαι Id. 8.45.

2. after Comparatives with ἤ, when the possibility of the consequence is denied (cf. ὡς B. 111.2), μέζω κακὰ ἢ ὥστε ἀνακλαίειν woes too great for tears, Hdt. 3.14; μεῖζον ἢ ὥστε φέρειν δύνασθαι κακόν X. Mem. 3.5.17: but in Poetry ὥστε is sts. left out, νόσημα μεῖζον ἢ φέρειν S. OT 1293; κρείσσον’ ἢ φέρειν κακά E. Hec. 1107 (rarely in Prose, Pl. Tht. 149c); similarly with the Posit., ψυχρὸν ὥ. λούσασθαι too cold to bathe in, X. Mem. 3.13.3; ἡμεῖς ἔτι νέοι ὥ. διελέσθαι too young to.., Pl. Prt. 314b; γέρων ἐκεῖνος ὥ. δ’ ὠφελεῖν παρών E. Andr. 80: this ὥστε is sts. omitted after words implying comparison, ὀλίγους εἶναι στρατιῇ τῇ Μήδων συμβαλέειν too few.. Hdt. 6.109; ταπεινὴ ἡ διάνοια ἐγκαρτερεῖν Th. 2.61, etc.
3. ὥστε.. ἄν is used with inf., of contingencies more or less improbable, οὕτως ἐκάετο ὥστε μήτε.. ἄλλο τι ἢ γυμνοὶ ἀνέχεσθαι, ἥδιστά τε ἂν ἐς ὕσωρ ψυχρὸν σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ῥίπτειν Th. 2.49, cf. S. OT 374, El. 1316, D. 8.35.
4. sts. implying on condition that.., like ἐφ’ ᾧτε, παραδοῦναι σφᾶς αὐτοὺς Ἀθηναίοις, ὥστε βουλεῦσαι ὅ τι ἂν ἐκείνοις δοκῇ Th. 4.37, cf. X. An. 5.6.26.

II c. Indic., to express the actual or possible result with emphasis, οὐκ οὕτω φρενοβλαβὴς ὁ Πρίαμος οὐδὲ οἱ ἄλλοι.., ὥ. κινδυνεύειν ἐβούλοντο Hdt. 2.120 (fort. delendum ἐβούλοντο) ; ἀσθενέες οὕτω, ὥ… διατετρανέεις Id. 3.12; οὕτως ἀγνωμόνως ἔχετε, ὥ. ἐλπίζετε..; are you so foolish that you expect.. ? D. 2.26, βέβηκεν, ὥ. πᾶν ἐν ἡσύχῳ ἔξεστι φωνεῖν S. OC 82, cf. OT 533: freq. in X., Mem. 2.2.3, al.; with ἄν and the impf. or aor. implying a supposed case, ὥστ’, εἰ φρονῶν ἔπρασσον, οὐδ’ ἂν ὧδ’ ἐγιγνόμην κακός S. OC 271; ὥστε οὐκ ἂν ἔλαθεν αὐτόθεν ὁρμώμενος Th. 5.6: ὥστε τὴν πόλιν ἂν ἡγήσω πολέμου ἐργαστήριον εἶναι X. Ages. 1.26.

2. at the beginning of a sentence, to mark a strong conclusion, and so, therefore, ὥστ’.. ὄλωλα καί σε προσδιαφθερῶ S. Ph. 75; ὥστ’ οὐχ ὕπνῳ γ’ εὕδοντά μ’ ἐξεγείρετε Id. OT 65; ὥ. καὶ ταῦτα λεχθήσεται Arist. Metaph. 1004a22: c. imper., θνητὸς δ’ Ὀρέστης, ὥ. μὴ λίαν στένε S. El. 1172; ὥ. θάρρει X. Cyr. 1.3.18, cf. Pl. Prt. 311a; ὥ. ἂν βούλησθε χειροτονήσατε D. 9.70 cod.A (-ήσετε cett.); before a question, ὥ. τίς ἂν ἀπετόλμησε..; Lys. 7.28.
3. c. opt., with ἄν, Hdt. 2.16; βρέφος γὰρ ἦν τότ’.., ὥστ’ οὐκ ἂν αὐτὸν γνωρίσαιμ’ E. Or. 379, cf. S. OT 857, Ar. Ach. 943 (lyr.). b. c. opt. in orat. obliq., X. HG 3.5.23; after opt. in principal clause, Id. Oec. 1.13.
4. with subj., in order that, in Thessalian dialect, τὸς ταμίας φροντίσαι οὕστε.. γενειθεῖ τᾶ πόλι ἁ δόσις BCH 59.38 (Crannon); ἀντιλλαβέσθαι τᾶς πόλλιος (sic) οὕστε.. ἐς πάντουν ἐγλυθεῖ τοῦν δανείουν ib.p.37.

III with part., instead of inf., after a part. in the principal clause, τοσοῦτον ἁπάντων διενεγκόντες, ὥσθ’ ὑπὲρ Ἀργείων δυστυχησάντων Θηβαίοις.. ἐπιτάττοντες κτλ. Isoc. 4.64 (s. v.l.); οὕτω σφόδρα μισοῦντα τοῦτον, ὥστε πολὺ δὴ (ἂν Dobree) θᾶττον διαθέμενον κτλ. Isaiah 9:16; ὥστε.. δέον D. 3.1. πόλεμος σκληρὸς ὥστε λίαν extremely, LXX 2 Kings 2:17. in later Greek, folld. by Preps., Παρμένοντι κλειδὸς ὥ. ἐπὶ τὸ Διοσκούριον Inscr.Délos 316.83 (iii B. C.); ξύλον ὥ. ἐπὶ τὴν ἅμαξαν IG 11(2) 287 A 52 (iii B. C.); μόλυβδος ὥ. εἰς τὸ Κύνθιον ib.203 A 52 (iii B. C.); κριθῶν ὥ. εἰς τὰ κτήνη barley for the animals, PCair.Zen. 251.5 (iii B. C.); ὥ. εἰς ξένια φοίνικας PHal. 1.7.4 (iii B. C.). c. dat., for, χρεία αὐτοῦ ἐστὶν ὥ. Πισικλεῖ it is needed for P., PCair.Zen. 241 (iii B. C.); ὥ. τοῖς χησίν IG 11(2).287 A 45 (iii B. C.).

ὥστε (from ὡς and the enclitic τέ (Tdf. Proleg., p. 110)), a consecutive conjunction, i. e. expressing consequence or result, from Homer down, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2, p. 770ff; Winers Grammar, § 41 b. 5 N. 1, p. 301 (282f); (Buttmann, § 139, 50);

1. so that (A. V. frequently insomuch that);
   a. with an infinitive (or accusative and infinitive) (Buttmann, § 142, 3; the neg. in this construction is μή, Buttmann, § 148, 6; Winer’s Grammar, 480 (447)): preceded by the demonstrative οὕτως, Acts 14:1; τοσοῦτος, Matthew 15:33 (so many loaves as to fill etc.); without a demonstrative preceding (where ὥστε defines more accurately the magnitude, extent, or quantity), Matthew 8:24, 28; Matthew 12:22; Matthew 13:2, 32, 54; Matthew 15:31; Matthew 27:14; Mark 1:27, 45; Mark 2:2, 12; Mark 3:10, 20; Mark 4:1, 32, 37; Mark 9:26; Mark 15:5; Luke 5:7; Luke 12:1; Acts 1:19; Acts 5:15; Acts 15:39; Acts 16:26; Acts 19:10, 12, 16; Romans 7:6; Romans 15:19; 1 Corinthians 1:7; 1 Corinthians 5:1; 1 Corinthians 13:2; 2 Corinthians 1:8; 2 Corinthians 2:7; 2 Corinthians 3:7; 2 Corinthians 7:7; Philippians 1:13; 1 Thessalonians 1:7; 2 Thessalonians 1:4; 2 Thessalonians 2:4; Hebrews 13:6; 1 Peter 1:21; it is used also of a designed result, so as to equivalent to in order to, for to, Matthew 10:1; Matthew 24:24 (their design); ; Luke 4:29 (Rec. εἰς τό); (L marginal reading WH ὡς, which see III.); and L T Tr WH in Luke 20:20 (R G εἰς τό) (1 Macc. 1:49 1 Macc. 4:2, 28 1 Macc. 10:3; 2 Macc. 2:6; Thucydides 4, 23; Xenophon, Cyril 3, 2, 16; Josephus, Antiquities 13, 5, 10; Eus. h. e. 3, 28, 3 (cf. Sophocles Lexicon, under the word, 5)); cf. Winers Grammar, 318 (298); Buttmann, § 139, 50 Rem.
   b. so that, with the indicative (Buttmann, 244 (210); cf. Winer’s Grammar, 301 (283); Meyer or Ellicott on Galatians, as below): Galatians 2:13, and often in secular authors; preceded by οὕτως, John 3:16.
2. so then, therefore, wherefore: with the indicative (cf. Passow, under the word, II. 1 b., vol. ii., p. 2639{b}; (Liddell and Scott, under the word B. II. 2; the neg. in this construction is οὐ, Buttmann, § 148, 5)), Matthew 12:12; Matthew 19:6; Matthew 23:31; Mark 2:28; Mark 10:8; Romans 7:4, 12; Romans 13:2; 1 Corinthians 3:7; 1 Corinthians 7:38; 1 Corinthians 11:27; 1 Corinthians 14:22; 2 Corinthians 4:12; 2 Corinthians 5:16; Galatians 3:9, 24; Galatians 4:7, 16; once with a hortatory subjunctive, 1 Corinthians 5:8 (here L marginal reading indicative). before an imperative: 1 Corinthians 3:21; (); ; Philippians 2:12; Philippians 4:1; 1 Thessalonians 4:18; James 1:19 (L T Tr WH read ἴστε; cf. p. 174{a} top); 1 Peter 4:19.
   STRONGS NT 5620a: ὠτάριον ὠτάριον, ὠταριου, τό (diminutive of οὖς, ὠτός; cf. γυναικάριον (Winer’s Grammar, 24, 96 (91))), equivalent to ὠτίον (which see), the ear: Mark 14:47 L T Tr WH; John 18:10 T Tr WH. (Anthol. 11, 75, 2; Anaxandrides quoted in Athen. 3, p. 95 c.)

Question 31

ἀποκτείνω

Answer 31

ἀποκτενῶ, ἀπέκτεινα, -, -, ἀπεκτάνθην

I kill

to kill in any way whatever
to destroy, to allow to perish
metaph. to extinguish, abolish
to inflict mortal death
to deprive of spiritual life and procure eternal misery in hell

ἀποκτείνω

(later -κτέννω (q. v.): -κταίνω 2 Corinthians 3:6, etc.), fut. -κτενῶ, Ion. -κτενέω Hdt. 3.30: aor. 1 ἀπέκτεινα Il.: pf. ἀπέκτονα Isoc. 12.66, Pl. Ap. 38c, X. Ap. 29, D. 22.2; plpf. 3 pl. -εκτόνεσαν Id. 19.148, Ion. 3 sg. -εκτόνεε Hdt. 5.67; later ἀπεκτόνηκα Arist. SE 182b19, Parth. 24.2, Plu. Tim. 16; also ἀπέκταγκα Men. 344, Arist. Pol. 1324b16, 18, LXX 1 Samuel 24:12, etc.; ἀπέκτᾰκα Plb. 11.18.10: aor. 2 -έκτᾰνον Il., poet. 1 pl. ἀπέκταμεν Od. 23.121, inf. -κτάμεναι, -κτάμεν, Il. 20.165, 5.675: — Pass., late (ἀποθνήσκω being used as the Pass. by correct writers), pres. in Palaeph. 7: aor. ἀπεκτάνθην D.C. 65.4, LXX 1 Maccabees 2:9 : aor. 2 inf. ἀποκτανῆναι Gal. 14.284: pf. inf. ἀπεκτάνθαι Plb. 7.7.4, LXX 2 Maccabees 4:36 : — but aor. Med. in pass. sense ἀπέκτατο Il. 15.437, 17.472; part. ἀποκτάμενος 4.494, etc.; cf. ἀποκτείνυμι: —

1. stronger form of κτείνω, kill, slay, , Ion., and the prevailing form in Att. (cf. ἀποθνήσκω): once in A. Ag. 1250, never in S., freq. in E., Hec. 1244, al.
2. of judges, condemn to death, Antipho 5.92, Pl. Ap. 30d sq., etc.; also of the accuser, And. 4.37, X. HG 2.3.21, Th. 6.61; put to death, Hdt. 6.4: generally of the law, Pl. Prt. 325b.
3. metaph., τὸ σεμνὸν ὥς μ’ ἀ. τὸ σόν E. Hipp. 1064; σὺ μή μ’ ἀπόκτειν) Id. Or. 1027.

ἀποκτείνω, and Aeolic, ἀποκτέννω (Matthew 10:28 L T Tr; Mark 12:5 G L T Tr; Luke 12:4 L T Tr; 2 Corinthians 3:6 T Tr; cf. Fritzsche on Mark, p. 507f; (Tdf. Proleg., p. 79); Winers Grammar, 83 (79); (Buttmann, 61 (54))), ἀποκτενῶ (Griesbach in Matthew 10:28; Luke 12:4), ἀποκταίνω (Lachmann in 2 Corinthians 3:6; Revelation 13:10), ἀποκτεννυντες (Mark 12:5 WH); future ἀποκτενῶ; 1 aorist ἀπέκτεινα; passive, present infinitive ἀποκτέννεσθαι (Revelation 6:11 G L T Tr WH); 1 aorist ἀπεκτάνθην (Alexander Buttmann (1873) Ausf. Spr. ii. 227; Winers Grammar, the passage cited; (Buttmann, 41 (35f))); (from Homer down);

1. properly, to kill in any way whatever (ἀπό i. e. so as to put out of the way; cf. (English to kill off), German abschlachten): Matthew 16:21; Matthew 22:6; Mark 6:19; Mark 9:31; John 5:18; John 8:22; Acts 3:15; Revelation 2:13, and very often; (ἀποκτενῶ ἐν θανάτῳ, Revelation 2:23; Revelation 6:8, cf. Buttmann, 184 (159); Winers Grammar, 339 (319)). to destroy (allow to perish): Mark 3:4 (yet others take it here absolutely, to kill).
2. metaphorically, to extinguish, abolish: τήν ἐχτραν, Ephesians 2:16; to inflict moral death, Romans 7:11 (see ἀποθνῄσκω, II. 2); to deprive of spiritual life and procure eternal misery, 2 Corinthians 3:6 (Lachmann ἀποκταινει; see above).

Question 32

τρεῖς, τρία

Answer 32

three

τρεῖς, οἱ, αἱ,

τρία, τά:

gen. τριῶν: dat. τρισί, also τριοῖσι Hippon. 51, and τρίεσσι Delph. 3(5).80.21 (iv B. C.); Aeol. τρίσσι Inscr.Perg. 245 B 18 (Pitana): acc. τρεῖς (written τρες IG 12.24.16, 44.15, 188.37, 1085, al.), τρία: Dor. nom. τρέες Leg.Gort. 9.48; τρῆς IG 12(3).1640 (Thera); τρῖς SIG 236 A 10 (Delph., iv B. C.), Tab.Heracl. 1.23; acc. τρίινς Leg.Gort. 5.54, al. (for Τρίνς, lengthd. to correspond with the other cases); τρῖς IG 12.838,839 (vi B. C.), SIG 239 D ii 28 (Delph., iv B. C.), Berl.Sitzb. 1927.158 (Cyrene): —

three, Il. 15.187, etc.; τρία ἔπεα three words, prov. in Pi. N. 7.48, — for from the earliest times three was a sacred and lucky number, esp. with the Pythagoreans (cf. τριάς), Arist. Cael. 268a11; so τῶν τριῶν μίαν λαβεῖν εὔσοιαν S. Fr. 122; εἰ καὶ τῶν τριῶν ἓν οἴσομαι ib. 908; cf. σωτήρ 1.2: — διὰ τριῶν ἀπόλλυμαι I am thrice, i. e. utterly, undone, E. Or. 434 (cf. τριάζω) ; ἡ διὰ τριῶν ἀγωγή the ‘trivium’, Simp. in Ph. 1171.34; ἵνα δήσῃ τρία τρία by threes, POxy. 121.19 (iii A. D.). (I.- E. stem tr[icaron]-, fuller form trey-, nom. tréy-es (Skt. tráyas, Lat. tres), whence τρέες, contr. τρῆς and τρεῖς (written τρες IG 12.295.11); acc. tri-ns (Goth. prins, Skt. tr[imacracute]n), whence τρῖς and τρίινς; in Gr. the nom. τρεῖς functions as acc. (as in Att.), or the acc. τρῖς as nom. (ll. cc.).)

Question 33

ὧδε

Answer 33

adv. here, in this place; here, to this place; under these circumstances, in this case

here, to this place, etc.

ὧδε,

Att. also ὡδί (q. v.), demonstr. Adv. of ὅδε:

I of Manner, in this wise, thus, sts. so very, so exceedingly, freq. from Hom. downwards: in Hom. usu. before the Verb, but after it in Il. 1.181, 574, 10.91, 18.392; Pl. and X. mostly place it after the Verb: — in construction ὧδε is answered by ὡς, so.., as.., Il. 3.300, Od. 19.312: answering ὥς περ, Il. 6.478, cf. S. OT 276, etc.: folld. by a relat., τίς ὧδε τλησικάρδιος, ὅτῳ..; A. Pr. 160 (lyr.); by εἰ, δοκῶ μοι ὧδε ἂν μᾶλλον πιθέσθαι σοι, εἴ μοι δείξειας.. Pl. Cra. 391a; εἰ φρονῶν ἔπρασσον, οὐδ’ ἂν ὧδ’ ἐγιγνόμην κακός S. OC 272: c. part., δύαις τε καμφθεὶς ὧδε δεσμὰ φυγγάνω A. Pr. 513: ὧδέπως is freq. in Att., Pl. R. 393d, X. Mem. 2.1.21, etc.; also in later Prose, Luc. Herm. 32, etc.

2. of a State or Condition, as it is, πρόμολ’ ὧ. come forth just as thou art, Il. 18.392, cf. Od. 1.182, 2.28 (rightly so taken by Aristarch. ap. Sch.A Il. 2.271, cf. Sch.A Il. 18.392: v. infr. 11); στρεύγεσθαι ὧδ’ ἄτως Il. 15.513, cf. 10.91.
3. of something following, thus, as follows, esp. to introduce quoted words, Il. 1.181 (where it follows the verb), Od. 2.111, Hes. Op. 203, etc.; ὧδ’ ἠμείψατο S. Ph. 378: sts. referring to what goes before, Hdt. 5.2.
4. pleon., τόσον ὧδ’ ἐβόησας Od. 9.403; ὧδε.. τῇδε S. El. 1301.
5. c. gen., γένους μὲν ἥκεις ὧ. τοῖσδε (where ἥκεις = προσήκεις) E. Heracl. 213.

II of Place, hither, cf. ὅδε 1: Aristarch. denied this usage in Hom. altogether (cf. Sch.A Il. 2.271, Apollon. Lex. s.v. ὧδε, A.D. Adv. 178.25, Eust. 792.2, al.); and most of the passages taken in this sense may be referred to signf. 1.1 or 2, just as you see, v. supr. 1.2: but hither seems prob. in Od. 17.544, Il. 12.346, 10.537: examples of ὧδε, hither, are found in Trag. (esp. in S., as OT 7, 144, 298, OC 182 (lyr.), 841 (lyr.), 1206, 1547, Tr. 402); also in Com., as ἴτω τις ὧ. Ar. Av. 229 (lyr.); and later, as Herod. 1.49; χιλίας ὧ. καὶ χιλίας ὧδ’ ἐμβαλεῖν Id. 5.48; ὧ. χὦδε χασκεύσῃ Id. 4.42; ὧδε καὶ ὧδε this way and that, AP 5.128 (Autom.): προσάγαγε ὧ. τὸν υἱόν σου Luke 9:41.

2. here, Herod. 2.98; εἰσὶν ὧ. πρὸς ἡμᾶς they are here with us, Mark 6:3; ὧ. κἀκεῖ Plu. 2.34a, cf. Mark 13:21 : τηνεῖ δρύες, ὧδε (v.l. ἠδὲ) κύπειρος Theoc. 1.106, cf. 120, 121: so Cratin. 54 (anap.) acc. to Phot. (but v. Kock).

ὧδε, adverb (from ὅδε);

1. so, in this manner (very often in Homer).
2. adverb of place;
   a. hither, to this place (Homer, Iliad 18, 399. Od 1 182; 17, 545; cf. Buttmann, 71 (62f) (cf. Winers Grammar, § 54, 7; but its use in Homer of place is now generally denied; see Ebeling, Lex. Homer, under the word, p. 484b; Liddell and Scott, under the word, II.)): Matthew 8:29; Matthew 14:18 (Tr marginal reading brackets ὧδε); ; Mark 11:3; Luke 9:41; Luke 14:21; Luke 19:27; John 6:25; John 20:27; Acts 9:21; Revelation 4:1; Revelation 11:12 (the Sept. for הֲלֹם, Exodus 3:5; Judges 18:3; Ruth 2:14); ἕως ὧδε (even unto this place), Luke 23:5.
   b. here, in this place: Matthew 12:6, 41; Matthew 14:17; Mark 9:1, 5; Mark 16:6; Luke 9:33; Luke 22:38; Luke 24:6 (WH reject the clause); John 6:9; John 11:21, 32, and often (the Sept. for פֹּה); τά ὧδε, the things that are done here, Colossians 4:9; ὧδε, in this city, Acts 9:14; in this world, Hebrews 13:14; opposed to ἐκεῖ (here, i. e. according to the Levitical law still in force; there, i. e. in the passage in Genesis concerning Melchizedek), Hebrews 7:8; ὧδε with some addition, Matthew 14:8; Mark 6:3; Mark 8:4; Luke 4:23; ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἤ ὧδε, here is Christ, or there (so A. V., but R. V. here is the Christ, or, Here (cf. ὧδε καί ὧδε, hither and thither, Exodus 2:12 etc.)), Matthew 24:23; ᾠδή ἤ … ἐκεῖ, Mark 13:21 (T WH omit ἤ; Tr marginal reading reads καί); Luke 17:21, 23 (here T Tr WH marginal reading ἐκεῖ … ὧδε (WH text ἐκεῖ ἤ … ὧδε)); James 2:3 (here Rec. ἐκεῖ ἤ … ὧδε; G L T Tr WH omit ὧδε (WH text and margin varying the place of ἐκεῖ)). Metaphorically, in this thing, Revelation 13:10, 18; Revelation 14:12; Revelation 17:9 (the phrase ὧδε ἐστιν in at least two of these passages (viz., Revelation 13:18; Revelation 14:12) seems to be equivalent to ‘here there is opportunity for’, ‘need of’ etc. (so in Epictetus diss. 3, 22, 105)); in this state of things, under these circumstances, 1 Corinthians 4:2 L (who, however, connects it with 1 Corinthians 4:1) T Tr WH; cf. Meyer at the passage

Question 34

ὑπάρχω

Answer 34

(ὑπῆρχον), -, -, -, -, -

I exist, I am

to have, possess; (n.) possessions; to be, exist
Definition:
to begin; to come into existence; to exist; to be, subsist, Acts 19:40; 28:18; to be in possession, to belong, Acts 3:6; 4:37; goods, possessions, property, Mt. 19:21; Lk. 8:3; to be, Lk. 7:25; 8:41

to begin below, to make a beginning
to begin
to come forth, hence to be there, be ready, be at hand
to be

ὑπάρχω, fut. -ξω Hdt. 6.109, S. Ant. 932 (anap.): aor. ὑπῆρξα (v. infr. 1): — Pass., fut. ὑπαρχθήσομαι PTeb. 418.7 (iii A. D.): pf. ὕπηργμαι, Ion. -αργμαι Hdt. 7.11: —

begin, take the initiative: —

Constr.:

1 abs., Od. 24.286, E. Ph. 1223; ὑπάρχων ἠδίκεις αὐτούς Isoc. 16.44; ὁ ὑπάρξας the beginner (in a quarrel), D. 59.15, cf. 1; ἀμύνεσθαι τοὺς ὑπάρξαντας Lys. 24.18; ἀμυνομένους, μὴ ὑπάρχοντας Pl. Grg. 456e; ὡς οὐχ ὑπάρχων ἀλλὰ τιμωρούμενος Men. 358: — Med., Pl. Ti. 41c, Ael. NA 12.41, etc.

2. c. gen., take the initiative in, begin, ἀδίκων ἔργων, ἀδικίης, Hdt. 1.5, 4.1, cf. Th. 2.74, etc.; ὑ. τῆς ἐλευθερίας τῇ Ἑλλάδι And. 1.142, cf. Pl. Mx. 237b.
3. c. part., take the initiative in doing, ἐμὲ ὑπῆρξαν ἄδικα ποιεῦντες Hdt. 7.8. β, cf. 6.133, 9.78; ὑπάρχει εὖ (or κακῶς) ποιῶν τινα X. An. 2.3.23, 5.5.9; τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἀμύνεσθαι οἷσπερ καὶ οἱ Λκεδαιμόνιοι ὑπῆρξαν retaliating by the means which the L. had used first, Th. 2.67 (where οἷσπερ is expld. by the following ἀποκτείναντες and ἐσβαλόντες). in Med. c. inf., Ael. NA 14.11: c. gen., βαδίσεως -ονται ib. 4.34; ἡλίου -ομένου τῆς ἀκμῆς ib. 1.20.
4. c. acc., ὑ. εὐεργεσίας εἴς τινα or τινι take the initiative in [doing] kindnesses to one, D. 19.280, Aeschin. 2.26; ὑ. τοῦτο (sc. τὸ εὐνοεῖν) Men. 927: —

Pass., ὑπηρεσίαι ὑπηργμέναι εἰς Φίλιππον αὑτῷ Aeschin. 2.109; τὰ παρὰ τῶν θεῶν ὑπηργμένα D. 1.10; τὰ ἔκ τινος ὑπαργμένα (Ion. for ὑπηργ-) Hdt. 7.11; ὑπηργμένων πολλῶν κἀγαθῶν Ar. Lys. 1159; οὐδέν μοι ὑπῆρκτο εἰς αὐτόν Antipho 5.58; ἀνάξια τῶν εἰς ὑμᾶς ὑπηργμένων Lys. 21.25; ἄξιον τῶν ὑ. equivalent to what was done for him, Arist. EN 1163b21: impers., ὑπῆρκτο αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ Πειραιέως) a beginning of it had been made, Th. 1.93. in Act. only, to be the begining, παιδοβόροι μὲν πρῶτον ὑπῆρξαν μόχθοι τάλανες A. Ch. 1068 (anap.); πολλῶν κακῶν, μεγάλων ἀχέων, E. Ph. 1582 (v. l.), Andr. 274 (lyr.), cf. HF 1169.

2. to be already in existence, πημονῆς δ’ ἅλις γ’ ὑπάρχει A. Ag. 1656 (troch.); φοίνισσα δὲ Θρηϊκίων ἀγέλα ταύρων ὑπᾶρχεν was already there, Pi. P. 4.205; αὗται αἱ νέες τοῖσι Ἀθηναίοισι ὑπῆρχον already existed, opp. to those they were about to build, Hdt. 7.144; εἰ τοίνυν σφι χώρη γε μηδεμία ὑπῆρχε if they had no country originally existing, Id. 2.15; χωρὶς δὲ τούτων οἱ χίλιοι ὑπῆρχον the original thousand existed, X. Cyr. 1.5.5; ἔδει πρῶτον μὲν ὑπάρχειν πάντων ἰσηγορίαν Eup. 291 (lyr.); ὑπαρχούσης μὲν τιμῆς, παρούσης δὲ δυνάμεως X. Ages. 8.1; τοῦτο δεῖ προσεῖναι, τὰ δ’ ἄλλ’ ὑπάρχει D. 3.15, cf. 8.53; ταὐτὰ ὑ. αὐτῷ ἅπερ ἐμοί Antipho 5.60, cf. Lys. 12.23; ὑμῖν.. ἐλευθερίαν τε ὑπάρχειν καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων ξυμμάχοις κεκλῆσθαι there is in store for you.., Th. 5.9: c. gen., οἶκος δ’ ὑ. τῶνδε.. ἔχειν there is store of these things for us to have, A. Ag. 961 (s. v. l., οἴκοις Pors.): freq. in part., ἡ ὑπάρχουσα οὐσία the existing property, Isoc. 1.28; τὰ ὑ. ἁμαρτήματα Th. 2.92; τῆς ὑ. τιμῆς for the current price, Syngr. ap. D. 35.12; οἱ ὑ. πολῖται the existing citizens, Id. 18.295; τῆς φύσεως ὑ. nature being what it is, X. Cyr. 6.4.4; also κρησφύγετόν τι ὑπάρχον εἶναι that there should be a refuge ready prepared, Hdt. 5.124.
3. exist really, opp. φαίνομαι, Arist. Cael. 297b22, Metaph. 1046b10; ἀθεώρητοι τῶν ὑπαρχόντων Id. GC 316a9; καταληπτικὴ φαντασία ἡ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος Stoic. 2.25.
4. simply, be, τοῖσιν ἄγουσιν κλαύμαθ’ ὑπάρξει S. Ant. 932 (anap.); ὅθεν εὐμάρει’ ὑπάρχοι πόρου Id. Ph. 704 (lyr.): and with a predicate, θησαυρὸς ἄν σοι παῖς ὑπῆρχ’ οὑμός E. Hec. 1229; τὸ χωρίον καρτερὸν ὑ. Th. 4.4; φύσεως ἀγαθῆς ὑπάρξαι to be of a good natural disposition, X. Oec. 21.11; κἂν σοφὸς ὑπάρχῃ Philem. 102; μέγα ὑ. τοῖς τοιούτοις λόγοις ις of great advantage to them, D. 3.19; πολλῶν ὑπάρξει κῦρος ἡμέρα καλῶν, = κυρώσει πολλὰ καλά, S. El. 919. τὰ ὑπάρχοντα, much like τὰ ὑπηργμένα (A. 4 Pass.), a man’s record, ἀνάξιον τῶν ὑ. τῇ πόλει καὶ πεπραγμένων τοῖς προγόνοις D. 8.49; τὰ κάλλιστα τῶν ὑ. your past record, Id. 18.95; ἡ ὑπάρχουσα αἰσχύνη the disgrace which has been incurred, Id. 19.217; τὰ ὑπάρχοντα [αὑτῷ] ἐγκλήματα Aeschin. 1.179.
5. sts. with a part., much like τυγχάνω, τοιαῦτα [αὐτῷ] ὑπῆρχε ἐὀντα Hdt. 1.192; ἐχθρὸς ὑ. ὤν D. 21.38; ὑ. δύναμιν κεκτημένοι Id. 3.7, cf. 15.1.
6. προγόνων ὑ. τῶν ἐξ Ἰλίου to be the descendant of.., D.H. 2.65.

II like ὑπόκειμαι 11.2, to be laid down, to be taken for granted, Pl. Smp. 198d; τούτου ὑπάρχοντος, τούτων ὑπαρχόντων, this being granted, Id. Ti. 30c, 29b; θέντες ὡς ὑπάρχον Id. R. 458a.

III belong to, fall to one, accrue, ὑπάρξει τοι.. τὰ ἐναντία you will have, Hdt. 6.109, etc.; τὸ μισεῖσθαι πᾶσιν ὑ. Th. 2.64; τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων ἀμφοτέροις [σωτηρίαν ] Id. 6.86; ἡ ὑπάρχουσα φύσις your proper nature, its normal condition, Id. 2.45; τῇ τέχνῃ ὑπάρχειν διδούς assigning as a property of art, Pl. Phlb. 58c, cf. Tht. 150b, 150c.

2. of persons, ὑ. τινί to be devoted to one, X. An. 1.1.4, HG 7.5.5, D. 19.54, etc.; καθ’ ὑμῶν ὑπάρξων ἐκείνῳ he will be on his side against you, ib.118, cf. 2.14. ἐν παντὶ.. πᾶς χωρίῳ, καὶ ᾧ μὴ ὑπάρχομεν every one in every place, even outside our sphere of influence (lit. to which we do not belong), Th. 6.87.
3. in the Logic of Arist. ὑπάρχειν denotes the subsistence of qualities in a subject, Metaph. 1025a14; ὑ. τινί, = κατηγορεῖσθαί τινος, APr. 25a13, al.; ὑ. κατά τινος ib. 24a27, Int. 16b13; ἐπί τινος ib. 16a32; ὑ. τινὶ ζῴῳ πεζῷ δίποδι εἶναι Top. 109a14; ὑπάρξει τι [τῷ πρώτῳ ] it will have predicates, Plot. 5.6.2; ἡ γένεσις τῷ χρόνῳ.. ὑπάρχει Dam. Pr. 142. freq. in neut. pl. part., τὰ ὑπάρχοντα,

I in signf.

1, existing circumstances, presentadvantages, Democr. 191, D. 2.2; ἀπὸ τῶν αἰεὶ ὑ. σφαλέντες Th. 4.18, cf. 6.33; πρὸς τὰ ὑ. ib. 31; ἐκ τῶν ὑ. under the circumstances, according to one’s means, X. An. 6.4.9, Arist. Pol. 1288b33; ὡς ἐκ τῶν ὑ. Th. 7.76, 8.1.

2. in signf. 111, possessions, resources, Id. 1.70, 144, etc.; τὰ ἑκατέροις ὑ. ib. 141; κινδυνεύειν περὶ τῶν ὑ. Isoc. 3.57: as a Subst., τὰ ὑ. αὐτοῦ Matthew 24:47, cf. LXX Genesis 12:5; ὑποθέμενος τὰ ὑ. καὶ ὑπάρξοντα present and future resources, POxy. 125.22 (vi A.D.), etc.
3. Math., ὑπάρχοντα εἴδη positive terms, Dioph. 1 Def. 10.
   impers. , ὑπάρχει the fact is that.., c. acc. et inf., ὑ. γάρ σε μὴ γνῶναί τινα S. El. 1340; ὡς ὑ. τοῦ ἔχειν.. as the case stands with regard to having, Arist. HA 516b25; περὶ τοὺς μαστοὺς ὑπεναντίως ὑ. ib. 500a14.
4. it is allowed, it is possible, c. dat. et inf., ὑ. ἡμῖν ἐπικρατεῖν Th. 7.63, cf. And. 2.19, etc.; ὑ. αὐτῇ εὐδαίμονι εἶναι Pl. Phd. 81a, cf. Prt. 345a, Phdr. 240b, etc.: also without a dat., οὐχ ὑ. εἰδέναι Th. 1.82; ὑ. τὴν αὐτὴν εἶναι μητέρα Isaiah 7:25, etc.: abs., ὥσπερ ὑπῆρχε as well as was possible, Th. 3.109.
5. in neut. part., ὑπάρχον ὑμῖν πολεμεῖν since it is allowed you to.., Th. 1.124, cf. Pl. Smp. 217a. to be ὕπαρχος or subordinate colleague, D.C. 36.36; τῷ.. Ἀντωνίνῳ Id. 71.34.

II dub. in the sense of ἄρχω, rule; for Th. 6.87, where the Sch. is in error, v. supr. B. 111.2b; in Arist. Pol. 1291b32 ὑπερέχειν is prob. l.

ὑπάρχω; imperfect ὑπῆρχον;

1. properly, to begin below, to make a beginning; universally, to begin; (Homer, Aeschylus, Herodotus, and following).
2. to come forth, hence, to be there, be ready, be at hand (Aeschylus, Herodotus, Pindar, and following): universally, and simply, Acts 19:40 (cf. Buttmann, § 151, 29 note); Acts 27:12, 21; ἐν τίνι, to be found in one, Acts 28:18; with a dative of the person ὑπάρχει μοι τί, something is mine, I have something: Acts 3:6; Acts 4:37; Acts 28:7; 2 Peter 1:8 (where Lachmann παρόντα; Sir. 20:16; Proverbs 17:17; Job 2:4, etc.); τά ὑπάρχοντα τίνι, one’s substance, one’s property, Luke 8:3; Luke 12:15 L text T Tr WH; Acts 4:32 (Genesis 31:18; Tobit 4:8; Dio C. 38, 40); also τά ὑπάρχοντα τίνος, Matthew 19:21; Matthew 24:47; Matthew 25:14; Luke 11:21; Luke 12:15 R G L marginal reading, 33, 44 (here L marginal reading Tr marginal reading the dative); ; 1 Corinthians 13:3; Hebrews 10:34 (often in the Sept. for מִקְנֶה, רְכוּשׁ, נְכָסִים; Sir. 41:1; Tobit 1:20, etc.; τά ἰδίᾳ ὑπαρξοντα, Polybius 4,3, 1).
3. to be, with a predicate nominative (as often in Attic) (cf. Buttmann, § 144, 14, 15 a., 18; Winer’s Grammar, 350 (328)): as ἄρχων τῆς συναγωγῆς ὑπῆρχεν, Luke 8:41; add, Luke 9:48; Acts 7:55; Acts 8:16; Acts 16:3; Acts 19:36; Acts 21:20; 1 Corinthians 7:26; 1 Corinthians 12:22; James 2:15; 2 Peter 3:11; the participle with a predicate nominative, being i. e. who is etc., since or although he etc. is: Luke 16:14; Luke 23:50; Acts 2:30; Acts 3:2; Acts 14:8 Rec.; ; (); Romans 4:19; 1 Corinthians 11:7; 2 Corinthians 8:17; 2 Corinthians 12:16; Galatians 1:14; Galatians 2:14; plural, Luke 11:13; Acts 16:20, 37; Acts 17:29; 2 Peter 2:19. ὑπάρχειν followed by ἐν with a dative of the thing, to be contained in, Acts 10:12; to be in a place, Philippians 3:20; in some state, Luke 16:23; ἐν τῇ ἐξουσία τίνος, to be left in one’s power or disposal, Acts 5:4; ἐν ἱματισμῷ ἐνδόξῳ καί τρυφή, to be gorgeously apparelled and to live delicately, Luke 7:25; ἐν μορφή Θεοῦ ὑπάρχειν, to be in the form of God (see μορφή), Philippians 2:6 (here R. V. marginal reading Gr. being originally (?; yet cf. 1 Corinthians 11:7)); followed by ἐν with a dative plural of the person, among, Acts 4:34 R G; 1 Corinthians 11:18. μακράν ἀπό ἑνός … ὑπάρχοντα , Acts 17:27; πρός τῆς σωτηρίας, to be conducive to safety, Acts 27:34. (Compare: προϋπάρχω.)

Question 35

τα ὑπαρχοντα

Answer 35

one’s belongings

Question 36

ἄχρι, ἄχρις

Answer 36

as far as, up to (+gen), until (as a conjuntion)

until, up to, as far as, as long as
Definition:
improper prep with the gen., also functioning as a conj, also spelled ἄχρις (Gal. 3:19; Heb. 3:13; Rev. 2:25), with respect to place, as far as; to time, until, during; as a conj., until

until, unto, etc.

ἄχρι and ἄχρις

(v. sub fin.):

I Adv.

1. to the uttermost, τένοντε καὶ ὀστέα λᾶας ἀναιδὴς ἄχρις ἀπηλοίησεν Il. 4.522; ἀπὸ δ’ ὀστέον ἄχρις ἄραξε 16.324, cf. 17.599.
2. after Hom., before Preps., ἄχρι εἰς Κοτύωρα X. An. 5.5.4; ἄ. ἐς ποταμόν Tab.Heracl. 1.17; ἄχρι πρὸς τὸν σκοπόν, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, Luc. Nigr. 36, Herm. 24; ἄχρις ἐπ’ ἄκνηστιν A.R. 4.1403; ἐπ’ ὀστέον IG 12(7).115.9 (Amorgos); ἄχρι ἐπὶ πολὺ τῶν πλευρῶν Thphr. Char. 19.3; ἄχρις ἐς ἠῶ Q.S. 6.177; ἄχρι ὑπὸ τὴν πυγήν Luc. DMort. 27.4: less freq. after the Noun, ἐς τέλος ἄχρις Q.S. 2.617, cf. Nonn. D. 5.153, etc.: rarely c. acc., ἄχρι.. θρόνον ἦλθεν IG 14.2012 (Sulp. Max.): with an Adv., ἄχρι πόρρω still farther, Luc. Am. 12; ἄχρι δεῦρο S.E. M. 8.401.

II Pr with gen., even to, as far as,

1 of Time, until, ἄχρι μάλα κνέφαος until deep in the night, Od. 18.370; ἄχρι τῆς τήμερον ἡμέρας D. 9.28; ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἄχρι τῆς τελευτῆς Id. 18.179; ἄχρι γήρως Apollod.Com. 2; ἄχρι δὲ τούτου until then, Sol. 13.35; ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν Timostr. 1, Romans 8:22; ἄχρι νῦν Luc. Tim. 39, LXX Genesis 44:28; ἄχρι παντός continually, Plu. Cic. 6.

2. of Space, as far as, even to, ἄχρι τῆς ἐσόδου τοῦ ἱροῦ Hdt. 2.138 (who elsewh. has μέχρι) ; ἄ. τῆς ὁδοῦ IG 12.893; ἄ. τῆς πυλίδος SIG 2587.25; ἄ. τοῦ Πειραιῶς D. 18.301; ἔδακνεν ἄχρι τῆς καρδίας Com.Adesp. 475; ἄχρις ἥπατος Ti.Locr. 101a, cf. 100e; ἄχρι τῆς πόλεως D.H. 2.43; ἄ. τοῦ δεῦρο Gal. 10.676: after its case, ἰνίου ἄχρις Euph. 41.
3. of Measure or Degree, ἄχρι τούτου up to this point, D. 23.122; ἄχρι τοῦ μὴ πεινῆν X. Smp. 4.37; ἄχρι τοῦ θορυβῆσαι D. 8.77; ἄ. θανάτου Acts 22:4; ἄχρι τῆς πρὸς τὸν πλησίον δοξοκοπίας Polystr. p.19 W.

III as Conj., ἄχρι, ἄχρις with or without οὗ,

1 of Time, until, so long as, ἄχρι οὗ ὅδε ὁ λόγος ἐγράφετο X. HG 6.4.37; ἄχρις ὅτου Epigr.Gr. 314.24 (Smyrna); ἄχρι οὗ ἄν or ἄχρι ἄν with Subj., ἄχρι ἂν σχολάσῃ till he should be at leisure, X. An. 2.3.2; ἄχρις οὗ ἂν δοκέῃ Hp. Fist. 3; ἄχρις ἂν αἱ ἡμέραι παρέλθωσιν Id. Int. 40; ἄχρι ἂν ἔχῃ τὸ ἴδιον ἐντελές [ἡ ἱστορία ] Luc. Hist.Conscr. 9: without ἄν, ἄχρις ῥεύσῃ Bion 1.47; ἄχρι οὗ τελευτήσῃ (v.l. -σει) Hdt. 1.117; ἄχρι οὗ ἐπιλάμψῃ Plu. Aem. 17; ἄχρι ἄν, c. inf., Epist. Mithr. in SIG 741.37: c. inf. only, ἄχρις ἱκέσθαι ὀστέον Q.S. 4.361.

2. of Space, so far as, διώξας, ἄχρι οὗ ἀσφαλὲς ᾤετο εἶναι X. Cyr. 5.4.16: c. subj., αὐξάνεται εἰς μῆκος, ἄχρι οὗ δὴ ἐφίκηται τοῦ ἡλίου Thphr. HP 5.1.8; cf. μέχρι throughout. — poets use ἄχρι or ἄχρις, as the metre requires: in Ion. μέχρι is preferred (v. supr.): but ἄχρι, -ις are more common in Hom. than μέχρι: the only Att. forms are ἄχρι, μέχρι, before both consonants and vowels, cf. Phryn. 6, Moer. 34; and so in Att. Inscrr. (where it is somewhat less freq. than μέχρι): ἄχρι ἄν with hiatus in IG 2.2729, Hegesipp.Com. 1.26; but ἄχρις Men. Sam. 179. — Never in Trag. (ἄχρι, = ṃṃ-χρι, cf. μέχρι.)

ἄχρι and ἄχρις (the latter of which in the N. T. is nowhere placed before a consonant, but the former before both vowels and consonants, although euphony is so far regarded that we almost constantly find ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας, ἄχρις οὗ, cf. Buttmann, 10 (9); (Winer’s Grammar, 42); and ἄχρι οὗ is not used except in Acts 7:18 and Revelation 2:25 by L T Tr WH and Luke 21:24 by T Tr WH; (to these instances must now be added 1 Corinthians 11:26 T WH; T WH; Romans 11:25 WH (see their Appendix, p. 148); on the usage in secular authors (`where ἄχρι is the only Attic form, but in later authors the epic ἄχρις prevailed’, Liddell and Scott, under the word) cf. Lobeck, Pathol. Elementa, vol. ii., p. 210f; Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 64; further, Klotz ad Devar. vol. ii. 1, p. 230f)); a particle indicating the terminus ad quem. (On its use in the Greek writings cf. Klotz as above, p. 224ff). It has the force now of a preposition now of a conjunction, even to; until, to the time that; (on its derivation see below).

1. as a preposition it takes the genitive (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 54, 6), and is used a. of place: Acts 11:5; Acts 13:6; Acts 20:4 (T Tr marginal reading WH omit; Tr text brackets); Acts 28:15; 2 Corinthians 10:13; Hebrews 4:12 (see μερισμός, 2); Revelation 14:20; Revelation 18:5.
   b. of Time: ἄχρι καιροῦ, until a season that seemed to him opportune, Luke 4:13 (but cf. καιρός, 2 a.); until a certain time, for a season, Acts 13:11; (ἄχρι (vel μέχρι, which see 1 a.) τοῦ θερισμοῦ, Matthew 13:30 WH marginal reading cf. ἕως, II. 5); ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας until the day that etc. Matthew 24:38; Luke 1:20; Luke 17:27; Acts 1:2; (ἄχρι (Rec. et al. ἕως) τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς, Acts 1:22 Tdf.); ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας and ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης, Acts 2:29; Acts 23:1; Acts 26:22; ἄχρι (ἄχρις R G) ἡμερῶν πέντε even to the space of five days, i. e. after (A. V. in) five days, Acts 20:6; ἄχρις (ἄχρι T Tr WH) αὐγῆς, Acts 20:11; ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν, Romans 8:22; Philippians 1:5; ἄχρι τέλους, Hebrews 6:11; Revelation 2:26; see besides, Acts 3:21; (Acts 22:22); Romans 1:13; Romans 5:13; 1 Corinthians 4:11; 2 Corinthians 3:14; Galatians 4:2; Philippians 1:6 (ἄχρι L T WH).
   c. of Manner and Degree: ἄχρι θανάτου, Acts 22:4 (even to delivering unto death); Revelation 2:10 (to the enduring of death itself); Revelation 12:11; and, in the option of many interpreters, Hebrews 4:12 (see μερισμός, 2).
   d. joined to the relative οὗ (ἄχρις οὗ for ἄχρι τούτου, ᾧ) it has the force of a conjunction, until, to the time that: followed by the indicative preterite, of things that actually occurred and up to the beginning of which something continued, Acts 7:18 (ἄχρις οὗ ἀνέστη βασιλεύς); . followed by a subjunctive aorist having the force of a future perfect, Luke 21:24 L T Tr WH; Romans 11:25; 1 Corinthians 11:26 (Rec. ἄχρις οὗ ἄν); Galatians 3:19 (not WH text (see 2 below)); Galatians 4:19 (T Tr WH μεχρες); Revelation 7:3 Rec.elz G; ἄχρις οὗ ἄν until, whenever it may be (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 42, 5 b.), 1 Corinthians 15:25 (Rec.); Revelation 2:25. with indicative present as long as: Hebrews 3:13; cf. Bleek at the passage and Buttmann, 231 (199).
2. ἄχρις without οὗ has the force of a simple conjunction, until, to the time that: followed by subjunctive aorist, Luke 21:24 R G; Revelation 7:3 L T Tr WH; ; (Revelation 17:17 Rec.); Revelation 20:3 ( G L T Tr WH); with indicative future, Revelation 17:17 (L T Tr WH); (ἄχρις ἄν followed by subjunctive aorist, Galatians 3:19 WH text (see 1 d. above)). Since ἄχρι is akin to ἀκή and ἄκρος (but cf. Vanicek, p. 22; Curtius, § 166), and μέχρι to μῆκος, μακρός, by the use of the former particle the reach to which a thing is said to extend is likened to a height, by use of μέχρι, to a length; ἄχρι, indicating ascent, signifies up to; μέχρι, indicating extent, is unto, as far as; cf. Klotz as above, p. 225f. But this primitive distinction is often disregarded, and each particle used of the same thing; cf. ἄχρι τέλους, Hebrews 6:11; μέχρι τέλους, Hebrews 3:6, 14; Xenophon, symp. 4, 37 περιεστι μοι καί ἐσθίοντι ἀρχι τοῦ μή πεινην ἀφίκεσθαι καί πινοντι μέχρι τοῦ μή διψην. Cf. Fritzsche on Romans 5:13, vol i., p. 308ff; .(Ellicott on 2 Timothy 2:9. Ἄχρι occurs 20 times in the writings of Luke; elsewhere in the four Gospels only in Matthew 24:38.).

Question 37

ἐπαγγελία, -ας, ἡ

Answer 37

promise

promise
Definition:
annunciation, 2 Tim. 1:1; a promise, act of promising, Acts 13:23, 32; 23:21; meton. the thing promised, promised favor and blessing, Lk. 24:49; Acts 1:4

announcement
promise
the act of promising, a promise given or to be given
a promised good or blessing

ἐπαγγ-ελία, ἡ,

1. command, summons, Plb. 9.38.2. announcement, notice, IG 22.1235.7 (iii B.C.); τοῦ ἀγῶνος SIG 561.9 (Chalcis), prob. in LXX 1 Maccabees 10:15; v.l. in 1 John 1:5.
2. as law-term, ἐ. (sc. δοκιμασίας) summons to attend a δοκιμασία τῶν ῥητόρων (v. ἐπαγγέλλω 3), ἐ. τινὶ ἐπαγγέλλειν Aeschin. 1.64, cf. 81; πρὸς τοὺς θεσμοθέτας ἔσθ’ ἡμῖν ἐ. D. 22.29: generally, notification, summons, Sammelb. 4434 (ii A.D.).
3. offer, promise, profession, undertaking, D. 21.14; τὰς ὑπερβολὰς τῶν ἐ. Arist. EN 1164a29, cf. Phld. Herc. 1251.20; ἐπαγγελίας ποιεῖσθαί τινι Plb. 1.72.6; ἐν ἐν ἐπαγγελίᾳ καταλιπών having left it as a promise, Id. 18.28.1; τὴν ἐ. ἐπὶ τέλος ἀγαγεῖν ibid., cf. SIG 577.11 (Milet., iii/ii B. C.); ὤμων ἐπαγγελίᾳ the promise of his shoulders, Philostr. Im. 1.4; ἐξ ἐ., = ἐπαγγειλάμενος, BCH 11.12 (Lagina); ἐ. ποιησάμενος ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων Michel 473.10 (Mylasa); ἐβεβαίωσεν τὴν ἐ. Inscr.Prien. 123.9, cf. GDI 3624a34 (Cos).
4. indication, τοῦ ἐσομένου A.D. Synt. 205.13.
5. pl., canvassing, = Lat. ambitus, prob. f.l. for παρ-, Plu. 2.276d.
6. = ἐπάγγελμα 2, subject of a treatise, Gal. Libr.Propr.Prooem.
7. the curative property claimed for prescriptions or drugs, ταῖς τῶν φαρμάκων ἐ. their advertised properties, Herod.Med. ap. Orib. 10.5.1, cf. Gal. 13.504,al.; ἐ. ἐπιτηδεύματος public exercise of a profession, Men.Prot.p.1D.

ἐπαγγελία, ἐπαγγελίας, ἡ (ἐπαγγέλλω);

1. announcement: 1 John 1:5 (Rec., where ἀγγελία was long since restored); κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν ζωῆς τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, to proclaim life in fellowship with Christ, 2 Timothy 1:1 (Winers Grammar, 402 (376); cf. κατά, II. at the end. But others give ἐπαγγελία here as elsewhere the sense of promise, cf. 2 below).
2. promise;
   a. the act of promising, a promise given or to be given: προσδέχεσθαι τήν ἀπό τίνος ἐπαγγελίαν (assent; the reference is to a promise to surrender Paul to the power and sentence of the Jews), Acts 23:21; (add, ἐπαγγελίας ὁ λόγος οὗτος, Romans 9:9). It is used also of the divine promises of blessing, especially of the benefits of salvation by Christ (cf. Lightfoot on Galatians, 3:14): Acts 7:17; Romans 4:14, 16; (plural Romans 9:4); Galatians 3:17f, 21; Galatians 4:23; Hebrews 11:17; 2 Peter 3:9 (on which see βραδύνω, 2); Hebrews 8:6; Hebrews 11:9; followed by the infinitive Hebrews 4:1; γίνεται τίνι, Romans 4:13; πρός τινα, Acts 13:32; Acts 26:6; ἐρρήθη τίνι, Galatians 3:16; ἐστι τίνι, belongs to one, Acts 2:39; ἐπαγγέλλεσθαι τήν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 John 2:25; ἔχειν ἐπαγγελίας, to have received, Hebrews 7:6; 2 Corinthians 7:1 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 177 (166)); to have linked to it, 1 Timothy 4:8; εἶναι ἐν ἐπαγγελία, joined with a promise (others besides; cf. Winer’s Grammar, 391 (366)), Ephesians 6:2; ἡ γῆ τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, the promised land, Hebrews 11:9; τά κατά τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, born in accordance with the promise, Romans 9:8; Galatians 4:28; τό πνεῦμα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τό ἅγιον, the promised Spirit, Ephesians 1:13; αἱ διαθῆκαι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, covenants to which was united the promise (of salvation through the Messiah), Ephesians 2:12; ἡ ἐπαγγελία τοῦ Θεοῦ, given by God, Romans 4:20; in the plural 2 Corinthians 1:20; αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι τῶν πατέρων, the promises made to the fathers, Romans 15:8; with the genitive of the object, τῆς ζωῆς, 1 Timothy 4:8; τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ, 2 Peter 3:4; κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν according to promise, Acts 13:23; Galatians 3:29; δἰ ἐπαγγελίας, Galatians 3:18.
   b. by metonymy, a promised good or blessing (cf. ἐλπίς, under the end): Galatians 3:22; Ephesians 3:6 (yet here cf. Meyer or Ellicott); ἀποστέλλειν τήν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ πατρός μου, the blessing promised by my Father, Luke 24:49; περιμένειν, Acts 1:4; κομίζεσθαι τήν ἐπαγγελίαν, Hebrews 10:36; Hebrews 11:39 (Hebrews 11:13 T Tr WH, προσδέχεσθαι L); λαμβάνειν τάς ἐπαγγελίας, Hebrews 11:13 (R G); ἐπιτυγχάνειν ἐπαγγελιῶν, Hebrews 11:33; κληρονομεῖν τάς ἐπαγγελίας, Hebrews 6:12; ἐπιτυγχάνειν τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, Hebrews 6:15; κληρονόμοι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, Hebrews 6:17 — (to reconcile Hebrews 6:12, 15, 17 with Hebrews 11:13, 39, which at first sight seem to be in conflict, we must hold, in accordance with Hebrews 12:22-24, that the O. T. saints, after the expiatory sacrifice offered at length to God by Christ, were made partakers of the heavenly blessings before Christ’s return from heaven; (others explain the apparent contradiction by the difference between the initial and the consummate reception of the promise; see the commentaries at the passage)); with the epexegetical genitive λαβεῖν τήν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος, the promised blessing, which is the Holy Spirit, Acts 2:33; Galatians 3:14 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 34, 3 a. at the end); τήν ἐπαγγελίαν τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας, Hebrews 9:15. ((Demosthenes 519, 8; Aristotle, eth. Nic. 10, 1, p. 1164a, 29); Polybius 1, 43, 6, and often; Diodorus 1, 5; Josephus, Antiquities 3, 5, 1; 5, 8, 11; 1 Macc. 10:15.)

Question 38

ὅπως

Answer 38

that, so that, (in order) to; in such a manner as
how, in what way, in what manner?

can function as a conj., how, in what way or manner, by what means, Mt. 22:5; Lk. 24:20; conj. that, in order that, and ὅπως μή, that not, lest, Mt. 6:2, 4, 5, 16, 18; Acts 9:2, et al. freq.

ὅπως,

also and Aeol. ὅππως, Ion. ὅκως, Dor. ὁπῶς acc. to A.D. Adv. 173.11: correlat. to ὡς and πῶς.

ADV. OF MANNER, Relat. as, in such manner as, and with interrog. force how, in what manner, rarely indef., v. infr. A.V.

FINAL CONJUNCTION, in such a manner that, in order that.

ADV. OF MANNER, how, as:

I

1. Relat. to ὥς or οὕτως (like ὡς), in such manner as, as: 1 with the ordinary Constr. of the Relat.: with ind., ἦ τοι νόστον, ὅπως φρεσὶ σῇσι μενοινᾷς, ὥς τοι Ζεὺς τελέσειεν Od. 15.111; οὕτως ὅ… S. Tr. 330; ὧδ’ ὅ. Id. El. 1301; οὕτως ὅ. δύνανται Th. 7.67: sts. an analogous word replaces the antec. Adv., με τοῖον ἔθηκεν, ὅπως (for οἷον) ἐθέλει Od. 16.208: freq. without any antec. expressed, ἔλθοι ὅ… ἐθέλω (sc. αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν) 14.172; ἔρξον ὅ. ἐθέλεις Il. 4.37, Od. 13.145; χρῶ ὅ. βούλει X. Cyr. 8.3.46; ποίει ὅ. ἄριστόν σοι δοκεῖ εἶναι ib. 4.5.50; ὅ. ἔχω as I am, on the spot, S. Ph. 819. with fut. ind., esp. after Verbs of seeing, providing, taking care.., in the manner in which, how, that, οἱ Περσικοὶ νόμοι ἐπιμέλονται ὅπως μὴ τοιοῦτοι ἔσονται οἱ πολῖται X. Cyr. 1.2.3; ποιέειν ὅκως μηκέτι κεῖνος ἐς Ἕλληνας ἀπίξεται Hdt. 5.23; ἐφρόντιζον ὅκως μὴ λείψομαι τῶν πρότερον γενομένων Id. 7.8. ά, cf. Pl. Ap. 29e; ἔπρασσον ὅπως τις βοήθεια ἥξει Th. 3.4; τοῦτο μηχανᾶσθαι ὅπως ἀποφεύξεται πᾶν ποιῶν θάνατον Pl. Ap. 39a; τούτου στοχαζόμενοι, ὅπως.. ἔσονται Id. Grg. 502e (cf. infr. 111.1 b, etc.): this fut. ind. may become opt. after a historical tense, ἐπεμελεῖτο ὅπως μήτε ἄσιτοι μήτε ἄποτοί ποτε ἔσοιντο X. Cyr. 8.1.43, cf. HG 7.5.3, Cyr. 8.1.10, Oec. 7.5, Ages. 2.8; and ὅπως is freq. used interchangeably with such forms as δι’ ὧν, ὅτῳ τρόπῳ, etc., εἰσηγοῦνται μὴ δι’ ὧν.. ἀσκήσουσιν, ἀλλ’ ὅπως.. δόξουσι Isoc. 1.4, cf. Th. 6.11: this sense easily passes into a final sense, so that, τοῦτο ἀπόβαλε οὕτω ὅκως μηκέτι ἥξει Hdt. 3.40; οὕτω δ’ (sc. ποίει) ὅπως μήτηρ σε μὴ ‘πιγνώσεται S. El. 1296, cf. Ar. Ra. 905, X. Cyr. 4.5.25, HG 2.4.17; v. infr. B.
2. with ἄν ( κε) and subj. in indefinite sentences, in whatever way, just as, however, ὅππως κεν ἐθέλῃσιν Il. 20.243 (but ὅπως ἐθέλῃσιν (without κε) Od. 1.349, 6.189); οὕτως ὅκως ἂν καὶ δυνώμεθα Hdt. 8.143; οὕτως ὅπως ἂν αὐτοὶ βούλωνται X. Cyr. 1.1.2, cf. IG 22.1.13 (v B. C.), Pl. Phd. 116a, Smp. 174b, etc. with opt. after historical tenses, οὕτως ὅ. τύχοιεν Th. 8.95; ὅ. βούλοιντο X. HG 2.3.13; in a gnomic statement, εἰκῇ κράτιστον ζῆν ὅ. δύναιτό τις S. OT 979: when ἄν appears with the opt., it belongs to the Verb and not to ὅπως, ὅ. ἄν τις ὀνομάσαι τοῦτο however one might think fit to call it, D. 13.4.
3. a very common phrase is οὐκ ἔστιν ὅ. (οὐκ ἔσθ’ ὅπως) there is no way in which.., it cannot be that, οὐκ ἔστι ὅκως κοτὲ σοὺς δέξονται λόγους Hdt. 7.102, cf. Ar. Pl. 18, D. 18.208, al.; so οὐκ ἔστιν ὅ. οὐ, fieri non potest quin, οὐκ ἔσθ’ ὅ. οὐ πιστὸν ἐξ ὑμῶν πτερὸν ἐξήγαγ’ S. OC 97, cf. Ar. Ach. 116, Eq. 426, Th. 882, Pl. Ap. 27e; οὐδαμῶς ὅ. οὐ, in answer, it must positively be so, Id. Tht. 160d; so also οὐκ ἂν γένοιτο τοῦθ’ ὅ… οὐ φανῶ S. OT 1058; οὐ γὰρ γένοιτ’ ἄν, ταῦθ’ ὅ. οὐχ ὧδ’ ἔχειν (anacoluth. for ἔχει or ἕξει) Id. Aj. 378: so in questions, ἔσθ’ ὅ… ἔλθωμεν; Ar. V. 471 (v.l. -οιμεν); ἔστιν οὖν ὅ. ὁ τοιοῦτος φιλοσοφήσει; Pl. R. 495a, cf. Phdr. 262b, Tht. 154c: so, besides ind. of all tenses, οὐκ ἔσθ’ ὅ. may be folld. by opt. with ἄν, οὐ γάρ ἐσθ’ ὅπως μί’ ἡμέρα γένοιτ’ ἂν ἡμέραι δύο Ar. Nu. 1181, cf. V. 212, Isoc. 12.156, Pl. La. 184c: by ind. with ἄν, οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως ἂν.. κατέστησαν Isoc. 15.206, cf. D. 33.28: ἄν is omitted in οὐκ ἔσθ’ ὅπως λέξαιμι A. Ag. 620, cf. E. Alc. 52, Ar. V. 471 (v.l. ἔλθωμεν).
4. in Trag., etc., like ὡς in comparisons, κῦμ’ ὅπως A. Pr. 1001; γῄτης ὅπως S. Tr. 32, cf. 442, 683; ὅπως δρῦν ὑλοτόμοι σχίζουσι κάρα Id. El. 98 (anap.); ὅπως ἁ πάνδυρτος ἀηδών ib. 1076 (lyr.), cf. Ph. 777, E. Andr. 1140; ὅκως τις καλλίης κάτω κύπτων Herod. 3.41; so in Locr. Prose, ὅπω(ς) ξένον IG 9(1).334.2 (V B.C.).
5. like ὡς or ὅτι, with Sup. of Advs., ὅ. ἄριστα A. Ag. 600, IG 12.44.8, etc.; ὅ. ἀνωτάτω as high up as possible, Ar. Pax 207; in full, οὕτως ὅ. ἥδιστα (sc. ἔχει) S. Tr. 330.
6. with a gen. added, σοῦσθε ὅ. ποδῶν run as you are off for feet, i. e. as quick as you can, A. Supp. 837 (lyr., where however [ἔχετε] shd. prob. be added); v. infr. 111.10, ἔχω (A) B. 11.2b.
7. sts. of Time, when, Τρῶες.. ὅπως ἴδον αἷμ’ Ὀδυσῆος.., ἐπ’ αὐτῷ πάντες ἔβησαν Il. 11.459, cf. 12.208, Od. 3.373: freq. in Hdt. with opt., whenever, ὅκως μὲν εἴη ἐν τῇ γῇ καρπὸς ἁδρός 1.17, cf. 68, 100, 162, 186, 2.13, 174, al.: in Trag. and Com., A. Pers. 198, S. El. 749, Tr. 765, Ar. Nu. 60: with Sup. of Advs., ὅ. πρῶτα as soon as, Hes. Th. 156; ὅ. ὤκιστα Thgn. 427; ὅ. τάχιστα A. Pr. 230.
8. of Place, where, dub. in Herod. 3.75.

II

1. ὅπως is sts. used to introduce the substance of a statement, after Verbs of saying, thinking, or perceiving, that, how, λόγῳ ἀνάπεισον ὅκως.. Hdt. 1.37; οὐδὲ φήσω ὅκως.. Id. 2.49, cf. 3.115, 116; τοῦτ’ αὐτὸ μή μοι φράζ’, ὅπως οὐκ εἶ κακός S. OT 548, cf. Ant. 223, Pl. Euthd. 296e; after ἐλπίζειν, S. El. 963, E. Heracl. 1051; after Verbs of emotion, ἐμοὶ δ’ ἄχος.., ὅπως δὴ δηρὸν ἀποίχεται grief is mine, when I think how.. (i. e. that..), Od. 4.109, cf. S. Ph. 169 (lyr.); after θαυμάζω freq. in Att., θαυμάζω ὅ. ποτὲ ἐπείσθησαν Ἀθηναῖοι X. Mem. 1.1.20, cf. Pl. Cri. 43a.
2. οὐχ ὅ… ἀλλὰ or ἀλλὰ καὶ.. is not only not.. but.., and is expld. by an ellipsis of λέγω or ἐρῶ (cf. ὅτι IV), οὐχ ὅ. κωλυταὶ.. γενήσεσθε, ἀλλὰ καὶ.. δύναμιν προσλαβεῖν περιόψεσθε not only will you not become.., but you will also.., Th. 1.35, cf. X. HG 5.4.34, D. 6.9; οὐχ ὅ. ὑμῖν τῶν αὑτοῦ τι ἐπέδωκεν, ἀλλὰ τῶν ὑμετέρων πολλὰ ὑφῄρηται Lys. 30.26; οὐχ ὅ. τούτων χάριν ἀπέδοσαν, ἀλλ’ ἀπολιπόντες ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων συμμαχίαν εἰσῆλθον Isoc. 14.27, cf. D. 18.131, 53.13; οὐ γὰρ ὅπως.., ἀλλὰ καὶ.. Id. 21.11; οὔκουν ὅπως.., ἀλλὰ.. X. Cyr. 8.2.12; also οὐχ ὅ…, ἀλλ’ οὐδέ.., οὐχ ὅ. ἀδικοῦντες, ἀλλ’ οὐδ’ ἐπιδημοῦντες ἐφυγαδευόμεθα Id. HG 2.4.14; οὐχ ὅ. τῆς κοινῆς ἐλευθερίας μετέχομεν, ἀλλ’ οὐδὲ δουλείας μετρίας τυχεῖν ἠξιώθημεν Isoc. 14.5; διμοιρίαν λαμβάνων ἐν ταῖς θοίναις οὐχ ὅπως ἀμφοτέραις ἐχρῆτο, ἀλλὰ διαπέμπων οὐδετέραν αὑτῷ κατέλειπε X. Ages. 5.1; οὐχ ὅ. ζημιοῦν, ἀλλὰ μηδ’ ἀτιμάζειν.. Th. 3.42: so sts. μὴ ὅ. (where an imper. must be supplied), μὴ ὅ. ὀρχεῖσθαι ἀλλ’ οὐδὲ ὀρθοῦσθαι ἐδύνασθε do not think that you could dance = so far from being able to dance, X. Cyr. 1.3.10. οὐχ ὅ. rarely follows another clause, to say nothing of.., let alone.., πεπαύμεθ’ ἡμεῖς, οὐχ ὅ. σε παύσομεν S. El. 796; μηδ’ ἐμπίδα, οὐχ ὅπως ταῦρον ἔτι ἄρασθαι δυνάμενος.. let alone a bull, Luc. Cont. 8, cf. Prom. 8, Pr.Im. 7, Pisc. 31.

III in in direct questions, how, in what way or manner:

1 with ind., ἔσπετε νῦν μοι ὅππως δὴ.. πῦρ ἔμπεσε νηυσίν Il. 16.113; εἴπ’ ἄγε μ’.. ὅππως τούσδ’ ἵππους λάβετον 10.545; εὖ μοι κατάλεξον ὅπως ἤντησας Od. 3.97; ὅπως ἠφανίσθη οὐδὲ λόγῳ εἰκότι δύνανται ἀποφαίνειν Antipho 5.26; Ἀλκιβιάδης ἀνήχθη.. ἐπὶ κατασκοπὴν.. τοῦ οἴκαδε κατάπλου ὅπως ἡ πόλις πρὸς αὐτὸν ἔχοι X. HG 1.4.11; οὐδέ τί πω σάφα ἴδμεν ὅπως ἔσται τάδε ἔργα Il. 2.252, etc. notably fut. after Verbs of deliberation (like the subj., v. infr. 2), φραζώμεθ’ ὅπως ἔσται τάδε ἔργα 4.14; φράζευ ὅπως Δαναοῖσιν ἀλεξήσεις κακὸν ἦμαρ (v.l. ἀλεξήσῃς) 9.251, cf. Od. 13.376, 386, 19.557, 20.29, 39.

2. with deliberative subj. after Verbs of deliberation, taking care, and the like, λεύσσει ὅπως ὄχ’ ἄριστα.. γένηται Il. 3.110; ἐνόησεν (gnomic aor.) ὅππως κέρδος ἔῃ 10.225; ἀλλ’ ἄγεθ’ ἡμεῖς οἵδε περιφραζώμεθα πάντες νόστον ὅπως ἔλθῃσι Od. 1.77, cf. 13.365; οὐκ οἶδ’ ὅπως.. φῶ S. OT 1367, cf. Aj. 428, Lys. 8.5, Pl. Men. 91d; ἐπιμελητέον ὅπως τρέφωνται οἱ ἵπποι X. Eq.Mag. 1.3, cf. Oec. 7.36, 37, 9.14, 15.1, Pl. Grg. 515c. — Sts. the fut. and subj. are conjoined without difference of meaning, ἐπράττετο γὰρ.., πρῶτον μὲν ὅπως μὴ περιμείνητε.., δεύτερον δὲ ὅπως ψηφιε̄σθε.., τρίτον δὲ ὅπως μὴ ἔσται Aeschin. 3.65, cf. X. Ages. 7.7, Mem. 2.2.10. — On ὅπως ἄν (κεν), v. infr. 5.
3. with opt. after tenses of past time, τῶν ἀδῄλων ὅπως ἀποβήσοιτο ib. 1.3.2, etc.: after Verbs of deliberation, being virtually orat. obliq., μερμήριξε.. Ἥρη ὅπως ἐξαπάφοιτο (orat. rect. πῶς ἐξαπάφωμαι;) Il. 14.160; μερμήριζεν ὅπως ἀπολοίατο πᾶσαι νῆες Od. 9.554, cf. 420; οὐ γὰρ εἴχομεν.. ὅπως δρῶντες καλῶς πράξαιμεν S. Ant. 271; ἐπεμελήθημεν ὅπως ἐξαλειφθείη αὐτῷ τὰ ἁμαρτήματα Lys. 6.39, cf. 13.32, X. Cyr. 6.2.11.
4. with opt. and ἄν freq. expressing a wish, which in orat. rect. would be expressed by πῶς ἄν, σκόπει ὅ. ἂν ἀποθάνοιμεν ἀνδρικώτατα Ar. Eq. 81 (v.l. ἀποθάνωμεν), cf. Nu. 760; βουλευόμενοι ὅ. ἂν τὴν ἡγεμονίαν λάβοιεν τῆς Ἑλλάδος X. HG 7.1.33, cf. Cyr. 2.1.4; τῶν ἄλλων ἐπιμελεῖται ὅ. ἂν θηρῷεν (v.l. -ῶσιν) ib. 1.2.10: the opt. with ἄν and subj. sts. appear in consecutive clauses, Id. HG 3.2.1.
5. ὅπως ἄν (κεν) with the subj. is used after imper. or inf. used as imper., πείρα ὅπως κεν δὴ σὴν πατρίδα γαῖαν ἵκηαι Od. 4.545; φράζεσθαι.., ὅππως κε μνηστῆρας.. κτείνῃς 1.295; σκοπεῖτε.., ὅ. ἂν ὑμῖν πρᾶγος εὖ νικᾷ τόδε A. Supp. 233, etc.; φύλασσε.. ἔπειθ’ ὅ. ἂν.. ἡ χάρις.. ἐξ ἁπλῆς διπλῆ φανῇ S. Tr. 618, cf. E. IA 539: in Prose, ἐπιμεληθῆναι ὅ. ἂν.. X. Cyr. 8.3.6, cf. Pl. Prt. 326a; μηχανᾶσθαι Id. Phdr. 239b, Grg. 481a, cf. Ar. Eq. 917.
6. rarely c. inf., ἐπιμελήθητε προθύμως ὅπως διπλάσια.. σῖτα καὶ ποτὰ παρασκευασθῆναι X. Cyr. 4.2.37 (v.l. -εσκευασμένα ᾖ), cf. Oec. 7.29, HG 6.2.32; so later ὅπως παρακολουθῆμεν (Dor. inf.) Supp.Epigr. 1.170.18 (cf. p.138, Delph., ii B. C.); ὅπως.. ἔχειν, ὅπως.. εἴργεσθαι, D.S. 20.4, 85; ὅπως πέμπιν PTeb. 315.30 (ii A. D.).
7. after Verbs of fear and caution, ὅπως and ὅπως μή are used with fut. ind. or aor. subj.: — the readings are freq. uncertain: the following (among others) are made certain either by the metre or the form, with fut. ind., δέδοιχ’ ὅπως μὴ τεύξομαι Ar. Eq. 112; παντὶ λόγῳ ἀντιτείνετε εὐλαβούμενοι ὅπως μὴ.. οἰχήσομαι Pl. Phd. 91c; φόβος.. ἔστιν.. ὅπως μὴ αὖθις διασχισθησόμεθα Id. Smp. 193a: sts. the preceding Verb is omitted, ὅπως μὴ οὐκ.. ἔσομαι Id. Men. 77a. with aor. subj., τὴν θεὸν δ’ ὅ. λάθω δέδοικα E. IT 995; φυλάττου, ὅ. μὴ εἰς τοὐναντίον ἔλθῃς X. Mem. 3.6.16: rarely with pres., οὐ φοβεῖ ὅ. μὴ ἀνόσιον πρᾶγμα τυγχάνῃς πράττων Pl. Euthphr. 4e: sts. the preceding Verb is omitted, with aor. subj., ὅκως μή τι ὑμῖν πανώλεθρον κακὸν ἐς τὴν χώρην ἐσβάλωσι Hdt. 6.85: with pres. subj., ὅπως μὴ.. ᾖ τοῦτο Pl. Cra. 430d. with opt. representing subj. after a historical tense, X. Mem. 2.9.3.
8. this Constr. is used in admonitions or commands: in the orig. Constr. a Verb implying caution or circumspection precedes, ὅρα ὅκως μή σευ ἀποστήσονται Πέρσαι Hdt. 3.36; ἄθρει.. ὅπως μὴ ἐκδύσεται Ar. V. 141; τηρώμεσθ’ ὅπως μὴ.. αἰσθήσεται ib. 372: but this came to be omitted, and ὅπως or ὅπως μή with fut. ind. or aor. subj. are exactly = the imper., ἔμβα χὤπως ἀρεῖς Id. Ra. 378 (lyr.): most freq. with fut. ind., ὅκως λόγον δώσεις τῶν μετεχείρισας χρημάτων, = δίδου λόγον, Hdt. 3.142; ὅπως παρέσει μοι, = πάρισθι, Ar. Av. 131; ὅπως πετήσει Id. Pax 77, cf. X. An. 1.7.3, Lys. 1.21, 12.50, Pl. Grg. 489a, etc.: rarely with I pers., ὁποῖα κισσὸς δρυός, ὅπως τῆσδ’ ἕξομαι E. Hec. 398, cf. Ar. Ec. 297 (lyr.): very rarely with aor. subj., ὅπως μή τι ἡμᾶς σφήλῃ Pl. Euthd. 296a codd.; ὅπως μὴ.. ἐξαπατήσῃ Id. Prt. 313c; ὅπως μὴ ποιήσητε D. 4.20 codd. — The codd. freq. vary, as between διδάξεις and -ξῃς Ar. Nu. 824; τιμωρήσονται and -ωνται Th. 1.56; πράξομεν and -ωμεν ib. 82; θορυβήσει and -σῃ D. 13.14, etc. — Since the fut. is frequently, and the aor. (whether 1 or 2) rarely guaranteed by metre or form, the aor. 1 forms shd. prob. be rejected, both in signf. 7 and 8, in cases where codd. vary.
9. as the echo to a preceding πῶς; in dialogue,

Question 39

ἁμαρτωλός, -όν

Answer 39

sinner, sinful

(a.) sinful, as an absolute moral failure; (n.) sinner, one who violates God’s will or law; in some contexts, one who does not keep orthodox traditions and behaviors
Definition:
one who deviates from the path of virtue, a sinner, Mk. 2:17; depraved, Mk. 8:38; sinful, detestable, Rom. 7:13

ἁμαρτωλός, (from the form ἁμάρτω, as φειδωλός from φείδομαι), devoted to sin, a (masculine or feminine) sinner. In the N. T. distinctions are so drawn that one is called ἁμαρτωλός who is,

a. not free from sin. In this sense all men are sinners; as, Matthew 9:13; Mark 2:17; Luke 5:8, 32; Luke 13:2; Luke 18:13; Romans 3:7; Romans 5:(8),19; 1 Timothy 1:15; Hebrews 7:26.
b. pre-eminently sinful, especially wicked; (α.). universally: 1 Timothy 1:9; Jude 1:15; Mark 8:38; Luke 6:32-34; Luke 7:37, 39; Luke 15:7, 10; John 9:16, 24f. John 9:31; Galatians 2:17; Hebrews 12:3; James 4:8; James 5:20; 1 Peter 4:18; ἁμαρτία itself is called ἁμαρτωλός, Romans 7:13. (β.) specifically, of men stained with certain definite vices or crimes, e. g. the tax-gatherers: Luke 15:2; Luke 18:13; Luke 19:7; hence, the combination τελῶναι καί ἁμαρτωλοί, Matthew 9:10; Matthew 11:19; Mark 2:15; Luke 5:30; Luke 7:34; Luke 15:1. heathen, called by the Jews sinners κατ’ ἐξοχήν (1 Macc. 1:34 1 Macc. 2:48, 62; Tobit 13:6): Matthew 26:45 (?); Mark 14:41; Luke 24:7; Galatians 2:15. (The word is found often in the Sept., as the equivalent of חֹטֵא and רָשָׁע , and in the O. T. Apocrypha; very seldom in Greek writings, as Aristotle, eth. Nic. 2, 9, p. 1109, 33; Plutarch, de audiend. poët. 7, p. 25 c.)

Question 40

ἔμπροσθεν

Answer 40

before, in front of (+gen)

before, in front of, in the presence of
Definition:
also an improper prep., before, in front of, Lk. 19:4; Phil. 3:14; before, in the presence of, in the face of, Mt. 5:24; 23:14; before, previous to, Jn. 1:15, 27, 30; from the Hebrew, in the sight or estimation of, Mt. 11:26; 18:14

ἔμπροσθεν (Tdf. in Revelation 4:6 ἐνπροσθεν (see ἐν, III. 3; cf. Alexander Buttmann (1873) 8)), adverb of place and of time (from ἐν and πρόσθεν, properly, in the fore part); (from Herodotus down); the Sept. chiefly for לִפְנֵי; before. In the N. T. used only of place;

1. adverbially, in front, before: Revelation 4:6 (opposed to ὄπισθεν, as in Palaeph. 29, 2). before: πορεύεσθαι, to precede, to go before, Luke 19:28; προδραμών ἔμπροσθεν, Luke 19:4 (T WH εἰς τό ἔμπροσθεν, cf. Herodotus 4, 61 (8, 89)), like προπορεύεσθαι ἔμπροσθεν, Xenophon, Cyril 4, 2, 23 (figuratively, Plato, Gorgias, p. 497 a. προιθι εἰς τό ἔμπροσθεν); τά ἔμπροσθεν the things which lie before one advancing, the goal set before one, Philippians 3:13 (14) (opposed to τά ὀπίσω).
2. it serves as a preposition, with the genitive (Buttmann, 319 (274); Winers Grammar, § 54, 6);
   a. before, i. e. in that local region which is in front of a person or a thing: Matthew 5:24; Matthew 7:6; Luke 5:19; Luke 14:2; to prostrate oneself ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ποδῶν τίνος, Revelation 19:10; Revelation 22:8; γονυπέτειν ἔμπροσθεν τίνος, Matthew 27:29; πορεύεσθαι ἔμπροσθεν τίνος, to go before one, John 10:4; ἀποστέλλεσθαι ἔμπροσθεν τίνος, to be sent before one, John 3:28; σαλπίζειν ἔμπροσθεν τίνος, Matthew 6:2; τήν ὁδόν κατασκευάσαι, where ἔμπροσθεν τίνος is nearly equivalent to a dative (cf. Buttmann, 172 (150)), Matthew 11:10; Mark 1:2 Rec.; Luke 7:27.
   b. before, in the presence of, equivalent to opposite to, over against one: στῆναι, Matthew 27:11; ὁμολογεῖν and ἀρνεῖσθαι (Buttmann, 176 (153)), Matthew 10:32; Matthew 26:70; Luke 12:8,(9 Lachmann); also Galatians 2:14; 1 Thessalonians 1:3; 1 Thessalonians 2:19; 1 Thessalonians 3:9, 13; before one, i. e. at his tribunal: Matthew 25:32; Matthew 27:11; Luke 21:36; Acts 18:17; 2 Corinthians 5:10; 1 Thessalonians 2:19; (1 John 3:19). Here belong the expressions εὐδοκία, θέλημα ἐστι ἔμπροσθεν Θεοῦ, it is the good pleasure, the will of God, Matthew 11:26; Matthew 18:14; Luke 10:21, formed after Chaldean usage; for in 1 Samuel 12:22 the words יְהוָה הואִיל, God wills, Jonathan the targumist renders יְהוָה קֲדָם רַעֲוָא; cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexamples N. T. etc., p. 329f; (cf. Buttmann, 172 (150)). o. before i. e. in the sight of one: Matthew 5:16; Matthew 6:1; Matthew 17:2; Matthew 23:13 (); Mark 2:12 T Tr marginal reading WH; ; Luke 19:27; John 12:37; Acts 10:4 L T Tr WH.
   d. before, denoting rank: γεγονέναι ἔμπροσθεν τίνος, to have obtained greater dignity than another, John 1:15, 30, also R L brackets; (Genesis 48:20 ἔθηκε τόν Αφραιμ ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Μανασσῆ; (cf. Plato, legg. 1,631 d.; 5, 743 e.; 7, 805 d.)).

Question 41

ποῦ

που

Answer 41

where? whither? at what place?

interrogative, where? In what place? direct, Mt. 2:2; Lk. 8:25; Jn. 1:39; indirect, Mt. 2:4; Jn. 1:40; whither, Jn. 3:8; 7:35; 13:36

somewhere, a place where; about, approximately

enclitic, somewhere, in a certain place, Heb. 2:6; 4:4; with numerals, thereabout, Rom. 4:19*

ποῦ,

Ion. κοῦ, interrog. Adv. where? Hom., etc.; freq. c. dat. pers., ποῦ δέ οἱ ἔντεα κεῖται . .; Il. 10.407; π. τοι τόξον; 5.171; π. τοι Δηΐφοβος . ., π. δέ τοι Ὀθρυονεύς; 13.770, 772; ἀλλ’ ἡμὶν Αἴας ποὖστιν; S. Aj. 733; π. μοί ποτε ναίει; Id. OC 137 (lyr.); rarely with Verbs of motion in early authors, v. που sub fin.: — c. gen. loci, π. χθονός; where in the world? A. Pers. 231; π. γῆς; S. Aj. 984, OT 108, etc.; π. τῆς χώρας; X. Eq.Mag. 7.14; τὴν σοφίαν . . π. χοροῦ τάξομεν; in what part of the chorus? Pl. Euthd. 279c .

2. so in a sense not strictly local, π. ποτ’ εἶ φρενῶν; S. El. 390; π. γνώμης ποτ’ εἶ; Id. Ant. 42; π. ποτ’ εἰμὶ πράγματος; Id. Tr. 375; π. σοι τύχης ἕστηκεν; at what point of fortune stands he? Id. Aj. 102 .

II of manner, how? E. IA 406, Or. 802; to express an inference very strongly, κοῦ γε δὴ . . οὐκ ἂν χωσθείη κόλπος . .; how then would it not . . ? i.e. it certainly would . ., Hdt. 2.11, cf. Th. 8.27 codd.; in Trag., in indignant questions, how? by what right? π. σὺ στρατηγεῖς τοῦδε; S. Aj. 1100; ποῦ σὺ μάντις εἶ σαφής; Id. OT 390, cf. Ph. 451, E. Heracl. 369 (lyr.), 510; π. γάρ ἐστι δίκαιον; D. 37.41, cf. 23.58 .

που,

Ion. κου, Aeol. ποι Sapph. Supp. 25.17, Pi. P. 5.101, BCH 37.157 (Cyme, iii B.C. ), prob. in Alc. 9: —

enclit. Adv. anywhere, somewhere, Il. 16.514, etc.; freq. with other Advs. of Place, οὐχ ἑκάς π. somewhere not far off, S. Ph. 41; πέλας π. ib. 163 (anap.); μηδαμοῦ . . π. ib. 256 (dub.l.); π. πέραν τοῦ ποταμοῦ X. An. 4.3.3; ἄλλοθί π. D. 4.41; τῇδέ π. Plb. 3.108.3, etc.: c.gen., ἀλλά π. αὐτοῦ ἀγρῶν in some part there of the fields, Od. 4.639; ἐμβαλεῖν π. (fort. ποι ) τῆς χώρας some part of the country, X. Cyr. 6.1.42; εἴ π. τῆς χώρας ταὐτὸ τοῦτο πάθος συνέβη D. 18.195 .

II without reference to Place, in some degree, καί πού τι Th. 2.87: freq. to qualify an expression, perhaps, I suppose, Hom., etc.; added to introductory Particles, οὕτω π . . . Il. 2.116; Ζεὺς μέν π. τό γε οἶδε 3.308; ὡς ὅτε π. 11.292; ἤν π., εἰ μή π., X. Hier. 3.2, Pl. R. 372a: strengthd., τάχ’ ἄν π. S. OT 1116; ἴσως π. E. El. 518: attached to single words to limit their significance, πάντως κ. Hdt. 3.73; τί π. δράσεις; what in the world? A. Pr. 743; οὐδείς π. Pl. Phlb. 64d; with numerals, ἔτεα τρία καὶ δέκα κ. μάλιστα about thirteen years, Hdt. 1.119, cf. 209, 7.22, etc.: οὔ τί που denies with indignation or wonder, surely it cannot be . ., οὔ τί π. οὗτος Ἀπόλλων Pi. P. 4.87, cf. S. Ph. 1233, Ar. Nu. 1260, Pax 1211, Ra. 522, Pl. R. 362d, etc.; οὐ δήπου adds a shade of suspicion, οὐ δήπου Στράτων; Ar. Ach. 122, cf. Av. 269, Pl. Smp. 194b: for δήπου, ἦπου, v. sub vocc. — In late writers ( LXX John 2:5, al., Ev.John 7:35, al., Arr. Epict. 1.27.9, 4.1.93, etc.) ποῦ, που take the place of ποῖ, ποι, with Verbs of motion, as in Engl. where for whither? This idiom (condemned by Phryn. 30, ποῦ ἄπει . . ἁμάρτημα ) is found occasionally in early authors, ποῦ τοι ἀπειλαὶ οἴχονται; Il. 13.219; ἐξελθών που Antipho 2.4.8; ἰόντα που X. Cyr. 1.2.16; but in pure Att. only as f.l. for ποῖ, ποι.

Question 42

τρίτος, -η, -ον

Answer 42

third

third, Mt. 20:3; 27:64; ἐκ τριτου, the third time, for the third time, Mt. 26:44; τὸ τριτον, sc. μέρος, the third part, Rev. 8:7, 12;

Question 43

ἐπιτίθημι

Answer 43

to place, lay upon, put on

to put, place, or lay upon, Mt. 9:18; Lk. 4:40; to impose a name, Mk. 3:16, 17; to inflict, Acts 16:23; Lk. 10:30; Rev. 22:18; mid. to impose with authority, Acts 15:28; 28:10; to set or fall upon, assail, assault, attack, Acts 18:10

(ἐπετίθην, ἐπιθήσω, ἐπέθηκα ορ ἐπέθην, -, -, -

ἐπιτίθημι,

I

1. Pass. mostly furnished by ἐπίκειμαι: Act., lay, put or place upon, of offerings laid on the altar, ἐπὶ μηρία θέντες Ἀπόλλωνι Od. 21.267, cf. 3.179; λιβανωτόν Ar. Nu. 426, V. 96, Antipho 1.18; set meats on the table, εἴδατα πόλλ’ ἐπιθεῖσα Od. 1.140, cf. 10.355; πάντ’ ἐπιθεῖτε on the car, Il. 24.264; [νέκυας] ἐπὶ νηυσὶ τιθέντες Od. 24.419; τινὶ κύρτον καὶ κώπαν, as a grave-monument, AP 7.505 (= Sapph. 120): Constr. mostly ἐ. τινί τι, τῷ ἰσχυροτέρῳ πλέον βάρος X. Oec. 17.9, etc.: but also c.gen., ἐ. λεχέων τινά Il. 24.589; ἐ. τι ἐπί τινος Hdt. 2.121. δ’; κεφαλὴν ἐπὶ στέρνα τινός X. Cyr. 7.3.14: c. acc. only, put upon, set up, ἐ. φάρμακα apply salves, Il. 4.190; δέελον δ’ ἐπὶ σῆμά τ’ ἔθηκε 10.466; στήλην λίθου Hdt. 7.183; φάκελον ξύλων E. Cyc. 243; ἐ. μνημεῖά τινι to him, Id. IT 702, cf. IG 14.446 (Tauromenium), 12.1068.
2. set upon, turn towards, Ἑκτορέοις ἐπὶ φρένα θῆχ’ ἱεροῖσιν Il. 10.46; but τῇ δ’ ἄρ’ ἐπὶ φρεσὶ θῆκε c. inf., put it into her mind to.., Od. 21.1.

II

1. put on a covering or lid, ὡς εἴ τε φαρέτρῃ πῶμ’ ἐπιθείη 9.314; κεφαλῇ ἐπέθηκε (as v.l. for ἐφύπερθἐ καλύπτρην 5.232; λίθον δ’ ἐπέθηκε θύρῃσι, i.e. put a stone as a door to the cave, put it before the door, 13.370; also, put a door to, κολλητὰς ἐπέθηκα θύρας 23.194; θύρας ἐπέθηκε φαεινάς 21.45; θυρεὸν μέγαν 9.240 (v. infr. B. 11).
2. set a seal on, BGU 361 iii 22 (ii A.D.); apply a pessary, Hp. Steril. 214 (Pass.); a cupping instrument, Sor. 2.11 (Pass.).

III

1. put to, add, grant or give besides, ὅσσα τε νῦν ὔμμ’ ἐστὶ καὶ εἴ ποθεν ἄλλ’ ἐπιθεῖτε Od. 22.62, cf. Il. 7.364, etc.; κράτος, κῦδός τινι, 1.509 (tm.), 23.400 (tm.), 406 (tm.); ἡμιτάλαντον χρυσοῦ ib. 796.
2. of Time, add, bring on, ἕβδομον ἦμαρ ἐπὶ Ζεὺς θῆκε Od. 12.399; μάλα πολλὰ [ἔτεα] Hes. Op. 697. put on as a finish, χρυσέην ἐπέθηκε κορώνην Il. 4.111; περόνην Od. 19.256: metaph., οὐδὲ τέλος μύθῳ ἐπιθήσεις add fulfilment, Il. 19.107, cf. 20.369; so later ἐ. κεφάλαἰ ἐφ’ ἅπασι D. 21.18; κολοφῶνα ἐ. τῇ σοφίᾳ Pl. Euthd. 301e; τέλος ἐπιτεθήκατον ib. 272a; πέρας ἐ. τῇ γενέσει Arist. GA 776a4; πίστιν ἐ. D. 12.22, 49.42; ὁ δὲ μισθωσάμενος πίστιν ἐπιθήσει πρὸς τοὺς νεωποίας SIG 963.34 (Arcesine, iv B. C.); πέρας ἐ. τῷ πράγματι PGiss. 25.7 (ii A. D.), etc.; ὅρον ἐ. τῷ πράγματι Mitteis Chr. 87.2 (ii A. D.). impose, inflict a penalty, σοὶ δέ, γέρον, θωὴν ἐπιθήσομεν Od. 2.192; δίκην, ζημίην, ἄποινα ἐ. τινί, Hdt. 1.120, 144, 9.120, etc.; θάνατον δίκην ἐ. τινί Pl. Lg. 838c; δίκην τὴν πρέπουσαν Id. Criti. 106b; ἔργων ἀντ’ ἀδίκων χαλεπὴν ἐ. ἀμοιβήν Hes. Op. 334; τιμωρίαν ὑπέρ τινος D. 60.11 (cf. infr. B. IV): so of burdens, grievances, etc., θήσειν..ἐπ’ ἄλγεα Τρωσί Il. 2.39; οἷσιν ἐπὶ Ζεὺς θῆκε κακὸν μόρον 6.357; [ἄτην] οἱ ἐπὶ φρεσὶθῆκε..Ἐρινύς Od. 15.234; ἀνάγκην ἐ. c. inf., X. Lac. 10.7; ἐ…μὴ τυγχάνειν imposing as a penalty not to.., ib. 3.3 (v. infr. B. IV). dispatch a letter, ἐ. τι ἐς Αἴγυπτον, ἐς Μυτιλήνην, Hdt. 3.42, 5.95; ἐ. [ἐπιστολάς] D. 34.28. give a name, Hdt. 5.68, Pl. Smp. 205b, etc. contribute (capital) to a venture, ἐς πεῖραν Leg.Gort. 9.44. Med., with pf. Pass. ἐπιτέθειμαι Plu. 2.975d, also aor. Pass., Inscr.Prien. (v. infr.), etc.: — put on oneself or for oneself, ἐπὶ στεφάνην κεφαλῆφιν..θήκατο placed a helmet on his head, Il. 10.30; κρατὶ δ’ ἐπὶ..κυνέην θέτο 5.743, cf. E. Ba. 702 (tm.), etc.; χεῖρας ἐπ’ ἀνδροφόνους θέμενος στήθεσσι laying one’s hands upon.., Il. 18.317; κτύπημα χειρὸς κάρᾳ on one’s head, E. Andr. 1210 (lyr.).

II put on or to, as a door, πύλας τοῖς ὠσὶν ἐπίθεσθε Pl. Smp. 218b; θύρας Orph. Fr. 245, al., etc. (v. supr. A. 11).

III

1. apply oneself to, employ oneself on or in, c. dat., ναυτιλίῃσι μακρῇσι Hdt. 1.1; τῇ πείρᾳ, τοῖς ἔργοις, Th. 7.42, X. Mem. 2.8.3, etc.; τοῖς πολιτικοῖς Pl. Grg. 527d: c. inf., attempt to.., φιλοσοφεῖν ἐπέθετο Alex. 36.3; γράφειν Isoc. 5.1, cf. Pl. Sph. 242b: — Pass., ἐπετέθη πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον Inscr.Prien. 17.38 (iii B.C.).
2. make an attempt upon, attack, τῇ Εὐβοίῃ Hdt. 5.31; Ἐφεσίοισι Id. 1.26, cf. 102, 8.27; τῷ δήμῳ Th. 6.61; τῇ δημοκρατίᾳ X. Ath. 3.12; ἐ. τῇ τοῦ δήμου καταλύσει attempt it, Aeschin. 3.235; τυραννίδι Lycurg. 125; ἀρχῇ Plu. 2.772d; ἐ. ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις or τοῖς ἀτυχήμασί τινος take advantage of them, Isoc. 2.3, D. 23.70: abs., make an attack, κατ’ ἀμφότερα Th. 7.42, cf. Arist. Pol. 1302b25.
3. abs., δικαιοσύνην ἐπιθέμενος ἤσκεε he practised justice with assiduity, Hdt. 1.96, cf. 6.60.
4. bring on oneself, ἐπέθου θύος δημοθρόους τ’ ἀράς A. Ag. 1409.
5. cause a penalty to be imposed, θάνατον ζημίαν ἐπιθέσθαι Th. 2.24; φόβον τινί X. Cyr. 4.5.41. lay commands on, τί τινι Hdt. 1.111, cf. OGI 669.61 (Egypt, i A.D.): also c. inf., Hdt. 3.63, v.l. in Ath. 11.465d. give a name, τινί Od. 8.554 (tm.), cf. Arist. Po. 1451b10. contribute, πολλοὶ ἐπέθεντο τὰς ἐπιδόσεις εἰς τὴν παρασκευὴν τοῦ πολέμου prob. in SIG 346.29 (iv B. C.).

Question 44

ἱκανός, -ή, -όν

Answer 44

sufficient, considerable, much; appropriate, competent, worthy, deserving

befitting; sufficient, enough, Lk. 22:38; ἱκανὸν ποιειν τινι, to satisfy, gratify, Mk. 15:15; τὸ ἱκανὸν λαμβάνειν, to take security or bail of any one, Acts 17:9; or persons, adequate, competent, qualified, 2 Cor. 2:16; fit, worthy, Mt. 3:11; 8:8; of number or quantity, considerable, large, great, much, and pl. many, Mt. 28:12; Mk. 10:46

ἱκᾰν-ός [ ῐ], ή, όν, (ἱκνέομαι)

sufficing, becoming, befitting; prose Adj., used two or three times by Trag. (v. infr.):

I

1. of persons, sufficient, competent to do a thing, c. inf., Hdt. 3.45, Antipho 1.15, etc.; ἱ. τεκμηριῶσαι sufficient to prove a point, Th. 1.9; -ώτατος [εἰπεῖν] καὶ γνῶναι Lys. 2.42; τίς σοῦ -ώτερος πεῖσαι; X. Cyr. 1.4.12; ἱ. ζημιοῦν with sufficient power to punish, Id. Lac. 8.4; ἱ. βοηθεῖν Pl. Phdr. 277a, cf. R. 365a; ἱ. ὥστε γνῶναι Id. Lg. 875a, cf. Phdr. 258b; ἱ. κατὰ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν Plb. 25.3.6, al.: c. acc. rei, ἀνὴρ γνώμην ἱ. a man of sufficient prudence, Hdt. 3.4; ἱ. τὴν ἰατρικήν sufficiently versed in medicine, X. Cyr. 1.6.15: c. dat. rei, ἱ. ἐμπειρίᾳ καὶ ἡλικίᾳ Pl. R. 467d; οἱ τοῖς χρήμασιν -ώτατοι X. Eq. 2.1: c. dat. pers., a match for, equivalent to, εἷς ἔχων ἰατρικὴν πολλοῖς ἱ. ἰδιώταις Pl. Prt. 322c, cf. Tht. 169a: abs., ἱ. Ἁπόλλων S. OT 377; οἱ -ώτατοι τῶν πολιτῶν Isoc. 12.132; κριτὴς -ώτερος Id. 10.38; ἱ. σοφιστής Pl. Ly. 204a; αὐληταὶ ἱ. ὡς πρὸς ἰδιώτας very tolerable in comparison with.., Id. Prt. 327c; γυνὴ ἱ. μέν, ἄγροικος δέ Luc. DDeor. 20.3; ὁ Ἱ. the Almighty, LXX Ruth 1:21.
2. in bad sense, capable, ἱ. εἶ λαλῶν κατακόψαι πάντα Men. Sam. 69.

II

1. of things, in amount, sufficient, adequate, τὰ ἀρκοῦνθ’ ἱ. τοῖς γε σώφροσιν E. Ph. 554; ἱ. τὰ κακὰ καὶ τὰ παρακείμενα Ar. Lys. 1047; ἱκανὰ τοῖς πολεμίοις ηὐτύχηται they have had successes enough, Th. 7.77; ἱ. εἴς, ἐπί, πρός τι, X. Hier. 4.9, Pl. R. 371e, Prt. 322b; [ πρόβατα] ἱ. ἐς φορβήν Hdt. 4.121; of size, large enough, οὐχ ἱκανῆς οὔσης τῆς Ἁττικῆς Th. 1.2; οὐδ’ ἦν ἱκανά σοι.. μέλαθρα.. ἐγκαθυβρίζειν not large enough to riot in, E. Tr. 996; χώρα ἱ. τρέφειν τοὺς τότε Pl. R. 373d, al.; of number or magnitude, considerable, λῦπαι Antipho 2.2.2; μέρος τῶν ὄντων ib. 2.1.6, etc.; of Time, considerable, long, ἱ. χρόνον Ar. Pax 354 (lyr.); ἱ. χρόνος τινὶ ἐπιλαθέσθαι Lys. 3.10; ἱκανόν ἐστί τινι Damox. 1.1: with personal constr., ἔφη ἱκανὸς αὐτὸς ἀτυχῶν εἶναι Isaiah 2:7.
2. sufficient, satisfactory, ἱ. μαρτυρίαν παρέχεσθαι Pl. Smp. 179b; ἱ. λόγῳ ἀποδεῖξαι Id. Hp.Mi. 369c; τὸ ἱ. λαμβάνειν to take security or bail, Acts 17:9, OGI 629.100 (Palmyra, ii A.D.); τὸ ἱ. ποιεῖν give security, Plb. 32.3.13, D.L. 4.50, Just. Nov. 86.4 (but simply, satisfy, τῷ ὄχλῳ Mark 15:15); ἱ. δοῦναι PSI 6.554.23 (iii B.C.), POxy. 294.23 (i A.D.); ἐφ’ ἱκανόν,= ἱκανῶς, Plb. 11.25.1, D.S. 11.40.

III

1. Adv. -νῶς sufficiently, adequately, Th. 6.92, etc.; λαγόνες λαπαραὶ ἱ. X. Cyn. 5.30, cf. Arist. Phgn. 807b26; ἱ. εἴρηται περί τινος Id. EN 1096a3, al.; later, considerably, amply, Philostr. VA 3.6, VS 1.8.3, Ant.Lib. 7.7; fully, μιᾶς ὥρας ἱ. παρελθούσης Ptol. Alm. 4.6. excessively, οὔτε γὰρ ἱ. ὑγρόν ἐστι not too moist, Gal. 6.765, cf. 767,768; ἱ. βλαβερά Id. Vict.Att. 8; παχὺ ἱ. αἷμα ibid.
2. ἱ. ἔχειν to be sufficient, Th. 1.91, etc.; ἱ. ἐχέτω let this be enough, Pl. Sph. 245e; ἱ. ἔχει πρός τι Id. R. 430c, cf. X. Cyr. 6.3.22; περί τινος Pl. R. 402a; ἱ. ἔχειν τινί to be sufficiently supplied with.., Id. Grg. 493c; ἱ. ἔχειν τοῦ βάθους Id. Tht. 194d; ἐπιστήμης Id. Phlb. 62a; ἱ. πεφυκέναι πρὸς τἆλλα Id. Chrm. 158b: abs., Antipho 2.1.1: Sup. -ωτάτως Hp. de Arte 12; -ώτατα Pl. Phlb. 67a.

Question 45

καινός, -ή, -όν

Answer 45

new, latest, anew; in some contexts new is superior to old (Mt 9:17; Heb 8)

new, recently made, Mt. 9:17; Mk. 2:22; new in species, character, or mode, Mt. 26:28, 29; Mk. 14:24, 25; Lk. 22:20; Jn. 13:34; 2 Cor. 5:17; Gal. 6:15; Eph. 2:15; 4:24; 1 Jn. 2:7; Rev. 3:12; novel, strange, Mk. 1:27; Acts 17:19; new to the possessor, Mk. 16:17; unheard of, unusual, Mk. 1:27; Acts 17:19; met. renovated, better, of higher excellence, 2 Cor. 5:17; Rev. 5:9

καινός, ή, όν,

I

1. new, fresh, ἔργα οὔτ’ ὦν κ. οὔτε παλαιά Hdt. 9.26; κ. ὁμιλία A. Eu. 406; κ. λόγους φέρειν to bring news, Id. Ch. 659; τίδ’ ἐστὶ κ.; S. OC 722, cf. Ph. 52; τὰ κ. τοῖς πάλαι τεκμαίρεται Id. OT 916; θυτῆρα καινῷ καινὸν ἐν πεπλώματι Id. Tr. 613; ἢ βούλεσθε περι[]όντες πυνθάνεσθαι, λέγεταί τι κ.;”” D. 4.10; γένοιτ’ ἄν τι -ότερον ἤ.. ibid.; ἐκ καινῆς (sc. ἀρχῆς) anew, afresh, Th. 3.92, Thphr. CP 5.1.11, Jahresh. 23 Beibl. 91 (Pamphyl., i A. D.), etc. (also ἐκ καινοῦ CPR 244.14 (iii A. D.)); esp. of new dramas, τραγῳδῶν γιγνομένων καινῶν Aeschin. 3.34; briefly τραγῳδοῖς κ. at the representation of the new tragedies, Docum. ap. D. 18.54; τραγῳδῶν τῇ κ. [ ἐπιδείξει ] ib.55; καινῇ κωμῳδῶν, τραγῳδῶν, CIG 2759iii (Aphrodisias); but κ. κωμῳδία, τραγῳδία, of a new style of drama, IG 7.1773 (Thebes, ii A.D.).
2. newly-made, κύλικες, τριήρης, ὀθόνια, οἶνος, SIG 1026.26 (Cos, iv/iii B. C.), IG 22.1623.289, PLond. 2.402v12 (ii B. C.), Ostr. 1142.4 (iii A. D.).
3. Adv. -νῶς newly, afresh, Alex. 240.4.

II newly-invented, novel, καινότεραι τέχναι Batr. 116; κ. προσφέρειν σοφά E. Med. 298; ἔνθα τι κ. ἐλέχθη Philox. 3.23; οὐκ ἀείδω τὰ παλαιά, καινὰ γὰρ ἀμὰ κρείσσω Tim. Fr. 21; κ. θεοί strange gods, Pl. Euthphr. 3b; κ. δαιμόνια Id. Ap. 24c; κ. τινες σοφισταί Id. Euthd. 271b; κ. καὶ ἄτοπα ὀνόματα Id. R. 405d; καινὰ ἐπιμηχανᾶσθαι innovations, X. Cyr. 8.8.16; οὐδὲν -ότερον εἰσέφερε τῶν ἄλλων he introduced as little of anything new as others, Id. Mem. 1.1.3, cf. Pl. Phd. 115b; πεπόνθαμεν -ότατον D. 35.26; τὸ κ. τοῦ πολέμου prob. f.l. for κενόν (v. κενός), Th. 3.30; οὐ καινόν nothing to be surprised at, Hp. Int. 17; τὸ -ότατον what is strangest, parenthetically, Luc. Nigr. 22, al.; εἰ Χρὴ -ότατα μᾶλλον ἢ κακουργότατα εἰπεῖν Antipho 2.4.2. Adv., μὴ σὺ -νῶς μοι λάλει in new, strange style, Alex. 144, cf. Pl. Phdr. 267b: Comp. -οτέρως, νοῆσαι περί τινος Arist. Cael. 308b31; without precedent, -νῶς κατακριθῆναι OGI 669.46,49 (Egypt, i A. D.).

III κ. ἄνθρωπος, = Lat. novus homo, Plu. Cat.Ma. 1; πράγματακ., = res novae, Id. Cic. 14, cf. 2.212c.

Question 46

πράσσω

Answer 46

to do, act, practice

to do, execute, perform, practise, act, transact, and of evil, to commit, Lk. 22:23; 23:15; Jn. 3:20; Acts 26:9, 20, 26, 31; to fulfil, obey, observe a law, Rom. 2:25; to do to any one, Acts 16:28; 5:35; to occupy one’s self with, be engaged in, busy one’s self about, Acts 19:19; 1 Thess. 4:11; absol. to fare, Acts 15:29; Eph. 6:21; to exact, require, collect tribute, money lent, etc., Lk. 3:13; 19:23

(ἔπρασσον), πράξω, ἔπραξα, πέπραχα, πέπραγμαι, ἐπράχθην

πράσσω,

Ep. and Ion. πρήσσω, Att. πράττω (first in IG 12.7.11, al., Ar. and X. ), Cret. πράδδω Leg.Gort. 1.35: fut. πράξω, Ion. πρήξω: aor. ἔπραξα, Ion. ἔπρηξα: pf. πέπραχα, Ion. πέπρηχα, (trans.) Hdt. 5.106, X. HG 5.2.32, Cyr. 3.1.15, Din. 3.21, Men. 619, IG 9(2).517.36 (Larissa, iii B. C. ), PHib. 1.80.11 (iii B. C.), (intr.) Pl.Com. 187 codd., Arist. Rh.Al. 1440a36: plpf. ἐπεπράχει ( ν ) (trans.) X. l.c., (intr.) App. BC 5.83: pf. 2 πέπρᾱγα, Ion. πέπρηγα, (intr.) Pi. P. 2.73, Hdt. 2.172, Ar. Pl. 629, Ra. 302, X. HG 1.4.2, (trans.) Arist. EN 1168b35, al., SIG 364.70 (Ephesus, iii B. C. ): plpf. ἐπεπράγεσαν (intr.) Th. 2.4, 7.24: — pf. πέπραγα Att., πέπραχα Hellenistic, acc. to Moer. p.293 P., Phryn. PS p.103 B., but see above: — Med., fut. πράξομαι Antipho Fr. 67, X. HG 6.2.36 (also in pass. sense, Pi. P. 4.243 (prob.), Pl. R. 452a ): aor. ἐπραξαμην S. OT 287, Th. 4.65, etc.: — Pass., fut. (v.supr.), also πραχθήσομαι Aeschin. 3.98, Arist. Rh. 1359a11, etc.; fut. 3 πεπράξομαι S. OC 861, Ar. Av. 847, Eup. 9.3 D.: aor. ἐπράχθην S. Tr. 679, Th. 4.54, etc.: pf. πέπραγμαι A. Pr. 75, etc. (sts. in med. sense, v. infr. vi). [ ᾱ by nature, as is shown by the Ion. form πρήσσω, and by the accent in πρᾶγμα, πρᾶξις, etc.] I in Ep. only, pass through, pass over, δὶς τόσσον ἅλα πρήσσοντες ἀπῆμεν Od. 9.491; ῥίμφα πρήσσοντε κέλευθον Il. 14.282, 23.501; ῥίμφα πρήσσουσι κέλευθον Od. 13.83; ὁδὸν πρήσσουσιν ὁδῖται h.Merc. 203: c. gen., ἵνα πρήσσωμεν ὁδοῖο Il. 24.264, Od. 15.219; ὄφρα πρ. ὁδοῖο ib. 47; ἵνα πρήσσῃσιν ὁδοῖο 3.476: Gramm. note that this sense is found only in pres., An.Ox. 1.355, EM 688.1 .

II experience certain for- tunes, fare well or ill, ὁ στόλος οὕτως ἔπρηξε Hdt. 3.26, cf. 4.77, Th. 7.24; so ὡς ἔπρηξε Hdt. 7.18; κατὰ νόον π. Id. 4.97, cf. Ar. Eq. 549; πράξασαν ὡς ἔπραξεν A. Ag. 1288; εὖ πέπραγεν, ὅτι . . Pi. P. 2.73, cf. Hdt. 1.24, 42, etc.; φλαύρως π. τῷ στόλῳ Id. 6.94; π. καλῶς A. Pr. 979; χαλεπώτατα π. Th. 8.95; ταπεινῶς π. Isoc. 5.64; ὅστις καλῶς πράττει, οὐχὶ καὶ εὖ πράττει; Pl. Alc. 1.116b; π. εὐτυχῶς S. Ant. 701; κάλλιστα E. Heracl. 794; μακαρίως, εὐδαιμόνως, Ar. Pl. 629, 802: freq. with neut. Pron. or Adj., εὖ π. τι S. OT 1006, cf. OC 391; μηδὲν εὖ π. X. Mem. 1.6.8; χρηστόν τι π. Ar. Pl. 341; καλά Th. 6.16; χείρω Id. 7.71; μεγάλα E. IA 346; πάντ’ ἀγαθά Ar. Ra. 302, cf. Eq. 683 (lyr.); εὐδαίμονα E. El. 1359 (anap.); πολλὰ καὶ ἀγαθά X. An. 6.4.8; οἷον ἥθελεν S. OC 1704 (lyr.); πράξας ἅπερ ηὔχου E. Or. 355 (anap.), cf. X. Mem. 3.9.14 .

III achieve, effect, accomplish, οὔ τι Il. 1.562, 11.552, Od. 2.191, etc.; οὐδέ τι ἔργον ἐνθάδ’ ἔτι πρήξει 19.324, cf. 16.88; χρῆμα μὲν οὐ πρήξεις, σὺ δ’ ἐτώσια πόλλ’ ἀγορεύσεις Hes. Op. 402; κλέος ἔπραξεν won it, Pi. I. 5(4).8; ἔπραξε δεσμόν achieved bondage, i.e. brought it on himself, Id. P. 2.40; τινὰ Νηρεΐδων π. ἄκοιτιν Id. N. 5.36; ὕμνον π. grant power of song, ib. 9.3; λεόντεσσι π. φόνον do slaughter upon them, ib. 3.46; τὴν Κυπρίων ἀπόστασιν π. Hdt. 5.113; π. εἰρήνην, φιλίαν, bring it about, D. 3.7, 18.162; π. τι παρά τινος get something from . ., ὧν δέονται πάντων πεπραγότες εἶεν παρὰ βασιλέως X. HG 1.4.2; ἐλπὶς πράξειν τι παρὰ τῶν θεῶν ἀγαθόν Isoc. 2.20; also, attempt, plot, δήμου κατάλυσιν And. 3.6: c. dat. pers., δαίμοσιν π. φίλα A. Pr. 660; Αοξίᾳ χάριν E. Ion 37, cf. 896 (lyr.), El. 1133, etc.; σὺ τοῦτο πράξεις ὥστε . .; A. Eu. 896: — Pass., πέπρακται τοὖργον Id. Pr. 75; φεῦ φεῦ πέπρακται E. Hipp. 680; τὰ πεπραγμένα Pi. O. 2.15, etc.; ἡ ἐπὶ τοῖς πεπρ. ἀδοξία D. 1.11; τὰ πεπρ. λῦσαι Id. 24.76; τὰ πραχθέντα A. Pr. 683, etc.; τὰ ἔργα τῶν πραχθέντων the facts of what took place, Th. 1.22; οὐ γὰρ ἂν τό γε πραχθὲν ἀγένητον θείη Pl. Prt. 324b .

2. abs., effect an object, be successful, δὸς Τηλέμαχον πρήξαντα νέεσθαι Od. 3.60; ἔπρηξας καὶ ἔπειτα Il. 18.357 .
3. of sexual intercourse, ἐπράχθη τὰ μέγιστα Theoc. 2.143 .
4. to be busy with, σὺ μὲν τὰ σαυτῆς πρᾶσσ’ mind your own business, S. El. 678; πράττων ἔκαστος τὸ αὑτοῦ Pl. Phdr. 247a, cf. Plt. 307e; τὰ αὑτοῦ π. καὶ μὴ πολυπραγμονεῖν Id. R. 433a, cf. 400e, etc. (whereas πολλὰ π. = πολυπραγμονεῖν, Hdt. 5.33, E. HF 266, Ar. Ra. 228, etc.); φιλοσόφου τὰ αὑτοῦ πράξαντος καὶ οὐ πολυπραγμονήσαντος Pl. Grg. 526c, cf. Ap. 33a, etc.; οὐδ’ εὖ . . οἰκοῦνται αἱ πόλεις, ὅταν τὰ αὑτῶν ἕκαστοι πράττωσι (ironical) Id. Alc. 1.127b; μὴ τὰ αὑτῶν π. not to act their part, Id. R. 452c; π. τὰ δέοντα X. Mem. 3.8.1 .
5. manage affairs, do business, act, εἰπεῖν τε καὶ πρᾶξαι ib. 2.9.4, cf. 2.8.6; πράττειν τὰ πολιτικὰ πράγματα, τὰ τῆς πόλεως, manage state-affairs, take part in government, Pl. Ap. 31d, Lys. 16.20; τὰ Ἀθηναίων Pl. Smp. 216a; οἱ τὰ κοινὰ π. καὶ πολιτευόμενοι Arist. Pol. 1324b1: abs., without any addition, ἱκανωτάτω λέγειν τε καὶ πράττειν, of able statesmen, X. Mem. 1.2.15, cf. 4.2.1, 4; πολιτεύεσθαι καὶ π. D. 18.45, cf. 59, Pl. Prt. 317a .
6. generally, transact, negotiate, manage, οἱ πράξαντες πρὸς αὐτὸν τὴν λῆψιν τῆς πόλεως Th. 4.114; Θηβαίοις τὰ πράγματα π. manage matters for their interest, D. 19.77: — so in Pass., τῷ Ἱπποκράτει τὰ . . πράγματα ἀπό τινων ἀνδρῶν . . ἐπράσσετο matters were negotiated with him by . ., Th. 4.76: but freq. abs., treat, negotiate, manage, act, οἱ πράσσοντες αὐτῷ ib. 110, cf. 5.76; π. πρός τινα Id. 2.5, 4.73, etc.; ἐς (v.l. πρὸς ) τοὺς βαρβάρους, ἐς τοὺς Εἵλωτας, Id. 1.131, 132: — Pass., ἐπράττετο οὐ πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους Aeschin. 3.64; also π. τι ὑπὲρ τῶν κοινῶν D. 26.2; π. ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως τὰ πάτρια Id. 59.73; π. περὶ εἰρήνης X. HG 6.3.3; π. τῇ δύναιτο ἄριστα Hdt. 5.30; π. ὡς ἄριστα καὶ πιστότατα Th. 1.129; οἱ πράσσοντες the traitors, Id. 4.89, 113: —
   folld. by dependent clauses, πρᾶσσε καὶ τὰ ἐμὰ καὶ τὰ σὰ ὅπῃ κάλλιστα ἕξει Id. 1.129; ἐς τὴν Πελοπόννησον ἔπρασσεν, ὅπῃ ὠφελία τις γενήσεται ib. 65; π. ὅπως πόλεμος γένηται ib. 57; π. ὅπως τιμωρήσονται ib. 56, cf. 3.4, 70, etc.: c. acc. et inf., μὴ δεῦρο πλεῖν τὴν ναῦν ἔπραττεν D. 32.22 . esp. of secret practices and intrigues, εἴ τι μὴ ξὺν ἀργύρῳ ἐπράσσετ’ ἐνθένδ’ unless some bribery was being practised, S. OT 125; καί τι αὐτῷ καὶ ἐπράσσετο ἐς τὰς πόλεις προδοσίας πέρι Th. 4.121, cf. 5.83; μετάστασις ἐπράττετο Lys. 30.10; τούτοις ἔπρασσον τὴν πόλιν Plb. 4.17.12; νῦν δ’ αὔτ’ Ἀτρεῖδαι φωτὶ παντουργῷ φρένας ἔπραξαν have jobbed them (the arms) away to a villain, S. Aj. 446 . practise, πόνῳ π. θεοδμάτους ἀρετάς Pi. I. 6(5).11; δίκαια ἢ ἄδικα Pl. Ap. 28b, etc.; ταῦτ’ ἔπραξάν τε καὶ ἔλεξαν X. Cyr. 5.1.1; ἃ καὶ λέγειν ὀκνοῦμεν οἱ πεπραχότες Men. 619: then abs., act, π. ἔργῳ μὲν σθένος βουλαῖσι δὲ φρήν Pi. N. 1.26; ὡς πράττοντες as doing, Pl. R. 527a; μεθ’ ἡμῶν ἔπραττεν, i. e. he took our side, Is. 5.14 .
7. study, δράματα Suid. s.v. Ἀριστοφάνης; συλλογισμούς Arr. Epict. 2.17.27; ἐν τοῖς πραττομένοις in the poems which are now studied, made the subject of commentaries, Sch. Nic. Th. 11 . c. dupl. acc. pers. et rei, πράττειν τινά τι do something to one, E. Hel. 1394, Isoc. 12.93; ἀγαθόν τι π. τὴν πόλιν Ar. Ec. 108 . exact payment from one, αὐτοὺς ἑκατὸν τάλαντα ἔπρηξαν Hdt. 3.58; πράσσει με τόκον he makes me pay interest, Batr. 185; π. τινὰ χρέος Pi. O. 3.7, cf. P. 9.104; ὅσοι πράξεις πεπράγασιν SIG 364.70 (Ephesus, iii B. C. ); τοὐφειλόμενον π. Δίκη A. Ch. 311 (anap.); ἀντίποινα Id. Pers. 476: freq. of tax-gatherers or other collectors of public debt, IG 12.116.16, al., Pl. Lg. 774d; π. τὰς εἰσφοράς D. 22.77, etc.; φόρον ἔπρησσον παρ’ ἑκάστων obtained or demanded from . ., Hdt. 1.106: c. acc. pers., press for payment, μὴ π. τοὺς ὀφειλέτας Plb. 38.11.10; π. τινά τι ὑπέρ τινος demand from one as the price for a thing, Luc. Vit.Auct. 18: metaph., φόνον π. exact punishment or vengeance for a murder: hence, avenge, punish, A. Eu. 624; τὰ περὶ τὸν φόνον ἀγριωτέρως π. Pl. Lg. 867d: — Pass., ὑπὸ βασιλέως πεπραγμένος φόρους called on to pay up the tribute, Th. 8.5; πραχθεὶς ὑπὸτῶνδε Lys. 9.21 codd., cf. Pl. Lg. 921c: — Med., exact for oneself, πράξασθαί τινα μισθόν Pi. O. 10(11).30; ἀργύριον, χρήματα, Hdt. 2.126, Th. 4.65, cf. Ar. Ra. 561, etc.; τὴν διπλασίαν π. τὸν ὑποφεύγοντα Pl. Lg. 762b, cf. Plb. 5.54.11; π. τοὺς ἐξάγοντας τριακοστήν D. 20.32; πράσσεσθαι χρέος Antipho Fr. 67; φόρους πράσσεσθαι ἀπό, ἐκ τῶν πόλεων, Th. 8.5, 37; παρ’ αὐτῶν ἃ ὤφειλον Lys. 17.3, cf. And. 2.11: metaph. of exacting punishment, etc., μεγάλ’ ἀντ’ ὀλίγων ἐπράξαο Call. Lav.Pall. 91: — Pass. pf. and plpf. in med. sense, εἰ μὲν ἐπεπράγμην τοῦτον τὴν δίκην if I had exacted from him the full amount, D. 29.2 . c. acc. pers., πράττειν τινά deal with, finish off, euphem., ἔπρασσε δ’ ᾇπέρ νιν, ὧδε θάπτει A. Ch. 440 (lyr.); πεπραγμένοι is f.l.ib. 132 .

Question 47

χωρίς

Answer 47

without, apart from (gen.)

χωρίς,

Adv., also χωρί, q. v.: (v. χῆρος): —

separately, apart, once in Il., 7.470; χ. μὲν πρόγονοι, χ. δὲ μέτασσαι, χ. δ’ αὖθ’ ἕρσαι Od. 9.221, cf. 4.130, Sapph. Supp. 20a. 16, IG 12.108.32, al.; χ. ἡ τιμὴ θεῶν A. Ag. 637; κεῖται χ. ὁ νεκρός Hdt. 4.62; χ. περὶ αὐτῶν ἑκάστου οἱ νόμοι κεῖνται Antipho 5.10; χίλια τάλαντα.. χ. θέσθαι set them apart, in reserve, Th. 2.24; χ. οἰκεῖν live apart, have an independent establishment, D. 4.36, 47.72; χ. γενόμενοι being separated, X. Cyr. 4.1.18; χ. ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων Parm. 8.56, Pl. Phd. 98c; μή με χ. αἰτιῶ without evidence, S. OT 608; χ. ποιῆσαι distinguish, Isoc. 15.68; χ. βλέπειν look two ways, squint, Timocl. 27.6; opp. κοινῇ, Isoc. 12.160; opp. κοινόν, E. Hec. 860; χ. δέ.. and separately, and besides, Th. 2.13; separately, Lys. 22.16, Plu. Arist. 20; λέγειν χ. περὶ ἑκάστου Lexap. Aeschin. 1.35; χ. καὶ ἐν μέρει Id. 3.2; περὶ τὸ ἓν καὶ χ. about the one and without [the one] Arist. Ph. 203a14; otherwise, χ. δὲ μηδαμῶς Pl. Lg. 950c; χ. ἢ ὁκόσοι except so many as.., Hdt. 2.77; χωρὶς ἢ ὅσα D.C. 53.21; χωρὶς ἤ ὅτι Hdt. 1.94, 4.61, 82; also χ. εἰ μή (condemned by Ps.- Hdn. post Moer. p.462P.), Plu. 2.698f, A.D. Pron. 91.8, al.; χ. πλήν Paus. 1.34.4.

2. metaph., of different nature, kind, or quality, Semon. 7.1; χ. τό τ’ εἶναι καὶ τὸ μὴ νομίζεται E. Alc. 528; χ. τό τ’ εἰπεῖν πολλὰ καὶ τὰ καίρια S. OC 808; χ. ᾤμην εἶναι τὸ συνεῖναί τε ἀλλήλοις διαλεγομένους καὶ τὸ δημηγορεῖν Pl. Prt. 336b.

II as Pr c. gen., without, A. Ag. 926, etc.; without the help or will of, χ. Ζηνός S. Tr. 1002 (lyr.): after its case, πόνου χ. Id. El. 915, cf. Theon. Sm. p.1H.

2. separate from, apart from, χ. ἀθανάτων Pi. O. 9.41; χ. ἀνθρώπων στίβου S. Ph. 487; χωρὶς ᾤκισται θεῶν E. Hec. 2; χ. ὀμμάτων ἐμῶν Id. Or. 272; ἡ ψυχὴ χ. τοῦ σώματος Pl. Phd. 67a, etc.
3. independently of, without reckoning, Hdt. 1.93, 106, 6.58; χ. τε γένους οὐκ ἔστιν ὅτῳ μείζονα μοῖραν νείμαιμ’ ἢ σοί A. Pr. 293 (anap.); χ. δὲ τῆς δόξης οὐδὲ δίκαιόν μοι δοκεῖ.. Pl. Ap. 35b.
4. differently from, otherwise than, χ. μυρηρῶν τευχέων πνέων A. Fr. 180.5; χ. δήπου σοφία ἐστίν ἀνδρείας Pl. La. 195a, cf. D. 19.13.

Question 48

πειράζω

Answer 48

(ἐπείραζον), πειράσω, ἐπείρασα, -, πεπείρασμαι, ἐπειράσθην

to put to the test; to tempt, to trap; to attempt; to examine oneself; passive: to be experienced; to be tested

Definition:
to test, tempt; to try to trap; to examine (oneself). The difference between a test and a temptation is found in the tester’s motivations and expectations; the devil tempts that the believer might fail God’s standards of faith and so sin; God tests that he might determine and sharpen true character, with no focus on making the believer fail.
to make proof, or trial of, put to the proof, whether with good or mischievous intent, Mt. 16:1; 22:35; absol. to attempt, Acts 16:7; 24:6; in NT to tempt, Mt. 4:1; to try, subject to trial, 1 Cor. 10:13

πειράζω,

(πεῖρα)

used by early authors only in pres. and impf., the other tenses being supplied by πειράω, -άομαι: Cret. fut. πειράξω GDI 5181: aor. 1 imper. πείρᾰσον AP 11.183 (Lucill.): aor. Pass. ἐπειράσθην LXX Wisdom of Solomon 11:9, Matthew 4:1 : pf. part. πεπειρασμένος Hebrews 4:15 : —

make proof or trial of, c. gen., Od. 16.319.23.114: abs., 9.281.

2. c. inf., attempt to do, Plb. 2.6.9, Judges 6:39, Acts 16:7, Acts 24:6; π. τι attempt a thing, ἄλλος ἄλλην ἐπ’ ἐμὲ πειράζει τέχνην Luc. Trag. 149, cf. S.E. M. 1.40; τόδε τόξον make trial of, Anacreont. 31.24: abs., make an attempt, Plb. Fr. 195.
3. Pass., ἤθη.. ἐν χρόνῳ πειράζεται are tried, proved, Men. Mon. 573; to be experienced, Phld. Sign. 32.

II c. acc. pers., try, tempt a person, put him to the test, LXX Genesis 22:1, al.; ἑαυτοὺς πειράζετε, εἰ.. 2 Corinthians 13:5, al.; τί πειράζετε τὸν Κύριον; LXX Exodus 17:2, cf. Acts 15:10; , al.

2. in bad sense, seek to seduce, tempt, Ἀθηναίην A.R. 3.10: abs., ὁ πειράζων the Tempter, 1 Thessalonians 3:5, etc.: — Pass., to be sorely tried, πειραζομένη βασανίζομαι PLit.Lond. 52.5; στομακάκκῃ Str. 16.4.24; to be attacked, ὑποχύσει Alex.Aphr. Pr. 2.54; ἐπιληψίᾳ Cyran. 47; to be tempted to sin, Matthew 4:1, al.

Question 49

ὑποτάσσω

Answer 49

I subject, put in subjection

-, ὑπέταξα, -, ὑποτέταγμαι, ὑπετάγην

to put in subjection, subject, subordinate; (pass.) to submit, be subject to
Definition:
to place, or arrange under; to subordinate, 1 Cor. 15:27; to bring under influence, Rom. 8:20; pass. to be subordinated, 1 Cor. 14:32; to be brought under a state or influence, Rom. 8:20; mid. to submit one’s self, render obedience, be submissive, Lk. 2:51; 10:17

ὑποτάσσω,

Att. ὑποτάκ-ττω, Pass., fut. ὑποτᾰγήσομαι Cyran. 15: aor. 2 ὑπετάγην [ᾰ ] Phryn.Com. (v. infr.), etc.: —

place or arrange under, assign, τινί τι Plb. 3.36.7, Plu. Nic. 23, etc.; ὑ. ὑπὸ τὸ τῆς προδοσίας ὄνομα Plb. 18.15.4: — Pass., τὸ ὑποτεταγμένον (sc. ὀστέον) the inferior bone, i. e. the ulna, Hp. Off. 16.

II post in the shelter of, ὑποτάσσεσθαι τινι Luc. Par. 49; draw up behind, Ael. Tact. 15.1 (Pass.), Arr. Tact. 26.7.

2. subject, ἑαυτοὺς οὐδενί Phld. Rh. 2.204 S., cf. Plu. Pomp. 64; subdue, make subject, Θηβαΐδα OGI 654.7 (Egypt, i B. C.), cf. 199.10, al. (Adule, i A. D.); ἔθνη Hdn. 7.2.9; αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα Philippians 3:21; πάντα ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ Ephesians 1:22 : — Pass., to be obedient, τινι Colossians 3:18, al.; ὑποτάγητε τῷ θεῷ Ephesians 4:7, cf. Arr. Epict. 3.24.65; ἄγρια θηρία ὑποταγήσεται αὐτῷ Cyran. 15; ὑποτάξονται they will submit, Hdn. 2.2.8; τὸ πλῆθος -όμενον Onos. 1.17, cf. Palaeph. 38: abs., κοὐχ ὑποτᾰγεὶς ἐβάδιζεν ὥσπερ Νικίας dejectedly, timidly, Phryn.Com. 59 (s. v. l.); οἱ ὑποταττόμενοι subjects, Plb. 3.13.8, etc.; ὑποτεταγμένοι subordinates, Phld. Oec. p.72 J.; ἐδούλευσας, ὑπετάγης Arr. Epict. 4.4.33; ὑποτεταγμέναι ἀρεταί subordinate virtues, i. e. the sub-divisions of the four cardinal (πρῶται) virtues, Stoic. 3.64.
3. Pass., c. dat., underlie, to be implied in or associated with, τὰ -τεταγμένα τοῖς φθόγγοις Epicur. Ephesians 1 p.4U., cf. Nat. 28p.13V.; τὰ -τεταγμένα, ἡ -τεταγμένη διάνοια, of the content or meaning which underlies a writer’s words, Phld. Po. 5.26, 27.

III put after, Plu. 2.737f; subjoin, append, ὑποτετάχαμέν σοι.. τὸ ἀντίγραφον SIG 664.11 (Delos, ii B. C.), cf. POxy. 34v iv 7 (ii A. D.): — Pass., τὰ -τεταγμένα what follows, OGI 629.6 (Palmyra, ii A. D.); οἱ -τεταγμένοι [ἀριθμοί ] the numbers that follow, Plu. 2.1020a, etc.; οἱ ὑποτεταγμένοι the following persons, SIG 880.11 (Pizus, iii A. D.); κῶμαι αἱ ὑποτεταγμέναι the following villages, Ptol. Geog. 6.7.27.

2. take as a minor premiss, Arr. Epict. 4.1.61. govern the subjunctive, EM 471.16.

Question 50

διαθήκη, -ης, ἡ

Answer 50

a covenant

covenant, a solemn agreement between two parties; will, testament, a legal document by which property is transferred to heirs, usually upon death (Heb 9:16)
Definition:
a testamentary disposition, will; a covenant, Heb. 9:16, 17; Gal. 3:15; in NT, a covenant of God with men, Gal. 3:17; 4:24; Heb. 9:4; Mt. 26:28; the writings of the old covenant, 2 Cor. 3:14

διαθήκη, ἡ, (διατίθημι)

I disposition of property by will, testament, Ar. V. 584, 589, D. 27.13, etc.; κατὰ διαθήκην by will, OGI 753.8 (Cilicia), Test.Epict. 4.8, BGU 1113.5 (i B.C.), etc.: in pl., διαθήκας διαθέσθαι Lys. 19.39; θέσθαι CIG 2690 (Iasus).

II

1. αἱ ἀπόρρητοι δ. mystic deposits on which the common weal depended, prob. oracles (cf. διαθέτης), Din. 1.9 codd.
2. name of an eyesalve, because the recipe was deposited in a temple, Aët. 7.118.

III compact, covenant, ἢν μὴ διαθῶνται διαθήκην ἐμοί Ar. Av. 440; freq. in LXX, Genesis 6:18, al.; καινή, παλαιὰ δ., Luke 22:20; 2 Corinthians 3:14; disposition (with allusion to 1), Galatians 3:15, cf. Hebrews 9:15. = cross διάθεσις 11, σώματος δ. Democr. 9.

Question 51

ποῖος, -α, -ον

Answer 51

what sort of? what?

what?, which?, of what kind?
Definition:
of what kind, sort, or species, Jn. 12:33; 21:19; what? which? Mt. 19:18; 21:23, 24, 27

ποῖος, α, ον,

Ion. κοῖος, η, ον, of what kind? in Hom. commonly expressing surprise and anger, π. τὸν μῦθον ἔειπες what manner of speech hast thou spoken! Il. 1.552, al.; ποῖόν σε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὀδόντων 4.350, al.; simply, ποῖον ἔειπες 13.824, Od. 2.85, al.; ποῖον ἔρεξας Il. 23.570; ποῖοί κ’ εἶτ’ Ὀδυσῆϊ ἀμυνέμεν what sort would ye be to . . ! Od. 21.195; in simple questions, ποίῃ . . νηΐ σε ναῦται ἤγαγον; 16.222; κοίῃ χειρί; Hdt. 4.155, cf. A. Th. 304 (lyr.), etc.; ποῖος οὐ interrog., equiv. to every affirm., Hdt. 7.21, S. OT 420, etc.

2. freq. in Com. and Prose dialogue, used in repeating a word used by the former speaker, to express scornful surprise, Πρωτέως τάδ’ ἐστὶ μέλαθρα. Answ. ποίου Πρωτέως; Ar. Th. 874, cf. Ach. 62, 157, 761, Nu. 367, Pl. Tht. 180b, Grg. 490e, Chrm. 174b: twice in Trag., S. Tr. 427, E. Hel. 567: with Art., τὰν ποίαν σύριγγα; Theoc. 5.5: abbrev. ποῖ (q.v.).
3. with the Art., when the question implies a Noun which is defined by the Art. or the context, τὸ π. εὑρὼν . . φάρμακον; A. Pr. 251; τὰ π. τρύχη; μῶν ἐν οἷς . .; Ar. Ach. 418; λέγεις δὲ τὴν π. κατάστασιν ὀλιγαρχίαν; Answ. τὴν ἀπὸ τιμημάτων πολιτείαν Pl. R. 550c: freq. with the demonstr., ὁ ποῖος οὗτος Λάμαχος; Answ. ὁ δεινός, ὁ ταλαύρινος . . Ar. Ach. 963, cf. Nu. 1270, Timocl. 12.4 (corr. Elmsley): sts. the answer is given more generally, S. OT 120, 291, OC 1415, Ph. 1229: in Prose, τὸ π.; Pl. Sph. 220e, etc.; τὸ π. δή; Id. Tht. 147d, Phdr. 279a; τὰ π. ταῦτα; Id. Cra. 395d, etc.; τῆς π. μερίδος γενέσθαι τὴν πόλιν ἐβούλετ’ ἄν; D. 18.64: so also without the Art., κοῖα ταῦτα λέγεις; Hdt. 7.48; π. Ἐρινὺν τήνδε . .; what sort of Fury is this that . .? A. Ag. 1119; π. ἐρεῖς τόδ’ ἔπος; what sort of word is this that thou wilt speak? S. Ph. 1204 (lyr.), cf. 441, etc.
4. ποῖός τις; making the question less definite, κοῖόν μέ τινα νομίζουσι Πέρσαι εἶναι; Hdt. 3.34, cf. S. OC 1163, X. HG 4.1.6, etc.: with Art., τὰ ποῖ’ ἄττα; Id. Cyr. 3.3.8, cf. Pl. Sph. 240c .

II like ὁποῖος, in indirect questions, διδάξω . . ποῖα χρὴ λέγειν A. Supp. 519, cf. Pr. 196, S. Ph. 153 (lyr.), etc.; ποῖα ἄττα δεῖ ἡμᾶς λέγειν Pl. R. 398c; οὐκ οἶδα ὁποίᾳ τόλμῃ ἢ ποίοις λόγοις χρώμενος ἐρῶ ib. 414d; εἴρετο . . κοῖός τις δοκέοι ἀνὴρ εἶναι Hdt. 3.34; doubled, ποίαν χρὴ [γυναῖκα] ποίῳ ἀνδρὶ συνοῦσαν τίκτειν Pl. Tht. 149d .

III = ποδαπός; ποῖος οὑτοσὶ [ὁ] Τιμόθεος; — Μιλήσιός τις . . Pherecr. 145.20, cf. Call. Epigr. 36 .

2. whose? ἐν π. δυνάμει ἢ ἐν π. ὀνόματι; Acts 4:7, cf. Ev.Matthew 21:23 . simply, what, which? esp. of place or time, ποίης ἐξ εὔχεται εἶναι γαίης; Od. 1.406, cf. Pi. P. 4.97; ἐν π. πόλει; Eup. 23 D., cf. Alex. 267.6; ἐκ ποίας πόλεως σὺ εἶ; LXX 2 Samuel 15:2; 1 Kings 13:12, al., Acts 23:34; ποίᾳ ἄλλῃ (sc. ὁδῷ ); by what other way? Ar. Av. 1219 (hence κοίῃ metaph., how? Hdt. 1.30 ); ποίου χρόνου; since what time? A. Ag. 278, cf. E. IA 815 (nisi leg. πόσον ) ; ἀπὸ π. χρόνου; Ar. Av. 920, UPZ 65.7 (ii B.C.); ἀπὸ ποίου ἔτους PAmh. 2.68.7 (i A.D.); ποίᾳ ἡμέρᾳ; Ev.Matthew 24:42, cf. Hyp. Epit. 31, Arist. Cat. 5a20, 22, SIG 826 E ii28 (Delph., ii B.C. ), IG 5(1).1390.113 (Andania, i B.C. ), PUniv.Giss. 20.18 (ii A.D.); φυλᾶς ἑλομένοις ἑκάστου ( = -ῳ ) ποίας κε βέλλειτει ( ἧστινος ἂν βούληται, sc. εἶναι ) IG 9(2).517.20 (Larissa, iii B.C. ); ποίας φυλῆς ἐστι LXX To. 5.8; π., = quis, Gloss. = πότερος, An.Ox. 1.284. Adv. ποίως Hdn.Gr.2.925, Bacch. Harm. 93 . [The first syll. is sts. short in Trag. and Com., A. Supp. 911, Ar. V. 1369 .]

Question 52

ἄνεμος, -ου, ὁ

Answer 52

wind.

wind, gale
Definition:
the wind;, met. a wind of shifting doctrine, Eph. 4:14

ἄνεμος [ᾰ], ὁ,

I

1. wind, πέτετο πνοιῇ ἀνέμοιο Il. 12.207; ἀνέμων ἀτάλαντοι ἀέλλῃ 13.795; ὦρσεν.. ἀνέμοιο θύελλαν 12.253; ἀνέμοιο.. δεινὸς ἀήτης 15.626, cf. 14.254; ἀνέμων ἀμέγαρτον ἀϋτμήν Od. 11.407, etc.; ἀνέμων πνεύματα Hdt. 7.16. ά, E. HF 102; ῥιπαί S. Ant. 137.930 (both lyr.); ἀήματα A. Eu. 905; αὖραι E. Med. 838; πνοιαί Ar. Av. 1396; ἀνέμων φθόγγος Simon. 37.10; ἀνέμου κατιόντος μεγάλου a gale having come on, Th. 2.25; ἀνέμου []ξαίφνης ἀσελγοῦς γενομένου Eup. 320; ἄνεμος κατὰ βορέαν ἑστηκώς the wind being set in the north, Th. 6.104; ἀνέμοις φέρεσθαι παραδιδόναι τι cast a thing to the winds, E. Tr. 419, cf. A.R. 1.1334; κατ’ ἄνεμον στῆναι stand to leeward, Arist. HA 541a26, cf. Plu. 2.972a; κατ’ ἄνεμον καὶ ῥοῦν νήχεσθαι ib.979c: metaph., ἄνεμος.. ἄνθρωπος ‘unstable as the wind’, Eup. 376; φέρειν τιν’ ἄρας (sic l.) ἄ. a very wind to carry off, Antiph. 195.5 (Lobeck); ἀνέμους θηρᾶν ἐν δικτύοις try to catch the wind, and ἀνέμῳ διαλέγεσθαι talk to the wind, Zen. 1.38; ἀνέμους γεωργεῖν ‘plough the sands’, ib. 100.
2. cardinal point, quarter, ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀ. LXX Zechariah 2:6, Annales du Service 19.40 (Theadelphia, 93 B.C.), Matthew 24:31, al., Vett.Val. 140.6, PFlor. 50.104: sg., ib. 20.19 (ii A.D.); τὸ κατ’ ἄνεμον aspect, POxy. 100.10 (ii A.D.).

II wind in the body, Hp. Mul. 2.179, al. (From ἀνε- ‘blow, breathe’, cf. Skt. áni-ti ‘breathes’, Goth. uzanan ‘expire’, etc.)

Question 53

ἐπιτιμάω

Answer 53

I rebuke, warn

(ἐπετίμων), -, ἐπετίμησα, -, -, -

to rebuke, warn
Definition:
pr. to set a value upon; to assess a penalty; to allege as a crimination; hence, to reprove, chide, censure, rebuke, reprimand, Mt. 19:13; Lk. 23:40; in NT to admonish strongly, enjoin strictly, Mt. 12:16; Lk. 17:3

ἐπιτιμάω, ἐπιτίμω; imperfect 3 person singular ἐπετίμα, 3 person plural ἐπετίμων; 1 aorist ἐπετίμησα; the Sept. for גָּעַר; in Greek writings

1. to show honor to, to honor: τινα, Herodotus 6, 39.
2. to raise the price of: ὁ σῖτος ἐπετιμηθη, Demosthenes 918, 22; others.
3. to adjudge, award (from τιμή in the sense of merited penalty): τήν δίκην, Herodotus 4, 43.
4. to tax with fault, rate, chide, rebuke, reprove, censure severely, (so Thucydides, Xenophon, Plato, Demosthenes, others): absolutely, 2 Timothy 4:2; τίνι, charge one with wrong, Luke (); ; to rebuke — in order to curb one’s ferocity or violence (hence, many formerly gave the word the meaning to restrain; against whom cf. Fritzsche on Matthew, p. 325), Matthew 8:26; Matthew 17:18; Mark 4:39; Luke 4:39, 41; Luke 8:24; Luke 9:42; Jude 1:9 (where Rec.elz strangely ἐπιτιμήσαι (1 aorist active infinitive) for ἐπιτιμμησαι (optative 3 person singular)); or to keep one away from another, Matthew 19:13; Luke 18:15; Mark 10:13; followed by ἵνα (with a verb expressing the opposite of what is censured): Matthew 20:31; Mark 10:48; Luke 18:39; with the addition of λέγων (καί λέγει, or the like) and direct discourse: Mark 1:25 (T omits; WH brackets λέγων); ; Luke 4:35; Luke 23:40 (cf. Psalm 105:9 (); Psalm 118:21 (); Zechariah 3:2; and the use of גָּעַר in Nahum 1:4; Malachi 3:11). Elsewhere in a milder sense, to admonish or charge sharply: τίνι, Matthew 16:22; Mark 8:30; Luke 9:21 (ἐπιτιμήσας αὐτοῖς παρήγγειλεν, followed by the infinitive), Luke 19:39; with ἵνα added, Matthew 16:20 L WH text; Mark 8:30; ἵνα μή, Matthew 12:16; Mark 3:12. (Cf. Trench, § iv; Schmidt, chapter 4, 11.)

Question 54

παραγγέλλω

Answer 54

to announce, notify; to command, direct, charge, Mt. 10:5; Mk. 6:8, 8:6; Lk. 9:21; to charge, entreat solemnly, 1 Tim. 6:13

I command, charge

(παρήγγελλον), -, παρήγγειλα, -, παρήγγελμαι, -

to order, command, direct; to give instruction

παραγγ-έλλω,

fut. -ελῶ: aor. 2 inf. Pass. παραγγελῆναι PHamb. 25.9 (iii B. C.): —

pass on or transmit a message, σέλας παραγγείλασα Μακίστου σκοπαῖς (nisi leg. παρηγγάρευσε) A. Ag. 289, cf. 294, 316; μνήμην παραγγέλλοντες ὧν ἐκύρσατε E. Supp. 1173.

II give orders, give the word of command, esp. of a general, A. Pers. 469, Hdt. 7.147, etc.; π. τινὶ κτείνειν Id. 3.147, cf. X. An. 1.8.3, Pl. Phd. 116c, etc.: with dat. omitted, Hdt. 8.70, etc.; τισὶ ὅπως c. fut., Pl. R. 415b; π. ὅπως ἂν.. give orders to the end that.., Id. Phd. 59e: c. acc. rei only, order, π. παρασκευὴν σίτου order corn to be supplied, Hdt. 3.25; σιτία Th. 7.43: c. acc. cogn., π. παράγγελμα Lys. 12.17, Hyp. Ath. 14; παραγγελίᾳ π. Acts 5:28 : — Pass., τὰ παραγγελλόμενα orders, Th. 2.11, Arist. Pol. 1298a18; ἐς τὰ π. ἰέναι Th. 1.121, 3.55; κατὰ τὰ παρηγγελμένα X. An. 2.2.8; παρηγγέλλετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν στρατεία Aeschin. 3.65, cf. 90.

2. recommend, exhort (not so strong as κελεύω), π. τινὶ πράσσειν τι S. Ph. 1178 (lyr.), etc.; τινί τι E. Heracl. 825; τινί τι περί τινος Th. 1.129.
3. summon to appear, π. παραγίνεσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ κριτήριον Sammelb. 3925.3 (ii B. C.).
4. of a physician, prescribe, τι Arist. Pr. 885b27.
5. τὰ παρηγγελμένα the points we have enjoined, Id. Top. 153a5; τὰ ὑπὸ [λόγου] παραγγελθέντα Id. Rh. Al. 1420b26.

III encourage, cheer on, c. acc., ἵππους Thgn. 998; π. εἰς ὅπλα call to arms, X. An. 1.5.13. summon to one’s help, esp. in politics, summon one’s partisans, form a cabal, D. 21.4 (v.l. περιήγγελκεν), cf. Prooem. 55, Lys. 1.41.

2. π. τὴν ἀρχήν canvass for office, D.H. 11.61, cf. Plu. Ma 5, etc.: abs., π. εἰς ὑπατείαν to be candidate for.., Id. Caes. 13, cf. Cat.Mi. 8; ἐς δημαρχίαν App. BC 1.21.
3. ἐκ μειρακίων π. εἰς ἄνδρα claim one’s majority, Poll. 2.10.

Question 55

συνείδησις, -εως, ἡ

Answer 55

conscience, consciousness, awareness, a present idea, persisting notion, impression of reality, knowledge, information, communication

conscience
Definition:
consciousness, Heb. 10:2; a present idea, persisting notion, impression of reality, 1 Pet. 2:19; conscience, as an inward moral impression of one’s actions and principles, Acts 23:1; 24:16; Rom. 9:1; 2 Cor. 1:12; conscience, as the inward faculty of moral judgment, Rom. 2:15; 13:5; 1 Cor. 8:7b, 10, 12; 10:25, 27, 28, 29; 2 Cor. 4:2; 5:11; 1 Tim. 1:5, 19; 3:9; 4:2; 2 Tim. 1:3; conscience, as the inward moral and spiritual frame, Tit. 1:15; Heb. 9:9, 14; 10:22; 13:18; 1 Pet. 3:16, 21*

συνείδησις, εως, ἡ,

knowledge shared with another, τῶν ἀλγημάτων (in a midwife) Sor. 1.4.

2. communication, information, εὑρήσεις ς. PPar. p.422 (ii A.D.); ς. εἰσήνεγκαν τοῖς κολλήγαις αὐτῶν POxy. 123.13 (iii/iv A.D.).
3. knowledge, λῦε ταῦτα πάντα μὴ διαλείψας ἀγαθῇ ς. (v.l. ἀγαθῇ τύχῃ) Hp. Ephesians 1:1-23.
4. consciousness, awareness, [ τῆς αὑτοῦ συστάσεως ] Chrysipp.Stoic. 3.43, cf. Phld. Rh. 2.140 S., 2 Corinthians 4:2, 2 Corinthians 5:11, 1 Peter 2:19; τῆς κακοπραγμοσύνης Democr. 297, cf. D.S. 4.65, Hebrews 10:2; κατὰ συνείδησιν ἀτάραχοι διαμενοῦσι Hero Bel. 73; inner consciousness, ἐν ς. σου βασιλέα μὴ καταράσῃ LXX Ecclesiastes 10:20; in 1 Corinthians 8:7 συνειδήσει is f.l. for συνηθείᾳ.
5. consciousness of right or wrong doing, conscience, Periander and Bias ap. Stob. 3.24.11,12, Luc. Am. 49; ἐὰν ἐγκλήματός τινος ἔχῃ ς. Anon. Oxy. 218 (a) ii 19; βροτοῖς ἅπασιν ἡ ς. θεός Men. Mon. 654, cf. LXX Wi. 17.11, D.H. Th. 8 (but perh. interpol.); ς. ἀγαθή Acts 23:1; ἀπρόσκοπος πρὸς τὸν θεόν ib. 24.16; καθαρά 1 Timothy 3:9, POsl. 17.10 (ii A.D.); κολαζομένους κατὰ συνείδησιν Vett.Val. 210.1; θλειβομένη τῇ ς. περὶ ὧν ἐνοσφίσατο PRyl. 116.9 (ii A.D.); τὸν.. θεὸν κεχολωμένον ἔχοιτο καὶ τὴν ἰδίαν ς. Ath.Mitt. 24.237 (Thyatira); conscientiousness, Arch.Pap. 3.418.13 (vi A.D.).–Senses 4 and 5 sts. run one into the other, v. 1 Corinthians 8:7, 1 Corinthians 10:27 sq.
6. complicity, guilt, crime, περὶ τοῦ πεφημίσθαι αὐτὴν ἐν ς. τοιαύτῃ Supp.Epigr. 4.648.13 (Lydia, ii A.D.).

Question 56

παράκλησις, -εως, ἡ

Answer 56

a reasoned comfort, consolation, or encouragement; uplifting persuasive discourse, exhortation, appeal, or call to action

Definition:
a calling upon, exhortation, incitement, persuasion, Rom. 12:8; 1 Cor. 14:3; hortatory instruction, Acts 13:15; 15:31; entreaty, importunity, earnest supplication, 2 Cor. 8:4; solace, consolation, Lk. 2:25; Rom. 15:4, 5; 2 Cor. 1:3, 4, 5, 6, 7; cheering and supporting influence, Acts 9:31; joy, gladness, rejoicing, 2 Cor. 7:13; cheer, joy, enjoyment, Lk. 6:24

a calling near, summons, (esp. for help)
importation, supplication, entreaty
exhortation, admonition, encouragement
consolation, comfort, solace; that which affords comfort or refreshment
thus of the Messianic salvation (so the Rabbis call the Messiah the consoler, the comforter)
persuasive discourse, stirring address
instructive, admonitory, conciliatory, powerful hortatory discourse

παρά-κλησις, εως, ἡ,

calling to one’s aid, summons, οἱ ἐκ παρακλήσεως συγκαθήμενοι a packed party in the assembly, D. 18.143.

2. imploring, appealing, τινος of or on the part of one, Th. 4.61; deprecation, συγγνώμης δεῖ καὶ π. Str. 13.1.1.
3. invocation of gods, Iamb. Myst. 4.3 (pl.).
4. demand, request, PGrenf. 1.32.7 (pl., ii B.C.), etc.; κατὰ-σιν on demand, PLond. 3.1164d10 (iii A. D.).

II exhortation, address, πρὸς τὸν ὄχλον Th. 8.92; οὐ π. εὑρόντες, ἀλλὰ παραίνεσιν γράψαντες not a mere address to their feelings, but counsel to act rightly, Isoc. 1.5; π. τῶν πολιτῶν πρὸς ἀρετήν Aeschin. 1.117; τὴν τῆς σωφροσύνης παράκλησιν.. αὐτοὺς παρακέκληκα Id. 2.180; ἀξιώσεισκαὶ-κλήσεις Plb. 1.67.10.

III consolation, LXX Isaiah 30:7, Nahum 3:7, Hebrews 6:18, Phalar. 103.1.

1. properly, a calling near, summons (especially for help, Thucydides 4, 61; Demosthenes, p. 275, 20).
2. imploration, supplication, entreaty: 2 Corinthians 8:4 (Strabo 13, p. 581; Josephus, Antiquities 3, 1, 5; (contra Apion 2, 23, 3 παράκλησις πρός τόν Θεόν ἔστω); λόγοι παρακλήσεως, words of appeal, containing entreaties, 1 Macc. 10:24).
3. exhortation, admonition, encouragement: Acts 15:31 (others refer this to 4); 1 Corinthians 14:3; 2 Corinthians 8:17; Philippians 2:1; 1 Timothy 4:13; Hebrews 12:5; λόγος τῆς παρακλήσεως, Hebrews 13:22 (2 Macc. 7:24 2Macc. 15:9 (11); Plato, del. 415 e.; Thucydides 8, 92; Aeschines, Polybius, others).
4. consolation, comfort, solace: 2 Corinthians 1:4-7; Hebrews 6:18; (add, Acts 9:31; 2 Thessalonians 2:16) (Jeremiah 16:7; Has. 13:14; (Job 21:2; Nahum 3:7); Phalaris, epistle 97 at the beginning); τῶν γραφῶν, afforded by the contents of the Scriptures, Romans 15:4 (Winer’s Grammar, 189 (178)); Θεός τῆς παρακλήσεως, God the author and bestower of comfort, Romans 15:5; 2 Corinthians 1:3; solace or cheer which comes from a happy lot or a prosperous state of things, Luke 6:24; 2 Corinthians 7:4, 7, 13 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 393 (368)); Philemon 1:7; by metonymy, that which affords comfort or refreshment; thus of the Messianic salvation, Luke 2:25 (so the rabbis call the Messiah the consoler, the comforter, κατ’ ἐξοχήν, מְנַחֵם (cf. Wünsche, Neue Beiträge as above with at the passage; Schöttgen, Horae Hebrew etc. ii. 18)).
5. universally, “persuasive discourse, stirring address — instructive; admonitory, consolatory; powerful hortatory discourse”: Romans 12:8; λόγος, παρακλήσεως (A. V. “word of exhortation), Acts 13:15; υἱός παρακλήσεως (a son of exhortation), a man gifted in teaching, admonishing, consoling, Acts 4:36; used of the apostles’ instruction or preaching, 1 Thessalonians 2:3.

Question 57

πάσχα, τό

Answer 57

a passover

Passover, Passover week; Passover meal; Passover lamb
Definition:
the passover, the paschal lamb, Mt. 26:17; Mk. 14:12; met. used of Christ, the true paschal lamb, 1 Cor. 5:7; the feast of the passover, the day on which the paschal lamb was slain and eaten, the 14th of Nisan, Mt. 26:18; Mk. 14:1; Heb. 11:28; more genr. the whole paschal festival, including the seven days of the feast of unleavened bread, Mt. 26:2; Lk. 2:41; Jn. 2:13

1. the paschal sacrifice (which was accustomed to be offered for the people’s deliverance of old from Egypt)
2. the paschal lamb, i.e. the lamb the Israelites were accustomed to slay and eat on the fourteenth day of the month of Nisan (the first month of their year) in memory of the day on which their fathers, preparing to depart from Egypt, were bidden by God to slay and eat a lamb, and to sprinkle their door posts with its blood, that the destroying angel, seeing the blood, might pass over their dwellings; Christ crucified is likened to the slain paschal lamb
3. the paschal supper
4. the paschal feast, the feast of the Passover, extending from the 14th to the 20th day of the month Nisan

πάσχα, τό,

indecl.,

the Hebrew Passover (from pâsa[hudot ] ‘pass over’) or Paschal feast, LXX Exodus 12:48, etc.

2. paschal supper, Matthew 26:17; Matthew 26:19,al.
3. paschal lamb, θύειν τὸ π. LXX Exodus 12:21, al.; τὸ π. ἐτύθη Χριστός 1 Corinthians 5:7.

πάσχα, τό (Chaldean פִּסְחָא, Hebrew פֶּסַח, from פָּסַח, to pass over, to pass over by sparing; the Sept. also constantly use the Chaldean form πάσχα, except in 2 Chron. (and Jeremiah 38:8 ()) where it is φασεκ; Josephus has φασκα, Antiquities 5, 1, 4; 14, 2, 1; 17, 9, 13; b. j. 2, 1, 3), an indeclinable noun (Winers Grammar, § 10, 2); properly, a passing over;

1. the paschal sacrifice (which was accustomed to be offered for the people’s deliverance of old from Egypt), or
2. the paschal lamb, i. e. the lamb which the Israelites were accustomed to slay and eat on the fourteenth day of the month Nisan (the first month of their year) in memory of that day on which their fathers, preparing to depart from Egypt, were bidden by God to slay and eat a lamb, and to sprinkle their door-posts with its blood, that the destroying angel, seeing the blood, might pass over their dwellings (Exodus 12; Numbers 9; Deuteronomy 16): θύειν τό πάσχα (הַפֶסַח שָׁחַט), Mark 14:12; Luke 22:7, (Exodus 12:21); Christ crucified is likened to the slain paschal lamb, 1 Corinthians 5:7; φαγεῖν τό πάσχα, Matthew 26:17; Mark 14:12, 14; Luke 22:11, 15; John 18:28; הָפֶסַח אָכַל, 2 Chronicles 30:17f.
3. the paschal supper: ἑτοιμάζειν τό πάσχα, Matthew 26:19; Mark 14:16; Luke 22:8, 13; ποιεῖν τό πάσχα to celebrate the paschal meal, Matthew 26:18.
4. the paschal festival, the feast of Passover, extending from the fourteenth to the twentieth day of the month Nisan: Matthew 26:2; Mark 14:1; Luke 2:41; Luke 22:1; John 2:13, 23; John 6:4; John 11:55; John 12:1; John 13:1; John 18:39; John 19:14; Acts 12:4; πεποίηκε τό πάσχα he instituted the Passover (of Moses), Hebrews 11:28 (cf. Winers Grammar, 272 (256); Buttmann, 197 (170)); γίνεται τό πάσχα the Passover is celebrated (R. V. cometh), Matthew 26:2. (See BB. DD. under the word ; Dillmann in Schenkel iv., p. 392ff; and on the question of the relation of the Last Supper to the Jewish Passover, see (in addition to references in BB. DD. as above) Kirchner, die Jüdische Passahfeier u. Jesu letztes Mahl. Gotha, 1870; Keil, Com. über Matth., pp. 513-528; J. B. McClellan, The N. T. etc. i., pp. 473-494; but especially Schürer, Ueber φαγεῖν τό πάσχα, akademische Festschrift (Giessen, 1883).)

Question 58

βαστάζω

Answer 58

βαστάσω, ἐβάστασα, -, -, -

I bear, carry

to carry, bear up, carry off; to tolerate, help, support
Definition:
pr. to lift, raise, bear aloft; to bear, carry in the hands or about the person; carry as a message, Acts 9:15; to take away, remove, Mt. 8:17; Jn. 20:15; to take up, Jn. 10:31; Lk. 14:27; to bear as a burden endure, suffer; to sustain, Rom. 11:18; to bear with, tolerate; to sustain mentally, comprehend, Jn. 16:12

to take up with the hands
to take up in order to carry or bear, to put upon one's self (something) to be carried
to bear what is burdensome
to bear, to carry
to carry on one's person
to sustain, i.e. uphold, support
to bear away, carry off

βαστάζω, Od. 11.594, etc.: fut. -άσω A. Pr. 1019, S. Aj. 920; late -άξω Ps.-Callisth. 1.45, etc.: aor. ἐβάστασα Od. 21.405, Ar. Th. 437 (lyr.), etc.; late ἐβάσταξα PFay. 122, LXX Si. 6.25, J. AJ 3.8.7, Epigr. ap. Stob. 1.49.52: — Pass., fut. βασταχθήσομαι Ps.-Callisth. 1.42: aor. ἐβαστάχθην Nic.Dam. p.114D., D.L. 4.59, Ath. 15.693e: aor. 2 βασταγῆναι Artem. 2.68: pf. βεβάσταγμαι (ἐμ-) Luc. Ocyp. 14: —

I

1. lift up, raise, λᾶαν βαστάζοντα.. ἀμφοτέρῃσι Od. 11.594; ἐπεὶ μέγα τόξον ἐβάστασε 21.405; πεπτῶτα β. τινά S. Aj. 827, etc.; lift a veil, Id. El. 1470: — Pass., of sluice-gates, PRyl. 81.6 (ii A. D.).
2. metaph., lift up, exalt, ennoble, Pi. O. 12.19; β. τινὰ χαρίτεσσιν Id. I. 3.8.

II

1. bear, carry, A. Pr. 1019, etc.; χερσὶν β. τινά S. El. 1129, cf. 1216; δόρυ Hermipp. 46.2 (anap.), Theoc. 16.78; ὅπλα Men. Epit. 107.
2. hold in one’s hands, S. El. 905; χεροῖν Id. Ph. 657, cf. 1127 (lyr.); of books, συνεχῶς β. Epicur. Ephesians 2 p.35U.: — in Pass., to be popular, Arist. Rh. 1413b12.
3. β. ἐν γνώμῃ bear in mind, consider, weigh, A. Pr. 888; φρενί Ar. Th. 437 (lyr.); β. προβούλευμα deliberate on.., Eup. 73; βαστάσας αἱρήσομαι on consideration, Id. 303.
4. bear, endure, οὐκέτι βαστάζω τὴν σεῖο διαζυγίην Revelation 5:8 (Rufin.).
5. produce, yield, of land, PGiss. 6 iii 8 (ii A. D.).

III

1. carry off, take away, John 20:15; steal, Plb. 32.15.4, J. AJ 1.19.9, D.L. 4.59, Luc. Asin. 16, PTeb. 330.7 (ii A. D.), perh. also in John 12:6, Ath. 2.46f (Pass.).
2. in Pass., to be sublimated, Zos.Alch. p.198 B. in Trag., touch, χέρα ἄνακτος.. τῇδε β. χερί A. Ag. 35; embrace, σῶμα S. OC 1105. — Not in Att. Prose: Pass. first in Plb.

βαστάζω; future βαστάσω; 1 aorist ἐβάστασα;

1. to take up with the hands: λίθους, John 10:31 (λααν, Homer, Odyssey 11, 594; τήν μάχαιραν ἀπό τῆς γῆς, Josephus, Antiquities 7, 11, 7).
2. to take up in order to carry or bear; to put upon oneself (something) to be carried; to bear what is burdensome: τόν σταυρόν, John 19:17; Luke 14:27 (see σταυρός 2 a. and b.); Metaphorically: βαστάζειν τί, to be equal to understanding a matter and receiving it calmly, John 16:12 (Epictetus ench. 29, 5); φορτίον, Galatians 6:5; βαστάσει τό κρίμα, must take upon himself the condemnation of the judge, Galatians 5:10 (מִשְׁפָּט נָשָׂא, Micah 7:9). Hence, to bear, endure: Matthew 20:12; Acts 15:10 (ζυγόν); Romans 15:1; Galatians 6:2; Revelation 2:2f (Epictetus diss. 1, 3, 2; Anthol. 5, 9, 3; in this sense the Greeks more commonly use φέρειν.)
3. simply to bear, carry: Matthew 3:11; Mark 14:13; Luke 7:14; Luke 22:10; Revelation 17:7; passive, Acts 3:2; Acts 21:35. τό ὄνομα μου ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν, so to bear it that it may be in the presence of Gentiles, i. e. by preaching to carry the knowledge of my name to the Gentiles, Acts 9:15. to carry on one’s person: Luke 10:4; Galatians 6:17 (cf. Ellicott at the passage); of the womb carrying the foetus, Luke 11:27; to sustain, i. e., uphold, support: Romans 11:18.
4. by a use unknown to Attic writers, to bear away, carry off: νόσους, to take away or remove by curing them, Matthew 8:17 (Galen de compos. medicam. per gen. 2, 14 (339, Bas. edition) ψωρας τέ θεραπεύει καί ὑπώπια βαστάζει) (others refer the use in Matthew, the passage cited to 2; cf. Meyer). John 12:6 (ἐβασταζε used to pilfer (R. V. text took away; cf. our ‘shoplifting’, though path. this lift is a different word, see Skeat, under the word)); John 20:15 (Polybius 1, 48, 2 ὁ ἄνεμος τούς πύργους τῇ βία βαστάζει, Apollod. Bibl. 2, 6, 2; 3, 4, 3; Athen. 2, 26, p. 46 f.; 15, 48, p. 693{e}; very many instances from Josephus are given by Krebs, Observations, p. 152ff). (Synonyms: cf. Schmidt, chapter 105.)

Question 59

πόθεν

Answer 59

from where? whence?

from where, from which
Definition:
whence? from where, used of place, etc., Mt. 15:33; met. of a state of dignity, Rev. 2:5; used of origin, Mt. 21:25; of cause, source, author, etc., Mt. 13:27, 54, 56; Lk. 1:43; how? in what way? Mk. 8:4; 12:37

of place: from where, from what condition
of origin or source: from what author or giver
of cause: how is that?, how can that be?

πόθεν,

Ion. κόθεν:

I interrog. Adv. whence?

1 of Place, εἰρώτα . ., τίς εἴη καὶ π. ἔλθοι Od. 15.423; ποδαπὸς ὁ ξένος; π.; A. Ch. 657; ποῖ δὴ καὶ π.; Pl. Phdr. 227a: c. gen., τίς π. εἰς ἀνδρῶν; Il. 21.150, Od. 1.170, al.; κ. τῆς Φρυγίης ἥκων; Hdt. 1.35; π. γῆς ἦλθες; E. Ion 258, etc.

2. of origin, π. γένος εὔχεται εἶναι from what stock he avows that he is by descent, Od. 17.373; τὴν . . τέχνην πῶς καὶ π. ἄν τις δύναιτο πορίσασθαι; Pl. Phdr. 269d; π. ἄλλοθεν . .; D. 3.28: c. gen., π. ποτὲ . . θνητῶν ἔφυσαν; E. Supp. 841 .
3. in speaking, π. ἄρξωμαι; A. Ch. 855 (anap.); π. ἂν λάβοιμι ῥῆμα; Ar. Pax 521, etc.
4. of the cause, whence? wherefore? π. χοὰς ἔπεμψεν; ἐκ τίνος λόγου; A. Ch. 515; to express surprise or negation, π. γὰρ ἔσται βιοτά; i.e. οὐδαμόθεν, S. Ph. 1159 (lyr.); π. υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ἐστιν; Mark 12:37; πόθεν; how can it be? impossible! nonsense! E. Ph. 1620, Ar. V. 1145, Ra. 1455; σὺ δ’ ὁμέστιος θεοῖς; π.; Id. Fr. 655; ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἔστι ταῦτα· πόθεν; πολλοῦ γε καὶ δεῖ D. 18.47, cf. 24.157, etc.; π. γάρ; E. Alc. 781 .
5. with Verbs of finding, taking, purchasing, etc., π. ἂν πριαίμην ῥῖνα; Ar. Pax 21; π. ἄν τις τοῦτο τὸ χρῖμα λάβοι; X. Smp. 2.4; π. πρᾷον . . ἦθος εὑρήσομεν; Pl. R. 375c, cf. Euthd. 273e, al.; so κάθησθε κλάοντες περὶ τῆς αὔριον π. φάγητε Arr. Epict. 1.9.19 .

II ποθέν, enclit. Adv. from some place or other, εἴ π. Il. 9.380; εἰ καί π. ἄλλοθεν ἔλθοι Od. 7.52, cf. 5.490; φανεὶς . . π. A. Pers. 354; ἦλθέ π. σωτήρ Id. Ch. 1073 (anap.); ἐκ δρυός π. ἢ ἐκ πέτρας Pl. R. 544d; ἐκ βιβλίου π. ἀκούσας from some book or other, Id. Phdr. 268c, cf. 244d; after ἐνθένδε, ἐντεῦθεν, ib. 229b, 270a, etc.

πόθεν, adverb (from Homer down), whence;

a. of place,from what place: Matthew 15:33; Luke 13:25, 27; John 3:8; John 6:5; John 8:14; John 9:29, 30; John 19:9; Revelation 7:13; from what condition, Revelation 2:5.
b. of origin or source, equivalent to from what author or giver: Matt. 13:(),; ; Mark 6:2; Luke 20:7; John 2:9; James 4:1; from what parentage, John 7:27f (cf. ), see Meyer at the passage,
c. of cause, how is it that? how can it be that? Mark 8:4; Mark 12:37; Luke 1:43; John 1:48 (); .

Question 60

ἥκω

Answer 60

I have come

ἥξω, ἧξα, -, -, -

to come, to have come, be present
Definition:
to become, have arrived, Mt. 8:11; Mk. 8:3; Lk. 15:27; Rev. 15:4*

ἥκω,

Il. 5.478: impf. ἧκον (v. infr.): fut. ἥξω (v. infr.); Dor. ἡξῶ Theoc. 4.47, Call. Fr. 1.65 P. (in Dor. and Hom. more commonly ἵκω): all other tenses late; aor. 1 part. ἥξας Paus. 2.11.5, Gal. 6.56, 10.609: pf. ἧκα Philostr. VA 3.24, Scymn. 62, 1 pl. ἥκαμεν UPZ 72.9 (ii B.C.), CIG 4762 (Egypt, i A.D.), Dor. ἥκαμες f.l. in Plu. 2.225b, 2 pl. ἥκατε PGrenf. 2.36.18 (i B.C.), 3 pl. ἥκασι LXX 4 Ki. 20.14, Mark 8:3; inf. ἡκέναι UPZ 6.30 (ii B.C.): plpf. ἥκεσαν J. AJ 19.1.14: —

I Med., pres. subj. ἥκηται Aret. SD 2.1: fut. ἥξομαι v.l. in M.Ant. 2.4: —

1. to have come, be present, prop. in a pf. sense, with impf. ἧκον as plpf., I had come, and fut. ἥξω as fut. pf., I shall have come, μάλα τηλόθεν ἥκω Il. 5.478, cf. Od. 13.325, Pi. O. 4.12 (ἵκω codd. vett.): impf. ἧκον A. Pr. 661, Th. 1.91, al., Pl. R. 327c, Hdt. 8.50, etc.: fut. ἥξω A. Pr. 103, al., E. Andr. 738, Ar. Pax 265, Orac. ap. Th. 2.54, etc.; ἧκε imper., S. Aj. 1116, Ar. Pax 275, X. Cyr. 4.5.25; ἡκέτω E. Rh. 337: — Constr. mostly with εἰς, Hdt. 8.50, A. Ch. 3, etc.; παρά τινα Hdt. 7.157, Th. 1.137; πρός τινα A. Ch. 659; πρὸς δαίμονα S. Fr. 770; esp. in worship, ἥκω πρὸς τὴν κυρίαν Ἶσιν OGI 186.6 (Egypt, i B.C.), cf. John 6:37; πρὸς πόλιν S. OC 734; ἐπί τινα to set upon, attack, Pl. R. 336b, Aeschin. 2.178; but ἥ. ἐπὶ τὸ στράτευμα to have come to fetch the army, X. An. 7.6.2; οἱ ἐπὶ ταῦθ’ ἥκοντες D. 18.28; ἐπ’ ὀλέθρῳ E. IA 886 (troch.); περὶ σπονδῶν X. An. 2.3.4: c. acc., ἥξεις ποταμόν A. Pr. 717, cf. 724, 730; ἥ. δῆμον τὸν Λυρκείου S. Fr. 271.6, cf. E. Ba. 1; ἥκουσιν αὐτῷ ἄγγελοι X. Cyr. 5.3.26; ἐς ταὐτὸν ἥ. to have come to the same point, to agree, E. Hec. 748, Hipp. 273: with Adv. of motion, ἥ. ἐνθάδε, δεῦρο, S. Ph. 377, D. 19.58; βῆναι κεῖθεν ὅθενπερ ἥκει S. OC 1227: c. neut. Pron., αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἥκω παρά σε Pl. Prt. 310e; ἐρωτώμενοι ὅ τι ἥκοιεν for what they had come, X. HG 4.5.9: c. acc. cogn., ὁδὸν μακρὰν ἥκειν Id. Cyr. 5.5.42: c. inf., μανθάνειν γὰρ ἥκομεν we are here to learn, S. OC 12.
2. to have reached a point, ἐς τοσήνδ’ ὕβριν ib. 1030; εἰς τοῦτο ἀμαθίας E. Andr. 170; εἰς τοσοῦτον ἀμαθίας Pl. Ap. 25e; εἰς ὅσον ἡλικίας Id. Chrm. 157d, etc.; πρὸς γάμων ἀκμάς S. OT 1492; ὁρᾷς ἵν’ ἥκεις; ib. 687, etc.; Geom., pass through a point, διὰ τῶν πόλων Autol. Sph. 10, cf. Archim. Con.Sph. 9. διὰ μάχης, δι’ ὀργῆς ἥκειν, A. Supp. 475, S. OC 905; cf. διά A. IV. with an Adv. folld. by gen., οὕτω πόρρω σοφίας ἥκεις Pl. Euthd. 294e; εὖ ἥκειν τινός to be well off for a thing, have plenty of it, τοῦ βίου, χρημάτων, Hdt. 1.30, 5.62; ἑωυτῶν Id. 1.102; θεῶν χρηστῶν Id. 8.111; πιθανότητος Demetr. Magn. ap. D.H. Din. 1; οὐκ ὁμοίως ἥ. τινός not to be equally well off in respect of.., Hdt. 1.149; πῶς ἀγῶνος ἥκομεν; how have we sped in the contest? E. El. 751; ὧδε γένους ἥ. τινί to be this degree of kin to him, Id. Heracl. 213; ὡς δυνάμεως ἥκεις Paus. 4.21.10; ἐς μῆκος εὖ ἥκων Ael. NA 4.34: abs., εὖ ἥκειν to be flourishing, Hdt. 1.30: rarely c. gen. only, σὺ δὲ δυνάμιος ἥκεις μεγάλης thou art in great power, Id. 7.157 (nisi leg. μεγάλως).
3. to have come back, returned, D. 20.73; from exile, And. 2.13; αὐτίκα ἥξω I shall be back in a moment, X. An. 2.1.9; ἧκέ νυν ταχύ come back soon, Ar. Pax 275; ἄψορρον ἥξεις A. Pr. 1021; ἄψορρον ἥξομεν πάλιν S. El. 53.
4. c. part., ἥκω φέρων I have come bringing (i.e. with), Id. OC 579, cf. 357, Ar. Pax 265, Eup. 22 D., Pl. Grg. 518d; ἧκεν ἄγων Id. Phd. 117a; ἕτερόν τι ἥκεις ἕχων Id. Grg. 491c, etc.: c. fut. part., like ἔρχομαι, ἥκω φράσων, ἀγγελῶν, etc., I am going, I intend to say, E. Ph. 706, 1075, etc.
5. to have come to be, θεοῖς ἔχθιστος ἥκω S. OT 1519 (troch.), cf. Aj. 636 (lyr.), El. 1201, etc.; take one’s origin, ἀπὸ πολιτειῶν τοιούτων ἥκετε, ἐν αἷς.. Th. 4.126.

II

1. of things, in various uses: of meats, to have come to table, Alex. 132; ὡς τὰ περιφερόμενα ἧκε πρὸς ἡμᾶς X. Cyr. 2.2.3; of reports, ἐμοὶ ἀγγελίη ἥκει παρὰ βασιλέος Hdt. 8.140. ά, cf. S. OC 1177; of events, πῆμα ἥκει τινί A. Pr. 103, cf. Ar. Ra. 606, etc.; ἐπ’ ἀνδρὶ ἥκει βίον τελευτή S. OC 1472; ἵν’ ἥκειτὰ μαντ εύματα what they have come to, Id. OT 953; ὡς αὐτὸν ἥξοι μοῖρα ib. 713 codd.; ἥξει πόλεμος Orac. ap. Th. 2.54; ἐς αὐτὸν ἥξει τὸ δεινόν Id. 6.77; of Time, ἥκει ἦμαρ, νύξ, A. Ag. 1301, E. IT 42; ἥκει ὑμῖν ὁ καιρός Lys. 12.79; τὸ μέλλον ἥξει A. Ag. 1240.
2. concern, relate to, ποῖ λόγος ἥκει; to what do the words relate? E. Tr. 154 (lyr.); εἰς ἔμ’ ἥκει.. τὰ πράγματα Ar. Pl. 919; εἰς ἐμὲ τὸ ἐλλεῖπον ἥξει will fall upon me, X. Cyr. 1.5.13: freq. in part., τὰ εἰς τοὺς κινδύνους ἥκοντα Antipho 5.81; τὰ εἰς πλοῦτον ἥ. Pl. Erx. 392d; τὰ πρὸς ἔπαινον, εἰς φιλανθρωπίαν ἥ., Plb. 12.15.9, 28.17.2, etc.
3. depend upon, ὅσα τῆς Φωκέων σωτηρίας ἐπὶ τὴν πρεσβείαν ἧκε D. 19.30; τό γε ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἧκον μέρος Ph. 2.21; ὅσα γ’ εἰς βούλησιν ἥκειν τὴν ἐμήν Hld. 4.7.
4. c. inf., ἧκέ μοι γένει.. πενθεῖν it has come to me by birth.., my birth lays it on me.., S. OC 738, cf. Ichn. 356; καλῶς αὐτοῖς κατθανεῖν ἧκον βίου it being well for them at their age to die, E. Alc. 291.
5. c. part., ὃ καὶ νῦν ἥκει γινόμενον which commonly happens even now, Plb. 24.9.11 codd. (v.l. γενόμενον). (Prob. from same root as ἵκω.)

Question 61

καταργέω

Answer 61

I bring to naught, abolish

καταργήσω, κατήργησα, κατήργηκα, κατήργημαι, κατηργήθην

to nullify, abolish, make ineffective; (pass.) cease, pass away
Definition:
to render useless, or unproductive, occupy unprofitable, Lk. 13:7; to render powerless, Rom. 6:6; to make empty and unmeaning, Rom. 4:14; to render null, to abrogate, cancel, Rom. 3:3, 31; Eph. 2:15; to bring to an end, 1 Cor. 2:6; 13:8; 15:24, 26; 2 Cor. 3:7; to destroy, annihilate, 2 Thess. 2:8; Heb. 2:14; to free from, dissever from, Rom. 7:2, 6; Gal. 5:4

καταργ-έω,

I

1. leave unemployed or idle, Χέρα E. Ph. 753; κατηργηκέναι τοὺς καιρούς to have missed the opportunities, Plb. Fr. 176; κ. τὴν γῆν make the ground useless, cumber it, Luke 13:7.
2. cause to be idle, hinder in one’s work, LXX 2 Esdras 4:21, POxy. 38.17 (i A.D.): — Pass., LXX 2 Esdras 6:8; to be rendered or lie idle, PFlor. 176.7 (iii A.D.), etc.

II make of no effect, Romans 3:3; Romans 3:31, al.: — Pass., to be abolished, cease, ib.6.6, 1 Corinthians 2:6, etc.; κ. ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου to be set free from.., Romans 7:2; to be parted, ἀπὸ Χριστοῦ Galatians 5:4.

Question 62

κελεύω

Answer 62

I order

(ἐκέλευον), -, ἐκέλευσα, -, -, -

to order, direct, command
Definition:
to order, command, direct, bid, Mt. 8:18; 14:19, 28

κελεύω,

impf. κέλευον Il. 23.767: fut. κελεύς-σω, inf. - σέμεναι Od. 4.274: aor. ἐκέλευσα, κέλ - Il. 20.4: pf. κεκέλευκα Lys. 1.34, Luc. Demon. 44: — Med., aor. ἐκελευσάμην Hp. Nat.Puer. 13: more freq. in compds. δια-, ἐπι-, παρα-κελεύομαι (q.v.): — Pass., fut. - ευσθήσομαι D.C. 68.9: aor. ἐκελεύσθην Hdt. 7.9. ά, S. OC 738, Th. 7.70: pf. κεκέλευσμαι X. Cyr. 8.3.14, Luc. Sacr. 11: plpf. ἐκεκέλευστο D.C. 78.4 (ἐκελεύθην v.l. in Hdt. 7.9. ά, and κεκέλευμαι IG 22.1121.13 (iv A.D.), v.l. in App. BC 5.141 are later forms). (A lengthd. form of κέλομαι, q.v.): — prop. urge, drive on, [ ἵππους] ὁ γέρων ἐφέπων μάστιγι κέλευε.. κατὰ ἄστυ Il. 24.326: hence, exhort, bid,

I

1. c.acc. pers. et inf., order one to do, σ’ ἔγωγε.. κελεύω ἐς πληθὺν ἰέναι 17.30, cf. 2.11, al., Hdt. 1.8, 24, etc.; ἐκέλευσε τὸν παῖδα περιμεῖναί ἑ κελεῦσαι he bade the lad bid us to wait for him, Pl. R. 327b; ὁ νόμος τὸν ἐπιβουλεύσαντα κελεύει φονέα εἶναι, i.e. bids that he be held guilty, Antipho 4.2.5; ὁ τὸν νόμον κελεύων ἄρχειν δοκεῖ κελεύειν ἄρχειν τὸν θεὸν καὶ τὸν νοῦν Arist. Pol. 1287a29; ἐς τὴν Μίλητον ἔπεμπον κελεύοντες σφίσι τὸν Ἀστύοχον βοηθεῖν Th. 8.38; request, Lys. 16.16; opp. ἐπιτάττειν, IG 12.76.33.
2. c. acc. pers. et rei, σφῶϊ μὲν οὔ τι κελεύω Il. 4.286; τά με θυμὸς.. κελεύει (sc. εἰπεῖν) 7.68, etc.: with inf. subjoined, τί με ταῦτα κελεύεις.. μάχεσθαι; 20.87.
3. c. acc. pers. only, εἰ μὴ θυμός με κελεύοι (sc. φείδεσθαι) Od. 9.278; ὥς με κελεύεις (sc. μυθεῖσθαι) 11.507: in Prose, ἐκέλευσε τοὺς ἕνδεκα ἐπὶ τὸν Θηραμένην ordered them [to go] against him, ordered them to seize him, X. HG 2.3.54; κ. τινὰς ἐπὶ τὰ ὅπλα ib. 20: — Pass., receive orders, Arist. Pol. 1253b34.
4. c.acc. rei only, ὃ μὴ κελεύσαι Ζεύς (Herm. for - σει) A. Eu. 618; ὁ νόμος τὰ μὲν κελεύων τὰ δ’ ἀπαγορεύων Arist. EN 1129b24: — Pass., τὸ κελευόμενον commands, orders, Hdt. 7.16, Antipho Soph. 61, X. Cyr. 4.1.3: pl., Pl. R. 340a.
5. c. dat. pers. folld. by inf., urge or order one to do, κηρύκεσσι.. κέλευσε κηρύσσειν.. Il. 2.50, Od. 2.6, etc.; ἀλλήλοισι κέλευον ἅπτεσθαι νηῶν.. Il. 2.151; ἑτάροισι.. ἐκέλευσα ἐμβαλέειν Od. 9.488: in later Prose, D.S. 19.17, Ceb. 32.4 codd., Luc. DMort. 1.1, Phalar. 121.1, etc.
6. rarely c. dat. pers. et acc. rei, τί δ’ ἐστὶν ὃ κελεύεις ἐμοί; Men. Pk. 224, cf. Ael. NA 9.1.
7. c. dat. pers. only, ἵπποισι καὶ Αὐτομέδοντι κελεύσας Il. 16.684; cf.infr. 111.
8. abs., freq. in Hom., ὡς σὺ κελεύεις Il. 23.96, al.; λέξω, κελεύεις γάρ A. Ch. 107; κελεύων, opp. αὐτοχειρίῃ, Democr. 260; κελευούσης τῆς Πυθίης Hdt. 6.36; κελεύοντος καὶ δεομένου Lys. 5.1.
9. c. inf. only, σιγᾶν κελεύω I order silence, S. Ph. 865; οὐκ ἂν κελεύσαιμ’ εὐσεβεῖν Id. Ant. 731; recommend, propose, Lys. 12.25, D. 4.21, etc.; opp. οὐκ ἐάω, Hdt. 6.109, X. Ath. 2.18.

II of inferiors, urge, entreat, Il. 24.599, Od. 10.17, Hdt. 1.116.

III

1. of the boatswain, give time to rowers, c.dat., Pl. R. 396b: abs., Ath. 12.535d.
2. sing a chanty, S.E. M. 6.24.

Question 63

ὀμνύω

Answer 63

I swear, take an oath

-, ὤμοσα, -, -, -

to declare an oath, swear an oath, promise with an oath
Definition:
to swear, Mt. 5:34; to promise with an oath, Mk. 6:23; Acts 2:30; 7:17

ὀμνυω

A prolonged form of a primary but obsolete word, ὀìμω omō, for which another prolonged form (ὀμοìω omoō om-o’-o) is used in certain tenses

ὀμόω, swear, v. ὄμνυμι.

Question 64

πόσος, -η, -ον

Answer 64

how great? how much?

how great?, how much?, how many?; how great!, how many!, how much!
Definition:
How great? How much?, Mt. 6:23; Lk. 16:5, 7; 2 Cor. 7:11; πόσω, adverbially before a comparative, How much? By how much? Mt. 7:11; 10:25; Heb. 10:29; of time, How long? Mk. 9:21; of number, pl. How many? Mt. 15:34; 16:9, 10

πόσος,

Ion. κόσος, η, ον, interrog. Adj.

of what quantity?

1 of Number, how many? κόσοι τινές εἰσι οἱ Αακεδαιμόνιοι Hdt. 7.234; π. καὶ ποῖα . .; X. Mem. 4.4.7; π. χρήματα; Id. Cyr. 3.1.35; π. ἄττα δὴ ὑποδήματα Arist. EN 1133a21: with sg. Nouns, how great? how much? π. πλῆθος νεῶν; A. Pers. 334; π. τις ἀριθμός; Pl. Tht. 198c; π. χρυσίον; X. An. 7.8.1 .

2. of Distance, how far? πόσον ἄπεστιν ἐνθένδε τὸ στράτευμα; Id. Cyr. 6.3.10; π. τις ὁδὸς εἴη ib. 4.6.10; μέχρι πόσου; Anon. ap. Gell. 1.3.9, cf. E. Fr. 953.32 .
3. of Time, how long? π. τινὰ χρόνον; S. OT 558, etc.; π. χρόνου;πότε; Ar. Ach. 83 .
4. of Value, how much? πόσον δίδως; Id. Pax 1262; πόσου; at what price? Id. Ach. 812, 898, Pl. Revelation 20:1-15 b, etc.; ἐπὶ πόσῳ; ib. 41a, X. Cyr. 3.1.43; ἐκ πόσου is f.l. for ὁπόσου in D. 50.30 .
5. of Degree, how great? πόθος; πόσος τις; Ar. Ra. 55; πόσης γέμει σωφροσύνης; Pl. Smp. 216d: neut. Adv. πόσον; πόσα; to what amount? Ar. Ec. 399, X. Mem. 2.2 . 8.

II ποσός, ή, όν, indef. Adj. of a certain quantity or magnitude, Gorg. Fr. 3D., Pl. Sph. 245d, etc.; ποσὰ τῶν περιφερῶν a certain number of . ., Epicur. Ephesians 2 p.50U.; ἐπὶ ποσόν for a certain time, Plb. 2.34.15, etc.; οὐδ’ ἐπὶ π. Id. 1.1.2; κατὰ ποσόν to a certain extent, Vett.Val. 81.22 .

2. ποσόν, τό, = ποσότης, Pl. Phlb. 24c, 24d, Arist. Cat. 4b20, Metaph. 1020a7, etc.; κατὰ ποσόν in point of quantity, Id. EN 1158b31 .

III Adv. ποσῶς Corn. ND 34, Ruf. Oss. 18, Sor. Fract. 2, Vett.Val. 238.24, S.E. P. 1.120, 227 . (I.- E. q[uglide]oty-os, cf.Lat. quot, Skt. káti ‘how many?’)

Question 65

στρατιώτης, -οῦ, ὁ

Answer 65

a soldier

soldier
Definition:
a soldier, Mt. 8:9; 27:27; met. a soldier of Christ, 2 Tim. 2:3

στρᾰτῐώτ-ης, ου, ὁ: voc. στρατιῶτα Philem. 155: ( στρατιά ): —

soldier, Hdt. 4.134, al., Cratin. 143, IG 12.60.12, etc.; στρατιώτας καταλέγειν Ar. Ach. 1065; ς. μισθωσάμενος, of Pisistratus, Arist. Ath. 15.2; ἄνδρες ς ., in a speech, Th. 7.61; collectively, in sg., ὁ πολὺς ὅμιλος καὶ ς . Id. 6.24; also of soldiers serving on ship-board, Id. 2.88 .

2. later, professional soldier,= μισθοφόρος, Arist. EN 1116b15, cf. Archestr. Fr. 61; soldier in Ptolemaic and Roman Egypt, PEnteux. 54.8 (iii B.C.), OGI 86.12 (iii B.C.), PLond. 1.142.4 (i A.D.), etc.; Κάσσανδρος τῶν Ἀπολλωνίου στρατιωτῶν PCair.Zen. 301.1 (iii B.C.) .

II water-lettuce ( ς. ἔνυδρος Gal. 12.131 ), Pistia Stratiotes, Meno Iatr. 6.22, Dsc. 4.101; ς. χιλιόφυλλος, Achillea Millefolium, yarrow or milfoil, ib.102.

Question 66

χήρα

Answer 66

a widow

χήρ-α,

Ion. χήρη, ἡ,

widow, χῆραι γυναῖκες Il. 2.289; μήτηρ χ. 22.499; μὴ παῖδ’ ὀρφανικὸν θήῃς χ. τε γυναῖκα 6.432; λείπειν τινὰ χ. ἐν μεγάροισιν 22.484, 24.725, cf. S. Aj. 653, E. Andr. 348, Tr. 380; χήρας δὲ γυναῖκας ἐποίησαν Lys. 2.71; as a name of Hera, Paus. 8.22.2 (χῆραι· αἱ μὴ ἔχουσαι ἄνδρας, Hsch.; ἡ μονωθεῖσα ἀπ’ ἀνδρὸς χ. Poll. 3.47).

2. Com., of a dish, widowed, i.e. without sauce, Sotad.Com. 1.26.
3. later masc. χῆρος, widower, Arist. HA 612b34 (of birds), Call. Epigr. 17, Gramm. post Hdn. Epim. 286.

II χῆρος, α, ον, Adj, metaph., bereaved, χῆρα μέλαθρα E. Alc. 862 (anap.); μάνδραι Call. Cer. 106; βίος Epigr.Gr. 406.13 (Iconium); εὐνή IG 14.1389 i 12; δόμος Call. Epigr. 22; δρυμοὶ χ. bereft of men, AP 9.84 (Antiphan.): c. gen., Il. 6.408; φάρσος.. στελεοῦ χῆρον ἐλαϊνέου AP 6.297 (Phanias), cf. Vett.Val. 117.6; χήρους γυναικῶν οἰκεῖν Str. 7.3.4; τὰ χῆρα φρονήσεως Ph. 1.601; ναῦς ὕδατος χ. Ael. NA 13.28. (Cf. χωρίς, χατίζω, Skt. jáhâti ‘abandon, renounce’.)

Question 67

γνωρίζω

Answer 67

γνωρίσω, ἐγνώρισα, -, -, ἐγνωρίσθην

to tell, reveal, make known

Definition:
to make known, reveal, declare, Jn. 15:15; 17:26, et al.; to know, Phil. 1:22

γνωρ-ίζω,

fut. Att. -ῐῶ: pf. ἐγνώρικα Pl. Phdr. 262b: —

I

1. make known, point out, A. Pr. 487, LXX 1 Kings 10:8, al., Rom. 0.22: — in this sense mostly Pass., become known, Pl. R. 428a, Arist. APr. 64b35; τὰ γνωριζόμενα μέρη τῆς οἰκουμένης Plb. 2.37.4.
2. c. acc. pers., make known, τινά τινι Plu. Fab. 21; commend, τινὰ τῇ βουλῇ ἰσχυρῶς App. Mac. 9.6.
3. certify a person’s identity, BGU 581.13 (ii A. D.), POxy. 1024.18 (ii A. D.).

II

1. gain knowledge of, become acquainted with, discover, c. part., τοὔργον ὡς οὐ γνωριοῖμί σου τόδε δόλῳ προσέρπον S. OT 538; τὰ καλὰ γ. οἱ εὐφυέες πρὸς αὐτά Democr. 56, cf. E. Alc. 564, Th. 7.44, Arist. Ph. 184a12: — Pass., Th. 5.103, Men. 72; γ. περί τι or περί τινος Arist. Metaph. 1005b8, 1037a16.
2. become acquainted with, τινά Pl. La. 181c, D. 35.6; τινὰς ὁποῖοί τινές εἰσι Isoc. 2.28: — Pass., ἐγνωρισμένοι αὐτῷ being made acquainted with him, ibid.; πρός τινος Luc. Tim. 5.

Question 68

ἕνεκα (+ gen)

Answer 68

for the sake of, on account of, for this reason, because

ἕνεκα,

Il. 1.110, etc., or ἕνεκεν (twice in Hom., Od. 17.288, 310, rare in Trag., as E. Med. 999 (lyr.), and early Prose, Th. 6.2, X. HG 2.1.14, Pl. Smp. 210e; in Com., Men. Epit. 330; twice in fourth-cent. Att. Inscrr., IG 2.987A2, 611b13, but prevalent in later Inscrr., cf. SIG 577.7 (Milet., iii/ii B.C.); in late Prose, Sch. Pi. O. 7.10), , Ion., and poet. εἵνεκα (also in Pl., Lg. 778d, al.), or εἵνεκεν (both forms in Hdt. and Hp. and not uncommon in codd. of later writers; εἵνεκεν B. 12.136, Pi. I. 8(7).35 codd.; εἵνεκε Aret. CA 1.2, f.l. in Hdt. 7.133): ἕνεκε SIG 333.14 (Samos, iv B.C.), Supp.Epigr. 1.351.10 (ibid.), CIG 3655.18 (Cyzicus, iii/ii B.C.): Aeol. ἔννεκα Alc. Supp. 9.1, IG 12(2).258.8 (Lesbos, i A.D.), but ἔνεκα ib. 11(4).1064b32 (Delos), 12(1).645a38 (Nesus): late ἕνεκον JHS 37.108 (Lydia), etc.: — Pr with gen., usu. after its case; also before, Il. 1.94, B. 12.136, Hdt. 3.122, etc. When it follows its case, it is sometimes separated from it by several words, as in Hdt. 1.30, D. 20.88, etc.

I

1 on account of, Τρώων πόλιν.. ἧς εἵνεκ’ ὀϊζύομεν κακὰ πολλά Il. 14.89, etc.; ὕβριος εἵνεκα τῆσδε 1.214; τοῦδ’ ἕνεκα for this, ib. 110; ὧν ἕ. wherefore, 20.21; τίνος ἕ. βλάβης; A. Fr. 181; παῖσαι ἄνδρας ἕνεκεν ἀταξίας X. An. 5.8.13; στεφανοῦσθαι ἀρετῆς ἕνεκα Aeschin. 3.10; for the sake of, τοῦ ἕ.; Pl. Prt. 31c b; τῶν δὲ εἵνεκα, ὅκως.., or ἵνα.., Hdt. 8.35, 40; κολακεύειν ἕ. μισθοῦ X. HG 5.1.17; διὰ νόσον ἕ. ὑγιείας by reason of sickness for the sake of health, Pl. Ly. 218e, cf. Smp. 185b; τὸ οὗ ἕ. the final cause, Arist. Ph. 194a27, Metaph. 983a31; τὸ οὗ ἕνεκεν Id. Ph. 243a3, Metaph. 1059a35.

2. as far as regards, ἐμοῦ γ’ ἕνεκα as far as depends on me, Ar. Ach. 386, D. 20.14; τοῦ φυλάσσοντος εἵνεκεν Hdt. 1.42; εἵνεκεν χρημάτων as for money, Id. 3.122, etc.; ἕνεκά γε φιλονικίας Pl. R. 548d, cf. 329b; ἐμπειρίας μὲν ἄρα ἕ. ib. 582d; ὁμοῖοι τοῖς τυφλοῖς ἂν ἦμεν ἕνεκά γε τῶν ἡμετέρων ὀφθαλμῶν X. Mem. 4.3.3.
3. in consequence of, εἵνεκα τέχνας by force of art, AP 9.729.
4. pleon., ἀμφὶσοὔνεκα S. Ph. 554c odd.; ὅσον ἀπὸ βοῆς ἕ. as far as shouting went, Th. 8.92, X. HG 2.4.31; τίνος χάριν ἕ.; Pl. Lg. 701d, cf. Plt. 302b.

II

1. Conj., for οὕνεκα (q.v.), because, h.Ven. 199, Call. Aet. 3.1.6, Fr. 287.
2. εἵνεκεν, = ὁθούνεκα, that, Pi. I. 8(7).35 codd.

εἵνεκεν see ἕνεκα, ἕνεκεν.

STRONGS NT 1752: ἕνεκα ἕνεκα (only before consonants (Rec. three times (Griesbach twice) out of twenty-five)), and ἕνεκεν (R G 19 times, L (out of 26) 21 times, Tr 20, WH 18, T 17), or in a form at first Ionic εἵνεκεν (Luke 4:18 (Rec. ἕν.; T WH; Acts 28:20 T WH); 2 Corinthians 3:10 (R G L marginal reading ἕνεκεν); 2 Corinthians 7:12 (R G), both the last forms alike before consonants and vowels (cf. under the word Nu; Winers Grammar, § 5, 1 d. 1; Buttmann, 10 (9); Krüger (dialects), § 68, 19, 1; WHs Appendix, p. 173)), a preposition followed by the genitive, on account of, for the sake of, for: Matthew 5:10; Matthew 16:25; Matthew 19:29; Mark 8:35; Luke 6:22.; Acts 28:20; Romans 8:36; 2 Corinthians 3:10; ἕνεκεν τούτου, for this cause, therefore, Matthew 19:5; τούτων, Acts 26:21; τίνος ἕνεκεν, for what cause, wherefore, Acts 19:32; before τοῦ with an infinitive expressing purpose (Winers Grammar, 329 (309); Buttmann, 266 (228)), 2 Corinthians 7:12; οὗ εἵνεκεν, because, Luke 4:18; cf. Meyer at the passage

Question 69

μήποτε

Answer 69

never, at no time, lest perchance

never, otherwise, that…not
Definition:
can function as an adverb, BAGD lists it as a negative part., conj., and interrogative part., same signif. and usage as μή, Mt. 4:6; 13:15; Heb. 9:17; also, whether, Lk. 3:15

that … not, lest, whether perhaps, whether or not, in no way, perhaps

μήποτε or μή ποτε,

Ion. μή κοτε (v. infr. 11):

I

1. as Adv. never, on no account, after ὡς, A. Pr. 205, Eu. 882; after εἰ, Id. Ch. 182, etc.: c. inf., Id. Eu. 977, Supp. 617; esp. in oaths, never, ὀμοῦμαι, μή ποτε τῆς εὐνῆς ἐπιβήμεναι Il. 9.133, 275; ἐπεκέκλετ’ Ἐρινῦς, μή ποτε.. ἐφέσσεσθαι ib. 455; in aposiopesis, ἢ μήπορ’ ἆρ’.. Men. Sam. 97: in orat. obliq., Hes. Op. 86.
2. in prohibition or warning, with aor. subj., μή ποτε καὶ σὺ.. ὀλέσσῃς Od. 19.81, etc.: with inf. for imper., 11.441.
3. in later Gr., perhaps, Arist. EN 1172a33, LXX Genesis 24:5, Aristeas 15, Ph. 1.13, Arr. Epict. 3.22.80, Plu. 2.106d, A.D. Pron. 18.4.

II as Conj., lest ever, αἰσχυνόμενοι φάτιν ἀνδρῶν.., μή ποτέ τις εἴπῃσι Od. 21.324, al.; οὐδαμὰ ἐλπίσας μή κοτε ἄρα.. ἐλάσῃ Hdt. 1.77, cf. 8.53.

μήποτε (from μή and πότε) (μή πότε (separately) L WH (except Matthew 25:9, see below) Tr (except 2 Timothy 2:25)), differing from οὔποτε as μή does from οὐ; (from Homer down). Accordingly it is:

1. a particle of Negation; not ever, never: ἐπεί μήποτε ἰσχύει, since it is never of force, because the writer thinks that the very idea of its having force is to be denied, Hebrews 9:17 (where WH text μή τότε), on which see Winers Grammar, 480 (447), cf. Buttmann, 353 (304); but others refer, this passage to 3 a. below.
2. a prohibitory conjunction; lest ever, lest at any time, lest haply, (also written separately μή πότε ((see at the beginning), especially when the component parts retain each its distinctive force; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch., p. 129f; Ellendt, Lex. Sophocles 2:107. In the N. T. use of this particle the notion of time usual to πότε seems to recede before that of contingency, lest perchance)), so that it refers to the preceding verb and indicates the purpose of the designated action (Winer’s Grammar, § 56, 2): with a subjunctive present Luke 12:58; with a subjunctive aorist, Matthew 4:6 and Luke 4:11, from Psalm 90:12 () (where the Sept. for פֶּן); Matthew 5:25 ((cf. below)); Matthew 7:6 (R G); and Acts 28:27 (both from Isaiah 6:10, where the Sept. for פֶּן); Matthew 13:29 (οὐ namely, θέλω); Matthew 15:32; Matthew 27:64; Mark 4:12; Luke 14:12; with ἵνα prefixed, Luke 14:29; with a future indicative (see Buttmann, § 139, 7, cf. also, p. 368 (315)
   d. ): (Matthew 7:6 L T Tr WH; (cf. )); Mark 14:2; (Luke 12:58 L T Tr WH). after verbs of fearing, taking care (Winers Grammar, as above; Buttmann, § 139, 48): with subjunctive aorist — so after προσέχω, to take heed, lest etc., Luke 21:34; Hebrews 2:1 (Sir. 11:33); so that an antecedent φοβούμενοι or προσέχοντες must be mentally supplied, Acts 5:39; μήποτε οὐκ ἀρκέσῃ, lest perchance there be not enough (so that οὐκ ἀρκέσῃ forms one idea, and φοβούμεθα must be supplied before μήποτε), Matthew 25:9 R T WH marginal reading; but L Tr WH text, together with Meyer, et al., have correctly restored μήποτε (namely, τοῦτο γενέσθω (Winer’s Grammar, § 64, 7 a.)) οὐ μή ἀρκέσῃ, i. e. “Not so! There will in no wise be enough” (see μή, IV. 2); cf. Bornemann in the Studien und Kritiken for 1843, p. 143f; (but all the editors above named remove the punctuation mark after μήποτε; in which case it may be connected directly with the words which follow it and translated (with R. V.) ‘peradventure there will not be enough’; cf. Buttmann, § 148, 10, especially, p. 354 (304) note. For additional examples of μήποτε in this sense (cf. Aristotle, eth. Nic. 10, 10, p. 1179a, 24; with indicative, ibid., pp. 1172{a}, 33; 1173{a} 22, etc.), see Sophocles Lexicon, under the word; Alexander Buttmann (1873) in his translation of Apoll. Dysk., index under the word; (cf. Liddell and Scott, under the word μή, Buttmann, 9)). after φοβοῦμαι, with present subjunctive Hebrews 4:1; so that φοβούμενος must be supplied before it, Luke 14:8. after βλέπειν with a future indicative (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 56, 2 b. α.; Buttmann, 243 (209)), Hebrews 3:12.
3. a particle of interrogation accompanied with doubt (see μή, III.), whether ever, whether at any time; whether perchance, whether haply, (German doch nicht etwa; ob nicht etwa);
   a. in a direct question introduced by ἐπεί, for, else (see ἐπεί, 2 under the end): so according to the not improbable interpretation of some (e. g. L WH marginal reading, Delitzsch) in Hebrews 9:17, see in 1 above. In the remaining N. T. passages so used that the inquirer, though he doubts and expects a negative answer, yet is inclined to believe what he doubtfully asks about; thus, in a direct question, in John 7:26.
   b. in indirect questions; α. with the optative (where the words are regarded as the thought of someone (Winers Grammar, § 41 b. 4 c.; Buttmann, § 139, 60)): Luke 3:15. (See β.) β. with the subjunctive: 2 Timothy 2:25 (R G L (cf. Buttmann, 46 (40));. but T Tr WH text give the optative), where μήποτε κτλ. depend on the suppressed idea διαλογιζόμενος (cf. Buttmann, § 139, 62 at the end; Winer’s Grammar, as above).

Question 70

προσέχω

Answer 70

(προσεῖχον), -, προσέσχον, προσέσχηκα, -, -

apply the mind to a thing (potentially addictively or obsessively), focus, observe, consider, attend to, give heed to, turn to, to be aware, to be cautious, be on guard, to watch out; to provide for, take care of

Definition:
to have in addition; to hold to, bring near;, absol. to apply the mind to a thing, to give heed to, attend to, observe, consider, Acts 5:35; Heb. 2:1; 2 Pet. 1:19; to take care of, provide for, Acts 20:28; when followed by ἀπό, μή, or μήποτε, to beware of, take heed of, guard against, Mt. 6:1; 7:15; to assent to, yield credence to, follow, adhere or be attached to, Acts 8:6, 10, 11; 16:14; to give one’s self up to, be addicted to, engage in, be occupied with, 1 Tim. 1:4, 3:8

to bring to, bring near
to bring a ship to land, and simply to touch at, put in
to turn the mind to, attend to be attentive
to a person or a thing: of caring for, providing for
to attend to one’s self, i.e. to give heed to one’s self
give attention to, take heed
to apply one’s self to, attach one’s self to, hold or cleave to a person or a thing
to be given or addicted to
to devote thought and effort to

προσέχω

( Cypr. ποέχω (q.v.)) and προσίσχω: aor. προσέσχον: —

hold to, offer, προσέσχε μαζὸν [δράκοντι ] A. Ch. 531; hold against, [ τὴν ἀσπίδα] προσῖσχε πρὸς τὸ δάπεδον Hdt. 4.200; apply, χλιάσματα Hp. Mul. 2.129 .

2. π. ναῦν bring a ship to port, προσσχόντες τὰς νέας Hdt. 9.99; Μαλέᾳ προσίσχων πρῷραν E. Or. 362; τίς σε προσέσχε . . χρεία; brought thee to land here? S. Ph. 236; [ναῦν] πρὸς τὴν γῆν προσσχεῖν D.C. 42.4: more freq. without ναῦν, put in, touch at a place, προσσχεῖν ἐς Τύρον, ἐς τὴν Σάμον, etc., Hdt. 1.2, 3.48, al.; πρὸς τὴν Σίφνον προσῖσχον ib. 58: c. dat. loci, π. τῇ γῇ Id. 4.156; τῆς νήσου τοῖς ἐσχάτοις Th. 4.30; Λιβύῃ κατὰ τὴν Μαυρουσίαν Plu. Sert. 7: c. acc. loci, τίνι στόλῳ προσέσχες τήνδε γῆν; S. Ph. 244, cf. Plb. 2.9.2: abs., land, Hdt. 2.182, etc.: with words added, πλέων δι’ Ἑλλησπόντου π. ἐς Κύζικον Id. 4.76, cf. 6.119; ναυσὶ προσσχεῖν Th. 4.11; τῇ νηῒ π. εἰς Ῥόδον D. 56.9; ὡς γῇ προσέξων τὸ σῶμα, of a shipwrecked sailor, Plu. 2.1103e.
3. turn to or towards a thing, π. ὄμμα E. HF 931: mostly, π. τὸν νοῦν turn one’s mind, attention to a thing, be intent on it, τοῖς ἀναπαίστοις Ar. Eq. 503; ἐμοί ib. 1014, cf. 1064, X. An. 2.4.2, etc.; π. τὸν νοῦν τινι give heed to him, pay court to him, Id. Cyr. 5.5.40; ἑαυτῷ π. τὸν νοῦν to be thinking with himself, in a fit of abstraction, Pl. Smp. 174d; also πρὸς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ κατηγορίαν π. τὸν νοῦν Antipho 3.4.1; πρὸς τούτοις Ar. Nu. 1010; π. τὸν νοῦν μὴ . . take heed lest . ., Pl. R. 432b, etc.: abs., πρόσεχε τὸν νοῦν Cratin. 284, Pherecr. 154, Ar. Pl. 113, etc.; δεῦρο τὸν νοῦν προσέχετε Id. Nu. 575, cf. Pl. Smp. 217b; προσεχέτω τὸν νοῦν let him take heed, as a warning, Ar. Nu. 1122; also τὴν γνώμην π . Id. Ec. 600, Th. 1.95, 2.11, 5.26, 7.15; π. τὴν διάνοιαν ὡς πράξει μεγίστῃ Plu. Numbers 14:1-45; but περὶ τούτου τῇ διανοίᾳ π . IG 7.2225.44 (ii B.C.); π. τῇ διανοίᾳ εἰς τὸ ῥῆμα Κυρίου LXX Exodus 9:21 .
4. without τὸν νοῦν, μὴ πρόσισχε . . βουκόλοις Cratin. 286; σαυτῷ π . Ar. Ec. 294 (lyr.), X. Mem. 3.7.9; π. ἑαυτοῖς ἀπό τινος to be on one’s guard against, Ev.Luke 12:1; πρόσεχ’ οἷς φράζω attend to what I shall tell you, Mnesim. 4.21 (anap.), cf. D. 10.3, etc.; π. τῶν ἐμπείρων . . ταῖς ἀναποδείκτοις φάσεσι Arist. EN 1143b11; τῷ πολλῷ χρόνῳ Id. Pol. 1264a2; π. τοῖς νόμοις Id. Fr. 539; τοῖς χιλιάρχοις take orders from them, Plb. 6.37.7; also π. ἐπί τινι LXX Genesis 4:5 : abs., πρόσεχε, κἀγώ σοι φράσω Athenio 1.8; προσέχων ἀκουσάτω attentively, D. 21.8; πρόσσχες An. Ox. 1.121: also c. acc., προσέχων τε ταῦτα Critias 25.19 D.; οὐ προσέχει τὰ πράγματα Philem. 73.4; π. νόμον θεοῦ LXX Is. 1.11, cf. Exodus 34:11 : also π. ἀπὸ τῶν ἁγίων, τῶν γραμματέων, ib. Leviticus 22:2, Ev.Luke 20:46; π. τοῦ μὴ φαγεῖν αἷμα LXX De. 12.23; π. ἵνα μὴ μαστιγωθῇς ib. 2 Chronicles 25:16 . devote oneself to a thing, c. dat., γυμνασίοισι Hdt. 9.33; τοῖς ἔργοις Ar. Pl. 553; τοῖς ναυτικοῖς Th. 1.15; τῷ πολέμῳ Id. 7.4; πλούτῳ Pl. Alc. 1.122d; τούτῳ τῷ ἀγῶνι Lycurg. 10; τοῖς κοινοῖς, γεωργίᾳ καὶ εἰρήνῃ, Plu. Cat.Mi. 19, Hdn. 2.11.3, etc.: — abs., ἐντεταμένως, προθύμως π ., Hdt. 1.18, 8.128 .
5. continue, ἡ νοῦσος, ἡ ὀδύνη π ., Hp. Int. 11, 7 .
6. Med., attach oneself to a thing, cling, cleave to it, ὅ τι πρόσσχοιτο τοῦ πηλοῦ τῷ κοντῷ Hdt. 2.136; ὥσπερ λεπὰς προσεχόμενος τῷ κίονι Ar. V. 105, cf. Pl. 1096; τῷ τοίχῳ Arist. HA 555a1: abs., οἱ πολύποδες οὕτω π. ὥστε μὴ ἀποσπᾶσθαι ib. 534b27 . metaph., devote oneself to the service of any one, esp. a god, Pi. P. 6.51 (dub.).
7. Pass., to be held fast by a thing, ὑπό τινος E. Ba. 756; to be attached to it, πρὸς τῷ στήθει Hp. Art. 14; πρὸς τῷ δένδρῳ προσέχεσθαι, of gum, stick to, Thphr. HP 9.4.4: metaph., to be implicated in, τῷ ἄγει Th. 1.127 .

II have besides or in addition, δεῖ καὶ τοῦτο προσέχειν τὸ μάθημα Pl. R. 521d, cf. D. 31.7, etc.

προσέχω; imperfect προσεῖχον; perfect προσέσχηκα; (present middle 3 person singular προσέχεται (1 Timothy 6:3 Tdf.)); to turn to (cf. πρός, IV. 1), that is,

1. to bring to, bring near; thus very frequent in Greek writings from Herodotus down with ναῦν (quite as often omitting the ναῦν) and a dative of place, or followed by πρός with an accusative of place, to bring a ship to land, and simply to touch at, put in.
   2.
   a. τόν νοῦν, to turn the mind to, attend to, be attentive: τίνι, to a person or thing, Aristophanes eqq. 503; Plato, Demosthenes, Polybius, Josephus, Lucian, Plutarch, others; once so in the Bible, viz. Job 7:17. The simple προσέχειν τίνι (the Sept. for הִקְשִׁיב, also for הֶאֱזִין), with τόν νοῦν omitted, is often used in the same sense from Xenophon down; so in the N. T. (cf. Winers Grammar, 593 (552); Buttmann, 144 (126)): Acts 8:6; Acts 16:14; Hebrews 2:1; 2 Peter 1:19 (1 Macc. 7:11; 4 Macc. 1:1; Wis. 8:12); in the sense of caring for, providing for, Acts 20:28.
   b. προσέχω ἐμαυτῷ, to attend to oneself, i. e. to give heed to oneself (the Sept. for נִשְׁמָר, to guard oneself, i. e. to beware, Genesis 24:6; Exodus 10:28; Deuteronomy 4:9; Deuteronomy 6:12, etc.): Luke 17:3; Acts 5:35 (cf. Buttmann, 337 (290); Winers Grammar, 567 (518); yet see ἐπί, B. 2 f. α.); with the addition of ἀπό τίνος, to be on one’s guard against, beware of, a thing (cf. Buttmann, § 147, 3 (ἀπό, I. 3 b.)): Luke 12:1 (Tobit 4:12; (Test xii. Patr., test. Dan 6)); also without the dative προσέχειν ἀπό τίνος: Matthew 7:15; Matthew 10:17; Matthew 16:6, 11; Luke 20:46, (Sir. 6:13 Sir. 11:33 Sir. 17:14 Sir. 18:27; (‘Teaching’ etc. 6, 3 [ET]; 12, 5 [ET])); followed by μή with an infinitive, to take heed lest one do a thing, Matthew 6:1; ἐμαυτῷ, μήποτε with the subjunctive Luke 21:34; absolutely to give attention, take heed: Sir. 13:13; the Epistle of Barnabas 4, 9 [ET]; 7, 4 [ET], 6. (9); followed by πῶς, the Epistle of Barnabas 7, 7 [ET]; by the interrogative τί, ibid. 15, 4 [ET]; ἵνα, ibid. 16, 8 [ET]; ἵνα μήποτε, the Epistle of Barnabas 4, 13 [ET] (variant; ἵνα μή, 2 Chronicles 25:16); (μήποτε, the Epistle of Barnabas 4, 14).
2. namely, ἐμαυτόν, to apply oneself to, attach oneself to, hold or cleave to a person or a thing (R. V. mostly give heed): with the dative of a person to one, Acts 8:10; 1 Timothy 4:1; τῷ ἐπισκόπω προσεχ. καί τῷ πρεσβυτεριω καί διακόνοις, Ignatius ad Philad. 7, 1 [ET]; ad Polycarp, 6, 1 [ET]; with the dative of a thing, μύθοις, 1 Timothy 1:4; Titus 1:14; (middle ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις, 1 Timothy 6:3 Tdf. (others προσέρχεται, which see b. β.)); to be given or addicted to: οἴνῳ, 1 Timothy 3:8 (τρυφή, Julian Caesar 22 (p. 326, Spanh. edition); τρυφή καί μέθηl, Polyaen. strateg. 8, 56); to devote thought and effort to: τῇ ἀναγνώσει κτλ., 1 Timothy 4:13; τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ (A. V. give attendance), Hebrews 7:13 (ναυτικοις, Thucydides 1, 15; for other examples from Greek writings see Passow, under the word, 3 c.; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, 4 b.)).

Question 71

ἀναιρέω

Answer 71

ἀνελῶ, ἀνεῖλα ορ ἀνει%λον, -, -, ἀνῃρέθην

I take up; kill

to kill, put to death; (mid.) take for oneself
Definition:
pr. to take up, lift, as from the ground; to take off, put to death, kill, murder, Mt. 2:16; to take away, abolish, abrogate, Heb. 10:9; mid. to take up infants in order to bring them up, Acts 7:21

to take up, to lift up (from the ground)
to take up for myself as mine
to own (an exposed infant)
to take away, abolish
to do away with or abrogate customs or ordinances
to put out of the way, kill slay a man

ἀναιρέω,

pf. ἀνῄρηκα (ἀνειρ -dub. in Com.Adesp. 18.6D.): (v. αἱρέω): —

I

1. take up, ἀνελόντες ἀπὸ χθονός having raised the victim from the ground, so as to cut its throat (cf. αὐερύω), Od. 3.453.
2. take up and carry off, bear away, esp. prizes, ἀέθλια Il. 23.736, cf. 551; στεφανηφόρους ἀγῶνας ἀναραιρηκότα Hdt. 5.102; Ὀλύμπια ἀναραιρηκώς 6.36, cf. B. 1.1.
3. simply, take up, παῖδα Pi. P. 9.61; τὰ ὀστᾶ Th. 1.126.
4. take up bodies for burial, ἀνελόντες καὶ κατακλαύσαντες Ar. V. 386, cf. X. An. 6.4.9; more common in Med., v. infr. B. 1.3.

II

1. make away with, destroy, of men, kill, Hdt. 4.66; πολλοὺς ἀναιρῶν A. Ch. 990; σὲ μὲν ἡμετέρα ψ[]φος ἀ. E. Andr. 517; θανάτοις ἀ. Pl. Lg. 870d; ἐκ πολιτείας τοιαῦτα θηρία ἀ. Din. 3.19, etc.
2. of things, abrogate, annul, ὅρους ἀνεῖλον πολλαχῇ πεπηγότας Sol. 36.4; νόμον Aeschin. 3.39; διαθήκας Isaiah 1:14; στήλας And. 1.103; ἀταξίαν D. 3.35, etc.; ἐκ μέσου ἀ. βλασφημίας Id. 10.36; τηλικαύτην ἀνελόντας μαρτυρίαν Id. 28.5; abolish, τὰς τῶν παρανόμων γραφάς Arist. Ath. 29.4: — Pass., ἀνῄρηνται ὀλιγαρχίαι X. Cyr. 1.1.1.
3. destroy an argument, confute it, Arist.; esp. confute directly, opp. διαιρέω (v. ἀναίρεσις 11.4), Arist. SE 176b36, al.; ἀ. ἑαυτὸν confute oneself, Olymp. in Mete. 25.14.
4. in argument, do away with, τὰς ὑποθέσεις Pl. R. 533c; deny, opp. τιθέναι, S.E. P. 1.192, al.

III

1. appoint, ordain, of oracle’s answer to inquiry, ὁ θεὸς αὐτοῖς ἀ. παραδοῦναι Th. 1.25; οὓς ἂν ὁ θεὸς ἀνέλῃ Pl. Lg. 865d, cf. 642d; ἀνεῖλεν θεοῖς οἷς ἔδει θύειν X. An. 3.1.6: also c. acc. et inf., ἢν τὸ χρηστήριον ἀνέλῃ μιν βασιλέα εἶναι Hdt. 1.13, etc.: abs., answer, give a response, ἀνεῖλε τὸ χρηστήριον ibid.; ἀ. τι περί τινος give an oracle about a thing, Pl. Lg. 914a; μαντείας ἀ. D. Ephesians 1:16 : — Pass., Id. 21.51. Med., take up for oneself, take up, pick up, οὐλοχύτας ἀνέλοντο Il. 1.449; ἀσπίδα, ἔγχος, 11.32, 13.296; κυνέην Hdt. 1.84; δίκτυα Arist. HA 602b9; achieve, win, ἀ. τὴν Ὀλυμπιάδα, τὴν νίκην, Hdt. 6.70, 103, D.H. 5.47; generally, ἀ. ἐπιφροσύνας take thought, Od. 19.22; εὐδαιμονίαν Pi. N. 7.56, cf. Thgn. 281; in bad sense, ὄνειδος σπαργάνων ἀ. S. OT 1035; εἴ σ’ ἀνελοίμην if I should take thee into my service, Od. 18.357; σῖτα ἀ. get forage, Hdt. 4.128; ποινὴν τῆς Αἰσώπου ψυχῆς ἀ. exact vengeance for.., Id. 2.134.
2. take up and carry off, snatch, κούρας ἀνέλοντο θύελλαι Od. 20.66; ἀναιρούμενος οἴκαδε φέρειν Pl. Lg. 914b; ἀνείλατο (for the form cf. Hsch.) δαίμων Epigr.Gr. 404.1.
3. take up for burial (cf. A. 1.4), Hdt. 4.14, Th. 4.97, etc.; πατέρων ἀρίστων σώμαθ’ ὧν ἀνειλόμην E. Supp. 1167; τὰ ὀστέα Hdt. 2.41; of the ashes of the dead, πυρὸς ἀ. ἄθλιον βάρος S. El. 1140; of one still living, E. Hel. 1616, X. HG 6.4.13; τοὺς ναυαγούς ib. 1.7.4, cf. 11; τοὺς δέκα στρατηγοὺς τοὺς οὐκ ἀνελομένους τοὺς ἐκ τῆς ναυμαχίας Pl. Ap. 32b: — Pass., ἀναιρεθέντων τῶν νεκρῶν.. ὑγιὴς ἀνῃρέθη Id. R. 614b, al.
4. take up in one’s arms, Il. 16.8: hence, take up new-born children, own them, Plu. Ant. 36, cf. Ar. Nu. 531; take up an exposed child, Men. Sam. 159, cf. BGU 1110, etc.
5. conceive in the womb, c. acc., Hdt. 2.108, 6.69.
6. take up money at interest, D. 50.17.
7. take up a lease, Michel 1359 (Chios). cf. BCH [*]7.204.

8.

I withdraw money from a bank, etc., αὐτὸς ἀνελέσθω IG 5(2).159.

II

1. take upon oneself, undertake, πόνους Hdt. 6.108; πόλεμόν τινι war against one, Id. 5.36; πολέμους ἀναιρούμεσθα E. Supp. 492, cf. D. 1.7; ἀ. ἔχθραν Pl. Phdr. 233c, D. 6.20; ἀ. δημόσιον ἔργον undertake, contract for the execution of a work, Pl. Lg. 921d, cf. a, b, D. 53.21.
2. accept as one’s own, adopt, γνώμην Hdt. 7.16. ά; τὰ οὐνόματα τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἥκοντα 2.52; ἀ. φιλοψυχίην entertain a love for life, 6.29.

III rescind, cancel, συγγραφήν, συνθήκας, etc., D. 34.31, 48.46, IG 7.3171 (Orchom. Boeot., iii B. C.).

ἀναιρέω, (ῶ; future ἀνελῶ, 2 Thessalonians 2:8 (L T Tr WH text cf. Judith 7:13; Dionysius Halicarnassus 11, 18; Diodorus Siculus 2, 25; cf. Winers Grammar, 82 (78); (Buttmann, 53 (47); Veitch, under the word αἱρέω, “perhaps late έ῾λω)), for the usual ἀναιρήσω; 2 aorist ἀνεῖλον; 2 aorist middle ἀνειλόμην (but ἀνείλατο Acts 7:21, ἀνεῖλαν Acts 10:39, ἀνείλατε Acts 2:23, in G L T Tr WH, after the Alex. form, cf. Winers Grammar, 73f (71f); Buttmann, 39 (34)f (see αἱρέω); passive, present ἀναιροῦμαι; 1 aorist ἀνῃρέθην;

1. to take up, to lift up (from the ground); middle to take up for myself as value, to own (an exposed infant): Acts 7:21; (so ἀναίρεσθαι, Aristophanes nub. 531; Epictetus diss. 1, 23, 7; (Plutarch, Anton. 36, 3; fortuna Romans 8; fratern. am. 18, etc.)).
2. to take away, abolish;
   a. ordinances, established customs (to abrogate): Hebrews 10:9:
   b. a man, to put not of the way, slay, kill, (often so in the Sept. and Greek writings from (Herodotus 4, 66) Thucydides down): Matthew 2:16; Luke 22:2; Luke 23:32; Acts 2:23; Acts 5:33, 36; Acts 7:28; Acts 9:23; Acts 9:29; Acts 10:39; Acts 12:2; Acts 13:28; Acts 22:20; Acts 23:15, 21, 27; Acts 25:3; Acts 26:10; 2 Thessalonians 2:8 L T Tr WH text; ἑαυτόν, to kill oneself, Acts 16:27.

Question 72

καταλείπω

Answer 72

(κατέλειπον), καταλείψω, κατέλειψα ορ κατέλιπον, -, καταλέλειμμαι, κατελείφθην
to leave (behind), neglect; (pass.) remain (behind)
Definition:
to leave behind; to leave behind, at death, Mk. 12:19; to relinquish, let remain, Mk. 14:52; to quit, depart from, forsake, Mt. 4:13; 16:4; to neglect, Acts 6:2; to leave alone, or without assistance, Lk. 10:40; to reserve, Rom. 11:4

καταλείπω,

later καταλιμπάνω (q.v.), also καλλείπω Il. 10.238: fut. καλλείψω 14.89: aor. κάλλῐπον 12.92: aor. 1 subj. καλλείψῃς Q.S. 10.299; part. καλλείψας Nonn. D. 32.130; καταλείψας Luc. DMeretr. 7.3; Ion. iterat. καταλίπεσκε (κατελίπεσκε, καταλειπέεσκε codd.) Hdt. 4.78: pf. -λέλοιπα Ar. Lys. 736: —

Med., fut. καταλείψομαι (in pass. sense) X. An. 5.6.12: aor. 2 -ελιπόμην Hdt. 3.34, Pl. Smp. 209d (in pass. sense, Berl.Sitzb. 1927.161 (Cyrene)): —

Pass., fut. καταλειφθήσομαι Isoc. 15.7, 17.1: —

I

1. leave behind, πὰρ δ’ ἄρ’ ὄχεσφιν ἄλλον.. κάλλιπεν Il. 12.92; esp. of persons dying or going into a far country, κὰδ δέ με Χήρην λείπεις ἐν μεγάροισι 24.725; οὖρον.. κατέλειπον ἐπὶ κτεάτεσσιν Od. 15.89; οἷόν μιν Τροίηυδε κιὼν κατέλειπεν Ὀδυσσεύς 17.314; so later, τὴν στρατιὴν καταλίπεσκε ἐν τῷ προαστίῳ Hdt. 4.78; φύλακον κ. τινά Id. 1.113, cf. 2.103: — Med., καταλείπεσθαι παῖδας leave behind one, Pl. Smp. l.c., cf. Hdt. 3.34, etc.: —

Pass., to be left, remain behind, κατελέλειπτο ἐν Πέρσῃσι Hdt. 1.209, cf. 7.170, X. An. 5.6.12: c. gen., [ στρατὸς ] καταλελειμμένος τοῦ ἄλλου στρατοῦ a force left behind the rest, Hdt. 9.96.

2. bequeath, [ τόξον ] παιδὶ κάλλιπ’ ἀποθνῄσκων Od. 21.33: metaph., ἐμοὶ δ’ ὀδύνας τε γόους τε κάλλιπεν 1.243, cf. 11.279; δόκησιν ἰσχύος καὶ ξυνέσεως ἐς τὸ ἔπειτα Th. 4.18; τοῖς θρέψασι λύπας Lys. 2.70; παισὶν αἰδῶ οὐ Χρυσὸν κ. Pl. Lg. 729b: c. inf., εἰ καταλείψει μηδὲ ταφῆναι not enough to be buried with, Ar. Pl. 556: — Pass., [ Χρήματα ] καταλειφθέντα Isa 1.45. κ. διαθήκας leave a will (when going on service), Id. 9.14.
3. Med., leave in a certain state, κόλπον βαθὺν καταλιπόμενος τοῦ κιθῶνος Hdt. 6.125.

II

1. forsake, abandon, οὕτω δὴ μέμονας Τρώων πόλιν.. καλλείψειν; Il. 14.89, cf. 22.383; πολλοὺς καταλείψομεν we shall leave many upon the field, 12.226; ὤ μοι, εἰ μέν κε λίπω κάτα τεύχεα 17.91; κὰδ δέ κεν εὐχωλὴν Πριάμῳ καὶ Τρωσὶ λίποιεν Ἀργείην Ἑλένην 2.160: c. inf., κάλλιπεν οἰωνοῖσιν ἕλωρ καὶ κύρμα γενέσθαι Od. 3.271; σχεδίην ἀνέμοισι φέρεσθαι κ. 5.344; μέλη.. θηρσὶν βοράν E. Supp. 46 (lyr.); μή ποτ’ ἐμὸν κατ’ αἰῶνα λίποι θεῶν πανάγυρις A. Th. 219; μή με καταλίπῃς μόνον S. Ph. 809; οἰκίας τε καὶ ἱερά Th. 2.16; πατέρας καὶ ξυγγενεῖς ἀτίμους κ. Id. 3.58; κ. τὴν δίαιταν not to appear at the trial, Test. ap. D. 21.93.
2. let drop, give up, τὰ αὑτῶν ἔργα X. Cyn. 3.10, cf. 10.15; εἰ ἐνταῦθα -λίποιμι τὸν λόγον Isoc. 9.33.

III

1. leave remaining, ὀκτὼ μόνον X. An. 6.3.5 codd.; κ. ἄφοδον leave an exit, ib. 4.2.11: — Med., κ. στενὴν διέξοδον Pl. Ti. 73e; -λείπεσθαι ἑαυτῷ reserve for oneself, X. Mem. 1.1.8; ὑπερβολὴν οὐ κ. Χαρᾶς Plb. 16.23.4, cf. 16.25.6: — Pass., to be left, remain, τίς ἔτι ἡδονὴ -λείπεται; Lys. 2.71, cf. Hebrews 4:1, etc.; of the remainder in calculations, PPetr. 3p.326, al. (iii B.C.), Nicom. Ar. 1.13.13, etc.: impers. καταλείπεται c. inf., it remains that.., τὸν κόσμον κ. ἀθάνατον εἶμεν Aristaeusap. Stob. 1.20.6, cf. D.Chr. 37.16, etc.; -λείπεται μάχη yet remains to be fought, X. Cyr. 2.3.11.
2. leave alone, opp. περιαιρέω, Id. Mem. 3.2.4, cf. Arist. Pol. 1342a34. leave undisputed, τὰς παραλλαγάς Phld. Sign. 24: hence, admit, allow the truth of a doctrine, Id. Po. 5.34, Demetr.Lac. Herc. 1055.13: — Pass., Phld. Piet. 80. omit, c. inf., Alex.Aphr. in SE 118.10.

Question 73

ἀμπελών, -ῶνος, ὁ

Answer 73

A vineyard

ἀμπελ-ών, ῶνος, ὁ,

vineyard, Aeschin. 2.156 (v.l.), Thphr. HP 9.10.3, LXX Genesis 9:20,al., PHib. 151 (iii B. C.), PTeb. 5.99 (ii B. C.), D.S. 4.6, Plu. Mar. 21, etc.; cf. ἀμπελεών: — Dim. ἀμπελ-ωνίδιον, τό, PSI 4.375.7 (iii B. C.).

Question 74

κωλύω

Answer 74

(ἐκώλυον), -, ἐκώλυσα, -, -, ἐκωλύθην
I hinder, forbid
to hinder, stop, restrain, forbid; oppress; (pass.) to be prevented, kept from
Definition:
to hinder, restrain, prevent, Mt. 19:14; Acts 8:36; Rom. 1:13

κωλύω,

fut. - ύσω Ar. Nu. 1448: aor. ἐκώλῡσα E. Alc. 897 (anap.), Pl. Mx. 244c; pf. κεκώλῡκα Din. 1.101, Phld. Rh. 2.63 S.: —

Pass., fut. κωλυθήσομαι LXX Si. 20.2(1), Luc. VH 2.25: also in med. form - ύσομαι Th. 1.142: aor. ἐκωλύθην Id. 2.64, etc.: pf. κεκώλῡμαι ib. 37. [ ῡ always before a conson.: common before a vowel, κωλῡόμεσθα E. Ion 391, κωλῡέτω Id. Ph. 990, κωλῠεν Pi. P. 4.33, κώλῠει Alc. 55 (= Sapph. 22 Lobel), Ar. Eq. (v.infr.), Fr. 100, Anaxil. 25, Men. Epit. 10.]: —

hinder, prevent: — Constr.:

1. c. acc. et inf., κ. ἐκρέειν τὸν Νεῖλον Hdt. 2.20; κώλυεν [μιν] μεῖναι Pi.l.c.; τί δῆτα καὶ σὲ κωλύει [λαβεῖν] κέρδος; E. Fr. 794, cf. IT 507, etc.; ὅς σε κ. τὸ δρᾶν S. Ph. 1241; φεύγειν οὐδεὶς κ. νόμος D. 23.52: with neg. added (rare in Att. Prose), κ. τινὰ μὴ θανεῖν E. Ph. 1268; μὴ προσεύχεσθαι X. HG 3.2.22, etc.: — Pass., χρημάτων σπάνει Th. 1.142; τοῦ ὕδατος πιεῖν from drinking the water, Pl. R. 621b; κωλυόμεσθα μὴ μαθεῖν E. Ion 391; μὴ οὐ πονηρὸν εἶναι D.H. 2.3. rarely c. part. pro inf., κ. τινὰ πόλεμον εἰσάγοντα Id. 7.25: — Pass., μὴ κωλύωνται περαιούμενοι Th. 1.26. with relat. clause, κωλύειν εἴ τις ἐπαγγέλλεται, = τινὰ μὴ ἐπαγγέλλεσθαι, D. 4.15; ἐκωλύσαμεν, ἵνα γένησθε.. J. BJ 6.6.2.
2. c. gen. rei, κ. τινά τινος hinder one from a thing, X. HG 3.2.21, An. 1.6.2, etc.; κ. τινὰ ἀπό τινος Id. Cyr. 1.3.11, 3.3.51: — Pass., τῆς ὁρμῆς ἐκωλύθησαν Plb. 6.55.3.
3. c. acc. rei, prevent, E. IA 1390 (troch.), X. An. 4.2.24: — Pass., ἐν τούτῳ κεκωλῦσθαι ἐδόκει τὰ πράγματα Th. 2.8, cf. 4.14; ταῦτα.. μὴ ἐν ὑμῖν κωλυθῇ Id. 2.64; μηδὲ.. δαπάνῃ κεκωλύσθω let there be no hindrance by reason of expense, Id. 1.129. withhold, τι ἀπό τινος LXX Genesis 23:6, Luke 6:29.
4. c. acc. pers., hinder, Th. 1.35; τοὺς δρῶντας μοχθηρά Arist. EN 1113b26.
5. abs., οὐδ’ ὁ κωλύσων παρῆν S. Ant. 261, cf. El. 1197; εἴσ’ οἳ κωλύουσιν Ar. Pax 499; of the tribune’s intercessio, Plu. TG 10; τὸ κωλῦον hindrance, X. An. 4.5.20, D. 1.12: freq. an inf. may be supplied, εἶτα τίς σε κωλύει (sc. γεωργεῖν); Ar. Fr. 100; αὐτοὶ ὠφελούμενοι τοὺς πολεμίους κωλύσετε [ὠφελεῖσθαι ] Th. 6.91, cf. 2.37 (Pass.).
6. freq. in 3 pers., οὐδὲν κωλύει there is nothing to hinder, c. acc. et inf., ὁμόψηφον τὸν Ἀργεῖον εἶναι κ. οὐδέν Hdt. 7.149; οὐδέν σε κωλύσει σεαυτὸν ἐμβαλεῖν ἐς τὸ βάραθρον Ar. Nu. 1448, cf. Pl. Phdr. 268e; ὃν διαμάττειν οὐ κ. Ar. Av. 463; τί κ. ἡμᾶς διελθεῖν; Pl. Tht. 143a, etc.; οὐδὲν κ., abs., as a form of assent, be it so, Ar. Eq. 723, 972, Pl. Euthd. 272d, etc.; τί γὰρ κ.; Id. Euthphr. 9d, cf. Plt. 292a, al.; τό γ’ ἐμὸν οὐδὲν κ. Id. Grg. 458d; μὴ τὸ σὸν κωλυέτω E. Ph. 990; οὐ τἀμὰ κωλύσει Plu. 2.151c, etc.; οὔτε ἐκεῖνο κωλύει ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς neither is that any hindrance, Th. 1.144 (wrongly expld. as = κωλύεται by D.H. Amm. 2.7); οὔτε μίαν δυοῖν τὴν αὐτὴν εἶναι κ. nor is there any hindrance to one of two being the same, Arist. Ph. 202b9.

Question 75

περισσός, ή, όν

Answer 75

exceeding, going beyond; full, abundant; (compar.) more than; (n.) advantage

over and above, Mt. 5:37; superfluous, 2 Cor. 9:1; extraordinary, Mt. 5:47; compar. more, greater, Mt. 11:9; 23:14; excessive, 2 Cor. 2:7; adverbially, περισσόν, in full abundance, Jn. 10:10; περισσότερον, and ἐκ περισσοῦ, exceedingly, vehemently, Mk. 6:51; 7:36; 1 Cor. 15:10; Eph. 3:20; τὸ περισσόν, preeminence, advantage, Rom. 3:1

περισσός,

Att. περιττός, ή, όν, (from περί, as ἔπισσαι from ἐπί, μέτασσαι from μετά )

beyond the regular number or size, prodigious, δῶρα Hes. Th. 399 (never in Hom. ); μος Trag.Adesp. 458.3; στάθμα, dub.sens., v. ἕλκω B. 3.

2. out of the common, extraordinary, strange, ἔ τι περισσὸν εἰδείη if he has any signal knowledge, Thgn. 769; εἴ τι φρονεῖς καί τι περισσὸν ἔχεις Philisc.( PLG 2.327); π. λόγος S. OT 841; ἄγρα E. Ba. 1197 (lyr.); πάθος Id. Supp. 791 (lyr.); βίος οὐδὲν ἔχων π. ἀλλὰ πάντα σμικρά Antipho Soph. 51; οὐ γὰρ π. οὐδὲν οὐδ’ ἔξω λόγου πέπονθας E. Hipp. 437; περισσότερα παθήματα Antipho 3.4.5; τὰ π. τῶν ἔργων καὶ τερατώδη Isoc. 12.77; ἴδια καὶ π . Id. 15.145; π. καὶ θαυμαστά Arist. EN 1141b6; πρᾶξις π . Id. Pol. 1312a27; οὐθὲν δὴ λέγοντες π. φαίνονταί τι λέγειν Id. Metaph. 1053b3; τί π. ποιεῖτε; Ev.Matthew 5:47; περιττοτάτη φύσις Arist. HA 531a9; συνανθρωπίζον . . πάντων περισσότατον, of the dog, Ath. 13.611c, cf. Clearch. 24; in Literature, striking, τὸ περιττόν, as a quality of οἱ τοῦ Σωκράτους λόγοι, Arist. Pol. 1265a11; τὰ σοφὰ καὶ τὰ π . refinements, Epicur. Fr. 409; opp. κοινὸς καὶ δημώδης, Longin. 40.2 (but also, elaborate, π. καὶ πεποιημένος Id. 3.4; in bad sense, far-fetched, D.H. Pomp. 2, Dem. 56 ).
3. of persons, extraordinary, remarkable, esp. for great learning, π. ὢν ἀνήρ E. Hipp. 948; τοὺς . . π. καί τι πράσσοντας πλέον Id. Fr. 788; δυστυχεῖς εἶναι τοὺς π . Arist. Metaph. 983a2; π. γένος τῶν μελιττῶν Id. GA 760a4: freq. with the manner added, π. κατὰ φιλοσοφίαν Id. Pr. 953a10; περὶ τὸν ἄλλον βίον περιττότερος somewhat extravagant or eccentric, Id. Pol. 1267 b24; τῇ φύσει π . Id. HA 622b6; κάλλει Plu. Demetr. 2; ἐν ἅπασι Id. Dem. 3; τὴν ὥραν Alciphr. 1.12: c. inf., D.H. Comp. 18 .
4. c. gen., περισσὸς ἄλλων πρός τι beyond others in . ., S. El. 155; θύσει τοῦδε περισσότερα greater things than this, AP 6.321 (Leon. Alex. ); περιττότερος προφήτου one greater than . ., Ev.Matthew 11:9 .

II more than sufficient, superfluous, αἱ π. δαπάναι X. Mem. 3.6.6; περιττὸν ἔχειν to have a surplus, Id. An. 7.6.31; οἱ μὲν . . περιττὰ ἔχουσιν, οἱ δὲ οὐδὲ τὰ ἀναγκαῖα . . Id. Oec. 20.1: c. gen., τῶν ἀρκούντων περιττά more than sufficient, Id. Cyr. 8.2.21; τὰ π. τῶν ἱκανῶν Id. Hier. 1.19: freq. in military sense, οἱ π. ἱππεῖς the reserve horse, Id. Eq.Mag. 8.14; οἱ π. τῆς φυλακῆς ib. 7.7; π. σκηναί spare tents, Id. Cyr. 4.6.12 (but τοῖς περιττοῖς χρήσεσθαι their superior numbers, Id. An. 4.8.11, cf. Cyr. 6.3.20 ); τὸ π . the surplus, residue, Inscr. ap. eund. An. 5.3.13 (but τὸ π. τοῦ Ἰουδαίου the advantage of the Jew, Ep.Romans 3:1 ); Ἁρπυιῶν τὰ π . their leavings, AP 11.239 ( Lucill. ); τὸ π. τῆς ἡμέρας the remainder of the day, X.Ephesians 1:3; π. γράμματα supplementary provisions in a will, BGU 326ii9 (ii A.D.) .

2. in bad sense, superfluous, useless, οὐδέ τι τοῦ παντὸς κενεὸν πέλει οὐδὲ π . Emp. 13; μόχθος π . A. Pr. 385, cf. S. Ant. 780; π. κἀνόνητα σώματα Id. Aj. 758; βάρος π. γῆς ἀναστρωφώμενοι Id. Fr. 945; ἄχθος Id. El. 1241 (lyr.); τὰ γὰρ π. πανταχοῦ λυπήρ’ ἔπη Id. Fr. 82; αὐδῶ σε μὴ περισσὰ κηρύσσειν A. Th. 1048; π. πάντες οὑν μέσῳ λόγοι E. Med. 819; π. φωνῶν Id. Supp. 459 .
3. excessive, extravagant, μηχανᾶσθαι περισσά commit extravagances, Hdt. 2.32; περισσὰ δρᾶν, πράσσειν, to be over -busy, S. Tr. 617, Ant. 68; π. φρονεῖν to be over -wise, E. Fr. 924 (anap.); ἡ π. αὕτη ἐπιμέλεια τοῦ σώματος Pl. R. 407b; μῆκος πολὺ λόγων π . Id. Lg. 645c; redundant, overdone, οἱ καρτεροὶ καὶ π. λόγοι Id. Ax. 365c, etc.; of dress, ἐσθὴς π . Plu. 2.615d; περισσοτέρα λύπη Cor. 2.7; τοῦ τὰ δέοντ’ ἔχειν περιττὰ μισῶ I hate extravagance in comparison with moderation, Alex. 254, etc.
4. of persons, over-wise, over-curious, περισσὸς καὶ φρονῶν μέγα E. Hipp. 445, cf. Ba. 429 (lyr.); ὁ πολυπράγμων καὶ π . Plb. 9.1.4; τὴν περὶ τὸ σῶμα θεραπείαν ἀκριβὴς καὶ π . Plu. Cic. 8; so, of speakers, π. ἐν τοῖς λόγοις Δημοσθένης Aeschin. 1.119 .
5. as a term of praise, subtle, acute, ἀκριβὴς καὶ π. διάνοια Arist. Top. 141b13 .

III Arith., ἀριθμὸς π . an odd, uneven number, opp. ἄρτιος, Epich. 170.7, Philol. 5, Pl. Prt. 356e, etc.; π. ἡμέραι Hp. Aph. 4.61; τὸ π. καὶ τὸ ἄρτιον the nature of odd and even, Pl. Grg. 451c, etc.; π. χῶραι the odd places in a verse, Heph. 5.1; ἀρτιάκις π. ἀριθμός a number divisible by an odd number an even number of times, as 2, 6, 10, Euc. 7 Def. 9. περισσότεροι more in number, extra, Carnead. ap. S.E. M. 9.140 . περιττόν, τό, = στρύχνος μανικός, θρύον 11, Thphr. HP 9.11.6; περισσόν Dsc. 4.73; περίσκον Orib. 12.8.56 . Adv. περισσῶς extraordinarily, exceedingly, θεοσεβέεες π. ἐόντες Hdt. 2.37; ἐπαινέσεται π . E. Ba. 1197 (lyr.); π. παῖδας ἐκδιδάσκεσθαι to have them educated overmuch, Id. Med. 295; περιττοτέρως τῶν ἄλλων far above all others, Isoc. 3.44; περισσότερον τοῦ ἑνός Luc. Pr.Im. 14; also περισσά Pi. N. 7.43, E. Hec. 579, etc.

2. remarkably, περισσότερον τῶν ἄλλων θάψαι τινά more sumptuously, Hdt. 2.129; οἴκησις π. ἐσκευασμένη Plb. 1.29.7; περιττότατα ἔχειν to be most remarkable, Arist. HA 589a31; κοσμουμένη π. καὶ σεμνῶς Plu. 2.145e; περισσότατα ἀνθρώπων θρησκεύειν in the most singular way, D.C. 37.17; ἡδέως καὶ π . in an uncommon manner, D.H. Comp. 3; εἰπεῖν στρογγύλως καὶ π . Id. Is. 20; ἰδίως καὶ π . Plu. Thes. 19; τὰ καινῶς ἱστορούμενα καὶ π . Id. 2.30d.
3. abundantly, ἐχέτω π. τῆς κρόκης Alciphr. 3.41 .
4. with a neg., οὐδὲν περισσὸν τούτων nothing more than or beyond these, Antipho 3.4.6; οὐδὲν τῶν ἄλλων περιττότερον πραγματεύεσθαι Pl. Revelation 20:1-15 c; οὐδὲν π. ἢ εἰ . . no otherwise than if . ., Id. Smp. 219c; περισσόν alone, furthermore, LXX Ecclesiastes 12:12,al.
5. τὰ περισσά in vain, AP 12.182 ( Strat. ). II ἐκ περιττοῦ superfluously, uselessly, Pl. Prt. 338c, Sph. 265e; but ὑπερέχειν ἐκ π . to be far superior, Id. Lg. 734d, cf. 802d; ἡ κάμινος ἐκαύθη ἐκ π . Thd. Daniel 3:22; ἐκ π. χρησάμενος τῇ παρρησίᾳ Luc. Pro Merc.Cond. 13; cf. ὑπερεκπερισσοῦ .

Question 76

σκεῦος, -ους, τό

Answer 76

a vessel, goods, object
possession, merchandise, object, thing; jar, vessel, dish; a general term that can refer to a human being
Definition:
a vessel, utensil, for containing anything, Mk. 11:16; Lk. 8:16; Rom. 9:21; any utensil, instrument; σκεύη, household stuff, furniture, goods, etc., Mt. 12:29; Mk. 3:27; the mast of a ship, or, the sail, Acts 27:17; met. an instrument, means, organ, minister, Acts 9:15; σκεύη ὀργῆς and σκεύη ἐλέους, vessels of wrath, or, of mercy, persons visited by punishment, or, the divine favor, Rom. 9:22, 23; the vessel or frame of the human individual, 1 Thess. 4:4; 1 Pet. 3:7

σκεῦος, εος, τό, vessel or implement of any kind, in sg., Ar. Th. 402, Th. 4.128; in dual, σκεύη δύο χρησίμω Ar. Eq. 983, cf. Pl. R. 596b; and in pl., κλῖναι καὶ . . τἆλλα σκεύη ib. 373a, al.: — but the pl. is freq. used in a collective sense, all that belongs to a complete outfit, house-gear, utensils, chattels, opp. live-stock and fixtures, Ar. Pax 1318, Lys. 19.31, etc.; ς. γεωργικά farming implements, Ar. Pax 552; ἱερὰ ς . sacred vessels and implements, Th. 2.13, cf. IG 12.313.20; a druggist’s stores, Thphr. HP 9.17.3; ς. τὰ ἐπιτράπεζα table- furniture, Id. Lap. 42; military accoutrements, equipment, τὰ περὶ τὸ σῶμα ς . Th. 6.31; τὰ τῶν ἵππων ς . X. Cyr. 4.5.55; baggage of an army, and, generally, baggage, luggage, Ar. Ra. 12, 15, X. Mem. 3.13.6; ὄνοι αὐτοῖς σκεύεσι packs and all, Id. HG 5.4.17; tackle, gear of ships, naval stores, etc., IG 12.74.14, 22.1611.10, Pl. Criti. 117d, La. 183e, X. Oec. 8.11, Arist. Ath. 46.1; ς. τριηρικά D. 47.19; τὰ σκέα ( σκεύη ) τοῦ πλοίου PSI 4.437.2 (iii B.C.) (so, collectively, in sg., Acts 27:17 ): various kinds of σκεύη catalogued by Pollux ( 10 ).

2. inanimate object, thing, opp. ζῷον, σῶμα, Pl. R. 601d, Grg. 506d; opp. ὄργανον, Democr. 159; Protagoras gave the name of σκεύη to neut. nouns, ἄρρενα καὶ θήλεα καὶ σκεύη Arist. Rh. 1407b8; ὑπηρετικὸν ς . a subordinate person, a mere tool or chattel, Plb. 13.5.7; ς. ἀγχίνουν καὶ πολυχρόνιον Id. 15.25.1: in NT, in good sense, ς. ἐκλογῆς a chosen instrument, of Paul, Acts 9:15 .

II τὸ ς . the body, as the vessel of the soul, a metaph. clearly expressed in 2 Corinthians 4:7, ἔχομεν δὲ τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον ἐν ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν, cf. 1 Thessalonians 4:4, 1 Peter 3:7 .

III = αἰδοῖον, APl. 4.243 ( Antist. ), Ael. NA 17.11 . sarcophagus, Jahresh. 26 Beibl. 13 (Ephesus, ii A.D. ).

Question 77

δέομαι

Answer 77

(ἐδεῖτο, 3ρδ σγ), -, -, -, -, ἐδεήθην
I beseech
to pray; ask, beg, plead
Definition: 
to be in want, to need; to ask, request, Mt. 9:38; Lk. 5:12; 8:28, 38; in NT absol. to pray, offer prayer, beseech, supplicate, Lk. 21:36; 22:32; Acts 4:31; 8:22, 24

δέομαι; 3 person singular imperfect ἐδητο (cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 220; Winers Grammar, 46; (Veitch, under the word δέω to need at the end)), Luke 8:38 (where Lachmann ἐδηιτο, Tr WH ἐδεῖτο; cf. Meyer at the passage; (WHs Appendix, p. 166); Buttmann, 55 (48)); 1 aorist ἐδεήθην; (from δέω to want, need; whence middle δέομαι to stand in need of, want for oneself); (from Herodotus down);

1. to want, lack: τίνος.
2. to desire, long for: τίνος.
3. to ask, beg (German bitten);
   a. universally — the thing asked for being evident from the context: with the genitive of the person from whom, Galatians 4:12; the thing sought being specified in direct discourse: Luke 5:12; Luke 8:28; Luke 9:38 (according to the reading ἐπίβλεψον R L); Acts 8:34 (δέομαι σου, περί τίνος ὁ προφήτης λέγει τοῦτο; of whom, I pray thee, doth the prophet say this?); Acts 21:39; 2 Corinthians 5:20; followed by the infinitive, Luke 8:38; Luke 9:38 (according to the reading ἐπιβλέψαι Tr WH); Acts 26:3 (where G L T Tr WH omit σου after δέομαι); followed by ἵνα, Luke 9:40 (cf. Winers Grammar, 335 (315); (Buttmann, 258 (222))); followed by τό with an infinitive 2 Corinthians 10:2 (cf. Buttmann, 263 (226), 279 (239); Winer’s Grammar, 321, 322 (301f)); with the genitive of person and the accusative of a thing, 2 Corinthians 8:4 (G L T Tr WH; for Rec. adds δέξασθαι ἡμᾶς without warrant) (cf. Buttmann, 164 (143); Winers Grammar, 198 (186)).
   b. specifically, of requests addressed to God; absolutely to pray, make supplication: Acts 4:31; τοῦ Θεοῦ, Acts 10:2; followed by εἰ ἄρα, Acts 8:22 (Buttmann, 256 (220); Winer’s Grammar, 300 (282)); τοῦ κυρίου, ὅπως etc. Matthew 9:38; Luke 10:2; without the genitive Θεοῦ — followed by εἰ πῶς, Romans 1:10 (cf. Winers Grammar, and Buttmann’s Grammar, the passages cited); by ἵνα, Luke 21:36; Luke 22:32; by the relic εἰς τό, 1 Thessalonians 3:10 (cf. Buttmann, 265 (228)); ὑπέρ τίνος πρός τόν κύριον, ὅπως, Acts 8:24. (Synonyms: see αἰτέω and δέησις. Compare: προσδέομαι.)
   STRONGS NT 1189a: δέος δέος, δέους, τό (δείδω) (from Homer down), fear, awe: μετά εὐλαβείας καί δέους, Hebrews 12:28 L T Tr WH. [SYNONYMS: δέος (apprehension), φόβος (fear): Ammonius under the word δέος says δέος καί φόβος διαφέρει. δέος μέν γάρ ἐστι πολυχρόνιος κακοῦ ὑπόνοια. φόβος δέ ἡ παραυτίκα πτόησις. Plato (Laches, p. 198 b.): δέος γάρ εἶναι προσδοκίαν μέλλοντος κακοῦ. Cf. Stallbaum on Platos Protag., p. 167; Schmidt, chapter 139; and see under the word δειλία.]

Question 78

θεάομαι

Answer 78

-, ἐθεασάμην, -, τεθέαμαι, ἐθεάθην
to behold, look upon
to see, look at; visit
Definition: 
to gaze upon, Mt. 6:1; 23:5; Lk. 7:24; to see, discern with the eyes, Mk. 16:11, 14; Lk. 5:27; Jn. 1:14, 32, 38; to see, visit, Rom. 15:24

θεάομαι,

and Ion. θηέομαι (v. infr.), Dor. θᾱέομαι, Θάομαι (qq. v.), imper. θεῶ Ar. Ach. 262; opt. θηοῖο (for Att. θεῷο) Il. 24.418; part. θηεύμενος Hdt. 7.146: Ion. impf. ἐθηεῖτο, ἐθηεῦντο, Id. 1.10, 3.136; θηεῖτο Od. 5.75, etc., θηεῦντο Il. 7.444, al., ἐθηεύμεσθα Od. 9.218, ἐθεῆτο Hp. Nat.Puer. 13, θηέσκετο Poet. ap. Parth. 21.2: fut. θεάσομαι [ᾱ ], Ion. -ήσομαι: aor. ἐθεᾱσάμην, opt. θηήσαιο, θηήσαιτο, Od. 17.315, 5.74; 3 pl. ἐθηήσαντο Euph. 51.15; Ion. inf. θεήσασθαι (v.l. θεάς-) Hdt. 1.8: Att. pf. τεθέαμαι X. Cyr. 7.5.7: codd. of Hdt. vary betw. θεη- and θηη-: a rare Ion. contr. of θηη- to θη- is found in θησαίατ’ Od. 18.191, θησάμενος IG 12.826: —

I

1. gaze at, behold, mostly with a sense of wonder, θηεῦντο μέγα ἔργον Il. 7.444, cf. Od. 2.13; λαοὶ δ’ αὖ θηεῦντό τε θάμβησάν τε Il. 23.728, cf. Hdt. 1.8, 11, etc.; θ. τὰ καλά Democr. 194; πάντες ὥσπερ ἄγαλμα ἐθεῶντο αὐτόν Pl. Chrm. 154c; θ. ὄμμασι E. Ion 232 (lyr.); ζητεῖ τὸ κακὸν τεθεᾶσθαι Ar. Th. 797 codd.; ἐθεᾶτο.. τὴν θέσιν τῆς πόλεως.., ὡς ἔχοι reconnoitred it, Th. 5.7; θ. κύκλῳ τὴν πόλιν X. Cyr. 4.5.7: abs., θεᾷ; do you see? Men. Epit. 564.
2. of the mind, contemplate, τὸ ἀληθές Pl. Phd. 84b, al. see clearly, ἵν’ ἴδητε καὶ θεάσησθε ὅτι.. D. 4.3, cf. Pl. Prt. 352a; with relat. clause, ὅση δεινότης ἦν ἐν τῷ Φιλίππῳ θεάσεσθε D. 18.144.
3. view as spectators, esp. in the theatre, Isoc. 4.44; οἱ θεώμενοι the spectators, Ar. Ra. 2, cf. Nu. 518, al. (but also, onlookers, bystanders, Antipho 3.3.7): metaph., θ. τὸν πόλεμον to be spectators of the war, Hdt. 8.116.
4. θ. τὸ στράτευμα to review it, X. Cyr. 5.5.1.

II Act. θεάω, late, Baillet Tombeaux des rois à Thèbes 1080: elsewh. in imper. θέα Them. Or. 3.44b, Jul. 89b, Hsch.: aor. ἐθεάθην in pass. sense, Ps. -Callisth. 2.42, Mark 16:11, Ap.Ty. 49, Just. Nov. 133.3.1: pres. θεῶνται Philostr. Her. 2.9. (Orig. prob. θᾱϝ έομαι and θᾱϝάομαι, cf. θαῦ-μα.)

Question 79

καθίστημι

Answer 79

καταστήσω, κατέστησα, -, καθέσταμαι, κατεστάθην
I set, constitute
to put in charge, appoint; to escort, bring, take; (pass.) to be made, become, be appointed
Definition:
also formed as καθιστάνω, to place, set, Jas. 3:6; to set, constitute, appoint, Mt. 24:45, 47; Lk. 12:14; to set down in a place, conduct, Acts 17:15; to make, render, or cause to be, 2 Pet. 1:8; pass. to be rendered, Rom. 5:19

καθίστημι,

I

1. in causal sense: — Act., in pres., impf., fut., and pf. καθέστᾰκα Hyp. Eux. 28, LXX Jeremiah 1:10, D.H. Dem. 54, D.S. 32.11, etc.; once καθέστηκα PHib. 1.82i14 (iii B. C.): plpf. -εστάκει Demetr. Sceps. ap. Ath. 15.697d: — also in Med., fut. (Paus. 3.5.1), aor. 1, more rarely pres. (infr. A. 11.2): — set down, κρητῆρα καθίστα Il. 9.202; νῆα κατάστησον bring it to land, Od. 12.185; κ. δίφρους place, station them, before starting for the race, S. El. 710; ποῖ [ δεῖ ] καθιστάναι πόδα; E. Ba. 184; κ. τινὰ εἰς τὸ φανερόν X. An. 7.7.22; set up, erect, of stones, Inscr.Cypr. 94, 95 H.: — Med., [ λαῖφος ] κατεστήσαντο βοεῦσι steadied it, h.Ap. 407.
2. bring down to a place, τούς μ’ ἐκέλευσα Πύλονδε καταστῆσαι Od. 13.274: generally, bring, κ. τινὰ ἐς Νάξον Hdt. 1.64, cf. Th. 4.78; esp. bring back, πάλιν αὐτὸν κ. ἐς τὸ τεῖχος σῶν καὶ ὑγιᾶ Id. 3.34; κ. τοὺς Ἕλληνας εἰς Ἰωνίαν πάλιν X. An. 1.4.13; without πάλιν, replace, restore, ἐς φῶς σὸν κ. βίον E. Alc. 362; ἃς (sc. τὰς κόρας) οὐδ’ ὁ Μελάμπους.. καταστήσειεν ἄν cure their squint, Alex. 112.5; ἰκτεριῶντας κ. Dsc. 4.1; τὸ σῶμα restore the general health, Hp. Mul. 2.133: — Med., κατεστήσαντο (v.l. for κατεκτήσαντο) εὐδαιμονίαν Isoc. 4.62: — Pass., οὐκ ἂν ἀντὶ πόνων Χάρις καθίσταιτο would be returned, Th. 4.86.
3. bring before a ruler or magistrate, Hdt. 1.209, PRyl. 65.10 (i B. C.), etc.; τινὰ ἐπί τινα PCair.Zen. 202.6 (iii B. C.), POxy. 281.24 (i A. D.).

II

1. set in order, array, of soldiers, X. An. 1.10.10; set as guards, προφυλακάς ib. 3.2.1, etc.
2. ordain, appoint, κατέστησε τύραννον εἶναι παῖδα τὸν ἑωυτοῦ Hdt. 5.94, cf. 25: usu. without the inf., κ. τινὰ ὕπαρχον Id. 7.105; ἄλλον [ ἄρχοντα ] ἀντὶ αὐτοῦ X. Cyr. 3.1.12, etc.; βασιλέα ἐπί τινας LXX 1 Samuel 8:5, al.; τινὰ ἐς μοναρχίαν E. Supp. 352; ἐπὶ τὰς ἀρχάς Isoc. 12.132; τινὰ τύραννον Ar. Av. 1672; κ. ἐγγυητάς Hdt. 1.196, Ar. Ec. 1064; δικαστάς, ἐπιμελητάς, νομοθέτας, Id. Pl. 917, X. Cyr. 8.1.9, D. 3.10 (sed leg. καθίσατε, cf. καθίζω 1.4); of games, etc., γυμνικοὺς ἀγῶνας κ. Isoc. 4.1: rarely c. inf., οἱ καθιστάντες μουσικῇ.. παιδεύειν Pl. R. 410b: — so in Pass., κυβερνᾶν κατασταθείς X. Mem. 1.7.3: aor. Med., appoint for oneself, τύραννον καταστησάμενοι παρὰ. σφίσι αὐτοῖσι Hdt. 5.92.á; ἄρχοντας X. An. 3.1.39, etc. esp. of laws, constitutions, ceremonies, etc., establish, νόμους, τελετάς, E. Or. 892, Ba. 21, etc.; πολιτείαν, δημοκρατίαν, Arist. Ath. 7.1, Decr.ib. 29.3; ὀλιγαρχίαν Lys. 12.42; also, set in order, arrange, πολιτείαν Pl. R. 590e: — also in Med., τοῦτο βουλευτήριον φρούρημα γῆς καθίσταμαι A. Eu. 706; τὴν Ἱππίου καθίσταμαι τυραννίδα Ar. V. 502; καθίστατο τὰ περὶ τὴν Μυτιλήνην ᾗ αὐτῷ ἐδόκει Th. 3.35; πόλεις ἐπὶ τὸ ὠφέλιμον Id. 1.76; [ Εὔβοιαν ] ὁμολογίᾳ ib. 114; πρὸς ἐμὲ τὸ πρᾶγμα καταστήσασθαι settle it with me, D. 21.90.
3. bring into a certain state, τινὰ ἐς ἀπόνοιαν Th. 1.82; ἐς ἀπορίαν Id. 7.75; εἰς ἀνάγκην Lys. 3.3; εἰς αἰσχύνην Pl. Sph. 230d; εἰς ἐρημίαν φίλων Id. Phdr. 232d; εἰς ἀγῶνα Id. Ap. 24c; τινὰ εἰς ἀσφάλειαν Isoc. 5.123; τίνας εἰς ἀγῶνα καθέστακα; Hyp. Eux. 28, cf. Lycurg. 2; κ. τινὰ ἐν ἀγῶνι καὶ κινδύνῳ Antipho 5.61; τὴν πόλιν ἐν πολέμῳ Pl. Mx. 242a; τοὺς φίλους ἐν ἀκινδύνῳ X. Cyr. 4.5.28; κ. ἑαυτὸν ἐς κρίσιν present himself for trial, Th. 1.131, cf. Lycurg. 6; κ. τινὰ εἰς τοὺς ἀρχικούς reckon him as one of.., X. Mem. 2.1.9.
4. c. dupl. acc., make, render so and so, ψευδῆ γ’ ἐμαυτόν S. Ant. 657; ἡ ἐπιθυμία κ. τινὰ ἀμνήμονα Antipho 2.1.7; τὸ πιστὸν ὑμᾶς ἀπιστοτέρους κ. Th. 1.68; κ. τι φανερόν, σαφές, Id. 2.42, 1.32; τινὸς ἐπίπονον τὸν βίον κ. Isoc. 10.17: c. part., κλαίοντα καθιστάναι τινά bring one to tears, E. Andr. 635: rarely c. inf., κ. τινὰ φεύγειν make him fly, Th. 2.84, cf. E. Alc. 283, Luc. Charid. 8: — Pass., ἀνάγκη τὴν ναυμαχίαν πεζομαχίαν καθίστασθαι Th. 2.89.
5. Med., get for oneself, τὴν ζόην καταστήσασθαι ἀπ’ ἔργων ἀνοσιωτάτων Hdt. 8.105.
6. make, in periphrases, πάννυχοι.. διάπλοον καθίστασαν A. Pers. 382: —

Med., κρυφαῖον ἔκπλουν οὐδαμῇ καθίστατο ib. 385. intr. in aor. 2, pf. καθέστηκα, and plpf. of Act. (also fut. καθεστήξω Th. 3.37, 102), and all tenses of Med. (exc. aor. 1) and Pass.: pf. καθέσταμαι in later Greek, IG 22.1006.24 (ii B. C.), LXX Numbers 3:32, etc.: —

1. to be set, set oneself down, settle, ἐς [ Αἴγιναν ] Hdt. 3.131, cf. Th. 4.75; [ ὀδύναι ] καθίσταντο ἐς ὑπογάστριον Hp. Epid. 7.97; of joints, ἐξίσταται ἀνωδύνως καὶ κ. goes out of joint and in again, Id. Art. 8; κ. ἐς Ῥήγιον to make R. a base of operations, Th. 3.86; simply, to be come to a place, ὅποι καθέσταμεν S. OC 23. come before another, stand in his presence, Pi. P. 4.135; λέξον καταστάς A. Pers. 295 (unless it be taken in signf. 4), cf. Hdt. 1.152; κ. ἐς ὄψιν τινός Id. 7.29; καταστάντες ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας ἔλεγον Id. 3.46, cf. 156; καταστὰς ἐπὶ τὸ πλῆθος ἔλεγε Th. 4.84.
2. to be set as guard, ὑπό τινος Hdt. 7.59, cf. S. OC 356, X. An. 4.5.19, etc.; to be appointed, δεσπότης.. καθέστηκα E. HF 142; στρατηλάτης νέος καταστάς Id. Supp. 1216; κ. Χορηγὸς εἰς Θαργήλια, στρατηγός, etc., Antipho 6.11, Isoc. 4.35, etc.; οἱ πρόβουλοι καθεστᾶσιν ἐπὶ τοῖς βουλευταῖς Arist. Pol. 1299b37; δικτάτωρ.. καθε [ στάμενος τὸ τέταρτον ], = Lat. dictator designatus quartum, of Caesar, IG 12(2).35b7 (Mytil.).
3. deposit a sediment, Hp. Epid. 1.2, 7.
4. also, stand or become quiet or calm, of water, ὅταν ἡ λίμνη καταστῇ Ar. Eq. 865, cf. PHolm. 16.3; θάλασσα γαληνὴ καὶ κ. Plb. 21.31.10; πνεῦμα λεῖον καὶ καθεστηκός calm and settled, Ar. Ra. 1003; ὁ θόρυβος κατέστη subsided, Hdt. 3.80; of laughter, Philostr. VA 3.4; of a swelling, Hp. Prog. 7; ἕως τὰ πράγματα κατασταίη Lys. 13.25; also of persons, καταστάς composedly, A. Pers. 295 (but v. supr. 1b); [ ἡ ψυχὴ ] καθίσταται καὶ ἠρεμίζεται Arist. Ph. 248a2; ὁρῶμεν [ τοὺς ἐνθουσιαστικοὺς ].. καθισταμένους Id. Pol. 1342a10; καθεστηκυίας τῆς διανοίας Ocell. 4.13; καθεστῶτι προσώπῳ with composed, calm countenance, Plu. Fab. 17; μαίνεσθαι καὶ ἔξω τοῦ καθεστηκότος εἶναι Luc. Philops. 5; τίς ἂν καθεστηκὼς φήσαιε; what person of mature judgement would say.. ? Phld. Po. 5.15; ἡ καθεστηκυῖα ἡλικία middle age, Th. 2.36; ἡλικία μέση καὶ κ. Pl. 316c; οἱ καθεστηκότες those of middle age, Hp. Aph. 1.13: also, with metaphor from wine, mellow, of persons, Alex. 45.8.
5. come into a certain state, become, and in pf. and plpf., to have become, be, ἀντὶ φίλου πολέμιόν τινι κ. Hdt. 1.87; οἱ μὲν ὀφθαλμῶν ἰητροὶ κατεστέασι, οἱ δὲ κεφαλῆς Id. 2.84; ἔμφρων καθίσταται S. Aj. 306; τῶν ἄνωθεν ὑπόπτων καθεστώτων Epicur. Sent. 13; ἐς μάχην Hdt. 3.45; ἐς πόλεμον ὑμῖν καὶ μάχην κ. E. HF 1168; ἐς πάλην καθίσταται δορὸς τὸ πρᾶγμα Id. Heracl. 159; ἐς τὴν ἴησιν Hp. Prorrh. 2.12; ἐς τὸ αὐτό they recover, Id. Coac. 160 (later abs., καταστῆναι καὶ μηδενὸς ἔτι φαρμάκου δεηθῆναι Gal. Vict.Att. 1); ἐς τοὺς κινδύνους Antipho 2.3.1; ἐς φόβον Hdt. 8.12, Th. 2.81; ἐς δέος, λύπην, Id. 4.108, 7.75; ἐς φυγήν Id. 2.81; ἐς ἔχθραν τινί Isoc. 9.67; εἰς ὁμόνοιαν, εἰς πολλὴν ἀθυμίαν, Lys. 18.18, 12.3; καταστῆναι ἐς συνήθειάν τινος τὴν πόλιν ποιεῖν make the city become accustomed to it, Aeschin. 1.165; ἀντιστασιώτης κατεστήκεε had been, Hdt. 1.92, cf. 9.37; ἐν δείματι μεγάλῳ κατέστασαν Id. 7.138; καταστάντων σφι εὖ τῶν πρηγμάτων ib. 132; τίνι τρόπῳ καθέστατε; in what case are ye? S. OT 10; φονέα με φησὶ.. καθεστάναι ib. 703; ἄπαρνος δ’ οὐδενὸς καθίστατο Id. Ant. 435; κρυπτὸς καταστάς E. Andr. 1064; οἱ ἐν τούτῳ τῆς ἡλικίας καθεστῶτες ἐν ᾧ.. Antipho 2.1.1; ἐν οἵῳ τρόπῳ [ἡ τῶν Ἀθηναίων ἀρχὴ] κατέστη how it came into being, Th. 1.97, cf. 96; ἀρξάμενος εὐθὺς καθισταμένου (sc. τοῦ πολέμου) from its first commencement, Id. 1.1.
6. to be established or instituted, prevail, καί σφι μαντήϊον Διὸς κατέστηκε Hdt. 2.29; ἄγραι.. πολλαὶ κατεστᾶσι ib. 70, cf. 1.200; ὅδε σφι νόμος κατεστήκεε ib. 197; βροτοῖσιν ὃς καθέστηκεν νόμος E. Hipp. 91: c. inf., θεὸν Ἀμφιάραον πρώτοις Ὠρωπίοις κατέστη νομίζειν Paus. 1.34.2: pf. part., existing, established, prevailing, τὸν νῦν κατεστεῶτα κόσμον Hdt 1.65; ἦν κατεστηκὸς οὐδὲν φόρου πέρι Id. 3.89; τοὺς κατεστεῶτας τριηκοσίους the regular 300, Id. 7.205; οἱ καθεστῶτες νόμοι S. Ant. 1113, Ar. Nu. 1400; τὰ καθεστῶτα the present state of life, S. Ant. 1160; also, existing laws, usages, τὰ τότε κ., τά ποτε κ., Pl. Lg. 798b, Isoc. 7.56; ἐπὶ τοῖσι κατεστεῶσι ἔνεμε τὴν πόλιν Hdt. 1.59.
7. of purchases, cost, πλέον ἢ ὅσου ἐμοὶ κατέστησαν more than they stood me in, And. 2.11, cf. Plu. 2.349a.
8. stand against, oppose, πρός τινα dub. l. in Plb. 23.18.5: — Pass., Τιτήνεσσι κατέσταθεν Hes. Th. 674. aor. 1 Med. and sts. pres. Med. are used in trans. sense, v. supr. A. 11.2sq.

Question 80

πληγή, -ῆς, ἡ

Answer 80

a blow, wound, plague

plague; punishment: beating, flogging, wounding
Definition:
a blow, stroke, stripe, Lk. 10:30; 12:48; meton. a wound, Acts 16:33; Rev. 13:3, 12, 14; from the Hebrew, a plague, affliction, calamity, Rev. 9:20; 11:6

πληγ-ή,

Dor. πλᾱγά, ἡ, ( πλήσσω ) blow, stroke, πεπληγὼν πληγῇσιν Il. 2.264, etc.; πᾶν ἑρπετὸν πληγῇ νέμεται Heraclit. 11, cf. Pl. Criti. 109b, Erasistr. ap. Ps.- Dsc. Ther. 18; ἡ π. τοῦ τραύματος Pl. Lg. 877b: freq. joined with Verbs of cogn. signf., πέπληγμαι καιρίαν πληγήν A. Ag. 1343; τύπτει τὰς ἴσας πληγὰς ἐμοί Ar. Ra. 636; τύπτεσθαι τῇ δημοσίᾳ μάστιγι ν πληγάς Lexap. Aeschin. 1.139; πολλὰς πληγὰς μαστιγούσθω Pl. Lg. 914b (but in such phrases πληγήν or πληγάς is freq. omitted, τρίτην ἐπενδίδωμι A. Ag. 1386; τυπτόμενος πολλάς Ar. Nu. 972, cf. D. 19.197; ὀλίγας παῖσαι X. An. 5.8.12; μαστιγωθεὶς ὁπόσας ἂν δόξῃ τοῖς δικασταῖς Pl. Lg. 854d, cf. 879e, 2 Corinthians 11:24 ): the person struck is said πληγὰς λαβεῖν, Ar. Ra. 673; ὑπὸ τῶν ῥαβδούχων Th. 5.50, etc.; πληγῶν δεῖσθαι Ar. Nu. 493; πληγὴν ἔχω Anaxandr. 72; ὑπὸ τὴν π. τοῦ ἀκοντίου ὑπελθεῖν Antipho 3.4.4; καιρίῃ (sc. πληγῇ ) τετύφθαι Hdt. 3.64; πληγὰς ὑπομένειν Aristopho 4.6; εἰληφέναι καὶ δεδωκέναι πληγάς D. 54.14; π. ἐμβαλεῖν, ἐντείνειν τινί, X. An. 1.5.11, 2.4.11, etc.; πατάξαι Pl. Grg. 527d; ἐντρίβειν τινί Luc. Ind. 25, cf. Somn. 14; προστρίβεσθαι Ar. Eq. 5; τὰς ἐξ ἀνθρώπων πληγὰς μαστιγοῦν τινα Aeschin. 1.59; πληγὴν ἐπὶ πληγῇ φέρειν Plb. 2.33.6; π. παρὰ πληγήν Ar. Ra. 643; πληγαῖς ζημιοῦν, κολάζειν, Th. 8.74, Pl. Lg. 762c, etc.; δίκη ὕβρεως ἢ πληγῶν PHal. 1.115 (iii B.C.); πληγῆς ἄρχειν strike the first blow, Antipho 4.2.2; τὰς π. στέγειν, of the shell of a tortoise, Ar. V. 1295 .

2. stroke by lightning, Hes. Th. 857 (pl.); πλαγαὶ σιδάρου strokes of axe or sword, Pi. P. 4.246, O. 10(11).37; κλυδωνίου . . πληγαῖς A. Th. 796; στέρνων πλαγαί beating of breasts, S. El. 90 (anap.); π. τῶν ὀδόντων strokes from boars’ tusks, X. Cyn. 10.5; spearing of fish, Pl. Lg. 824 (pl.); of pig- sticking, οἱ κάπροι οἱ πρὸς τὴν π . . . ὠθούμενοι Id. Euthd. 294d: in sg., fight with clubs, Hdt. 2.63 .
3. stroke or impression on the ears or eyes, Pl. Ti. 67b, Plu. 2.490c, etc.; αἱ νοήσεις τύποι ἔσονται· εἰ δὲ τοῦτο, καὶ ἐπακτοὶ καὶ πληγαί Plot. 5.5.1 .
4. impact of bodies, atoms, etc., Archyt. 1, Epicur. Fr. 308, Placit. 1.4.2, Plot. 3.6.19 .
5. beat of the pulse, Gal. 9.464.
6. metaph., blow, stroke of calamity, esp. in war, ἐν μιᾷ π. κατέφθαρται . . ὄλβος A. Pers. 251, cf. Hell.Oxy. 16.2; ἐν πληγαῖς ὄντες ibid.; πληγὴν ὑπήνεγκεν ἡ πόλις Arist. Pol. 1270a33; πληγῇ περιπεπτωκέναι Plb. 14.9.6; πληγαὶ βιότου A. Eu. 933 (anap.); π. Διός α heaven-sent plague, Id. Ag. 367 (lyr.), S. Aj. 137 (anap.); μὴ ‘κ θεοῦ π. τις ἥκει ib. 279; δμαθέντες πλαγαῖσι ποντίαισιν A. Pers. 908 (lyr.); of the ten plagues of Egypt, J. BJ 5.9.4 .

Question 81

πωλέω

Answer 81

I sell

(ἐπώλουν), -, ἐπώλησα, -, -, -

πωλ-έω, Ion. impf. πωλέεσκε Hdt. 1.196: fut. -ήσω Ar. Fr. 543, X. Cyr. 6.2.38; Dor. 3 pl. πωλησεῦντι IG 12(1).3.2 (Rhodes, i A.D. ): aor. ἐπώλησα Plu. Phil. 16: — Pass., fut. in med. form πωλήσεται Eub. 74.1: 2 fut. πεπωλήσεται Aen.Tact. 10.19: aor. ἐπωλήθην Pl. Plt. 260d, prob. in IG 12.60.10: — sell or offer for sale, opp. ὠνεῖσθαι, Hdt. 1.165, 196, etc.; opp. ἀποδίδοσθαι (of the actual sale), X. Smp. 8.21, cf. Mem. 2.5.5 ( Pass. ); μετ’ ἀβακίου καὶ τραπεζίου π. ἑαυτόν sell oneself across the counter, Lys. Fr. 50: c. gen. pretii, ἐπώλεε ἐς Σάρδις χρημάτων μεγάλων sold at a high price for exportation to Sardis, Hdt. 8.105, cf. Ar. l.c.; πωλέω οὐδενὸς χρήματος refuse to sell it at any price, Hdt. 3.139; τὰ ξύμπαντα τούτου ἑνὸς ἂν πωλοῖτο Th. 2.60; τῶν πόνων π. ἁμῖν πάντα τἀγάθ’ οἱ θεοί Epich. 287; ἀργυρίου π. τι X. Mem. 1.6.13, etc.; τὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν μικροῦ λήμματος π . D. 11.18; ἔρωμαι ὁπόσου πωλεῖ; ask what he wants for it, X. Mem. 1.2.36; π. δὶς πρὸς ἀργύριον Thphr. HP 9.6.4 ( Pass. ); τὴν Ἀσίην πωλῶ πρὸς μύρα Revelation 11:3; π. τινί τι Stratt. 13.1, cf. X. Hier. 1.13 ( Pass. ); τι πρός τινας Hdt. 9.80, Pl. Lg. 741b; ὑπὸ κήρυκος π. τὰ κοινά D. 51.22: abs., carry on business, trade, ἐν τῇ πόλει OGI 629.83 (Palmyra, ii A.D. ); π. πρός τινα deal with one, Ar. Ach. 722; π. πάλιν retail, Pl. Plt. 260d: — Pass., to be sold or offered for sale, εἰν ἀγορῇ πωλεύμενα Hom. Epigr. 14.5, cf. Berl.Sitzb. 1927.160 ( Cyrene ), Hdt. 8.105; of a person, to be sold up, POxy. 1477.3 (iii/iv A.D.) .

2. π. τέλη let out the taxes, Aeschin. 1.119; μέταλλα Arist. Ath. 47.2; ὠνάς SIG 284.28 (Erythrae, iv B.C. ). sell or farm out offices, priesthoods, etc., [ τὰς ἀρχάς ] Arist. Ath. 62.1; ἐπὶ τοῖσδε πωλοῦμεν τὴν ἱερωσύνην τοῦ Διονύσου SIG 1003.2 (Priene, ii B.C. ).
3. sell, i.e. give up, betray, τὰς γραφάς D. 58.35; τὰ τῆς πόλεως Id. 19.141; τὰ οἴκοι Id. 7.17: — Pass., of persons, to be bought and sold, betrayed, Ar. Pax 633 .

Question 82

ἐφίστημι

Answer 82

I stand over, come upon

-, ἐπέστην, ἐπέστην, -, ἐπεστάθην

to approach, come near, stand beside, stop; to be imminent, at hand
Definition:
trans. to place upon, over, close by; intrans. to stand by or near, Lk. 2:38; 4:39; to come suddenly upon, Lk. 2:9; 24:4; to come upon, assault, Acts 6:12; 17:5; to come near, approach, Lk. 10:40; to impend, be instant, to be at hand, 1 Thess. 5:3; to be present, Acts 28:2; to be pressing, urgent, earnest, 2 Tim. 4:2

ἐφίστημι,

Ion. ἐπ-: causal in pres., impf., fut., and aor. 1 (also in the later pf. and plpf. ἐφέστᾰκα, ἐφεστάκειν [ᾰ ], v. infr. 11.1, VI. 2):

I set, place upon, τεῖχος τείχει Th. 2.75; τι ἐπί τινος Pl. Criti. 116a; τι ἐπί τινι X. HG 3.1.7; ὅρους ἐπὶ οἰκίαν D. 41.6: metaph., ἐ. τὴν ἐκεῖ μοῖραν βίῳ Pl. R. 498c; ἀνάγκην τινί D.H. 1.16.

II

1. set over, μ’ Ἀπόλλων τῷδ’ ἐπέστησεν τέλει A. Ag. 1202; φύλακ’ ἐπέστησεν βοτ Id. Supp. 303; ἐ. τινὰ ὕπαρχόν τισι Hdt. 5.27; τινὰ παιδαγωγόν τινι Pl. Alc. 1.122b, cf. X. Lac. 2.1; τινὰ πεντηκοντόρῳ Id. An. 5.1.15; τινὰ τοῖς πράγμασι Isoc. 2.27; τὸν νόμον Arist. Pol. 1292b28; ἐπὶ [συμμάχων] τινά Plb. 2.65.9; ἐφεστάκει τινὰς πρὸς χρείαν Id. 10.20.5; κύνα ἐπὶ ποίμνην D. 26.22; τινὰ ἐπὶ τὰς εὐθύνας Id. 18.112: c. inf., βουλὴν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τῆς εὐκοσμίας Isoc. 7.37: — Pass., to be appointed, instituted, PTeb. 61 (b).358 (ii B. C.), etc.
2. bring in, ἡ τύχη ἐπιστήσασα Ῥωμαίους Plb. 15.20.6; Φίλιππον ἐ. τοῖς πράγμασι to let him have a hand in the business, D. 19.34.
3. bring in, cause, occasion, κατάπληξίν τισι D.S. 14.62; κίνδυνον, ἀγῶνά τινι, App. Hann. 55, Syr. 10; ἡ τύχη λοιμικὴν διάθεσιν ἐπέστησε Γαλάταις Plb. 2.20.7.

III

1. set up, establish, ἀγῶνα Hdt. 1.167, 6.38: c. acc. et inf., ordain, prescribe, ὁ νόμος ἐφίστησι τὰ λοιπὰ κρίνειν τοὺς ἄρχοντας Arist. Pol. 1287a26; ἐπιστήσατε quid facere debeamus, Plin. 6.31.12. set by or near to, ἐπιστήσαντες κύκλῳ τὸ σῆμα ἱππέας Hdt. 4.72; esp. place in rear, of troops, τὴν φάλαγγα τούτοις κατόπιν ἐ. Plb. 1.33.6, cf. 1.26. 14. stop, cause to halt, ἐπιστῆσαι τὸ στράτευμα X. Cyr. 4.2.18; τὴν ὁδόν, τὴν πορείαν, D.S. 17.112, Plu. Cim. 1; τοὺς ἱππέας τοῦ πρόσω Arr. An. 5.16.1; ἐ. τὴν ὁρμήν check it, Plb. 16.34.2; τὴν διήγησιν interrupt it, Id. 7.11.1; check, ἔμμηνα Dsc. 1.125, cf. POxy. 1088.20 (i A. D.): abs., ἐπιστήσας (sc. ἑαυτόν) having halted, X. An. 1.8.15: — Pass., to be checked, stopped, PPetr. 2p.62 (iii B. C.); ἐὰν ἐφίστηται ἡ κοιλία Sor. 1.122. ἐφίστημι τὴν διάνοιαν κατά τι, περί τινος, fix one’s mind upon it, attend to it, Isoc. 9.69, Arist. Metaph. 987b3, Thphr. Char.Prooem., etc.; τὴν σκέψιν περί τινος Arist. Metaph. 1090a2; τὸν λόγον Id. Juv. 470b5; τὸν νοῦν τινι D.S. 12.1; αὑτὸν ἐπιστήσας ἐπί τι Arist. Top. 135a26: ἐπιστῆσαι abs., give attention, τούτοις ἐπιστήσαντες Id. Mu. 391a26; περί τινος Id. GC 315b18; περί τι Id. HA 487a13; ἐπί τι Plb. 1.65.5, etc.; ἐπιστήσασι μᾶλλον λεκτέον one must speak with more care and accuracy, Arist. Pol. 1335b3, cf. EN 1144a22; πότερον.. ἤ Jul. ad Them. 265b; ὅτι.. Sor. 1.97 (hence ἐπίσταμαι, ἐπιστήμη, qq.v.).
2. c. acc. pers., arrest the attention of, Plu. TG 17, cf. 2.17e, Gal. 18(2).105; ἐπιστῆσαί τινα ἐπί τι call his attention to, Plb. 2.61.11, cf. 4.34.9; τοῦ καιροῦ τοῦ κατὰ τὴν διήγησιν ἐφεστακότος ἡμᾶς ἐπί τι having led us to.., Id. 10.21.2, cf. 31.23.1: hence, object, Plot. 1.4.5. intr. in Med. and Pass., ἐφίσταμαι, aor. 1 ἐπεστάθην [ S. ] Fr. [1127.5], E. Hipp. 819, IT 1375, etc., with pf., plpf. (Aeol. plpf. 3 sg. ἐπήστᾱκε Schwyzer 646.16 (Cyme, ii B. C.): Dor. plpf. 3 pl. ἐφεστάκεον [ᾱ ] SIG 241.146 (Delph., iv B. C.)), and aor. 2 Act.: (the causal tenses are not found in Hom., the Med. or Pass. only in impf. ἐφίστατο Il. 11.644; elsewh. always aor. 2 or pf. Act. with inf. ἐφεστάμεναι Od. 24.380): —
3. stand upon, τεῖχος.. ῥύατ’ ἐφεσταότες Il. 18.515; πύργῳ ἐφεστήκει 6.373; δίφρῳ ἐφεσταότος 17.609, etc.; ἐπέστη βηλῷ ἔπι λιθέῳ 23.201; ἡ.. ἐπισταθεῖσα ὀρθή Arist. Metaph. 1051a28; ἐπὶ τὰς.. σχεδίας Plb. 3.46.8.
4. to be imposed upon, μόχθων τῶν ἐφεστώτων ἐμοί S. Tr. 1170.
5. stand on the top or surface, τὸ ἐπιστάμενον [τοῦ γάλακτος ], i. e. cream, Hdt. 4.2; λιπαρότητες ἄνω ἐφιστάμεναι Hp. Prog. 12; ἐ. καθάπερ ὀρρὸς [γάλακτι ] Dsc. 1.72; of vapour, form, Arist. Juv. 469b31. II to be set over, ἐφίσταται πύλαις A. Th. 538; οἷός τε πολλοῖς προβατίοις ἐφεστάναι Ar. V. 955; οἷοι νῷν ἐφεστᾶσι σκοποί S. Aj. 945; ἄρχοντες ἐφ’ ἑκάστῳ μέρει ἐ. X. Hier. 9.5; ἐπί τινος Pl. R. 460b; ἐπὶ τῆς πολιτείας D. 19.298: rarely c. gen., τὸν ἐπεστεῶτα τῆς διώρυχος Hdt. 7.117; ὅσοι θεοῦ χρημάτων ἐφέστασαν E. Andr. 1098: abs. in part., ὁ ἐφεστηκώς the person in authority, the officer in command, X. Oec. 21.9; οἱ ἐφεστῶτες, Ion. οἱ ἐπεστεῶτες, Hdt. 2.148, S. Aj. 1072, X. Mem. 3.5.19.

III

1. stand by or near, ὣς πυκνοὶ ἐφέστασαν ἀλλήλοισιν Il. 13.133; ἐπ’ ἄκρῳ χείλει ἐφεσταότες, ἐ. παρὰ τάφρῳ, 12.52, 199; θύρῃσιν ἐφίστατο 11.644; ἐπὶ τὰς πύλας, ἐπὶ τὰς θύρας, Hdt. 3.77, Pl. Smp. 212d; ἐπὶ τοῖς προθύροις Id. Phlb. 64c; esp. of dreams or visions, appear to, εὕδοντι ἐπέστη ὄνειρος Hdt. 1.34, cf. 7.14; ὄναρ κεφαλῆφιν ἐπέστη Il. 10.496; ἐπιστᾶσα τῆς νυκτός Isoc. 10.65; ἄγγελος ἐπέστη αὐτοῖς.Luke 2:9 : abs., stand by, Hdt. 3.78; πολλῶν ἐφεστώτων App. Syr. 10; ἤμην ἐφεστώς Acts 22:20; οἱ λέβητες ἐπεστεῶτες Hdt. 1.59; ὁ ἀντίδικος ἐφέστηκε Pl. Tht. 172e, cf. Aeschin. 3.79; without hostile sense, ἐπέστης S. OC 558, cf. Luke 2:38, etc.; of troops, to be posted after or behind, κατόπιν ἐ. τοῖς θηρίοις Plb. 16.18.7.
2. in hostile sense, stand against, τὰ φρονέοντες ἐφέστασαν ἀλλήλοισιν Il. 15.703, cf. 5.624; ἔνθα μένος πνείοντες ἐφέστασαν Od. 22.203, cf. 24.380; appear before, of an army, ἐπὶ τῇ πόλι Hdt. 4.203; ἐπὶ τὸ βασίλειον Isoc. 9.58; come upon suddenly or by surprise, Th. 8.69; ἐξαίφνης ἐπιστὰς τοῖς γιγνομένοις Isoc. 8.41, cf. D. 6.5, Luc. DDeor. 17.1; εἰς τοὺς ὄχλους Isoc. 18.9; so of events, etc., αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐ. ὄλεθρος 1 Thessalonians 5:3, cf. Luke 21:34; διὰ τὸν ἐφεστῶτα ζόφον Plb. 18.20.7; διὰ τὸν ὑετὸν τὸν ἐφεστῶτα Acts 28:2.
3. metaph., of events, spring upon one, occur, πρίν μοι τύχη τοιάδ’ ἐπέστη S. OT 777, cf. Th. 3.82; in pf., impend, be at hand, τὸν ἐφεστηκότα κίνδυνον τῇ πόλει D. 18.176; ὁ καιρός.. ἐφέστηκε 2 Timothy 4:6; περὶ τοῦ βασιλέως.. ὁ λόγος ἐφέστηκε νῦν Arist. Pol. 1287a2, cf. Metaph. 999a25; of a more remote future, to be in store, lie in wait for, κῆρες ἐφεστᾶσιν θανάτοιο Il. 12.326.
4. halt, stop, as in a march, ἄλλοτε καὶ ἄλλοτε ἐφιστάμενος X. An. 2.4.26 (cf. A. V); ἐπιστὰς περιέμεινα Pl. Smp. 172a: c. gen., ἐ. τοῦ πλοῦ Th. 2.91. fix one’s mind on, give one’s attention to, σφαγῇ E. Andr. 547; τῇ τρύγῃ PFlor. 236.4 (iii A. D.); ἐπί τι Isoc. 10.29, D. 18.60; τοῖς πράγμασιν.. ἐπιστάντες Id. 4.12; ἐπιστάς abs. (sc. τοῖς πράγμασι), Id. 18.233; διὰ ταῦτ’ ἐγρήγορεν, ἐφέστηκεν Id. 6.19. aor. 1 Med. in causal sense, set up, τὰς θύρας X. Ages. 8.7; set, post, φρουροὺς ἐπεστησάμην Id. Cyr. 8.2.19; τέλος ἐπιστήσασθαι, Lat. finem imponere, Pl. Lg. 802a: pres. is once so used, τοῦ με τήνδ’ ἐφίστασαι βάσιν; why dost thou cause me to halt ? S. Tr. 339.
5. ἐπιστησάμενος, intr., having been ἐπιστάτης, IGRom. 4.1265 (Thyatira).

Question 83

θερίζω

Answer 83

I reap

θερίσω, ἐθέρισα, -, -, ἐθερίσθην

to reap, harvest
Definition:
to gather in harvest, reap, Mt. 6:26; 25:24, 26; met. to reap the reward of labor, 1 Cor. 9:11; 2 Cor. 9:6; to reap the harvest of vengeance, Rev. 14:15, 16

θερίζω; future θερίσω (Buttmann, 37 (32), cf. WH’s Appendix, p. 163f); 1 aorist ἐθερισα; 1 aorist passive ἐθερίσθην; (θέρος); the Sept. for קָצַר; (from Aeschylus, Herodotus down); to reap, harvest;

a. properly: Matthew 6:26; Luke 12:24; James 5:4; (figuratively, John 4:36 (twice)).
b. in proverbial expressions about sowing and reaping: ἄλλος … ὁ θερίζων, one does the work, another gets the reward, John 4:37f (where the meaning is ‘ye hereafter, in winning over a far greater number of the Samaritans to the kingdom of God, will enjoy the fruits of the work which I have now commenced among them’ (others do not restrict the reference to converted Samaritans)); θερίζων ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρας, unjustly appropriating to thyself the fruits of others’ labor, Matthew 25:24, 26; Luke 19:21f; ὁ ἐάν … θερίσει, as a man has acted (on earth) so (hereafter by God) will he be requited, either with reward or penalty (his deeds will determine his doom), Galatians 6:7 (a proverb: ut sententem feceris, ita metes, Cicero, de orat. 2, 65; (σύ δέ ταῦτα αἰσχρῶς μέν ἔσπειρας κακῶς δέ ἐθερισας, Aristotle, rhet. 3, 3, 4; cf. Plato, Phaedr. 260 d.; see Meyer on Galatians, the passage cited)); τί, to receive a thing by way of reward or punishment: τά σαρκικά, 1 Corinthians 9:11; φθοράν, ζωήν αἰώνιον, Galatians 6:8, (σπείρειν πυρούς, θερίζειν ἀκάνθας, Jeremiah 12:13; ὁ σπείρων φαῦλα θερίσει κακά, Proverbs 22:8; ἐάν σπείρητε κακά, πᾶσαν ταραχήν καί θλῖψιν θερισετε, Test. xii. Patr., p. 576 (i. e. test. Levi § 13)); absolutely: of the reward of well-doing, Galatians 6:9; 2 Corinthians 9:6.
c. As the crops are cut down with the sickle, θερίζειν, is figuratively used for to destroy, cut off: Revelation 14:15; with the addition of τήν γῆν, to remove the wicked inhabitants of the earth and deliver them up to destruction, Revelation 14:16 (τήν Ἀσίαν, Plutarch, reg. et. imper. apophthegm. (Antig. 1), p. 182 a.).

Question 84

παράπτωμα, ατος, τό,

Answer 84

trespass, transgression, sin against, to sin as a moral failure to keep a command, fig., stepping out of the bounds of God’s law
Definition:
pr. a stumbling aside, a false step; in NT a trespass, fault, offence, transgression, Mt. 6:14, 15; Mk. 11:25, 26; Rom. 4:25; a fall in faith, Rom. 11:11, 12

false step, slip, blunder, Plb. 9.10.6, Phld. Herc. 1251.14 (pl.), Longin. 36.2.

2. defeat, D.S. 19.100.
3. transgression, trespass, LXX Ezekiel 14:13,al., Matthew 6:14, Galatians 6:1, al.
4. error in amount of payments, PTeb. 5.91 (ii B.C.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παράπτωμα, παραπτώματος, τό (παραπίπτω, which see);

1. properly, a fall beside or near something; but nowhere found in this sense.
2. tropically, a lapse or deviation from truth and uprightness; a sin, misdeed (R. V. trespass, ‘differing from ἁμάρτημα (which see) in figure not in force’ (Fritzsche); cf. Trench, § lxvi.): Matthew 6:14,(a G T omit; WH brackets), b; Rec.; Mark 11:25, 26 R G L; Romans 4:25; Romans 5:15-18, 20; Romans 11:11; 2 Corinthians 5:19; Galatians 6:1; Ephesians 1:7; Ephesians 2:1, 5; Colossians 2:13; James 5:16 (where L T Tr WH ἁμαρτίας). (Polybius 9, 10, 6; Wis. 3:13 Wis. 10:1; the Sept. several times for מַעַל, עָוֶל, פֶּשַׁע , etc.; of literary faults, Longinus, 36, 2.)

Question 85

τεσσαράκοντα

Answer 85

forty

Question 86

ἀκροβυστία, -ας, ἡ

Answer 86

uncircumcision

uncircumcision, foreskin; fig., not of the Mosaic covenant, a Gentile
Definition:
foreskin; uncircumcision, the state of being uncircumcised, Rom. 4:10; the abstract being put for the concrete, uncircumcised men, i.e., Gentiles, Rom. 4:9, et al

I foreskin, LXX Genesis 17:11, al., Ph. Fr. 49 H., Acts 11:3.

II

1. state of having the foreskin, uncircumcision, Romans 2:25, etc.
2. collect., the uncircumcised, Romans 2:26; Romans 3:30, etc. (Prob. from ἄκρος and a Semitic root, cf. Bab. buśtu ‘pudenda’, Heb. bôsheth ‘shame’: wrongly derived from ἄκρος, βύω by EM 53.48.

Question 87

γνῶσις, -εως, ἡ

Answer 87

knowledge, understanding

knowledge, Lk. 1:77; knowledge of an especial kind and relatively high character, Lk. 11:52; Rom. 2:20; 1 Tim. 6:20; more particularly in respect of Christian enlightenment, Rom. 15:14; 1 Cor. 8:10; 12:8; 2 Cor. 11:6, et al

γνῶσις, εως, ἡ,

I

1. seeking to know, inquiry, investigation, esp. judicial, τὰς τῶν δικαστηρίων γ. D. 18.224; τὴν κατὰ τοῦ διαιτητοῦ γ. Id. 21.92, cf. 7.9, Lycurg. 141; γ. περὶ τῆς δίκης PHib. 1.92.13 (iii B. C.).
2. result of investigation, decision, PPetr. 3p.118 (iii B. C.).

II

1. knowing, knowledge, Heraclit. 56; opp. ἀγνωσίη, Hp. Vict. 1.23 (dub.); opp. ἄγνοια, Pl. R. 478c; ἡ αἴσθησις γ. τις Arist. GA 731a33: pl., Θεὸς γνώσεων κύριος LXX 1 Kings 2:3. higher, esoteric knowledge, 1 Corinthians 8:7; 1 Corinthians 8:10, Ephesians 3:19, etc.; χαρισάμενος ἡμῖν νοῦν, λόγον, γνῶσιν PMag.Par. 2.290.
2. acquaintance with a person, πρός τινα Test. ap. Aeschin. 1.50; τῶν Σεβαστῶν IPE 1.47.6 (Olbia).
3. recognizing, Th. 7.44.
4. means of knowing, [ αἱ αἰσθήσεις] κυριώταται τῶν καθ’ ἕκαστα γ. Arist. Metaph. 981b11.

III

1. being known, γνῶσιν ἔχει τι, = γνωστόν ἐστι, Pl. Tht. 206b.
2. fame, credit, Hdn. 7.5.5, Luc. Herod. 3. means of knowing: hence, statement in writing, PLond. 5.1708, etc. (vi A. D.). = γνῶμα, Hsch. s. h. v.

Question 88

ἐπίγνωσις, -εως, ἡ

Answer 88

insight, ascertainment, understanding, knowledge

the coming at the knowledge, of a thing, ascertainment, Rom. 3:20; a distance perception or impression, acknowledgment, insight, Col. 2:2

ἐπί-γνωσις, εως, ἡ,

I

1. recognition, c.gen., Phld. Lib. p.49O.; σφραγίδων Hdn. 7.6.7; [ τινῶν] διὰ βοῆς, δι’ ὀμμάτων, J. BJ 6.2.6; ἐς ἐπίγνωσιν App. Praef. 13; recognition of a mistake, D.S. 17.114; determination of a fact, PTeb. 24.23 (ii B.C.).
2. . knowledge, τινός Plb. 3.7.6, 3.31.4, Attal. ap. Hipparch. 1.8.10, cf. Ph. Bel. 59.2; τοῦ μέλλοντος Ph. 2.222; μουσικῆς Plu. 2.1145a; θεοῦ LXX Proverbs 2:5, cf. Romans 10:2, etc.; τὸν θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει ib.1.28, etc.; λαβὼν κανόνας εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν τῆς ἀληθείας Arr. Epict. 2.20.21, cf. S.E. M. 7.259; ἐ. ἐπιστημονική scientific theory, Theol.Ar. 17.

II. decision, πρὸς -σιν κεκαθίκασιν SIG 826 D 16; θεῶν ἐ. Him. Or. 1.17.

Question 89

ὑπηρέτης, -ου, ὁ

Answer 89

servant, attendant, helper, one who serves or attends, not distinguished in status from other words for servant

pr. an under-rower, a rower, one of a ship’s crew; a minister, attendant, servant; an attendant on a magistrate, officer, Mt. 5:25; an attendant or officer of the Sanhedrin, Mt. 26:58; an attendant, or servant of a synagogue, Lk. 4:20; a minister, attendant, assistant in any work, Lk. 1:2; Jn. 18:36

ὑπηρέτ-ης, ου, ὁ,

(ἐρέτης)

Dor. ὑπηρέτας IG 42(1).122.40,112 (Epid., iv B. C.), SIG 1000.31 (Cos, i B. C.): —

rower, τοὶ ὑ. τᾶν μακρᾶν ναῶν SIG l. c. (dub. sens.).

II underling, servant, attendant, Hdt. 3.63, 5.111; δοῦλοι καὶ πάντες ὑ. Pl. Plt. 289c; ὑ. [τῆς πόλεως ], opp. ἄρχων, Id. R. 552b; ἡ πόλις εἰς ὑπηρέτου σχῆμα.. προελήλυθεν D. 23.210; τῶν ἰατρῶν, τῶν δικαστῶν ὑ., Pl. Lg. 720a, 873b; used in Trag. and Att. to express all kinds of subordinate relations, as Hermes is ὑ. θεῶν, A. Pr. 954, cf. 983; the Delphians are Φοίβου ὑπηρέται, S. OT 712; Neoptolemus is ὑ. to Odysseus, Id. Ph. 53; the αὐλός is ὑ. to the Chorus, Pratin.Lyr. 1.7: sts. c. dat., τῷ θεῷ ὑ. Pl. Lg. 773e; τοῖς νόμοις ib. 715c, Arist. Pol. 1287a21; also οἱ περὶ τυράννους καὶ πόλεις ὑ. E. Tr. 426; opp. οἰκέτης, X. Mem. 2.10.3: c. gen. objecti, ὑ. παντὸς ἔργου a helper in every work, Id. An. 1.9.18.

2. at Athens, the servant who attended each man-at-arms (ὁπλίτης) to carry his baggage, rations, and shield, Th. 3.17; sts. light-armed as slingers or bowmen, Ar. Av. 1186. ὁ τῶν ἕνδεκα ὑ. the assistant of the Eleven, employed in executions of state-criminals, Pl. Phd. 116b, cf. X. HG 2.3.54, 2.4.8. a petty officer of the Council, IG 12.879 (pl.), Hesperia 3.63 (iv B. C.).
3. pl., staff-officers in immediate attendance on the general, aides-de-camp, adjutants, X. Cyr. 2.4.4, 6.2.13, etc.: sg., D. 50.31; also, officer attached to τάξις, σύνταγμα, or ἑκατονταρχία, Ascl. Tact. 2.9, 6.3, Ael. Tact. 9.4, 16.2, Arr. Tact. 10.4, 14.4.
4. servitor in the cult of Mithras, RHist.Rel. 109.64 (Rome).

Question 90

ἐπιβάλλω

Answer 90

(tr.) to throw over; to place; lay hold of, seize, arrest; to sew on; (intr.) to break over

to cast, or throw upon, Mk. 11:7; 1 Cor. 7:35; to lay on, apply to, Lk. 9:62; to put on, sew on, Mt. 9:16; Lk. 5:36; τὰς χειρας, to lay hands on, offer violence to, seize, Mt. 26:50; also, to lay hand to, undertake, commence, Acts 12:1; intrans. to rush, dash, beat into, Mk. 4:37; to ponder, reflect on, Mk. 14:72; to fall to one’s share, pertain to, Lk. 15:12

ἐπιβάλλω:

I.

1. trans., throw or cast upon, θριξὶ.., ἃς ἐπέβαλλον (sc. πυρί) Il. 23.135; ἐπὶ δὲ χλαῖναν βάλεν αὐτῷ Od. 14.520, cf. 4.440; ἑωυτὸν ἐς τὸ πῦρ v.l. in Hdt. 7.107; φάρη κόραις E. El. 1221 (lyr.); ἐ. τινὰς ἐπὶ ἁμάξας Th. 4.48, cf. Hdt. 4.75, 5.112; ἐπιβάλλοντας (sc. χοῦν) throwing on more and more, Th. 2.76.
2. . lay on, [ ἡμιόνοις] ἐπέβαλλεν ἱμάσθλην Od. 6.320; ἐ. πληγάς τινι X. Lac. 2.8; Ζεὺς ἐπὶ χεῖρα βάλοι A. Ch. 395 (lyr.), cf. Ar. Nu. 933 (anap.); ἐ.τὴν χεῖρά τινι Id. Lys. 440 (but τῷ καρπῷ τοῦ νοσοῦντος τὴν χεῖρα, of feeling the pulse, Gal. 18(2).40; so τὴν ἁφήν Id. 8.821, Marcellin. Puls. 119); τὰς χεῖρας τοῖς κατ’ Αἴγαιον Plb. 3.2.8; Ῥωμαίοις Id. 18.51.8; ἐπί τινα Matthew 26:50; impose as a tax tribute, τινί τι Hdt. 1.106, Th. 8.108; as a fine or penalty, ζημίην, φυγὴν ἐ. τινί, Hdt. 6.92 (Pass.), 7.3; ἀργύριον Lys. 9.6; ἐπιβολάς Id. 20.14, cf. Arist. Ath. 61.2; λύτρα LXX Exodus 21:30 (Pass.); inflict, θνατοῖς ἐ. ἀνάλγητα, λύπην, etc., S. Tr. 128 (lyr.), E. Med. 1115 (anap.), etc.
3. . ἐ. σφρηγῖδα, δακτύλιον, affix a seal, Hdt. 3.128, 2.38; σφραγῖδ’ ἐπί τι Ar. Av. 559; σύμβολόν τινι ib. 1215.
4. . add, contribute, μικρὸν [ἀληθεία ] Arist. Metaph. 993b2; ἐ. ἐπὶ τὸ ὕδωρ Thphr. Ign. 49; νέον [φῶς ] Pl. Cra. 409b: metaph., throw in, mention, τι dub. in S. El. 1246 (lyr.) (in Med., “” χαίρειν τεοῖς προθύροις ἐπιβάλλομαι Theoc. 23.27); Φαῖστος.. ἐπιβάλλων φησί Sch. Pi. P. 4.28: abs., bid higher, Arist. Pol. 1259a14.
5. . place next in order, Plb. 1.26.15.
6. . let grow, κλήματα Thphr. HP 4.13.5; βλαστούς ib. 3.5.1.
7. . let loose, πρόβατα ἐπὶ κνῆκον PRyl. 69.6 (i B.C.).
8. . causal of ἐπιβαίνω A. 111.3, D.Chr. 7.134.

II.

1. throw oneself upon, go straight towards, c. acc., ἡ δὲ Φεὰς ἐπέβαλλεν Od. 15.297: later c. dat. loci, Plb. 5.18.3, D.S. 1.30, Plot. 3.7.12, etc.; νήσοις Rhian. 39; εἰς Ιταλίαν, ἐπὶ τὸν τόπον, Plb. 2.24.17, 5.6.6, cf. PAmh. 2.31.5 (ii B.C.), etc.
2. . fall upon, ὅπου ἂν ὁ ἥλιος ἐ. Arist. HA 598a3; esp. in hostile sense, set upon, c.dat., ib. 623b1, etc.; τοῖσ’ Αρβήλοις D.S. 17.64: abs., ἐ.ληστρικῷ τρόπῳ PRyl. 127.10 (i A.D.); ἐπιβάλλουσαι jostling, trampling, Pl. Phdr. 248a; sens. obsc., Ar. Av. 1216.
3. . (sc. τὸν νοῦν) set to a thing, devote oneself to it, c. dat., M.Ant. 10.30; τοῖς αὐλοῖς D.S. 3.59; τοῖς κοινοῖς πράγμασιν Plu. Cic. 4 (in full τὴν διάνοιαν ἐ. πρός τι D.S. 20.43): generally, give one’s attention to, think on, Mark 14:72.. apprehend, Epicur. Fr. 423; attain by intuition, c.dat., Dam. Pr. 54.
4. . fall in one’s way, ὅταν ἐπιβάλλῃ περὶ τῆς τοιαύτης πολιτείας ἡ σκέψις Arist. Pol. 1266a25; κατὰ τὸν ἐπιβάλλοντα λόγον Id. GA 716a3.
5. . follow, come next, Plb. 11.23.2; τισί Plu. Aem. 33; ἐφ’ ὃν ἐπιβαλὼν ἔφη said thereupon, Plb. 1.80.1; interrupt, ἀποκρινομένῳ Thphr. Char. 7.2.
6. . belong to, fall to the share of, μόριον ὅσον αὐτοῖσι ἐπέβαλλε Hdt. 7.23, cf. Diph. 43.16; εἰ μὴ τὸ ὅλον, μέρος γε, ἐπιβάλλει τῆς βλασφημίας ἅπασι D. 18.272; ὅσον ἐπιβάλλει αὐτοῖς Arist. Pol. 1260a19; ἑκάστῳ τῆς εὐδαιμονίας ἐπιβάλλει τοσοῦτον ὅσονπερ ἀρετῆς ib. 1323b21; τῶν κτημάτων τὸ ἐπιβάλλον (sc. μέρος) the portion that falls to one, Hdt. 4.115, cf. LXX To. 3.17, 6.12; so τὸ ἐ. ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς μέρος D. 18.254; τὸ ἐ. μέρος τῆς οὐσίας Luke 15:12, cf. PGrenf. 1.33.33 (ii B.C.), etc.; fall due, of payments, PLond. 1.3.21 (ii B.C.); τόκον ὃν ἔφη ἐπιβάλλειν αὑτῷ which was payable by him, BCH 6.21 (Delos, ii B.C.).. part. ἐπιβάλλων, in Law, next-of-kin, ὁ ἐ., οἱ ἐ., Leg.Gort. 7.36, 11.42, al.
7. . impers. c. acc. et inf., τοὺς Δελφοὺς δὴ ἐπέβαλλε.. παρασχεῖν it concerned them to provide, Hdt. 2.180: or c. dat. et inf., ἐπιβάλλει τινὶ ποιεῖν τι Chrysipp.Stoic. 2.39,al., Plb. 18.51.1; ἐπιβάλλοντος ἡμῖν εὐεργετικοῖς εἶναι Corn. ND 15; κοινῇ πᾶσιν ἐπιβάλλει UPZ 112.10 (ii B.C.); καθότι ἐπέβαλλεν ἀνδρὶ καλῷ καὶ ἀγαθῷ IG 12(7).231.5 (Amorgos): freq. in part., ἐπιβάλλουσαν ἡγεῖσθαι τὴν στρατείαν τινί incumbent upon.., Teles p.61 H.; τὸ ἐπιβάλλον Cleanth.Stoic. 1.128, Arr. Epict. 2.11.3, etc.; τὰς -ούσας τάσεις τῆς φωνῆς Chrysipp.Stoic. 2.96; τὸ τῇ φύσει ἐ. Antip.Stoic. 3.255; appropriate, ὑποδοχαί Teles p.41 H.; ἰήματα IG 22.1121.15; ἁρμονία Iamb. Comm. Math. 30; ἡ στέρησις ἐπιβάλλοντός ἐστι παρεῖναι εἴδους τινός a specific form which ought to be present, Plot. 1.8.11.
8. . shut to, close, of the larynx, Arist. PA 664b26.
9. . in Logic, λόγοι ἐπιβάλλοντες, -όμενοι, overlapping and overlapped, of syllogisms in a sorites, Chrysipp.Stoic. 2.85; so of Time, ἐπέβαλε τοῖς χρόνοις Ἰουλιανῷ Eun. VS p.497 B.: — Med., γηραιῷ τῷ Κυρηναίῳ ἐπεβάλετο Anon. Intr.Arat. p.326M.
10. . in Alchemy, make a `projection’ (cf. ἐπιβολή), Syn.Alch.p.68B.

III.

1. Med., mostly like the intr. usages, but also: 1. c. gen., throw oneself upon, desire eagerly, ἐνάρων ἐπιβαλλόμενος Il. 6.68; παρθενίας ἐπιβάλλομαι Sapph. 102; τοῦ εὖ ζῆν ἐπιβάλλονται Arist. Pol. 1258a3.
2. . c. acc., put upon oneself, ἐπιβαλλομέναν.. πλόκον ἀνθέων E. Med. 840; ἐπιβάλλεσθαι put on more wraps, Thphr. Char. 2.10 (cf. IV. 1); ὕπνον ἡδὺν -όμενος D.Chr. 12.51: metaph., take possession of, καὶ ἐπὶ κλήρους ἐβάλοντο Od. 14.209; αὐθαίρετον δουλείαν ἐπιβαλεῖται will take upon himself, Th. 6.40.. of trees, make fresh growth, Thphr. HP 3.5.1.
3. . c.acc., also, attempt, undertake, ἔργον Pl. Sph. 264b, Ti. 48c; μέθοδον Arist. Pol. 1260b36: c. inf., Decr. ap. D. 18.164, Zeno Stoic. 1.68, Plb. 1.43.2, etc.: abs., πολλῶν -ημένων though many have made the attempt, Agatharch. 76.
4. . c. dat., put one’s hand to, ἐχέτλῃ AP 7.650 (Phal. (?)): metaph., apply or devote oneself to, τόλμῃ καὶ πράξει Plb. 5.81.1; ἐγχειρήματι μεγάλῳ D.H. 5.25, etc.
5. . arrive at, [ πολίεσσι ] Call. Del. 68; ὅταν ἐπὶ τοὺς χρόνους ἐπιβαλώμεθα D.S. 19.55.
6. . ἐπὶ πᾶσι -εβάλοντο brought up the rear, Id. 18.33..
7. in Pass., lie upon, be put upon, ἐπιβεβλημένοι τοξόται archers with their arrows on the string, X. An. 4.3.28, cf. 5.2.12; λάσιον ἐπιβεβλημένος having a rough cloak on, Theopomp.Com. 36; τὸ ἐν ψύχει κεῖσθαι -ημένον Hp. Epid. 2.3.1, cf. 6.4.14; διφθέραν -ημένη D.Chr. 5.25.
8. . to be set over, ὁ τελώνης ὁ ἐπιβεβλημένος τῷ Ζεύγματι Philostr. VA 1.20.
9. . Rhet., ornate (v. ἐπιβολή), ἰδέα λόγων οὔτ’ ἐπιβεβλημένη οὔτ’ αὖος Id. VS 1.20.2.

Question 91

μεριμνάω

Answer 91

I am anxious, distracted

μεριμνήσω, ἐμερίμνησα, -, -, -

to worry, have anxiety, be concerned
Definition:
to be anxious, or solicitous, Phil. 4:6; to expend careful thought, Mt. 6:27, 28, 31, 34a; 10:19; Lk. 10:41; 12:11, 22, 25, 26; to concern one’s self, Mt. 6:25; 1 Cor. 12:25; to have the thoughts occupied with, 1 Cor. 7:32, 33, 34; to feel an interest in, Phil. 2:20*

μεριμν-άω,

care for, be anxious about, meditate upon, ἔργον μεριμνῶν ποῖον..; S. OT 1124; esp. of philosophers, τὰ [μὲν ἀ]φανῆ μ. Ar. Fr. 672; οἱ λεπτῶς μεριμνῶντες Lyr.Adesp. 135, cf. X. Mem. 4.7.6; μ. περὶ τῆς τῶν πάντων φύσεως ib. 1.1.14; πολλὰ μ. to be cumbered with many cares, Id. Cyr. 8.7.12; τοῖς μεριμνῶσίν τε καὶ λυπουμένοις Apollod.Com. 3; μηθὲν τὴν ἀλήθειαν μεριμνᾶν Phld. Rh. 1.135 S., cf. 2.143 S.; μεριμνήσω ὑπὲρ τῆς ἁμαρτίας μου LXX Psalms 37:18(38).18; μ. εἰς τὴν αὔριον Matthew 6:34 : c. inf., to be careful to do, ὁ μεριμνήσας τὰ δίκαια λέγειν D. 21.192: with relat. clause, πολλὰ μ. ὅπως μὴ λάθῃς X. Mem. 3.5.23; μεριμνῶ πῶς κλαύσω AP 9.148; μὴ μεριμνᾶτε τῇ ψυχῇ τί φάγητε Matthew 6:25 : — Pass., to be treated with anxious care, AP 10.52 (Pall.); τράπεζαι πολυτελῶς μεμεριμνημέναι Ath. 14.641c; ἔννοια, ἀμφισβήτησις μ., Just. Nov. 22.26 Intr., 44.1.3

Question 92

πότε
AND
ποτε/ποτέ

Answer 92

when? how long?

interrogative adverb, When? At what time? Mt. 24:3; 25:37, 38, 39, 44; ἕως πότε, until when? how long? Mt. 17:17

Ion. κότε, Dor. πόκα Theoc. 4.7, al.: —

interrog. Particle used in direct and indirect questions, when? at what time? Il. 19.227, Od. 4.642; πότ’ εἰ μὴ νῦν . .; A. Th. 101 (lyr.), cf. Ch. 394 (lyr.); πότ’ ἆρα; = cross πότε with ἆρα 1.4 or 11, E. Ion 563; πότε δή; A. Ch. 720 (lyr.); ἐς πότε λήξει; S. Aj. 1185 (lyr.); ἐκ πότε . . ἤρξασθε SIG 832.9 (Astypalaea, ii A. D. ). II indef. ποτε ( Att., also Arc. in οὔποτε IG 5(2).343.48,66 (Orchom., iv B. C. ), οὔτε ποτέ Tab.Defix. in Philol. 59.201, and Cypr. in μήποτε Inscr.Cypr. 144H. ), Ion. κοτε, Dor. ποκα, Aeol. ποτα Sapph. 1.5, enclit.

Particle:

1 at some time or other, at some time, τάχ’ ἄν ποτε θυμὸν ὀλέσσῃ Il. 1.205, cf. Od. 2.76, etc.; π. καὶ ἄλλοτε at certain other times, X. An. 6.4.12, Arist. Po. 1451a9, Luc. Herm. 24 .

2. in hypoth. clauses, questions, etc., at any time, ever, S. Aj. 755, 1133; εἴ κοτε Call. Aet.Oxy. 2080.69; cf. εἴ ποτε: also with relatives (cf. δήποτε ), Ζεὺς ὅστις ποτ’ ἐστίν A. Ag. 160 (lyr.), etc.; ὅποι ποτέ, ὅπου π., etc., S. Ph. 780, Aj. 194 (lyr.), etc.; after πω, πη, v. cross πώποτε, πήποκα: very freq. with negatives, οὔτε ποτ’ . . Il. 1.226; οὐδέ ποτ’ Hes. Th. 759; οὐδέν ποτ’ ἄλλο A. Ch. 16; οὐδεὶς ἐρεῖ ποθ’ S. Aj. 481; οὐκ ἂν δή ποτε Il. 19.271, etc.; τοῦτο μὴ δόξῃς ποτέ S. Ant. 762, cf. 648, 750, etc.; cf. οὔποτε, μήποτε, οὐδέποτε, μηδέποτε, οὐπώποτε, μηπώποτε.
3. in correl. clauses it stands first, with accent, ποτὲ μὲν . ., ποτὲ δὲ . . at one time . ., at another . ., Pl. Tht. 170c (s. v. l.), Plb. 4.38.6, etc.; ποτὲ μὲν . ., αὖθις δὲ . . Pl. R. 560a; ποτὲ . ., τοτὲ δ’ οὔ Id. Tht. 192d; ποτ’ εἶχε . ., εἶτά γε νῦν D. 36.50; ποτὲ μὲν . . νῦν δέ Luc. DMort. 11.1; ποτὲ δὲ . ., without any preceding Part., Thphr. Char. 9.7 (dub.).

III of some unknown point of time,

1 in ref. to the past, once, ὅν ποτ’ Ἀθήνη θρέψε Il. 2.547, etc.; οὕς ποτ’ ἀπ’ Αἰνείαν ἑλόμην, of the day before, 8.108 (v. Sch.), cf. 14.45; ἤδη π. 1.260, S. Aj. 1142, Ar. Nu. 346, Ra. 931; ποτ’ ἤδη A. Eu. 50; πρόσθε πού ποτ’ S. OC 1549; χρόνῳ ποτ’ Id. Ant. 303; esp. in telling a story, once upon a time, οὕτω ποτ’ ἦν μῦς καὶ γαλῆ Ar. V. 1182, cf. Pl. Phdr. 237b: with historic pres., S. OT 715, E. El. 416, Ba. 2: with a Subst., εἰς τήν π. φιλίαν And. 3.22; τυράννου . . πάλαι π. S. OT 1043, cf. Ph. 677 (lyr.), Tr. 555 . at length, μόγις δή κοτε εἶπε Hdt. 1.116; μόγις οὖν π. Pl. Prt. 314e, etc.; ὀψὲ γοῦν π. Hierocl. in CA 27p.484M.

2. in ref. to the future, at some time, καί π. τοι . . παρέσσεται . . δῶρα Il. 1.213, cf. 240, S. OC 386, Ant. 912, etc.: also to denote earnest expectation, at length, εὔχεταί π. οἶκον ἰδεῖν Pi. P. 4.293; ἔμελλον ἄρα παύσειν π. Ar. Ra. 268; esp. with imper., μέθες π. dimitte tandem aliquando, S. Ph. 816; τείσασθ’, ἀλλὰ τῷ χρόνῳ π. ib. 1041, etc.; ὀψέ π. Jul. Or. 1.31d .
3. with intensive force, in questions, τίς ποτε; who in the world? τίνες ποτ’ ἐστέ; A. Eu. 408, cf. S. Ph. 220, etc.; τί ποτ’ ἐστὶ τοῦτο τὸ πάθος what it can possibly be, Pl. Tht. 187d; οὐκ ἐξερεῖς ποτε; S. OT 335, cf. 754, Aj. 1290, etc.; to strengthen ἀεί, ἀεί ποτε from all time, always in the past, ἀεί ποτε ζῇ ταῦτα Id. Ant. 456, cf. Aj. 320, Th. 6.82, al., D.C. 42.5; ἀεὶ δή π. Th. 1.13, 8.73

AND
ποτε/ποτέ

once, at one time, formerly; now, now at last
Definition:
enclitic particle, once, some time or other, either past or future; formerly, Jn. 9:13; at length, Lk. 22:32; at any time, ever, Eph. 5:29; Heb. 2:1; intensive after interrogatives, ever, 1 Cor. 9:7; Heb. 1:5

ποτέ, an enclitic particle, from Homer down;

1. once, i. e. at some time or other, formerly, aforetime;
   a. of the Past: John 9:13; Romans 7:9; Romans 11:30; Galatians 1:13, 23 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 15, 7); Ephesians 2:2f, 11, 13; Ephesians 5:8; Colossians 1:21; Colossians 3:7; 1 Thessalonians 2:5; Titus 3:3; Philemon 1:11; 1 Peter 2:10; 1 Peter 3:5, 20; ἤδη πότε, now at length, Philippians 4:10.
   b. of the future: Luke 22:32; ἤδη πότε, now at length, Romans 1:10.
2. ever: after a negative, οὐδείς πότε, Ephesians 5:29 (Buttmann, 202 (175).); οὐ … πότε, 2 Peter 1:21; μή πότε (see μήποτε); after οὐ μή with the aorist subjunctive 2 Peter 1:10; in a question, τίς πότε, 1 Corinthians 9:7; Hebrews 1:5, 13; ὁποῖοί πότε, whatsoever, Galatians 2:6 (but some would render πότε here formerly, once; cf. Lightfoot ad loc.).

Question 93

ἀνάγκη, -ης, ἡ

Answer 93

necessity; (+εστι & dat or acc. + inf) there is need (to), it is necessary (to), one must

necessity; distress, hardship
Definition:
necessity, Mt. 18:7; constraint, compulsion, 2 Cor. 9:7; obligation of duty, moral or spiritual necessity, Rom. 13:5; distress, trial, affliction, Lk. 21:23; 1 Cor. 7:26; 2 Cor. 6:4; 12:10; 1 Thess. 3:7

ἀνάγκη,

Ion. and ἀναγκαίη, ἡ,

1. force, constraint, necessity, κρατερὴ δ’ ἐπικείσετ’ ἀ. Il. 6.458; ἀναγκαίη γὰρ ἐπείγει ib. 85; ἀναγκαίῃ πολεμίζειν 4.300; τίς τοι ἀνάγκη πτώσσειν; 5.633; οἷσιν ἀ. (sc. φυλάσσειν) 10.418, al.: but in Hom. usu. in dat. as Adv., ἀνάγκῃ perforce, of necessity, ἀείδειν Od. 1.154; φεύγειν Il. 11.150: in act. sense, forcibly, by force, ἴσχειν, ἄγειν, Od. 4.557, 22.353; μνήσασθαι 7.217: strengthd. by καί, 10.434; ὑπ’ ἀνάγκης 19.156; opp. ἑκόντες, Pl. Phdr. 231a; ὑπ’ ἀναγκαίης Hdt. 7.172, al.; ἐξ ἀνάγκης S. Ph. 73, Th. 3.40, etc.; δι’ ἀνάγκης Pl. Ti. 47e; σὺν ἀνάγκᾳ Pi. P. 1.51; πρὸς ἀνάγκαν A. Pers. 569 codd. (lyr.), cf. Epict. Ench. 29.2; κατ’ ἀνάγκην X. Cyr. 4.3.7: ἀνάγκη ἐστί, c. inf., it must be that.., is necessary that.., cf. Il. supr. cit.; πᾶσα ἀ. ἐστὶ ὗσαι Hdt. 2.22; τρέφειν τοὺς τοκέας τοῖσι μὲν παισὶν οὐδεμία ἀ., τῇσι δὲ θυγατράσι πᾶσα ἀ. ib. 35: c. dat. pers., ἀ. μοι σχεθεῖν A. Proverbs 16:1-33, cf. Pers. 293: — in Trag. freq. in answers and arguments, πολλή γ’ ἀνάγκη, πολλή’ στ’ ἀνάγκη, or πολλή μ’ ἀνάγκη, with which an inf. may always be supplied, E. Med. 1013, Hec. 396, S. Tr. 295; so πᾶσ’ ἀνάγκη El. 1497, cf. Pl. R. 441d; ἀνάγκη μεγάλη [ἐστί ] ib. 485e, Isaiah 3:6, D. 28.9; ἐν ἀνάγκῃ ἐστί Lys. 6.8: later ἀνάγκην ἔχω, c. inf., Luke 14:18.
2. necessity in the philosophical sense, Arist. APo. 94b37, Metaph. 1026b28, Ph. 199b34; logical necessity, Metaph. 1064b33: in pl., laws of nature, τίσιν ἀνάγκαις ἕκαστα γίγνεται τῶν οὐρανίων X. Mem. 1.1.11, cf. Hp. Aër. 21. natural need, γαστρὸς ἀνάγκαις A. Ag. 726, cf. Ar. Nu. 1075, X. Cyn. 7.1; ὑπ’ ἀ. τῆς ἐμφύτου Pl. R. 458d; ἐρωτικαῖς ἀ. ib., etc. ἡ ἀ. τοῦ τόπου the lie of the ground as a necessary condition, PLille 4.14. ἀνάγκη δαιμόνων, αἱ ἐκ θεῶν ἀνάγκαι, fate, destiny, E. Ph. 1000, 1763: freq. personified in Poets, Parm. 8.30, Emp. 116, A. Pr. 105, S. Fr. 256; Ἀνάγκᾳ δ’ οὐδὲ θεοὶ μάχονται Simon. 5.21.
3. compulsion exerted by a superior, ἀ. προστιθέναι, ἐπιτιθέναι, X. Hier. 9.4, Lac. 10.7. violence, punishment, esp. of torture, mostly pl., ἐς ἀνάγκας ἄγεσθαι Hdt. 1.116, cf. Antipho 6.25, Herod. 5.5; προσάγειν τινὶ τὰς ἀνάγκας Th. 1.99; τὰ πρὸς ἀνάγκας ὄργανα instruments of torture, Plb. 15.28.2: later in sg., ἡ ἀ. τῶν βασάνων Plu. 2.305e; πρὸς ἀνάγκην under torture, Id. Publ. 17: metaph., Hp. de Arte 13; δολοποιὸς ἀ., i. e. the stratagem of Nessus, S. Tr. 832; βρόχων πλεκταῖς ἀνάγκαις Xenarch. 1.9. duress, ‘force majeure’, ὅρκους οὓς ποιέονται ἐν ἀνάγκῃ ὄντες Democr. 239; stress of circumstances, ἀκούσιοι ἀ. Th. 3.82. treatment by mechanical force, τῶν ἀναγκῶν τινὰ προσφέρειν Hp. Fract. 15, cf. Art. 73.
4. bodily pain, anguish, κατ’ ἀνάγκην ἕρπειν painfully, S. Ph. 206 (lyr.); ὑπ’ ἀνάγκης βοᾶν ib. 215; ὠδίνων ἀνάγκαι E. Ba. 89 (lyr.): generally, distress, ἐν ἀνάγκαις γλυκὺ γίνεται καὶ τὸ σκληρόν Simon. 226; freq. in LXX, Job 15:24, al.; ἡ ἐνεστῶσα ἀ. 1 Corinthians 7:26 : esp. in pl., IG 12 (7).386.23 (Amorgos, iii B. C.), D.S. 4.43, 2 Corinthians 6:4, etc.

II tie of blood, kindred, Lys. 32.5.

III = ἡ δικαστικὴ κλεψύδρα, Hsch.

Question 94

ἀποκάλυψις, -εως, ἡ

Answer 94

A revelation (apocalypse)

revelation, what is revealed, disclosure, to make information known with an implication that the information can be understood. This refers in the NT to God making information known, especially to his close associates
Definition:
a disclosure, revelation, Rom. 2:5; manifestation, appearance, Rom. 8:19; 1 Cor. 1:7; 2 Thess. 1:7; 1 Pet. 1:7, 13; 4:13; met. spiritual enlightenment, Lk. 2:32

ἀπο-κάλυψις [κᾰ], εως, ἡ,

uncovering, of the head, Phld. Vit. p.38J.; disclosing, of hidden springs, Plu. Aem. 14: metaph., ἁμαρτίας Id. 2.7o f; revelation, esp. of divine mysteries, Romans 16:25, etc.; of persons, manifestation, 2 Thessalonians 1:7, etc.; title of the Apocalypse.

Question 95

δέησις, -εως, ἡ

Answer 95

prayer, request, petition
Definition:
entreaty; prayer, supplication, Lk. 1:13; 2:37; 5:33

δέ-ησις, εως, ἡ,

I

1. entreaty, Lys. 2.15 (pl.), Isoc. 8.138 (pl.), Pl. 329d (pl.), etc.; δέομαι δ’ ὑμῶν.. δικαίαν δέησιν D. 29.4; δεήσεις ποιεῖσθαι Luke 5:33, cf. Wilcken Chr. 41 ii 12 (iii A.D.).
2. written petition, CPHerm. 6.10, J. BJ 7.5.2, Ph. 2.586, PGen. 16.10 (iii A.D.).

II want, need, Antipho Soph. 11; ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις τε καὶ δεήσεσιν Pl. Erx. 405e; κατὰ τὰς δεήσεις according to their needs, Arist. Pol. 1257a23; δεήσεις εἰσὶν αἱ ὀρέξεις Id. Rh. 1385a22.

Question 96

ἐλέγχω

Answer 96

to logically refute, to put to proof, to test, rebuke, show fault, convict

to reprove (elenchus, a logical refutation)
to expose; to rebuke, refute, show fault; to convince, convict

to put to proof, to test; to convict, Jn. 8:46; Jas. 2:9; to refute, confute, 1 Cor. 14:24; Tit. 1:9; to detect, lay bare, expose, Jn. 3:20; Eph. 5:11, 13; to reprove, rebuke, Mt. 18:15; Lk. 3:19; 1 Tim. 5:20; to discipline, chastise, Heb. 12:5; Rev. 3:19; pass. to experience conviction, Jn. 3:20; 1 Cor. 14:24
ἐλέγξω, ἤλεγξα, -, -, ἠλέγχθην

ἐλέγχω,

Od. 21.424, etc.: fut. ἐλέγξω Ar. Nu. 1043, etc.: aor. ἤλεγξα Il. 9.522, etc.: — Pass., fut. ἐλεγχθήσομαι Antipho 2.4.10, X. Mem. 1.7.2: aor. ἠλέγχθην Antipho l.c., Pl. Grg. 458a, etc.: pf. ἐλήλεγμαι Id. Lg. 805c: 3 sg. ἐλήλεγκται Antiphol.c. (ἐξ-ηλεγμένοι is f.l. in Lys. 6.44): plpf. ἐξ-ελήλεγκτο D. 32.27: —

I disgrace, put to shame, μῦθον ἐ. treat a speech with contempt, Il. 9.522; ἐ. τινά put one to shame, Od. 21.424. — This usage is only

II

1. cross-examine, question, Hdt. 2.115, Pl. Revelation 18:1-24 d, etc.; μὴ ‘λεγχε τὸν πονοῦντα A. Ch. 919; φύλαξ ἐλέγχων φύλακα S. Ant. 260; τί ταῦτ’ ἄλλως ἐλέγχεις; Id. OT 333, cf. 783; ἔλεγχ’, ἐλέγχου Ar. Ra. 857; ἐ. τινὰ περί τινος Id. Pl. 574; ἕνεκά τινος Antiph. 207.10; τὰς ἀρχὰς βασάνοις χρώμενοι ἐλεγχόντων Pl. Lg. 946c: c. acc. et inf., accuse one of doing, E. Alc. 1058: — Pass., to be convicted, Hdt. 1.24, 117; ἐλεγχόμενοι εἴ τι περιγένοιτο τῶν χρημάτων D. 35.36, cf. Pl. Prt. 331c, 331d: with part., ἐλεγχθεὶς διαφθείρας Antipho 2.3.9, cf. 2.4.10; ἐλεγχθήσεται γελοῖος ὤν X. Mem. 1.7.2.
2. test, bring to the proof, ἀνδρῶν ἀρετὰν παγκρατὴς ἐλέγχει ἀλάθεια B. Fr. 10.2; πρᾶγμ’ ἐ. A. Ag. 1351 (Pass., τὸ πρᾶγμ’ ἐλεγχθέν Ar. Ec. 485); λόγον Pl. Sph. 242b (Pass., Id. Tht. 161e): with subject. clause, ἐ. τινά, εἰ.., A. Ch. 851, Ar. Eq. 1232.
3. prove, τοῦτο ἐ. ὡς.. Pl. Phdr. 273b, cf. Sph. 256c: abs., bring convincing proof, ὡς ἡ ἀνάγκη ἐ. Hdt. 2.22; αὐτὸ τὸ ἔργον ἐ. Th. 6.86; περί τινος D. 21.5.
4. refute, confute, τινά or τι, Pl. Grg. 470c, al., D. 28.2, Luc. Nigr. 4: — Pass., Pl. Tht. 162a; χρυσὸς κληῖδας ἐλέγχει proves that they avail not, AP 5.216 (Paul. Sil.). put right, correct, prove by a reductio ad impossibile, ὅσα ἔστιν ἀποδεῖξαι, ἔστι καὶ ἐλέγξαι τὸν θέμενον τὴν ἀντίφασιν τοῦ ἀληθοῦς Arist. SE 170a24; παράδοξα ἐ. Id. EN 1146a23.
5. get the better of, στρατιὰν ὠκύτατι ἐ. Pi. P. 11.49, cf. D.P. 750, Him. Or. 1.16.
6. expose, τινὰ ληροῦντα Pl. Tht. 171d, cf. X. Mem. 1.7.2, M.Ant. 1.17; betray a weakness, Democr. 222.
7. decide a dispute, ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν δύο LXX Genesis 31:37.

Question 97

ἐπιτρέπω

Answer 97

to let, allow, permit, give permission
to give over, to leave to the entire trust, or management of any one; hence, to permit, allow, suffer, Mt. 8:21; Mk. 5:13
-, ἐπέτρεψα, -, ἐπιτέτραμμαι, ἐπετράπην

ἐπιτρέπ-ω,

Ion. ἐπιτρεπ-τράπω [ᾰ] Hdt. 3.81: fut. -τρέψω; Dor. 3 pl. -τρέψοντι Pi. O. 6.21; Cret. inf. -τραψῆν GDI 5039.21,5024.12: aor. I -έτρεψα Il. 10.116, etc.: aor. 2 -έτραπον ib. 59: pf. -τέτρᾰφα Plb. 30.6.6: — Med., fut. -τρέψομαι (v.l. -τράψ-) Hdt. 3.155: aor. 2 -ετρᾰπόμην Od. 9.12: —

I Pass., fut. -τετράψομαι Pisistr. ap. D.L. 1.54: aor. I -ετρέφθην Antipho 4.3.5; Ion. -ετράφθην, part. -τραφθείς Hdt. 1.7: aor. 2 -ετράπην [ᾰ] Th. 5.31: pf. (v. infr. 1.6): —

1. prop. to turn to or towards, used by Hom.in aor. 2 Med., σοὶ.. θυμὸς ἐπετράπετο εἴρεσθαι thy mind inclined itself to ask, Od. 9.12. to overturn upon, τινί τι Luc. Lex. 8.
2. turn over to, transfer, bequeath, παισὶν ἐπιτρέψειεν ἕκαστος κτήματ’ ἐνὶ μεγάροισι Od. 7.149.
3. commit, entrust to another as trustee, guardian, or vicegerent, οἱ.. ἐπέτρεπεν οἶκον ἅπαντα 2.226; ἐπιτρέψειας ἕκαστα δμῳάων [ἐκείνῃ] ἥ τις..ἀρίστη 15.24, cf. Il. 17.509; θεοῖσι μῦθον ἐπιτρέψαι leave it to them, Od. 22.289, cf. 19.502; so κάκοισι θῦμον ἐπιτρέπην (Aeol. inf.) Alc. 35.1; σμικραῖς ἑαυτοὺς ἐ. ἐλπίσιν E. Fr. 921; freq. in Prose, ἐ. τινὶ τὰ πρήγματα Hdt. 6.26; τὴν πόλιν Id. 4.202; Νάξον Λυγδάμι Id. 1.64; τὰ πάντα Th. 2.65; πλεῖστα τῷ ἀλογίστῳ Id. 5.99; τὴν ἀρχήν X. An. 6.1.31, etc.; also a son for education, Pl. La. 200d: c. dat. et inf., τινά τινι γερονταγωγεῖν Ar. Eq. 1098: freq. in Att., refer a legal issue to any one, τινὶ δίαιταν D. 59.45; διάγνωσις -τετράφθω τῷ ἐπιμελητῇ Pl. Lg. 936a; οἷς (attracted for ἃ) ἂν ἐπιτρέψωσιν οἱ δὲ τάξωσι, τούτοις ἐμμένειν, i.e. acquiesce in the court and abide by its decision, ib. 784c (for the constr. cf. And. 3.34 fin.).
4. c. dat. only, rely upon, leave to, τοῖσιν γὰρ ἐπετράπομέν γε μάλιστα Il. 10.59; ἐπιτρέψαι δὲ θεοῖσιν Od. 21.279; ἐ. τῇ ὀλιγαρχίῃ Hdt. 3.81; ὥς οἱ (sc. ἰατρῷ) ἐπέτρεψε ib. 130: c. dat. et inf., σοὶ ἐπέτρεψεν πονέεσθαι he left it to you to work, Il. 10.116, cf. 421, Hdt. 9.10: freq. in Att., refer the matter to a person, leave it to his arbitration, Ar. Ach. 1115, V. 521, Ra. 811; τινὶ δικαστῇ to one as a judge, Th. 4.83; τῷ ἐν Δελφοῖς μαντείῳ Id. 1.28; ἐ. τῷ θεῷ περί τινος Pl. Grg. 512e, cf. Alc. 1.117e; ὑμῖν ἐπιτρέπω καὶ τῷ θεῷ κρῖναι Id. Ap. 35d; Ἀθηναίοις ἐ. περὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν πλὴν θανάτου to leave their case to the A. save as to the penalty of death, Th. 4.54; περὶ ὧν διαφερόμεθα τοῖς οἰκείοις ἐ. D. 27.1: — Pass., δίκης Λακεδαιμονίοις ἐπιτραπείσης Th. 5.31.
5. Med., entrust oneself, leave one’s case to, τινί Hdt. 1.96; διαιτητῇ Id. 5.95, cf. X. An. 1.5.8; also, to entrust what is one’s own to another, Hdt. 3.155, 157.
6. Pass., to be entrusted, ᾧ λαοί τ’ ἐπιτετράφαται (3 pl. pf. for ἐπιτετραμμένοι εἰσί) Il. 2.25; τῇς (sc. Ὥραις) ἐπιτέτραπται μέγας οὐρανός heaven’s gate is committed to them (to open and to shut), 5.750, cf. Hdt. 3.142; ὑπό τινων ἐπιτρεφθῆναι (sc. ἰατρῷ), of a patient, Antipho 4.3.5: c. acc. rei, ἐπιτρέπομαί τι I am entrusted with a thing, ἐπιτραφθέντες τὴν ἀρχήν Hdt. 1.7; ἐπιτετραμμένοι τὴν φυλακήν Th. 1.126.

II

1. give up, yield, Ποσειδάωνι δὲ νίκην πᾶσαν ἐπέτρεψας Il. 21.473; later ἐ. τινί c. inf., permit, suffer, Ar. Pl. 1078, Pl. Chrm. 171e, etc.: c. acc. et inf., X. An. 7.7.8; also ἐ. Θηβαίοις αὐτονόμους εἶναι Id. HG 6.3.9; οὐδενὶ ἐ. κακῷ εἶναι Id. An. 3.2.31; ἐ. ἀδικέοντι τῷ ἀδελφεῷ Hdt. 2.120; μὴ ἐ. τῷ ἀσεβοῦντι Pl. Euthphr. 5e: abs., give way, Pi. O. 6.21, Ar. Nu. 799, Pl. 915, Th. 1.71, Pl. Ap. 35b: — Pass., ἄνευ τοῦ ἐπιτραπῆναι without leave, POxy. 474.40 (ii A.D.).
2. intr., give way, οὐ μὲν ἐπέτρεπε γήραϊ λυγρῷ Il. 10.79; indulge, μὴ πάντα ἡλικίῃ καὶ θυμῷ ἐπίτρεπε Hdt. 3.36; ταις ἡδοναῖς καὶ ἐπιθυμίαις Pl. Lg. 802c; τῇ ὀργῇ D.H. 7.45.

III command, τὴν μὲν [τάξιν] ἐπὶ τῷ δεξιῷ ἐπέτρεψεν ἐφέπεσθαι X. An. 6.5.11: elsewh. c. dat., PLond. 3.1173.3 (ii A.D.), etc.: — Pass., ἐπετράπην ὑπὸ σοῦ POxy. 51.5 (ii A.D.).

Question 98

κενός, -ή, -όν

Answer 98

empty, empty-handed; by extension: vain, ineffective, useless, foolish

empty; having nothing, empty-handed, Mk. 12:3; met. vain, fruitless, void of effect, Acts 4:25; 1 Cor. 15:10; εἰς κενόν, in vain, to no purpose, 2 Cor. 6:1; hollow, fallacious, false, Eph. 5:6; Col. 2:8; inconsiderate, foolish, 1 Thess. 3:5; Jas. 2:20

κενός, ή, όν,

Ion. and poet. κεινός Il. 3.376, 4.181, 11.160, 15.453, Pi. O. 2.65, 3.45, Hdt. 1.73, al.; also κενεός, as always in Hom. (exc. in Il.ll.cc., and κενός Od. 22.249 (s.v.l., fort. κενέ’ εὔγματα or κείν’ εὔγματα)), also Hp. Aph. 7.24, Meliss. 7, Timo 20.2 (Comp.), and in Dor., IG 42(1).121.73 (Epid., iv B.C.); Aeol. κέννος, acc. to Greg. Cor.p.610 S.: Sup. κεννότατος Sch.Tz.in An.Ox. 3.356.18; but οἱ Αἰολεῖς.. οὐ λέγουσι κέννος Choerob.in An.Ox. 2.242, cf. Hdn.Gr.2.302, and the true Aeol. is prob. κένος or κένεος, from κενϝος, kenevos, cf. Cypr. κενευϝός Schwyzer 683.4.

I

1. mostly of things, empty, opp. πλέως, Ar. Eq. 280; opp. πλήρης, Id. Nu. 1054; opp. μεστός, Diph. 12; κενεὰς σὺν χεῖρας ἔχοντες Od. 10.42; νοστήσαντας κεινῇσι χερσί Hdt. 1.73; κεναῖς χερσίν Pl. Lg. 796b (v. infr. 11.2); τὸ κ. (sc. τάλαντον) the empty one, Ar. Fr. 488.5; κ. οἴκησις S. Ph. 31; γῆ Id. OT 55; εὐνή Id. Ant. 424; χώματα κεινά, = κενοτάφια, Hdt. 9.85; κ. τάφος E. Hel. 1057; κατέθισαν ἐπὶ κενευϝῶν (sc. τάφων gen. sg.) Schwyzer l.c. (Cypr.); κ. χρόνος a pause in music, Anon.Bellerm. 83; σφυγμὸς κ. Agathin. ap. Gal. 8.936; of wool and wine, dub. sens. in Archig. ap. Gal. 8.945; τὸ κ. the void of space, Democr. 9, Meliss.l.c., Emp. 13,al., Epicur. Ephesians 1 p.6U., etc.; τὸ κ., = τόπος ἐστερημένος σώματος, Arist. Ph. 208b26, cf. 213a13 sqq., Cael. 279a13; κ. χώρα Pl. Ti. 58a; ἢν κενεὸν λάβῃ [ἡ διακοπή ] if it penetrates the (brain-) cavity, Hp. Aph. l.c.; esp.Astrol., not occupied by a planet, κ. δρόμος Man. 2.452, cf.Vett. Val. 94.27; cf. κενοδρομέω.
2. empty, fruitless, void, κενὰ εὔγματα εἰπών Od. 22.249 (v. supr.); ἐλπίς, ἐλπίδες, Simon. 5.16, A. Pers. 804; γνώμα Pi. N. 4.40, cf. S. Ant. 753; ἔξοδοι Id. Aj. 287; φροντίδες Id. Fr. 949; τέρψις ib. 577; φόβοι E. Supp. 548, cf. X. An. 2.2.21; φρόνημα Pl. R. 494d, etc.; κ. πρόφασις καὶ ψευδής D. 18.150; λοιδορία κ. Id. 2.5; μάταιον καὶ κ. ib.12; κενὸν ἆρα καὶ τὸ φάρμακον πρὸς τὸ κ. prob. in Men. 530.19; ἀπόντων κενὴν κατηγορεῖν bring an idle charge, Arist. Resp. 470b12; ineffectual, λύγξ Th. 2.49; πουλυμαθημοσύνης, τῆς οὐ κενεώτερον ἄλλο Timo l.c.; πολλὰ κ. τοῦ πολέμου Arist. EN 1116b7; κ. δόξαι Epicur. Sent. 15; ἐπιθυμίαι, opp. φυσικαί, Id. Ephesians 3:1-21 p.62U., Diog.Oen. 59; κ. ὀρέξεις Metrod. Herc. 831.16; freq.in adverbial usages, neut.pl., κενεὰ πνεύσαις Pi. O. 10(11).93; ἡ διὰ κενῆς ἐπανάσεισις τῶν ὅπλων empty flourishing of arms, Th. 4.126; διὰ κενῆς ῥίπτειν throw without a projectile, Arist. Pr. 881a39; κεκλάγγω διὰ κενῆς ἄλλως to no purpose, Ar. V. 929; μάτην διὰ κ. Pl.Com. 174.21; οὐ μαχοῦμαί σοι διὰ κ. Men. Sam. 260; ἐν κενοῖς S. Aj. 971; κατὰ κενῆς Procl. in Ti. 2.167 D.; εἰς κενόν D.S. 19.9, Hld. 10.30; εἰς κ. ἡ δαπάνη IG 14.1746; εἰς κ. μοχθεῖν Men. Mon. 51; κατὰ κενοῦ χανεῖν Suid.s.v. λύκος ἔχανεν; κατὰ κενοῦ φέρειν τὰς χεῖρας Ph. 1.153; κατὰ κ. βαίνειν, = κενεμβατεῖν, Plu. 2.463c: regul. Adv. κενῶς, διαλεκτικῶς καὶ κ. Arist. de An. 403a2; λογικῶς καὶ κ. Id. EE 1217b21; μὴ κ. πόνει Men. 1101, cf. Epicur. Ephesians 3 p.61U., Polystr. p.7 W., Arr. Epict. 2.17.6, Plu. 2.35e.

II of persons and things,

1 c.gen., destitute, bereft, τοῦ νοῦ S. OC 931; φρενῶν Id. Ant. 754; δακρύων E. Hec. 230; συμμάχων κ. δόρυ Id. Or. 688; πεδίον κ. δένδρων Pl. R. 621a; κ. φρονήσεως, ἐπιστήμης, Id. Ti. 75a, R. 486c; κ. πόνου without the fruits of toil, A. Fr. 241.

2. abs., empty-handed, αἰσχρόν τοι δηρόν τε μενειν κενεόν τε νέεσθαι Il. 2.298, cf. Od. 15.214; ἀπίκατο, οἱ μὲν κεινοί, οἱ δὲ φέροντες κτλ. Hdt. 7.131; κενὸς κενὸν καλεῖ A. Th. 353 (lyr.); ἥκεις οὐ κενή S. OC 359, cf. Tr. 495; οὐθ’ ὑπεργέμων.. οὔτε κ. Alex. 216; of camels, without burdens, unloaded, opp. ἔγγομοι, OGI 629.166 (Pal- myra, ii A.D.); κ. ἂν ἴῃ.., κ. ἄπεισιν Pl. R. 370e; κ. τινὰ ἐξαποστεῖλαι LXX Genesis 31:42; bereft of her mate, λέαινα S. Aj. 986; orphan, Ἔρωτες Bion 1.59; ὑπ’ ἄσθματος κενοί exhausted.., A. Pers. 484; of places, without garrison, χῶραι Aeschin. 3.146, cf. Hdt. 5.15; of the body, without flesh, Plu. 2.831c. devoid of wit, vain, pretentious, κεινὸς εἴην Pi. O. 3.45; διαπτυχθέντες ὤφθησαν κενοί S. Ant. 709; ἀνόητον καὶ κ. Ar. Ra. 530, cf. James 2:20.

III Comp. and Sup., κενότερος Stratt. 10 D.; - ότατος D. 27.25, Phld. Rh. 1.67 S., al., cf. Choerob. in Theod. 2.76, EM 275.50; κενώτερος, -ώτατος, Pl. Smp. 175d, v.l. in Arist. EN 1107a30 (Comp.); κενεώτερος Timo (v. supr.); κενεώτατος v.l. in Hp. Acut. 62.

Question 99

μήτι

Answer 99

interrogative particle that is found in questions expecting a negative answer.
often not translated; expects a no answer to a question: surely not, unless, “forget about it!”

interrogative particle, used in questions expecting a negative answer; has the same use as μή in the form εἰ μήτε, Lk. 9:3; also when prefixed to an interrogative clause, Mt. 7:16; Jn. 4:29

μήτι (so G T WH R (commonly), but μή τί L (except 1 Corinthians 6:3) Tr (except Matthew 26:22, 25; Mark 4:21)) (μή and τί), whether at all, whether perchance, an interrogative expecting a negative answer; in a direct question (German doch nicht etwa? (in English generally untranslated; cf. Winers Grammar, § 57, 3 b.; Buttmann, 248 (213))): Matthew 7:16; Matthew 26:22, 25; Mark 4:21; Mark 14:19; Luke 6:39; John 7:31 (R G); (here all texts μή τί (properly)); Acts 10:47; 2 Corinthians 12:18; James 3:11; μήτι ἄρα, 2 Corinthians 1:17; used by one asking doubtfully yet inclining to believe what he asks about (see μήποτε, 3 a.): Matthew 12:23; John 4:29. εἰ μήτι, see εἰ, III. 10. μήτιγε (or μήτι γέ) see in its place.

Question 100

παραχρῆμα

Answer 100

on the spot, forthwith, straightway
immediately, instantly, at once
at once, immediately, Mt. 21:19, 20; Lk. 1:64

παραχρῆμα,

Adv. for παρὰ τὸ χρῆμα (cf. χρέος) on the spot, forthwith, Hdt. 3.15, 7.150, Lys. 25.17, etc.; πάλαι τε καὶ οἱ πλεῖστοι π. Th. 7.75; εἰ καὶ μὴ π., ἀλλ’ ὀλίγον ὕστερον Isoc. 18.64; ταχέως καὶ π. Cratin. 6; at the moment, π. τέρψασαι Critias 6.23 (nisi divisim scribendum); τὰ π. the present, opp. τὰ μέλλοντα, Th. 1.138; ἡ π. ἀνάγκη present necessity, Id. 2.17; τὸ π. περιχαρές ib. 51; τὸ π. περιδεές Id. 8.1; τὸ π. ἡδύ immediate pleasure, Pl. Prt. 356a; αἱ π. ἡδοναί Antipho Soph. 58: with the Art., τὸ π. Hdt. 6.11, etc.; ἐκ τοῦ π. λέγειν to speak offhand, Pl. Cra. 399d, cf. D. 1.1; ἐκ τοῦ π. στρατεύεσθαι X. HG 6.4.11; αἱ ἐκ τοῦ π. ἡδοναί Id. Mem. 2.1.20; λέγειν ἀπὸ τοῦ π. Id. HG 1.1.30; ἐν τῷ π. Antipho 5.73, Pl. R. 455a, etc.; ἐς τὸ π. ἀκούειν Th. 1.22; ἀσθενεῖς εἰς τὸ π. γίγνονται Pl. Lg. 646c. — More freq. in Hdt. and Att. Prose than in later writers (hence expld. by Hsch. παραχρῆμα· παραυτίκα.., εὐθέως), cf. Call. Fr. 106.3, SIG 577.12 (Milet., iii/ii B. C.), Plu. Cam. 42; νόμοι ἐκ τοῦ π. κείμενοι Jul. ad Them. 262a; ἐκ τοῦ π. εἰπεῖν Plu. 2.6e, cf. Longin. 18.2; ἐν τῷ π. Aristid. 2.407 J.: — hence Cobet treats ἄρτι, εὐθύς, εὐθέως, when joined with παραχρῆμα as glosses, π. ἄρτι X. HG 1.4.14; εὐθέως π. Antipho 1.20; εὐθὺς π. Isaiah 1:11, Din. 1.94, D. 48.40.

2. in later writers, c. gen., π. τῆς εὐεργεσίας D.Chr. 11.130; π. τῆς διαβάσεως Eun. Hist. p.240 D., cf. Gp. 10.75.16.

Question 101

πυλών, -ῶνος, ὁ

Answer 101

large gate, large door; entryway, gateway; vestibule

a gateway, vestibule, Mt. 26:71; Lk. 16:20; a gate, Acts 14:13; Rev. 21:12, 13, 15, 21, 25

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πυλ-ών, ῶνος, ὁ,

gateway, Arist. Mu. 398a16 (pl.), PCair.Zen. 193.9 (iii B.C.), PEnteux. 74.3 (iii B.C.), Sammelb. 6157 (ii B.C.), IG 3.398 (pl.); freq. separated from the house or temple to which it gave entrance, gate-tower, gate-house, IPE 12.32 B 48 (Olbia, iii B.C. ), Plb. 4.18.2, Luc. Hipp. 5, etc.; of a temple, Plu. Tim. 12; τετράθυρος π . Callix. 1; π. τὸ μῆκος δίπλεθρος D.S. 1.47, cf. Luc. Nigr. 23; ἡ θύρα τοῦ π . Acts 12:13 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πυλών, πυλῶνος, ὁ (πύλη) (Aristotle, Polybius, others), the Sept. often for פֶּתַח, sometimes for שַׁעַר;

1. a large gate: of a palace, Luke 16:20; of a house, Acts 10:17; plural (of the gates of a city), Acts 14:13; Revelation 21:12, 13, 15, 21, 25; Revelation 22:14.
2. the anterior part of a house, into which one enters through the gate, porch: Matthew 26:71 (cf. 69 and 75); Acts 12:14; hence, ἡ θύρα τοῦ πυλῶνος, Acts 12:13.

Question 102

ταράσσω

Answer 102

to trouble, disturb, throw into confusion; (pass.) to be disturbed, terrified, confused; to be stirred up

to agitate, trouble, as water, Jn. 5:7; met. to agitate, trouble the mind; with fear, to terrify, put in consternation, Mt. 2:3; 14:26; with grief, etc., affect with grief, anxiety, etc., Jn. 12:27; 13:21; with doubt, etc., to unsettle, perplex, Acts 15:24; Gal. 1:7

(ἐτάρασσον), -, ἐτάραξα, -, τετάραγμαι, ἐταράχθην

Thayer’s Definition
to agitate, trouble (a thing, by the movement of its parts to and fro)
to cause one inward commotion, take away his calmness of mind, disturb his equanimity
to disquiet, make restless
to stir up
to trouble
to strike one’s spirit with fear and dread
to render anxious or distressed
to perplex the mind of one by suggesting scruples or doubts

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τᾰράσσω,

Pi. O. 2.63, etc.; Att. τᾰράξ-ττω Ar. Eq. 902; also θράσσω (q.v.): fut. ταράξω ib. 358, etc.: aor. ἐτάραξα Od. 5.291, (συν-) Il. 1.579, 8.86: plpf. συν-ετεταράχει D.C. 42.36: pf. in pass. sense τέτρηχα (v. infr. 111): — Pass., fut. ταραχθήσομαι Men. 858 (prob.), Epict. Ench. 3, etc.; Med. ταράξομαι in pass. sense, Th. 7.36, X. Cyr. 6.1.43: aor. ἐταράχθην Ar. Nu. 386 (anap.), etc.: pf. τετάραγμαι ib. 388 (anap.), etc.: —

stir, trouble, in a physical sense, σύναγεν νεφέλας ἐτάραξε δὲ πόντον [Ποσειδῶν ] Od. 5.291; κύμασιν ταράσσεται πόντος Archil. 54, cf. Sol. 54; τ. πέλαγος ἁλός E. Tr. 88, cf. 692; ὁμοῦ τ. τήν τε γῆν καὶ τὴν θάλατταν εἰκῇ Ar. Eq. 431; τ. καὶ κυκᾶν Id. Ach. 688 (troch.), Eq. 251 (troch.); οὐ χθόνα ταράσσοντες troubling not the earth (by ploughing), Pi. l.c.; βροντήμασι.. κυκάτω πάντα καὶ ταρασσέτω A. Pr. 994; τ. φάρμακον perh. mix, Luc. Lex. 4, cf. Amips. 18: metaph., φωνὰν ταρασσέμεν to wag the tongue, Pi. P. 11.42; πάντα τ., of a speaker, jumble up, D. 19.93; τὴν τῶν πραγμάτων διδασκαλίαν Gal. 15.185.

2. trouble the mind, agitate, disturb, με δεινὸς ὀρθομαντείας πόνος στροβεῖ ταράσσων A. Ag. 1216; δεινὰ (adverbial) τ. [με ] S. OT 483 (lyr.); ὅταν ταράξῃ Κύπρις ἡβῶσαν φρένα E. Hipp. 969, cf. Fr. 1079.4; Νικίαν ταράξω Ar. Eq. 358 (troch.); τ. καρδίαν E. Ba. 1321; esp. of fear, A. Ch. 289, Ar. Eq. 66, etc.; ἄν τις φόβος τ. X. Mem. 2.4.6; τὸ σῶμα τ. τὴν ψυχήν Pl. Phd. 66a, cf. 103c; so τ. γλῶσσαν E. IA 1542: abs., cause confusion, Pl. R. 564b, Hp.Mi. 373b: — Pass., Id. Phd. 100d, etc.; περί τι Id. Sph. 242c; διά τι D. 4.3; ταράσσομαι φρένας S. Ant. 1095; ὄμμα σὸν τ. E. Or. 253.
3. of an army, etc., throw into disorder, Hdt. 4.125, 9.51, etc.; ἐτάρασσον τοὺς ταρσοὺς τῶν κωπέων Id. 8.12: — Pass., to be in disorder, Id. 4.125, 129, 8.16, Th. 4.25, X. Cyr. 2.1.27, etc.; ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς τ. Th. 7.67. metaph., rout or upset, κριτήριον τ. Demetr.Lac. Herc. 1012.38 (perh. variant of Epicur. Sent. 24): — Pass., λόγου ταραχθέντος Phld. Rh. 1.136 S.; εἰ τὰ σημεῖα ταραχθείη Gal. 6.262.
4. τ. τὴν γαστέρα cause relaxation of the bowels, of purges, Hp. Nat.Mul. 12, cf. Acut. 56, Arist. Pr. 864b23, Gal. 15.667: — Pass., ἐταράχθης τὴν γαστέρα Ar. Nu. 386 (anap.); τὸ πνεῦμα Gal. 15.903; more generally, τεταραγμένον σῶμα Sor. 1.105.
5. freq. of political agitation, τ. τὴν πόλιν Ar. Eq. 867; τὰ πράγματα ib. 214: — Pass., to be in a state of disorder or anarchy, ἐν ἀλλήλοις τ. Th. 2.65, cf. D. 2.14, Ptol. Tetr. 164.
6. ταράττεσθαι ἐπὶ τῶν ἵππων to be shaken in one’s seat on horseback, X. Cyr. 5.2.17.
7. Math., τεταραγμένη ἀναλογία disturbed proportion, Euc. 5 Def. 18, Archim. Sph.Cyl. 2.4.

II stir up, metaph., τ. νεῖκος, πόλεμον, S. Ant. 794 (lyr.), Pl. R. 567a; φόνον E. Ba. 797; ἡλίκα πράγματα ταράξασα D. 18.153, cf. X. An. 5.10.9; τ. δίκας τινὶ πρός τινας Plu. Them. 5: — Pass., πόλεμος ἐταράχθη D. 18.151; γόος.. ταραχθείς A. Ch. 331 (lyr.).

III exc. in the places mentioned, Hom. uses only intr. pf. τέτρηχα, to be in disorder or confusion, be in an uproar, τετρήχει δ’ ἀγορή Il. 2.95; ἀγορὴ τετρηχυῖα 7.346; so τετρηχυῖα θάλασσα AP 7.283 (Leon.); τετρηχότος οἴδματος A.R. 1.1167; τετρηχότα βῶλον Id. 3.1393; τετρηχότι νώτῳ Nic. Th. 267; but ἐκ σέθεν.. ἄλγεα.. τετρήχασι cruel woes arise, A.R. 4.447, cf. 3.276, Philet. 7; in Nic. Th. 72 τετρήχοντα κλήματα is f.l. for δὲ τρήχοντα. (Alexandrine and later Poets seem to have thought erroneously that τέτρηχα = to be rough (cf. τραχύς).) (ταράχψω from ταραχ-ή, τάραχ-ος and these from Θᾰρᾰχ-: cogn. with θράσσω from θρᾱχ-ψω of which the Ion. pf. is τέτρηχα.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ταράσσω; imperfect ἐτάρασσόν; 1 aorist ἐταραξα; passive, present imperative 3 person singular ταρασσέσθω; imperfect ἐταρασσομην; perfect τεταραγμαι; 1 aorist ἐταράχθην; from Homer down; to agitate, trouble (a thing, by the movement of its parts to and fro);

a. properly: τό ὕδωρ, John 5:4 (R L),7 (Ezekiel 32:2; τόν Πόντον, Homer, Odyssey 5, 291; τό πέλαγος, Euripides, Tro. 88; τόν ποταμόν, Aesop fab. 87 (25)).
b. tropically, “to cause one inward commotion, take away his calmness of mind, disturb his equanimity; to disquiet, make restless” (the Sept. for בִּהֵל, etc.; passive, ταράσσομαι for רָגַז, to be stirred up, irritated); α. to stir up: τόν ὄχλον, Acts 17:8; (τούς ὄχλους, Acts 17:13 L T Tr WH). β. to trouble: τινα, to strike one’s spirit with fear or dread, passive, Matthew 2:3; Matthew 14:26; Mark 6:50; Luke 1:12; (Luke 24:38); 1 Peter 3:14; παράσσεται ἡ καρδία, John 14:1, 27; to affect with great pain or sorrow: ἑαυτόν (cf. our to trouble oneself), John 11:33 (A. V. was troubled (some understand the word here of bodily agitation)) (σεαυτόν μή ταρασσε, Antoninus 4, 26); τετάρακται ἡ ψυχή, John 12:27 (Psalm 6:4); ἐταράχθη τῷ πνεύματι, John 13:21. γ. to render anxious or distressed, to perplex the mind of one by suggesting scruples or doubts (Xenophon, mem. 2, 6, 17): Galatians 1:7; Galatians 5:10; τινα λόγοις, Acts 15:24. (Compare: διαπαράσσω, ἐκπαράσσω.)

Question 103

τίκτω

Answer 103

I give birth to

Thayer's Definition
to bring forth, bear, produce (fruit from the seed)
of a woman giving birth
of the earth bringing forth its fruits
metaph. to bear, bring forth

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τίκ-τω, Od. 4.86, etc.: fut. τέξω 11.249, h.Merc. 493, Orac. ap. Hdt. 5.92. β, A. Pr. 851, 869, E. Tr. 747, Ar. Eq. 1037 (Orac.), Th. 509; also τέξομαι Il. 19.99, Hes. Th. 469, 898, h.Ap. 101, A. Pr. 768, Hdt. 7.49, Ar. Lys. 744, etc.; poet. inf. also τεκεῖσθαι h.Ven. 127; pl. τεξείεσθε Arat. 124: aor. ἔτεκον, τέκον, Il. 1.352, 5.875, etc.: aor. 1 ἔτεξα only late, Orph. H. 41.8 codd. (for ἐντήξῃ is prob. l. in Ar. Lys. 553): pf. τέτοκα Hes. Op. 591, Hp. Aph. 5.39, Ar. Pax 757, Pl.Com. 64.5, X. Cyn. 5.13, cf. ἐντίκτω: —

Med., in same sense as Act., only in Poets, A. Ch. 127, Fr. 44: fut. (v. supr.): aor. ἐτεκόμην Ar. Av. 1193 (lyr.), τεκόμην Il. 4.59, al.; subj. τέκηαι A.R. 1.905: — Pass., pres. indic. τίκτεται A. Th. 437; inf. τίκτεσθαι Sor. 2.53; part. τικτόμενος ib. 54: fut. τεχθήσομαι J. AJ 2.9.2, Gp. 17.6.1, etc.: aor. ἐτέχθην Hp. Superf. 18, Ps.- E. Fr. 1132.44, LXX Numbers 26:60 (v.l.),al., Gp. 17.6.2, etc.: pf. τέτεγμαι, inf. τετέχθαι, Ael. Nahum 2:12, Paus. 3.7.7, etc.–These pass. tenses seem not to have been used in correct Att.: —

bring into the world, engender; of the father, beget, of the mother, bring forth.

I impf. Act. τίκτε, ἔτικτε, in Hom. usu. of the father, Il. 2.628, 6.155, 206, 11.224, cf. Hes. Fr. 44 (of the mother, Il. 16.180, 22.428, 24.497, Od. 23.325); in Hes. (Frr. 17,142), Lyr., and Trag. the pres. and impf. are also used of the mother, ἃ Θήβαν ἔτικτεν Pi. O. 6.85, cf. B. 18.50; μᾶτερ, ἅ μ’ ἔτικτες A. Eu. 321 (lyr.), cf. Ag. 763 (lyr., of Υβρις), S. El. 533; δεινὸν τὸ τίκτειν ib. 770, cf. Pl. Tht. 151a, etc.; τ. καὶ γεννᾷ Id. Smp. 206d; of both parents. Στάσις δὲ καὶ Κρόνος.. τίκτετον τύραννον Cratin. 240.

2. aor. Act. τέκε, ἔτεκε, mostly of the mother, Il. 1.36, 352, 2.513, etc. (also fut. Med. τέξεσθαι 19.99); τεκεῖν τινά τινι 2.658, 6.22, etc.; ὑπό τινι 2.714, 728, etc.; τ. ἔκ τινος Plu. Thes. 20; παρά τινος Luc. Alex. 42; παρά τινι E. El. 62: but τέκεν of the father, Il. 13.450, Od. 3.489, al., Hes. Th. 208, Fr. 99.2: metaph., τῷ τεκόντι ἀρετήν Pl. Smp. 212a.
3. the aor. Med. τέκετο is commonly used of the father, as Il. 2.741, 6.154, al., Hes. Fr. 19: but τέκετο of the mother, Il. 2.742, 15.187, 22.48, Hes. Fr. 46; so τῶν τεκομένων of the mother, A. Ch. 419 (lyr.).
4. the two are conjoined, ὃν τέκετο θάνατος, ἔτεκε δ’ αἰόλος δράκων S. Tr. 834 (codd., lyr.).
5. aor. Act. is used in pl. of both parents, Od. 7.55, 8.554 (οὓς Ἑκάβη ἠδὲ Πρίαμος τέκε παῖδας Il. 22.234); aor. Med. τεκόμεσθα, Od. 23.61, 24.293. οἱ τεκόντες the parents, A. Th. 49, S. OT 999, etc.; the Art. is rarely omitted, πατέρων τε καὶ τεκόντων A. Ch. 329 (lyr.): c. gen., κιόντων τοῖς τεκοῦσι Id. Pers. 245 (troch.): ὁ τεκών the father, Id. Ch. 690, S. OC 1108; ἁ τεκοῦσα the mother, A. Th. 926 (lyr.), cf. Ch. 133, etc. (rarely ἡ τίκτουσα, S. OT 1247, El. 342); in Prose, Lys. 10.8; ἡ τ. αὐτόν his mother, Hdt. 1.116; ὅ τ’ ἐκεῖνον τεκών E. El. 335.
6. freq. in Medic. and other Prose, of women, τίκτουσι ῥηϊδίως Hp. Aër. 5, cf. Sor. 2.54, al., Gal. 16.670; κόρον ἔτεκε IG 42(1).121.5, cf. 21 (Epid., iv B.C.).

II of female animals, bear young, breed, of mares, Il. 16.150, 20.225; of cows, Hes. Op. 591; of sheep, Od. 4.86, etc.; τὰς τετοκυίας τοκάδας PCair.Zen. 292.305, cf. 710.4 (iii B.C.); ἐὰν τέκῃ ἵππος ib. 635.2 (iii B.C.); of the hare, τὰ μὲν τέτοκε, τὰ δὲ τίκτει, τὰ δὲ κύει X. Cyn. 5.13; of birds, hatch, Il. 2.313; ᾠὰ τ. lay eggs, Hdt. 2.68, Ar. Fr. 185, Arist. GA 718b23, etc.; of fish, spawn, Id. HA 568a16, Gal. 6.718, etc.

III of the earth, bear, produce, ἔμπεδα μῆλα (sheep) Od. 19.113; ἡ γῆ.. τίκτουσα ποίαν E. Cyc. 333: — Med., γαῖαν.., ἣ τὰ πάντα τίκτεται A. Ch. 127, cf. Fr. 44.4: — Pass., τίκτεσθαι δὲ φόρους γᾶς.. εὐχόμεθ’ ἀεί Id. Supp. 674 (lyr.). metaph., generate, engender, produce, λέγω τὴν χώρην λιμὸν τέξεσθαι Hdt. 7.49; ἐπειχθῆναι πρῆγμα τίκτει σφάλματα ib. 10. ζ; of impiety, τὸ γὰρ δυσσεβὲς ἔργον μετὰ μὲν πλείονα τίκτει A. Ag. 759 (lyr.), cf. 763 (lyr., cf. supr. 1.1), Ch. 805 (lyr.); ἡ ἐπιθυμία τ. ἁμαρτίαν Ephesians 1:15; μὴ θράσος τέκῃ φόβον A. Supp. 498; of Night as the mother of Day, τῆς.. τεκούσης φῶς τόδ’ εὐφρόνης Id. Ag. 279; ὃν αἰόλα νὺξ.. τίκτει.., Ἅλιον αἰτῶ S. Tr. 95 (lyr.): generally, τ. [νόμους ] Id. OT 870 (lyr.); χάρις χάριν γάρ ἐστιν ἡ τίκτουσ’ ἀεί Id. Aj. 522; τ. ἀοιδάς E. HF 767 (lyr.); ὕδωρ δὲ πίνων οὐδὲν ἂν τέκοι σοφόν Cratin. 199; τ. ῥήματα Ar. Ra. 1059 (anap.); also in Prose, νουσήματα Hp. Hum. 12; ἃ ἀεὶ τίκτει πόλεμον καὶ ἔχθραν Pl. R. 547a; πολλοὺς καὶ καλοὺς λόγους Id. Smp. 210d; [ δὰς] πῦρ τέξεται X. Cyr. 7.5.23, etc.: — Pass., τῷδε κέρδει (sic codd.) κέρδος ἄλλο τίκτεται A. Th. 437. (τίκτω fr. τί-τκ-ω redupl. fr. τεκ (τέκνον, etc.).)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τίκτω; future τέξομαι; 2 aorist ἔτεκον; 1 aorist passive ἐτέχθην; from Homer down; the Sept. for יָלַד; to bring forth, bear, produce (fruit from the seed); properly, of women giving birth: absolutely, Luke 1:57 (Buttmann, 267 (230)); ; John 16:21; Galatians 4:27; Hebrews 11:11 Rec.; Revelation 12:2, 4; υἱόν, Matthew 1:21, 23, 25; Luke 1:31; Luke 2:7; Revelation 12:5, 13; passive, Matthew 2:2; Luke 2:11; of the earth bringing forth its fruits: βοτάνην, Hebrews 6:7 (Euripides, Cycl. 333; Γαιαν, ἡ τά πάντα τίκτεται, Aeschylus Cho. 127; γῆς τῆς πάντα τικτούσης, Philo opif. m. § 45, who draws out at length the comparison of the earth to a mother). metaphorically, to bear, bring forth: ἁμαρτίαν, in the simile where ἡ ἐπιθυμία is likened to a female, James 1:15 (ἀρετήν, Plato, conv., p. 212 a.).

Question 104

φανερός

Answer 104

Manifest

Thayer’s Definition
apparent, manifest, evident, known
manifest i.e to be plainly recognised or known

φᾰνερός, ά, όν,

but ός, όν, E. Ba. 991 (lyr.): (φαίνω): —

visible, manifest, ἡ στήλη ἔχει πάντα φ., i.e. all that is in it can be plainly seen, Hdt. 3.24; φ. ὄμμασιν ἐμοῖς E. Ba. 501; φ. τι δεῖξαι S. Tr. 608 (v.l.); θήσω φανέρ’ ἀθρό’ Pi. O. 13.98; φ. ποιῆσαι Pl. Lg. 630b, etc.; ἐς φ. ὄψιν βαίνειν E. El. 1236 (anap.); τοὔργον παρέσται φ. S. Ph. 1291; φ. χαρακτὴρ ἀρετᾶς E. HF 658 (lyr.); φ. πηγαί Th. 2.15; ἐσβολαὶ ἐς Αἴγυπτον Hdt. 3.5; φ. ἔχθραν κτήσασθαι Th. 1.42; διαφορὰ φ. ἐγένετο ib. 102; φ. θάνατος, ὄλεθρος, opp. ἀφανής, Antipho 3.3.7, And. 1.53; φ. ὑποψία εἰς ἐμὲ ἰοῦσα Antipho 2.2.6; φ. γενόμενος if detected, Lys. 7.12: — Constr.: φανερός εἰμι c. part., ἀπικόμενοι φανεροί εἰσι they are known to have come, Hdt. 3.26; ἐπισπεύδων φανερὸς ἦν Id. 7.18; ὁ μέν ἐστι φ. ἐκβὰς ἐκ τοῦ πλοίου καὶ οὐκ εἰσβὰς πάλιν Antipho 5.23: folld. by Conj., φανεροὶ γιγνόμενοι ὅτι ποιοῦσιν X. Cyr. 2.2.12; φ. ἦν ὅπως ἐγίγνωσκεν Id. Mem. 1.1.17: impers., φανερόν [ἐστιν] ὅτι.. ib. 3.9.2; εἰ φανερὸν γίγνοιτο ὅτι.. Pl. Phd. 70d.

2. shining, illustrious, προεδρίη Xenoph. 2.7; ὁδός Pi. O. 6.73; conspicuous, remarkable, φ. μηδὲν κατεργάζεσθαι Th. 1.17.
3. φ. οὐσία real property, opp. personalty (ἀφανής), Lys. 32.4, Fr. 79, D. 50.8. property in possession (opp. in action), And. 1.118, Isa 6.30, D. 38.7. in hand, in cash, μηδὲν φανερὸν κεκτῆσθαι to have no cash in hand, Din. 1.70; λαβὼν ἀργύριον φ. καὶ ὁμολογούμενον D. 56.1; πόρος φ. Id. 14.24; φ. οὐσία Id. 27.57; φ. χρήματα Lys. 12.83; φ. ποιεῖν D. 28.4; φανερόν τι a certain sum of money, Sch. Ar. Pl. 330, Sch. Aeschin. 1.102.
4. of votes, φ. ψήφῳ by open vote, opp. κρύβδην (ballot), D. 43.82, cf. Arist. Ath. 68.2; ψῆφον φ. διενεγκεῖν Th. 4.74; τὴν ψῆφον φ. φέρειν Pl. Lg. 767d; φ. ἡ ψῆφος τιθεμένη ib. 855d.
5. Adv. -ρῶς openly, manifestly, βουλόμενος φ. Hdt. 9.71; στείχειν A. Pr. 1090 (anap.); οἴχεσθαι S. El. 833 (lyr.); ἀκοῦσαι Ar. Nu. 291 (anap.); ἀποδείκνυσθαι τὴν γνώμην Th. 1.87; φ. ἐρᾶν, opp. λάθρᾳ, Pl. Smp. 182d; τὸ φ. ἐξεῖναι Isoc. 2.3: Comp., φανερώτερον ἐκπολεμεῖν Th. 6.91; -τέρως Arist. PA 657a2: but, τὸ φ. freq. with Preps. in advb. sense, ἐκ τοῦ φ. openly, Hdt. 5.96, 8.126; πολέμιος οὐκ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ φ. not openly declared, Th. 4.79; ἐκ τοῦ φ. τὴν μάχην ποιεῖσθαι X. HG 6.5.16; ἐκ τοῦ φ. ἀποφεύγειν Id. Mem. 3.11.8; ἀπὸ τοῦ φ. D.H. 4.4; also ἐν τῷ φ. σαυτὸν παρεῖχες X. Cyr. 7.5.55; ἀκοῦσαι ἐν τῷ φ. Id. An. 1.3.21; βουλεύεσθαι D. 18.235 (rarely ἐν φ. X. Ages. 5.7); ἐς τὸ φ. ἀποδῦναι Th. 1.6; αἱ ἐς τὸ φ. λεγόμεναι αἰτίαι, Id. 1.23; τὸν σῖτον φέρειν ἐς τὸ φ. into public, Id. 3.27, cf. Pl. Grg. 480c, etc.; εἰπεῖν κατὰ τὸ φ. Ar. Th. 525 (lyr.); ἐπὶ φανεροῖς ξυνελθεῖν on public, acknowledged terms, Th. 1.69.

II of persons, manifest, conspicuous, εἰ [Διόνυσος καὶ Πὰν] φ. ἐγένοντο ἐν τῇ Ἑλλάδι Hdt. 2.146; φανερὰ.. ἦλθε κόρα S. OT 507 (lyr.); Κύπρις.. φανερὰ τῶνδ ἐφάνη πράκτωρ Id. Tr. 861 (lyr.); πάντων -ώτατος Βρασίδας ἐγένετο Th. 4.11, cf. X. Cyr. 7.5.58; οἱ -ώτεροι persons of distinction, Philostr. VA 2.20.

2. open, frank, opp. ἐπίβουλος, Arist. EN 1149b15.

III = τις, φ. χρέα certain debts, Mitteis Chr. 71.3 (v A. D.), cf. PMasp. 167.10, 194.5 (vi A. D.), etc.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
φανερός, φανερά, φανερόν (φαίνομαι), from (Pindar), Herodotus down, apparent, manifest evident, known (opposed to κρυπτός and ἀπόκρυφος): Galatians 5:19; ἐν πᾶσιν, among all, 1 Timothy 4:15 Rec.; ἐν αὐτοῖς, in their minds, Romans 1:19; τίνι, dative of the person, manifest to one, of a person or thing that has become known, Acts 4:16; Acts 7:13; (1 Timothy 4:15 GL T Tr WH); φανερόν γίνεσθαι: Mark 6:14; (Luke 8:17); 1 Corinthians 3:13; 1 Corinthians 14:25; ἐν ὑμῖν, among you, 1 Corinthians 11:19; ἐν with a dative of the place, Philippians 1:13 (see πραιτώριον, 3); φανερόν ποιεῖν τινα (A. V. to make one known, i. e.) disclose who and what he is, Matthew 12:16; Mark 3:12; εἰς φανερόν ἐλθεῖν, to come to light, come to open view, Mark 4:22; Luke 8:17; ἐν τῷ φανερῷ, in public, openly (opposed to ἐν τῷ κρύπτω), Matthew 6:4 Rec., 6 R G, (Matthew 6:18 Rec.); Romans 2:28 (here A. V. outward, outwardly). manifest i. e. to be plainly recognized or known: followed by ἐν with a dative of the thing in (by) which, 1 John 3:10. (Synonym: see δῆλος, at the end.)

Question 105

ἄφεσις

Answer 105

A sending away, remission

Thayer’s Definition
release from bondage or imprisonment
forgiveness or pardon, of sins (letting them go as if they had never been committed), remission of the penalty

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἄφεσις, εως, ἡ, (ἀφίημι)

1. letting go, release, περὶ τῆς τῶν πλοίων ἀφέσεως Philipp. ap. D. 18.77, cf. Pl. Plt. 273c; καρπῶν PAmh. 2.43.9 (ii B. C.); γῆ ἐν ἀφέσει land in private hands, opp. βασιλική, PTeb. 5.37 (ii B. C.), etc. of persons, dismissal: in ritual, λαοῖς ἄ. Apul. Met. 11.17; release, Plb. 1.79.12, IG 2.314.21, Luke 4:18.
2. c. gen., ἀ. φόνου quittance from murder, Pl. Lg. 869d: so abs., Hermog. Stat. 8; discharge from a bond, D. 33.3; ἄ. ἐναντίον μαρτύρων ποιήσασθαι Id. 45.41; opp. ἀπόδοσις χρημάτων, Isoc. 17.29; exemption from attendance, leave of absence, Arist. Ath. 30.6; ἀ. τῆς στρατείας exemption from service, Plu. Ages. 24; remission of a debt, ταλάντου Michel 1340 B7 (Cnidus, ii B. C.); χρημάτων IPE 12.32 B 70 (Olbia, iii B. C.); sc. καταδίκης, Inscr.Magn. 93c16. forgiveness, Mark 3:29; ἁμαρτιῶν Matthew 26:28.
3. relaxation, exhaustion, Hp. Epid. 3.6.
4. divorce, τινὶ πέμπειν Plu. Pomp. 42.
5. starting of horses in a race, ἵππων ἄ. ποιεῖν D.S. 4.73: hence, starting-post itself, ἰσώσας τἀφέσει (Musgr. for τῇ φύσει) τὰ τέρματα having made the winning-post one with the starting-post, i.e. having completed the δίαυλος and come back to the starting-post, dub. cj. in S. El. 686, cf. Paus. 5.15.5, 6.20.9: metaph., the first start, beginning of anything, Man. 3.405, etc.
6. discharge, emission, ὕδατος Arist. PA 697a24; βέλους D.S. 17.41; τοῦ θοροῦ, τοῦ ᾠοῦ Arist. GA 756a12; τοῦ κυήματος Id. HA 608a1; the dropping of a foal, ib. 576a25. discharge, release of an engine, Ph. Bel. 58.24.
7. = cross ἀφεσμός, Arist. HA 625a20 (pl.).
8. release, ὕδατος PPetr. 2p.34 (iii B. C.): hence, in concrete sense, conduit, sluice, ib. 3p.88, PFlor. 388.44 (iii A. D.): pl., ἀφέσεις θαλάσσης channels, LXX 2 Kings 22:16.
9. Astrol., reckoning of the vital quadrant, Ptol. Tetr. 127, cf. Vett.Val. 136.2 (but ἀπὸ Λέοντος τὴν ἄφεσιν ποιούμενοι, simply, starting from.., Id. 31.8).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἄφεσις, ἀφέσεως, ἡ (ἀφίημι);

1. release, as from bondage, imprisonment, etc.: Luke 4:18 (19) (Isaiah 61:1f; Polybius 1, 79, 12, etc.).
2. ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν forgiveness, pardon, of sins (properly, the letting them go, as if they had not been committed (see at length Trench, § xxxiii.)), remission of their penalty: Matthew 26:28; Mark 1:4; Luke 1:77; Luke 3:3; Luke 24:47; Acts 2:38; Acts 5:31; Acts 10:43; Acts 13:38; Acts 26:18; Colossians 1:14; τῶν παραπτωμάτων, Ephesians 1:7; and simply ἄφεσις: Mark 3:29; Hebrews 9:22; Hebrews 10:18 (φόνου, Plato, legg. 9, p. 869 d.; ἐγκληματων, Diodorus 20, 44 (so Dionysius Halicarnassus 50:8 § 50, see also 7, 33; 7, 46; especially 7, 64; ἁμαρτημάτων, Philo, vit. Moys. 3:17; others.)).

Question 106

ἐπαύριον

Answer 106

On the morrow

ἐπαύριον,

Adv. on the morrow, τῇ ἐ. ἡμέρᾳ PLille 1.15 (iii B.C.); ἡμέρα ἡ ἐ. LXX Numbers 11:32; usu. τῇ ἐ. on the morrow, Plb. 3.53.6, al., Matthew 27:62, al.; εἰς τὴν ἐ. Plb. 8.13.6,al. (Sts. written ἐφ-, PHamb. 1.27.4 (iii B.C.), PTeb. 119.17 (ii B.C.).)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπαύριον, adverb of time, equivalent to ἐπ’ αὔριον, on the morrow; in the N. T. τῇ ἐπαύριον, namely, ἡμέρα, the next day, on the morrow: Matthew 27:62; Mark 11:12; John 1:29; Acts 10:9, etc.; the Sept. for חרָת.

Question 107

ἕτοιμος

Answer 107

ready, prepared

prepare ready
of things
ready at hand
opportune, seasonable
of persons
ready prepared 1b
to do something 1b
to receive one coming

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἑτοῖμος, ον, also fem. ἑτοίμη Il. 9.425, Hp. Art. 66, - μᾱ S. El. 1079 (lyr.), etc.: — in v B. C. and later ἕτοιμος, η, ον, or ος, ον, cf. Hdn.Gr. 2.938: —

1. at hand, ready, prepared, ὀνείαθ’ ἑτοῖμα προκείμενα Od. 14.453, etc.; τὶν δ’ αἶνος ἑτοῖμος Pi. O. 6.12; [ τὰ κρέα] εἶχε ἕτοιμα Hdt. 1.119, cf. 3.123; ἑτοιμοτάταν ἐπὶ δαῖτα Theoc. 13.63, cf. E. Cyc. 357 (lyr.); ἕ. χρήματα money in hand, Hdt. 5.31; ἐξ ἑ. in ready money, POxy. 2106.23 (iv A.D.); ἕ. ἀεὶ παρακείμενον ἐκμαγεῖον Pl. Ti. 72c; ἕ. ποιήσασθαι to make ready, Hdt. 1.11; ὡς ἑτοῖμα ἦν Th. 2.3; ἐπειδὴ αὐτῷ ἑ. ἦν ib. 98; ἐξ ἑτοίμου at once and without hesitation, immediately, offhand, ἐξ ἑ. λαμβάνειν Isoc. 5.96; ἐξ ἑ. ὑπακούειν X. Oec. 14.3; ἐξ ἑτοιμοτάτου διώκειν Id. Cyr. 5.3.57; ἐξ ἑ. φίλον εἶναι Id. Mem. 2.6.16; γίνεται ταῦτα ἐξ -οτάτου are most likely to attack, Hp. Prog. 24; ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἐστί Epicur. Ephesians 3 p.62U., cf. Theoc. 22.61; ἐν ἑ. ἔχειν Plb. 2.34.2, 2 Corinthians 10:6, etc.; ἑτοιμότερα γέλωτος λίβη tears that came more readily than.., A. Ch. 448; τὰ ἑ. that which is ready to hand, ἐπὶ τὰ ἑ. μᾶλλον τρέπονται Th. 1.20; τὰ ἑ. βλάψαι ib. 70; τοῖς ἑ. περὶ τῶν ἀφανῶν.. κινδυνεύειν Id. 6.9.
2. of the future, sure to come, certain, αὐτίκα γάρ τοι ἔπειτα μεθ’ Ἕκτορα πότμος ἑ. Il. 18.96; χώλωσις ἑτοίμη τοῖσι περιγινομένοισι Hp. Art. 66; also, easy to be done, feasible, ἐπεὶ οὔ σφισιν ἥδε γ’ ἑτοίμη (sc. μῆτις) Il. 9.425; ἕ. [ἐστι] τὸ διαφθαρῆναι imminent, Plu. 2.706c: c. inf., ἕ. μᾶλλόν [ἐστι] ἀπεχθάνεσθαι Pl. R. 567a, cf. E. HF 86; οὐ γάρ τι ἕ. μεταπεῖσαι it is not easy.., Paus. 2.23.6.
3. of the past, carried into effect, realized, ταῦτα ἑ. τετεύχαται Il. 14.53; ἠδ’ ἄρ’ ἑτοῖμα τέτυκτο and this promise has been made good, Od. 8.384.

II

1. of persons, ready, active, zealous, ἕ. ἦν ἐμοὶ σειραφόρος A. Ag. 842; τινι in or for a thing, Pi. O. 4.16; ἐς τι for a thing, Hdt. 8.96; πρός τι X. Mem. 4.5.12: c. dat. pers., ready to assist or go with him, etc., Pi. N. 4.74, Hdt. 1.70: c. inf., ready to do, ib. 42, 113, al.; ἐπιστενάχειν πᾶς τις ἕ. A. Ag. 791; χωρεῖν ἑ. S. Aj. 813, cf. Ant. 264, Antipho 6.23, Ar. V. 341 (lyr.); ὑπακούειν ἑτοιμότεροι too ready.., Th. 4.61; θηρία ἕ. διαμάχεσθαι Pl. Smp. 207b: c. Art., τὸ μὴ βλέπειν ἑτοίμα S. El. 1079 (lyr.); ἦν ἕτοιμος, abs., he was ready, Hdt. 1.10; ἑ. ἔχειν τινάς Id. 3.45; ἑ. ποιέεσθαί τινας Id. 5.86.
2. of the mind, ready, bold, λῆμα Ar. Nu. 458 (lyr.); ἡ γνώμη Th. 4.123; τὸ ἕ. readiness, resolution, E. Or. 1106; τὸ ἕ. τῆς γνώμης Philostr. Her. 8.1; τὰ θερμά τε καὶ ἕ. τῶν θηρίων Id. VA 7.14.

III Adv. - μως readily, willingly, Th. 1.80; ἑ. ἔχω τελευτᾶν I am ready to die, Demad. 4, cf. D. 18.161, PAmh. 2.32.6 (ii B.C.), Acts 21:13; ἑ. ἥκειν X. An. 2.5.2; διδόναι IG 22.956.24; ἑ. παρορᾷς evidently, Pl. Hp.Ma. 300c: Comp. ἑτοιμότερον Isa 4.14, - οτέρως Alex. Trall. 12: Sup. - ότατα Pl. Plt. 290a.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἕτοιμος (on the accent cf. (Chandler § 394); Winer’s Grammar, 52 (51)), ἑτοίμη (2 Corinthians 9:5; 1 Peter 1:5), ἕτοιμον, and ἕτοιμος, ἕτοιμον (Matthew 25:10 (cf. WHs Appendix, p. 157a; Winers Grammar, § 11, 1; Buttmann, 25 (22))); from Homer down; prepared, ready;

a. of things: Matthew 22:4, 8, ((Luke 14:17)); Mark 14:15 (L brackets ἑτοιμάσατε); 2 Corinthians 9:5; ready to hand: τά ἕτοιμα, the things (made) ready (in advance by others), i. e. the Christian churches already founded by them, 2 Corinthians 10:16; equivalent to opportune, seasonable, ὁ καιρός, John 7:6; σωτηρία ἑτοίμη ἀποκαλουφθῆναι, on the point of being revealed, 1 Peter 1:5.
b. of persons; ready, prepared: to do something, Acts 23:21; to receive one coming, Matthew 24:44; Matthew 25:10; Luke 12:40; πρός τί, for (the doing of) a thing, Titus 3:1; 1 Peter 3:15; followed by the infinitive (cf. Buttmann, 260 (224)), Luke 22:33; by τοῦ with an infinitive, Acts 23:15 (Buttmann, § 140, 15; Winer’s Grammar, § 44, 4 a.); ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχω, to be in readiness, followed by the infinitive (Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 34 under the end): 2 Corinthians 10:6 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 332 (311)). (For נָכון, Exodus 19:11, 15; Joshua 8:4, etc.)

Question 108

θησαυρός, ~οῦ, ὁ

Answer 108

treasure, treasury, storehouse

Question 109

καταλύω

Answer 109

I destroy, lodge

Question 110

κερδαίνω

Answer 110

to gain

Question 111

νυμφιος

Answer 111

A bridegroom (akin to nuptial)

Question 112

περιτέμνω

Answer 112

I circumcise

Question 113

ῥύομαι

Answer 113

I rescue, deliver

Question 114

ἀθετέω

Answer 114

I reject

Question 115

δεῖπνον

Answer 115

a supper

Question 116

εντελλομαι

Answer 116

I command

Question 117

θεμέλιος

Answer 117

a foundation

Question 118

παρεχω

Answer 118

I offer, afford

Question 119

προσδοκαω

Answer 119

I wait for

Question 120

συλλαμβάνω

Answer 120

to take, seize, capture, arrest; conceive/become pregnant; middle - to help, assist, aid

Question 121

τολμάω

Answer 121

(ἐτόλμων), τολμήσω, ἐτόλμησα, -, -, -
to dare, be bold, courageous
Definition: 
to assume resolution, to do a thing, Mk. 15:43; Rom. 5:7; Phil. 1:14; to make up the mind, 2 Cor. 10:12; to dare, Acts 5:13; 7:32; to presume, Mt. 22:46; Mk. 12:34; Lk. 20:40; Jn. 21:12; Rom. 15:18; Jude 9; to have the face, 1 Cor. 6:1; absol. to assume a bold bearing, courageous, 2 Cor. 10:2; 11:21*

Question 122

ὑστερέω

Answer 122

-, ὑστέρησα, ὑστέρηκα, ὑστέρημαι, ὑστερήθην
I lack
to lack, be in need, destitute; to be inferior; to fall short
Definition:
to be behind, in place or time, to be in the rear; to fall short of, be inferior to, 2 Cor. 11:5; 12:11; to fail of, fail to attain, Heb. 4:1; to be in want of, lack, Lk. 22:35; to be wanting, Mk. 10:21; absol. to be defective, in default, Mt. 19:20; 1 Cor. 12:24; to run short, Jn. 2:3; mid. to come short of a privilege or standard, to miss, Rom. 3:23; absol. to come short, be below standard, 1 Cor. 1:7; to come short of sufficiency, to be in need, want, Lk. 15:14; 2 Cor. 11:9; Phil. 4:12; Heb. 11:37; to be a loser, suffer detriment, 1 Cor. 8:8; in NT ὑστερειν ἀπό, to be backwards with respect to, to slight, Heb. 12:15*

Question 123

χορτάζω

Answer 123

passive, I eat to the full, am satisfied, am filled

Question 124

γυμνός, -ή, -όν

Answer 124

naked, without clothing; needing (more or better) clothing
Definition:
naked, without clothing, Mk. 14:51, 52; without the upper garment, and clad only with an inner garment or tunic, Jn. 21:7; poorly or meanly clad, destitute of proper and sufficient clothing, Mt. 25:36, 38, 43, 44; Acts 19:16; Jas. 2:15; met. unclothed with a body, 2 Cor. 5:3; not covered, uncovered, open, manifest, Heb. 4:13; bare, mere, 1 Cor. 15:37; naked of spiritual clothing, Rev. 3:17; 16:15; 17:16

Question 125

ἐλαία, -ας, ἡ

Answer 125

olive, olive tree; when used with {4001} it is the proper name the Mount of Olives, a ridge on the east side of the Kidron Valley, overlooking Jerusalem and the Temple mount
Definition:
an olive tree, Mt. 21:1; 24:3; an olive, fruit of the olive tree, Jas. 3:12, ὄρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν, the Mount of Olives, Mt. 21:1

Question 126

θρίξ, τριχός, ἡ

Answer 126

a hair, the hair

Thayer’s Definition
the hair of the head
the hair of animals

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
θρίξ, ἡ,

gen. τρῐχός, dat. pl. θριξί (τρίχεσιν J. AJ 16.7.3 is f.l. for τρύχ-): -

I hair, Hom. only in pl., ὀρθαὶ τρίχες ἔσταν ἐνὶ.. μέλεσσι Il. 24.359; mostly, hair of the head, 22.77, Od. 13.431; αἱ ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ τρίχες Th. 1.6; sheep’s wool, Il. 3.273, Hes. Op. 517; pig’s bristles, Il. 19.254, Od. 10.239; τρίχες ἄκραι οὐραῖαι, of a horse’s tail, Il. 23.519; ἀνάστασις τῶν τριχῶν, of a lark’s crest, Gal. 12.361.

II

1. later in sg. collectively, A. Th. 535, Ag. 562, S. El. 451; τριχὸς πλόκαμος, βόστρυχος, A. Th. 564 (lyr.), Ch. 229; γενείον θρίξ Id. Pers. 1056; κόμη θρίξ LXX Numbers 6:6; Ἐπαφρόδιτον.. τὴν παιδικὴν τρίχα Ὑγίᾳ (sc. ἀνέθηκεν) IG 12(5).173 (Paros, i A.D.); of a horse’s mane, S. Fr. 475; of dogs, X. Cyn. 4.8 (sg. and pl.).
2. a single hair, οὐδὲ τρίχ[α ] Alc. Supp. 14.10: prov., θρὶξ ἀνὰ μέσσον only a hair’s breadth wanting, Theoc. 14.9, cf. X. Smp. 6.2; ἄξιον τριχός, i.e. good for nothing, Ar. Ra. 614; οὐδ’ ἂν τριχὸς πριαίμην Eup. 7.18D.; ἐκ τριχὸς κρέμασθαι to hang by a hair, Aristaenet. 2.1, Zen. 3.47; ἀπὸ τ. ἠερτῆσθαι AP 5.229 (Paul. Sil.); ἐπὶ τριχὸς ἦν ἡ σωτηρία Procop. Aed. 6.6; εἰς ἱερὴν τρίχα ἐλθεῖν, i.e. to come to life’s end, v.l. in AP 7.164 (Antip. Sid.), but cf. Epigr.Gr. 248.13; μόνον οὐχὶ τῶν τ., φασί, λαμβάνεται ‘saute aux yeux’, S.E. M. 7.257.

III Medic., vein on the right lobe of the liver, Hp. Mul. 1.43 (v.l. ἡ σῦριγξ), Gal. 19.104.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
θρίξ, τριχός, dative plural θριξί, ἡ (from Homer down), the hair;

a. “the hair of the head: Matthew 5:36; Luke 7:44; Luke 21:18; John 11:2; John 12:3; Acts 27:34; 1 Peter 3:3 (Lachmann omits); Revelation 1:14; with τῆς κεφαλῆς added (Homer, Odyssey 13, 399. 431), Matthew 10:30; Luke 7:38; Luke 12:7.
b. the hair of animals: Revelation 9:8; ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου, with a garment made of camel’s hair, Mark 1:6, cf. Matthew 3:4; ἐν … τριχῶν καμηλειων πλέγμασιν περιεπάτησαν, Clement of Alexandria, strom. 4, p. 221, Sylb. edition.

Question 127

καταλαμβάνω

Answer 127

-, κατέλαβον, κατείλ;ηφα, κατείλημμαι, κατελήμφθην
I overtake, apprehend, lay hold of
to obtain, attain, take hold of; seize, overtake; (mid.) to grasp, comprehend, understand, realize, find out
Definition:
to lay hold of, grasp; to obtain, attain, Rom. 9:30; 1 Cor. 9:24; Phil. 3:12, 13; to seize, to take possession of, Mk. 9:18; to come suddenly upon; overtake, surprise, Jn. 12:35; 1 Thess. 5:4; to detect in the act, seize, Jn. 8:3, 4; met. to comprehend, apprehend, Jn. 1:5; mid. to understand, perceive, Acts 4:13; 10:34; 25:25; Eph. 3:18*

Question 128

ὅθεν

Answer 128

whence, wherefore (from where?) (for what?)
from where, from there; therefore, this is why
Definition:
whence, Mt. 12:44; Acts 14:26; from the place where, Mt. 25:24, 26; whence, from which circumstance, 1 Jn. 2:18; wherefore, whereupon, Mt. 14:7

Question 129

μοιχεύω

Answer 129

μοιχεύσω, ἐμοίχευσα, -, -, ἐμοιχεύθην
to commit adultery
(act.) to commit adultery; (pass.) to become an adulterer
Definition:
trans. to commit adultery with, debauch, Mt. 5:28; absol. and mid. to commit adultery, Mt. 5:27; Jn. 8:4; to commit spiritual adultery, be guilty of idolatry, Rev. 2:22

Question 130

οἰκουμένη, ης, ἡ

Answer 130

the (inhabited) world ( cf. ecumenical)
the (inhabited) world, (Roman) world; humankind
Definition:
some list as a participle, the habitable earth, world, Matt 24:14; Rom. 10:18; Heb. 1:6; used, however, with various restrictions of meaning, according to the context, Lk. 2:1; Acts 17:6; meton. the inhabitants of the earth, the whole human race, mankind, Acts 17:31; 19:27; Rev. 3:10. Some view this word as a participial form of οἰκέω.

Question 131

σαλεύω

Answer 131

-, ἐσάλευσα, -, σεσάλευμαι, ἐσαλεύθην
to shake up; agitate; (pass.) to be shaken, swayed, unsettled
Definition:
to make to rock, to shake, Mt. 11:7; 24:29; Mk. 13:25; Lk. 6:38, 48; 7:24; 21:26; Acts 4:31; 16:26; Heb. 12:26; met. to stir up, excite the people, Acts 17:13; to agitate, disturb mentally, Acts 2:25; 2 Thess. 2:2; pass. impl. to totter, be ready to fall, be near to ruin, met. Heb. 12:36, 27*

Question 132

ἀλλότριος, -α, -ον

Answer 132

belonging to another
Definition:
belonging to another, Lk. 16:12; foreign, Acts 7:6; Heb. 11:9; a foreigner, alien, Mt. 17:25

Question 133

ἀμφότεροι, -αι, -α

Answer 133

both
both, all
Definition:
both. , Only plural in the NT.

Question 134

ἀπειθέω

Answer 134

-, ἠπείθησα, -, -, -
Ι disbelieve, disobey
to disobey, be disobedient
Definition: 
to be uncompliant; to refuse belief, disbelieve, Jn. 3:36; to refuse belief and obedience, Rom. 10:21; 1 Pet. 3:20; to refuse conformity, Rom. 2:8

Question 135

ἕκτος, -η, -ον

Answer 135

sixth, noon (the sixth hour)
Definition:
sixth, Mt. 20:5; 27:45

Question 136

ἐνιαυτός, -οῦ, ὁ

Answer 136

a year
Definition:
a year, more particularly as being a cycle of seasons, and in respect of its revolution, Jn. 11:49, 51; 18:13; in NT an era, Lk. 4:19

Question 137

εὐφραίνω

Answer 137

-, ηὔφρανα, -, -, ηὐφράνθην
I rejoice, I gladden, cheer up; am glad (cf. Euphrosyne, one of the three Graces in Greek mythology)
(act.) to cause celebration, make glad; (mid./pass.) to celebrate, rejoice, be glad
Definition:
to gladden, 2 Cor. 2:2; pass. to be glad, exult, rejoice, Lk. 12:19; Acts 2:26; mid. to feast in token of joy, keep a day of rejoicing, Lk. 15:23, 24, 29, 32

Question 138

κωφός, -ή, -όν

Answer 138

Deaf, dumb
unable to speak, mute; deaf
Definition:
pr. blunt, dull, as a weapon; dull of hearing, deaf, Mt. 11:5; Mk. 7:32, 37; 9:25; Lk. 7:22; dumb, mute, Mt. 9:32, 33; 12:22; 15:30, 31; Lk. 1:22; meton. making dumb, causing dumbness, Lk. 11:14*

Question 139

μύρον, ου, τό

Answer 139

ointment

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μύρον [ ῠ], τό,

1. sweet oil, unguent, perfume, Archil. 31 (pl.), Alc. 36, Sapph. Supp. 23.18, Anacr. 9, A. Fr. 14 (pl.), Hdt. 3.22; μύρον ἑψῆσαι Ar. Lys. 946; ὄζω μύρου Id. Ec. 524; μ. κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαι Pl. R. 398a; mixed with wine, Ael. VH 12.31; various kinds in Dsc. 1.42 sqq., Ath. 15.688e sqq.; μ. Μενδήσιον, ἠθητόν, PCair.Zen. 89.3, 436.1 (iii B. C.): prov., τὸ ἐπὶ τῇ φακῇ μ. sweet oil on lentils, i.e. ‘a jewel of gold in a swine’s snout’, Cic. Att. 1.19.2, cf. Stratt. 45, Sopat. 14, title of Menippean Satire by Varro.
2. place where unguents were sold, perfume-market, τὰ μειράκια.. τἀν τῷ μ. Ar. Eq. 1375, cf. Polyzel. 11; οἱ δ’ ἐν τῷ μ. λαλεῖτε Pherecr. 2; ἵσταται πρὸς τῷ μ. Eup. 209.
3. metaph., anything graceful or charming, AP 5.89.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μύρον, μύρου, τό (the grammarians derive it from μύρῳ to flow, accordingly, a flowing juice, trickling sap: but probably more correct to regard it as an oriental word akin to μύρρα, Hebrew מֹר, מור; (Fick (i. 836) connects it with the root, smar, ‘to smear’, with which Vanicek, 1198f associates σμύρνα, μύρτος, etc.; cf. Curtius, p. 714)), ointment: Matthew 26:7, 9 Rec., 12; Mark 14:3-5; Luke 7:37; Luke 23:56; John 11:2; John 12:3, 5; Revelation 18:13; distinguished from ἔλαιον (which see and see Trench, Synonyms, § xxxviii.), Luke 7:46. ((From Aeschylus, Herodotus down); the Sept. for שֶׁמֶן, fat, oil, Proverbs 27:9; for טוב שֶׁמֶן, Psalm 132:2 ().)

Question 140

μέτρον, μέτρου, τό

Answer 140

measure, moderation (meter)

Thayer’s Definition
measure, an instrument for measuring
a vessel for receiving and determining the quantity of things, whether dry or liquid
a graduated staff for measuring, a measuring rod
proverbially, the rule or standard of judgment
determined extent, portion measured off, measure or limit
the required measure, the due, fit, measure

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μέτρον, τό,

that by which anything is measured:

I

1. measure, rule, μέτρ’ ἐν χερσὶν ἔχοντες Il. 12.422; ἐν μέτροισι ταμὼν δόνακας h.Merc. 47; πάντ’ ἄνδρα πάντων χρημάτων μ. εἶναι is a measure of all things, Pl. Tht. 183c, cf. Protag. ap. Arist. Metaph. 1053a36; μ. αὐτῷ οὐχ ἡ ψυχή, ἀλλ’ ὁ νόμος X. Cyr. 1.3.18. Math., measure, divisor, Eratosth. ap. Nicom. Ar. 1.13, etc.
2. measure of content, whether solid or liquid, δῶκεν μέθυ, χίλια μ. Il. 7.471; εἴκοσι δ’ ἔστω μ… ἀλφίτου Od. 2.355; ὕδατος ἀνὰ εἴκοσι μ. χεῦε 9.209, cf. Il. 23.268, 741, Hes. Op. 350, 600, etc.; at Samos, of the μέδιμνος, SIG 976.55 (ii B.C.); in Egypt, of the ἀρτάβη, μ. δοχικόν PTeb. 11.6 (ii B.C.); also of smaller units, as μ. ἑξαχοίνικον ib. 105.40 (ii B.C.); μέτροις καὶ σταθμοῖς by measure and weight, Decr. ap. And. 1.83; in the widest sense, either weight or measure, Φείδωνος τοῦ τὰ μ. ποιήσαντος Πελοποννησίοισι Hdt. 6.127; μ. οἰνηρά, σιτηρά, Arist. EN 1135a2; Κιλικίῳ μ. μετρεῖν OGI 579.2 (Cilicia).
3. any space measured or measurable, length, size, in pl., dimensions, μέτρα κελεύθου the length of the way, Od. 4.389; μέτρα θαλάσσης Hes. Op. 648, Orac. ap. Hdt. 1.47; μορφῆς μέτρα bodily dimensions, E. Alc. 1063; τὰ μ. τοῦ λίθου its distances from a given point in given directions, its position, Hdt. 2.121. ά, cf. Pl. Lg. 843e, Plu. Sol. 23; ἄστρων μέτρα S. Fr. 432.8; ἀπέχει.. θαλάσσης μέτρον ἑξήκοντα σταδίους Th. 8.95; τῷ Ἴστρῳ ἐκ τῶν ἴσων μ. ὁρμᾶται [ὁ Νεῖλος ] starts from the same distances as (i.e. the position corresponding to the source of) the Ister, Hdt. 2.33; εἰδέναι τὴν ἑαυτοῦ χώραν μέτρῳ καὶ τόπῳ X. Cyr. 8.5.3; ἐντὸς τῶν μ. τετμημένον μέταλλον Hyp. Eux. 35; later of Time, duration, μέτρα βίοιο ἄρκια APl. 4.333 (Antiphil.); ἐτέων μέτρα, ὡράων μέτρον, AP 7.334,9.481; μέτρα ἐνιαυτῶν, νυκτός, Arat. 464.731; χρονικὰ μ. Simp. in de An. 299.37. limit, goal, ὅρμου μ. the goal which is the mooring-place, Od. 13.101; ἥβης μ. ἱκέσθαι the term which is puberty, Il. 11.225, Hes. Op. 132; but, ἥβης μ. ἔχειν full measure of youthful vigour, ib. 438, Thgn. 1119; σοφίης, γνωμοσύνης μ. Sol. 13.52, 16.2.
4. due measure or limit, proportion, μέτρα φυλάσσεσθαι Hes. Op. 694; χρὴ κατ’ αὐτὸν παντὸς ὁρᾶν μέτρον Pi. P. 2.34; μέτρα μὲν γνώμᾳ διώκων, μέτρα δὲ καὶ κατέχων Id. I. 6(5).71; κατὰ μέτρον Hes. Op. 720; πίνειν ὑπὲρ μέτρον Thgn. 498; προστιθεὶς μ. A. Ch. 797 (lyr.); τί μ. κακότατος ἔφυ; S. El. 236 (lyr.); μ. ἔχει have a moderating power, Pl. Lg. 836a; πλέον πίνειν τοῦ μέτρου Id. R. 621a; μ. ἔχειν Id. Lg. 957a; μέτρῳ, = μετρίως, καταβαίνειν Pi. P. 8.78; οὐδεὶς τῷ μ. τὸ πίνειν ἔστεργε Alciphr. 3.32.
5. τίς ἱππείοις ἐν ἔντεσσιν μέτρα.. ἐπέθηκ ‘ checks, i.e. bits, Pi. O. 13.20.

II

1. metre, Ar. Nu. 638, 641, etc.; opp. μέλος (music) and ῥυθμός (time), Pl. Grg. 502c, etc.; λόγους ψιλοὺς εἰς μέτρα τιθέντες putting into verse, Id. Lg. 669d; τὰ ἐν μέτρῳ πεποιημένα ἔπη X. Mem. 1.2.21.
2. pl., verses, Pl. Ly. 205a. (I.- E. *métro-m from *métro-m ‘measuring instrument’, cf. Goth. mitan ‘measure’.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μέτρον, μέτρου, τό, the Sept. chiefly for מִדָּה (cf. μήτηρ), measure;

1. an instrument for measuring;
   a. a vessel for receiving and determining the quantity of things, whether dry or liquid: in proverbial discourse, μέτρειν μέτρῳ, of the measure of the benefits which one confers on others, Luke 6:38; μέτρον πεπιεσμένον καί σεσαλευμένον, figuratively equivalent to most abundant requital, ibid.; πληροῦν τό μέτρον τῶν πατέρων, to add what is lacking in order to fill up their ancestors’ prescribed number of crimes, Matthew 23:32 (see πληρόω, 2 a.); ἐκ μέτρου (A. V. by measure; see ἐκ, V. 3) i. e. sparingly, John 3:34 (also ἐν μέτρῳ, Ezekiel 4:11).
   b. a graduated staff for measuring, measuring-rod: Revelation 21:15; with ἀνθρώπου added (man’s measure), such as men use, Revelation 21:17; hence, in proverbial discourse, the rule or standard of judgment: Matthew 7:2; Mark 4:24.
2. determined extent, portion measured off, measure or limit: with a genitive of the thing received, Romans 12:3; 2 Corinthians 10:13; (Ephesians 4:7); ἐν μέτρῳ, in proportion to the measure (cf. Winers Grammar, § 48, a. 3 b. and see ἐνέργεια; others, in due measure), Ephesians 4:16; the required measure, the due, fit, measure: τῆς ἡλικίας, the proper i. e. ripe, full age (see ἡλικία, 1 c.) (of a man), Ephesians 4:13 (ἡβης, Homer, Iliad 11, 225; Odyssey 11, 317; Solon 5, 52 (Poet. Min. Gr. (edited by Gaisford) 3:135)).

Question 141

οἷος

Answer 141

such as

Thayer’s Definition
what sort of, what manner of, such as

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
οἶος, α

( η), ον, Cypr. οἶϝος Inscr.Cypr. 135.14 H.: —

alone, lonely, freq. in Hom. and Hes., thrice in Pi., once in A., twice in S. (v. infr.): —

Special usages:

I

1 defined by the addition of other words, οἶ. ἄνευθ’ ἄλλων Il. 22.39; οἶ…, νόσφιν δεσποίνης Od. 14.450; οὐκ οἶ., ἅμα τῷ γε.. not alone, but.., Il. 2.822, cf. Od. 1.331, al.; οἶ. ἐν ὄρφνᾳ Pi. O. 1.71, cf. P. 1.93; οἶ. (prob. cj.) ἐξέβης λαθών S. Fr. 22: neut. οἶον as Adv., γαστέρες οἶον naught but.., Hes. Th. 26; οἶον μὴ.. only let not.., A. Ag. 131 (lyr.); οὐ.. οἶον, ἀλλ’.. not only.., but.., IG 3.171 B 22.

2. strengthd., εἷς οἶος, μία οἴη, one alone, one only, Il. 4.397, 18.565, al.; dual, δύ’ οἴω 24.473, Od. 14.94: pl., δύ’ οἴους 3.424; δύ’ οἶαι 16.245.
3. sts. c. gen., οἴη γάρ ῥα θεῶν alone, the only one, of the gods, Il. 11.74; τῶν οἶος ib. 693; οἶος θεῶν Pi. Fr. 93.
4. with a Pr, οἴη ἐν ἀθανάτοισιν alone among the immortals, Il. 1.398; οἶος μετὰ τοῖσι Od. 3.362: but οἶον ἀπ’ ἄλλων alone from, apart from, 9.192; οἶον ἀπ’ ἀνθρώπων 21.364; πῶς ἂν.. ἀπὸ σεῖο.. λιποίμην οἶ.; Il. 9.438; οἶ. Ἀτρειδῶν δίχα clam Atridis, S. Aj. 750.

II single in its kind, unique, excellent, ὃς δέ μοι οἶ. ἔην.., Ἕκτορα Il. 24.499. (Cf. O Pers. aiva- ‘one’: I.- E. oi-wo-, akin to oi-no-, v. οἴνη (B).)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
οἷος, οἷα, οἷον (from Homer down), relative pronoun (correlative to the demonstrative τοῖος and τοιοῦτος), what sort of, what manner of, such as (Latinqualis): οἷος … τοιοῦτος, 1 Corinthians 15:48; 2 Corinthians 10:11; τόν αὐτόν … οἷον, Philippians 1:30; with the pronoun τοιοῦτος suppressed, Matthew 24:21; Mark 9:3; Mark 13:19 (here however the antecedent demonstrative is merely attracted into the relative clause or perhaps repeated for rhetorical emphasis, cf. Buttmann, § 143, 8; Winers Grammar, 148 (140); see τοιοῦτος, b.); 2 Corinthians 12:20; 2 Timothy 3:11; Revelation 16:18; ὁιωδηποτουν νοσήματι, of what kind of disease soever, John 5:4 Lachmann (cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 373f); in indirect question, Luke 9:55 (Rec.); 1 Thessalonians 1:5. οὐχ οἷον δέ ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν, concisely for οὐ τοιον ἐστιν οἷον ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν, “but the thing (state of the case) is not such as this, that the word of God hat fallen to the ground, i. e. the word of God hath by no means come to nought” (A. V. but not as though the word of God hath etc.), Romans 9:6; cf. Winers Grammar, § 64 I. 6; Buttmann, § 150, 1 Rem.

Question 142

ταπεινόω

Answer 142

ταπεινώσω, ἐταπείνωσα, -, τεταπείνωμαι, ἐταπεινώθην
I humble
(act.) to humble (oneself), lower (oneself); (pass.) to be humbled, brought low, in need
Definition:
to bring low, depress, level, Lk. 3:5; met. to humble, abase, Phil. 2:8; mid. to descend to, or live in, a humble condition, 2 Cor. 11:7; Phil. 4:12; to humble, depress the pride of, any one, Mt. 18:4; mid. to humble one’s self, exhibit humility and contrition, Jas. 4:10; 1 Pet. 5:6; to humble with respect to hopes and expectations, to depress with disappointment, Mt. 23:12; Lk. 14:11; 18:14; 2 Cor. 12:21*

Thayer’s Definition
to make low, bring low
to level, reduce to a plain
metaph. to bring into a humble condition, reduce to meaner circumstances
to assign a lower rank or place to
to abase
to be ranked below others who are honoured or rewarded
to humble or abase myself by humble living
to lower, depress
of one’s soul bring down one’s pride

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τᾰπειν-όω,

lower, in point of height, reduce, σπλῆνα (swollen spleen) Dsc. 2.155: — Pass., πᾶν ὄρος ταπεινωθήσεται LXX Isaiah 40:4; πρόσωπον ἐκ μετεώρου ταπεινούμενον Hp. Coac. 208; of a plant, decrease in size, Thphr. HP 7.13.9; of rivers, D.S. 1.36; Astrol., of a planet, suffer dejection, Vett.Val. 119.15.

II metaph., lessen, τὸν φθόνον Plu. Per. 32; τὸ ἐν μέλιτι χολῶδες Gal. 15.683 (to expl. κολάζεται in Hp. Acut. 59); disparage, minimize, Plb. 6.15.7, cf. 3.85.7: — Pass., to be lowered or lessened, Pl. Ti. 72d.

2. humble, abase, X. An. 6.3.18; τ. καὶ συστέλλων Pl. Ly. 210e; ταπεινώσαντες.. τοὺς νῦν ἐπηρμένους Aeschin. 3.235: — Pass., ταπεινωθεὶς ἕπεται Pl. Phdr. 254e; ὑπὸ πενίας Id. R. 553c, Phld. Rh. 1.225 S.; τεταπείνωται ἡ τῶν Ἀθηναίων δόξα X. Mem. 3.5.4; ἐταπεινοῦντο ταῖς ἐλπίσι D.S. 13.11; τεταπεινωμένων τῶν ἄλλων διὰ τὴν τῶν πραγμάτων κατάστασιν Anon. Oxy. 664.22. violate a woman, LXX Genesis 34:2, 2 Kings 13:12; 2 Kings 13:14, Ezekiel 22:10-11.
3. in moral sense, make lowly, humble, ἑαυτόν Phld. Vit. p.38 J., Matthew 23:12, al.: — Pass., humble oneself, τὴν θεὸν ἐξιλάσαντο τῷ ταπεινοῦσθαι σφόδρα Men. 544, cf. LXX Genesis 16:9, Si. 18.21, 1 Peter 5:6.
4. esp. of fasting or abstinence, θεοῦ ᾧ πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἐν τῇ σήμερον ἡμέρᾳ (i.e. on a fast-day) ταπεινοῦται μεθ’ ἱκετείας SIG 1181.11 (Rhenea, Jewish, ii A.D.); ἐὰν ψυχὴν τεταπεινωμένην ἐμπλήσῃς feed the hungry, LXX Isaiah 58:10, cf. Leviticus 23:27, al.; οἶδα ταπεινοῦσθαι, opp. περισσεύειν, Philippians 4:12.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ταπεινόω, ταπεινῷ; future ταπεινώσω; 1 aorist ἐταπείνωσα; passive, present ταπεινοῦμαι; 1 aorist ἐταπεινώθην; 1 future ταπεινωθήσομαι; (ταπεινός); to make low, bring low (Vulg. humilio);

a. properly: ὄρος, βουνόν, i. e. to level, reduce to a plain, passive, Luke 3:5 from Isaiah 40:4.
b. metaphorically, to bring into it humble condition, reduce to meaner circumstances; i. e. α. to assign a lower rank or place to; to abase; τινα, passive, to be ranked below others who are honored or rewarded (R. V. to humble): Matthew 23:12; Luke 14:11; Luke 18:14. β. ταπεινῷ ἐμαυτόν, to humble or abase myself, by frugal living, 2 Corinthians 11:7; in the passive of one who submits to want, Philippians 4:12; ἑαυτόν, of one who stoops to the condition of s servant, Philippians 2:8.
c. to lower, depress (English humble): τινα, one’s soul, bring down one’s pride; ἐμαυτόν, to have a modest opinion of oneself, to behave in an unassuming manner devoid of all haughtiness, Matthew 18:4; Matthew 23:12; Luke 14:11; Luke 18:14; passive, ταπεινοῦμαι ἐνώπιον κυρίου (see ἐνώπιον, 2 b. at the end) in a middle sense (Buttmann, 52 (46)), to confess and deplore one’s spiritual littleness and unworthiness, James 4:10 (in the same sense ταπεινοῦν τήν ψυχήν αὐτοῦ, Sir. 2:17 Sir. 7:17; the Sept. for נַפְשׁו עִנָּה, he afflicted his soul, of persons fasting, Leviticus 16:29, 31; Leviticus 23:27, 32; Isaiah 58:3, 5, 10; τήν ψυχήν τίνος, to disturb, distress, the soul of one, Protevangelium Jacobi,
c. 2.13.15 (rather, to humiliate; see the passages)); ὑπό τήν χεῖρα τοῦ Θεοῦ, to submit oneself in a lowly spirit to the power and will of God, 1 Peter 5:6 (cf. Genesis 16:9); equivalent to to put to the blush, 2 Corinthians 12:21. ((Hippocrates), Xenophon, Plato, Diodorus, Plutarch; the Sept. for עָנָה, שָׁפֵל and הִשְׁפִּיל, דִּכָּא, הִכְנִיעַ , etc.) (See references under the word

Question 143

φρόνιμος, -η, -ον

Answer 143

prudent
wise, sensible, shrewd; (with {4123} + {4932}) conceited
Definition:
considerate, thoughtful, prudent, discreet, Mt. 7:24; 10:16; 24:45; 25:2, 4, 8, 9; Lk. 12:42; sensible, wise, Rom. 11:25; 12:16; 1 Cor. 4:10; 10:15; 2 Cor. 11:19*

Thayer’s Definition
intelligent, wise
prudent, i.e. mindful of one’s interests

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
φρόνιμ-ος, ον, also η, ον Plu. 2.1070b: —

in one’s right mind, in one’s senses, S. Aj. 259 (anap.).

II showing presence of mind, ἐν τοῖς δεινοῖς X. An. 2.6.7; τὸ φ. presence of mind, Id. HG 2.3.56.

III sensible, prudent, opp. ἄφρων, Gorg. Fr. 6; ψυχή Pl. Sph. 247a; opp. ἀνόητος, Isoc. 2.14 (Comp.); τὸν φρόνιμον ζητοῦντας.. ὥσπερ ἀποδεδρακότα Bato 2.3; ὡς ἂν ὁ φ. ὁρίσειε Arist. EN 1107a1, al.; φ. περί τινος possessing sagacity or discernment in a thing, X. Cyr. 1.6.15, 21 (Comp.); περί τι Pl. Grg. 490b (Comp.), Isoc. 12.161 (Comp.); εἴς τι Pl. Alc. 1.125a; ἐν τῷ σίτῳ φ. καὶ μέτριοι X. Cyr. 5.2.17.

2. of thoughts, acts, and the like, φ. τι ἐργάσασθαι Ar. Lys. 42; φιλόπολις ἀρετή, φρόνιμος ib. 547 (lyr.).
3. of birds as giving omens, τοὺς ἄνωθεν φρονιμωτάτους οἰωνούς S. El. 1058 (lyr.). sagacious, of animals, Pl. Plt. 263d, Arist. HA 488b15, PA 648a8 (Comp.), 687a8 (Sup.), GA 753a11 (Comp.), al.
4. τὸ φ. practical wisdom, prudence, E. Fr. 52.9 (lyr.), Pl. R. 586d, al.; opp. τὸ ἄφρον, Id. Phdr. 235e; ἰέναι ἐπὶ τὸ φρονιμώτερον X. Smp. 8.14: pl., ἄπορος ἐπὶ φρόνιμα helpless in point of wisdom, S. OT 692 (lyr.); τὰ -ώτερα ποιεῖν Isoc. 15.211.
5. Adv. -μως Ar. Eq. 1364, Av. 1333 (lyr.), Pl. La. 192e, etc.; opp. ἀλόγως, Isoc. 3.9; φ. ἔχειν X. Cyr. 3.3.57; διακεῖσθαι Isoc. 8.114: Comp. φρονιμώτερον, διακεῖσθαι τῶν ἄλλων Id. 2.10; -ωτέρως Id. 13.15: Sup. -ώτατα, λέγειν X. Revelation 20:1-15.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
φρόνιμος, φρόνιμον (φρονέω);

a. intelligent, wise (so A. V. uniformly): 1 Corinthians 10:15; opposed to μωρός, 1 Corinthians 4:10; opposed to Ἄφρον, 2 Corinthians 11:19; φρόνιμος παῥ ἑαυτῷ, one who deems himself wise (A. V. wise in one’s own conceits), Romans 11:25; Romans 12:16, (Proverbs 3:7).
b. prudent, i. e. mindful of one’s interests: Matthew 10:16; Matthew 24:45; Luke 12:42; opposed to μωρός, Matthew 7:24 (cf. ); f comparitive φρονιμώτερος, Luke 16:8. (From Sophocles, Xenophon, Plato down; the Sept. for נָבון, חָכָם, מֵבִין.) (Synonym: see σοφός, at the end.)

Question 144

ἀναστροφή, -ῆς, ἡ

Answer 144

Conduct
way of life, behavior
Definition:
conversation, mode of life, conduct, deportment, Gal. 1:13

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀνα-στροφή, ἡ,

I

1. turning upside down, upsetting, overthrow, E. Fr. 301 (pl.); μοῖραν εἰς ἀ. δίδωσι, = ἀναστρέφει, Id. Andr. 1007; disorder, confusion, Posidipp. 26.22.
2. turning back, return, S. Ant. 226; πολλὰς ἀ. ποιούμενος, of a hunter, making many casts backward, X. Cyn. 6.25; wheeling round, of a horse, Id. Eq.Mag. 3.14; of soldiers in battle, whether to flee or rally, Id. Cyr. 5.4.8; μηκέτι δοῦναι αὐτοῖς ἀ. time to rally, Id. HG 4.3.6, cf. Ages. 2.3; esp. of the reversal of a wheeling movement, Ascl. Tact. 10.6, Ael. Tact. 25.7, Arr. Tact. 21.4; of a ship, Th. 2.89; ἐξ ἀ. turning back, Plb. 4.54.4; κατ’ ἀναστροφήν conversely, S.E. M. 7.430.
3. in Gramm., throwing back of the accent, as in Prepositions after their case, A.D. Synt. 308.15, etc.
4. Rhet., = ἐπαναστροφή, repetition of words which close one sentence at the beginning of another, Hermog. Id. 1.12, etc. inversion of the natural order, A.D. Synt. 71.18, Phoeb. Fig. 1.4, etc.; τῆς τάξεως Theon Prog. 4.
5. Math., conversion of a ratio, ἀ. λόγου Euc. 5 Def. 16; κατ’ ἀναστροφήν Papp. 1002.25.

II

1. dwelling in a place, Plu. 2.216a.
2. abode, haunt, δαιμόνων ἀναστροφή A. Eu. 23.
3. mode of life, behaviour, Plb. 4.82.1, D.L. 0.64; -φὴν ποιεῖσθαι IG 2.477b12, cf. SIG 491.5, LXX Tobit 4:14, Galatians 1:13, Ephesians 4:22, al.; ἀ. πολιτική PGiss. 40ii29 (iii A.D.); ἐξημερωμένης -φῆς civilized life, Phld. Sto.Herc. 339.19.
4. delay, respite, time for doing a thing, Plb. 1.66.3,al., D.S. 10.5.
5. occupation, concern, περί τι τὰν ἀ. ἔχειν Archyt. 1, cf. Phld. Po. 5.1425.6.
6. return, way back, Arist. HA 631a26, cf. Pr. 940b23.
7. recourse, ἀ. λαμβάνειν πρός τι Plu. 2.112c.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀναστροφή, ἀναστροφῆς, ἡ (from the passive ἀναστρέφομαι, see the preceding word), properly, ‘walk,’ i. e. manner of life, behavior, conduct (German Lebenswandel): Galatians 1:13; Ephesians 4:22; 1 Timothy 4:12; James 3:13; 1 Peter 1:15, 18; 1 Peter 2:12; 1 Peter 3:1f, 16; 2 Peter 2:7; plural ἅγιαι ἀναστροφαι the ways in which holy living shows itself, 2 Peter 3:11. Hence, life in so far as it is comprised in conduct, Hebrews 13:7. (This word, in the senses given, is found in Greek writings from Polybius 4, 82, 1 down; in the Scriptures first in Tobit 4:14; 2 Macc. 5:8; add Epictetus diss. 1, 9, 5; 4, 7, 5 (and (from Sophocles Lexicon, under the word) Agatharchides 134, 12; 153, 8; Aristeas 16).)

Question 145

ἄνωθεν

Answer 145

from above, again
from above; from the beginning; again, anew
Definition:
from above, from a higher place, Jn. 3:31; of time, from the first or beginning, Acts 26:5; from the source, Lk. 1:33; again, anew, Jn. 3:3, 7; Gal. 4:9; with a prep., the top or upper part, Mt. 27:51

Thayer's Definition
from above, from a higher place
of things which come from heaven or God
from the first, from the beginning, from the very first
anew, over again

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἄνωθεν and ἄνωθε (Ar. Ec. 698), Dor. ἄνωθα Tab.Heracl. 1.17: (ἄνω): —

I Adv. of Place,

1. from above, from on high, θεοὺς ἄ. γῆς ἐποπτεύειν ἄχη A. Ag. 1579; ὕδατος ἄ. γενομένου Th. 4.75; βάλλειν ἄ. Id. 7.84; from the interior of a country, Id. 1.59, X. An. 7.7.2; esp. from inner Asia, Plu. Dem. 14; from the north, Hdt. 4.105.
2. like ἄνω, above, on high, opp. κάτωθεν or κάτω, A. Ag. 871 (dub.): of the gods, Id. Supp. 597 (lyr.), Pl. Lg. 717b; of men on earth, οἱ ἄ. the living, A. Ch. 834 (lyr.), E. Hel. 1014; those on deck (in a ship), Th. 7.63; of birds of the air, S. El. 1058 (lyr.); ἡ ἄ. Φρυγία upper Phrygia, D. 23.155. rarely c. gen., ἄ. τοῦ στρατοπέδου Hdt. 1.75; τοῦ καρποῦ Hp. Art. 80; τῆς νεώς Plu. Them. 12.

II in narrative or in quiry,

1. from the beginning, from farther back, ἄ. ἄρχεσθαι, ἐπιχειρεῖν, Pl. Phlb. 44d, Lg. 781d; ἄ. ἐξετάζειν τὸ γένος D. 44.69, cf. Men. Epit. 23; in quotations, above, earlier, Sch. E. Ph. 249, etc.: οἱ ἔμπροσθεν καὶ ἄ. γονεῖς ancestors, Pl. Ti. 18d; Κορίνθιαι εἰμὲς ἄ. by descent, Theoc. 15.91, cf. 22.164, Call. Aet. 3.1.32; πονηρὸς ἄ. a born rogue, D. 45.80; ἐκ προγόνων ἄ. τετιμημένος IG 22.1072; ἄ. ἀναμάρτητον from early life, Phld. Sto.Herc. 339.17.16; ἐν τοῖς ἄ. χρόνοις D. 9.41.
2. τὰ ἄ. higher, more universal principles, Pl. Phd. 101d, cf. Arist. AP 0.97a33.
3. over again, anew, afresh, φιλίαν ἄ. ποιεῖται J. AJ 1.18.3, Artem. 1.14, cf. John 3:3; πάλιν ἄ. Galatians 4:9, cf. Harp. s.v. ἀνάδικοι κρίσεις; κτίστης ἄνωθε γενόμενος IG 7.2712.58.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἄνωθεν (ἄνω), adverb;

a. from above, from a higher place: ἀπό ἄνωθεν (Winer’s Grammar, § 50, 7 N. 1), Matthew 27:51 (Tdf. omits ἀπό); Mark 15:38; ἐκ τῶν ἄνωθεν from the upper part, from the top, John 19:23. Often (also in Greek writings) used of things which come from heaven, or from God as dwelling in heaven: John 3:31; John 19:11; James 1:17; James 3:15, 17.
b. from the first: Luke 1:3; then, from the beginning on, from the very first: Acts 26:5. Hence,
c. anew, over again, indicating repetition (a use somewhat rare, but wrongly denied by many (Meyer among them; cf. his commentary on John and Galatians as below)): John 3:3, 7 ἄνωθεν γεννηθῆναι, where others explain it from above, i. e. from heaven. But, according to this explanation, Nicodemus ought to have wondered how it was possible for anyone to be born from heaven; but this he did not say; (cf. Westcott, Commentary on John, p. 63). Of the repetition of physical birth, we read in Artemidorus Daldianus, oneir. 1, 13 (14), p. 18 (i., p. 26, Reiff edition) (ἀνδρί) ἔτι τῷ ἔχοντι ἐγκυον γυναῖκα σημαίνει παῖδα αὐτῷ γεννήσεσθαι ὅμοιον κατά πάντα. οὕτω γάρ ἄνωθεν αὐτός δοξειε γέννασθαι; cf. Josephus, Antiquities 1, 18, 3 φιλίαν ἄνωθεν ποιεῖσθαι, where a little before stands πρότερα φιλία; add, Martyr. Polycarp, 1, 1 [ET]; (also Socrates in Stobaeus, flor. cxxiv. 41, iv. 135, Meineke edition (iii. 438, Gaisf. edition); Harpocration, Lex., see under the words, ἀναδικάσασθαι, ἀναθέσθαι, ἀναποδιζομενα, ἀνασυνταξις; Canon. apost. 46 (others 39, Coteler. patr. apost. works, i. 444); Pseudo-Basil, de bapt. 1, 2, 7 (iii. 1537); Origen in Joann. t. xx. c. 12 (works, iv. 322 c. DelaRue). See Abbot, Authorship of the Fourth Gospel, etc. (Boston 1880), p. 34f). πάλιν ἄνωθεν, (on this combination of synonymous words cf. Kühner, § 534, 1; (Jelf, § 777, 1); Grimm on Sap. xix. 5 (6)): Galatians 4:9 (again, since ye were in bondage once before).

Question 146

διαλέγομαι

Answer 146

(διελεγόμην), -, διελεξάμην, -, -, διελέχθην
I dispute (dialectics)
to reason, discuss, discourse; to argue, dispute
Definition:
to discourse, argue, reason, Acts 17:2, 17; 24:12; to address, speak to, Heb. 12:5; to contend, dispute, Mk. 9:34; Jude 9

Thayer’s Definition
to think different things with one’s self, mingle thought with thought
to ponder, revolve in mind
to converse, discourse with one, argue, discuss

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διαλέγομαι; imperfect διελεγομην; (1 aorist 3 person singular διελέξατο (L T Tr WH in Acts 17:2; Acts 18:19)); 1 aorist διελεχθην; (middle of διαλέγω, to select, distingish);

1. to think different things with oneself, mingle thought with thought (cf. διαλογίζομαι); to ponder, revolve in mind; so in Homer.
2. as very frequent in Attic, to converse, discourse with one, argue, discuss: absolutely, Acts (); f; (); περί τίνος, Acts 24:25; τίνι, with one, Acts 17:17; Acts 18:19; Acts 20:7; Hebrews 12:5; ἀπό τῶν γραφῶν, drawing arguments from the Scriptures, Acts 17:2; πρός τινα, Acts 17:11; Acts 24:12; with the idea of disputing prominent: πρός ἀλλήλους, followed by the interrogative τίς, Mark 9:34; περί τίνος, Jude 1:9.

Question 147

διαφέρω

Answer 147

(διέφερον), -, διήνεγκα, -, -, -
to carry or convey through a place in different ways or into different parts; to convey a thought, discriminate, distinguish; separate

discriminate, distinguish; to convey through, across, Mk. 11:16; pass. to be borne, driven, or tossed hither and thither, Acts 27:27; to be proclaimed, published, Acts 13:49; intrans. met. to differ, 1 Cor. 15:41; to excel, be better or of greater value, be superior, Mt. 6:26; 10:31; impers. διαφέρει, it makes a difference, it is of consequence; with οὐδέν, it makes no difference, it is nothing, Gal. 2:6

to bear or carry through any place
to carry different ways
to carry in different directions, to different places
of people who are carried hither and thither in a ship, driven to and fro
to differ, to test, prove, the good things that differ,
to distinguish between good and evil, lawful and unlawful, to approve of things that excel, to differ from one
to excel, surpass one
impersonally, it makes a difference, it matters, is of importance

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
διαφέρω,

fut. διοίσω S. OT 321, διοίσομαι h.Merc. 255, etc.: aor. 1 διήνεγκα, Ion. διήνεικα: aor. 2 διήνεγκον: —

I

1. carry over or across, δ. ναῦς τὸν Ἰσθμόν Th. 8.8; carry from one to another, διαφέρεις κηρύγματα E. Supp. 382; [ τὸ ἤλεκτρον] διαφέρεται εἰς τοὺς Ἕλληνας Arist. Mir. 836b6: metaph., γλῶσσαν διοίσει will put the tongue in motion, will speak, S. Tr. 323 codd.
2. of Time, δ. τὸν αἰῶνα, τὸν βίον, go through life, Hdt. 3.40, E. Hel. [10]; νύκτα Id. Rh. 600: abs., ἄπαις διοίσει ib. 982: — Med., live, continue, ὑγιηροὶ τἄλλα διαφέρονται Hp. Art. 56; σοῦ διοίσεται μόνος will pass his life apart from thee, S. Aj. 511; σκοπούμενος διοίσει X. Mem. 2.1.24 (cj. Dind. for διέσῃ).
3. bear through, bear to the end, σκῆπτρα E. IA 1195; γαστρὸς ὄγκον δ., of a woman, Id. Ion 15, cf. X. Mem. 2.2.5: hence,
4. bear to the end, go through with, πόλεμον Hdt. 1.25, Th. 1.11; but also, bear the burden of war, Id. 6.54; endure, support, with an Adv., ῥᾷστα γὰρ τὸ σόν τε σὺ κἀγὼ διοίσω τοὐμόν S. OT 321; δ. πότμον δάκρυσι E. Hipp. 1143 (lyr.): abs., of patients in disease, δ. ἕως τῶν εἰκοσιτεσσάρων ἡμερέων Hp. Int. 40; δ. φθειρόμενος ib. 12 (also ἡ νοῦσος δ. ἐννέα ἔτεα ibid.).

II

1. carry different ways, Ar. Lys. 570, etc.; δ. ἕκαστα εἰς τὰς χώρας τὰς προσηκούσας X. Oec. 9.8; toss about, ὅπλισμα.. διαφέρων ἐσφενδόνα E. Supp. 715; δ. τὰς κόρας to turn the eyes about, Id. Ba. 1087. Or. 1261 (lyr.): — Pass., to be drawn apart, disrupted, opp. συμφέρεσθαι, Heraclit. 10, Pl. Sph. 242e, Epicur. Nat. 908.2; to be tossed about, dub. in Str. 3.2.5; δ. ἐν τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ Acts 27:27, cf. Plu. Galb. 26.
2. δ. τινά spread his fame abroad, Pi. P. 11.60; εἰς ἅπαντας τὴν ἐκείνου μνήμην δ. D. 61.46: — Pass., φήμη διηνέχθη Plu. 2.163c.
3. tear asunder, E. Ba. 754; disjoin, Arist. Po. 1451a34 (Pass.): metaph., distract, τὰς ψυχὰς φροντίσιν Plu. 2.133d, cf. 97f(Pass.), D.Chr. 32.46 (Pass.).
4. δ. τὴν ψῆφον give one’s vote a different way, i.e. against another, Hdt. 4.138, etc.; but also, give each man his vote, E. Or. 49, Th. 4.74, X. Smp. 5.8.
5. ἐράνους δ., = διαλύεσθαι, pay them up, discharge them, Lycurg. 22.
6. defer, reserve for judgement, τὸν αἴτιον A. Ch. 68 (lyr., διασπαράσσει Sch.).
7. plunder, Herod. 7.90: — Pass., τῶν ἀπὸ [τῆς οἰκίας] φορτίων διενηνεγμένων PLond. 1.45.9 (ii B.C.).
8. excel, ἀρετῇ τοὺς ἄλλους D.S. 11.67, cf. 2.5; καλλιτεκνίᾳ πάσας γυναῖκας Stud.Pont. 3.123 (Amasia).

III intr.,

1. differ, φυᾷ δ. Pi. N. 7.54; ἆρ’ οἱ τεκόντες διαφέρουσιν ἢ τροφαί; is it one’s parents or nurture that make the difference? E. Hec. 599: c. gen., to be different from, Id. Or. 251, Th. 5.86, etc.; οὐδὲν διοίσεις Χαιρεφῶντος τὴν φύσιν Ar. Nu. 503, cf. Pl. Prt. 329d; τὸ δ’.. ἀφανίζειν ἱερὰ ἔσθ’ ὅτι τοῦ κόπτειν διαφέρει; D. 21.147; δ. τὰς μορφάς Arist. HA 497b15; δ. εἴς τι, ἔν τινι, X. Hier. 1.2, 7; παρὰ τὴν Βεβρυκίαν App. Mith. 1; καθ’ ὑπεροχὴν καὶ ἕλλειψιν Arist. HA 486a22; κατὰ τὴν θέσιν Id. Mete. 341b24; πρός τι Id. HA 505a21; τίνι δ. τὰ ἄρρενα τῶν θηλειῶν.. θεωρείσθω Id. PA 684b3: c. inf., μόνῃ τῇ μορφῇ μὴ οὑχὶ πρόβατα εἶναι δ. Luc. Alex. 15: with Art., τρεῖς μόναι ψῆφοι διήνεγκαν τὸ μὴ θανάτου τιμῆσαι three votes made the difference (i.e. majority) against capital punishment, D. 23.167; also διαφέρει τὸ ἥμισυ τοῦ ἔργου makes a difference equal to half the effort expended, X. Oec. 20.17.
2. impers., διαφέρει it makes a difference, πλεῖστον δ. Hp. Aph. 5.22; βραχὺ δ. τοῖς θανοῦσιν εἰ.. E. Tr. 1248, etc.; οὐδὲν δ. it makes no odds, Pl. Phd. 89c, cf. Men. Epit. 193; σμικρὸν οἴει διαφέρειν; Pl. R. 467c: c. dat. pers., δ. μοι it makes a difference to me, Antipho 5.13, Pl. Prt. 316b, etc.; ἰδίᾳ τι αὐτῷ δ. he has some private interest at stake, Th. 3.42; εἰ ὑμῖν μή τι δ. if you see no objection, Pl. La. 187d; τί δέ σοι τοῦτο δ. εἴτε.. εἴτε μή; Id. R. 349a, cf. Grg. 497b, etc.: c. inf., οὐδέ τί οἱ διέφερεν ἀποθανεῖν Hdt. 1.85: with personal constr., πράγματά τινι διαφέροντα Plu. Caes. 65; to be of importance, πρός or εἴς τι, Gal. 15.420,428; τῷ ζῴῳ Id. UP 9.5.
3. τὸ δ. the difference, the odds, Pl. Phlb. 45d; = τὸ συμφέρον Antiph. 31; περὶ μεγίστων δὴ τῶν -όντων βουλεύεσθαι Th. 6.92, cf. Lys. 31.5, Isa 4.12; τὰ ἀναγκαιότερα τῷ ταμιείῳ δ. vital interests, PThead. 15.17 (iii A.D.); τὸ δ. μέρος τῶν ἀποφάσεων the essential part, POxy. 1204.11 (iii A.D.); τὰ δ. vital matters, Romans 2:18; ἐπιστάμενος τὰ δ. παραβαίνειν τολμᾷ And. 3.19 (but τὰ δ. also simply, points of difference, in character and the like, Th. 1.70, etc.).
4. to be different from a person: generally, in point of excess, surpass, excel him (cf. supr. 11.8), τινός v.l. for -όντως in Th. 3.39; τινί in a thing, Id. 2.39, Alex. 36.6; ἔν τινι Isoc. 3.39; εἴς τι Pl. Ap. 35b; κατὰ μέγεθος X. Lac. 1.10; πρός τι Aeschin. 1.181: c. inf., δ. τινὸς μεταβιβάζειν τινά Pl. Grg. 517b: sts. folld. by ἤ, πολὺ διέφερεν ἀλέξασθαι ἤ.. it was far better.. than.., X. An. 3.4.33, cf. Mem. 3.11.14, Vect. 4.25 (where it means to differ in point of diminution); also δ. μέγα τι παρὰ τὰς ἄλλας πόλεις Plb. 10.27.5: abs., excel, ἐπί τινι Isoc. 10.12; τάχει Jul. Or. 2.53c; οἱ τόποι διαφέρουσι Thphr. CP 5.14.9; διαφέρον τι πεπραχέναι a remarkable achievement, Plb. 6.39.2.
5. prevail, ἐπὶ πολὺ διήνεγκε Th. 3.83.
6. quarrel, struggle, Telecl. 20; οἱ διαφέροντες the parties, litigants, PPar. 69 B10 (iii A.D.).
7. come between, intervene, ὁ διαφέρων χρόνος Antipho 5.94.
8. belong to, τινί, as property, Ph. 1.207, PLond. 3.940.23 (iii A.D.); of persons, belong to a household, PStrassb. 26.5 (iv A.D.); οἱ -φέροντες kinsfolk, Annuario 4 /5.476 (Bargylia); appertain to, τῇ ὠνῇ BGU 1062.21 (iii A.D.); τὰ εἰς τοῦτο -φέροντα πράγματα Mitteis Chr. 372v3 (ii A.D.). Med. and Pass., be at variance, quarrel, τινί Heraclit. 72, cf. Amphis 32, etc.; περί τινος Hdt. 1.173, Pl. Euthphr. 7b; δ. ἀλλήλοις differ with, ibid., cf. Antipho 5.42; τινὶ περί τινος Th. 5.31, cf. X. Oec. 17.4; πρὸς ἀλλήλους Lys. 18.17, cf. Hyp. Oxy. 1607 Fr. 1 iii 60, etc.; τὰ πρὸς ἀλλήλους Supp.Epigr. 1.363.5 (Samos, iii B.C.); ἀμφί τινος X. An. 4.5.17; διενεχθέντας γνώμῃ Hdt. 7.220; δ. ὡς.. maintain on the contrary that.., D. 56.46; οὐ διαφέρομαι, = οὔ μοι διαφέρει, Id. 9.8; μηδὲν διὰ τοῦτο διαφέρου let there be no dispute on this ground, Lys. 10.17; οἱ -φερόμενοι the litigants, SIG 685.29 (Crete, ii B.C.). — Not in

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διαφέρω; 2 aorist διηνεγκον (but the subjunctive 3 person singular διενέγκῃ (Mark 11:16), the only aorist form which occurs, can come as well from 1 aorist διήνεγκα; cf Veitch, under the word φέρω, at the end); passive (present διαφέρομαι); imperfect διεφερομην; (from Homer (h. Merc. 255), Pindar down);

1. to bear or carry through any place: σκεῦος διά τοῦ ἱεροῦ, Mark 11:16.
2. to carry different ways, i. e., a. transitive, to carry in different directions, to different places: thus, persons are said διαφέρεσθαι, who are carried hither and thither in a ship, driven to and fro, Acts 27:27 (Strabo 3, 2, 7, p. 144; σκάφος ὑπ’ ἐναντίων πνευμάτων διαφερόμενον, Philo, migr. Abr. § 27; Lucian, Hermot. 28; often in Plutarch) metaphorically, to spread abroad: διεφέρετο ὁ λόγος τοῦ κυρίου δἰ ὅλης τῆς χώρας, Acts 13:49 (ἀγγελιας, Lucian, dial. deor. 24, 1; φήμη διαφέρεται, Plutarch, mor., p. 163 d.).
   b. intransitive (like the Latindiffero) to differ: δοκιμάζειν τά διαφέροντα, to test, prove, the things that differ, i. e. to distinguish between good and evil, lawful and unlawful, Romans 2:18; Philippians 1:10 (διάκρισις καλοῦ τέ καί κακοῦ, Hebrews 5:14); cf. Thol. Commentary on Romans, p. 111 edition 5.; Theophilus of Antioch ad Autol., p. 6, Otto edition δοκιμάζοντες τά διαφέροντα, ἤτοι φῶς, ἤ σκότος, ἤ λευκόν, ἤ μέλαν κτλ.); (others, adopting a secondary sense of each verb in the above passages, translate (cf. A. V.) to approve the things that excel; see Meyer (yet, cf. Weiss edition) on Romans, the passage cited; Ellicott on Philippians, the passage cited). διαφέρω τίνος, to differ from one, i. e. to excel, surpass one: Matthew 6:26; Matthew 10:31; Matthew 12:12; Luke 12:7, 24 (often so in Attic authors); τίνος ἐν τίνι, 1 Corinthians 15:41; (τίνος οὐδέν, Galatians 4:1).
   c. impersonally, διαφέρει, it makes a difference, it matters, is of importance: οὐδέν μοι διαφέρει, it matters nothing to me, Galatians 2:6 (Plato, Prot., p. 316 b. ἡμῖν οὐδέν διαφέρει, p. 358 e.; de rep. 1, p. 340 c.; Demosthenes 124, 3 (in Philippians 3, 50); Polybius 3, 21, 9; Aelian v. h. 1, 25; others; (cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 394; Wetstein (1752) on Galatians, the passage cited)).

Question 148

ἐκπλήσσω /

ἐκπλήσσομαι

Answer 148

Thayer’s Definition
to astonish, amaze: to be astonished, be amazed, to be struck with amazement, to strike with panic, shock, to strike one out of self-possession;
to strike out, expel by a blow, drive out or away
to cast off by a blow, to drive out
commonly

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐκπλήσσω,

I. Att. ἐκπλήρ-ττω, strike out of, drive away from, expel, ἐκ δ’ ἔπληξέ μου τὴν αἰδῶ A. Pr. 134; ὃς (sc. κεραυνὸς) αὐτὸν ἐξέπληξε τῶν.. κομπασμάτων ib. 362, cf. E. Ion 635: abs., drive away, ἡ τέρψις τὸ λυπηρὸν ἐκπλήσσει Th. 2.38; φόβος μνήμην ἐ. ib. 87.

II

1. drive out of one’s senses by a sudden shock, amaze, astound, Od. 18.231 (tm.); κάλλει καὶ ὥρᾳ διενεγκόντες ἐ. τινάς Aeschin. 1.134; ὁ φόβος ἐκπλήσσων.. Antipho 2.1.7; κακοὶ εὐτυχοῦντες ἐκπλήσσουσί με Trag.Adesp. 465; ὅ μ’ ἐκπλήσσει λόγου frightens me in speaking, E. Or. 549: — in this sense most freq. in aor. 2 Pass., ἐξεπλήγην (v. infr.), Att. ἐξεπλάγην [ᾰ] (also aor. I ἐξεπλήχθην Id. Tr. 183: pf. part. ἐκπεπληγμένος A. Pers. 290, S. Tr. 386, etc.); to be panic-struck, amazed, esp. by fear, ἐκ γὰρ πλήγη φρένας Il. 16.403, cf. 13.394; ἡνίοχοι ἔκπληγεν 18.225: c. part., ἐκπεπληγμένον κεῖνον βλέποντες S. OT 922, cf. Ant. 433, etc.; ἐκπλαγῆναί τινι to be astonished at a thing, Hdt. 1.116, etc.; ὑπό τινος Id. 3.64; διά τι Th. 7.21; ἐπί τινι X. Cyr. 1.4.27; πρός τι Plu. Thes. 19, etc.: also c.acc., ἐκπλαγῆναί τινα to be struck with panic fear of.., S. Ph. 226, El. 1045; ἡμᾶς δ’ ἂν..μάλιστα ἐκπεπληγμένοι εἶεν Th. 6.11, cf. 3.82.
2. generally, of any sudden, overpowering passion, to be struck with desire, Ar. Pl. 673; with love, E. Hipp. 38, Med. 8; χαρᾷ, ἡδονῇ, A. Ch. 233, S. Tr. 629; with admiration, Hdt. 3.148, etc.: c.acc.rei, ἐκπλαγέντα τὰ προκείμενα ἀγαθά Id. 9.82.
3. εἰς ὁμολογίαν ἐκπλήττειν frighten one into.., f.l. in Plb. 23.4.11.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐκπλήσσω, ἐκπλήττω: passive (present ἐκπλήσσομαι or ἐκπλήττομαι (so R G Matthew 13:54; Tr WH Acts 13:12)); imperfect ἐξεπλησσομην; 2 aorist ἐξεπλάγην; common in Greek from Homer down; properly, to strike out, expel by a blow, drive out or away; to cast off by a blow, to drive out; commonly, to strike one out of self-possession, to strike with panic, shock, astonish; passive to be struck with astonishment, astonished, amazed; absolutely: Matthew 13:54; Matthew 19:25; Mark 6:2; Mark 10:26; Luke 2:48; used of the glad amazement of the wondering people, Mark 7:37; ἐπί τῇ διδαχή, Matthew 7:28; Matthew 22:33; Mark 1:22; Mark 11:18; Luke 4:32; Acts 13:12; (ἐπί τῇ μεγαλειότητι, Luke 9:43), (ἐπί τῷ κάλλει, Xenophon, Cyril 1, 4, 27; ἐπί τῇ θεά, Aelian v. h. 12, 41; (Winer’s Grammar, § 33, b.); by the Greeks also with simple dative and with accusative of the thing, as Wis. 13:4; 2 Macc. 7:12). (Synonym: see φοβέω, at the end.)

Question 149

ἐμπαίζω

Answer 149

ἐμπαίξω, ἐνέπαιξα, -, -, ἐνεπαίχθην
I mock
to mock, ridicule
Definition: 
to play upon, deride, mock, treat with scorn, ridicule, Mt. 20:19; 27:29; by impl. to delude, deceive, Mt. 2:16

Thayer’s Definition
to play with, trifle with
to mock
to delude, deceive

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐμπαίζω,

I fut. -ξομαι LXX Habakkuk 1:10 : pf. ἐμπέπαιχα ib. Numbers 22:29 : —

1. mock at, mock, τινί Hdt. 4.134; τινά PCair.PreIsa 3.10 (iv A.D.): abs., S. Ant. 799: — Pass., ψυχὴ ὑπό.. σωμάτων καὶ πραγμάτων ἐμπαιζομένη Ph. 1.568, cf. Luc. Trag. 333.
2. euphem. in mal. part., LXX Jd. 19.25.
3. Pass., to be deluded, Matthew 2:16, AP 10.56.2 (Pall.), Vett.Val. 16.14; to be defrauded, of the revenues, Cod.Just. 1.34.2.

II sport in or on, ὡς νεβρὸς χλοεραῖς ἐ. λείμακος ἡδοναῖς E. Ba. 866 (lyr.); τοῖς χοροῖσιν ἐ. to sport in the dance, Ar. Th. 975; τῷ γυμνασίῳ Luc. Lex. 5.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐμπαίζω (see ἐν, III. 3); imperfect ἐνέπαιζον; future ἐμπαιξω (Mark 10:34 for the more common ἐμπαιξοῦμαι and ἐμπαίξομαι); 1 aorist ἐνεπαιξα (for the older ἐνεπαισα); passive, 1 aorist ἐνεπαίχθην (Matthew 2:16, for the older ἐνεπαίσθην); 1 future ἐμπαιχθήσομαι; (cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 240f; Krüger, § 40 under the word παίζω; (Veitch, ibid.); Buttmann, 64f (56f)); to play in, τίνι, Psalm 103:26 (); Euripides, Bacch. 867. to play with, trifle with (Latinilludere) i. e.

Question 150

καταντάω

Answer 150

-, κατήντησα, κατήντηκα, -, -
I come to
to come to, arrive at; attain, reach
Definition: 
to come to, arrive at, Acts 16:1; 20:15; of an epoch, to come upon, 1 Cor. 10:11; met. to reach, attain to, Acts 26:7

Thayer’s Definition
to come to, arrive
to come to a place over against, opposite another
metaph. to attain to a thing

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
καταντ-άω,

I

1. come down to, arrive, εἰς τὰ βασίλεια, ἐπὶ κοίτην, D.S. 4.52, 3.27, cf. PTeb. 59.3 (i B.C.), etc.: metaph., ἐπὶ τὴν φυσικὴν ὁδόν Vett.Val. 259.3, cf. 185.16, 251.30.
2. in a speech or narrative, come to, arrive at a point, εἰς τὴν ἔκπτωσιν Plb. 4.1.8; ἐπί τινας λογισμούς Id. 10.37.3; κ. ἐπὶ τὸν ὅρκον D.S. 1.79, cf. J AJ 3.10.4, etc.; have recourse to, ἐπὶ [ τὴν ἡδονήν ] Epicur. Ephesians 3 p.63U.; ἐπὶ τὰ δάκρυα Phld. Lib. p.62 O.
3. of persons, κ. εἰς ἑαυτούς attack, commence hostilities against each other, Plb. 30.11.3.
4. of events, come upon, πᾶς δ’ ἀγὼν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ κατήντα Alex. 261.13; κ. εἴς τινα affect him, Phld. Ir. p.83 W.; of blood-guiltiness, fall, ἐπὶ κεφαλήν τινος LXX 2 Ki. 3.29. turn out, result, ποῦ καταντήσει πάλιν Plb. 6.4.12; τὸ πρᾶγμα κ. εἰς ὑπόνοιαν D.S. 1.37; εἰς τὸ μηδέν Plb. 4.34.2; so of numbers, to be reduced, εἰς μόνους ἄνδρας δέκα BGU 903.14 (ii A.D.), etc.
5. of an inheritance, κ. εἴς τινα fall to one’s share, 1 Corinthians 10:11, POxy. 75 (ii A.D.), etc.

II trans., make to come back, bring back, τινα Palaeph. 2; εἰς ἑαυτὸν τὴν ἀρχιερωσύνην LXX 2 Maccabees 4:24 (so intr. in pf., return, εἰς τὸν αὐτὸν κατηντηκέναι βίον BGU 1101.5 (i B.C.)).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καταντάω, κατάντω: 1 aorist κατήντησα; perfect κατήντηκα (1 Corinthians 10:11 L T Tr WH); to come to, arrive at;

a. properly: followed by εἰς with the accusative of place, Acts 16:1; Acts 18:19, 24; Acts 21:7; Acts 25:13; Acts 27:12; Acts 28:13 (2 Macc. 4:44); ἀντικρύ τίνος, to a place over against, opposite another, Acts 20:15; εἰς τινα τά τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν, i. e. whose lifetime occurs at the ends of the ages, 1 Corinthians 10:11.
b. metaphorically, εἰς τί, like the Latinad aliquid pervenio, i. e. to attain to a thing: Acts 26:7; Ephesians 4:13; Philippians 3:11; κάταντα τί εἰς τινα, to one, that he may become partaker of it, 1 Corinthians 14:36. (Polybius, Diodorus; ecclesiastical writings.)

Question 151

πώς

Answer 151

somehow, in some way, by any means, in any way, perhaps
Definition:
enclitic particle, in any way, by any means, Acts 27:12; Rom. 1:10

Thayer’s Definition
by any means, at all, perhaps

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πως,

Ion. κως, enclit.

Adv. of Manner, in any way, at all, by any means, οὐ μέν π. ἅλιον πέλει ὅρκιον Il. 4.158, cf. Od. 20.392; ἀλλὰ μὴ γένοιτό π . A. Ag. 1249; cf. οὔπως, μήπως: freq. after other Advbs. of Manner, ὧδέ π . somehow so, X. Cyr. 3.3.7; ἄλλως π . in some other way, Id. An. 3.1.20; τεχνικῶς π . ib. 6.1.5; εὐσχημόνως π . Id. Cyr. 1.3.9; sometimes merely to qualify their force, when it cannot be always rendered by any one English equivalent, ἀεί π . Il. 12.211; μάλα π . 14.104, X. Cyr. 4.5.54; μόγις π . Pl. Prt. 328d, etc.: with Verbs, καὶ ἔτυχέ κως τοῦ μάγου Hdt. 3.78, cf. 150; τὸ γὰρ κάταγμα τυγχάνω ῥίψασά π . S. Tr. 695; ἠθάς εἰμί π. τῶν τῆσδε μύθων Id. El. 372; πράσσοντές π. ταῦτα Th. 2.3; ἀπώκνησάν π . Id. 3.20; freq. after γάρ, ἔνεστι γάρ π . . . τῇ τυραννίδι νόσημα A. Pr. 226, cf. Ch. 958 (lyr.), etc.: most freq. after hypothet. Particles, εἴ πως Od. 14.460; ἐάν π . S. OC 1770 (anap.), Tr. 584; ἤν π . Ar. V. 399: expressing uncertainty, I suppose, Hdt. 1.95, 3.108 .

II πως, πῶς, or πώς, in a certain way, opp. ἁπλῶς, Arist. Pol. 1275a16; οὐδ’ ὁ ἁπλῶς ὀργιζόμενος, ἀλλ’ ὁ πῶς Id. EN 1106a1; ἀλλὰ πῶς πραττόμενα καὶ πῶς νεμόμενα δίκαια ib. 1137a12 .

2. πὼς μὲν . ., πὼς δὲ . . in one way . ., in another . ., Iamb. Comm.Math. 13, Them. in de An. 4.25-28,al.; πῶς μὲν . ., ὅλως δὲ . . Arist. Pol. 1263a26 . ( πῶς is Adv. of stem πο- (I.- E. q[uglide]o- ), whence ποῦ, ποῖ, πῇ, etc.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πώς, an enclitic particle, on which see under εἴπως (i. e. εἰ, III. 14) and μήπως.

STRONGS NT 4458a: ρ [ρ ,Rho: the practice of doubling rho ρ (after a preposition or an augment) is sometimes disregarded by the Mss, and accordingly by the critical editors; so, too, in the middle of a word; see ἀνατιρήπτω, παραρέω, ῤαβδίζω, ῤαντίζω, ῤαπίζω, ῤίπτω, ῤύομαι, etc.; cf. Winers Grammar, § 13, 1 b.; Buttmann, 32 (28f); WHs Appendix, p. 163; Tdf. Proleg., p. 80. Recent editors, L T (cf. the Proleg. to his 7th edition, p. cclxxvi.), Kuenen and Cobet (cf. their Praef., p. xcvi.), WH (but not Treg.), also follow the older manuscripts in omitting the breathings from ῥρ in the middle of a word; cf. Lipsius, Grammar. Untersuch., p. 18f; Greg. Corinth. edition Bast, p. 782f; in opposition see Donaldson, Greek Gram., p. 16; Winer’s Grammar, 48 (47). On the smooth breathing over the initial rho ῥ when rho begins two successive syllables, see Lipsius as above; WH. as above, pp. 163, 170; Kühner, § 67 Anm. 4; Göttling, Accent, p. 205 note; and on the general subject of the breathings cf. the Proleg. to Tdf. edition 8, p. 105f and references there. On the usagee of modern editions of the classics cf. Veitch, see under the words, ῤάπτω, ῤέζω, etc.]

Question 152

ἀσκός, -οῦ, ὁ

Answer 152

a leather bottle, wine-skin
wineskin, leather bag holding wine
Definition:
a leather bag, or bottle, bottle of skin, Mt. 9:17; Mk. 2:22; Lk. 5:37, 38

Thayer’s Definition
a leathern bag or bottle, in which water or wine was kept

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀσκός, ὁ,

1. skin, hide, PFay. 121.9 (i/ii A. D.); but usually, skin made into a bag, esp. wineskin, οἶνον.. ἀσκῷ ἐν αἰγείῳ Il. 3.247, Od. 6.78; ἀσκὸν.. μέλανος οἴνοιο 5.265, 9.196; ἀσκὸς βοός, of the bag in which Aeolus bottled up the winds, Od. 10.19, cf. 45, 57; ἀσκοὺς καμήλων skins of camel’s hide, Hdt. 3.9; ἀ. Μαρσύεω bag made from the skin of Marsyas, Id. 7.26; ἀ. ἀφύσητος Hp. Art. 47; εἴ μοι ἡ δορὰ μὴ εἰς ἀσκὸν τελευτήσει ὥσπερ ἡ Μαρσύου Pl. Euthd. 285c; ἀσκοῖς καὶ θυλάκοις X. An. 6.4.23, cf. Th. 4.26; ἀσκοὶ πεφυσαμένοι, of mankind, Epich. 246; ἄνθρωποι κενεῆς οἰήσιος ἔμπλεοι ἀ. Timo 11; ἀσκός, of the human skin, Ph. 2.462.
2. paunch, belly, Archil. 72; in oracular language, E. Med. 679, Plu. Thes. 3.
3. bellows, Plb. 21.28.15, Ath. 10.456d.
4. bagpipes, Gal. 4.459.
5. prov., wineskin, of a toper, Antiph. 19: prov., ἀεί ποτ’ εὖ μὲν ἀ. εὖ δὲ θύλακος ἅνθρωπός ἐστι Alex. 85; “” ἀσκός, πέλεκυς “” in a child’s game, Thphr. Char. 5.5; ἀσκὸν δείρειν flay alive, hence, abuse, maltreat, Ar. Nu. 442: — Pass., ἀσκὸς δεδάρθαι Sol. 33.7.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀσκός, ἀσκοῦ, ὁ, a leathern bag or bottle, in which water or wine was kept: Matthew 9:17; Mark 2:22; Luke 5:37f. (Often in Greek writings from Homer down; the Sept.) (BB. DD. under the word ; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 92.)

Question 153

ἔθος

Answer 153

a custom

Thayer’s Definition
custom
usage prescribed by law, institute, prescription, rite

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἔθος, εος, τό, (ἔθω)

custom, habit, ἔ. τὸ πρόσθε τοκήων (but prob. f.l. for ἦθος) A. Ag. 728 (lyr.); τὸ σύνηθες ἔ. S. Ph. 894; εἰ τὸ ἔ. συνθήκη Pl. Cra. 435a; πάτρια ἔ. Id. Plt. 295a: prov., “” ἔ., φασί, δευτέρη φύσις “” Jul. MIsa 353a; ἐν ἔθει τῇ πόλει εἶναι to be the habit, Th. 2.64; ἔ. ἐστίν τινι, c. inf., Cratin.Jun. 7.1, Alex. 253; ἔθος ἔχειν, c. inf., Plu. Them. 4; ἔθει by habit, habitually, opp. φύσει, Arist. EN 1179b21; ἐν ἔθει Id. Fr. 122; δι’ ἔθος, opp. ἐκ γενετῆς, Id. EN 1154a33; ἐξ ἔθους ib. 1103a17; κατὰ τὰ Ῥωμαίων ἔ. PSI 3.182 (iii A. D.), etc. (σϝέθ -, cf. Lat. suesco; v. βεσόν.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἔθος, ἐθεος (ἦθος), τό, from Aeschylus (Agam. 728 (?); better from Sophocles) down, custom: Luke 22:39; ἔθος ἐστι τίνι followed by an infinitive, John 19:40; Acts 25:16; Hebrews 10:25; contextually, usage prescribed by law, institute, prescription, rite: Luke 1:9; Luke 2:42; Acts 16:21; Acts 21:21; Acts 26:3; Acts 28:17; περιτέμνεσθαι τῷ ἔθει Μωϋσέως, Acts 15:1; ἀλλάξει τά ἔθη ἅ παρέδωκε Μωϋσῆς, Acts 6:14.

Question 154

κομίζω

Answer 154

Thayer’s Definition
to receive, to care for, take care of, provide for
to take up or carry away in order to care for and preserve
to carry away, bear off
to carry, bear, bring to, to carry away for one’s self, to carry off what is one’s own, to bring back
to receive, obtain: the promised blessing
to receive what was previously one’s own, to get back, receive back, recover

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κομίζω,

fut. κομιῶ Od. 15.546, Hdt. 2.121. γ, Ar. Ec. 800, etc.; κομίσω only late, as AP 6.41 (Agath.): aor. ἐκόμισα, ἐκόμισσα Il. 13.579, κόμισσα Od. 18.322, κόμισα Il. 13.196; Dor. ἐκόμιξα Pi. P. 4.159: pf. κεκόμικα Hdt. 9.115, etc.: — Med., fut. κομιοῦμαι Ar. V. 690, Th. 1.113, etc.; Ion. - ιεῦμαι, v. infr. 11.4; late κομίσομαι Phalar. 135: aor. ἐκομισάμην Hdt. 6.118, etc.; ἐκομισς - or κομισς -, Od. 14.316, Il. 8.284: — Pass., fut. - ισθήσομαι Th. 1.52, D. 18.301: aor. ἐκομίσθην Hdt. 1.31, Th. 5.3, etc.: pf. κεκόμισμαι D. 18.241: but more freq. in med. sense, v. infr. 11.2: (κομέω): —

I

1. take care of, provide for, τόν γε γηράσκοντα κομίζω Il. 24.541; τόνδε τ’ ἐγὼ κομιῶ Od. 15.546; ἐμὲ κεῖνος ἐνδυκέως ἐκόμιζε 17.113, etc.; κόμισσε δὲ Πηνελόπεια, παῖδα δὲ ὢς ἀτίταλλε 18.322, cf. 20.68: rare in Trag., A. Ch. 262, 344; receive, treat, φιλίως, οὐ πολεμίως κ. Th. 3.65 codd.: — more freq. in Med., καί σε.. κομίσσατο ᾧ ἐνὶ οἴκῳ Il. 8.284, cf. Od. 14.316; Σίντιες.. ἄφαρ κομίσαντο πεσόντα Il. 1.594; κομίζεσθαί τινα ἐς τὴν οἰκίαν And. 1.127, cf. Isaiah 1:15 : — Pass., οὔ τι κομιζόμενός γε θάμιζεν not often was he attended to, Od. 8.451.
2. of things, attend, give heed to, τὰ ο’ αὐτῆς ἔργα κόμιζε Il. 6.490, Od. 21.350; κτήματα μὲν.. κομιζέμεν ἐν μεγάροισι 23.355; δῶμα κ., of the mistress of the house, 16.74, etc.; τὸν χρυσόν Hdt. 1.153; ἔξω κ. πηλοῦ πόδα keep it out of the mud, A. Ch. 697: — Med., ἔργα κ. Δημήτερος Hes. Op. 393; Δημήτερος ἱερὸν ἀκτὴν μέτρῳ εὖ κομίσασθαι ἐν ἄγγεσιν store up.., ib. 600.

II

1. carry away so as to preserve, Ἀμφίμαχον.. κόμισαν μετὰ λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν they carried away his body, Il. 13.196 (so in Med., κόμισαί με carry me safe away, 5.359, cf. E. IT 774); of things, τὴν δὲ κόμισσε κῆρυξ the herald took up the mantle, that it might not be lost, Il. 2.183; [ τρυφάλειαν] κόμισαν.. ἑταῖροι 3.378, cf. 13.579; later, simply, save, rescue, ἄνδρ’ ἐκ θανάτου Pi. P. 3.56; ἄρουραν πατρίαν σφίσιν κόμισον Id. O. 2.14; of the dead, νεκρὸν κ. carry out to burial, E. Andr. 1264, cf. S. Aj. 1397: — in Med., Isaiah 8:21; also, simply, carry the body home, opp. θάπτω, A. Ch. 683, cf. Hdt. 4.71.
2. carry off as a prize or booty, χρυσὸν δ’ Ἀχιλεὺς ἐκόμισσε Il. 2.875; κόμισσα δὲ μώνυχας ἵππους 11.738; τέσσαρας ἐξ ἀέθλων νίκας ἐκόμιξαν four victories they won, Pi. N. 2.19; ἔπαινος, ὃν κομίζετον τοῦδ’ ἀνδρός S. OC 1411: — in Med., Orac. ap. Hdt. 1.67: — later freq., get for oneself, acquire, gain, δόξαν ἐσθλήν v.l. in E. Hipp. 432; τριώβολον Ar. V. 690; τὴν ἀξίαν Pl. R. 615c; τὰ ἆθλα αὐτῆς ib. 621d; κ. τί τινος S. OT 580; τι παρά τινος Th. 1.43; τι ἀπό τινος X. Cyr. 1.5.10; gather in, reap, καρπόν Hdt. 2.14: pf. Pass. in med. sense, ὑμεῖς τοὺς καρποὺς κεκόμισθε you have reaped the fruits, D. 18.231; κεκόμισται χάριν Id. 21.171; ὡμολόγει κεκομίσθαι τὴν προῖκα Id. 27.14, cf. Isaiah 5:22; simply, receive, ἐνηρόσιον SIG 1044.31 (Halic., iv/iii B.C.); ἐπιστολήν PCair.Zen. 186 (iii B.C.); μισθόν IG 42(1).99.24 (Epid., ii B.C.); ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων χρείας Phld. D. 3 Fr. 84.
3. receive a missile in one’s body, ἀλλά τις Ἀργείων κόμισε χροΐ (sc. τὸν ἄκοντα) Il. 14.456, cf. 463: — Med., ὡς δή μιν σῷ ἐν χροΐ πᾶν κομίσαιο (sc. τὸ ἔγχος) 22.286.
4. carry, convey, κόμισαν δέπας 23.699, cf. Od. 13.68, Hdt. 5.83, etc.; κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτόν betake thyself, S. Ant. 444: — Pass., to be conveyed, journey, travel, by land or sea, Hdt. 5.43, etc.; εἴσω κομίζου get thee in, A. Ag. 1035, cf. Pr. 394; κ. παρά τινα betake oneself to him, Hdt. 1.73: in this sense fut. and aor. Med. sts. occur, κομιεύμεθα ἐς Σῖριν Id. 8.62; οἳ ἂν κομίσωνται.. ἐς Βαβυλῶνα Id. 1.185; ἔξω κομίσασθ’ οἴκων E. Tr. 167 (lyr.).
5. bring to a place, bring in, introduce, κόμιζέ νύν μοι παῖδα S. Aj. 530; import, Pl. R. 370e, etc.; ξενικοῦ κομισθέντος νομίσματος Id. Lg. 742c; κ. τὴν φιλοσοφίαν εἰς τοὺς Ἕλληνας Isoc. 11.28; οἱ κομίσαντες τὴν δόξαν ταύτην Arist. EN 1096a17, cf. Metaph. 990b2: — in Med., [ τὸν ἀνδριάντα] ἐπὶ Δήλιον Hdt. 6.118; ποίμνας ἐς δόμους S. Aj. 63, cf. Ar. V. 833.
6. conduct, escort, τί μέλλεις κομίζειν δόμων τόνδ’ ἔσω; S. OT 678 (lyr.), cf. Ph. 841 (hex.), Th. 7.29, Pl. Phd. 113d, etc.; κ. ἐξ ὀμμάτων γυναῖκα τήνδε take her from my sight, E. Alc. 1064; κ. ναῦς Th. 2.85; ἄρχοντα Id. 8.61.
7. bring back from exile, Pi. P. 4.106 (dub.); τεὰν ψυχὰν κ. (from the world below), Id. N. 8.44; πάλιν κ. Pl. Phd. 107e, etc.
8. get back, recover, Pi. O. 13.59; τέκνων.. κομίσαι δέμας E. Supp. 273 (hex.), cf. 495: — Med., get back for oneself, τὸν παῖδα Id. Ba. 1225, cf. IT 1362; τὴν βασιλείαν Ar. Av. 549; τοὺς ἄνδρας Th. 1.113, cf. 4.117; τοὺς νεκροὺς ὑποσπόνδους κ. Id. 6.103; τὰ πρέποντα Id. 4.98; ἃ νῦν ἀπολαβεῖν οὐ δυνάμεθα διὰ πολέμου, ταῦτα διὰ πρεσβείας ῥᾳδίως κομιούμεθα Isoc. 8.22; esp. of money, recover debts, etc., Lys. 32.14, And. 1.38, D. 4.7, etc.; διπλάσια Lys. 19.57; τόκους πολλαπλασίους Pl. R. 556a, etc.; κ. τιμωρίαν παρά τινος Lys. 12.70; κ. τὴν θυγατέρα take back one’s daughter (on the death of her husband), Isaiah 8:8.
9. metaph., rescue from oblivion, ἀοιδοὶ καὶ λόγοι τὰ καλὰ ἔργ’ ἐκόμισαν Pi. N. 6.30.

10.

I bring, give, θράσος.. ἀνδράσι θνῄσκουσι κ. A. Ag. 804 (anap.): — Act. and Med. combined, χθὼν πάντα κομίζει καὶ πάλιν κομίζεται gives all things and gets them back again, Men. Mon. 539, cf. 89, 668.

II

1. cite as an authority, Θεμιστοκλέα Phld. Rh. 2.205 S.
2. Medic., extract, remove, Gal. 2.632.

III Pass., come or go back, return, Hdt. 4.76,al.; ἐκομίσθησαν ἐπ’ οἴκου Th. 2.33, cf. 73; κομισθεὶς οἴκαδε Pl. R. 614b.

κολυμβ-άω

(Dor. κολυμβ-φάω acc. to EM 526.2),

1. dive, plunge headlong, εἰς τὸν Τάρταρον Pherecr. 108.21; εἰς τὰ φρέατα Pl. Prt. 350a, cf. La. 193c, Str. 17.1.44, etc.; εἰς κολυμβήθραν μύρου Alex. 300.
2. swim, τοὺς δυναμένους κολυμβᾶν Acts 27:43, cf. Hippiatr. 26.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κομίζω: 1 aorist participle feminine κομίσασα; middle, present participle κομιζόμενος; 1 future κομίσομαι (Ephesians 6:8 L T Tr WH; Colossians 3:25 L text WH) and Attic κομιοῦμαι (Colossians 3:25 R G L marginal reading T Tr; (Ephesians 6:8 R G); 1 Peter 5:4; cf. (WHs Appendix, p. 163f); Buttmann, 37 (33); (Winers Grammar, § 13, 1 c.; Veitch, under the word)), participle κομιουμενος (2 Peter 2:13 (here WH Tr marginal reading ἀδικούμενοι; see ἀδικέω, 2 b.)); 1 aorist ἐκομισάμην,(lButtmann, § 135, 1); rare in the Sept., but in Greek writings from Homer down, frequent in various senses;

1. to care for, take care of, provide for.
2. to take up or carry away in order to care for and preserve.
3. universally, to carry away, bear off.
4. to carry, bear, bring to: once so in the N. T., viz. ἀλάβαστρον, Luke 7:37. Middle (as often in secular authors) to carry away for oneself; to carry off what is one’s own, to bring back; i. e.
   a. to receive, obtain: τήν ἐπαγγελίαν, the promised blessing, Hebrews 10:36; Hebrews 11:39 (τάς ἐπαγγελίας L; so T Tr WH in Hebrews 11:13); σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν, 1 Peter 1:9; τῆς δόξης στέφανον, 1 Peter 5:4; μισθόν ἀδικίας, 2 Peter 2:13 (see above) (τόν ἄξιον τῆς δυσσεβείας μισθόν, 2 Macc. 8:33; δόξαν ἐσθλην (others, καρπίζεται), Euripides, Hipp. 432; τήν ἀξίαν παρά θεῶν, Plato, legg. 4, p. 718 a., and other examples elsewhere).
   b. to receive what was previously one’s own, to get back, receive back, recover: τό ἐμόν σύν τόκῳ, Matthew 25:27; his son (of Abraham after he had consented to sacrifice Isaac), Hebrews 11:19 (2 Macc. 7:29; τόν ἀδελφόν ἀνυβριστον, Philo de Josepho § 35; οἱ δέ παῥ ἐλπίδας ἑαυτούς κεκομίσμενοιt, having received each other back, been restored to each other, contrary to their expectations, of Abraham and Isaac after the sacrifice of the latter had been prevented by God, Josephus, Antiquities 1, 13, 4; τήν ἀδελφήν, Euripides, Iph. T. 1362; used of the recovery of hostages, captives, etc., Thucydides 1, 113; Polybius 1, 83, 8; 3, 51, 12; 3,40, 10; the city and temple, 2 Macc. 10:1; a citadel, a city, often in Polybius; τήν βασιλείαν, Aristophanes an. 549; τήν πατρῴαν ἀρχήν, Josephus, Antiquities 13, 4, 1). Since in the rewards and punishments of deeds, the deeds themselves are as it were requited and so given back to their authors, the meaning is obvious when one is said κομίζεσθαι that which he has done, i. e. either the reward or the punishment of the deed (Winer’s Grammar, 620f (576)): 2 Corinthians 5:10; Colossians 3:25; with παρά κυρίου added, Ephesians 6:8; ((ἁμαριταν, Leviticus 20:17); ἕκαστος, καθώς ἐποίησε, κομειται, the Epistle of Barnabas 4, 12 [ET]). (Compare: ἐκκομίζω, συγκομίζω.)

Question 155

παραιτέομαι

Answer 155

to request, beg; to make excuses; to refuse, reject

to entreat; to beg off, excuse one’s self, Lk. 14:18, 19; to deprecate, entreat against, Acts 25:11; Heb. 12:19; to decline receiving, refuse, reject, 1 Tim. 4:7; 5:11; Tit. 3:10; Heb. 12:25; to decline, avoid, shun, 2 Tim. 2:23

Thayer’s Definition
to ask along side, beg to have near one
to obtain by entreaty
to beg from, to ask for, supplicate
to avert by entreaty or seek to avert, to deprecate
to entreat that … not
to refuse, decline
to shun, avoid
to avert displeasure by entreaty
to beg pardon, crave indulgence, to excuse
of one excusing himself for not accepting a wedding invitation to a feast

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παραιτ-έομαι,

beg of or from another, ask as a favour of him, τινά τι Pl. Ap. 27b, etc.; τι Hdt. 1.24, 90: with inf. added, ἓν δ’ αὐτοὺς παραιτησώμεθα, ἐπίδηλον ἡμῖν.. ποιεῖν, ἢν τοῖς ἔπεσι χαίρωσι Ar. Eq. 37: with inf. for acc., θεοὺς παραιτοῦ τῶν σ’ ἔρως ἔχει τυχεῖν A. Supp. 521; Προμηθέα -εῖται Ἐπιμηθεὺς αὐτὸς νεῖμαι asks P. for permission to.., Pl. Prt. 320d, cf. Hdt. 4.146: c. acc. cogn., παραίτησιν π. Pl. Criti. 107a.

2. παραιτησάμενος βασιλέα having obtained the king’s leave, Hdt. 6.24: generally, intercede with, appeal to a person, Id. 3.132, 5.33; κτεῖν’, οὐ παραιτοῦμαί σε E. Heracl. 1026, cf. Ar. V. 1257; π. σφέας, ὡς ἄξουσι.. entreating them and saying that.., Hdt. 4.158: c. dupl. acc., beg one’s pardon for.., σὲ παραιτοῦμαι τάδε E. IA 685: abs., εἴ τις ὑμῶν ἀχθεσθήσεται, παραιτοῦμαι And. 3.21, cf. Plb. 39.1.6.
3. c. acc. et inf., entreat one to.., Hdt. 1.90, 6.86. γ, X. Mem. 2.2.14, etc.; παραιτήσομαι δ’ ὑμᾶς μηδὲν ἀχθεσθῆναί μοι D. 21.58; π. σε συγγνώμην ἔχειν Men. 867: c. gen. pers. et inf., beg of.., παραιτήσῃ πατρὸς φυγὰς ἀφεῖναι E. Med. 1154: c. inf. only, π. μηδὲν τούτων δρᾶν Th. 5.63.

II c. acc. rei, avert by entreaty, deprecate, τὴν ὀργήν Aeschin. 3.198; τὰς ζημίας ὑπέρ τινος Id. 2.19, cf. D. 21.5; αἰκίαν Plb. 1.80.8; τὸν φθόνον Plu. Pomp. 56; τὸ ἀποθανεῖν Acts 25:11 : abs., τοῖς.. παραιτουμένοις [πρᾷοί εἰσιν ] Arist. Rh. 1380a28, cf. PCair.Zen. 482.14 (iii B. C.).

2. decline, deprecate, χάριν Pi. N. 10.30; τὴν διαίρεσιν τῶν ὀνομάτων Pl. Prt. 358a; τοὺς πότους Plu. Them. 3; τοὺς.. γραώδεις μύθους 1 Timothy 4:7; π. [τὰ ὦτα ] refuse to hear, Philostr. Her. 11; refuse, βρώσεις Id. VA 1.8, cf. Porph. Abst. 4.7: c. inf., παλιλλογεῖν παρῄτηται Sch. Il. 1.365; παραιτοῦ φαγεῖν κάπρου κεφαλήν Herm. in RPhil. 32.252; also τοὺς πολλοὺς χαρακτῆρας παρῃτημέναι εἰσὶν αἱ ἀντωνυμίαι do not admit.., A.D. Synt. 104.16; reject a theory, interpretation, or M S. reading, Theo Sm.p.200 H., Iamb. VP 2.7, Sch. A.R. 2.127, Sch. Ar. Pax 854; except, Hdn.Gr. 2.929; reject the use of, avoid, τὴν λογικήν S.E. M. 7.15, cf. Ptol. Tetr. 107, etc. demand exemption from, τὴν εἰς τὸ μέλλον γεωργίαν PLond. 3.1231.3 (ii A. D.); ἀρχήν POxy. 1252v28 (iii A. D.).
3. c. acc. pers., ask him to excuse one, decline his invitation, Plb. 5.27.3; παραιτησάμενος Ἔφορον, Lat. pace Ephori, Id. 5.33.2: abs., Luke 14:18 : — Pass., ἔχε με παρῃτημένον ibid.
4. π. γυναῖκα divorce her, Plu. 2.206a; π. οἰκέτην dismiss him, D.L. 6.82; π. τινὰ τῆς οἰκίας Luc. Obadiah 1:19 : — Pass., τὴν παραίτησιν ᾗ παρὰ τοῦ Καρακάλλου παρῄτητο D.C. 78.22.
5. of medicines, relieve, ναυσίαν Dsc. 3.70; ὀδόντων ἀλγήματα ib.48.

III c. acc. pers., intercede for, beg off, esp. from punishment, Hdt. 3.119, Plb. 4.51.1; π. τινὰ τιμωρίας Plu. Sull. 31; Θεσσαλοὺς τοῦ Μηδισμοῦ π. excuse them from the charge of Medism, Id. 2.868d; π. περί τινων X. An. 6.6.29.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παραιτέομαι, παραιτοῦμαι, imperative present παραιτοῦ; (imperfect 3 person plural παρῃτοῦντο, Mark 15:6 T WH Tr marginal reading, where others ὅνπερ ᾐτοῦντο (which see)); 1 aorist παρητησαμην; perfect passive participle παρητημενος with a passive significance; from Aeschylus and Pindar down;

1. properly, to ask alongside (παρά (IV. 1)), beg to have near one; to obtain by entreaty; to beg from, to ask for, supplicate: (Mark 15:6 (see above)).
2. to avert (παρά aside (see παρά, IV. 1)) by entreaty or seek to avert, to deprecate;
   a. properly, followed by μή and an accusative with an infinitive (to intreat that … not), Hebrews 12:19 (Thucydides 5, 63); cf. Winers Grammar, 604 (561); (Buttmann, § 148,13).
   b. equivalent to to refuse, decline: τό ἀποθανεῖν, Acts 25:11 (θανεῖν οὐ παραιτοῦμαι, Josephus, de vita sua29).
   c. equivalent to to shun, avoid: τί, 1 Timothy 4:7; 2 Timothy 2:23; τινα, 1 Timothy 5:11; Titus 3:10; equivalent to to refuse, reject, Hebrews 12:25.
   d. to avert displeasure by entreaty, i. e. to beg pardon, crave indulgence, to excuse: ἔχε με παρῃτημένον (see ἔχω, I. 1 f.), Luke 14:18f (of one excusing himself for not accepting an invitation to a feast, Josephus, Antiquities 7, 8, 9).
   STRONGS NT 3868a: παρακαθέζομαι παρακαθέζομαι: to sit down beside (παρά, IV. 1), seat oneself (Xenophon, Plato, others); 1 aorist passive participle παρακαθεσθεις (Josephus, Antiquities 6, 11, 9); πρός τί, Luke 10:39 T Tr WIt (cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 269).

Question 156

πιάζω

Answer 156

to seize, to grasp an object, usually with the hand; by extension: to arrest, capture, place in confinement

to press;, in NT to take or lay hold of, Acts 3:7; to take, catch fish, etc., Jn. 21:3, 10; Rev. 19:20; to take, seize, apprehend, arrest, Jn. 7:30, 32, 44

Thayer's Definition
to lay hold of
to take, capture
of fishes
to apprehend
of a man, in order to imprison him

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πιάζω,

Dor. and later Att. for πιέζω (q. v.).

πῐέζω,

impf. ἐπίεζον, Ep. πίεζον Od. 12.174, etc.: fut. πιέσω Diph. 18.3; Ep. πιέσσω Nonn. D. 4.146: aor. ἐπίεσα Hp. Fract. 6, Hdt. 9.63, Th. 2.52, etc. (but subj. πιέξῃς Hp. Fract. 5, inf. πιέξαι IG 42(1).123.116 (Epid., iv B.C. ), part. πιέξας (v.l. πιάξας ) Nic. Al. 224 ): pf. πεπίεκα Demetr.Lac. Herc. 1012.44: — Pass., fut. πιεσθήσομαι Gal. 11.317 ( δια -), Heliod ap. Orib. 10.18.15: aor. ἐπιέσθην Od. 8.336, Sol. 13.37, Hdt. 4.11, etc.; ἐπιέχθην Hp. Fract. 5, etc.: pf. πεπίεσμαι Arist. Mu. 392b33, Procl. Hyp. 5.49, cj. in Alciphr. 3.55 . etc.; πεπίεγμαι Hp. Fract. 5 . — From πῐεζέω we have πιεζέουσι v.l. in Id. Fract. 31: impf. πιέζευν v.l. in Od. 12.174, 196; part. πιεζεῦντα Hp. Off. 25, Fract. 9, πιεζεῦσαν Herod. 8.47: — Pass., part. πιεζεύμενος Hdt. 3.146, 6.108, 8.142 (always with v.l. - όμενος ), Hp. Nat.Puer. 21, πιεζούμενος Plb. 3.74.2; imper. πιεζείσθω IG 4.364.7 (Corinth, iv A.D. ): impf. ἐπιεζοῦντο Plb. 11.33.3; so in later Gr., as Plu. Thes. 6, Alc. 2, etc.; Dor., Aeol., and later Gr. πῐάζω Alcm. 44, Alc. 148: aor. 1 ἐπίᾰσα LXX Song of Solomon 2:15, Ev.John 8:20; ἐπίαξα Theoc. 4.35, ( ἀμφ -) Ep.. 6: Pass., fut. πιασθήσομαι LXX Si. 23.21: aor. ἐπιάσθην Revelation 19:20 : pf. πεπίασμαι POxy. 812 (i B. C.), Dsc. 1.15, Hippiatr. 34: — press tight, squeeze, χειρὶ ἑλὼν ἐπίεζε βραχίονα Il. 16.510, cf. Hes. Op. 497; ἀστεμφέως ἐχέμεν μᾶλλόν τε π . Od. 4.419; μ’ ἐν δεσμοῖσι δέον μᾶλλόν τε πίεζον 12.196, cf. 164; π. τὰ χείλεα compress them, Hp. VM 22; ῥύγχος εἰς ὄξος π . Axionic. 8.5; π. τοὺς ὑπευθύνους squeezing them (like figs), to try if they are ripe, Ar. Eq. 259; σφόδρα π. αὐτοῦ τὸν πόδα Pl. Phd. 117e; π. [τὴν δεξιὰν] ἐμπαθῶς Plb. 31.24.9: abs., X. Mem. 3.10.13, Arist. Rh. 1361b17: — Pass., to be pressed tight, ἐν δεσμοῖς Od. 8.336, cf. Hp. Fract. 25, al.; of wrestlers, Plu. Alc. 2; πιέζεται ὅσα πόρους ἔχει κενούς are compressible, Arist. Mete. 386b1 .

II press or weigh down, of a heavy weight, Σικελία αὐτοῦ π. στέρνα Pi. P. 1.19, cf. Ar. Pax 1032: — and in Pass., ὁ δ’ ὦμος . . πιέζεται Id. Ra. 30, cf. X. Cyr. 7.5.11: metaph., oppress, distress, π. τινὰ ἡ δαπάνη Hdt. 5.35; λιμός A. Ch. 250; καὶ πρὸς π. χρημάτων ἀχηνία (Abresch for προσπιέζει ) ib. 301; συμφορὰ δ’ἑτέρους ἑτέρα π . E. Alc. 894 (lyr.); αὐχμὸς π. τὰς ἀμπέλους Ar. Nu. 1120; π. ἡ ἀνάγκη ib. 437, cf. Th. 2.52: — freq. in Pass., ὑπὸ νούσοισι Sol. 13.37; ὑπὸ λιμοῦ Th. 1.126; πολέμῳ Hdt. 4.11, 6.34; τῇ νούσῳ Pherecyd. ap. D.L. 1.122, cf. Th. 7.47; ταῖς εἰσφοραῖς Lys. 28.3; ταῖς συμφοραῖς X. Cyr. 7.2.20; σπάνει σίτου Id. HG 5.4.56, etc.: abs., Hdt. 7.121, etc.; of a river, to be exhausted from the heat of the sun, Id. 2.25 .

2. press hard, of a victorious army, τοὺς ἐναντίους Id. 9.63: — Pass., τὴν πιεζομένην μάλιστα τῶν μοιρέων ib. 60; εἴ πῃ πιέζοιντο Th. 1.49, cf. X. HG 2.4.34; ὑπό τινων ib. 7.1.43 .
3. bear hardly upon, τινα Pl. Cra. 409a; τῷ λόγῳ Plu. Alc. 6; ὑπὸ τῶν ἐλέγχων πιέζεσθαι Phld. D. 3.8; of a point in the argument, hold fast to, Pl. Lg. 965d; press it, Plb. 3.21.3, Demetr.Lac. l.c., etc.; lay stress on, Plu. 2.31e: c. dat., insist upon, τοῖσι περιπάτοισι Hp. Insomn. 88 . determine precisely, ἀποστήματα Procl. Hyp. 5.19, cf. 49 ( Pass. ); π. δεῖ πῶς ἓν ἐκεῖνο καὶ ἕτερον Porph. Sent. 36 .
4. repress, stifle, ἐν θυμῷ χόλον Pi. O. 6.37; τὸν τῦφον Plu. Alc. 4 .
5. outweigh, τἀγαθῷ τὸ δυστυχές E. Hipp. 637, cf. Supp. 249 (s. v.l.).

III later, lay hold of, ταῦρον . . πιάξας τᾶς ὁπλᾶς by the hoof, Theoc. 4.35; αὐτὸν τῆς χειρός Acts 3:7, cf. Ev.John 7:30, etc.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πιάζω (Doric for πιέζω, cf. Buttmann, 66 (58)): 1 aorist ἐπίασα; 1 aorist passive ἐπιασθην;

1. to lay hold of: τινα τῆς χειρός, Acts 3:7 (Theocritus, 4, 35).
2. to take, capture: fishes, John 21:3, 10; θηρίον, passive, Revelation 19:20 (Song of Solomon 2:15). to take i. e. apprehend: a man, in order to imprison him, John 7:30, 32, 44; John 8:20; John 10:39; John 11:57; Acts 12:4; 2 Corinthians 11:32. (Compare: ὑποπιάζω.)

Question 157

πρόθεσις

Answer 157

a setting forth, a purpose

Thayer’s Definition
a setting forth of a thing, placing of it in view, the shewbread
twelve loaves of wheaten bread, corresponding to the number of the tribes of Israel, which loaves were offered to God every Sabbath, and separated into two rows, lay for seven days upon a table placed in the sanctuary or front portion of the tabernacle, and afterwards of the temple
a purpose

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πρόθεσις, εως, ἡ,

( προτίθημι )

placing in public; of a corpse, laying it out (cf. προτίθημι 11 ), Pl. Lg. 947b, 959a, 959e, D. 43.64 .

2. public notice, αἱ π. τῶν ἀναγεγραμμένων Arist. Pol. 1322a9 .
3. statement of a case, Id. Rh. 1414b8; ὑπέρ τινος τὴν πρόθεσιν ποιήσασθαι Id. Cat. 11a21; theme, thesis, Phld. Rh. 1.36, al. S.: generally, proposition, statement, D.H. Amm. 2.2.
4. πρόθεσιν ποιεῖσθαι ἐπὶ ταῖς . . προσόδοις to make payment in advance, IPE 12.32 A 41 (Olbia, iii B.C. ).
5. offering, PCair.Zen. 328.75 (iii B.C.), Gauthier et Sottas Decret trilingue (iii B.C.), Call. Fr. 1.13 P., OGI 90.48 (ii B.C.), UPZ 149.21, 31 (ii B.C.): esp. in VT and NT, οἱ ἄρτοι τῆς π. the loaves laid before, shew -bread, LXX 1 Samuel 21:6(7), Ev.Matthew 12:4; ἡ π. τῶν ἄρτων Ep.Hebrews 9:2, cf. Ph. 2.294; ἡ τράπεζα τῆς π. LXX 2 Chronicles 29:18 .

II purpose, end proposed, ἐπαινῶ σὴν π. SIG 22.14 ( Magn. Mae., Epist. Darei), cf. Philipp. ap. D. 18.167, Arist. APr. 47a5, Cleanth.Stoic. 1.131, Plb. 5.35.2, Arr. Epict. 1.21.2, etc.; π. βίων Adam. Phgn. 1.2; defined as σημείωσις ἐπιτελέσεως, Stoic. 3.41; κατὰ πρόθεσιν purposely, Plb. 12.10.6; τὰ κατὰ π. φύντα Ph. 2.144; τὰ κατὰ τὴν π. Plb. 1.54.1, cf. PTeb. 27.81 (ii B.C.) .

2. goodwill, π. ἔχειν πρὸς ἔθνος, ὑπὲρ τῶν πολιτῶν, Plb. 4.73.2, OGI 765.44 (prob. l., Priene).

III supposition, calculation, Plb. 6.32.1, 12.21.6 . Gramm., preposition, Chrysipp.Stoic. 2.45, D.T. 634.5, D.H. Comp. 2, A.D. Synt. 305.24, Pron. 64.5 .

2. prefixing, placing first, Id. Synt. 311.1, Pron. 58.16 .
3. π. καὶ πτῶσις perh. stem (or root ) and ending, Phld. Po. 2.18 . = cross προθεσμία, interpol. in Suid.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πρόθεσις, προθέσεως, ἡ (προτίθημι);

1. the setting forth of a thing, placing of it in view (Plato, Demosthenes, Plutarch); οἱ ἄρτοι τῆς προθέσεως (Vulg. panes propositionis), the showbread, the Sept. for הַפָנִים לֶחֶם (Exodus 35:13; Exodus 39:18 (); 1 Kings 7:48 ()), and הַמַּעֲרֶכֶת לֶחֶם (1 Chronicles 9:32; 1 Chronicles 23:29); twelve loaves of wheaten bread, corresponding to the number of the tribes of Israel, which loaves were offered to God every Sabbath, and, separated into two rows, lay for seven days upon a table placed in the sanctuary or anterior portion of the tabernacle, and afterward of the temple (cf. Winer, RWB, under the word Schaubrode; Roskoff in Schenkel see p. 213f; (Edersheim, The Temple, chapter ix., p. 152ff; BB. DD.)): Matthew 12:4; Mark 2:26; Luke 6:4 (οἱ ἄρτοι τοῦ προσώπου, namely, Θεοῦ, Nehemiah 10:33; ἄρτοι ἐνωπιοι, Exodus 25:29); ἡ πρόθεσις τῶν ἄρτων (the rite of) the setting forth of the loaves, Hebrews 9:2.
2. a purpose (2 Macc. 3:8; (Aristotle), Polybius, Diodorus, Plutarch): Acts 27:13; Romans 8:28; Romans 9:11; Ephesians 1:11; Ephesians 3:11; 2 Timothy 1:9; 2 Timothy 3:10; τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας, with purpose of heart, Acts 11:23.

Question 158

τρίς

Answer 158

thrice

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τρίς,

Adv. of τρεῖς (q. v.),

thrice, three times, τ. τόσσα thrice as much or many, Il. 1.213, cf. 5.136; δὶς καὶ τ. Thgn. 633, S. Aj. 433, etc.; δὶς ἢ τ. Ar. Pax 1181 (troch.); τ. τετράκι τε Pi. N. 7.104; ἐς τ. thrice, Id. O. 2.68, Hdt. 1.86, 5.105, GDI iv p.884 (Erythrae, iv B. C.), Theoc. 1.25, 2.43; ἐπὶ τρίς thrice, Acts 10:16, Acts 11:10, Dsc. Eup. 2.19; freq. used merely to intensify the notion, τ. λελουμένη Eub. 102, etc.; esp. in compds., such as τρισάθλιος, τρίσμακαρ, etc., cf. τρι-, τριάζω, τρικυμία; but such words may sts. be written divisim, τρὶς ἄθλιος, etc.: prov., τ. ἓξ βαλεῖν throw thrice six (the highest throw, there being three dice), A. Ag. 33, cf. Pl. Lg. 968e; τρὶς ἓξ νικητήριος βόλος App. Prov. 4.99; ἢ τ. ἓξ ἢ τρεῖς κύβοι Pherecr. 124. [ ῐ: in Hes. Op. 173 long by position before (ϝ) έτεος. ] (I.- E. tris, cf. Skt. tris, Lat. ter.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τρίς (τρεῖς), adverb, thrice: Matthew 26:34, 75; Mark 14:30, 72; Luke 22:34, 61; John 13:38; 2 Corinthians 11:25; 2 Corinthians 12:8; ἐπί τρίς (see ἐπί, C. I. 2 d., p. 235a bottom), Acts 10:16; Acts 11:10. (From Homer down.)

Question 159

φονεύω

Answer 159

I murder, kill

Thayer’s Definition
to kill, slay, murder
to commit murder

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
φον-εύω,

murder, kill, τινα Hdt. 1.35, 211, al., A. Th. 340 (lyr.), S. OT 716, etc.; c. dupl. acc., [ φόνον] φ. τινά Sch. E. Hec. 335: abs., καὶ τίς φονεύει; S. Ant. 1174, cf. El. 34: — Pass., to be slain, Pi. P. 11.17, E. IA 1317 (lyr.), Th. 8.95.

2. of an animal, ἐὰν.. ζῷον.. τι φονεύσῃ τινά Pl. Lg. 873e.
3. stain with blood, φασγάνῳ δέρην E. IA 875 (troch.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
φονεύω; future φονεύσω; 1 aorist ἐφόνευσα; (φονεύς); from (Pindar, Aeschylus), Herodotus down; the Sept. mostly for רָצֵח, also for הָרַג, הִכָּה, etc.; to kill, slay, murder; absolutely, to commit murder (A. V. kill): Matthew 5:21; James 4:2; οὐ (which see 6) φονεύσεις, Matthew 5:21; Matthew 19:18; Romans 13:9 (Exodus 20:15); μή φονεύσῃς, Mark 10:19; Luke 18:20; James 2:11. τινα: Matthew 23:31, 35; James 5:6.

Question 160

ἀγαλλιάω

Answer 160

to be filled with delight, with great joy, to exult

to celebrate, praise;, usually in the middle in the NT (ἀγαλλιάομαι) to exult, rejoice exceedingly; to desire ardently, Jn. 8:56

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀγαλλι-άω,

late form of ἀγάλλομαι,

rejoice exceedingly, Revelation 19:7 (v.l. ἀγαλλιώμεθα) ; ἠγαλλίᾱσα Luke 1:47, cf. POxy. 1592.4 (iii/iv A.D.): — more common as D ἀγαλλιάομαι, LXX Isaiah 12:6, al.: fut. -άσομαι Psalms 5:11 : aor. ἠγαλλιᾱσάμην Psalms 16:2(15).2, John 8:56; ἠγαλλιάσθην ib. 5.35. — This family of words seems also to have been used in malam partem,

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀγαλλιάομαι, see ἀγαλλιάω.

STRONGS NT 21: ἀγαλλιάω ἀγαλλιάω, (ῶ, and (but the active is not used except in Luke 1:47 (ἠγαλλίασα), in Revelation 19:7 (ἀγαλλιῶμεν) L T Tr WH (and in 1 Peter 1:8 WH Tr marginal reading (ἀγαλλιᾶτε), cf. WH’s Appendix, p. 169)); 1 aorist ἠγαλλιασάμην, and (with a middle significance) ἠγαλλιάθην (John 5:35; Rec. ἠγαλλιάσθην); a word of Hellenistic coinage (from ἀγάλλομαι to rejoice, glory (yet cf. Buttmann, 51 (45))), often in the Sept. (for גִּיל, עָלַץ, רָנַן, שׂוּשׂ), to exult, rejoice exceedingly: Matthew 5:12; Luke 10:21; Acts 2:26; Acts 16:34; 1 Peter 1:8; 1 Peter 4:13; ἔν τίνι, 1 Peter 1:6, dative of the thing in which the joy originates (cf. Winers Grammar, § 33 a.; B. 185 (160)); but John 5:35 means, ‘to rejoice while his light shone’ (i. e. in (the midst of) etc.). ἐπί τίνι, Luke 1:47; followed by ἵνα, John 8:56 that he should see, rejoiced because it had been promised him that he should see. This divine promise was fulfilled to him at length in paradise; cf. Winers Grammar, 339 (318); B. 239 (206). On this word see Gelpke in the Studien und Kritiken for 1849, p. 645f.

Question 161

ἄφρων

Answer 161

foolish

Thayer’s Definition
without reason
senseless, foolish, stupid
without reflection or intelligence, acting rashly

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἄφρων, ον, gen. ονος, (φρήν)

1. senseless, of statues, X. Mem. 1.4.4: — and so, crazed, frantic, ἄφρονα κούρην Il. 5.875, cf. 761, A. Eu. 377 (lyr.); silly, foolish, Il. 3.220, Hes. Op. [210], S. El. 941, etc.; φρένας ἄ. Il. 4.104; τὸ ἄ., = cross ἀφροσύνη, Th. 5.105, X. Mem. 1.2.55; τῶ φρονίμῳ τῆς γνώμης παύοντες τὸ ἄ. [τῆς ῥώμης ] Gorg. Fr. 6; ἐξ ἄφρονος σώφρων γεγένηται X. Cyr. 3.1.17: Comp. -έστερος Pl. Cra. 392c: Sup. -έστατος X. Mem. 2.1.5. Adv. -νως senselessly, S. Aj. 766, X. HG 5.1.19; opp. νοῦν ἐχόντως, Isoc. 5.7: Comp. -εστέρως Pl. La. 193c; -έστερον Jul. Or. 7.224d.
2. ἄφρων, = cross κώνειον, Ps.- Dsc. 4.78.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἄφρων, ἀφρωνος, ὁ, ἡ, Ἄφρον, τό (from the alpha privative and φρήν, cf. εὔφρων, σώφρων) (from Homer down), properly, without reason ((εἴδωλα, Xenophon, mem. 1, 4, 4); of beasts, ibid. 1, 4, 14), senseless, foolish, stupid; without refection or intelligence, acting rashly: Luke 11:40; Luke 12:20; Romans 2:20; 1 Corinthians 15:36; 2 Corinthians 11:16, 19 (opposed to φρόνιμος, as in Proverbs 11:29); 2 Corinthians 12:6, 11; Ephesians 5:17 (opposed to συνιέντες); 1 Peter 2:15. (A strong term; cf. Schmidt, chapter 147 § 17.)

Question 162

δάκρυ and δάκρυον

Answer 162

a tear

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δάκρυ, τό,

used by Poets metri gr. for δάκρυον in sg. δάκρυ and dat. pl. δάκρυσι Il. 9.570, etc.: dat. pl. sts. in Prose, Th. 7.75, D. 30.32, Luke 7:38 : pl., δάκρη An.Ox. 1.121 (cj. Bgk. in Pi. Fr. 122.3, cf. δάκρυον 2): —

I tear, Il. 2.266, Od. 4.114, A. Pr. 638, etc.; τοῦ ὅ γε δ. χέων Od. 2.24.

II generally, drop, λιβάνου Pi. l.c.; δ. πεύκινον E. Med. 1200. (Cf.Lat. lacruma, Goth. tagr, O E. tear.)

δάκρυον, τό, used in sg. δάκρυον, pl. δάκρυα, -ύων, -ύοις, gen. pl. δακρυόφι (-φιν) Il. 17.696, Od. 5.152, etc.: (v. δάκρυ): —

I

1. tear, δ. θερμὰ χέων Il. 16.3; δ. λείβειν, εἴβειν, 13.88, Od. 4.153; βλεφάρων ἄπο δ. ἧκεν 23.33; ἐς δάκρυα πεσεῖν Hdt. 6.21; ἴσχειν πηγὰς δακρύων S. Ant. 803 (lyr.), etc.; μετὰ πολλῶν δ. ἱκετεύειν Pl. Ap. 34c.
2. that which drops like tears, gum, sap, τῆς ἀκάνθης Hdt. 2.96; κρομμύου Hp. Mul. 2.201; τῶν δένδρων Arist. HA 553b28; ἀμπέλου AP 11.298; τὸ ἤλεκτρον καὶ ὅσα λέγεται ὡς δάκρυα Arist. Mete. 388b19; δ. κάμωνος, = σκαμμωνία, Nic. Al. 484; of the bulbils of κρίνον (q.v.), Thphr. HP 2.2.1, al.

II = δάκρυμαι, 1, AP 7.527 (Theodorid.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δάκρυ, δακρυος, τό, and τό δάκρυον, δακρυου (from Homer down), a tear: Mark 9:24 R G; Acts 20:19, 31; 2 Corinthians 2:4; 2 Timothy 1:4; Hebrews 5:7; Hebrews 12:17. The (nominative) form τό δάκρυον in Revelation 7:17; Revelation 21:4, (Isaiah 25:8). The dative plural δάκρυσι in Luke 7:38, 44 (Psalm 125:5 (); Lamentations 2:11).

Question 163

γέμω

Answer 163

I fill

Thayer’s Definition
to be full, filled, full

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
γέμω,

used only in pres. and impf.,

1. to be full, prop. of a ship, Hdt. 8.118, X. HG 5.1.21: generally, πάντα γ. Jul. MIsa 368c. = κύειν, Hsch.
2. c. gen. rei, to be full of, πλοῖα γέμοντα χρημάτων Th. 7.25; λιμὴν ἔγεμεν πλοίων Pl. Criti. 117e; κώμας πολλῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν γεμούσας X. An. 4.6.27; of animals, to be laden. ὄνοι γέμοντες οἴνου καὶ βρωμάτων Posidon. 5: metaph., κόμπος τῆς ἀληθείας γ. A. Ag. 613, cf. S. OT 4; γέμω κακῶν δή E. HF 1245; γ. θρασύτητος Pl. Lg. 649d; ἀσυμμετ ρίας καὶ αἰς χρότητος γέμουσα ψυχή Id. Grg. 525a; πικρίας Phld. Ir. p.56 W.: c. dat., to be filled with, ἰτρίοισι, πέμμασι, Archipp. 9, Antiph. 174.2; γῆν πυρὸς γέμουσαν ῥεύμασιν Carc. 5; γ. ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς.Matthew 23:25.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
γέμω, defect. verb, used only in present and imperfect (in N. T. only in present indicative and participle); to be full, filled full;

a. τίνος (as generally in Greek writings): Matthew 23:25 Lachmann, 27; Luke 11:39; Romans 3:14 (from Psalm 9:28 ()); Revelation 4:6, 8; Revelation 5:8; Revelation 15:7; Revelation 17:3 R G (see below), ; .
b. ἐκ τίνος: Matthew 23:25 (γέμουσιν ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς (L omits; Tr brackets ἐξ) their contents are derived from plunder; see γεμίζω, b. (and references there)).
c. Hebraistically (see πληρόω, 1 (cf. Buttmann, 164 (143); Winer’s Grammar, § 30, 8 b.)), with accusative of the material. γέμοντα (Treg. γέμον τά) ὀνόματα βλασφημίας, Revelation 17:3 (L T Tr WH (see above and cf. Buttmann, 80 (70))).

Question 164

εἴκοσι

Answer 164

twenty

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
εἴκοσι

(for εἴκοσιν v. infr.), Att., Ion., also Arc., IG 5(2).3.1 (Tegea), and Aeol., ib.12(2).6.21 (Lesbos): —

indecl., twenty, Il. 2.510, 748, etc.; in Hom. more freq. in form ἐείκοσι, before a vowel ἐείκοσιν, 1.309, 6.217, al.; Dor. ϝίκατι Leg.Gort. 4.13, etc.; ϝείκατι Tab.Heracl. 2.71; Lacon. βείκατι Hsch.; εἴκατι IG 9(1).693.10 (Corc.), Theoc. 4.10, 5.86. (Orig. ϝῑκατι and Εϝῑκοσι, whence ἐείκοσι in Hom.; ϝείκατι and εἴκατι are late spellings of (ϝ) ῑκατι; εἴκοσι is contr. from Εϝῑκοσι. Cf. Lat. vîginti, Skt. viṃśatIsa εἴκοσιν is the only form used by Ar., whether before vowels or consonants (εἴκοσ’ ἀπολογίζεται is dub. in Fr. 465); also (before consonants) Herod. 3.91, Phld. Piet. 3, etc., but not common in Inscrr. or Pap., e.g. (before consonants) Schwyzer 707 B 2 (Ephesus, vi B. C.), IG 2.804.155 (iv B.C.), (before a vowel) PGrenf. 2.75.7 (iv A. D.); εἴκοσι ἔτη, εἴκοσι ἡμερῶν, IG 12.94,49.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
εἴκοσι (or εἴκοσιν; Tdf. uses εἴκοσι ten times before a consonant, and says εἴκοσι “etiam ante vocalem fere semper in manuscripts antiquiss.” Proleg., p. 98; WH everywhere εἴκοσι . cf. their Appendix, p. 148; Buttmann, 9), οἱ , αἱ , τά , twenty: Luke 14:31; Acts 1:15, etc. (From Homer down.)

Question 165

ἐνδείκνυμαι ἐνδείκνῡμι or ἐνδεικύω

Answer 165

I show forth

Thayer’s Definition
to point out
to show, demonstrate, prove, whether by arguments or by acts
to manifest, display, put forth

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐνδείκ-νῡμι or ἐνδεικ-ύω,

fut. -δείξω,

I

1. mark, point out, τι Pi. O. 7.58; πρίν γ’ ἂν ἐνδείξω τί δρῶ S. OC 48; ἐ. τῷ δικαστηρίῳ τἀδικήματα Antipho 6.37, etc.; indicate, τοὺς καιρούς Gal. 1.204: c. part., show that a thing is, Pl. Plt. 278b; also ἑκάστοις ἐ. τὰ ἔργα ἀποτελεῖν ib. 308e.
2. law-term, inform against, τινά Id. Ap. 32b: abs., Isoc. 18.20; ἐ. ταῖς ἀρχαῖς Pl. Lg. 856c, cf. And. 1.8, etc.; τῷ φήναντι ἢ ἐνδείξαντι IG 22.1128.18; ἐ. πρὸς τοὺς μαστῆρας ib.12(7).62.53 (Amorgos, iv B. C.): — Med., Plu. Sol. 24: — freq. in Pass., κακοῦργος ἐνδεδειγμένος Antipho 5.9; ἐνδειχθείς Lys. 6.15, OGI 669.45 (Egypt, i A.D.); ἐνδειχθέντα δικάζειν ὀφείλοντα τῷ δημοσίῳ D. 21.182.
3. exhibit, display, ὑπερήφανον αἰχμάν A. Pr. 406 (lyr.).
4. Med., declare the possession of goods to fiscal authorities, PRLaws 54.10 (iii B.C.).

II Med.,

1. show forth oneself or what is one’s own, once in Hom., Πηλεΐδῃ ἐνδείξομαι I will declare myself to Achilles, Il. 19.83; ἐνδεικνύμενοι τὴν ἑαυτῶν γνώμην Hdt. 8.141; ἐ. περί τινος Plb. 4.28.4; τι μετ’ ἀποδείξεως Id. 5.16.7.
2. show, make plain, c. part., πῶς δ’ ἂν.. μᾶλλον ἐνδείξαιτό τις πόσιν προτιμῶσ’..; E. Alc. 154, cf. Ba. 47, X. Cyr. 1.6.10; τὴν δύναμιν κρείττω οὖσαν ἐ. D. 21.66; also ἐ. ὅτι.. Th. 8.82, Pl. Ap. 23b, X. Cyr. 8.3.21; ἐ. ὁποῖα τούτων ἀληθῆ Pl. Tht. 158e: — Pass., ἐνδεδεῖχθαι τὸ βούλεσθαι D. 8.12. prove, demonstrate, PMagd. 3.10 (iii B.C.), Phld. Sign. 11, al.
3. c. acc. rei, display, exhibit, τὸ εὔψυχον Th. 4.126; εὔνοιάν τινα Ar. Pl. 785; τῷ σώματι τὴν εὔνοιαν, οὐ Χρήμας ιν οὐδὲ λόγοις, ἐνεδείξατο τῇ πατρίδι D. 21.145; τύπῳ τἀληθὲς ἐ. Arist. EN 1094b20; of a name, denote, Pl. Cra. 394e.
4. ἐνδείκνυσθαί τινι display oneself to one, make a set at him, court him, D. 19.113, Aeschin. 3.217, etc.; ἐνδεικνύμενοι καὶ ὑπερκολακεύοντές τινα D. 19.160; make a show, show off, τινί Pl. Prt. 317c, Arist. Oec. 1352b13.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐνδείκνυμι: to point out (Latinindicare; German anzeigen), from Pindar down; in middle first in Homer; in the N. T. only in the middle: (present ἐνδεικνυμαι); 1 aorist ἐνεδειξαμην; properly, to show oneself in something, show something in oneself (cf. Buttmann, 192 (166));

1. to show, demonstrate, prove, whether by arguments or by acts: τί, Romans 9:22 (joined with γνωρίσαι); Ephesians 2:7; Titus 2:10; Titus 3:2; Hebrews 6:11; with two accusatives, the one of the object, the other of the predicate, Romans 2:15; τί ἐν τίνι, the dative of the person, Romans 9:17 (from Exodus 9:16 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 254 (238))); 1 Timothy 1:16; τί εἰς τό ὄνομα τίνος, Hebrews 6:10; τήν ἔνδειξιν ἐνδικνυσθαι (as in Plato, legg. 12, p. 966 b.; cf. Winer’s Grammar, 225 (211)); εἰς τινα, 2 Corinthians 8:24.
2. to manifest, display, put forth: τίνι (dative of person) κακά, 2 Timothy 4:14; Genesis 50:15, 17.

Question 166

ἔπαινος

Answer 166

praise

Thayer’s Definition
approbation, commendation, praise

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἔπαιν-ος, ὁ,

1. approval, praise, commendation, Simon. 4.3, Pi. Fr. 181; ἔ. ἔχειν πρός τινος Hdt. 1.96; πολλῷ ἐχρᾶτο τῷ ἐ. Id. 3.3: freq. in Trag. and Att., ἐπαίνου τυχεῖν ἔκτινος S. Ant. 665, etc.; κλεινὴ καὶ ἔπαινον ἔχουσα meriting praise, ib. 817; ἔπαινον ἐπαινεῖν Pl. La. 181b: pl., praises, S. OC 720, El. 976, X. Mem. 2.1.33; τιμαὶ.. καὶ ἔ. Pl. R. 516c, etc.
2. complimentary address, panegyric (but distd. fr. ἐγκώμιον, as the general from the particular, Arist. EE 1219b15, Rh. 1367b27); ἔ. ποιεῖσθαι περί τινος Pl. Phdr. 260c; λόγον εἰπεῖν ἔπαινον Ἔρωτος Id. Smp. 177d; συντιθεὶς λόγον ἔ. κατά τινος Id. Phdr. 260b; οἱ κατὰ Δημοσθένους ἔ. Aeschin. 3.50; εἴς τινα Pl. Lg. 947c; ὑπέρ τινος Plb. 1.1.1, D.S. 13.22, D.H. 10.57.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἔπαινος, ἐπαινου, ὁ (ἐπί and αἶνος (as it were, a tale for another; cf. Alexander Buttmann (1873) Lexil. § 83, 4; Schmidt, chapter 155)); approbation, commendation, praise: Philippians 4:8; ἐκ τίνος, bestowed by one, Romans 2:29; ἔπαινον ἔχειν ἐκ τίνος, genitive of person, Romans 13:3; ὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπό τοῦ Θεοῦ, 1 Corinthians 4:5; with the genitive of the person to whom the praise is given, Romans 2:29; 2 Corinthians 8:18; εἰς ἔπαινον, to the obtaining of praise, 1 Peter 1:7; εἰς ἔπαινον τίνος, that a person or thing may be praised, Ephesians 1:6, 14; Philippians 1:11; (πέμπεσθαι εἰς … ἔπαινον τίνος, 1 Peter 2:14); εἶναι εἰς ἔπαινον τίνος to be a praise to a person or thing, Ephesians 1:12.

Question 167

ἐπαισχύνομαι

Answer 167

to be ashamed

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐπαισχ-ύνομαι,

I fut. -αισχυνθήσομαι, to be ashamed at or of, τῷ οὐνόματι Hdt. 1.143; τινά or τι, X. HG 4.1.34, Pl. Sph. 247c: c. inf., to be ashamed to do, A. Ag. 1373: c. part., to be ashamed of doing or having done a thing, Hdt. 1.90, S. Aj. 1307, Ph. 929, etc.: abs., feel shame, show a sense of shame, Pl. R. 573b, Men. 625.

II late in Act., make ugly, mar, Nonn. D. 20.61, 42.421.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπαισχύνομαι; future ἐπαισχυνθήσομαι; 1 aorist ἐπησχυνθην, and with neglect of augment ἐπαισχυνθην (2 Timothy 1:16 L T Tr WH; cf. (WHs Appendix, p. 161); Buttmann, 34 (30); (Winers Grammar, § 12 at the end)); from Aeschylus down; to be ashamed (ἐπί on account of (cf. Isaiah 1:29 Alex.; Ellicott on 2 Timothy 1:8); see αἰσχύνω): absolutely, 2 Timothy 1:12; τινα (on the accusative, cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 32, 1 b. α.; Buttmann, 192 (166)), of a person, Mark 8:38; Luke 9:26; τί, of a thing, Romans 1:16; 2 Timothy 1:8, 16; ἐπί τίνι, the dative of a thing, Romans 6:21; followed by the infinitive Hebrews 2:11; with the accusative of a person and the infinitive of a thing, Hebrews 11:16. (Twice in the Sept.: Isaiah 1:29 (Alex.); Job 34:19.)

Question 168

ἐπισκέπτομαι

Answer 168

Ι visit, have a care for

Thayer’s Definition
to look upon or after, to inspect, examine with the eyes
in order to see how he is, i.e. to visit, go to see one
the poor and afflicted, the sick
to look upon in order to help or to benefit
to look after, have care for, provide for: of God
to look (about) for, look out (one to choose, employ, etc.)

Question 169

καταβολή, ῆς, ἡ

Answer 169

foundation, beginning

Thayer's Definition
a throwing or laying down
the injection or depositing of the virile semen in the womb
of the seed of plants and animals
a founding (laying down a foundation)

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
καταβολ-ή, ἡ,

I

1. throwing down: hence, sowing, Corp.Herm. 9.6; esp. of begetting, κ. σπέρματος, σπερμάτων, Philol. 13, Luc. Am. 19, cf. Hebrews 11:11, Arr. Epict. 1.13.3; ἡ Ῥωμύλου σπορὰ καὶ κ. Plu. 2.320b. congenital defect, ἀπὸ ξυγγενικῆς αἰτίας καὶ κ. Plu. Tim. 37. Astrol., nativity, ἡ ἐξ ἀρχῆς κ. Vett.Val. 220.29, al.
2. paying down, esp. by instalments, καταβάλλειν τὰς κ. D. 59.27; τὸ ἀργύριον ἔφερε καταβολὴν τῇ πόλει paid money as a deposit (by way of caution), Docum.ib. 37.22, cf. IG 12(7).515.26 (Amorgos, ii B. C.), UPZ 112v12 (pl., ii B. C.), etc.; ἔχειν τῆς γῆς.. καταβολήν liability for rent, PEleph. 23.17 (iii B. C.): pl., instalments, PLips. 12.17 (iii A. D.), etc.

II laying of a foundation: hence, building, structure, LXX 2 Maccabees 2:29; τῆς ἀρχιτεκτονίας Bito 49.2; ἔργου J. AJ 12.2.9: but usu. metaph.,

1 foundation, beginning, ἱερῶν ἀγώνων Pi. N. 2.4; τῆς περιόδου Arist. Mete. 352b15; κ. ἐποιεῖτο καὶ θεμέλιον ὑπεβάλλετο τυραννίδος Plb. 13.6.2; κ. κόσμου Matthew 13:35, Ephesians 1:4; κ.κοσμική Cat.Cod.Astr. 8(3).138 (Thessal.); ἡ πρώτη κ. τῆς φιλοσόφου θεωρίας Procl. in Alc.Praef. p.8C.; ἐκ καταβολῆς from the foundations: hence, anew, σκάφη ἐκ κ. ἐναυπηγοῦντο, of fresh construction, Plb. 1.36.8; ἐκ κ. πλάττων, of pure invention, Id. 15.25.35: hence, of set purpose, deliberately, Id. 1.47.7, 24.8.9.

2. = θυσία, τελετή, Hsch., cf. κατηβολή.

III periodical attack of illness, fit, τῆς ἀσθενείας Pl. Grg. 519a, cf. κατηβολή; πυρετοῦ D. 9.29, Ph. 1.399, 2.563, cf. Aristid. Or. 50(26).59, Id. 2.166J.; trance, Poll. 1.16; cf. Lat. catabolicus. detraction, abuse, Phld. Rh. 2.56S.: pl., Ph. 2.571 codd. perh. outer wrapper (cf. κατάβλημα 11.4) of a bandage, Hp. Off. 9.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καταβολή, καταβολῆς, ἡ (καταβάλλω, which see);

1. a throwing or laying down: τοῦ σπέρματος (namely, εἰς τήν μήτραν), the injection or depositing of the virile semen in the womb, Lucian, amor. 19; Galen, aphorism. iv. § 1; of the seed of animals and plants, Philo de opif. mund. §§ 22, 45; σπέρματα τά εἰς γῆν ἤ μήτραν καταβαλλομενα, Antoninus 4, 36; accordingly many interpret the words Σάρρα δύναμιν εἰς καταβολήν σπέρματος ἔλαβε in Hebrews 11:11, she received power to conceive seed. But since it belongs to the male καταβάλλειν τό σπέρμα, not to the female, this interpretation cannot stand ((according to the reading of WH marginal reading αὐτῇ Σάρρα, Abr. remains the subjunctive of ἔλαβεν; but see 2 below)); cf. Bleek (and, on the other side, Kurtz) at the passage
2. a founding (laying down a foundation): εἰς καταβολήν σπέρματος, to found a posterity, Hebrews 11:11 (but compare above) (πυραννιδος, Polybius 13, 6, 2; ἅμα τῇ πρώτη καταβολή τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Plato, aquae et ignis comp. C. 2). ἀπό καταβολῆς κόσμου, from the foundation of the world: Matthew 13:35 (L T Tr WH omit κόσμου); ; Luke 11:50; Hebrews 4:3; Hebrews 9:28; Revelation 13:8; Revelation 17:8; πρό καταβολῆς κόσμου, John 17:24; Ephesians 1:4; 1 Peter 1:20.

Question 170

κατασκευάζω

Answer 170

to prepare

Thayer’s Definition
to furnish, equip, prepare, make ready
of one who makes anything ready for a person or thing
of builders, to construct, erect, with the included idea of adorning and equipping with all things necessary

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κατασκευ-άζω,

fut. -σκευάσω, Att. -σκευῶ SIG 1097.9 (Athens, iv B.C.), IPE 12.32 B 53 (Olbia, iii B.C.): Dor. aor. -εσκεύαξα Ti. Locr. 94d, Test.Epict. 1.14, also κατεσκέαξα Africa Italiana 1.330 (Cyrene): Boeot. aor. inf. -σκευάττη SIG 1185.13 (Tanagra, iii B.C.): pf. -εσκεύᾰκα D. 42.30: fut. Med. 3 sg. -ᾶται SIG 1015.28 (Halic.): Dor. aor. Med. -εσκευαξάμην Test.Epict. 1.9: —
1. equip, furnish fully with.., [ πᾶσι ] κ. τὸ πλοῖον with all appliances, D. 18.194: — Med., τοὺς ἵππους Χαλκοῖς.. προβλήμασι κ. X. Cyr. 6.1.51: — freq. in Pass., ἱρὸν θησαυροῖσί τε καὶ ἀναθήμασι κατεσκευασμένον Hdt. 8.33, cf. 2.44; κατασκευὴ Χρυσῶ τε καὶ ἀργύρω κατεσκ. Id. 9.82; οἷς ἡ Χώρα κατεσκεύασται Th. 6.91.
2. without dat., furnish, equip fully, τὴν Χώραν X. An. 1.9.19; κ. τινὰ ἐπὶ στρατιάν Id. Cyr. 3.3.3; [ ἐλέφαντας ] κ. πρὸς τὴν πολεμικὴν Χρείαν OGI 54.12 (Adule, iii B.C.): — Med., κ. τοὺς ὄνους having got his asses ready, Hdt. 2.121. δ, etc.: — Pass., τῆς Ἀντάνδρου μελλούσης -σκευάζεσθαι Th. 4.75, cf. 8.24; ἔργα -ασμένα cultivated farms, Anaxag. 4; of persons, to be under treatment, Phld. Lib. p.3 O., al.
3. construct, build, γέφυραν Hdt. 1.186 (Pass.); διδασκαλεῖον Antipho 6.11; πόλιν Pl. R. 557d; γυμνάσια Id. Lg. 761c; ἱερὰ θυσίας τε αὑτοῖς κ. Id. Criti. 113c; ἐπιτείχισμ’ ἐπὶ τὴν Ἀττικήν D. 18.71: generally, prepare, arrange, establish, κ. δημοκρατίαν X. HG 2.3.36; δύναμιν τῇ πόλει And. 3.39; συμπόσιον Pl. R. 363c; ἰσότητα τῆς οὐσίας Id. Lg. 684d, cf. Arist. Pol. 1265a39; ὀλιγαρχίαν Id. Ath. 37.1; ναύτας D. 50.36; κ. τινὰς μελέτῃ train them, X. Cyr. 8.1.43, etc.; turn out, πολιτικούς Phld. Rh. 2.264 S., al.: — Med., κατασκευάζεσθαι ναυμαχίαν prepare it, make ready for it, v.l. for παρασκ- in Th. 2.85; make for oneself, esp. build a house and furnish it, opp. ἀνασκευάζομαι Id. 1.93, 2.17; unpack, opp. ἀνασκ., X. Cyr. 8.5.2; κ. ἐρημίαν αὑτῶ Pl. Lg. 730c, etc.; κ. τ ράπεζαν set up a bank, Isa Fr. 66; κατασκευάζομαι τέχνην μυρεψικήν I am setting up as a perfumer, Lys. Fr. 1.2; τοὺς ἐγγυτάτω τῆς ἀγορᾶς κατ εσκευασμένους Id. 24.20; [ πρόσοδον ] οὐ μικρὰν κατεσκευάσαντο made themselves a good [income], D. 27.61, cf. And. 4.11.
4. of fraudulent transactions, fabricate, trump up, πρόφασιν X. Cyr. 2.4.17; τὸ ἀπόρρητον κατασκευάσαι D. 2.6; λιποταξίου γραφὴν κατεσκεύασεν Id. 21.103, cf.92; Χρέα ψευδῆ Id. 42.30, cf. 45.22 (Pass.); of persons, suborn, λογοποιούς Din. 1.35; set up, ἢ.. ἐπιτίθενται αὐτοὶ ἢ κατασκευάζουσιν ἕτερον Arist. Pol. 1306a1; οἱ κατεσκευασμένοι τῶν Θετταλῶν men prepared for the purpose, D. 18.151; κατεσκ. δανεισταί Id. 42.28: c. inf., τὸν ἀνεψιὸν.. κατεσκεύασεν ἀμφισβητεῖν Id. 55.1.
5. c. dupl. acc., make, render, [ φρούρια ] κ. ὡς ἐχυρώτατα X. Cyr. 2.4.17; ἀριστερὰ δεξιῶν ἀσθενέστερα κ, Pl. Lg. 795a; φοβερὸν κ. τὸ αὐτόχειρα γενέσθαι D. 20.158; ἀνομοθέτητον ἑαυτῶ τὸν βίον Duris 10 J.; κ. τινὰ τοιοῦτον.. Arist. Rh. 1380a2 (also with Adv., πρὸς ἑαυτὸν κ. εὖ τὸν ἀκροατήν render the audience favourably disposed towards oneself, 1419b11).
6. represent as so and so, κ. τινὰς παροίνους, ὑβριστάς, ἀγνώμονας, D. 54.14, cf. 45.82; εἰ μὴ Γοργίαν Νέστορά τινα κατασκευάζεις unless you make out a Gorgias to be Nestor, Pl. Phdr. 261c.
7. in argument, maintain, prove, τῶν ἐν Εὐβοίᾳ πραγμάτων.. ὡς ἐγὼ αἴτιός εἰμι, κατεσκεύαζε tried to make out that.., D. 21.110; κ. ὅτι.. Arr. Epict. 3.15.14, S.E. P. 1.32; κ. τῶ λόγψ establish a proposition by reasoning, Damian. Opt. 5; διὰ λόγου -σκευασθήσεται Phld. Sign. 6.
8. in Logic, construct a positive argument, opp. ἀναιρέω, ἀνασκευάζω (of negative arguments), Arist. Rh. 1401b3, cf. Plu. 2.1036b, etc.: Philos., κ. τῶν ἀριθμῶν ἰδέαν construct, postulate, Arist. EN 1096a19, cf. Metaph. 984b25, al.
9. Geom., construct, Euc. 5.7 (Pass.), Archim. Sph.Cyl. 2.6 (Pass.); solve by a construction, πρόβλημα Papp. 54.25.
10. Rhet., frame, ὀνόματα D.H. Comp. 16; elaborate, κατεσκεύασται τὸ δοκοῦν εἶναι ἀφελές Id. Isaiah 7:1-25; λόγος κατεσκευασμένος Str. 1.2.6.
11. abs. in Med., prepare oneself or make ready for doing, ὡς πολεμήσοντες Th. 2.7; ὡς οἰκήσων X. An. 3.2.24; ὡς εἰς μάχην Paus. 5.21.14.
12. Pass., of disease, to become established, -σκευαζομένου τοῦ πάθους Gal. 8.332.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κατασκευάζω: future κατασκευάσω; 1 aorist κατεσκεύασα; Passive, present κατασκευάζομαι; perfect participle κατεσκευασμενος; 1 aorist κατεσκευασθην; to furnish, equip, prepare, make ready;

a. of one who makes anything ready for a person or thing: τήν ὁδόν, Matthew 11:10; Mark 1:2; Luke 7:27; perfect passive participle prepared in spirit, Luke 1:17 (Xenophon, Cyril 5, 5, 10).
b. of builders, to construct, erect, with the included idea of adoming and equipping with all things necessary (often so in Greek authors; cf. Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebrew ii. 1, p. 398f): οἶκον, Hebrews 3:3f; κιβωτόν, Hebrews 11:7; 1 Peter 3:20; σκηνήν, Hebrews 9:2, 6; the Sept. for בָּרָא, Isaiah 40:28; Isaiah 43:7.

Question 171

κλάδος, ου, ὁ

Answer 171

a branch ( of a tree) (in botany, cladophyll)

Thayer’s Definition
a young tender shoot, broken off for grafting
a branch
as the Jewish patriarchs are likened to a root, so their posterity are likened to branches

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κλάδος [ ᾰ], ου, ὁ,

1. branch, shoot of a tree, Arist. Juv. 468b25, GA 752a20; twig, opp. ἀκρεμών, Thphr. HP 1.1.9, 1.10.7: generally, branch, τῆς ἐλαίης τοὺς κλάδους Hdt. 7.19: presented by suppliants, ἐλαίας θ’ ὑψιγέννητον κλάδον A. Eu. 43, cf. Supp. 22 (anap.), S. OT 3, 143; also of laurel branches used in temples, E. Ion 80.
2. plank, POxy. 1738.4, al. (iii A.D.).
3. branch of a blood-vessel, Gal. 15.141.
4. metaph., ἀπὸ νώτοιο δύο κλάδοι ἀΐσσονται two arms, Emp. 29.1.
5. κ. ἐλέας, of a young girl, Epigr.Gr. 368.7: — metapl. forms, dat. κλαδί Scol. 9, prob. in SIG 1025.33 (Cos, iv/iii B.C.); τῇ κ. Ael. NA 4.38 codd. (cf. Eust. 58.37); τῷ κ. Choerob. in Theod. 1.138; acc. κλάδα Lyr.Adesp. 122; cf. κλάδα[ν]· κλάδον, Hsch.; gen. pl. κλαδέων prob. in Philox. 1.3; dat. pl. κλάδεσι Ar. Av. 239 (lyr.), κλαδέεσσι Nic. Fr. 74.19; acc. κλάδας ib.53.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κλάδος, κλαδου, ὁ (κλάω);

a. properly, a young, tender shoot, broken off for grafting.
b. universally, a branch: Matthew 13:32; Matthew 21:8; Matthew 24:32; Mark 4:32; Mark 13:28; Luke 13:19; as the Jewish patriarchs are likened to a root., so their posterity are likened to branches, Romans 11:16-19, 21; cf. Sir. 23:25 Sir. 40:15; Menander fragment, Meineke edition, p. 247 (fragment 182, vol. iv. 274 (Ber. 1841)). (Tragg., Aristophanes, Theophrastus, Geoponica, others.)

Question 172

κράβαττος

Answer 172

mattress, pallet, bed, cot

Thayer’s Definition
a pallet, camp bed (a rather simple bed holding only one person)

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κράββᾰτος, ὁ,

also κράβᾰτος, Sammelb. 4292.9, v.l.in Mark 2:4, κράβακτος, v.l. in NT (cod. Alex.), PTeb. 406.19 (iii A. D.) (whence Dim. κραβάκτιον, τό, PGrenf. 2.111.32 (v/vi A. D.), and Adj. κραβακτήριος, α, ον, PMasp. 6 ii 46 (vi A. D.)): — also κράβακτον, τό, l.c. 97 (vi A. D.), κράβαττος, Arr. Epict. 1.24.14, v.l. in NT (cod. W), Gloss., cf. grabattus, Virg. Mor. 5: — couch, mattress, pallet, Rhinth. 11, Crito Com. 2; but condemned as un-Attic by Phryn. 44; freq. in later Gr., ἐπὶ κλιναρίων καὶ κραββάτων Acts 5:15, etc., cf. Arr. Epict. l.c., PLond. 2.191.16 (ii A. D.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κράββατος (L T Tr WH κράβαττος; the Sinaiticus manuscript κραβακτος (except in Acts 5:15; cf. KC. Nov. Test. ad fid. Vat. praef., p. 81f; Tdf. Proleg., p. 80)), κραββατου, ὁ (Latingrabatas), a pallet, camp bed (a rather mean bed, holding only one person, called by the Greeks σκίμπους, σκιμποδιον): Mark 2:4, 9, 11; Mark 6:55; John 5:8-12 (in 12 T WH omit; Tr brackets the clause); Acts 5:15; Acts 9:33. Cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc., p. 175f; Lob. ad Phryn., p. 62; Volkmar, Marcus u d. Synapse as above with, p. 131; (McClellan, New Testament etc., p. 106; Winer’s Grammar, 25).

Question 173

νόσος

Answer 173

disease, illness

a disease, sickness, distemper, Mt. 4:23, 24; 8:17; 9:35

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
νόσος,

and Ion. (not Dor., cf. Berl.Sitzb. 1927.156 (Cyrene)) νοῦσος, ἡ,

I sickness, disease, plague, νοῦσον ἀνὰ στρατὸν ὦρσε κακήν (sc. Apollo), ὀλέκοντο δὲ λαοί Il. 1.10; νοῦσόν γ’ οὔ πως ἔστι Διὸς μεγάλου ἀλέασθαι Od. 9.411; δολιχὴ ν. 11.172; νοῦσοι ἀργαλέαι Hes. Op. 92: — Phrases: ἐς ν. πεσεῖν A. Pr. 473; ἐς ν. ἐμπίπτειν Antipho 1.20; νόσον ἐμπεπτωκέναι τοῖς κτήνεσιν X. Cyr. 8.3.41; μοι ν. ἐπήλυθεν Od. 11.200; νόσῳ ληφθέντι S. Tr. 445; κάμνειν νόσον, ὑπὸ νόσου, v. κάμνω; ἀσθενεῖν ταύτην τὴν νόσον Isoc. 19.24; ἐκ τῆς νούσου ἀνέστη Hdt. 1.22; θήλεα ν. ib. 105, cf. Hdn. 4.12.2; ἱερὰ νόσος, v. ἱερός IV. 8: ν. defined, Gal. 7.43.

II

1. generally, distress, anguish, Hes. Th. 527, S. OC 544 (lyr.), etc.
2. disease of mind, esp. caused by madness, passion, vice, etc., ν. φρενῶν A. Pers. 750 (troch.); θεία ν., i.e. madness, S. Aj. 185 (lyr.); μανιάσιν ν. ib. 59; λυσσώδη ν. ib. 452; of love, Id. Tr. 491; Ἀφροδίτας ν. E. Hipp. 767 (lyr.); ἀκόλαστον ἔσχε γλῶσσαν, αἰσχίστην ν. Id. Or. 10; τῆς μεγίστης ν., ἀνοίας Pl. Lg. 691d; ν. καὶ στάσιν οὐ ταὐτὸν νενόμικας; Id. Sph. 228a.
3. plague, bane, mischief, e.g. a whirlwind is θεία ν. S. Ant. 421, cf. 1141 (lyr.); of the trident of Poseidon, A. Pr. 924 (s.v.l.); πεντεσύριγγος ν., of the pillory, Polyeuct. ap. Arist. Rh. 1411a23; κτείνειν τινὰ ὡς νόσον πόλεως Pl. Prt. 322d.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
νόσος, νόσου, ἡ, disease, sickness: Matthew 4:23; Matthew 8:17; Matthew 9:35; Matthew 10:1; Mark 1:34; Mark 3:15 (R G L); Luke 4:40; Luke 6:18(); ; Acts 19:12. (Deuteronomy 7:15; Deuteronomy 28:59; Exodus 15:26, etc. (Homer, Herodotus, others.))

Question 174

ὁμοθυμαδόν

Answer 174

with one accord

1) with one mind, with one accord, with one passion
++++
A unique Greek word, used 10 of its 12 New Testament occurrences in
the Book of Acts, helps us understand the uniqueness of the Christian
community. Homothumadon is a compound of two words meaning to “rush
along” and “in unison”. The image is almost musical; a number of
notes are sounded which, while different, harmonise in pitch and
tone. As the instruments of a great concert under the direction of a
concert master, so the Holy Spirit blends together the lives of
members of Christ’s church.

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὁμοθῡμ-ᾰδόν,

Adv. with one accord, πάντες ὁ. Pl. Lg. 805a, etc.; ὁ. ἐκ μιᾶς γνώμης D. 10.59; ὁ. ἅπασιν ὑμῖν ἀντιληπτέον Ar. Pax 484, cf. Av. 1015, X. HG 2.4.17, LXX Exodus 19:8, Plb. 1.45.4, al., SIG 742.13 (Ephes., i B.C.), Acts 15:25.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὁμοθυμαδόν (from ὁμοθυμος, and this from ὁμός and θυμός; on adverbs in ὁμοθυμαδόν (chiefly derived from nouns, and designating form or structure) as γνωμηδον, ῤοιζηδόν, etc., cf. Alexander Buttmann (1873) Ausf. Spr. ii., p. 452), with one mind, of one accord (Vulg. unanimiter (etc.)): Romans 15:6; Acts 1:14; Acts 2:46; Acts 4:24; Acts 7:57; Acts 8:6; Acts 12:20; Acts 15:25; Acts 18:12; Acts 19:29, and R G in (Aristophanes, Xenophon, Demosthenes, Philo, Josephus, Herodian, the Sept. Lamentations 2:8; Job 17:16; Numbers 24:24, etc.); with ἅπαντες (L T WH πάντες) (Aristophanes pax 484, and often in classical Greek), Acts 5:12 (cf. 2:1 above).

Question 175

ὀνειδίζω

Answer 175

Thayer's Definition
to reproach, upbraid, revile
of deserved reproach
of undeserved reproach, to revile
to upbraid, cast (favours received) in one's teeth

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὀνειδ-ίζω,

fut. -ιῶ S. OT 1423, E. Tr. 430, Pl. Ap. 30a: aor. ὠνείδισα ( ὀν-) Il. 9.34, etc.: pf. ὠνείδικα Lys. 16.15: — Pass., E. Tr. 936, etc.: fut. Med. ὀνειδιεῖσθε (in pass. sense) S. OT 1500: aor. ὠνειδίσθην Plb. 11.4.10:

I cast in one’s teeth, make a reproach to one, usu. c. acc. rei et dat. pers., ἀλκὴν μέν μοι πρῶτον ὀνείδισας Il. 9.34, cf. Od. 18.380, Hes. Op. 718, Hdt. 1.90, 8.106; αἰσχύνομαί σοι τοῦτ’ ὀνειδίσαι A. Ch. 917; ἃ δ’ εἰς γάμους μοι βασιλικοὺς ὠνείδισας E. Med. 547; ὀ. φόνον [τινί] D. 21.120; ὄνειδος ὀ. εἴς τινα S. OC 754, Ph. 523: with a relat. clause instead of the acc., Ἀγαμέμνονι.. ὀνειδίζων, ὅτι.. Il. 2.255, cf. Pl. Ap. 30a, al.; ὀ. τινί, ὡς.. X. Mem. 2.9.8, cf. Il. 1.211 (without dat.); ὀ. εἰς ἀχαριστίαν τινί, διότι.. Plb. 28.4.11: c. inf., εἴ τίς τῳ ὀ. φιλοκερδεῖ εἶναι Pl. Hipparch. 232c; ὀ. τινὶ τετρῆσθαι τὰ ὦτα D.L. 2.50: without dat. pers., ὀνειδιῶν τι τῶν πάρος κακῶν make a reproach, S. OT 1423, cf. 441, Hdt. 8.143: — Pass., to be made a reproach, καὶ σχεδὸν δὴ πάντα.. οὐκ ὀρθῶς ὀνειδίζεται Pl. Ti. 86d, cf. Th. 1.77.

II without acc. rei, reproach, upbraid,

1 c. dat. pers., Lys. 27.16, etc.; τισὶ περί τινος Hdt. 4.79; [τινὶ] ἔς τι Id. 8.92; without dat. pers., Il. 7.95.

2. c. acc. pers., chide, reproach, Pl. Ap. 30e; τοιαῦτ’ ὀνειδίζεις με thus dost thou reproach me, S. OC 1002; also ἐπειδὴ.. τυφλόν μ’ ὠνείδισας (sc. ὄντα) didstreproach me with being blind, Id. OT 412: — Pass., to be reproached, ἔκ τινων E. Tr. 936; εἰς δειλίαν D.S. 20.62; τὴν μικροπολιτείαν with.., Stob. 3.39.29.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὀνειδίζω; imperfect ὠνείδιζον; 1 aorist ὠνείδισα; present passive ὀνειδίζομαι; (ὄνειδος, which see); from Homer down; the Sept. especially for חָרַף; to reproach, upbraid, revile; (on its construction cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 32, 1 b. β.; Buttmann, § 133, 9): of deserved reproach, τινα, followed by ὅτι, Matthew 11:20; τί (the fault) τίνος, followed by ὅτι, Mark 16:14. of unjust reproach, to revile: τινα, Matthew 5:11; Mark 15:32; Luke vt. 22; Romans 15:3 from Psalm 68:10 (); passive 1 Peter 4:14; followed by ὅτι, 1 Timothy 4:10 R G Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading; τό αὐτό ὠνείδιζον αὐτόν (Rec. αὐτῷ), Matthew 27:44 (see αὐτός, III. 1). to upbraid, cast (favors received) in one’s teeth: absolutely James 1:5; μετά τό δοῦναι μή ὀνείδιζε, Sir. 41:22, cf. 20:14; τίνι σωτηρίαν, deliverance obtained by us for one, Polybius 9, 31, 4.

Question 176

πηγή

Answer 176

a spring, fountain

Thayer’s Definition
fountain, spring
a well fed by a spring

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πηγή,

Dor. πᾱγά, ἡ,

running water, used by Hom. always in pl., streams, πηγαὶ ποταμῶν Il. 20.9, cf. Hdt. 1.189, A. Pr. 89, 434 (lyr.), Pers. 311, E. HF 1297, Rh. 827 (lyr.); κρουνὼ δ’ ἵκανον καλλιρρόω, ἔνθα δὲ πηγαὶ δοιαὶ ἀναΐσσουσι Il. 22.147: sg., καλλιρρόου ἔψαυσα π . A. Pers. 202, cf. 613 .

2. metaph., of tears, πηγαὶ κλαυμάτων, δακρύων, streams . ., Id. Ag. 888, S. Ant. 803, Tr. 852 (lyr.): abs., παρειὰν νοτίοις ἔτεγξα παγαῖς A. Pr. 402 (lyr.), cf. E. Alc. 1068, etc.; also πηγαὶ γάλακτος, βοτρύων, S. El. 895, E. Cyc. 496 (lyr.); πόντου πηγαῖς with sea- water, Id. IT 1039; πηγαὶ τροφῆς τῷ γεννωμένῳ, of mother’s milk, Pl. Mx. 237e; π. μαστῶν Inscr.Cos 218.8 .

II fount, source, τοῦ Νείλου Hdt. 2.28, 4.53 (pl.), OGI 168.9 (Syene, ii B. C. ), Str. 17.1.52 (pl.); πηγαὶ ἡλίου the fount of light, i. e. the South, A. Pr. 809; πηγαὶ νυκτός the North, S. Fr. 956; παγὰ ἐπέων Pi. P. 4.299; πυρὸς παγαί ib. 1.22, cf. A. Pr. 110, Pl. Ti. 79d; πηγὴ ἀργύρου, of the silver-mines at Laureion, A. Pers. 238; τῆς ἀκουούσης π. δι’ ὤτων, i.e. the sense of hearing, S. OT 1387; ἀπὸ μιᾶς ἀρχῆς καὶ π . Arist. PA 668a15, cf. Plu. 2.856e.

2. metaph., source, origin, mostly in sg., κακῶν π . A. Pers. 743; αἱ τέχναι, ἃς πηγάς φασι τῶν καλῶν εἶναι X. Cyr. 7.2.13; π. καὶ ἀρχὴ κινήσεως Pl. Phdr. 245c; π. ἡδονῶν, τοῦ φρονεῖν, νοσημάτων, etc., Id. Phlb. 62d, Lg. 808d, Ti. 85b, etc.; ἀρχαὶ καὶ π. τῶν στάσεων Arist. Pol. 1301b5, cf. Pl. Lg. 690d; π. τῆς κακοπραγμοσύνης Plb. 18.40.3; βέβηκα π. εἰς ἐμάς I have returned to the source of my existence, Epigr.Gr. 463 ( Crommyon ), cf. Dam. Pr. 95,al.
3. inner canthus of eye, supposed source of tears, Poll. 2.71, Hsch. (both pl.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πηγή, πηγῆς, ἡ, from Homer down, the Sept. chiefly for מַעְיָן, עַיִן, מָקור; a fountain, spring: James 3:11, and Rec. in 12; 2 Peter 2:17; ὕδατος ἁλλομένου, John 4:14; τῶν ὑδάτων, Revelation 8:10; Revelation 14:7; Revelation 16:4; of a well fed by a spring, John 4:6. ζωῆς πηγαί ὑδάτων, Revelation 7:17; ἡ πηγή τοῦ ὕδατος τῆς ζωῆς, Revelation 21:6 (on both passive see in ζωή, p. 274{a}); ἡ πηγή τοῦ αἵματος, a flow of blood, Mark 5:29.

Question 177

πραΰτης / πρᾳότης

Answer 177

gentleness, humility, courtesy

Thayer’s Definition
mildness of disposition, gentleness of spirit, meekness

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πρᾱΰ-της, ητος, ἡ, v. πραότης.

πρᾱότης, ητος, ἡ,

mildness, gentleness, Th. 4.108, Lys. 6.34, Isoc. 3.55, Pl. R. 558a, etc.; opp. ἀγριότης, Id. Smp. 197d; opp. ὀργιλότης, Arist. EN 1125b26; opp. ὀργή, Id. Rh. 1380a6: pl., Isoc. 5.116: later πραΰτης, LXX Psalms 44:4(45).4, Ep.Galatians 5:23 (v.l.), CIG 2788 ( Aphrodisias ).

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πρᾱότης, ητος, ἡ,

mildness, gentleness, Th. 4.108, Lys. 6.34, Isoc. 3.55, Pl. R. 558a, etc.; opp. ἀγριότης, Id. Smp. 197d; opp. ὀργιλότης, Arist. EN 1125b26; opp. ὀργή, Id. Rh. 1380a6: pl., Isoc. 5.116: later πραΰτης, LXX Psalms 44:1-26(45).4, Ep.Galatians 5:23 (v.l.), CIG 2788 ( Aphrodisias ).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πραότης (Rec. and Griesbach (except in James 1:21; James 3:13; 1 Peter 3:15); see the preceding word), πραότης (so Lachmann), and according to a later form πραΰτης (so R and G, but with the iota subscript under the alpha ἆ, in James 1:21; James 3:13; 1 Peter 3:15; Lachmann everywhere except in Galatians 6:1; Ephesians 4:2; Treg. everywhere (except in 2 Corinthians 10:1; Galatians 5:23 (22); ; Ephesians 4:2), T WH everywhere; cf. B. 26f (23f)), πρᾳότητος, ἡ, gentleness, mildness, meekness: 1 Corinthians 4:21; 2 Corinthians 10:1; Galatians 5:23 (22); ; Colossians 3:12; Ephesians 4:2; 1 Timothy 6:11 R; 2 Timothy 2:25; Titus 3:2; James 1:21; James 3:13; 1 Peter 3:16 (15). (Xenophon, Plato, Isocrates, Aristotle, Diodorus, Josephus, others; for עַנְוָה, Psalm 44:4 ()) (Synonym: see ἐπιείκεια, at the end; Trench (as there referred to, but especially) § xlii.; Lightfoot on Colossians 3:13.)

Question 178

πυνθάνομαι

Answer 178

Thayer’s Definition
to enquire, ask
to ascertain, by enquiry

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πυνθάνομαι, Od. 2.315, etc.; poet. also πεύθομαι (q.v.): Ep. impf. πυνθανόμην 13.256: fut. πεύσομαι Il. 18.19, etc., Dor. πευσοῦμαι Theoc. 3.51 (so cod. Med. in A. Pr. 988 ): aor. ἐπῠθόμην Il. 5 . 702, etc., Ep. and Lyr. πυθόμην Od. 4.732, B. 15.26; imper. πυθοῦ, Ion. πυθεῦ Hdt. 3.68; Ep. opt. πεπύθοιτο Il. 6.50, al. ( subj. πεπύθωνται is f.l. for γε πύθωνται, 7.195 ); 3 pl. πυθοίατο S. OC 921: pf. πέπυσμαι Od. 11.505, etc.; 2 sg. πέπῠσαι Pl. Prt. 310b, Ep. πέπυσσαι Od. 11.494; inf. πεπύσθαι Th. 7.67, etc.; part. πεπυσμένος Pl. Smp. 179e: plpf. ἐπεπύσμην Ar. Pax 615, Av. 470; 3 sg. ἐπέπυστο Il. 13.674, Ep. πέπυστο ib. 521; 3 dual πεπύσθην 17.377: — learn, whether by hearsay or by inquiry ( ἐξιστορήσαντες τὰ ἐβούλοντο πυθέσθαι Hdt. 7.195 ): constr. 1 π. τί τινος learn something from a person, Il. 17.408, Od. 10.537, A. Ag. 599, Ar. Ra. 1417, etc.; also π. τι ἀπό τινος A. Ch. 737; ἐξ ἄλλων S. OC 1266; ἐκ τοῦ παρατυχόντος Th. 1.22; freq. παρά τινος, Hdt. 2.91, etc.; παρ’ ἄλλων (v.l. ἄλλων ) X. Cyr. 4.1.3 .

2. c. acc. rei only, hear or learn a thing, Od. 2.411, A. Ch. 765, Antipho 5.25, etc.: abs., αἰσχρὸν τόδε γ’ ἐστὶ καὶ ἐσσομένοισι πυθέσθαι Il. 2.119, cf. Pi. P. 7.7, etc.; ὡς ἐγὼ πυνθάνομαι Hdt. 1.22, etc.
3. c. gen. objecti, hear or inquire concerning, πυθέσθαι πατρός, ἀγγελιάων, μάχης, Od. 1.281, 2.256, Il. 15.224, cf. S. El. 35, Pl. Lg. 635b .
4. π. τινά τινος inquire about one person of or from another, τὸν ἄνδρα τῶν ὁδοιπόρων Ar. Ach. 204; so π. περί τινος Hdt. 2.75; πᾶσαν πυθέσθαι τῶνδ’ ἀλήθειαν πέρι S. Tr. 91: c. acc. pers. only, inquire about a person, Ar. Th. 619 .
5. c. part., πυθόμην ὁδὸν ὁρμαίνοντα that he was starting, Od. 4.732, cf. Hdt. 9.58, S. Aj. 692; π. τὸ Πλημμύριον ἑαλωκός Th. 7.31, cf. X. An. 1.7.16, etc.; οὔ πω . . πεπύσθην Πατρόκλοιο θανόντος they had not yet heard of his being dead, Il. 17.377, cf. 427, 19.322, A. Ch. 763; ὡς ἐπύθοντο τῆς Πύλου κατειλημμένης Th. 4.6: with acc. rei added, εἰ σφῶϊν τάδε πάντα πυθοίατο μαρναμένοιιν Il. 1.257 .
6. c. acc. et inf., hear or learn that . ., Hdt. 1.62, 5.15, S. Tr. 103 (lyr.), Th. 7.25, etc.
7. folld. by an interrog. clause, ὡς πυθώμεθα ὅπου ποτ’ ἐσμέν S. OC 11; αὐτοῦ π. τί ποτε νοεῖ inquire or learn from him what . ., Pl. La. 196c, cf. X. An. 6.3.25, Plb. 3.107.6; π., ὅτεῳ . . συνοικέει Hdt. 3.68; π. εἰ . . inquire whether . ., S. OC 993, IG 42(1).121.18 (Epid., iv B.C. ); τοῦ ξένου ἡδέως ἂν π., τί ταῦθ’ ἡγοῦντο Pl. Sph. 216d; π. τινῶν, ὅτι . . X. An. 4.6.17; π., ὅπως ἂν κάλλιστα πορευθείη ib. 3.1.7, cf. Cyr. 1.4.7 .

II Act., aor. 1 part. fem. πεύσασα having learned, PMasp. 5.7 (vi A.D.) .

2. v. πεύθω .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πυνθάνομαι; imperfect ἐπυνθανομην; 2 aorist ἐπυθόμην; (cf. Curtius, § 328); a deponent verb; as in classical Greek from Homer down.

1. to inquire, ask: followed by an indirect question — with the indicative Acts 10:18; with the optative, John 13:24 R G; Luke 15:26; Luke 18:36; Acts 21:33; followed by a direct question, Acts 4:7; Acts 10:29; Acts 23:19; παρά τίνος τί (Buttmann, 167 (146)), John 4:52; παρά τίνος followed by an indirect question with the indicative Matthew 2:4; τί περί τίνος, Acts 23:20.
2. to ascertain by inquiry: followed by ὅτι, Acts 23:34 (A. V. understood).

Question 179

τελευτάω

Answer 179

to finish, bring to an end; come to an end; to die

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τελευτ-άω,

fut. -ήσω E. Tr. 1029, etc.: pf. τετελεύτηκα Pl. Men. 75e, al.: — Pass., fut. Med. τελευτήσομαι always in pass. sense, Il. 13.100, Od. 8.510, 9.511, E. Hipp. 370 (lyr.): aor. ἐτελευτήθην Il. 15.74: —

bring to pass, accomplish, ὄφρα.. τελευτήσω τάδε ἔργα Il. 8.9; τ. ἃ μενοινᾷς Od. 2.275; ἐπὴν ταῦτα τελευτήσῃς τε καὶ ἔρξῃς 1.293, cf. 2.306; γάμον τ. 24.126; fulfil an oath or promise, wish or hope, τ. ἐέλδωρ 21.200; τ. ὅσ’ ὑπέστης Il. 13.375; οὐ Ζεὺς ἄνδρεσσι νοήματα πάντα τελευτᾷ 18.328, cf. Od. 3.56, 62; ὅρκια Call. Aet. 3.1.29; τελευτᾶν τινι κακὸν ἦμαρ bring about an evil day for one, Od. 15.524; τ. πόνους Δαναοῖς Pi. P. 1.54, cf. E. Ph. 1581 (lyr.); οἷ τ. λόγον Id. Tr. 1029; τὸ δ’ ἔνθεν ποῖ τελευτῆσαί με χρή; to what end must I bring it? S. OC 476; Ζεὺς ὅ τι νεύσῃ, τοῦτο τελευτᾷ E. Alc. 979 (lyr.), etc.: — Pass., to be fulfilled, come to pass, happen, ll. cc. sub init.; πρίν γε τὸ Πηλεΐδαο τελευτηθῆναι ἐέλδωρ Il. 15.74; πρὶν τελευτηθῇ φόνος E. Or. 1218.

2. finish, σχεδίην.. ἐπηγκενίδεσσι Od. 5.253; ἐπεί ῥ’ ὄμοσέν τε, τελεύτησέν τε τὸν ὅρκον had sworn and completed (made binding) the oath, 2.378, etc.; ἡσύχιμον ἁμέραν τ. close a peaceful day, Pi. O. 2.33; ἄρξομαι ἐκ βολβοῖο τελευτήσω δ’ ἐπὶ θύννον (sc. τὸ δεῖπνον) Pl.Com. 173.6 (hex.).
3. esp. τ. τὸν αἰῶνα finish life, i.e. die, Hdt. 1.32, 9.17, etc.; τ. βίον A. Ag. 929, S. Fr. 646 codd. (sed leg. δρόμον), E. Hec. 419, Pl. Prt. 351b; ὑπ’ ἄλλου τ. τὸν βίον, i.e. to be killed, Id. Lg. 870e: also (after the analogy of παύομαι) c. gen., τελευτᾶν τοῦ ἀνθρωπίνου βίου make an end of life, X. Cyr. 8.7.17; so λόγου τ. Th. 3.59; ἐπαίνου τ. ἐς τάδε ἔπη ib. 104. freq. abs., end life, die, Hdt. 1.66, 3.38, 40, al., Pl. R. 614b, al.; πρὶν τελευτήσαντ’ ἴδῃς before you see him dead, S. Fr. 662; τ. μάχῃ A. Th. 617; νούσῳ Hdt. 1.161; γήραϊ Id. 6.24; τ. ὑπό τινος die by another’s hand or means, ib. 92; δόλῳ ὑπό τινος Id. 4.78; ὑπὸ αἰχμῆς σιδηρέης Id. 1.39; ὑπ’ ἀλλαλοφόνοις χερσίν A. Th. 930 (lyr.); ἐκ τῆς πληγῆς Pl. Lg. 877b; of animals, Arist. PA 667b11, PMich.Zen. 67.25 (iii B.C.).

II intr. (as always in Prose, except in signf. 1.3a):

1 to be accomplished, λόγων κορυφαί Pi. O. 7.68 (as v.l. for τελεύταθεν) ; ἐλπίδες E. Ba. 908 (lyr.).

2. come to an end, A. Ag. 635, etc.: esp. of Time, τελευτῶντος τοῦ μηνός, τοῦ θέρους, Th. 2.4, 32, etc.: of actions, events, etc., τ. ἡ ναυμαχία ἐς νύκτα Id. 1.51, etc. with words indicating the kind of end or outcome, ἢν ὁ πόλεμος κατὰ νόον τ. Hdt. 9.45, cf. 7.47; εὖ τ. A. Supp. 211; πτωχοὶ τ. end by being beggars, Pl. R. 552c; οὕτως τ. Th. 1.110, 138; τ. ἔς τι come to a certain end, issue in, αἱ εὐτυχίαι ἐς τοῦτο ἐτελεύτησαν Hdt. 3.125; τ. ἐς τὠυτὸ γράμμα end in the same letter, Id. 1.139, cf. Th. 2.51, 4.48, Pl. R. 618a; εἰς ἄνδρας ἐκ μειρακίων τ. Id. Tht. 173b; ποῖ (ἐς τί) τελευτᾶν (φασι); came to what end? A. Pers. 735 (troch.), cf. Ch. 528, Pl. Lg. 630b; also τ. ἐπί τι Id. R. 510d, Smp. 211c.
3. die, v. supr. 1.3b.
4. the part. τελευτῶν, ῶσα, ῶν, is used with Verbs like an Adv., to finish with, at the end, at last, as τελευτῶν ἔλεγε Hdt. 3.75; κἂν ἐγίγνετο πληγὴ τελευτῶσα there would have been a fray to finish with, S. Ant. 261; τελευτῶν.. ἐξεβλήθη Ar. Eq. 524 (anap.); τὰς ὀλοφύρσεις τελευτῶντες ἐξέκαμνον at last they got tired of mourning, Th. 2.51, cf. 47; ἢν δέῃ τελευτῶντα τὴν στρωμνὴν ἐξαργυρῶσαι Id. 8.81; sts. with another part., τὴν τυραννίδα χαλεπὴν τελευτῶσαν γενομένην having at last become.., Th. 6.53, cf. Pl. Phdr. 228b; πόλεις ἐπάγοντες καὶ τελευτῶντες Λακεδαιμονίους Lys. 12.60.
5. of local limits and the like, μέχρι Σολόεντος ἄκρης, ἣ τελευτᾷ τῆς Λιβύης Hdt. 2.32; τελευτῶντος τοῦ Λαβυρίνθου ἔχεται πυραμίς ib. 148; τῇ ἡ Κνιδίη χώρη ἐς τὴν ἤπειρον τ. Id. 1.174, cf. 2.33, 4.39, IG 12.900, Pl. Men. 75e.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τελευτάω, τελεύτω; 1 aorist ἐτελεύτησα; perfect participle τετελευτηκώς (John 11:39 L T Tr WH); (τελευτή; from Homer down;

1. transitive, to finish; to bring to an end or close: τόν βίον, to finish life, to die, often from Aesehyl. and Herodotus down.
2. intransitive (cf. Buttmann, § 130, 4) to have an end or close, come to an end; hence, to die, very often so from Aeschylus and Herodotus down (the Sept. for מוּת), and always in the N. T.: Matthew 2:19; Matthew 9:18; Matthew 22:25; Mark 9:41, 46 ((these two vss. T WH omit; Tr brackets)),48; Luke 7:2; John 11:39 L T Tr WH; Acts 2:29; Acts 7:15; Hebrews 11:22; θανάτῳ τελευτάτω (in imitation of the Hebrew יוּמָת מות, Exodus 21:12, 15-17,etc.) (A. V. let him die the death i. e.) let him surely die (Winers Grammar, 339 (319); Buttmann, § 133, 22), Matthew 15:4; Mark 7:10.

Question 180

ὑπαντάω

Answer 180

I meet, go to meet

Thayer’s Definition
to go to meet, to meet
in military reference
of a hostile meeting

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑπαντ-άω, Ion. ὑπαντ-έω APl. 4.101: fut. -ήσομαι J. AJ 1.20.1, A.D. Synt. 149.15, S.E. M. 10.61: aor. -ήντησα Plu. Arat. 34, Dor. -άντᾱσα Pi. P. 8.59: — come or go to meet, either as a friend, X. Cyr. 3.3.2; or in arms, ib. 1.4.22, 4.2.17; εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς ὑ. Hyp. Eux. 22, cf. SIG 798.21 (Cyzicus, i A. D.); ὑ. τινί Pi. l. c., X. Cyr. 6.3.15, Matthew 8:28, etc.; ὑ. τῇ πόλει πρὸς τὴν χρείαν Plu. l. c.; πρὸς τὸ [βῆμα ] POxy. 1630.15 (iii A. D.): also c. gen., ἀνδρῶν ἀγαθῶν παιδὸς ὑ. S. Ph. 719 (anap., s. v. l.): — in App. BC 5.45, the acc. ὄντα (sic codd., ὄντι Schweigh., Mendelss.) refers to σε κατιόντα ὁρῶν just before: — later in Med., ὑπαντώμενος αὐτοῖς Hdn. 2.5.5, cf. 3.11.3, 5.4.5, etc.

2. meet, encounter, of a heavenly body, Ptol. Tetr. 132.

II metaph., meet, i. e. agree to, ταῖς τιμαῖς Posidon. 36 J.; present oneself at, τῇ ἀποδόσει Sammelb. 6.23 (iii A. D.); πρὸς τὴν ἀπόδοσιν BGU 614.23 (iii A.D.).

2. meet, i.e. reply or object to, τοῖς ἐμοῖς βουλεύμασι E. Supp. 398 (s. v.l., v. cross ὕπαντα) ; πρός τινα or τι S.E. M. 10.105, etc.; πρός τι ὑ. ὡς.. A.D. Synt. 265.4: abs., εὐαρεστήσεως ὑπαντησομένης come in response, ensue, Herod. Med. in Rh.Mus. 58.85, cf. 100.
3. occur to one, τῷ ῥήτορι Longin. 16.4.
4. fall in with, ἀνωμαλίᾳ S.E. M. 1.6; correspond with, A.D. Conj. 232.23.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑπαντάω, ὑπάντω: 1 aorist ὑπήντησα; to go to meet, to meet: τίνι, Matthew 8:28; Luke 8:27; John 11:20, 30; John 12:18; also L T Tr WH in Mark 5:2; John 4:51; and T Tr WH in Matthew 28:9; Acts 16:16; (and T in Luke 17:12 (so WH marginal reading but without the dative)); in a military reference, of a hostile meeting: Luke 14:31 L T Tr WH. (Pindar, Sophocles, Euripides, Xenophon, Josephus, Plutarch, Herodian, others.)

Question 181

χείρων

Answer 181

worse, more severe

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
χείρων, ὁ, ἡ,

neut. χεῖρον, gen. -ονος, acc. -ονα: nom. and acc. pl. χείρονες, -ας, χείρονα, contr. in Att. Prose χείρους, χείρω; dat. χείροσι, poet. χειρόνεσσι Pi. N. 8.22: — (for form χερείων, poet. χειρότερος, χερειότερος, v. sub vocc.): — irreg. Comp. of κακός: (χείρων from Χερ-ψων, cf. χερείων):

I of persons, mcaner, inferior, either in bodily strength and bravery, or in rank, opp. ἀρείων, Il. 10.238, Od. 20.133; σὺ μὲν ἐσθλὸς ἐγὼ δὲ σέθεν πολὺ χείρων Il. 20.434; τοῦ γένετ’ ἐκ πατρὸς πολὺ χείρονος υἱὸς ἀμείνων 15.641, cf. Od. 20.82; ἦ πολὺ χείρονες ἄνδρες ἀμύμονος ἀνδρὸς ἄκοιτιν μνῶνται 21.325; opp. κρείσσων, Pi. I. 4(3).34(52); τὸν ὄλβιον τόν τε χ. E. Ba. 422 (lyr.); τὰ χείρονα S. Fr. 192, E. Supp. 196.

2. later in moral sense, worse than others, sts. almost like a positive, knave, opp. ἀγαθός, S. Ph. 456, cf. Th. 3.9, Lys. 16.3; οἱ πένητες καὶ οἱ δημόται καὶ οἱ χ. X. Ath. 1.4, cf. 3.10; οἱ χ., opp. οἱ ἀγαθοί, Pl. R. 460c, etc. χ. βίος, opp. ἀμείνων, ib. 618d; γνώμη X. Cyr. 8.8.7.
3. worse in quality, inferior, of horses, Il. 23.572: inferior, less skilful, ἰητροί Hp. Acut. 6; ζωγράφοι, δημιουργοί, etc., Pl. Cra. 429a, R. 421e, etc.: χ. εἰς σοφίαν, εἰς τὴν ἀρετήν, Id. Tht. 162c, R. 335b; πρὸς ἀλήθειαν Luc. JTr. 48; c. acc., χ. τὰ πολεμικά X. Cyr. 8.8.20; χ. τὴν ψυχήν, τὴν διάνοιαν, Aeschin. 3.46. Isoc. 11.43; τὰ ἄλλα μηδὲν χ. Id. 4.105; c. inf., χ. ἡμῶν ταῦτα ποιεῖν X. Cyr. 2.1.16; οὐδὲν χείρους ἔσεσθε.. ἀκηκοότες you will be none the worse for having heard.., D. 24.139; less kind, μὴ χ. περὶ ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς εἶναι.. τῶν ὑπαρχόντων Id. 2.2.

II of things, inferior in quality, ἄεθλον Il. 23.413; ὑποδήματα X. Oec. 13.10; ὄνομα Pl. Cra. 429b.

2. worse, harder, more severe, νόσος E. Andr. 220; μοῖρα Pl. Phdr. 248e; τιμωρία Hebrews 10:29.

III neut.,

1 as a Subst., τὸ χ. inferiority, Polem. Call. 27; but mostly in phrases with Preps., ἐπὶ τὸ χ. τρέπεσθαι, κλῖναι, fall off, get worse, X. Cyr. 8.8.2, Mem. 3.5.13; ἐπὶ τὸ χ. μεταβάλλει ἑαυτόν Pl. R. 381b; ἀλλοιοῦσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ χ., opp. ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον, Thphr. CP 6.3.3; also πάντα ὑποπτεύοντες ἐπὶ τὸ χ. putting the worst construction on.. D.H. 6.85; λαμβάνειν τι ἐπὶ τὸ χ. J. AJ 16.7.4; also πρὸς τὸ χ. μεταβάλλειν D.S. 20.57; κατὰ τὸ χ. Pl. Lg. 720e; in the lower sense, opp. κατὰ τὸ κρεῖττον, Dam. Proverbs 7:1-27 : less freq. in pl., ἐπὶ τὰ χείρω ἰέναι X. Mem. 3.9.9; τὰ χ. προαιρεῖσθαι Isoc. 8.110.

2. as a predicate, ἀλλὰ σοὶ αὐτῷ χ. (sc. ἐστί or ἔσται) Od. 15.515, cf. X. An. 7.6.4; with a neg., οὐ χ. [ἐστι ] c. inf., we may as well, Pl. Phd. 105a, Arist. EN 1127a14; simply οὐ χεῖρον, in an answer, it is as well, Ar. Eq. 37; λάβ’, ὦγάθ’· οὐδὲν χ. Clearch.Com. 4.
3. as Adv., worse, χ. βουλεύσασθαι Th. 3.46, cf. 6.89; χ. πρᾶξαι Id. 7.67; βιῶναι, ζῆν, Pl. R. 344e, 519d. in inferior degree, less, ἀγαπᾶν Id. Lg. 928a; φυλακὰς χ. φυλαττομένας X. HG 6.2.17, etc. Sup. χείριστος, η, ον, worst, Pl. Plt. 303a, etc.; ὁ χ., opp. ὁ βέλτιστος, Lys. 1.2; esp. οἱ χ. men of lowest degrce, X. Mem. 1.2.32. Adv. χείριστα Arist. PA 687a24, Metaph. 1083b2 (dub. 1.); also -τως LXX 2 Maccabees 7:39.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
χειρῶν, χεῖρον (comparitive of κακός; derived from the obsolete χερης, which has been preserved in the dative χερηι, accusative χερηα, plural χερεης, χερηα; cf. Alexander Buttmann (1873) Ausf. Spr. i., p. 268 (cf. Ebeling, Lex. Homer under the word χερης) (from Homer down), worse: Matthew 9:16; Matthew 27:64; Mark 2:21; γίνεται τά ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων, Matthew 12:45; Luke 11:26; 2 Peter 2:20; εἰς τό χεῖρον ἔρχεσθαι (to grow worse), of one whose illness increases, Mark 5:26; ἵνα μή χεῖρον σοι τί γένηται, lest some worse thing befall thee, John 5:14; πόσῳ χειρῶν τιμωρία (A. V. how much sorer punishment), Hebrews 10:29; ἐπί τό χεῖρον προκόπτειν ((A. V. wax worse and worse); see προκόπτω, 2), 2 Timothy 3:13; of the moral character, σπιστου χειρῶν, 1 Timothy 5:8.

Question 182

ἀπολύτρωσις

Answer 182

redemption

Thayer’s Definition
a releasing effected by payment of ransom
redemption, deliverance
liberation procured by the payment of a ransom

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀπολύτρ-ωσις, εως, ἡ,

I ransoming, αἰχμαλώτων Plu. Pomp. 24 (pl.), cf. J. AJ 12.2.3, Ph. 2.463.

II redemption by payment of ransom, deliverance, Luke 21:28, Romans 3:24, al.; of Nebuchadnezzar’s recovery, LXX Daniel 4:30 c; in NT, redemption, Romans 3:24,al.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀπολύτρωσις, ἀπολυτρώσεως, ἡ (from ἀπολυτρόω signifying a. to redeem one by paying the price, cf. λύτρον: Plutarch, Pomp. 24; the Sept. Exodus 21:8; Zephaniah 3:1;

b. to let one go free on receiving the price: Plato, legg. 11, p. 919a.; Polybius 22, 21, 8; (cf.) Diodorus 13, 24), “a releasing effected by payment of ransom; redemption, deliverance, liberation procured by the payment of a ransom”;
1. properly: πόλεων αἰχμαλώτων, Plutarch, Pomp. 24 (the only passage in secular writings where the word has as yet been noted; (add, Josephus, Antiquities 12, 2, 3; Diodorus fragment l. xxxvii. 5, 3, p. 149, 6 Dindorf; Philo, quod omn. prob. book § 17)).
2. everywhere in the N. T. metaphorically, viz. deliverance effected through the death of Christ from the retributive wrath of a holy God and the merited penalty of sin: Romans 3:24; Ephesians 1:7; Colossians 1:14 (cf. ἐξαγοράζω, ἀγοράζω, λυτρόω, etc. (and Trench, § lxxvii.)); ἀπολύτρωσιν τῶν … παραβάσεων deliverance from the penalty of transgressions, effected through their expiation, Hebrews 9:15 (cf. Delitzsch at the passage and Fritzsche on Romans, vol. ii., p. 178); ἡμέρα ἀπολυτρώσεως, the last day, when consummate liberation is experienced from the sin still lingering even in the regenerate, and from all the ills and troubles of this life, Ephesians 4:30; in the same sense the word is apparently to be taken in 1 Corinthians 1:30 (where Christ himself is said to be redemption, i. e. the author of redemption, the one without whom we could have none), and is to be taken in the phrase ἀπολύτρωσιν τῆς περιποιήσεως, Ephesians 1:14, the redemption which will come to his possession, or to the men who are God’s own through Christ (cf. Meyer at the passage); τοῦ σώματος, deliverance of the body from frailty and mortality, Romans 8:23 (Winer’s Grammar, 187 (176)); deliverance from the hatred and persecutions of enemies by the return of Christ from heaven, Luke 21:28, cf. Luke 18:7f; deliverance or release from torture, Hebrews 11:35.

Question 183

ἀφαιρέω

Answer 183

I take away

Thayer’s Definition
to take from, take away, remove, carry off
to cut off

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀφαιρ-έω, Ion. ἀπαιρέω, fut. -ήσω: pf. ἀφῄρηκα, Ion. ἀπαραίρηκα: aor. ἀφεῖλον, later inf. ἀφέλαι GDI 4940.35 (Cret.); ἀφῄρησα Gal. 11.121: —

I

1. take away from: — Constr.: mostly ἀ. τί τινι, σῖτον μέν σφιν ἀφεῖλε took it from him, Od. 14.455, cf. A. Eu. 360 codd., etc. (but also, relieve one of a duty, X. Cyr. 7.1.44): less freq. ἀ. τί τινος Ar. Pax 560, X. Lac. 4.7; κῆρα χώρας A. Th. 777 (lyr.); ἔκ τινος Id. Eu. 444; also τινά τι prob. l. ib. 360, S. Ph. 933, v. infr. II. I, III: c. gen., take from, τιμῆς οὔτ’ ἀφελὼν οὔτ’ ἐπορεξάμενος Song of Solomon 5:2; μηδὲν ἀφαιρῶμεν τοῦ ἀδίκου (from the unjust man) ἀπὸ τῆς ἀδικίας Pl. R. 360e; τοῦ πλήθους diminish the number, X. Vect. 4.4: c. acc. only, ἀπελὼν τὰ ἄχθεα having taken them off, Hdt. 1.80; βασιλέων.. ὀργὰς ἀφῄρουν took away, E. Med. 455, cf. Ar. Pl. 22, Ra. 518.
2. set aside, κρέα SIG 1044.41 (Halic., iv B. C.). exclude, separate, τὸ Ἑλληνικὸν ὡς ἓν ἀπὸ πάντων ἀφαιροῦντες χωρίς Pl. Plt. 262d; opp. προστιθέναι, Id. Phd. 95e, etc.
3. Math., ἀ. ἀπὸ.. subtract from, Euc. Ax. 3 (Pass.), etc.; of ratios, divide out from both sides of an equation, Apollon. Perg. 1.41 (Pass.); intercept, in Pass., Procl. Hyp. 2.27.
4. in Logic, abstract, c. acc., Arist. APo. 74a37, al.: abs., Id. Metaph. 1030a33.

II Med., fut. ἀφαιρήσομαι (in pass. sense, v.l. for ἀπαιρε-θήσεσθαι, Hdt. 5.35, cf. Antipho Fr. 57), later ἀφελοῦμαι Timostr. 5, Plb. 3.29.7: aor. ἀφειλόμην, later ἀφειλάμην Ph. 2.586, D.C. 41.63, cf. Phryn. 116: pf. ἀφῄρημαι (in med. sense) X. Cyr. 7.5.79 (spelt ἀφείρ- Sammelb. 4309 (iii B. C.)): —

1. from Hom. downwds. more freq. than Act., take away for oneself; also in reciprocal sense, ἀφαιρεῖσθον τύχην ye have received each the fortune of the other, E. El. 928: — Constr. like Act., ἀφαιρεῖσθαί τί τινι, as καὶ δή μοι γέρας.. ἀφαιρήσεσθαι ἀπειλεῖς Il. 1.161; τί τινος 5.673, 691, 9.335, Th. 3.58, Lys. 24.13, etc. (also τεύχεα.. ὤμοιϊν ἀφελέσθαι Il. 13.510); τι πρός τινος E. Tr. 1034; τι ἀπό τινος Ar. V. 883; ἔκ τινος X. Cyn. 12.9: c. dupl. acc. rei et pers., bereave or deprive of, μήτε σὺ τόνδ’.. ἀποαίρεο κούρην Il. 1.275, cf. Hdt. 1.71, 7.104; freq. in Att. and Trag., Lys. l. c., Th. 8.74, D. 20.46, etc.; τέκνα ἀ. τινά E. Andr. 613, cf. Ar. Ach. 464: rarely c. acc. pers. et gen. rei, ἀ. τὰς κύνας τοῦ εὑρεῖν X. Cyn. 6.4; τῆς ἀρχῆς τινά Plu. Ant. 60; τὴν Ἀμαζόνα τοῦ ζωστῆρος Paus. 5.10.9.
2. c. acc. rei, ἀ. ψήφισμα cancel or rescind, And. 2.24; ἀφελομένης τῆς νυκτὸς τὸ ἔργον having broken off the action, Th. 4.134; ἕως κελαινῆς νυκτὸς ὄμμ’ ἀφείλετο A. Pers. 428: abs., μέχρι σκότος ἀφείλετο (sc. τὴν δίωξιν) X. HG 1.2.16; ἀ. τὴν μνήμην πολλῶν ἀγαθῶν D. 22.13.
3. folld. by μή c. inf., prevent, hinder from doing, τί μ’ ἄνδρα.. ἀφείλου μὴ κτανεῖν; S. Ph. 1303, cf. E. Tr. 1146; κἄκτεινας, ἤ τις συμφορά σ’ ἀφείλετο [μὴ κτεῖναι ]; Id. Andr. 913; c. inf. Pass., τὸν τὰ ὕστερον ἀφείλετο ἀδικήματα εὐεργέτην μὴ ὀνομασθῆναι Paus. 8.52.2; c. inf. only, Pi. I. 1.62: simply, obstruct, ἀρχήν Pl. Lg. 958c.
4. ἀ. τινὰ εἰς ἐλευθερίαν, Lat. vindicare in libertatem, claim as free, Pl. Lg. 914e, Isoc. 12.97, D. 58.19, cf. Lys. 23.10, Aeschin. 1.62.

III Pass., fut. -αιρεθήσομαι E. Hel. 938; -ήσομαι Antipho Fr. 57: pf. ἀφῄρημαι, Ion. ἀπαραίρημαι Hdt. 7.159, etc.: — 1. to be robbed or deprived of a thing, τι A. Ch. 962 (lyr.), Hdt. 3.137, etc.; τι πρός or ὑπό τινος, Id. 1.70, 3.65, 7.159; ἀφῃρέθην τὰ ἐνέχυρα ὑπό τινος D. 47.41; ἐκ χερῶν ἀφῃρέθην had them taken out of my hands, E. Tr. 486: c. inf., ἀφῃρέθη Σκίρωνος ἀκτὰς ὄμμα τοὐμὸν εἰσορᾶν was deprived of, hindered from seeing them, Id. Hipp. 1207: less freq. μηδὲν τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὄγκου ἀφαιρεθέντος ἀλλὰ σοῦ αὐξηθέντος Pl. Tht. 155b.

2. ὁ ἀφαιρεθείς, in Law, the person from whom a slave has been claimed, Id. Lg. 915a.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀφαιρέω, ἀφαίρω; future ἀφαιρήσω (Revelation 22:19 Rec. (from Erasmus, apparently on no Ms. authority; see Tdf.’s note)), and ἀφελῶ (ibid. G L T Tr WH; on this rarer future cf. Alexander Buttmann (1873) Ausf. Spr. ii., p. 100); 2 aorist ἀφεῖλον; 1 future passive ἀφαιρεθήσομαι; middle, present ἀφαιροῦμαι; 2 aorist ἀφειλομην; (see αἱρέω); in Greek writings from Homer down; to take from, take away, remove, carry off: τί, Luke 1:25; to cut off, τό ὠτίον, Matthew 26:51; Mark 14:47 (L T Tr WH τό ὠτάριον); Luke 22:50 (τό οὖς) (τήν κεφαλήν τίνος, 1 Macc. 7:47; for כָּרַת, 1 Samuel 17:51); to take away, τί ἀπό with the genitive of a thing, Revelation 22:19; τί ἀπό with the genitive of person Luke 10:42 (T WH omit; L Tr brackets ἀπό) (Genesis 31:31; Job 36:7; Proverbs 4:16 (Alex.), etc.); middle (properly, to take away or bear off for oneself), Luke 16:3 (Leviticus 4:10; Micah 2:8; in Greek writings with a simple genitive for ἀπό τίνος); ἀφαιρεῖν τάς ἁμαρτίας to take away siins, of victims expiating them, Hebrews 10:4 (Jeremiah 11:15; Sir. 47:11); middle of God putting out of his sight, remembering no more, the sins committed by men, i. e., granting pardon for sins (see ἁμαρτία, 2 a.): Romans 11:27.

Question 184

δικαίωμα

Answer 184

regulation, righteous deed

Thayer’s Definition
that which has been deemed right so as to have force of law
what has been established, and ordained by law, an ordinance
a judicial decision, sentence
of God
either the favourable judgment by which he acquits man and declares them acceptable to Him
unfavourable: sentence of condemnation
a righteous act or deed

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δῐκαί-ωμα, ατος, τό,

I

1. act of right, opp. ἀδίκημα, Arist. Rh. 1359a25; duty, τὰ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους δ. Ph. 2.199; prop. amendment of a wrong, opp. δικαιοπράγημα, Arist. EN 1135a13: hence, judgement, penalty, Pl. Lg. 864e. justification, plea of right, Th. 1.41, Isoc. 6.25, Arist. Cael. 279b9, LXX 2 Kings 19:28(29), PLond. 2.360.8 (ii A. D.), etc.; δικαιώματα Ἑλληνίδων πόλεων, compiled by Arist. for Philip, Harp. s.v. Δρύμος. pl., pleadings, documents in a suit, OGI 13.13 (Samos), PLille 29.25 (iii B. C.), etc.; also, credentials, BGU 113.10 (ii A. D.), al. act of δικαίὠσις 1.3, Romans 5:16.

II ordinance, decree, LXX Genesis 26:5, Exodus 15:26 (pl.), al., Romans 1:32, Romans 2:26 (pl.), al.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δικαίωμα, δικαιώματος, τό (from δικαιόω; ὁ δεδικαίωται or τό δεδικαιωμενον), the Sept. very often for חֹק, חֻקָה, and מִשְׁפָּט; for מִצְוָה, Deuteronomy 30:16; 1 Kings 2:3; plural occasionally for פִּקּוּדִים;

1. that which has been deemed right so as to have the force of law;
   a. what has been established and ordained by law, an ordinance: universally, of an appointment of God having the force of law, Romans 1:32; plural used of the divine precepts of the Mosaic law: τοῦ κυρίου, Luke 1:6; τοῦ νόμου, Romans 2:26; τό δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου, collectively, of the (moral) precepts of the same law, Romans 8:4; δικαιώματα λατρείας, precepts concerning the public worship of God, Hebrews 9:1; δικαιώματα σαρκός, laws respecting bodily purity ((?) cf. Hebrews 7:16), Hebrews 9:10.
   b. a judicial decision, sentence; of God — either the favorable judgment by which he acquits men and declares them acceptable to him, Romans 5:16; or unfavorable: sentence of condemnation, Revelation 15:4, (punishment, Plato, legg. 9, 864 e.).
2. a righteous act or deed: τά δικαιώματα τῶν ἁγίων, Revelation 19:8 (τῶν πατέρων, Baruch 2:19); ἑνός δικαίωμα, the righteous act of one (Christ) in his giving himself up to death, opposed to the first sin of Adam, Romans 5:18 (Aristotle, eth. Nic. 5, 7, 7, p. 1135{a}, 12f καλεῖται δέ μᾶλλον δικαιοπράγημα τό κοινόν, δικαίωμα δέ τό ἐπανόρθωμα τοῦ ἀδικηματος (cf. rhet. 1, 13, 1 and Cope’s note on 1, 3, 9)). (Cf. references in δικαιόω.)

Question 185

ἔννατος / ἔνατος

Answer 185

ninth

Thayer’s Definition
ninth
the ninth hour corresponds to our 3 o’clock in the afternoon for the sixth hour of the Jews coincides with the twelfth of the day as divided by our method, and the first hour of the day is 6 A.M. to us

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἔνατος, see ἔννατος.

STRONGS NT 1766: ἔννατος ἔννατος or ἔνατος (which latter form, supported by the authority alike of manuscripts and of insert., has been everywhere restored by L T Tr WH; cf. (under Nu; Tdf. Proleg., p. 80); Krüger, § 24, 2,12; Winer’s Grammar, 43; (found once (Revelation 21:20) in Rec.st)), ἐννάτῃ, ἐννατον (from Homer down), ninth: Revelation 21:20; the ἐνάτῃ ὥρα, spoken of in Matthew 20:5; Matthew 27:45; Mark 15:33; Luke 23:44; Acts 3:1; Acts 10:3, 30, corresponds to our 3 o’clock in the afternoon; for the sixth hour of the Jews coincides with the twelfth of the day as divided by our method, and the first hour of the day with them is the same as the sixth with us. (Cf. BB. DD., under the word, Hour.)

Question 186

ἐπιτελέω

Answer 186

to accomplish, complete, bring to an end; to bring to perfection, to perfect; to execute, perform; to celebrate; passive: to be perfected
~~~

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐπιτελ-έω,

I fut. -τελῶ SIG 229.17 (Erythrae, iv B.C.), Dor. 3 pl. fut. -τελεσσεῦντι Annuario 4 /5.225.27 (Rhodes, ii B.C.), 3 pl. pf. -τετελέκαντι SIG 1158.3 (Delph., iii B.C.): —

1. complete, finish, accomplish, ἐ. τὰ ἐπιτασσόμενα Hdt. 1.115, cf. 51, 90; τὰς ἐντολάς ib. 157; τὸν προκείμενον ἄεθλον ib. 126; ἀποδείξιας Archyt. 4; ἐ. ἔργῳ ἃ ἂν γνῶσιν Th. 1.70; ταῦτα τοῖς ἔργοις ἐ. Isoc. 2.38; πόλεμον Plb. 1.65.2; esp. of the fulfilment of oracles, visions, etc., Hdt. 1.13 (Pass.), al.; εὐχήν ib. 86; ἃ ὑπέσχετο Th. 1.138: — Med., τὴν κρίσιν ἐπιτελέσασθαι get it completed, Pl. Phlb. 27c; καλὴν καὶ σεμνὴν πρᾶξιν -τετελεσμένος Plb. 15.22.1: — Pass., ὅπως ἂν ἡ εἰρήνη ἐπιτελεσθῇ that it may be brought to pass, Decr. ap. D. 18.29; of movements, Hero Aut. 19.5; [ παθήματα ] τῇ ἀδελφότητι ἐ. 1 Peter 5:9.
2. bring to perfection, τὴν γένεσιν Arist. GA 741b5, cf. HA 539a33: — Pass., Id. GA 758b26.
3. Pass. in Logic, of a syllogism, to be made perfect, by reduction to the first figure, Id. APr. 28a5, 41b4.

II

1. discharge a religious duty, θυσίας Hdt. 2.63, Thphr. ap. Porph. Abst. 2.16, Inscr.Prien. 108.27 (ii B.C.); τὰ νομιζόμενα τοῖς θεοῖς PAmh. 2.35.50 (ii B.C.); νηστείας καὶ ὁρτάς Hdt. 4.186; λατρείας Hebrews 9:6 (so in Med., εὐωχίαν ἐπετελέσατο Inscr.Prien. 113.61 (i B.C.)): abs., sacrifice, τινί Ael. VH 12.61.
2. celebrate, τὴν τοῦ Κυνὸς ἐ. ἐπιτολήν Olymp. in Mete. 113.14.

III pay in full, ἀποφορήν Hdt. 2.109; πεντακόσια τάλαντα βασιλέϊ τὸν ἐπέτειον φόρον Id. 5.49, cf. 82, 84; ἐπιμήνια Id. 8.41: metaph. in Med., ἐπιτελεῖσθαι τὰ τοῦ γήρως to have to pay, be subject to, the burdens of old age, X. Mem. 4.8.8; ἐ. θάνατον have to pay the debt of death, Id. Ap. 33: — Pass., ἡ δίκη.. τοῦ φόνου.. ἐκ Μαρδονίου ἐπετελέετο was paid in full by.., Hdt. 9.64. impose upon, ἀσεβείας δίκην τινί Pl. Lg. 910d.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπιτελέω, ἐπιτελῶ; future ἐπιτελέσω; 1 aorist ἐπετελεσα; (present middle and passive ἐπιτελοῦμαι);

1. to bring to an end, accomplish, perfect, execute, complete: substantively, τό ἐπιτελέσαι, 2 Corinthians 8:11; τί, Luke 13:32 (R G); Romans 15:28; 2 Corinthians 7:1; 2 Corinthians 8:6, 11; Philippians 1:6; Hebrews 8:5; τάς λατρείας, to perform religious services, discharge religious rites, Hebrews 9:6 (similarly in secular writings, as θρησκείας, Herodotus 2, 37; ὁρτας, 4, 186; θυσίαν, θυσίας, 2, 63; 4, 26; Herodian, 1. 5, 4 (2 edition, Bekker); λειτουργίας, Philo de som. i. § 37). Middle (in Greek writings to take upon oneself: τά τοῦ γήρως, the burdens of old age, Xenophon, mem. 4, 8, 8; θάνατον, Xenophon, Apology 33; with the force of the act.: τί, Polybius 1, 40, 16; 2, 58, 10) to make an end for oneself, i. e. to leave off (cf. παύω): τῇ σαρκί, so as to give yourselves up to the flesh, stop with, rest in it, Galatians 3:3 (others take it passively here: are ye perfected in etc., cf. Meyer).
2. to appoint to, impose upon: τίνι παθήματα, in passive 1 Peter 5:9 (τήν δίκην, Plato, legg. 10 at the end).

Question 187

κἀκεῖθεν

Answer 187

and from there; and then

Thayer's Definition
of place
and from thence, and thence
of time
and thereafter, and afterward

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κἀκεῖθεν (Griesbach κἀκεῖθεν; see κἀγώ and references) (by crasis from καί and ἐκεῖθεν (cf. Winers Grammar, § 5, 3; Buttmann, 10; especially Tdf. Proleg. 96f)); Latinet inde;

a. of place, and from thence, and thence: Mark 9:30 (R G καί ἐκεῖθεν); Mark 10:1 (L T Tr WH καί ἐκεῖθεν; Luke 11:53 T Tr text WH); Acts 7:4; Acts 14:26; Acts 16:12 (ἐκεῖθεν τί R G); (L T Tr WH ἐκεῖθεν); .
b. of time, and thereafter, and afterward (cf. Bornem. Scholia in Luc., p. 90f): Acts 13:21.

Question 188

ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε

Answer 188

this

Thayer’s Definition
this one here, these things, as follows, thus

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε,

demonstr. Pron., this, formed by adding the enclit. -δε to the old demonstr. Pron. ὁ, ἡ, τό, and declined like it through all cases: dat. pl. τοῖσδεσσι, τοῖσδεσσιν, as well as τοῖσδε, Il. 10.462, Od. 2.47, al.; and τοῖσδεσι 10.268, 21.93; τοῖσδεσιν Democr. 175; τοισίδε Hdt. 1.32, al.: Aeol. gen. pl. τῶνδεων Alc. 126: Arg. gen. pl. τωνδεωνήν (= τῶνδεων ἤν) Mnemos. 57.208 (vi B. C.): nom. pl. neut. ταδήν ibid., IG 4.506.1; ταδή Sch. Ar. Ach. 744: — ὅδε, like οὗτος, is opp. ἐκεῖνος, to designate what is nearer as opp. to what is more remote; but ὅδε refers more distinctly to what is present, to what can be seen or pointed out, though this distinction is sts. not observed, e.g. ξύμπας Ἀχαιῶν λαός, ἐν δὲ τοῖσδ’ ἐγώ S. Ph. 1243 (v.l. τοῖς), cf. Ant. 449, and on the other hand, ἦ τόνδε φράζεις; — τοῦτον, ὅνπερ εἰσορᾷς Id. OT 1120: the forms ὁδί, ἡδί, etc. [ῑ], are freq. in Com. and Oratt., but are not used in Trag.: the ῑ may be separated from the ὅδε by the adversative δέ, as τὸν μὲν.., τηνδεδί Ar. Av. 18, cf. Ec. 989.

I

1. of Place, to point out what is present or before one, Ἕκτορος ἥδε γυνή this is, or here is, the wife of Hector, Il. 6.460: very freq. in Trag., ἀκτὴ μὲν ἥδε Λήμνου S. Ph. I, cf. E. Tr. 4, Ion 5, Hel. I, HF 4, Ba. 1; in Com., ἐγὼ σιωπῶ τῷδε; Ar. Ra. 1134, etc.; and in Prose, ὧν Θεόδωρος εἷς ὅδε Pl. Tht. 164e; of what belongs to this world, Id. Phdr. 250a, Smp. 211c.
2. with Verbs of action, = here, ἀνδρί, ὅστις ὅδε κρατέει who holds sway here, Il. 5.175; ἔγχος μὲν τόδε κεῖται ἐπὶ χθονός here it lies, 20.345, cf. 21.533, Od. 1.185, etc.; ἥδ’ ἡ κορώνη.. λέγει the crow here.., v.l. in Ar. Av. 23: freq. in Trag., esp. to indicate the entrance of a person on the stage, καὶ μὴν Ἐτεοκλῆς.. ὅδε χωρεῖ here comes.., E. Ph. 443, cf. S. OT 297, 531, 632, OC 32, 549; f.l. in E. Heracl. 80.
3. with a pers. Pron., ὅδ’ ἐγὼ.. ἤλυθον here am I come, Od. 16.205; ἡμεῖς οἵδε περιφραζώμεθα let us here.., 1.76; δῶρα δ’ ἐγὼν ὅδε.. παρασχέμεν here am I [ready] to provide.., Il. 19.140: with a pr. n., ὅδ’ εἰμ’ Ὀρέστης E. Or. 380: with αὐτός, ὅδ’ αὐτὸς ἐγώ Od. 21.207, 24.321.
4. also with τίς and other interrog. words, τίς δ’ ὅδε Ναυσικάᾳ ἕπεται; who is this following her? 6.276, cf. 1.225; τί κακὸν τόδε πάσχετε; what is this evil ye are suffering? 20.351; πρὸς ποῖον ἂν τόνδ’.. ἔπλει; S. Ph. 572, cf. 1204.
5. in Trag. dialogue, ὅδε and ὅδ’ ἀνήρ, = ἐγώ, Id. OT 534, 815, etc.; γυναικὸς τῆσδε, for ἐμοῦ, A. Ag. 1438; τῆσδέ γε ζώσης ἔτι S. Tr. 305; so ξὺν τῇδε χερί with this hand of mine, Id. Ant. 43, cf. OT 811.
6. in Arist., τοδί designates a particular thing, ‘such and such’, τοδὶ διὰ τοδὶ αἱρεῖται EN 1151a35; τόδε μετὰ τόδε GA 734a28, cf. b9; Καλλίᾳ κάμνοντι τηνδὶ τὴν νόσον τοδὶ συνήνεγκε Metaph. 981a8; τόδε τὸ ἐν τῷ ἡμικυκλίῳ APo. 71a20; ἥδε ἡ ἰατρική, opp. αὐτὴ ἡ ἰ., Metaph. 997b30; τόδε τι a this, i.e. a fully specified particular, Cat. 3b10, al., cf. Gal. 6.113,171; τόδε τι καὶ οὐσία Arist. Metaph. 1060b1; πορευσόμεθα εἰς τήνδε τὴν πόλιν James 4:13.

II

1. of Time, to indicate the immediate present, ἥδ’ ἡμέρα S. OT 438, etc.: more strongly, κατ’ ἦμαρ.. τὸ νῦν τόδε Id. Aj. 753; τοῦδ’ αὐτοῦ λυκάβαντος Od. 14.161; but νυκτὸς τῆσδε in the night just past, S. Aj. 21; νυκτὶ τῇδε Id. El. 644; so τῆσδε τῆς ὁδοῦ on this present journey, Id. OT 1478, cf. Ant. 878 (cj.); also ἀπόλλυμαι τάλας ἔτος τόδ’ ἤδη δέκατον now for these ten years, Id. Ph. 312; τῶνδε τῶν ἀσκητῶν athletes of the present day, Pl. R. 403e.
2. ἐς τόδε elliptic c. gen., ἐς τόδ’ ἡμέρας E. Ph. 425; ἐς τόδε ἡλικίης Hdt. 7.38; πῶς ἐς τόδ’ ἂν τόλμης ἔβη; S. OT 125.

III

1. in sentences beginning this Isa., the Engl. this is freq. represented by nom. pl. neut. τάδε ; ἐπεὶ οὐκ ἔρανος τάδε γ’ ἐστίν this is not an ἔρανος, Od. 1.226; ἆρ’ οὐχ ὕβρις τάδ’; is not this insolence? S. OC 883; of persons, Ἀπόλλων τάδ’ ἦν this was A., S. OT 1329 (lyr.); οὐ γὰρ ἔσθ’ Ἕκτωρ τάδε E. Andr. 168; οὐκέτι Τροία τάδε Id. Tr. 100 (anap.); οὐ τάδε Βρόμιος Id. Cyc. 63 (lyr.); οὐκ Ἴωνες τάδε εἰσίν Th. 6.77; τάδ’ οὐχὶ Πελοπόννησος, ἀλλ’ Ἰωνία Inscr. ap. Str. 9.1.6.
2. to indicate something immediately to come, τόδε μοι κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ (which then follows) Il. 1.41, 504, cf. 455, al.; Ἀθηναίων οἵδε ἀπέθανον IG 12.943.2: hence, in historical writers, opp. what goes before (cf. οὗτος c. 1.2), ταῦτα μὲν Λακεδαιμόνιοι λέγουσι.., τάδε δὲ ἐγὼ γράφω Hdt. 6.53; ταῦτα μὲν δὴ σὺ λέγεις· παρ’ ἡμῶν δὲ ἀπάγγελλε τάδε X. An. 2.1.20, etc.; v. οὗτος B. 1.2; opp. ἐκεῖνος, S. El. 784: rarely applied to different persons in the same sentence, νῦν ὅδε [La[*]us] πρὸς τῆς τύχης ὄλωλεν, οὐδὲ τοῦδ’ ὕπο [by Oedipus] Id. OT 948.
3. as ‘antecedent’ to a defining Relat., ὃν πόλις στήσειε, τοῦδε χρὴ κλύειν Id. Ant. 666, cf. Tr. 23, Ph. 87, etc.: in Hom., in such cases, the δέ is separate, as ὃς δέ κε μηρίνθοιο τύχῃ.., ὁ δ’ οἴσεται ἡμιπέλεκκα Il. 23.858, cf. Od. 11.148, 149, al. (but ὅδε sts. has its deictic force and the relat. clause merely explains, as νήσου τῆσδ’ ἐφ’ ἧς ναίει S. Ph. 613, cf. Il. 2.346, X. An. 7.3.47, etc.). Adverbial usage of some cases:

1 τῇδε, of Place, here, on the spot, Il. 12.345, Od. 6.173, etc.; so τῶν τε ὑπὸ γῆς θεῶν καὶ τῶν τ. Pl. Lg. 958d. of Manner, thus, A. Eu. 45; ὅρα δὲ καὶ τ., ὅτι.. Pl. Phd. 79e, cf. R. 433e, etc.

2. acc. neut. τόδε with ἱκάνω, etc., hither, to this spot, Il. 14.298, Od. 1.409, al.; also δεῦρο τόδε Il. 14.309, Od. 17.444, 524. therefore, on this account, τόδε χώεο 23.213: so also acc. pl. neut., τάδε γηθήσειε on this account, Il. 9.77.
3. dat. pl. neut., τοισίδε in or with these words, τοισίδε ἀμείβεται Hdt. 1.120; τοισίδε προέχει in these respects, ib. 32.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὅδε, ἤδη, τόδε (from the old demonstrative pronoun ὁ, ἡ, τό, and the enclitic δέ) (from Homer down), this one here, Latinhicce, haecce, hocce;

a. it refers to what precedes: Luke 10:39 and Rec. in ; τάδε πάντα, 2 Corinthians 12:19 Griesbach; to what follows: neuter plural τάδε, these (viz. the following) things, as follows, thus, introducing words spoken, Acts 15:23 R G; τάδε λέγει etc., Acts 21:11; Revelation 2:1, 8, 12, 18; Revelation 3:1, 7, 14.
b. εἰς τήνδε τήν πόλιν (where we say into this or that city) (the writer not knowing what particular city the speakers he introduces would name), James 4:13 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 162 (153), who adduces as similar τήνδε τήν ἡμέραν, Plutarch, symp. 1, 6, 1; (but see Lünemann’s addition to Winers and especially Buttmann, § 127, 2)).

Question 189

οἰκονόμος

Answer 189

steward

Thayer’s Definition
the manager of household or of household affairs
esp. a steward, manager, superintendent (whether free-born or as was usually the case, a freed-man or a slave) to whom the head of the house or proprietor has intrusted the management of his affairs, the care of receipts and expenditures, and the duty of dealing out the proper portion to every servant and even to the children not yet of age
the manager of a farm or landed estate, an overseer
the superintendent of the city’s finances, the treasurer of a city (or of treasurers or quaestors of kings)

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
οἰκόνομ-ος, ὁ, ἡ,

I

1. one who manages a household, = cross οἰκοδεσπότης, X. Oec. 1.2, Pl. R. 417a, etc.; steward of an estate, Ζήνωνι τῷ οἰ. PCair.Zen. 48.2 (iii B.C.); house-steward, being a slave, IG 5(1).40, 1235, IGRom. 4.1699, TAM 2.518 (Pinara), prob. in BCH 52.413: metaph., οἰ. ἡδονῆς Alcid. ap. Arist. Rh. 1406a27.
2. generally, manager, administrator, opp. τύραννος, Id. Pol. 1314b7, etc.: hence, title of a subordinate state official, IG 5(2).389.15 (Lusi, iv/iii B. C.); also of a high financial officer, Inscr.Prien. 6.30 (iv B. C.), BMus.Inscr. 448.7 (Ephesus, iv B. C.); under a monarch, OGI 225.37 (iii B. C.); in Egypt, ORLaws 3.3, 5.6, al. (iii B. C.), PTeb. 39.11 (ii B. C.), etc.; in charge of the Serapeum, UPZ 56.7 (ii B. C., pl.); οἱ Καίσαρος οἰ., = Lat. procuratores Caesaris, Luc. Alex. 39; θεοῦ οἰ. minister of God, Titus 1:7; 1 Corinthians 4:1.

II as fem., housekeeper, housewife, Phoc. 3.7, Lys. 1.7: Metaph., A. Ag. 155.

Thayer's Expanded Definition
οἰκονόμος, οἰκονόμου, ὁ (οἶκος, νέμω (`to dispense, manage'); Hesychius ὁ τήν οἶκον νεμόμενος), the manager of a household or of household affairs; especially a steward, manager, superintendent (whether free-born, or, as was usually the case, a freed-man or slave) to whom the head of the house or proprietor has intrusted the management of his affairs, the care of receipts and expenditures, and the duty of dealing out the proper portion to every servant and even to the children not yet of age: Luke 12:42; 1 Corinthians 4:2; Galatians 4:2; the manager of a farm or landed estate, an overseer (A. V. steward): Luke 16:1, 3, 8; ὁ οἰκονόμος τῆς πόλεως, the superintendent of the city's finances, the treasurer of the city (Vulg. arcarius civitatis): Romans 16:23 (of the treasurers or quaestors of kings, Esther 8:9; 1 Esdr. 4:49; Josephus, Antiquities 12, 4, 7; 11, 6, 12; 8, 6, 4). Metaphorically, the apostles and other Christian teachers (see οἰκονομία) are called οἰκονόμους μυστηρίων τοῦ Θεοῦ, as those to whom the counsels of God have been committed to be made known to men: 1 Corinthians 4:1; a bishop (or overseer) is called οἰκονόμος Θεοῦ, of God as the head and master of the Christian theocracy (see οἶκος, 2), Titus 1:7; and any and every Christian who rightly uses the gifts intrusted to him by God for the good of his brethren, belongs to the class called καλοί οἰκονόμοι ποικίλης χάριτος Θεοῦ, 1 Peter 4:10. (Aeschylus, Xenophon, Plato, Aristotle, others; for עַל־בַּיִת the Sept. 1 Kings 4:6; 1 Kings 16:9, etc.)

Question 190

ὅρκος

Answer 190

an oath

Thayer’s Definition
that which has been pledged or promised with an oath

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὅρκος, ὁ,

I

1. the object by which one swears, as the Styx among the gods, Στυγὸς ὕδωρ, ὅς τε μέγιστος ὅ. δεινότατός τε πέλει μακάρεσσι θεοῖσι Il. 15.38, cf. 2.755, Hes. Th. 400, 784, 805, h.Cer. 259, Arist. Metaph. 983b31; or as Zeus among mortals, Pi. P. 4.167; so of things, ὅρκον δ’ ἐνοσφίσθης μέγαν, ἅλας τε καὶ τράπεζαν Archil. 96; οἷς ἦν μέγιστος ὅ… κύων, ἔπειτα χήν Cratin. 231, cf. Placit. 1.3.8: hence,
2. oath, mostly with epith. μέγας, καρτερός, Hom. (v. infr.), etc.; θεῶν ὅ. an oath by the gods, Od. 2.377; μακάρων ὅ. 10.299, cf. S. OT 647, E. Hipp. 657; ὅ. ἐκ θεῶν μέγας A. Ag. 1284; ὅ. κατὰ τῶν.. ὀφθαλμῶν Aeschin. 2.153; ὅ. πλατύς a firm-based oath, Emp. 30.3; ὅρκον ὀμόσαι swear an oath, ὄμοσέν τε τελεύτησέν τε τὸν ὅ. Od. 2.378, etc.; ὅ. ἀπώμνυ ib. 377, cf. 10.381; ἐπὶ δ’ ὅρκον ὀμεῖται Hes. Op. 194; κατομόσαι E. IT 790; ὅ. ἐπιορκῆσαι take a false oath, Aeschin. 1.115, etc.; ὅρκου προστεθέντος when an oath is added, S. Fr. 472, cf. El. 47; δαίμονι τῷ Πλεισθενιδῶν ὅρκους θεμένη having made a sworn compact with.., A. Ag. 1570 (anap.); ὅ. ἀλλήλοις ποιοῦνται οἱ μὲν ἔφοροι ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως, βασιλεὺς δ’ ὑπὲρ ἑαυτοῦ X. Lac. 15.7; ὅρκους συνῆψαν E. Ph. 1241, etc.; of the person demanding the oath, ὅ. ἑλέσθαι τινός or τινί take it of him, i.e. make him swear, Od. 4.746, Il. 22.119; ὅρκους ἐπελάσαι and προσάγειν τινί lay oath upon a man, put him on his oath, Hdt. 1.146, 6.62, 74; τὸν ὅ… ἐπάγειν.. Ὀποντίοις readminister the oath, IG 9(1).334.12 (Locr., v B. C.); ὅρκους δοὺς καὶ δεξάμενος after tendering his oath to them and accepting theirs, Hdt. 6.23, cf. IG 12.52.18, A. Eu. 429, Ar. Ra. 589, D. 39.3 and 4; so ὅρκον διδόναι καὶ λαμβάνειν Arist. Rh. 1377a7, 8; ἀποδοῦναι take it oneself, D. 19.318, Aeschin. 3.74; ἀπολαμβάνειν administer or tender it, D. 5.9, 18.25; ὅρκους καὶ πίστιν ἀλλήλοις δότε swear to one another, Ar. Lys. 1185, cf. And. 1.107; ὅρκοις καταλαβὼν τὰ τέλη having bound the authorities by oaths, Th. 4.86; ὅρκοις κατειλημμένους Id. 1.9; ὅρκῳ ἐμμένειν abide by it, E. Med. 754; ὅ. τηρεῖν Democr. 239; παραβαίνειν E. Fr. 286.7, Ar. Av. 332, D. 19.318; ἐκβάντι τῶν ὅ. Pl. Smp. 183b; ἐκλιπεῖν E. Supp. 1194; συγχέαι Id. Hipp. 1063; ἐμπεδοῦν X. An. 3.2.10: after ὅρκος aor., pres., or fut. inf. may refer to fut. time, ὤμοσα καρτερὸν ὅ., μὴ.. ἀναφῆναι Od. 4.253; ἐμεῦ δ’ ἕλετο μέγαν ὅ., μὴ πρὶν σοὶ ἐρέειν ib. 746; ὅρκους ἔδοσαν καὶ ἔλαβον, ἀποδοῦναι.., Ἀθηναίους δὲ μὴ πολεμεῖν.. X. HG 1.3.9: with Preps., οὐκ αὔτως.., ἀλλὰ σὺν ὅρκῳ Od. 14.151; σὺν θεῶν ὅρκῳ X. Cyr. 2.3.12; εἶπαι ἐπ’ ὅρκου say on oath, Hdt. 9.11; κατὰ τοὺς ὅ. X. HG 5.4.54; opp. παρ’ ὅρκον Pi. O. 13.83; παρὰ τοὺς ὅ. X. An. 2.5.41: prov., ὅρκους ἐγὼ γυναικὸς εἰς ὕδωρ γράφω S. Fr. 811; parodied by Philonid. 7 ὅρκους δὲ μοιχῶν εἰς τέφραν.. γράφω, cf. Xenarch. 6, Men. Mon. 25.

II Ὅρκος, personified, son of Eris, Hes. Op. 804; a divinity who punishes the false and perjured, ib. 219, Th. 231, Orac. ap. Hdt. 6.86. γ; Διὸς Ὅ., as servant of Zeus, S. OC 1767 (anap.). (Cogn. with ἕρκος.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὅρκος, ὅρκου, ὁ (from ἔργῳ, εἴργω; equivalent to ἕρκος an enclosure, confinement; hence, Latinorcus) (from Homer down), the Sept. for שֲׁבוּעָה, an oath: Matthew 14:7, 9; Matthew 26:72; Mark 6:26; Luke 1:73 (Winers Grammar, 628 (583); Buttmann, § 144, 13); Acts 2:30 (Winer’s Grammar, 226 (212); 603 (561)); Hebrews 6:16; James 5:12; by metonymy, that which has been pledged or promised with an oath; plural vows, Matthew 5:33 ((cf. Wünsche ad loc.)).

Question 191

πενθέω

Answer 191

I mourn

Thayer’s Definition
to mourn
to mourn for, lament one

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πενθ-έω, Ephesians 3:1-21 dual πενθείετον Il. 23.283; inf. πενθήμεναι Od. 18.174, 19.120: fut. -ήσω A. Fr. 207: aor. ἐπένθησα Id. Ch. 173, Aeschin. 3.211: pf. πεπένθηκα Luc. Demon. 25, (συμ-) D. 60.33: (πένθος): —

bewail, lament, esp. for persons, νέκυν πενθῆσαι Il. 19.225, cf. Trag.Adesp. 331; πενθέειν τινα ὡς τεθνεῶτα Hdt. 4.95; π. γόοις A. Pers. 545 (anap.); π. τινὰς δημοσίᾳ Lys. 2.66; π. τινὰ τριχί A. Ch. 173; ἐπί τινι π. καὶ κείρασθαι Aeschin. 3.211: abs., mourn, go into mourning, Pl. Phdr. 258b, etc.: c. acc. cogn., πενθεῖ νέον οἶκτον A. Supp. 64: — Pass., to be mourned for, Isoc. 10.27; πένθος ἀμφί τινι πενθεῖται Arr. Tact. 33.4.

2. of things, π. κακά S. OT 1320, Lys. 2.2; πήματα S. OC 739; τύχας E. Med. 268.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πενθέω, πένθω; future πενθήσω; 1 aorist ἐπένθησα (πένθος); from Homer down; the Sept. chiefly for אָבַל; to mourn;

a. intransitive: Matthew 5:4 (); ; 1 Corinthians 5:2; πενθεῖν καί κλαίειν, Mark 16:10; Luke 6:25; James 4:9; Revelation 18:15, 19; ἐπί τίνι, over one, Revelation 18:11 R G L (Isaiah 66:10); ἐπί τινα, ibid. T Tr WH (2 Samuel 13:37; 2 Chronicles 35:24, etc.).
b. transitive, to mourn for, lament, one: 2 Corinthians 12:21 (cf. Winers Grammar, 635f (590); Buttmann, § 131, 4. Synonym: see θρηνέω, at the end.)

Question 192

περιστερά

Answer 192

a dove

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
περιστερ-ά, ἡ,

common pigeon or dove, Hdt. 1.138, S. Fr. 866, Democr. 164, etc.; specifically, Columba livia domestica, and so distd. from φάψ, φάττα, οἰνάς, τρυγών, Arist. HA 562b5, 593a16; ἐλάττων μὲν ἡ πελειάς, τιθασὸν δὲ γίνεται μᾶλλον ἡ π . ib. 544b3: περιστερός, ὁ, cock-pigeon, Pherecr. 33 (of a carrier- pigeon ), Alex. 214; censured by Luc. Song of Solomon 7:1-13 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
περιστερά, περιστεράς, ἡ, Hebrew יונָה, a dove: Matthew 3:16; Matthew 10:16; Matthew 21:12; Mark 1:10; Mark 11:15; Luke 2:24; Luke 3:22; John 1:32; John 2:14, 16. (From Herodotus down.)

Question 193

πλεονεξία

Answer 193

Thayer’s Definition
greedy desire to have more, covetousness, avarice

some advantage which one possesses over another; an inordinate desire of riches, covetousness, Lk. 12:15; grasping, overreaching, extortion, Rom. 1:29; 1 Thess. 2:5; a gift exacted by importunity and conferred with grudging, a hard-wrung gift, 2 Cor. 9:5; a scheme of extortion, Mk. 7:22

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πλεονεξία,

Ion. -ιη, ἡ,

greediness, assumption, arrogance, τῶν Σπαρτιητέων ἡ π. Hdt. 7.149, cf. And. 4.13, Th. 3.82, Isoc. 12.240, Pl. R. 359c, X. HG 3.5.15; π. συγγενική wrong done to one’s kin, Iamb. VP 24.108 .

2. assumption, αἱ ἐν τῷ πυνθάνεσθαι π. Arist. SE 175a19 .

II advantage, Isoc. 4.183, 15.275, D. 23.128: pl., αἱ ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ π. Isoc. 3.22, etc.; αἱ π. αἱ ἴδιαι, αἱ δημόσιαι, X. Cyn. 13.10; ἐπὶ πλεονεξίᾳ with a view to one’s own advantage, Th. 3.84, X. Mem. 1.6.12; μετὰ πλεονεξίας τινὸς ἀγωνίζεσθαι πρὸς [τὰ θηρία ] Id. Cyr. 1.6.28; πλεονεξίαι ψυχῆς excellences, Plot. 4.6.3 .

2. a larger share of a thing, τῶν πολιτικῶν δικαίων Arist. Pol. 1282b29 .
3. gain derived from a thing, τὴν ἐπὶ τῶν ἰδίων δικῶν πλεονεξίαν D. 21.28; αἱ π. τῶν πλουσίων undue gains, Arist. Pol. 1297a11, cf. Pl. R. 586b; π. ἔκ τινος Plb. 6.56.3 .

III excess, opp. ἔνδεια, Pl. Ti. 82a .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πλεονεξία, πλεονεξίας, ἡ (πλεονέκτης, which see), greedy desire to have more, covetousness, avarice: Luke 12:15; Romans 1:29; Ephesians 4:19; Ephesians 5:3; Colossians 3:5; 1 Thessalonians 2:5; 2 Peter 2:3 (on the omission of the article in the last two passages, cf. Winer’s Grammar, 120 (114)), 14; ὡς (Rec. ὥσπερ) πλεονεξίαν (as a matter of covetousness), i. e. a gift which betrays the giver’s covetousness, 2 Corinthians 9:5 (here R. V. text extortion); plural various modes in which covetousness shows itself, covetings (cf. Winers Grammar, § 27, 3; Buttmann, 77 (67)), Mark 7:22. (In the same and various other senses by secular writings from Herodotus and Thucydides down.) (Trench, N. T. Synonyms, § xxiv., and (in partial correction) Lightfoot’s Commentary on Colossians 3:5.)

Question 194

ποικίλος

Answer 194

varied, manifold

Thayer’s Definition
a various colours, variegated
of various sorts

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ποικίλος [ῐ], η, ον,

many-coloured, spotted, pied, dappled, παρδαλέη Il. 10.30; ὄφις Hes. Th. 300 codd. ( αἰόλον Sch.); δράκων Pi. P. 8.46; ἴυγξ ib. 4.214; νεβρίδες E. Ba. 249; ὄρνιθες Plot. 4.4.29; also of cattle, PCair.Preis. 37.9 (iii B.C.), etc.; -ώτερον ταὧ Alex. 110.14, cf. Ath. 9.397c; opp. ὁμόχρους, Arist. HA 543a25; κιθῶνες Hdt. 7.61; λίθος Αἰθιοπικὸς π., of the red granite of Syene, Id. 2.127, cf. IG 42(1).106i96, 113(Epid., iv B.C. ); σφαῖρα Pl. Phd. 110b; in X. An. 5.4.32, tattooed. II wrought in various colours, of woven or embroidered stuffs, in Hom. as epith. of πέπλος, Il. 5.735, al.; ἱμάς 14.215; φᾶρος S. Fr. 586; ἐν ποικίλοις . . κάλλεσιν βαίνειν, of a rich carpet, A. Ag. 923; ποικίλα, τά, ib. 926, 936, Theoc. 15.78; π., τό, a broidered robe, Cratin. 38; ἐπίβλημα π. IG 12.387.28; of Cyprian, Carthaginian, and Sicilian stuffs, Ar. Fr. 611, Hermipp. 63.23, Philem. 76.4 . Adv. -λως, ὑφασμένον Antiph. 99 (dub.); στρωμναὶ π. διηνθισμέναι LXX Ezra 1:6 .

2. of metal work, τεύχεα π. χαλκῷ cunningly wrought in bronze, Hes. Sc. [423]; θώρηξ Il. 16.134; τεύχεα, ἔντεα, σάκος, δίφρος, κλισμός, etc., 4.432, 10.75, 149, 501, Od. 1.132, etc.; but δεσμὸς π. intricate, 8.448 .
3. ἡ στοὰ ἡ π. the Painted Hall at Athens, Aeschin. 3.186; ἡ π. στοά D. 45.17, 59.94, cf. Paus. 1.15.1; also Ποικίλη alone, Id. 5.11.6, Luc. DMeretr. 10.2; or ἡ Π., Id. Pisc. 13, 16, etc.; also π. στοά, at Olympia, Paus. 5.21.17; λέσχη π., at Sparta, Id. 3.15.8; θρᾶνος π. PCair.Zen. 445.5 (iii B.C.) .
4. of drugs, complicated, Aret. CD 1.4 .

III metaph., changeful, diversified, manifold, εὐμορφία A. Pr. 495; π. κακῶν ταμιεῖον Democr. 149; -ώτερος αὐτοῦ Πρωτέως Luc. Sacr. 5; ποικίλα ἀντὶ ἁπλοῦ Pl. Tht. 146d; -ώτερα ποιεῖν τὰ νοσήματα Id. R. 426a; παντοδαπὰς ἡδονὰς καὶ π. καὶ παντοίως ἐχούσας ib. 559d; οὕτω δὲ π. τί ἐστι τὸ ἀγαθὸν καὶ παντοδαπόν Id. Prt. 334b; πηδήσεις ὡς ἔνι -ωτάτας ποιεῖσθαι Arr. Tact. 43.3; π. μῆνες the changing months, Pi. I. 4(3).18 (nisi leg. ποικίλα [χθών] ) ; π. εὐεργεσία IG 5(2).268.22 (Mantinea, i B.C. ). Adv. -λως in various ways, Hp. Art. 33, Gal. 13.91: Comp. -ωτέρως, θρεπτέον Herod. Med. in Rh.Mus. 58.85; but -ώτερον Sor. Vit.Hp. 4 .

2. of Art, π. ὕμνος a song of changeful strain or full of diverse art, Pi. O. 6.87; ποικίλον κιθαρίζων Id. N. 4.14; δεδαιδαλμένοι ψεύδεσι ποικίλοις μῦθοι Id. O. 1.29; of style, λέξις ποιητικωτέρα καὶ π. Isoc. 15.47 ( Comp. ); σχηματισμοί D.H. Is. 3 .
3. intricate, complex, εἱλιγμοὶ -ώτατοι, of a labyrinth, Hdt. 2.148; of an oracle, Id. 7.111 ( Comp. ); ὁ θεὸς ἔφυ τι π. E. Hel. 711; π. νόμος, opp. νοῆσαι ῥᾴδιος, Pl. Smp. 182b; π. μηχάνημα, λόγοι, S. OC 762, Ar. Th. 438; opp. ἁπλούστερος, Arist. Rh. 1416b25; οὐδὲν π. οὐδὲ σοφόν D. 9.37 . Adv. -λως, αὐδώμενος speaking in double sense, S. Ph. 130; π. ᾐνιγμένος Ar. Eq. 196 . of abstruse knowledge, intricate, subtle, εἰδέναι τι π. E. Med. 300; οὐδὲν π. nothing abstruse or difficult, Pl. Men. 75e, Grg. 491d, etc. of persons and things, subtle, artful, wily, of Prometheus, Hes. Th. 511, A. Pr. 310; of Odysseus, E. IA 526; π. γὰρ ἁνήρ Ar. Eq. 758; φύσει π. Plb. 8.18.4; ἀλώπηξ κερδαλέα καὶ π. Pl. R. 365c; π. λαλήματα, of the Sirens, E. Andr. 937; π. τόξον B. 9.43; βουλεύματα Pi. N. 5.28 . Adv. subtly, artfully, E. Ba. 888 (lyr.); σοφῶς . . καὶ π. Alex. 110.20; π. χρώμενοι τοῖς πράγμασιν Plb. 4.30.7 .
4. changeable, unstable, ὁ εὐδαίμων οὐ π. καὶ εὐμετάβολος Arist. EN 1101a8; π. ἐλπίδες doubtful hopes, Plb. 14.1.5; π. περιστάσεις OGI 194.5 (Egypt, i B.C. ). Adv. -λως, ἔχειν to be different, X. Mem. 2.6.21; δέος π. περιαμύττον τὸν νοῦν Pl. Ax. 365c: Comp. -ωτέρως dub. in Epicur. Nat. 5G. (Cf. Skt. pimśáti ‘dress (meat)’, ‘adorn’, péśas ‘shape’, ‘colour’, ‘embroidery’, Lith. pi[etilde]šti ‘draw’, ‘write’, Slav. p[icaron]sati ‘write’.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ποικίλος, ποικίλη, ποικίλον, from Homer down, various, i. e.

a. of divers colors, variegated: the Sept. b. equivalent to of divers sorts: Matthew 4:24; Mark 1:34; Luke 4:40; 2 Timothy 3:6; Titus 3:3; Hebrews 2:4; Hebrews 13:9; James 1:2; 1 Peter 1:6; 1 Peter 4:10 ((A. V. in the last two examples manifold)).

Question 195

προσκαρτερέω

Answer 195

to persevere courageously; adhere firmly to or be faithful or devoted to, especially to a particular person; persist obstinately; to continue with

Thayer’s Definition
to adhere to one, be his adherent, to be devoted or constant to one
to be steadfastly attentive unto, to give unremitting care to a thing
to continue all the time in a place
to persevere and not to faint
to show one’s self courageous for
to be in constant readiness for one, wait on constantly

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
προσκαρτερ-έω,

Dor. ποτι- IG 42(1).63.4 (Epid., ii B.C. ): —

persist obstinately in, τῇ πολιορκίᾳ Plb. 1.55.4, D.S. 14.87; τῇ προφορᾷ Phld. Rh. 1.158 S.; τῇ προσευχῇ Acts 1:14 : abs., X. HG 7.5.14, Ph. Bel. 101.9, LXX Numbers 13:21(20), J. BJ 6.1.3, Ach.Tat. 1.10; καίπερ ἀχθόμενοι τῇ καθέδρᾳ π . J. AJ 5.2.6 .

2. adhere firmly to a man, be faithful to him, τινι Plb. 23.5.3, Acts 8:13, Acts 10:7; of servants, remain in one’s service, D. 59.120; of a κοσμητής, IG 22.1028.84. remain in attendance at a law-court, τῷ βήματι, τῷ κριτηρίῳ, PHamb. 4.7 (i A.D.), POxy. 261.12 (i A.D.) . devote oneself to an office or occupation, τῇ στρατηγίᾳ ib. 82.4 (iii A.D.); τῇ ἑαυτῶν γεωργίᾳ PAmh. 2.65.3 (ii A.D.) .
3. Pass., ὁ προσκαρτερούμενος χρόνος time diligently employed, D.S. 2.29 .
4. wait for a person, Φιλέᾳ POxy. 1764.4 (iii A.D.): abs., ἕως ἂν Ἐτέαρχος παραγένηται PSI 5.598.7 (iii B.C.) .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
προσκαρτερέω, προσκαρτερῶ; future προσκαρτερήσω; (καρτερέω, from καρτερός (strong,' 'steadfast'), of which the root is (τό) κάρτος for κράτος (strength’; cf. Curtius, § 72)); to persevere (`continue steadfastly’) in anything (cf. πρός, IV. 4): of persons, with the dative of a thing, to give constant attention to a thing, Acts 2:42 (here Lachmann adds ἐν (once) in brackets); τῇ προσευχή,Acts 1:14; Acts 6:4; Romans 12:12; Colossians 4:2 (ταῖς θηραις, Diodorus 3, 17; τῇ πολιορκία,Polybius 1, 55, 4; Diodorus 14, 87; τῇ καθέδρα, persist in the siege, Josephus, Antiquities 5, 2, 6); with the dative of a person, to adhere to one, be his adherent; to be devoted or constant to one: Acts 8:13; Acts 10:7, (Demosthenes, p. 1386, 6; Polybius 24, 5, 3; (Diogenes Laërtius 8, 1, 14); εἰς τί, to be steadfastly attentive unto, to give unremitting care to a thing, Romans 13:6 (cf. Meyer ad loc:); ἐν with a dative of place, to continue all the time in a place, Acts 2:46 (Susanna 6); absolutely to persevere, not to faint (in a thing), Xenophon, Hell. 7, 5, 14; to show oneself courageous, for הִתְחַזֵּק, Numbers 13:21 (20), of a thing, with the dative of a person, to be in constant readiness for one, wait on continually: Mark 3:9.

Question 196

σέβομαι

Answer 196

I reverence, worship

Thayer’s Definition
to revere, to worship

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
σέβομαι, mostly used in pres.: impf. in Hdt. 7.197: fut. σεβήσομαι POxy. 1381.202 (ii A.D.): aor. ἐσέφθην S. Fr. 164, Pl. Phdr. 254b, Porph. Plot. 12: — feel awe or fear before God, feel shame, οὔ νυ σέβεσθε; Il. 4.242, cf. Ar. Nu. 293; τιμῶν καὶ σεβόμενος Pl. Lg. 729c; σεφθεῖσα awe-stricken, Id. Phdr. l.c.: rarely c. inf., dread or fear to do a thing, ς. προσιδέσθαι . ., ἀντία φάσθαι A. Pers. 694 (lyr.); μιαίνειν τὸ θεῖον Pl. Ti. 69d; σέβεται καὶ φοβεῖται . . τό τι κινεῖν τῶν καθεστώτων Id. Lg. 798b: so c. acc. rei, to fear to do it, Antipho 2.4.12: c. part., ς. προσορῶν Pl. Phdr. 250e .

2. after Hom., c. acc. pers., revere, worship, Κρονίδαν Pi. P. 6.25; θεούς A. Supp. 921, etc.; πάντων ἀνάκτων κοινοβωμίαν ib. 223; Λατώ Ar. Th. 123; Λυκοῦργον σέβεσθαι worship him as a hero, Hdt. 1.66, cf. 7.197; προσορῶν ὡς θεὸν ς. τινά Pl. Phdr. 251a; do homage to Zeus, A. Pr. 937: generally, pay honour or respect to . ., θνατοὺς ἄγαν ς. ib. 543 (lyr.); τὸ φίλον S. OC 187 (lyr.), cf. Ph. 1163 (lyr.), etc.; ς. τινὰ τύχης μάκαρος E. IT 648 . esp. of Jewish proselytes, σεβομένη τὸν θεόν Acts 16:14, cf. J. AJ 14.7.2; σεβόμενοι προσήλυτοι, Ἕλληνες, Acts 13:43, Acts 17:4; σεβόμεναι γυναῖκες ib. 13.50 .
3. of things, τὰ βυβλία σεβόμενοι μεγάλως Hdt. 3.128; ὄργια Ar. Th. 949; ὦ Πιερία, σέβεταί σ’ Εὔιος E. Ba. 566 (lyr.); τὸ σῶφρον αἰδούμενος ἅμα καὶ ς. Pl. Lg. 837c .

II Act. σέβω is post- Hom., used only in pres. and impf., worship, honour, mostly of the gods, ς. Δήμητρος πανήγυριν Archil. 120; πατρὸς Ὀλυμπίοιοτιμάν Pi. O. 14.12; θεούς A. Th. 596; Νύμφας Id. Eu. 22; Ἅιδην S. Ant. 777; τἀν Ἅιδου ib. 780; θεῶν θέσμια Id. Aj. 713 (lyr.), etc.; rare in Prose, νομίζεται θεοὺς σέβειν X. Mem. 4.4.19, cf. Ar. Nu. 600; but also of parents, S. OC 1377, cf. Ant. 511; of kings, Id. Aj. 667, etc.; of suppliants, A. Eu. 151 (lyr.); λέγω κατ’ ἄνδρα, μὴ θεόν, σέβειν ἐμέ Id. Ag. 925; αἰχμὴν . . μᾶλλον θεοῦ ς. Id. Th. 530; ς. ὀνείρων φάσματα Id. Ag. 274; τὰς ἐμὰς ἀρχὰς ς. S. Ant. 744 ( εὖ σέβουσι is dub. cj. for εὐσεβοῦσι in A. Ag. 338, cf. E. Ph. 1320, Tr. 85 ); σέβειν ἐν τιμῇ c. acc., A. Pers. 166, Pl. Lg. 647a: c. inf., ὑβρίζειν ἐν κακοῖσιν οὐ σέβω, i.e. τὸ ὑβρίζειν, I do not respect, approve it, A. Ag. 1612; τὸ μὴ ἀδικεῖν σέβοντες Id. Eu. 749: rarely of a god, Ποσειδῶν . . τὰς ἐμὰς ἀρὰς σέβων E. Hipp. 896: — σέβομαι as Pass., to be reverenced, ἡ δ’ οἴκοι [πόλις] πλέον δίκῃ σέβοιτ’ ἄν S. OC 760; τὸ σεβόμενον reverence, Plu. 2.1101d.

2. less freq. abs., to worship, to be religious, τὸν σέβοντ’ εὐεργετεῖν A. Eu. 725, cf. 897; οὐ γὰρ σέβεις S. Ant. 745; κρίνοντες ἐν ὁμοίῳ καὶ σέβειν καὶ μή Th. 2.53; but in all these places an object shd. perh. be supplied from the context. ( σέβομαι prob. orig. ‘ I shrink from . . ‘, of which σοβέω is the causal; perh. cogn. with Skt. tyajati ‘desert, let go’.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
σέβω, and (so everywhere in the Scriptures) σέβομαι; from Homer down; to revere, to worship: τινα (a deity), Matthew 15:9; Mark 7:7; Acts 18:13; Acts 19:27 (Wis. 15:18 etc.; for יָרֵא, Joshua 4:24; Joshua 22:25; Jonah 1:9). In the Acts, proselytes of the gate (see προσήλυτος, 2) are called σεβόμενοι τόν Θεόν (`men that worship God’), Acts 16:14; Acts 18:7 (Josephus, Antiquities 14, 7, 2); and simply οἱ σεβόμενοι (A. V. the devout persons), Acts 17:17; σεβόμενοι προσήλυτοι (R. V. devout proselytes), Acts 13:43; σεβομεναι γυναῖκες, Acts 13:50; τῶν … σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων, (A. V. the devout Greeks), Acts 17:4; in the Latin church,metuentes, verecundi, religiosi, timorati; Vulg. (except Acts 13:50)colentes; cf. Thilo in his Cod. apocr. Nov. Test., p. 521.

Question 197

σιγάω

Answer 197

to be silent, become silent

Thayer’s Definition
to keep silence, hold one’s peace
to be kept in silence, be concealed

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
σῑγάω, Dor. 2 sg. σιγῇς Ar. Ach. 778; Cyrenaic inf. σιγέν Berl.Sitzb. 1927.170; 1 sg. opt. σιγῷμ ( ι ) E. Hipp. 336: fut. -ήσομαι S. OC 113, 980, E. Ba. 801, Ar. Av. 1684, etc.; later -ήσω AP 9.27 ( Arch. or Parmen. ), D.Chr. 37.42, Charito 1.10: pf. σεσίγηκα Aeschin. 3.218: — Pass., fut. σιγηθήσομαι E. IT 1076; σεσιγήσομαι Pl. Ep. 311c: aor. ἐσιγήθην E. Supp. 298, Aeschin. 2.86: pf. σεσίγημαι (v. infr.): ( σιγή ): — keep silence, used by Hom. only in imper. σίγα, hush! be still! Il. 14.90, Od. 17.393; σιγᾶν h.Merc. 93, Hdt. 8.61, 110; but freq.in Pi., Trag., and Att., as Pi. N. 10.29, A. Pr. 200, etc.; ς. περί τινος E. Hipp. 312; πρὸς οὓς δεῖ Pl. Phdr. 276a; πρὸς τοῦτο, ἐν τούτῳ, X. Cyr. 5.5.20, An. 5.6.27 .

2. metaph. of things, σιγῶν δ’ ὄλεθρος καὶ μέγα φωνοῦντ’ . . ἀμαθύνει A. Eu. 935 (anap.); σύριγγες οὐ σιγῶσιν Id. Supp. 181; σίγησε δ’ αἰθήρ E. Ba. 1084; ς. πόντος, ς. ἀῆται, ἁ δ’ ἐμὰ οὐ ς. ἀνία Theoc. 2.38: — in E. Fr. 781.13, τὰ σιγῶντ’ ὀνόματ’ . . δαιμόνων seems to be = τὰ ἄρρητα, secret, mystical: — Pass., μέμψομαι σιωπὴν ὡς ἐσιλγήθη κακῶς I shall impute as a fault that silence was kept, Id. Supp. 298; also τί σεσίγηται δόμος Ἀδμήτου; why is it all silent? Id. Alc. 78; σιγῶντα λέγειν, λέγοντα σιγᾶν, phrases illustrating a logical fallacy, Pl. Euthd. 300b, Arist. SE 166a13 .

II trans., hold silent, keep secret, Pi. Fr. 81, A. Pr. 106, 441, Ag. 36, Hdt. 7.104 (s. v. l.), etc.: — Pass., to be kept silent or secret, σεσιγαμένον χρῆμα Pi. O. 9.103; ὁ θάνατος . . ἐσιγήθη Hdt. 5.21; σιγώμενος S. Fr. 653; ἐσιγάθη δ’ ἂν ὑφορβός would never have been heard of, Theoc. 16.54 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
σιγάω, σίγω; 1 aorist ἐσίγησα; perfect passive participle σεσιγημενος; (σιγή); from Homer down; to keep silence, hold one’s peace: Luke 9:36; Luke 18:39 L T Tr WH; (Luke 20:26); Acts 12:17; Acts 15:12; 1 Corinthians 14:28, 30, 34; passive, to be kept in silence, be concealed, Romans 16:25. (Synonym: see ἡσυχάζω.)

Question 198

σιωπάω

Answer 198

I am silent ( aposiopesis, in rhetoric, a figure of speech in which the speaker breaks off suddenly)

Thayer’s Definition
to be silent, hold one’s peace
used of one’s silence because dumb
metaph. of a calm, quiet sea

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
σῐωπ-άω,

inf. σιωπᾶν Il. 2.280: fut. -ήσομαι in early writers, S. OT 233, Ar. Pax 309, Av. 225, Lys. 364, Pl. Phdr. 234a, etc.; later -ήσω Aeschin. Ep. 10.1, D.H. 11.6, Plu. 2.240e, etc. (cf. σιγάω ): aor. ( ἐ ) σιώπησα Il. 23.568, etc.: pf. σεσιώπηκα Ar. V. 944, D. 6.34: — Med. and Pass., v. infr.: Dor. σωπάω (q.v.): — keep silence, σιωπᾶν λαὸν ἀνώγει Il. 2.280, cf. 23.568, Od. 17.513, Hdt. 7.10, etc.; Σιμωνίδης τὴν ζωγραφίαν ποίησιν σιωπῶσαν προσαγορεύει Plu. 2.346f; φησὶν σιωπῶν his silence is an admission, E. Or. 1592, cf. IA 1245; πονηρῶν ἔργων δόξει κοινωνεῖν τῷ σιωπῆσαι D. 19.33; ς. τινί keep silence for or at the behest of . ., Ar. Ra. 1134, Lys. 530; ς. πρός τινα Pl. Phdr. 234a; πρὸς τοῦτο X. Cyr. 5.5.20; ὑπέρ τινος E. Fr. 796; imper. σιώπα hush! be still! S. Fr. 81, Ar. Lys. 529, etc.
2. of bees, to be still, opp. βομβέω, Arist. HA 627a24 .

II trans., keep secret, speak not of, τὰ δίκαια E. Fr. 1037, cf. Ar. Th. 27, X. Smp. 6.10, etc.; ς. ὅτι . . PMasp. 295.21 (v A.D.): — Pass., ἂν σιωπηθῇ τὰ παρὰ τῶν πολεμίων D. Prooem. 21, cf. Isoc. 1.22, etc.; τί σιγῶσ’ ὧν σιωπᾶσθαι χρεών; E. Ion 432; σιωπώμενον καὶ ἀβασάνιστον ἐᾶσαι Antipho 1.13; οὐ τὸ αἰσχρὸν σιωπηθήσεται Aeschin. 3.155; ταῦτα σιωπᾶσθαι συνέφερεν D. 19.42; ἡ σιωπωμένη ἀλήθεια D.H. 1.76 .

III Med., silence, σιωπησάμενος τὰ πλήθη Plb. 18.46.4 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
σιωπάω, σιώπω; imperfect, 3 person singular ἐσιώπα, 3 person plural ἐσιώπων; future σιωπήσω (Luke 19:40 L T Tr WH); 1 aorist ἐσιώπησα; (σιωπή silence); from Homer down; to be silent, hold one’s peace: properly, Matthew 20:31; Matthew 26:63; Mark 3:4; Mark 9:34; Mark 10:48; Mark 14:61; Luke 18:39 R G; ; Acts 18:9; used of one silent because dumb, Luke 1:20; 4 Macc. 10:18; likesileo in the Latin poets, used metaphorically of a calm, quiet sea ((in rhetorical command)): Mark 4:39. (Synonym: see ἡσυχάζω.)

Question 199

συζητέω

Answer 199

I discuss, dispute

Thayer’s Definition
to seek or examine together
in the NT to discuss, dispute, question

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
συζητ-έω,

search or examine together with, τινι Pl. Cra. 384c, etc.; τινὶ περί τινος Id. Men. 90b: — Pass., to be discussed, Demetr.Lac. Herc. 1006 tit.

II ς. τινί or πρός τινα dispute with.., Acts 6:9, Acts 9:29, cf. POxy. 1673.20 (ii A.D.); ς. πρὸς αὑτούς Mark 1:27, Luke 22:23.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
συζητέω (L T Tr WH συνζητέω (cf. σύν, II. at the end)), συζήτω; imperfect 3 person singular συνεζήτει;

a. to seek or examine together (Plato).
b. in the N. T. to discuss, dispute (question (A. V. often)): absolutely (Mark 12:28); Luke 24:15; τίνι, with one, Mark 8:11; Mark 9:14 (R G L); Acts 6:9; in the same sense πρός τινα, Mark 9:14 (T Tr WH), 16 (where read πρός αὐτούς, not with Rec.bez elz G πρός αὑτούς (see αὑτοῦ, p. 87)); Acts 9:29, πρός ἑαυτούς (L Tr WH marginal reading or πρός αὑτούς Rbez elz G) equivalent to πρός ἀλλήλους, Mark 1:21 (where T WH text simply αὐτούς as subjunctive); πρός ἑαυτούς with the addition of an indirect question τό τίς etc. with the optative (cf. Buttmann, § 139, 60; Winer’s Grammar, § 41 b. 4c.), Luke 22:23; τί, with the indicative, Mark 9:10.

Question 200

σφάζω

Answer 200

I slay

Thayer’s Definition
to slay, slaughter, butcher
to put to death by violence
mortally wounded

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
σφάζω, Od. 4.320, Hdt. 2.39, E. Tr. 134 (lyr.); in Com. (Cratin. 361) and Prose, from Pl. (Grg. 468c) downwards, σφάττω, cf. Σφαττόμενος title of play by Diph., IG 22.2363.34, and ς[φά]ττετ[αι ] SIG 1024.36 (Myconus, iii/ii B.C.); Boeot. σφάδδω An.Ox. 4.325: fut. σφάξω E. Heracl. 493: aor. ἔσφαξα Il. 2.422: pf. ἔσφᾰκα, known from plpf. ἐσφάκειν D.C. 73.6, (ἀπο-) 78.7: — Pass., fut. σφᾰγήσομαι E. Andr. 315, Heracl. 583, (ἀπο-) X. HG 3.1.27: aor. ἐσφάγην [ᾰ ] Trag. (A. Eu. 305, etc.) and late Prose, Plu. Publ. 4, etc.; less freq. ἐσφάχθην, Pi. P. 11.23, Hdt. 5.5, E. IT 177 (lyr., nowhere else in Trag.): pf. ἔσφαγμαι Od. 10.532, D. 23.68: —

slay, slaughter, properly by cutting the throat (v. σφαγή 11), in Hom. always of cattle, μῆλ’ ἁδινὰ σφάζουσι καὶ εἰλίποδας ἕλικας βοῦς Od. 1.92, cf. 9.46, 23.305, Il. 9.467.

II esp. slaughter victims for sacrifice, 1.459, etc.; ἔσφαζ’ ἐπ’ ὤμων μόσχον cut its throat, as it hung from the servant’s shoulders, E. El. 813; ς. παρθένου δέρην Id. Or. 1199: — Pass., Od. 10.532; ἀρνίον ἐσφαγμένον Revelation 5:6.

2. generally, slay, kill, of human victims, as Iphigeneia, Menoeceus, Pi. P. 11.23, E. Ph. 913, cf. A. Ag. 1433, Ch. 904; ς. τινὰ ἐς τὸν κρητῆρα so that the blood ran into the bowl, Hdt. 3.11: — Pass., σφάζεται ἐς τὸν τάφον Id. 5.5; πρὸς βωμῷ σφαγείς A. Eu. 305.
3. of any slaughter by knife or sword, Hdt. 5.25, 7.107; ς. ἑαυτόν Th. 2.92; ς. καὶ ἐκδέρειν Pl. Euthd. 301c; τὸν ἴδιον ἀδελφόν PMag.Osl. 1.5, cf. 1 John 3:12.
4. of animals, tear by the throat, ς. ὥσπερ οἱ λύκοι τὰ πρόβατα Arist. HA 612b2.
5. of any killing, BGU 388 ii 21 (ii A.D.), OGI 697 (Egypt), Sammelb. 7436.7 (vi A.D.), Gloss.
6. metaph., torment, τινα POxy. 259.33 (i A.D.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
σφάζω, Attic σφάττω: future σφάξω, Revelation 6:4 L T Tr WH; 1 aorist ἐσφαξα; passive, perfect participle ἐσφαγμένος; 2 aorist ἐσφαγην; from Homer down; the Sept. very often for שָׁחַט, to slay, slaughter, butcher: properly, ἀρνίον, Revelation 5:6, 12; Revelation 13:8; τινα, to put to death by violence (often so in Greek writings from Herodotus down), 1 John 3:12; Revelation 5:9; Revelation 6:4, 9; Revelation 18:24. κεφαλή ἐσφαγμενη εἰς θάνατον, mortally wounded (R. V. smitten unto death), Revelation 13:3. (Compare: κατασφάζω.)

Question 201

τέταρτος

Answer 201

fourth

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τέταρτος, η, ον, also τέτρᾰτος (q.v.), Boeot. πέτρᾰτος (q.v.), fourth, Il. 23.301, etc.

II τὸ τέταρτον as Adv., the fourth time, 5.438, etc.: without Art., fourthly, Pl. Phdr. 266e: regul. Adv. -τως, fourfold, Id. Ti. 86a.

2. (sc. μέρος) a quarter, D.S. 1.50, POxy. 1293.25 (ii A.D.).

III ἡ τετάρτη:

1 (sc. ἡμέρα) the fourth day, Hes. Op. 800, X. An. 4.8.21.

2. (sc. μοῖρα) a liquid measure, Hdt. 6.57: — also, a measure of weight, λαβὼν χρυσοῦ τετάρτας [β] PMag.Leid.V. 6.24, cf. 6.22. a fourth part, ἐπὶ τετάρταις ἐργάζονται τῶν καρπῶν Str. 15.1.40.
3. tax of 25 %, τ. ἐπὶ τοῖς καρποῖς App. Mith. 83, cf. SIG 4.8 (Cyzicus, vi B.C.); ὧν τετάρτη goods which pay a tax of 25%, PCair.Zen. 12.59, 70, al. (iii B.C.); τ. σιτοποιῶν ib. 206.34 (iii B.C.). Τέταρτος, ὁ, a month in Locris, GDI 1901.2, 2097.5 (Delph., ii B.C.). (Skt. caturthás, Lith. ketvi[rtilde]tas, Lat. quartus, etc.: l.- E. q[uglide]eturto- and q[uglide]et[uglide]ṛto-.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τέταρτος, τετάρτῃ, τέταρτον (from τετταρες), the fourth: Matthew 14:25; Mark 6:48; Acts 10:30; Revelation 4:7, etc. (From Homer down.)

Question 202

φείδομαι

Answer 202

Thayer’s Definition
to spare
to abstain

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
φείδομαι,

Anacr. 101, etc.: impf. φείδοντο (without augm.) even in S. El. 716 after a diphth. at the end of the preceding line: fut. φείσομαι Ar. Ach. 312 (troch.), Pl. Ap. 31a, etc., πεφῐδήσομαι Il. 15.215, later fut. Pass. in med. sense φ[ε] ισθήσομαι PUniv.Giss. 21.6 (ii A.D.): aor. 1 ἐφεισάμην Sol. 32.1, A. Th. 412, And. 2.11, etc., Ephesians 3:1-21 sg. φείσατο Il. 24.236: redupl. aor. 2 πεφῐδόμην, used by Hom. in opt. πεφῐδοίμην, πεφίδοιτο, Od. 9.277, Il. 20.464, inf. πεφιδέσθαι 21.101: pf. part. πεφεισμένος Luc. Hist.Conscr. 59 (in med. sense, D.C. 50.20); imper. πεφίδησο IG 14.1363.16; part. πεφιδημένος Nonn. D. 12.392: —

spare:

I spare persons and things, e.g. in war, i.e. not destroy them, c. gen., Τρώων Il. 21.101; ἀνδρός 24.158, cf. Od. 9.277, 22.54, Pl. Ap. 31a; Ἰλίου Il. 15.215; Ἄρης οὐκ ἀγαθῶν φ. Anacr. l. c.; ἀπ’ ἀνδρῶν ὧν Ἄρης ἐφείσατο A. Th. 412; γῆς πατρίδος Sol. l.c.; μὴ φείσῃ βίου spare not my life, S. Ph. 749; μὴ φείδεσθε.. στρατοῦ Id. Aj. 844; φ. μήτε ἰδίου μήτε δημοσίου οἰκοδομήματος Th. 1.90, cf. 3.74: abs., spare, be merciful, ib. 59.

II spare persons and things in using them, use sparingly, ἵππων φειδόμενος, i. e. taking care of them, Il. 5.202; πίθου μεσσόθι φ. Hes. Op. 369; φ. ὃν εἶχε βίον (βίον by attraction to the relat.) Thgn. 908; ἰδίᾳ μὲν τῶν [ὄντων] φείδομαι δημοσίᾳ δὲ λῃτουργῶν ἥδομαι Lys. 21.16; φείδεσθε τοὐλαίου σφόδρα Pl. Com.190: in this sense, most freq. with a negat., οὐ φ. not to spare, i. e. to use or give freely, οὐδέ νυ τοῦ περ [δέπαος] φείσατο Il. 24.236; μὴ φείδεο σίτου Hes. Op. 604; θνῄσκωμεν ψυχέων μηκέτι φειδόμενοι Tyrt. 10.14; τᾶς ζωᾶς Id. 15.5; σφετέρας οὐ φείσατο νευρᾶς Pi. I. 6(5).33; φείδεο τῶν νεῶν, μηδὲ ναυμαχίην ποιέο Hdt. 8.68. ά; τούτων φ. μηδενός Id. 9.41, cf. 39; φείδοντο κέντρων οὐδέν S. El. 716; οὐδὲν φ. αὐτῶν οὔτ’ ἐν πόνοις κτλ. X. Cyr. 4.2.1, cf. 7.1.29; οὔτε τοῦ σώματος οὔτε τῶν ὄντων And. 2.11; οὐδενὸς ἂν ἐφείσατο τῶν ἑαυτοῦ Lys. 19.24; οὔθ’ ἱερῶν κτεάνων οὔτε τι δημοσίων φ. Song of Solomon 4:13; μήτε χρημάτων μήτε πόνων Pl. Phd. 78a: later also c. acc., τῶν συμμάχων and τὰ τῶν συμμάχων both in D.C. 50.20.

2. abs., to be sparing, live thriftily, φείδεσθαι μὲν ἄμεινον Thgn. 931; τοὺς φειδομένους καὶ τοὺς ἀκριβῶς διαιτῶντας And. 4.32; οἱ γεωργοῦντες καὶ φ. D. 24.172, cf. Antipho Soph. 53; freq. in part. φειδόμενος, η, ον, thrifty, Ar. Pl. 247, 553 (anap.), etc.; ὄμμασι φειδομένοις with shrinking, shy eyes, AP 12.21 (Strat.), cf. 5.215 (Agath.), 268 (Id.); αἱ μὴ φ. (sc. μέλισσαι) the un thrifty ones, Arist. HA 627a20: also ἔπαινοι πάνυ πεφεισμένοι Luc. Hist.Conscr. 59; πεφιδημένα δάκτυλα Nonn. D. 12.392; cf. πεφεισμένως, φειδομένως.

III have consideration for, τῆς τοῦ λόγου συμμετρίας Plu. 2.114b: with neg., pay no heed to, οὔτ’ ἀνθρώπων φείδεται οὔτε θεῶν AP 5.278 (Paul.Sil.), cf. 7.706 (Diog.). draw back from, refrain from, θαλάσσας Alc. Supp. 4.13 (prob.); κελεύθου Pi. N. 9.20; κινδύνου X. Cyr. 5.5.18; τᾶς θήρας Bion Fr. 10.12; τοῦ λέγειν, τοῦ ἀκολουθεῖν, X. Cyr. 1.6.19 (v.l.), HG 7.1.24; φείδου μηδὲν ὧνπερ ἐννοεῖς S. Aj. 115, cf. E. Med. 401, etc.; οὐδενὸς φεισάμενος οὔτε τῶν πρὸς τοὺς θεοὺς οὔτε τῶν πρὸς τοὺς πολίτας δικαίων SIG 708.36 (Istropolis, ii B.C.): (abs., μὴ φείδεσθε E. Tr. 1285; φείδου μηδέν Id. Hec. 1044; μὴ φείδου, εἴ τι ἔχεις διδάσκειν X. Cyr. 1.6.35): c. inf., spare to do, forbear from doing, dub. in E. Or. 393 (fort. abs., post φείδου δ’ distinguendum); also φ. μή τι δρᾶσαι τῶν τυραννικῶν Pl. R. 574b; τί φειδόμεσθα τῶν λίθων.. μὴ οὐ καταξαίνειν τὸν ἄνδρα; Ar. Ach. 319 (troch.). in LXX, with Preps., φ. ἐπί τινι have mercy upon.., Jeremiah 15:5; Jeremiah 21:7; ἐπί τινα Id. 28(51).3; φ. περί τινος to keep one’s hands off.., 2 Samuel 12:6 (but φ. περὶ κακώσεως spare to hurt, ib. Si. 13.12); φ. ὑπὲρ τῆς κολοκύνθης John 4:10; ἀπό τινος 1 Samuel 15:3, Ezekiel 24:21; φ. τι ἀπό τινος keep it off, Job 30:10; φ. τῆς ψυχῆς ἀπὸ θανάτου ib. 33.18, cf. Psalms 19:14(18).14; φειδεύμενοι (from contr. φειδέομαι) is cj. for φιλεύμεναι in Eus.Mynd. 17.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
φείδομαι; future φείσομαι; 1 aorist ἐφεισάμην; deponent middle; from Homer down; the Sept. for חָמַל, חוּס, חָשַׂך (to keep back); to spare: absolutely 2 Corinthians 13:2; τίνος, to spare one (Winers Grammar, § 30, 10 d.; Buttmann, § 132, 15), Acts 20:29; Romans 8:32; Romans 11:21; 1 Corinthians 7:28; 2 Corinthians 1:23; 2 Peter 2:4f; to abstain (A. V. forbear), an infinitive denoting the act abstained from being supplied from the context: καυχᾶσθαι, 2 Corinthians 12:6 (μή φειδου — namely, διδάσκειν — εἰ ἔχεις διδάσκειν, Xenophon, Cyril 1, 6, 35; with the infinitive added, λέγειν κακά, Euripides, Or. 393; δρασαι τί τῶν τυραννικων, Plato, de rep. 9, p. 574 b.).

Question 203

χρηστότης

Answer 203

goodness, kindness

Thayer’s Definition
moral goodness, integrity
benignity, kindness

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
χρηστότης, ητος, ἡ,

goodness, honesty, uprightness, χρηστότητα ἀσκεῖν E. Supp. 872; μέγιστον ἀγαθόν ἐστι μετὰ νοῦ χ. Men. 788, cf. 472.1; χρηστότητος εἵνεκα as a reward for honesty, Aristopho 14.4 (troch.), Timocl. 8.17; ποιεῖν χ. LXX Psalms 14:3(13).3; ἀκολουθεῖ τῇ ἀρετῇ χ.) Arist. VV 1251b33; ἡ σὴ χ., as a honorific address, PGiss. 7.15 (ii A. D.), PLond. 2.411.6 (iv A. D.), etc.

II goodness of heart, kindness, Isaiah 2:7 (but in depreciatory sense, soft-heartedness, Men. 579); εὔνοιαν καὶ χ. παρέσχητο Hdn. 2.9.9; χ. καὶ φιλοστοργία, φιλανθρωπία καὶ χ., Plu. Agis 17, Comp.Dem.Cic. 3, cf. Luc. Tim. 8, D.C. 73.5; ἡ χ. καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία τοῦ θεοῦ Titus 3:4, cf. Romans 11:22, al.; χ. ἐθ’ ἡμᾶς Ephesians 2:7; ποιεῖν χρηστότητα to show kindness, LXX Psalms 119:65(118).65; πολλὰ τῇ χ… κτῶνται Phld. Rh. 1.262S.

2. simplicity, silly good nature, ἤθους ἀπλαστία μετ’ ἀλογιστίας, Pl. Def. 412e.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
χρηστότης, χρηστητος, ἡ (χρηστός);

1. moral goodness, integrity: Romans 3:12 (from Psalm 13:3 () (A. V. ‘doeth good’).
2. benignity, kindness: Romans 2:4; 2 Corinthians 6:6; Galatians 5:22; Colossians 3:12; Titus 3:4; ἡ χρηστότης τίνος ἐπί τινα, Romans 11:22 (opposed to ἀποστομια (which see)); Ephesians 2:7. (The Sept.; Euripides, Isaeus, Diodorus, Josephus, Aelian, Herodian; often in Plutarch) (See Trench, Synonyms, § lxiii.)

Question 204

περιάγω

Answer 204

I lead about, go about

Thayer’s Definition
to lead around, to lead about with one’s self
to go about, walk about

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
περιάγω [ᾰ],

fut. - άξω Men. 532.13, etc.: —

I

1. lead or draw round, Hdt. 1.30, al.; τὰ φορτία ἐν βάρισι περὶ τὸ Δέλτα Id. 2.179; π. τινὰς ἐν ἁμάξῃσι κειμένους Id. 4.73: c. acc. loci, περιάγουσι τὴν λίμνην κύκλῳ (sc. τὴν παρθένον ) ib. 180 (s.v.l.), cf. Men. l. c.; carry about for sale, Pl. Prt. 313d: — Med., lead round with one, ἐλέφαντα Epin. 2.4 . cause to revolve, ψυχὴ π. πάντα Pl. Lg. 898d, cf. Plot. 5.1.2: — Pass., rotate, οἷον τροχοῦ περιαγομένου Pl. Ti. 79b .
2. lead about with one, have always by one, X. Cyr. 2.2.28, cf. 1.3.3: — more freq. in Med., ἀκολούθους πολλοὺς περιάγεσθαι Id. Mem. 1.7.2, cf. Theopomp.Hist. 89 ( a ), Posidon. 7 J., etc. metaph., lead round and round, perplex, τὼ θεώ με περιάγουσιν, ὥστε . . And. 1.113 (s.v.l.), cf. Luc. Nigr. 8: — Pass., περιαγόμενος τῷ λόγῳ Pl. La. 187e .
3. turn round, turn about, τὴν κεφαλήν, τὸν τράχηλον, τὸν αὐχένα, Ar. Pax 682, Av. 176, Pl. R. 515c, cf. Hp. Art. 18; τινὰ πρὸς τἀριστερά E. Cyc. 686 (s.v.l.); μύλην Poll. 7.180; π. τὴν σκυταλίδα twist it round in order to tighten a noose, Hdt. 4.60; τὼ χεῖρε περιαγαγὼν εἰς τοὔπισθεν καὶ δήσας twisting back the hands behind the back, Lys. 1.25; simply π. τὼ χεῖρε D.H. 6.82: — Pass., περιαχθεὶς τὼ χεῖρε Philostr. Her. 10.7; so prob. περιαχθείς alone, π. κρεμήσεται PCair.Zen. 202.9 (iii B. C.) .
4. pass round, τὸ περιαγόμενον ποτήριον Ath. 10.420a, etc., cf. Hld. 3.11 .
5. protract, ἐς ὥραν τινά Luc. Merc. Cond. 31 .
6. bring round to . ., [ τὴν πολιτείαν] πάλιν εἰς τὴν ἑτέραν πολιτείαν Arist. Pol. 1265a4; εἰς αὑτὸν τὴν ἀρχήν Hdn. 4.3.1: — Pass., π. εἰς ὁμόνοιαν Id. 3.15.7; εἰς τόδε, εἰς ἀνάγκην, Luc. Nigr. 5, J. AJ 5.2.8 .
7. Rhet., round a period, etc., περίοδος, σύνθεσις περιηγμένη, Demetr. Eloc. 19, 30 .

II

1. intr., come round, πάλιν κύκλῳ π. εἰς τὴν ἀρχήν Arist. Mete. 356a8; περιφερομένης καὶ περιαγούσης Epicur. Nat. 11.2 .
2. c. acc. loci, go round, π. τὴν ἐσχατιάν D. 42.5; π. τὰς πόλεις Ev.Matthew 9:35; cf. Matthew 4:23, etc.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
περιάγω; imperfect περιηγον; from Herodotus down;

1. transitive,
   a. to lead around (cf. περί, III. 1).
   b. equivalent to to lead about with oneself: τινα (Xenophon, Cyril 2, 2, 28; τρεῖς παῖδας ἀκολουθους, Demosthenes, p. 958, 16), 1 Corinthians 9:5.
2. intransitive, to go about, walk about (Cebes () tab. c. 6): absolutely, Acts 13:11; with an accusative of place (depending on the preposition in compos., cf. Matthiae, § 426; (Buttmann, 144 (126); Winer’s Grammar, § 52, 2 c.; 432 (402))), Matthew 4:28 (R G; (others read the dative with or without ἐν)); ; Mark 6:6.

Question 205

ἐπισυνάγω

Answer 205

to collect, gather together at one place

Thayer’s Definition
to gather together besides, to bring together to others already assembled
to gather together against
to gather together in one place

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐπισυν-άγω [ᾰ],

I. collect and bring to a place, Plb. 1.75.2 (Pass.), 5.97.3, Wilcken Chr. 11 A 5 (ii B.C.); gather together, LXX Genesis 6:16, al., Matthew 23:37, etc.: — Pass., OGI 90.23 (Rosetta, ii B. C.), Placit. 3.4.1, Ph. 1.338; οἱ -συνηγμένοι ἐν Ξόει Βοιωτοί Supp.Epigr. 2.871 (Egypt, ii B. C.); to be combined, τὰ ἐκ τῶν πληθυντικῶν εἰς τὰ ἑνικὰ -όμενα Longin. 24.1; ἐπισυναχθέντες τόκοι accumulated interest, PGrenf. 2.72.8 (iii/iv A. D.), cf. PFlor. 1.46.14 (ii A. D.); ἐπισυναγόμενος ἀριθμός counted up, Ptol. Tetr. 43.

II

1. bring in, in a discussion, περιττὸν-ειν καὶ ταύτας Phld. Acad.Ind. 28.
2. Astrol., = cross ἐπισυμφέρω, Vett.Val. 288.29.

III conclude, infer, συλλογιζόμενοι τὸν μεταξὺ χρόνον ἐπισυνάγουσιν ὅτι.. Procl. Hyp. 5.54.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπισυνάγω; future ἐπισυνάξω; 1 aorist infinitive ἐπισυνάξαι; 2 aorist infinitive ἐπισυναγαγεῖν; passive, perfect participle ἐπισυνηγμενος; 1 aorist participle ἐπισυναχθεις; (future ἐπισυναχθήσομαι, Luke 17:37 T Tr WH); Sept several times for אָסַף, קָבַץ, קָהַל;

1. to gather together besides, to bring together to others already assembled (Polybius).
2. to gather together against (Micah 4:11; Zechariah 12:3; 1 Macc. 3:58, etc.).
3. to gather together in one place (ἐπί to): Matthew 23:37; Matthew 24:31; Mark 13:27; Luke 13:34; passive: Mark 1:33; Luke 12:1; Luke 17:37 T Tr WH (Psalm 101:23 (); (); 2 Macc. 1:27, etc.; Aesop 142).

Question 206

ἀγών, ἀγῶνος, ὁ (ἄγω);

Answer 206

an athletic contest, a contest

Thayer’s Definition
an assembly,
a place of assembly: especially an assembly met to see games
the place of contest, the arena or stadium
the assembly of the Greeks at their national games
hence the contest for a prize at their games
generally, any struggle or contest
a battle
an action at law, trial

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀγωìν

ἀγών [ ᾰ], ῶνος, ὁ, Aeol. ἄγωνος, ου, ὁ, Alc. 121 (also E.ap.Sch.Il. Oxy. 1087.60); Elean dat. pl. ἀγώνοιρ GDI 1172.26: (ἄγω): — gathering, assembly, ἵζανεν εὐρὺν ἀ. Il. 23.258; λῦτο δ’ ἀ. 24.1, cf. Od. 8.200; νεῶν ἐν ἀγῶνι Il. 15.428, cf. Eust. 1335.57: esp. assembly met to see games, freq. in Il. 23; Ὑπερβορέων ἀ. Pi P. 10.30; κοινοὺς ἀ. θέντες A. Ag. 845.

2. place of contest, lists, course, βήτην ἐς μέσσον ἀ. Il. 23.685, cf. 531, Od. 8.260, Hes. Sc. 312, Pi. P. 9.114, and esp. Th. 5.50: prov., ἔξω ἀγῶνος out of the lists or course, i.e. beside the mark, Pi. P. 1.44, Luc. Anach. 21: pl., κατ’ ἀγῶνας Od. 8.259. II assembly of the Greeks at the national games, ὁ ἐν Ὀλυμπίῃ ἀ. Hdt. 6.127; ὁ Ὀλυμπικὸς ἀ. Ar. Pl. 583; Ἑλλάδος πρόσχημ’ ἀ. S. El. 682, cf. 699: — hence, contest for a prize at the games, ἀ. γυμνικός, ἱππικός, μουσικός, Hdt. 2.91, Pl. Lg. 658a, Ar. Pl. 1163, cf. Th. 3.104; οἱ τῶν λαμπάδων ἀ. Arist. Ath. 57.1; ἀ. τῶν ἀνδρῶν contest in which the chorus was composed of men, opp. to παίδων or ἀγενείων (q.v.), D. 21.18, etc.; ἀ. στεφανηφόρος or στεφανίτης contest where the prize is a crown, Hdt. 5.102, Arist. Rh. 1357a19; ἀ. χάλκεος, where it is a shield of brass, Pi. N. 10.22; ἀ. θεματικός IG 14.739 (Naples); ἀργυρίτης δωρίτης Plu. 2.820d: — hence many phrases, ἀγῶνα καταστῆσαι establish a contest, Isoc. 4.1; τιθέναι Hdt. 5.8; ποιεῖν Th. 3.104; οὐ λόγων τοὺς ἀ. προθήσοντες Id. 3.67; προηγόρευέ τε ἀγῶνας καὶ ἆθλα προυτίθει X. Cyr. 8.2.26; προκαλούμενος ἑαυτὸν εἰς ἀ. Id. Mem. 2.3.17; τοὺς ἀ. νικᾶν ib. 3.7.1; ἐν τοῖς ἀγῶσι Isoc. 15.301; of contests in general, εἰς ἀ. λόγων ἀφικέσθαι τινί Pl. Prt. 335a; πρὸς τίν’ ἀγῶνας τιθέμεσθ’ ἀρετῆς; E. Ion 863 (lyr.); ἀ. σοφίας Ar. Ra. 883. III generally, struggle, πολλοὺς ἀ. ἐξιών, of Hercules, S. Tr. 159; ξιφηφόρος ἀ. A. Ch. 584; εἰς ἀ. τῷδε συμπεσὼν μάχης S. Tr. 20, etc; ὁ Φίλιππος, πρὸς ὀν ἦν ἡμῖν ὁ ἀ. D. 18.67; ποιέειν ἢ παθεῖν πρόκειται ἀ. Hdt. 7.11; ἀληθείην ἀσκέειν ἀ. μέγιστος ib. 209: pl., πραγμάτων ἀγῶνας κεκτημένων Epicur. Sent. 21; ἄπορος ἀ. Lys. 7.2; ὅπλων ἔκειτ’ ἀ. πέρι S. Aj. 936; and without περί, τῶν Ἀχιλλείων ὅπλων ἀ. ib. 1240; ψυχῆς ἀ. τὸν προκείμενον πέρι struggle for life and death, E. Or. 847, cf. Ph. 1330; πολλοὺς ἀ. δραμέονται περὶ σφέων αὐτῶν Hdt. 8.102; λόγων γὰρ οὐ.. ἁγών, ἀλλὰ σῆς ψυχῆς πέρι S. El. 1492, cf.infr. 5.
3. battle, action, Th. 2.89, etc.
4. action at law, trial, Antipho 6.21, etc., cf. A. Eu. 677, 744; εἰς ἀγῶνα καθιστάναι ἀνθρώπους Pl. Ap. 24c, R. 494e; περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς εἰς ἀγῶνα καταστῆσαί τινα X. Lac. 8.4.
5. speech delivered in court or before an assembly or ruler, πρεσβευτικοὶ ἀ. Plb. 9.32.4; τοὺς ἐπιφανεστάτους εἰρηκότος ἀ. τούς τε δικανικοὺς καὶ τοὺς δημηγορικούς D.H. Amm. 1.3, cf. OGI 567 (Attalia, ii A.D.); ἀ. ἐσχηματισμένοι D.H. Rh. 8.1, al. Rhet., main argument of a speech (opp. προοίμιον, ἐπίλογος), in pl., Syr. in Hermog. 2.111, 170R., cf. Proll. Hermog. ap. Rh. 4.12 W.
6. metaph., οὐ λόγων ἔθ’ ἁγών now is not the time for words, E. Ph. 588; οὐχ ἕδρας ἀ. ‘tis no time for sitting still, Id. Or. 1291; ἀ. πρόφασιν οὐ δέχεται the crisis admits no dallying, Ar. Fr. 331, cf. Pl. Cra. 421d, Lg. 751d; μέγας ὁ ἀ… τὸ χρηστὸν ἢ κακὸν γενέσθαι the issue is great.., Id. R. 608b, cf. E. Med. 235; οὐ περί τινος ὁ ἀ. the question is not about.., Th. 3.44.
7. mental struggle, anxiety, Th. 7.71, Plb. 4.56.4, Colossians 2:1 : in pl., τρόμοι καὶ ἀ. Plu. So 7 of speakers, vehemence, power, Longin. 15.1, cf. 26.3. personified, Ἀγών, divinity of the contest, Paus. 5.26.3.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀγών, ἀγῶνος, ὁ (ἄγω);

1. a place of assembly (Homer, Iliad 7, 298; 18, 376); specifically, the place in which the Greeks assembled to celebrate solemn games (as the Pythian, the Olympian); hence,
2. a contest, of athletes, runners, charioteers. In a figurative sense,
   a. in the phrase (used by the Greeks, see τρέχω, b.) τρέχειν τόν ἀγῶνα, Hebrews 12:1, that is to say ‘Amid all hindrances let us exert ourselves to the utmost to attain to the goal of perfection set before the followers of Christ’; any struggle with dangers, annoyances, obstacles, standing in the way of faith, holiness, and a desire to spread the gospel: 1 Thessalonians 2:2; Philippians 1:30; 1 Timothy 6:12; 2 Timothy 4:7.
   b. intense solicitude, anxiety: περί τίνος, Colossians 2:1 (cf. Euripides, Ph. 1350; Polybius 4, 56, 4). On the ethical use of figures borrowed from the Greek Games cf. Grimm on Wis. 4:1; (Howson, Metaphors of St. Paul, Essay iv.; Conyb. and Hows. Life and Epistles of St. Paul, chapter xx.; McClintock and Strong’s Cyclopaedia iii. 733bf; BB. DD. under the word )

Question 207

ἁγνός, ή, όν

Answer 207

1) exciting reverence, venerable, sacred
2) pure
2a) pure from carnality, chaste, modest
2b) pure from every fault, immaculate
2c) clean

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἁγνός, ή, όν, (cf. ἅγιος)

pure, chaste, holy, Hom. (only in Od.), etc.:

I of places and things dedicated to gods, hallowed, ἑορτή Od. 21.259; of frankincense, ἁγνὴ ὀδμή Xenoph. 1.7; ἄλσος h.Merc. 187; τέμενος Pi. P. 4.204; ὕδωρ Id. I. 6(5).74; πυρὸς ἁγνόταται παγαί Id. P. 1.21; αἰθήρ A. Pr. 282; φάος, λουτρόν, S. El. 86, Ant. 1201; θύματα Id. Tr. 287, cf. Th. 1.126, D.H. 1.38; of food, Jul. Or. 6.192c (Comp.); χρηστήρια E. Ion 243, etc.; ἐν ἁγνῷ on holy ground, A. Supp. 223, but χῶρον οὐχ ἁ. πατεῖν a spot not lawful to tread on, S. OC 37.

2. of divine persons, chaste, pure, Hom., mostly of Artemis, χρυσόθρονος Ἄ. ἁ. Od. 5.123, 18.202, etc.; also ἁ. Περσεφόνεια 11.386, cf. h.Cer. 337; of Demeter, h.Cer. 203, 439; Χάριτες Sapph. 65; ἁ. θεαί, Demeter and Persephone, IG 14.204, 4.31; Apollo, Pi. P. 9.64; Zeus, A. Supp. 653, S. Ph. 1289: of the attributes of gods, θεῶν σέβας S. OT 830.

II after Hom.,

1. of persons, undefiled, chaste, of maidens, Alc. 55, Pi. P. 4.103, A. Fr. 242; ἁ. αὐδά, of a maiden’s voice, Ag. 245; of Hippolytus, E. Hipp. 102; c. gen., λέχους ἁ. δέμας ib. 1003; γάμων ἁ. Pl. Lg. 840d, cf. Men. Epit. 223; ἁ. ἀπ’ ἀνδρὸς συνουσίας Jusj. ap. D. 59.78.
2. pure from blood, guiltless, ἁγνοὶ τοὐπὶ τήνδε τὴν κόρην S. Ant. 889; ἁ. χεῖρας E. Or. 1604; μητροκτόνος.. τόθ’ ἁ. ὤν Id. El. 975, cf. IA 940; ὅθ’ ἁ. ἦν when he had been purified, S. Tr. 258: c. gen., ἁγνὰς χεῖρας αἵματος E. Hipp. 316; φόνου Pl. Lg. 759c; Δάματρος ἀκτᾶς δέμας ἁ. ἴσχειν pure from food, E. Hipp. 138.
3. generally, pure, upright, ἀέθλων ἁ. κρίσις Pi. O. 3.21; ψυχῆς φιλία ἁ. X. Smp. 8.15, etc.

III Adv. ἁγνῶς καὶ καθαρῶς h.Ap. 121, Hes. Op. 337; ἁ. ἔχειν X. Mem. 3.8.10.

ἄγνος, ἡ, Att. ὁ, = λύγος,

I chaste-tree, the branches of which were strewed by matrons on their beds at the Thesmophoria, Vitex Agnus-castus, h.Merc. 410, Chionid. 2, cf. Trag.Adesp. 396, Pl. Phdr. 230b, Hp. Int. 30, Arist. H A 627a9, Nic. Th. 71, Dsc. 1.103. (Associated with the notion of chastity from the like ness of its name to ἁγνός.)

II ἄγνος, ὁ, name of a fish, = καλλιώνυμος Diph.Siph. ap. Ath. 8.356a (sine acc. cod., ἁγνός Kaib.).

III a kind of bird, Sch. Pl. Phdr. l.c., Suid.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἁγνός, (ή, (ἅζομαι, see ἅγιος);

1. exciting reverence, venerable, sacred: πῦρ καί ἡ σποδός, 2 Macc. 13:8; Euripides, El. 812.
2. pure (Euripides, Or. 1604 ἁγνός γάρ εἰμί χεῖρας, ἀλλ’ οὐ τάς φρένας, Hipp. 316f, ἁγνάς … μίασμα);
   a. pure from carnality, chaste, modest: Titus 2:5; παρθένος an unsullied virgin, 2 Corinthians 11:2 (4 Macc. 18:7).
   b. pure from every fault, immaculate: 2 Corinthians 7:11; Philippians 4:8; 1 Timothy 5:22; 1 Peter 3:2; 1 John 3:3 (of God (yet cf. ἐκεῖνος 1 b.)); James 3:17. (From Homer down.) (Cf. references under the word ἅγιος, at the end; Westc. on 1 John 3:3.)

Question 208

ἁγνίζω

Answer 208

I make pure

Thayer’s Definition
ceremonially
to make pure, purify, cleanse
morally

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἁγνίζω, fut. ῐῶ (ἀφ-) LXX Numbers 8:6 : pf. ἥγνικα 1 Peter 1:22 : (ἁγνός): —

1. wash off, cleanse away, esp. by water (τὸ πῦρ καθαίρει.. τὸ ὕδωρ ἁγνίζει Plu. 2.263e), λύμαθ’ ἁγνίσας ἐμά S. Aj. 655; τινὰ πηγαῖς E. IT 1039.
2. cleanse, purify, χέρας σὰς ἁγνίσας μιάσματος E. HF 1324, cf. Diph. 126.1, LXX Exodus 19:10 : — Med., purify oneself, i[*]. John 3:5, Plu. 2.1105b: — Pass., ἁγνίσθητι Acts 21:24; ἀπὸ οἴνου LXX Numbers 6:3 (Pass.).
3. esp. ἁ. τὸν θανόντα purify the dead by fire, S. Ant. 545: — Pass., σώμαθ’ ἡγνίσθη πυρί E. Supp. 1211.
4. sacrifice, E. Fr. 314, IT 705 (Pass.).
5. hallow, consecrate, Aristonous 1.17 (Pass.).
6. burn up, consume, S. Fr. 116; ἐπαστράψας αἰθὴρ ἥγνισε.. ἱστορίαν AP 7.49 (Bianor).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἁγνίζω; 1 aorist ἥγνισα; perfect participle active ἠγνικώς; passive ἡγνισμένος; 1 aorist passive ἡγνίσθην (Winer’s Grammar, 252 (237)); (ἁγνός); to purify;

1. ceremonially: ἐμαυτόν, John 11:55 (to cleanse themselves from levitical pollution by means of prayers, abstinence, washings, sacrifices); the passive has a reflexive force, to take upon oneself a purification, Acts 21:24, 26; Acts 24:18 (הזּיר, Numbers 6:3), and is used of Nazarites or those who had taken upon themselves a temporary or a life-long vow to abstain from wine and all kinds of intoxicating drink, from every defilement and from shaving the head (cf. BB. DD. under the word ).
2. morally: τάς καρδίας, James 4:8; τάς ψυχάς, 1 Peter 1:22; ἑαυτόν, 1 John 3:3. (Sophocles, Euripides, Plutarch, others.)

Question 209

καταγγέλλω

Answer 209

Thayer’s Definition
to announce, declare, promulgate, make known
to proclaim publicly, publish
to denounce, report, betray

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κατ-αγγέλλω,

1. announce, proclaim, declare, πόλεμον κατηγγέλκασι Lys. 25.30, cf. D.S. 14.68, Plu. Pyrrh. 26; κ. ῥύσιά τινι Plb. 4.53.2; δεῖπνον Plu. 2.727b: freq. in NT, κ. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, Χριστόν 1 Corinthians 9:14, Philippians 1:17 : c. inf., κ. ἱκέσθαι report one’s arrival, Berl.Sitzb. 1927.170 (Cyrene).
2. recite, recount, ἀγῶνα Luc. Par. 39.
3. denounce, τινὸς τὴν ἐπιβουλήν X. An. 2.5.38; δοῦλοι ὅσοι δεσπότας κ. Hdn. 5.2.2; lay an information, πρός τινα CIG 3641 b. 32 (Lampsacus): metaph., κ. ἀπειρίαν τοῦ ποιητοῦ A.D. Pron. 78.20.
4. of symptoms, threaten, σπασμόν Antyll. ap. Orib. 10.2.6.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καταγγέλλω; imperfect κατήγγελλον; 1 aorist κατηγγειλα; passive, present καταγγέλλομαι; 2 aorist κατηγγελην; to announce, declare, promulgate, make known; to proclaim publicly, publish: τόν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, Acts 13:5; Acts 15:36; passive Acts 17:13; ἔθη, Acts 16:21; τό εὐαγγέλιον, 1 Corinthians 9:14; τήν ἀνάστασιν τήν ἐκ νεκρῶν, Acts 4:2; τάς ἡμέρας ταύτας, Acts 3:24 G L T Tr WH; Θεόν (others ὁ), Acts 17:23; Ἰησοῦν, Acts 17:3; Christ, Philippians 1:16 (17),18; Colossians 1:28; τίνι τί, Acts 13:38; Acts 16:17; 1 Corinthians 2:1; with the included idea of celebrating, commending, openly praising (Latinpraedicare): τί, Romans 1:8 (A. V. is spoken of); 1 Corinthians 11:26. (Occasionally in Greek writings from Xenophon, an. 2, 5, 38 where it means to denounce, report, betray; twice in the O. T. viz. 2 Macc. 8:36 2Macc. 9:17. (Cf. Westcott on 1 John 1:5.)) (Compare: προκαταγγέλλω.)

Question 210

ἀλλάσσω

Answer 210

to change, exchange

to change, alter, transform, Acts 6:14; Rom. 1:23; 1 Cor. 15:51, 52; Gal. 4:20; Heb. 1:12

Thayer’s Definition
to change, to exchange one thing for another, to transform

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀλλάσσω,

later Att. ἀλλαντό-ττω Pl. Prm. 139a: impf. ἤλλαττον Men. Epit. 466: fut. -άξω Thgn. 21: aor. ἤλλαξα E. Alc. 661: pf. ἤλλᾰχα (ἀπ-) X. Mem. 3.13.6, (δι-) Dionys. Com. 2.10: — Med., fut. ἀλλάξομαι Luc. Tyr. 7, (ἀντ-) E. Hel. 1088: aor. ἠλλαξάμην Id. El. 103, Antipho 5.79, Th. 8.82, etc.: pf. (in med. sense) ἤλλαγμαι (ἐν -) S. Aj. 208: — Pass., fut. ἀλλαχθήσομαι Trag. and Com., (ἀπ-) E. Med. 878, Ar. Av. 940; ἀλλαγήσομαι in early Prose, (ἀπ-) Hdt. 2.120, (ἐξαπ-) Th. 4.28: aor. ἠλλάχθην and ἠλλάγην, former more freq. in S. and E., latter in Prose: pf. ἤλλαγμαι Antiph. 176, AP 9.67, al.: plpf. ἤλλακτο Hdt. 2.26. (More common in compds., esp. in later Gk.): (ἄλλος): —

I make other than it is, change, alter, τόπον Parm. 8.41; μορφήν Emp. 137; χροιάν E. Med. 1168; ἤλλαττε χρώματ’ Men. Epit. 466; τὸ ἑαυτοῦ εἶδος εἰς πολλὰς μορφάς Pl. R. 380d; χώραν Id. Prm. 139a.

II

1. ἀ. τί τινος give in exchange, barter one thing for another, τῆς σῆς λατρείας τὴν ἐμὴν δυσπραξίαν.. οὐκ ἂν ἀλλάξαιμ’ ἐγώ A. Pr. 967; τι ἀντί τινος E. Alc. 661: — Med., τὴν παραντίκα ἐλπίδα.. οὐδενὸς ἂν ἠλλάξαντο Th. 8.82.
2. repay, requite, φόνον φονεῦσιν E. El. 89.
3. leave, quit, οὐράνιον φῶς S. Ant. 944, cf. E. IT 193.
4. Med., ἔξω τρίβου ἀλλάσσεσθαι ἴχνος move one’s position, Id. El. 103.

III

1. take one thing in exchange for another, κάκιον τοὐσθλοῦ παρεόντος Thgn. 21; πόνῳ πόνον ἀ. to exchange one suffering with another (nisi leg. πόνου), Trag.Adesp. 7.3; ἠλλαττόμεσθ’ ἂν δάκρυα δόντες χρυσίον should take in exchange, Philem. 73: ἀ. θνητὸν εἶδος assume it, E. Ba. 53, cf. 1331: — more freq. in Med., τί τινος one thing for another, εὐδαιμονίας κακοδαιμονίαν Antipho 5.79, cf. Pl. Lg. 733b; τὰ οἰκήϊα κακὰ ἀλλάξασθαι τοῖσι πλησίοισι exchange them with them, Hdt. 7.152: hence, buy, τι ἀντ’ ἀργυρίου Pl. R. 371c; διά τινος ὠνῆς ἢ καὶ πράσεως ἀλλάττεσθαί τί τινι Id. Lg. 915d, 915e; τοῦ παντὸς ἀ. prize above all things, Ph. Bel. 56.30.
2. take a new position, i.e. go to a place, ἀ.Ἅιδα θαλάμους E. Hec. 483; πόλιν ἐκ πόλεως Pl. Plt. 289e. abs.,
3. have dealings, as buyer or seller, in Med., πρός τινα Pl. Lg. 915e.
4. alternate, Emp. 17.6; σκῆπτρ’ ἔειν ἐνιαυτὸν ἀλλάσσοντε to enjoy power in turn, E. Ph. 74, cf. Pl. Ti. 42c: — Pass., ἀρεταὶ.. ἀλλασσόμεναι in turns, Pi. N. 11.38, cf. Arist. Pr. 940a15. ϝ. Pass., to be reconciled, S. Fr. 997.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀλλάσσω: future ἀλλάζω; 1 aorist ἤλλαξα; 2 future passive ἀλλαγήσομαι; (ἄλλος); (from Aeschylus down); to change: to cause one thing to cease and another to take its place, τά ἔθη, Acts 6:14; τήν φωνήν to vary the voice, i. e., to speak in a different manner according to the different conditions of minds, to adapt the matter and form of discourse to mental moods, to treat them now severely, now gently, Galatians 4:20 (but see Meyer at the passage), to exchange one thing for another: τί ἐν τίνι, Romans 1:23 (בְּ הֵמִיר Psalm 105:20 (); the Greeks say ἀλλάσσειν τί τίνος (cf. Winers Grammar, 206 (194), 388 (363) Vaughan on Romans, the passage cited)), to transform: 1 Corinthians 15:51; Hebrews 1:12. (Compare: ἀπαλλάσσω, διαλλάσσω, καταλλάσσω, ἀποκαταλλάσσω, μεταλλάσσω, συναλλάσσω.)

Question 211

καταλλάσσω

Answer 211

I change, reconcile

Thayer's Definition
to change, exchange, as coins for others of equivalent value
to reconcile (those who are at variance)
return to favour with, be reconciled to one
to receive one into favour

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
καταλλ-άσσω,

Att. κατάλλ-ττω,

I

1. change money, Plu. Arat. 18, etc. (also in Med., D. 19.114: — Pass., Matreas ap. Ath. 1.19b, with a play on signf. 11); change or give away, τὴν Χάριν τῶν νόμων for the laws, Din. 3.21 (s. v. l.); καταλλάσσειν τὸν βίον to leave life, Ael. VH 5.2. abs., transgress, contravene regulations, IG 5(2).3.2 (Tegea).
2. Med., exchange one thing for another, ἡδονὰς πρὸς ἡδονάς Pl. Phd. 69a; ἀντί τινος πάντα ibid., cf. Phld. Vit.Herc. 1457.10; βίον πρὸς μικρὰ κέρδη Arist. EN 1117b20; τι ἐπ’ ἀργυρίῳ Hdn. 2.13.6: abs., exchange prisoners, D.C. Fr. 57.36.

II

1. change a person from enmity to friendship, reconcile, σφέας Hdt. 5.29, cf. 95, 6.108; κ. τινὰς πρὸς ἀλλήλους Arist. Oec. 1348b9; θεὸς κόσμον κ. ἑαυτῷ 2 Corinthians 5:19 : — Med., καταλλάσσεσθαι τὴν ἔχθρην τινί to make up one’s enmity with any one, Hdt. 1.61, cf. 7.145: — Pass., esp. in aor. κατηλλάχθην or κατηλλάγην (former preferred by Trag., latter in Prose), to become reconciled, τινι E. IA 1157, X. An. 1.6.1, etc.; πρὸς ἀλλήλους Th. 4.59; θεοῖσιν ὡς καταλλαχθῇ Χόλου that he may be reconciled to them after his anger, S. Aj. 744; κ. πρός τινα ἐκ διαφορᾶς Ael. VH 2.21.
2. Pass., of an offence, to be atoned for, φόνον ἐπιγαμίαις μὴ καταλλάσσεσθαι μηδὲ Χρήμασιν OGI 218.105 (Ilium, iii B. C.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καταλλάσσω; 1 aorist participle καταλλαξας; 2 aorist passive κατηλλάγην; properly, to change, exchange, as coins for others of equal value; hence, to reconcile (those who are at variance): τινας, as τούς Θηβαιους καί τούς Πλαταιεας, Herodotus 6, 108; κατηλλαξαν σφεας οἱ Παριοι, 5, 29; Aristotle, oecon. 2, 15, 9 (p. 1348b, 9) κατήλλαξεν αὐτούς πρός ἀλλήλους; passive τίνι, to return into favor with, be reconciled to, one, Euripides, Iph. Aul. 1157; Plato, rep. 8, p. 566 e.; πρός ἀλλήλους, Thucydides 4, 59; but the passive is used also where only one ceases to be angry with another and receives him into favor; thus καταλλαγεις, received by Cyrus into favor, Xenophon, an. 1, 6, 1; καταλλάττεται πρός αὐτήν, regained her favor, Josephus, Antiquities 5, 2, 8; and, on the other hand, God is said καταλλαγῆναι τίνι, with whom he ceases to be offended, to whom he grants his favor anew, whose sins he pardons, 2 Macc. 1:5 2Macc. 7:33 2Macc. 8:29; Josephus, Antiquities 6, 7, 4 cf. 7, 8, 4 (so ἐπικαταλλάττεσθαι τίνι, Clement of Rome, 1 Cor. 48, 1 [ET]). In the N. T. God is said καταλλάσσειν ἑαυτῷ τινα, to receive one into his favor (A. V. reconcile one to himself), 2 Corinthians 5:18f (where in the added participles two arguments are adduced which prove that God has done this: first, that he does not impute to men their trespasses; second, that he has deposited the doctrine of reconciliation in the souls of the preachers of the gospel); καταλλαγῆναι τῷ Θεῷ, to be restored to the favor of God, to recover God’s favor, Romans 5:10 (but see ἐχθρός, 2); καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ, allow yourselves to be reconciled to God; do not oppose your return into his favor, but lay hold of that favor now offered you, 2 Corinthians 5:20. of a woman: καταλλαγήτω τῷ ἀνδρί, let her return into harmony with (A. V. be reconciled to) her husband, 1 Corinthians 7:11. Cf. Fritzsche on Romans, vol. i., p. 276ff (who shows (in opposition to Tittmann, N. T. Synonyms, 1:102, et al.) that καταλλάσσω and διαλλάσσω are used promiscuously; the prepositions merely intensify (in slightly different modes) the meaning of the simple verb, and there is no evidence that one compound is stronger than the other; διαλλάσσω and its derivatives are more common in Attic, καταλλάσσω and its derivatives in later writers. Compare: ἀποκαταλλάσσω.

Question 212

ἀρχαῖος, -αία, -αῖον

Answer 212

old, ancient
ancient, of old

old, ancient, of former age, Mt. 5:21, 33; of long standing, old, veteran, Acts 21:16; ἀφἠμερῶν ἀρχαιων, from early days, from an early period, of the Gospel, Acts 15:7

Thayer’s Definition
that has been from the beginning, original, primal, old ancient
of men, things, times, conditions

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀρχαῖος, α, ον, (ἀρχή I)

from the beginning or origin:

I

1. mostly of things, ancient, σκότος S. OC 106; ἐσθής Hdt. 5.88; δόμοις ἐπασσάλευσαν ἀρχαῖον γάνος A. Ag. 579 codd.; Ζηνὸς ἀρχαίοις νόμοις S. OC 1382; χερὸς σῆς πίστιν ἀρχαίαν faith firm for ever, ib. 1632 codd.
2. old-fashioned, antiquated, A. Pr. 317 (lyr.), Ar. Nu. 984, D. 22.14; of literary style, Demetr. Eloc. 244. simple, silly, Ar. Nu. 915, al., Pherecr. 205; -ότερος εἶ τοῦ δέοντος Pl. Euthd. 295c, etc.
3. ancient, former, τὸ ἀ. ῥέεθον Hdt. 1.75; τοῦ ἀ. λόγου Id. 7.160; οὐ γὰρ δὴ τό γ’ ἀ. δέμας S. OC 110; οἱ ἀ., opp. οἱ ὕστερον, Th. 2.16; ἀ. φύσις A. Ch. 281, Hp. Art. 53, Pl. Smp. 193c, etc.; φύσις καὶ κατάστασις ἀ. Democr. 278; coupled with παλαιός, παλαιὸν δῶρον ἀρχαίου θηρός S. Tr. 555, cf. Lys. 6.51, D.l.c.
4. old, worn out, ὑποδήματα X. An. 4.5.14; πινάκια BGU 781i1 (i A. D.).

II of persons, Θέμιν.. ἀρχαίαν ἄλοχον Διός Pi. Fr. 6.5; ἀ. θεαί, of the Erinyes, A. Eu. 728; Πέλοψ S. Aj. 1292; οἱ ἀ.

1. the Ancients, name given by Arist. to the pre-Socratics, Metaph. 1069a25, GC 314a6; in Lit. Crit., ancient, classical writers, Demetr. Eloc. 15, 67; in Plot., the philosophers down to Aristotle, 5.1.9; in NT, the Fathers, Matthew 5:21, al.
2. ancient, old, βαλὴν ἀ., of Darius, A. Pers. 657 (lyr.); λάτρις E. Hec. 609; ἑταῖρος X. Mem. 2.8.1; οἱ ἀ. κύριοι the original owners, BGU 992 ii 6 (ii B. C.); τὰς ἀ. πόλεις (banished from) their original cities, Polystr. p.22 W.; ἀ. μαθητής an original disciple, Acts 21:16; ἀ. μύστης Inscr.Magn. 215 b; παιδαγωγὸς ἀ., i.e of old, formerly, E. El. 287, cf. 853.

III neut. as Adv., τὸ ἀρχαῖον, Ion. contr. τὠρχαῖον,

1. anciently, Hdt. 1.56, 173, al., Att. τἀρχαῖον A. Supp. 326; ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀ. Hdt. 4.117; ἐξ ἀρχαίων D.S. 1.14.
2. regul. Adv. ἀρχαίως in olden style, καινὰ ἀ. λέγειν Pl. Phdr. 267b, cf. Isoc. 4.8, D. 9.48; ἀ. καὶ σεμνῶς Aeschin. 1.183. irreg. Comp. ἀρχαιέστερος Pi. Fr. 45 (on ἀρχέστατος v. h. v.); usual Comp. -ότερος Ar. Av. 469: Sup. -ότατος Hdt. 1.105, etc. as Subst., τὸ ἀρχαῖον, of money, prime cost, πλέον τοῦ ἀ. X. Vect. 3.2;
3. principal, mostly in pl., Ar. Nu. 1156, etc.; τἀρχαῖα ἀποδιδόναι D. 34.26, etc.; τῶν ἀρχαίων ἀπέστησαν lost their capital, Id. 1.15: opp. ἔργον, Id. 27.10; opp. πρόσοδοι, Isa 6.38.
4. ἀρχαίη, ἡ, = cross ἀρχή, Eust. 475.1, etc.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀρχαῖος, ἀρχαῖα, ἀρχαῖον (from ἀρχή beginning, hence) properly, that has been from the beginning, original, primeval, old, ancient, used of men, things, times, conditions: Luke 9:8, 19; Acts 15:7, 21; Acts 21:16; 2 Peter 2:5; Revelation 12:9; Revelation 20:2; οἱ ἀρχαιοι the ancients, the early Israelites: Matthew 5:21, 27 (Rec.),33; τά ἀρχαῖα the man’s previous moral condition: 2 Corinthians 5:17. (In Greek writings from Pindar and Herodotus down.) [SYNONYMS: ἀρχαῖος, παλαιός: In παλαιός the simple idea of time dominates, while ἀρχαῖος (“σημαίνει καί τό ἀρχῆς ἔχεσθαι,” and so) often carries with it a suggestion of nature or original character. Cf. Schmidt, chapter 46; Trench, § lxvii.]

Question 213

ἀπαρχή, ῆς, ἡ

Answer 213

first fruits

1) to offer firstlings or firstfruits
2) to take away the firstfruits of the productions of the earth which
was offered to God. The first portion of the dough, from which sacred
loaves were to be prepared. Hence term used of persons consecrated
to God for all time.
3) persons superior in excellence to others of the same class

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀπαρχή, ἡ,

mostly in pl. ἀπαρχαί (cf. ἄπαργμα):

1 beginning of a sacrifice, primal offering (of hairs cut from the forehead), ἀπαρχαὶ κόμης E. Or. 96, cf. Ph. 1525 (lyr.); later, a banquet held on this occasion, Plu. 2.40b.

2. firstlings for sacrifice or offering, first-fruits, ἁπάντων ἀπαρχαί Hdt. 4.71; ἀπαρχὰς ἄγειν θεοῖσι S. Tr. 183; ἀπαρχὰς θύειν E. Fr. 516; ἀ. σκυλευμάτων Ph. 857; ἐπιφέρειν ἀ. τῶν ὡραίων Th. 3.58; τῶν ὄντων Isa 5.42, cf. Epicur. Fr. 130, etc.: — so also in sg., λείας ἀ. S. Tr. 761; ἀ. τῶν πατρων χρημάτων Hdt. 1.92, etc.; ἀνθρώπων ἀ. εἰς Δελφοὺς ἀποστέλλειν Arist. Fr. 485; ἀ. ἀπό τινος ἀνατιθέναι Hdt. 4.88; inscribed on votive offerings, [ ἀνέθηκεν].. τόδ’ α. IG 1.382, etc.; freq. in LXX, as Exodus 25:2, al., cf. Romans 11:16, and metaph., ἀ. τῶν κεκοιμημένων 1 Corinthians 15:20; τῶν κτισμάτων James 1:18.
3. metaph., ἀπαρχαὶ τῶν ἐμῶν προσφθεγμάτων E. Ion 402; ἀπαρχὴν τῆς σοφίας ἀνέθεσαν Pl. Prt. 343b, etc.; ἀ. ἀπὸ φιλοσοφίας Plu. 2.172c.
4. tax on inheritances, PTaur. 1.7.10; tax paid by Jews, Stud.Pal. 4.72 (i A. D.).
5. entrance fee, PTeb. 316.10 (i A.D.), al.
6. board of officials (cf. sq.), IG 12(8).273 (Thasos).
7. birth-certificate of a free person, PTeb. 316.10 (i A. D.), PGnom. 131 (ii A. D.): perh. metaph. in Romans 8:23.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀπαρχή, ἀπαρχῆς, ἡ (from ἀπάρχομαι:

a. to offer firstlings or first-fruits;
b. to take away the first-fruits; cf. ἀπό in ἀποδεκατόω), in the Sept. generally equivalent to רֵאשִׁית; the first-fruits of the productions of the earth (both those in a natural state and those prepared for use by hand), which were offered to God; cf. Winers RWB under the word Erstlinge (BB. DD. under the word First-fruits): ἡ ἀπαρχή namely, τοῦ φυράματος, the first portion of the dough, from which sacred loaves were to be prepared (Numbers 15:19-21), Romans 11:16. Hence, in a transferred use, employed a. of persons consecrated to God, leading the rest in time: ἀπαρχή τῆς Ἀχαΐας the first person in Achaia to enroll himself as a Christian, 1 Corinthians 16:15; with εἰς Χριστόν added, Romans 16:5; with a reference to the moral creation effected by Christianity all the Christians of that age are called ἀπαρχή τίς (a kind of first-fruits) τῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ κτισμάτων, James 1:18 (see Huther at the passage) (noteworthy is εἵλατο ὑμᾶς ὁ Θεός ἀπαρχήν etc. as first-fruits] 2 Thessalonians 2:13 L Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading; Christ is called ἀπαρχή τῶν κεκοιμημένων as the first one recalled to life of them that have fallen asleep, 1 Corinthians 15:20, 23 (here the phrase seems also to signify that by his case the future resurrection of Christians is guaranteed; because the first-fruits forerun and are, as it were, a pledge and promise of the rest of the harvest).
b. of persons superior in excellence to others of the same class: so in Revelation 14:4 of a certain class of Christians sacred and dear to God and Christ beyond all others (Schol. ad Euripides, Or. 96 ἀπαρχή ἐλέγετο οὐ μόνον πρῶτον τῇ τάξει, ἀλλά καί τό πρῶτον τῇ τιμή).
c. οἱ ἔχοντες τήν ἀπαρχήν τοῦ πνεύματος who have the first-fruits (of future blessings) in the Spirit (τοῦ πνεύματος is genitive of apposition), Romans 8:23; cf. what Winer § 50, 8 a. says in opposition to those (e. g. Meyer, but see Weiss in edition 6) who take τοῦ πνεύματος as a partitive genitive, so that οἱ ἔχοντες τήν ἀπαρχήν τοῦ πνεύματος are distinguished from the great multitude who will receive the Spirit subsequently. (In Greek writings from (Sophocles) Herodotus down.)

Question 214

ἐμβαίνω

Answer 214

to get into, step into, embark

to step in; to go on board, a ship, embark, Mt. 8:23; 9:1; 13:2

-, ἐνέβην -, -, -

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐμβαίνω,

I fut. -βήσομαι: pf. -βέβηκα; part. ἐμβεβᾰώς, -υῖα, Il. 5.199, Hes. Th. 12, etc.: aor. 2 ἐνέβην; Ephesians 3:1-21 sg. ἔμβη Od. 4.656; dual imper. ἔμβητον Il. 23.403: —

1. step in, μή τις.. ἐμβήῃ let none step in (so as to interfere), 16.94: c. dat., ποταμῷ οὐκ ἔστιν δὶς τῷ αὐτῷ ἐμβῆναι Heraclit. 91; εἰς πηλόν Id. 5; ἐμβέβακεν ἴχνεσιν πατρός Pi. P. 10.12.
2. go on, go quickly, ἔμβητον, says Antilochus to his horses, Il. 23.403; ἔμβα advance! E. El. 113 (lyr.).
3. embark on a ship, ἐρέται δ’ ἐν ἑκάστη πεντήκοντα ἐμβέβασαν Il. 2.720; τότε δ’ ἔμβη νηΐ Πύλονδε Od. 4.656, cf. Il. 1.311; ἐς ἕτερον πλοῖον ἐ. (v.l. for ἐσβ-) Hdt. 2.29, cf. Th. 1.18 (v.l.), Lys. 2.40, Pl. Mx. 243c: c. acc., λέμβον ἐ. Plb. 30.9.11: abs., embark, E. Tr. 455 (troch.), Ar. Ra. 188, etc.: generally, step into, mount, εἰς τὸ φορεῖον Plu. Galb. 26: pf., to be mounted on, ἵπποισι καὶ ἅρμασιν ἐμβεβαῶτα Il. 5.199; ἐπ’ ἀπήνης ἐμβεβώς S. OT 803: also c. acc., Τροίαν Ἰλιάδ’ ἐμβεβαῶτα E. Hec. 922 (lyr.); στέγην τήνδ’ ἐμβεβῶτες Id. Cyc. 92.
4. step upon, τῷ δ’ ἐγὼ ἐμβαίνων Od. 10.164; πεδίλοις ἐμβεβαυῖα Hes. Th. 12; τοῖσδ’ ἁλουργέσιν A. Ag. 946; δαίμων ἐνέβη Περσῶν γενεᾷ trampled upon it, Id. Pers. 911 (anap.); μὴ’ μβαινε τῷ δυστυχοῦντι Men. Mon. 356: abs., tread on one’s toes, Thphr. Char. 15.6; cf. βοῦς viii.
5. enter upon, ἐς τόνδε χρησμόν dub. in A. Ag. 1567; εἰς κίνδυνον X. Cyr. 2.1.15: c. acc., ἐ. κέλευθον E. Supp. 989 (lyr.). metaph., enter upon, embark in, μεγαλανορίαις Pi. N. 11.44; τῷ ἐπιτηδεύατι Pl. Phdr. 252e; ἐν αὐτοῖς τοῖς δεινοῖς ἐμβεβηκώς embarked, engaged in.., D. 18.248; light upon, εἰς ἀρχήν τε καὶ τύπον τῆς δικαιοσύνης Pl. R. 443c: abs., enter upon office, IG 5(1).1390.31 (Andania).
6. rarely c. gen., step upon, νᾶος Alc. 19; γῆς ὅρων S. OC 400.
7. Poets, with acc. of the instrument of motion, ὄχοις.. ἐμβεβὼς πόδα S. Fr. 672; ἐς ἄντλον ἐμβήσει (2 sg.) πόδα E. Heracl. 168.
8. to be fixed or fastened, κατά τι Il. 24.81; to be fixed in, εἰς ἐμπυελίδας Hero Aut. 2.3.
9. = ἐμβατεύω 11, SIG 364.75 (Ephesus, iii B.C.).

II causal in aor. 1 ἐνέβησα, make to step in, put in, ἐν δὲ τὰ μῆλα.. ἐβήσαμεν Od. 11.4; δίφρον ἐμβῆσαί τινα E. Heracl. 845, cf. Cyc. 467; ἐ. τὰν ἀρχάν Schwyzer 485.9 (Thespiae, iii B.C.): metaph., ἐμβῆσαί τινα ἐς φροντίδα plunge him into anxiety, Hdt. 1.46.

III intr., step, march or dance, ὀρθῶς Pl. Alc. 1.108c; πρὸς ῥυθμόν Luc. Salt. 10.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐμβαίνω (see ἐν, III. 3); 2 aorist ἐνεβην, infinitive ἐμβῆναι, participle ἐμβάς; (from Homer down); to go into, step into: John 5:4 R L; εἰς τό πλοῖον, to embark, Matthew 8:23, and often.

Question 215

μεταβαίνω

Answer 215

to go on, leave, move from

to go, or pass from one place to another, Jn. 5:24; to pass away, be removed, Mt. 17:20; to go away, depart, Mt. 8:34
μεταβήσομαι, μετέβην, μεταβέβηκα, -, -

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μεταβαίνω,

fut. - βήσομαι h.Ven. 293: aor. μετέβην, imper. μετάβηθι Od. 8.492, μετάβα Alex. 14: pf. - βέβηκα: —

Med., aor. 3 sg. μετεβήσετο or - σατο A.R. 4.1176: —

1. pass over from one place to another, μετὰ δ’ ἄστρα βεβήκει (for μετεβεβήκει) the stars had passed over the meridian, Od. 12.312, 14.483 (but τοῦ ἄστρου μεταβαίνοντος μίαν ἡμέραν διὰ τεσσάρων ἐτῶν OGI 56.42 (Canopus, iii B. C.)); μ. ἐς τὴν Ἀσίην Hdt. 7.73, cf. 1.57; μ. ἐξ οἰκίας εἰς οἰκίαν Luke 10:7 : abs., change one’s abode, PTeb. 316.20 (i A.D.): metaph., ᾗ τὸ δίκαιον μεταβαίνει according as right passes over (from one side to the other), A. Ch. 308 (anap.).
2. in writing or speaking, pass from one subject to another, μετάβηθι change thy theme, Od. 8.492; μεταβάντες changing their course, turning round, Hdt. 8.4; μεταβήσομαι ἄλλον ἐς ὕμνον h.Ven. l.c.; ἐπανέλθωμεν ὅθεν δεῦρο μετέβημεν Pl. Cra. 438a; ἀπὸ τοῦ ψέγειν πρὸς τὸ ἐπαινεῖν Id. Phdr. 265c; ἀπ’ ἐμψύχων ἐπ’ ἄψυχα μ. Phld. Rh. 1.172 S.; μεταβαίνων ὁ λόγος advancing step by step, Arist. EN 1097a24.
3. pass from one state to another, change, [ αἱ πολιτεῖαι] οὐκ εὐθὺς μ. Id. Pol. 1292b18, etc.: freq. with Preps., μ. ἐκ μείζονος εἰς ἔλαττον Pl. Prm. 165a; of changes of fortune in a drama, μ. εἰς εὐτυχίαν Arist. Po. 1455b27; μ. ἐκ τῆς τιμαρχίας εἰς τὴν ὀλιγαρχίαν Pl. R. 550d; μεταβαίνει τυραννὶς ἐκ δημοκρατίας comes on after.., ib. 569c; μεταβεβήκαμεν ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τὴν ζωήν 1 John 3:14; ἀπὸ τοῦ παιδὸς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα Luc. Am. 24; μ. εἰς ἀλεκτρυόνα Id. Gall. 4.
4. in the Epicurean logic, make a transition: hence, infer, esp. from analogy or resemblance, λόγος ὁ μεταβαίνων ἀπό τινος ἐπί τι Phld. D. 3.12, cf. Sign. 5, al.
5. c. acc., pass to another place or state, ἄνω μεταβὰς βίοτον E. Hipp. 1292 (anap.); μ. τόπον ἐκ τόπου S.E. M. 10.52. go after, follow a pursuit eagerly, Opp. H. 4.418. II causal in aor. 1 μεταβῆσαι, carry over or away, τινὰ ποτὶ δῶμα Διὸς -βᾶσαι Pi. O. 1.42; change, ἄστρων ὁδούς E. El. 728 (lyr.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μεταβαίνω; future μεταβήσομαι; 2 aorist μετεβην, imperative μετάβηθι and (in Matthew 17:20 L T Tr WH) μετάβα (see ἀναβαίνω, at the beginning); perfect μεταβέβηκα; from Homer down; to pass over from one place to another, to remote, depart: followed by ἀπό with a genitive of the place, Matthew 8:34; ἐξ οἰκίας εἰς οἰκίαν (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 52, 4. 10), Luke 10:7; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου πρός τόν πατέρα, John 13:1; ἐντεῦθεν, John 7:3; ἐκεῖθεν, Matthew 11:1; Matthew 12:9; Matthew 15:29; Acts 18:7; ἐντεῦθεν (L T Tr WH ἔνθεν) ἐκεῖ (for ἐκισε (cf. Winers Grammar, § 54, 7; Buttmann, 71 (62))), of a thing, equivalent to to be removed, Matthew 17:20; metaphorically, ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τήν ζωήν, John 5:24; 1 John 3:14.

Question 216

παράβασις, εως, ἡ

Answer 216

transgression, breaking, violation

a stepping by the side, deviation; a transgression, violation of law, Rom. 2:23; 4:15

Thayer’s Definition
a going over
metaph. a disregarding, violating
of the Mosaic law
the breach of a definite, promulgated, ratified law
to create transgressions, i.e. that sins might take on the character of transgressions, and thereby the consciousness of sin be intensified and the desire for redemption be aroused

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παρά-βᾰσις,

παραίβ-, εως, ἡ,

going aside, escape, παραίβασις ἔσσετ’ ὀλέθρου A.R. 4.832; deviation, v.l. in Arist. Pol. 1307b33, cf. Plu. 2.649b (pl.); digression, Str. 1.2.2, Longin. 12.5 (pl.).

2. of the action of walking, π. καὶ παράλλαξις σκελῶν Plu. Phil. 6.
3. transition, passage, Demetr.Lac. Herc. 1012.31.

II overstepping, ὅρων Plu. 2.122e; ἔθους Str. 12.8.9; τοῦ πατρίου νόμου J. AJ 18.8.2; τῶν δικαίων παραβάσεις Plu. Comp.Ages.Pomp. 1: abs., transgression, LXX 4 Ki. 2.24, Galatians 3:19, Plu. 2.209a, 746c, etc.; error, illusion, Epicur. Nat. 11.7; cf. παραβασία.

III parabasis, a part of the Old Comedy, in which the Chorus came forward (cf. παραβαίνω IV) and addressed the audience in the Poet’s name, Plu. 2.711f, Heph. Poëm. 8, Sch. Ar. Pax 733, etc.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παράβασις, παραβάσεως, ἡ (παραβαίνω, which see), properly, a going over; metaphorically, a disregarding, violating; Vulg. praevaricario, and once (Galatians 3:19)transgressio; (A. V. transgression): with a genitive of the object, τῶν ὅρκων, 2 Macc. 15:10; τῶν δικαίων, Plutarch, comparative, Ages. and Pomp. 1; τοῦ νόμου, of the Mosaic law, Romans 2:23 (Josephus, Antiquities 18, 8, 2); absolutely, the breach of a definite, promulgated, tariffed law: Romans 5:14; 1 Timothy 2:14 (but ἁμαρτία is wrong-doing which even a man ignorant of the law may be guilty of (cf. Trench, N. T. Synonyms, § lxvi.)); τῶν παραβάσεων χάριν, to create transgressions, i. e. that sins might take on the character of transgressions, and thereby the consciousness of sin be intensified and the desire for redemption be aroused, Galatians 3:19; used of the transgression of the Mosaic law, Romans 4:15; Hebrews 2:2; Hebrews 9:15; Psalm 100:3 (); with a genitive of the subjunctive, τῶν ἀδίκων, Wis. 14:31.

Question 217

προβαίνω

Answer 217

(spacial) to go on, go on farther; (temporal) to be well along (in years), advanced (in age)

to go forward, advance, Mt. 4:21; Mk. 1:19; to advance in life, Lk. 1:7, 18; 2:36*

-, προέβην, προβέβηκα, -, -

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
προβαίνω,

fut. -βήσομαι: pf. -βέβηκα: aor. 2 προὔβην, imper. πρόβᾱ, Ar. Ach. 262, E. Alc. 872 (lyr.), pl. πρόβᾱτε S. OC 841 (lyr.), E. HF 1047 (lyr.): Hom. has only pf. and pres. part. προβιβάς (as if from βίβημἰ, Il. 13.18, but προβιβῶντα ( -τἰ (as if from βιβάὠ ib. 807, al. codd. (v. infr.); imper. προβιβάσθων Hsch.; part. προβάοντε, read by Aristarch. for προβοῶντε, Il. 12.277; προβῶντες Cratin. 126: —

step forward, advance, κραιπνά, κοῦφα ποσὶ προβιβάς, Il. 13.18, 158, Od. 17.27; τὸν δ’ ὦκα προβιβάντα ( -βιβῶντα codd.) πόδες φέρον 15.555; ὑπασπίδια προβιβάντι ( -βιβῶντι codd.) Il. 13.807, cf. 16.609; π. εὐθέσι τοῖς σκέλεσι Arist. HA 604b5: c. acc. cogn., οἵαν ὁδὸν ἁ δειλαιοτάτα π. E. Alc. 263 (lyr.); μέγα π. take a big stride forward, Hp. Art. 60 . of hair, grow, Lib. Or. 64.50 .

2. as a mark of Time, ἄστρα προβέβηκε they are far gone in heaven, i.e. it is past midnight. Il. 10.252; ἡ νὺξ π. the night is wearing fast, X. An. 3.1.13: hence of Time itself, τοῦ χρόνου προβαίνοντος as time went on, Hdt. 3.53, 140; ὁ μὲν χρόνος δὴ διὰ χρόνου προὔβαινέ μοι S. Ph. 285; also τὰ μὲν προβέβηκεν the past, Thgn. 583; προβαίνοντος τοῦ ἔργου, τοῦ πολέμου, Hdt. 7.23, Plb. 2.47.3; τοῦ κώθωνος εὖ μάλα προβεβηκότος Hegesand. 21; ἐκ τοῦ προβεβηκότος, e re nata, on the spur of the moment, Plb. 7.12.2: of Age, προβήσεται ἡ ἡλικία X. Revelation 6:1-17; of persons, οἱ προβεβηκότες τῇ ἡλικίᾳ advanced in age, Lys. 24.16, cf. D.S. 12.18; π. τῶν ἡμερῶν, ταῖς ἡμέραις, LXX John 13:1, LXX Jo. 23.1: abs., οἱ π. Bato 7.9, Luc. Nigr. 24; ἐπεὶ προέβη τοῖς ἔτεσιν Macho ap. Ath. 13.580c; προβεβηκότες ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις αὐτῶν Ev.Luke 1:7; Luke 18:1-43; ἡλικίας εἰς τὸ πρόσθε π. Pl. Ep. 325c; π. εἰς πεντήκοντα ἔτη D.C. 68.4 (nisi leg. προεβεβιώκεἰ.
3. metaph. of narrative, argument, action, events, μὴ πέρα προβῇς λόγου Cratin. 66; προβήσομαι ἐς τὸ πρόσω τοῦ λόγου Hdt. 1.5; προβάς φησιν . . further on, Demetr.Lac. Herc. 1012.12, cf. Phld. Rh. 1.87 S.; π. ἐκ τῶν κνημέων ἐς τοὺς μηρούς went on . ., Hdt. 6.75; προέβαινε τὸ ἔθνος ἄρχον καὶ ἐπιτροπεῦον the nation was organized in a series of overlordships and mandates, Id. 1.134; προὔβης τῶνδε καὶ περαιτέρω A. Pr. 249; π. ἐπ’ ἔσχατον θράσους S. Ant. 853 (lyr.); οἷ προβαίνει τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦ βουλεύματος Ar. Ach. 836; ποῖ προβήσεται λόγος; E. Hipp. 342; πέρας δὴ ποῖ κακῶν προβήσεται; Id. Or. 511, cf. 749; τὸ τῆς τύχης ἀφανὲς οἷ προβήσεται Id. Alc. 785; μὴ προβαίη μεῖζον ἢ τὸ νῦν κακόν Id. Med. 907; τὸ ἔθος ἐπὶ πολὺ προβαίνει Aeschin. 1.179: impers., εἰς τοῦτο προβέβηκε ὥστε . . it has gone so far that . ., Pl. Lg. 839c; π. πόρρω μοχθηρίας to be far gone in knavery, X. Ap. 30; π. εἰς τοῦτο ἔχθρας ὥστε . . D. 12.16; εἰς ἀταξίαν Aeschin. 3.38; μέχρι τίνος Plb. 2.1.3; ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον π. τὰ πράγματα Id. 5.30.6: in good sense, make progress, τοσοῦτον προβεβήκαμεν ὥστε . . Pl. Tht. 187a; of an enterprise, prosper, succeed, BGU 1209.10 (i B.C.), etc.

II go before, i.e. be superior to, another, πολὺ προβέβηκας ἁπάντων σῷ θάρσει Il. 6.125; κράτεϊ 16.54, cf. 23.890; δυνάμει τε καὶ αἰδοῖ Τρηχῖνος προβέβηκε by might and awe he is over, i.e. rules, Trachis, Hes. Sc. 355, cf. Call. Epigr. 1.5 .

III c. acc. rei, overstep, τέρμα προβάς Pi N. 7.71. with acc. of the instrum. of motion, πόδα π. Thgn. 283; οὐκ ἂν προβαίην τὸν πόδα τὸν ἕτερον Ar. Ec. 161, cf. Luc. Hist. Conscr. 29; προβὰς δὲ κῶλον E. Ph. 1412; ἀρβύλαν προβάς Id. Or. 1470 (lyr.); προβεβήκασι τὰ ἀριστερά have their left legs foremost (v.l. προβεβλήκασι, v. προβάλλω A. Il. 1 ), Arist. IA 706a7; προβὰς τὸν πόδα τὸν ἀριστερὸν καὶ τὸν δεξιὸν ὑποβάς Poll. 5.23 . Causal, in fut. Act., move forward, advance, τίς τρόπος ἄνδρα προβάσει [ᾱ]; Pi. O. 8.63 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
προβαίνω: perfect participle προβεβηκώς; 2 aorist participle προβάς; from Homer down; to go forward, go on (cf. πρό, d. α.): properly, on foot, Matthew 4:21; Mark 1:19; tropically, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις προβεβηκώς, advanced in age, Luke 1:7, 18; Luke 2:36 (see ἡμέρα, at the end; τήν ἡλικίαν, 2 Macc. 4:40 2Macc. 6:18; Herodian, 2, 7, 7 (5 edition, Bekker); τῇ ἡλικία, Lysias, p. 169, 37; (Diodorus 12, 18); ταῖς ἡλικιαις, Diodorus 13, 89; (cf. Liddell and Scott, under the word, I. 2)).

Question 218

συμβαίνω

Answer 218

to happen; to come about

to step, or come together; to happen, meet, fall out, Mk. 10:32; Lk. 24:14 ; Acts 3:10; 20:19; 21:35; 1 Cor. 10:11; 1 Pet. 4:12; 2 Pet. 2:22*

(συνέβαινον), -, συνέβην, συμβέβηκα, -, συνέβην

Thayer’s Definition
to walk with the feet near together
to come together, meet with one
of things which fall out at the same time, to happen, turn out, come to pass

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
συμβαίνω, fut. -βήσομαι Hdt. 2.3, etc.: pf. -βέβηκα, 3 pl. -βεβᾶσι E. Hel. 622, Ion. inf. -βεβάναι Hdt. 3.146: pf. inf. Pass. -βεβάσθαι Th. 8.98: aor. 2 συνέβην (v. infr.): aor. 1 subj. Pass. ξυμβᾰθῇ Id. 4.30: —

stand with the feet together, Hp. Off. 3; διαβαίνοντες μᾶλλον ἢ συμβεβηκότες X. Eq. 1.14; συμβεβηκὼς τὼ πόδε Poll. 3.91; συμβᾶσα τὼ πόδε, opp. περιβάδην, Ach.Tat. 1.1; Παλλάδιον τοῖς ποσὶ συμβεβηκός a statue with closed feet, as in early Greek art, Apollod. 3.12.3.

2. ς. κακοῖς to be joined to them, i.e. increase them, E. Hel. 37.
3. meet, σὺν δ’ ἔβη ἐν Φιλότητι Emp. 21.8; τὸν συμβαίνοντά σοι Eup. 136 (dub.); ς. αὐτοὶ αὑτοῖς X. HG 1.2.17; ξυμβέβηκε δ’ οὐδαμοῦ has never come in my way, has had naught to do with me, E. Hel. 1007.
4. attack jointly, ἐπὶ Ναξίους Parth. 9.1.

II most freq. metaph., come to an agreement, come to terms, E. Ph. 71, etc.; ἐπ’ ἐλάττονι ς. agree on (i.e. to accept) less, POxy. 237 viii 11 (ii A.D.): c. dat., Th. 3.52, 4.128, etc.; πρὸς ἀλλήλους ib. 61, etc.: with neut. Adj., ἐὰν ξυμβῶ τί σοι Ar. Ra. 175; ἤν τι ξυμβαίνωσι Th. 2.5; ξ. τὰ πλείω, οὐδέν, Id. 4.117, 5.36; τἆλλα τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις Id. 8.98: c. inf., συνέβησαν ἐς τὠυτὸ.., τὸν δὲ βασιλεύειν Hdt. 1.13; ξ. ὑπήκοοι εἶναι Th. 1.117; ξ. ἤν τις ἁλίσκηται,.. δοῦλον εἶναι ib. 103; ξ. τοῖς Πλαταιεῦσι παραδοῦναι σφᾶς αὐτούς Id. 2.4; ξ. πρὸς Νικίαν.. ἐπιτρέψαι Id. 4.54; also συνέβησαν.. ὥστε τριηκοσίους μαχέσασθαι Hdt. 1.82; ς. εἰς τὸ μέσον agree to a compromise, Pl. Prt. 337e; λόγοις ς., of a verbal agreement, E. Med. 737, Andr. 233: generally, make friends with, ἐκ πολέμου ξ. Ar. V. 867; ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου Th. 4.19; ἐπὶ τοῖς εἰρημένοις E. Ph. 590 (troch.): in pf. συμβεβάναι and Pass., of the agreement, δοκέοντες πάντα συμβεβάναι that everything had been settled, or that they had settled everything, Hdt. 3.146; ἐπὶ τούτοις ξυμβεβάσθαι Th. 8.98; ἕως ἄν τι περὶ τοῦ πλέονος ξυμβαθῇ Id. 4.30.

2. agree with, be on good terms with, οὐ.. Ἀθηναίοισι συνέβαιν’ Αἰσχύλος Ar. Ra. 807; ς. ἑκατέρᾳ τῶν στάσεων hold with one and other of them, D.H. 2.62.
3. of things, tally, correspond with, ὁ χρόνος ἐδόκεε τῇ ἡλικίῃ συμβαίνειν Hdt. 1.116; ἐθέλων εἰδέναι εἰ [οἱ ἐκείνων λόγοι] συμβήσονται τοῖσι λόγοισι τοῖσι ἐν Μέμφι Id. 2.3; ξυμβαίνει ταῦτα τοῖς πρὸ τοῦ Lys. 8.9; εἰς ταὐτὸ ς. τοῖς ἐμοῖς στίβοις A. Ch. 210: abs., ὅπως ἂν ἀρτίκολλα συμβαίνῃ τάδε ib. 580; χρησμοί τε συμβαίνουσι are in harmony therewith, Ar. Eq. 220, cf. S. Tr. 1164; αὐτὸ ς. εἰς ταύτην εἶναι πέμπτην five days later exactly tallies, D. 19.60; τοῦτο ς. οὐ πλέον ἢ εἰς δώδεκα comes to no more than 12, X. HG 6.4.12; αἱ πεντακόσιαι μάλιστά πως συνέβαινον δραχμαί Aristid. Or. 50(26).94; τὸ φαρμακεύεσθαι τῷ καθαίρεσθαι εἰς ταὐτὸν ς. comes to the same thing as.., Gal. 15.901; of ashlar-work, fit or range exactly, M.Ant. 5.8.
4. fall to one’s lot, c. dat. pers., μοι ς. ἆται E. IT 148 (lyr.), etc.; ἡδοναί τινι Isoc. 15.222; τριηραρχία μοι D. 47.49; ἀτυχία Id. 57.65; εὐεργεσιῶν συμβαίνειν καιρόν Id. 20.121.
5. to be an attribute or characteristic of, ξυνεβεβήκει.. Ἀθηναίοις τοῦτο Th. 2.15; τὰ ὀφείλοντα ταῖς ἀρίσταις συμβεβηκέναι τιτθαῖς Sor. 1.87, cf. 91, 2.6.

III of events, come to pass, fall out, happen, συμβαίνει δ’ οὐ τὰ μέν, τὰ δ’ οὔ A. Pers. 802; τῶνδε ναμέρτεια ς. S. Tr. 173; ἐὰν μὴ θεία τις ς. τύχη Pl. R. 592a; αἱ ἀεὶ συμβαίνουσαι τύχαι Id. Criti. 120e; εἰ καιρὸς ς. X. Eq.Mag. 2.5; χρηστόν τι ς. παρὰ θεῶν D. 1.11; τοὐναντίον συμβαίνειν πέφυκε Gal. 15.460: c. dat., ib.67, 16.724: also euphem., ἄν τι ξυμβῇ if anything happen (i.e. any evil), D. 21.112, cf. Riv.Fil. 60.59 (ii B.C.): generally, occur, be found, exist, ἐν τῇ ἀρχαίᾳ ἡμετέρᾳ φωνῇ ς. τὸ ὄνομα Pl. Cra. 398b, cf. A.D. Pron. 29.15: but, mostly impers., sts. c. dat. et inf., αὐτῷ Ὀλυμπιάδα ἀνελέσθαι συνέβη Hdt. 6.103, cf. 3.50, Th. 1.1; συμβαίνει τῷ πλοίῳ ἀργεῖν PCair.Zen. 650.2 (iii B.C.), cf. PMich.Zen. 21.3, al. (iii B.C.): sts. c. acc. et inf., συνέβη Γέλωνα νικᾶν Hdt. 7.166, cf. Th. 8.25; συμβαίνει διὰ παντὸς ἡμᾶς περιφόβους εἶναι PCair.Zen. 160.6, cf. 132.5 (iii B.C.), PEnteux. 6.2, al. (iii B.C.), Gal. 15.476; ς. τῷ οἰκοδόμῳ μουσικῷ εἶναι Arist. Metaph. 1017a11; folld. by ὥστε, S. Tr. 1152, Th. 4.79, Arist. Pol. 1261a34: c. part., ς. ὄν, γιγνόμενον, λεγόμενον, Pl. Sph. 244d, Phlb. 42d, Cra. 412a. τὸ συμβεβηκός chance event, contingency, Id. Prm. 128c; τὰ συμβαίνοντα X. Cyr. 1.6.43; τὰ συμβάντα Id. An. 3.1.13; ἀπὸ τοῦ συμβαίνοντος ὁ τόπος εἴληφε τὴν προσηγορίαν Plb. 10.28.7: hence κατὰ συμβεβηκός by accident, contingently (v. infr. iv. 1); τοῦ συμβαίνοντός ἐστι it depends upon accident, easily happens, Isa 4.13.

2. joined with Adverbs or Adiectives, turn out in a certain way, ὀρθῶς σφι ἡ φήμη συνέβαινε ἐλθοῦσα Hdt. 9.101; κακῶς, καλῶς συμβῆναι, X. Mem. 1.2.63, Cyr. 5.4.14, E. IT 1055; τὰ μητρὸς.. ἔχθιστα συμβέβηκεν S. El. 262; ταῦτα.. λαμπρὰ ς. Id. Tr. 1174; ξυμβεβᾶσιν οἱ λόγοι.. ἀληθεῖς E. Hel. 622; ἄπιστ’ ἀληθῆ πολλὰ ς. βροτοῖς Id. Fr. 396; ς. μέγιστον κακὸν ἡ ἀδικία Pl. Grg. 479c, cf. Alc. 1.130c, Cra. 398e; δοκεῖ τὸ μαντεῖον τοὐναντίον ξυμβῆναι ἢ.. Th. 2.17; τοιούτου τούτου συμβάντος Id. 1.74; συμβαίνει καὶ σοὶ (sc. ἄριστον) Pl. Lg. 903d: abs., turn out well, ἢν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα Th. 3.3; εἴ μοι ς. τοῦτο Pl. Lg. 744a.
3. of consequences, come out, result, follow, δαπανῶντες ἐς τοιαῦτα ἀφ’ ὦν ἡ ἀσθένεια ξυμβαίνει Th. 8.45; κάλλιστον δὴ ἔργων ὑμῖν ξυμβήσεται Id. 6.33; τὰ συμβάντα, opp. ἡ προαίρεσις, D. 18.192; δηλοῦται ἐκ τοῦ συμβάντος Gal. 16.583; ἐὰν μὴ ὅτι τάχος ἀποσταλῇ τὰ ὑποζύγια, συμβήσεται τὰ μελίσσεια ἀπολέσθαι PCair.Zen. 467.8, cf. 481.2, al. (iii B.C.). of logical conclusions, result, follow, freq. in Pl. and Arist., Pl. Grg. 459b, etc.; ς. ἐκ τῶν κειμένων Arist. Top. 156b38, al., cf. D. 25.73: impers., it follows, c. inf., Pl. Tht. 170c, Phd. 74a, Arist. EN 1152b25, al.; also ς. μήτε κουφότητ’ ἔχειν μήτε βάρος, ἔπειθ’ ὅτι ἀδύνατον κινηθῆναι Arist. Cael. 270a5: also pers., συμβαίνει εἶναι or γίγνεσθαι turns out to be, i.e. consequently or inevitably is or happens, κάθαρσις εἶναι τοῦτο ς. Pl. Phd. 67c, cf. 80b, Cra. 396a, Phlb. 55a, 64e, Prm. 134b, R. 438e; ὅσα συμβαίνει γίγνεσθαι κακὰ καὶ ὅσα συμβήσεται Id. Plt. 301e: hence συμβεβηκός (v. infr. iv. 2). in Philos., τὸ συμβεβηκός has two senses:

1 a contingent attribute or ‘ accident ‘ (in the modern sense), Arist. APo. 73b4, Top. 102b4, al.; κατὰ συμβεβηκός ‘ accidentally ‘, opp. καθ’ αὑτό, Id. Ph. 192b22, cf. Metaph. 1052a18, Thphr. Sens. 22; opp. ἁπλῶς, Arist. APo. 71b10, al.; opp. φύσει, Id. de An. 406a14; opp. κυρίως, πρώτως, Gal. 15.629, cf. 16.575, al.; opp. ἄντικρυς, Id. 18(2).180.

2. an attribute necessarily resulting from the notion of a thing, but not entering into the definition thereof, οἷον τῷ τριγώνῳ τὸ δύο ὀρθὰς ἔχειν Arist. Metaph. 1025a31; distd. by the addition of καθ’ αὑτό, Id. APo. 83b19, al.; in Epicurus, essential attribute, property, opp. σύμπτωμα ‘accident’, τὰ τούτων συμπτώματα ἢ ς. Ephesians 1:1-23 p.6U., cf. Nat. 4 G., al.; ς. ἀνθρώπου τὸ θνητὸν εἶναι Phld. Sign. 3, al.; in the Stoics, consequence, opp. αἴτιον, Zeno Stoic. 1.25.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
συμβαίνω (ξυμβαίνω Rec.bez in 1 Peter 4:12; see Sigma, at the end); imperfect συνέβαινον; 2 aorist συνεβην, participle συμβάς; perfect συμβέβηκα; from (Aeschylus), Herodotus down;

1. to walk with the feet near together.
2. to come together, meet with one; hence,
3. of things which fall out at the same time, to happen, turn out, come to pass (so occasionally in the Sept for קָרָה and קָרָא); as very often in Greek writings (the Sept. Genesis 42:4; Genesis 44:29), συμβαινει τί τίνι, something befalls, happens to, one: Mark 10:32; Acts 20:19; 1 Corinthians 10:11; (1 Peter 4:12); 2 Peter 2:22; τό συμβεβηκός τίνι, Acts 3:10 (Susanna 26); absolutely, τά συμβεβηκότα, the things that had happened, Luke 24:14 (1 Macc. 4:26; (Josephus, contra Apion 1, 22, 17)); συνέβη followed by an accusative with an infinitive it happened (A. V. so it was) that, etc.: Acts 21:35 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 323 (303)), examples from secular authors are given by Grimm on 2 Macc. 3:2.

Question 219

βέβαιος, α, ον

Answer 219

solid, sure, firm, certain, binding

firm, stable, steadfast, Heb. 3:14; 6:19; sure, certain, established, Rom. 4:16

Thayer’s Definition
stable, fast, firm
metaph. sure, trusty

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
βέβαιος, ον

(so always in Th., Pl.), also α, ον (v. infr.): (βαίνω): —

I

1. firm, steady, κρύσταλλος Th. 3.23; ὄχημα Pl. Phd. 85d (Comp.); γῆ β. terra firma, Arr. An. 2.21.5; steadfast, durable, ὁμιλία.. πιστὴ καὶ βέβαιος S. Ph. 71; ἀρετῆς βέβαιαι.. αἱ κτήσεις μόνης Id. Fr. 194; ψῆφος βεβαία E. El. 1263; τὴν χάριν βέβαιον ἔχειν Th. 1.32; οὐδέπω βέβαιος ἦν ἡ σωτηρία And. 1.53; εἰρήνην βεβαίαν ἀγαγεῖν Isoc. 4.173; φιλία βέβαιος Pl. Smp. 182c; βεβαίου τε καὶ καθαρᾶς ἡδονῆς γεύεσθαι Id. R. 586a; δόξαι καὶ πίστεις βέβαιοι καὶ ἀληθεῖς Id. Ti. 37b, etc. sure, certain, τέκμαρ A. Pr. 456; ἄκεα Id. Eu. 506 (lyr.); τοξεύματα S. Ant. 1086; πύλας β. παρέχειν make safe, secure, Th. 4.67; βεβαιότερος κίνδυνος a surer game, Id. 3.39: Sup. -ότατος Id. 1.124; βέβαιόν ἐστί τινι ὅτι.. D.H. 3.35; τὰ παρ’ ἀνθρώπων αὐτῷ β. ἦν ibid.; but β. παρέχειν τὰν ὠνάν confirm, guarantee, GDI 1867, al. (Delph.); μένειν κυρίαν καὶ β… συγχώρησιν BGU 1058.47 (i B. C.).
2. of persons, etc., steadfast, constant, φίλος A. Pr. 299 (Comp.), cf. Th. 5.43, etc.: c. inf., βεβαιότεροι μηδὲν νεωτεριεῖν more certain to make no change, Th. 3.11.
3. τό β. certainty, Hdt. 7.50, cf. Pl. Phlb. 59c, etc.; but τὸ β. τῆς διανοίας firmness, resolution, Th. 2.89. security, guarantee, τὸ δημόσιον β. IG 12.189.

II Adv. -ως A. Ag. 15; β. κλῃστόν Th. 2.17; β. οἰκεῖσθαι Id. 1.2; ἔχειν, γνῶναι, δημοκρατεῖσθαι, D. 8.41, 39, 10.4: Comp. -ότερον, οἰκεῖν Th. 1.8; -οτέρως Isoc. 8.60, Porph. Abst. 1.11: Sup. -ότατα Th. 6.91.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
βέβαιος, βεβαία (Winers Grammar, 69 (67); Buttmann, 25 (22)), βέβαιον (ΒΑΩ, βαίνω) (from Aeschylus down), stable, fast, firm; properly: ἄγκυρα, Hebrews 6:19; metaphorically, sure, trusty: ἐπαγγελία, Romans 4:16; κλῆσις καί ἐκλογή, 2 Peter 1:10; λόγος προφητικός, 2 Peter 1:19; unshaken, constant, Hebrews 3:14; ἐλπίς, 2 Corinthians 1:7 (6) (4 Macc. 17:4); παρρησία, Hebrews 3:6 (but WH Tr marginal reading in brackets); valid and therefore inviolable, λόγος, Hebrews 2:2; διαθήκη, Hebrews 9:17. (With the same meanings in Greek writings from Herodotus down.)

Question 220

βεβαιόω

Answer 220

I confirm, ratify; keep strong

to confirm, establish; to render constant and unwavering, 1 Cor. 1:8; to strengthen or establish by arguments or proofs, ratify, Mk. 16:20; to verify, as promises, Rom. 15:8

βεβαιώσω, ἐβεβαίωσα, -, -, ἐβεβαιώθην

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
βεβαι-όω,

I

1. confirm, establish, make good, τοῖς δικασταῖς τὴν δόξαν Pl. Cri. 53b; δωρεὰν Isaiah 1:18; εἴτε δεξιὰς δοῖεν ἐβεβαίουν X. Cyr. 8.8.2, etc.; ἔργῳ βεβαιούμενα, opp. ἀκοῇ λεγόμενα, Th. 1.23; β. λόγον make good one’s word, Lys. 20.32; β. τὴν πρᾶξιν X. An. 7.6.17; treat as valid, τὰς αὑτῶν αἰσθήσεις Metrod. 1, cf. Epicur. Sent. 24; β. τινί τι secure one the possession of a thing, οὐδ’ ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς βεβαιοῦμεν [τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ] Th. 1.122; τοῖς θεοῖς βεβαιοῦντες τοὺς νόμους οὒς ἐψηφίσασθε Lys. 6.29, cf. D. 21.30; τὴν ἀρχήν τινι Plu. Sull. 22; τὸν λόγον Mark 16:20 : — Med., establish for oneself, secure, σφᾶς αὐτούς Th. 1.33; τὴν ἀρχήν, τὴν φιλίαν τινός, Id. 6.10, 78; β. τινάς confirm them in one’s interest, ib. 34; βασιλείαν Paus. 3.11.4; τὰ περὶ τῆς βοηθείας Plb. 2.51.5.
2. Med., secure one’s ground in argument, Pl. Tht. 169e; confirm oneself in an opinion, Id. Grg. 489a, Prt. 348d.
3. guarantee the validity of a purchase, warrant the purchaser’s title, β. τινὶ τὸ βαλανεῖον Isaiah 5:23, cf. Din. 1.42, D. 37.12, SIG 46.4 (Halic., v B. C.); τὴν μίσθωσιν BGU 1119.47 (i B. C.): generally, β. τοὺς κανόνας Arr. Epict. 2.11.24.

II intr., determine, show itself positively, τοῖσιν ἐνδοιαστῶς ἔχουσι.. ἐβεβαίωσε [ἡ νοῦσος ] Hp. Epid. 1.2.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
βεβαιόω, βεβαιω; future βεβαιώσω; 1 aorist ἐβεβαιωσα; passive (present βεβαιοῦμαι); 1 aorist ἐβεβαιωθην; (βέβαιος); to make firm, establish, confirm, make sure: τόν λόγον, to prove its truth and divinity, Mark 16:20; τάς ἐπαγγελίας make good the promises by the event, i. e. fulfil them, Romans 15:8 (so also in Greek writings as Diodorus 1, 5); passive: τό μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 Corinthians 1:6; ἡ σωτηρία … εἰς ἡμᾶς ἐβεβαιώθη,a constructio praegnans (Winer’s Grammar, § 66, 2 d.) which may be resolved into εἰς ἡμᾶς παρεδόθη καί ἐν ἡμῖν βέβαιος ἐγένετο, Hebrews 2:3 cf. Hebrews 2:2; see βέβαιος. of men made steadfast and constant in soul: Hebrews 13:9; 1 Corinthians 1:8 (βεβαιώσει ὑμᾶς ἀνεγκλήτους will so confirm you that ye may be unreprovable (Winer’s Grammar, § 59, 6 at the end)); 2 Corinthians 1:21 (βεβαιῶν ἡμᾶς εἰς Χριστόν, causing us to be steadfast in our fellowship with Christ; cf. Meyer at the passage); ἐν τῇ πίστει, Colossians 2:7 (L T Tr WH omit ἐν). (In Greek writings from Thucydides and Plato down.) (Compare: διαβεβαιωμαι.)

Question 221

βέβηλος, ον

Answer 221

godless, irreligious, profane, worldly

pr. what is open and accessible to all; hence, profane, not religious, not connected with religion; unholy; a despiser, scorner, 1 Tim. 1:9; 4:

1) accessible, lawful to be trodden
1a) of places
2) profane
2a) unhallowed, common, public place
2b) of men, ungodly

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
βέβηλ-ος, ον,

Dor. βέβᾱλος IG 3.3845, Ps.- Lysis ap. Iamb. VP 17.75: (βαίνω, βηλός): —

I allowable to be trodden, prob. of ground (opp. ἱερός, D.H. 7.8); καὶ πῶς β. ἄλσος ἂν ῥύοιτό με; A. Supp. 509; ἢ πρὸς βεβήλοις ἢ πρὸς ἄλσεσιν θεῶν either on profane ground or.., S. OC 10; ἔς τε τἄβατα καὶ πρὸς βέβηλα Id. Fr. 88: hence generally, permitted, καὶ βέβηλα καὶ κεκρυμμένα λόγια public, current, E. Heracl. 404; ἐν βεβήλῳ Th. 4.97; βέβηλα permitted meats, Ath. 2.65f.

II of persons, unhallowed, = ἀμύητος, S. Fr. 154, Orph. Fr. 245; impure, E. Fr. 648; β. τε καὶ ἄγροικος Pl. Smp. 218b; β. καὶ ἀνόσια ἐνθυμήματα Ph. 2.165: c. gen., uninitiated, τελετῆς AP 9.298 (Antiphil.); ἀποδεικτικῆς μεθόδου Gal. UP 12.6. Adv. -λως Ph. 1.523.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
βέβηλος, βεβηλον (ΒΑΩ, βαίνω, βηλός threshold);

1. accessible, lawful to be trodden; properly, used of places; hence,
2. profane, equivalent to חֹל (i. e. unhallowed, common), Leviticus 10:10; 1 Samuel 21:4; opposed to ἅγιος (as in (Ezekiel 22:26); Philo, vit. Moys. iii., § 18): 1 Timothy 4:7; 1 Timothy 6:20; 2 Timothy 2:16; of men, profane i. e. ungodly: 1 Timothy 1:9; Hebrews 12:16. (Often in Greek writings from Aeschylus down.) (Cf. Trench, § 101.)

Question 222

λιθοβολέω

Answer 222

I pet with stones, kill by stoning

to throw stones

to stone, pelt with stones, in order to kill, Mt. 21:35; 23:37

(ἐλιθοβόλουν), -, ἐλιθοβόλησα, -, -, ἐλιθοβολήθην

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
λῐθοβολ-έω,

pelt with stones, stone, LXX Leviticus 20:2, al., D.S. 17.41, Matthew 21:35, Plu. 2.1011e: — Pass., LXX Exodus 8:26(22).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
λιθοβολέω, λιθοβόλω; imperfect 3 person plural ἐλιθοβόλουν; 1 aorist ἐλιθοβόλησα; passive, present λιθοβολοῦμαι; 1 future λιθοβοληθήσομαι; (λιθοβόλος, and this from λίθος and βάλλω (cf. Winers Grammar, 102 (96); 25, 26)); the Sept. for סָקַל and רָגַם; equivalent to λιθάζω (which see), to stone; i. e.

a. to kill by stoning, to stone (of a species of punishment, see λιθάζω): τινα, Matthew 21:35; Matthew 23:37; Luke 13:34; Acts 7:58f; passive, John 8:5; Hebrews 12:20.
b. to pelt with stones: τινα, Mark 12:4 (Rec.); Acts 14:5. ((Diodorus 17, 41, 8); Plutarch, mor., p. 1011 e.)

Question 223

συμβάλλω

Answer 223

to throw together, to bring together, to dispute with; to confer with, meet with; to ponder; to engage in (war); (mid.) to help, assist

pr. to throw together; absol. to meet and join, Acts 20:14; to meet in war, to encounter, engage with, Lk. 14:31; to encounter in discourse or dispute, Acts 17:18; to consult together, Acts 4:15; mid. to contribute, be of service to, to aid, Acts 18:27; συμβάλλειν ἐν τῇ καρδιᾳ, to revolve in mind, ponder upon, Lk. 2:19*

(συνέβαλλον), -, συνέβαλον, συμβέβληκα, -, -

Thayer's Definition
to throw together, to bring together
to converse
to bring together in one's mind, confer with one's self
to come together, meet
to encounter in a hostile sense
to fight with one
to bring together of one's property, to contribute, aid, help

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
συμβάλλω, fut. -βᾰλῶ: aor. -έβᾰλον, inf. -βᾰλεῖν: pf. -βέβληκα: aor. 1 Pass. -εβλήθην: — of these tenses Hom. uses only pres. Act., aor. Act. and Med., but most commonly intr. aor. forms συμβλήτην, -βλήμεναι, Med. σύμβλητο, -βληντο, -βλήμενος, subj. 2 sg. -βλήεαι prob. cj. for -βλήσεαι in Il. 20.335, 3 sg. contr. -βληται Od. 7.204: —

throw together, dash together, σύν ῥ’ ἔβαλον ῥινούς, of men in close combat, Il. 4.447, 8.61; ἀσπίδας E. Ph. 1405, Ar. Pax 1274 (hex.), X. HG 4.3.19, etc.; bring together, unite, e.g. of rivers that fall into one another, ἐς μισγάγκειαν συμβάλλετον ὄβριμον ὕδωρ Il. 4.453; ῥοὰς Σιμόεις συμβάλλετον ἠδὲ Σκάμανδρος 5.774: — Med., πολλοὶ ποταμοὶ ς. τὸ σφέτερον ὕδωρ Hdt. 4.50 (cf. δάκρυα δάκρυσι ς. E. Or. 336 (lyr., Act.)); ὁ Ἀκεσίνης τῷ Ἰνδῷ τὸ ὕδωρ ς. Arr. An. 6.1.5; ς. τὰ ὦτα πρὸς τὴν γῆν have their ears reaching to.., Arist. HA 606a15: — Pass., κατὰ τὰς ῥᾶγας συμβεβλημένων [τῶν δακτύλων ] Sor. 2.60.

2. collect, X. Cyr. 2.1.5; store up, accumulate, κριθὰς ἵπποις συμβεβλημένας πολλάς Id. An. 3.4.31.
3. jumble up together, διαφέροντα ς. εἰς ταὐτόν Pl. Plt. 285a.
4. intr. in Act., fit (cf. σύμβολον 1.1), Arist. EE 1239b14; to be suitable, τὰ χεδροπὰ ς. εἰς τὰς νέας Thphr. CP 3.20.7 (unless = sow, set). to be profitable, ς. τῷ πολιτικῷ.. δικαίῳ εἶναι Phld. Rh. 2.285 S.; ς. ἀναμένειν ἡμέραν μίαν Gal. 16.496.
5. intr., come together, ἔνθα δίστομοι.. ς. ὁδοί where two roads join, S. OC 901, cf. Str. 6.3.7; τὰ συμβάλλοντα the watersmeet, IG 9(2) p.xi (Delph., iii/ii B.C.); [ φλὲψ] ς. τῇ ἀποσχίσει Arist. HA 514a12; collide, τοὺς τύπους ἀνάγκη συμβάλλειν ἑαυτοῖς Thphr. Sens. 52: Geom., meet, τὸ σημεῖον, καθ’ ὃ συμβάλλουσιν the point in which (the straight lines) meet, Archim. Sph.Cyl. 1.23, etc.
6. βλέφαρα ς. ὕπνῳ close the eyes in sleep, A. Ag. 15; ς. ὄμμα, in death, ib. 1294 (but ποῖον ὄμμα συμβαλῶ; how shall I meet her eyes with mine? E. IA 455).
7. generally, join, unite, ς. σχοινία twist ropes (cf. συμβολεύς), Ar. Pax 37; so τοπεῖα IG 22.1672.311 (iv B.C.); ὠμόλινον ς. πεντάπλουν Hp. Fist. 4; στέφανον Philostr. Her.Prooem.; [ αἱ φλέβες] ς. [τὸ σῶμα] εἰς ἕν Arist. PA 668b24; fit together, ἁρμούς IG 7.4255.23 (Oropus, iv B.C.); ς. καὶ κολλῆσαι ib. 22.1668.73 (iv B.C.); κεραῖαι συμβεβλημέναι PCair.Zen. 566.10 (iii B.C.); δεξιὰς ς. ἀλλήλοισι join hands, E. IA 58.
8. ς. συμβόλαιά τινι or πρός τινα make a contract with a person, esp. lend him money on bond, D. 34.1, Pl. R. 425c, cf. Th. 5.77 (Med.); συμβόλαιον εἰς τἀνδράποδα συμβεβλημένον money lent on the security of the slaves, D. 27.27: abs., in same sense, Isoc. 21.13; make a contract, Pl. Alc. 1.125d, OGI 669.21 (Egypt, i A.D.), Cod.Just. 1.3.55.4; of a marriage contract, Mitteis Chr. 372 vi 22, cf. 8 (ii A.D.); advance, lend, πέρα μεδίμνου κριθῶν Isaiah 10:10; ἱμάτια, χρυσία, etc., Ar. Ec. 446; ἐπί τισι on certain terms, D.H. 6.29; ς. δανεισμῷ Pl. Lg. 921d; ὁ συμβαλών the lender, creditor, D. 56.2, cf. D.H. 5.63 (but οἱ συμβ. the borrowers, debtors, Id. 4.9): — Med., with pf. Pass., pay a share, contribute, ὁλκάδα οἱ συμβαλέεσθαι give him a merchant-vessel, Hdt. 3.135, cf. Lys. 32.24, X. Ages. 2.27; ς. χρήματά τινι εἰς τροφὴν τῶν στρατιωτῶν advance it, Id. An. 1.1.9, cf. IG 7.2418 (Thebes, iv B.C.); τριήρεις εἰς κίνδυνον Isoc. 4.98; ἐφόδιον PSI 4.407.12 (iii B.C.).
9. generally, contribute: — Pass., συμβάλλεταί τις.. μερίς Alex. 149.4: — in this sense mostly in Med., τέμενος συμβάλλεσθαι add thereto, Pi. I. 1.59; ἡ τύχη οὐδὲν ἔλασσον ξυμβάλλεται ἐς τὸ ἐπαίρειν Th. 3.45, cf. Hp. Aër. 2, Sosip. 1.37, Damox. 2.11; τὸ μὴ ἀγανακτεῖν.. ἄλλα τέ μοι πολλὰ συμβάλλεται, καὶ.. many circumstances contribute to my feeling no vexation, and especially.., Pl. Ap. 36a; ς. βοήθειαν οὐ σμικρὰν πρός τι Id. Lg. 836b; τιμὴν καὶ δόξαν τῇ πόλει ς. Isoc. 8.6; οὐ δεῖ λογίζεσθαι, πότερος πλείω συμβέβληται X. Oec. 7.13; freq. with μέρος as obj., ἔργων οὐκ ἐλάχιστον μέρος ς. And. 1.143; μέρος ς. πρὸς ἀρετήν Pl. Lg. 836d, cf. R. 331b, D. 41.11; οὐκ ἐλάχιστον μέρος πρὸς εὐδαιμονίαν Isoc. 7.79; συμβαλλέσθω τὸ μέρος ἕκαστος εἰς τὸ ἀνάλωμα PHal. 1.108, cf. 113 (iii B.C.); τὴν μεγίστην εἰς αὐτὰ μοῖραν Pl. Ti. 47c, cf. X. Cyr. 6.1.28: also abs., οὔτε ποταμὸς οὔτε κρήνη οὐδεμία ἐσδιδοῦσα ἐς πλῆθός οἱ συμβάλλεται contributes to its volume, Hdt. 4.50; ς. πρὸς τὸ λανθάνειν X. Cyr. 2.4.21, cf. Isoc. 7.21; συμβαλλόμενα contributory causes, Thphr. Sud. 6: abs., to be helpful, πολλά ἐστι τὰ συμβαλλόμενα τοῖς βουλομένοις Antipho 5.79, cf. Pl. Lg. 905b, D. 21.133; φόνου κηκὶς ξ. contributes to the proof, A. Ch. 1012: rarely c. gen. partit., ξυμβάλλεται πολλὰ τοῦδε δείματος many things contribute [ their share ] of this fear, i.e. join in causing it, E. Med. 284.
10. συμβάλλεσθαι γνώμας contribute one’s opinion to a discussion, Hdt. 8.61; περί τινος Pl. Plt. 298c; συμβαλέσθαι περί τινος λόγους X. Cyr. 2.2.21; λόγον ς. περὶ βίου contribute an opinion about life, Pl. Lg. 905c; also συμβαλέσθαι τι to have something to say, Id. Ion 532c, cf. 533a; ταῦτά σοι περὶ Ἔρωτος ς. Id. Smp. 185c; συμβαλοῦ γνώμην contribute your opinion, help in judging, S. OC 1151; ς. τὴν γνώμην τῆς βουλῆς, with or without εἰς τὸν δῆμον, communicate it, IG 22.79.6, 103.17, al.; cast votes, Schwyzer 84.15 (Tylisus, v B.C.).

II συμβάλλειν (sc. λόγους) converse, ς. τινί or πρός τινα, Plu. 2.222c, Acts 4:15 : — Med., ἀτὰρ τί ἐγὼ περὶ κλοπῆς ς.; X. An. 4.6.14.

II bring men together in hostile sense, pit them against each other, match them, ἀμφοτέρους θεοὶ σύμβαλον Il. 20.55; ἐμὲ.. καὶ Μενέλαον συμβάλετε.. μάχεσθαι 3.70; ς. σκύμνον λέοντος σκύλακι κυνός set one to fight with the other, Hdt. 3.32; ἄνδρα ἀνδρὶ καὶ ἵππον ἵππῳ ς. Id. 5.1; τοὺς ἡβῶντας ς. εἰς ἔριν περὶ ἀρχῆς X. Lac. 4.2; ἀλεκτρυόνας ς. Id. Smp. 4.9; ἄνδρας φίλους Id. Cyr. 6.1.32; εἰς χεῖρα δοῦλον δεσπότῃ μὴ συμβάλῃς Philem. 206: metaph., ἀναισχυντίᾳ ς. τινὰ καὶ προσγυμνάζειν make him contend with.., Pl. Lg. 647c. Med., join in fight, σὺν δ’ ἐβάλοντο μάχεσθαι ἐναντίον Il. 12.377. intr., come together, σύμβαλον μάχεσθαι 16.565; also ς. alone, come to blows, engage, πρίν γ’ ἠὲ ξυμβλήμεναι ἠὲ δαμῆναι 21.578; freq. in Hdt., either abs., as 1.77, 82, or c. dat. pers., ib. 80, 104; Ἄρης Ἄρει δυμβαλεῖ, Δίκα Δίκᾳ A. Ch. 461 (lyr.); Ἕλληνες Μήδοις ς. Simon. 136; also ς. πρός τινα X. Cyr. 7.1.20, Isoc. 4.69; εἰς μονομαχίαν πρός τινα Str. 14.5.16; συμβάλλων coming into collision, Pl. Plt. 273a, cf. Wilcken Chr. 16.6 (ii A.D.).

2. ς. πόλεμον καὶ δηϊοτῆτα engage in war, Il. 12.181 (prob. interpol.); so in Trag., ς. βάκχαις μάχην E. Ba. 837; ἔχθραν τινί Id. Med. 44; ἔριν φίλοις ib. 521: metaph., συμβαλεῖν ἔπη κακά bandy reproaches, S. Aj. 1323; αἰσχρὸν δέ μοι γυναιξὶ συμβάλλειν λόγους E. IA 830.
3. Med., fall in with one, meet him, c. dat., freq. in Hom., who uses aor. forms beginning ξυμβλη- or συμβλη- solely in this sense, Νέστορι δὲ ξύμβληντο Il. 14.27, cf. 39; εἰ δ’ ἄρα τις.. ξύμβληται ὁδίτης Od. 7.204; ξυμβλήμενος ἄλλος ὁδίτης 11.127; ὅτε κεν συμβλήσεαι (leg. -βλήεαι) αὐτῷ Il. 20.335; ξυμβλήτην ἀλλήλοιιν Od. 21.15.
4. so in Act., συμβαλών having met, A. Ch. 677; οἱ συμβάλλοντες those who come in contact with one, Plu. Mar 20; φιλοσόφῳ ς. Arr. Epict. 3.9.13, cf. 12, POxy. 1063 (ii/iii A.D.), PFay. 129.2 (iii A.D.).

III compare, σμικρὰ μεγάλοισι Hdt. 2.10; ἑωυτόν τινι Id. 3.160; ἓν πρὸς ἕν Id. 4.50; τι πρός τι Lycurg. 68; πρὸς ἄλληλα Pl. Tht. 186b; οὐδὲν ἦν τούτων.. πρὸς ἀτταγῆνα συμβαλεῖν Phoenicid. 2.5: — Pass., Hdt. 2.10, 3.125; τὸ ἀργύριον τὸ Βαβυλώνιον πρὸς τὸ Εὐβοικὸν συμβαλλόμενον τάλαντον the Babyl. talent being compared with, reduced to, the Euboic, ib. 95. compare for the purpose of checking, μέτρῳ συμβεβλημένῳ πρὸς τὸ χαλκοῦν Wilcken Chr. 410.11 (iii B.C.), etc.

2. Med., reckon, compute, Hdt. 2.31, 4.15, 6.63, 65: — Pass., ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἡμερησίη ἀνὰ διηκόσια στάδια συμβέβληταί μοι Id. 4.101.
3. conclude, infer, conjecture, interpret, συμβαλεῖν τι Pi. N. 11.33; ς. ὅτι.. Pl. Cra. 412c; τοῦτο ς. S. OC 1474; τοῦτο ς., ὅτι.. Ar. V. 50; τὰ πρὶν οὐκ εὔγνωστα ς. E. Or. [1394]; εὖ ξυνέβαλεν αὐτά Ar. Eq. 427; ἣν [νόσον] οὐδ’ ἂν εἷς γνοίη ποτ’ οὐδ’ ἂν ξυμβάλοι Id. V. 72; ς. ἔπη E. Med. 675; τοὖναρ Id. IT 55; τὴν μαντείαν Pl. Cra. 384a; τὸν χρησμόν Arist. Fr. 532, cf. 76; σήματα ς., εἰ.. ἤ.. Arat. 1146: abs., καθὼς συμβάλλομεν ἐκ τοὖ.. Sor. 2.63: — Med., abs., Heraclit. 47, freq. in Hdt., as 2.33, 4.87: c. acc., make out, understand, τὸ πρῆγμα ib. 111; ς. τι ἔκ τινος 6.107; τῇδε, ὅτι.. from the fact that.., 3.68: c. acc. et inf., 1.68, 2.33, 112, al.; folld. by indirect question, 4.45. agree, arrange, καθάπερ ξυνέβαλον ἢ διέθεντο IG 12.46.14; πρὸς ἐμὲ πάντες συμβάλλετε X. Cyr. 6.2.41: — Med., make a treaty, Foed. ap. Th. 5.77; agree upon, fix, settle, λόφον εἰς ὃν δέοι ἁλίζεσθαι X. An. 6.3.3; ἔδει σε, καθότι συνεβάλου ἡμῖν, Ἡρακλείδην.. ἀπεσταλκέναι PCair.Zen. 314.1 (iii B.C.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
συμβάλλω (συνβάλλω WH (so Tdf. except Luke 14:31); cf. Σιν, II. at the end); imperfect συνέβαλλον; 2 aorist συνέβαλον; 2 aorist middle συνεβαλομην; from Homer down; to throw together, to bring together;

a. λόγους (Latinsermones conferre), to converse, Euripides, Iphig. Aul. 830; with λόγους omitted (cf. English confer), Plutarch, mor., p. 222 e. (Winers Grammar, 593 (552); (Buttmann, 145 (127))): τίνι, to dispute with one, Acts 17:18 (where A. V. encountered (cf.
c. below)); πρός ἀλλήλους, to confer with one another, deliberate among themselves, Acts 9:15.
b. to bring together in one’s mind, confer with oneself (cf. σύν, II. 4), to consider, ponder: ἐν τῇ καρδία, to revolve in the mind, Luke 2:19 (συμβαλων τῷ λογισμῷ τό ὄναρ, Josephus, Antiquities 2, 5, 3).
c. intransitive (Winers Grammar, § 38, 1; (Buttmann, § 130, 4)), to come together, meet: τίνι, to meet one (on a journey), Acts 20:14 (Homer, Odyssey 21, 15; Josephus, Antiquities 2, 7, 5); “to encounter in a hostile sense: τίνι, to fight with one (1 Macc. 4:34; 2 Macc. 8:23 2Macc. 14:17; Polybius 1, 9, 7; 3, 111, 1, and often), with εἰς πόλεμον added, Luke 14:31 (εἰς μάχην, Polybius 3, 56, 6; Josephus, Antiquities 12, 8, 4; πρός μάχην, Polybius 10, 37, 4). Middle, to bring together of one’s property, to contribute, aid, help: πολύ τίνι, one, Acts 18:27; often so in Greek authors also, especially Polybius; cf. Schweighäuser, Lex. Polybius, p. 576; Passow, under the word, 1 b. ἆ.; (Liddell and Scott, under the word I. 2); Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Wis. 5:8.

Question 224

ὑπερβάλλω

Answer 224

I surpass, exceed
to go beyonδ, be incomparable

pr. to cast or throw over or beyond, to overshoot; met. to surpass, excel; surpassing, 2 Cor. 3:10; 9:14; Eph. 1:19; 2:7; 3:19*
- , -, -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to surpass in throwing, to throw over or beyond any thing
to transcend, surpass, exceed, excel
excelling, exceeding

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑπερβάλλω, fut. -βαλῶ, -βαλέω Od. 11.597: aor. 2 ὑπειρέβαλον Il. 23.637: —

throw over or beyond a mark, overshoot, ὑπέρβαλε σήματα πάντων Il. 23.843; τόσσον παντὸς ἀγῶνος (sc. σήματα) ὑπέρβαλε ib. 847; δουρὶ ὑ. Φυλῆα beat him in throwing with it, ib. 637.

2. ὅτε μέλλοι ἄκρον [λόφον] ὑπερβαλέειν force the stone over the top, Od. l.c.
3. intr., run beyond, overrun the scent, of hounds, X. Cyn. 6.20.
4. outstrip or pass, in racing, τινας S. El. 716.
5. Med., throw a stone over one’s head, SIG 1071 (Olympia).

II in various metaph. senses:

1 outdo, excel, surpass, overpower, δέδοικα μὴ πρὶν πόνοις ὑπερβάλῃ με γῆρας E. Fr. 453.5 (lyr.): c. gen., Pi. Fr. 33; βροντῆς ὑπερβάλλοντα κτύπον A. Pr. 923.

2. go beyond, exceed, μήτ’ ἄρ’ ὑπερβάλλων βοὸς ὁπλὴν μήτ’ ἀπολείπων Hes. Op. 489; ὑ. πόσιος μέτρον Thgn. 479; τὴν τοῦ μετρίου φύσιν Pl. Plt. 283e; ὑ. τὰ ἱκανά X. Hier. 4.8: of Time, ὑ. ἑκατὸν ἔτεα exceed 100 years, in age, Hdt. 3.23; ὑ. τὰς τρεῖς ἡμέρας delay longer than.., Hp. VC 14; ὑ. τὸν χρόνον exceed the time, i. e. be too late, X. HG 5.3.21; ὑ. τὸν καιρόν exceed reasonable bounds, Democr. 235, D. 23.122: in number, intensity, etc., ἡδοναὶ ὑ. λύπας Pl. Lg. 734b, cf. Prt. 356b (Pass.): c. dat. modi, exceed one in.., πάντας ἀνθρώπους τόλμῃ καὶ μιαρίᾳ X. HG 7.3.6; ἅπαντας ἀνθρώπους ὠμότητι D. 18.275: abs., ὑ. πρὸς ἀρετήν Pl. Lg. 945c. c. gen. pro acc., ἆρα λύπῃ ὑ. τὸ ἀδικεῖν τοῦ ἀδικεῖσθαι; Id. Grg. 475c, cf. Lg. 734a; ὑ. τῆς συμμετρίας Arist. Pol. 1284b8, cf. HA 503b22.
3. abs., exceed, αἱ μέσαι ἕξεις πρὸς μὲν τὰς ἐλλείψεις ὑπερβάλλουσι compared with their defects are in excess, Id. EN 1108b17; exceed all bounds, A. Pers. 291, E. Ba. 785, Th. 7.67, Pl. Tht. 180a; οὐχ ὑπερβαλών keeping within bounds, Pi. N. 7.66; μή νυν ὑπέρβαλλ’, ἀλλ’ ἐναισίμως φέρε E. Alc. 1077: c. dat. modi, ὑ. τῇ μοχθηρίᾳ Ar. Pl. 109; ἀδυναμίᾳ τοῦ δοξάσαι Pl. Tht. 192c, cf. X. Mem. 4.3.7; ἀνοίᾳ D. 8.16. freq. in part. ὑπερβάλλων, ουσα, ον, exceeding, excessive, ὑ. δαπάνη X. Hier. 11.2; ἡδονή, ἔπαινοι, Pl. R. 402e, Phdr. 240e; θεάματα ταῖς δαπάναις ὑ. Isoc. 4.45, cf. Pl. Lg. 899a; οἱ ὑπερβάλλοντες, opp. οἱ καταδεέστεροι, Isoc. 9.13; τὰ ὑ. an over-high estate, E. Med. 127 (anap.); φεύγειν τὰ ὑ. ἑκατέρωσε extremes, Pl. R. 619a; τὸ ὑ. αὐτῶν such part of them as goes beyond that, Th. 2.35; οἱ ὑ. [λόγοι ], title of work by Thrasymachus (Fr. 7), perh. overpowering arguments.
4. overbid or outbid at auction, ἀλλήλους Lys. 22.8, POxy. 1633.5 (iii A. D.); τὸ ὑπερβάλλον the overbid, PPetr. 3p.195 (iii B. C.): abs., go on further and further, in making offers, προέβαινε τοῖσι χρήμασι ὑπερβάλλων he went on bidding more and more, Hdt. 5.51; ᾔτει τοσαῦτα ὑπερβάλλων Th. 8.56, cf. And. 1.133: — Pass., ἕνεκα τοῦ-βεβλῆσθαι τὴν οἰκίαν POxy. 513.25 (ii A. D.); v. infr. B. 1.3.
5. Adv. ὑπερβαλλόντως exceedingly, Pl. R. 492b, Epicur. Nat. 2.2, SIG 685.36 (Crete, ii B. C.), Phld. Lib. p.7O., 2 Corinthians 11:23; written ὑπερβαλόντως in IG 12(7).410.12 (Amorgos); opp. μετρίως, Isoc. 1.28.

III pass over, cross mountains, rivers, and the like, πρῶνα A. Ag. 307; κορυφάς Id. Pr. 722; γῆς ὅρους E. Or. 443; τὰς Ἄλπεις εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν Str. 7.2.3: c. gen., θριγκοῦ τοῦδ’ ὑ. ποδί E. Ion 1321 (where Dobree suggested θριγκοὺς τούσδ’): metaph., surmount, τάσδ’ ὑ. τύχας Id. Alc. 795. of ships, double a headland, ὑ. Μαλέην Hdt. 7.168; τὴν ἄκραν Th. 8.104. abs., cross over, ἐς τὴν ἄνω Μακεδονίην Hdt. 8.137, cf. X. An. 4.6.10; πρὸς τοὺς Θρᾷκας ib. 7.5.1; κατὰ λόφους τινάς ib. 6.5.7.

2. of water, run over, beat over, c. gen., ὑπερβάλλει δὲ θάλασσα ἀμφοτέρων τοίχων Thgn. 673; of rivers, overflow, τὰς ἀρούρας Hdt. 2.111: abs., of a kettle, boil over, Id. 1.59; of the sea, ἢν δ’ ὑπερβάλῃ.. πόντος E. Tr. 691.
3. of the sun, to be very hot, Hdt. 4.184.
4. exceed, i. e. overlap, a base, Euc. 6.29; cf. ὑπερβολή

IV. — Note, the case that follows is almost always the acc.; the gen. occurs in a few exceptional instances, v. supr. 11.2 b, 111.1 and 2. Med., with pf. Pass., = A. 11, outdo, overcome, conquer, τινα Hdt. 5.124, Ar. Eq. 758 (lyr.), Nu. 1035; τὴν βασιλέος δύναμιν Hdt. 8.24; μάχῃ ὑ. τινά E. Or. 691; φίλτροις ὑ. τινά S. Tr. 584, cf. Ar. Eq. 413: abs., to be conqueror, Hdt. 6.9, 7.168.

2. exceed, surpass, τινα D. 19.342, etc.; τοὺς ἀπ’ αἰῶνος OGI 542.11 (Ancyra, ii A. D.); πάντας τῷ ὕψεϊ καὶ τῷ μεγάθεϊ Hdt. 2.175, cf. 110; τινὰ ἀναιδείᾳ Ar. Eq. 409; θωπείαις ib. 890; εἴς τι Pl. Criti. 115d; ἔν τινι Str. 1.1.2. δόσι χρημάτων ὑ. surpass all, Hdt. 1.61; ἀρετῇ Id. 9.71; ὑπερβαλλόμενος πλήθεϊ with overpowering numbers, Id. 3.21: pf. part. Pass., ὑπερβεβλημένη γυνή an excellent, surpassing woman, E. Alc. 153; φύσις ὑπερβεβλ. Pl. R. 558b; ταφῆς τῆς μὲν ὑπερβεβλ., τῆς δὲ ἐλλειπούσης Id. Lg. 719d: c. gen., γόγγροι τῶν παρ’ ἡμῖν ὑπερβεβλ. κατὰ τὸ μέγεθος Str. 3.2.7.
3. overbid, outbid (v. supr. A. 11.4), τινὰ χρήμασιν Pl. Phdr. 232c, cf. X. Cyr. 5.3.32.
4. outflank, τὸ κέρας τῶν πολεμίων Ascl. Tact. 10.2, cf.18.

II put off, postpone, τὴν ἀπόδοσιν Hdt. 4.9; τὴν συμβολήν Id. 9.45; εἰς ἄλλον καιρόν Phld. Rh. 1.223S.; but ἢν ὑπερβάλωνται ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν.. συμβολὴν μὴ ποιεύμενοι if they let that day pass without fighting, Hdt. 9.51: abs., delay, linger, Id. 3.71, 76, 7.206; εἰς αὖθις ὑπερβαλέσθαι Pl. Phdr. 254d, cf. Arist. Rh.Al. 1420a8, 1438b6.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑπερβάλλω; from Homer down;

1. transitive, to surpass in throwing; to throw over or beyond anything.
2. intransitive, to transcend, surpass, exceed, excel; participle ὑπερβαλλων, excelling, exceeding; Vulg. (in Ephesians 1:19; Ephesians 3:19)supereminens; (Aeschylus, Herodotus, Euripides, Isocrates, Xenophon, Plato, others): 2 Corinthians 3:10; 2 Corinthians 9:14; Ephesians 1:19; Ephesians 2:7; with a genitive of the object surpassed (Aeschylus Prom. 923; Plato, Gorgias, p. 475 b.; cf. Matthiae, § 358, 2), ἡ ὑπερβαλλουσα τῆς γνώσεως ἀγάπη Χρσιτου, the love of Christ which passeth knowledge, Ephesians 3:19 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 346 (324) note).

Question 225

παρεμβολή, -ῆς, ἡ

Answer 225

fortress, camp, barracks; army

an insertion besides;, later, a marshalling of an army; an array of battle, army, Heb. 11:34; a camp, Heb. 13:11, 13; Rev. 20:9; a standing camp, fortress, citadel, castle, Acts 21:34, 37; 22:24; 23:10, 16, 32*

Thayer’s Definition
an encampment
the camp of Israel in the desert
used for the city of Jerusalem, inasmuch as that was to the Israelites what formerly the encampment had been in the desert
of the sacred congregation or assembly of Israel, as it had been gathered formerly in camps in the wilderness
the barracks of the Roman soldiers, which at Jerusalem were in the castle of Antonia
an army in a line of battle

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παρεμ-βολή, ἡ,

insertion, interpolation, ἑτέρων πραγμάτων Aeschin. 3.205, cf. 1.166 (pl.), Phld. Rh. 1.261 S.

2. Gramm., parenthesis, Alex. Fig. 25, Tib. Fig. 48.

II drawing up in battle-order, Plb. 11.32.6; in Tactics, insertion of men in the ranks (dist. fr. παρένταξις and παρεμπλοκή), Ascl. Tact. 6.1, 10.17. company of soldiers, etc., LXX Genesis 32:2(3); host, ib. 33.8 (pl.), Ezek. Exag. 81.

2. encampment, Diph. 57, Theophil. 9, Crito Com. 1, LXX Exodus 14:19, al., Plb. 3.74.5, al., Plu. Galb. 27: generally, soldiers’ quarters, Plb. 6.29.1; barracks, Acts 21:34, cf. Ostr. 901, al. (ii A. D.); name of an ἄμφοδον, POxy. 2131.8 (iii A. D.).

III = cross παρεξειρεσία (q. v.), Plb. 21.7.4 (sed leg. παραβολαί). in boxing and wrestling, π. βάλλειν trip an adversary by a twist of the leg, Luc. Ocyp. 60, cf. Plu. 2.638f (pl.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παρεμβολή, παρεμβολῆς. ἡ (from παρεμβάλλω, which see);

1. interpolation, insertion (into a discourse of matters foreign to the subject in hand, Aeschines).
2. In the Maced. dialect (cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex., p. 30; Lob. ad Phryn., p. 377; (Winers Grammar, 22)) an encampment (Pclyb., Diodorus, Josephus, Plutarch);
   a. the camp of the Israelites in the desert (an enclosure within which their tents were pitched), Exodus 29:14; Exodus 19:17; Exodus 32:17; hence, in Hebrews 13:11 used for the city of Jerusalem, inasmuch as that was to the Israelites what formerly the encampment had been in the desert; of the sacred congregation or assembly of Israel, as that had been gathered formerly in camps in the wilderness, Hebrews 13:13.
   b. the barracks of the Roman soldiers, which at Jerusalem were in the castle Antonia: Acts 21:34, 37; Acts 22:24; Acts 23:10, 16, 32.
3. an army in line of battle: Hebrews 11:34; Revelation 20:9 (here A. V. camp), (Exodus 14:19, 20; Judges 4:16; Judges 8:11; 1 Samuel 14:16; very often in Polybius; Aelian v. h. 14, 46). Often in the Sept. for מַחֲנֶה, which signifies both camp and army; frequent in both senses in 1 Maccabees (); cf. Grimm on 1 Macc. 3:3.

Question 226

ὑπερβολή, ῆς, ἡ

Answer 226

excess, abundance,all-surpassing, surpassingly great, most excellent, beyond measure

pr. a throwing beyond, an overshooting; extraordinary amount or character, transcendency, 2 Cor. 12:7; 4:7; καθ᾿ ὑπερβολήν, adverbially, exceedingly, extremely, Rom. 7:13; 2 Cor. 1:8; Gal. 1:13; a far better way, 1 Cor. 12:31; beyond all measure, 2 Cor. 4:17*

Thayer's Definition
a throwing beyond
metaph.
superiority, excellence, pre-eminence
beyond measure, exceedingly, preeminently
beyond all measure

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑπερβολ-ή, ἡ, (ὑπερβάλλω)

a throwing beyond others, δίσκων ὑπερβολαῖς Philostr. Im. 2.19: in intr. sense, altitude of a star, Arist. Mete. 342b32.

2. overshooting, superiority, χερῶν ὑπερβολαῖς E. Fr. 434; στρατιᾶς Th. 6.31.
3. excess, τοῦ μεγέθεος Archyt. 1; opp. ἔλλειψις or ἔνδεια, Pl. Prt. 356a, 357a, 357b; θερμασίης Hp. Vict. 2.65; ὑ. δισσὴ.., τῷ ποσῷ καὶ τῷ ποιῷ Arist. PA 668b14; ὑπερβολὴν τῆς ἐπιθυμίας ἔχειν c. acc. et inf., And. 3.33, etc.: hence in various phrases, χρημάτων ὑπερβολῇ.. πρίασθαι at an extravagant price, E. Med. 232; ἐπέφερον τὴν ὑ. τοῦ καινοῦσθαι pushed on their extravagance in revolutionizing, Th. 3.82; οὐκ ἔχον ἐστὶν ὑπερβολήν it can go no further, D. 21.119, cf. 25.54; ἃ μηδὲ πιθανὰς τὰς ὑ. ἔχει Men. Her. 62; so οὐδεμίαν or μηδεμίαν ὑ. λείπειν, Isoc. 4.5,110, cf. D. 3.25; οὐδεμίαν ὑ. καταλείπων φιλοτιμίας SIG 545.13 (Delph., iii B. C.); εἴ τις ὑ. τούτου if there is aught beyond (worse than) this, D. 19.66, cf. Isoc. 5.42; ταῦτ’ οὐχ ὑ.; is not this the extreme, the last degree? D. 27.38; ὑπερβολὴν ποιήσομαι I will put an extreme case, Id. 19.332; τοσαύτην ὑ. ποιεῖσθαι ὥστε.. to go so far that.., Id. 18.190: folld. by a gen., ὑ. ποιεῖσθαι ἐκείνων τῆς αὑτοῦ βδελυρίας to carry his own rascality beyond theirs, Id. 22.52, cf. 23.201, And. 4.22, Lys. 14.38; ὑ. ποιεῖν τῆς τιμῆς to raise the price, Arist. Pol. 1259a26; εἰς ὑ. εὐδαιμονίας ἥκειν Isoc. 11.14; τοσαύτας ὑ. δωρειῶν παρές χηται D. 20.141; ὑ. ἀνοίας ἔχειν Polystr.p.27 W.
4. with Pr in Adverbial phrases, = ὑπερβαλλόντως, εἰς ὑπερβολήν in excess, exceedingly; εἰς ὑ. ἄμεινον E. Fr. 494; ἀγαθὸς εἰς ὑ. Antiph. 80.11; ἐς ὑ. ἐκθερμαίνεσθαι Hp. Vict. 2.65: c. gen., κτήσαιτ’ ἂν ὄλβον εἰς ὑ. πατρός E. Fr. 282.6 (v.l. εἰς ὑπεκτροφὴν πάτρας); far beyond, τοῦ πρόσθεν εἰς ὑ. πανοῦργος, i. e. far more wicked, Id. Hipp. 939, cf. D. 61.33; ἀναλίσκειν πάντα εἰς ὑπερβολάς Pl. 326d: — ἐξ ὑπερβολῆς Plb. 8.15.8: — καθ’ ὑπερβολὰν τοξεύσας with surpassing aim, S. OT 1196 (lyr.); καθ’ ὑ. ἐπαινεῖν extravagantly, Isoc. 5.11; οἱ καθ’ ὑ. ἐν ἐνδείᾳ ὄντες in extremity of need, Arist. Pol. 1295b18; αἱ καθ’ ὑ. ἡδοναί Id. EN 1151a12; τὸ καθ’ ὑ. τραχύ Phld. Po.Herc. 994.35; καθ’ ὑ. ἁμαρτωλός Romans 7:13 : c. gen., καθ’ ὑ. φιλοδοξίας OGI 472.9 (Didyma, i A. D.): — so in dat., εὐτελὴς ὑπερβολῇ Men. 615; παχεῖ’ ὑ. Philem. 41; ὑ. ἀγαθός Arist. HA 625a29, etc.
5. preeminence, perfection, without any notion of excess, δι’ ἀρετῆς ὑπερβολήν Id. EN 1145a24, cf. Rh. 1367b1, Pol. 1284a4; ἡ ὑ. τῆς φιλίας the best and noblest kind of friendship, Id. EN 1166b1; but ἡ καθ’ ὑ. φιλία, = ἡ καθ’ ὑπεροχήν, Id. EE 1238b18.
6. overstrained phrase, hyperbole, ὑπερβολὰς εἰπεῖν Isoc. 4.88; οἱ πρὸς ὑπερβολὴν πεπονημένοι λόγοι ib.11; ὑπερβολὰς εἰπεῖν make strong statements, Id. 3.35, D. 27.64; as a figure of speech, Arist. Rh. 1413a29, Demetr. Eloc. 52, Str. 3.2.9; πρὸς -ὴν εἰρημένος Id. 1.2.33.
7. τὸ καθ’ ὑπερβολήν the superlative degree, in Adjectives, Arist. Top. 134b24; τιθέναι ὑπερβολῇ ib. 139a9; καθ’ ὑ. εἰπεῖν Id. Cael. 281a16.
8. overbid at auction, PPetr. 2p.44 (iii B. C.).

II crossing over, passage of mountains, etc., X. An. 1.2.25, Plb. 3.34.6, etc.

2. in sg. or pl., place of passage, mountain-pass, with or without τοῦ ὄρους, τῶν ὀρέων, X. An. 3.5.18, 4.1.21, 4.4.18; ὑ. τοῦ Ταύρου Wilcken Chr. 1 ii 14 (iii B. C.); αἱ τῶν Ἄλπεων ὑ. Plb. 3.39.10; αἱ Ἄλπιαι ὑ. Str. 7.1.5; ἡ κατὰ τὸν Αἷμον ὑ. D.S. 19.73.

III (from Med.) delay, τοῦ κακοῦ Hdt. 8.112, cf. Decr. ap. D. 18.29, Plb. 14.9.8; [τῆς κρίσεως] ὑ. λαβούσης PEnteux. 65.3 (iii B. C.). the conic section called hyperbola, because the square of the ordinate is equal to a rectangle with height equal to the abscissa applied to the parameter (as base) but exceeding (ὑπερβάλλον), i. e. overlapping, that base, Apollon. Perg. Con. 1.12, Procl. in Euc. p.419F.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑπερβολή, ὑπερβολης, ἡ (ὑπερβάλλω, which see), from Herodotus (8, 112, 4) and Thucydides down;

1. properly, a throwing beyond.
2. metaphorically, superiority, excellence, preeminence (R. V. exceeding greatness): with a genitive of the thing, 2 Corinthians 4:7; 2 Corinthians 12:7; καθ’ ὑπερβολήν, beyond measure, exceedingly, preeminently: Romans 7:13; 1 Corinthians 12:31 (cf. Winers Grammar, § 54, 2b.; Buttmann, § 125, 11 at the end); 2 Corinthians 1:8; Galatians 1:13 (4 Macc. 3:18; Sophocles O. R. 1196; Isocrates, p. 84 d. (i. e. πρός Φιλ. 5); Polybius 3, 92, 10; Diodorus 2, 16; 17, 47); καθ’ ὑπέρ εἰς ὑπερβολήν, beyond all measure (R. V. more and more exceedingly), 2 Corinthians 4:17.
   STRONGS NT 5236a: ὑπερεγώ ὑπερεγώ (Lachmann), equivalent to ὑπέρ ἐγώ (see ὑπέρ, II. 2 c.): 2 Corinthians 11:23. Cf. Winer’s Grammar, 46 (45).

Question 227

συγγενής, -ές

Answer 227

family, relative, one’s own race or people

kindred, akin;, as a subst. a kinsman or kinswoman, relative; Mk. 6:4; Lk. 1:58; 2:44; 14:12; 21:16; Jn. 18:26; Acts 10:24; one nationally akin, a fellow countryman, Rom. 9:3; 16:7, 11, 21*

Thayer’s Definition
of the same kin, akin to, related by blood
in a wider sense, of the same nation, a fellow countryman

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
συγγεν-ής, ές, congenital, inborn, ἦθος Pi. O. 13.13; εὐδοξία Id. N. 3.40; ς. εἶδος,= φύσις, character, Hp. Hum. 1; νόσημα ς. ἐστί τινι Id. Prorrh. 2.2; φόβος A. Eu. 691; παύροις . . ἐστι συγγενὲς τόδε natural to them, Id. Ag. 832; ἡ τύχη προσγίγνεθ’ ἡμῖν ς. τῷ σώματι Philem. 10; πότμος ς . Pi. N. 5.40; προϊδεῖν ς. οἷς ἕπεται who have the natural gift to foresee, ib. 1.28; συγγενεῖς μῆνες my connate months, the months of my natural life, S. OT 1082; ς. τρίχες the hair born with one, i.e. the hair of the head as opp. to the beard, Arist. HA 518a18, 584a24; σημεῖα ς . birth -marks, ib. 585b31; δυνάμεις αἱ ς., opp. αἱ ἔθει and αἱ μαθήσει, Id. Metaph. 1047b31; αὔξει τὸ ς . increases its natural force, Id. EN 1119b9 . Adv., -νῶς δύστηνος miserable from his birth, E. HF 1293; v. σύμφυτος .

II of the same kin, descent, or family, akin to, τινι Hdt. 1.109, 3.2, E. Heracl. 229: abs., akin, cognate, θεός A. Proverbs 14:1-35; γυνή E. Andr. 887; χείρ S. OC 1387; συγγενέστατον φύσει πάντων most nearly akin, Is. 11.17; ς. γάμος ἀνεψιῶν A. Pr. 855; of animals, Arist. HA 539a23, GA 747a31, al.: hence, Subst., kinsman, relative, οὖσα ς. ἐκείνου Ar. Pax 618 (troch.); τῆς ἐμῆς γυναικὸς ξυγγενεῖ (dual) Id. Av. 368 (troch.); πρὸς ς. τε καὶ οἰκείους αὐτῶν Pl. R. 378c; ἔργον εὑρεῖν συγγενῆ πένητός ἐστιν Men. 4; γάμει τὴν συγγενῆ Id. 929: freq. in pl., οἱ ς . kinsfolk, kinsmen, Pi. P. 4.133, Hdt. 2.91, etc.; not properly applied to children ( ἔκγονοι ) in relation to their parents, and so opp. ἔκγονοι in Is. 8.30, v. συγγένεια 1 (but cf. And. 1.17 ); τοῖς συγγενέσι τὰ τοῦ συγγενοῦς ψηφίζεσθαι Is. 4.23 . τὸ ς.,= συγγένεια, kindred, relationship, A. Pr. 291 (anap.), S. El. 1469, Th. 3.82, etc.; also, the spirit of one’s race, Pi. P. 10.12, N. 6.8; εἰ τούτῳ προσήκει Λαΐῳ τι ς . if he had any connexion with him, S. OT 814; of tribes, κατὰ τὸ ξ . Th. 1.95 .

2. metaph., akin, cognate, of like kind, τοὺς τρόπους οὐ συγγενής Ar. Eq. 1280 (troch.), cf. Th. 574; ξυγγενὴς ὁ κύσθος αὐτῆς θητέρᾳ (for τῷ τῆς ἑτέρας ) Id. Ach. 789; freq. in Pl., [ ἡ ψυχὴ] ς. οὖσα τῷ θείῳ R. 611e; τῇ πολεμικῇ ς. ἡ πάλη Lg. 814d; τοῖς . . λόγοις τὴν αἰτίαν συγγενῆ δεῖ νομίζειν Arist. GA 788b9, cf. Rh. 1398a21 ( Comp. ): rarely c. gen., νοῦς αἰτίας ς . Pl. Phlb. 31a, cf. Phd. 79d, R. 403a, 487a: abs., ς. τιμωρίαι fitting, proper punishments, Lycurg. 122 (but prob. f.l. for εὐγ- ) ; συγγενῆ things of the same kind, homogeneous, Arist. APo. 76a1; τὰ ς. καὶ τὰ ὁμοειδῆ Id. Rh. 1405a35; ς. τέχναι Stoic. 2.30; ἐν γαίῃ μὲν σῶμα τὸ ς . its congener, IG 9(1).882.7 (Corc[*]ra). Adv., συγγενῶς ἔρχεσθαι Pl. Lg. 897c; ς. τρέχων Πλάτωνι Alex. 1 (codd. D.L. ); τὰ ς. εἰρημένα to similar effect, Phld. Mus. p.92K.

III συγγενής represented a title bestowed at the Persian court by the king as a mark of honour, ‘cousin’, X. Cyr. 1.4.27, 2.2.31, D.S. 16.50; also at the Ptolemaic and Seleucid courts, OGI 104.2 (Delos, ii B.C. ), al., BGU 1741.12 (i B.C.), LXX 1 Maccabees 10:89; οἱ ς. τῶν κατοίκων ἱππέων prob. a category of nobles among the κάτοικοι, PTeb. 61 ( b ). 79 (ii B.C.); συγγενεῖς κάτοικοι UPZ 14.8 (ii B.C.) .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
συγγενής, συγγενες (accusative singular συγγενῆ, and in Romans 16:11 Treg. συγγενην; see ἄρσην), dative plural συγγενέσιν and (in Mark 6:4 T Tr (WH, also in Luke 2:44 WH) according to a barbarous declension, cf. (1 Macc. 10:89) Buttmann, 25 (22)) συγγενεῦσιν (σύν and γένος) (from Pindar, Aeschylus down; the Sept.), of the same kin, akin to, related by blood, (Pliny,congener): Mark 6:4; Luke 2:44; Luke 21:16; τίνος, Luke (); ; John 18:26; Acts 10:24; Revelation 16:7, 11, 21 (see below); ἡ συγγενής, Luke 1:36 R G Tr (Leviticus 18:14); in a wider sense, of the same race, a fellow-countryman: Romans 9:3 ((so some take the word in , above; cf. Lightfoot on Philippians, p. 175)).

STRONGS NT 4773: συγγενίς συγγενίς, συγγενιδος, ἡ (see the preceding word), a later Greek word ((Plutarch, quaest. Romans 6); like ἐυγενις, cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 451f; cf. Winers Grammar, 69 (67); Kühner, i., p. 419 Anm. 8), a kinswoman: τίνος, Luke 1:36 L T WH.

Question 228

γενεά, -ᾶς, ἡ

Answer 228

generation, kin, one’s own kind or race, descendant; fig., age, period of time (as in to all generations)

pr. birth; hence, progeny; a generation of mankind, Mt. 11:16; 23:36, et al.; a generation, a step in a genealogy, Mt. 1:17; a generation, an interval of time, an age; in NT course of life, in respect of its events, interests, or character, Lk. 16:8; Acts 13:36

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
συγγεν-ής, ές, congenital, inborn, ἦθος Pi. O. 13.13; εὐδοξία Id. N. 3.40; ς. εἶδος,= φύσις, character, Hp. Hum. 1; νόσημα ς. ἐστί τινι Id. Prorrh. 2.2; φόβος A. Eu. 691; παύροις . . ἐστι συγγενὲς τόδε natural to them, Id. Ag. 832; ἡ τύχη προσγίγνεθ’ ἡμῖν ς. τῷ σώματι Philem. 10; πότμος ς . Pi. N. 5.40; προϊδεῖν ς. οἷς ἕπεται who have the natural gift to foresee, ib. 1.28; συγγενεῖς μῆνες my connate months, the months of my natural life, S. OT 1082; ς. τρίχες the hair born with one, i.e. the hair of the head as opp. to the beard, Arist. HA 518a18, 584a24; σημεῖα ς . birth -marks, ib. 585b31; δυνάμεις αἱ ς., opp. αἱ ἔθει and αἱ μαθήσει, Id. Metaph. 1047b31; αὔξει τὸ ς . increases its natural force, Id. EN 1119b9 . Adv., -νῶς δύστηνος miserable from his birth, E. HF 1293; v. σύμφυτος .

II of the same kin, descent, or family, akin to, τινι Hdt. 1.109, 3.2, E. Heracl. 229: abs., akin, cognate, θεός A. Proverbs 14:1-35; γυνή E. Andr. 887; χείρ S. OC 1387; συγγενέστατον φύσει πάντων most nearly akin, Is. 11.17; ς. γάμος ἀνεψιῶν A. Pr. 855; of animals, Arist. HA 539a23, GA 747a31, al.: hence, Subst., kinsman, relative, οὖσα ς. ἐκείνου Ar. Pax 618 (troch.); τῆς ἐμῆς γυναικὸς ξυγγενεῖ (dual) Id. Av. 368 (troch.); πρὸς ς. τε καὶ οἰκείους αὐτῶν Pl. R. 378c; ἔργον εὑρεῖν συγγενῆ πένητός ἐστιν Men. 4; γάμει τὴν συγγενῆ Id. 929: freq. in pl., οἱ ς . kinsfolk, kinsmen, Pi. P. 4.133, Hdt. 2.91, etc.; not properly applied to children ( ἔκγονοι ) in relation to their parents, and so opp. ἔκγονοι in Is. 8.30, v. συγγένεια 1 (but cf. And. 1.17 ); τοῖς συγγενέσι τὰ τοῦ συγγενοῦς ψηφίζεσθαι Is. 4.23 . τὸ ς.,= συγγένεια, kindred, relationship, A. Pr. 291 (anap.), S. El. 1469, Th. 3.82, etc.; also, the spirit of one’s race, Pi. P. 10.12, N. 6.8; εἰ τούτῳ προσήκει Λαΐῳ τι ς . if he had any connexion with him, S. OT 814; of tribes, κατὰ τὸ ξ . Th. 1.95 .

2. metaph., akin, cognate, of like kind, τοὺς τρόπους οὐ συγγενής Ar. Eq. 1280 (troch.), cf. Th. 574; ξυγγενὴς ὁ κύσθος αὐτῆς θητέρᾳ (for τῷ τῆς ἑτέρας ) Id. Ach. 789; freq. in Pl., [ ἡ ψυχὴ] ς. οὖσα τῷ θείῳ R. 611e; τῇ πολεμικῇ ς. ἡ πάλη Lg. 814d; τοῖς . . λόγοις τὴν αἰτίαν συγγενῆ δεῖ νομίζειν Arist. GA 788b9, cf. Rh. 1398a21 ( Comp. ): rarely c. gen., νοῦς αἰτίας ς . Pl. Phlb. 31a, cf. Phd. 79d, R. 403a, 487a: abs., ς. τιμωρίαι fitting, proper punishments, Lycurg. 122 (but prob. f.l. for εὐγ- ) ; συγγενῆ things of the same kind, homogeneous, Arist. APo. 76a1; τὰ ς. καὶ τὰ ὁμοειδῆ Id. Rh. 1405a35; ς. τέχναι Stoic. 2.30; ἐν γαίῃ μὲν σῶμα τὸ ς . its congener, IG 9(1).882.7 (Corc[*]ra). Adv., συγγενῶς ἔρχεσθαι Pl. Lg. 897c; ς. τρέχων Πλάτωνι Alex. 1 (codd. D.L. ); τὰ ς. εἰρημένα to similar effect, Phld. Mus. p.92K.

III συγγενής represented a title bestowed at the Persian court by the king as a mark of honour, ‘cousin’, X. Cyr. 1.4.27, 2.2.31, D.S. 16.50; also at the Ptolemaic and Seleucid courts, OGI 104.2 (Delos, ii B.C. ), al., BGU 1741.12 (i B.C.), LXX 1 Maccabees 10:89; οἱ ς. τῶν κατοίκων ἱππέων prob. a category of nobles among the κάτοικοι, PTeb. 61 ( b ). 79 (ii B.C.); συγγενεῖς κάτοικοι UPZ 14.8 (ii B.C.) .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
συγγενής, συγγενες (accusative singular συγγενῆ, and in Romans 16:11 Treg. συγγενην; see ἄρσην), dative plural συγγενέσιν and (in Mark 6:4 T Tr (WH, also in Luke 2:44 WH) according to a barbarous declension, cf. (1 Macc. 10:89) Buttmann, 25 (22)) συγγενεῦσιν (σύν and γένος) (from Pindar, Aeschylus down; the Sept.), of the same kin, akin to, related by blood, (Pliny,congener): Mark 6:4; Luke 2:44; Luke 21:16; τίνος, Luke (); ; John 18:26; Acts 10:24; Revelation 16:7, 11, 21 (see below); ἡ συγγενής, Luke 1:36 R G Tr (Leviticus 18:14); in a wider sense, of the same race, a fellow-countryman: Romans 9:3 ((so some take the word in , above; cf. Lightfoot on Philippians, p. 175)).

STRONGS NT 4773: συγγενίς συγγενίς, συγγενιδος, ἡ (see the preceding word), a later Greek word ((Plutarch, quaest. Romans 6); like ἐυγενις, cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 451f; cf. Winers Grammar, 69 (67); Kühner, i., p. 419 Anm. 8), a kinswoman: τίνος, Luke 1:36 L T WH.

Question 229

γένημα, ατος, τό / γέννημα

Answer 229

fruit, product, yield, harvest

natural produce, fruit, increase, Mt. 26:29; Mk. 14:25; Lk. 12:18; 22:18; 2 Cor. 9:10*

Thayer’s Definition
that which has been born or begotten
the offspring or progeny of men or animals
the fruits of the earth, the produce of agriculture

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
γένν-ημα, ατος, τό,

I

1. that which is produced or born, child, S. Tr. 315; παίδων τῶν σῶν νέατον γ. Id. Ant. 627; τῶν Λαΐου.. τις ἦν γεννημάτων Id. OT 1167: generally, any product or work, Pl. R. 597e, etc.: in pl., fruits of the earth, Plb. 1.71.1, etc.; τῶν στοιχείων Phld. Sign. 37.
2. breeding, δηλοῖ τὸ γ. ὠμὸν (sc. ὄν).. παιδός S. Ant. 471.

II Act.,

1. begetting, A. Pr. 850 (pl., s.v.l.).
2. producing, Pl. Sph. 266d.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
γένημα, γενήματος, τό (from γίνομαι), a form supported by the best manuscripts in Matthew 26:29; Mark 14:25; Luke 12:18; Luke 22:18; 2 Corinthians 9:10, and therefore adopted by T (see his Proleg., p. 79) Tr (L WH (see WH’s Appendix, p. 148 and below)), printed by Griesbach only in Luke 12:18; 2 Corinthians 9:10, but given by no grammarian, and therefore attributed by Fritzsche (on Mark, p. 619f) to the carelessness of transcribers — for Rec. (but in Luke, the passage cited Rst reads γενημ.) γέννημα, which see In Mark 14:25 Lachmann has retained the common reading; (and in Luke 12:18 Tr text WH have σῖτον. In Ezekiel 36:30 manuscripts A B read γενήματα).

STRONGS NT 1081: γέννημα γέννημα, γεννήματος, τό (from γεννάω), that which has been begotten or born;

a. as in the earlier Greek writings from Sophocles down, the offspring, progeny, of men or of animals: ἐχιδνῶν, Matthew 3:7; Matthew 12:34; Matthew 23:33; Luke 3:7; (γυναικῶν, Sir. 10:18).
b. from Polybius (1, 71, 1 etc.) on (cf. Winers Grammar, 23), the fruits of the earth, products of agriculture (in the Sept. often γεννήματα τῆς γῆς): Luke 12:18 (where Tr (txt. WH) τόν σῖτον); τῆς ἀμπέλου, Matthew 26:29; Mark 14:25; Luke 22:18; cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 286. Metaphorically, fruit, reward, profit: τῆς δικαιοσύνης, 2 Corinthians 9:10 (Hosea 10:12; τῆς σοφίας, Sir. 1:17 Sir. 6:19). Further, see γένημα.

Question 230

γνώμη, ης, ῆ

Answer 230

purpose, resolve; judgment, opinion; consent

the mind, as the means of knowing and judging; assent, Phlm. 14; purpose, resolution, Acts 20:3; opinion, judgment, 1 Cor. 1:10; 7:40; suggestion, suggested advice, as distinguished from positive injunction, Acts 20:3; 1 Cor. 7:25; 2 Cor. 8:10

Thayer's Definition
the faculty of knowledge, mind, reason
that which is thought or known, one's mind
view, judgment, opinion
mind concerning what ought to be done
by one's self: resolve purpose, intention
by others: judgment, advice
decree

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
γνώμ-η, ἡ,

I means of knowing: hence, mark, token, Thgn. 60 (pl.); of the teeth (cf. γνώμων 111), Arist. HA 576b15.

II organ by which one perceives or knows, intelligence,

1 thought, judgement (τῆς ψυχῆς ἡ γ. Pl. Lg. 672b), ἐκμαθεῖν ψυχήν τε καὶ φρόνημα καὶ γ. S. Ant. 176: acc. abs., γνώμην ἱκανός intelligent, Hdt. 3.4; γ. ἀγαθός, κακός, S. OT 687, Ph. 910; τοιάδε τὴν γ. Id. El. 1021; κατὰ γ. ἴδρις Id. OT 1087 (lyr.); γνώμᾳ διπλόαν θέτο βουλάν Pi. N. 10.89; γνώμῃ μαθεῖν τι S. OC 403; γνώμῃ κυρήσας Id. OT 398; γνώμῃ φρενῶν, opp. ὀργῇ, ib. 524; γνώμης ξύνεσις Th. 1.75; γνώμης μᾶλλον ἐφόδῳ ἢ ἰσχύος Id. 3.11; ταῖς γ. καὶ τοῖς σώμασι σφάλλεσθαι X. Cyr. 1.3.10, cf. Th. 1.70; γνώμῃ, opp. τύχῃ, σωφρονοῦντες Isoc. 3.47; γνώμης ἅπτεσθαι affect the head, of wine or fever, Hp. Acut. 63, Fract. 11; γνώμην ἔχειν understand, S. El. 214 (lyr.), Ar. Ach. 396; πάντων γ. ἴσχειν S. Ph. 837 (lyr.); προσέχειν γνώμην give heed, attend, δεῦρο τὴν γ. προσίσχετε Eup. 37; πρὸς ἕτερον γνώμην ἔχειν Aeschin. 3.192; to be on one’s guard, Th. 1.95; δηλοῦν τὴν γ. ἔν τινι to show one’s wit in.., Id. 3.37; ἐν γνώμῃ τι παραστῆσαι D. 4.17; ἀπὸ γνώμης φέρειν ψῆφον δικαίαν with a good conscience, A. Eu. 674; but οὐκ ἀπὸ γ. λέγεις not without judgement, with good sense, S. Tr. 389; ἄτερ γνώμης A. Pr. 456; ἄνευ γ. S. OC 594; γνώμῃ κολάζειν with good reason, X. An. 2.6.10; γνώμῃ τῇ ἀρίστῃ (sc. κρίνειν or δικάζειν) to the best of one’s judgement, in the dicasts’ oath, Arist. Rh. 1375a29; ἡ καλουμένη γ. τοῦ ἐπιεικοῦς κρίσις ὀρθή Id. EN 1143a19; so περὶ ὧν ἂν νόμοι μὴ ὦσι, γνώμῃ τῇ δικαιοτάτῃ κρινεῖν D. 20.118; γ. τῇ δ. δικάσειν ὀμωμόκασιν Id. 23.96, cf. 39.40; τῇ δ. γ. Arist. Pol. 1287a26; ὅστις γνώμῃ μὴ καθαρεύει has not a clear conscience, Ar. Ra. 355.

2. will, disposition, inclination, εὐσεβεῖ γνώμᾳ Pi. O. 3.41; γ. Διός A. Pr. 1003; ἐν γνώμῃ γεγονέναι τινί to stand high in his favour, Hdt. 6.37; πάσῃ τῇ γ. with all one’s zeal, Th. 6.45; τίνα αὐτοὺς οἴεσθε γ. ἕξειν περὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν And. 1.104; γ. ἔ. περί τινα Lys. 10.21; πρὸς τοὺς Ἀθηναίους τὴν γ. ἔχειν to be inclined towards.., Th. 5.44; ἐμπιμπλάναι τὴν γ. τινός satisfy his wishes, X. An. 1.7.8, cf. HG 6.1.15 (pl.); ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ γνώμης on his own initiative, Th. 4.68; ἐκ μιᾶς γ. of one accord, with one consent, D. 10.59; μιᾷ γνώμῃ Th. 1.122, 6.17; διὰ μιᾶς γ. γίγνεσθαι Isoc. 4.139; κατὰ γνώμην according to one’s mind or wishes, ὅταν τἀκεῖ θῶ κατὰ γνώμην ἐμήν E. Andr. 737; ἄν τι μὴ κατὰ γ. ἐκβῇ D. 1.16: in pl., φίλιαι γνῶμαι friendly sentiments, Hdt. 9.4.

III judgement, opinion, βροτῶν γ. Parm. 8.61; ταύτῃ.. τῇ γνώμῃ πλεῖστός εἰμι

1 in cline mostly to this view, Hdt. 7.220 (s. v.l.); also ταύτῃ πλεῖστος τὴν γνώμην εἰμί Id. 1.120; ἡ πλείστη γ. ἐστί τινι Id. 5.126; τλέον φέρει ἡ γ. τινί Id. 8.100; τὸ πλεῖστον τῆς γ. εἶχεν.. προσμεῖξαι Th. 3.31; γνώμην τίθεσθαι Hdt. 3.80; οὕτως τὴν γ. ἔχειν to be of this opinion, Th. 7.15, cf. X. Cyr. 6.2.8, Ar. Nu. 157; εἴ τινι γ. τοιαύτη παρειστήκει περὶ ἐμοῦ And. 1.54; τὴν αὐτὴν γ. ἔχειν Th. 2.55; τῆς αὐτῆς γ. εἶναι, ἔχεσθαι, Id. 1.113, 140; ὁ αὐτὸς εἰμὶ τῇ γ. Id. 3.38; κατὰ γ. τὴν ἐμήν in my judgement or opinion, Hdt. 2.26, 5.3; ellipt., κατά γε τὴν ἐμήν Ar. Ec. 153, cf. Plb. 18.1.18, D.H. Isoc. 3: abs., γνώμην ἐμήν Ar. V. 983, Pax 232; παρὰ γνώμην τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ἐγένετο contrary to general opinion, Th. 4.40; but παρὰ γ. κινδυνευταί reckless venturers, Id. 1.70, cf. 4.19; εἰπὲ μὴ παρὰ γ. ἐμοί either contrary to my wish, or contrary to your true opinion, A. Ag. 931, cf. Supp. 454: freq. of opinions delivered publicly, ἑστάναι πρὸς τὴν γ. τινός Th. 4.56; Θεμιστοκλέους γνώμῃ by the advice of Th., Id. 1.90, 93; γνώμην ἀποφαίνειν deliver an opinion, Hdt. 1.40; ἀποδείκνυσθαι ib. 207; ἐκφαίνειν Id. 5.36; τίθεσθαι S. Ph. 1448 (anap.), Ar. Ec. 658; ἀποφαίνεσθαι E. Supp. 336; ποιεῖσθαι περί τινων Th. 3.36; γνώμας κατέθεντο have made up their minds, Parm. 8.53. verdict, ἡ τοῦ δικαστοῦ γ. IG 4.364 (Corinth, iv A. D.), cf. 685.32 (pl., Cret., ii B. C.).

2. proposition, motion, γνώμην εἰσφέρειν Hdt. 3.80, 81; εἰπεῖν Th. 8.68, etc.; (but γνώμας προτιθέναι hold a debate, Th. 3.36); γνῶμαι τρεῖς προεκέατο Hdt. 3.83: freq. in Inscrr., resolution, IG 12.118.28, etc.; γ. στρατηγῶν ib.22.27; Κλεισόφου καὶ συμπρυτάνεων ib.1; ἡ ἐκφερομένη γ. ib.1051c26; γνώμην νικᾶν carry a motion, Ar. V. 594, Nu. 432; κρατεῖν τῇ γ. Plu. Cor. 17.
3. γνῶμαι, αἱ, practical maxims, Heraclit. 78, S. Aj. 1091, X. Mem. 4.2.9, Arist. Rh. 1395a11 (sg., 1394a22).
4. in pl., fancies, illusions, S. Aj. 52.
5. intention, purpose, resolve, ἀπὸ τοιᾶσδε γνώμης with some such purpose as this, Th. 3.92; γνώμην ποιεῖ σθαι, c. inf., propose to do, Id. 1.128; κατὰ γνώμην of set purpose, D.H. 6.81 (so also γνώμης Lib. Or. 33.13, 50.12); τίνα ἔχουσα γνώμην; with what purpose? Hdt. 3.119; οἶδα δ’ οὐ γνώμῃ τίνι; with what intent? S. OT 527, cf. Aj. 448; ἡ ξύμπασα γ. τῶν λεχθέντων the general purport.., Th. 1.22; ἦν τοῦ τείχους ἡ γνώμη.., ἵνα.. the purpose of it was.., that.., Id. 8.90.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
γνώμη, γνώμης, ἡ (from γινώσκω);

1. the faculty of knowing, mind, reason.
2. that which is thought or known, one’s mind;
   a. view, judgment, opinion: 1 Corinthians 1:10; Revelation 17:13.
   b. mind concerning what ought to be done, aa. by oneself, resolve, purpose, intention: ἐγένετο γνώμη (T Tr WH γνώμης, see γίνομαι 5 e. a.) τοῦ ὑποστρέφειν, Acts 20:3 (Buttmann, 268 (230)). bb. by others, judgment, advice: διδόναι γνώμην, 1 Corinthians 7:25 (40); 2 Corinthians 8:10. cc. decree: Revelation 17:17; χωρίς τῆς σής γνώμης, without thy consent, Philemon 1:14. (In the same senses in Greek writings; (cf. Schmidt, chapter 13, 9; Meyer on 1 Corinthians 1:10).)

Question 231

ἐνδείκνυμι

Answer 231

to show, display

to manifest, display, Rom. 9:17, 22; Heb. 6:10; to give outward proof of, Rom. 2:15; to display a certain bearing towards a person; hence, to perpetrate openly, 2 Tim. 4:14*
-, ἐνέδειξα, -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to point out
to show, demonstrate, prove, whether by arguments or by acts
to manifest, display, put forth

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐνδείκ-νῡμι or ἐνδεικ-ύω,

fut. -δείξω,

I

1. mark, point out, τι Pi. O. 7.58; πρίν γ’ ἂν ἐνδείξω τί δρῶ S. OC 48; ἐ. τῷ δικαστηρίῳ τἀδικήματα Antipho 6.37, etc.; indicate, τοὺς καιρούς Gal. 1.204: c. part., show that a thing is, Pl. Plt. 278b; also ἑκάστοις ἐ. τὰ ἔργα ἀποτελεῖν ib. 308e.
2. law-term, inform against, τινά Id. Ap. 32b: abs., Isoc. 18.20; ἐ. ταῖς ἀρχαῖς Pl. Lg. 856c, cf. And. 1.8, etc.; τῷ φήναντι ἢ ἐνδείξαντι IG 22.1128.18; ἐ. πρὸς τοὺς μαστῆρας ib.12(7).62.53 (Amorgos, iv B. C.): — Med., Plu. Sol. 24: — freq. in Pass., κακοῦργος ἐνδεδειγμένος Antipho 5.9; ἐνδειχθείς Lys. 6.15, OGI 669.45 (Egypt, i A.D.); ἐνδειχθέντα δικάζειν ὀφείλοντα τῷ δημοσίῳ D. 21.182.
3. exhibit, display, ὑπερήφανον αἰχμάν A. Pr. 406 (lyr.).
4. Med., declare the possession of goods to fiscal authorities, PRLaws 54.10 (iii B.C.).

II Med.,

1. show forth oneself or what is one’s own, once in Hom., Πηλεΐδῃ ἐνδείξομαι I will declare myself to Achilles, Il. 19.83; ἐνδεικνύμενοι τὴν ἑαυτῶν γνώμην Hdt. 8.141; ἐ. περί τινος Plb. 4.28.4; τι μετ’ ἀποδείξεως Id. 5.16.7.
2. show, make plain, c. part., πῶς δ’ ἂν.. μᾶλλον ἐνδείξαιτό τις πόσιν προτιμῶσ’..; E. Alc. 154, cf. Ba. 47, X. Cyr. 1.6.10; τὴν δύναμιν κρείττω οὖσαν ἐ. D. 21.66; also ἐ. ὅτι.. Th. 8.82, Pl. Ap. 23b, X. Cyr. 8.3.21; ἐ. ὁποῖα τούτων ἀληθῆ Pl. Tht. 158e: — Pass., ἐνδεδεῖχθαι τὸ βούλεσθαι D. 8.12. prove, demonstrate, PMagd. 3.10 (iii B.C.), Phld. Sign. 11, al.
3. c. acc. rei, display, exhibit, τὸ εὔψυχον Th. 4.126; εὔνοιάν τινα Ar. Pl. 785; τῷ σώματι τὴν εὔνοιαν, οὐ Χρήμας ιν οὐδὲ λόγοις, ἐνεδείξατο τῇ πατρίδι D. 21.145; τύπῳ τἀληθὲς ἐ. Arist. EN 1094b20; of a name, denote, Pl. Cra. 394e.
4. ἐνδείκνυσθαί τινι display oneself to one, make a set at him, court him, D. 19.113, Aeschin. 3.217, etc.; ἐνδεικνύμενοι καὶ ὑπερκολακεύοντές τινα D. 19.160; make a show, show off, τινί Pl. Prt. 317c, Arist. Oec. 1352b13.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐνδείκνυμι: to point out (Latinindicare; German anzeigen), from Pindar down; in middle first in Homer; in the N. T. only in the middle: (present ἐνδεικνυμαι); 1 aorist ἐνεδειξαμην; properly, to show oneself in something, show something in oneself (cf. Buttmann, 192 (166));

1. to show, demonstrate, prove, whether by arguments or by acts: τί, Romans 9:22 (joined with γνωρίσαι); Ephesians 2:7; Titus 2:10; Titus 3:2; Hebrews 6:11; with two accusatives, the one of the object, the other of the predicate, Romans 2:15; τί ἐν τίνι, the dative of the person, Romans 9:17 (from Exodus 9:16 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 254 (238))); 1 Timothy 1:16; τί εἰς τό ὄνομα τίνος, Hebrews 6:10; τήν ἔνδειξιν ἐνδικνυσθαι (as in Plato, legg. 12, p. 966 b.; cf. Winer’s Grammar, 225 (211)); εἰς τινα, 2 Corinthians 8:24.
2. to manifest, display, put forth: τίνι (dative of person) κακά, 2 Timothy 4:14; Genesis 50:15, 17.

Question 232

ἐπιδείκνυμι

Answer 232

to show, call attention to; to prove, point out

to exhibit, Mt. 16:1; Acts 9:39; to show, Mt. 22:19; Lk. 17:14; to point out, Mt. 24:1; to demonstrate, prove, Acts 18:28; Heb. 6:17*
ἐπιδείξω, ἐπέδειξα, -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to exhibit, show
to bring forth to view, to show
furnish to be looked at, produce what may looked at
to display something belonging to one’s self
to prove, demonstrate, set forth to be known and acknowledged

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπιδείκνυμι; 1 aorist ἐπέδειξα; (present middle ἐπιδεικνυμαι); to exhibit, show (as though for exposition or examination (Schmidt, chapter 127, 5); from Pindar, Herodotus down.);

a. to bring forth to view: τί, Matthew 22:19; and Luke 20:24 Rec.; τί τίνι, Luke 24:40 R G; ἑαυτόν τίνι, Luke 17:14; to show i. e. bid to look at, τί τίνι, Matthew 24:1; to show i. e. furnish to be looked at, produce what may be looked at: σημεῖον, Matthew 16:1; Middle with the accusative of the thing, to display something belonging to oneself: χιτῶνας, the tunics as their own, Acts 9:39 (see Meyer).
b. to prove, demonstrate, set forth to be known and acknowledged: Hebrews 6:17; followed by the accusative and the infinitive Acts 18:28.

Question 233

ὑποδείκνυμι

Answer 233

to show, indicate, warn

also spelled ὑποδεικνύω, to indicate, Acts 20:35; to intimate, suggest, show, prove, Mt. 3:7; Lk. 3:7; 6:47; 12:5; Acts 9:16*

ὑποδείξω, ὑπέδειξα, -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to show by placing under (i.e. before) the eyes
to show by words and arguments, i.e. to teach
to show by make known future things

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑποδείκ-νῡμι and ὑποδεικ-νύω

(v. infr.),

show, indicate, οὔτοι.. πάντα θεοὶ θνητοῖσ’ ὑπέδειξαν Xenoph. 18.1; πολλοῖσι ὑποδέξας (Ion. aor.) ὄλβον ὁ θεός having given a glimpse of happiness, Hdt. 1.32; ἄλλο τι τῶν χρησίμων ὑ. show any other good symptom, Hp. Coac. 483; ὑποδεικνύεις μὲν ἦθος ἀστεῖον Nicom.Com. 1.1; ὑ. ἐλπίδας Plb. 2.70.7, etc.; τὰς χώρας ὑποδείκνυμεν we indicate, cite the passages, Phld. Rh. 1.98 S.; ὑ. τινὰ τοῖς ἀνδράσι introduce, Plu. 2.710c.

2. abs., indicate one’s will, intimate, οἱ θεοὶ οὕτως ὑποδεικνύουσι X. Mem. 4.3.13, cf. An. 5.7.12; warn, τίς ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυγεῖν; Matthew 3:7.
3. lay an information, τῷ βασιλεῖ περί τινος LXX To. 1.19; ὑποδέδειχέν σε τὰ σύμβολα ἀπεστράφθαι he has reported that.., BGU 1755.4 (i B. C.): c. acc., report, σοι τὴν τῆς οἰκίας σου διάθεσιν ib. 1881.3 (i B. C.): also ὑπόδειξον αὐτῷ ὅτι ἀναβαίνω PSI 9.1079.5 (i B. C.): — Pass., to be brought to the notice of a court, produced in evidence, PTeb. 27.78 (ii B. C.), etc.

II show by tracing out, mark out, διώρυχας Hdt. 1.189; Ὅμηρος καὶ τὰ τῆς κωμῳδίας σχήματα.. ὑπέδειξε Arist. Po. 1448b37, cf. Rh. 1404b25, Ath. 41.2: abs., set a pattern or example, τοῦ διδασκάλου πονηρῶς τι ὑποδεικνύοντος X. Oec. 12.18; οὐχ οἷόν τε μὴ καλῶς ὑποδεικνύντος καλῶς μιμεῖσθαι unless some one sets a good example, Arist. Oec. 1345a9.

2. generally, teach, indicate, ὑ. αὐτοῖς οἵους εἶναι χρὴ.. Isoc. 3.57, cf. 5.111, Ephesians 2:11; ὡς ἔμπροσθεν ὑπεδείξαμεν Sor. 1.16, cf. 54, al., Ael. Tact. 28.1.
3. make a show of, pretend to, ἀρετήν Th. 4.86, cf. Plb. 2.47.10.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑποδείκνυμι: future ὑποδείξω; 1 aorist ὑπέδειξα; from Herodotus and Thucydides down; the Sept. several times for הִגִּיד;

1. properly, to show by placing under (i. e. before) the eyes: ὑπέδειξεν αὐτοῖς τόν πλοῦτον αὐτοῦ, Esther 5:11; add, Sir. 49:8; (others give ὑπό in this compound the force of ‘privily’; but cf. Fritzsche on Matthew, p. 126).
2. to show by words and arguments, i. e. to teach (for הורָה, 2 Chronicles 15:3) (A. V. frequently, to warn): τίνι, followed by an infinitive of the thing, Matthew 3:7; Luke 3:7; to teach by the use of a figure, τίνι, followed by indirect discourse, Luke 6:47; Luke 12:5; to show or teach by one’s example, followed by ὅτι, Acts 20:35; to allow i. e. make known (future things), followed by indirect discourse Acts 9:16.

Question 234

ὑπόδειγμα, ατος, τό

Answer 234

example, representation, illustration, imitation, model, pattern, copy, sign,

a token, intimation; an example, model, proposed for imitation or admonition, Jn. 13:15; Heb. 4:11; Jas. 5:10; 2 Pet. 2:6; a copy, Heb. 8:5; 9:23*

Thayer's Definition
a sign suggestive of anything, delineation of a thing, representation, figure, copy
an example: for imitation
of the thing to be imitated
for a warning, of a thing to be shunned

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑπόδειγ-μα, ατος, τό, sign, token, indication, v. l. in X. Eq. 2.2 (pl.); φιλαγαθίας IG 22.1011.81.

2. illustration, picture showing how something is to be done, Apollon.Cit. 2, 3.

II pattern, Plb. 3.17.8; μετανοίας LXX Si. 44.16, cf. 2 Maccabees 6:28; ὑ. καὶ σκιά Hebrews 8:5; cf. Hebrews 9:23; τὸ ὑ. τοῦ οἴκου LXX Ezekiel 42:15 : in Inscrr., πρὸς ὑπόδειγμα ἀρετῆς CIG 2769,2774,2775d (add.), al. (Aphrodisias); καλὸν ὑ. τῆς ἰδίας προαιρέσεως καταβαλλόμενος BMus.Inscr. 925b22 (Branchidae, i B. C.): but also ὑ. ἀπειθίας BGU 747 ii 14 (ii A. D.); ὑ. μελλόντων ἀσεβεῖν 2 Peter 2:6.

III example, instance, AP 6.342, Ph. Bel. 69.10, D.H. Comp. 17, Hp. 17, Herm. in Phdr. p.185 A.; ὑποδείγματος χάριν Nicom. Ar. 1.8; specimen, BGU 1141.43 (i B. C.), etc.: pl., Phld. Rh. 1.8 S., al.: — rejected as less correct than παράδειγμα by the Atticists, Phryn. 4.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑπόδειγμα, ὑποδειγματος, τό (ὑποδείκνυμι, which see), a word rejected by the Atticists, and for which the earlier writers used παράδειγμα; see Lob. ad Phryn., p. 12; (Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 62). It is used by Xenophon, r. eq. 2, 2, and among subsequent writings by Polybius, Philo, Josephus, Appian, Plutarch, Herodian, others; cf. Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebrews 2:1, p. 554;

a. a sign suggestive of anything, delineation of a thing, representation, figure, copy: joined with σκιά Hebrews 8:5; with a genitive of the thing represented, Hebrews 9:23.
b. an example: for imitation, διδόναι τίνι, John 13:15; καταλελοιπεναι, 2 Macc. 6:28; with a genitive of the thing to be imitated, James 5:10 (Sir. 44:16; 2 Macc. 6:31); for warning: with a genitive of the thing to be shunned, τῆς ἀπειθείας, Hebrews 4:11; with a genitive of the person to be warned, 2 Peter 2:6 (τούς Ρ᾽ομαιους … εἰς ὑπόδειγμα τῶν ἄλλων ἐθνῶν καταφλέξειν τήν ἱεράν πόλιν, Josephus, b. j. 2, 16, 4).

Question 235

ἐκδέχομαι

Answer 235

to wait for, expect, look forward to

pr. to receive from another; to expect, look for, Acts 17:16; to wait for, to wait, 1 Cor. 11:33; 16:11; Heb. 11:10; 10:13; Jas. 5:7*

(ἐξεδεχόμην), -, -, -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to receive, accept
to look for, expect, wait for, await

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐκδέχομαι,

Ion. ἐκδέκ-, Ephesians 3:1-21 pl. ἐκδέχαται Tryph. 197: fut. ἐκδερμᾰτ-δέξομαι: — Pass. (v. infr. 1.6).

I mostly of persons,

1 take or receive from another, οἵ οἱ σάκος ἐξεδέχοντο Il. 13.710; Ὀρέστην ἐξεδεξάμην πατρί A. Ch. 762; of a beacon-fire, τρίτον Ἀθῷον αἶπος..ἐξεδέξατο Id. Ag. 285; ἐ. τὴν αἰτίαν take it on oneself, D. 19.37.

2. of a successor, ἐ. τὴν βασιληΐην Hdt. 1.26, etc.: freq. with acc. omitted, ἐξεδέξατο Σαδυάττης (sc. τὴν βασιληΐην) S. succeeded, ib.16, cf. 103,al.; παῖς παρὰ πατρὸς ἐκδεκόμενος τὴν ἀρχήν, [τὴν τέχνην], Id. 1.7,2.166; so ἐκδεξάμενοι (sc. τὴν μάχην) Id. 7.211.
3. take up the argument, ὥσπερ σφαῖραν ἐ. τὸν λόγον Pl. Euthd. 277b; ἐκδεξάμενος (sc. τὸν λόγον) εἰπεῖν Id. Smp. 189a; ὁ μὲν πρῶτος εἰπὼν..ὁ δ’ ἐκδεξάμενος D. 18.21.
4. wait for, expect, κεῖνον ἐνθάδ’ ἐ. S. Ph. 123; ἐλέφαντας Plb. 3.45.6; ἀλλήλους 1 Corinthians 11:33; ἐ. μεθ’ ἡσυχίας ἕως.. D.H. 6.67; πότε.. Tryph.l.c.: abs., wait, ἕως.. POxy. 1673.8 (ii A.D.).
5. take or understand in a certain sense, οὕτω δὴ τὴν ἀσωτίαν ἐκδεχόμεθα Arist. EN 1120a3; τοὺς λόγους Plb. 10.18.12; πρὸς τὸ συμφέρον D.S. 14.56.
6. entertain, μεγαλοπρεπέστερον ἐγδεχθῆναι PTeb. 33.7 (ii B.C.).
7. to be surety for, τινά PSI 4.349 (iii B.C.), LXX Genesis 43:9.

II

1. of events, await, τοὺς Σκύθας.. ἐξεδέξατο οὐκ ἐλάσσων πόνος Hdt. 4.1; ἐ. [ αὐτοὺς ] περίοδος τῆς λίμνης μακρή Id. 1.185.
2. of contiguous countries, come next, ἀπὸ ταύτης (sc. τῆς Περσικῆς) ἐ. Ἀσσυρίη Id. 4.39, cf. 99, Peripl.M. Rubr. 27.
3. in Archit., support, καμάραν D.S. 18.26.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐκδέχομαι; imperfect ἐξεδεχομην; (ἐκ from some person or quarter);

1. to receive, accept ((Homer), Aeschylus, Herodotus, and following).
2. to look for, expect, wait for, await: τί, John 5:3 R L; Hebrews 11:10; James 5:7; τινα, Acts 17:16; 1 Corinthians 16:11; ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε wait for one another, namely, until each shall have received his food, 1 Corinthians 11:33, cf. 1 Corinthians 11:21; followed by ἕως etc. Hebrews 10:13; (absolutely, 1 Peter 3:20 Rec., but see Tdf.s note at the passage). Rarely with this meaning in secular authors, as Sophocles Phil. 123; Apollod. 1, 9, 27 § 3; ἕως ἄν γένηται τί, Dionysius Halicarnassus 6, 67. (Compare: ἀπεκδέχομαι. Cf. δέχομαι, at the end.)

Question 236

ἀπεκδέχομαι

Answer 236

wait eagerly for

to expect, wait, or look for, Rom. 8:19, 23, 25; 1 Cor. 1:7; Gal. 5:5; Phil. 3:20; Heb. 9:28
(ἀπεξεδεχόμην), -, -, -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
assiduously and patiently waiting for

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀπεκ-δέχομαι,

I expect anxiously, await eagerly, σωτῆρα Philippians 3:20; θάνατον Alciphr. 3.7; τὸ μέλλον Hld. 2.35, cf. S.E. M. 2.73.

II misunderstand, misinterpret, Hipparch. 1.6.11, al. understand a word from the context, A.D. Conj. 226.20.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀπεκδέχομαι; (imperfect ἀπεξεδεχομην); assiduously and patiently to wait for (cf. English wait it out): absolutely, 1 Peter 3:20 (Rec. ἐκδέχομαι); τί, Romans 8:19, 23, 25; 1 Corinthians 1:7; Galatians 5:5 (on this passage cf. ἐλπίς; at the end); with the accusative of a person, Christ in his return from heaven: Philippians 3:20; Hebrews 9:28. Cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opuscc., p. 155f; Winers De verb. comp. etc. Part iv., p. 14; (Ellicott on Galatians, the passage cited). (Scarcely found out of the N. T.; Heliodorus Aeth. 2, 35; 7, 23.)

Question 237

παραδέχομαι

Answer 237

to welcome, receive, accept

to accept, receive, admit, yield assent to, Mk. 4:20; Acts 15:4; 16:21; 22:18; 1 Tim. 5:19; in NT to receive or embrace with favor, approve, love, Heb. 12:6*
παραδέξομαι, παρεδεξάμην, -, -, παρεδέχθην

Thayer’s Definition
to receive, take up, take upon one’s self
to admit i.e. not to reject, to accept, receive
of a son: to acknowledge as one’s own

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παραδέχομαι,

Ion. παραδεκ-δέκομαι, fut. -ξομαι Pl. Tht. 155c: —

receive from another, σῆμα Il. 6.178; [ Γαῖα] σταγόνας παραδεξαμένη τίκτει θνητούς E. Fr. 839.4 (anap.); τὰ φερόμενα γράμματα X. Cyr. 8.6.17, etc.; of children, receive by inheritance, σοφώτατα νοήματα Pi. O. 7.72; τὴν ἀρχήν Hdt. 1.102; π. τὸν πόλεμον παρὰ τοῦ πατρός ib. 18; but μάχην π. take up and continue the battle, Id. 9.40; receive by way of rumour or tradition, π. φήμην Pl. Lg. 713c; ἀκοήν τινος Id. Ti. 23d; of magistrates or others, receive articles entered in an inventory, etc., IG 12.91.21, al., PHib. 1.32.4 (iii B. C.), etc.; of pupils, receive lessons from a master, τοὺς μετὰ πόνου.. παραδεχομένους Plu. Cat.Mi. 1. take over an office or function, BGU 1199.3, al. (i B. C.).

2. c. inf., π. τινὶ πράττειν τι take upon oneself or engage to another to do a thing, D. 58.38.
3. admit, εἰς τὴν πόλιν Pl. R. 394d, 399d, 605b; εἰς [τὴν οἰκίαν ] D. 40.2; εἰς τοὺς ἀγῶνας Aeschin. 1.178; admit to citizenship, τῶν περιοίκων τινάς Arist. Pol. 1303a7; admit as a pupil, Pl. Euthd. 304b; π. τὸ ἔθνος admit to friendly relations, Plb. 38.9.8.
4. admit, allow, τὴν ἀπαγωγήν Lys. 13.86, cf. Pl. Tht. 155c, Lg. 935d; π. σκῆψιν Hyp. Eux. 7; π. τὸν λόγον accept the definition, Pl. Chrm. 162e, cf. Arist. Cat. 4a28; recognize as correct, agree to, συντίμησιν BGU 1119.54 (i B. C.); τὸ δαπανηθέν PFay. 125.10 (ii A. D.).
5. signify, κτῆσιν A.D. Synt. 171.6.

II in later writers the aor. παρεδέχθην takes also a pass. sense, Luc. VH 2.21, Gloss.; ἀξιῶ παραδεχθῆναί τινα εἰς τοὺς ἐφήβους to be admitted, POxy. 477.24 (ii A. D.); also, to be credited as a set-off, BGU 831.15 (iii A. D.): so fut. -δεχθήσομαι PAmh. 2.86.13 (i A. D.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παραδέχομαι; future 3 person plural παραδέξονταί; deponent middle, but in Biblical and ecclesiastical Greek with 1 aorist passive παρεδεχθην (Acts 15:4 L T Tr WH; 2 Macc. 4:22; (cf. Buttmann, 51 (44));

1. in classical Greek from Homer down, properly, to receive, take up, take upon oneself. Hence,
2. to admit i. e. not to reject, to accept, receive: τόν λόγον, Mark 4:20; ἔθη, Acts 16:21; τήν μαρτυρίαν, Acts 22:18; κατηγορίαν, 1 Timothy 5:19 (τάς δοκιμους δραχμάς, Epictetus diss. 1, 7, 6); τινα, of a son, to acknowledge as one’s own (A. V. receiveth), Hebrews 12:6 (after Proverbs 3:12, where for רָצָה); of a delegate or messenger, to give due reception to, Acts 15:4 L T Tr WH. (Cf. δέχομαι, at the end.)

Question 238

προσδέχομαι

Answer 238

to receive, welcome, accept; to wait for, anticipate

to receive, accept; to receive, admit, grant access to, Lk. 15:2; to receive, admit, accept, and with οὐ, to reject, Heb. 11:35; to submit to, Heb. 10:34; to receive kindly, as a guest, entertain, Rom. 16:2; to receive, admit, as a hope, Acts 24:15; to look or wait for, expect, await, Mk. 15:43; Lk. 2:25

Thayer’s Definition
to receive to one’s self, to admit, to give access to one’s self
to admit one, receive one into intercourse and companionship
to receive one (coming from some place)
to accept (not to reject) a thing offered
to expect: the fulfilment of promises

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
προσδέχομαι,

Ion. προσδέκομαι: used by Hom. only in Ep. pres. part. ποτιδέγμενος (v. infr. 111 ): aor. 1 προσεδέχθην in pass. sense, Arist. Pr. 956b25, Plb. 4.33.9, D.S. 15.70: — receive favourably, accept, τὸ ἐκ Δελφῶν [χρηστήριον ] Hdt. 1.48, cf. SIG 557.11 ( Magn. Mae., iii B.C. ), etc.; π. συμμαχίαν X. HG 7.4.2; τὴν φιλίαν, τὰς διαλύσεις, Plb. 1.16.8, 1.17.1; also π. ἑκάστους ἐπὶ . . ὁμολογίαις Id. 3.18.7; receive hospitably, S. OT 1428, E. Ph. 1706; ζῶνθ’ Ἡρακλῆ S. Tr. 233 .

II admit, ἐς τὴν πόλιν Th. 2.12; admit into one’s presence, of a king, X. Cyr. 7.5.37, HG 1.5.9; of a demos receiving foreign emissaries, SIG 561.7 (Chalcis, found at Magn. Mae., iii B.C. ).

2. admit to citizenship, Pl. Lg. 708a, D. 57.59; so ποία δὲ χέρνιψ φρατέρων προσδέξεται; A. Eu. 656; τοὺς οἰκέτας π. εἰς τὸ πολίτευμα IG 9(2).517.32 (Epist. Philippi, Larissa, iii B.C. ); π. τινὰ εἰς τοὺς ἐφήβους Sammelb. 7333.40 (Alexandria, ii A.D. ); ὁ προσδεχθησόμενος εἰς τὴν στιβάδα IG 22.1368.52; ὅταν τις . . προσδεχθῇ εἴς τι τῶν κατὰ τὸ σῶμα ἀθλημάτων Arist. l.c.
3. of the female, ἡ ἵππος π. τὸν ὄνον Id. HA 577b15, cf. 575b17, Hdt. 2.121 . έ .
4. admit an argument, π. τὸ ψεῦδος, λόγον ἀληθῆ, Pl. R. 485c, 561b, cf. SIG 685.130 ( Magn. Mae., ii B.C. ); π. πρόφασιν accept an excuse, PTeb. 27.82 (ii B.C.) .
5. admit, be capable of, μήτε γένεσιν μήτε ὄλεθρον Pl. Phlb. 15b; φθοράν Id. Ti. 52a .
6. undertake, προσδέχεσθαι μάλα χρὴ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἰήματα Hp. Art. 69; take a liability upon oneself, guarantee, τὸ ἀνάλωμα IG 5(1).501, 555b, al. ( Sparta ); credit a sum to a person or an account, PHib. 1.58 (iii B.C.), PSI 4.372.9 (iii B.C.), PCair.Zen. 306.11, 355.69, al. (iii B.C.), Ostr. 1089 (ii B.C.), Ostr.Bodl. i 256 (ii B.C.), etc.

III await, expect, the only sense in Hom., in Ep. part. ποτιδέγμενος waiting for or expecting, δῶρον Od. 2.186; σὴν ὁρμήν ib. 403; σὸν μῦθον 7.161; ἡμέας 9.545; λαῶν ὀτρυντύν Il. 19.234; ἀγγελίην ib. 336; so later, προσδεκομένους τοιοῦτον οὐδέν Hdt. 3.146, cf. S. Tr. 15, E. Alc. 131 (lyr.), etc.; παρὰ ἃ προσεδέχετο Th. 4.19; τῷ Νικίᾳ προσδεχομένῳ ἦν τὰ παρὰ τῶν Ἐγεσταίων was according to his expectation, Id. 6.46; π. τινός τι expect anything from anybody, Antipho Soph. 10: c. acc. et inf. fut., οὐδὲν πάντως προσεδέκοντο . . τὸν στόλον ὁρμήσεσθαι Hdt. 5.34, cf. 6.100, 7.156, al., Th. 4.9; πολεμίους παρέσεσθαι X. Cyr. 4.5.22: c. part. fut., τοῦτον π. ἐπαναστησόμενον Hdt. 1.89; πανταχόθεν π. τοὺς πολεμίους await them, Plb. 2.69.6, etc.

2. wait, ἥατ’ ἐνὶ μεγάροις ποτιδέγμεναι Il. 2.137, cf. 9.628, Od. 2.205, etc.; π. ὁππότ’ ἄρ’ ἔλθοι Il. 7.415; π. εἰ c. opt., Od. 23.91 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
προσδέχομαι; deponent middle; imperfect προσεδεχόμην; 1 aorist προσεδεξαμην;

1. as in Greek writings from Aeschylus and Herodotus down, “to receive to oneself, to admit, to give access to oneself’: τινα, to admit one, receive into contact and companionship, τούς ἁμαρτωλούς, Luke 15:2; to receive one (coming from some place), Romans 16:2; Philippians 2:29 (1 Chronicles 12:18); τί, to accept (not to reject) a thing offered: οὐ προσδεξάμενοι, to reject, Hebrews 11:35; προσδέχονται ἐλπίδα, to admit (accept) hope, i. e. not to repudiate but to entertain, embrace, its substance, Acts 24:15 (others refer this to the next head (R. V. text look for)); not to shun, to bear, an impending evil (A. V. took the spoiling etc.), Hebrews 10:34.
2. as from Homer down, to expect (A. V. look for, trait for): τινα, Luke 12:36; τί, Mark 15:43; Luke 2:25, 38; Luke 23:51; (Acts 23:21); Titus 2:13; Jude 1:21; τάς ἐπαγγελίας, the fulfilment of the promises, Hebrews 11:13 Lachmann (Cf. δέχομαι, at the endl

Question 239

εὐπρόσδεκτος, ον

Answer 239

well received, acceptable, favorable

acceptable, grateful, pleasing, Rom. 15:16, 31; 2 Cor. 6:2; 8:12; 1 Pet. 2:5; in NT gracious*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
εὐπρόσ-δεκτος, ον,

acceptable, Romans 15:16; Romans 15:31; τοῖς πολλοῖς Plu. 2.801c; εὐχή, θυσία, Porph. Mar 24, Sch. Ar. Pax 1054; ὥσπερ οὐκ εὐ. (sc. ὄν) c. inf., Phld. Rh.Supp. p.7S.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
εὐπρόσδεκτος, ἐυπροσδεκτον (εὖ and προσδέχομαι), well-received, accepted, acceptable: Romans 15:16; 2 Corinthians 6:2; 2 Corinthians 8:12; τίνι, Romans 15:31; 1 Peter 2:5. (Plutarch, praecept. rei publ. ger. c. 4, 17, p. 801 c.; ecclesiastical writings.)

Question 240

διάκονος, -ου, ὁ - ἡ

Answer 240

servant, minister, a person who renders service and help to others, in some contexts with an implication of lower status; also transliterated as deacon, a trusted officer of helps and service in the local church

one who renders service, to another; an attendant, servant, Mt. 20:26; 22:13; Jn. 2:5, 9; one who executes a commission, a deputy, Rom. 13:4; Χριστοῦ, Θεοῦ, ἐν κυριω, etc. a commissioned minister or preacher of the Gospel, 1 Cor. 3:5; 2 Cor. 6:4; a minister charged with an announcement or sentence, 2 Cor. 3:6; Gal. 2:17; Col. 1:23; a minister charged with a significant characteristic, Rom. 15:8; a servitor, devoted follower, Jn. 12:26; a deacon or deaconess, whose official duty was to superintend the alms of the Church, with other kindred services, Rom. 16:1; Phil. 1:1; 1 Tim. 3:8, 12

Thayer’s Definition
one who executes the commands of another, esp. of a master, a servant, attendant, minister
the servant of a king
a deacon, one who, by virtue of the office assigned to him by the church, cares for the poor and has charge of and distributes the money collected for their use
a waiter, one who serves food and drink

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
διάκονος [ᾱ ],

Ion. διήκονος, ὁ, later διάκων (q.v.): —

I

1. servant, Hdt. 4.71, 72, PFlor. 121.3 (iii A.D.), etc.; messenger, A. Pr. 942, S. Ph. 497; ὄρνιθα καὶ κήρυκα καὶ δ. Id. Fr. 133: — as fem., Ar. Ec. 1116, D. 24.197.
2. attendant or official in a temple or religious guild, Inscr.Magn. 109,217, IG 9(1).486 (Acarnania, ii/i B.C.), 4.774.12 (Troezen, iii B.C.): fem., CIG 3037 (Metropolis in Lydia): — esp. in the Christian church, deacon, 1 Timothy 3:8, etc., POxy. 1162.3 (iv A.D.): fem., deaconess, Romans 16:1.

II as Adj., servile, menial, ἐπιστήμη Pl. Plt. 290c: irreg. Comp. διᾱκονέστερος Epich. 159 Ahr. (Cf. ἐγ-κονέω, ἀ-κονιτί.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διάκονος, διακονου, ὁ, ἡ (of uncertain origin, but by no means, as was formerly thought, compounded of διά and κόνις, so as to mean, properly, ‘raising dust by hastening’; cf. ἐγκόνειν; for the alpha in the preposition διά is short, in διάκονος, long. Alexander Buttmann (1873) Lexil. i., p. 218ff (English translation, p. 231f) thinks it is derived from the obsolete διάκω equivalent to διήκω (allied with διώκω; cf. Vanicek, p. 363)); one who executes the commands of another, especially of a master; a sergeant, attendant, minister;

1. universally: of the servant of a king, Matthew 22:13; with the genitive of the person served, Matthew 20:26; Matthew 23:11; Mark 9:35; Mark 10:43 (in which passage it is used figuratively of those who advance others’ interests even at the sacrifice of their own); τῆς ἐκκλησίας, of one who does what promotes the welfare and prosperity of the church, Colossians 1:25; διάκονοι τοῦ Θεοῦ, those through whom God carries on his administration on earth, as magistrates, Romans 13:4; teachers of the Christian religion, 1 Corinthians 3:5; 2 Corinthians 6:4; 1 Thessalonians 3:2 R T Tr WH text L marginal reading; the same are called διάκονοι (τοῦ) Χριστοῦ, 2 Corinthians 11:23; Colossians 1:7; 1 Timothy 4:6; ἐν κυρίῳ, in the cause of the Lord, Colossians 4:7; (Ephesians 6:21); ὁ διάκονος μου, my follower, John 12:26; τοῦ Σατανᾶ, whom Satan uses as a servant, 2 Corinthians 11:15; (ἁμαρτίας, Galatians 2:17); διάκονος περιτομῆς (abstract for concrete), of Christ, who labored for the salvation of the circumcised, i. e. the Jews, Romans 15:8; with the genitive of the thing to which service is rendered, i. e. to which one is devoted: καινῆς διαθήκης, 2 Corinthians 3:6; τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, Ephesians 3:7; Colossians 1:23; δικαιοσύνης, 2 Corinthians 11:15.
2. a deacon, one who, by virtue of the office assigned him by the church, cares for the poor and has charge of and distributes the money collected for their use (cf. BB. DD., Dict. of Christ. Antiq., Schaff-Herzog under the word ; Lightfoot’s Commentary on Philippians, dissert. i. § i.; Julius Muller, Dogmatische Abhandlungen, p. 560ff): Philippians 1:1; 1 Timothy 3:8, 12, cf. Acts 6:3ff; ἡ διάκονος, a deaconess (ministra, Pliny, epistles 10, 97), a woman to whom the care of either poor or sick women was entrusted, Romans 16:1 (cf. Dictionaries as above, under the word ; Lightfoot as above, p. 191; B. D. under the word ).
3. a waiter, one who serves food and drink: John 2:5, 9, as in Xenophon, mem. 1, 5, 2; Hier. 3, 11 (4, 2); Polybius 31, 4, 5; Lucian, de merced. cond. § 26; Athen. 7, p. 291 a.; 10, 420 e.; see διακονέω, 2 and διακονία, 5; (also Wetstein (1752) on Matthew 4:11). [SYNONYMS: διάκονος, δοῦλος, θεράπων, ὑπηρέτης: “διάκονος represents the servant in his activity for the work; not in his relation, either servile, as that of the δοῦλος, or more voluntary, as in the case of the θεράπων, to a person” Trench; yet cf. e. g. Romans 13:4; 2 Corinthians 6:4 etc.). δοῦλος opposed to ἐλεύθερος, and correlate to δεσπότης or κύριος, denotes a bondman, one who sustains a permanent servile relation to another. θεράπων is the voluntary performer of services, whether as a freeman or a slave; it is a nobler, tenderer word than δοῦλος. ὑπηρέτης according to its etymol. suggests subordination. Cf. Trench, § ix.; B. D. under the word ; Meyer on Ephesians 3:7; Schmidt, chapter 164.]

Question 241

δικαίως

Answer 241

justly, uprightly

Thayer’s Definition
just, agreeably to right
properly, as is right
uprightly, agreeable to the law of rectitude

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δῐκαί-ωσις, εως, ἡ,

I setting right, doing justice to: hence,

1 condemnation, punishment, Th. 8.66, D.C. 40.43 (pl.), cj. in Plu. 2.421d.

2. plea of legal right, justification, Lys. 9.8, cf. Harp.
3. making or accounting righteous, justification, Romans 4:25, etc.

II demand of right or as of right, just claim, Th. 1.141, Plu. Demetr. 18.

III judgement of what is right, ἀντήλλαξαν τῇ δικαιώσει altered at their will and pleasure, Th. 3.82.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δικαίως, adverb (from Homer down);

1. justly, agreeably to right: κρίνειν (see δίκαιος, 2), 1 Peter 2:23; to suffer, Luke 23:41.
2. properly, as is right: 1 Corinthians 15:
3. uprightly, agreeably to the law of rectitude: 1 Thessalonians 2:10 (ὁσίως καί δικαίως, as Plato, rep. 1, p. 331 a. (cf. Trench, § 88, p. 328)); Titus 2:12.

Question 242

ἐκδικέω

Answer 242

I avenge

Thayer's Definition
to vindicate one's right, do one justice
to protect, defend, one person from another
to avenge a thing
to punish a person for a thing

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐκδῐκ-έω,

I

1. avenge, punish, φόνον Ctes. Fr. 37; παρακοήν 2 Corinthians 10:6; τινάς PGen. 47.17 (iv A.D.); exact vengeance for, τὰ αἵματα τῶν δούλων LXX 2 Samuel 4:8; τὸ αἷμα τὸ ἀναίτιον SIG 1181.12 (Jewish, circ. ii/i B.C.).
2. decide a case, δίκην, ἀγῶνα, Ph. 2.432, POxy. 1020.6 (ii A. D.).

II

1. avenge or vindicate a person, by taking up his cause, Apollod. 2.5.11, PAmh. 2.134.10 (ii A.D.), Plu. Comp.Ag.Gracch. 5; ἑαυτούς Romans 12:19, etc.; ἐ. τινὰ ἀπό τινος avenge one on another, Luke 18:3 : c.dat., Sch. Ar. Pl. 627: — Pass., LXX Psalms 37:28 (36). 28.
2. act as ἔκδικος 11.3, AJA 18.325 (Sardes, i B. C.), cf. CIG 2824 (Aphrodisias), BCH 23.182 (Pisidia).

III claim, CIG 3488 (Thyatira), Inscr.Perg. 245; σιτία καὶ ποτά Hierocl. in CA 8p.431M. ἐ. τισί make retribution for them, Aesop. 279b.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐκδικέω, ἐκδικῶ; future ἐκδικήσω; 1 aorist ἐξεδίκησα; (ἔκδικος, which see); the Sept. for נָקַם, פָּקַד, שָׁפַט;

a. τινα, to vindicate one’s right, do one justice (A. V. avenge): Luke 18 (1 Macc. 6:22); τινα ἀπό τίνος, to protect, defend, one person from another, Luke 18:3; ἑαυτόν, to avenge oneself, Romans 12:19.
b. τί, to avenge a thing (i. e. to punish a person for a thing): τήν παρακοήν, 2 Corinthians 10:6; τό haima] τίνος ἀπό or ἐκ τίνος, to demand in punishment the blood of one from another, i. e. to exact of the murderer the penalty of his crime (A. V. avenge one’s blood on or at the hand of): Revelation 6:10; Revelation 19:2; see ἐκ, I. 7. (In Greek authors from (Apollod.), Diodorus down.)

Question 243

ἀντίδικος, ου, ὁ

Answer 243

an opponent in a suit of law, an adversary

Thayer’s Definition
opponent
an opponent in a suit of law
an adversary, enemy

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀντίδῐκ-ος, ον,

opponent or adversary in a suit, Aeschin. 2.165, cf. Pl. Phdr. 273c: fem., ἡ ἀ. POxy. 37i8 (iA. D.): properly, the defendant, Antipho 1.2; but also, the plaintiff, Lys7.13; ἀ. πρός τινα Antipho 1.5: — generally, opponent, adversary, A. Ag. 41; ἀληθινῶν ἀ. [ Heraclit. ] 133, cf. 1 Peter 5:8, Phld. Ir. p.65W.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀντίδικος, ἀντίδικον (δίκη); as a substantive ὁ ἀντίδικος a. an opponent in a suit at law: Matthew 5:25; Luke 12:58; Luke 18:3 (Xenophon, Plato, often in the Attic orators).

b. universally, an adversavy, enemy (Aesehyl. Ag. 41; Sir. 33:9; 1 Samuel 2:10; Isaiah 41:11, etc.): 1 Peter 5:8 (unless we prefer to regard the devil as here called ἀντίδικος because he accuses men before God).

Question 244

ἐκδίκησις

Answer 244

vengeance, punishment

Thayer’s Definition
a revenging, vengeance, punishment
In 2 Cor 7:11 – meeting out of justice; doing justice to allparties. See Luke 18:3, 21:22. The word also has the sense ofacquittal and carries the sense of vindication. - Vincent III p. 329

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐκδῐκ-ησις, εως, ἡ,

avenging, ἐ. ποιεῖσθαι to give satisfaction, Plb. 3.8.10; ἐ. ποιεῖσθαί τινος obtain it from.., CIG 2826 (Aphrodisias); legal remedy, PLond. 5.1674.102 (vi A.D.); ἐ. ποιεῖν τινι avenge him, Acts 7:24; τινός Lu Luke 18:7-8.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐκδίκησις, ἐκδικήσεως, ἡ (ἐκδικέω, which see), the Sept. for נְקָמָה and נָקָם, פְּקֻדָּה, מִשְׁפָּט (Ezekiel 16:38; Ezekiel 23:45) and שְׁפָטִים; a revenging; vengeance, punishment: Romans 12:19 and Hebrews 10:30 from Deuteronomy 32:35; 2 Corinthians 7:11; Luke 21:22; ποιεῖν τήν ἐκδίκησιν τίνος, to vindicate one from wrongs, accomplish the avenging of, Luke 18:7f; τίνι, to avenge an injured person, Acts 7:24 (Judges 11:36); ἐκδίκησις τίνος, objec. genitive, the punishment of one, 1 Peter 2:14; διδόναι ἐκδίκησιν τίνι, to inflict punishment on (render vengeance to) one, 2 Thessalonians 1:8; cf. (Sir. 12:6); Ezekiel 25:14. (Polybius 3, 8, 10.)

Question 245

ἀποδίδωμι

Answer 245

to give back, pay a debt, restore, requite, recompense

Thayer’s Definition
to deliver, to give away for one’s own profit what is one’s own, to sell
to pay off, discharge what is due
a debt, wages, tribute, taxes, produce due
things promised under oath
conjugal duty
to render account
to give back, restore
to requite, recompense in a good or a bad sense

to give in answer to a claim, or expectation; to render a due, Mt. 12:36; 16:27; 21:41; 22:21; to recompense, Mt. 6:4, 6, 18; to discharge an obligation, Mt. 5:33; to pay a debt, Mt. 5:26; to render back, requite, Rom. 12:17; to give back, restore, Lk. 4:20; 9:42; to refund, Lk. 10:35; 19:8; mid., to sell, Acts 5:8; 7:9; Heb. 12:16; pass., to be sold, Mt. 18:25; to be given up at a request, Mt. 27:58

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀποδίδωμι,

fut. -δώσω: aor. 1 ἀπέδωκα: aor. 2 ἀπέδων A.D. Synt. 276.9, shortened inf. ἀποδοῦν prob. in Hsch.: —

1. give up or back, restore, return, τινί τι Hom., etc.: esp. render what is due, pay, as debts, penalties, submission, honour, etc., τοκεῦσι θρέπτρα Il. 4.478; ἀ. τινὶ λώβην give him back his insuit, i.e. make atonement for it, ib. 9.387 (tm.); τὴν πλημμέλειαν LXX Numbers 5:7; εὖ ἔρδοντι κακὴν ἀ. ἀμοιβήν Thgn. 1263; ἀ. τὴν ὁμοίην τινί Hdt. 4.119; ἀμοιβάς Democr. 92; κακὸν ἀντ’ ἀγαθοῦ Id. 93; ἀ. τὸ μόρσιμον pay the debt of fate, Pi. N. 7.44; τὸ χρέος Hdt. 2.136; τὸν ναῦλον Ar. Ra. 270; τὴν ζημίαν, τὴν καταδίκην, Th. 3.70, 5.50; τὴν φερνήν PEleph. 1.11 (iv B. C.); εὐχάς X. Mem. 2.2.10; ἀ. ὀπίσω ἐς Ἡρακλείδας τὴν ἀρχήν Hdt. 1.13, etc.; πόλεις ἀ. τοῖς παρακαταθεμένοις Aeschin. 3.85; ἀ. χάριτας Lys. 31.24; οὐκ ἐς χάριν ἀλλ’ ἐς ὀφείλημα τὴν ἀρετ ὴν ἀ. Th. 2.40; ἀ. χάριν τινός Isoc. 6.73; [ τὴν πόλιν] ἀ. τοῖς ἐπιγιγνομένοις οἵανπερ παρὰ τῶν πατέρων παρελάβομεν X. HG 7.1.30: — Pass., ἔως κ’ ἀπὸ πάντα δοθείη Od. 2.78; ἀ. μισθός, χάριτες, Ar. Eq. 1066, Th. 3.63.
2. assign, ταῖς γυναιξὶ μουσικὴν καὶ γυμναστικήν Pl. R. 456b; τὸ δίκαιον καὶ τὸ συμφέρον Arist. Rh. 1354b3, cf. 1356a15; τὸ πρὸς ἀλκὴν ὅπλον ἀ. ἡφύσις Id. GA 759b3, etc. refer to one, as belonging to his department, εἰς τοὺς κριτὰς τὴν κρίσιν Pl. Lg. 765b; ἀ. εἰς τὴν βουλὴν περὶ αὐτῶν refer their case to the Council, Isoc. 18.6, cf. Lys. 22.2, etc.
3. render, yield, of land, ἐπὶ διηκόσια ἀποδοῦναι (sc. καρπόν) yield fruit two hundred-fold, Hdt. 1.193; τἅλλα δ’ ἅν τις καταβάλη ἀπέδωκεν ὀρθεῶς Men. Georg. 38; ἤν ἡ χώρη κατὰ λόγον ἐπιδιδοῖ ἐς ὕψος καὶ τὸ ὅμοιον ἀποδιδοῖ ἐς αὔξησιν renders, makes a like increase in extent, Hdt. 2.13: — hence perh. metaph., τὸ ἔργον ἀ. Arist. EN 1106a16; ἀ. δάκρυ E. HF 489.
4. concede, allow, c. inf., suffer or allow a person to do, ἀ. τισὶ αὐτονομεῖσθαι Th. 1.144, cf. 3.36; εἰ δὲ τοῖς μὲν.. ἐπιτάττειν ἀποδώσετε D. 2.30; ἀ. κολάζειν Id. 23.56; τῷ δικαστηρίῳ ἀποδίδοται τοῦ φόνου τὰς δίκας δικάζειν Lys. 1.30; ἀ. τινὶ ζητεῖν Arist. Pol. 1341b30, cf. Po. 1454b5; also οὔτε ἀπολογίας ἀποδοθείσης And. 4.3; ἐπειδὰν αὐτοῖς ὁ λόγος ἀποδοθῆ when right of speech is allowed them, Aeschin. 3.54.
5. ἀ. τινά with an Adj., render or make so and so, like ἀποδείκνυμι, ἀ. τὴν τέρψιν βεβαιοτέραν Isoc. 1.46; τέλειον ἀ. τὸ τέκνον Arist. GA 733b1; δεῖ τὰς ἐνεργείας ποιὰς ἀ. Id. EN 1103b22; μετριωτέραν τὴν ὑπερηφανίαν D.H. 7.16. exhibit, display, τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἀρετήν And. 1.109; ἀ. τὴν ἰδίαν μορφήν render, express it, Arist. Po. 1454b10; ἀ. φαντασίαν τινός present appearance of, Phld. Ir. p.71 W., al.
6. deliver over, give up, e.g. as a slave, E. Cyc. 239; ἀ. τὸν μιαρὸν τῶ χρόνῳ φῆναι Antipho 4.4.11.
7. ἀ. ἐπιστολήν deliver a letter, Th. 7.10, cf. E. IT 745.
8. ἀ. τὸν ἀγῶνα ὀρθῶς καὶ καλῶς bring it to a conclusion, Lycurg. 149.
9. λόγον ἀ. render an account, D. 27.48: — Pass., μαρτυρίαι ἀ. Test. ap. D. 18.137.
10. ἀ. ὅρκον, v. ὅρκος.
11. give an account or definition of a thing, explain it, E. Or. 150; ἀ. τί ἐστί τι Arist. Cat. 2b8, cf. 1a10, Metaph. 1040b30, al.; ἑπομένως τούτοις ἀ. τὴν ψυχήν Id. de.An. 405a4, cf. Ph. 194b34, al.; also, use by way of definition, ὁ μὲν τὴν ὕλην ἀποδίδωσιν, ὁ δὲ τὸ εἶδος Id. de An. 403b1; simply, define, τὸν ἄνθρωπον S.E. M. 7.272; expound, Phld. D. 3.14, cf. Epicur. Nat. 14.3, 119G., 143 G.; render, interpret one word by another, ἀ. τὴν κοτύλην ἄλεισον Ath. 11.479c; explain, interpret, τὸ φωνὴν αἵματος βοᾶν Ph. 1.209: — Pass., βέλτιον ἀποδοθήσεται Epicur. Ephesians 1 P. 15 U.; ἀκριβεστέρως ἀποδοθήσεται A.D. Synt. 45.21; ἀ. τι πρός τι use with reference to, Olymp. in Mete. 281.10, cf. Sch. Ar. Pl. 538.
12. attach or append, make dependent upon, τί τινι or εἴς τι Hero Aut. 24.5, 6, 2.
13. ἀ. τί τινος assign a property to a thing, Arist. Top. 128b28.

II intr.,

1. return, recur, Id. GA 722a8, HA 585b32.
2. Rhet. and Gramm., introduce a clause answering to the πρότασις, Id. Rh. 1407a20; διὰ μακροῦ ἀ. D.H. Dem. 9, etc.; cf. ἀπόδοσις 11.2; οὐκ ἀποδίδωσι τὸ ἐπεί has no apodosis, Sch. Od. 3.103; esp. in similes, complete the comparison, Arist. Rh. 1413a11.
3. in Tactics, turn back to face the enemy, εἰς ὀρθόν Ascl. Tact. 10.12, etc.
4. Medic. in Pass., to be evacuated, σὺν τοῖς περιττώμασιν Dsc. 4.82.

III Med., give away of one’s own will, sell, Ar. Av. 585, Hdt. 1.70, etc.; ἀ. τι ἐς τὴν Ἑλλάδα take to Greece and sell it there, Id. 2.56: c. gen. pretii, Ar. Ach. 830, Pax 1237; οὐκ ἄν ἀπεδόμην πολλοῦ τὰς ἐλπίδας Pl. Phd. 98b; ἀ. τῆς ἀξίας, τοῦ εὑρίσκοντος, sell for its worth, for what it will fetch, Aeschin. 1.96; ὅταν τις οἰκέτην πονηρὸν πωλῆ (= offer for sale) καὶ ἀποδῶται τοῦ εὑρόντος X. Mem. 2.5.5, cf. Thphr. Char. 15.4; διδοῦσι [τὰς νέας] πενταδράχμους ἀποδόμενοι Hdt. 6.89; ἀ. εἰσαγγελίαν sell, i.e. take a bribe to forgo, the information, D. 25.47; οἱ δραχμῆς ἄν ἀποδόμενοι τὴν πόλιν X. HG 2.3.48; at Athens, esp. farm out the public taxes, D. 20.60, opp. ὠνέομαι: metaph., οἷον πρὸς ἄργυρον τὴν δόξαν τὰς ψυχάς Jul. Or. 1.42b: — Act. and Med. are distinguished in Lex ap. And. 1.97 πάντα ἀποδόμενος τὰ ἡμίσεα ἀποδώσω τῷ ἀποκτείναντι: but Act. is used in med. sense in Th. 6.62 (s.v.l.), cf. Foed.Delph.Pell. 2 A 22, and possibly in E. Cyc. 239, Ar. Ra. 1235: Med. for Act. in Antipho Fr. 54: — Pass., to be sold, Hsch.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀποδίδωμι, present participle neuter ἀποδιδοῦν (from the form ἀποδιδόω, Revelation 22:2, where T Tr WH marginal reading ἀποδιδούς (see WH’s Appendix, p. 167)); imperfect 3 person plural ἀπεδίδουν (for the more common ἀπεδίδοσαν, Acts 4:33; cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 14, 1 c.); future ἀποδώσω; 1 aorist ἀπέδωκα; 2 aorist ἀπεδων, imperative ἀπόδος, subjunctive 3 person singular ἀποδῷ and in 1 Thessalonians 5:15 Tdf. ἀποδοι (see δίδωμι), optative 3 person singular ἀποδῴη (or rather, ἀποδῴη; for ἀποδῴη is a subjunctive form) (2 Timothy 4:14, for ἀποδοιη, cf. Winers Grammar, § 14, 1 g.; Buttmann, 46 (40); yet L T Tr WH ἀποδώσει); passive, 1 aorist infinitive ἀποδοθῆναι; middle, 2 aorist ἀπεδομην, 3 person singular ἀπέδοτο (Hebrews 12:16, where L WH ἀπέδετο; cf. Buttmann, 47 (41); Delitzsch on Hebrew, p. 632 note; (WHs Appendix, p. 167)); a common verb in Greek writings from Homer down, and the N. T. does not deviate at all from their use of it; properly, to put away by giving, to give up, give over (German abgeben (cf. Winer’s De verb. comp. etc. Part iv., p. 12f who regards ἀπό as denoting to give from some reserved store, or to give over something which might have been retained, or to lay off some burden of debt or duty; cf. Cope on Aristotle, rhet. 1, 1, 7));

1. to deliver, relinquish what is one’s own: τό σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, Matthew 27:58; hence, in middle to give away for one’s own profit what is one’s own, i. e. to sell (Winer’s Grammar, 253 (238)): τί, Acts 5:8; Hebrews 12:16; τινα, Acts 7:9 (often in this sense in Greek writings, especially the Attic, from Herodotus 1, 70 down; in the Sept. for מָכַר, Genesis 25:33 etc.; Baruch 6:27 (i. e. Epistle Jer.) (28)).
2. to pay off, discharge, what is due (because a debt, like a burden, is thrown off, ἀπό, by being paid): a debt (German abtragen), Matthew 5:26; Matthew 18:25-30, 34; Luke 7:42; Luke 10:35; Luke 12:59; wages, Matthew 20:8; tribute and other dues to the government, Matthew 22:21; Mark 12:17; Luke 20:25; Romans 13:7; produce due, Matthew 21:41; Hebrews 12:11; Revelation 22:2; ὅρκους things promised under oath, Matthew 5:33, cf. Numbers 30:3 (εὐχήν a vow, Deuteronomy 23:21, etc.); conjugal duty, 1 Corinthians 7:3; ἀμοιβάς grateful requitals, 1 Timothy 5:4; λόγον to render account: Matthew 12:36; Luke 16:2; Acts 19:40; Romans 14:12 L text Tr text; Hebrews 13:17; 1 Peter 4:5; μαρτύριον, to give testimony (as something officially due), Acts 4:33. Hence,
3. to give back, restore: Luke 4:20; ( Lachmann marginal reading); .
4. to requite, recompense, in a good or a bad sense: Matthew 6:4, 6, 18; Matthew 16:27; Romans 2:6; 2 Tim. 4:(),; Revelation 18:6; Revelation 22:12; κακόν ἀντί κακοῦ, Romans 12:17; 1 Thessalonians 5:15; 1 Peter 3:9. (Compare: ἀνταποδίδωμι.)

Question 246

ἀνταποδίδωμι

Answer 246

1) in a good sense, to repay, requite
2) in a bad sense, penalty and vengeance

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀνταπο-δίδωμι,

I

1. give back, repay, tender in repayment or requital, Batr. 186; ἀ. τὸ ὅμοιον, τὸἴσον, Hdt. 1.18, Th. 1.43; χάριν Pherecr. 2D.; τὴν ἴσην Arist. Rh. 1379b7; ἀ. τροφεῖα Lys. 6.49; ἀρετήν Th. 4.19; ὕβριν Plu. 2.825c; τὰ αὐτὰ ἀ. react in the same way, Pl. Ti. 79e; of counter-arguments, Id. Prm. 128d: abs., pay back, Th. 3.40, Arist. Rh. 1367a21.
2. take vengeance, LXX Deuteronomy 32:35, al., Romans 12:19.

II

1. assign as a balance, ἐναντίαν γένεσιν Pl. Phd. 71e.
2. make convertible, τὴν μεταφορὰν τὴν ἐκ τοῦ ἀνάλογον Arist. Rh. 1407a15: — Pass., Demetr. Eloc. 79. Gramm., make to correspond, of correlatives (e.g. τοιοῦτος, οἷος), in Pass., A.D. Conj. 254.19, Synt. 54.5, al.; so of μέν.. δέ, Arist. Rh. 1407a23, Demetr. Eloc. 53, cf. Hermog. Id. 1.4, al.
3. intr., answer to, correspond with, εἰ μὴ ἀνταποδιδοίη τὰ ἕτερα τοῖς ἑτέροις Pl. Phd. 72a, cf. b; οὐκ ἀνταποδίδωσι τὸ ὅμοιον there is no similar correspondent, Arist. Mete. 347b32, cf. IA 707b16, Ps.- Alex. Aphr. inSE 192.14.
4. give back words, exchange ‘tu quoque’s’, Pl Phdr. 236c.

III deliver in turn, τὸ σύνθημα X. Cyr. 3.3.58 (Pass.); explain in turn, Pl. Ti. 87c. give back a sound, of an echo, Plu. Sull. 19; of troops, κραυγὴν ἀ. Id. Tim. 27.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀνταποδίδωμι: future ἀνταποδώσω; 2 aorist infinitive ἀνταποδοῦναι; 1 future passive ἀνταποδοθήσομαι; (ἀντί for something received, in return, ἀποδίδωμι to give back); to repay, requite;

a. in a good sense: Luke 14:14; Romans 11:35; εὐχαριστίαν τίνι, 1 Thessalonians 3:9.
b. in a bad sense, of penalty and vengeance; absolutely: Romans 12:19; Hebrews 10:30 (Deuteronomy 32:35); θλῖψιν τίνι, 2 Thessalonians 1:6. (Very often in the Sept. and Apocrypha, in both senses; in Greek writings from (Herodotus] Thucydides down.)

Question 247

δωρεά, -ᾶς, ἡ

Answer 247

gift

a gift, free gift, benefit, Jn. 4:10; Acts 2:38

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δωρ-εά,

Ion. δωρ-εή, ἡ: δωρειά in earlier Attic Inscrr., IG 12.77, al., δωρεά first in ib.22.1.68: —

I

1. gift, present, esp. bounty (= δόσις ἀναπόδοτος Arist. Top. 125a18), Hdt. 2.140; δωρεὰν διδόναι Id. 6.130, A. Pr. 340; πορεῖν ib. 616; δωρεῖσθαι Pl. Plt. 290c; δ. δέχεσθαι, λαμβάνειν, Isoc. 6.31, 15.40; ironically, θάνατόν τινι δωρεὰν ἀποδοῦναι Antipho 5.34; δ. ἔχειν S. Aj. 1032, D. 18.312; ἐν χάριτος μέρει καὶ δωρειᾶς D. 21.165; δωρειὰν καὶ χάριν ib.172, cf. Pl. Lg. 844d; of a legacy, D. 27.41, 65; δωρεαί privileges and immunities, opp. δῶρα, gifts in cash or kind, Philostr. VS 2.10.4.
2. estate granted by a king, fief, Phoenicid. 4.7, PSI 5.511.4, 518.2 (iii B.C.).

II acc. δωρεάν as Adv.,

1. as a free gift, freely, Hdt. 5.23, prob. in And. 1.4; μηδὲν δ. πράττειν Plb. 18.34.7, cf. LXX Job 1:9; δ. λειτουργεῖν Test.Epict. 4.27, cf. Inscr.Prien. 4.17 (iv B.C.); so κατὰ δωρεάν IG 7.2711.13, al. (Acraeph., i A. D.); ἐν δωρεᾷ προσνεῖμαι Plb. 22.5.4; but γῆν (ἀμπελῶνα, etc.) ἐν δωρεᾷ ἔχειν to hold land by a royal grant, PR Laws 36.15 (iii B.C.), cf. 43.11, 44.3.
2. to no purpose, for naught, Galatians 2:21.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δωρεά, δωρεᾶς, ἡ (δίδωμι); from (Aeschyh and) Herodotus down; a gift: John 4:10; Acts 8:20; Acts 11:17; Romans 5:15; 2 Corinthians 9:15; Hebrews 6:4; ἡ χάρις ἐδόθη κατά τό μέτρον τῆς δωρεᾶς τοῦ Χριστοῦ, according to the measure in which Christ gave it, Ephesians 4:7; with an epexegetical genitive of the thing given, viz. τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος, Acts 2:38; Acts 10:45; δικαιοσύνης, Romans 5:17 (L WH Tr marginal reading brackets τῆς δωρεᾶς); τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ, Ephesians 3:7. The accusative δωρεάν (properly, as a gift, gift-wise (cf. Winers Grammar, 230 (216); Buttmann, 153 (134))) is used adverbially; the Sept. for חִנָּם;

a. freely, for naught, gratis, gratuitously: Matthew 10:8; Romans 3:24; 2 Corinthians 11:7; 2 Thessalonians 3:8; Revelation 21:6; Revelation 22:17 (Polybius 18, 17, 7; Exodus 21:11; δωρεάν ἄνευ ἀργυρίου, Isaiah 52:3).
b. by a usage of which as yet no example has been noted from Greek writings, without just cause, unnecessarily: John 15:25 (Psalm 68:5 (); Psalm 34:19 (); Galatians 2:21 (Job 1:9 (?); Psalm 34:7 () (where Symm. ἀναιτίως); so the Latingratuitus: Livy 2, 42gratuitus furor, Seneca, epistles 105, 3 (book xviii., epistle 2, § 3)odium aut est ex offensa … aut gratuitum). (Synonym: see δόμα, at the end.)

Question 248

δωρεάν

Answer 248

freely, free of charge, without payment

Thayer’s Definition
freely, undeservedly

II acc. δωρεάν as Adv.,

1. as a free gift, freely, Hdt. 5.23, prob. in And. 1.4; μηδὲν δ. πράττειν Plb. 18.34.7, cf. LXX Job 1:9; δ. λειτουργεῖν Test.Epict. 4.27, cf. Inscr.Prien. 4.17 (iv B.C.); so κατὰ δωρεάν IG 7.2711.13, al. (Acraeph., i A. D.); ἐν δωρεᾷ προσνεῖμαι Plb. 22.5.4; but γῆν (ἀμπελῶνα, etc.) ἐν δωρεᾷ ἔχειν to hold land by a royal grant, PR Laws 36.15 (iii B.C.), cf. 43.11, 44.3.
2. to no purpose, for naught, Galatians 2:21.

gratis, gratuitously, freely, Mt. 10:8; Rom. 3:24; in NT undeservedly, without cause, Jn. 15:25; in vain, Gal. 2:21

Question 249

δῶρον, -ου, τό

Answer 249

gift, offering

a gift, present, Mt. 2:11; Eph. 2:8; Rev. 11:10; an offering, sacrifice, Mt. 5:23, 24; 8:4; δῶρον, σχ. ἐστι(ν), it is consecrated to God, Mt. 15:5; Mk. 7:11; contribution to the temple, Lk. 21:1, 4

Thayer’s Definition
a gift, present
gifts offered in expression of honour
of sacrifices and other gifts offered to God
of money cast into the treasury for the purposes of the temple and for the support of the poor
the offering of a gift or of gifts

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δῶρον, τό, (δίδωμι)

I

1. gift, present, gift of honour, ἀγλαὰ δ. Il. 1.213, etc.; votive gift or offering to a god, φέρε δῶρον Ἀθήνῃ 6.293, cf. LXX Genesis 4:4, Mark 7:11; βωμοὶ δώροισι φλέγονται A. Ag. 91; ποῦ μοι τὰ.. δ. κἀκροθίνια; Id. Fr. 184; δῶρά τινος the gifts of, i. e. given by, him, θεῶν ἐρικυδέα δ. Il. 20.265, cf. Od. 18.142; δῶρ’ Ἀφροδίτης, i.e. personal charms, Il. 3.54, 64; δ. Κύπριδος E. Hel. 363 (lyr.); δ. τῶν Μουσῶν καὶ Ἀπόλλωνος, of μουσική, Pl. Lg. 796e: c. gen. rei, ὕπνου δ. the blessing of sleep, Il. 7.482; δῶρα presents given as tribute, 17.225; δῶρον τοῦ ποταμοῦ, of the land of Egypt, Hdt. 2.5.
2. δῶρα presents, as retaining fees or bribes, D. 18.109, Jusj.ib. 24.150, Arist. Ath. 55.5, SIG 953.7 (Calymna), etc. (the usual sense of the word in Att. Oratt.): hence in Att. law, δώρων γραφή an indictment for being bribed, Aeschin. 3.232, etc., cf. Harp.; δώρων κριθῆναι to be tried for taking bribes, Lys. 27.3; δώρων ἑλεῖν τινα to convict him of taking bribes, Ar. Nu. 591; δ. ὀφλεῖν to be found guilty of taking bribes, And. 1.74; δώρων δίωξις Plu. Per. 32.
3. in pl., good qualities, talents, τὰ βασιλέως δ. Lib. 19.

II

1. front part of palm, Poll. 2.144.
2. hand’s breadth, palm, as a measure of length, Nic. Th. 398, Vitr. 2.3.3, Milet. 7.57 (Didyma); cf. δεκάδωρος.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δῶρον, δώρου, τό (from Homer down), the Sept. generally for קָרְבָּן, often also for מִנְחָה and שֹׁחַד; a gift, present: Ephesians 2:8; Revelation 11:10; of gifts offered as an expression of honor, Matthew 2:11; of sacrifices and other gifts offered to God, Matthew 5:23; Matthew 8:4; Matthew 15:5; Matthew 23:18; Mark 7:11; Hebrews 5:1; Hebrews 8:3; Hebrews 9:9; Hebrews 11:4; of money cast into the treasury for the purposes of the temple and for the support of the poor, Luke 21:1,(4). (Synonym: see δόμα, at the end.)

STRONGS NT 1435a: δωροφορία δωροφορία, δωροφοριας, ἡ (δωροφόρος, bringing gifts), the offering of a gift or of gifts: Romans 15:31 L Tr marginal reading, cf. διακονία, 3. (Alciphron 1, 6; Pollux 4, 47 (p. 371, Hemst. edition); several times in ecclesiastical writings.)

Question 250

εὐδοκία, ας, ἡ

Answer 250

goodwill, good purpose, favor, pleasure, desire

good will, favor, Lk. 2:14; good pleasure, purpose, intention, Mt. 11:26; Lk. 10:21; Eph. 1:5, 9; Phil. 2:13; by impl. desire, Rom. 10:1; Phil. 1:15; 2 Thess. 1:11*

Thayer's Definition
will, choice
good will, kindly intent, benevolence
delight, pleasure, satisfaction
desire
for delight in any absent thing easily produces longing for it

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
εὐδοκ-ία, ἡ,

1. = cross εὐδόκησις, esp. of God, LXX 1 Chronicles 16:10, al., Luke 2:14, al.; good will, Philippians 1:15; contentment, Phld. Piet. 25.
2. object of desire, LXX Psa 144.16, Si. 18.31.
3. v.l. for cross εὐδοκιμίη in Hp. Praec. 6.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
εὐδοκία, εὐδοκίας, ἡ (from εὐδοκέω, as εὐλογία from εὐλογέω), unknown to secular authors (Boeckh, Inscriptions 5960), found in the O. T. in some of the Psalms (for רָצון) and often in Sir.; on it cf. Fritzsche on Romans, ii., p. 371f; (especially Lightfoot on Philippians 1:15); properly,beneplacitum (Vulg. (edited by Clement.) Ephesians 1:9);

1. will, choice: Matthew 11:26; Luke 10:21 (on both passages see ἔμπροσθεν, 2 b.); Sir. 1:27 (); , etc.; in particular, good-will, kindly intent, benevolence: Ephesians 1:5, 9; Philippians 2:13 (Psalm 50:20 (); Sir. 2:16 Sir. 11:17 () etc.); δἰ εὐδοκίαν, prompted by good will, Philippians 1:15.
2. delight, pleasure, satisfaction: with the genitive of the thing that pleases, 2 Thessalonians 1:11; ἐν ἀνθρώποις εὐδοκία, either among men pleasure produced by salvation, or God’s pleasure in men, Luke 2:14 R G Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading; ἄνθρωποι εὐδοκίας, men in whom God is well pleased (i. e. not a particular class of men (viz. believers), but the whole race, contemplated as blessed in Christ’s birth), Luke 2:14. L T Tr text WH text (see WH’s Appendix at the passage; Field, Otium Norv. iii. at the passage) (Psalm 144:16 (); Sir. 9:12).
3. desire (for delight in any absent thing easily begets a longing for it): Romans 10:1; cf. Philippi and Tholuck at the passage.

Question 251

συνευδοκέω

Answer 251

I entirely approve of, agree with
1) to be pleased together with, to approve together (with others)
2) to be pleased at the same time with, consent, agree to
2a) to applaud
to approve of, give approval; to be willing

to approve with, another; to agree with in principle, Rom. 1:32; to stamp approval, Lk. 11:48; Acts 8:1; 22:20; to be willing, agreeable, 1 Cor. 7:12, 13*

Thayer’s Definition
to be pleased together with, to approve together (with others)
to be pleased at the same time with, consent, agree to
to applaud

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
συνευδοκ-έω,

join in approving, give one’s consent, Demad. 17, Plb. 7.1.3, SIG 712.46 (Crete, ii B.C., Dor. -ιόντων), PGrenf. 2.26.25 (ii B.C.), D.S. 4.24, Acts 22:20, etc.; συνευδοκέοντος τοῦ δεῖνα, in forms of sale, GDI 1532a4, 1555a5 (Delph.), etc.

2. c. dat. rei, consent or agree to a thing, LXX 1 Maccabees 1:57, POxy. 1644.27 (i B.C.), BGU 1731.12 (i B.C.), Luke 11:48, etc.
3. c. dat. pers., agree or sympathize with.., Romans 1:32.

II Pass., aor. συνευδοκήθην in signf. 1.3, D.S. 18.49; so ὅκκα [τὰ μέρεα].. συνευδοκῆται ἀλλάλοις Theag. ap. Stob. 3.1.117.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
συνευδοκέω, συνευδόκω; (see εὐδοκέω, at the beginning);

a. to be pleased together with, to approve together (with others): absolutely (yet so that the thing giving pleasure is evident from the context), Acts 22:20 G L T Tr WH; with a dative of the thing, Luke 11:48; Acts 8:1; Acts 22:20 Rec. ((Polybius 24, 4, 13); 1 Macc. 1:57; 2 Macc. 11:24).
b. to be pleased at the same time with, consent, agree to ((Polybius 32, 22, 9); 2 Macc. 11:35); followed by an infinitive 1 Corinthians 7:12f. (R. V. here be content); with a dative of a person to applaud (R. V. consent with), Romans 1:32. (Diodorus; ecclesiastical writings.)

Question 252

δοκιμάζω

Answer 252

to test, scrutinize, examine; to decide upon after examination, approve, judge worthy, choose; distinguish, discern; interpret

to test, assay, metals, 1 Pet. 1:7; to prove, try, examine, scrutinize, Lk. 14:19; Rom. 12:2; to put to the proof, tempt, Heb. 3:9; to approve after trial, judge worthy, choose, Rom. 14:22; 1 Cor. 16:3; 2 Cor. 8:22; to decide upon after examination, judge of, distinguish, discern, Lk. 12:56; Rom. 2:18; Phil. 1:10

Question 253

ἀποδοκιμάζω

Answer 253

to reject

to reject upon trial; to reject, Mt. 21:42; Mk. 12:10; Lk. 20:17; 1 Pet. 2:4, 7; pass., to be disallowed a claim, declared useless, Lk. 9:22; 17:25; Heb. 12:17

Thayer’s Definition
to disapprove, reject, repudiate

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀποδοκῐμ-άζω,

I

1. reject on scrutiny or trial, reject a candidate from want of qualification, Hdt. 6.130, Lys. 13.10, Archipp. 14: — Pass., λαχὼν ἀπεδοκιμάσθη ἄρχειν Din. 2.10, cf. D. 25.30.
2. generally, reject as unworthy or unfit, πασσόφους ἄνδρας Pl. Tht. 181b; ἵππον X. Eq.Mag. 1.13; νόμους Id. Mem. 4.4.14; ἀργύριον Thphr. Char. 4.11; τὴν [τοῦ αὐλοῦ] χρῆσιν ἐκ τῶν νέων Arist. Pol. 1341a26, cf. 37 (Pass.); [ ἡ ὄρνις] ἀ. τὰ αὑτῆς Id. HA 618a17; τὴν τοιαύτην διατριβήν Timocl. 8.12; τὸ ποιεῖν τι X. Cyr. 8.1.47: c. inf., Phlp. in Ph. 584.26.

II conclude, judge, Dam. Pr. 117.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀποδοκιμάζω: (see δοκιμάζω); 1 aorist ἀπεδοκίμασα; passive, 1 aorist ἀπεδοκιμασθην; perfect participle ἀποδεδοκιμασμενος; to disapprove, reject, repudiate: Matthew 21:42; Mark 8:31; Mark 12:10; Luke 9:22; Luke 17:25; Luke 20:17; 1 Peter 2:4, 7; Hebrews 12:17. (Equivalent to מָאַס in Psalm 117:22 (); Jeremiah 8:9, etc.; in Greek writings from Herodotus 6, 130 down.)

Question 254

δοκιμή, ῆς, ἡ

Answer 254

the state or disposition of that which has been tried and approved, approved character or temper, Rom. 5:4; 2 Cor. 2:9; Phil. 2:22; trial, proof by trial, 2 Cor. 8:2; proof, document, evidence, 2 Cor. 8:2; 13:3*

Thayer’s Definition
proving, trial
approved, tried character
a proof, a specimen of tried worth

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δοκῐμ-ή, ἡ,

1. proof, test, interpol. in Dsc. 4.184.
2. tried or approved character,.Philippians 2:22; 2 Corinthians 2:9.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δοκιμή, δοκιμῆς, ἡ (dokimos];);

1. in an active sense, a proving, trial: θλίψεως, through affliction, 2 Corinthians 8:2.
2. approvedness, tried character: Romans 5:4; 2 Corinthians 2:9; Philippians 2:22; τῆς διακονίας, exhibited in the contribution, 2 Corinthians 9:13.
3. “a proof (objectively], a specimen of (Dioscorides (?) 4, 186 (183); occasionally in ecclesiastical writings.)

Question 255

δόκιμος, ον

Answer 255

genuine, proved, tried; approved, after examination and trial, Rom. 16:10; Jas. 1:12; by impl. acceptable, Rom. 14:18

Thayer’s Definition
accepted, particularly of coins and money.
accepted, pleasing, acceptable

In the ancient world there was no banking system as we know it today, and no paper money. All money was made from metal, heated until liquid, poured into moulds and allowed to cool. When the coins were cooled, it was necessary to smooth off the uneven edges. The coins were comparatively soft and of course many people shaved them closely. In one century, more than eighty laws were passed in Athens, to stop the practice of shaving down the coins then in circulation. But some money changers were men of integrity, who would accept no counterfeit money. They were men of honour who put only genuine full weighted money into circulation. Such men were called “dokimos” or “approved”. Donald Barnhouse

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δόκῐμ-ος, ον

(Dor. α, ον Tab.Heracl. 1.103), (δέχομαι) acceptable: hence,

1 of persons, trustworthy, Heraclit. 28 (Sup.), Democr. 67; approved, esteemed, Hdt. 1.65, al.; δ. παρά τινι Id. 7.117; δοκιμώτατος Ἑλλάδι most approved by Hellas, her noblest son, E. Supp. 277 (anap.): c. inf., of approved ability to do.., δόκιμος δ’ οὔτις.. εἴργειν A. Pers. 87 (lyr.).

2. of things, excellent, τὸ ἔαρ -ώτατον Hdt. 7.162; notable, considerable, ποταμός Id. 7.129; approved, κριθὰ καθαρὰ δ. Tab.Heracl. l. c.; δ. ἀργύριον legal tender, D. 35.24, cf. PLond. 3.938.6 (iii A. D.); ὕμνος acceptable, Pi. N. 3.11.
3. Adv. -μως really, genuinely, A. Pers. 547 (lyr.), X. Cyr. 1.6.7.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δόκιμος, δόκιμον (δέχομαι); from Herodotus down;

1. properly, accepted, particularly of coins and metals, Genesis 23:16; 2 Chronicles 9:17; Lucian, Herm. 68, etc.; hence, universally, proved, tried: in the N. T. one who is of tried faith and integrity (R. V. approved), Romans 16:10 (τόν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ, the approved servant of Christ); 1 Corinthians 11:19; 2 Corinthians 10:18; 2 Corinthians 13:7; 2 Timothy 2:15 (παρισταναι ἑαυτόν δόκιμον τῷ Θεῷ); James 1:12.
2. accepted, equivalent to acceptable, pleasing: εὐάρεστος τῷ Θεῷ καί δόκιμος (L marginal reading δοκιμοις) τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, Romans 14:18.

Question 256

δόγμα, ατος, τό

Answer 256

decree, regulation

a decree, statute, ordinance, Lk. 2:1; Acts 16:4; 17:7; Eph. 2:15; Col. 2:14*

Thayer’s Definition
doctrine, decree, ordinance
of public decrees
of the Roman Senate
of rulers
the rules and requirements of the law of Moses; carrying a suggestion of severity and of threatened judgment
of certain decrees of the apostles relative to right living

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δόγμα, ατος, τό, (δοκέω)

1. that which seems to one, opinion or belief, Pl. R. 538c; δ. πόλεως κοινόν Id. Lg. 644d, etc.; esp. of philosophical doctrines, Epicur. Nat. 14.7, 15.28, Str. 15.1.59, Ph. 1.204, etc.; notion, Pl. Tht. 158d, al.
2. decision, judgement, Id. Lg. 926d (pl.); public decree, ordinance, And. 4.6; τὰ τῶν Ἀμφικτυόνων δ. D. 5.19, cf. 18.154; δόγμα ποιήσασθαι, c. inf., X. An. 3.3.5; esp. of Roman Senatus-consulta, δ. συγκλήτου Plb. 6.13.2, IG 12(3).173.22; δ. τῆς βουλῆς D.H. 8.87.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δόγμα, δογματος, τό (from δοκέω, and equivalent to τό δεδογμενον), an opinion, a judgment (Plato, others), doctrine, decree, ordinance;

1. of public decrees (as τῆς πόλεως, Plato, legg. 1, p. 644 d.; of the Roman Senate (Polybius 6, 13, 2); Herodian, 7, 10, 8 (5, Bekker edition)): of rulers, Luke 2:1; Acts 17:7; Hebrews 11:23 Lachmann (Theod. in Daniel 2:13; Daniel 3:10; Daniel 4:3; Daniel 6:13, etc. — where the Sept. uses other words).
2. of the rules and requirements of the law of Moses, 3Macc. 1:3; διατήρησις τῶν ἁγίων δογμάτων, Philo, alleg. legg. i., § 16; carrying a suggestion of severity, and of threatened punishment, τόν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δογμασι, the law containing precepts in the form of decrees (A. V. the law of commandments contained in ordinances), Ephesians 2:15; τό καθ’ ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον τοῖς δογμασι equivalent to τό τοῖς δογμασι (dative of instrument) by ὄν καθ’ ἡμῶν, the bond against us by its decrees, Colossians 2:14; cf. Winers Grammar, § 31, 10 Note 1 (Buttmann, 92 (80); on both passages see Lightfoot on Colossians, the passage cited).
3. of certain decrees of the apostles relative to right living: Acts 16:4. (Of all the precepts of the Christian religion: βεβαιωθῆναι ἐν τοῖς δόγμασιν τοῦ κυρίου καί τῶν ἀποστόλων, Ignatius ad Magnes. 13, 1 [ET]; of the precepts (`sentences’ or tenets) of philosophers, in the later secular writings: Cicero, acad. 2, 9, 27de suis decretis, quae philosophi vocant dogmata.) (On the use of the word in general, see Lightfoot as above; (cf. ‘Teaching’ etc. 11, 3 [ET]).)

Question 257

δουλεύω

Answer 257

δουλεύσω, ἐδούλευσα, δεδούλευκα, -, -

to be a slave; to serve

Thayer’s Definition
to be a slave, serve, do service
of a nation in subjection to other nations
metaph. to obey, submit to
in a good sense, to yield obedience
in a bad sense, of those who become slaves to some base power, to yield to, give one’s self up to

to be a slave, or servant; to be in slavery or subjection, Jn. 8:33; Acts 7:7; Rom. 9:12; to discharge the duties of a slave or servant, Eph. 6:7; 1 Tim. 6:2; to serve, be occupied in the service of, be devoted, subservient, Mt. 6:24; Lk. 15:29; Acts 20:19; Rom. 14:18; 16:18; met. to be enthralled, involved in a slavish service, spiritually or morally, Gal. 4:9, 25; Tit. 3:3

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δουλ-εύω, (δοῦλος)

1. to be a slave, Hdt. 2.56, And. 1.138, Pl. Lg. 777d, etc.; παρά τινι D. 18.129: c. acc. cogn., δουλείαν δ. X. Mem. 3.12.2, Pl. Smp. 183a, al.
2. serve, be subject, τό τ’ ἄρχειν καὶ τὸ δ. δίχα A. Pr. 927, etc.; δ. ζεύγλαις ib. 463; τοῖς ἄρχουσι καὶ τοῖς νόμοις Pl. Lg. 698b; ἡδονῇ Id. Phdr. 238e, etc.; δ. γαστρί, ὕπνῳ, λαγνείᾳ, X. Mem. 1.6.8; κεναῖς δόξαις Polystr. p.29 W.; τῇ γῇ δ. make oneself a slave to one’s land, i. e. give up rights that one may keep it, Th. 1.81; so δ. τῇ κτήσει αὐτοῦ Pl. R. 494d; δουλεύομεν δόξαισιν Philem. 93.8; δ. τῷ καιρῷ accommodate oneself to the occasion, AP 9.441 (Pall.); θυμῷ Hdn. 1.17.6.
3. render a service, τινά PLond. 5.1727.11 (vi A. D.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δουλεύω; future δουλεύσω; 1 aorist ἐδούλευσα; perfect δεδούλευκά; (δοῦλος); the Sept. for עָבַד;

1. properly, to be a slave, serve, do service: absolutely, Ephesians 6:7; 1 Timothy 6:2; τίνι Matthew 6:24; Luke 16:13; Romans 9:12; said of nations in subjection to other nations, John 8:33; Acts 7:7; men are said δουλεύειν who bear the yoke of the Mosaic law, Galatians 4:25 (see δουλεία).
2. metaphorically, to obey, submit to;
   a. in a good sense: absolutely, to yield obedience, Romans 7:6; τίνι, to obey one’s commands and render to him the services due, Luke 15:29; God: Matthew 6:24; Luke 16:13; 1 Thessalonians 1:9; κυρίῳ and τῷ κυρίῳ, Acts 20:19; Romans 12:11 (not Rec.st, see below); Ephesians 6:7; Christ: Romans 14:18; Colossians 3:24; νόμῳ Θεοῦ, according to the context, feel myself bound to, Romans 7:25; τοῖς θεοῖς, to worship gods, Galatians 4:8; τῷ καιρῷ (Anth. 9, 441, 6), wisely adapt oneself to, Romans 12:11 Rec.st (see above), cf. Fritzsche at the passage; perform services of kindness and Christian love: ἀλλήλοις, Galatians 5:13; used of those who zealously advance the interests of anything: ὡς πατρί τέκνον σύν ἐμοί ἐδούλευσεν εἰς τό εὐαγγέλιον equivalent to ὡς πατρί τέκνον δουλεύει, ἐμοί ἐδούλευσεν καί οὕτω σύν ἐμοί ἐδούλευσεν, etc. Philippians 2:22 (Winers Grammar, 422 (393); 577 (537)).
   b. in a bad sense, of those who become slaves to some base power, to yield to, give oneself up to: τῇ ἁμαρτία, Romans 6:6; νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας, Romans 7:25; ἐπιθυμίαις καί ἡδοναῖς, Titus 3:3, (Xenophon, mem. 1, 5, 5; Apology Socrates 16; Plato, Phaedrus, p. 238 e.; Polybius 17, 15, 16; Herodian, 1, 17, 22 (9, Bekker edition)); τῇ κοιλία, Romans 16:18, (γαστρί, Anthol. 11, 410, 4; Xenophon, mem. 1, 6, 8;abdomini servire, Seneca, de benef. 7, 26, 4;ventri obedire, Sall. (Cat. 1:1)); μαμωνᾷ, to devote oneself to getting wealth: Matthew 6:24; Luke 16:13. τοῖς στοιχειοις τοῦ κόσμου, Galatians 4:9.

Question 258

δουλόω

Answer 258

to enslave, to cause one to become a slave; (pass.) to become enslaved; see also {1528}

to reduce to servitude, enslave, oppress by retaining in servitude, Acts 7:6; 2 Pet. 2:19; met. to render subservient, 1 Cor. 9:19; pass. to be under restraint, 1 Cor. 7:15; to be in bondage, spiritually or morally, Gal. 4:3; Tit. 2:3; to become devoted to the service of, Rom. 6:18, 22*
δουλώσω, ἐδούλωσα, -, δεδούλωμαι, ἐδουλώθην

Thayer’s Definition
to make a slave of, reduce to bondage
metaph. give myself wholly to one’s needs and service, make myself a bondman to him

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δουλ-όω,

enslave, Hdt. 1.27; δουλοῖς καὶ σὲ καὶ πᾶσαν πόλιν A. Th. 254, cf. S. Tr. 467; δ. φρόνημα Th. 2.61: — mostly in Pass., to be enslaved, ὑπὸ Πέρσῃσι, ὑπὸ Ἁρπάγου, Hdt. 1.94, 174, cf. Th. 1.98; αἱ ψ[]χαὶ δεδούλωνται Hp. Aër. 23; δεδουλωμένοι τῇ γνώμῃ, τὴν γνώμην ἐδουλοῦντο, Th. 4.34, 7.71; ἐλεύθερος πᾶς ἑνὶ δεδούλωται, νόμῳ Men. 699, cf Sam. 280: — Med. (with pf. δεδουλῶσθαι Th. 6.82), make subject to oneself, enslave, Id. 1.18, 5.29, 7.68, 75, Pl. Mx. 239d; τὸν ἥσσονα δουλούμεθ’ ἄνδρα E. Supp. 493; ἐπιθυμίαν Pl. Lg. 838d; τὸ ἑαυτοῦ θειότατον ὑπὸ τῷ ἀθεωτάτῳ.. δουλοῦται Id. R. 589e.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δουλόω, δούλῳ: future δουλώσω; 1 aorist ἐδούλωσα; perfect passive δεδουλωμαι; 1 aorist passive ἐδουλωθην; (δοῦλος); (from Aeschylus and Herodotus down); to make a slave of, reduce to bondage;

a. properly: τινα, Acts 7:6; τούτῳ καί (yet T WH omit; Tr brackets καί) δεδούλωται to him he has also been made a bondman, 2 Peter 2:19.
b. metaphorically: ἐμαυτόν τίνι, give myself wholly to one’s needs and service, make myself a bondman to him, 1 Corinthians 9:19; δουλουσθαι τίνι, to be made subject to the rule of some one, e. g. τῇ δικαιοσύνη, τῷ Θεῷ, Romans 6:18, 22; likewise ὑπό τί, Galatians 4:3; δεδουλωμενος οἴνῳ, wholly given up to, enslaved to, Titus 2:3 (δουλεύειν οἴνῳ, Libanius, epist. 319); δεδουλωμαι ἐν τίνι, to be under bondage, held by constraint of law or necessity, in some matter, 1 Corinthians 7:15. (Compare: καταδουλόω.)

Question 259

ἐνδυναμόω

Answer 259

to empower, invigorate, be invigorated, to give strength, strengthen; (mid./pass.) to be strong, strengthened

to empower, invigorate, Phil. 4:13; 1 Tim. 1:12; 2 Tim. 4:17; mid. to summon up vigor, put forth energy, Eph. 6:10; 2 Tim. 2:1; pass. to acquire strength, be invigorated, be strong, Acts 9:22; Rom. 4:20*

Thayer’s Definition
to be strong, endue with strength, strengthen
to receive strength, be strengthened, increase in strength
in a bad sense
be bold, headstrong

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐνδυνᾰμ-όω,

I strengthen, confirm, LXX Judges 6:34, 1 Timothy 1:12, al.: — Pass., ἐπὶ τῇ ματαιότητι LXX Psalms 51:9(52).9; τῇ πίστει Romans 4:20, al.

II endow with vitality, in Pass., metaph. of scientific theorems, Plot. 4.9.5.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐνδυναμόω, ἐνδυνάμω; 1 aorist ἐνεδυναμωσα; passive (present imperative 2 person singular ἐνδυναμοῦ, 2 person plural ἐνδυναμοῦσθε); imperfect 3 person singular ἐνεδυναμοῦτο; 1 aorist ἐνεδυναμωθην; (from ἐνδυναμος equivalent to ὁ ἐν δυνάμει ὤν); to make strong, endue with strength, strengthen: τινα, Philippians 4:13; 1 Timothy 1:12; 2 Timothy 4:17; passively, to receive strength, be strengthened, increase in strength: Arts 9:22; ἐν τίνι, in anything, 2 Timothy 2:1; ἐν κυρίῳ in union with the Lord, Ephesians 6:10; with the dative of respect, τῇ πίστει, Romans 4:20; ἀπό ἀσθενείας, to recover strength from weakness or disease, Hebrews 11:34 R G; (in a bad sense, be bold, headstrong, Psalm 51:9 (); (Judges 6:34 Alex., Ald., Complutensian; 1 Chronicles 12:18 Alex.; Genesis 7:20 Aq.); elsewhere only in ecclesiastical writings).

Question 260

ἐπέρχομαι

Answer 260

to come, come upon, happen to

to come to, Acts 14:19; to come upon, Lk. 1:35; 21:26; Acts 1:8; Jas. 5:1; to be coming on, to succeed, Eph. 2:7; to occur, happen to, Acts 8:24; 13:40; to come against, attack, Lk. 11:22*

Thayer's Definition
to come to arrive
of time, come on, be at hand, be future
to come upon, overtake, one
of sleep
of disease
of calamities
of the Holy Spirit, descending and operating in one
of an enemy attacking one

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐπέρχομαι,

impf. ἐπηρχόμην Th. 4.120 (unless fr. ἐπάρχομαι: Att. impf. is ἐπῇα (but v. ἔρχομαι) and fut. ἔπειμι): aor. 2 ἐπῆλθον, -ήλῠθον: pf. -ελήλυθα:

I come upon:

1 of persons, approach, c. dat., Il. 12.200, 218, etc.; esp. come suddenly upon, Od. 19.155, Hdt. 6.95: c. acc., ἐ. πόλιν E. HF 593 codd. (nisi leg. ἐς-); come to for advice, μάντεις, μοῦσαν, Id. Supp. 155, Hel. 165, cf. Pl. Lg. 772d: with Preps., ἐ. ἐς ποταμόν Od. 7.280, cf. S. Aj. 438: metaph., ἐ. ἐς λόγου στάσιν Id. Tr. 1180; ἐ. ἐς πόλεμον Th. 3.47; ἐ. ἐνθάδε Il. 24.651. freq. in hostile sense, go or come against, attack, abs., 12.136, al., Th. 1.90, etc.: c. dat., Il. 20.91, E. Ba. 736, Th. 6.34, etc.: rarely c. acc., τμήδην αὐχέν’ ἐπῆλθε Il. 7.262; τὴν τῶν πέλας ἐ. invade it, Th. 2.39: hence, visit, reprove, ταῦτα μέν σε πρῶτ’ ἐπῆλθον E. IA 349, cf. Andr. 688: with a Pr, invade, ἐπὶ τὴν οἰκίαν PFay. 12.12 (ii B.C.). come forward to speak, E. Or. 931, Th. 1.119, Pl. Lg. 850c; ἐ. ἐπὶ τὸν δῆμον, ἐπὶ τοὺς ἐφόρους, Hdt. 5.97, 9.7; ἐπὶ τὸ κοινόν Th. 1.90; τοῖς Αακεδαιμονίοις ib. 91. in Law, proceed against, ἐπί τινα PEleph. 3.3 (iii B.C.); ἐπί τινα περί τινος PAmh. 2.96.8 (iii A.D.); τινὶ περί τινος POxy. 489.11 (ii A.D.); ἐπὶ πιττάκιον impugn, BGU 1167.14 (i B.C.): also in aor. 1 ἐπελεύσασθαι PStrassb. 35.25 (ii B.C.), etc. (ἐπιπορεύομαι (q. v.) is more common in the pres. in the Hellenistic period.)

2. of events, conditions, etc., come upon, esp. come suddenly upon, c. acc., μιν.. ἐπήλυθε νήδυμος ὕπνος Od. 4.793, al., cf. Hdt. 2.141; ἔρως γὰρ ἄνδρας οὐ μόνους ἐπέρχεται E. Fr. 431: c. dat., τοῖσιν ἐπήλυθε νήδυμος ὕπνος Od. 12.311, cf. 5.472; μοι νοῦσος ἐπήλυθεν 11.200; βροτοῖσιν.. ὅταν κλύδων κακῶν ἐπέλθῃ A. Pers. 600, cf. Ag. 1256; ἐπῆλθέ μοι πάθος Pl. Lg. 811d, etc.
3. c. dat. pers., come into one’s head, occur to one, ἵμερος ἐπειρέσθαι μοι ἐπῆλθε Hdt. 1.30; ὅ τι ἂν ἐπέλθῃ Lat. quicquid in buccam venerit, Isoc. 12.24: impers. c. inf., καί οἱ ἐπῆλθε πταρεῖν Hdt. 6.107, cf. S. Tr. 134 (lyr.); ἐμοὶ τοιαῦτ’ ἄττα ἐ. λέγειν Pl. Grg. 485e, etc.; also ἐπέρχεταί με λέγειν Id. Phd. 88d.
4. come in, of revenues, etc., ἐπερχόμενοι τόκοι, ἐπιβολαί, BGU 155.11 (ii A.D.), 1049.16 (iv A.D.).

II of Time,

1. come on, ἐπήλυθον ὧραι the season came round again, Od. 2.107, etc.; also, come on, be at hand, νὺξ δ’ ἄρ’ ἐπῆλθε 14.457; γῆρας ἐ. Thgn. 528, 728; ἕκαθεν ἐπελθὼν ὁ μέλλων χρόνος Pi. O. 10(11).7; τὸ παρὸν τό τ’ ἐπερχόμενον πῆμα and that which is coming, the future, A. Pr. 98.
2. come in after or over another, of a second wife, Hdt. 5.41.

III

1. go over or on a space, traverse, mostly of persons, c. acc., πολλὴν γαῖαν Od. 4.268; ἀγρόν 16.27; ἄγκεα πολλά Il. 18.321, cf. Od. 14.139, Hdt. 1.30; go the round of, visit, δόμους S. El. 1297; ναοὺς χοροῖς Id. Ant. 153 (lyr.); πόλιν, of a god, Maced. Pac. 29; of an officer, πύλας φυλακάς τ’ ἐπῆλθον E. Ph. 699; τὰς ξυνωμοσίας ἐπελθών Th. 8.54; walk on ice, Id. 3.23; also of water, ἐπέρχεται ὁ Νεῖλος τὸ Δέλτα overflows it, Hdt. 2.19, cf. A. Supp. 559 (lyr.), Th. 3.89.
2. go through or over, discuss, recount, c. acc., Hes. Fr. 160.4 codd. Str., Ar. Eq. 618; review, τὰ εἰρημένα περί τινος Arist. EN 1172b8; also ἐ. περί τινος Id. Ph. 189b31, al.; folld. by an interrog., πειρατέον ἐπελθεῖν τίνες.. Id. Pol. 1289b24; πῶς δεῖ.. ἐπέλθωμεν συντόμως ib. 1317a15.
3. accomplish, πολέμῳ καὶ διαχειρίσει πραγμάτων Th. 1.97. come up to, imitate, πάτρῳ Pi. P. 6.46.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπέρχομαι; future ἐπελεύσομαι; 2 aorist ἐπῆλθον (3 person plural Ἐπῆλθαν, Acts 14:19 L T Tr WH); the Sept. chiefly for בּוא;

1. to come to, to arrive;
   a. universally, followed by ἀπό with a genitive of place, Acts 14:19.
   b. of time; to come on, be at hand, be future: ἐν τοῖς αἰῶσι τοῖς ἐπερχομένοις, Ephesians 2:7 (Isaiah 41:4, 22, 23; in Greek writings from Homer down); of that which time will bring, to impend: ἡ ταλαιπωρία ἡ ἐπερχομενη, James 5:1: τίνι, Luke 21:26 (Isaiah 63:4; also of things favorable, ἡ εὐλογία, Sir. 3:8).
2. to come upon, overtake, one; so even in Homer, as of sleep, τινα, Odyssey 4, 793; 10, 31; τίνι, 12, 311: of disease, 11, 200: ἐπί τινα, a. of calamities: Luke 21:35 R G; Acts 8:24; Acts 13:40 (L T Tr text WH omit; Tr marginal reading brackets ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς) (Genesis 42:21; Micah 3:11; Zephaniah 2:2; 2 Chronicles 20:9; Jeremiah 5:12 (here ἥξει)).
   b. of the Holy Spirit, descending and operating in one: Luke 1:35; Acts 1:8.
   c. of an enemy attacking one: ἐπελθών νικήσῃ αὐτόν, Luke 11:22; (Homer, Iliad 12, 136; 1 Samuel 30:23; with the dative of person Herodian, 1, 8, 12 (6 Bekker)).

Question 261

ἀνέχομαι

Answer 261

to put up with, endure

also listed as ἀνέχω, but it is always in the middle in our literature, to endure patiently, 1 Cor. 4:12; 2 Cor. 11:20; 2 Thess. 1:4; to bear with, Matt 17:7; to suffer, admit, permit, Acts 18:14; 2 Cor. 11:4; 2 Tim. 4:3; Heb. 13:22
ἀνέξομαι, ἀνεσχόμην -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to hold up
to hold one’s self erect and firm
to sustain, to bear, to endure

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀνέχω: in the N. T. only in the middle ἀνέχομαι; future ἀνέξομαι (Winer’s Grammar, 83 (79)); imperfect ἠνειχόμην 2 Corinthians 11:4 (Rec.) (2 Corinthians 11:1 Rec.elz) (G T Tr WH marginal reading ἀνειχομην (cf. Moeris, Piers. edition, p. 176; (but L WH text in 2 Corinthians 11:4 ἀνέχεσθε); cf. WHs Appendix, p. 162; Winers Grammar, 72 (70); Buttmann, 35 (31))); 2 aorist ἠνεσχόμην Acts 18:14 (L T Tr WH ἀνεσχόμην, references as above); to hold up (e. g. κεφαλήν, χεῖρας, Homer and others); hence, in middle to hold oneself erect and firm (against any person or thing), to sustain, to bear (with equanimity), to bear with, endure, with a genitive of the person (in Greek writings the accusative is more common, both of the person and of the thing), of his opinions, actions, etc.: Matthew 17:17; Mark 9:19; Luke 9:41; 2 Corinthians 11:19; Ephesians 4:2; Colossians 3:13. followed by the genitive of the thing: 2 Thessalonians 1:4 (WH marginal reading ἐνέχεσθε) (αἷς by attraction for ὧν, unless ἅς be preferred (Buttmann, 161 (140); cf. Winer’s Grammar, 202 (190))). followed by μικρόν τί with the genitive of both person and thing, 2 Corinthians 11:1 (according to the reading μου μικρόν τί ἀφροσύνης (Rbez Relz L T Tr WH); cf. Meyer at the passage). without a case, 1 Corinthians 4:12 (we endure). followed by εἰ τίς, 2 Corinthians 11:20. Owing to the context, to hear with i. e. to listen: with the genitive of the person, Acts 18:14; of the thing, 2 Timothy 4:3; Hebrews 13:22. (Compare: προσανέχω.)

Question 262

ἀνεκτός, ον / ἀνεκτότερος

Answer 262

bearable, tolerable; used only in the comparative: more bearable

tolerable, supportable, Mt. 10:15; 11:22, 24; Lk. 10:12, 14*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀνεκτοìτερος

Comparative of a derivative of G430

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀνεκτός, ἀνεκτον, and in later Greek also ἀνεκτός, ἀνεκτη, ἀνεκτον (cf. Winers Grammar, 68 (67); Buttmann, 25 (22)) (ἀνέχομαι to bear, endure); from Homer down; bearable, tolerable: ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται the lot will be more tolerable, Matthew 10:15; Matthew 11:22, 24; Mark 6:11 R L brackets; Luke 10:12, 14. (In Greek writings from Homer down.)

Question 263

ἀπέχω

Answer 263

to have, to have or receive in full, to be enough or sufficient; to be distant or estranged; (mid.) to abstain, avoid

trans. to have in full what is due or is sought, Mt. 6:2, 5, 16; Lk. 6:24; Phil. 4:18; to have altogether, Phlm. 15; hence, it is enough, Mk. 14:41; intrans. to be distant, Lk. 7:6; to be estranged, Mt. 15:8; Mk. 7:6, mid. to abstain from, Acts 14:20
- , -, -, -, -

Thayer's Definition
have
to hold back, keep off, prevent
to have wholly or in full, to have received
it is enough, sufficient
to be away, absent, distant
to hold one's self off, abstain
"have" in Mat. 6.2, is modified with a prefix which changes itsmeaning to "have in full" and was commonly used on business receiptsto mean "paid in full". No payment or service was expected to followthe close of the transaction.

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀπέχω,

fut. ἀφέξω, and (Od. 19.572) ἀποσχήσω: aor. ἀπέσχον: —

I

1. keep off or away from, αἴ κεν τυδέος υἱὸν ἀπόσχη Ἰλίου ἱρῆς Il. 6.96, 277; ἑκὰς νήσων ἀπέχων εὐεργέα νῆα Od. 15.33; κληῖδες ἀπ’ ὤμων αὐχέν’ ἔχουσιν the collar-bone parts the neck from the shoulders, Il. 22.324; Εὐβοίης ἀπέχειν.. αἶγας Orac. ap. Hdt. 8.20, cf. 22; ἄπεχε τῆς βοὸς τὸν ταῦρον A. Ag. 1125 (lyr.), cf. Pr. 687 (lyr.).
2. c. dat. pers., τοι.. χεῖρας ἀφέξω Od. 20.263.
3. with a Pr, ἀ. φρένα περισσῶν παρὰ φωτῶν E. Ba. 427 (lyr.); ῥῖνα ἀπὸ κάκκης Ar. Pax 162.
4. c.acc. only, keep off or away, σκοτεινὸν ἀ. ψόγον Pi.N. 7.61; ἀ. φάσγανον E. Or. 1519.
5. οὐδὲν ἀπέχει c. inf., nothing hinders, debars one from doing, Pl. Cra.407b, Plu. 2.433a.

II Med., κακῶν ἄπο χεῖρας ἔχεσθαι

1. hold one’s hands off or away from.., Od. 22.316; κυάμων ἄπο χεῖρας ἔχεσθε Emp. 141; ἀθανάτων ἀ. χεῖρας A. Eu. 350 (lyr.), cf. Supp. 756, Pl. Smp. 213d, 214d: — but mostly,
2. ἀπέχεσθαί τινος hold oneself off a thing, abstain or desist from it, πολέμου Il. 8.35, al.; βοῶν Od. 12.321; οὐδὲ.. σευ ἀφέξομαι will not keep my hands off thee, ib. 19.489; Δεκελέης abstain from ravaging D., Hdt. 0.73, cf. 1.66, 4.118, al., Th. 1.20, etc.; keep away from, πόλεως X. HG 7.3.10: in pf. Pass., μηδὲ τῶν μικρῶν ἀπεσχημένον D. 27.47; ἀγορᾶς ἀπεσχ. Arist. Pol. 1278a25.
3. c. inf., ἀπέχεσθαι μὴ στρατεῦσαι abstain from marching, Th. 5.25; λαμβάνειν ἀπέσχετο Philem. 94.3; ἀπέχεσθαι τοῦ ποιεῖν X. Mem. 4.2.3; οὐκ ἀ. τὸ μὴ οὐ ποιεῖν Id. Cyr. 1.6.32, Pl. R. 354b: also c. part., Jul. Or. 1.43d.
4. abs., refrain oneself, D. 21.61.

III intr. in Act.,

1. to be away or far from, c. gen. loci, τῶν Ἐπιπολῶν ἓξ ἢ ἑπτὰ σταδίους Th. 6.97; ἀ.ἀπὸ Βαβυλῶνος, etc., Hdt. 1.179,cf. 3.26,al.; ἀπὸ θαλάττης.. δώδεκα δδὸν ἡμερῶν ἀ. Euphro 11.3; ἀ. παμπόλλων ἡμερῶν ὁδόν X. Cyr. 1.1.3; τὸ μέσον ἴσον τῶν ἐσχάτων ἀ. Pl. Prm. 145b; πλεῖστον ἀ. κατὰ τόπον Arist. Mete. 363a31; a). τὴν ἡμίσειαν διάμετρον Id. Cael. 293b30, etc. project, extend, Id. GA 781a11; τὰἀπέχοντα prominent parts, PA 655a32. ἀποσχὼν τεσσαράκοντα μάλιστα σταδίους μὴ φθάσαι ἐλθών failing to arrinein time by.., Th. 5.3.
2. of actions, to be far from, ἀπεῖχον τῆς ἐξευρέσιος οὐδὲν ἔλασσον were just as farfrom the discovery, Hdt. 1.67; τοσοῦτον ἀπέχω τοῦ ποιεῖν τι ὥστε.. Isoc. 6.70; τοσούτῳ πλέον ἡμῶν ἀπέχεις τοῦ πιστὰ λέγειν ὅσον.. ib. 11.32; ἀπέχει τοῦ μὴ μετ’ ὀργῆς [πράττειν ] D. 21.41; πλεῖστον ἀ. τινός to be as far as possible from doing, X. Mem. 1.2.62; but τοσοῦτ’ ἀπέχει τῶν χορηγῶν so far is it from the thoughts of.., D. 21.59.
3. generally, to be far remoued from, πολιτείας, μοναρχίας, Arist. Pol. 1289b2, 1293a17; τοῦ μέσου Id. EN 1109a10.
4. differ from, οὐδέν τι ἀπεῖχε γαμετῆς γυναικός Hdn. 1.16.4.
5. διαφύσιες.. ᾗσιν οὐδὲν ἀπέχει ἀγγεῖα εἶναι
6. nothing is wanting, Hp. de Arte 10. have or receive in full, τὴν ἀπόκρισιν Aeschin. 2.50; τὸ χρέος ἀ. receive payment in full, Call. Epigr. 55; χάριτας ib. 51; ἀπέχω in receipts, BGU 612.2 (i A.D.), etc.; ἀ. τὸν μισθόν Plu. Sol. 22, Matthew 6:2, al.; καρπὸν ἀ. τῶν πονηθέντων Plu. Them. 17; ἀ. τὸ μέτεριον Id. 2.124e.
7. impers., ἀπέχει it sufficeth, it is enough, Mark 14:41, cf. Anacreont. 15.33.

Question 264

ἐπέχω

Answer 264

I hold out over, extend, offer/present, pause, have power over, hold back/keep in check, give attention to, hold fast,
(tr.) hold out, hold fast; (intr.) to give attention, watch, notice; to stay, stop

trans. to hold out, present, exhibit, display, Phil. 2:16; intrans. to observe, take heed to, attend to, Lk. 14:7; Acts 3:5; 1 Tim. 4:16; to stay, delay, Acts 19:22*

(ἐπεῖχον), -, ἐπέσχον, -, -, -

Thayer's Definition
to have or hold upon, apply, to observe, attend to
to give attention to
to hold towards, hold forth, present
to check
delay, stop, stay

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐπέχω,

I fut. ἐφέξω (v. infr. IV. 1, 2) and ἐπισχήσω E. Andr. 160, D. 45.88: aor. ἐπέσχον, imper. ἐπίσχες, inf. ἐπισχεῖν; poet. ἐπισχέθοι A. Th. 453 (lyr.), ἐπέσχεθον A.R. 4.1622: pf. ἐπέσχηκα Supp.Epigr. 1.362.12 (Samos, iv B.C.): — have or hold upon, θρῆνυν.., τῷ κεν ἐπισχοίης (v.l. ἐπίσχοιας) λιπαροὺς πόδας Il. 14.241, cf. Od. 17.410; ποτῷ κρωσσὸν ἐ. hold it to or for.., Theoc. 13.46; λόγον ζωῆς ἐπέχοντες (sc. κόσμῳ) holding it out like a torch, Philippians 2:16 : — Med., hold by, χειρός A.R. 4.751.

II

1. hold out to, present, offer, οἶνον ἐπισχών Il. 9.489; ἐπέσχε τε οἶνον ἐρυθρόν Od. 16.444; κοτύλην.. ἐπέσχε Il. 22.494; εἴ ποτέ τοι.. μαζὸν ἐπέσχον ib. 83, cf. E. Andr. 225; also γάλακτι δ’ οὐκ ἐπέσχον οὐδὲ μαστῷ τροφεῖα ματρός I offered not mother’s food with my breast, Id. Ion 1492: c. inf., πιεῖν ἐπέσχον Ar. Nu. 1382: abs., Id. Pax 1167: — Med., ἐπισχόμενος (sc. τὴν κύλικα) ἐξέπιεν having put it to his lips, Pl. Phd. 117c, cf. Stesich. 7, A.R. 1.472, Luc. Tox. 37; ἐπὶ χείλεσι.. μαστὸν ἐπισχομένη Euph. 92; present a sum of money, τῇ πόλει Supp.Epigr. l.c.
2. extend, spread out, τὴν πλεκτάνην Arist. HA 550b6.
3. simply, hold, σκῆπτρα IPE 2.37 (Panticapaeum); of writings, contain, Philostr. VS 2.24.2, cf. 2.9.1.
4. enjoin, impose a task, c. dat. pers., Procop. Arc. 17, Vand. 1.8.

III

1. hold or direct towards, ἔπεχε τόξον σκοπῷ Pi. O. 2.89; ἄλλῳ ἐπεῖχε τόξα E. HF 984: — Med., abs., ἐπισχόμενος βάλεν ἰῷ having aimed at him he hit him, Od. 22.15. intr., aim at, attack, τί μοι ὧδ’ ἐπέχεις; why thus launch out against me? 19.71; in tmesi, ἐπὶ αὐτῷ πάντες ἔχωμεν 22.75; ἀλλήλοις ἐ. Hes. Th. 711; ἄνδρα ἐπέχοντα τῷ Πύρρῳ Plu. Pyrrh. 16; ἐπέχειν ἐπί τινα Hdt. 9.59; τὰς ἐπὶ σφίσι ναῦς ἐπεχούσας Th. 8.105; πρός τι Plu. Ant. 66: c. dat., ἀκτῇσιν ἐπέσχεθον held straight for the beach, A.R. 4.1766: abs., E. Ba. 1131.
2. ἐπέχειν τὴν διάνοιαν ἐπί τινι direct one’s mind to a thing, Pl. Lg. 926b; τῷ πολέμῳ τὴν γνώμην Plu. Aem. 8, etc.; also ἐ. ἑαυτόν τινι attend to him, Pl. R. 399b codd. abs., ἐπέχειν (sc. τὸν νοῦν) intend, purpose, c. inf., ἐπεῖχε ἐλλάμψεσθαι Hdt. 1.80, cf. 153, 6.96: c. dat. rei, to be intent upon, ταῖς ἀρχαῖς, διαβάσει, etc., Ar. Lys. 490, Plb. 3.43.2, etc.
3. stand facing, face in a line of battle, οὗτοι (sc. οἱ Μῆδοι) ἐπέσχον Κορινθίους Hdt. 9.31. hold back, keep in check, ἐπέσχε δὲ καλὰ ῥέεθρα Il. 21.244; καὶ πῶς ἐπέσχε χεῖρα μαιμῶσαν φόνου; S. Aj. 50; ἐπισχὼν ἡνίαν ib. 847; ἐπίσχωμεν τὸ πλεῖν Id. Ph. 881; ὀργάς E. Hel. 1642; οὐκ ἐφέξετε στόμα; Id. Hec. 1283; χρησμοὺς ἐ. withhold them, Id. Ph. 866; ἐπέχειν τινὰ τῷ ξύλῳ keep him down with the stick, Ar. Pax 1121; τὸ εὐθέως ἐπιχειρεῖν Th. 7.33; confine, as the earth a corpse, AP 7.461 (Mel.); ἐ. τῇ χειρὶ τὸ στόμα cover, Plu. Cat.Mi. 28; ἐπέχομεν τὴν ἐκπνοήν Gal. 6.172; τὰς διαχωρήσεις ἐ. Id. Vict.Att. 12: — Med., ἐπισχόμενος τὰ ὦτα Pl. Smp. 216a: —
4. Pass., τοῦ βάθους ἐπεσχημένου J. AJ 5.1.3; to be prevented, hindered, ὑπό τινος PFreib. 11.13 (iv A.D.); of the menses, Gal. 1.184. stay or adjourn proceedings, τὰ πρὸς Ἀργείους Th. 5.46; τὴν ζημίαν καὶ τὴν κατασκαφήν ib. 63; τὴν δίαιταν D. 21.84; suspend payments, in Pass., PTeb. 337.4 (ii/iii A.D.), cf. PGiss. 48.11 (iii A.D.). ἐ. τινά τινος stop, hinder from, E. Andr. 160, Ar. Lys. 742, D.S. 13.87: c. inf., σε μήτε νὺξ μήτε ἡμέρα ἐπισχέτω ὥστε ἀνεῖναι.. let them not stop thee so that thou neglect.., Th. 1.129; ἐ. τινὰ μὴ πράσσειν τι S. El. 517, Ph. 349; κλαυθμυρίζον τὸ βρέφος ἐπισχεῖν μὴ δυνάμεναι Sor. 1.88: — Pass., μηδενὸς ἐπεχομένου no objection being taken, PTeb. 327.37 (ii A.D.). impers., ἐπέχει there is a hindrance, Astramps. Orac. 97.3.
5. abs., stay, pause, Ἀντίνοος δ’ ἔτ’ ἐπεῖχε Od. 21.186; refrain, Hdt. 1.32, 5.51, 7.139; εἰ δ’ ἐφέξετον if you tarry, S. El. 1369, etc.: folld. by a Conj., esp. in imper., ἐπίσχες ἢν.. wait and see whether.., E. Supp. 397; ἐπίσχες ἔστ’ ἂν.. προσμάθῃς A. Pr. 697; ἐ. ἕως.. D. 4.1; μέχρι τοσούτου ἔως.. Th. 1.90; ἐπίσχες, abs., hold! stop! A. Ch. 896, S. OC 856, etc.; ἐπίσχετε, μηδὲ συρίξητε Timocl. 2.6D.; ἐπίσχετον, μάθωμεν S. Ph. 539, cf. E. Hipp. 567; in part., ἐπισχὼν ὀλίγον χρόνον Hdt. 1.132, al.; τὸ ἐπισχεῖν, opp. τὸ παραχρῆμα, Antipho 5.73; οὐ πολὺν χρόνον ἐπισχὼν ἧκεν came after a short interval, Pl. Phd. 59e; μικρὸν ἐπισχόντα διεφθείροντο they very shortly died, Thphr. HP 4.4.13, cf. Diocl.Fr. 43; in Th. 2.81 οὐκ ἐπέσχον τὸ στρατόπεδον καταλαβεῖν did not halt for the purpose of occupying a camp (unless it, = ‘ had no intention of occupying’). c. gen. rei, stop or cease from, ἐπίσχες τοῦ δρόμου Ar. Av. 1200; τῆς πορείας X. Cyr. 4.2.12; τούτου Th. 8.31; also ἐ. περί τινος Id. 5.32, cf. 8.5: so c. inf., leave off, cease to do, X. Mem. 3.6.10: c. part., cease doing, ἀναλῶν οὐκ ἐφέξεις Ar. Eq. 915 (lyr.), cf. E. Ph. 449. as technical term of the Sceptics, suspend judgement, doubt, Str. 2.1.11, Ph. 1.387, S.E. P. 1.196; ἐ. ἐν τοῖς ἀδήλοις Plu. 2.955c; [πρὸς] τὰ ἄδηλα Arr. Epict. 1.7.5.
6. Med., maintain reserve, ἐπείχετο [ἡ σύγκλητος] κατὰ τοὺς Ἀθηναίους Plb. 30.19.17 (s. v.l.). reach or extend over a space, ἐπτὰ δ’ ἐπέσχε πέλεθρα Il. 21.407; ὁπόσσον ἐπέσχε πυρὸς μένος so far as the fire reached, 23.238, cf. Hdt. 7.19, Th. 2.77, f.l. in Hp. Aër. 5, etc.: aor. Med., ἐπέσχετο he lay outstretched, Hes. Th. 177; βούβρωστις ἐπέσχετο κόσμον prevailed over.., Epigr.Gr. 793.5 (Apollonia); ἀφορία ἐ. τὸν βίον Longin. 44.1. have power over, occupy a country, οἱ Σκύθαι τὴν Ἀσίην πᾶσαν ἐπέσχον Hdt. 1.104, cf. 108, 8.32, Th. 2.101, 7.62, etc.;
7. of things, ἐπ’ ὀκτὼ μῆνας Κυρηναίους ὀπώρη ἐ. occupies or engages them, Hdt. 4.199; τὴν πόλιν ἐπεῖχε κλαυθμός Plu. Oth. 17; ὧν τὰς χρόας τὸ ἡμερινὸν φῶς ἐ. overspreads, Pl. R. 508c: κραυγῆς ἐπεχούσης τὴν ἐκκλησίαν D.S. 13.87; πρὸ τοῦ τὰ σώματα τὰς ὠδῖνας ἐπισχεῖν Sor. 2.53: generally, occupy, τὴν κρατίστην μοῖραν ἐ. hold the foremost place, Longin. 9.1, cf. 44.12; ὕλης ἐ. τάξιν Stoic. 3.27; τὴν γῆν κέντρου λόγον ἐπέχουσαν D.L. 7.155, cf. Placit. 3. Praef.; τὸν τέλειον ἐ. λόγον Gal. 19.160; δίκην ἐπέχειν ἡμᾶς φυτῶν we are like plants, Meno Iatr. 6.18.
8. abs., prevail, predominate, ἢν μὴ λαμπρὸς ἄνεμος ἐπέχῃ Hdt. 2.96; σεισμοὶ ἐπέσχον ἐπὶ πλεῖστον μέρος γῆς Th. 1.23; πάντῃ ἐπεῖχε γαλήνη Timo 63; [ τῶν νεῶν] ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς θαλάσσης ἐπεχουσῶν being spread over.., Th. 1.50; τὴν [τύχην].., ἣ νῦν ἐπέχει D. 18.253; ἐτησίων ἐπεχόντων Plb. 5.5.6. of Time, continue, τὴν θύραν ἐπεῖχε κρούων Ar. Ec. 317; ἐπέχων καὶ οὐκ ἀνιείς continuously, Pl. Tht. 165e; ἐπὶ πλείους ἡμέρας ὁ σεισμὸς ἐπεῖχεν D.C. 68.25; σκότος, νὺξ ἐπέσχε, came on, Plu. Mar. 20, Crass. 30, etc. Med., fut. ἐπιέξομαι, meet, Orac. in Michel 855.39 (Magn. Mae.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπέχω; imperfect ἐπειχον; 2 aorist ἐπέσχον;

1. to have or hold upon, apply: namely, τόν νοῦν, to observe, attend to, followed by an indirect question, Luke 14:7; τίνι, dative of person, to give attention to one, Acts 3:5; 1 Timothy 4:16 (with the dative of a thing, Sir. 31:2 (Sir. 34:2); 2 Macc. 9:25; Polybius 3, 43, 2, etc.; fully ὀφθαλμόν τίνι, Lucian, dial. mar. 1, 2).
2. to hold toward, hold forth, present: λόγον ζωῆς, as a light, by which illumined ye are the lights of the world, Philippians 2:16 (others besides, cf. Meyer or Ellicott at the passage).
3. to check ((cf. English hold up), German anhalten): namely, ἐμαυτόν, to delay, stop, stay, Acts 19:22, and in Greek writings from Homer down; (cf. Winers Grammar, § 38, 1; Buttmann, 144 (126); Fritzsche on Sir. 5:1).

Question 265

μετέχω

Answer 265

to share in, partake in, take part in

to share in, partake, 1 Cor. 9:10, 12; 10:17, 21; 1 Cor. 10:30; Heb. 2:14; 5:13; to be a member of, Heb. 7:13*

-, μετέσχον, μετέσχηκα, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to be or become partaker
to partake

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μετέχω,

Aeol. πεδέχω Alc. 59, Sapph. 68.2; inf. πεδέχην Ead. Supp. 5.22: fut. μεθέξω Th. 8.86, later μεθέξομαι (3 sg. misspelt μεθέξετε) IG 3.1427: pf. μετέσχηκα Hdt. 3.80: — partake of, share in: —

Constr.:

I

1 mostly c. gen. rei only, κακοτάτων, βρόδων, Alc.l.c., Sapph. 68.2; ἀγαθῶν, κακῶν, βίου, Thgn. 82, 354, cf. A. Pr. 333; τῆς τοῦ Μάγου ὕβριος Hdt.l.c.; μ. τοῦ λόγου to be in the secret, Id. 1.127; τοῦ ἔργου And. 1.62: c. gen. pers., μ. τῶν πεντακισχιλίων to be members of the 5, 000, Th.l.c.; μ. τῆς πόλεως, τῆς πολιτείας, Lys. 6.48, 30.15; ἐκκλησίας Arist. Pol. 1282a29; also ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου μ. 1 Corinthians 10:17 : with dat. pers. added, μ. τινός τινι partake of something in common with another, οὔ οἱ μ. θράσεος Pi. P. 2.83; πόνων μ. Ἡρακλέει E. Heracl. 8; τῶν αὐτῶν ἔργων Ἐρατοσθένει μ. Lys. 12.58; μ. ἱερῶν καὶ θυσιῶν τισι X. HG 2.4.20; μ. τῶν ἴσων τισί Id. Cyr. 2.1.15, cf. Pl. Lg. 805d; κινδύνων Plb. 3.16.3; also ξὺν σοὶ μετεῖχον τῶν ἴσων S. El. 1168.

2. freq. the part or share is added, τοῦ πεδίου οὐκ ἐλαχίστην μοῖραν μ. Hdt. 1.204; μ. τάφου μέρος A. Ag. 507, cf. Ar. Pl. 226, Lys. 31.5; πλεῖστόν σου μέρος μεθέξομεν X. Cyr. 7.5.54.
3. c. acc. rei, μ. τὸ ἴσον (sc. μέρος) τῶν ἀγαθῶν τινι ib. 7.2.28, cf. E. Fr. 787; μ. τὰς ἴσας πληγὰς ἐμοί Ar. Pl. 1144; μ. τινὶ τὴν μερίδα PPetr. 3p.67 (iii B.C.).
4. rarely c. acc. only, ἀκερδῆ χάριν μ. S. OC 1484 (lyr.).
5. c. dat. rei only in a corrupt passage, τῇ.. κατὰ τὴν χώραν.. οἰκήσει μετεῖχον Th. 2.16.
6. μ. περὶ ἔργων καὶ τεχνῶν have some knowledge respecting.., Arist. Pol. 1282a11.
7. abs., to be a partner, PRLaws 14.11 (iii B.C.); οἱ μετέχοντες the partners, accomplices, Hdt. 8.132.

II in Platonic Philos., participate in a universal, Arist. Metaph. 990b31, 1037b19; τὰ μετέχοντα, opp. αἱ ἰδέαι, ib. 991a3: — Pass., μετέχονται (sc. αἱ ἰδέαι) are participated in, ib. 990b30, cf. S.E. M. 4.16, Procl. in Prm. p.650 S., etc.

III in Aristotelian Logic, share in, viz. admit the definition of, τὰ μὲν εἴδη μετέχει τῶν γενῶν, τὰ δὲ γένη τῶν εἰδῶν οὔ Arist. Top. 121a12, cf. 123a8, 143b14.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μετέχω; 2 aorist μετεσχον; perfect μετέσχηκα; to be or become partaker; to partake: τῆς ἐλπίδος αὐτοῦ, of the thing hoped for, 1 Corinthians 9:10 Rec. but G L T Tr WH have rightly restored ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τοῦ μετέχειν, in hope of partaking (of the harvest); with a genitive of the thing added, 1 Corinthians 9:12; 1 Corinthians 10:21; Hebrews 2:14; φυλῆς ἑτέρας, to belong to another tribe, be of another tribe, Hebrews 7:13; namely, τῆς τροφῆς, to partake of, eat, 1 Corinthians 10:30; γάλακτος, to partake of, feed on, milk, Hebrews 5:13; ἐκ τοῦ ἑνός ἄρτου namely, τί or τίνος (see ἐκ, I. 2 b.), 1 Corinthians 10:17; cf. Buttmann, § 132, 8; (Winer’s Grammar, § 28, 1; 30, 8 a.).

Question 266

μέτοχος, ον

Answer 266

sharing in, partners with

a partaker, Heb. 3:1, 14; 6:4; 12:8; an associate, partner, fellow, Lk. 5:7; Heb. 1:9*

Thayer’s Definition
sharing in, partaking
a partner (in a work, office, dignity)

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μέτοχος, ον,

I sharing in, partaking of, c. gen., [ τῆς συμφορῆς] τὸ πλεῦν μέτοχος Hdt. 3.52; μ. ἐλπίδων, τέχνης, E. Ion 698 (lyr.), Pl. Phdr. 262d; τοῦ βίου, of a wife, Diod.Com. 3.5; δίκης Arist. Mu. 401b29.

II

1. Subst., partner, accomplice in, τοῦ φόνου E. HF 721, Antipho 3.3.11: abs., Th. 8.92; partner in business, PHib. 1.109.3 (iii B. C.), PCair.Zen. 176.102 (iii B. C.), Ostr.Bodl. i92, 251 (ii B. C.), Luke 5:7, etc.
2. member of a board of officials, freq. in phrase ὁ δεῖνα καὶ μέτοχοι πράκτορες, ἐπιτηρηταί, ἀγορανόμοι, τραπεζῖται, etc., PFlor. 358.5 (ii A. D.), PSI 2.160.4 (ii A. D.), PStrassb. 52.17 (ii A. D.), POxy. 96.4 (ii A. D.), etc.
3. joint owner of a house, CPHerm. 119 A iv 20 (iii A. D.).

III θεῶν μέτοχοι, of the demigods, Arist. Fr. 640.20, cf. IG 14.2117 (Rome).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μέτοχος, μέτοχον (μετέχω);

1. sharing in, partaking of, with the genitive of the thing (Winer’s Grammar, § 30, 8 a.): Hebrews 3:1; Hebrews 6:4; Hebrews 12:8; τοῦ Χριστοῦ, of his mind, and of the salvation procured by him, Hebrews 3:14; cf. Bleek at the passage
2. a partner (in a work, office, dignity): Hebrews 1:9 (from Psalm 44:8 ()); Luke 5:7. (Herodotus, Euripides, Plato, Demosthenes, others.)

Question 267

παρέχω

Answer 267

Ι offer, hold out to, present, afford, give proof
to present, give; to show, give proof; to cause, bring about, promote; (mid.) to set (an example); to provide; to get for oneself

to hold beside; to hold out to, offer, present, Lk. 6:29; to confer, render, Lk. 7:4; Acts 22:2; 28:2; Col. 4:1; to afford, furnish, Acts 16:16; 17:31; 19:24; 1 Tim. 6:17; to exhibit, Tit. 2:7; to be the cause of, occasion, Mt. 26:10; Mk. 14:6; Lk. 11:7

(παρείχον), παρέξω, παρέσχον, παρέσχηκα, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to reach forth, offer
to show, afford, supply
to be the authors of, or to cause one to have
to give, bring, cause one something either favourable or unfavourable, to occasion
to offer, show or present one’s self
to exhibit or offer on one’s own part
to render or afford from one’s own resources or by one’s own power

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παρέχω,

fut. παρέξω Od. 18.317, Th. 8.48, παρασχήτω Id. 6.86, Isoc. 6.71, 15.248: pf. παρέσχηκα: aor. παρέσχον, inf. παρασχέμεν Il. 19.147; imper. παράσχες E. Hec. 842 (παράσχε is f.l.); poet. παρέσχεθον Hes. Th. 639, inf. παρασχεθεῖν Ar. Eq. 321; Aeol. παρέσκεθον Alc. Oxy. 1788 Fr. 15 ii 11; παρεχέσκετο is f.l. for cross παρεκέσκετο in Od. 14.521. [In Od. 19.113, πᾱρέχη.] Act., hand over, Il. 18.556; furnish, supply, φάος πάντεσσι παρέξω Od. 18.317; δῶρα Il. 19.147; esp. in Od., ἱερήϊα, βρῶσίν τε πόσιν τε, σῖτον, 14.250, 15.490, 18.360: abs., ἐγὼ δ’ εὖ πᾶσι παρέξω I will provide for all, 8.39; π. νέας Hdt. 4.83, 7.21; τεταρτημόριον τοῦ μισθώματος Id. 2.180; χρήματα Th. 8.48; ἀργύριον, ποίμνια, IG 12.39.69,45.4; αἱ δὲ Συράκουσαι σῦς.. παρέχουσιν Hermipp. 63.9; πληρώμαθ’ ἡ πόλις παρέχει the state finds men to man the ships, D. 21.155, cf. Lys. 19.43.
2. of natural objects, yield, produce, θάλασσα π. ἰχθῦς Od. 19.113; [ σίδηρον] παρέξει (sc. σόλος) Il. 23.835.
3. of incorporeal things, afford, cause, φιλότητα, ἀρετήν, γέλω τε καὶ εὐφροσύνην, 3.354, Od. 18.133, 20.8; ὀνίαις Alc. 88; π. εἰράναν τισί Pi. P. 9.23; ὕμνον Id. N. 6.33; αἶσαν Id. O. 6.102; Σάρδεσιπένθος A. Pers. 322; τύχην, φρίκην, S. OT 53, 1306 (anap.); χάριν, εὔνοιαν, Id. OC 1498 (lvr.), Tr. 708; ὄχλον, πρήγματα π., Hdt. 1.86, al. (v. πρᾶγμα) ; πόνον Alc. 19, Hdt. 1.177; ἔργον Ar. Nu. 523; π. εὔνοιαν εἴς τινα Antipho 5.76; αἴσθησιν παρέχει τινός enables one to observe a thing, Th. 2.50; but αἴσθησιν π., abs., it causes remark, is perceived, Id. 3.22, X. An. 4.6.13; πενία ἀνάγκῃ τὴν τόλμαν π. Th. 3.45; ὑφειμένου δόξαν π., = cross ὑφειμένῳ ἐοικέναι, Plu. 2.131a.

II present or offer for a purpose, 1 c. inf., [ ὄϊες ] παρέχουσι.. γάλα θῆσθαι Od. 4.89; π. τὸ σῶμα τύπτειν Ar. Nu. 441; τὸ στράτευμα π. τισὶ διαφθεῖραι Th. 8.50 (without inf., πτήξας δέμας παρεῖχε A. Pers. 210): with reflex. Pron., ἐμαυτόν σοι ἐμμελετᾶν π. I give myself up to you to practise upon, Pl. Phdr. 228e; π. ἐμαυτὸν ἐρωτᾶν Id. Ap. 33b, cf. Prt. 312c; π. ἑαυτοὺς τοῖς ἄρχουσι χρῆσθαι ἤν τι δέωνται X. Cyr. 1.2.9: rarely with a part., π. ἑαυτὸν δεδησόμενον Luc. Tox. 35.

2. give oneself up, submit oneself, ἑαυτόν being omitted, π. [ἑωυτοὺς] διαφθαρῆναι Hdt. 9.17; πατεῖν παρεῖχετῷ θέλοντι [ἑαυτόν ] S. Aj. 1146, cf. Ar. Nu. 422; τοῖς ἰατροῖς παρέχουσι.. ἀποτέμνειν καὶ ἀποκάειν X. Mem. 1.2.54, cf. Pl. Grg. 456b; τῷ λόγῳ ὥσπερ ἰατρῷ παρέχων ἀποκρίνου ib. 475d, cf. Tht. 191a; ἕτοιμός εἰμί σοι παρέχειν ἀποκρινόμενος Id. Prt. 348a; esp. of a woman, sens. obsc., Ar. Lys. 162, 227, Luc. DMeretr. 5.4, etc. (in full, π. ἑαυτήν Id. DMar. 13.1, Artem. 1.78).
3. with reflex. Pron. and a predicative, show, exhibit oneself so and so, π. ἐμαυτὸν ὅσιον καὶ δίκαιον Antipho 2.2.2; σπάνιον σεαυτὸν π. Pl. Euthphr. 3d; σαυτὸν σοφιστὴν π. Id. Prt. 312a; ἑαυτὸν π. εὐπειθῆ X. Cyr. 2.1.22; μέτριον ἐμαυτὸν π. Aeschin. 1.1; τοιοῦτον πολίτην Lys. 14.1; π.ἐν τῷ μέσῳ ἐμαυτόν X. Cyr. 7.5.46; δέμασἀ κέντητον παρέχων Pi. O. 1.21.

III allow, grant, σιγὴν παρασχὼν κλῦθί μου S. Tr. 1115: c. inf., ἐπεὶ παρέσχες ἀντιφωνῆσαι did’st allow me to.., ib. 1114; π. αὐτοὺς δικαστὰς.. γίγνεσθαι Th. 1.37: abs. in imperat., πάρεχε make way, E. Tr. 308, Cyc. 203, Ar. V. 1326, Av. 1720 (all lyr.); πάρεχ’ ἐκποδών Id. V. 949.

2. impers., παρέχει τινί c. inf., it is allowed, in one’s power to do so and so, παρεῖχε ἄν σφι εὐδαιμονέειν Hdt. 1.170, cf. 3.73, al., Pi. I. 8(7).76; ὑμῖν οὐ παρασχήσει ἀμύνασθαι Th. 6.86; σωφρονεῖν παρεῖχέ σοι E. El. 1080: neut. part. used abs., παρέχον it being in one’s power, since one can, like cross ἐξόν, παρόν, παρέχον [ὑμῖν] ἄρχειν Hdt. 5.49; also εὖ, καλῶς παρασχόν, Th. 1.120, 5.14; κάλλιον π. ib. 60. produce a person on demand, ἐς τὸ κοινόν X. HG 7.4.38; εἰς τὴν βουλήν, εἰς ἀγοράν (leg. αὔριον), εἰς κρίσιν, Lys. 13.23, 23.9, Aeschin. 2.117, cf. PHib. 1.168 (iii B.C.), etc. with a predic. added, make so and so, τὴν διέξοδόν οἱ ἀσφαλέα π. Hdt. 3.4; π. τινὰς βελτίους And. 1.136, cf. Pl. Phdr. 274e, 277a: with part., π. ξυμμάχους τὰς σπονδὰς δεχομένους Th. 5.35, cf. X. Oec. 21.4; κοινὴν τὴν πόλιν π. offer it as a common resort, Isoc. 4.52; γῆν ἄσυλον καὶ δόμους ἐχεγγύους π. E. Med. 388, etc. Med. παρέχομαι, fut. -έξομαι Antipho 5.20, Lys. 23.8, etc.; also παρασχήσομαι Antipho 5.24, Lys. 9.8: aor. 2 παρεσχόμην Isaiah 3:18-19 : pf. Pass. (in med. sense) παρέσχημαι X. An. 7.6.11, D. 27.49, 36.35: freq. used much like Act., without any reflex. sense:

1 supply of oneself or from one’s own means, νέας Hdt. 6.8, 15,al.; δαπάνην οἰκηΐην Id. 8.17; π. ὅπλα furnish a suit of armour, IG 12.22.11, Th. 8.97; οἱ τὰ τιμήματα παρεχόμενοι the tax- paying citizens, Arist. Ath. 39.6; μηδεμίαν δύναμιν π. εἰς τὴν στρατιάν supply no contingent of one’s own to.., X. An. 6.2.10; freq. with ἑαυτόν, εὔνουν καὶ πρόθυμον ἑαυτὸν παρέχεται SIG 333.11 (Samos, iv/iii B.C.), cf. 620.6 (Tenos, ii B.C.), etc.

2. of natural objects, furnish, present, exhibit, [ ποταμὸς] κροκοδείλους π. Hdt. 4.44; π. λίμνην ὁ Πόντος.. οὐ πολλῷ τεῳ ἐλάσσω ἑωυτοῦ ib. 86, cf. 46, Pl. Phd. 81d.
3. of works, ἓν ἔργον πολλὸν μέγιστον π. Hdt. 1.93.
4. of incorporeal things, display on one’s own part, πᾶσαν προθυμίην Id. 7.6, cf. X. An. 7.6.11; πᾶν τὸ πρόθυμον Th. 4.85, cf. 61; εὔνοιαν D. 18.10; χρείας Decr. ap. D. 18.84.

II in Law, παρέχεσθαί τινας μάρτυρας, π. τεκμήρια, bring forward witnesses or proofs, Pl. Revelation 19:1-21 d, Prm. 128b, Antipho 1.11, cf. 5.20,22, Lys. 23.8, etc.; π. ἐκμαρτυρίαν, μαρτυρίαν, Isa ll.cc.

III produce as one’s own, ἄρχοντα παρέχεσθαί τινα acknowledge as one’s general, Hdt. 7.61, 62, 67; Ἀθηναῖοι ἀρχαιότατον ἔθνος παρεχόμενοι presenting themselves as.., ib. 161; π.πόλιν μεγίστην, of an ambassador, represent a city in one’s own person, Th. 4.64, cf. 85. offer, promise, ἀψευδέα μαντήϊα Hdt. 2.174; ἔστιν ἃ π. Th. 3.36; put forward, τὸ εὐπρεπὲς τῆς δίκης Id. 1.39. render so and so for or towards oneself, θεὸν παρασχέσθαι εὐμενῆ E. Andr. 55; δυσμενεστέρους π. τοὺς ἀνθρώπους Pl. Prt. 317b, cf. R. 432a, Lg. 809d; v. supr. A. V. Arith., make up, amount to, ἐνιαυτοὶ.. παρέχονται ἡμέρας.. Hdt. 1.32, cf. X. Cyr. 6.1.28.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παρέχω; imperfect παρεῖχον, 3 person plural παρειχαν (Acts 28:2 L T Tr WH; see ἔχω, at the beginning, and ἀπέρχομαι, at the beginning); future 3 person singular παρέξει (Luke 7:4 R G; see below); 2 aorist 3 person plural παρέσχον, participle παρασχών; middle (present παρέχομαι); imperfect παρειχομην; future 2 person singular παρέξῃ (Luke 7:4 L T Tr WH); from Homer down; Plautus praehibeo i. e.praebeo (Latinprae from the Greek παραί (but see Curtius, §§ 346, 380 (cf. παρά IV. 1 at the end))); i. e.

a. to reach forth, offer: τί τίνι, Luke 6:29.
b. to show, afford, supply: τίνι ἡσυχίαν, Acts 22:2; φιλανθρωπίαν, Acts 28:2; πάντα, 1 Timothy 6:17.
c. to be the author of, or to cause one to have; to give, bring, cause, one something — either unfavorable: κόπους, Matthew 26:10; Mark 14:6; Luke 11:7; Luke 18:5; Galatians 6:17 (παρέχειν πόνον, Sir. 29:4; ἀγῶνα, Isaiah 7:13; πράγματα, very often from Herodotus down; also ὄχλον, see Passow, under the word ὄχλος, 3; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, II.)); — or favorable: ἐργασίαν, Acts 16:16, and Lachmann in ; πίστιν (A. V. to give assurance), Acts 17:31, on which phrase cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexic. N. T., pp. 37-39; equivalent to to occasion (ζητήσεις, see οἰκονομία), 1 Timothy 1:4. Middle,
1. to offer, show, or present oneself: with ἑαυτόν added (Winers Grammar, § 38, 6; (Buttmann, § 135, 6)), with an accusative of the predicate, τύπον, a pattern, Titus 2:7; παράδειγμα … τοιονδε, ἑαυτόν παρείχετο, Xenophon, Cyril 8, 1, 39; (Josephus, contra Apion 2, 15, 4); in the act., Plutarch, puer. educ. c. 20 at the beginning.
2. to exhibit or offer on one’s own part: τό δίκαιον τοῖς δούλοις, Colossians 4:1; to render or afford from one’s own resources or by one’s own power: τίνι τί, Luke 7:4 (where if we read, with Rec., παρέξει, it must be taken as the 3rd person singular of the future active (in opposed to Winer’s Grammar, § 13, 2 a.), the elders being introduced as talking among themselves; but undoubtedly the reading παρέξῃ should be restored (see above at the beginning), and the elders are addressing Jesus; cf. Meyer at the passage; (and on the construction, cf. Buttmann, § 139, 32)). On the middle of this verb, cf. Krüger, § 52, 8, 2; Winers Grammar, § 38, 5 end; (Ellicott and Lightfoot on Col. as above).

Question 268

συνέχω

Answer 268

I hold together, hold fast, oppress
to cover (ears); to crowd (against); to guard, hold in custody; to compel, urge on; (pass.) to suffer, be distressed; to be devoted to

pr. to hold together; to confine, shut up, close; τὰ ωτα, to stop the ears, Acts 7:57; to confine, as a besieged city, Lk. 19:43; to hold, hold fast, have the custody of any one, Lk. 22:63; to hem in, urge, press upon, Lk. 8:45; to exercise a constraining influence on, 2 Cor. 5:14; pass. to be seized with, be affected with, as fear, disease, etc., Mt. 4:24; Lk. 4:38; 8:37; Acts 28:8; to be in a state of mental constriction, to be hard pressed by urgency of circumstances, Lk. 12:50; Acts 18:5; Phil. 1:23*

(σύνειχον), συνέξω, συνέσχον, -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to hold together
any whole, lest it fall to pieces or something fall away from it
to hold together with constraint, to compress
to press together with the hand
to hold one’s ears, to shut the heavens that it may not rain

to press on every side
of a besieged city
of a strait, that forces a ship into a narrow channel
of a cattle squeeze, that pushing in on each side, forcing the beast into a position where it cannot move so the farmer can administer medication
to hold completely
to hold fast
of a prisoner

metaph.
to be held by, closely occupied with any business
in teaching the word
to constrain, oppress, of ills laying hold of one and distressing him
to be held with, afflicted with, suffering from
to urge, impel 3b
of the soul

Question 269

ὑπερέχω

Answer 269

I rise above, am superior
to govern, have authority; to be better than, transcend; (n.) surpassing greatness

to hold above;, intrans. to stand out above, to overtop; met. to surpass, excel, Phil. 2:3; 4:7; τὸ ὑπερέχον, excellence, preeminence, Phil. 3:8; to be higher, superior, Rom. 13:1; 1 Pet. 2:13*

ὑπερέξω, -, -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to have or hold over one
to stand out, rise above, overtop
to be above, be superior in rank, authority, power
the prominent men, rulers
to excel, to be superior, better than, to surpass

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑπερέχω,

ὑπειρ- Thgn. (v. infr. 1.2): impf. ὑπείρεχον Il. 2.426: aor. ὑπερέσχον, and in poet. form -έσχεθον, 11.735, 24.374: fut. -έξω PCair.Zen. 60.6 (iii B. C.), Hsch.: —

hold over, σπλάγχνα.. ὑπείρεχον Ἡφαίστοιο held them over the fire, Il. 2.426; μου τὸ σκιάδειον ὑπέρεχε Ar. Av. 1508; ἡμῶν ὑπερεῖχε τὴν χύτραν Id. Eq. 1176; ὑπερέχοντα τὸν αὐλὸν τῆς θαλάσσης holding it up out of the sea, Arist. HA 537b1.

2. ὑ. χεῖρά (χεῖράς) τινος hold one’s hand over him, so as to protect, μάλα γάρ ἑθεν εὐρύοπα Ζεὺς χεῖρα ἑὴν ὑπερέσχε Il. 9.420, 687; τις.. ἐμεῖο θεῶν ὑπερέσχεθε χεῖρα 24.374; Ζεὺς τῆσδε πόληος ὑπειρέχοι.. χεῖρα Thgn. 757; so πόλεως ἵν’ ὑπερέχοιεν ἀλκάν A. Th. 215 (lyr.), cf. Fr. 199.7: c. dat. pers., οἱ.. ὑπείρεχε χεῖρας Ἀπόλλων Il. 5.433; αἴ κ’ ὔμμιν ὑπέρσχῃ χεῖρα Κρονίων 4.249, cf. Od. 14.184.
3. hold above, ὑ. τὸ ῥύγχος, ὅπως ἀναπνέῃ, of the dolphin, Arist. HA 589b11, cf. 566b15, 599b27, al.; ὑ. ὀφρύν elevate, AP 5.298 (Agath.).

II intr., to be above, rise above the horizon, εὖτ’ ἀστὴρ ὑπερέσχε φαάντατος Od. 13.93; αὐτῆς [Αἰγύπτου] εἶναι οὐδὲν ὑπερέχον no part of it was above water, Hdt. 2.4; ὕδωρ,.. ὃ μόλις ὑπερέχοντες ἐπεραιώθησαν which they crossed, with their heads only just above it, Th. 3.23; ἕψεται ἄχρι ἂν ὑπερέχῃ τὸ ὕδωρ till it sticks out above the water, Dsc. 3.7; but ἐπιχέας ὕδωρ ὥστε ὑπερέχειν till it covers (sc. the contents of the vessel), Id. 5.87; τὸ κέρας τὸ ἕτερον ἢ καὶ ἀμφότερα ὑπερέχοντα projecting above the ground, Hdt. 2.41; γεῖσον.. ὑπερέχον τρία ἡμιπόδια projecting a foot and a half, IG 22.1668.34, cf. 7.3073.71 (Lebad., ii B.C.): c. gen., ὑπερέσχεθε γαίης rose above, overlooked the earth, Il. 11.735; ὄμμ’ ὑπερσχὸν ἴτυος E. Ph. 1384; [σταυροὺς] οὐχ ὑπερέχοντας τῆς θαλάσσης Th. 7.25; σκεύη ὑπερέχοντα τοῦ τειχίου Pl. R. 514c, cf. X. An. 3.5.7; ὤφθη.. ὁ δεξιὸς ὀφθαλμὸς ὑπερέχειν θατέρου παμπόλλῳ δή τινι Gal. 18(2).301.

2. overtop, be prominent above, στάντων μὲν Μενέλαος ὑπείρεχεν εὐρέας ὤμους, i. e. stood (head and) shoulders above them, Il. 3.210; ὅκως τινὰ ἴδοι τῶν ἀσταχύων ὑπερέχοντα Hdt. 5.92. ζ, cf. Arist. Pol. 1284a37; φιλέει ὁ θεὸς τὰ ὑπερέχοντα πάντα κολούειν Hdt. 7.10. έ, cf. X. Cyr. 6.2.17; [ᾡ] ὁ πρῶτος ὅρος ὑ. τοῦ δευτέρου.. μέρει by the fraction by which the first term exceeds the second, Archyt. 2: τὸ ὑπερέχον the excess, Dioph. 1.6.
3. in military phrase, outflank, τῶν πολεμίων ὑ. τῷ κέρατι X. HG 4.2.18, cf. Th. 3.107.
4. metaph., c. acc., overtop, excel, outdo, βροτῶν πάντων ὑπερσχὼν ὄλβον A. Pers. 709 (troch.); σωφροσύνῃ πάντας ὑ. E. Hipp. 1365 (anap.); πελταστικῷ εἰκὸς ὑ. τὴν ἡμετέραν δύναμιν X. HG 6.1.9. c. gen., πάντων ὑ. μεγέθει καὶ ἀρετῇ Pl. Ti. 24e, cf. Prm. 150e, Grg. 475c; ὑ. τῶν πολλῶν D. 23.206, cf. Philippians 2:3; ἁπάντων ὑπερέχουσι τῶν κακῶν Anaxil. 22.7 (troch.). abs., prevail, θεῶν ὑπερέσχε νόος Thgn. 202; οἱ ὑπερσχόντες the more powerful, A. Pr. 215; τῶν πόλεων αἱ ὑπερέχουσαι Isoc. 4.95; οἱ ὑπερέχοντες those in authority, D.L. 6.78, cf. Vett.Val. 61.30, al.; ἐπειδὰν ἡ θάλαττα ὑπέρσχῃ has prevailed, D. 9.69; ἐν τοῖς πολεμίοις ὑ. excel in.., Men. 642; ἐνδέχεται.. μὴ τοσοῦτον ὑ. τῷ ποσῷ, ὅσον λείπεσθαι τῷ ποιῷ exceed so much.., Arist. Pol. 1296b23; ὑπὲρ ὧν πλειονάκι ἐντετευχυιῶν ὑπερέχων ἡμᾶς ἀπράκτους καθίστησι being too strong for us, Sammelb. 4638.18 (ii B. C.); πᾶν κρύφιον οὐχ ὑπερεῖχε σέ was beyond thee (i. e. thy comprehension), Thd. Ezekiel 28:3. Pass., to be outdone, ὑπό τινος Pl. Phd. 102c, 102d; τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ ὑπερέχειν καὶ ὑπερέχεσθαι Id. Prm. 150d; κατὰ πλοῦτον ὑπερέχειν κατ’ ἀρετὴν δ’ ὑπερέχεσθαι Arist. Pol. 1281a7, cf. Gal. 15.805.
5. in Logic, have a wider extension, Arist. APo. 99a24, cf. Rh. 1363b8 (Act. and Pass.).
6. ἐπὶ τοῖς ὑπερέχουσι δανεῖσαι to lend on the security of excess value, of a second mortgage, SIG 364.33 (Ephesus, iii B. C.).

III c. gen. rei, rise above, be able to bear, τῆς ἀντλίας Ar. Pax 17; τῶν ἀναλωμάτων D.S. 4.80 (v.l. for cross ὑπερεῖδον). have over, ὑπερέχει he has in hand, PCair.Zen. 292.498, cf. 790.25 (iii B. C.); ὑπερέξομεν πρὸς τὸ διὰ χερός ib.355.93 (iii B. C.). — Cf. ὑπερίσχω.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑπερέχω; from Homer down;

1. transitive, to have or hold over one (as τήν χεῖρα, of a protector, with a genitive of the person protected; so in Greek writings from Homer down; Josephus, Antiquities 6, 2, 2).
2. intransitive, to stand out, rise above, overtop (so properly, first in Homer Iliad 3, 210); metaphorically,
   a. to be above, be superior in rank, authority, power: βασιλεῖ ὡς ὑπεχοντι (A. V. as supreme), 1 Peter 2:13; ἐξουσία ὑπερεχουσαι, of magistrates (A. V. higher powers), Romans 13:1 (οἱ ὑπερεχοντες, substantively, the prominent men, rulers, Polybius 28, 4, 9; 30, 4, 17; of kings, Sap 6:6).
   b. to excel, to be superior: τίνος, better than (cf. Buttmann, § 132, 22), Philippians 2:3 (Sir. 36:7; Xenophon, venta 1, 11; Plato, Menex., p. 237d.; Demosthenes, p. 689, 10; Diodorus 17, 77); to surpass: τινα or τί (cf. Buttmann, § 130, 4), Philippians 4:7; τό ὑπερέχον, a substantive, the excellency, surpassing worth (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 34, 2), Philippians 3:8.

Question 270

εὐσχήμων, ον

Answer 270

of elegant figure, grace, of good standing
presentable, proper, right; prominent, of high standing

of good appearance, pleasing to look upon, comely, 1 Cor. 12:24; met. becoming, decent, τὸ εὔσχημον, decorum, propriety, 1 Cor. 7:35; honorable, reputable, of high standing and influence, Mk. 15:43; Acts 13:50; 17:12*

Thayer’s Definition
of elegant figure
shapely, graceful, comely, bearing one’s self becomingly in speech or behaviour
of good standing
honourable, influential, wealthy, respectable

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
εὐσχήμ-ων, ον,

gen. ονος, (σχῆμα)

I

1. elegant in figure, mien and bearing, graceful, opp. ἀσχήμων, Pl. R. 413e, al.; ἀλεκτρυών Cratin. 108; τὰ εὐ. ἡμῶν (sc. μόρια) 1 Corinthians 12:24 : Comp. - έστερος more respectable, Pl. R. 554e: Sup. - έστατοι, πονεῖν ἵπποι X. Eq. 11.12.
2. in bad sense, with an outside show of goodness, specious in behaviour, εἴς τινα E. Med. 584.

II

1. of things, decent, becoming, λόγοι Id. Hipp. 490, D. 60.9; πρᾶγμα οὐδαμῶς εὔσχημον λέγειν Aeschin. 3.162; λέγειν εὐσχήμονα Arist. EN 1128a7; τὸ εὔσχημον decorum, Pl. R. 401c, Lg. 797b. Adv. - μόνως with grace and dignity, like a gentleman, Ar. V. 1210, X. Cyr. 1.3.8, Arist. EN 1101a1; ζῆν Phld. Herc. 1251.18: Comp - έστερον, ἔχειν Pl. Epin. 981a; τι φέρειν D. 60.35: Sup. - έστατα IG 22.1034.11.
2. later also, noble, honourable, in rank (condemned by Phryn. 309), Mark 15:43, Acts 13:50, J. Vit. 9, Vett.Val. 66.7, al.; ἡ εὐ. the noble lady, PFlor. 16.20 (iii A.D.). title of a village magistrate, in pl., εὐ. κώμης BGU 147 (ii/iii A.D.): sg., ἡ οἰκία τοῦ εὐ. PRyl. 236.15 (iii A.D.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
εὐσχήμων, εὔσχημον (εὖ, and σχῆμα the figure, Latinhabitus);

1. of elegant figure, shapely, graceful, comely, bearing oneself becomingly in speech or behavior (Euripides, Aristophanes, Xenophon, Plato): τά εὐσχήμονα ἡμῶν, the comely parts of the body that need no covering (opposed to τά ἀσχήμονα ἡμῶν, verse 23), 1 Corinthians 12:24; of morals: πρός τό εὔσχημον, to promote decorum, 1 Corinthians 7:35.
2. in later usage (cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 333), of good standing, honorable, influential, wealthy, respectable (R. V. of honorable estate): Mark 15:43; Acts 13:50; Acts 17:12. (Josephus, de vita sua §9; Plutarch, parallel. Graec. et Rom c. 15, p. 309 b.)

Question 271

μετασχηματίζω

Answer 271

I change the figure of, transfigure
(act.) to transform, change (the form); (mid.) to masquerade, disguise (oneself)

to remodel, transfigure, Phil. 3:21; mid. to transform one’s self, 2 Cor. 11:13, 14, 15; to transfer an imagination, 1 Cor. 4:6*
μετασχηματίσω, μετεσχημάτισα, -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to change the figure of, to transform

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μετασχημᾰτ-ίζω,

I change the form of a person or thing, Pl. Lg. 903e, Arist. GC 335b26; τὸ σῶμα τῆς ταπεινώσεως Philippians 3:21; of a building, Sammelb. 5174.10 (vi A. D.): — Med., with Att. fut. - ιοῦμαι, change one’s form, Demetr.Lac. Herc. 1012.12; disguise oneself, J. AJ 8.11.1: — Pass., to be changed in form, Pl. Lg. 906c, Arist. Cael. 298b31, GA 747a15, D.S. 2.57; of grammatical change, A.D. Pron. 68.5, al.

II μ. τι εἰς ἐμαυτόν transfer as in a figure, 1 Corinthians 4:6.

III change the posture of, Sor. 2.62 (Pass.), al. of stars and planets, in Pass., change their configuration, πρὸς ἀλλήλους Adam. Vent. 47.

Thayer's Expanded Definition
μετασχηματίζω: future μετασχηματίσω (cf. Buttmann, 37 (32)); 1 aorist μετεσχημάτισα; middle present μετασχηματίζομαι; to change the figure of, to transform (see μετά, III. 2): τί, Philippians 3:21 (see below); middle followed by εἰς τινα, to transform oneself into someone, to assume one's appearance, 2 Corinthians 11:13f; followed by ὡς τίς, so as to have the appearance of someone, 2 Corinthians 11:15; μετασχηματίζω τί εἰς τινα, to shape one's discourse so as to transfer to oneself what holds true of the whole class to which one belongs, i. e. so as to illustrate by what one says of himself what holds true of all: 1 Corinthians 4:6, where the meaning is, 'by what I have said of myself and Apollos, I have shown what holds true of all Christian teachers.' (4 Macc. 9:22; Plato, legg. 10, p. 903 e.; (Aristotle, de caele 3, 1, p. 298{b}, 31, etc.); Josephus, Antiquities 7, 10, 5; 8, 11, 1; Plutarch, Ages. 14; def. orac. c. 30; (Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 11); Sextus Empiricus, 10, p. 688, Fabric. edition (p. 542, 23 edition, Bekker).) [SYNONYMS: μεταμορφόω, μετασχηματίζω: (cf. Philippians 3:21) "μετασχηματίζω would here refer to the transient condition from which, μεταμορφόω to the permanent state to which, the change takes place. Trench (N. T. Synonyms, § lxx.), however, supposes that μετασχηματίζω is here preferred to μεταμορφόω as expressing 'transition but no absolute solution of continuity', the spiritual body being developed from the natural, as the butterfly from the caterpillar" (Lightfoot on Phil. 'Detached Note,' p. 131). See μορφή, at the end]

Question 272

παῤῥησιάζομαι

Answer 272

(ἐπαρρησιαζόμην), παρρησιάσομαι, ἐπαρρησιασάμην, -, -, -

to speak freely, speak boldly, confidently, or fearlessly
to use freedom in speaking, be free spoken
to grow confident, have boldness, show assurance, assume a bold bearing

to speak boldly, preach fearlessly

to speak plainly, freely, boldly, and confidently, Acts 13:46; 14:3

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παρρησι-άζομαι,

fut. -άσομαι Pl. Chrm. 156a, etc. (but παρρησιασθήσομαι LXX Job 22:26): aor. ἐπαρρησιασάμην Isoc. 11.1, dub. in Aeschin. 1.80: pf. (v.infr.): used only in Prose: —

speak freely, openly, Pl. Grg. 487d; τι ib. 491e, cf. Aeschin. l.c.; πρὸς ὑμᾶς Pl. La. 178a, etc.; τινὶ περί τινος Id. Chrm. 156a, D. 18.177; πολλὰ κατά τινος Plb. 12.13.8: pf. πεπαρρησίασμαι in act. sense, ἂ γιγνώσκω πάνθ’ ἁπλῶς.. πεπ. D. 4.51, cf. Plb. l.c.; but τὰ πεπαρρησιασμένα in pass. sense, free expressions, Isoc. 15.10; -ασμέναι φωναί Phld. Lib. p.4 O.: — once in Act., ib. p.58 O.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παρρησιάζομαι; imperfect ἐπαρρησιαζομην; 1 aorist ἐπαρρησιασαμην; (παρρησία, which see); a deponent verb; Vulg. chieflyfiducialiter ago; to bear oneself boldly or confidently;

1. to use freedom in speaking, be free-spoken; to speak freely ((A. V. boldly)): Acts 18:26; Acts 19:8; ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, relying on the name of Jesus, Acts 9:27, 28(29); also ἐπί τῷ κυρίῳ, Acts 14:3.
2. to grow confident, have boldness, show assurance, assume a bold bearing: εἶπεν, Acts 13:46 (R. V. spake out boldly); λαλεῖν, Acts 26:26; παρρησιάζεσθαι ἐν τίνι, in reliance on one to take courage, followed by an infinitive of the thing to be done: λαλῆσαι, Ephesians 6:20; 1 Thessalonians 2:2. (Xenophon, Demosthenes, Aeschines, Polybius, Philo, Plutarch, others; the Sept.; Sir. 6:11.)

Question 273

ἐργασία, ας, ἡ

Answer 273

work, business, profit
trade, business, making money; indulgence

work, labor;, in NT ἐργασιαν διδόναι, to endeavor, strive, Lk. 12:58; performance, practice, Eph. 4:19; a trade, business, craft, Acts 19:25, gain acquired by labor or trade, profit, Acts 16:16, 19; 19:24*

Thayer's Definition
a working, performing
work, business
gain got by work, profit
endeavour, pains

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐργᾰσ-ία,

Ion. -ιη, Cret. ϝεργασία Leg.Gort. 8.44, ἡ, (ἐργάτης)

I

1. work, business, ἐργασίην φεύγουσα h.Merc. 486, etc.; opp. ἀργία, X. Mem. 2.7.7; ἐ. ἀγαθή productive labour, Id. Vect. 4.29; ἐργασίᾳ ἐγχειρεῖν, of bees, Arist. HA 625b24; ἡ περὶ τὴν θάλατταν ἐ., of seamen, Pl. R. 371b; μὴ γενομένης ἐργασίας if no work was done, D. 27.20; δὸς ἐργασίαν, c. inf., Lat. da operam ut.., Luke 12:58, cf. OGI 441.109 (SC. de Stratonicensibus, i B. C.): pl., τὰς ἐν ὑπαίθρῳ ἐ. ἐργάζεσθαι X. Oec. 7.20; ἐ. ἀνελεύθεροι Arist. EN 1121b33, cf. Epicur. Fr. 196 (dub.).
2. function, ἥπατος Aret. SD 1.15.

II

1. working at, making, manufacture, ἱματίων, ὑποδημάτων, etc., Pl. Grg. 449d, Tht. 146d, etc.; ἡ τῆς ἐσθῆτος ἐκ τῶν ἐρίων ἐ. X. Oec. 7.21; making up of a prescription, Hp. Ulc. 14: metaph., Πέργαμος ἀμφὶ τεαῖς χερὸς ἐργασίαις ἁλίσκεται Troy is (i.e. is doomed to be) taken in the part wrought by thy hands, Pi. O. 8.42; ἐ. ἡδονῆς production of pleasure, Pl. Prt. 353d; ἐ. χρημάτων money- making, Arist. EN 1160a16 (but administration of property, Leg.Gort. l.c.).
2. working of a material, ἡ ἐ. τοῦ σιδήρου Hdt. 1.68; χαλκοῦ, ἐρίων, ξύλων, Pl. Chrm. 173e; τῶν χρυσείων μετάλλων Th. 4.105, cf. Hyp. Eux. 36; πίττης Thphr. HP 9.2.6: most commonly, tillage of the ground, ἐ. γῆς, χώρας, Ar. Ra. 1034 (pl.), Isoc. 7.30, etc.; ἐ. κήπων Pl. Min. 316b; ἐ. περὶ τὴν τροφήν preparation (i.e. mastication and digestion) of food, Arist. Juv. 469a3; treatment of silphium, Thphr. HP 6.3.2
3. generally, trade, business, X. Mem. 3.10.1; ἐπὶ τῆς ἐργασίας ὢν τῆς κατὰ θάλατταν engaged in trade by sea, D. 33.4; ἡ ἐ. τῆς τραπέζης the banking business, Id. 36.6; ἐ. χρυσοχοϊκή, ἀρωματική, PLond. 3.906.6 (ii A.D.), PFay. 93.7 (ii A.D.); βαφεῖς τὴν ἐ. dyers by trade, PTeb. 287.3 (ii A.D.); esp. of a courtesan’s trade, Hdt. 2.135, D. 18.129; of sexual intercourse, Arist. Pr. 876a39. ἐὰν ἐργασίαν εὕρῃ ὁ οἰκέτης if a slave brings in earnings, Hyp. Ath. 22.
4. practising, exercising, τῶν τεχνῶν Pl. Grg. 450c; Κύπριδος AP 5.218 (Paul. Sil.); ἀκαθαρσίας Ephesians 4:19.
5. work of art, production, τετράγωνος ἐ., of the Hermae, Th. 6.27 (non legit Sch.); τῶν τειχῶν αἱ ἐργασίαι the fortification works, Id. 7.6.
6. literary execution, ἐ. ποιητική Phld. Po. 5.11; elaboration of a topic, Sch. Pi. P. 2.24.
7. production of a play, Arg. Men. Oxy. 1235.108.

III guild or company of workmen, ἡ ἐ. τῶν βαφέων Judeich Altertümer von Hierapolis 50; ἐριοπλυτῶν ib. 40; ἐ. θρεμματική dub. sens., ib.227.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐργασία, ἐργασίας, ἡ, (ἐργάζομαι;

1. equivalent to τό ἐργάζεσθαι, a working, performing: ἀκαθαρσίας, Ephesians 4:19.
2. work, business: Acts 19:25 (Xenophon, oec. 6, 8, et al.).
3. gain got by work, profit: Acts 16:19; παρέχειν ἐργασίαν τίνι, Acts 16:16; Acts 19:24 (yet others refer this to 2 above); (Xenophon, mem. 3, 10, 1; cyneg. 3, 3; Polybius 4, 50, 3).
4. endeavor, pains (A. V. diligence): δίδωμι ἐργασίαν, after the Latinismoperam do, Luke 12:58 (Hermog. de invent. 3, 5, 7).

Question 274

γεωργός, -οῦ, ὁ

Answer 274

a farmer (George),tenant farmer, share-cropper

a farmer, one who tills the earth, 2 Tim. 2:6; Jas. 5:7; in NT spc. a vine-dresser, keeper of a vineyard, i.q. ἀμπελουργός, Mt. 21:33, 34, et al.

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
γεωργ-ός, όν, (γῆ, ἔργον)

tilling the ground, βοίδιον Ar. Ach. 1036; fertilizing, Νεῖλος Lib. Or. 13.39: — as Subst., γεωργός, ὁ, husbandman, Hdt. 4.18, Ar. Pax 296, Pl. Phdr. 276b, etc.; οἱ γ., opp. οἱ μισθαρνοῦντες, Arist. Pol. 1296b28; but γ., opp. ὁ δεσπότης τοῦ χωρίου, IG 22.1100; so of vine-dressers, gardeners, etc., Pl. Tht. 178d, Ael. NA 7.28; γ. ὄχλος the peasantry, D.H. 10.53; γ. βίος prob. in Ar. Pax 589; δένδρων ὧν γ. αἵδε αἱ χεῖρες Philostr. VA 2.26.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
γεωργός, γεωργου, ὁ (from γῆ and ἘΡΓΩ), from (Herodotus), Xenophon, and Plato down; a husbandman, tiller of the soil: 2 Timothy 2:6; James 5:7; several times in the Sept.; used of a vine-dresser (Aelian nat. an. 7, 28; (Plato, Theact., p. 178 d.; others)) in Matthew 21:33ff; Mark 12:1f, 7, 9; Luke 20:9f, 14, 16; John 15:1.

Question 275

λειτουργός

Answer 275

a servant

Thayer's Definition
a public minister, a servant of the state
a minister, servant
so of military labourers
of the temple
of one busied with holy things
of a priest
of the servants of a king

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
λειτουργ-ός, ὁ,

(λήϊτος, ἔργον)

I one who performed a λειτουργία (q.v.), POxy. 82.3 (iii A.D.), etc.; λ. τῶν ἐν παισὶ λειτουργιῶν CIG 2881.13, cf. 2882, 2886 (Branchidae).

II

1. public servant, ἡ στάσις τῶν λ. [τοῦ Σαλομῶνος ] LXX 1 Kings 10:5; of workmen, carpenters, etc., οἰκοδόμοι καὶ λ. PPetr. 3p.139 (iii B.C.), cf. Plb. 3.93.5; at Magnesia, an official of the γερουσία, Inscr.Magn. 116.17; = Lat. lictor, Plu. Rom. 26: metaph., λ. τῆς χρείας μου ministering to my need, Philippians 2:25.
2. private servant, LXX 2 Samuel 13:18.

III in religioussense, minister, [ θεοῦ ] ib. Psalms 103:21(102).21, Romans 13:6, al.; τῶν θεῶν D.H. 2.22, cf. 73; τῶν ἁγίων λ. Hebrews 8:2; θεοῖς λιτουργοί (sic) REt.Anc. 32.5 (Athens, i B.C.); attendant at sacrifices, acolyte, IG 3.1005, al. Astrol., λειτουργοί, οἱ, astral gods subordinate to the δεκανοί, Iamb. Myst. 9.2, Firm. 2.4.4, Mart.Cap. 2.200.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
λειτουργός, λειτουργου, ὁ (from ἘΡΓΩ i. e. ἐργάζομαι, and unused λεῖτοσ῟ equivalent to ληιτος equivalent to δημοσις public, belonging to the state (Hesychius), and this from λεώς Attic for λαός), the Sept. for מְשָׁרֵת (Piel participle of שָׁרַת);

1. a public minister; a servant of the state: τῆς πόλεως, Inscriptions; of the lictors, Plutarch, Rom. 26; (it has not yet been found in its primary and proper sense, of one who at Athens assumes a public office to be administered at his own expense (cf. Liddell and Scott, under the word I.); see λειτουργέω).
2. universally, a minister, servant: so of military laborers, often in Polybius; of the servants of a king, 1 Esdr. 10:5; Sir. 10:2; (of Joshua, Joshua 1:1 Alex.; universally, 2 Samuel 13:18 (cf. 2 Samuel 13:17)); of the servants of the priests, joined with ὑπηρέται, Dionysius Halicarnassus, Antiquities 2, 73; τῶν ἁγίων, of the temple, i. e. one busied with holy things, of a priest, Hebrews 8:2, cf. (Philo, alleg. leg. iii. § 46); Nehemiah 10:39; Sir. 7:30; τῶν θεῶν, of heathen priests, Dionysius Halicarnassus 2, 22 cf. 73; Plutarch, mor., p. 417 a.; Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, of Paul likening himself to a priest, Romans 15:16; plural τοῦ Θεοῦ, those by whom God administers his affairs and executes his decrees: so of magistrates, Romans 13:6; of angels, Hebrews 1:7 from Psalm 103:4 () (cf. Philo de caritat. § 3); τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ, those whose ministry the grace of God made use of for proclaiming to men the necessity of repentance, as Noah, Jonah: Clement of Rome, 1 Cor. 8, 1 [ET] cf. c. 7 [ET]; τόν ἀπόστολον καί λειτουργόν ὑμῶν τῆς χρείας μου, by whom ye have sent to me those things which may minister to my needs, Philippians 2:25.

Question 276

πανουργία

Answer 276

craftiness, cunning

Thayer’s Definition
craftiness, cunning
a specious or false wisdom
in a good sense, prudence, skill, in undertaking and carrying on affairs

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πᾰνουργ-ία, ἡ,

1. knavery, A. Th. 603, S. Ph. 927, Lys. 22.16, Pl. Lg. 747c, Arist. EN 1144a27: in pl., villainies, S. Ant. 300, Ar. Eq. 684, etc.
2. of animals, Arist. HA 588a23 (pl.), 614a30.
3. adulteration of drugs or honey, Gal. 14.27.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πανουργία, πανουργίας, ἡ (πανοῦργος, which see), craftiness, cunning: Luke 20:23; 2 Corinthians 4:2; 2 Corinthians 11:3; Ephesians 4:14; contextually equivalent to a specious or false wisdom, 1 Corinthians 3:19. (Aeschylus, Sophocles, Aristophanes, Xenophon, Plato, Lucian, Aelian, others; πᾶσα τέ ἐπιστήμη χωριζομενη δικαιοσύνης καί τῆς ἄλλης ἀρετῆς πανουργία οὐ σοφία φαίνεται, Plato, Menex., p. 247 a. for עָרְמָה in a good sense, prudence, skill, in undertaking and carrying on affairs, Proverbs 1:4; Proverbs 8:5; Sir. 31:10 (Sir. 34:11.))

Question 277

ἀργός

Answer 277

idle, lazy (not αγρος)

Thayer’s Definition
free from labour, at leisure
lazy, shunning the labour which one ought to perform

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀργός

(A), ή, όν,

I

1. shining, glistening, of a goose, Od. 15.161; of a sleek, well-fed ox, Il. 23.30; in Hom. mostly in the phrase πόδας ἀργοί, of hounds, swift-footed, because all swift motion causes a kind of glancing or flickering light, 18.578, Od. 2.11, etc.; κύνες ἀργοί Il. 1.50, 18.283, cf. D.S. 4.41, Corn. ND 16.
2. white, Arist. Top. 149a7.

II parox. as pr. n., Ἄργος, ὁ, name of a dog, Swift-foot, Od. 17.292: also of the herdsman Argus (i.e. bright-eyed, A. Pr. 567 (lyr.), Supp. 305) who was so called from his eyes being ever open and bright. (By dissimilation from Αργρός, cf. Skt. ṛjrá-, = (1) shining, (2) swift, Vedic pr. n. [Rnull ]ji-śvan-, lit. = possessing κύνες ἀργοί.)

ἀργός

(B), όν, later ή, όν Arist. EN 1167a11, Mete. 352a13, Thphr. Lap. 27, Ath.Mech. 12.11, etc.: (contr. from ἀεργός): — prop.

I

1. not working the ground, Hdt. 5.6; idle, lazy, opp. ἐργάτις, S. Ph. 97, cf. Ar. Nu. 53, etc.; γαστέρες ἀ. Epimenid. 1; ἀ. ἐπιθυμίαι Pl. R. 572e; ἀ. τὴν διάνοιαν ib. 458a; τὸ πρὸς ἅπαν ξυνετὸν ἐπὶ πᾶν ἀ. Th. 3.82; ἂν ἀ. ᾖ if he have no trade, Antiph. 123.3; πότερον ἀνθρώπου οὐδέν ἐστιν [ἔργον] ἀλλ’ ἀργὸν πέφυκεν; Arist. EN 1097b30: c. gen. rei, idle at a thing, free from it, τῶν οἴκοθεν from domestic toils, E. IA 1000; πόνων σφοδρῶν Pl. Lg. 835d; γυναῖκας ἀργοὺς ταλασίας ib. 806a; ἀ. αἰσχρῶν slow to evil, A. Th. 411; ἀργότεραι ἐς τὸ δρᾶν τι Th. 7.67; ἀ. περί τι Pl. Lg. 966d.
2. of things, δόρυ E. Ph. 1387; of money, lying idle, yielding no return, opp. ἐνεργός, D. 27.7 and 20; of land, lying fallow, Isoc. 4.132, X. Cyr. 3.2.19, Thphr. HP 9.12.2; opp. πεφυτευμένος, IG 7.2226 B (Thisbe, iii A.D.); διατριβὴ ἀ. in which nothing is done, fruitless, Ar. Ra. 1498 (lyr.), Isoc. 4.44; χρόνον ἀργὸν διάγειν Plu. Cor. 31. Adv. ἀργῶς, ἐπιμέλεσθαι X. Mem. 2.4.7; ἔχειν D. 6.3: Comp. and Sup. ἀργότερον, -ότατα, X. Oec. 15.6 and 1. ἀ. λόγος, name of a sophism, Chrysipp.Stoic. 2.277, cf. Plu. 2.574e.

II Pass.,

1. unwrought, ἁρμός, κυμάτιον, IG 1.322b23,59; πυροὶ ἀ. unprepared for eating, Hp. VM 13; ἄργυρος Paus. 3.12.3; βύρσαι undressed hides, Ath.Mech. l.c.; unpolished, Thphr. Lap. 27.
2. not done, left undone, κοὐκ ἦν ἔτ’ οὐδὲν ἀ. S. OC 1605; ἓν δ’ ἐστὶν ἡμῖν ἀ. E. Ph. 766; οὐκ ἐν ἀργοῖς not among things neglected, S. OT 287; τὰ μὲν προβέβηκεν ἀμήχανόν ἐστι γενέσθαι ἀργά Thgn. 584.
3. unattempted, μάχη Pl. Euthd. 272a.
4. Astrol., τόπος ἀ., name of the 8t h of the 12 ‘houses’, Ptol. Tetr. 128, Paul.Al. M. 4; πλανήτης Plot. 2.3.3; ζῴδιον S.E. M. 5.15.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀργός, ἀργόν, and in later writings from Aristotle, hist. anim. 10, 40 (vol. i., p. 627{a}, 15) on and consequently also in the N. T. with the feminine ἀργῇ, which among the early Greeks Epimenides alone is said to have used, Titus 1:12; cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 104f; id. Paralip., p. 455ff; Winers Grammar, 68 (67) (cf. 24; Buttmann, 25 (23)) (contracted from ἀεργός which Homer uses, from alpha privative and ἔργον without work, without labor, doing nothing), inactive, idle;

a. free from labor, at leisure (ἀργόν εἶναι, Herodotus 5, 6): Matthew 20:3, 6 (Rec.); 1 Timothy 5:13.
b. lazy, shunning the labor which one ought to perform (Homer, Iliad 9, 320 ὁ, τ’ ἀεργός ἀνήρ, ὁ, τέ πολλά ἐοργως): πίστις, James 2:20 (L T Tr WH for R G νεκρά); γαστέρες ἀργαί i. e. idle gluttons, from Epimenides, Titus 1:12 (Nicet. ann. 7, 4, 135 d. εἰς ἀργᾷς γαστερας ὀχετηγησας); ἀργός καί ἄκαρπος εἰς τί, 2 Peter 1:8.
c. of things from which no profit is derived, although they can and ought to be productive; as of fields, trees, gold and silver, (cf. Grimm on Wis. 14:5; (Liddell and Scott, under the word I. 2)); unprofitable, ῤῆμα ἀργόν, by litotes equivalent to pernicious (see ἄκαρπος): Matthew 12:36. [SYNONYMS: ἀργός, βραδύς, νωθρός: ἀργός, idle, involving blameworthiness; βραδύς slow (tardy), having a purely temporal reference and no necessary bad sense; νωθρός sluggish, descriptive of constitutional qualities and suggestive of censure. Schmidt, chapter 49; Trench, § civ.]

Question 278

εἶδος

Answer 278

form, shape, kind

Thayer’s Definition
the external or outward appearance, form figure, shape
form, kind

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
εἶδος, εος, τό,

(εἴδω A)

I

1. that which is seen: form, shape, freq. in Hom., of the human form or figure, esp. abs. in acc. with Adjs., εἶδος ἄριστος, ἀγητός, κακός, Il. 3.39, 5.787, 10.316; ἀλίγκιος ἀθανάτοισιν Od. 8.174; opp. φρένες, 17.454; opp. βίη, Il. 21.316; δευτέρα πεδ’ Ἀγιδὼν τὸ εἶ. Alcm. 23.58; τὸ εἶδος τῆς γυναικὸς ὑπερεπαινέων Hdt. 1.8, etc.; appearance, of a dog, Od. 17.308; ὄφιες ποικίλοι τὰ εἴδεα Hdt. 3.107; εἴδεα [τῶν θεῶν] σημήναντες Id. 2.53; γυνὴ τό γ’ εἶδος Ar. Th. 267: hence, periphr. for person, S. El. 1177; τὸ ἐπ’ εἴδει καλόν Pl. Smp. 210b. esp. of beauty of person, comeliness, εἴδεος ἐπαμμένος Hdt. 1.199; πλούτῳ καὶ εἴδει προφέρων Id. 6.127. Medic., physique, habit of body, constitution, Hp. Nat.Hom. 9, Hum. 1: more freq. in pl., Id. Aër. 3, al.; εἴδεα εὔχροά τε καὶ ἀνθηρά ib. 5.
2. generally, shape, σχῆμα καὶ εἶδος Id. Off. 3, cf. Mochl. 6, etc.; pattern, of ‘figurate’ numbers, Arist. Ph. 203a15; ἡ μονὰς εἶδος εἰδῶν τυγχάνει Theol.Ar. 4, cf. 17; decorative pattern or figure, Plu. Them. 29 (pl.); of a musical scale, τοῦ διὰ τεσσάρων τρία εἰδη Aristox. Harm. p.74 M. (identified with σχῆμα, ibid.): in pl., shapes, i.e. various kinds of atoms (cf. ἰδέα), Democr. ap. Thphr. Sens. 51. Geom., δύο εἴδη τῷ εἴδει δεδομένα two figures given in species, Euc. Dat. 53, etc.; esp. in central conics, rectangle formed by a transverse diameter and the corresponding parameter, Apollon.Perg. Con. 1.14, 21, al.; also, species of numbers, of the terms in an algebraical expression involving different powers of the unknown quantity, Dioph. Def. 11.

II form, kind, or nature, τῶν ἀλλέων παιγνιέων τὰ εἴδεα Hdt. 1.94; τὸ εἶ. τῆς νόσου Th. 2.50, etc.; ἐν ἁρμονίας εἴδει εἶναι, γενέσθαι, to be or become like.., Pl. Phd. 91d, cf. Cra. 394d; ὡς ἐν φαρμάκου εἴδει by way of medicine, Id. R. 389b; νόμων ἔχει εἶδος is in the province of law, Arist. Pol. 1286a3; situation, state of things, σκέψασθε ἐν οἵῳ εἴδει.. τοῦτο ἔπραξαν Th. 3.62; plan of action, policy, ἐπὶ εἶδος τρέπεσθαι Id. 6.77, 8.56; ἐπ’ ἄλλ’ εἶδος τρέπεσθαι take up another line, Ar. Pl. 317; specific notion, meaning, idea, ἂν παρέχῃ τὸ ἓν εἶ. δύο ὀνόματα.., περὶ ἑνὸς εἴδεος δύο ὀνόματα οὐ τὰ αὐτά Aen.Tact. 24.1; department, Hp. VM 12 (but also, elementary nature or quality, ib. 15); type, sort, πυρετῶν Id. Epid. 3.12; αὐγῆς Id. Off. 3, etc.: Rhet., style of writing, τὰ εἴδη τῶν λόγων Isoc. 13.17, cf. Arist. Rh.Al. 1441b9 (pl.); later, definite literary form, Men.Rh.init., Procl. Chrest. p.243 W., EM 295.52; also, example of a style, ὅλοις εἴδεσι Isoc. 15.74; later, single poem, applied to Pindar’s odes by Sch.; also, written statement, ἀναγνωσθέντος εἴδους PAmh. 2.65.11 (ii A.D.), cf. PTeb. 287.12 (ii A.D.).

III

1. class, kind, πᾶν τὸ τῶν πίστεων εἶδος Isoc. 15.280, cf. D. 24.192: freq. in Pl., περὶ παντὸς τοῦ εἴδους.. ἐν ᾧ.. Tht. 178a; ἑνὶ εἴδει περιλαβεῖν ib. 148d; εἰς ταὐτὸν ἐμπέπτωκεν εἶδος ib. 205d, etc.; logical species, Sph. 235d; ἓν εἶδος ἀποχωρίζειν Plt. 262e; τὰς διαφορὰς ὁπόσαιπερ ἐν εἴδεσι κεῖνται, ib. 285b, al., cf. Arist. Metaph. 1057b7, al., Cat. 2b7; as a subdivision of γένος, Id. Rh. 1393a27; ἐπὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ γένους πεύκη, εἴδει διαφέρουσα, Dsc. 1.69.
2. = ἰδέα 11.2, Pl. Phd. 103e, R. 596a, Prm. 132a, al., Arist. Metaph. 990b9, al., etc.
3. form, opp. matter (ὕλη), Id. Ph. 187a18, al., Metaph. 1029a29: hence, formal cause, essence, ib. 1032b1, etc. in later Gr., wares of different kinds, goods, POxy. 109.1 (iii/iv A.D.), PFay. 34.7 (ii A.D.): hence, payments in kind, opp. χρυσίον, Just. Nov. 17.8, cf. Cod.Just. 1.4.18, al.; spices, Lyd. Mag. 3.61; groceries, Anon.post Max.p.120 L.; εἶ. ἰατρικόν drug, Hsch. s.v. νίτρον, cf. Hippiatr. 129.54 and v. ἑξάειδος, τετράειδος, τρίειδος; of a chemical reagent, Zos.Alch.p.205 B.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
εἶδος, εἴδους, τό (ἘΙΔΩ), in the Sept. chiefly for מַרְאֶה and תֹּאַר; properly, that which strikes the eye, which is exposed to view;

1. the external oppearance, form, figure, shape, (so from Homer down): John 5:37; σωματικῷ εἴδει, Luke 3:22; τό εἶδος τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, Luke 9:29; διά εἴδους, as encompassed with the visible appearance (of eternal things) (see διά, A. I. 2), 2 Corinthians 5:7, — commonly explained, by sight i. e. beholding (Luth.:im Schauen); but no example has yet been adduced from any Greek writings in which εἶδος is used actively, like the Latin species, of vision; (στόμα κατά στόμα, ἐν εἴδει, καί οὐ δἰ ὁραμάτων καί ἐνυπνίων, Clement. homil. 17, 18; cf. Numbers 12:8 the Sept.).
2. form, kind: ἀπό παντός εἴδους πονηροῦ ἀπέχεσθε, i. e. from every kind of evil or wrong, 1 Thessalonians 5:22 (cf.πονηρός, under the end); (Josephus, Antiquities 10, 3, 1 πᾶν εἶδος πονηρίας. The Greeks, especially Plato, oppose τό εἶδος to τό γένος, as the Latin does species to genus. Cf. Schmidt, chapter 182, 2).

Question 279

ζήτημα

Answer 279

a question, debate

Thayer’s Definition
a question, debate
about the law

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ζήτ-ημα, ατος, τό,

I that which is sought, Hp. VM 3; οὐ ῥάδιον ζ. a thing not easy to find, of Pentheus’ mutilated limbs, E. Ba. 1139; δυσνοούμενον ζ., of God, Secund. Sent. 3.

II

1. inquiry, question, S. OT 278, Acts 15:2,al.; esp. of a philosophic nature, τὸ περὶ νόμους ζ. Pl. Lg. 631a; τὰ περὶ φύσεως ζ. ib. 891c; ποιητικῶν ζ. λύσεις Metrod. Herc. 831.13; also τοῦτ’.. οὗ τυγχάνει ζ. Pl. Cra. 421a; ἐκεῖνό γ’ ἦν τὸ ζ. πρῶτον, πότερον.. Id. Sph. 221c; search, σῶμα μυρίοις ζητήμασιν εὑρών E. Ba. 1218; μητρός after her, Id. Ion 1352.
2. official or judicial inquiry, POxy. 97.14 (ii A.D.). III in pl., claims, PRyl. 117.14 (iii A.D.); subjects of dispute, SIG 785.8 (i A.D.), Acts 25:19.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ζήτημα, ζητητός, τό (ζητέω), a question, debate: Acts 15:2; Acts 26:3; νόμου, about the law, Acts 23:29; περί τίνος, Acts 18:15; Acts 25:19. (From Sophocles down.)

Question 280

ζήτησις, εως, ἡ

Answer 280

argument, debate, controversy, discussion, questioning

a seeking; an inquiry, a question; a dispute, debate, discussion, Jn. 3:25; 1 Tim. 6:4; a subject of dispute or controversy, Acts 15:2, 7; 25:20; 2 Tim. 2:23; Tit. 3:9

Thayer's Definition
a seeking
enquiry
a questioning, debate
a subject of questioning or debate, matter of controversy

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ζήτ-ησις, εως, ἡ,

1. seeking, search for, κατ’ Εὐρώπης ζήτησιν ἐκπλῶσαι Hdt. 2.44; κατὰ βίου τε καὶ γῆς ζ. Id. 1.94, cf. 2.54; ἀνδρὸς κατὰ ζήτησιν in quest of him, S. Tr. 55; ἡ ζ. τῶν δρασάντων Th. 8.66; ζ. ἐπιστήμης Pl. Tht. 196d, etc.; τῆς τροφῆς Th. 8.57; τῆς ἀληθείας Id. 1.20.
2. searching, examining, ζήτησιν ἐποιέετο τῶν νεῶν searched the ships, Hdt. 6.118, cf. Lys. 12.30, Aeschin. 1.43.
3. inquiry, investigation, esp. of a philosophic nature, Pl. Cra. 406a, Ap. 29c, al.; περὶ τῆς τοῦ παντὸς φύσεως Id. Ti. 47a; ζ. τοῦ μέλλοντος διὰ ὀρνίθων ποιεῖσθαι inquire into the future by augury, Id. Phdr. 244c: in pl., Id. Phd. 66d, Phld. Rh. 1.276S., 2.185S.
4. judicial inquiry, Din. 1.10, POxy. 237 vi7 (ii A.D.), etc.: pl., suits, controversies, OGI 629.9 (Palmyra, ii A.D.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐκζήτησις (ἐκζητέω, which see), ἐκζητησεως, ἡ;

1. an investigating.
2. a subject of subtle inquiry and dispute (R. V. questioning): 1 Timothy 1:4 T Tr (WH; see Ellicott at the passage and cf. οἰκονομία). (Basil Caesar., Didymus of Alexandria (circa ).)
   STRONGS NT 2214: ζήτησις ζήτησις, ζητήσεως, ἡ (ζητέω);

a. a seeking: (Herodotus), Thucydides 8, 57; others;
b. inquiry (German die Frage): περί τίνος, Acts 25:20.
c. a questioning, debate: Acts 15:2 (for Rec. συζήτησις); 7 T Tr text WH; περί τίνος, John 3:25.
d. a subject of questioning or debate, matter of controversy: 1 Timothy 1:4 R G L; ; 2 Timothy 2:23; Titus 3:9.

Question 281

θνῄσκω

Answer 281

I die; perfect tense, I am dead

θανοῦμαι, ἔθανον, τέθνηκα, -, -

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
θνῄσκω

(with ι IG 2.2477.7, 10,2494, Ἀρχ.Ἐφ.1910.73; θνείσκ- IG 2.4040b; [ ἀποθν]ήισκειν Pl. Phdr. in PPetr. 1p.18 (iii B.C.), but θνήσκω Did. ap. EM 452.29, freq. in codd.), Aeol. θναίσκω Hdn.Gr. 2.79, Dor. θνᾴσκω Sammelb. 6754.22 (iii B.C.): fut. θᾰνοῦμαι Simon. 85.9, S. Ant. 462, etc.; inf. -έεσθαι Il. 4.12; later θνήξομαι AP 9.354 (Leon.), Polyaen. 5.2.22 codd.: aor. 2 ἔθᾰνον, θάνον Od. 11.412, al.; inf. and Ion. θανέειν, as always in Hom., exc. Il. 7.52, θανέμεν Pi. P. 4.72: pf. τέθνηκα Il. 18.12, etc.; subj. τεθνήκω Th. 8.74: plpf. ἐτεθνήκειν Antipho 5.70, Lys. 19.48; 3 pl. -ήκεσαν And. 1.52: short forms of pf., 3 dual τέθνᾰτον X. An. 4.1.19, 1 pl. τέθνᾰμεν Pl. Grg. 493a, 3 pl. τεθνᾶσι Il. 22.52, etc.; 3 pl. plpf. ἐτέθνᾰσαν Antipho 5.70, And. 1.59, X. HG 6.4.16; imper. τέθνᾰθι Il. 22.365, τεθνάτω 15.496, IG 12.10, Pl. Lg. 933e, etc.; opt. τεθναίην Il. 18.98, etc.; inf. τεθνάναι [ᾰ ] Semon. 3, Hdt. 1.31, Ar. Ra. 1012, Pl.Com. 68, Th. 8.92, etc., τεθνᾶναι dub.l. in Mimn. 2.10, A. Ag. 539; τεθνάμεναι, -άμεν, Il. 24.225, 15.497, etc.; Aeol. τεθνάκην Sapph. 2.15; part. τεθνεώς Hdt. 9.120, Ar. Av. 476, etc., fem. τεθνεῶσα Lys. 31.22, D. 40.27 (τεθνηκυῖα Hippon. 29, E. Or. 109), neut. τεθνεός Hdt. 1.112, Hp. Nat.Mul. 32 (τεθνηκός Pl. Phd. 71d, pl. τεθνεῶτα 72c); gen. τεθνεῶτος, etc., Hdt. 5.68, etc. (once in Hom., dat. τεθνεῶτι Od. 19.331); poet. τεθνεότος Archel. ap. Antig. Mir. 89, Q.S. 7.65; Dor. τεθνᾰότα Pi. N. 10.74; τεθνηώς (v.l. -ειώς) Il. 17.161, -ηυῖα Od. 4.734, (κατα-) 11.141; gen. τεθνηῶτος Il. 9.633, etc.; also τεθνηότος 17.435, Od. 15.23, al. [ τεθνεῶτι is trisyll. Od. 19.331, τεθνεώτων E. Supp. 272 (hex.): disyll. forms are written in later Gr., nom. τεθνώς BCH 18.438 (Argilus); gen. sg. τεθνῶτος SIG 799.13 (Cyzicus, i A.D.); dat. sg. τεθνῶτι Papers of the Amer. School 3.334 (Pisid.); fem. τεθνώσῃ (and gen. pl. τεθνήτων) Ath.Mitt. 50.134(Macedonia); acc. pl. fem. τεθνώσας Babr. 45.9 ]: from τέθνηκα arose fut. τεθνήξω Ar. Ach. 325, A. Ag. 1279 (censured as archaic by Luc. So 7), later τεθνήξομαι Diogenian.Epicur. 1.28, 3.52, Luc. Pisc. 10, Ael. NA 2.46; part. τεθνηξόμενος Lib. 438.7. —

I

1. The simple Verb is regularly used in early Prose in pf. and plpf.; for pres., fut., and aor. the compd. ἀποθνῄσκω is substituted: θνῄσκει v.l. in Hp. Mul. 1.9, σάρκες θνῄσκουσι Art. 69, ἔθνῃσκον Th. 2.47, al., θνῃσκόντων ib. 53, θνῄσκοι Pl. Phd. 72d, θνῄσκομεν Epicur. Ephesians 1 p.20U.: aor. part. θανών, subj. θάνῃ, IG 12(5).593.2,20,23 (Iulis, v B.C.), Berl.Sitzb. 1927.166 (Cyrene), Phld. Herc. 1649.4: aor. inf. θανεῖν ib.1418.13: — in pres. and impf., die, as well of natural as of violent death; in aor. and pf., to be dead (cf. τί τοὺς θανὅντας οὐκ ἐᾷς τεθνηκέναι; Eup. 12.3 D.; τέθνηκ’ ἔγωγε πρὶν θανεῖν κακῶν ὕπο E. Hec. 431), θανεῖν καὶ πότμον ἐπισπεῖν Il. 7.52, etc.; ζωὸς ἠὲ θανών alive or dead, Od. 4.553, cf. 15.350; ἦ ἤδη τέθνηκε 4.834; ὡς ἄμεινον εἴη τεθνάναι μᾶλλον ἢ ζώειν Hdt. 1.31, cf. 7.46; τεθνάναι κρεῖττον ἤ.. D. 9.65, cf. 10.25; ἄξιος τεθνάναι Ar. Ra. 1012, etc.; τεθνάτω let him be put to death, IG 12.10.29; ἄτιμος τεθ. Lex ap. D. 9.44: freq. in part., νέκυος πέρι τεθνηῶτος Il. 18.173; νεκρὸν.. τεθνηῶτα a dead corpse, Od. 12.10; οἱ τεθνηκότες, οἱ θανόντες, the dead, E. Hec. 278, Eup. l.c., etc.; οὔτε τεθνεῶτα οὔτε ζῶντα Hdt. 4.14; οἴχεται θανών (v. οἴχομαι) ; θανὼν φροῦδος (v. φροῦδος) ; θανόντι συνθανεῖν S. Tr. 798, Fr. 953, cf. E. Supp. 1007 (lyr.); ὁ θανών, opp. ὁ κτανών, S. Ph. 336: pres. with pf. sense, θνῄσκουσι γάρ, for τεθνήκασι, Id. OT 118, cf. E. Hec. 695 (lyr.), Ba. 1041 (lyr.), etc.
2. used like a pass. Verb, χερσὶν ὑπ’ Αἴαντος θανέειν to fall by his hand, Il. 15.289; θ. ὑπό τινος Pl. 329c, Arist. HA 625a16; ἔκ τινος Pi. P. 4.72, S. OT 1454; πρός τινος ib. 292, E. Hec. 773; θεοῖς τέθνηκε S. Aj. 970: freq. c. dat. instrumenti, θ. χερί, δορί, Id. OC 1388, A. Th. 959 (lyr.); φαρμάκοισι E. Fk. 464; also ἐν βρόχῳ A. Ch. 558; τεθνάναι τῷ δέει, τ. τῷ φόβῳ, c. acc., to be in mortal fear of, D. 4.45, 19.81, cf. Arr. An. 7.9.4; προοίμιον σκοτεινὸν καὶ τεθνηκὸς δειλίᾳ Aeschin. 2.34; θ. ἐπί τινι to die leaving one as heir, Luc. DMort. 7.1.

II metaph., of things, perish, θνᾴσκει σιγαθὲν καλὸν ἔργον Pi. Fr. 121; ἐσλῶν ὑπὸ χαρμάτων πῆμα θνᾴσκει.. δαμασθέν Id. O. 2.19; λόγοι θνῄσκοντες μάτην A. Ch. 846; θ. πίστις S. OC 611; τὸ τρύβλιον τέθνηκέ μοι Ar. Ra. 986 (lyr.): in Prose, τέθνηκε τὸ τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας μισεῖν D. 19.289; τεθνηκός τι φθέγξασθαι D.C. 40.54; τεθνηκὸς ὁρᾶν Callistr. Stat. 14; τὸ τεθνηκὸς ὁ λίθος ὑπεδύετο ib. 2.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
θνῄσκω: perfect τέθνηκα, infinitive τεθνάναι and L T Tr WH τεθνηκέναι (in Acts 14:19), participle τεθνηκώς; pluperfect 3 person singular ἐτεθνήκει (John 11:21 Rec.); (from Homer down); the Sept. for מוּת; to die; perfect to be dead: Matthew 2:20; Mark 15:44; Luke 7:12 (L brackets); ; John 11:21, Rec. in and ; John 12:1 (T WH omit; L Tr brackets); John 19:33; Acts 14:19; Acts 25:19; metaph, of the loss of spiritual life: ζῶσα τέθνηκε, i. e. κἄν δοκῇ ζῆν ταύτην τήν αἰσθητην ζωήν, τέθνηκε κατά πνεῦμα (Theoph.): 1 Timothy 5:6 (Philo de secular § 10 ζῶντες ἔνιοι τεθνήκασι καί τεθνηκότες ζῶσι). (Compare: ἀποθνῄσκω, συναποθνῄσκω.)

Question 282

θνητός, ή, όν

Answer 282

mortal

mortal, subject to death, Rom. 6:12; 8:11; 2 Cor. 4:11; τὸ θνητόν, mortality, 1 Cor. 15:53, 54; 2 Cor. 5:4*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
θνητός, ή, όν, also ός, όν E. Ion 973, IA 901, 1396: Dor. θνᾱτός (v. infr.): Aeol. θνᾶτος Sapph. Supp. 13.7: (θνῄσκω): —

1. liable to death, mortal, opp. ἀθάνατος, freq. in Hom., Od. 5.213, al.; θ. ἄνδρες Hes. Th. 967; οὐδὲν.. θνητὸν ἐόν Hdt. 8.98; ζῷα πάντα θ. καὶ φυτά Pl. Sph. 265c: as Subst., θνητοί mortals, Od. 19.593, etc.; θνηταί mortal women, 5.213; πάντων τῶν θ. of all mortal creatures, Hdt. 1.216, 2.68; εἴ τις φθόγγος (φθόγγον cod., but θ. is only used of living persons) εἰσακούεται θνητῶν παρ’ Ἅιδῃ E. HF 491: Comp., ἐν θνητῷ ὄντες, ἔτι θνητοτέρους ἑαυτοὺς ποιοῦντες Porph. Abst. 4.20: Sup., θνητότατος πάντων Plot. 5.1.1.
2. of things, befitting mortals, human, ἔργματα E. Ba. 1069; θνατὰ θνατοῖσι πρέπει Pi. I. 5(4).16; θνατὰ χρὴ τὸν θνατὸν.. φρονεῖν Epich. [263], cf. S. Tr. 473; τὸ δαιμόνιον μεταξύ ἐστι θεοῦ τε καὶ θνητοῦ Pl. Smp. 202e.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
θνητός, θνητῇ, θνητόν (verbal adjective from θνῄσκω) (from Homer down), liable to death, mortal: Romans 6:12; Romans 8:11; 1 Corinthians 15:53; 2 Corinthians 4:11; 2 Corinthians 5:4. (θνητός subject to death, and so still living; νεκρός actually dead.)

STRONGS NT 2349a: θορυβάζω θορυβάζω: (θόρυβος, which see); to trouble, disturb (i. e. τυρβάζω, which see); passive present 2 person singular θορυβάζῃ in Luke 10:41 L T Tr WH after manuscripts א B C L etc. (Not found elsewhere (Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word, quotes Eusebius of Alexandria (Migne, Patr. Graec. vol. 86:1), p. 444 c.).)

Question 283

ἀποθνῄσκω

Answer 283

to die (in a literal or fig. sense); to be about to die, be mortal

to die, Mt. 8:32; to decay, rot, as seeds, Jn. 12:24; 1 Cor. 15:36; to wither, become dry, as a tree, Jude 12; met. to die the death of final condemnation and misery, Jn. 6:50; 8:21, 24; to die to a thing by renunciation or utter separation, Rom. 6:2; 1 Cor. 15:31; Gal. 2;19; Col. 3:3
(ἀπέθνῃσκον), ἀποθανοῦμαι, ἀπέθανον, -, -, -

Thayer’s Definition
to die
of the natural death of man
of the violent death of man or animals
to perish by means of something
of trees which dry up, of seeds which rot when planted
of eternal death, to be subject to eternal misery in hell

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀποθνήσκω,

fut. -θᾰνοῦμαι, Ion. -θανέομαι or -εῦμαι Hdt. 3.143, 7.134: — strengthd. for θνῄσκω,

I die, Hom. (v. infr.), Pi. O. 1.27, and once in Trag. (E. Fr. 578.6); in Com. and Prose the usual form of the pres.; σεῦ ἀποτεθνηῶτος Il. 22.432; ἀποθνῄσκων περὶ φασγάνῳ Od. 11.424; βόες δ’ ἀποτέθνασαν ἤδη 12.393; ἐκ τῶν τρωμάτων Hdt. 2.63; ὑπὸ λιμοῦ Th. 1.126: c. dat., βρόμῳ κεραυνοῦ Pi.l.c.; νόσῳ Th. 8.84: c. acc. cogn., θάνατον ἀ. X. Mem. 4.8.3, etc.; εἰς ἕτερον ζῆν ἀ. Pl. Ax. 365d; to be ready to die, of laughter, etc., Ar. Ach. 15; ἀ. τῷ δέει Arist. MM 1191a35.

II serving as Pass. of ἀποκτείνω, to be put to death, slain, ὑπό τινος Hdt. 1.137, 7.154; esp. by judicial sentence, ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως Lycurg. 93, cf. Pl. Ap. 29d, 32d,al., Arist. Rh. 1397a30 (v.l.).

III renounce, νόμῳ Galatians 2:19; ἀπό τινος Colossians 2:20.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀποθνῄσκω, imperfect ἀπέθνῃσκον (Luke 8:42); 2 aorist ἀπέθανον; future ἀποθανοῦμαι, Romans 5:7; John 8:21, 24 (see θνῄσκω); found in Greek writings from Homer down; to die (ἀπό, so as to be no more; (cf. Latinemorior; English die off or out, pass away); German absterben,versterben);

I. used properly
1. of the natural death of men: Matthew 9:24; Matthew 22:24; Luke 16:22; John 4:47; Romans 7:2, and very often; ἀποθνῄσκοντες ἀποθνῄσκοντες subject to death, mortal, Hebrews 7:8 (Buttmann, 206 (178)).
2. of the violent death — both of animals, Matthew 8:32, and of men, Matthew 26:35; Acts 21:13 etc.; 1 Peter 3:18 L T Tr WH text; ἐν φόνῳ μαχαίρας, Hebrews 11:37; of the punishment of death, Hebrews 10:28; often of the violent death which Christ suffered, as John 12:33; Romans 5:6, etc.
3. Phrases: ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐκ τίνος, to perish by means of something, (cf. English to die of), Revelation 8:11; ἐν τῇ ἁμαρτία, ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις, fixed in sin, hence, to die unreformed, John 8:21, 24; ἐν τῷ Ἀδάμ by connection with Adam, 1 Corinthians 15:22; ἐν κυρίῳ in fellowship with, and trusting in, the Lord, Revelation 14:13; ἀποθνῄσκειν τί, to die a certain death, Romans 6:10 (θάνατον μακρόν, Chariton, p. 12, D’Orville edition (l. i. c. 8, p. 17, 6, Beck edition; cf. Winers Grammar, 227 (213); Buttmann, 149 (130))); τῇ ἁμαρτία, used of Christ, ‘that he might not have to busy himself more with the sin of men,’ Romans 6:10; ἑαυτῷ to become one’s own master, independent, by dying, Romans 14:7 (cf. Meyer); τῷ κυρίῳ to become subject to the Lord’s will by dying, Romans 14:8 (cf. Meyer); διά τινα i. e. to save one, 1 Corinthians 8:11; on the phrases ἀποθνῄσκειν περί and ὑπέρ τίνος, see περί, the passage cited δ. and ὑπέρ I. 2 and 3. Oratorically, although the proper signification of the verb is retained, καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀποθνῄσκω I meet death daily, live daily in danger of death, 1 Corinthians 15:31, cf. 2 Corinthians 6:9.
4. of trees which dry up, Jude 1:12; of seeds, which while being resolved into their elements in the ground seem to perish by rotting, John 12:24; 1 Corinthians 15:36.
II. tropically, in various senses;
1. of eternal death, as it is called, i. e. to be subject to eternal misery, and that, too, already beginning on earth: Romans 8:13; John 6:50; John 11:26.
2. of moral death, in various senses;
a. to be deprived of real life, i. e. especially of the power of doing right, of confidence in God and the hope of future blessedness, Romans 7:10; of the spiritual torpor of those who have fallen from the fellowship of Christ, the fountain of true life, Revelation 3:2.
b. with the dative of the thing (cf. Winers Grammar, 210 (197); 428 (398); Buttmann, 178 (155)), to become wholly alienated from a thing, and freed from all connection with it: τῷ νόμῳ, Galatians 2:19, which must also be supplied with ἀποθανόντες (for so we must read for Rec.elz ἀποθανόντος) in Romans 7:6 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 159 (150)); τῇ ἁμαρτία, Romans 6:2 (in another sense in Romans 6:10; see I. 3 above); ἀπό τῶν στοιχείων τοῦ κόσμου so that your relation to etc. has passed away, Colossians 2:20 (ἀπό τῶν παθῶν, Porphyry, de abst. animal. 1, 41 (cf. Buttmann, 322 (277); Winer’s Grammar, 370 (347))); true Christians are said simply ἀποθανεῖν, as having put off all sensibility to worldly things that draw them away from God, Colossians 3:3; since they owe this habit of mind to the death of Christ, they are said also ἀποθανεῖν σύν Χριστῷ, Romans 6:8; Colossians 2:20. (Compare: συναποθνῄσκω.)

Question 284

θάνατος, -ου, ὁ

Answer 284

death

death, the extinction of life, whether naturally, Lk. 2:26; Mk. 9:1; or violently, Mt. 10:21; 15:4; imminent danger of death, 2 Cor. 4:11, 12; 11:23; in NT spiritual death, as opposed to ζωή in its spiritual sense, in respect of a forfeiture of salvation, Jn. 8:51; Rom. 6:16

Thayer’s Definition
the death of the body
that separation (whether natural or violent) of the soul and the body by which the life on earth is ended
with the implied idea of future misery in hell
the power of death
since the nether world, the abode of the dead, was conceived as being very dark, it is equivalent to the region of thickest darkness i.e. figuratively, a region enveloped in the darkness of ignorance and sin
metaph., the loss of that life which alone is worthy of the name,
the misery of the soul arising from sin, which begins on earth but lasts and increases after the death of the body in hell
the miserable state of the wicked dead in hell
in the widest sense, death comprising all the miseries arising from sin, as well physical death as the loss of a life consecrated to God and blessed in him on earth, to be followed by wretchedness in hell

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
θάνᾰτος

[ θᾰ], ὁ, (θνῄσκω)

I

1. death, whether natural or violent, Hom., etc.; τῶν ὑπαλευάμενος θάνατον the death threatened by them, Od. 15.275; ὣς θάνον οἰκτίστῳ θανάτῳ 11.412; θάνατόνδε to death, Il. 16.693, 22.297; θανάτου τέλος, μοῖρα, A. Th. 906 (lyr.), Pers. 917 (anap.), etc.; θανάτου πέρι καὶ ζωᾶς for life and death, Pi. N. 9.29; θ. ἢ βίον φέρει S. Aj. 802; θάνατος μὲν τάδ’ ἀκούειν Id. OC 529; θανάτῳ ἴσον πάθος Id. Aj. 215; ἐν ἀγχόναις θάνατον λαβεῖν E. Hel. 201; πόλεώς ἐστι θ., ἀνάστατον γενέσθαι it is its death, Lycurg. 61; γῆρας ζῶν θ. Secund. Sent. 12; θάνατον ἀποθνῄσκειν, τελευτᾶν, Plu. Crass. 25, D.H. 4.76.
2. in Law, death-penalty, θάνατον καταγνῶναί τινος to pass sentence of death on one, Th. 3.81; θανάτου δίκῃ κρίνεσθαι ib. 57; θανάτου κρίνειν X. Cyr. 1.2.14, Plb. 6.14.6; περὶ θανάτου διώκειν X. HG 7.3.6; πρὸς τοὺς ἐχθροὺς.. ἀγωνίσασθαι περὶ θ. D. 4.47; θ. τῆς ζημίας ἐπικειμένης the penalty is death, Isoc. 8.50; ellipt., παιδίον κεκος μημένον τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολήν) Hdt. 1.109; τὴν ἐπὶ θ. προσαγαγεῖν τινα Luc. Alex. 44; but δῆσαί τινα τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. δέσιν) Hdt. 3.119; τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ ἔξοδον ποιεῖσθαι to go to execution, Id. 7.223; ἐπὶ θάνατον ἄγεσθαι Id. 3.14; τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις ἐπιτρέψαι περὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν πλὴν θανάτου for any penalty short of death, Th. 4.54; εὐθύνας εἶναι πλὴν φυγῆς καὶ θανάτου καὶ ἀτιμίας IG 12.39.73; εἰργόμενον θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ἀνάπηρον ποιῆσαι short of death or maiming, Aeschin. 1.183.
3. pl., θάνατοι kinds of death, Od. 12.341; the deaths of several persons, S. OT 1200, E. Heracl. 628 (both lyr.); poet., of one person, A. Ch. 53, S. OT 496, El. 206 (all lyr.); οὐχ ἑνός, οὐδὲ δυοῖν ἄξια θανάτοιν Pl. Lg. 908e; πολλῶν θ., οὐχ ἑνὸς ἄξιος D. 21.21, cf. 19.16, Ar. Pl. 483, D.H. 4.24; δεύτερος θ. *Revelation 2:11, cf. Plu. 2.942f; esp. of violent death, θ. αὐθένται A. Ag. 1572 (lyr.), cf. Th. 879 (lyr.); εἰς θανάτους ἰέναι Pl. R. 399b.

II as pr. n., Θάνατος Death, Ὕπνῳ.. κασιγνήτῳ Θανάτοιο Il. 14.231, cf. S. Aj. 854, Ph. 797, etc.; μόνος θεῶν γὰρ Θ. οὐ δώρων ἐρᾷ A. Fr. 161; ὃν [ἰὸν] τέκετο Θ. S. Tr. 834; character in E. Alc.

III corpse, θ. ἀτύμβευτος AP 9.439 (Crin.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
θάνατος, θανάτου, ὁ (θανεῖν); the Sept. for מָוֶת and מוּת, also for דֶּבֶר pestilence (Winers Grammar, 29 note); (one of the nouns often anarthrous, cf. Winers Grammar, § 19, 1 under the word; (Buttmann, § 124, 8 c.); Grimm, commentary on Sap., p. 59); death;

1. properly, the death of the body, i. e. that separation (whether natural or violent) of the soul from the body by which the life on earth is ended: John 11:4 (13); Acts 2:24 (Tr marginal reading ᾅδου) (on this see ὠδίν); Philippians 2:27, 30; Hebrews 7:23; Hebrews 9:15; Revelation 9:6; Revelation 18:8; opposed to ζωή, Romans 8:38; 1 Corinthians 3:22; 2 Corinthians 1:9; Philippians 1:20; with the implied idea of future misery in the state beyond, 1 Corinthians 15:21; 2 Timothy 1:10; Hebrews 2:14f; equivalent to the power of death, 2 Corinthians 4:12. Since the nether world, the abode of the dead, was conceived of as being very dark, χώρα καί σκιά θανάτου (צַלְמָוֶת) is equivalent to the region of thickest darkness, i. e. figuratively, a region enveloped in the darkness of ignorance and sin: Matthew 4:16; Luke 1:79 (from Isaiah 9:2); θάνατος is used of the punishment of Christ, Romans 5:10; Romans 6:3-5; 1 Corinthians 11:26; Philippians 3:10; Colossians 1:22; Hebrews 2:(9),14; σῴζειν τινα ἐκ θανάτου, to free from the fear of death, to enable one to undergo death fearlessly, Hebrews 5:7 (but others besides); ῤύεσθαι ἐκ θανάτου, to deliver from the danger of death, 2 Corinthians 1:10; plural θανατοῖ, deaths (i. e. mortal perils) of various kinds, 2 Corinthians 11:23; περίλυπος ἕως θανάτου, even unto death, i. e. so that I am almost dying of sorrow, Matthew 26:38; Mark 14:34 (λελύπημαι ἕως θανάτου, Jonah 4:9; λύπη ἕως θανάτου, Sir. 37:2, cf, Judges 16:16); μέχρι θανάτου, so as not to refuse to undergo even death, Philippians 2:8; also ἄχρι θανάτου, Revelation 2:10; Revelation 12:11; ἐσφαγμένος εἰς θάνατον, that has received a deadly wound, Revelation 13:3; πληγή θανάτου, a deadly wound (death-stroke, cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 34, 3 b.), Revelation 13:3, 12; ἰδεῖν θάνατον, to experience death, Luke 2:26; Hebrews 11:5; also γεύεσθαι θανάτου (see γεύω, 2), Matthew 16:28; Mark 9:1; Luke 9:27; διώκειν τινα ἄχρι θανάτου, even to destruction, Acts 22:4; κατακρίνειν τινα θανάτῳ, to condemn one to death (ad mortem damnare, Tacitus), Matthew 20:18 (here Tdf. εἰς θάνατον); Mark 10:33, (see κατακρίνω, a.); πορεύεσθαι εἰς θάνατον, to undergo death, Luke 22:33; παραδιδόναι τινα εἰς θάνατον, that he may be put to death, Matthew 10:21; Mark 13:12; passive, to be given over to the peril of death, 2 Corinthians 4:11; παρέδωκαν … εἰς κρίμα θανάτου, Luke 24:20; ἀποκτεῖναι τινα ἐν θανάτῳ (a Hebraism (cf. Buttmann, 184 (159f))), Revelation 2:23; Revelation 6:8 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 29 note); αἰτία θανάτου (see αἰτία, 2), Acts 13:28; Acts 28:18; ἄξιον τί θανάτου, some crime worthy of the penalty of death, Acts 23:29; Acts 25:11, 25; (Acts 26:31); Luke 23:15, 22 (here αἴτιον (which see 2 b.) θάνατος); ἔνοχος θανάτου, worthy of punishment by death, Matthew 26:66; Mark 14:64; θανάτῳ τελευτάτω, let him surely be put to death, Matthew 15:4; Mark 7:10, after Exodus 21:17 the Sept. (Hebrew יוּמָת מות); cf. Winers Grammar, § 44 at the end N. 3; (Buttmann, as above); θανάτου … σταυροῦ, Philippians 2:8; ποιῶ θανάτῳ, by what kind of death, John 12:33; John 18:32; John 21:19. The inevitable necessity of dying, shared alike by all men, takes on in the popular imagination the form of a person, a tyrant, subjugating men to his power and confining them in his dark dominions: Romans 6:9; 1 Corinthians 15:(26),54,56; Revelation 21:4; Hades is associated with him as his partner: 1 Corinthians 15:55 R G; Revelation 1:18 (on which see κλείς); ,(a) (Psalm 17:5 (); Psalm 114:3 (); Hosea 13:14; Sir. 14:12).
2. metaphorically, the loss of that life which alone is worthy of the name, i. e. “the misery of soul arising from sin, which begins on earth but lasts and increases after the death of the body”: 2 Corinthians 3:7; James 1:15 (Clement of Rome, 2 Cor. 1, 6 [ET] says of life before conversion to Christ, ὁ βίος ἡμῶν ὅλος ἄλλο οὐδέν ἦν εἰ μή θάνατος (cf. Philo, praem. et poenis § 12, and references in 4 below)); opposed to ἡ ζωή, Romans 7:10, 13; 2 Corinthians 2:16; opposed to σωτηρία, 2 Corinthians 7:10; equivalent to the cause of death, Romans 7:13; σῴζειν ψυχήν ἐκ θανάτου, James 5:20; μεταβεβηκέναι ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τήν ζωήν, John 5:24; 1 John 3:14; μένειν ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ, 1 John 3:14; θεωρεῖν θάνατον, John 8:51; γεύεσθαι θανάτου, John 8:52 (see 1 above); ἁμαρτία and ἁμαρτάνειν πρός θάνατον (see ἁμαρτία, 2 b.), 1 John 5:16f (in the rabbinical writers לָמוּת חֵטְא — after Numbers 18:22, the Sept. ἁμαρτία θανατηφόρος — is acrimen capitale).
3. the miserable state of the wicked dead in hell is called — now simply θάνατος, Romans 1:32 (Wis. 1:12f Wis. 2:24; Tatian or. ad Graec. c. 13; the author of the epistle ad Diognet. c. 10, 7 [ET] distinguishes between ὁ δοκῶν ἐνθάδε θάνατος, the death of the body, and ὁ ὄντως θάνατος, ὅς φυλάσσεται τοῖς κατακριθησομενοις εἰς τό πῦρ τό αἰώνιον); now ὁ δεύτερος θάνατος and ὁ θάνατος ὁ δεύτερος (as opposed to the former death, i. e. to that by which life on earth is ended), Revelation 2:11; Revelation 20:6, 14b; Revelation 21:8 (as in the Targums on Deuteronomy 33:6; Psalm 48:11 (); Isaiah 22:14; Isaiah 66:15; (for the Greek use of the phrase cf. Plutarch, de fade in orbe lunae 27, 6, p. 942 f.); θάνατος αἰώνιος, the Epistle of Barnabas 20, 1 [ET] and in ecclesiastical writings (ὁ ἀΐδιος θάνατος, Philo, post. Cain. § 11 at the end; see also Wetstein on Revelation 2:11)).
4. In the widest sense, death comprises all the miseries arising from sin, as well physical death as the loss of a life consecrated to God and blessed in him on earth (Philo, alleg. legg. i. § 33 ὁ ψυχῆς θάνατος ἀρετῆς μέν φθορά ἐστι, κακίας δέ ἀνάληψις (de profug. § 21 θάνατος ψυχῆς ὁ μετά κακίας ἐστι βίος, especially §§ 10, 11; qued det. pot. insid. §§ 14, 15; de poster. Cain. § 21, and de praem. et poen. as in 2 above)), to be followed by wretchedness in the lower world (opposed to ζωή αἰώνιος): θάνατος seems to be so used in Romans 5:12; Romans 6:16, 21 (Romans 6:23; yet others refer these last three examples to 3 above); Romans 7:24; Romans 8:2, 6; death, in this sense, is personified in Romans 5:14, 17, 21; Romans 7:5. Others, in all these passages as well as those cited under 2, understand physical death; but see Philippi on Romans 5:12; Messner, Lehre der Apostel, p. 210ff

Question 285

θανατόω

Answer 285

to put to death, kill

to put to death, deliver to death, Mt. 10:21; 26:59; Mk. 13:12; pass. to be exposed to imminent danger of death, Rom. 8:36; in NT met. to subdue, Rom. 8:13; pass. to be dead to, to be rid, parted from, as if by the intervention of death, Rom. 7:4

θανατώσω, ἐθανάτωσα, -, -, ἐθανατώθην

Thayer’s Definition
to put to death
metaph.
to make to die i.e. destroy, render extinct
by death to be liberated from the bond of anything, literally to be made dead in relation to (something)

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
θᾰνᾰτ-όω,

fut. -ώσω A. Pr. 1053 (anap.), etc.: pf. τεθανάτωκα Phld. Rh. 1.359S.: — Pass., fut. -ωθήσομαι LXX 1 Ki. 14.45: fut. Med. in pass.sense θανατώσοιτο X. Cyr. 7.5.31: aor.1 ἐθανατώθην Id. An. 2.6.4, Pl. Lg. 865d: pf. τεθανάτωμαι Plb. 23.4.14: —

I

1. put to death, τινα Hdt. 1.113, A. Pr. l.c.; esp. of the public executioner, Pl. Lg. 872c, etc.: metaph., τεθανατωκέναι τὰς Ἀθήνας (sc. τοὺς ῥήτορας) Phld.l.c.: — Pass., to be made dead, Romans 7:4; ὁ -ωθείς the murdered man, Pl. Lg. 865d.
2. Pass., of flesh, to be mortified, Hp. Fract. 26: — metaph. in Act., mortify, τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος Romans 8:13.

II condemn to death by sentence of law, Antipho 3.3.11, Matthew 26:60 : — Pass., X. An. 2.6.4; οἱ τεθανατωμένοι those condemned to death, Plb. l.c.

III to be fatal, cause death, ὄφεις -οῦντες LXX Numbers 21:6; μυῖαι -οῦσαι ib. Ecclesiastes 10:1; νόσος Ph. 2.247 (-ῶσαν, -ώσασαν codd.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
θανατόω, θανάτῳ; future θανατώσω; 1 aorist infinitive θανατῶσαι (3 person plural subjunctive θανατώσωσι, Matthew 26:59 R G); passive (present θανατοῦμαι); 1 aorist ἐθανατωθην; (from θάνατος); from Aeschylus and Herodotus down; the Sept. for הֵמִית, הָרַג, etc.

1. properly, to put to death: τινα, Matthew 10:21; Matthew 26:59; Matthew 27:1; Mark 13:12; Mark 14:55; Luke 21:16; 2 Corinthians 6:9; 1 Peter 3:18; passive, by rhetorical hyperbole, to be in the state of one who is being put to death, Romans 8:36.
2. metaphorically,
   a. to make to die i. e. destroy, render extinct (something vigorous), Vulg. mortifico (A. V. mortify): τί, Romans 8:13.
   b. passive with the dative of the thing, by death to be liberated from the bond of anything (literally, to be made dead in relation to; cf. Winers Grammar, 210 (197); Buttmann, 178 (155)): Romans 7:4.

Question 286

αποτιθεμαι / ἀποτίθημι

Answer 286

I put off from myself, lay aside

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀποτίθημι,

I

1. put away, stow away, δέπας δ’ ἀπέθηκ’ ἐνὶ χηλῷ Il. 16.254, cf. X. An. 2.3.15; ἀ. εἰς δεσμωτήριον Lycurg. 112: metaph., ‘pigeon-hole’, class, Phlp. in Ph. 361.22.
2. expose a child, Pl. Tht. 161a.

II Med. (aor. I part. ἀποθησαμένη Hsch.),

1. put away from oneself, lay aside, τεύχεα κάλ’ ἀποθέσθαι ἐπὶ χθονί Il. 3.89; τὴν Σκυθικὴν στολὴν ἀ. put it off, Hdt. 4.78; ἀ. κόμας cut it off, in mourning, E. Hel. 367 (lyr., tm.); ἀ. τὸν νόμον set aside, i.e. disregard, the law, Th. 1.77; ἀ. τὰν Ἀφροδίταν quell desire, E. IA 558 (lyr.); ἀ. ῥᾳθυμίαν D. 4.8, 8.46; ὀργήν Plu. Cor. 19; ἀρχήν Id. Pomp. 23.
2. put away from oneself, avoid, ἀποθέσθαι ἐνιπήν wipe away the reproach, Il. 5.492, cf. Hes. Op. 762; νόστον ἔχθιστον ἀπεθήκατο Pi. O. 8.68, cf. 10(11).40.
3. put by for oneself, stow away, Ar. Eq. 1219, X. Cyr. 6.1.15; ἀ. τροφὴν τοῖς νεοττοῖς Arist. HA 619a20; ἀ. τινὰ εἰς φυλακήν Plb. 23.10.8; freq. of drugs, Dsc. 4.136, al., cf. PEleph. 12 (iii B.C.); ἐν φυλακῇ Matthew 14:3. bury, IG 14.1974.
4. ἀποτίθεσθαι εἰς αὖθις put off, defer, E. IT 376, Pl. Grg. 449b, X. Smp. 2.7, etc.; εἰς τοὺς παῖδας ἀ. τὰς τιμωρίας Lys. Fr. 53.3.
5. reserve, keep back, Pl. Lg. 887c, Din. 1.30.
6. ἀπεθήκατο κόλπων, of a woman, laid down the burden of her womb, i.e. bore a child, Call. Dian. 25; ἀ. ὠδῖνας Str. 10.5.2: but,
7. μηδὲν ἀποτίθεσθαι τῶν γιγνομένων expose none of one’s children, Arist. Pol. 1335b22.
8. ἀ. χρόνον εἴς τι employ, bestow time upon it, Plb. 18.9.10.
9. set a fracture, Pall. in Hp.Fract. 12.276 C.; cf. ἀπόθεσις.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀποτίθημι: 2 aorist middle ἀπεθεμην; (from Homer down); to put off or aside; in the N. T. only middle to put off from oneself: τά ἱμάτια, Acts 7:58; (to lay up or away, ἐν τῇ φυλακή (i. e., put), Matthew 14:3 L T Tr WH (so εἰς φυλακήν, Leviticus 24:12; Numbers 15:34; 2 Chronicles 18:26; Polybius 24, 8, 8; Diodorus 4, 49, ete.)); tropically those things are said to be put off or away which anyone gives up, renounces: as τά ἔργα τοῦ σκότους, Romans 13:12; — Ephesians 4:22 (cf. Winers Grammar, 347 (325); Buttmann, 274 (236)), 25; Colossians 3:8; James 1:21; 1 Peter 2:1; Hebrews 12:1; (τήν ὀργήν, Plutarch, Coriol. 19; τόν πλοῦτον, τήν μαλακίαν, etc. Luc. dial. mort. 10, 8; τήν ἐλευθερίαν καί παρρησίαν, ibid. 9, etc.).

Question 287

διατιθημι / διατίθεμαι

Answer 287

to arrange, make an arrangement; make a will and testament, do away with what belongs to oneself by way of a legal will or arrangement; make a covenant

Thayer’s Definition
to arrange, dispose of, one’s own affairs
of something that belongs to one
to dispose of by will, make a testament
to make a covenant, enter into a covenant, with one

to make a covenant or a will; to confer, assign

in NT only mid., so some list as διατιθεμαι, to arrange; to arrange according to one’s own mind; to make a disposition, to make a will; to settle the terms of a covenant, to ratify, Acts 3:25; Heb. 8:10; 10:16; to assign, Lk. 22:29

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
διατιìθεμαι

Middle voice from G1223 and G5087

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διατίθημι: to place separately, dispose, arrange, appoint, (cf. διά, C. 3). In the N. T. only in the middle, present διατίθεμαι; 2 aorist διεθέμην; future διαθήσομαι;

1. to arrange, dispose of, one’s own affairs;
   a. τί, of something that belongs to one (often so in secular authors from Xenophon down); with the dative of person added, in one’s favor, to one’s advantage; hence, to assign a thing to another as his possession: τίνι βασιλείαν (to appoint), Luke 22:29.
   b. to dispose of by will, make a testament: Hebrews 9:16f; (Plato, legg. 11, p. 924 e.; with διαθήκην added, ibid., p. 923 c., etc.).
2. διατίθεμαι διαθήκην τίνι (פּ אֶת בֲּרִית כָּרַת, Jeremiah 38:31ff (ff)), to make a covenant, enter into covenant, with one, (cf. Winers Grammar, 225 (211); Buttmann, 148 (129f)): Hebrews 8:10, (Genesis 15:18); πρός τινα, Acts 3:25; Hebrews 10:16 (Deuteronomy 7:2); μετά τίνος, 1 Macc. 1:11. The Greeks said συντίθεμαι πρός τινα, αἱ πρός τινα συνθηκαι, Xenophon, Cyril 3, 1, 21. (Compare: ἀντιδιατίθημι.)

Question 288

μετατίθημι

Answer 288

I transfer, change

Thayer’s Definition
to transpose (two things, one of which is put in place of the other)
to transfer
to change
to transfer one’s self or suffer one’s self to be transferred
to go or pass over
to fall away or desert from one person or thing to another

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μετατίθημι,

fut. - θήσω: — Med., fut. - θήσομαι D. 19.341:

I place among, τῷ κ’ οὔ τι τόσον κέλαδον μετέθηκε (v.l. μεθέηκεν) then he would not have caused so much noise among us, Od. 18.402.

II place differently,

1 in local sense, transpose, change the place of, τὰ αἰδοῖα εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν Pl. Smp. 191b; εἰς βελτίω τόπον Id. Lg. 903d; μ. τὰς θύρας PSI 5.546.5 (iii B. C.); μετέθηκεν αὐτὸν (sc. τὸν Ἑνώχ) ὁ θεός LXX Genesis 5:24 : — Pass., Arist. Int. 20b10; to be transferred, OGI 338.20 (Pergam., ii B. C.), Acts 7:16, etc.

2. in Logic, μ. τὸ συμπέρασμα alter a conclusion to its contrary, Arist. APr. 59b1.
3. change, alter, of a treaty, μεταθεῖναι ὅπῃ ἂν δοκῇ ἀμφοτέροις Foed. ap. Th. 5.18; τὸ νυνδὴ ῥηθέν Pl. Plt. 297e, cf. X. Mem. 3.14.6; μ. τινὰ ἐς πτηνὴν φύσιν AP 11.367 (Jul.); ἐπὶ ὑὸς τὰς ἐπωνυμίας μ. change their names and call them after swine, Hdt. 5.68; substitute, προφάσεις ἀντὶ τῶν ἀληθῶν ψευδεῖς μ. D. 18.225, cf. Pl. Lg. 683b (Pass.); correct, τοὺς ἠγνοηκότας Plb. 1.67.5; but, pervert, μετ έθηκεν αὐτὸν ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ LXX 3 Ki. 20(21).25.
4. Med., change what is one’s own or for oneself, μ. τὰ εἰρημένα X. Mem. 4.2.18; νόμους ib. 4.4.14; τὴν δόξαν D. 18.229; τὸν τρόπον Id. 19.341; τοὔνομα Arist. Fr. 549; ὀνόματα change the use of words, Epicur. Nat. 95 G. (also in Act., Nat. 28.5); [ τὸ νόμισμα ] Arist. Pol. 1257b11: abs., change one’s opinion, retract, Pl. R. 345b, etc.; μεταθέσθω let him change his mind, Men. Pk. 48; also in political sense, change sides, μεταθέσθαι πρὸς τὴν Ῥωμαίων αἵρεσιν Plb. 24.9.6; Dionysius of Heraclea, who went over from the Stoics to the Cyrenaics, was called μεταθέμενος, turn-coat, D.L. 7.37, 166; μ. ἀπὸ τῶν πατρίων LXX 2 Maccabees 7:24; ἐξ ἀδικίας Corn. ND 11. τὴν γνώμην μετατίθεσθαι change to or adopt a new opinion, Hdt. 7.18 (but τῆς γνώμης μ. change from.., App. BC 3.29); μετέθου λύσσαν ἄρτι σωφρονῶν thou hast changed to madness, E. Or. 254; μ. τὸ ὄνομα τὸ νῦν ἀπὸ τῶν αἰγῶν adopted their present name, Paus. 7.26.3. μ. [τὸν φόβον ] transfer one’s fear, D. 18.177; τῇ μισθαρνίᾳ ταῦτα μετατιθέμενος τὰ ὀνόματα transferring.., ib.284. c. inf., μ. ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀπλήστως.. ἔχοντος βίου τὸν κοσμίως.. ἔχοντα βίον ἑλέσθαι change one’s mind and determine to choose.., Pl. Grg. 493c. c. dupl. acc., τὸ κείνων κακὸν τῷδε κέρδος μ. turning their misdeeds into his gain, S. Ph. 515 (lyr.).
5. Pass., to be changed, alter, μετετέθην εὐβουλίᾳ E. IA 388 (troch.); μ. ἐς Ῥωμαίους pass over, App. Hisp. 17; μ. ἀπὸ τοῦ καλέσαντος ὑμᾶς are turned away from.., Galatians 1:6.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μετατίθημι; 1 aorist μετέθηκα; present middle μετατίθεμαι: 1 aorist passive μετετεθην; to transpose (two things, one of which is put in place of the other (see μετά, III. 2)); i. e.,

1. to transfer: τινα followed by εἰς; with the accusative of place, passive, Acts 7:16; without mention of the place, it being well known to the readers, Hebrews 11:5 (Genesis 5:24; Sir. 44:16, cf. Wis. 4:10).
2. to change (Herodotus 5, 68); passive of an office the mode of conferring which is changed, Hebrews 7:12; 71 τί εἰς τί, to turn one thing into another (τινα εἰς πτηνην φύσιν, Anth. 11, 367, 2); figuratively, τήν … χάριν εἰς ἀσέλγειαν, to pervert the grace of God to license, i. e. to seek from the grace of God an argument in defense of licentiousness, Jude 1:4 (cf. Huther, in the place cited).
3. passive or (more commonly) middle, to transfer oneself or suffer oneself to be transferred, i. e. to go or pass over: ἀπό τίνος εἰς τί, to fall away or desert from one person or thing to another, Galatians 1:6 (cf. 2 Macc. 7:24; Polybius 5, 111, 8; 26, 2, 6; Diodorus 11, 4; (ὁ μεταθεμενος, turncoat, (Diogenes Laërtius 7, 166 cf. 37; Athen. 7, 281 d.)).
   STRONGS NT 3346a: μετατρέπω [μετατρέπω: 2 aorist passive imperative 3 person singular μετατραπήτω; to turn about, figuratively, to transmute: James 4:9 WH text. From Homer down; but seems not to have been used in Attic (Liddell and Scott).]

Question 289

παρατίθημι

Answer 289

to set before, near, or beside; to lay out an explanation; to provide; to commend or commit what is one’s own into another’s hands, entrust, deposit

Thayer's Definition
to place beside or near or set before
food, i.e. food placed on a table
to set before (one) in teaching
to set forth (from one's self), to explain
to place down (from one's self or for one's self) with any one
to deposit
to intrust, commit to one's charge

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παρατίθημι,

Dor. and poet. παρτίθημι (late forms from παρατίθω PMag.Par. 1.333, Tab.Defix.Aud. 26.27); 3 sg. παρτιθεῖ, παρατιθεῖ, Od. 1.192, Hdt. 4.73: impf. -ετίθει Ar. Ach. 85, Eq. 1223: aor. Act. παρέθηκα, Med. παρεθέμην: pf. παρατέθεικα: in Att. παράκειμαι generally serves as the Pass.: —

place beside, πὰρ δὲ τίθει δίφρον Od. 21.177, cf. 182 (tm.), Berl.Sitzb. 1927.167 (Cyrene), etc.; [ εἰκόσι] κόσμον OGI 90.40 (Rosetta, ii B. C.).. freq. of meals, set before, serve up, σφιν δαῖτ’ ἀγαθὴν παραθήσομεν Il. 23.810, cf. 9.90 (tm.); ἥ οἱ βρῶσίν τε πόσιν τε παρτιθεῖ Od. 1.192; πὰρ δ’ ἐτίθει σπλάγχνων μοίρας 20.260; [ νῶτα βοὸς] γέρα πάρθεσαν αὐτῷ 4.66; νῦν οἱ παράθες ξεινήϊα καλά Il. 18.408; ξείνιά τ’ εὖ παρέθηκεν 11.779, cf. Od. 9.517 (tm.); θεὰ παρέθηκε τράπεζαν 5.92: c. gen., τῷ νεκρῷ πάντων παρατιθεῖ Hdt. 4.73, cf. 1.119 (Pass.); παρετίθεσαν ἐπὶ τὴν τράπεζαν κρέα X. An. 4.5.31; οἱ παρατιθέντες the serving-men, Id. Cyr. 8.8.20; τὰ παρατιθέμενα meats set before one (with or without βρώματα), ib. 2.1.30, 5.2.16: in Com., Ar. Ach. 85, Eq. 52, 57, Aristomen. 12, etc.; of a sacrificial meal, σκέλος τοῦ πράτου βοὸς παρθέντω τῷ θιῷ IG 42(1).41.11 (Epid., v/iv B. C.).. of a mother, put to the breast, Sor. 1.105.

2. . generally, provide, furnish, αἲ γὰρ ἐμοὶ.. θεοὶ δύναμιν παραθεῖεν (v.l. περιθεῖεν) oh that they would place power at my disposal !, Od. 3.205; π.ἑκάστων τῶν σοφῶν ἀπογεύσασθαι, i. e. π. ἕκαστα τὰ σοφὰ ὥστε ἀπογεύσασθαι αὐτῶν, Pl. Tht. 157c; π. αὐτοῖς.. ἀναγιγνώσκειν.. ποιήματα Id. Prt. 325e: — Med., expose for sale, Arist. HA 622b34.
3. . place upon, στεφάνους παρέθηκε καρήατι Hes. Th. 577 (nisi leg. περίθηκε).
4. . lay before one, explain, X. Cyr. 1.6.14; π. ἔν τισι ὡς οὐ χρή.. POxy. 2110.6 (iv A. D.); allege, produce, Isa 9.32; ὑποδείγματα Phld. Mus. p.79 K.; παραβολὴν π. αὐ τοῖς Matthew 13:24 : — Med., v. infr. B. 5.
5. . put or provide side by side, ὁμοῦ λύπας ἡδοναῖς π. Pl. Phlb. 47a; παρατεθείσης τῆς ἀπολογίας (sc. τῇ κατηγορίᾳ) Demad. 6; set side by side, compare, τινά τινι Plu. Demetr. 12.. Gramm., place side by side, juxtapose (opp. συντίθημι form a compound), A.D. Pron. 42.5, al. (Pass.).
6. . deposit, = παρακατατίθημι, Charito 8.4 (s.v.l.), v. infr. B. 2..

Med., set before oneself, have set before one, ἐπὴν δαΐδας παραθεῖτο Od. 2.105 codd., cf. 19.150, 24.140; σκύφος παραθέσθαι E. Cyc. 390; τράπεζαν Περσικήν Th. 1.130; σῖτον X. Cyr. 8.6.12; οἱ τὰ εὐτελέστερα παρατιθέμενοι those who fare less sumptuously, Id. Hier. 1.20; have meat set before others, ἠῶθεν δέ κεν ὔμμιν ὁδοιπόριον παραθείμην Od. 15.506; provide for oneself, supply oneself with, παρετίθεντο τῶν ἀναγκαίων πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον, ὅσα.. Plu. Per. 26.

2. . deposit what belongs to one in another’s hands, give in charge, τοῦ παραθεμένου τὰ χρήματα Hdt. 686. β’; τὴν οὐσίαν ταῖς νήσοις π. X. Ath. 2.16; τῶν ἀβακείων ἃ παρεθέμεθα παρ’ αὐτῷ PCair.Zen. 71 (iii B. C.), cf. Plb. 3.17.10, PGrenf. 1.14.1 (ii B. C.), etc.; deposit deeds or documents, POxy. 237 iv 38 (ii A. D.), etc.; give a person in charge to, τινὶ ὀρφανόν Arr. Epict. 2.8.22; commend or commit into another’s hands, εἰς χεῖράς σου τὸ πνεῦμα Luke 23:46; τινὰς τῷ Κυρίῳ Acts 14:23; cf. Acts 20:32; cf. ; commend by a letter of introduction, PGiss. 88.5 (ii A. D.).. store up in one’s mind, ἅ τις ὁρᾷ π. παρ’ αὑτῷ Plot. 4.4.8.
3. . venture, stake, hazard, σφὰς γὰρ παρθέμενοι κεφαλάς Od. 2.237; τοίτ’ ἀλόωνται ψυχὰς παρθέμενοι 3.74, cf. Tyrt. 12.18.
4. . apply something of one’s own to a purpose, employ it, ὄψιν ἐν τῷ διανοεῖσθαι Pl. Phd. 65e.
5. . cite in one’s own favour, cite as evidence or authority, π. μῦθον, παράδειγμα, Id. Plt. 275b, 279a; ἀντίγραφον [ἐπιστολῆς ] BGU 1004.12 (iii B. C.); ἀποδείξεις Wilcken Chr. 77.5 (ii A. D.); ψήφισμα Plu. 2.833e, cf. D. Chr. 17.10, Ath. 11.479c, Porph. Abst. 1.3, etc.; mention, ἔννοιάν τινος A.D. Synt. 65.9; ἐκδόσεις π. quote editions, Id. Pron. 89.22: abs., quote instances, ib. 52.7,al.: — rarely in Act., λέξεις π. D.H. Dem. 37, v. l. in Id. Comp. 23.
6. . affix, apply a name, τῷ χωρίῳ ὄνομα Paus. 2.14.4.
7. . explain, allege, Wilcken Chr. 20 iii 12 (ii A. D.), etc.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παρατίθημι; future παραθήσω; 1 aorist παρέθηκα; 2 aorist subjunctive 3 person plural παραθῶσιν, infinitive παραθεῖναι (Mark 8:7 R G); passive, present participle παρατιθέμενος; 1 aorist infinitive παρατεθῆναι (Mark 8:7 Lachmann); middle, present παρατίθεμαί; future παραθήσομαι; 2 aorist 3 person plural παρέθεντο, imperative παράθου (2 Timothy 2:2); from Homer down; the Sept. chiefly for שׂוּם;

1. to place beside, place near (cf. παρά, IV. 1) or set before: τίνι τί, as a. food: Mark 6:41; Mark 8:6; Luke 9:16; Luke 11:6; τράπεζαν a table, i. e. food placed on a table, Acts 16:34 (Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 7 [ET]); τά παρατιθέμενα ὑμῖν (A. V. such things as are set before you), of food, Luke 10:8 (Xenophon, Cyril 2, 1, 30); singular 1 Corinthians 10:27.
   b. to set before (one) in teaching (Xenophon, Cyril 1, 6, 14; the Sept. Exodus 19:7): τίνι παραβολήν, Matthew 13:24, 31. Middle, to set forth (from oneself), to explain: followed by ὅτι, Acts 17:3.
2. Middle, “to place down (from oneself or for oneself) with anyone, to deposit; to intrust, commit to one’s charge” (Xenophon, respub. Athen. 2, 16; Polybius 33, 12, 3; Plutarch, Numbers 9; Tobit 4:1): τί τίνι, a thing to one to be cared for, Luke 12:48; a thing to be religiously kept and taught to others, 1 Timothy 1:18; 2 Timothy 2:2; τινα τίνι, to commend one to another for protection, safety, etc., Acts 14:23; Acts 20:32 (Diodorus 17, 23); τάς ψυχάς to God, 1 Peter 4:19; τό πνεῦμα μου εἰς χεῖρας Θεοῦ, Luke 23:46; Psalm 30:6 ().

Question 290

προστίθημι

Answer 290

(προσετίθην), προσθήσω, προσέθηκα, -, -, προσετέθην

to add to, increase ; (pass.) to be brought to, given
Definition:
to put to, or near; to lay with or by the side of, Acts 13:36; to add, adjoin, Mt. 6:27, 33; Lk. 3:20; Acts 2:41; from the Hebrew, denote continuation, or repetition, Lk. 19:11; 20:11, 12; Acts 12:3

Thayer's Definition
to put to
to add
i.e. to join to, gather with any company, the number of one's followers or companions
he was gathered to his fathers i.e. died

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
προστίθημι, Dor. ποτι-, also aor. inf. ποιθέμεν IG 42(1).121.17 (Epid.); ποτθέμειν prob. in Epich. 170.8: late pres. προστιθῶ Ps.- Luc. Philopatr. 18,27; imper. προστίθει A. Pr. 83: fut. προσθήσω: aor. προσέθηκα, pl. -έθεμεν, subj. προσθῶ Th. 4.86, Ion. προσθέω Hdt. 1.108: — Med., fut. προσθήσομαι LXX Exodus 14:13 : aor. 1 προσεθηκάμην Hdt. 4.65: more freq. aor. 2 προσεθέμην, subj. προσθῶμαι (not πρόσθωμαι ), 3 sg. opt. προσθεῖτο D. 6.12, but πρόσθοιτο Id. 11.6; Dor. part. ποτθέμενος, Πρακτικά 1931.89 ( Dodona ): pf. -τέθειμαι LXX De. 23.15: — Pass., aor. 1 προσετέθην Th. 3.82: fut. -τεθήσομαι LXX Numbers 27:13, al. ( -τεθήσεσθαι is f.l. ib. Exodus 5:7 ): but the pf. Pass. is chiefly supplied by πρόσκειμαι: — put to, χερσὶν ἀπώσασθαι λίθον ὃν προσέθηκεν Od. 9.305; π. τὰς θύρας, τὴν θύραν, put to, close the door, Hdt. 3.78, Lys. 1.13; τὰς πύλας Th. 4.67; κλίμακας [τοῖς πύργοις ] Id. 3.23; κόμῃ προσθεῖσα βόστρυχον holding it close to . ., A. Ch. 229; χέρα ἐλάτῃ E. Ba. 1110; γόνασιν ὠλένας Id. Andr. 895, cf. S. Ph. 942; τοῖς καλλίστοις τοῦ ζῴου τὰ κάλλιστα φάρμακα Pl. R. 420c; π. μύωπας apply the spur, Plb. 11.18.4; π. χεῖρ’ ἐπὶ πρόσωπα E. Ph. 1699; apply a pessary, Hp. Nat.Mul. 32, Sor. 1.62, al.; [ κύαθον ] Arist. Pr. 890b24: — Pass., of pessaries, Dsc. 1.76, al., Sor. 1.35, al.

2. hand over, deliver to, θεῶν γέρα . . ἐφημέροισι προστίθει A. Pr. 83, cf. h.Merc. 129; τινὶ γυναῖκα π . give her to him as wife, Hdt. 6.126; but π. γυναικὶ τάλαντον, as a dower, Hyp. Lyc. 13; π. τινὰ ἄλλῳ πατρί E. Ion 1545; Ἅιδῃ ἐμὸν δέμας Id. Hec. 368, cf. IA 540; π. τινὰ πυρί Id. Supp. 948; σφαγέντα παῖδα π. πόλει Id. Ph. 964; τισὶ π. πόλιν Th. 4.86; τὴν διοίκησιν τῶν κοινῶν ἑαυτῷ D.C. 52.14; also νᾶσον εὐκλέϊ π. λόγῳ Pi. N. 3.68 .
3. give besides or also, φερνάς E. Hipp. 628; προῖκα D. 19.195; χρήματα Id. 18.239, etc.; πίστιν ὑμῖν Id. 54.42; τὰ ἴδια τοῖς ἀλλοτρίοις Men. 557: abs., spend money, οὐ μόνον ἄνευ μισθοῦ, ἀλλὰ καὶ προστιθεὶς ἂν ἡδέως Pl. Euthphr. 3d, cf. Arist. EN 1130a25, Iamb. Protr. 9 .

II impose upon, πρῆγμα τὸ ἄν τοι προσθέω Hdt. 1.108, cf. 3.62: c. inf., π. τινὶ πρήσσειν Id. 5.30; π. μέτρον impose measure or bounds, A. Ch. 796 (lyr.); π. τινὶ ἀτιμίην impose, inflict disgrace upon him, Hdt. 7.11; π. [φθόρον ] A. Ch. 482; ἐπ’ ἐμαυτῷ ἀράς S. OT 820; ὄκνον Id. Ant. 243; αύτὸς αὑτῷ τὴν βλάβην Id. Fr. 350; λύπην, πόνους, E. Supp. 946, Heracl. 505; ἀναλώματα IG 14.830.12 (Puteoli, ii A.D., Pass. ); π. τινὶ ἔκπληξιν ἀφασίαν τε strike him dumb with fear, E. Hel. 549; ἐνθύμιον τοῖς ζῶσι Antipho 3.1.2; τισὶ ζημίας Th. 3.39; π. φιλανθρωπίαν εἰς τὰ τῆς πόλεως πράγματα employ it on . ., D. 19.140 .

2. attribute or impute to, τῷ θεῷ τὴν αἰτίαν E. Ion 1525, cf. Th. 3.39 ( Pass. ); π. θράσος μοι impute boldness to me, E. Heracl. 475; θεοῖσι π. ἀμαθίαν Id. Hipp. 951; ἀπληστίαν λέχους γυναιξί Id. Andr. 219; τὸ ἐμπλήκτως ὀξὺ ἀνδρὸς μοίρᾳ προσετέθη Th. 3.82 .

III add, τάδε τούτοισι Hdt. 1.20, al.; πρὸς [τῇ γνώμῃ] ἔργα Id. 4.139; ἄλλον πρὸς ὦν ἔθηκαν χρυσόν ib. 196; χάριτι χάριν E. HF 327; νοσοῦντι νόσον Id. Alc. 1048; π. τῷ νόμῳ τὸν λόγον τόνδε Th. 2.35, cf. Hdt. 2.136 ( Pass. ), Pl. R. 468b; προσθεῖναι τῷ δικαίῳ ἢ ὡς ἐλέγομεν (for πλέον ἤ . . ) ib. 335a; ἄγγελλε δ’ ὅρκον π . S. El. 47 (Reiske for ὅρκῳ codd., cf. ὅρκου προστεθέντος Fr. 472; ὀμόσας . . προσθείς τε χεῖρα δεξιάν Ph. 942 ); τὴν στήλην ὕστερον προσέθηκε IG 12.374.174; τοῖς εὖ ἔχουσιν ἔργοις οὔτ’ ἀφελεῖν ἔστιν οὔτε προσθεῖναι Arist. EN 1106b11; ἐάν τι ἀφέλωμεν ἢ προσθῶμεν ἢ μεταθῶμεν Pl. Cra. 432a; π. γράμματα ib. 418a, cf. 431c; also π. ἐπὶ τοῖσδε χάριν S. Tr. 1253; ἵππον πρὸς τοὔνομα Ar. Nu. 63; πρὸς τὸν μισθὸν ἑκάστῳ ὀβολόν X. HG 1.5.6, cf. Pl. Phlb. 33c: abs., make additions, Th. 3.45; πρὸς τὰ ὑπάρχοντα -τιθέντες πλουσιώτεροι γίνονται Arist. Rh. 1359b28; make additions to a story, improve it, Id. Po. 1460a18; also of actors, ib. 1461b30: esp. of adding articles to statements or documents, προσθεῖναι οὐδὲν εἶχον τοῖς εἰρημένοις οὐδ’ ἀφελεῖν Isoc. 12.264, cf. POxy. 1062.4 (ii A.D.), etc.; π. καὶ ἀφελεῖν τι περὶ τῆς ξυμμαχίας Foed. ap. Th. 5.23, cf. 29; π. τὶ πρὸς τοῖς ξυγκειμένοις Foed.ib. 47; πρὸς τὰς συνθήκας Foed. ap. Plb. 21.43.27; π. ὅτι . . D. 18.231; of entries in accounts, προσετέθη τὰ τέλη τῷ κυριακῷ λόγῳ PAmh. 77.15 (ii A.D.), cf. BGU 620.15 (iv A.D.), etc.; π. τινὶ [ἀργύριον ] pay, PMich.Zen. 28.24 (iii B.C.), cf. PCair.Zen. 647.56 (iii B.C.), PRyl. 153.27 (ii A.D.); πρόσθες εἰς ὄνομα Ἐπωνύχου credit to account of E., Ostr. 1159 (ii/iii A.D.); pay in, deposit gold in a bank or mint, PCair.Zen. 23.32 (iii B.C.) .

2. c. acc. pers., τίνα τῇδε προστιθῶ στάσει; A. Ch. 114; Ἀθηναίοις π. σφᾶς αὐτούς join their party, Th. 3.92; π. ἑαυτόν τινι ἐς πίστιν, ἐπὶ ἰδίοις κέρδεσι, Id. 8.46, 50 .
3. Math., add, πὸτ ἀριθμόν . . φᾶφον Epich. 170.8 (prob.); [ χωρίον] ἕτερον αὐτῷ τουτὶ ἴσον Pl. Men. 84d; πρὸς πεπερασμένον ἀεὶ π . Arist. Ph. 266b2: — Pass., εἴ κα . . ποτὶ τὸ ἕτερον τῶν βαρέων ποτιτεθῇ, . . ῥέπειν ἐπὶ τὸ βάρος ἐκεῖνο ᾧ ποτετέθη Archim. Aequil. 1 Def. 2, cf. Euc. 1 Ax. 2, etc.; κοινοῦ -τεθέντος Papp. 742.15 .
4. in Logic, add some determining word, opp. ἀφαιρεῖν, Arist. APo. 91b27, cf. EN 1147b33 .
5. in LXX and NT, continue or repeat an action, c. inf., προσέθηκεν ἔτι λαλῆσαι LXX Genesis 18:29; οὐ προσθήσω ἔτι πατάξαι ib. 8.21; οὐ μὴ προσθῶ πεῖν I will not drink again, Mark 14:25 (v.l.); also προσθεὶς Ἰὼβ εἶπεν Job continued and said, LXX Job 27:1; προσθεὶς εἶπε παραβολήν Ev.Luke 19:11; προσθεῖσα ἔτεκεν υἱόν she bore another son, LXX Genesis 38:5 : —

also in Med., v. infr. B. 111. Med., side with one, οἷς ἂν σὺ προσθῇ S. OC 1332, cf. Th. 3.11, 8.48, 87, D. 6.12, 11.6, 52.25; τῷ ἀστῷ π . to be favourable, wellinclined to him, Hdt. 2.160, cf. D. 43.34; τῇ ἡδονῇ side with pleasure, Arist. MM 1201a2: abs., come in, submit, Epist. Phil. ap. D. 18.39 .

2. assent, agree, οὔ οἱ ἔγωγε π. τῇ γνώμῃ Hdt. 1.109, cf. 3.83, Th. 6.50, X. An. 1.6.10; τῷ λόγῳ τῷ λεχθέντι Hdt. 2.120; τῷ Καρχηδονίων νόμῳ Pl. Lg. 674a: later c. inf., consent, bring onself to, J. AJ 19.1.8 .
3. φῆφον δ’ Ὀρέστῃ τήνδ’ ἐγὼ προσθήσομαι will deposit this vote in favour of Orestes, i.e. will vote in his favour, A. Eu. 735; ἡμῖν ἂν προσθέμενοι τὴν φῆφον εὐορκοίητε D. 57.69; so μὴ μιᾷ φήφῳ π . (sc. τὴν γνώμην ), ἀλλὰ δυοῖν Th. 1.20; φῆφον π. ἐναντίαν τινί ib. 40; φῆφον π. ὥστε ἀποκτεῖναι OGI 218.102 (Ilium, iii B.C. ).
4. Math., add, Sammelb. 6951 ii 30, al. (ii A.D.) .

II c. acc. pers., associate with oneself, i.e. take to one as a friend, ally, or helper, win over, π. τὸν δῆμον πρὸς τὴν ἑωυτοῦ μοῖραν Hdt. 5.69, cf. Th. 6.18; εἰ στρατὸν προσθέοιτο φίλον Hdt. 1.53, cf. 69, S. OC 404; ταύτην προσθοῦ δάμαρτα take her to wife, Id. Tr. 1224: also in bad sense, πολέμιον π. τινά X. Cyr. 2.4.12 .

2. c. acc. rei, apply to oneself, βάλανον Hp. Epid. 1.26 .a’, cf. 4.30 (abs., ib. 1.26 . δ’ ) ; ὀξύβαφον προσθοῦ λαβών Ar. Av. 361; πατρὸς στέρνα προσθέσθαι θέλω E. HF 1408: metaph., put on, τῇ ὄφει ἀχθηδόνας Th. 2.37; add to oneself, gain, τί ἂν προσθείμην πλέον; what should I be profited? S. Ant. 40; π. χάριν, = ἐπιχαρίζεσθαι, Id. OC 767; esp. of evils, bring or take upon onself, πρὸς κακοῖσι κακόν A. Pers. 531; μέριμναν S. OT 1460; κακά E. Heracl. 146; ἄχθος ἐπ’ ἄχθει π. διπλοῦν Id. Andr. 396; οἰκεῖον πόνον, κινδύνους αὐθαιρέτους, Th. 1.78, 144; ἔχθρας ἑκουσίους πρὸς ταῖς ἀναγκαίαις π . Pl. Prt. 346b . bring upon others, οἱ . . πόλεμον προσεθήκαντο made war upon him, Hdt. 4.65; οὐκ ἄν σφι Σπαρτιήτας μῆνιν οὐδεμίαν προσθέσθαι vented any wrath upon . ., Id. 7.229 .

III in LXX and NT, continue or repeat an action (cf. supr. A. 111.5), οὐ προσθήσεσθε ἔτι ἰδεῖν αὐτούς LXX Exodus 14:13; προσέθετο πέμφαι ἕτερον Ev. Luke 20:11; προσέθετο συλλαβεῖν καὶ Πέτρον he caused Peter also to be arrested, Acts 12:3; also Φαραὼ προσέθετο τοῦ ἁμαρτάνειν LXX Exodus 9:34; οὐ προσέθετο τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι ib. Genesis 8:12 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
προστίθημι: imperfect 3 person singular προσετίθει (Acts 2:47); 1 aorist προσέθηκα; 2 aorist προσεθην, imperative πρόσθες (Luke 17:5), infinitive προσθεῖναι, participle προσθείς; passive, imperfect 3 person plural προσετίθεντο; 1 aorist προσετέθην; 1 future προστεθήσομαι; 2 aorist middle προσεθεμην; from Homer, Odyssey 9, 305 down; the Sept. very often for יָסַף, also for אָסַף, etc.;

1. properly, to put to.
2. to add, i. e. join to, gather with any company, the number of one’s followers or companions: τινα τῇ ἐκκλησία, Acts 2:47 (R G); τῷ κυρίῳ, Acts 5:14; Acts 11:24; namely, τῷ κυρίῳ, or τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, Acts 2:41; Hebraistically, προσετέθη πρός τούς πατέρας αὐτοῦ (Judges 2:10; 1 Macc. 2:69), he was gathered to his fathers assembled in Sheol (which is לְכָל־חָי מועֵד בֵּית, the house of assembly for all the living, Job 30:23), Acts 13:36 (others explain it, he was added to the bodies cf his ancestors, buried with them in a common tomb; but cf. Knobel on Genesis 25:8; (Böttcher, De inferis, p. 54ff)); equivalent to to add viz. to what one already possesses: τί, Luke 17:5 (A. V. here increase); passive, Matthew 6:33; Luke 12:31; Mark 4:24; Hebrews 12:19 ((μή προστεθῆναι αὐτοῖς λόγον, R. V. that no word more should be spoken to them)); — to what already exists: (ὁ νόμος) προσετέθη, was added to (supervened upon) namely, the ἐπαγγελία, Galatians 3:19 R L T Tr WH; τί ἐπί τίνι, some thing to (upon) a thing (which has preceded (cf. ἐπί, B. 2 d.)), Luke 3:20; τί ἐπί τί, to a thing that it may thereby be increased, Matthew 6:27; Luke 12:25. In imitation of the Hebrew (יָסַף) the middle (in the Sept. the active also) followed by an infinitive signifies (to add, i. e.) to go on to do a thing, for to do further, do again (as Genesis 4:2; Genesis 8:12; Genesis 18:29): προσέθετο πέμψαι (לִשְׁלֹחַ וַיֹסֶף), he continued to send (as be had already sent), Luke 20:11, 12 (equivalent to πάλιν ἀπέστειλεν, Mark 12:4); προσέθετο συλλαβεῖν καί Πέτρον, be besides apprehended Peter also (A. V. he proceeded etc.), Acts 12:3; in the same way also the participle is used with a finite verb: προσθείς εἶπεν, i. e. he further spake (A. V. he added and spake), Luke 19:11 (προσθεῖσα ἔτεκεν, Genesis 38:5; προσθέμενος ἔλαβε γυναῖκα, Genesis 25:1); cf. Winers Grammar, § 54, 5; Buttmann, § 144, 14.

Question 291

ἀποθήκη, ῆς, ἡ

Answer 291

a storehouse, granary, barn

a place where anything is laid up for preservation, repository, granary, storehouse, barn, Mt. 3:12; 6:26; 13:30; Lk. 3:17; 12:18, 24

Thayer’s Definition
a place in which anything is laid by or up
a storehouse, granary

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀπο-θήκη, ἡ,

I

1. any place wherein to lay up a thing, magazine, storehouse, Th. 6.97; ἀ. βιβλίων Luc. Ind. 5; ἀ. σωμάτων burial-place, Id. Cont. 22.
2. refuge, Philist. 59.

II anything laid by, store, ἀποθήκην ποιεῖσθαι ἐς τὸν Πέρσην lay up store of favour with him, Hdt. 8.109.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀποθήκη, ἀποθηκης, ἡ (ἀποτίθημι), a place in which anything is laid by or up; a storehouse, granary (A. V. garner, barn): Matthew 3:12; Matthew 6:26; Matthew 13:30; Luke 3:17; Luke 12:18, 24. (Jeremiah 27:26 (); Thucydides 6, 97.)

Question 292

ἐπιθυμέω

Answer 292

to long for, desire; covet, lust

with the gen. or acc., to set the heart upon; to desire, long for, have earnest desire, Mt. 13:17; Lk. 15:16; to lust after, Mt. 5:28; spc. to covet, Rom. 13:9
(ἐπεθύμουν), ἐπιθυμήσω, ἐπεθύμησα, -, -, -

Thayer's Definition
to turn upon a thing
to have a desire for, long for, to desire
to lust after, covet
of those who seek things forbidden

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐπιθῡμ-έω,

set one’s heart upon a thing, long for, covet, desire, c. gen. rei, Hdt. 2.66, A. Ag. 216, etc.: also c. gen. pers., Lys. 3.5, X. An. 4.1.14 (later c. acc. pers., [ Men. ] ap. Clem.Al. Strom. 5.119, Tab.Defix. Aud. 271.45 (Hadrumetum, iii A.D.)); of political attachments, τῶν ἡμετέρων πολεμίων And. 4.28; ὀλιγαρχίας Lys. 20.3: c. inf., desire to do, πλῶσαι Hdt. 1.24; ἀπικνέεσθαι ib. 116; περισσὰ δρᾶν S. Tr. 617, etc.: abs., desire, covet, Th. 6.92; ὁ ἀεὶ-ῶν Pl. Prt. 313d, etc.; τὸ ἐπιθυμοῦν τοῦ πλοῦ, = ἐπιθυμία, eagerness for it, Th. 6.24: — Pass., to be desired, τὰ ἐπιθυμούμενα Pl. Phlb. 35d.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπιθυμέω, ἐπιθύμω; (imperfect ἐπεθύμουν); future ἐπιθυμήσω; 1 aorist ἐπεθύμησα; (θυμός); from Aeschylus down; the Sept. for אִוָּה and חָמַד; properly, “to keep the θυμός turned upon a thing, hence (cf. our to set one’s heart upon) to have a desire for, long for; absolutely, to desire (A. V. lust”), James 4:2; to lust after, covet, of those who seek things forbidden, Romans 7:7; Romans 13:9 (from Exodus 20:17); 1 Corinthians 10:6 (4 Macc. 2:6); κατά τίνος, to have desires opposed to (A. V. lust against) a thing (Galatians 5:17 (Buttmann, 335 (288)); τίνος, to long for, covet a thing, Acts 20:33; 1 Timothy 3:1; of sexual desire, γυναικός, Matthew 5:28 Rec. (see below) (παιδός ἤ γυναικός, Xenophon, an. 4, 1, 14; with the genitive also in Exodus 34:24; Proverbs 21:26; Proverbs 23:3, 6; Wis. 6:12; Sir. 24:19 (18), etc.); contrary to the usage of the better Greek writings with the accusative of the object, Matthew 5:28 L Tr (WH brackets), and without an object Tdf. (Exodus 20:17; Deuteronomy 5:21; Micah 2:2; Wis. 16:3; Sir. 1:26 (23), etc.; cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 30, 10 b.); as often in Greek writings, followed by the infinitive: Matthew 13:17; Luke 15:16; (Luke 16:21); ; 1 Peter 1:12; Revelation 9:6; followed by the accusative with the infinitive Hebrews 6:11; ἐπιθυμία ἐπεθύμησα I have greatly desired, Luke 22:15; cf. Winers Grammar, § 54, 3; Buttmann, § 133, 22 a.

Question 293

προθυμία, ας, ἡ

Answer 293

eagerness, enthusiasm, willingness, readiness

promptness, readiness, eagerness of mind, willingness, Acts 17:11; 2 Cor. 8:11, 12, 19; 9:2*

Thayer’s Definition
zeal, spirit, eagerness
inclination, readiness of mind

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
προθῡμ-ία,

Ion. -ιη, ἡ,

readiness, willingness, eagerness, ᾗσι προθυμίῃσι [ῑ] pepoiqw/s Il. 2.588; opp. ἀθυμία, X. Cyr. 1.6.13; τῶν πέρι καί τινα ἐνάγει π. μαχόμενον ἀποθνῄσκειν Hdt. 5.49; προθυμίας οὐδὲν ἐλλείπεις A. Pr. 343; μηδὲν ἀπολείπειν π. Pl. Lg. 961c; οὐ μὴν ἀνήσω νῦν π. E. Hipp. 285; π. ἐμβαλεῖν τινι X. Cyr. 1.6.13, etc.; πάσῃ π. with all zeal, Pl. R. 412e; διὰ τὴν π. Plb. 1.20.15; ὑπὸ προθυμίας by my eagerness, Pl. Phd. 91c: pl., τὰς ἄγαν π. E. Or. 708 .

2. c. gen. pers., ἐκ τῆς Κλεομένεος π. at his desire, Hdt. 6.65, cf. E. Hipp. 1329; κατὰ τὴν τούτου π. as far as his desire goes, Hdt. 1.124; τοῦ θεοῦ προθυμίᾳ by the will of the god, E. Ion 1385; also ἡ ἐμὴ π. Lys. 12.99 .
3. c. gen. objecti, πᾶσαν π. σωτηρίης . . παρεχόμενοι showing the utmost zeal to save it, Hdt. 4.98; π. ἔργου readiness for action, will or purpose to act, S. Tr. 669, cf. E. IT 616; π. τοῦ ἐθέλειν κινδυνεύειν Pl. Lg. 697d, cf. 935d, etc.
4. π. ἔχειν, = προθυμεῖσθαι, Hdt. 7.19, 53:c. inf., ἔσχε π. στρατεύσασθαι Id. 1.204, cf. E. Tr. 689; πᾶσαν π. ἔχειν Pl. Prt. 327b, cf. 361c: also c. part., ἔφη πᾶσαν π. σχεῖν δεόμενος Id. Ti. 23d; also π. ἔχειν ὅπως . . Id. Mx. 247a .

II goodwill, ready kindness, Ἑλλήνων εἵνεκα ἔργον . . ἔργασμαι ὑπὸ προθυμίης Hdt. 9.45; εἴς τινας X. HG 6.5.43; πλείστην π. περὶ ὑμᾶς, π. πολλὴν περί σε, Id. An. 7.6.11, 7.7.45; ὑπέρ τινων D. 1.8; π. ἐδείξαμεν Th. 1.74 .

III desire of natural functions, Sor. 1.66, 2.20, 45; πρὸς τὸ κνᾶσθαι Herod.Med. ap. Aët. 5.129 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
προθυμία, προθυμίας, ἡ (πρόθυμος), from Homer down;

1. zeal, spirit, eagerness;
2. inclination; readiness of mind: so Acts 17:11; 2 Corinthians 8:11f, 19; 2 Corinthians 9:2.

Question 294

ἄνεσις, εως, ἡ

Answer 294

a loosening; relief, rest, relaxation

pr. the relaxing of a state of constraint; relaxation of rigor of confinement, Acts 24:23; met. ease, rest, peace, tranquility, 2 Cor. 2:13; 7:5; 8:13; 2 Thess. 1:7*

Thayer’s Definition
a loosening, relaxing
spoken of a more tolerable condition in captivity, to be held in less vigorous confinement
relief, rest, from persecutions

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἄνεσις,

gen. εως, Ion. ιος, ἡ: (ἀνιημι): —

I

1. loosening, relaxing, τῶν χορδῶν of the strings, opp. ἐπίτασις, Pl. R. 349e; coupled with χάλασις, ib. 590b; τῆς αἰσθήσεως.. δεσμὸν τὸν ὕπνον εἶναί φαμεν, τὴν δέ.. ἄνεσιν ἐγρήγορσιν Arist. Somn.Vig. 454b27; ἀέρος Thphr. CP 2.1.6; πάγων ἄ., i.e. a thaw, Plu. Sert. 17; of the ebb -tide, Str. 7.2.1.
2. metaph., remission, abatement, κακῶν Hdt. 5.28; opp. θλῖψις, 2 Corinthians 8:13, al.; λύπης, μοχθηρίας, etc., Plu. 2.102b, etc.; τὴν ἡδονὴν ἄνεσιν λαμβάνειν Phld. D. 3 Fr. 1; ἄ. φόρων, τελῶν, remission of tribute, taxes, Plu. Sert. 6, IG 7.2227 (Thisbe), etc.; κολάσεως Plot. 4.3.24; of fevers, opp. παροξυσμός, Gal. 7.427.
3. relaxation, recreation, opp. σπουδή, Pl. Lg. 724a, Arist. Rh. 1371b34, cf. Cleanth.Stoic. 1.122; ἄ. καὶ σχολή Plb. 1.66.10; ψυχῆς Mnesith.Ath. ap. Ath. 11.484a.
4. solution, Dsc. 5.96.
5. = τὸ τελευταῖον τῆς παρακμῆς Archig. ap. Gal. 7.424.

II indulgence, licence, ἡδονῶν Pl. R. 561a; ἡ τῶν γυναικῶν παρ’ ὑμῖν ἄ. Id. Lg. 637c, cf. Arist. Pol. 1270a1; δούλων ib. 1313b35; relaxation of custody, Acts 24:23.

III of musical pitch, Aristid.Quint. 1.5; of an unaccented syll., Phld. Po. 2.18.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἄνεσις, ἀνεσεως, ἡ (ἀνίημι to let loose, slacken, anything tense, e. g. a bow), a loosening, relaxing; spoken of a more tolerable condition in captivity: ἔχειν ἄνεσιν, to be held in less rigorous confinement (R. V. have indulgence), Acts 24:23 (Josephus, Antiquities 18, 6, 10 φυλακή μέν γάρ καί τήρησις ἦν, μετά μέντοι ἀνεσεως τῆς δίαιταν). relief, rest, from persecutions, 2 Thessalonians 1:7; from the troubles of poverty, 2 Corinthians 8:13; relief from anxiety, quiet, 2 Corinthians 2:13 (); . (the Sept.; in Greek writings from Thucydides (Herodotus 5, 28) down.) (Synonym: see ἀνάπαυσις, at the end.)

Question 295

σύνεσις, εως, ἡ

Answer 295

understanding, insight; intelligence, the faculty of comprehension, often referring to wisdom and insight in spiritual matters

pr. a sending together, a junction, as of streams; met. understanding, intelligence, discernment, Lk. 2:47; 1 Cor. 1:19; meton. the understanding, intellect, mind, Mk. 12:33; Eph. 3:4; Col. 1:9; 2:2; 2 Tim. 2:7*

Thayer’s Definition
a running together, a flowing together with
knowledge
understanding
the understanding, i.e the mind so far forth as it understands

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
σύνεσις,

Att. ξύνεσις, εως, ἡ, (συνίημι)

uniting, union, πέτρη τε ξύνεσίς τε δύω ποταμῶν Od. 10.515 (with ξυν- metri gr.).

2. metaph., with allusion to foreg. signf. and signf. 11, χωρὶς ἕκαστος εἰς τὸ φρονεῖν ἀσθενής, συμβάλλων δὲ εἰς ἓν πᾶς ἐν τῇ συνόδῳ καὶ τῇ ὡς ἀληθῶς συνέσει τὸ φρονεῖν ἐγέννησε καὶ εὗρε Plot. 6.5.10.

II faculty of quick comprehension, mother-wit, sagacity, Democr. 77, Th. 2.62, 3.82, etc.; οἰκείᾳ ξυνέσει Id. 1.138, cf. Pl. Cra. 412a, Phlb. 19d, Arist. EN 1143a17, D. 18.127, Luke 2:47, Gal. 6.457, etc.; hence of animals, ὃ [ζῷον] συνέσει.. ὑπερέχει τῶν ἄλλων Pl. Mx. 237d: —

Phrases, ὅστις γε σύνεσιν ἔχει Hdt. 2.5, 7.49; ἀρκεῖν ξυνέσει E. Tr. 674; ξ. καὶ σοφία Id. HF 655 (lyr.); φρόνησίς τε καὶ ξ. Pl. Cra. 411a; ς. λαβεῖν, of children, Arist. EN 1161b26; μοῖραν ἔχειν συνέσεως (αἰσθήσεως) Democr. ap. Thphr. Sens. 71; also with qualifying words added, ς. φρενῶν Pi. N. 7.60; γνώμης ξ. Th. 1.75; ς. πολιτική Arist. Pol. 1291a28; ἡ περὶ τὴν διάνοιαν ς. Id. HA 588a23; ἡ ὑμετέρα ς. as form of address, Sammelb. 7433.6 (v A.D.).

2. c. gen. objecti, intelligence in a thing, sagacity in respect to it, Pl. Cra. 412c, D.S. 1.1; περὶ τῶν παρόντων Th. 2.97.

III conscience = συνείδησις, ἡ ς. (sc. μ’ ἀπόλλυσι) · ὅτι σύνοιδα δείν’ εἰργασμένος E. Or. 396, cf. Men. 632, Plb. 18.43.13. a branch of art or science, οἱ περὶ τὴν ς. ταύτην, i.e. music, Arist. Pol. 1342b8. knowledge, opp. ἄγνοια, Id. de An. 410b3. decision, decree, IG 5(1).1390.112 (Andania, i B.C.). (Plato (Cra. 412a) derives σύνεσις 11 from συνιέναι (σύνειμι) come together, neglecting the unwritten aspiration (συνἱέναι); but the form and signfs. point to συνίημι 11, perceive, apprehend, cf. Arist. EN 1143a17.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
σύνεσις, συνέσεως, ἡ (συνίημι, which see);

1. a running together, a flowing together: of two rivers, Homer, Odyssey 10, 515.
   2.
   a. from Pindar down, understanding: Luke 2:47; 1 Corinthians 1:19 (from Isaiah 29:14); Ephesians 3:4; Colossians 2:2; 2 Timothy 2:7; πνευματικῇ, Colossians 1:9.
   b. the understanding, i. e. the mind so far forth as it understands: Mark 12:33; Wis. 4:11. (The Sept. for בִּינָה, תֲּבוּנָה, דַּעַת, מַדַע , שֵׂכֶל, etc.; also for מַשׂכִיל, a poem.) (Synonym: see σοφία, at the end; cf. Lightfoot on Colossians 1:9; Schmidt, chapter 147, 8.)

Question 296

ἰσχύς, -ύος, ἡ

Answer 296

strength, power

strength, might, power, Rev. 18:2; Eph. 1:19; faculty, ability, 1 Pet. 4:11; Mk. 12:30, 33; Lk. 10:27

Thayer’s Definition
ability, force, strength, might

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἰσχ-ύς

[v. sub fin.], ύος, ἡ,

I

1. strength of body, Hes. Th. 146, 823, etc.; ἀκμαὶ ἰσχύος Pi. O. 1.96; δεινὸν ἰσχύος θράσος S. Ph. 104; τὴν ἰ. δεινὰ καὶ τὴν ῥώμην Pl. Smp. 190b; πρὸς ἰσχὺν ὀφθαλμοὶ ἄριστα πεφυκότες X. Smp. 5.5: pl., ἰσχύες καὶ ἀσθένειαι Pl. R. 618d; κατὰ σωμάτων ἰσχῦς καὶ εὐμορφίας Id. Lg. 744c; of places, ἰσχὺς γῆς S. OC 610; of a fortified place, Th. 4.35.
2. might, power, θεοῦ, θεῶν, A. Th. 226 (lyr.), S. Aj. 118; ἰ. βασιλεία A. Pers. 590 (lyr.), cf. 12 (anap.); ὅπου γὰρ ἰ. συζυγοῦσι καὶ δίκη might and right, Id. Fr. 381; φύσεως ἰ., of Themistocles, Th. 1.138; ἐπὶ μέγα ἐλθεῖν ἰσχύος to a great height of power, Id. 2.97, cf. 1.85, etc.; παρὰ ἰσχὺν τῆς δυνάμεως Id. 7.66; ἰ. μάχης fighting power, Id. 2.97; ἰ. τῆς ἐλπίδος Id. 4.65, cf. 2.62; ἡ τῶν νόμων ἰ. POxy. 67.14 (iv A.D.); validity, PGrenf. 2.71ii11 (iii A.D.), etc.
3. brute force, κατ’ ἰσχύν perforce, opp. δόλῳ, A. Pr. 214; πρὸς ἰσχύος κράτος S. Ph. 594; πρὸς ἰσχύος χάριν E. Med. 538; ὑπὸ τῆς ἰσχύος Epicr. 3.10; κατέχοντες ἰσχύϊ τὸ πλῆθος Th. 3.62; εἴ τι ἰσχύϊ πράττεται, ἰσχυρῶς πράττεται Pl. Prt. 332b.
4. motive force, Arist. Ph. 250a6; ἡ κινοῦσα ἰ. Id. Cael. 275b20, al.
5. in Lit. Crit., vigour of style, D.H. Pomp. 3, Comp. 2,al.

II in Tactics, the main body of troops, οὔπω ἡ ἰ. πάρεστιν X. Cyr. 1.4.19. [ ῠ in gen., etc.: in nom. and acc. sg. ῠ in Pi. N. 11.31 (acc.): ῡ in Trag. and Com., A. Th. 1080 (anap.), Ch. 721 (anap.), S. Aj. 118, Men. 449.] (Perh. ϝισχύς, cf. βίσχυν, γισχύν.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἰσχύς, ἰσχύος, ἡ (ἴσχω (allied with ἔσχον; to hold in check)) (from Hesiod down), the Sept. especially for כֹּחַ, חַיִל, עֹז, גְּבוּרָה; ability, force, strength, might: 2 Peter 2:11 (joined with δύναμις); Revelation 5:12; Revelation 7:12; τό κράτος τῆς ἰσχύος, power (over external things) afforded by strength, Ephesians 1:19; Ephesians 6:10 (Isaiah 40:26); ἡ δόξα τῆς ἰσχύος (see δόξα, III. 3 b. α. at the end), 2 Thessalonians 1:9; κράζειν ἐν ἰσχύει, with strength, mightily, Revelation 18:2 Rec.; ἐξ ἰσχύος, of one’s strength, to the extent of one’s ability, 1 Peter 4:11; with ὅλης added, Mark 12:30, 33; Luke 10:27 (here L text T Tr WH read ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ἰσχύι). (Synonym: see δύναμις, at the end.)

Question 297

ἰσχυρός, -ά, -όν

Answer 297

powerful, strong, forceful

strong, mighty, robust, Mt. 12:29; Lk. 11:21; powerful, mighty, 1 Cor. 1:27; 4:10; 1 Jn. 2:14; strong, fortified, Rev. 18:10; vehement, Mt. 14:20; energetic, 2 Cor. 10:10; sure, firm, Heb. 6:18

Thayer’s Definition
strong, mighty
of living beings
strong either in body or in mind
of one who has strength of soul to sustain the attacks of Satan, strong and therefore exhibiting many excellences
on inanimate things
strong, violent, forcibly uttered, firm, sure

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἰσχῡρός, ά, όν, (ἰσχύς)

I

1. strong, esp. of personal strength, S. Ph. 945, E. Fr. 290, etc.; of things, ἰ. βέλος Alc. 15.4; ῥεύματα Hdt. 8.12; ἰ. χθών hard, A. Pers. 310; of food, indigestible, Hp. Art. 50; of taste, strong, Thphr. HP 7.6.1; of armies, ἰσχυροτέρα φάλαγξ X. Cyr. 7.1.30; of places, Th. 4.9, X. An. 4.6.11, etc.; τῆς χώρης τὸ -ότατον Hdt. 1.76; τὸ ἑαυτοῦ ἰ., opp. τὰ τοῖς πολεμίοις ἰ., X. Eq.Mag. 8.24; τὰ ἰσχυρότατα your strongest points, Th. 5.111; τὰ τῆς πόλεως ἰ. that in which the strength of the state lies, Aeschin. 3.66; ὁρῶντες οὐδὲν ἰ. ἀπὸ τῶν Λεσβίων no show of strength, Th. 3.6; ἰ. τι πρὸς τὸ πρᾶγμ’ ἔχειν a strong point, Men. Epit. 130; -ότατον τεκμήριον SIG 685.84 (Crete, ii B.C.).
2. powerful, ἄλοχος Διός A. Supp. 302; πόλις E. Supp. 447; θεός Ar. Pl. 946; ἰ. τὸ πολλόν Hdt. 1.136; οἱ ἰ. ἐν ταῖς πόλεσιν X. Ath. 1.14: Comp. -ότερος, ἐς πειθώ Democr. 51; ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος -ότερός μου ἐστίν Matthew 3:11.
3. forcible, violent, severe, σιτοδείη, ψύχη, Hdt. 1.94, 4.29; λιμός Luke 15:14; ἀναγκαίη Hdt. 1.74; αἱ λίαν ἰ. τιμωρίαι violent, excessive, Id. 4.205; ὅρκος -ότατος, ἀνάγκαι -όταται, Antipho 5.11, 6.25; νόσημα Hp. Acut.(Sp.)4; βήξ Th. 2.49; γέλως, ἐπιθυμίαι, etc., Pl. R. 388e, 560b, etc.; νόμος ἰ. severe, Hdt. 7.102, Lys. 15.9; ἔχθρα Pl. Phdr. 233c; γνώμη -οτέρη more positive, Hdt. 9.41; τρόπῳ ᾧ ἂν δύνωνται -οτάτῳ Foed. ap. Th. 5.23; κατὰ τὸ ἰσχυρόν by main force, opp. δόλῳ, Hdt. 4.201, cf. 9.2.
4. of literary style, vigorous, D.H. Comp. 22; also of syllables, strong, ib. 16; στάσεις λαμβάνειν ἰ. ib. 22.

II

1. Adv. -ρῶς strongly, with all force, ἐγκεῖσθαι Th. 1.69, etc.; φυλάττειν τινάς X. An. 6.3.11.
2. very much, exceedingly, with Adjs., Hdt. 4.108; ἔθνος μέγα ἰ. ib. 183; διώρυγες ἰ. βαθεῖαι X. An. [1.7.15], etc.; ἰ. χλωρόν Hp. Prog. 11; κίνησις νωθὴς ἰ. Arist. HA 503b9; ἰ. φιλοπλάτων Phld. Ind Sto. 61: with Verbs, ἰ. ἥδεσθαι, ἀνιᾶσθαι, X. Cyr. 8.3.44; ἀπήγγειλεν ὅτι πάντα δοκοίη ἰ. τῷ εὐνούχῳ ib. 5.3.15: Comp. -οτέρως Heraclit. 114, Hdt. 3.129; -ότερον X. Cyr. 4.5.12, etc.: Sup., in answers, ἰσχυρότατά γε most certainly, Id. Oec. 1.15.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἰσχυρός, ἰσχυρά, ἰσχυρόν (ἰσχύω) (from Aeschylus down), the Sept. mostly for אֵל, גִּבּור, חָזָק, עָצוּם, and Chaldean תַּקִּיף; strong, mighty;

a. of living beings: strong either in body or in mind, Matthew 12:29; Mark 3:27; Luke 11:21; Revelation 5:2; Revelation 10:1; Revelation 18:21; ἐν πολέμῳ, mighty i. e. valiant, Hebrews 11:34, cf. Revelation 19:18; of one who has strength of soul to sustain the assaults of Satan, 1 John 2:14; universally strong, and therefore exhibiting many excellences, 1 Corinthians 4:10 (opposed to ἀσθενής); comparitive, Matthew 3:11; Mark 1:7; Luke 3:16; mighty, — of God, 1 Corinthians 1:25; Revelation 18:8 (Deuteronomy 10:17; 2 Macc. 1:24, etc.); of Christ raised to the right hand of God, 1 Corinthians 10:22; of those who wield great influence among men by their rank, authority, riches, etc., τά ἰσχυρά equivalent to τούς ἰσχυρούς (on the neuter cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 27, 5), 1 Corinthians 1:27 (οἱ ἰσχυροί τῆς γῆς, 2 Kings 24:15); joined with πλούσιοι, Revelation 6:15 (Rec. οἱ δυνατοί).
b. of inanimate things: strong equivalent to violent, ἄνεμος, Matthew 14:30 (T WH omit ἰσχυρόν); forcibly uttered, φωνή, Revelation 18:2 (Rec. μεγάλη) (Exodus 19:19); κραυγή, Hebrews 5:7; βρονταί, Revelation 19:6; λιμός, great, Luke 15:14; ἐπιστολαί (stern (forcible)), 2 Corinthians 10:10; strong equivalent to firm, sure, παράκλησις, Hebrews 6:18; fitted to withstand a forcible assault, πόλις, well fortified, Revelation 18:10 (τεῖχος, 1 Macc. 1:33; Xenophon, Cyril 7, 5, 7; πύργος, Judges 9:51). (Cf. δύναμις, at the end.)

Question 298

καθαρισμός, ου, ὁ

Answer 298

cleansing, purification, washing

ceremonial cleansing, purification, Lk. 2:22; 5:14; mode of purification, Jn. 2:6; 3:25; cleansing of lepers, Mk. 1:44; met. expiation, Heb. 1:3; 2 Pet. 1:9*

Thayer’s Definition
a cleansing, purification, a ritual purgation or washing
of the washing of the Jews before and after their meals
of levitical purification of women after childbirth
a cleansing from the guilt of sins wrought by the expiatory sacrifice of Christ

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κᾰθαρ-ισμός, ὁ,

later form for καθαρμός, LXX Exodus 29:36, Luke 2:22, John 2:6, Luc. Asin. 22, PLond. 2.168.11 (ii A.D.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καθαρισμός, καθαρισμοῦ, ὁ (καθαρίζω), a cleansing, purification; a ritual purgation or washing (Vulg. purgatio, pnrifcatio, emundatio): used with a genitive of the subjunctive, τῶν Ἰουδαίων, of the washings of the Jews before and after their meals, John 2:6; without a genitive, of baptism (a symbol of moral cleansing), John 3:25; with a genitive of the object, and that a person — of the levitical purification of women after childbirth, Luke 2:22; and of lepers, Mark 1:44; Luke 5:14; with a genitive of the thing, ἁμαρτιῶν or ἁμαρτημάτων, a cleansing from the guilt of sins (see καθαρίζω, 1 b. β.): wrought now by baptism, 2 Peter 1:9, now by the expiatory sacrifice of Christ, Hebrews 1:3 on which cf. Kurtz, Commentary, p. 70; (Exodus 30:10; τῆς ἁμαρτίας μου, Job 7:21; of an atonement, Lucian, asin. 22).

Question 299

κλῆσις, εως, ἡ

Answer 299

call, calling; situation, station in life

a call, calling, invitation;, in NT the call or invitation to the privileges of the Gospel, Rom. 11:29; Eph. 1:18; the favor and privilege of the invitation, 2 Thess. 1:11; 2 Pet. 1:10; the temporal condition in which the call found a person, 1 Cor. 1:26; 7:20

Thayer's Definition
a calling, calling to
a call, invitation
to a feast
of the divine invitation to embrace salvation of God

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κλῆσις, εως, ἡ,

(καλέω)

I

1. calling, call, Pl. Smp. 172a, X. Cyr. 3.2.14, etc.
2. calling into court, summons, prosecution, Ar. Nu. 875, 1189, etc.; τὰς κλήσεις καλεῖσθαι ὅσας ἔδει Antipho 6.38; ἀφιέναι τὰς κ. X. HG 1.7.13.
3. invitation to a feast, Id. Smp. 1.7; εἰς τὸ πρυτανεῖον D. 19.32; κλήσεις δείπνων Plu. Per. 7, cf. Parmenisc. ap. Ath. 4.156d.
4. invocation, θεῶν Men.Rh. p.333 S.
5. calling to aid, Plb. 2.50.7.
6. calling in a religious sense, 1 Corinthians 7:20.

II name, appellation, Pl. Plt. 262d, 287e, Dsc. 1.42; τοὺς θεοὺς εἶναι κ. ἱεράς Cleanth.Stoic. 1.123; Φιλησίη τὴν κ. by name, IG 14.2067; reputation, Phld. Rh. 2.46 S.

III Gramm., αἱ κ. τῶν ὀνομάτων the nominatives, opp. αἱ πτώσεις (the oblique cases), Arist. APr. 48b41; ἔχειν θηλείας ἢ ἄρρενος κλῆσιν the nominative form of.., Id. SE 173b40, cf. 182a18. = Lat. classis, D.H. 4.18.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κλῆσις, κλήσεως, ἡ (καλέω);

1. a calling, calling to ((Xenophon, Plato, others)).
2. a call, invitation: to a feast (3Macc. 5:14; Xenophon, symp. 1, 7); in the N. T. everywhere in a technical sense, the divine invitation to embrace salvation in the kingdom of God, which is made especially through the preaching of the gospel: with the genitive of the author, τοῦ Θεοῦ, Ephesians 1:18; ἀμεταμέλητα … ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ, God does not repent of the invitation to salvation, which he decided of old to give to the people of Israel, and which he promised their fathers (i. e. the patriarchs), Romans 11:29; ἡ ἄνω (which see (a.)) κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ, which was made in heaven by God on the ground of Christ, Philippians 3:14; also ἡ ἐπουράνιος κλῆσις, Hebrews 3:1; καλεῖν τινα κλήσει, 2 Timothy 1:9; passive Ephesians 4:1; ἀξιουν τινα κλήσεως is used of one whom God declares worthy of the calling which he has commanded to be given him, and therefore fit to obtain the blessings promised in the call, 2 Thessalonians 1:11; with the genitive of the object, ὑμῶν, which ye have shared in, Ephesians 4:4; 2 Peter 1:10; what its characteristics have been in your case, as having no regard to learning, riches, station, etc. 1 Corinthians 1:26; used somewhat peculiarly, of the condition in which the calling finds one, whether circumcised or uncircumcised, slave or freeman, 1 Corinthians 7:20.

Question 300

ἐγκαλέω

Answer 300

to accuse

Thayer’s Definition
to come forward as accuser against, bring charge against
to be accused

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐγκᾰλέω,

I

1. call in a debt, Isoc. 17.44, X. An. 7.7.33, D. 31.6, 36.14: generally, demand as one’s due, ἀργύριον Lys. 3.26.
2. invoke, τὴν τῶν θεῶν ἰατρείαν Str. 14.1.44.

II bring a charge or accusation against a person: — Constr.: c. dat. pers. et acc. rei, charge something against one, φόνους ἐ. τινί S. El. 778, cf. Pl. Ap. 26c, etc.; ἐ. ἔγκλημά τινι Hyp. Lyc. 18, cf. Eux. 24; χόλον κατ’ αὐτῶν ἐ. S. Ph. 328: folld. by a relat. clause, ἐ. τινὶ ὅτι.. X. An. 7.5.7: c. inf., ἐστὶν ἃ ἐνεκάλει τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις παραβαίνειν τὰς σπονδάς Th. 4.123: c. part., ἐ. αὐτοῖς ἀμελοῦσιν Pl. Prt. 346a: freq. c. dat. pers. only, accuse, Antipho 4.2.2, etc.; ἐ. περί τινων Inscr.Prien. 28.8 (ii B. C.); ἐπὶ τοῖς διῳκημένοις ib.37.128 (ii B. C.): c. acc. rei only, bring as a charge, εἴ τι ἄλλο ἐνεκάλουν Th. 5.46, cf. 6.53; τὸ νεῖκος ἐγκαλεῖν throw the blame of quarrel on another, S. OT 702: abs., οἱ ἐγκαλέσαντες Arist. Rh.Al. 1437a17: rarely c. gen.rei, τῆς βραδύτητος αὐτοῖς ἐνεκάλει Plu. Arist. 10: —

1. Pass., ἐγκαλεῖται τῇ τύχῃ a charge is brought against.., Arist. EN 1120b17; ἐνίων ἐγκληθέντων ἐπὶ τῷ βίῳ Phld. Piet. p.93 G.; τὰ ἐγκεκλημένα charges, OGI 90.14 (ii B. C.): also with person. constr., ἐγκαλεῖσθαι ὑπέρ τινος D.H. 7.46; τινός D.C. 58.4: — Locr. part. ἐγκαλείμενος may be either Med. or Pass., IG 9(1).334.41.
2. as lawterm, prosecute, take proceedings against, οὔτ’ ἐγκαλοῦντες οὔτ’ ἐγκαλούμενοι D. 34.1; ἐ. δίκην τινί Id. 40.19; ἐ. τινὶ περί τινος Isoc. 4.40: abs., Ar. Av. 1455.
3. object, c. acc. et inf., Phld. Sign. 29.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐγκαλέω (see ἐν, III. 3) ἐγκάλω; future ἐγκαλέσω; imperfect ἐνεκάλουν; (present passive ἐγκαλοῦμαι); properly, to call (something) in someone (ἐν (i. e. probably in his case; or possibly, as rooted in him)); hence, to call to account, bring a charge against, accuse: as in classic Greek followed by the dative of the person (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 30, 9 a.), Acts 19:38; Acts 23:28 (Sir. 46:19); κατά with the genitive of the person to come forward as accuser against, bring a charge against: Romans 8:33. Passive to be accused (cf. Buttmann, § 134, 4 (sec. 133, 9; yet cf. Meyer on Acts as below, Winer’s Grammar, as above)); with the genitive of the thing: στάσεως, Acts 19:40, (ἀσεβείας ἐς τόν Τιβεριον ἐγκληθείς, Dio Cassius, 58, 4; active with the dative of the person and the genitive of the thing, Plutarch, Aristotle 10, 9; see Winers Grammar, as above; Matthiae, § 369); περί τούτων, ὧν ἐγκαλοῦμαι, unless this is to be resolved into περί τούτων ἅ, etc., according to the well-known construction ἐγκάλειν τίνι τί, Acts 26:2; περί τίνος (active, Diodorus 11, 83) Acts 23:29; Acts 26:7 (Buttmann, § 133, 9). (In Greek writings from Sophocles and Xenophon down.) (Synonym: see κατηγορέω, at the end.)

Question 301

ἀνέγκλητος, ον

Answer 301

blameless, not to be called to account, unreprovable, free from accusation
Definition:
unblamable, irreproachable, 1 Cor. 1:8; Col. 1:22; 1 Tim. 3:10; Tit. 1:6, 7*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀνέγκλη-τος, ον,

I without reproach, blameless, X. HG 6.1.13, D. Ephesians 2:14; διαφυλάττειν τοὺς πολίτας ἀ. Arist. Rh. 1360a16; ἀ. ἑαυτὸν παρέχειν IG 22.1271, cf. CIG 2270.7 (Delos). Adv. -τως D. 17.2, SIG 436. 6 (Delph., iii B. C.), PIand. 33.14 (ii A. D.).

II giving no ground for dispute, ἀ. τὰς οὐσίας πρὸς ἀλλήλους κατασκευάζεσθαι Pl. Lg. 737a. Adv. -τως, ἔχειν Arist. Pol. 1321b22.

III Act. in Adv. -τως uncomplainingly, Plu. 2.102e.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀνέγκλητος, ἀνέγκλητον (alpha privative and ἐγκαλέω, which see), that cannot be called to account, unreprovable, unaccused, blameless: 1 Corinthians 1:8; Colossians 1:22; 1 Timothy 3:10; Titus 1:6f (3Macc. 5:31; Xenophon, Plato, Demosthenes, Aristotle, others) (Cf. Trench, § ciii.)

Question 302

ἐπικαλοῦμαι/ἐπικαλέω/ἐπικαλεìομαι/ἐπικαλέομαι

Answer 302

ἐπικαλέσω, ἐπεκάλεσα, -, ἐπικέκλημαι, ἐπεκλήθην
I call, name; middle, I invoke, appeal to
(act./pass.) to call (upon), name, be named; (mid.) appeal to, call upon for aid
Definition:
pluperfect, ἐπεκέκλητο (3 sg), to call on; to attach or connect a name, Acts 15:17; Jas. 2:7; to attach an additional name, to surname, Mt. 10:3; pass. to receive an appellation or surname, Heb. 11:16; mid. to call upon, invoke, 2 Cor. 1:23; to appeal to, Acts 25:11, 12, 21
ἐπικαλέω, ἐπικαλῶ: 1 aorist ἐπεκαλεσα; (passive and middle, present ἐπικαλοῦμαι); perfect passive ἐπικέκλημαι; pluperfect 3 person singular ἐπεκέκλητο, and with neglect of augment (cf. Winers Grammar, § 12, 5; Buttmann, 33 (29)) ἐπικεκλητο (Acts 26:32 Lachmann); 1 aorist passive ἐπεκλήθην; future middle ἐπικαλέσομαι; 1 aorist middle ἐπεκαλεσάμην; the Sept. very often for קָרָא;

Thayer’s Definition
to put a name upon, to surname
to permit one’s self to be surnamed
to be named after someone
to call something to one
to cry out upon or against one
to charge something to one as a crime or reproach
to summon one on any charge, prosecute one for a crime
to blame one for, accuse one of
to invoke
to call upon for one’s self, in one’s behalf
any one as a helper
as my witness
as my judge
to appeal unto
to call upon by pronouncing the name of Jehovah
an expression finding its explanation in the fact that prayers addressed to God ordinarily began with an invocation of the divine name

1. to put a name upon, to surname: τινα (Xenophon, Plato, others), Matthew 10:25 G T Tr WH (Rec. ἐκάλεσαν); passive ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος, he who is surnamed, Luke 22:3 R G L; Acts 10:18; Acts 11:13; Acts 12:12; Acts 15:22 R G; also ὅς ἐπικαλεῖται, Acts 10:5, 32; ὁ ἐπικληθείς, Matthew 10:3 (R G); Acts 4:36; Acts 12:25; equivalent to ὅς ἐπεκλήθη, Acts 1:23. Passive with the force of a middle (cf. Winers Grammar, § 38, 3), to permit oneself to be surnamed: Hebrews 11:16; middle with τινα: 1 Peter 1:17 εἰ πατέρα ἐπικαλεῖσθε τόν etc. i. e. if ye call (for yourselves) on him as father, i. e. if ye surname him your father.
2. ἐπικαλεῖται τό ὄνομα τίνος ἐπί τινα, after the Hebrew פ עַל פ… שֵׁם נִקְרָא…, “the name of one is named upon some one, i. e. he is called by his name or declared to be dedicated to him” (cf. Gesenius, Thesaurus iii., p. 1232a): Acts 15:17 from Amos 9:12 (the name referred to is the people of God); James 2:7 (the name οἱ τοῦ Χριστοῦ).
3. τίνι with the accusative of the object; properly, to call something to one (cf. English to cry out upon (or against) one); “to charge something to one as a crime or reproach; to summon one on any charge, prosecute one for a crime; to blame one for, accuse one of” (Aristophanes pax 663; Thucydides 2, 27; 3, 36; Plato, legg. 6, 761 e.; 7, 809 e.; Dio Cass. 36, 28; 40, 41 and often in the orators (cf. under the word κατηγορέω)): εἰ τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ Βηλζεβουλ ἐπεκάλεσαν (i. e. accused of commerce with Beelzebul, of receiving his help, cf. Matthew 9:34; Matthew 12:24; Mark 3:22; Luke 11:15), πόσῳ μᾶλλον τοῖς ὀικιακοις αὐτοῦ, Matthew 10:25 L WH marginal reading after Vat. (see 1 above), a reading defended by Rettig in the Studien und Kritiken for 1838, p. 477ff and by Alexander Buttmann (1873) in the same journal for 1860, p. 343, and also in his N. T. Gram. 151 (132); (also by Weiss in Meyer edition 7 at the passage). But this expression (Beelzebul for the help of Beelzebul) is too hard not to be suggestive of the emendation of some ignorant scribe, who took offence because (with the exception of this passage) the enemies of Jesus are nowhere in the Gospels said to have called him by the name of Beelzebul.
4. to call upon (like German anrufen), to invoke; middle, to call upon for oneself, in one’s behalf: anyone as a helper, Acts 7:59, where supply τόν κύριον Ἰησοῦν (βοηθόν, Plato, Euthyd., p. 297 c.; Diodorus 5, 79); τινα μάρτυρα, as my witness, 2 Corinthians 1:23 (Plato, legg. 2, 664 c.); as a judge, i. e. to appeal to one, make appeal unto: Καίσαρα, Acts 25:11; Acts 26:32; Acts 28:19; (τόν Σεβαστόν, Acts 25:25); followed by the infinitive passive Acts 25:21 (to be reserved).
5. Hebraistically (like יְהוָה בְּשֵׁם קָרָא to call upon by pronouncing the name of Jehovah, Genesis 4:26; Genesis 12:8; 2 Kings 5:11, etc.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaurus, p. 1231{b} (or his Hebrew Lexicon, under the word קָרָא); an expression finding its explanation in the fact that prayers addressed to God ordinarily began with an invocation of the divine name: Psalm 3:2; Psalm 6:2; Psalm 7:2, etc.) ἐπικαλοῦμαι τό ὄνομα τοῦ κυρίου, I call upon (on my behalf) the name of the Lord, i. e. to invoke, adore, worship, the Lord, i. e. Christ: Acts 2:21 (from Joel 2:32 ()); ; Romans 10:13; 1 Corinthians 1:2; τόν κύριον, Romans 10:12; 2 Timothy 2:22; (often in Greek writings ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τούς Θεούς, as Xenophon, Cyril 7, 1, 35; Plato, Tim., p. 27 c.; Polybius 15, 1, 13).

Question 303

καύχημα, -ατος, τό

Answer 303

a boasting, a ground of boasting
something to boast about, boasting; pride, joy
Definition:
a glorying, boasting, 1 Cor. 5:6; a ground or matter of glorying or boasting, Rom. 4:2; joy, exultation, Phil. 1:26; complimentary testimony, 1 Cor. 9:15, 16; 2 Cor. 9:3

Thayer’s Definition
that of which one glories or can glory, matter or ground of glorying
a glorying or boasting

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καύχημα, καυχήματος, τό (καυχάομαι), very rare in secular authors; the Sept. for תְּהִלָּה, praise, and תִּפְאֶרֶת, ornament, beauty; several times in Sirach:

1. that of which one glories or can glory, matter or ground of glorying: Romans 4:2; 1 Corinthians 9:15; 2 Corinthians 1:14; Philippians 2:16; τό καύχημα ἔχειν εἰς ἑαυτόν μόνον, his glorying confined to himself (R. V. in regard of himself alone), Galatians 6:4; τό καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος, the matter for glorying which hope gives, i. e. the hope, of which we glory, Hebrews 3:6.
2. As γέννημα, δίωγμα, θέλημα. ἴαμα, κήρυγμα (2 Timothy 4:17), κλαῦμα, πλήρωμα, φρόνημα, etc., are used for γέννησις, δίωξις, θέλησις, κτλ. (cf. Ellicott on Philippians 4:6), so also (which H. A. W. Meyer persists in denying (as respects the New Testament (see his note on Romans 4:2); so Ellicott and Lightfoot on Galatians 6:4; Lünem. on Heb. as above)) is καύχημα used for καύχησις (Pindar Isthm. 5, 65 (cf. Meyer on Philippians 1:26 note; on the apparent use of nouns in μά in an active sense see Lightfoot on Colossians, p. 257f)), a glorying, boasting: 1 Corinthians 5:6; Philippians 1:26; ὑπέρ τίνος (see καυχάομαι, under the end), 2 Corinthians 5:12; 2 Corinthians 9:3.

Question 304

καύχησις, -εως, ἡ

Answer 304

boasting, pride; glorying in; this can refer to proper or improper boasting, depending on the object of the boast
Definition:
boasting, pride, a later equivalent to καύχημαι, Rom. 3:27; 2 Cor. 7:4, 14; 11:10

Thayer’s Definition
the act of glorying

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
καύχ-ησις, εως, ἡ,

boasting, Epicur. Fr. 93, LXX 1 Chronicles 29:13, al., Phld. Vit. p.27 J., Ph. 1.534, Romans 15:17.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καύχησις, καυχήσεως, ἡ (καυχάομαι), the act of glorying: Romans 3:27; 2 Corinthians 9:4 Rec.; 2 Corinthians 11:10, 17; James 4:16; στέφανος καυχήσεως, crown of which we can boast, 1 Thessalonians 2:19; Ezekiel 16:12; Proverbs 16:31; ὑπέρ τίνος (on behalf) of one (cf. καυχάομαι, under the end), 2 Corinthians 7:4; 2 Corinthians 8:24; ἐπί τίνος, before one, 2 Corinthians 7:14; ἔχω (τήν critical editions) καύχησιν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, the glorying which I have I ascribe to Christ, or I owe it to Christ that I am permitted to glow (see ἐν, I. 6 b., p. 211b), Romans 15:17; 1 Corinthians 15:31; that of which one glories, cause of glorying, 2 Corinthians 1:12. (The Sept. several times for תִּפְאֶרֶת; ((Diogenes Laërtius 10, 7 at the end); Philod. in Vol. Hercul. Oxfort. i., p. 16.)

Question 305

ἀντίκειμαι

Answer 305

-, -, -, -, -
I resist, oppose
to be an opponent, in conflict
Definition: 
pr. occupy an opposite position; met. to oppose, be adverse to, Gal. 5:17; 1 Tim. 1:10; opponent, hostile, Lk. 13:7

Thayer’s Definition
to be set over against, opposite to
to oppose, be adverse to, withstand

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀντίκειμαι, 3 pl. ἀντικέαται Archyt. ap. Stob. 2.2.4, used as Pass. of ἀντιτίθημι: —

I to be set over against, correspond with, τιμὰ ἀγαθοῖσιν ἀ. is held out to them as a fitting reward, Pi. I. 7(6).26: — ἀντικείμενος, ὁ, name of a bandage, Sor. Fasc. 12.515C.

II

1. to be opposite to, of places, τινός Hp. Aeër. 4; τινί Str. 2.5.15; of things, to be opposite or opposed, πρὸς ἄλληλα Pl. Sph. 258b; ἀ. κατὰ διάμετρον in a circle, Arist. Cael. 277a23, al. Adv. -μένως, συνέστηκεν PA 654a11.
2. to be opposed, in various ways, Cat. 11b17, Metaph. 1055a38, al.; in Logic, αἱ -κειμέναι προτάσεις APr. 63b24, al. Adv. ἀντικειμένως Metaph. 1054b15, etc.; propositions are opposed either contradictorily (ἀντιφατικῶς) or contrarily (ἐναντίως), Int. 17b16; ἀντικείμενα defined as ὧν τὸ ἕτερον τοῦ ἑτέρου ἀποφάσει πλεονάζει Stoic. 2.70, cf. 82, al.
3. Rhet., ἀντικειμένη [λέξις ] antithetical, Arist. Rh. 1409b35; ἀντικειμένως εἰπεῖν ib. 1401a5, cf. 1410b29; ἀντικείμενα κῶλα Demetr. Eloc. 22.

III resist, be adverse, ἀντικείσομαι τοῖς ἀντικειμένοις σοι LXX Exodus 23:22, cf. Isaiah 66:6, al., Luke 13:17, al.; to be hurtful, τοῖς σώμασι Procop.Gaz. 27.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀντίκειμαι;

1. to be set over against, lie opposite to, in a local sense ((Hippocrates de aëre, p. 282 Foes. (191 Chart.); Strabo 7, 7, 5); Herodian, 6, 2, 4 (2 Bekker); 3, 15, 17 (8 Bekker); (cf. Aristotle, de caelo 1, 8, p. 277{a}, 23)).
2. to oppose, be adverse to, withstand: τίνι, Luke 13:17; Luke 21:15; Galatians 5:17; 1 Timothy 1:10. simply (ὁ) ἀντικείμενος, an adversary, (Tittmann 2:9): 1 Corinthians 16:9; Philippians 1:28; 2 Thessalonians 2:4; 1 Timothy 5:14. (Dio Cass. 39, 8. Exodus 23:22; 2 Macc. 10:26, etc.; (see Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word).)

Question 306

κατάκειμαι

Answer 306

(κατεκείμην), -, -, -, -, -
to lie down; to recline (at meals); to lie sick

Definition:
to lie, be in a recumbent position, be laid down, Mk. 1:30; 2:4; Lk. 5:25; Jn. 5:3, 6; Acts 9:33; 28:8; to recline at table, Mk. 2:15; 14:3; Lk. 5:29; 7:37; 1 Cor. 8:10*

Thayer’s Definition
to have lain down, i.e. to lie prostrate
of the sick
of those at meals, to recline

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κατάκειμαι, Ephesians 3:1-21 pl. κατακείαται Il. 24.527: Ion. plpf. κατεκέατο Hdt. 7.229; subj. -κέωμαι Pl. Smp. 213b: —

Pass., only in pres. and impf. with fut. Med. -κείσομαι: —

1. lie down, μῆλα τὰ δὴ κατάκειτ’ ἐσφαγμένα Od. 10.532; ἐπὶ πλευρὰς κ. Il. 24.10; νέκυς κ. Tyrt. 11.19; ἐφ’ ἁρμαμαξῶν μαλθακῶς κατακείμενοι Ar. Ach. 70.
2. lie hid, ἐν λόχμῃ.. κατέκειτο μέγας σῦς Od. 19.439; θάμνῳ ὑπ’ ἀμφικόμῳ κατακείμενος Il. 17.677.
3. lie stored up, δοιοὶ γάρ τε πίθοι κατακείαται ἐν Διὸς οὔδει Il. 24.527; τό γ ἐν οἴκῳ κατακείμενον ἀνέρα κήδει Hes. Op. 364: metaph., ἄλγεα.. ἐν θυμῷ κ. Il. 24.523. to be deposited, of deeds in a registry, POxy. 1040.32 (iii A.D.), etc.
4. lie sick, keep one’s bed, Hdt. 7.229, Mark 1:30, etc.; lie in bed, Ar. Ec. 313; ἐφ’ ὃ κατέκειτο Luke 5:25.
5. lodge, reside, Hp. Epid. 1.26. έ, 3.1. γ, al.
6. to be idle, X. An. 3.1.14; of things, lie neglected, καθεύδειν ἐᾶν ἐν τῇ γῇ κατακείμενα τὰ τείχη Pl. Lg. 778d.
7. recline at meals, πῖνε, κατάκεισο Ar. Ach. 985, cf. Hdt. 3.121, Pl. Smp. 185d, Mark 14:3.
8. of land, lie sloping to the sea, πρῶνες ἔξοχοι -κεινται Pi. N. 4.52.
9. ἀρετᾷ κατάκειται πᾶσαν ὀργάν is expended in every impulse on.., Id. I. 1.41.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κατάκειμαι; imperfect 3 person singular κατέκειτο; (κεῖμαι, to lie (see κατά, III. 1)); to have lain down i. e. to lie prostrate;

a. of the sick (cf. colloquial, ‘down sick’) (Herodotus 7, 229; Lucian, Icarom. 31; (Plutarch, vit. Cicero 43, 3)): Mark 1:30; John 5:6; Acts 28:8; followed by ἐπί with the dative of the couch or pallet, Mark 2:4 R G L marginal reading; (Acts 9:33 R G); Luke 5:25 R L; ἐπί τιονς, Acts 9:33 (L T Tr WH); ἐπί τί, Luke 5:25 T Tr WH (Buttmann, § 147, 24 note; Winer’s Grammar, 408 (381) note); ἐν with the dative of place, John 5:3.
b. of those at meals, to recline (Athen. 1, 42, p. 23 c.; Xenophon, an. 6, 1, 4; conv. 1, 14; Plato, conv., p. 177 d.; rep. ii., p. 372 d., etc.; (Diogenes Laërtius 7, 1, 19; see ἀνάκειμαι): absolutely, Mark 14:3; Luke 5:29; followed by ἐν with the dative of place, Mark 2:15; 1 Corinthians 8:10; Luke 7:37 L T Tr WH.

Question 307

περίκειμαι

Answer 307

-, -, -, -, -
to surround or to be surrounded or to have around (like clothing)
I am compassed about with, have around me
to surround, place or tie around; to be subject to
Definition:
to lie around, be surround, Heb. 12:1; to be hung around, Mk. 9:42; Lk. 17:2; to have around one’s self, to wear, Acts 28:20; to be in submission to, Heb. 5:2*

Thayer’s Definition
to lie around
to be compassed with, have round one

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
περίκειμαι,

inf. - κεῖσθαι: fut. - κείσομαι: —

used as Pass. of περιτίθημι, lie round about, c. dat., εὗρε σὲ Πατρόκλῳ περικείμενον ὃν φίλον νἱόν lying with his arms round him, Il. 19.4; [ γωρυτὸς τόξῳ] περίκειτο ] there was a case round the bow, Od. 21.54; πασσάλοις (acc. pl.) κρύπτοισιν περικείμεναι . . κνάμισες Alc. 15; οἷς στέφανος περίκειται Pi.O. 8.76; τὸ σχῆμα καὶ τὸ ὄνομα τῆς βασιλείας τινὶ π . Hdn. 6.1.1; π. τινὶ τῶν πράξεων κηλίς Plu. Dio 56: c. acc., σφέας εὐσίη καὶ γαληναίη περικέαται Luc. Astr. 3: with a Prep., περὶ [τὰς φλέβας] τὸ σῶμα π. τὸ τῶν σαρκῶν Arist. GA 764b30: abs., τὰ περικείμενα χρυσία plates of gold laid on (an ivory statue), Th. 2.13; [ ὁ κημὸς] περικείμενος put round the horse’s mouth, X. Eq. 5.3 .

2. metaph., οὐδέ τί μοι περίκειται there is no advantage for me, I have nought laid by, Il. 9.321 . οἱ περικείμενοί τινι his supporters, POxy. 1408.24 (iii A. D.) . II c. acc. rei, have round one, wear, mostly in part., [ τελαμῶνας] περὶ τοῖσι αὐχέσι περικείμενοι Hdt. 1.171, cf. OGI 56.67 (Canopus, iii B.C. ); τιάρας π . Str. 15.3.15; στεφάνους Plu. Arat. 17; πτέρυγα Luc. Icar. 14; προσωπεῖον Id. Nigr. 11, Aesop. 360; στρατιωτικὴν δύναμιν π invested with . ., Plu. Pomp. 51; ὕβριν π . clad in arrogance, Theoc. 23.14 (s. v.l.): rarely in other moods, περίκεισο ἄνθεα have garlands put round thee, AP 11.38 ( Polem. ); περιέκειτο ξίφος, σχῆμα βασιλικόν, Hdn. 3.5.7, 5.4.7; τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι Acts 28:20; περίκειται ἀσθένειαν Ep.Hebrews 5:2 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
περίκειμαι; (περί and κεῖμαι); from Homer down;

1. to lie around (cf. περί, III. 1): περί (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 52, 4, 12) τί (A. V. were hanged, Mark 9:42); Luke 17:2; ἔχοντες περικείμενον ἡμῖν νέφος (A. V. are composed about with a cloud etc.), Hebrews 12:1.
2. passively (cf. Buttmann, 50 (44)), to be compassed with, have round one, (with the accusative; cf. Winers Grammar, § 32, 5; Buttmann, § 134, 7): ἅλυσιν, Acts 28:20 (δεσμά, 4 Macc. 12:3); ἀσθένειαν, infirmity cleaves to me, Hebrews 5:2 (ὕβριν, Theocritus, 23,14; ἀμαυρωσιν, νέφος, Clement of Rome, 2 Cor. 1, 6 [ET]).

Question 308

πρόκειμαι

Answer 308

-, -, -, -, -
I am set before, am present
(pass.) to be set before, present
Definition: 
to lie, or be placed before; met. to be proposed or set before, as a duty, example, reward, etc., Heb. 6:18; 12:1, 2; Jude 7; to be at hand, be present, 2 Cor. 8:12*

Thayer’s Definition
to lie or be placed before (a person or a thing) or in front of
to set before
to be placed before the eyes, to lie in sight
to stand forth
to be appointed, destined
to be there, be present, be at hand

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πρόκειμαι,

used as Pass. of προτίθημι, to be set before one, ὀνείαθ’ ἑτοῖμα προκείμενα the meats laid ready, Il. 9.91, al.; π. δαίς, δεῖπνον, Hdt. 1.211, 5.105; τὰ π. ἀγαθά Id. 9.82; ἄρτοι προκείμενοι shew -bread, LXX Exodus 39:18 ( 36 ); τράπεζα π. ib. 38.9 ( 37.10 ).

2. lie exposed, ὁρέω παιδίον προκείμενον Hdt. 1.111; of a tuft of wool, S. Tr. 702; ἄτιμος ὧδε πρόκειμαι, says Ajax of himself, Id. Aj. 427 (lyr.), cf. E. Tr. 1179; νομίζετε τὸν παῖδα τουτονὶ ἱκετηρίαν ὑμῖν προκεῖσθαι D. 43.83; esp. lie dead, A. Th. 964 (lyr.), S. Aj. 1059; προκείμενον νέκυν laid out for burial, E. Alc. 1012, cf. S. Ant. 1101, Ar. Ec. 537, Av. 474, Antipho 6.34, Luc. Luct. 12; opp. ἐξενεχθείς, Lys. Fr. 23 (also, to be buried first, IGRom. 4.735 ( Eumenia ), MAMA 4.357 (ibid., iii A.D. )): metaph., πρὸς ὕβριν π. to be exposed to . ., D.S. 33.15 (dub.l.).
3. to be set before competitors, as the prize of a contest, τοῖσι . . προὔκειτο μέγας τρίπος Hes. Sc. 312: hence, metaph., to be set before one, proposed, γνῶμαι τρεῖς προεκέατο three opinions were set forth, Hdt. 3.83, cf. 7.16 . α’; τοσούτων πέρι σκέψις πρόκειτα Pl. R. 533e, cf. Phdr. 237c; π. τῷ συμβουλεύοντι σκοπὸς τὸ συμφέρον is proposed as a mark, Arist. Rh. 1362a17; ἡ προκειμένη ξυμμαγία the alliance which naturally offers, Th. 1.35; freq. of contests, πόνος τε καὶ ἀγὼν ἔσχατος ψυχῇ π. Pl. Phdr. 247b, cf. La. 182a; καταγέλαστον . ., ὃ πάλαι πρόκειται, τοῦτο πάλιν προτιθέναι Id. Euthd. 279d; to be extant, προοίμια π. Id. Lg. 722e; freq. in part., ὁ προκείμενος ἄεθλος the task set, Hdt. 1.126, 4.10, cf. A. Pr. 259, 755; ἀγῶνος μεγίστου π. Hdt. 9.60; ἆθλα π. Lys. 1.47, X. Cyr. 2.3.2, etc.; τὸν π. πόνον E. Alc. 1149; ἔχειν ἔργον π. Pl. R. 407a; τὰ προκείμενα, opp. μέλλοντα, S. Ant. 1334, cf. E. Rh. 984; so ξυμφορᾶς προκειμένης Id. Alc. 551; τὸ π. ἐν τῷ λόγῳ or τὸ π., the question under discussion, Pl. Grg. 457d, La. 184c, etc.; τὸ π. πρῆγμα the matter in hand, Hdt. 1.207: impers., περὶ σωτηρίας προκειμένου when the question is concerning safety, Ar. Ec. 401; πρόκειται ἡμῖν ζητεῖν Luc. Par. 54, cf. D.H. Rh. 7.5 .
4. to be set forth, settled, prescribed, appointed, ἔργων ὧν νόμοι πρόκεινται S. OT 865 (lyr.); π. σημήϊα Hdt. 2.38; αἱ προκείμεναι ἡμέραι the prescribed days, ib. 87; ὀγδώκοντα ἔτεα ξόης πλήρωμα ἀνδρὶ προκεῖσθαι Id. 3.22; ἀναγκαίη π. Id. 1.11; τὸ θανεῖν . . πᾶσι πρόκειται prob. in IG 12(1).146 ( Rhodes ); of laws, νόμους ὑπερβαίνουσα τοὺς π. S. Ant. 481; of punishments, στέρεσθαι κρατὸς ἦν προκείμενον A. Pers. 371; φόνον π. δημόλευστον S. Ant. 36; πολλῶν [ἁμαρτημάτων] θανάτου ζημίαι π. Th. 3.45 .
5. to be first stated, οὐ πρόκειται τοῦ λόγου τὸ τί ἐστιν Arist. Top. 142b24 .

II lie before, lie in front of, c. gen., Αἴγυπτος προκειμένη τῆς ἐχομένης γῆς projecting further than, Hdt. 2.12, cf. 4.99; ᾗ ( ᾧ codd.) προὔκειτο μαστῶν περονίς where was set a brooch before her breasts, S. Tr. 925; πρὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων π. τὰ παραφράγματα Pl. R. 514b; Ἐφέσου τεὰ τόξα πρόκειται Call. Dian. 258; οἱ προκείμενοι τῶν στοῶν πύργοι Plb. 1.48.2: abs., of a cape, island, etc., ἐν τῇ θαλάττῃ π. χωρίον X. An. 6.4.3; τὰ προκείμενα τῆς χώρας ὄρη Id. Mem. 3.5.27; παρὰ ἤπειρον νῆσος π. Id. Ath. 2.13, etc.

2. bulge, project, ἡ γαστὴρ πρόκειται Hp. Mul. 1.3 .

III precede, γράμμα π. an initial letter, AP 11.426; ἐν τοῖς π. in the preceding pages, A.D. Synt. 138.4; ὡς πρόκειται ib. 32.17, freq. in Pap., POxy. 271.15 (i A. D.), etc.; προκείμενον a preceding word, A.D. Pron. 39.25, al.; χρόνος ὁ προκείμενος date as above, PTeb. 397.34 (ii A. D.); τοῦ π. ἔτους in the aforesaid year, PAmh. 50.11 (ii B.C.); ἡ π. βοτάνη above-mentioned, PMag.Par. 1.779, cf. Gal. 12.455 (but οἱ π. θεοί represented on this monument, OGI 663.2 (Egypt, i A. D. )).

2. τὸ π. αὐτοῦ μόριον from which it is derived ( ὥς from ὅς ), A.D. Adv. 171.8 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πρόκειμαι; (πρό (which see d. α.) and κεῖμαι): from Homer down;

1. properly, to lie or be placed before (a person or thing), or in front (often so in Greek writings).
2. to be set before, i. e., a. to be placed before the eyes, to lie in sight; to stand forth: with a predicate nominative, δεῖγμα, as an example, Jude 1:7 (καλόν ὑπόδειγμα σοι πρόκειται, Josephus, b. j. 6, 2, 1).
   b. equivalent to to be appointed, destined: προκειμενη ἐλπίςt’;, the hope open to us, offered, given, Hebrews 6:18; used of those things which by any appointment are destined to be done, borne, or attained by anyone; so προκειμενος ἀγών, Hebrews 12:1; προκειμενος χαρά, the destined joy (see ἀντί, 2 b.), ibid. 2 (the phrase τά ἆθλα προκεῖσθαι occurs often in secular writings from Herodotus down; cf. Bleek, Br. an die Hebrews 2:2, p. 268ff).
   c. to be there, be present, be at hand (so that it can become actual or available): 2 Corinthians 8:12.

Question 309

κοιμάομαι / κοιμάω

Answer 309

I sleep, fall asleep, die

Thayer's Definition
to cause to sleep, put to sleep
metaph.
to still, calm, quiet
to fall asleep, to sleep
to die

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κοιμ-άω,

fut. - ήσω, Dor. - άσω [ᾱ ]: aor. ἐκοίμησα, κοίμησα Od. 12.372: — Med., fut. - ήσομαι OGI 383.43 (Commagene, i B.C.), D.H. 4.64, Luc. DDeor. 4.4, etc.: aor. κοιμήσατο, -αντο, Il. 11.241, 1.476: — Pass., fut. - ηθήσομαι S. Fr. 574.6, Luc. Asin. 40, Alciphr. 1.37.3, etc.: aor. ἐκοιμήθην Od. 14.411, al., E. Andr. 390, Pl. R. 571e, etc.: pf. κεκοίμημαι Aeschrio 8.2, Luc. Gall. 6: —

I

1. lull, put to sleep, κοίμησον.. Ζηνὸς ὑπ’ ὀφρύσιν ὄσσε φαεινώ Il. 14.236; ἦ με.. κοιμήσατε νηλέϊ ὕπνῳ Od. 12.372; βλέφαρα μὴ κοιμῶν ὕπνῳ A. Th. 3; put to bed, τὸν δ’ αὐτοῦ κοίμησε Od. 3.397; of a hind, ἐν ξυλόχῳ.. νεβροὺς κοιμήσασα 4.336.
2. metaph., still, calm, ἀνέμους, κύματα, Il. 12.281, Od. 12.169; φλόγα A. Ag. 597; κύματος μένος Id. Eu. 832; εὔφημον.. κοίμησον στόμα Id. Ag. 1247; also, soothe, assuage, κοίμησον δ’ ὀδύνας Il. 16.524; ᾧ (sc. φύλλῳ) κοιμῶ τόδ’ ἕλκος S. Ph. 650.

II

1. Med. and Pass., fall asleep, go to bed, Il. 1.476, al., Hdt. 1.9, etc.; of animals, lie down, κατὰ ἤθεα κοιμηθῆναι Od. 14.411: c. acc. cogn., ποῖόν τινα ὕπνον ἐκοιμῶ; X. Hier. 6.7; βαθὺν κοιμηθῆναι (sc. ὕπνον) Luc. DMar. 2.3.
2. metaph., ὅπως ἂν κοιμηθῇ [τὸ ἐπιθυμητικόν ] Pl. l.c.
3. of the sleep of death, κοιμήσατο χάλκεον ὕπνον Il. 11.241; ἱερὸν ὕπνον κ. Call. 11.2: abs., fall asleep, die, S. El. 509 (lyr.), Aeschrio l.c.; ἐκοιμήθη μετὰ τῶν πατέρων LXX 3 Ki. 2.10, al., cf. PFay. 22.28 (i A.D.), Matthew 27:52, John 11:11, etc.; in epitaphs, IG 14.1683, etc.; κ. τὸν αἰώνιον ὕπνον ib.929.
4. κοιμῶντο.. παρὰ μνηστῇς ἀλόχοισι Il. 6.246, cf. 250: hence, of sexual intercourse, lie with another, Od. 8.295, Pi. I. 8(7).23; οὔ τινι κοιμηθεῖσα Hes. Th. 213; παρά τινι Hdt. 3.68; σὺν δεσπόταισι E. l.c.; μετά τινος Timocl. 22.2; ἀπὸ γυναικὸς ἀνὴρ τὰν νύκτα κοιμαθές Berl.Sitzb. 1927.157 (Cyrene).
5. keep watch at night, A. Ha 2, X. Cyr. 1.2.4, 9, POxy. 933.25 (ii A.D.), etc.
6. of things, remain during the night, οὐ μὴ κοιμηθήσεται ὁ μισθὸς παρά σοι ἕως πρωί LXX Leviticus 19:13; ἡ κιβωτὸς ἐκοιμήθη ἐκεῖ ib. John 6:10.
7. c. acc., dream of, μέταλλα χρύσεια Luc. Gall. 6.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κοιμάω, κοίμω: passive, present κοιμάομαι. κοιμωμαι; perfect κεκοίμημαι (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 274 (257)); 1 aorist ἐκοιμήθην; 1 future κοιμηθήσομαι; (akin to κεῖμαι; Curtius, § 45); to cause to sleep, put to sleep (Homer, et al.); metaphorically, to still, calm, quiet, (Homer, Aeschylus, Plato); passive to sleep, fall asleep: properly, Matthew 28:13; Luke 22:45; John 11:12; Acts 12:6; the Sept. for שָׁכַב. metaphorically, and euphemistically equivalent to to die (cf. English to fall asleep): John 11:11; Acts 7:60; Acts 13:36; 1 Corinthians 7:39; 1 Corinthians 11:30; 1 Corinthians 15:6, 51 (cf. Winers Grammar, 555 (517); Buttmann, 121 (106) note); 2 Peter 3:4; οἱ κοιμώμενοι, κεκοιμημένοι, κοιμηθέντες, equivalent to the dead: Matthew 27:52; 1 Corinthians 15:20; 1 Thessalonians 4:13-15; with ἐν Χριστῷ added (see ἐν, I. 6 b., p. 211b), 1 Corinthians 15:18; in the same sense Isaiah 14:8; Isaiah 43:17; 1 Kings 11:43; 2 Macc. 12:45; Homer, Iliad 11, 241; Sophocles Electr. 509.

Question 310

κοινόω

Answer 310

-, ἐκοίνωσα, κεκοίνωκα, κεκοίνωμαι, -
I make common, defile
to make (ceremonially) unclean, impure; to defile
Definition:
to make common, in NT to profane, desecrate, Acts 21:28; to render ceremonially unclean, defile, pollute, Mt. 15:11, 18, 20; 7:15, 18, 20, 23; Heb. 9:13; to pronounce unclean ceremonially, Acts 10:15; 11:9*

Thayer’s Definition
to make common
to make (Levitically) unclean, render unhallowed, defile, profane
to declare or count unclean

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κοιν-όω,

fut. κοινώσω A. Ch. 673: aor. ἐκοίνωσα Th. 8.48, Pl. Lg. 889d; Dor. ἐκοίνᾱσα Pi. P. 4.115: — Med., fut. κοινώσομαι Id. N. 3.12 codd. (leg. - άσομαι (Dor.)), E. Med. 499: aor. ἐκοινωσάμην A. Ag. 1347, Isa 11.50, etc.: — Pass., aor. ἐκοινώθην E. Andr. 38, Pl. Ti. 59b: pf. κεκοίνωμαι (in med. sense) E. Fr. 493: —

communicate, impart information, κ. τινί τι A. Ch. 717 (in 673 an acc. must be supplied), E. Med. 685, Ar. Nu. 197, Th. 4.4, etc.; μῦθον ἔς τινας E. IA 44 (anap.); κ. τινὶ περί τινος A. Supp. 369; νυκτὶ κοινάσαντες ὁδόν having imparted their journey to night alone (i.e. travelling by night without consulting any one), Pi. P. l.c.

2. make common, share, κοινώσαντας τὴν δύναμιν κοινὰ καὶ τὰ ἀποβαίνοντα ἔχειν Th. 1.39, cf. Pl. Lg. l.c.; v.l. for ἐκοινώνησε in Arist. Pol. 1264a1: — in Med., κοινάσομαι [ὕμνον] λύρᾳ Pi. N. l.c.: aor. Med. in act. sense, Hp. Jusj.; κ. τὴν οὐσίαν τῇ τοῦ παιδός unite one to the other, Isal.c.
3. make common, defile, τὸν ἄνθρωπον Matthew 15:11; γαστέρα μιαροφαγίᾳ LXX 4 Maccabees 7:6 : — Med., deem profane, Acts 10:15.

II Med., c. acc., undertake together, make common cause in, βουλεύματα A. Ag. 1347; κοινούμεθα.. ἐγώ τε καὶ Λάχης τὸν λόγον Pl. La. 196c; τὸ πρᾶγμα D. 32.30; κοινουμένη τὰς ξυμφοράς σοι E. Ion 608, cf. 858; κοινοῦσθαι τὸν στόλον Th. 8.8; τὴν τύχην X. Vect. 4.32.

2. take counsel with, consult, esp. an oracle or god, X. An. 6.2.15, v.l. in HG 7.1.27: generally, πρός τινας Pl. Lg. 930c; περὶ πάντων ἑαυτοῖς Plb. 7.16.3; τοῖς ἰατροῖς περί τινων Gal. Consuet. 5; τοῖς φίλοις περὶ τὸ πρακτέον Hdn. 7.8.1; ὧν ἄν τις κοινώσαιτο δόξαις agree with, Arist. Metaph. 993b12: abs., οὔτ’ ἠθέλησας οὔτ’ ἐγὼ ‘κοινωσάμην S. Ant. 539; simply, communicate, τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ τῇ βουλῇ Alciphr. 3.72; μηδὲν τῇ γυναικὶ χρήσιμον Men. Mon. 361.
3. c.gen., to be partner or partaker, τινος of a thing, E. Ph. 1709, Cyc. 634, Lys. 12.93, etc.; τινί τινος with one in.., E. Andr. 933.
4. come to terms, μοι Pl. Smp. 218e.

III Pass., have communication with, λέχει E. Andr. 38, cf. 217: metaph., ἀλλήλοις Pl. Lg. 673d; ξανθῷ χρώματι -ωθέν, i.e. tinged with yellow, Id. Ti. 59b.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κοινόω, κοινῷ; 1 aorist infinitive κοινῶσαι (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 91 (86)); perfect κεκοίνωκα; perfect passive participle κεκοινωμενος; (κοινός);

1. in classical Greek to make common.
2. in Biblical use (see κοινός, 2), a. to make (levitically) unclean, render unhallowed, defile, profane (which the Greeks express by βεβηλόω, cf. Winer’s De verb. comp. etc. Part ii., p. 24 note 33 (where he calls attention to Luke’s accuracy in putting κοινοῦν into the mouth of Jews speaking to Jews (Acts 21:28) and βεβηλοῦν when they address Felix (xxiv. 6))): Revelation 21:27 Rec.; Matthew 15:11, 18, 20; Mark 7:15, 18, 20, 23; passive Hebrews 9:13; τί, Acts 21:28; γαστέρα μαροφαγια, 4 Macc. 7:6.
   b. to declare or count unclean: Acts 10:15 (cf. ); ; see δικαιόω, 3.

Question 311

κοινωνέω

Answer 311

κοινωνήσω, ἐκοινώνησα, κεκοινώνηκα, -, -
to share in, participate in
I have a share of, take part in

Definition: 
to have in common, share, Heb. 2:14; to be associated in, to become a sharer in, Rom. 15:27; 1 Pet. 4:13; to become implicated in, be a party to, 1 Tim. 5:22; 2 Jn. 11; to associate one's self with by sympathy and assistance, to communicate with in the way of aid and relief, Rom. 12:13; Gal. 6:6; Phil. 4:15*

Thayer’s Definition
to come into communion or fellowship with, to become a sharer, be made a partner
to enter into fellowship, join one’s self to an associate, make one’s self a sharer or partner

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κοινων-έω,

fut. - ήσω Pl. R. 54o c: pf. κεκοινώνηκα Id. Phdr. 246d, etc.: — Pass., fut. κοινωνήσομαι (v. infr.): pf. κεκοινώνημαι Id. Lg. 801e: —

I

1. have or do in common with, share, take part in a thing with another, c. gen. rei et dat. pers., τῆς πολιτείας κ. τινί ib. 753a; κ. πόνων καὶ κινδύνων ἀλλήλοις ib. 686a, cf. X. HG 2.4.21; κ. αὐτοῖς ὧν ἔπραττον ib. 6.3.1; σιτήσεώς τισι Din. 1.101: also in act. sense, give a share of.., βρωτοῦ μηδενὸς μηδένα τούτῳ κ. D. 25.61; τὰ περὶ τὰς κτήσεις τοῖς συσσιτίοις ὁ νομοθέτης ἐκοινώνησε (v.l. ἐκοίνωσε) Arist. Pol. 1264a1; πυρὸς ἢ ὕδατος κ. Luc. Alex. 46; πάντων ἐκοινώνει μοι τῶν ἀπορρήτων Id. Philops. 34.
2. κ. τινός have a share of, take part in a thing, χθονός A. Supp. 325; μύθου Id. Ch. 165; κακῶν Id. Th. 1038; γάμων S. Tr. 546; τάφου E. Or. 1055; τύχης Id. Med. 302; σίτου καὶ ποτοῦ X. Mem. 2.6.22; τῆς πολιτείας Arist. Pol. 1268a18, etc.; τῶν αὐτῶν κ. πάντων share all things in common, ib. 1257a22; ἱερῶν SIG 1106.7 (Cos, iv/iii B.C.); θυσίας Inscr.Magn. 44.19 (Decr. Corc.); ἦθος παιδείας κεκοινωνηκός Aristeas 290; φύσεως κεκοινώνηκε σαρκίνης Phld. Sign. 27; πάθους, of infection, Gal. 12.312. of partnership in business, BGU 969.13 (ii A.D.), etc.
3. κ. τινί go shares with, have dealings with a man, Ar. V. 692, Av. 653, Pl. R. 343d, etc.; also of things, κοινωνεῖν μὲν ἡγοῦμαι καὶ τοῦτο τοῖς πεπολιτευμένοις I think that this also is concerned with my public measures, D. 18.58; στολὴν φοινικίδα.. ἥκιστα.. γυναικείᾳ κ. has least in common with.., X. Lac. 11.3; οὐδὲν τραγῳδίᾳ κ. Arist. Po. 1453b10, cf. SE 179b16: Medic., sympathize, of bodily parts, Hp. Mul. 1.38: — Pass., ἐγκώμια κεκοινωνημένα εὐχαῖς united with.., Pl. Lg. 801e.
4. with Preps., φύσις ἡ θήλεια τῇ τοῦ ἄρρενος γένους κ. εἰς ἅπαντα Id. R. 453a; κ. περί τινος Plb. 31.18.6.
5. c.acc.cogn., κ. κοινωνίαν τινί Pl. Lg. 881e; κ. ἴσα πάντα τοῖς ἀνδράσι Id. R. 540c: rarely c. acc. rei, κ. φόνον τινί commit murder in common with him, E. El. 1048.
6. abs., share in an opinion, agree, σκόπει.., πότερον κοινωνεῖς καὶ ξυνδοκεῖ σοι Pl. Cri. 49d.
7. communicate, join, ἡ ἐρυθρὰ θάλασσα κ. πρὸς τὴν ἔξω.. Arist. Mete. 354a2.
8. form a community, Id. Pol. 1280a26, etc.

II of sexual intercourse, κ. γυναικί, ἀνδρί, Pl. Lg. 784e, Luc. DDeor. 1.2, 10.2, PFlor. 36.6 (iv A.D.): — Pass., ὑπὸ μηδενός ποτε κοινωνήσεται εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ σοῦ μόνου PMag.Osl. 1.293.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κοινωνέω, κοινώνω; 1 aorist ἐκοινώνησα; perfect κεκοινώνηκα; (κοινωνός);

a. to come into communion or fellowship, to become a sharer, be made a partner: as in Greek writings with the genitive of the thing, Hebrews 2:14 ((so Proverbs 1:11; 2 Macc. 14:25)); with the dative of the thing (rarely so in Greek writings), Romans 15:27; (1 Peter 4:13).
b. to enter into fellowship, join oneself as an associate, make oneself a sharer or partner: as in Greek writings, with the dative of the thing, 1 Timothy 5:22; 2 John 1:11; ταῖς χεῖρας τίνος, so to make another’s necessities one’s own as to relieve them (A. V. communicating to the necessities etc.), Romans 12:13; with the dative of person followed by εἰς τί (as in Plato, rep. 5, p. 453 a.), Philippians 4:15; followed by ἐν with the dative of the thing which one shares with another, Galatians 6:6 (κοινωνησεις ἐν πᾶσι τῷ πλησίον σου καί οὐκ ἐρεῖς ἰδίᾳ εἶναι, Epistle of Barnabas 19, 8 [ET]); cf. Winers Grammar, § 30, 8a.; (Buttmann, § 132, 8; Lightfoot or Ellicott on Galatians 1.
c. Compare: συγκοινωνέω.)

Question 312

κοινωνός

Answer 312

Thayer’s Definition
a partner, companion, associate, sharer, in anything

of the altar in Jerusalem on which the sacrifices are offered

sharing in the worship of the Jews
partakers of (or with) demons
brought into fellowship with them, because they are the authors of heathen worship

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κοινων-ός, ὁ, also ἡ,

I

1. companion, partner, τινος of or in a thing, A. Ag. 1037, 1352, Supp. 344, Men. Epit. 499; τῆς ἐπιβουλῆς Antipho 5.68; ἱερῶν Pl. Lg. 868e; τῆς ἀρχῆς Th. 7.63, 8.46; ὁ τοῦ κακοῦ κ. accomplice in.., S. Tr. 730; ἀνοσίων αὐτοῖς ἔργων Pl. 325a; κ. περὶ νόμων Pl. Lg. 810c; τινι in a thing, E. El. 637: c. dat. pers., κ. ἀλλήλοις τῶν τιμῶν with each other, X. Mem. 2.6.24.
2. abs., partner, fellow, S. Aj. 284, Pl. R. 333b, Phdr. 239c, etc.; ὁ σὸς κ., οὐχ ὁ ἐμός D. 18.21; ἴσοι καὶ κ. Arist. EN 1133b3; κοινωνοὶ λιμένων, of a societas publicanorum which farmed harbour-dues, BCH 10.267 (Syme); of joint-owners, PAmh. 2.100 (ii/iii A.D.).
3. familiar spirit, LXX 4 Ki. 17.11.

II as Adj., = κοινός, ξίφος E. IT 1173.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κοινωνός, κοινωνη, κοινωνόν (κοινός) (as adjective Euripides, Iph. Taur. 1173; commonly as a substantive);

a. a partner, associate, comrade, companion: 2 Corinthians 8:23; ἔχειν τινα κοινωνόν, Philemon 1:17; εἰμί κοινωνός τίνι, to be one’s partner, Luke 5:10; τίνος (the genitive of person), to be the partner of one doing something, Hebrews 10:33; τίνος ἐν τῷ αἵματι, to be one’s partner in shedding the blood etc. Matthew 23:30.
b. a partaker, sharer, in any thing; with the genitive of the thing: τῶν παθημάτων, 2 Corinthians 1:7; τῆς δόξης, 1 Peter 5:1; θείας φύσεως, 2 Peter 1:4; τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου, of the altar (at Jerusalem) on which sacrifices are offered, i. e. sharing in the worship of the Jews, 1 Corinthians 10:18; τῶν δαιμονίων, partakers of (or with) demons, i. e. brought into fellowship with them, because they are the authors of the heathen worship, ibid. 20; (ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ κοινωνοί … ἐν τοῖς φθαρτοῖς, joint partakers in that which is imperishable … in the blessings which perish, Epistle of Barnabas 19, 8 [ET]; see κοινωνέω, at the end).

Question 313

ἀποκόπτω

Answer 313

I cut off, amputate

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀπο-κόπτω,

I

1. cut off, hew off, freq. in Hom., of men’s limbs, κάρη ἀπέκοψε Il. 11.261; ἀπό τ’ αὐχένα κόψας ib. 146, al.; in Prose, χεῖρας ἀ. Hdt. 6.91, etc.; ἀγκύρας X. HG 1.6.21; γεφύρας Plu. Nic. 26; amputate, Archig. ap. Orib. 47.13.2; νηῶν ἀποκόψειν ἄκρα κόρυμβα Il. 9.241; ἀπὸ πείσματ’ ἔκοψα νεός Od. 10.127; ἀΐξας ἀπέκοψε παρήορον he cut loose the trace-horse, Il. 16.474: — Pass., ἀποκεκόψονται, of buds, will be cut off, Ar. Nu. 1125, cf. M.Ant. 11.8; ἀ. τὴν χεῖρα have it cut off, Hdt. 6.114; ἀ.τὰ γεννητικά, of eunuchs, Ph. 1.89: abs., ἀποκεκομμένος eunuch, LXX De. 23.1, cf. Luc. Eun. 8: — Med., make oneself a eunuch, Galatians 5:12, cf. Arr. Epict. 2.20.19.
2. metaph., ἀπ’ ἐλπίδα φημὶ κεκόφθαι ναυτιλίης νόστου τε A.R. 4.1272, cf. Plb. 3.63.8; ἔλεον D.S. 13.23; ἀ. τὸ ἀμφίβολον τῆς γνώμης decide summarily, Alciphr. 1.8; also ἀποκοπῆναι τῆς ἐλπίδος Plu. Pyrrh. 2; διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀποκόπτειν τὴν πολυχρόνιον ζωήν exclude from the reckoning, despair of, Phld. Herc. 1251.22; reject, exclude, Id. Sign. 7, D. 3.13: — Med., dub.in Phld. Mort. 23.
3. esp. of voice or breath, cut short, τὸν τοῦ πνεύματος τόνον D.H. Comp. 14, cf. 22: — Pass., ἀποκέκοπταί τινι ἡ φωνή Plu. Dem. 25, cf. Dsc. Eup. 1.85.
4. of literary periods or phrases, bring to an abrupt close, δεῖ τῆ μακρᾶ -κόπτεσθαι Arist. Rh. 1409a19, cf. Demetr. Eloc. 18, 238.
5. Gramm., in Pass., to be cut short by ἀποκοπή (q.v.), Eust. 487.10, EM 609.54.
6. abstract an idea or word from its context, τὸ ἀγαθὸς ἀποκοπέν Anon. in SE 57.31.

II ἀ. τινὰ ἀπὸ τόπου beat off from a strong place, of soldiers, X. An. 3.4.39, 4.2.10.

III Med., smite the breast in mourning: c. acc., mourn for, νεκρόν E. Tr. 628.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀποκόπτω: 1 aorist ἀπεκοψα; future middle ἀποκόψομαι; to cut off, amputate: Mark 9:43 (45); John 18:10, 26; Acts 27:32; ὄφελον καί ἀποκόψονται I would that they (who urge the necessity of circumcision would not only circumcise themselves, but) would even mutilate themselves (or cut off their privy parts), Galatians 5:12. ἀποκόπτεσθαι occurs in this sense in Deuteronomy 23:1; (Philo de alleg. leg. 3:3; de vict. off. § 13; cf. de spec. legg. i. § 7); Epictetus diss. 2, 20, 19; Lucian, Eun. 8; (Dion Cass. 79, 11; Diodorus Siculus 3, 31), and other passages quoted by Wetstein (1752) at the passage (and Sophocles Lexicon under the word). Others incorrectly: I would that they would cut themselves off from the society of Christians, quit it altogether; (cf. Meyer and Lightfoot at the passage).

Question 314

ἐκκόπτω

Answer 314

I cut out, cut off

Thayer’s Definition
to cut out, cut off
of a tree
metaph. to cut off occasion

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐκκόπτ-ω,

I

1. cut out, knock out, τοὺς γομφίους Phryn.Com. 68; τῶν ἑρπετῶν ἐξέκοψε τὸ φθέγμα Call. Iamb. 1.163: — Pass., ἢν..τωφθαλμὼ’ κκοπῇς have your eyes knocked out, Ar. Av. 342; τὸν ὀφθαλμὸν ἐκκεκομμένος D. 18.67; ἐξεκέκοπτο τὴν φωνήν had lost his voice, Luc. JTr. 16.
2. cut [trees] out of a wood, fell, Hdt. 6.37 (Pass.), 9.97, Th. 6.99, etc.; δένδρα ἐκκεκόφασι X. HG 6.5.37; παράδεισον laid waste the park, Id. An. 1.4.10; χωρία D.H. 8.87; νήσους καὶ πόλεις Plu. Pomp. 24: hence, metaph., cut off, make an end of, τοὺς ἄνδρας Hdt. 4.110; ἐ. φενακισμόν, ἱεροσυλίαν, Din. 2.4, Isa 8.39; eradicate abuses, OGI 669.64 (Egypt, i A.D.); τὴν αἰσθητικὴν ἐνέργειαν Arist. PA 656b5; extirpate, [ λύπας ] Diog.Oen. 2: — Pass., ἡ θρασύτης ἐξεκέκοπτο Pl. Chrm. 155c. ἐ. πλοῖα scuttle ships, IG 12(7).386.9 (Amorgos).
3. as military term, beat off, repulse, τὰς ἀκροβολίσεις X. Cyr. 6.2.15; τοὺς ἐπὶ τῷ λόφῳ Id. HG 7.4.26.
4. win, in throwing the dice, Alex. 44, Menecr.I D.: — Pass., to be ruined at play, Hsch.
5. ἐ. θύρας break open, Lys. 3.6; οἰκίαν ἐ. Plb. 4.3.10.
6. cut out or erase an inscription, SIG 38.38 (Teos, V B.C.), Arist. Rh. 1400a33; οὐδενὶ ἐξέσται..γράμμα ἐκκόψαι CIG 3028 (Ephesus), al.; ἐ. τὴν χεῖρα Matthew 5:30; cut out, as a surgeon does, Luc. Cat. 24.
7. coin, stamp money, D.S. 11.26. metaph., φαντασίαν ἐ. ὡς.. Phld. Lib. p.56 O.; γένη οὐκ ἐκκοπτόμενα ἰδίοις τέλεσι genders not marked by different terminations, A.D. Synt. 104.23; ἐ. ἀναφθέγματα coin expressions, Phld. D. 3.14.
8. hinder, bring to a stop, PAlex. 4.1 (iii B.C.), Vett.Val. 268.6.

II intr., pause, come to a stop, Id. 260.24.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐκκόπτω: future ἐκκόψω; 1 aorist imperative ἔκκοψον, subjunctive ἐκκόψω; (passive, present ἐκκόπτομαι); 2 aorist ἐξεκοπην; 2 future ἐκκοπήσομαι; to cut out, cut off;

a. properly: of a tree, Matthew 3:10; Matthew 7:19; Luke 3:9; Luke 13:7, 9 (Herodotus 9, 97, etc.); a hand, an eye: Matthew 5:30; Matthew 18:8 (τόν ὀφθυλμον, Demosthenes, p. 744 (13) 17); passive ἐκ τίνος, a branch from a tree, Romans 11:22, 24.
b. figuratively: τήν ἀφορμήν, to cut off occasion, 2 Corinthians 11:12 (τήν ἐλπίδα, Job 19:10). In 1 Peter 3:7 read ἐγκόπτεσθαι; see ἐγκόπτω.

Question 315

ενκοπτω

Answer 315

I block, hinder

Question 316

προσκόπτω

Answer 316

to strike one thing against another; to stumble (striking the foot against a stone); encounter friction; take offense at

Thayer's Definition
to strike against
of those who strike against a stone or other obstacle in the path, to stumble
to strike one's foot against a stone
i.e. to meet with some harm;
to rush upon, beat against
to be made to stumble by a thing
i.e. metaph. to be induced to sin

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
προσκόπτω,

strike one thing against another, πρὸς λίθον τὸν πόδα LXX Psalms 90:12(91).12; π. τὸν δάκτυλόν που Ar. V. 275 (lyr). intr., stumble or strike against, τινι X. Eq. 7.6, Alex. 81, Arist. Pr. 882b18, GC 326a27, etc.; π. τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ (sc. ῥίζῃ κυάμου ) Thphr. HP 4.8.8; of liquid, to be checked by striking against, c. dat., Plu. Lyc. 9; πνεῦμα προσκόπτον broken, interrupted breathing, Hp. Aph. 4.68 .

2. π. τῷ ἄξονι encounter friction at . ., Arist. Mech. 852a32 .

II metaph., = cross προσκρούω 111, offend, Posidipp. 36; τοῖς πολλοῖς Plb. 5.49.5; οὐ μόνον δυσαρεστήσειν ἀλλὰ καὶ προσκόπτειν ἔμελλε προφανῶς, of an open breach, Id. 7.5.6 .

2. take offence at, ἵνα μή μοι προσκόψῃς PCair.Zen. 463.11 (iii B.C.); τῇ βαρύτητί τινος Plb. 1.31.7, cf. Carneisc. Herc. 1027.14; θεοὺς -κόψαντάς τισι D.S. 13.59; of things, π. τῷ ζῆν to be disgusted with life, Id. 4.61: — Pass., δῆμος π. αὐτῷ διά τι being offended with him, App. BC 2.27, cf. Phld. Piet. 30, M.Ant. 9.3 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
προσκόπτω; 1 aorist προσεκοψα; to strike against (cf. πρός, IV. 4): absolutely of those who strike against a stone or other obstacle in the path, to stumble, John 11:9, 10; πρός λίθον τόν πόδα, to strike the foot against a stone, i. e. (dropping the figure) to meet with some harm, Matthew 4:6; Luke 4:11 (from Psalm 90:12 ()); to rush upon, beat against, οἱ ἄνεμοι τῇ οἰκία, Matthew 7:27 (L marginal reading προσερρηξαν, see προσρήγνυμι). ἐν τίνι, to be made to stumble by a thing, i. e. metaphorically, to be induced to sin, Romans 14:21 (cf. Winers Grammar, 583 (542); Buttmann, § 151, 23 d.). Since we are angry with an obstacle in our path which we have struck and hurt our foot against, one is tropically said προσκόπτειν, to stumble at, a person or thing which highly displeases him; thus the Jews are said προσκόψαι τῷ λίθῳ τοῦ προσκόμματος, i. e. to have recoiled from Jesus as one who failed to meet their ideas of the Messiah (see πρόσκομμα), Romans 9:32; the enemies of Christianity are said προσκόμματος … τῷ λόγῳ, 1 Peter 2:8 (some (cf. R. V. marginal reading) take προσκόμματος here absolutely, and make τῷ λόγῳ depend on ἀπειθοῦντες, which see in a.). (Examples of this and other figurative uses of the word by Polybius, Diodorus, M. Antoninus are cited by Passow (Liddell and Scott), under the word and Fritzsche, Ep. ad Romans, ii., p. 362f.)

Question 317

πρόσκομμα

Answer 317

a stumbling, a stumbling-block, an obstacle

Thayer’s Definition
a stumbling block
an obstacle in the way which if one strikes his foot against he stumbles or falls
that over which a soul stumbles i.e. by which is caused to sin

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πρόσκομμα, ατος, τό, ( προσκόπτω )

stumble, λίθου πρόσκομμα LXX Is. 8.14; ὁ λίθος τοῦ π . Ep.Romans 9:33 : hence, offence, obstacle, hindrance, LXX Exodus 23:33, Ep.Romans 14:13, etc.

II result of stumbling, bruise, hurt, προσκομμάτων ἀπόλυσις Plu. 2.1048c, cf. Ath. 3.97f .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πρόσκομμα, προσκόμματος, τό (προσκόπτω), a stumbling-block, i. e. an obstacle in the way which if one strike his foot against he necessarily stumbles or falls; tropically, that over which the soul stumbles, i. e. by which it is impelled to sin: 1 Corinthians 8:9 (Sir. 17:25 (20); (Sir. 34:16); Sir. 39:24); τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τίνι, to put a stumblingblock in someone’s way, i. e. tropically, to furnish one an occasion for sinning, Romans 14:13 (WH marginal reading omits); ὁ διά προσκόμματος ἐσθίων (A. V.) who eateth with offence (see διά, A. I. 2), by making no discrimination as to what he eats occasions another to act against his conscience, Romans 14:20; λίθος προσκόμματος (from Isaiah 8:14 for נֶגֶף אֶבֶן), properly, a stone against which the foot strikes (A. V. stone of stumbling), used figuratively of Christ Jesus, with regard to whom it especially annoyed and offended the Jews that his words, deeds, career, and particularly his ignominious death on the cross, quite failed to correspond to their preconceptions respecting the Messiah; hence, they despised and rejected him, and by that crime brought upon themselves woe and punishment: Romans 9:32, 33; 1 Peter 2:8 (7). (In the Sept. for מוקֵשׁ, Exodus 23:33; Exodus 34:12; (cf. Judith 8:22). a sore or bruise caused by striking the foot against any object, Athen. 3, p. 97 f.; a hindrance (?), Plutarch, mor., p. 1048 c. (i. e. de Stoic. repugn. 30, 8 at the end).)

Question 318

εὔκοπος / εὐκοπώτερος

Answer 318

with easy labor, easy

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
εὔκοπος, εὔκοπον (εὖ and κόπος), that can be done with easy labor; easy: Polybius, et al.; Sir. 22:15; 1 Macc. 3:18; in the N. T. only in the phrase εὐκοπώτερον ἐστι — followed by an infinitive, Matthew 9:5; Mark 2:9; Luke 5:23; by an accusative with an infinitive, Matthew 19:24; Mark 10:25; Luke 16:17; Luke 18:25.

Question 319

ἀνακρίνω

Answer 319

Thayer’s Definition
examine or judge
to investigate, examine, enquire into, scrutinise, sift, question
specifically in a forensic sense of a judge to hold an investigation
to interrogate, examine the accused or witnesses
to judge of, estimate, determine (the excellence or defects of any person or thing

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀνακρίνω,

I

1. examine closely, interrogate, esp. judicially, Παυσανίαν Th. 1.95, cf. Antipho 2.1.9, Pl. Smp. 201e; ἀ. τινὰ πόθεν ζῇ Diph. 32.3; sound a person, LXX 1 Samuel 20:12.
2. inquire into, ἀ. τοὺς ἐργασαμένους Antipho 2.3.2; τὴν [αἰτίαν ] Phld. Po. 994 Fr. 21, cf. Lib. p.21 O.: — Med., ἀ. ποινὰ τίς ἔσται what remedy there shall be, Pi. P. 4.63.

II

1. examine magistrates so as to prove their qualification, D. 57.66 and 70.
2. of the magistrates, examine persons concerned in a suit, so as to prepare the matter for trial, And. 1.101, Isa 5.32; ὁ ἄρχων ἀνέκρινε πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ ἀνακρίνας ει[]σήγαγεν εἰς τὸ δικαστήριον D. 48.31, cf. Arist. Ath. 56.6: — Pass., ἀνεκρίθησαν αἱ ἀμφισβητήσεις D. 48.23: — Med., οὐκ ἀνεκρίνατο ταύτην [τὴν γραφήν ] he did not have it examined, of the prosecutor, Id. 21.103, cf. 53.17.
3. generally, examine, μάρτυρας SIG 953.46 (Calymna); τινά 1 Corinthians 9:3 : — Med., Michel 409.9 (Cos).
4. select, Ps.-Callisth. 3.26.

III in Med., abs., ἀνακρίνεσθαι πρὸς ἑωυτούς dispute, wrangle one with another, Hdt. 9.56.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀνακρίνω; 1 aorist ἀνέκρινα; passive (present ἀνακρίνομαι); 1 aorist ἀνεκρίθην; (frequent in Greek writings, especially Attic); properly, “by looking through a series (ἀνά) of objects or particulars to distinguish (κρίνω) or search after. Hence,

a. to investigate, examine, inquire into, scrutinize, sift, question”: Acts 17:11 (τάς γραφάς); 1 Corinthians 10:25, 27 (not anxiously questioning, namely, whether the meat set before you be the residue from heathen sacrifices). Specifically, in a forensic sense (often also in Greek writings) of a judge, to hold an investigation; to interrogate, examine, the accused or the witnesses; absolutely: Luke 23:14; Acts 24:8. τινα, Acts 12:19; Acts 28:18; passive, Acts 4:9. Paul has in mind this judicial use (as his preceding term ἀπολογία shows) when in 1 Corinthians 9:3 he speaks of τοῖς ἐμέ ἀνακρίνουσί, investigating me, whether I am a true apostle.
b. universally, to judge of, estimate, determine (the excellence or defects of any person or thing): τί, 1 Corinthians 2:15; τινα, 1 Corinthians 4:3f; passive, 1 Cor. 2:(),; . (Cf. Lightfoot Fresh Revision, etc. iv. § 3 (p. 67f, American edition).)

Question 320

ἀποκρίνομαι

Answer 320

I answer

Thayer’s Definition
to give an answer to a question proposed, to answer
to begin to speak, but always where something has preceded (either said or done) to which the remarks refer

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀποκριìνομαι

From G575 and κρινω krino

κρίνω [ῑ], Ephesians 3:1-21 sg. ind. κρίνησι (δια -) f.l. in Theoc. 25.46: fut. κρῐνῶ, , Ion. κρῐνέω (δια -) Il. 2.387: aor. ἔκρῑνα Od. 18.264, etc.: pf. κέκρῐκα Pl. Lg. 734c, etc.: — Med., fut. κρῐνοῦμαι E. Med. 609, but in pass. sense, Pl. Grg. 521e: aor. ἐκρῑνάμην Il. 9.521, etc.: — Pass., fut. κρῐθήσομαι A. Eu. 677, Antipho 6.37, etc.: aor. ἐκρίθην [ῐ ] Pi. N. 7.7, etc.; 3 pl. κρίθεν Id. P. 4.168, ἔκριθεν A.R. 4.1462; opt. κρινθεῖτε (δια -) Il. 3.102, part. κρινθείς 13.129, Od. 8.48, inf. κρινθήμεναι A.R. 2.148: pf. κέκρῐμαι Pi. O. 2.30, And. 4.35, etc.; inf. κεκρίσθαι (ἀπο -) Pl. Men. 75c: — Aeol. κρίννω dub.in IG 12(2).278 (Mytil.): aor. ἔκριννε ib. 6.28(Mytil., ἐπ-); inf. κρίνναι ib.526b15: — Thess. pres. inf. κρεννέμεν ib.9(2).517.14 (Larissa): —

I separate, put asunder, distinguish, ὅτε τε ξανθὴ Δημήτηρ κρίνῃ.. καρπόν τε καὶ ἄχνας Il. 5.501, etc.; κρῖν’ ἄνδρας κατὰ φῦλα 2.362. cf. 446; ἥλιος ἠὼ καὶ δύσιν ἔκρινεν Emp. 154.1; κ. τὸ ἀληθές τε καὶ μή Pl. Tht. 150b; τούς τε ἀγαθοὺς καὶ τοὺς κακούς X. Mem. 3.1.9, etc.: — also Med., ἀντία δ’ ἐκρίναντο δέμας καὶ σήματ’ ἔθεντο χωρὶς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων Parm. 8.55: — Pass., κρινόμενον πῦρ Emp. 62.2.

II pick out, choose, ἐν δ’ ἐρέτας ἔκρινεν ἐείκοσιν Il. 1.309; ἐκ Λυκίης.. φῶτας ἀρίστους 6.188, cf. Od. 4.666, 9.90, 195, 14.217, etc.; κ. τινὰ ἐκ πάντων Hdt. 6.129; κρίνασα δ’ ἀστῶν.. τὰ βέλτατα A. Eu. 487; δίδωμί σοι κρίναντι χρῆσθαι S. OC 641, etc.: — Med., κρίνασθαι ἀρίστους to choose the best, Il. 9.521, cf. 19.193, Od. 4.408, 530, etc.: —

1. Pass., to be chosen out, distinguished, ἵνα τε κρίνονται ἄριστοι 24.507; esp.in partt., κεκριμένος picked out, chosen, Il. 10.417, Od. 13.182, al., Hdt. 3.31; κρινθείς Il. 13.129, Od. 8.48; ἀρετᾷ κριθείς distinguished for.., Pi. N. 7.7; κριθέντων ἐν τοῖς ἱερέοις approved.., GDI 2049.15 (Delph.); ἀσπίδα.. κεκριμένην ὕδατι καὶ πολέμῳ proved by sea and land, AP 9.42 (Leon.); ἐν ζῶσι κεκριμένα numbered among.., cj. in E. Supp. 969 (lyr.); εἰς τοὺς ἐφήβους κριθείς Luc. Amos 2:1-16.
2. decide disputes, κρίνων νείκεα πολλά Od. 12.440; ἔκριναν μέγα νεῖκος.. πολέμοιο 18.264: c.acc. cogn., οἳ.. σκολιὰς κρίνωσι θέμιστας judge crooked judgements, Il. 16.387; κ. δίκας Hdt. 2.129; κρῖνε δ’ εὐθεῖαν δίκην A. Eu. 433, etc.; πρώτας δίκας κρίνοντες αἵματος ib. 682; κρινεῖ δὲ δὴ τίς ταῦτα; Ar. Ra. 805; κ. κρίσιν Pl. R. 36o e; ἄριστα κ. Th. 6.39; κρίνουσι βοῇ καὶ οὐ ψήφῳ they decide the question.., Id. 1.87; μίσει πλέον ἢ δίκῃ κ. Id. 3.67; τὸ δίκαιον κ. Isoc. 14.10; τῷ τοῦτο κρίνεις; by what do you form this judgement ? Ar. Pl. 48; κ. περί τινος Pi. N. 5.40, Pl. Ap. 35d, Arist. Rh. 1391b9, etc.: — Pass., ἀγὼν κριθήσεται A. Eu. 677; κἂν ἰσόψηφος κριθῇ (sc. ἡ δίκη) ib. 741: impers., κριθησόμενον a decision being about to be taken, Arr. An. 3.9.6. decide a contest, e.g. for a prize, ἀγῶνα κ. Ar. Ra. 873; ἔργον ἐν κύβοις Ἄρης κρινεῖ A. Th. 414: c. acc. pers., κ. τὰς θεάς decide their contest, i.e. judge them, E. IA 72: — Pass., Id. Supp. 601 (lyr.); αἱ μάχαι κρίνονται ταῖς ψυχαῖς X. Cyr. 3.3.19: — Med. and Pass., of persons, have a contest decided, come to issue, κρινώμεθ’ Ἄρηϊ Il. 2.385, cf. 18.209; ὁπότε μνηστῆρσι καὶ ἡμῖν.. μένος κρίνηται Ἄρηος Od. 16.269; βίηφι κ. Hes. Th. 882; dispute, contend, Ar. Nu. 66; περὶ ἀρετῆς Hdt. 3.120; οὐ κρινοῦμαι.. σοι τὰ πλείονα E. Med. 609; δίκῃ περί τινος κρίνεσθαι Th. 4.122; κρίνεσθαι μετά τινος v.l. in LXX Jd. 8.1, Job 9:3; πολλαῖς μάχαις κριθείς Nic.Dam. 20 J.; compete in games, c. acc. cogn., κριθέντα Πύθια JRS 3.295 (Antioch. Pisid.): pf. part., decided, clear, strong, κεκριμένος οὖρος Il. 14.19; πόνοι κεκρ. decided, ended, Pi. N. 4.1. win a battle, τὴν μάχην Ἀννίβας ἔκρινε Plb. 3.117.11.
3. adjudge, κράτος τινί S. Aj. 443: — Pass., τοῖς οὔτε νόστος.. κρίθη Pi. P. 8.84; τὰ κριθησόμενα the sum adjudged to be paid, PLips. 38.13 (iv A. D.). abs., judge, give judgement, ἄκουσον.. καὶ κρῖνον Ar. Fr. 473; ἀδίκως κ. Pherecr. 96, cf. Men. Mon. 287, 576. Medic., bring to a crisis, τὸ θερμὸν φίλιόν [ἐστι] καὶ κρῖνον Hp. Aph. 5.22; κ. τὰ νοσήματα Gal. Nat. Fac. 1.13, al.: — Pass., of a sick person, come to a crisis, ἐκρίθη εἰκοσταῖος Hp. Epid. 1.15 (also impers. in Act., ἔκρινε τούτοισιν ἑνδεκαταίοισιν the crisis came.., ib. 18); τοῦ πάθους κριθέντος D.S. 19.24.
4. judge of, estimate, πρὸς ἐμαυτὸν κρίνων [αὐτόν ] judging of him by myself, D. 21.154; πρὸς ἀργύριον τὴν εὐδαιμονίαν κ. Isoc. 4.76: — Pass., ἴσον παρ’ ἐμοὶ κέκριται Hdt. 7.16. α’; εὔνοιακαιρῷ κρίνεται Men. 691.
5. expound, interpret in a particular way, τὸ ἐνύπνιον ταύτῃ ἔκριναν Hdt. 1.120, cf. 7.19, A. Pr. 485, etc.: — in Med., ὁ γέρων ἐκρίνατ’ ὀνείρους Il. 5.150.
6. c. acc. et inf., decide or judge that.., Hdt. 1.30, 214, Pl. Tht. 17o d, etc.; κρίνω σὲ νικᾶν A. Ch. 903; so, with the inf. omitted, ἀνδρῶν πρῶτον κ. τινά S. OT 34; Ἔρωτα δ’ ὅστις μὴ θεὸν κρίνει μέγαν E. Fr. 269; τὴν πόλιν ἀθλιωτάτην ἔκρινας Pl. R. 578b; ἐκ τῶν λόγων μὴ κρῖνε.. σοφόν Philem. 228: — Pass., Ἑλλήνων ἕνα κριθέντ’ ἄριστον S. Ph. 1345, cf. Th. 2.40, etc.
7. decide in favour of, prefer, choose, κρίνω δ’ ἄφθονον ὄλβον A. Ag. 47 [*], cf. Supp. 396 (both lyr.); τὴν ἐλπίδα τῆς τύχης πάρος S. Tr. 724; τινὰ πρό τινος Pl. R. 399e, cf. Phlb. 57e; τι πρός τι Id. Phd. 110a (Pass.); εἴ σφε κρίνειεν Πάρις E. Tr. 928, cf. Ar. Av. 1103, Ec. 1155; choose between, δύ’ ἔσθ’ ἃ κρῖναι τὸν γαμεῖν μέλλοντα δεῖ, ἤτοι προσηνῆ γ’ ὄψιν ἢ χρηστὸν τρόπον Men. 584.
8. c. inf. only, determine to do a thing, UPZ 42.37 (ii B. C.), Titus 3:12; 1 Corinthians 2:2, etc.; ζῆν μεθ’ ὧν κρίνῃ τις ἄν (sc. ζῆν) with whom he chooses to live, Men. 506; but τὸ βιάζεσθαι οὐκ ἔκρινε D.S. 15.32.
9. form a judgement of a thing, μὴ κρῖν’ ὁρῶν τὸ κάλλος Men. Mon. 333.

III

1. in Trag., question, αὐτὸν.. ἅπας λεὼς κρίνει παραστάς S. Tr. 195; εἴ νιν πρὸς βίαν κρίνειν θέλοις ib. 388; καὶ κρῖνε κἀξέλεγχ ‘ Id. Ant. 399; μὴ κρῖνε, μὴ ‘ξέταζε Id. Aj. 586; σέ τοι, σὲ κρίνω Id. El. 1445.
2. bring to trial, accuse, D. 2.29, 18.15, 19.233; κ. θανάτου judge (in matters) of life and death, X. Cyr. 1.2.14; κ. τινὰ προδοσίας Lycurg. 113; περὶ προδοσίας Isoc. 15.129; κ. τινὰ κακώσεως ἐπαρχίας, Lat. repetundarum, Plu. Caes. 4: — Pass., to be brought to trial, Th. 6.29; θανάτου (δίκῃ add. cod. B) Id. 3.57; Λεωκράτους τοῦ κρινομένου Lycurg. 1; κρίνομαι πρὸς Σωφρόνην; Men. Epit. 529; τρὶς κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν περὶ θανάτου D. 4.47; ἐκρίνετο τὴν περὶ Ὠρωποῦ κρίσιν θανάτου Id. 21.64: c. gen. criminis, κρίνεσθαι δώρων Lys. 27.3: κ. ἐπ’ ἀδικήματι Plu. 2.241e: abs., ὁ κεκριμένος Aeschin. 2.159.
3. pass sentence upon, condemn, D. 19.232: — Pass., to be judged, condemned, κακούργου.. ἐστι κριθέντ’ ἀποθανεῖν Id. 4.47; μὴ κρίνετε, ἵνα μὴ κριθῆτε Matthew 7:1; τὰ κεκριμένα the judgement of a court, PRyl. 76.8 (ii A. D.). (κρῐ-ν - y ω ἐ-κρῐ-ν-σα, cf. Lat. cerno (from * cr[icaron]-n-), crîbrum (from * crei-dhrom).)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀποκρίνω: (passive, 1 aorist ἀπεκρίθην; 1 future ἀποκριθήσομαι); i. to part, separate; passive to be parted, separated (1 aorist ἀπεκρίθην was separated, Homer, Iliad 5:12; Thucydides 2, 49; (4, 72); Theoph. de caus. plant. 6, 14, 10; (other examples in Veitch, under the word)). ii. to give sentence against one, decide that he has lost; hence, middle (present ἀποκρίνομαι; 1 aorist 3 person singular ἀπεκρίνατο); (to give forth a decision from myself (Winers Grammar, 253 (238))), to give answer, to reply; so from Thucydides down (and even in Herodotus 5, 49 (Gaisf.); 8, 101 (Gaisf., Bekker), who generally uses ὑποκρίνομαι). But the earlier and more elegant Greek writings do not give this sense to the passive tenses ἀπεκρίθην, ἀποκριθήσομαι. “The example adduced from Plato, Alcib. Secund., p. 149 b. (cf. Stallb., p. 388) is justly discredited by Sturz, De dial. Alex., p. 148, since it is without parallel, the author of the dialogue is uncertain, and, moreover, the common form is sometimes introduced by copyists.” Lobeck ad Phryn., p. 108; (cf. Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 186f; Veitch, under the word; Winers Grammar, 23 (22)). But from Polybius down ἀποκριθῆναι and ἀποκρίνασθαι are used indiscriminately, and in the Bible the passive forms are by far the more common. In the N. T. the aorist middle ἀπεκρίνατο is found only in Matthew 27:12; Mark 14:61; Luke 3:16; Luke 23:9; John 5:17, 19; John 12:23 (R G L Tr marginal reading); Acts 3:12; in the great majority of places ἀπεκρίθη is used; cf. Winers Grammar, § 39, 2; (Buttmann, 51 (44)).

1. to give an answer to a question proposed, to answer;
   a. simply: καλῶς, Mark 12:28; νουνεχῶς, 34; ὀρθῶς, Luke 10:28; πρός τί, Matthew 27:14.
   b. with the accusative: λόγον, Matthew 22:46; οὐδέν, Matthew 27:12; Mark 14:61; Mark 15:4f.
   c. with the dative etc.: ἑνί ἑκάστῳ, Colossians 4:6; together with the words which the answerer uses, John 5:7, 11; John 6:7, 68, etc.; the dative omitted: John 7:46; John 8:19, 49, etc. πρός τινα, Acts 25:16. joined with φάναι, or λέγειν, or εἰπεῖν, in the form of a participle, as ἀποκριθείς εἶπε or ἔφη or λέγει: Matthew 4:4; Matthew 8:8; Matthew 15:13; Luke 9:19; Luke 13:2; Mark 10:3, etc.; or ἀπεκρίθη λέγων: Matthew 25:9, 37, 44; Luke 4:4 (R G L); (R G Tr marginal reading brackets); John 1:26; John 10:33 (Rec.); . But John far more frequently says ἀπεκρίθη καί εἶπε: John 1:48 (); (R G), , etc.
   d. followed by the infinitive: Luke 20:7; followed by the accusative with infinitive: Acts 25:4; followed by ὅτι: Acts 25:16.
2. In imitation of the Hebrew עָנָה (Gesenius, Thesaurus ii., p. 1047) to begin to speak, but always where something has preceded (either said or done) to which the remarks refer (Winer’s Grammar, 19): Matthew 11:25; Matthew 12:38; Matthew 15:15; Matthew 17:4; Matthew 22:1; Matthew 28:5; Mark 9:5 ( T Tr WH); ; Luke 14:3; John 2:18; John 5:17; Acts 3:12; Revelation 7:13. (the Sept. (Deuteronomy 26:5); Isaiah 14:10; Zechariah 1:10; Zechariah 3:4, etc.; 1 Macc. 2:17 1 Macc. 8:19; 2 Macc. 15:14.) (Compare: ἀνταποκρίνομαι.)

Question 321

διακρίνω

Answer 321

to discriminate, judge; separate; middle: doubt

Thayer’s Definition
to separate, make a distinction, discriminate, to prefer
to learn by discrimination, to try, decide
to determine, give judgment, decide a dispute
to withdraw from one, desert
to separate one’s self in a hostile spirit, to oppose, strive with dispute, contend
to be at variance with one’s self, hesitate, doubt

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
διακρίνω [ρῑ ],

fut. -κρῐνῶ, and Delph. -κρῐνέω Il. 2.387, SIG 614.8 (ii B.C.): —

I

1. separate one from another, ὥς τ’ αἰπόλια.. αἰπόλοι ἄνδρες ῥεῖα διακρίνωσιν Il. 2.475, cf. Hdt. 8.114; part combatants, εἰς ὅ κε δαίμων ἄμμε διακρίνη Il. 7.292, etc.; εἰ μὴ νὺξ.. διακρινέει μένος ἀνδρῶν 2.387; δ. φιλέοντε Od. 4.179; κρόκην καὶ στήμονας συγκεχυμένους δ. Pl. Cra. 388b: — Pass., to be parted, of hair, Plu. Romans 15:1-33 : more freq. of combatants, διακρινθήμεναι ( inf. aor. 1 Pass.) ἤδη Ἀργείους καὶ Τρῶας Il. 3.98, cf. 102, 7.306, etc.: also in fut. Med., διακρινέεσθαι Od. 18.149, 20.180; διακριθέντες ἐκ τῆς ναυμαχίης Hdt. 8.18; διακριθῆναι ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων Th. 1.105, cf. 3.9; διακρίνεσθαι πρός.. part and join different parties, Id. 1.18. Pass., to be divorced, Leg.Gort. 2.46.
2. in Philosophy, separate, decompose into elemental parts, opp. συγκρίνω, chiefly in Pass., Anaxag. 12, cf. Arist. Metaph. 985a28, [ Epich. ] 245, Pl. Phd. 71b, Prm. 157a, etc.
3. ἄστρων διακρίνει φάη σελάνα prob. sets apart, removes, i.e. outshines, B. 8.28.

II distinguish, καί κ’ ἀλαὸς διακρίνειε τὸ σῆμα Od. 8.195; οὐδένα δ. without distinction of persons, Hdt. 3.39; οὐχὶ δ. τὴν πενιχρὰν ἢ πλουσίαν Diod.Com. 2.8: pf. Pass. in med. sense, διακεκρίμεθα τάς τε καθαρὰς ἡδονὰς καὶ.. Pl. Phlb. 52c: plpf. in pass. sense, διεκέκριτο οὐδέν no distinction was made, Th. 1.49; διακεκριμέναι distinct, varied, B. Fr. 24.

III decide, of judges, ὀρθᾷ δ. φρενί Pi. O. 8.24; δ. δίκας Hdt. 1.100; διὰ δὲ κρίνουσι θέμιστας Theoc. 25.46; also, determine a fever, mark its crisis, Hp. Coac. 137; ἡ νοῦσος μάλιστα διακρίνει ἐν οὐδενί has usually no crisis in any patient, Id. Morb. 2.71; δ. αἵρεσιν Hdt. 1.11; δ. εἰ.. Id. 7.54; δ. περί τινος Ar. Av. 719: — Med., νεῖκος δ. get it decided, Hes. Op. 35; τὸ ζητούμενον Pl. Phlb. 46b; decide among yourselves, ταῦτα.. ὅπως ποτ’ ἔχει δ. D. 32.28: — Pass., bring an issue to decision, ἐπέεσσί γε νηπυτίοισι ὧδε διακρινθέντε Il. 20.212; αἴ τινι τᾶν πολίων ᾖ ἀμφίλλογα, διακριθῆμεν Foed. Dor. ap. Th. 5.79; διακριθεῖμεν περί τινος Pl. Euthphr. 7c; of combatants, μάχῃ διακριθῆναι πρός τινα Hdt. 9.58; πρός τινα ὑπέρ τινος LXX Joel 3:2 (4).2; ὅπλοις ἢ λόγοις διακρίνεσθαι Philipp. ap. D. 12.7; διακρίνεσθαι περὶ τῶν ὅλων Plb. 3.111.2; τινί with one, Judges 1:9 : abs., PMagd. 1.15 (iii B.C.), etc.; also πόλεμος διακριθήσεται Hdt. 7.206; of a person, to be judged, Polem. Call. 18. set [a place] apart for holy purposes, Pi. O. 10(11).46. interpret a dream, etc., Ph. 2.54, Junc. ap. Stob. 4.50.95. question, τοὺς ἰατρούς Arr. Epict. 4.1.148. doubt, hesitate, waver, Acts 11:12 (s.v.l.): usu. in Med. and Pass., μηδὲν διακρινόμενος ib.10.20; μὴ διακριθῆτε Matthew 21:21, cf. Romans 4:20.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διακρίνω; imperfect διεκρινον; 1 aorist διεκρινα; middle (present διακρίνομαι); imperfect διεκρινομην; 1 aorist διεκρίθην (in secular authors in a passive sense, to be separated; cf. Winers Grammar, § 39, 2; (Buttmann, 52 (45))); in Greek writings from Homer down; in the Sept. chiefly for שָׁפַט, also for הֵדִין etc.

1. “to separate, make a distinction, discriminate (cf. διά, C. 4): οὐδέν διέκρινε μεταξύ ἡμῶν τέ καί αὐτῶν, Acts 15:9; μηδέν διακρίναντα, making no difference, namely, between Jews and Gentiles, Acts 11:12 L T Tr WH; like the Latindistinguo, used emphatically: to distinguish or separate a person or thing from the rest, in effect equivalent to to prefer, yield to him the preference or honor: τινα, 1 Corinthians 4:7 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 452 (421)); τό σῶμα (τοῦ κυρίου), 1 Corinthians 11:29.
2. to learn by discrimination, to try, decide: Matthew 16:3 (T brackets WH reject the passage); 1 Corinthians 14:29; ἑαυτόν, 1 Corinthians 11:31; to determine, give judgment, decide a dispute: 1 Corinthians 6:5. Passive and middle to be parted, to separate oneself from;
3. to withdraw from one, desert him (Thucydides 1, 105; 3, 9); of heretics withdrawing from the society of true Christians (Sozom. 7, 2 (p. 705, Vales. edition) ἐκ τούτου οἱ μέν διακριθεντες ἰδίᾳ ἐκκλησιαζον): Jude 1:22 according to the (preferable) reading of L T Tr text ἐλέγχετε διακρινομένους, those who separate themselves from you, i. e. who apostatize; instead of the Rec. ἐληιτε διακρινομένοι, which is to be rendered, making for yourselves a selection; cf. Huther at the passage; (others though adopting the reading preferred above, refer διακρίνω to the following head and translate it while they dispute with you; but WH (see their Appendix) Tr marginal reading follow manuscripts א B and a few other authorities in reading ἐλεᾶτε διακρινομένους, according to which διακρίνω is probably to be referred to signification 3: R. V. text on some have mercy, who are in doubt).
4. to separate oneself in a hostile spirit, to oppose, strive with, dispute, contend: with the dative of person Jude 1:9 (Polybius 2, 22,11 (cf. Winers Grammar, § 31, 1 g.; Buttmann, 177 (154)); πρός τινα, Acts 11:2 (Herodotus 9, 58).
5. in a sense not found in secular authors, to be at variance with oneself, hesitate, doubt: Matthew 21:21; Romans 14:23; James 1:6; ἐν τῇ καρδία αὐτοῦ, Mark 11:23; ἐν ἑαυτῷ (i. e., ἑαυτοῖς), James 2:4 (others refer this to 1: do ye not make distinctions among yourselves); μηδέν διακρινόμενος, nothing doubting, i. e. wholly free from doubt, James 1:6; without any hesitation as to whether it be lawful or not, Acts 10:20 and according to R G in ; οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστία, he did not hesitate through lack of faith, Romans 4:20.

Question 322

ἀνυπόκριτος

Answer 322

unfeigned, undisguised

Thayer’s Definition
unfeigned, undisguised, sincere

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀνυπό-κρῐτος, ον,

I without dissimulation, LXX Wi. 5.18, Romans 12:9, James 3:17. Adv. -τως M.Ant. 8.5.

II undramatic, Demetr. Eloc. 194.

III in punctuation, of a stop in a simple sentence, opp. ἐνυπόκριτος (q.v.), Sch.D.T. p.24H.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀνυπόκριτος, ἀνυπόκριτον (alpha privative and ὑποκρίνομαι), unfeigned, undisguised: Romans 12:9; 2 Corinthians 6:6; 1 Timothy 1:5; 2 Timothy 1:5; 1 Peter 1:22; James 3:17 (Wis. 5:19 Wis. 18:16. Not found in secular authors, except the adverb ἀνυποκρίτως in Antoninus 8, 5.)

Question 323

ἐπιλαμβάνω / ἐπιλαμβάνομαι

Answer 323

to take hold of

Thayer’s Definition
to take in addition, to lay hold of, take possession of, overtake, attain, attain to
to lay hold of or to seize upon anything with the hands, to take hold of, lay hold of
metaph. to rescue one from peril, to help, succour

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπιλαμβάνω; 2 aorist middle ἐπελαβόμην; to take in addition (cf. ἐπί, D. 4), to take, lay hold of, take possession of, overtake, attain to. In the Bible only in the middle; the Sept. for אָחַז and הֶחֱזִיק;

a. properly, to lay hold of or to seize upon anything with the hands (German sich an etwas anhalten): τῶν ἀφλαστων νηός, Herodotus 6, 114; hence, universally, to take hold of, lag hold of: with the genitive of person, Matthew 14:31; Luke 9:47. (Tr WH accusative); (Luke 23:26 R G); Acts 17:19; Acts 21:30, 33; with the accusative of person, Luke 23:26 L T Tr WH, but in opposition see Meyer; for where the participle ἐπιλαβόμενος is in this sense joined with an accusative, the accusative, by the σχῆμα ἀπό κοίνου, depends also upon the accompanying finite verb (cf. Buttmann, § 132, 9; (so Winer’s Grammar, (edited by Lünem.) 202 (190))): Acts 9:27; Acts 16:19; Acts 18:17, cf. Luke 14:4. with the genitive of a thing: τῆς χειρός τίνος, Mark 8:23; Acts 23:19; of a leader, and thus metaphorically, of God, Hebrews 8:9 (cf. Winers Grammar, 571 (531); Buttmann, 316 (271)); with the genitive of a person and of a thing: ἐπιλαμβάνειν τίνος λόγου, ῤήματος, to take anyone in his speech, i. e. to lay hold of something said by him which can be turned against him, Luke 20:20 (Tr λόγον), 26 (WH Tr marginal reading τοῦ for αὐτοῦ); ἐπιλαμβάνειν τῆς αἰωνίου (others, ὄντως) ζωῆς, to seize upon, lay hold of, i. e. to struggle to obtain eternal life, 1 Timothy 6:12, 19 (cf. Winers Grammar, 312 (293)).
b. by a metaphor drawn from laying hold of another to rescue him from peril, to help, to succor (cf. German sich eines annehmen): τίνος, Hebrews 2:16; in this sense used besides only in Sir. 4:11 and Schol. ad Aeschylus Pers. 739. In Appian. bel. civ. 4, 96 the active is thus used with the dative: ἡμῖν τό δαιμόνιον ἐπιλαμβανει.

Question 324

μεταλαμβάνω

Answer 324

to be a part of, to get a share of, to take a share of

Thayer’s Definition
to be or to be made a partner
to partake of, take [some] food
of a thing, to get, find (a whole)

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μεταλαμβάνω,

fut. - λήψομαι Th. 6.18: —

I

1. have or get a share of, partake of, c. gen. rei, ληΐης, καμάτου, μιαρίας, Hdt. 4.64, Pi. N. 10.79, Antipho 3.3.12; ἀμείνονος μοίρας Pl. Phdr. 248e; τροφῆς Acts 2:46, etc.: — Med., μεταλαμβάνεσθαί τινος lay claim to, τοῦ οὐνόματος Hdt. 4.45.
2. with the part received added in acc., Ἄρεως μοῖραν μ. E. Ba. 302; τὸ πέμπτον μέρος τῶν ψήφων Pl. Ap. 36b, D. 18.266, etc.; μ. τῶν τῆς ἀρετῆς μορίων οἱ μὲν ἄλλο οἱ δὲ ἄλλο Pl. Prt. 329e.
3. c. acc. rei, ἢν μὴ μεταλάβῃ τοὐπίπεμπτον Ar. Fr. 201; δικαστῶν τοσούτων οὐ δὲ διακοσίας ψήφους μ. And. 1.17.
4. in Platonic Philos., c. gen. rei, participate in the universal, ἤτοι ὅλου τοῦ εἴδους ἢ μέρους μ. Pl. Prm. 131a.
5. c. gen. pers., have part in, share his society, X. Cyr. 7.5.51; go shares with another, ὡς ἐμοῦ τι κεκλοφότος ζητεῖς μεταλαβεῖν Ar. Pl. 370.
6. receive notice or information, Mitteis Chr. 31 ii 2 (ii B. C.): c. acc. et inf., PTeb. 40.7 (ii B. C.), LXX 2 Maccabees 4:21 : c. acc. et part., μ. πολιορκοῦντά τινα ib. 11.6; μ. διότι.. Aristeas 316: — Pass., to be cited, = Lat. recitari, ἐκ διπτύχων SIG 827 B 1 (Delph., ii A. D.).
7. understand, φωνάς Philostr. VA 1.19.

II

1. receive in succession or afterwards, [ χαλινόν ] X. Eq. 10.6; [ ἱμάτιον] θάτερον Eup. 159.6; πλοῦτον ἕτερον Philem. 201; occupy a position left by the enemy, Plb. 10.40.11, etc.; μ. τὴν ἀρχήν succeed to the government, Id. 5.40.6, cf. PTeb. 79.49 (ii B. C.); μ. τὸν λόγον take up the discourse, i. e. answer, Plb. 18.2.2; μ. alone, Id. 10.38.1, etc.; οἱ παρά τινος -λημψόμενοι his successors in title, PTeb. 294.18 (ii A. D.), etc.; ἐκ διαδοχῆς μ. τὸ ἱερόν Stud.Pal. 22.184.95 (ii A. D.).
2. abs., come after, come on, ἅμα τῷ μεταλαβεῖν τὸ τῆς νυκτός Plb. 15.30.2.

III

1. take instead, take in exchange, substitute, πόλεμον ἀντ’ εἰρήνης Th. 1.120; ἄλλο ὄνομα ἀντὶ τῆς ἡδονῆς Pl. Prt. 355c; διαναπαύσωμεν αὐτὸν μεταλαβόντες αὐτοῦ τὸν συγγυμναστήν; Id. Plt. 257c; τὰ ὄργανα τἀλλήλων Id. R. 434a, cf. b; μ. τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα ἐς τὸ ὁμοῖον adopt new customs so as to resemble others, Th. 6.18, cf. Pl. Prt. 356d; ἱμάτια, ἐσθῆτας μ., X. Cyr. 4.5.4, Plb. 3.78.3; μ. παλτόν take another javelin, X. Eq. 12.13: c. inf., ἀντὶ τοῦ αἰεὶ φυλάσσεσθαι.. [τὸ] ἀντεπιβουλεῦσαι μ. Th. 6.87. Pass., to be changed, Sor. 2.9, Olymp. in Mete. 36.19.
2. Medic., of humours, blood, to be transferred, conveyed, ὑπὸ δηχθέντος Ruf. Fr. 118, cf. Sor. 2.7.
3. Gramm., to be changed, altered, εἰς.. A.D. Synt. 107.2; also, of words, have their construction altered, εἰς.. Id. Pron. 15.11, al.; but μ. ἐκ..
4. to be used in place of, Id. Synt. 195.14, al. take words in another sense, τὰ πράγματα τοῖς ὀνόμασι μ. Hld. 9.9, cf. Them. in de An. 18.35; parody, Ath. 8.336f (Pass.).
5. translate, interpret, Ph. 1.480 (Pass.). in the Logic of Arist., τὸ μεταλαμβανόμενον proposition substituted for the original thesis in hypothetical reasoning, APr. 41a39.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μεταλαμβάνω; imperfect μετελάμβανον; 2 aorist infinitive μεταλαβεῖν, participle μεταλαβών; (see μετά, III. 1; from Pindar and Herodotus down); to be or to be made a partaker: genitive of the thing, 2 Timothy 2:6; Hebrews 6:7; Hebrews 12:10; τροφῆς, to partake of, take (some) food, Acts 2:46; Acts 27:33f (in 34 Rec. προσλαβεῖν); with the accusative of the thing, to get, find (a whole): καιρόν, Acts 24:25; on the construction with the genitive and accusative see Krüger, § 47, 15; cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 30, 8.

Question 325

παραλαμβάνω

Answer 325

to join to one’s self, to receive, take along, to take with one’s self
an associate, a companion
metaph.
to accept or acknowledge one to be such as he professes to be
not to reject, not to withhold obedience
to receive something transmitted
an office to be discharged
to receive with the mind
by oral transmission: of the authors from whom the tradition proceeds
by the narrating to others, by instruction of teachers (used of disciples)

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παραλαμβάνω

(Cret. παλλαμβάνω Riv.Fil. 58.472 (Gortyn, iii B.C.)), fut. -λήψομαι, Ion. -λάμψομαι Hdt. 2.120: —

receive from another, esp. of persons succeeding to an office, etc., [ τὴν βασιληΐην ] Hdt.l.c., cf. Th. 1.9; τὴν βασιλείαν παρὰ τοῦ πατρός OGI 90.1 (Rosetta, ii B.C.); τοῖς παραλαμβάνουσι (sc. τὴν βασιλείαν) the successors, Arist. Pol. 1285b8; π. τὴν ἀρχήν Pl. Lg. 698e; τῆς πόλεως τὰ πράγματα Ar. Ec. 107; τὴν ἐπιμέλειάν τινος Aeschin. 1.143; τὴν τριηραρχίαν D. 47.32; π. πόλιν ἀνάστατον And. 1.108, cf. Th. 1.9, etc.; νόμον ὄντα παραλαβόντες, opp. θέντες, Id. 5.105, cf. Isoc. 8.102; of inherited rites or customs, Hdt. 2.51; of persons succeeding by inheritance, E. Ion 814, Lys. 10.5, etc.; οἱ μὴ κτησάμενοι ἀλλὰ -λαβόντες τὴν οὐσίαν Arist. EN 1120b12; παρὰ τοῦ πατρὸς πολλὴν οὐσίαν π. D. 21.157; opp. ἐπικτᾶσθαι, Pl. R. 330a; π. ἀράς inherit curses, E. Ph. 1611; of officers, receive things as stated in an inventory from their predecessors, IG 12.301.5, al.; τὰ μὲν παρειληφότα τὰ δ’ αὐτὸν εὑρηκότα Isoc. 15.208: Astrol., take over, [ χρονοκρατορίαν ] Vett.Val. 171.16: generally, receive, ἔρια παραλαβοῦσα ἱμάτιον ἀποδεῖξαι X. Oec. 7.6; of cargo, POxy. 276.13 (i A.D.), etc.

2. take upon oneself, undertake, πρᾶγμά τι Ar. Eq. 345; τὰ παραλαμβανόμενα undertakings, Hdt. 1.38; take to oneself, admit, employ, π. ἐν ταῖς μάχαις τὸν θυμόν Plu. 2.988e: — Pass., π. πρὸς τὴν σύστασιν τῆς ψυχῆς ib.1027d.
3. take in pledge, Hdt. 3.136; take by force or treachery, seize, οὐδὲν ἐδυνέατο π. τῆς ἐσόδου Id. 7.211; ναῦς παραλαβόντες Th. 1.19, 4.16, And. 3.39; π. τὰ πράγματα get control of affairs, Plu. Alc. 26: — in Med., lay hold of, ἄκρων τῶν χειρῶν Paus. 6.4.1 (s.v.l.).
4. receive by hearing or report, ascertain, παρὰ τῶν Αἰγυπτίων Hdt. 2.19; π. ἀληθείην Id. 1.55; π. ἀκοῇ Id. 2.148; π. τὰ περὶ Ἀλκμέωνα Th. 2.102; τι περί τινος Plb. 12.22.5; receive by way of lesson, σοφίαν παρά τινος Pl. La. 197d: — Pass., to be received, accepted, τὰ παρειλημμένα the received or traditionary doctrines, Arist. Mete. 365a16; οἱ π. μῦθοι Id. Po. 1453b22; [λόγοι] ἔνιοι π. ὡς Ἀριστογείτονος Plu. 2.850e.
5. take, receive, or use as a substitute or equivalent, τὸν ἀριθμὸν ἀντὶ τοῦ νοῦ π. Placit. 4.2.3: — Pass., ὑμέτερον ἀντὶ τοῦ ὑμεῖς παρείληπται D.H. Amm. 2.14. Gramm. and Medic., simply, use, employ, D.H. Comp. 25; εἰς λόγον A.D. Synt. 250.3; θλῖψιν, βοηθήματα, Antyll. ap. Orib. 8.6.37, 8.10.1 (Pass.): — freq. in Pass., to be found, used, D.H. Comp. 14, 17, A.D. Synt. 83.2,al.; π. ἐκ κοινοῦ, δεικτικῶς, ib. 123.1, Pron. 10.17. admit, ἡ ὅλη ὑπόθεσις τὸ ἓν εἶναι παρελάμβανεν Dam. Pr. 417.
6. take up, catch up, τὸ οὔνομα τοῦτο Hdt. 1.122, cf. 126; τὸν λόγον Plb. 33.18.9; π. ἐπὶ βραχύ give a résumé of, Id. 6.58.1.
7. compare, Porph. in Cat. 97.8 (Pass.).
8. Pass., to be derived, ἔκ τινος v.l. in A.D. Pron. 32.16.

II c. acc. pers., take to oneself, associate with oneself, as a wife or mistress, Hdt. 4.155; as an adopted son, Id. 1.113; as a partner, auxiliary, or ally, ib. 76, 7.150, Th. 1.111, etc.; παραλαμβάνων ἄλλος ἄλλον ἐπ’ ἄλλου.. χρείᾳ Pl. R. 369b; συμβούλους π. Arist. EN 1112b10; get control of, Pl. Revelation 18:1-24 b, R. 460b, 541a, Alc. 1.121e; μάρτυρας π. call in witnesses, D. 47.67: c. inf., τὴν αἴσθησιν ὑπουργεῖν Jul. Or. 8.248a.

2. invite, ἐπὶ ξείνια Hdt. 4.154; παραληφθεὶς ἐπὶ δεῖπνον Alciphr. 3.46; ἐφ’ ἑστίασιν παρειλημμένος Plu. 2.40b; παραληφθεὶς εἰς τὸ συσσίτιον Id. Lyc. 20: abs., Id. 2.461d; παραληφθῆναι πρός τινα Parmenisc. ap. Ath. 4.156e.
3. receive, take over in succession, Hdt. 4.203; Λυκοῦργος π. τοὺς Σπαρτιάτας οἴκοι σκηνοῦντας X. Lac. 5.2.
4. take prisoner, Plb. 3.69.2 (Pass.).
5. of the dead, παραλημφθεὶς ὑπὸ θεῶν καταχθονίων IG 14.1702.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παραλαμβάνω; future παραλήψομαι, in L T Tr WH παραλήμψομαι (John 14:3; see Mu); 2 aorist παρέλαβον, 3 person plural παρελάβοσαν (2 Thessalonians 3:6 G T L marginal reading Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading; cf. δολιόω (yet see WH’s Appendix, p. 165)); passive, present παραλαμβάνομαι; 1 future παραληφθήσομαι, in L T Tr WH παραλημφθήσομαι (see Mu; Luke 17:34-36); from Herodotus down; the Sept. for לָקַח;

1. to take to (cf. παρά, IV. 1), to take with oneself, to join to oneself: τινα, an associate, a companion, Matthew 17:1; Matthew 26:37; Mark 4:36; Mark 5:40; Mark 9:2; Mark 10:32; Luke 9:10, 28; Luke 11:26; Luke 18:31; Acts 15:39; in the passive, Matthew 24:40, 41; Luke 17:34-36; one to be led off as a prisoner, John 19:16; Acts 23:18; to take with one in order to carry away, Matthew 2:13f, 20f; τινα μεθ’ ἑαυτοῦ, Matthew 12:45; Matthew 18:16; Mark 14:33; παραλαμβάνειν γυναῖκα, to take one’s betrothed to his home, Matthew 1:20, 24; τινα followed by εἰς with an accusative of place, to take (and bring, cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 66, 2 d.) one with one into a place, Matthew 4:5, 8; Matthew 27:27; τινα κατ’ ἰδίαν, Matthew 20:17; middle with πρός ἐμαυτόν, to my companionship, where I myself dwell, John 14:3. The participle is prefixed to other active verbs to describe the action more in detail, Acts 16:33; Acts 21:24, 26, 32 (here L WH marginal reading λαβών). Metaphorically, equivalent to “to accept or acknowledge one to be such as he professes to be; not to reject, not to withhold obedience”: τινα, John 1:11.
2. to receive something transmitted;
   a. properly: παραλαμβάνειν διακονίαν, an office to be discharged, Colossians 4:17; βασιλείαν, Hebrews 12:28 (so for the Chaldean קַבֵּל in Daniel 5:31; Daniel 7:18, Theod.; Herodotus 2, 120; (Josephus, contra Apion 1, 20, 5 (where see Müller)); τήν ἀρχήν, Plato, Polybius, Plutarch).
   b. to receive with the mind; by oral transmission: τί followed by ἀπό with a genitive of the author from whom the tradition proceeds, 1 Corinthians 11:23 (on which cf. Paret in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1858, Bd. iii., p. 48ff; (see references in ἀπό, II. 2 d. aa.)); by the narration of others, by the instruction of teachers (used of disciples): (τόν Χριστόν Ἰησοῦν τόν κύριον, Colossians 2:6); τί, 1 Corinthians 15:1, 3; Galatians 1:9; Philippians 4:9; (τί followed by an infinitive, Mark 7:4); τί παρά τίνος (see references under the word παρά, the passage cited), Galatians 1:12; 1 Thessalonians 2:13; 2 Thessalonians 3:6; παρά τίνος, καθώς … τό πῶς δεῖ etc. 1 Thessalonians 4:1, (σοφίαν παρά τίνος, Plato, Lach., p. 197 d.; Euthyd., p. 304 c.). (Compare: συμπαραλαμβάνω.)

Question 326

προσλαμβάνω

Answer 326

Thayer’s Definition
to take to one’s self, receive, take in addition, to take to
to take as one’s companion
to take by the hand in order to lead aside
to take or receive into one’s home, with the collateral idea of kindness
to receive, i.e. grant one access to one’s heart
to take into friendship and intercourse
to take to one’s self, to take: i.e. food

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
προσλαμβάνω,

fut. -λήψομαι X. An. 7.3.13: aor. προσέλᾰβον Id. Mem. 3.14.4: pf. -είληφα Id. An. 7.6.32, Ion. -λελάβηκα Eus.Mynd. 51: —

take or receive besides or in addition, get over and above, ἄρτον προσέλαβε (sc. τῷ ὄψῳ ) X. Mem. l.c.; πρὸς τοῖς παροῦσιν ἄλλα [κακά ] A. Pr. 323; τὸ ἀναίσχυντον τῇ συμφορᾷ E. IA 1145; π. αἰσχύνην Th. 5.111; ἐμπειρίαν Id. 6.18; ὧν μάλιστα δεόμεθα And. 3.23; δόξαν γελοίαν ἡμῖν X. Smp. 4.8; ἄλλην εὔκλειαν πρὸς ἐκείνοις Id. An. 7.6.32; μισθόν ib. 7.3.13; λόγον τῇ ἀληθεῖ δόξῃ Pl. Tht. 207c; δωρειάς D. 19.147; παιδείαν Id. 61.42; παιδεύματα [ S. ] Fr. 1120.4; ἃ μὴ μεμάθηκας προσλάμβανε ταῖς ἐπιστήμαις Isoc. 1.18; in tmesi, τοῦτο πρὸς ζητεῖς λαβεῖν Men. Epit. 132; καιρούς Pl. Phdr. 272a: abs., make gains, D. 2.7; make progress, Lib. Or. 54.16: — Pass., τὸ προσειλημμένον what has been gained, opp. τὸ ἀπολειπόμενον, Plu. 2.77c.

2. take in, add an area to a building site, PCair.Zen. 193.6 (iii B.C.): — Math., τὸ ποτιλαμβανόμενον or ποτιλᾱφθὲν χωρίον Archim. Spir.Praef.; προσλαβών, plus, opp. λιπών, minus, Apollon.Perg. Con. 3.12 . προσλαβών, multiplied by . ., Archim. Sph.Cyl. 2.8.2: — Pass., κοινοῦ -ληφθέντος λόγου if the ratio be multiplied into both, Papp. 164.22 . in Music, ὁ προσλαμβανόμενος [τόνος ] the added note at the bottom of the scale, Ph. 1.111, Plu. 2.1028f, etc.
3. c. acc. pers., take to oneself as one’s helper or partner, κῆδος καινὸν καὶ ξυνασπιστὰς φίλους S. OC 378, cf. A. Pr. 219, E. Med. 885, Hipp. 1011; ἱππέας καὶ πελταστάς X. Cyr. 1.4.16; πόλεις τὰς μὲν βίᾳ τὰς δ’ ἑκούσας Id. HG 4.1.1; τινὰς τῶν πολιτῶν D. 15.14; τὸν δῆμον Arist. Pol. 1312b17; π. ἀδελφοὺς τοῖς παισί, by a second marriage, X. Lac. 1.9: with a second acc., π. τινὰ σύμμαχον Id. An. 7.6.27, cf. Lys. 26.16: — Med., πόλεις προσλαβέσθαι Plb. 1.37.5; μισθοφόρους Plu. Pel. 27; π. τινὰ συνεργόν, κοινωνόν, PFay. 12.10 (ii B.C.), PAmh. 100.4 (ii/iii A.D.); of admitting into the army, π. τὸν . . μου ἀδελφὸν . . εἰς τὴν Δεξειλάου σημέαν UPZ 14.21 (ii B.C.); προσλαβέσθαι γνώμην τινός get his vote besides, Plb. 3.70.2: — Pass., -ληφθέντες εἰς τὴν κατοικίαν admitted, enrolled, PTeb. 61 ( a ).2, cf.31,al. (ii B.C.) . Med., appropriate neighbouring land, π. τῇ ἑαυτοῦ οἰκίᾳ ψιλοὺς τόπους Sammelb. 5954.5 (i A.D.), cf. BGU 1060.17 (i B.C.) .
4. in Logic, add by apposition, ὅρους Arist. APo. 78a14, cf. Id. APr. 58b27 ( Pass. ); assume as minor premiss, Stoic. 2.85, Muson. Fr. 1p.2H., Procl. in Prm. p.855S.; cf. πρόσληψις .
5. borrow, τι κερμάτιον Men. Her. 32; ἡ σελήνη φέγγος ἴδιον οὐκ ἔχει, ἀλλ’ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου προσλαμβάνει Eudox. Ars 11.15 .

II take hold of, με π. κουφίσας S. Tr. 1025 (lyr.); π. τὸν ἀγωγέα βραχύτερον shorten the rein, Stratt. 52: — Med., take hold of, c. gen., Ar. Ach. 1215 sq., Lys. 202; μικρᾶς ῥοπῆς ἔξωθεν δεῖται προσλαβέσθαι Pl. R. 556e .

2. fasten, Hp. Art. 78, Arist. PA 670a14; καταδεῖν καὶ π . v.l. in Thphr. HP 6.2.2: — Pass., δεσμοῖς π . Arist. PA 654b27, cf. HA 497a22; to be enveloped, Ruf. Anat. 32 .
3. lend a hand, help, X. An. 2.3.11 and 12; π. τινί help, assist, IG 12.374.54, cf. Ar. Pax 9 ( Med. ); τῆς ἀποκρίσεως ὑμῖν . . π . help you to find an answer, Pl. Lg. 897d; οἱ ποταμοὶ π. τῇ θαλάττῃ co-operate with . ., Str. 2.5.17, cf. 11.4.2, 13.1.1: — Med., προσελάβετο τοῦ πάθεος he was partly the author of what befell, cj. for -εβάλετο in Hdt. 8.90: — Pass., π. ὑπό τινος to be aided by . ., Vett.Val. 58.16 .

III προσείληφασιν have learnt, believe, ὅτι . . f.l. for προσυπ- in Dsc. 2.141.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
προσλαμβάνω: 2 aorist infinitive προσλαβεῖν (Acts 27:34 Rec. see below); middle, present προσλαμβάνομαι; 2 aorist προσελαβομην; from Aeschylus and Herodotus down; to take to, take in addition (cf. πρός, IV. 2); in the N. T. found only in the middle, to take to oneself (cf. Buttmann, § 135, 4): τινα (cf. Buttmann, 160f (140));

a. to take as one’s companion (A. V. take one unto one): Acts 17:5; Revelation 18 b. to take by the hand in order to lead aside (A. V. (simply) take): Matthew 16:22; Mark 8:32.
c. to take or (so A. V.) receive into one’s home, with the collateral idea of kindness: Philemon 1:12. R G, Philemon 1:17; into shelter, Acts 28:2.
d. to receive, i. e. grant one access to one’s heart; to take into friendship and contact: Romans 14:1; Romans 15:7; God and Christ are said προσλάβεσθαι (to have received) those whom, formerly estranged from them, they have reunited to themselves by the blessings of the gospel, Romans 14:3; Romans 15:7; Clement of Rome, 1 Cor. 49, 6 [ET],(cf. Psalm 26:10 (); Psalm 64:5 (); Psalm 72:24 ().
e. to take to oneself, to take: μηδέν (A. V. hating taken nothing) i. e. no food, Acts 27:33; τροφῆς (a portion of (A. V. (not R. V.) ‘some’)) food, cf. Buttmann, 160f (140), Acts 27:36 (in Acts 27:34 G L T Tr WH have restored μεταλαβεῖν (so R. V. (`to take some food’)) for προσλαβεῖν).

Question 327

ὑπολαμβάνω

Answer 327

to take up; to show hospitality; to reply; to suppose, think, believe

to take up, by placing one’s self underneath what is taken up; to catch away, withdraw, Acts 1:9; to take up discourse by continuation; hence, to answer, Lk. 10:30; to take up a notion, to think, suppose, Lk. 7:43; Acts 2:15; receive as a guest, 3 Jn. 8*

Thayer's Definition
to take up in order to raise, to bear on high
to take up and carry away
to receive hospitably, welcome
to take up
follow in speech, in order either to reply to or controvert or supplement what another has said
to take up in the mind
to assume, suppose

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑπολαμβάνω,

also ὑπολάζυμαι (q. v.), late Dor. 3 pl. fut. -λαμψοῦνται Anon. Oxy. 410.99: —

take up by getting under, as the dolphin did Arion, Hdt. 1.24, Pl. R. 453d; τοὺς νεοττοὺς ὑ. ἡ φήνη Arist. HA 619b34; τὸ κῦμα ὑ. τινά Clearch. 73; νεφέλη ὑ. τινά Acts 1:9. bear up, support, Hdt. 4.72; ὑ. τοὺς ἐνδεεῖς Str. 14.2.5, cf. D.S. 19.67; ὑπέλαβές με πέμψας μοι τὰ κριθάρια BGU 48.3 (ii/iii A. D.).

2. take up, seize or come suddenly upon, ὑπὸ τρόμος ἔλλαβε γυῖα Il. 3.34, Od. 18.88; of a storm of wind, Hdt. 4.179; of a fit of madness, Id. 6.75; of a pestilence, ib. 27; of a river taking up earth thrown into it, Id. 2.150; of winds taking up water, ib. 25; of soldiers marching, δυσχωρία ὑπελάμβανεν αὐτούς, i. e. they came suddenly into difficult ground, X. HG 3.5.20: abs., ὑπολαβὼν πυρετός Hp. Epid. 5.20; of events, follow next, come next, ὑπέλαβε ναυμαχίη καρτερή Hdt. 8.12, cf. 6.27.
3. in discourse, take up what is said, interpret or understand it in a certain way, ταύτῃ ὑπολαμβάνεις ᾗ ἃν κακουργήσαις μάλιστα τὸν λόγον Pl. R. 338d; ὃν μὴ σὺ φράζεις, πῶς ὑπολάβοιμ’ ἂν λόγον; E. IA 523, cf. Pl. Euthd. 295c; ὑ. τι εἴς τινα understand it of, i. e. apply it to, him, Aeschin. 1.157; ὥσπερ ὁ ἀκούων ὑ. Arist. Rh. 1412a30; rejoin, retort, Pl. Lg. 875d, D. 22.10, etc.; πρός τι Th. 5.85; τιπρός τινας D. 20.146, cf. 23.93; ὑ. τινὶ ὅτι.. Pl. R. 598d; ὑ. ὡς.. X. Ath. 3.12, etc.: c. acc. et inf., reply that.., Th. 5.49; ὑπολαμβάνεῖν χρὴ εἰ.. retort by asking whether.., Lys. 13.82: abs., in dialogue, ἔφη ὑπολαβών, ὑ. ἔφη, ὑ. εἶπεν, he said in answer, Pl. R. 331d, Hdt. 101, Th. 3.113, etc. take up, interrupt, μεταξὺ ὑ. X. An. 3.1.26; ἔτι λέγοντος αὐτοῦ ὑ. Id. Cyr. 5.5.35.
4. take up the conqueror, fight with him, Th. 8.105.
5. take up a charge, Id. 6.28; ὑ. τὴν ἐπιθυμίαν τινός take up and turn it to their own use, Luc. Cal. 17.

II = cross ὑποδέχομαι, receive and protect, ὁ Κῦρος ὑπολαβὼν τοὺς φεύγοντας (the exiles) X. An. 1.1.7; admit a visitor, Pl. Smp. 212d; of a doctor, take in hand, treat a patient, Hp. Morb. 1.15 (Pass.).

2. accept or entertain a proposal, Hdt. 1.212, 3.146; δυσχερῶς ὑ. D. 57.35; μηδεὶς ὑπολάβῃ δυσκόλως ἐὰν.. take it amiss, ib.59.

III take up a notion, assume, suppose, freq. of an ill-grounded opinion, ὑ. θεῖον εἶναι τὸ ἐπαγγελλόμενον Hdt. 2.55; οὐκ ἂν ὑπέλαβον τοῦτον ἀντειπεῖν Antipho 3.3.2, cf. Pl. Phd. 86b, Prt. 343d; ἐὰν ὑπολάβῃ.. Ἀθήνῃσιν εἶναι, ὢν ἐν Λιβύῃ Arist. Metaph. 1010b10: an Adv. is freq. added to give the word a good sense, ὀρθῶς ὑ. Pl. Grg. 458e, Arist. EN 1145b21, καλῶς Id. Rh. 1404a1, etc.; βέλτιον ὑπελάβομεν εἶναι πάλιν γράψαι PCair.Zen. 36.15 (iii B. C.): with εἶναι omitted, assume or understand a thing to be so and so, τὰ φύματα τεχνικώτατον ὑπειληφέναι (sc. εἶναι) δεῖ δύνασθαι διαλύειν Hp. Medic. 10; τὸ χαλεπὸν κακὸν (sc. εἶναι) ὑ. Pl. Prt. 341b; ὑ. τὸν Ἔρωτα ἕν τι τῶν ὄντων Id. Phdr. 263d; ὑ. τι ὡς ὂν.. Id. Prm. 134c; τὸν αἰθέρα τῇδέ πῃ ὑ. conceive of the word αἰθήρ somewhat in this way, Id. Cra. 410b; οὕτως ὑ. περί τινος Isoc. 3.26, cf. D. 18.269: simply c. acc., καίπερ ὑπειληφὼς ταῦτα though I assume this to be so, Id. 19.3, cf. Arist. Metaph. 1005b26; τίς σε ἀναγκάσαι δύναται ὑπολαβεῖν τι ὧν οὐ θέλεις; Arr. Epict. 2.6.21; ὃ βούλει, ὑπολάμβανε ib. 1.10.4; ὑ. πλῆθος ὡρισμένον Arist. Metaph. 1073b13; ὑ. ὅτι.. Id. Pol. 1301a25: — Pass., τοιοῦτος ὑπολαμβάνομαι Isoc. 12.5, cf. Arist. Rh. 1366a26; ὑ. μειζόνως ἢ κατὰ τὴν ἀξίαν Isoc. 11.24, cf. D. 23.6; ἡ ὑπειλημμένη ἀρετή Id. 14.1; ὅπως ποθ’ ὑπείλημμαι περὶ τούτων ἀρκεῖ μοι I am content with whatever opinion of me has been formed in these matters, Id. 18.269: c. inf., τῇ φιλανθρωπίᾳ ἢν ἔχειν ὑπείληψαι παρὰ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις Isoc. Ephesians 4:9, cf. Arist. Rh. 1383b8; ὑπολαμβάνεται δεδωκέναι is understood to have granted, Id. SE 178a20: τὸ ὑποληφθὲν πᾶν, = cross πᾶσα ὑπόληψις (11), Men. 249.7.

2. suspect, disbelieve, X. Ages. 5.6, unless ὅ τι ὑπολαμβάνουσί τινες ταῦτα οὐκ ἀγνοῶ means ‘I know how some people regard it’.

draw away, seduce, ὑ. μισθῷ μείζονι τοὺς ναυβάτας Th. 1.121, cf. 143; Κέρκυραν ib. 68.

2. take away, remove, seize, τοῖς ἐπικούροις φράσας τὰ ὅπλα ὑπολαβεῖν ordering his bodyguard to remove the arms (of the citizens), Id. 6.58.
3. receive, ἀποτίσει.. ὃ ὑπείληφεν.. ἀργυρικὸν κεφάλαιον Mitteis Chr. 220.21 (i A. D.), cf. BGU 709.19 (ii A. D.). ὑ. ἵππον, as a term of horsemanship, hold up the horse, check him in his course, X. Eq. 7.15, 9.5.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑπολαμβάνω; 2 aorist ὑπέλαβον;

1. “to take up (literally, under (cf. ὑπό, III. 1)) in order to raise, to bear on high (Herodotus 1, 24); to take up and carry away” (ὥσπερ νῆα ἄνεμοι ὑπολαβόντες, Stobaeus, serm. 6, p. 79, 17): τινα, Acts 1:9 (see ὀφθαλμός, middle).
2. to receive hospitably, welcome: τινα, 3 John 1:8 L T Tr WH (Xenophon, an. 1, 1, 7).
3. to take up i. e. follow in speech, in order either to reply to or controvert or supplement what another has said (very often so in secular authors from Herodotus down): ὑπολαβών εἶπεν, Luke 10:30 (for עָנָה, Job 2:4; Job 4:1; Job 6:1; Job 9:1; Job 11:1; Job 12:1, etc.).
4. to take up in the mind, i. e. to assume, suppose: Acts 2:15; followed by ὅτι (namely, πλεῖον ἀγαπήσει), Luke 7:43 (Job 25:3; Tobit 6:18; Wis. 17:2; 3Macc. 3:8; 4 Macc. 5:17 (18) etc.,and often in secular authors from Xenophon, and Plato down).
   STRONGS NT 5274a: ὑπόλειμμα ὑπόλειμμα (ὑπόλιμμα WH (see their Appendix, p. 154; cf. Iota), ὑπολειμματος, τό, a remnant (see κατάλειμμα): Romans 9:27 L T Tr WH. (The Sept.; Aristotle, Theophrastus, Plutarch, Galen.)

Question 328

λανθάνω

Answer 328

to be hidden, escape notice, to keep secret

Thayer’s Definition
to be hidden, to be hidden from one, secretly, unawares, without knowing

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
λανθάνω,

Pi. Fr. 75.13, etc.: — also λήθω (which is the form of the Act. generally used in compds., δια-λανθάνω being the sole exception), Il. 23.323, S. OT 1325 (lyr.), X. Smp. 4.48; Dor. λάθω [ᾱ] S. El. 222 (lyr.); inf. λᾱθέμεν Pi. O. 1.64: impf. ἐλάνθανον Il. 13.721, etc.; ἔληθον Od. 19.151, S. El. 1359; λῆθον Il. 15.461; Ion. λήθεσκεν 24.13: fut. λήσω Od. 11.102, Ar. Ec. 98, etc.; Aeol. inf. λᾱσην Alc. Supp. 22.8; Dor. λᾱσῶ Theoc. 14.9, al., so (in late writers) λήσομαι, v. infr. c. 11: aor. 1 ἔλησα Nic. Al. 280 (but Hom. has ἐπ-έλησα, Alc. ἐξ-έλᾱσα, in causal sense): aor. 2 ἔλᾰθον Il. 17.676, etc. (for λέλᾰθον, v. infr. B): pf. λέληθα Semon. 7.9, Sol. 13.27; Aeol. part. λελᾱθων Alc. Supp. 26.8: plpf. ἐλελήθειν, Att. - ήθη, Th. 8.33, Ar. Eq. 822, Nu. 380, Luc. Pr.Im. 15; Ion. 3 sg. ἐλελήθεε Hdt. 6.79. causal ληθάνω, aor. 2 λέλᾰθον, v. infr. B. Med. and Pass., λανθάνομαι Arist. Po. 1455a25 (s.v.l.), λήθομαι Il. 11.790, A. Ag. 39; Dor. λάθομαι [ᾱ ] Pi. O. 8.72: impf. λανθανόμην Od. 12.227: fut. λήσομαι 1.308; Dor. λᾱσεῦμαι Theoc. 4.39, also λελήσομαι E. Alc. 198: aor. 1 ἐλησάμην or λησάμην only in late , Maiist. 47, Mosch. 3.62 (Dor. λᾱς -), Q.S. 3.99, etc.; also ἐλήσθην, Dor. inf. λασθῆμεν Theoc. 2.46, cf. διαλανθάνω: aor. 2 ἐλᾰθόμην, λαθ -, Il. 13.835, E. Hipp. 289: rare in Prose exc. in compds., Plu. Caes. 38; also redupl. λελάθοντο, etc., v. infr. c: pf. λέλησμαι S. El. 342, Pl. Phdr. 252a; λέλασμαι, part. λελασμένος, etc.; cf. ἐπιλήθω. in most of the act. tenses, escape notice (freq. joined with a neg.): —

I Constr.:

1 c. acc. pers. only, escape his notice, λάθε δ’ Ἕκτορα Il. 22.277; οὐδέ σε λήσει 23.326; οὐ λῆθε Διὸς πυκινὸν νόον 15.461, cf. Od. 11.102, al.; [ τοῦτον] οὐκ ἔστι λαθεῖν ὄμματα φωτός A. Ag. 796 (anap.); οὐ λάθει μ’ ὀργά S. El. 222 (lyr.), cf. Ph. 207 (lyr.); τουτί μ’ ἐλελήθειν Ar. Nu. 380; εἰ λανθάνει σε perhaps you don’t know, Men. Sam. 78: impers., λεληθέναι οὐ θαυμάζω τὸ πλῆθος περὶ τούτου it escaped the notice of the people, X. Hier. 2.5; σὲ δὲ λέληθεν περὶ τοῦτο ὡς.. Pl. Lg. 903c.

2. most freq. with a part. added, in which case we usually translate the part. by a Verb, and express λανθάνω by an Adv., unawares, without being observed; either, c. acc. pers., ἄλλον τινὰ λήθω μαρνάμενος I am unseen by others while fighting, i.e. 1 fight unseen by them, Il. 13.273; πάντας ἐλάνθανε δάκρυα λείβων Od. 8.93, cf. 12.17, 220, 19.88, al., Pi. O. 1.64, 6.36, Hdt. 8.25: freq. in Trag. and Att., μὴ λάθῃ με προσπεσών lest he come on unseen by me, S. Ph. 46, cf. 156 (lyr.); ὅπως μὴ λήσουσιν αὐτοὺς αἱ νῆες.. ἀφορμηθεῖσαι should put to sea without their observing them, Th. 8.10; or, without an acc., φονέα ἐλάνθανε βόσκων he maintained the murderer unawares, Hdt. 1.44; λέληθας ἐχθρὸς ὤν S. OT 415; δουλεύων λέληθας Ar. V. 517; συνέβη δὲ ὑπερημέρῳ γενομένῳ λαθεῖν D. 21.89: the reflex. Pron. may be supplied and is sts. added, λέληθεν αὑτὸν τοῖς ξυνοῦσιν ὢν βαρύς S. Fr. 103; ἕως σαυτὸν λάθοις διαρραγείς Ar. Pax 32, cf. Nu. 242, X. An. 6.3.22: sts., however, a different object must be supplied from the context, βάλλοντες ἐλάνθανον (not ἑαυτούς, but Τρῶας) Il. 13.721; ἐλάνθανε [πάντας] ἔχων Hdt. 8.5; μὴ διαφθαρεὶς λάθῃ [τινὰ ὁ βίος ] S. Ph. 506; μὴ λάθῃ [ἡμᾶς] φύγδα βάς A. Eu. 256 (lyr.), cf. Th. 4.133, etc. — In a few examples this constr. is reversed, and λαθών is put in the part., as in our idiom, ἀπὸ τείχεος ἆλτο λαθών (for ἔλαθεν ἁλόμενος) Il. 12.390; ἣ.. λήθουσά μ’ ἐξέπινες S. Ant. 532.
3. rarely c. acc. et inf., μή σε λαθέτω ὑπερτιθέμεν let it not escape thee to.., i.e. forget not to.., Pi. P. 5.23; ἔλαθεν αὐτὸν σύνθημα δοῦναι Plu. Arist. 17; σφᾶς λέληθε Θεόδωρον εἶναι it has been unnoticed that it was.., Paus. 9.41.1.
4. folld. by a relat. clause, οὐδέ με λήθεις, ὅττι θεῶν τίς σ’ ἦγε thou escapest me not, it is not unknown to me, that some god led thee, Il. 24.563; οὐδέ ἑ λήθει, ὅππως.. 23.323; ἐδόκεες θεοὺς λήσειν οἷα ἐμηχανῶ thou thought’st to escape the gods’ notice in.., Hdt. 8.106; οὔκουν με.. οἷα πράττεις λανθάνει Ar. Eq. 465; οὐ λανθάνεις με, ὅτι.. X. Mem. 3.5.24, cf. Smp. 3.6, 13; ὁ γείτων λ. τινὰ οὐ μόνον ὅτι πράττει, ἀλλ’ εἰ.. Pl. Tht. 174b.
5. abs., escape notice or detection, S. Tr. 455, Th. 1.37, 69, al.; λάθε βιώσας Epicur. Fr. 551; λανθάνει τὸ οὖρον προσπῖπτον Hp. Coac. 464. causal, make one forget a thing, c. gen. rei, in compds. ἐκληθάνω, ἐπι-λήθω; the simple Verb only in redupl. aor. 2, ὄφρα.. λελάθῃ ὀδυνάων that.. he may cause him to forget his pains, Il. 15.60; πόλιν λελάθοιτε συντυχιᾶν Lyr.Adesp. 140.9: but

II in late , λέλαθον, = ἔλαθον, escaped notice of, ἑὸν νόον, τοκῆας, A.R. 2.226, 3.779, cf. Orph. A. 876. Med. and Pass., let a thing escape one, forget,

1 forget simply, in pres. (abs.), σὺ δὲ λήθεαι Il. 11.790: c. gen., Κίρκης μὲν ἐφημοσύνης.. λανθανόμην Od. 12.227, cf. Pi. O. 8.72; οὔ ποτε λήσομαι αὐτῶν Od. 1.308; ἄλγος, οὗ ποτ’ οὐ λελήσεται E. Alc. 198: mostly in aor. 2, ἀλκῆς λαθέσθαι A. Supp. 731; νόστου τε λαθέσθαι Od. 9.97; πῶς ἂν.. Ὀδυσῆος.. λαθοίμην; 1.65: also in redupl. aor., οὐδὲ σέθεν.. θεοὶ μάκαρες λελάθοντο Il. 4.127; μή τίς μοι ἀπειλάων λελαθέσθω 16.200; οὐ δυνάμην λελαθέσθ’ Ἄτης 19.136 (but in Hes. Th. 471 like the Act., ὅπως λελάθοιτο τεκοῦσα that she might bear unknown): so in pf., τῶν δὲ λέλασται Il. 5.834; ἐμεῖο λελασμένος 23.69; κείνου λελῆσθαι S. El. 342, etc.; ἑταίρων πάντων λέλησται Pl. Phdr. 252a: with a relat. clause, λελασμένος ὅσσ’ ἐπεπόνθει Od. 13.92: fut. Med. in pass. sense, once in S., οὐδέ ποτε λησόμενον οἷον ἔφυ κακόν never will be forgotten, El. 1249 (lyr.); cf. ἐπιλανθάνω.

2. forget purposely, pass over, ἢ λάθετ’ ἢ οὐκ ἐνόησεν either he chose to forget it.., Il. 9.537; μαθοῦσιν αὐδῶ, κοὐ μαθοῦσι λήθομαι A. Ag. 39. II in later writers fut. Med. is used like Act., escape notice, ἡμᾶς Arist. APr. 66a31, cf. A.R. 3.737, Luc. Sacr. 14: abs., Alciphr. 3.52.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
λανθάνω (lengthened form of λήθω); 2 aorist ἔλαθόν, (whence Latinlatere); the Sept. several times for נֶעְלַם, etc.; (from Homer down); to be hidden: Mark 7:24; Luke 8:47; τινα, to be hidden from one, Acts 26:26; 2 Peter 3:5 (on which see θέλω, 1 under the end), 8; accusative to the well-known classic usage, joined in a finite form to a participle equivalent to secretly, unawares, without knowing (cf. Matthiae, § 552 β.; Passow, under the word, ii., p. 18{b}; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, A. 2); Winers Grammar, § 54, 4; (Buttmann, § 144, 14)): ἔλαθόν ξενίσαντες, have unawares entertained, Hebrews 13:2. (Compare: ἐκλανθάνω, ἐπιλανθάνω (λανθάνομαι).)

Question 329

ἐπιλανθάνομαι

Answer 329

I forget, neglect

Thayer’s Definition
to forget
neglecting, no longer caring for
forgotten, given over to oblivion, i.e. uncared for

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπιλανθάνομαι; perfect passive ἐπιλελησμαι; 2 aorist middle ἐπελαθόμην; the Sept. often for שָׁכַח; to forget: followed by the infinitive, Matthew 16:5; Mark 8:14; followed by an indirect question. James 1:24; in the sense of neglecting, no longer caring for: with the genitive, Hebrews 6:10; Hebrews 13:2, 16; with the accusative (cf. Winers Grammar, § 30, 10 c.; Matthiae, § 347 Anm. 2, ii., p. 820f), Philippians 3:13 (14); with a passive signification (Isaiah 23:16; Sir. 3:14 Sir. 32:9 (Sir. 35:9); Wis. 2:4, etc. (cf. Buttmann, 52 (46))): ἐπιλελησμένος forgotten, given over to oblivion, i. e. uncared for, ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ before God i. e. by God (Sir. 23:14), Luke 12:6. ((From Homer on.))

Question 330

ἐκλογή

Answer 330

a choosing out, election

Thayer’s Definition
the act of picking out, choosing
of the act of God’s free will by which before the foundation of the world he decreed his blessings to certain persons
the decree made from choice by which he determined to bless certain persons through Christ by grace alone
a thing or person chosen
of persons: God’s elect

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐκλογ-ή, ἡ,

I

1. choice, selection, τῶν ἀρχόντων Pl. R. 414a, 536c; ἐ. ποιεῖσθαι Id. Lg. 802b; ἐ. [ τῶν ἀρίστων νόμων ] Arist. EN 1181a18; τῶν ἐναντίων Id. Metaph. 1004a2; ὀνομάτων Phld. Rh. 1.162 S., D.H. Comp. 1, etc.; ὀνόματος A.D. Synt. 71.10; κατ’ ἐκλογὴν ἀριστίνδην κεκριμένοι Plb. 6.10.9; ἐπὶ ἐγλογῇ γεωργεῖν PTeb. 5.166 (ii B.C.).
2. levying of troops, Plb. 5.63.11.
3. collection of tribute, etc., κριθῶν Lex Attica ap. Ath. 6.235c; χρημάτων D.C. 42.6; σίτου Cratesap. Ath. 6.235b.
4. Theol., election,Romans 9:11, etc.; σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς Acts 9:15.
5. balancing of accounts, PRyl. 157.6 (ii A.D.).

II

1. extract, quotation from a book, Apollon. Cit. 3, Ath. 14.663c, Antig. Mir. 15.
2. choice collection of passages, such as the Eclogae or ‘Elegant Extracts’ of Stobaeus: ἐκλογαὶ Ἀρχιγένους select prescriptions of A., Gal. 14.343.
3. διὰ τὴν ἐ. τῶν ἀνθρώπων because they were picked men, Plb. 1.47.9,cf. Ph. 2.362.
4. ἐκλογήν· κάλαθον (Lacon.), Hsch.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐκλογή, ἐκλογῆς, ἡ (ἐκλέγω), election, choice;

a. the act of picking out, choosing: σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς (the genitive of quality; cf. Winers Grammar, § 34, 3 b.; (Buttmann, 161 (140f))), equivalent to ἐκλεκτόν, namely, τοῦ Θεοῦ, Acts 9:15; specifically used of that act of God’s free will by which before the foundation of the world he decreed his blessings to certain persons; — ἡ κατ’ ἐκλογήν προφεσις, the decree made from choice (A. V. the purpose according to election, cf. Winer’s Grammar, 193 (182)), Romans 9:11 (cf. Fritzsche at the passage, p. 298ff); — particularly that by which he determined to bless certain persons through Christ, Romans 11:28; κατ’ ἐκλογήν χάριτος, according to an election which is due to grace, or a gracious election, Romans 11:5; with the genitive of the person elected, 1 Thessalonians 1:4; 2 Peter 1:10.
b. the thing or person chosen: equivalent to ἐκλεκτοί, Romans 11:7. (Plato, Aristotle, Polybius, Diodorus, Josephus, Dionysius Halicarnassus, others.)

Question 331

ἀπολογέομαι

Answer 331

Thayer's Definition
to defend one's self, make one's defence
to defend a person or a thing
to give a full account of
to calculate or consider well

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀπολογέομαι, ἀπολογοῦμαι; imperfect ἀπελογουμην (Acts 26:1); 1 aorist ἀπελογησαμην; 1 aorist passive infinitive ἀπολογηθῆναι, in a reflexive sense (Luke 21:14); a deponent middle verb (from λόγος), properly, “to speak so as to absolve (ἀπό) oneself, talk oneself off” of a charge etc.;

1. to defend oneself, make one’s defense: absolutely, Luke 21:14; Acts 26:1; followed by ὅτι, Acts 25:8; τί, to bring forward something in defense of oneself, Luke 12:11; Acts 26:24 (often so in Greek writings also); τά περί ἐμαυτοῦ ἀπολογοῦμαι either I bring forward what contributes to my defense (?), or I plead my own cause (R. V. make my defense), Acts 24:10; περί with the genitive of the thing and ἐπί with the genitive of person, concerning a thing before one’s tribunal, Acts 26:2; with the dative of the person whom by my defense I strive to convince that I am innocent or upright, to defend or justify myself in one’s eyes (A. V. unto), Acts 19:33; 2 Corinthians 12:19 (Plato, Prot., p. 859 a.; often in Lucian, Plutarch; (cf. Buttmann, 172 (149))).
2. to defend a person or a thing (so not infrequent in secular authors): Romans 2:15 (where according to the context the deeds of men must be understood as defended); τά περί ἐμοῦ, Acts 26:2 (but see under 1).

Question 332

παραλυομαι / παραλύω

Answer 332

to be a paralytic

Thayer’s Definition
to loose on one side or from the side
to loose or part things placed side by side
to loosen, dissolve
to weaken, enfeeble
suffering from the relaxing of the nerves, unstrung, weak of limb
tottering, weakened, feeble knees

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παραλύω

[v. λύω ]:

I c. acc. rei, loose and take off, detach, τὰ πηδάλια τῶν νεῶν Hdt. 3.136 (so in Med., παραλυόμενοι τὰ πηδάλια taking off the rudders, X. An. 5.1.11: — Pass., παραλελυμέναι τοὺς ταρσούς with their oars taken off, Plb. 8.4.2); τὴν πτέρυγα -λύσασα τοῦ χιτωνίου Ar. Fr. 325; τὸν θώρακα Plu. Ant. 76: — Med., π. τὴν ῥαφὴν [τοῦ χιτῶνος ] Id. Cleom. 37; τοὺς στεφάνονς Id. 2.646a: — Pass., Hdt. 3.105. hamstring, ἅρματα LXX 2 Kings 8:4.

2. undo, put an end to, πόνους E. Andr. 304 (lyr.); τὴν τοῦ παιδίου ἀμφισβήτησιν relinquish it, Isa 4.10: — Med., get rid of, τὸν κίνδυνον D.H. 6.28.
3. undo secretly, τὰ σακκία τῶν χρημάτων Plu. 2.10b, cf. D.S. 13.106.
4. pay a penalty, LXX Genesis 4:15; = Lat. persolvo, νόμισμα PStrassb. 50.8, 14 (vi A.D.).

II c. acc. pers. et gen. rei, part from, πολλοὺς ἤδη παρέλυσεν θάνατος δάμαρτος E. Alc. 932 (lyr., dub.l.); μία γάρ σφεων παρελύθη ὑπὸ Ἰώνων one city (Smyrna) was detached from them, Hdt. 1.149; π. τινὰ τῆς στρατιῆς release from military service, Id. 7.38 (and in Pass., to be exempt from it, 5.75), cf. Plb. 6.33.10; τοῦ ὅρκου OGI 266.46 (Pergam., iii B.C.); π. τινὰ δυσφρονᾶν set free from cares, Pi. O. 2.52; π. τινὰ τῆς στρατηγίης dismiss from the command, Hdt. 6.94, cf. Th. 7.16, 8.54; τῆς δυνάμεως τινά Arist. Pol. 1315a12 (so in Pass., π. τῆς φυλακῆς Plu. Cleom. 37; τῆς ἀρχῆς Eun. VS p.481 B.); also τὴν ἀρχήν τινι π. ib. p.479 B.; τοὺς Ἀθηναίους π. τῆς ἐς αὐτὸν ὀργῆς set them free, release them from.., Th. 2.65; φαρμάκῳ π. ἑαυτὸν τοῦ ζῆν Str. 8.6.14; παραλελύσθαι τοῦ φόβου Plb. 30.4.7: c. acc. only, set free, δυστάνου ψυχάν E. Alc. 117 (lyr.): — Med., obtain leave of absence from, τοὺς παιδονόμους SIG 577.56 (Milet., iii/ii B.C.).

III loose besides, in addition, π. καὶ ἑτέραν [κύνα ] X. Cyn. 6.14. disable, enfeeble, Pl. Ax. 367b; π. τροφῆς ἀποχῇ τὸ σῶμα Plu. Demetr. 38: — mostly in Pass., to be paralysed, δεξιὴ χεὶρ παρελύθη Hp. Epid. 1.26. ιγ ; τὰ παραλελυμένα τοῦ σώματος μόρια Arist. EN 1102b18: generally, to be exhausted, flag, ἡ δύναμις.. τῆς πόλεως παρελύθη Lys. 13.46; τῇ σωματικῇ δυνάμει παραλυόμενος ὑπὸ τῶν τραυμάτων Plb. 16.5.7; παραλελυμένοι καὶ τοῖς σώμασι καὶ ταῖς ψυχαῖς Id. 20.10.9; τὴν δύναμιν παρελέλυντο Id. 1.58.9; τὰς χεῖρας Teles p.38 H.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παραλύω: (perfect passive participle παραλελυμένος); properly, to loose on one side or from the side (cf. παρά, IV. 1); to loose or part things placed side by side; to loosen, dissolve, hence, to weaken, enfeeble: παραλελυμένος, suffering from the relaxing of the nerves, unstrung, weak of limb (palsied), Luke 5:18, 24 ((not L WH marginal reading) see παραλυτικός); Acts 8:7; Acts 9:33; παραλελυμένα γόνατα, i. e. tottering, weakened, feeble knees, Hebrews 12:12; Isaiah 35:3; Sir. 25:23; χεῖρες παραλελυμένα Ezekiel 7:27; Jeremiah 6:24; (Jeremiah 27:15, 43 ()); παρελύοντο αἱ δεξιαι, of combatants, Josephus, b. j. 3, 8, 6; παρελύθη καί οὐκ ἐδύνατο ἔτι λαλῆσαι λόγον, 1 Macc. 9:55, where cf. Grimm; σωματική δυνάμει παραλελυμένα, Polybius 32, 23, 1; τοῖς σωμασι καί ταῖς ψυχαῖς, id. 20, 10, 9.’

Question 333

προσμένω

Answer 333

Thayer’s Definition
to remain with, to continue with one
to hold fast to: the grace of God received in the Gospel
to remain still, tarry, stay

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
προσμένω,

Dor. ποτι- SIG 615.7 (Delph., ii B.C. ): —

bide, wait, χρόνον πολλόν Hdt. 1.199, cf. 5.19; σῖγ’ ἔχουσα πρόσμενε S. El. 1236, cf. 1399; ἡσυχάζων π . Id. OT 620; π. χρόνον ὀλίγον ἔστ’ ἂν . ., π. ἕως . ., Hdt. 8.4, X. HG 2.4.7 .

2. c. dat., remain attached to, cleave to, πάθεα π. τοκεῦσιν A. Eu. 497 (lyr.); τῷ Κυρίῳ Acts 11:23; π. ταῖς δεήσεσιν continue in . ., 1 Timothy 5:5; ταῖς ἑαυτῶν ἀγωγαῖς Gal. 15.436 .

II trans., wait for, await, c. acc., Thgn. 1144, S. OT 837, El. 164 (lyr.), etc.; face in battle, stand one’s ground against, δορίκτυπον ἀλαλάν Pi. N. 3.60: c. acc. et inf. fut., Ὀρέστην τῶνδε προσμένουσ’ ἀεὶ παυστῆρ’ ἐφήξειν S. El. 303 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
προσμένω; 1 aorist participle προσμείνας, infinitive προσμεῖναι; from Aeschylus and Herodotus down;

a. to remain with (see πρός, IV. 3): with a dative of the person to continue with one, Matthew 15:32; Mark 8:2 (here L WH marginal reading omit; Tr brackets the dative); τῷ κυρίῳ, to be steadfastly devoted to (A. V. cleave unto) the Lord, Acts 11:23 (Wis. 3:9; Josephus, Antiquities 14, 2, 1); τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ, to hold fast to (A. V. continue in) the grace of God received in the gospel, Acts 13:43 G L T Tr WH; δεήσεσι καί προσευχαῖς (A. V. to continue in supplications and prayers), 1 Timothy 5:5.
b. to remain still (cf. πρός, IV. 2), stay, tarry: Acts 18:18; followed by ἐν with a dative of place, 1 Timothy 1:3.

Question 334

ὑπομιμνήσκω

Answer 334

to remember, to remind, to be reminded

Thayer’s Definition
to cause one to remember, bring to remembrance, recall to mind: to another
to put one in remembrance, admonish, of something
to be reminded, to remember

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑπομιμνήσκω

(not ὑπομενε-μιμνήσκω, cf. PCair.Zen. 15v. 35 (iii B. C.), Phld. Ir. p.63 W.), fut. ὑπομνήσω, aor. ὑπέμνησα:

I Acts 1:1-26 c. acc. pers., put one in mind or remind one of, ὑπέμνησέν τέ ἑ πατρός Od. 1.321, cf. 15.3, Th. 6.19; also ὑ. τοὺς Ἀθηναίους τάδε Id. 7.64, cf. X. Cyr. 3.3.37, Pl. Criti. 108a, etc.; ὑ. ἡμᾶς τί βούλει δηλοῦν.. Id. Phlb. 31c; τὸν εἰδότα περί τινος Id. Phdr. 275d; τινὰ ὅτι.. Id. Phd. 88d; πῶς Id. Phdr. 277b; ὑ. τινά put him in mind, Id. La. 181c; ἐὰν.. σεαυτὸν ὡς ἄνθρωπος ὢν ὑπομιμνήσκῃς Isoc. 1.21.

2. bring to one’s mind, mention, suggest, c. acc., Hdt. 7.171, 9.6, S. Ph. 1170 (lyr.), Pl. Phdr. 241a, etc.; ὅτι.. Phld. l.c. Medic., provoke a dormant process, τὴν ἔκκρισιν Sor. 2.59; αἱμορροΐδας ἢ ἔμμηνα γυναιξίν Aët. 3.136; cf. ὑπομνηστέον 3.
3. c. gen. rei, make mention of, πατρίδος τῆς ἐλευθερωτάτης Th. 7.69, cf. Aeschin. 3.156, Theoc. 21.50.
4. c. acc. cogn., ἀληθῆ ὑ. Pl. R. 427e: abs., καλῶς, ὀρθῶς ὑπέμνησας, Id. Phdr. 266d, Tht. 187e; ἀναστὰς ὑπομνησάτω let him get up and remind me, And. 1.70; ὑ. ὅτι.. suggest that.., Pl. R. 452c, etc.

II Pass. or Med., fut. -μνησθήσομαι Phld. Sign. 27: — call to mind, remember, τι Pl. Phlb. 47e, La. 188a, X. Cyr. 6.1.24, etc; τινων Luc. Cat. 4.

2. make mention, περί τινος A. Pers. 329; ὡς ὑπέμνησται as has been observed above, Procl. in Prm. p.657 S. (v.l. ὑπομέμνησται).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑπομιμνῄσκω; future ὑπομνήσω; 1 aorist infinitive Ὑπομνῆσαι; 1 aorist passive ὑπεμνησθην; from Homer down; (cf. our ‘suggest’, see ἀνάμνησις);

1. actively, to cause one to remember, bring to remembrance, recall to mind: τί (to another), 2 Timothy 2:14; τινα τί, John 14:26 (Thucydides 7, 64; Xenophon, Hier. 1, 3; Plato, Isocrates, Demosthenes); with implied censure, 3 John 1:10; τινα περί τίνος, to put one in remembrance, admonish, of something: 2 Peter 1:12 (Plato, Phaedr., p. 275 d.); τινα, followed by ὅτι, Jude 1:5 (Xenophon, mem. 3, 9, 8; Plato, de rep. 5, p. 452 c.; Aelian v. h. 4, 17); τινα, followed by an infinitive (indicating what must be done), Titus 3:1 (Xenophon, hipparch. 8, 10).
2. passively, to be reminded, to remember: τίνος, Luke 22:61.

Question 335

μνεία

Answer 335

Thayer’s Definition
remembrance, memory, mention

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μνεία, ἡ,

I = cross μνήμη, remembrance, βίου δὲ τοῦ παρόντος οὐ μνείαν ἔχεις S. El. 392, cf. E. Ph. 464, Pl. Lg. 798b; κατά γε τὴν ἐμὴν μ. dub. in Ael. VH 6.1; μνείας χάριν, freq. in late epitaphs, IG 3.3112, al.

II mention, περί τινος μνείαν ποιεῖσθαι And. 1.100, cf. Aeschin. 1.160; περί τινος πρός τινα Pl. Prt. 317e; τὴν μνείαν περί τινος ἀποδιδόναι Arist. PA 58b13; ὅ τι καὶ μνείας ἄξιον Id. Pol. 1274b17; μ. τινῶν ποιεῖσθαι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν Romans 1:2, al., cf. Epigr.Gr. 983.3 (i B. C.); reminder, τινος Pl. Phdr. 254a; commemoration, αἱ μ. τῶν ἁγίων v. l. in Romans 12:13.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μνεία, μνειας, ἡ (μιμνήσκω), remembrance, memory, mention: ἐπί πάσῃ τῇ μνεία ὑμῶν, as often as I remember you (literally, ‘on all my remembrance’ etc. cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 18, 4), Philippians 1:3; ποιεῖσθαι μνείαν τίνος, to make mention of one, Romans 1:9; Ephesians 1:16; 1 Thessalonians 1:2; Philemon 1:4 (Plato, Phaedr., p. 254 a.; (Diogenes Laërtius 8. 2, 66; the Sept. Psalm 110:4 ()); ἔχειν μνείαν τίνος, to be mindful of one, 1 Thessalonians 3:6 (Sophocles, Aristophanes, Euripides, others); ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχειν τήν περί τίνος μνείαν, 2 Timothy 1:3.

Question 336

μαρτυρία

Answer 336

testimony, witness, proof

Thayer’s Definition
a testifying
the office committed to the prophets of testifying concerning future events
what one testifies, testimony, i.e. before a judge

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μαρτῠρ-ία, ἡ,

I testimony, Διονύσου μαρτυρίῃσι Od. 11.325, cf. Hes. Op. 282 (pl.): freq. both sg. and pl., μ. τινός his evidence, Antipho 2.2.7; μ. παρέχεσθαι Pl. Smp. 179b; εἰς μ. κληθῆναι Id. Lg. 937a; μαρτυριῶν ἀπέχεσθαι to refuse to give evidence, Ar. Eq. 1316; ἐμβάλλεσθαι μ. ψευδῆ D. 54.31; γράφειν μ. τινί serve him with a subpoena, Aeschin. 1.45; μ. ἔχειν παρά τινων ἔκ τινων Arist. Pol. 1338a36: in non-legal sense, commendation, πάσης μ. ἐπιτήδειον (in sense of ἄξιον) SIG 1073.17 (Olympia, ii A.D.): in pl., demonstrations of favour, POxy. 41.18 (iii/iv A.D.).

II Astrol., aspect, Vett. Val.5.5, Gal. 19.532, Man. 1.124, Procl. Par.Ptol. 255.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μαρτυρία, μαρτυρίας, ἡ (μαρτυρέω, which see) (from Homer down);

1. a testifying: the office committed to the prophets of testifying concerning future events, Revelation 11:7.
2. what one testifies, testimony: universally, John 5:34; in a legal sense, of testimony before a judge: Luke 22:71; Mark 14:56; with the genitive of the subjunctive, Mark 14:59; John 8:17; 1 John 5:9; κατά τίνος, against one, Mark 14:55; in an historical sense, of the testimony of an historian: John 19:35; John 21:24; in an ethical sense, of testimony concerning one’s character: 3 John 1:12; 1 Timothy 3:7; Titus 1:13; in a predominantly dogmatic sense respecting matters relating to the truth of Christianity: of the testimony establishing the Messiahship and the divinity of Jesus (see μαρτυρέω, a.), given by — John the Baptist: John 1:7; John 5:32; ἡ μαρτυρία τοῦ Ἰωάννου, John 1:19; Jesus himself, with a genitive of the subjunctive, John 5:31; John 8:13f; God, in the prophecies of Scripture concerning Jesus tile Messiah, in the endowments conferred upon him, in the works done by him, John 5:36; through the Holy Spirit, in the Christian’s blessed consciousness of eternal life and of reconciliation with God, obtained by baptism ((cf. references under the word βάπτισμα, 3)) and the expiatory death of Christ, with a subject. genitive τοῦ Θεοῦ, 1 John 5:9-11, cf. 1 John 5:6-8; the apostles, σου τήν μαρτυρίαν περί ἐμοῦ, Acts 22:18 (Winer’s Grammar, 137 (130)); the other followers of Christ: Revelation 6:9; with a genitive of the subjunctive αὐτῶν, Revelation 12:11; with a genitive of the object Ἰησοῦ, Revelation 12:17; Revelation 19:10; Revelation 20:4 (ἔχειν this μαρτυρία is to hold the testimony, to persevere steadfastly in bearing it, Revelation 6:9; Revelation 12:17; Revelation 19:10 (see ἔχω, I. 1 d.); others, however, explain it to have the duty of testifying laid upon oneself); elsewhere the testimony of Christ is that which he gives concerning divine things, of which he alone has thorough knowledge, John 3:11, 32f; ἡ μαρτυρία Ἰησοῦ, that testimony which he gave concerning future events relating to the consummation of the kingdom of God, Revelation 1:2 (cf. Revelation 22:16, 20); διά τήν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, to receive this testimony, Revelation 1:9.

Question 337

νόημα

Answer 337

a thought, a design

Thayer’s Definition
a mental perception, thought
an evil purpose
that which thinks, the mind, thoughts or purposes

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
νό-ημα, ατος, τό,

Ion. νῶμα Emp. 110.10 (but νόημα 105.3): (νοέω): —

I

1. that which is perceived, perception, thought, τῶν νέες ὠκεῖαι, ὡς εἰ πτερὸν ἠὲ νόημα Od. 7.36 (cf. ὀξύτερον νοήματος Lib. Or. 59.148; ἅμα νοήματι ‘in the twinkling of an eye’, Epicur. Ephesians 1 p.11U.: hence ἡ ἅμα ν. περίοδος lightning survey, ib. p.32 U., cf. Phld. Mort. 37, Plu. Alex. 35); ν. φρενός Ar. Nu. 704 (lyr.).
2. thought, purpose, idea, design, τοιοῦτον ἐνὶ στήθεσσι νόημα Od. 13.330; Ζεὺς.. ἐνὶ φρεσὶν ὧδε νόημα ποίησ’ 14.273; νοήματα.. ἐκτελέει Il. 10.104, cf. Alc. 77, Pi. P. 6.29; σοφώτατα νοήματα Id. O. 7.72; οὐκ οἶδ’ ὄττι θέω· δίχα μοι τὰ ν. Sapph. 36; ἐκτὸς τῶν ἐωθότων ν. στῆσαί τινα Hdt. 3.80; τὸ μὲν ν. τῆς θεοῦ, τὸ δὲ κλέμμ’ ἐμόν Ar. Eq. 1203, cf. Nu. 743.
3. in Philos., thought, concept, opp. sensation, sense-presentation, Parm. 8.34, etc.; φύσει διῄρηται τά τε ν. καὶ τὰ αἰσθήματα Arist. Fr. 87; σύνθεσίς τις νοημάτων Id. de An. 430a28; discursive thinking, as the function of διάνοια, Herm. ap. Stob. 2.8.31.
4. Rhet., thought as expressed in literary form, D.H. Amm. 2.24, Longin. 12.1.

II understanding, mind, παρέπλαγξεν δὲ νόημα Od. 20.346, cf. Il. 19.218, Thgn. 435, Emp. 110.10; αἷμα γὰρ ἀνθρώποις περικάρδιόν ἐστι ν. Id. 105.3; θεὸς.. οὔ τι δέμας θνητοῖσιν ὁμοίιος οὐδὲ ν. Xenoph. 23.2.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
νόημα, νοηματος, τό, from Homer down;

1. a mental perception, thought.
2. specifically, (an evil) purpose: αἰχμαλωτίζειν πᾶν νόημα εἰς τήν ὑπακοήν τοῦ Χριστοῦ, to cause whoever is devising evil against Christ to desist from his purpose and submit himself to Christ (as Paul sets him forth), 2 Corinthians 10:5; plural: 2 Corinthians 2:11 (τοῦ διαβόλου, Ignatius ad Eph. (interpolated) 14 [ET]; τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν πονηρᾶς, Baruch 2:8).
3. that which thinks, the mind: plural (where the minds of many are referred to), 2 Corinthians 3:14; 2 Corinthians 4:4, and perhaps (2 Corinthians 11:3); Philippians 4:7, for here the word may mean thoughts and purposes; (others would so take it also in all the examples cited under this head (cf. καύχημα, 2)).

Question 338

κατανοέω

Answer 338

to pay attention, notice, observe; consider, contemplate; this word has a strong implication that the attention paid is intense, and the contemplation is broad and thorough, resulting in complete understanding

to perceive, understand, apprehend, Lk. 20:23; to observe, consider, contemplate, Lk. 12:24, 27; to discern, detect, Mt. 7:3; to have regard to, make account of, Rom. 4:19

Thayer’s Definition
to perceive, remark, observe, understand
to consider attentively, fix one’s eyes or mind upon

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κατανο-έω,

I

1. observe well, understand, apprehend, ὡς ἐμὲ κατανοέειν Hdt. 2.28, cf. 93; οὐ Χαλεπὸν τῷ βουλομένῳ κ. Lys. 25.34; οὐ.. κατανοῶ τὸ νῦν ἐρωτώμενον Pl. Sph. 233a; κ. ὅ τι λέγω Id. Grg. 455b; οὐ πάνυ κατανοῶ Id. Phlb. 48a; κ. ὅτι.. Id. Sph. 264b; κατανοεῖς τίς ποτ’ ἐστίν..; Antiph. 33.1; ἐκεῖνο, ὅτι.. Epicur. Ephesians 1 p.30U.; ἐκ τίνων.. καὶ πότε.. καὶ πῶς.. Plb. 1.12.9: — Pass., of a doctrine, to be grasped and hence accepted, μᾶλλον μᾶλλον κ. Epicur. Nat. 138G.; εἰς καρδίαν -εῖται is understood of.., Heph.Astr. 1.1.
2. perceive, τῷ κατανοουμένῳ τὸ κατανοοῦν ἐξομοιῶσαι the percipient to the perceived, Pl. Ti. 90d, etc.: c. part., κ. οὐ []πολλοὺς ὄντας Th. 2.3.
3. learn, τῆς Περσίδος γλώσσης ὅσα ἐδύνατο κατενόησε Id. 1.138.
4. consider, περί τινος X. Cyr. 1.6.20.
5. look at, view, τὴν οἰκίαν Ath. 5.179a.

II to be in one’s right mind, in one’s senses, Hp. Epid. 1.26. γ, 5.39.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κατανοέω, κατάνω; imperfect κατενωυν; 1 aorist κατενόησα; from Herodotus down; the Sept. here and there for הִתְבּונֵן, הִבִּיט, רָאָה;

1. to perceive, remark, observe, understand: τί, Matthew 7:3; Luke 6:41; Luke 20:23; Acts 27:39.
2. to consider attentively, fix one’s eyes or mind upon: τί, Luke 12:24, 27; Acts 11:6; Romans 4:19; with the accusative of the thing omitted, as being understood from the context, Acts 7:31f; τινα, Hebrews 3:1; Hebrews 10:24; James 1:23f.

Question 339

νουθετέω

Answer 339

to warn, admonish; instruct

pr. to put in mind; to admonish, warn, Acts 20:31; Rom. 15:14

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
νουθετ-έω,

(τίθημι)

1. put in mind: hence, admonish, warn, re- buke, c. acc. pers., Hdt. 2.173; παραινεῖν ν. τε τὸν κακῶς πράσσοντα A. Pr. 266; οὐδὲ νουθετεῖν ἔξεστί σε S. El. 595; κᾆτα νουθετεῖς ἐμέ Id. Ph. 1283; Ἔρωτα Lyr.Alex.Adesp. 8 (a): c. acc. rei, ν. τάδε S. El. 1025, cf. Ar. V. 732 (lyr.); advise concerning, μηχανήματα E. HF 855 (troch.): c. dupl. acc., τοιαῦτ’ ἄνολβον ἄνδρ’ ἐνουθέτει S. Aj. 1156; ἅπερ με νουθετεῖς E. Supp. 337, cf. Or. 299; ν. τινὰ ὡς.. X. Cyr. 8.2.15: — Pass., S. OC 1193, E. Med. 29, etc.; πρὶν ὑπὸ σοῦ ταῦτα νουθετηθῆναι Pl. Hp.Ma. 301c.
2. metaph., chastise, ν. τινὰ κονδύλοις, πληγαῖς, Ar. V. 254, Pl. Lg. 879d: — Pass., coupled with κολάζεσθαι, Id. Grg. 478e.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
νουθετέω, νουθετῶ; (νουθετης, and this from νοῦς and τίθημι; hence, properly, equivalent to ἐν τῷ νώ τίθημι, literally, ‘put in mind’, German an das Herz legen); to admonish, warn, exhort: τινα, Acts 20:31; Romans 15:14; 1 Corinthians 4:14; Colossians 1:28; Colossians 3:16; 1 Thessalonians 5:12, 14; 2 Thessalonians 3:15. ((1 Samuel 3:13); Job 4:3; Wis. 11:11 Wis. 12:2; Tragg., Aristophanes, Xenophon, Plato, others.)

Question 340

ἐποικοδομέω

Answer 340

I build upon, build up

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐποικοδομ-έω,

I

1. build up, -ήσαντας αὐτὸ (sc. τὸ τεῖχος) ὑψηλότερον Th. 7.4, cf. X. HG 6.5.12, D. 55.25: metaph., pile up, use a climax, Arist. Rh. 1365a16, Rh.Al. 1426b3.
2. build upon, ἐπὶ κρηπῖδι X. An. 3.4.11; ἐπὶ κρηπῖδος Pl. Lg. 736e; ἐπὶ τοὺς τοίχους OGI 483.117 (Pergam., ii B.C.): metaph., Pl. Lg. 793c (Pass.); φύσει μαθήματα Ph. 1.610; τινὶ εὐτονίαν, ἀσφάλειαν, Arr. Epict. 2.15.8 (Pass.); ἐπὶ θεμέλιον or θεμελίῳ, 1 Corinthians 3:12, Ephesians 2:20; θεμελίοις Sor. 1.47 (Pass.); τοῖς ἀληθέσιν ἐψευσμένα Paus. 8.2.6, cf. Dam. Pr. 87 (Pass.). edify, ἑαυτοὺς τῇ πίστει Judges 1:20 : — Pass., -ούμενοι ἐν Χριστῷ Colossians 2:7.

II = cross ἐπιτειχίζω, Plb. 2.46.5: — Med., στρατόπεδα πέντε -ησάμενος Arr. An. 2.1.2.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐποικοδομέω, ἐποικοδόμω; 1 aorist ἐπωκοδόμησα, and without augment ἐποικοδόμησα (1 Corinthians 3:14 T Tr WH; cf. Tdf.’s note on Acts 7:47 (see οἰκοδομέω)); passive, present ἐποικοδομοῦμαι; 1 aorist participle ἐποικοδομηθέντες; in the N. T. only in the figurative which likens a company of Christian believers to an edifice or temple; to build upon, build up (Vulg. superaedifico); absolutely (like our English build up) viz. ‘to finish the structure of which the foundation has already been laid,’ i. e. in plain language, to give constant increase in Christian knowledge and in a life conformed thereto: Acts 20:32 (where L T Tr WH οἰκοδομῆσαι (Vulg. aedifico)); 1 Corinthians 3:10; (l Pet. 2:5 Tdf.); ἐπί τόν θεμέλιον, 1 Corinthians 3:12; τί, 1 Corinthians 3:14; ἐν Χριστῷ, with the passive, in fellowship with Christ to grow in spiritual life, Colossians 2:7; ἐποικοδομηθέντες ἐπί τῷ θεμελίῳ τῶν ἀποστόλων, on the foundation laid by the apostles, i. e. (dropping the figurative) gathered together into a church by the apostles’ preaching of the gospel, Ephesians 2:20; ἐποικοδόμειν ἑαυτόν τῇ πίστει, Jude 1:20, where the sense is, ‘resting on your most holy faith as a foundation, make progress, rise like an edifice higher and higher.’ (Thucydides, Xenophon, Plato, others.)

Question 341

οἰκέω

Answer 341

οἰκήσω, ᾤκησα, -, -, -
I dwell, inhabit
to live, dwell
Definition: 
to dwell in, inhabit, 1 Tim. 6:16; intrans. to dwell, live; to cohabit, 1 Cor. 7:12, 13; to be indwelling, indwell, Rom. 7:17, 18, 20; 8:9, 11; 1 Cor. 3:16*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
οἰκέω,

οἰκείω Hes. Th. 330, Locr. ϝοικέω IG 9(1).334.29; Aeol. pres. part. οἴκεις Alc. 69; Arg. 3 sg. pres. opt. οἰκείη BCH 33.452: impf. ᾤκεον Il. 20.218, al., Att. ᾤκουν, Ion. οἴκεον Hdt. 1.57: fut. οἰκήσω E. IA 1508 (lyr.): aor. ᾤκησα Hdt. 1.1: pf. ᾤκηκα S. El. 1101: —

Pass. and Med., fut. οἰκήσομαι in med. sense, Men.Rh. p.363 S.; but in pass., v. A. 11: aor. ᾠκήθην Il. 2.668, etc.; ᾠκησάμην Aristid. 1.103 J.: pf. ᾤκημαι as Med. and Pass., Ion. 3 pl. οἰκέαται, v. A. 1.2, 3: (οἶκος): trans., inhabit, ὑπωρείας ᾤκεον πολυπίδακος Ἴδης Il. 20.218 (elsewh. in Hom. always intr., v. infr. B); οἰ. τοῦτον τὸν χῶρον Hdt. 1.1, cf. 175, etc.; οἰ. δόμους A. Supp. 961; ἄντρον Id. Eu. 194: metaph., οἰ. αἰῶνα καὶ μοῖραν have, enjoy, E.l.c.: —

I

1. Pass., to be inhabited, οἰκέοιτο πόλις Πριάμοιο Il. 4.18; ἐς γῆν.. οἰκουμένην S. Ph. 221; διὰ τῆς οἰκεομένης through the inhabited country, Hdt. 2.32; ὁδοιπόρεον ἐς τὴν οἰκεομένην Id. 4.110; τὰς ἄλλας πόλιας οἰκεομένας μηδὲν ἧσσον although inhabited no less than before, Id. 1.170: for ἡ οἰκουμένη, v. sub voce.
2. colonize, settle in, τὰς πλείστας τῶν νήσων Th. 1.8, cf. 2.27, etc.; πόλιν prob. in E. Fr. 360.11; νῆσον οἰκῆσαι, i.e. to be deported, POxy. 1101.24 (iv A. D.): in pf. Pass., to be settled in, occupy, τοῖσι τὰς νήσους οἰκημένοισι Ἴωσι Hdt. 1.27; αἱ δύο [πόλιες] νήσους οἰκέαται ib. 142 (cf. infr. 3).
3. in Pass., to be settled, of men or tribes to whom new abodes are assigned, τριχθὰ ᾤκηθεν καταφυλαδόν Il. 2.668: Ion. pf. Pass. οἴκημαι, as pres., οἱ ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ οἰκημένοι Ἕλληνες those who have been settled, i.e. those who dwell.., Hdt. 1.27; οἱ ἐντὸς Ἅλυος ποταμοῦ οἰ. ib. 28, cf. 8.115; also of cities, to be situated, lie, παρ’ ὃν [ποταμὸν] Νίνος πόλις οἴκητο Id. 1.193.

II manage, direct a household or a state, S. OC 1535 (dub. sens.), E. El. 386, Th. 3.37; οἴκει τὴν πόλιν ὁμοίως ὥσπερ τὸν πατρῷον οἶκον Isoc. 2.19: metaph., μὴ τὸν ἐμὸν οἴκει νοῦν don’t manage.., E. Fr. 144: — Pass., εὖ οἰκούμεναι πόλεις well governed, Id. Hipp. 486; μετρίως, ὀρθῶς, ἄριστα οἰ., Pl. Lg. 936b, R. 371c, 520d, etc.; πατρίδος τετυχηκὼς ἣ νόμοις.. μάλιστα οἰκεῖσθαι δοκεῖ D. 21.150: fut. οἰκήσεται in pass. sense, καθ’ ὅτι ἄριστα ἡ πόλις οἰκήσεται Th. 8.67, cf. Pl. La. 185a, Aeschin. 1.22, D. 58.62, Arist. Pol. 1284b38. intr., dwell, live, of persons, families, or tribes, have their abodes, settlements, in Hom. and Hdt. generally with ἐν.., ᾤκεον δ’ ἐν Πλευρῶνι Il. 14.116, cf. Od. 9.200, 400; οἴκεε ἐν Πίνδῳ Hdt. 1.56, cf. A. Ag. 1234, Ar. Av. 967 (Orac.), Antipho 5.78; esp. of metics, ἐγ Κολλυτῷ οἰκοῦντι IG 12.373.60, al.; κατὰ στέγας E. Ion 314; ὑπὸ χθονός Id. Fr. 450: after Hom. with dat. (loc.) alone, Σαλαμῖνι IG 12.1.2 (vi B. C.); οὐρανῷ Pi. N. 10.58; ναοῖσι E. Ion 314; ἐλθόνθ’ ἁγνὸν ἐς Θήβης πέδον οἰ. Eub. 10; παρὰ κρημνοῖσιν Pi. P. 3.34; παρὰ ὄχθον E. IT 1098 (lyr.); οἰ. μετά τινος, = συνοικεῖν τινι, S. OT 414, 990; κέρδη μὲν οἰκήσαντα.. having fixed my dwelling [there] with gain to my hosts, Id. OC 92; τὸ τὴν φροντίδ’ ἔξω τῶν κακῶν οἰκεῖν γλυκύ sweet it is for the mind to keep free from cares, Id. OT 1390; ἐπὶ προστάτου οἰ. (v. προστάτης) Lys. 31.9.

III

1. of cities, to be situated, Hdt. 2.166, X. HG 7.1.3, 7.5 5; but τὴν πόλιν σποράδην καὶ κατὰ κώμας οἰκοῦσαν formed of detached villages, Isoc. 10.35, cf. 4.39 (so in Pass., X. An. 1.4.1).
2. to be governed or administered, τίς τῶν πόλεων διὰ σὲ βέλτιον ᾤκησεν; Pl. R. 599d, cf. 462d, 472e, 473a, 543a, al.: freq. hardly distinguishable from the Pass. (supr. A. II); σωφρόνως γε οἰκοῦσα [πόλις] εὖ ἂν οἰκοῖτο a state administered by self-control would be well governed, Id. Chrm. 162a; ἀρετῆς, ᾗ πόλεις τε καὶ οἶκοι εὖ οἰκοῦσι X. Mem. 1.2.64; εἰς ὀλίγους, εἰς πλείους οἰκεῖν, to be governed in the interest of the few or the many, Th. 2.37.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
οἰκέω, οἴκῳ; (οἶκος); from Homer down; the Sept. for יָשַׁב, a few times for שָׁכַן; Latinhabito (transitive), to dwell in: τί (Herodotus and often in Attic), 1 Timothy 6:16; (intransitive, to dwell), μετά τίνος, with one (of the husband and wife), 1 Corinthians 7:12f; tropically, (ἐν τίνι, to be fixed and operative in one’s soul: of sin, Romans 7:17f, 20; of the Holy Spirit, Romans 8:(9),11; 1 Corinthians 3:16. (Compare: ἐνοικέω, κατοικέω, ἐνκατοικέω, παροικέω, περιοικέω, συνοικέω.)

Question 342

κατοικέω

Answer 342

-, κατῴκησα, -, -, -
I inhabit, dwell
to live in, reside in, settle
Definition: 
trans. to inhabit, Acts 1:19; absol. to have an abode, dwell, Lk. 13:4; Acts 11:29; to take up or find an abode, Acts 7:2; to indwell, Eph. 3:17; Jas. 4:5

Thayer’s Definition
to dwell, settle
metaph. divine powers, influences, etc., are said to dwell in his soul, to pervade, prompt, govern it
to dwell in, inhabit
God is said to dwell in the temple, i.e. to be always present for worshippers

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
κατοικ-έω,

I

1. settle in, colonize, πόλιν Hdt. 7.164; γῆν E. Med. 10; τοῖς κατοικεῖν ἐθέλουσι τὰν πόλιν Decr.Byz. ap. D. 18.91: generally, inhabit, τόπους S. Ph. 40; τὴν Ἀσίαν SIG 557.17 (Magn. Mae., iii B.C.), etc.: — Pass., to be dwelt in or inhabited, opp. κατοικίζομαι (to be just founded), Arist. Pol. 1266b2.
2. abs., settle, dwell, ζητοῦσα.. ποῦ κατοικοίης S. OC 362; ἵνα χρὴ κατοικεῖν Ar. Av. 153; ἐν δόμοις, ἐν ἄστεσι, E. Hel. 1651, Pl. Lg. 666e, etc.; αὐτόθι Th. 3.34; ἐν μοναρχίᾳ Isoc. 1.36; ἐπὶ γῆς Revelation 3:10; esp. of non-citizens, Ἐφέσιοι καὶ οἱ -οῦντες SIG 352.4 (Ephesus, iv B.C.). cf. 633.67 (Milet., ii B.C.): — pf. and plpf. Pass., to have been planted or settled, κατὰ κώμας Hdt. 1.96, cf. 2.102; κ.νῆσον, τὴν μεσόγειαν, Id. 4.8, Th. 1.120.

II administer, govern, οἱ τὰς πόλεις -οῦντες Phld. Rh. 2.225 S.: — more freq. in Pass., κατῴκηνται καλῶς, of Athens, S. OC 1004; ὀρθῶς κ., of Sparta, Pl. Lg. 683a.

III intr. of cities, lie, be siluated, ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις ib. 677c, cf. 682c: also c. acc. loci, τὰς τὴν Ἀσίαν κατοικούσας which are situated in.., Isoc. 5.123.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
κατοικέω, κατοικῶ; 1 aorist κατῴκησα; (from Sophocles and Herodotus down); the Sept. times uncounted for יָשַׁב, more rarely for שָׁכַן;

1. intransitive, to dwell, settle;
   a. properly: followed by ἐν with the dative of place, Luke 13:4 (Tr WH omit ἐν); Acts 1:20; Acts 5 (T WH marginal reading εἰς (see below)); ; Hebrews 11:9; Revelation 13:12; followed by εἰς (a pregnant construction; see εἰς, C. 2, p. 186a), Matthew 2:23; Matthew 4:13; Acts 7:4; ἐπί τῆς γῆς, Revelation 3:10; Revelation 6:10; Revelation 8:13; Revelation 11:10; Revelation 13:8, 14; Revelation 14:6 Rec.; (Numbers 13:33; Numbers 14:14; Numbers 35:32, 34); ἐπί πᾶν τό πρόσωπον (παντός προσώπου L T Tr WH (cf. ἐπί, C. I. 1 a.)) τῆς γῆς, Acts 17:26; ὅπου, Revelation 2:13; so that ἐκεῖ must be added mentally, Acts 22:12; demons taking possession of the bodies of men are said κατοικεῖν ἐκεῖ, Matthew 12:45; Luke 11:26.
   b. metaphorically, divine powers, influences, etc., are said κατοικεῖν ἐν τίνι (the dative of person), or ἐν τῇ καρδία τίνος, to dwell in his soul, to pervade, prompt, govern it: ὁ Θεός ἐν ἡμῖν, the Epistle of Barnabas 16, 8 [ET]; ὁ Χριστός, Ephesians 3:17; the Holy Spirit, James 4:5 R G (Hermas, past., mand. 5, 2 [ET]; (sim. 5, 5 [ET] etc.; cf. Harnack’s references on mand. 3, 1)); τό πλήρωμα τῆς θεότητος in Christ, Colossians 2:9, cf. 1:19; ἡ σοφία ἐν σώματι, Wis. 1:4; δικαιοσύνη is said to dwell where righteousness prevails, is practised, 2 Peter 3:13.
2. transitive, to dwell in, inhabit: with the accusative of place, Acts 1:19; Acts 2:9, 14; Acts 4:16; Acts 9:32, 35; Acts 19:10, 17; Revelation 12:12 Rec.; ; God is said to dwell in the temple, i. e. to be always present for worshippers: Matthew 23:21. (Compare: ἐγκατοικέω [SYNONYMS: κατοικεῖν, in the Sept. the ordinary rendering of יָשַׁב to settle, dwell, differs from παροικεῖν, the common representative of גּוּר to sojourn, as the permanent differs from the transitory; e. g. Genesis 37:1 κατῴκει δέ Ἰακώβ ἐν τῇ γῆ οὗ παρῴκησεν ὁ πατήρ αὐτοῦ, ἐν γῆ Χανάαν; Philo de sacrif. Ab. et Cain. § 10 ὁ γάρ τοῖς ἐγκυκλιοις μόνοις ἐπανεχων, παροικεῖ σοφία, οὐ κατοικεῖ. Cf. Lightfoot on Colossians 1:19 and on Clement of Rome, 1 Cor. 1.]
   STRONGS NT 2730: κατοικίζω κατοικίζω; 1 aorist κατῴκισα; from Herodotus down; the Sept. for הושִׁיב; to cause to dwell, to send or bring into an abode; to give a dwelling to: metaphorically, τό πνεῦμα, ὁ κατῴκισεν ἐν ἡμῖν, i. e. the Spirit which he placed within us, to pervade and prompt us (see κατοικέω, 1 b.), James 4:5 L T Tr WH.

Question 343

ὁμολογέω

Answer 343

(ὡμολόγουν), ὁμολογήσω, ὡμολόγησα, -, -, -
I confess, profess
to confess, acknowledge, agree, admit, declare; this can be a profession of allegiance, an admission of bad behavior, or an emphatic declaration of a truth
Definition:
to speak in accordance, adopt the same terms of language; to engage, promise, Mt. 14:7; to admit, avow frankly, Jn. 1:20; Acts 24:14; to confess, 1 Jn. 1:9; to profess, confess, Jn. 9:22; 12:42; Acts 23:8; to avouch, declare openly and solemnly, Mt. 7:23; in NT ὁμολογειν ἐν, to accord belief, Mt. 10:32; Lk. 12:8; to accord approbation, Lk. 12:8; from the Hebrew, to accord praise, Heb. 13:15

to say the same thing as another, i.e. to agree with, assent
to concede
not to refuse, to promise
not to deny
to confess
declare
to confess, i.e. to admit or declare one’s self guilty of what one is accused of
to profess
to declare openly, speak out freely
to profess one’s self the worshipper of one
to praise, celebrate

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὁμολογ-έω,

S. Ph. 980 (but very rare in Poets), Hdt. and Att. (v. infr.): fut. -ήσω Hdt. 8.144, etc.: aor. ὡμολόγησα Id. 9.88, etc.: perf. ὡμολόγηκα And. 1.29, etc.: — Med., pres. and aor., Pl. (v. infr.): — Pass., fut. -ήσομαι Hp. de Arte 4 (v.l.), Pl. Tht. 171b: aor. ὡμολογήθην Th. 8.29, etc.: pf. ὡμολόγημαι Pl. (v. infr.), etc.: —

I to be ὁμόλογος: hence, I agree with, say the same thing as, c. dat., λέγουσι Κορίνθιοι, ὁμολογέουσι δέ σφι Λέσβιοι Hdt. 1.23, cf. 171, 2.4; Κυρηναῖοι τὰ περὶ B άττον οὐδαμῶς -έουσι Θηραίοισι Id. 4.154.

II

1. correspond, agree with, whether of persons or things, c. dat., [τὸ ἓν] ἑωυτῷ ὁ. Heraclit. 51; ὁμολογέουσι ταῦτα τοῖσι Ὀρφικοῖσι Hdt. 2.81; αὗται αἱ πόλιες τῇσι πρότερον λεχθείσῃσι ὁμολογέουσι κατὰ γλῶσσαν οὐδέν Id. 1.142, cf. 2.18; have to do with, ὁμολογέοντας κατ’ οἰκηϊότητα Περσίϊ οὐδέν Id. 6.54; τοῖς λόγοις τοὺς μάρτυρας -οῦντας Antipho 6.31; οὐκ ἔφη τοὺς λόγους τοῖς ἔργοις ὁμολογεῖν Th. 5.55; ὥστε μηδὲν ὁμολογεῖν τὼ τρόπω τὼ ἀλλήλων are utterly unlike, Lys. 20.12. to be coordinated, πρὸς ἓν ἔργον Gal. UP 1.8: metaph., of a vowel, agree, i. e. form a diphthong, Plu. 2.737f. to be suitable for, c. gen., ὁμολογεῖ ὤμου ἡ περὶ τὴν ἑτέρην μασχάλην περιβολή Hp. Off. 9.
2. agree to a thing, grant, concede, ὁμολογῶ τάδε S.l.c.: abs., Hdt. 8.94; τινί τι Pl. Smp. 195b; αὐτοῖς ὡμολογηκὼς ταύτην τὴν ὁμολογίαν Id. Cri. 52a; ὁμολογοῖεν ἂν ἡμῖν οἱ ἄνθρωποι, ἢ οὔ; Id. Prt. 357a; ὅπως.. τῇ τύχῃ σου χάριτας ὁμολογεῖν δυνηθῶ that I may avow my gratitude.., PRyl. 114.32 (iii A. D.); ὁ. χάριν θεοῖς acknowledge gratitude, Luc. Laps. 15 (ὁ. ἔν τινι Matthew 10:32 appears to be an Aramaism; ὁ. ἐφ’ ἁμαρτίαις LXX Si. 4.26): without acc. rei, ὁμολογῶ σοι I grant you, i.e. 1 admit it, Ar. Pl. 94; parenthetically, ἀφειλόμην, ὁμολογῶ I allow it, X. An. 6.6.17: c. inf., ὁ. Νικίαν ἑορακέναι allows, confesses that he has seen.., Eup. 181.3; ὁ. σε ἀδικεῖν I confess that I am wronging thee, E. Fr. 265; ὁ. κλέπτειν Ar. Eq. 296, cf. Antipho 2.4.8; ὁ. καπηλεύειν Isoc. 2.1; ὁ. οὐκ εἰδέναι confess ignorance, Arist. SE 183b8; ὁ. πατάξαι Ar. V. 1422; ὁμολογοῦσι νοσεῖν μᾶλλον ἢ σωφρονεῖν Pl. Phdr. 231d; ὁ. ἓν πάντα εἶναι Heraclit. 50; ὁ. Μειδίαν ἁπάντων λαμπρότατον γεγενῆσθαι D. 21.153, cf. 197; esp. in receipts, ὁ. ἀπέχειν, ἐσχηκέναι, etc., PHib. 1.97.5 (iii B. C.), CPR 229.3 (iii A. D.), etc.; in contracts, ὁ. διαλελύσθαι πρὸς ἀλλήλους PHib. 1.96.5 (iii B. C.), cf. BGU 1160.3 (i B. C.), etc.; τοῦθ’ ὁ. ὡς.. Pl. Chrm. 163a, cf. Lg. 896c: also c. Partic., ὁ. τινὰ δίκαια ὄντα Id. Cri. 49e, 50a; v. infr. c.
3. agree or promise to do, c. fut. inf., Antipho 6.23, And. 1.62, Pl. Smp. 174a, Phdr. 254b, etc.: c. aor. inf., D. 42.12: c. pres. inf., ὡμολόγησαν ἑκατὸν τάλαντα ἐκτείσαντες ἀζήμιοι εἶναι Hdt. 6.92: also freq. abs., promise, μισθῷ ὁμολογήσαντες (sc. ἀπαλλάξεσθαι) Id. 2.86; ὁ ὁμολογῶν the person who gives an undertaking, BGU 297.22 (i A. D.), etc.; make an agreement, come to terms, τινι with another, Hdt. 6.33, 7.172, al.; ἐπὶ τούτοισι on these terms, Id. 1.60, cf. 8.140. β’, Th. 4.69. c. acc., promise, τῆς ἐπαγγελίας ἧς (for ἣν) ὡμολόγησεν ὁ θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ Acts 7:17; θεῷ ὑψίστῳ εὐχὴν Αὐρήλιος Ἀσκλάπων, ἣν ὡμολόγησεν ἐν Ῥώμῃ IGRom. 4.542 (Phrygia). Med., in sense of Act., ὑπεναντίος ὁ τρόπος.. ὁμολογεόμενος Hp. Vict. 1.11; αὐτοὶ ἑαυτοῖς ὁμολογούμενοι λόγοι Pl. Ti. 29c; νόμοι σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ὁ. Isoc. 2.17, cf. 6.14; τὸ ταὐτὸν καὶ ὁ. Pl. Lg. 741a; ὡμολογεῖτ’ ἂν ἡ κατηγορία τοῖς ἔργοις αὐτοῦ D. 18.14; -ούμενος καὶ σύμφωνος κατὰ τὸν βίον Plb. 31.25.8; τοῦτο -ήσασθαι ὅτι.. Pl. Cra. 439b, etc. Pass.,
4. to be agreed upon, allowed or granted by common consent, X. An. 6.3.9, etc.; πλέον ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ ἢ τρεῖς ὀβολοὶ ὡμολογήθησαν Th. 8.29: c. inf., with predicate added, to be allowed or confessed to be so and so, ἡ ὑπὸ πάντων ὁμολογουμένη ἄριστον εἶναι εἰρήνη Id. 4.62; ὁμολογεῖταί γε παρὰ πάντων μέγας θεὸς εἶναι Pl. Smp. 202b, cf. X. An. 1.9.20, etc.
5. without inf., ἡ τοῦ οἰκείου.. ἕξις.. δικαιοσύνη ἂν ὁμολογοῖτο should be allowed [to be] justice, Pl. R. 434a; -ούμενοι δοῦλοι And. 4.17; τοὺς -ουμένους θεούς those who are admitted [to be] gods, Timocl. 1.2, cf. Th. 6.89.
6. abs., ὁμολογεῖται it is granted, agreed, Pl. Phd. 72a, al.; τὰ ὡμολογημένα the things granted, ibid.; ἐξ ὁμολογουμένου, = cross ὁμολογουμένως, Plb. 3.111.7.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὁμολογέω, ὁμολογῶ; imperfect ὡμολόγουν; future ὁμολογήσω; 1 aorist ὡμολόγησα; present passive 3 person singular ὁμολογεῖται; (from ὁμόλογος, and this from ὁμον and λέγω); from (Sophocles and) Herodotus down;

1. properly, to say the same thing as another, i. e. to agree with, assent, both absolutely and with a dative of the person; often so in Greek writings from Herodotus down; hence,
2. universally, to concede; i. e.
   a. not to refuse, i. e. to promise: τίνι τήν ἐπαγγελίαν, Acts 7:17 L T Tr WH (here R. V. vouchsafe); followed by an object. infinitive, Matthew 14:7 (Plato, Demosthenes, Plutarch, others).
   b. not to deny, i. e. to confess; declare: joined with οὐκ ἀρνεῖσθαι, followed by direct discourse with recitative ὅτι, John 1:20; followed by ὅτι, Hebrews 11:13; τίνι τί, ὅτι, Acts 24:14; to confess, i. e. to admit or declare oneself guilty of what one is accused of: τάς ἁμαρτίας, 1 John 1:9 (Sir. 4:26).
3. to profess (the difference between the Latin profiteor (to declare openly and voluntarily') and confiteor (to declare fully,’ implying the yielding or change of one’s conviction; cf.pro fessio fidei, confessio peccatorum) is exhibited in Cicero, pro Sest. 51, 109), i. e. to declare openly, speak out freely (A. V. generally confess; on its construction see Buttmann, § 133, 7): (followed by an infinitive, εἰδέναι Θεόν, Titus 1:16); τίνι (cf. Buttmann, as above; Winer’s Grammar, § 31, 1 f.) followed by direct discourse with ὅτι recitative, Matthew 7:23; one is said ὁμολογεῖν that of which he is convinced and which he holds to be true (hence, ὁμολογεῖν is distinguished from πιστεύειν in John 12:42; Romans 10:9f): the passive absolute, with στόματι (dative of instrum.) added, Romans 10:10; τί, Acts 23:8; τινα with a predicate accusative (Buttmann, as above), αὐτόν Χριστόν, John 9:22; κύριον (predicate accusative) λησουν, Romans 10:9 (here WH τό ῤῆμα … ὅτι κύριος etc., L marginal reading Tr marginal reading simply ὅτι etc.; again with ὅτι in 1 John 4:15); Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν ἐν σαρκί ἐληλυθότα (Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading ἐληλυθεναι), 1 John 4:2 and Rec. also in 3 (see below); ἐρχόμενον ἐν σαρκί, 2 John 1:7 (cf. Buttmann, as above; Winer’s Grammar, 346 (324)); τινα, to profess oneself the worshipper of one, 1 John 4:3 (here WH marginal reading λύει, cf. Westcott, Epistles of John, p. 156ff) and G L T Tr WH in ; ἐν with a dative of the person (see ἐν, I. 8 c.), Matthew 10:32; Luke 12:8; with cognate accusative giving the substance of the profession (cf. Buttmann, § 131, 5; Winer’s Grammar, § 32, 2), ὁμολογίαν, 1 Timothy 6:12 (also followed by περί τίνος, Philo de mut. nom. § 8); τό ὄνομα τίνος, to declare the name (written in the book of life) to be the name of a follower of me, Revelation 3:5 G L T Tr WH.
4. According to a usage unknown to Greek writers to praise, celebrate (see ἐξομολογέω, 2; (Buttmann, § 133, 7)): τίνι, Hebrews 13:15. (Compare: ἀνθομολογέω (ἀνθομολογοῦμαι), ἐξομολογέω.)

Question 344

πάσχω

Answer 344

(ἔπασχον), πασχον, ἔπαθον, πέπονθα, -, -
I suffer
to experience, suffer, endure (almost always in NT with reference to unpleasant experiences)
Definition:
to be affected by, a thing, whether good or bad, to suffer, endure evil, Mt. 16:21; 17:12, 15; 27:19; absol. to suffer death, Lk. 22:15; 24:26

Thayer’s Definition
to be affected or have been affected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undergo
in a good sense, to be well off, in good case
in a bad sense, to suffer sadly, be in a bad plight
of a sick person

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πάσχω,

Il. 20.297, etc.: impf. ἔπασχον 17.375, etc.: fut. πείσομαι Od. 2.134, etc.; Dor. 3 sg. παισεῖται Abh.Berl.Akad. 1925(5).21 (Cyrene, iii B.C.): aor. ἔπᾰθον Il. 9.492, etc.: pf. πέπονθα Od. 13.6, etc.: plpf. ἐπεπόνθειν ib. 92, etc.; Att. ἐπεπόνθη Pl. Smp. 198c (all the above tenses in Hom., pres. and aor. only in Hes.). — Rarer forms, 2 pl. pf. πέπασθε (so Aristarch.) Il. 3.99, πέποσθε Od. 23.53; fem. pf. part. πεπᾰθυῖα 17.555; Dor. pf. πέποσχα Stesich. 89, Epich. 11, PCair.Zen. 482.18 (iii B.C.): — have something done to one, suffer, opp. do, ὅσσ’ ἔρξαν τ’ ἔπαθόν τε Od. 8.490; ῥέζοντά τι καὶ παθεῖν ἔοικεν Pi. N. 4.32; δρᾶν καὶ πάσχειν, v. δράω ; πολλὰ μὲν.. πείσεσθαι, πολλὰ δὲ ποιήσειν Hdt. 5.89, etc.: hence used as Pass. of ποιέω (cf. Arist. Cat. 2a4, Metaph. 1017a26, Plot. 3.6.8, etc.), π. τι ὑπό τινος to be treated so and so by another, suffer it at his hands, ἃ πάσχοντες ὑφ’ ἑτέρων ὀργίζεσθε, ταῦτα τοὺς ἄλλους μὴ ποιεῖτε Isoc. 3.61, cf. Hdt. 1.44, 124,al.; ἐξ ἐμοῦ μὲν ἔπαθες οἷα φῂς παθεῖν, δρᾷς δ’ οὐδὲν ἡμᾶς εὖ E. Hec. 252; οἷα πρὸς θεῶν πάσχω θεός A. Pr. 92, cf. Hdt. 1.36.

II to have something happen to one, to be or come to be in a state or case, καί τι ἔφη γελοῖον παθεῖν Pl. Smp. 174e; ὅπερ οἱ τὰς ἐγχέλεις θηρώμενοι πέπονθας Ar. Eq. 846, cf. V. 946; ὁρᾶτε μὴ ταὐτὸ πάθητε τῷ ἵππῳ see that it be not with you as with the horse in the fable, Arist. Rh. 1393b20, cf. Pl. R. 488a; παραπλ ήσιον π. ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ.. Isoc. 1.27; ὁμοιότατον πεπονθέναι ὥσπερ ἂν εἴ τις.. Pl. Phd. 98c.

2. of the influence of passion or feeling, to be affected in a certain way, be (or come to be) in a certain state of mind, οἱ Καμαριναῖοι ἐπεπόνθεσαν τοιόνδε Th. 6.88, cf. 1.80, D. 20.56; ὅ τι μὲν ὑμεῖς πεπόνθατε ὑπὸ τῶν ἐμῶν κατηγόρων οὐκ οἶδα Pl. Revelation 17:1-18 a, cf. 21c, 22c, Alc. 1.118b, Smp. 198c; π. τι πρός τινας Isoc. 2.42, Pl. Grg. 485b, cf. X. Smp. 4.11, 8.15, etc.; τι ἔς τινας Th. 6.11: sts. with Adj., ὑϊκὸν πάσχει he is swinishly disposed, X. Mem. 1.2.30: abs., ὁ πάσχων the man of feeling or impulse, ὁ μὴ πάσχων the un impassioned man, Arist. MM 1203b21.
3. of things, πεπόνθασι.. αἱ Ἰώνων ὁρταὶ τοῦτο this is the case with.., Hdt. 1.148; πάσχει δὲ ταὐτὸ τοῦτο καὶ τὰ κάρδαμα this is just the way with.., Ar. Nu. 234; οἷον τὰ γράμματα πεπονθότ’ ἂν εἴη Pl. Sph. 253a; ὁμοίως π. τῷ Νείλῳ to be in the same case with.., Hdt. 2.20.
4. Gramm., of words, to be subject to certain changes, EM 200.11, 491.2, etc.; τὸ πεπονθός a modified form, A.D. Adv. 137.16. to be passive in meaning, Id. Synt. 244.6,al.

III freq. with Advbs., κακῶς πάσχειν or παθεῖν to be in evil plight, unlucky, Od. 16.275, Hdt. 3.146, etc.; κακῶς π. ὑπό τινος to be ill used, ill treated by.., A. Pr. 1041 (anap.); ἐκ Διὸς π. κακῶς ib. 759 (but also κακὸν π. ὑ. τ. Th. 8.48): freq. with an Adj., κακά, αἰνά, λυγρὰ π., Il. 3.99, 22.431, Hdt. 9.37; ἀνάρσια πρός τινος Id. 5.89: freq. in Trag., π. δύσοιστα, τάλανα, ἀμήχανα, οἰκτρά, σχέτλια, ἀνάξια, A. Eu. 789 (lyr.), Th. 988 (dub.), E. Hipp. 598, Hec. 321, Andr. 1180 (dub.), IA 852: also in Prose, δεινά, βίαια π., D. 51.19, 21.1, etc.; πρέποντα πάσχειν Anti-pho 3.3.9: in Hom. also with Subst., ἄλγεα, κήδεα, πήματα, ἀεκήλια ἔργα, Il. 20.297, Od. 17.555, Il. 5.886, 18.77: rarely in Att., πράγματ’ αἴσχιστ’ ἂν ἐπάθομεν D. 21.17. εὖ πάσχειν to be well off, in good case, c. gen., τῶν αὑτοῦ (leg. ὧν αὐτοῦ, cf. ὅς Possess.) κτεάνων εὖ πασχέμεν to have the good of, enjoy one’s own, like ἀπολαύω, γεύομαι, etc., Thgn. 1009, cf. Pi. N. 1.32; εὖ πάσχειν receive benefits, opp. εὖ δρᾶν, A. Eu. 868, Th. 2.40, etc.; ἀνθ’ ὧν ἔπασχον εὖ.. χάριν δοῦναι S. OC 1489; τιμᾶσθαι.. ἐν τῇ μνήμῃ τῶν εὖ πεπονθότων Aeschin. 3.182; εὖ παθεῖν ὑπό τινων Pl. Grg. 519d, etc.: also with an Adj., π. ἀγαθά Hdt. 2.37; τι ἐσλόν Pi. P. 9.89, cf. Alc. Supp. 22.5; τερπνόν τι S. Aj. 521, cf. Theoc. 7.83; χαρτά, ὅσια, E. Ph. 618, Hec. 788; γλυκέα, χαρίεντα π., Ar. Pax 591, Ec. 794; δίκαια Din. 1.10; φιλικὰ ὑπό τινος X. Cyr. 4.6.6.

2. without Adv., with reference to evil, used for κακῶς or κακὰπ., μάλα πόλλ’ ἔπαθον καὶ πόλλ’ ἐμόγησα Od. 5.223, cf. Il. 23.607; εἴ κεν μάλα πολλὰ πάθοι 22.220; ὁτιοῦν π. suffer anything whatever, Isoc. 12.133, etc.: abs., παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω by hard experience, Hes. Op. 218, cf. S. OT 403; ὁ παθών the injured parly, Pl. Lg. 730a, 878c: — Phrases: μή τι πάθῃς or πάθοι, lest thou, lest he suffer any ill, Od. 17.596, Il. 5.567, cf. 11.470, etc.; μή τι πάθωμεν 13.52: hence εἴ τι πάθοιμι or ἤν τι πάθω, as euphemism, if aught were to happen to me, i.e. if I were to die, Callin. 1.17, Hdt. 8.102, Ar. Ec. 1105, V. 385, Lys. 19.51, Theoc. 8.10; ἂν οὗτός τι πάθῃ D. 4.11; ἐάν τινα ἀνθρώπινα πάσχῃ IG 3.74.13; so εἴ τι πείσεται.. ἅδε γᾶ E. Ph. 244 (lyr.); ἤν τι ναῦς πάθῃ Id. IT 755, cf. Syngr. ap. D. 35.13. in Law, suffer punishment, pay the penalty, Lys. 20.30; π. ὡς ἱερόσυλος SIG 1016.7 (Iasos, iv B. C.), cf. 1 Peter 4:15; ὡς προδότης καὶ ἐπιβουλεύων τῷ δήμῳ πασχέτω τι Aen. Tact. 11.9; τιμᾶν ὅ τι χρὴ παθεῖν.. ἢ ἀποτεῖσαι Pl. Plt. 299a (-τίνειν codd.), cf. Ap. 36b, X. Mem. 2.9.5, IG 12.65.50, etc.
3. τί πάθω; what is to become of me? ὤμοι ἐγώ, τί π.; Il. 11.404, Od. 5.465, S. OC 216 (lyr.), Theoc. 3.24; sts. what (else) am I to do? Ar. Nu. 798; so esp. τί γὰρ π.; E. Hec. 614, Supp. 257, Ar. Av. 1432, etc.; ὡμολόγηκα· τί γὰρ π.; I allow it — how can I help it? Pl. Euthd. 302d, cf. Hdt. 4.118.
4. in 2 sg., τί πάσχεις; what’ s the matter with you? Ar. Nu. 708, Av. 1044; τί χρῆμα πάσχεις; Id. Nu. 816: so in aor. part., τί παθών ; τί παθόντε λελάσμεθα θούριδος ἀλκῆς; what possesses us that we have forgotten.. ? Il. 11.313; but τί παθόντες γαῖαν ἔδυτε; what befell you that you died ? Od. 24.106; also οὐδὲν θαυμαστὸν ἔπαθεν.. πεισθείς no wonder that he was induced, Antipho 2.4.7.
5. to be ill, suffer, c. acc. of the part affected, π. τοὺς πόδας, τὴν πλευράν, PSI 4.293.23 (iii A. D.), PGen. 56.27 (iv A. D.): abs. in part., ὁ πάσχων, almost = ὁ κάμνων, the patient, PMag. Par. 1.3017; μεταβαίνει ἀπὸ τῶν παθῶν ἐπὶ τοὺς πάσχοντας ἀνθρώπους Gal. 16.583, cf. 15.501, Sor. Fasc. 45, al. in later Stoic Philos., πάσχειν is to be acted upon by outward objects, take impressions from, them, opp. ἀποπάσχω, mostly folld. by ὅτι, to be led to suppose that.., Arr. Epict. 1.2.3, 1.18.1, etc.: also c. acc., have experience of, ἀρετήν, λόγον, Ph. 2.449, 1.121. (Π ṇ θσκω, fut. Πένθ-σομαι, cf. πένθος.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πάσχω; 2 aorist ἔπαθον; perfect πέπονθα (Luke 13:2; Hebrews 2:18); from Homer down; to be affected or have been affected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undergo; it is a vox media — used in either a good or a bad sense; as, ὅσα πεπονθασι καί ὅσα αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο, of perils and deliverance from them, Esther 9:26 (for רָאָה); hence, κακῶς πάσχειν, to stiffer sadly, be in bad plight, of a sick person, Matthew 17:15 where L Tr text WH text κακῶς ἔχειν (on the other hand, εὖ πάσχειν, to be well off, in good case, often in Greek writings from Pindar down).

1. in a bad sense, of misfortunes, to suffer, to undergo evils, to be afflicted (so everywhere in Homer and Hesiod; also in the other Greek writings where it is used absolutely): absolutely, Luke 22:15; Luke 24:46; Acts 1:3; Acts 3:18; Acts 17:3; 1 Corinthians 12:26; Hebrews 2:18; Hebrews 9:26; 1 Peter 2:19f, 23; 1 Peter 3:17; 1 Peter 4:15, 19; Hebrews 13:12; ὀλίγον, a little while, 1 Peter 5:10; πάσχειν τί, Matthew 27:19; Mark 9:12; Luke 13:2; (); Acts 28:5; 2 Timothy 1:12; (Hebrews 5:8 cf. Winers Grammar, 166 (158)
   a. ; Buttmann, § 143, 10); Revelation 2:10; παθήματα πάσχειν, 2 Corinthians 1:6; τί ἀπό with the genitive of person, Matthew 16:21; Luke 9:22; Luke 17:25; πάσχειν ὑπό with the genitive of person, Matthew 17:12; ὑπό τίνος, Mark 5:28; 1 Thessalonians 2:14; πάσχειν ὑπέρ τίνος, in behalf of a person or thing, Acts 9:16; Philippians 1:29; 2 Thessalonians 1:5; with the addition of a dative of reference or respect (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 31, 6), σαρκί, 1 Peter 4:1a; ἐν σαρκί, ibid. b (yet G L T Tr WH omit ἐν; cf. Winer’s Grammar, 412 (384)); πάσχειν περί with the genitive of the thing and ὑπέρ with the genitive of person 1 Peter 3:18 (R G WH marginal reading; cf. Winer’s Grammar, 373 (349); 383 (358) note); πάσχειν διά δικαιοσύνην, 1 Peter 3:14.
2. in a good sense, of pleasant experiences; but nowhere so unless either the adverb εὖ or an accusative of the thing be added (Ὑπομνῆσαι, ὅσα παθοντες ἐξ αὐτοῦ (i. e. Θεοῦ) καί πηλικων εὐεργεσιῶν μεταλαβόντες ἀχάριστοι πρός αὐτόν γένοιντο, Josephus, Antiquities 3, 15, 1; examples from Greek authors are given in Passow, under the word, II. 5; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, II. 2)): Galatians 3:4, on which see γέ, 3 c. (Compare: προπάσχω, συμπάσχω.)

Question 345

παιδεύω

Answer 345

(ἐπαίδευον), -, ἐπαίδευσα, -, πεπαίδευμαι, ἐπαιδεύθην
I teach, chastise, train
instruct, train, educate, as an on-going matter, in accord with rules and proper conduct; discipline, punish, for the purpose of better behavior
Definition:
to educate, instruct, children, Acts 7:22; 22:3; genr. παιδεύομαι, to be taught, learn, 1 Tim. 1:20; to admonish, instruct by admonition, 2 Tim. 2:25; Tit. 2:12; in NT to chastise, chasten, 1 Cor. 11:32; 2 Cor. 6:9; Heb. 12:6, 7, 10; Rev. 3:19; of criminals, to scourge, Lk. 23:16, 22*

to train children
to be instructed or taught or learn
to cause one to learn
to chastise
to chastise or castigate with words, to correct
of those who are moulding the character of others by reproof and admonition
of God
to chasten by the affliction of evils and calamities
to chastise with blows, to scourge
of a father punishing his son
of a judge ordering one to be scourged

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παιδ-εύω,

fut. -σω: aor. ἐπαίδευσα: pf. πεπαίδευκα: — Med., fut. παιδεύσομαι E. Fr. 1068: aor. ἐπαιδευσάμην Pl. R. 546b: — Pass., fut. παιδευθήσομαι ib. 376c; παιδεύσομαι (in pass. sense) Id. Cri. 54a: aor. ἐπαιδεύθην S. OC 562, Pl. Mx. 236a, etc.: pf. πεπαίδευμαι X. Cyr. 5.2.17, Pl. Lg. 920a, etc.: (παῖς): —

I bring up or rear a child, λευκὸν αὐτὴν.. ἐπαίδευσεν γάλα S. Fr. 648: — Pass., ἐπαιδεύθην ξένος Id. OC 562; Ἅιδου δ’ ἐν δόμοις παιδεύεται E. Ion 953: but mostly,

II opp. τρέφω or ἐκτρέφω (Pl. Cri. 54a, al.),

1. train and teach, educate, παῖδας, etc., S. Tr. 451, E. Supp. 917; τοὺς νέους Pl. Ap. 24e, etc.; κάκιστον ἡ εὐπετείη παιδεῦσαι τὴν νεότητα Democr. 178; οἱ πεπαιδευμένοι educated, cultured persons, opp. ἀυαθεῖς, Id. 185; τὴν Ἑλλάδα πεπαίδευκεν.. ὁ ποιητής Pl. R. 606e; also, of animals, train, X. Eq. 10.6 (Pass.), v. infr.: — Constr.: π. τινά τινι educate in or by.., παιδείᾳ πεπαιδευμένους Pl. Lg. 741a; μουσικῇ καὶ γυμναστικῇ π. τινάς Id. R. 430a; ἔθεσι τοὺς φύλακας ib. 522a; π. τινὰ ἐν τοῖς ἔργοις Lys. 2.3, etc.; ἐν ἤθεσι, ἐν ἀρετῇ, Isoc. 4.82, 12.138; ἐν μουσικῇ καὶ γυμναστικῇ Pl. Cri. 50e; π. τινὰ εἰς ἀρετήν, εἰς τέχνην τινά, Id. Grg. 519e, X. Mem. 2.1.17 (Pass.); πεπαιδευμένον πρὸς ἀρετήν, πρὸς τὸ μετρίων δεῖσθαι, Pl. R. 492e, X. Mem. 1.2.1 (Pass.); πρὸς τὴν πολιτείαν βλέποντας Arist. Pol. 1260b15; ἐπ’ ἀρετήν X. Cyn. 13.3 (Pass.); περὶ βύρσας Id. Ap. 29, etc.: c. dupl. acc., π. τινά τι teach one a thing, Antipho 3.2.3, Pl. R. 414d; ἀείμνηστον παιδείαν αὐτοὺς ἐπαίδευσε Aeschin. 3.148: c. acc. rei only, teach a thing, Arist. Pol. 1337b23: c. acc. et inf., π. τινὰ κιθαρίζειν Hdt. 1.155: with predicative Adj. or Subst., π. τινὰ κακόν S. OC 919; γυναῖκας σώφρονας π. E. Andr. 601: — in Pass., c. acc. rei, to be taught a thing, παιδεύεσθαι τέχνην Pl. Lg. 695a, al.; ἀκούσματα Men. Kith.Fr. 5: c. acc. cogn. (attracted), ἀπὸ παιδεύσιος τῆς ἐπεπαίδευτο Hdt. 4.78: c. inf., π. ἄρχειν X. Mem. 2.1.3; ὄρνιθες ἐπεπαίδευντό σοι.. ὥστε ὑπηρετεῖν Id. Cyr. 1.6.39 (in later Gr., of things, ἡ ὕλη παιδεύεται φέρεσθαι.. Pall. in Hp. 2.106 D.); ἐν τοῖς ἀναγκαιοτάτοις π. to be educated only in what is indispensable, Th. 1.84: esp. in pf. part. Pass. πεπαιδευμένος, educated, trained, expert, X. Cyr. 5.2.17; opp. ἀπαίδευτος, Pl. Lg. 654d; ἱκανῶς π. ib.b; φαυλοτέρως π. δικασταί ib. 876d; opp. δημιουργός, Id. Amat. 135d; ἰατρὸς ὅ τε δημιουργὸς καὶ ὁ ἀρχιτεκτονικός, καὶ τρίτος ὁ π. περὶ τὴν τέχνην Arist. Pol. 1282a4; π. also, well-bred, Id. EN 1128a21: — Med., to have any one taught, cause him to be educated, E. Fr. 1068; οὓς ἡγεμόνας πόλεως ἐπαιδεύσασθε educated as leaders, Pl. R. 546b: c. acc. cogn., πολλὰ ἃ ἐκεῖνος αὐτὸν ἐπαιδεύσατο Id. Men. 93d: — also in Act. in this sense, ἐν Ἀρίφρονος ἐπαίδευε had him educated in the house of Ariphron, Id. Prt. 320a, cf. Cri. 50e: c. acc. cogn., Id. Men. 93e; of animals, cause to be trained, Nausicr. 2.8 (whereas Med. is sts. used like Act., τροφαὶ αἱ παιδευόμεναι educating nurture, i.e. education, E. IA 561 (lyr.)).
2. abs., give instruction, teach, Isoc. 15.226.

III

1. correct, discipline, τοὐμὸν ἦθος π. νοεῖς S. Aj. 595; διαίτῃ τὴν ψυχὴν ἐπαίδευσε καὶ τὸ σῶμα X. Mem. 1.3.5; ὕβρις πεπαιδευμένη chastened (i.e. well-bred) insolence, Aristotle’s definition of εὐτραπελία, Rh. 1389b11.
2. chastise, punish, LXX Hosea 7:12, Luke 23:16, al.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παιδεύω; imperfect ἐπαίδευον; 1 aorist participle παιδεύσας; passive, present παιδεύομαι; I aorist ἐπαιδεύθην; perfect participle πεπαιδευμένος; (παῖς); Sept for יָסַר;

1. as in classical Greek, properly, to train children: τινα with a dative of the thing in which one is instructed, in passive, σοφία (Winer’s Grammar, 221 (213) n.), Acts 7:22 R G L WH (cf. Buttmann, § 134, 6) (γράμμασιν, Josephus, contra Apion 1, 4 at the end); ἐν σοφία, ibid. T Tr; τινα κατά ἀκρίβειαν, in passive, Acts 22:3. passive, to be instructed or taught, to learn: followed by an infinitive, 1 Timothy 1:20; to cause one to learn: followed by ἵνα, Titus 2:12.
2. to chastise;
   a. to chastise or castigate with words, to correct: of those who are moulding the character of others by reproof and admonition, 2 Timothy 2:25 (τινα παιδεύειν καί ῥυθμίζειν λόγῳ, Aelian v. h. 1, 34).
   b. in Biblical and ecclesiastical use employed of God, to chasten by the infliction of evils and calamities (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 2, 1 b.): 1 Corinthians 11:32; 2 Corinthians 6:9; Hebrews 12:6; Revelation 3:19 (Proverbs 19:18; Proverbs 29:17; Wis. 3:5 Wis. 11:10 (9); 2 Macc. 6:16 2Macc. 10:4).
   c. to chastise with blows, to scourge: of a father punishing a son, Hebrews 12:7,(); of a judge ordering one to be scourged, Luke 23:16, 22 ((Deuteronomy 22:18)).

Question 346

παιδεία, ας, ἡ

Answer 346

instruction which aims at increasing virtue; education, training, discipline, chastisement, upbringing

Thayer’s Definition
the whole training and education of children (which relates to the cultivation of mind and morals, and employs for this purpose, commands and admonitions, reproof and punishment) It also includes the training and care of the body
whatever in adults also cultivates the soul, esp. by correcting mistakes and curbing passions.
instruction which aims at increasing virtue
chastisement, chastening, (of the evils with which God visits men for their amendment)

training
discipline, training
Definition:
education, training up, nurture, of children, Eph. 6:4; instruction, discipline, 2 Tim. 3:16; in NT correction, chastisement, Heb. 12:5, 7, 8, 11*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παιδεία, ἡ,

I

1. rearing of a child, A. Th. 18.
2. training and teaching, education, opp. τροφή, Ar. Nu. 961, Th. 2.39 (pl.); π. καὶ τροφή Pl. Phd. 107d, Phlb. 55d.
3. its result, mental culture, learning, education, ἡ π. εὐτυχοῦσι κόσμος, ἀτυχοῦσι καταφύγιον Democr. 180, cf. Pl. Prt. 327d, Grg. 470e, R. 376e, Arist. Pol. 1338a30, etc.; τῆς Λακεδαιμονίων π. Pl. Prt. 343a: in pl., parts or systems of education, Id. Lg. 653c, 804d.
4. culture of trees, Thphr. CP 3.7.4.
5. πλεκτὰν Αἰγύπτου παιδείαν ἐξηρτήσασθε the twisted handiwork of Egypt, i.e. (acc. to Sch.) ropes of papyrus, E. Tr. 129 (lyr.).
6. anything taught or learned, art, science, π. ἱερή, of medicine, IG 14.2104.
7. chastisement, LXX Proverbs 22:15, Hebrews 12:5.

II

1. youth, childhood, παιδείης πολυήρατον ἄνθος Thgn. 1305, cf. 1348; ἐκ παιδείας φίλος Lys. 20.11; so (prob.) στερρὰν παιδείαν E. IT 206 (lyr.).
2. in collect. sense, body of youths, παιδείας λιπαρὴς ὄχλος Luc. Amos 6:1-14.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παιδεία (Tdf. παιδία; (see Iota)), παιδείας, ἡ, (παιδεύω), the Sept. for מוּסָר;

1. the whole training and education of children (which relates to the cultivation of mind and morals, and employs for this purpose now commands and admonitions, now reproof and punishment): Ephesians 6:4 (cf. Winers Grammar, 388 (363) note); (in Greek writings from Aeschylus on, it includes also the care and training of the body.) (See especially Trench, Synonyms, § xxxii.; cf. Jowett’s Plato, index under the word Education).
2. “whatever in adults also cultivates the soul, especially by correcting mistakes and curbing the passions “; hence,
   a. instruction which aims at the increase of virtue: 2 Timothy 3:16.
   b. according to Biblical usage chastisement, chastening (of the evils with which God visits men for their amendment): Hebrews 12:5 (Proverbs 3:11), f (see ὑπομένω, 2 b.), ; (Proverbs 15:5, and often in the O. T.; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch. on Sap., p. 51; (cf. (Plato) definition παιδεία. δύναμις θεραπευτικη

Question 347

πάντως

Answer 347

entirely, assuredly
surely, certainly, by all possible means, quite
Definition:
wholly, altogether; at any rate, by all means, 1 Cor. 9:22; by impl. surely, assuredly, certainly, Lk. 4:23; Acts 21:22; 28:4; 1 Cor. 9:10; οὐ πάντως, in nowise, not in the least, Rom. 3:9; 1 Cor. 5:10; 16:12

Thayer's Definition
altogether
in any and every way, by all means
doubtless, surely, certainly
in no wise, not at all

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πάντως,

I Adv., (πᾶς) in all ways, ἄλλως τε π. καὶ.., i.e. especially (since).., A. Pers. 689, Eu. 726, Pl. Ap. 35d; σκιδνάμενον πάντῃ π. Parm. 2.3; περιφέρεσθαι καὶ π. φέρεσθαι Pl. Cra. 411b, cf. Grg. 527a: in Hom. always folld. by οὐ, in no wise, by no means, Il. 8.450, Od. 19.91, al.; πάντως γὰρ οὐ πείσεις νιν A. Pr. 335, cf. Hdt. 5.34, Pl. Grg. 497b, etc.: without οὐ first in Parm. l.c., A. (v. supr.); ἔδεε πάντως it was absolutely necessary, Hdt. 1.31; εἰ δὴ δεῖ γε π. Id. 7.10. θ; π. θελῆσαι to wish at all hazards, Id. 2.42; εἰ π. ἐλεύσονται if they positively will go, Id. 6.9; π. κου πυνθάνεαι no doubt, Id. 7.157: with an Adj., π. ἀναρίστητος Alex. 233: freq. with πᾶς or its derivs., Th. 7.87, Pl. Criti. 107d, al.; cf. πάντῃ 11.

II

1. in strong affirmations, at all events, at any rate, A. Proverbs 16:1-33, Hdt. 5.111, Pl. Ap. 33d, 1 Corinthians 9:22, etc.; so νηστεύωμεν δὲ π. Ar. Th. 984 (lyr.); π. κρέ’ ἡμῖν ἐστίν Ephipp. 15.11; π. γε μήν Ar. Eq. 232; π. δήπου Id. Th. 805; assuredly, opp. ἴσως, Jul. Or. 7.222a; παρήγγειλά σοι ὅτι μὴ ἀπέλθῃς.., καὶ ἀπῆλθες π. and you did (emphat.), Sammelb. 7249.5 (iii/iv A. D.); τάχ’ οὖν.. μᾶλλον δὲ π. nay rather I am sure, Herod. 7.89; π. ὅτι.. evidently because.., Dam. Pr. 96 (but, it follows that.., ib. 86).
2. c. imper., in command or entreaty, Hdt. 1.156, etc.; ἀλλ’ ἐμοὶ πείθεσθε π. do but obey me, Eup. 357; π. παρατίθετε just put on the table, Pl. Smp. 175b; καὶ τὸ ἱερεῖον δὲ π. ἡμῖν ἀπόστειλον be sure to send.., PCair.Zen. 191.14 (iii B. C.).
3. in answers, by all means, no doubt, Pl. R. 574b; πάντως γάρ.. Ar. Pl. 273; π. δήπου And. 1.102, Pl. Phd. 75e, etc.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πάντως (from πᾶς), adverb, altogether (Latinomnino), i. e.

a. in any and every way, by all means: 1 Corinthians 9:22 (so from Herodotus down).
b. doubtless, surely, certainly: Luke 4:23; Acts 18:21 (Rec.); ; 1 Corinthians 9:10 (Tobit 14:8; Aelian v. h. 1, 32; by Plato in answers (cf. our colloquial by all means)). with the negative οὐ, α. where οὐ is postpositive, in no wise, not at all: 1 Corinthians 16:12 (often so as far back as Homer). β. when the negative precedes, the force of the adverb is restricted: οὐ πάντως, not entirely, not altogether, 1 Corinthians 5:10; not in all things, not in all respects, Romans 3:9; (rarely equivalent to πάντως οὐ, as in Ep. ad Diogn. 9 [ET] ‘God οὐ πάντως ἐφηδόμενος τοῖς ἁμαρτήμασιν ἡμῶν.’ Likewise, οὐδέν πάντως in Herodotus 5, 34. But in Theognis, 305 edition, Bekker οἱ κακοί οὐ πάντως κακοί ἐκ γαστρός γεγόνασι κτλ. is best translated not wholly, not entirely. Cf. Winers Grammar, 554f (515f); Buttmann, 389f (334f) (on whose interpretation of Romans, the passage cited, although it is that now generally adopted, see Weiss in Meyer 6te Aufl.)).

Question 348

ἔμπορος

Answer 348

a merchant

Thayer’s Definition
one on a journey, whether by sea or by land, esp. for trade
a merchant as opposed to a retailer or petty tradesman

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἔμπορ-ος, ον,

I one who goes on ship-board as a passenger, Od. 2.319, 24.300.

II = ὁ ἐν πόρψ ὤν, wayfarer, traveller, B. 17.36, A. Ch. 661, S. OC 25, 303, E. Alc. 999 (lyr.).

III

1. merchant, trader, Semon. 16, Hdt. 2.39, Th. 6.31, etc.; distd. from the retail-dealer (κάπηλος) by his making voyages and importing goods himself, Pl. Prt. 313d, R. 371a, Arist. Pol. 1291a16, Sch. Ar. Pl. 1156: metaph., ἔ. κακῶν A. Pers. 598; ἔ. βίου a trafficker in life, E. Hipp. 964; ἔ. περὶ τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς μαθήματα Pl. Sph. 231d; ὥρης ἔ. a dealer in beauty, AP 9.416 (Phil.); ἔ. γυναικῶν IG 14.2000.
2. as Adj., = ἐμπορικός, ναῦς ἔ. D.S. 5.12.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἔμπορος (see ἐν, III. 3), ἐμπόρου, ὁ (πόρος);

1. equivalent to ὁ ἐπ’ ἀλλοτρίας νεώς πλέων μισθοῦ, ὁ ἐπιβάτης; so Hesychius, with whom agree Phavorinus and the Schol. ad Aristophanes, Plutarch, 521; and so the word is used by Homer.
2. after Homer one on a journey, whether by sea or by land, especially for traffic; hence,
3. a merchant (opposed to κάπηλος a retailer, petty tradesman): Revelation 18:3, 11, 15, 23; ἄνθρωπος ἔμπορος (see ἄνθρωπος, 4 a.), Matthew 13:45 (WH text omits ἄνθρωπος). (the Sept. for סֹחֵד and רֹכֵל.)

Question 349

διαπεράω

Answer 349

I cross over

Thayer’s Definition
to pass over, cross over, i.e. a river, a lake

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
διαπεράω,

1. go over or across, ῥοάς E. Tr. 1151; πελάγη Isoc. 1.19; δ. ἐπ’ οἶδμα E. IT 395 (lyr.); δ. πόλιν pass through it, Ar. Av. 1264; δ. Ἑλλάδα E. Supp. 117; δ. εἰς Ἰταλίαν Arist. Fr. 485; of Time, δ. τὸν βίον pass through life, X. Oec. 11.7. διαπερᾶν Μολοσσίαν reign through all Molossia, E. Andr. 1248 codd.
2. pass through, pierce, κνήμην διεπέρασεν Ἀργεῖον δόρυ Id. Ph. 1394; traverse, ἧπαρ, of a vein, Aret. SA 2.8 (cf. διαπεραίνω).
3. οἶσθα διαπερῶν by traversing, i.e. by experience, A. Th. 994 (lyr.), cf. Sch.

II reach, arrive at a place, PFlor. 247.9 (iii A.D.).

III trans., carry over, ὕδωρ ποταμοῦ σῶμα δ. Eub. 151, cf. Luc. DMort. 20.1.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διαπεράω, διαπέρω; 1 aorist διεπέρασα; to pass over, cross over, e. g. a river, a lake: Matthew 9:1; Matthew 14:34; Mark 6:53 (here T WH follow with ἐπί τήν γῆν, for (to) the land (cf. R. V. marginal reading)); followed by εἰς with the accusative of place, Mark 5:21; Acts 21:2; πρός with the accusative of person Luke 16:26. ((Euripides), Aristophanes, Xenophon, subsequent writings; the Sept. for עָבַר.)

Question 350

ἀπορέω

Answer 350

I am in doubt, perplexed

Thayer’s Definition
to be without resources, to be in straits, to be left wanting, to be embarrassed, to be in doubt, not to know which way to turn
to be at a loss with one’s self, be in doubt
not to know how to decide or what to do, to be perplexed

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀπορέω

(A), Ion. for ἀφοράω.

ἀπορ-έω

(B), Lacon. 1 pl. ἀπορίομες X. HG 1.1.23: aor. ἠπόρησα Th. 1.63, etc.: pf. ἠπόρηκα Pl. Sph. 244a, etc.: — Pass., fut. ἀπορηθήσομαι (συν-) S.E. M. 10.5, but Med. in pass. sense ἀπορήσομαι Arist. MM 1200a11: aor. ἠπορήθην, pf. ἠπόρημαι, both in act. and pass. sense (v. infr.): —

I to be ἄπορος, i. e. without means or resource: hence,

1. to be at a loss, be in doubt, be puzzled, mostly folld. by relat. clause, ἀ. ὅκως διαβήσεται Hdt. 1.75; ὅτῳ τρόπῳ διασωθήσεται Th. 3.109; ὅ τι λέξω δ’ ἀπορῶ S. OT 486 (lyr.); ἀ. ὅπῃ, ὁπόθεν, ὅποι, Th. 1.107, 8.80, X. HG 5.4.44; ὅτι χρὴ ποιεῖν Id. Cyr. 4.5.38; τίνα χρὴ τρόπον.. D. 3.3; ἀ. εἰ.. Pl. Prt. 326e; πότερα.. X. Mem. 1.4.6; ἀ. ὁποτέραν τῶν ὁδῶν τράπηται ib. 2.1.21; ἀ. μή.. fear lest.., Pl. Alc. 2.142d: with acc.added, ἀ. τὴν ἔλασιν ὅκως διεκπερᾷ to be at a loss about his march, how to cross, Hdt. 3.4: c. acc. only, ἀ. τὴν ἐξαγωγήν to be at a loss about it, Id. 4.179, cf. Ar. Ec. 664, Pl. Prt. 348c, al.: also c. inf., to be at a loss how to do, Ar. V. 590, Pl. Plt. 262e, Lys. 9.7: — also ἀ. περί τινος Pl. Phd. 84c, Grg. 462b, al.; ἀ. διὰ τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων ὅθεν ἄρξομαι And. 4.10; ἐς πολλά S. Tr. 1243: abs., Hdt. 6.134; οὐκ ἀπορήσας without hesitation, Id. 1.159; τὸ δ’ ἀπορεῖν ἀνδρὸς κακοῦ E. HF 106, etc.: — Med. used like Act., Hdt. 2.121. γ; ὡς ἠπόρημαι.. τάδε E. IA 537; ἠπορούμην ὅτι χρησαίμην Lys. 3.10, cf. Pl. Prt. 321c: so in aor. Pass., πολλὰ.. ἀπορηθείς D. 27.53.
2. in Dialectic, start a question, raise a difficulty, ἀπορία ἣν ἀπορεῖς Pl. Prt. 324d; ἀ. περί τινος Arist. Ph. 194a15, al.; τὰ αὐτὰ περί τινος Metaph. 1085a35; ἀ. πότερον.. Pol. 1283b36; ἀπορήσειε δ’ ἄν τις τί.. EN 1096a34, cf. 1145b21, Plb. 1.64.1, al.: — Pass., τὸ ἀπορούμενον, τὸ ἀπορηθέν, the difficulty just started, the puzzle before us, Pl. Sph. 243b, Lg. 799c, cf. Hp. VM 1; τὰ ἠπορημένα Arist. Pol. 1281a38; ἀπορεῖται there is a question or difficulty, πότερον.. Id. EN 1c99 b9; μή.. ib. 1159a6.
3. Pass., of things, to be left wanting, left unprovided for, τῶν δεομένων γίγνεσθαι οὐδὲν ἀπορεῖται X. Lac. 13.7, cf. Oec. 8.10; to fail, turn out a failure, opp. εὐπορεῖσθαι, Hp. Art. 47.

II c. gen. rei, to be at a loss for, in want of, ἀπορεῖς δὲ τοῦ σύ; S. Ph. 898; ἀλφίτων Ar. Pax 636; πάντων Id. Pl. 531; τροφῆς Thuc. 8.81; ξυμμάχων X. Cyr. 4.2.39; τοσαύτης δαπάνης Id. Mem. 1.3.5; λόγων Pl. Smp. 193e: — Med., Id. Lg. 925b.

III ἀ. τινί to be at a loss by reason of, by means of something, X. An. 1.3.8, Isoc. 4.147. to be in want, be poor, opp. εὐπορέω, in Med., ὅταν ἀπορῆταί τις Antiph. 123, but Act., Timocl. 11, E. Fr. 953.19; opp. πλουτέω, Pl. Smp. 203e: — Pass., ἄνθρωπος ἠπορημένος Com.Adesp. 249. — Chiefly Prose and Com.; never in A., thrice in S., twice in E.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀπορέω, ἀπόρω: imperfect 3 person singular ἠπόρει (Mark 6:20 T WH Tr marginal reading); (present middle ἀποροῦμαι); to be ἄπορος (from alpha privative and πόρος a transit, ford, way, revenue, resource), i. e. “to be without resources, to be in straits, to be left wanting, to be embarrassed, to be in doubt, not to know which way to turn”; (imperfect in Mark 6:20 (see above) πολλά ἠπόρει he was in perplexity about many things or much perplexed (cf. Thucydides 5, 40, 3; Xenophon, Hell. 6, 1, 4; Herodotus 3, 4; 4, 179; Arlstot. meteorolog. 1, 1); elsewhere) middle, to be at a loss with oneself, be in doubt; not to know how to decide or what to do, to be perplexed: absolutely 2 Corinthians 4:8; περί τίνος, Luke 24:4 L T Tr WH; περί τίνος τίς λέγει, John 13:22; ἀποροῦμαι ἐν ὑμῖν I am perplexed about you, I know not how to deal with you, in what style to address you, Galatians 4:20; ἀπορούμενος ἐγώ εἰς (T Tr WH omit εἰς) τήν περί τούτου (τούτων L T Tr WH) ζήτησιν I being perplexed how to decide in reference to the inquiry concerning him (or these things), Acts 25:20. (Often in secular authors from Herodotus down; often also in the Sept.) (Compare: διαπορέω, ἐξαπορέω.)

Question 351

πιπράσκω

Answer 351

I sell

Thayer’s Definition
to sell
of price, one into slavery
of the master to whom one is sold as a slave
metaph.
sold under sin, entirely under the control of the love of sinning
of one bribed to give himself up wholly to another’s will

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πιπράσκω, v. cross πέρνημι .

πέρνημι,

3 pl. περνᾶσι Thgn. 1215, Hippon. 46 ( 2 sg. περνᾷς dub. in 52 ); part. περνάς Il. 22.45, Hippon. 52 (v. l.), E. Cyc. 271: Ep. Iterat. 3 sg. πέρνασκε Il. 24.752: Ep. fut. inf. περάαν 21.454 (but pres. περάω is wrongly inferred from forms like ἐπέρασσα ): aor. ἐπέρασσα ib. 40, Od. 15.387; part. περάσαντες h.Cer. 132; aor. opt. 3 sg. περάσειε [ᾰ ] Od. 14.297; aor. subj. 2 pl. περάσητε 15.453, cf. ἀποπέρνημι; also aor. ἔπρησα Schwyzer 714 (Samos, vi B. C. ): pf. πέπρᾱκα Alex. 146.1, Is. 7.31, etc. (v. infr.): plpf. ἐπεπράκειν [ᾱ] D. 18.23: — Pass., pres. 3 sg. πέρνᾰται Ar. Eq. 176, Hsch.: impf. 3 pl. ἐπέρναντο Pi. I. 2.7; part. περνάμενος [ᾰ] Il. 18.292: pf. part. once πεπερημένος 21.58; elsewh. the pf. is Att. πέπρᾱμαι, A. Ch. 132, S. Ph. 978, etc., inf. πεπρᾶσθαι Ar. Ach. 734, Pax 1011, And. 1.73, etc.; Ion. πέπρημαι Hdt. 2.56, imper. πεπρήσθω SIG 45.35 (Halic., V B.C.), inf. πεπρῆσθαι ib.38: plpf. ἐπέπρᾱτο Ar. Ach. 522: aor. Trag. and Att. ἐπράθην [ᾱ] Sol. 36.7, A. Ch. 915, And. 1.133, etc.; Ion. ἐπρήθην Hdt. 1.156, SIG 229.5 (Erythrae, iv B. C. ), etc.: Att. fut. πεπράσομαι [ᾱ] Ar. V. 179, X. An. 7.1.36, later πρᾱθήσομαι Sopat. 6, LXX Leviticus 25:23, etc., cf. Moer. p.294 P.: Aeol. pres. inf. πόρναμεν Hsch. (fort. πορνάμεναι ): pres. part. Pass. πορνάμεναι Id. — In Att. the usual pres. in act. sense is πωλέω, fut. ἀποδώσομαι, aor. ἀπεδόμην: from πέπρᾱμαι, ἐπράθην, etc. is formed the later pres. Pass. πιπράσκομαι, first found in Lys. 18.20, interpol. in Pl. Phd. 69b, Sph. 224a, and from this the pres. Act. πιπράσκω first found in Luc. Asin. 32: impf. ἐπίπρασκον Plu. 2.178c, Per. 16; Ion. πιπρήσκω Call. Iamb. 1.93, v.l. in Hp. Ep. 17: —

export for sale, in Ep. usu. of exporting captives to foreign parts for sale as slaves, πολλοὺς ζωοὺς ἑλον ἠδὲ πέρασσα Il. 21.102, cf. Od. 14.297; π. τινὰ Αῆμνον sell one to Lemnos, Il. 21.40; ἐς Αῆμνον ib. 58 ( Pass. ), 78; σέ γε . . νηυσὶν λάβον ἠδ’ ἐπέρασσαν τοῦδ’ ἀνδρὸς πρὸς δώμαθ’ Od. 15.387; κατ’ ἀλλοθρόους ἀνθρώπους ib. 453; δήσειν καὶ περάαν νήσων ἔπι τηλεδαπάων Il. 21.454; κτείνων καὶ περνὰς ν. ἔ. τ. 22.45; πέρνασχ’ ὅν τιν’ ἕλεσκε πέρην ἁλὸς . . ἐς Σάμον 24.752; οὐδ’ ἡμᾶς περνᾶσι Thgn. l. c., cf. Hippon. 46; later also of other merchandise, ὡς χαραδριὸν περνάς Id. 52 (v.l. μῶν . . περνᾷς;; τοῖς ξένοις τὰ χρήματα περνάντα σ’ εἶδον E. Cyc. l. c.: — Pass., κτήματα περνάμεν’ ἵκει Il. 18.292, cf. Pi. I. 2.7; πάντα . . πέρναται Ar. Eq. 176 .

2. simply, sell (as always in the Att. forms), τὰ κτήματα πέντε ταλάντων πεπρακότας Is. l.c.: — Pass., to be sold, esp. for exportation, Sol. l. c., Hdt. 1.156, A. Ch. 915, E. Ion 310; ἐς Αιβύην, ἐς Θεσπρωτούς, Hdt. 2.54, 56; ἐπ’ ἐξαγωγῇ SIG 45.38 (Halic., V B.C.); ὠνούμενά τε καὶ πιπρασκόμενα interpol. in Pl. Phd. 69b; τὸ ὠνηθὲν ἢ πραθέν Id. Lg. 850a; πραθείσης ὀλίγου [τῆς πεντηκοστῆς] the tax of 2 per cent. having been sold or let for a small sum, And. 1.133 .

II sell for a bribe, of political leaders, τοὺς πεπρακότας αὑτοὺς ἐκείνῳ D. 10.63, cf. 17.13; τὰ ὅλα πεπρακέναι Id. 18.28; τἆλλα πλὴν ἑαυτοὺς οἰομένοις πωλεῖν πρώτους ἑαυτοὺς πεπρακόσιν αἰσθέσθαι ib.46; τὴν πατρῴαν γῆν πεπρακέναι Din. 1.71; πεπρακότες τὴν τοῦ βίου παρρησίαν Alex. 146.1: metaph. in Pass., πέπραμαι I am bought and sold !, i. e. betrayed, ruined, πέπραμαι κἀπόλωλα S. Ph. 978; εὐμορφίᾳ πραθεῖσα E. Tr. 936 . (Cogn. with περάω (A), πέραν, OIr. renaid ‘he sells’.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πιπράσκω: imperfect ἐπίπρασκον; perfect πέπρακα; passive, present participle πιπρασκόμενος; perfect participle πεπραμένος; 1 aorist ἐπράθην; (from περάω to cross, to transport to a distant land); from Aeschylus and Herodotus down; the Sept. for מָכַר; to sell: Matthew 13:46 (on the use of the perfect, cf. Sophocles’ Glossary, etc., Introduction, § 82, 4) Acts 2:45; Acts 4:34; Acts 5:4; with the genitive of price, Matthew 26:9; Mark 14:5; John 12:5 (Deuteronomy 21:14); τινα, one into slavery, Matthew 18:25; hence, metaphorically, πεπραμένος ὑπό τήν ἁμαρτίαν (A. V. sold under sin) i. e. entirely under the control of the love of sinning, Romans 7:14 (ἐπράθησαν τοῦ ποιῆσαι τό πονηρόν, 2 Kings 17:17; 1 Macc. 1:15, cf. 1 Kings 20:25 (); with a dative of the master to whom one is sold as a slave, Leviticus 25:39; Deuteronomy 15:12; Deuteronomy 28:68; Baruch 4:6; Sophocles Trach. 252; ἑαυτόν τίνι, of one bribed to give himself up wholly to another’s will, τῷ Φιλίππῳ, Demosthenes, p. 148, 8).

Question 352

πόρνη

Answer 352

a prostitute, harlot

Thayer’s Definition
a woman who sells her body for sexual uses
a prostitute, a harlot, one who yields herself to defilement for the sake of gain
any woman indulging in unlawful sexual intercourse, whether for gain or for lust
metaph. an idolatress
of “Babylon” i.e. Rome, the chief seat of idolatry

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πόρν-η, ἡ,

harlot, prostitute, Archil. 142, Ar. Ach. 527, etc. (Prob.from πέρνημι, because Greek prostitutes were commonly bought slaves. )

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πόρνη, πόρνης, ἡ (from περάω, πέρνημι, to sell; Curtius, § 358), properly a woman who sells her body for sexual uses (cf. Xenophon, mem. 1, 6, 13), the Sept. for זונָה;

1. properly, a prostitute, a harlot, one who yields herself to defilement for the sake of gain (Aristophanes, Demosthenes, others); in the N. T. universally, any woman indulging in unlawful sexual intercourse, whether for gain or for lust: Matthew 21:31; Luke 15:30; 1 Corinthians 6:15; Hebrews 11:31; James 2:25.
2. Hebraistically (see πορνεία, b. and πορνεύω, 3), metaphorically, an idolatress; so of ‘Babylon’ i. e. Rome, the chief seat of idolatry: Revelation 17:1, 5, 15; Revelation 19:2.

Question 353

πόρνος

Answer 353

a fornicator

Thayer’s Definition
a man who prostitutes his body to another’s lust for hire
a male prostitute
a man who indulges in unlawful sexual intercourse, a fornicator

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πόρνος, ὁ,

catamite, Ar. Pl. 155, X. Mem. 1.6.13, D. 22.73, Alex. 242, etc.

2. sodomite, D. Ephesians 4:11, Phalar. Ephesians 4:1-32 .
3. in LXX and NT, fornicator, LXX Si. 23.16, 1 Corinthians 5:9, al.

II idolater, Suid.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πόρνος, πορνου, ὁ (for the etym. see πόρνη), a man who prostitutes his body to another’s lust for hire, a male prostitute, ((Aristophanes), Xenophon, Demosthenes, Aeschines, Lucian); universally, a man who indulges in unlawful sexual intercourse, a fornicator (Vulg. fornicator,fornicarius (Revelation 22:15impudicus)): 1 Corinthians 5:9-11; 1 Corinthians 6:9; Ephesians 5:5; 1 Timothy 1:10; Hebrews 12:16; Hebrews 13:4; Revelation 21:8; Revelation 22:15. (Sir. 23:16f.)

Question 354

καταπέτασμα

Answer 354

a veil, a curtain

Thayer’s Definition
a veil spread out, a curtain
the name given to the two curtains in the temple at Jerusalem, one of them at the entrance to the temple separated the Holy Place from the outer court, the other veiled the Holy of Holies from the Holy Place

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
καταπέτασμα, ατος, τό,

1. curtain, veil, Hld. 10.28, PGrenf. 2.111.7 (v/vi A. D.); esp. the veil of the Temple, LXX Exodus 26:31, Aristeas 86, Matthew 27:51, etc.; prop. the inner veil, the outer being τὸ κάλυμμα, cf. Ph. 2.148: metaph., κ. δόξης Id. 1.270.
2. κ. τραπέζης table- cover, Michel 832.25 (Samos, iv B. C.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καταπέτασμα, καταπετάσματος, τό (καταπετάννυμι to spread out over, to cover), an Alex. Greek word for παραπέτασμα. which the other Greeks use from Herodotus down; a veil spread out, a curtain — the name given in the Greek Scriptures, as well as in the writings of Philo and Josephus, to the two curtains in the temple at Jerusalem (τά καταπετάσματα, 1 Macc. 4:51; (yet cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, 2:611)): one of them (Hebrew מָסָך) at the entrance of the temple separated the Holy place from the outer court (Exodus 26:37; Exodus 38:18; Numbers 3:26; Josephus, b. j. 5, 5, 4; it is called also τό κάλυμμα by the Sept. and Philo, Exodus 27:16; Numbers 3:25; Philo, vit. Moys. 3: §§ 5 and 9), the other veiled the Holy of holies from the Holy place (in Hebrew the פָּרֹכֶת; ἐνδοτερον καταπέτασμα, Josephus, Antiquities 8, 3, 3; τό ἐσωτατον καταπέτασμα Philo de gig. § 12; by the Sept. and Philo this is called pre-eminently τό καταπέτασμα, Exodus 26:31ff; Leviticus 21:23; Leviticus 24:3; Philo, vit. Moys. as above). This latter καταπέτασμα is the only one mentioned in the N. T.: τό καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ, Matthew 27:51; Mark 15:38; Luke 23:45; τό δεύτερον καταπέτασμα, Hebrews 9:3; τό ἐσώτερον τοῦ καταπετάσματος (cf. Leviticus 16:2, 12, 15; Exodus 26:33) the space more inward them the veil, equivalent to ‘the space within the veil,’ i. e. the Holy of holies, figuratively used of heaven, as the true abode of God, Hebrews 6:19; in a similar figurative way the body of Christ is called καταπέτασμα, in (Heb.) , because, as the veil had to be removed in order that the high priest might enter the most holy part of the earthly temple, so the body of Christ had to be removed by his death on the cross, that an entrance might be opened into the fellowship of God in heaven.

Question 355

ἐμπίπτω

Answer 355

ἐμπεσοῦμαι, ἐνέπεσον, -, -, -
to fall into
Definition:
to fall into, Mt. 12:11; Lk. 14:5; to encounter, Lk. 10:36; to be involved in, 1 Tim. 3:6, 7; 6:9; εἰς χειρας, to fall under the chastisement of, Heb. 10:31

Thayer’s Definition
to fall into
to fall among robbers
fall into one’s power

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐμπίπτω, fut. -πεσοῦμαι: aor. ἐνέπεσον, ἔμπεσον (v. infr.): lyr. aor. ἔμπετες Pi. P. 8.81: —

1. fall in or on, c. dat., τρύφος ἔμπεσε πόντῳ Od. 4.508; ὁ δ’ ὕπτιος ἔμπεσε πέτρῃ Il. 4.108; ἐν δ’ ἔπεσ’ ὠκεανῷ, of the Sun, 8.485; πῦρ ἔμπεσε νηυσίν fire fell upon them, 16.113; αὐχένι.. ἔμπεσεν ἰός 15.451, cf. 624; with ἐν, ὡς δ’ ὅτε πῦρ.. ἐν ἀξύλῳ ἐμπέσῃ ὕλῃ 11.155; κεραυνοὶ αὐτοῖσι ἐνέπιπτον Hdt. 8.37; ἐμπέσοι γέ σοι (sc. ὁ πύργος) Ar. Pl. 180, etc.: abs., ῥύμῃ ἐ. Th. 2.76, cf. Hdt. 1.34: c. gen., ὠκεανοῖο Arat. 635. Geom., meet, of a line meeting another, Euc. 1 Post. 5, etc.; to be placed, ἐὰν εἰς τὸν κύκλον εὐθεῖα ἐμπέσῃ Archim. Sph.Cyl. 1.9; ἡ ἐμπεσοῦσα ibid. of a dislocated limb, fall into place, Hp. Art. 8.
2. fall upon, attack, ἐν δ’ ἔπεσον προμάχοις Od. 24.526, cf. Il. 16.81; στρατῷ E. Rh. 127; τοῖς πολεμίοις X. Eq.Mag. 8.25, etc.; ἐμπεσόντες having fallen on them, Hdt. 3.146, cf. 7.16. ά: metaph., insult, ἄλλοισι δ’ ἐμπίπτων γελᾷ Pi. I. 1.68; so,
3. of evils, diseases, etc., fall on one, attack, κακὸν ἔμπεσε οἴκῳ Od. 2.45; λὺγξ τοῖς πλέοσιν ἐνέπιπτε κενή Th. 2.49; νόσημα ἐμπέπτωκεν εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα D. 19.259; πρὶν ἐμπεσεῖν σπαραγμόν S. Tr. 1253; ὕπνος ἐ. Pl. Ti. 45e: of passions, of frames of mind, χόλος, δέος ἔμπεσε θυμῷ, Il. 9.436, 17.625; ἔρως μή τις ἐμπίπτῃ στρατῷ A. Ag. 341; Ἔρως, ὃς ἐν κτήμασι πίπτεις S. Ant. 782 (lyr.); ἐμοὶ.. οἶκτος Id. Ph. 965; τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις ἐνέπεσέ τι γέλωτος Th. 4.28; μὴ λύσσα τις ἡμῖν ἐμπεπτώκοι X. An. 5.7.26; ἔλεος ἐμπέπτωκέ τίς μοι Philippid. 9.1; ἐ. εἰς.., Hdt. 7.43, E. IA 443, Th. 2.48 codd., Lys. 1.18, etc.: rarely c.acc., οὐδείς ποτ’ αὐτοὺς.. ἂν ἐμπέσοι ζῆλος S. OC 942; ἐμπέπτωκ’ ἔρως.. Ἑλλάδα E. IA 808. of words, καί μοι ἔπος ἔμπεσε θυμῷ came into my mind, Od. 12.266; λόγος ἐμπέπτωκεν ἀρτίως ἐμοί came to my ears, S. OC 1150; κἂν περὶ ἀνδρῶν γ’ ἐμπέσῃ λόγος τις a report arose, Ar. Lys. 858, cf. Pl. R. 354b, Lg. 799d, Thphr. Char. 2.2; so τόποι ἐμπίπτοντες available, suitable topics, Hermog. Prog. 7, etc., cf. Ph. 1.179.
4. light or fall upon, πρὶν ἁλίῳ γυῖον ἐμπεσεῖν before his body was exposed to the sun, Pi. N. 7.73; [ θηρία] ἐμπίπτοντα ταῖς ὄψεσι Hdn. 3.9.5; also εἰς τὴν ὄψιν, εἰς τὴν αἴσθησιν, Pl. Ti. 67d, R. 524d. fall into, ἐ. ἐν ἀπορίᾳ Id. Euthd. 293a; ἐπὶ συμφορήν Hdt. 7.88; more freq. ἐ. εἰς.., ἐ. εἰς ἄτας S. El. 216 (lyr.); εἰς βάρβαρα φάσγανα E. Hel. 864; εἰς ἐνέδραν X. Cyr. 8.5.14; εἰς ἔρωτα Antiph. 235.3; εἰς νόσον Antipho 1.20; εἰς ὑποψίας Id. 2.2.3; εἰς φαῦλον σκέμμα Pl. R. 435c; εἴς τινα βυθὸν φλυαρίας Id. Prm. 130d; εἰς πράγματα D. 18.292; ἐ. εἰς τὰ πεπραγμένα, in speaking, come upon the exploits, ib.211; εἰς λόγους ib.42, cf. 59.
5. τῷ ἀκοντίῳ ἐ. τῷ ὤμῳ throw oneself on the javelin with one’s shoulder, i.e. to give all one’s force to the throw, Hp. Aër. 20.
6. break in, burst in, στέγῃ S. OT 1262; πύλαις E. Ph. 1146; εἰς τὴν θύραν κριηδόν Ar. Lys. 309; intrude, εἰς τὸ ἀρχεῖον Arist. Pol. 1270b9: abs., A. Ag. 1350; ἐμπεσών violently, rashly, Hdt. 3.81.
7. εἴς τι fall within the province of, Pl. Tht. 205d; εἰς τὰς εἰρημένας αἰτίας Arist. Metaph. 986a15, cf. Rh. 1401b29, Ph. 196b9; εἰς ἄλλο πρόβλημα Id. Pol. 1268b25. of income, εἰς τὸν λόγον τινὸς ἐ. PLille 16.5 (iii B.C.), cf. POxy. 494.21 (ii A.D.). of suits, come before, εἰς δικαστῶν πλῆθος Arist. Pol. 1300b35, cf. Plu. Sol. 18.
8. ἐ. εἰς δεσμωτήριον to be thrown into prison, Din. 2.9, cf. D. 25.60 (abs., get into prison, Luc. Tox. 28); εἰς ζήτρειον Eup. 19 D.; so ἐ. εἰς τὸν Τάρταρον Pl. Phd. 114a: Com., εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν Com.Adesp. 9D.
9. of circumstances, happen, occur, Paus. 7.8.4.
10. desert, πρός τινα LXX 2 Kings 25:11.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐμπίπτω (see ἐν, III. 3); future ἐμπεσοῦμαι; 2 aorist ἐνέπεσον; (from Homer down); to fall into: εἰς βόθυνον, Matthew 12:11, and L text T Tr WH in Luke 6:39; εἰς φρέαρ, Luke 14:5 (R G); to fall among robbers, εἰς τούς λῃστάς, Luke 10:36, and in metaphorical phrases, 1 Timothy 3:6; 1 Timothy 6:9; εἰς χεῖρας τίνος, into one’s power: τοῦ Θεοῦ, to incur divine penalties, Hebrews 10:31, as in 2 Samuel 24:14; 1 Chronicles 21:13; Sir. 2:18.

Question 356

ἐπιπίπτω

Answer 356

-, ἐπέπεσον, ἐπιπέπτωκα, -, -
to fall upon, come eagerly, embrace; to come on
Definition:
to fall upon; to throw one’s self upon, Lk. 15:20; Jn. 13:25; Acts 20:10, 37; to press, urge upon, Mk. 3:10; to light upon, Rom. 15:3; to come over, Acts 13:11; to come upon, fall upon mentally or spiritually, Lk. 1:12; Acts 8:16; 10:10, 44; 11:15; 19:17

Thayer's Definition
to fall upon, to rush or press upon
to lie upon one
to fall into one's embrace
to fall back upon
metaph.
to fall upon one i.e. to seize, take possession of him
of the Holy Spirit, in his inspiration and impulse
of reproaches cast upon one

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐπιπίπτω,

I

1. fall upon or over, ἐπέπιπτον ἀλλήλοις Th. 7.84; ἐπί τι X. Oec. 18.7, cf. Thphr. CP 5.4.5: metaph., ἐπέπεσε μοῖρα Pi. Pae. 2.64; ἐπί τι Isoc. 5.89; διαλογισμοὶ ἐπιπίπτουσί τινι Plu. Oth. 9.
2. . of money, accrue, τὸ μέρος ὃ εὑρίσκομες ἐπιπῖπτον ἐπὶ τὸ χρέος τὸ ὀφειλόμενον SIG 953.66 (Cnidus, ii B.C.).

II.

1. fall upon in hostile sense, attack, assail, τινί Hdt. 4.105, Th. 3.112; ἀφυλάκτῳ αὐτῷ ἐ. Hdt. 9.116; ἀφάρκτῳ τῷ στρατοπέδῳ Th. 1.117; ἀπαρασκεύοις τοῖς ἐναντίοις X. Cyr. 7.4.3; also ἐς τοὺς Ἕλληνας, v.l. for ἐς-, Hdt. 7.210; of storms, τοῖσι βαρβάροισι ὁ βορῆς ἐπέπεσε ib. 189; χειμὼν ἐπιπεσών Pl. Prt. 344d; of winds meeting one another, Arist. Mete. 364b3; of diseases, Hp. Aër. 3; ἡ νόσος ἐ. τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις Th. 3.87; so of grief, misfortunes, etc., οὐχὶ σοὶ μόνᾳ ἐπέπεσον λῦπαι E. Andr. 1043 (lyr.), etc.; ἐπέπεσε πολλὰ καὶ χαλεπὰ κατὰ στάσιν ταῖς πόλεσι Th. 3.82, etc.
2. . come on after, ἐ. ῥῖγος πυρετῷ Hp. Aph. 4.46.
3. . accumulate, πλήθη σίτου ἐπιπεπτωκέναι PPetr. 2p.62 (iii B.C.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπιπίπτω; 2 aorist ἐπέπεσον, 3 person plural ἐπέπεσαν, Romans 15:3 L T Tr WH (cf. ἀπέρχομαι at the beginning); perfect participle ἐπιπεπτωκως; (see πίπτω); the Sept. for נָפַל; to fall upon; to rush or press upon;

a. properly: τίνι, upon one, Mark 3:10; to lie upon one, Acts 20:10; ἐπί τόν τράχηλον τίνος, to fall into one’s embrace, Luke 15:20; Acts 20:37 (Genesis 46:29; Tobit 11:8, 12; 3Macc. 5:49); to fall back upon, ἐπί τό στῆθος τίνος, John 13:25 R G T.
b. metaphorically, ἐπί τινα, to fall upon one, i. e. to seize, take possession of him: φόβος, Luke 1:12; Acts 19:17 (L Tr ἔπεσεν); Revelation 11:11 L T Tr WH; ἔκστασις, Acts 10:10 Rec.; ἀχλύς, Acts 13:11 (R G). used also of the Holy Spirit, in its inspiration and impulse: ἐπί τίνι, Acts 8:16; ἐπί τινα, (Lachmann ἔπεσε); (Ezekiel 11:5); of reproaches cast upon one: Romans 15:3. (Noteworthy is the absolutely use in Acts 23:7 WH marginal reading ἐπέπεσεν (others, ἐγένετο) στάσις. (From Herodotus down.))

Question 357

πτέρυξ, υγος, ἡ

Answer 357

a wing
wing
Definition:
a wing, pinion, Mt. 23:37; Lk. 13:34

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πτέρυξ ( πτερύξ Aristarch. ap. Hdn.Gr. 1.45 ), ῠγος, ἡ: Ep. dat. pl. πτερύγεσσι: ( πτερόν ): — wing of a bird, Il. 2.316; mostly pl., ib. 462, Od. 2.149, Hes. Sc. 134, A. Ag. 52 (anap.), etc.; λευκὴ πτεροῖσι, πλὴν . . ἄκρων τῶν πτερύγων white in its plumage, save . . the tips of the wings, of the ibis, Hdt. 2.76; of Eros and Nike, Aristopho 11.8: metaph., κινοῦντα πτέρυγας ἤδη ‘trying your wings ‘, Lib. Ep. 155.2 .

2. winged creature, bird, Revelation 6:12 ( Jul. ).
3. flight, augury, omen, ποίων (sc. ὀρνίχων ) οὐκ ἀγαθαὶ πτέρυγες Call. Lav.Pall. 124 .

II anything like a wing,

1 in pl.,= πτερύγια, fins of fish, Arist. HA 505b21, Mir. 835b10, Ael. NA 11.24; flippers of seals, Arist. PA 697b5; of dolphins and whales, Id. HA 537b3; of the tortoise, Nic. Al. 559 .

2. pl., feathery foliage, Thphr. HP 3.9.6 . = ἄσπληνος 1, Dsc. 3.134.
3. blade of the steering-paddle, IG 22.1607.74: hence, rudder, S. Fr. 1083; ἑξήρετμοι π ., of oars, Epigr.Gr. 337.2 ( Cyzicus ).
4. flap of a cuirass, X. An. 4.7.15 (v.l.), cf. Eq. 12.4, 6; of the Doric χιτών, Ar. Fr. 325, Men. Epit. 187, Com.Adesp. 17.1 D., Plu. Comp.Lyc.Numbers 3:1-51, Poll. 7.62 .
5. broad edge of a knife or hunting-spear, Plu. Alex. 16, Poll. 5.21; beak of the sword-fish (v.l. ῥύγχος ), Ael. NA 9.40 .
6. lobe of the lungs, Hp. Coac. 394 .
7. point of a building, Poll. 7.121 .
8. front frame of a torsion-engine, Hero Bel. 101.8 .
9. shoulder-blade, Philostr. Gym. 30 .
10. in pl., title of poem whose lines form a pattern like wings, AP 15.24 ( Simm. ).
11. pl., sails, Com.Adesp. 9 D., Lyr.Alex.Adesp. 20.9.

III anything that covers or protects like wings, π. πέπλων E. Ion 1143; κολπώδη πτέρυγ’ Εὐβοίας, i.e. Aulis, Id. IA 120 (lyr.); νεοσσὸς ὡσεὶ πτέρυγας εἰσπίτνων ἐμάς Id. Tr. 751; of a mountain, Λιβάνου πτέρυγες Musae. 48 .

2. fence, wall, Lyc. 291. metaph., πτέρυγες γόων the wings, i.e. the flight or flow, of grief, S. El. 242 (lyr.); π. Πιερίδων Pi. I. 1.64 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πτέρυξ, πτέρυγος, ἡ (πτερόν a wing), from Homer down, the Sept. often for כָּנָף; a wing: of birds,

Question 358

πτῶμα, ατος, τό

Answer 358

a corpse
dead body, carcass, corpse
Definition:
a fall; a dead body, carcass, corpse, Mt. 24:28; Mk. 6:29

Thayer's Definition
a fall, downfall
metaph. a failure, defeat, calamity
an error, lapse into sin
that which has fallen
the fallen body of one dead or slain, a corpse, a carcase

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πτῶμα

πτῶμα, ατος, τό, ( πίπτω ) fall, πεσεῖν . . πτώματ’ οὐκ ἀνασχετά A. Pr. 919; πίπτουσι . . πτώματ’ αἰσχρά S. Ant. 1046; π. θανάσιμον πεσῇ E. El. 686; ἡ πόλις οὐκ ἂν ἔπεσε τοιοῦτον π . Pl. La. 181b . fall in wrestling, Call. Iamb. 1.274, AP 9.391 ( Diotim. ): metaph., booby-trap, π. φιλοσόφων ἀπαλαιστρότατον Phld. Rh. 1.8S.; lapse, blunder, Gal. 10.124.

2. metaph., misfortune, calamity, τά γ’ ἐκ θεῶν πτώματα calamities sent by the gods, E. HF 1228 .
3. pl., injuries due to falls, bruises, Dsc. 1.128,3.1,5.117.

II fallen body, corpse, carcase, freq. with gen., πτῶμα Ἑλένης, Ἐτεοκλέους, E. Or. 1196, Ph. 1697, cf. LXX Jd. 14.8, D.H. 4.70, etc.; πτώματα νεκρῶν E. Ph. 1482 (anap.): without a gen., A. Supp. 662 (s. v.l., lyr.), Plb. 15.14.2, Sardis 7 No. 165, Plu. Alex. 33, etc.: collective in sg., SIG 700.17 ( Maced., ii B.C. ), Revelation 11:8, Polyaen. 6.18.1 .

2. of buildings, ruin, οἰκίας, κρηνῖδος, IG 11(2).161 A 120, 163 Ba 21 (Delos, iii B.C. ); ἐπὶ τοῦ π . on the ruins (of the wall), Plb. 16.31.8, cf. 5.4.9, 5.100.6, Aristid. Or. 25(43).27; breach in a city-wall, D.S. 16.8, al.: pl., ruins, IG 11(2).199 A 103 (Delos, iii B.C. ), Ph. Bel. 100.45, Plb. 21.28.2; π. οἴκων Phryn. 351; π. ἐλαιῶν fallen olive-trees or fruit, Lys. Fr. 203 S.; windfall fruit, of the φοῖνιξ, Dsc. 1.109.

III payment which falls due, PEleph. 11.4 ( iii B.C., pl.), PLond. 1.3.37 (ii B.C.) .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πτῶμα, πτώματος, τό (πίπτω, perfect πέπτωκα);

1. in Greek writings from Aeschylus down, a fall, downfall; metaphorically, a failure, defeat, calamity; an error lapse, sin.
2. that which is fallen; hence, with the genitive of a person or with νεκροῦ added, the (fallen) body of one dead or slain, a corpse, carcase; later also with νεκροῦ omitted (Polybius, the Sept., Philo, Joseph, Plutarch, Herodian), cf. Thomas Magister, p. 765 (edited by Ritschl, p. 290, 14); Phryn. ed. Lob., p. 375; (Winer’s Grammar, 23), and so in the N. T.: Matthew 14:12 L T Tr WH; Mark 15:45 L T Tr WH; Matthew 24:28; τίνος, Mark 6:29; Revelation 11:8, 9.

Question 359

παράπτωμα, -ατος, τό

Answer 359

a sin, trespass
trespass, transgression, sin against, to sin as a moral failure to keep a command, fig., stepping out of the bounds of God’s law
Definition:
pr. a stumbling aside, a false step; in NT a trespass, fault, offence, transgression, Mt. 6:14, 15; Mk. 11:25, 26; Rom. 4:25; a fall in faith, Rom. 11:11, 12

Thayer’s Definition
to fall beside or near something
a lapse or deviation from truth and uprightness
a sin, misdeed

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
παρά-πτωμα, ατος, τό,

false step, slip, blunder, Plb. 9.10.6, Phld. Herc. 1251.14 (pl.), Longin. 36.2.

2. defeat, D.S. 19.100.
3. transgression, trespass, LXX Ezekiel 14:13,al., Matthew 6:14, Galatians 6:1, al.
4. error in amount of payments, PTeb. 5.91 (ii B.C.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
παράπτωμα, παραπτώματος, τό (παραπίπτω, which see);

1. properly, a fall beside or near something; but nowhere found in this sense.
2. tropically, a lapse or deviation from truth and uprightness; a sin, misdeed (R. V. trespass, ‘differing from ἁμάρτημα (which see) in figure not in force’ (Fritzsche); cf. Trench, § lxvi.): Matthew 6:14,(a G T omit; WH brackets), b; Rec.; Mark 11:25, 26 R G L; Romans 4:25; Romans 5:15-18, 20; Romans 11:11; 2 Corinthians 5:19; Galatians 6:1; Ephesians 1:7; Ephesians 2:1, 5; Colossians 2:13; James 5:16 (where L T Tr WH ἁμαρτίας). (Polybius 9, 10, 6; Wis. 3:13 Wis. 10:1; the Sept. several times for מַעַל, עָוֶל, פֶּשַׁע , etc.; of literary faults, Longinus, 36, 2.)

Question 360

ἀπείθεια, ας, ἡ

Answer 360

disobedience, rebellion
Definition:
an uncompliant disposition; obstinacy, disobedience, unbelief, Rom. 11:30, 32; Eph. 2:2; 5:6; Heb. 4:6, 11; Col. 3:6*

Thayer’s Definition
obstinacy, obstinate opposition to the divine will

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀπείθ-εια, ἡ,

disobedience, X. Mem. 3.5.5, D.H. 9.41, Arr. Epict. 3.24.24; υἱοὶ τῆς ἀπειθείας Ephesians 5:7; later ἀπειθία, ἡ, BGU 747ii14 (ii A.D.), etc., Gloss.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀπείθεια (WH ἀπειθια, except in Heb. as below (see Iota)), ἀπειθας, ἡ (ἀπειθής), disobedience (Jerome,inobedientia), obstinacy, and in the N. T. particularly obstinate opposition to the divine will: Romans 11:30, 32; Hebrews 4:6, 11; υἱοί τῆς ἀπειθείας, those who are animated by this obstinacy (see υἱός, 2), used of the Gentiles: Ephesians 2:2; Ephesians 5:6; Colossians 3:6 (R G L brackets). (Xenophon, mem. 3, 5, 5; Plutarch, others.)

Question 361

ἀπειθής

Answer 361

Thayer’s Definition
impersuasible, stiff necked; not compliant, disobedient, contumacious; of things or people: rigid, inflexible

Definition:
who will not be persuaded, uncompliant; disobedient, Lk. 1:17; Acts 26:19; Rom. 1:30; 2 Tim. 3:2; Tit. 1:16; 3:3

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀπειθής, ές,

1. disobedient, S. Fr. 45; ἀ. τοῖς νόμοις Pl. Lg. 936b; of ships, τοῖς κυβερνήταις ἀπειθεστέρας τὰς ναῦς παρεῖχον less obedient to them, Th. 2.84, cf. D.C. 50.29 (Comp.), Orph. A. 247; στράτευμα X. Eq. 3.6; of horses, Id. Eq.Mag. 1.3; ἀπειθέα τεύχειν work disobedience, Call. Dian. 66. Adv. ἀπειθῶς, ἔχειν πρός τινα Pl. R. 391b. unbelieving, Nonn. D. 8.306.
2. of things, inflexible, rigid, κέντρον Ael. NA 1.55; σιδήρου καὶ ἀδάμαντος ἀπειθέστεροι Ph. 2.87; ὀδόντες ἀ. unyielding, Opp. C. 2.511; χῶρος ἀ. impracticable, of Hades, Hermesian. 7.3; δίκη ἀ. Νεμέσεως IG 4.444. II Act., not persuasive, incredible, μῦθος Thgn. 1235; uninviting, πρὸς τὴν γεῦσιν Hices. ap. Ath. 3.87b, c; τὴν γεῦσιν Id. 323a; of places, difficult of access, Ael. Fr. 120.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀπειθής, ἀπειθες, genitive ἀπειθους (πείθομαι), impersuasible, uncompliant, contumacious (A. V. disobedient): absolutely, Luke 1:17; Titus 1:16; Titus 3:3; τίνι, 2 Timothy 3:2; Romans 1:30; Acts 26:19. (Deuteronomy 21:18; Numbers 20:10; Isaiah 30:9; Zechariah 7:12; in Greek writings from Thucydides down; (in Theognis, 1235 actively not persuasive).)

Question 362

πεποίθησις, εως, ἡ

Answer 362

trust, confidence
confidence, trust
Definition:
trust, confidence, reliance, 2 Cor. 1:15

Thayer’s Definition
trust, confidence, reliance

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πεποίθ-ησις, εως, ἡ,

trust, confidence, boldness, LXX 4 Ki. 18.19, Phld. Lib. p.22 O., Ph. 2.444, Ep.Ephesians 3:12, Philum. Ven. 2.4; π. ἐπὶ τῇ δυνάμει J. AJ 1.3.1; ἡ ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ π. ib. 10.1.4: in pl., Babr. 43.19 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πεποίθησις, πεποιθησεως, ἡ (πείθω, 2 perfect πέποιθα), trust, confidence (R. V.), reliance: 2 Corinthians 1:15; 2 Corinthians 3:4; 2 Corinthians 10:2; Ephesians 3:12; εἰς τινα, 2 Corinthians 8:22; ἐν τίνι,Philippians 3:4. (Philo de nobilit. § 7; Josephus, Antiquities 1, 3, 1; 3, 2, 2; 10, 1, 4; (11, 7, 1; Clement of Rome, 1 Cor. 2, 3 [ET]); Zosimus (), Sextus Empiricus, others; the Sept. once for בִּטָּחון, 2 Kings 18:19.) The word is condemned by the Atticists; cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 295.

Question 363

ἐμπίπλημι/ἐμπιμπλάω

Answer 363

(ἐνεπίμπλατο 3 σγ πασσ), -, ἐνέπλησα, -, ἐμπέπλησμαι, ἐνεπλήσθην
fill, fill up, take one’s fill, to provide, satisfy, satiate
Definition:
also spelled ἐμπιμπλημι (1855) and ἐμπιμπλάω (1857), to fill, Acts 14:17; pass. to be satisfied, satiated, full, Lk. 1:53; 6:25; Jn. 6:12; met. to have the full enjoyment of, Rom. 15:24*

Thayer’s Definition
to fill up, fill full
to take one’s fill of, glut one’s desire for, satisfy, satiate

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐμπίπλημι (not ἐμπίμπλημι (see ἐν, III. 3); for euphony’s sake, Lob. ad Phryn., p. 95; Veitch, p. 536) and ἐμπιπλάω (from which form comes the present participle ἐμπιπλῶν, Acts 14:17 (Winers Grammar, § 14,1 f.; Buttmann, 66 (58))); 1 aorist ἐνέπλησα; 1 aorist passive ἐνεπλήσθην; perfect passive participle ἐμπεπλησμένος; the Sept. for מָלֵא and in passive often for שָׂבַע to be satiated; in Greek writings from Homer down; to fill up, fill full: τινα τίνος, to bestow something bountifully on one, Luke 1:53; Acts 14:17 (Jeremiah 38:14 (); Psalm 106:9 (); Isaiah 29:19; Sir. 4:12); to fill with food, i. e. satisfy, satiate; passive, Luke 6:25; John 6:12 (Deuteronomy 6:11; Deuteronomy 8:10; Ruth 2:14; Nehemiah 9:25, etc.); to take one’s fill of, glut one’s desire for: passive with the genitive of person, one’s contact and companionship, Romans 15:24; cf. Kypke at the passage; τοῦ κάλλους αὐτῆς, gazing at her beauty, Susanna 32.

STRONGS NT 1705a: ἐμπιπράω ἐμπιπράω (see ἐν, III. 3) (for the more common ἐμπίπρημι, from πίμπρημι to burn; on the dropping of the mu μ’, cf. ἐμπίπλημι, at the beginning); from Herodotus down; to burn, set on fire; present infinitive passive ἐμπίπρασθαι to be (inflamed, and so) swollen (Hesychius πιμπραν … φυσαν; Etym. Magn. 672, 23 πιμπρασαι. φυσωσαι; Josephus, Antiquities 3, 11, 6; etc.); of the human body to swell up: from the bite of a viper, Acts 28:6 Tdf., for R G etc. πίμπρασθαι, which see (and Veitch, under the word πίμπρημι).

Question 364

ἀναπληρόω

Answer 364

ἀναπληρώσω, ἀνεπλήρωσα, -, -, -
Definition:
to fill up, complete, 1 Thess. 2:16; to fulfil, confirm, as a prophecy by the event, Mt. 13:14; to fill the place of any one, 1 Cor. 14:16; to supply, make good, 1 Cor. 16:17; Phil. 2:30; to observe fully, keep the law, Gal. 6:2*

Thayer’s Definition
to fill up, make full, e.g. a ditch
to supply

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀναπληρ-όω,

1. fill up a void, Pl. Ti. 81b, cf. 78d; τὸ κεχηνὸς τῆς ἑρμηνείας, τοῦ ῥυθμοῦ, A.D. Synt. 266.22, Luc. Tim. 1: — Pass., to be filled up, Arist. Cael. 306b4.
2. make up, supply, εἴ τι ἐξέλιπον ἀ. Pl. Smp. 188e; τὴν ἔνδειαν Arist. Pol. 1318b22; τοὺς.. ἀμόρφους ἀνατληροῖ ἡ τοῦ λέγειν πιθανότης compensates them, Id. Fr. 101: — Med., δώματ’ ἀ. fill their houses, E. Hel. 907.
3. fill up the numbers of a body, τὴν βουλήν Plu. Publ. 11, cf. X. Vect. 4.24; ἀ. τὴν συνηγορίαν fill the place of advocate (left vacant by another), Plu. Crass. 3, cf. 1 Corinthians 14:16.
4. pay in full, τὰς ὠνάς, of tax-farmers, PPar. 62.5.3 (ii B. C.): — in Med., get paid, receive, ἕως ἀνεπληρώσατο τὴν προῖκα D. 27.13.
5. use expletive particles, Demetr. Eloc. 58.
6. fulfil, ἀναπληροῦται ἡ προφητεία Matthew 13:14; of a task, perform, PPetr. 3p.104.

II Pass., to be restored to its former size or state, ἀνεπληρώθη ὁ ἥλιος, after an eclipse, Th. 2.28; ἀναπληρουμένης τῆς φύσεως being in process of restoration, Arist. EN 1153a2, cf. HA 548b18.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀναπληρόω, ἀναπλήρω; future ἀναπληρώσω; 1 aorist ἀνεπληρωσα; (present passive ἀναπληροῦμαι); (ἀνά to, up to, e. g. to fill a vessel up to the brim; up to the appointed measure or standard, German anfüllen); (from Euripides down);

1. to fill up, make full, e. g. a ditch (Strabo 5, 6, p. 223); hence, tropically, ἁμαρτίας, 1 Thessalonians 2:16 (to add what is still lacking to complete the number of their sins; on the meaning, cf. Genesis 15:16; Daniel 8:23; Daniel 9:24; Matthew 23:32; 2 Macc. 6:14). ἀναπληροῦται ἡ προφητεία the prophecy is fully satisfied, the event completely corresponds to it, Matthew 13:14. τόν νόμου to fulfil i. e. observe the law perfectly, Galatians 6:2 (the Epistle of Barnabas 21 [ET] ἀναπληραν πᾶσαν ἐντολήν); τόν τόπον τίνος to fill the place of anyone, 1 Corinthians 14:16 (after the rabbinical מְקום מָלֵא to hold the position of anyone (yet cf. Meyer ad loc.)).
2. to supply: τό ὑστέρημα, Philippians 2:30 (Colossians 1:24); 1 Corinthians 16:17 (they by their presence supplied your place in your absence); cf. Plato, symp., p. 188 e. ἀλλ’ εἰ τί ἐξέλιπον, σόν ἔργον (namely, ἐστιν) ἀναπληρῶσαι. Cf. Winer’s De verb. comp. etc. Part iii., p. 11f; (Ellicott on Philippians, the passage cited, or Meyer on Galatians, the passage cited Compare: ἀνταναπληρόω, προσαναπληρόω).

Question 365

πλεονάζω

Answer 365

-, ἐπλεόνασα, -, -, -
to grow, to make increase; increase, to be or have more than enough, to have abundance

Definition:
to be more than enough; to have more than enough, to have in abundance, 2 Cor. 8:15; to abound, be abundant, 2 Thess. 1:3; 2 Pet. 1:8; to increase, be augmented, Rom. 5:20; to come into wider action, be more widely spread, Rom. 6:1; 2 Cor. 4:15; in NT trans. to cause to abound or increase, to augment, 1 Thess. 3:12

Thayer's Definition
to superabound
of things
to exist in abundance
to increase
be augmented
to make to increase: one in a thing

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πλεον-άζω

(rarely πλειονάζω, q.v.), fut. -άσω: pf. πεπλεόνακα D.S. 1.90: — Pass., pf. -ασμαι Hp. Fract. 7, etc.: aor. -άσθην Id. Art. 47: ( πλέον ): —

to be more, esp. to be more than enough, superfluous, opp. ἐλλείπειν, ὑπολείπειν, Arist. EN 1106a31, Col. 799a18; τὸ πλεονάζον the excess, PRev.Laws 57.13 (iii B. C.), LXX Exodus 26:12; π. παρά c. acc., to be in excess of . ., ib. Numbers 3:46; ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία Ep.Romans 5:20; of animals, have more than the due number of limbs, opp. κολοβὰ γίνεσθαι, Arist. GA 770b32; of visits, to be frequent, Plb. 4.3.12; of the sea, encroach, Arist. Mete. 351b6, cf. Plu. 2.366b; πάθος defined as ὁρμὴ πλεονάζουσα, Zeno Stoic. 1.50; εἰκασία ἐστὶ μεταφορὰ πλεονάζουσα simile is expanded metaphor, Demetr. Eloc. 80; τὸ ς πλεονάσαν used to excess, D.H. Comp. 14: Gramm., to be redundant, Demetr.Lac. Herc. 1012.21, etc.; Ἀρίσταρχος οὐκ ἔλεγε πλεονάζειν τὸ ἄρθρον A.D. Synt. 6.2; also of letters, τὸ ε πλεονάζει (in ἑ-ώρων ) Id. Pron. 58.25; but π. τῷ ῑ to have an added ῑ (as in ἐμεῖο ), ib. 38.20; cf. 111.6 .

2. c. gen., exceed, opp. λείπω, Ptol. Geog. 1.20.7: abs., τὸ -άζον ἔργον the extra work, PLille 1v . 16 (iii B. C.); τοὺς -άζοντας τῶν ρκέ (sc. ἐρίφους ) the odd 25 out of 125, PCair.Zen. 422.7 (iii B. C.) .

II of persons, go beyond bounds, take or claim too much, Isoc. 2.33, 12.85, D. 9.24, 39.14: c. dat., presume upon . ., εὐτυχίᾳ Th. 1.120; but π. κυνηγεσίαις go beyond bounds in . ., Str. 11.5.1; of a writer, τοῖς ὀνόμασι π. Id. 3.3.7: abs., to be lengthy, tedious, Id. 9.1.16, D.S. 1.90, LXX 2 Maccabees 2:32; περί τινος Parmenisc. ap. Ath. 4.156d .

2. π. τινός have an excess of, abound in a thing, opp. ἐνδεὴς εἶναι, Arist. Pol. 1257a33, cf. Epicur. Sent. 4; but π. τοῦ καιροῦ exceed all bounds . ., of a writer, D.H. Comp. 22 .

III c. acc., state at a higher figure, Str. 6.3.10: — Pass., to be magnified, exaggerated, [ νομίσειεν ἂν] ἔστιν ἃ πλεονάζεσθαι Th. 2.35, cf. Str. 2.4.3; πεπλεόνασται has been overdone, opp. ἐνδεὲς πεποίηται, Hp. Fract. 7, cf. Art. 47 .

2. make to increase, τινὰς τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 Thessalonians 3:12 .
3. eat in too great quantity, τι Diph.Siph. ap. Ath. 8.356d, Dsc. 4.75, 82 (all Pass. ).
4. raise the price of, τι Aristid. 1.170J.
5. Pass., to be deceived, prob. f.l. for πλεονεκτεῖσθαι, Stob. 2.7.11m.
6. Gramm., use in addition or redundantly, εἰώθασιν οἱ Ἀττικοὶ τὰ ἄρθρα πλεονάζειν Sch. Ar. Pl. 5; Αἰολεῖς πλεονάζουσιν ἕτερον σύμφωνον EM 84.18: — Pass., τὸ ῡ πλεοναζόμενον ψιλοῦται ib. 440.12 .
7. to be in excess of unity, partake of plurality, Procl. Inst. 2 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πλεονάζω; 1 aorist ἐπλεόνασα; (πλέον); the Sept. for עָדַף, and רָבָה;

1. intransitive: used of one possessing, to superabound (A. V. to have over), 2 Corinthians 8:15. of things, to exist in abundance (R. V. be multiplied), 2 Corinthians 4:15; to increase, be augmented, Romans 5:20; Romans 6:1; 2 Thessalonians 1:8; Philippians 4:17; 2 Peter 1:8.
2. transitive, to make to increase: τινα τίνι, one in a thing, 1 Thessalonians 3:12; for הִרְבָּה, Numbers 26:54; Psalm 70:21 (); add 1 Macc. 4:35. By secular writings ((from Hippocrates on)) in various other senses. (Compare: ὑπερπλεονάζω.)

Question 366

πλεονεκτέω

Answer 366

-, ἐπλεονέκτησα, -, -, ἐπλεονεκτήθην
to have more than another; to take advantage of; to overreach, make gain of, 2 Cor. 7:2; 12:17, 18; to wrong, 1 Thess. 4:6; to get the better, or an advantage of, to outwit 2 Cor. 2:11*

Thayer’s Definition
to have more, or a greater part or share
to be superior, excel, surpass, have an advantage over
to gain or take advantage of another, to overreach

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πλεονεκτ-έω,

fut. -ήσω Th. 4.62, etc. ( πλέον ἐκτήσεται shd. be read in Pl. La. 192e ): —

Prose Verb, have or claim more than one’s due, mostly in bad sense, to be greedy, grasping, Hdt. 8.112, X. Mem. 2.6.21, Pl. Grg. 483c, etc.

2. also, gain or have some advantage, without any bad sense, δυνάμει τινὶ π. Th. 4.62, cf. 86; opp. ἐλαττοῦσθαι, Arist. Rh. 1360a3; πολὺ ἐπλεονέκτει ὁ Πελοπίδας παρὰ τῷ Πέρσῃ X. HG 7.1.34: abs., Arist. Rh. 1402b25, D.S. 12.46; π. ἀπὸ τῶν μὴ καθηκόντων Plb. 6.56.2: freq. with neut. Pron., π. ταῦτα, etc., Th. 4.61, etc.
3. c. gen. rei, have or claim a larger share of than others, τῶν ὠφελίμων Id. 6.39; τοῦ ἡλίου, τοῦ ψύχους, τῶν πόνων, X. Cyr. 1.6.25, cf. Oec. 7.26; δόξης, χάριτος, Arist. EN 1136b22, 1137a1 .

II c. gen. pers., have or gain the advantage over, τῶν ἐχθρῶν Pl. R. 362b, cf. Hyp. Lyc. 8, etc.; παρά τινος X. Cyr. 1.6.32 (v.l.); παρ’ ἀλλήλων Arist. Pol. 1292b19; τινι in a thing, X. Cyr. 4.3.21, etc.; κατά τι Pl. Euthphr. 15a; περί τι Id. La. 183a; also π. τῶν νόμων gain at the expense of the laws, Id. Lg. 691a; τῆς ὑμετέρας π. εὐηθείας take advantage of your simpleness, D. Prooem. 24 .

2. later c. acc. pers., get or have the advantage over, D.H. 9.7, Plu. Marc. 29, Luc. Am. 27: usu. in bad sense, overreach, defraud, πλεονεκτεῖν μηδένα Men. Mon. 259, cf. 1 Thessalonians 4:6, 2 Corinthians 7:2, D.Chr. 17.8, D.C. 52.37: in early writers only Pass. in this sense, ὑπό τινων X. Mem. 3.5.2; πλεονεκτεῖσθαι χιλίαις δραχμαῖς to be defrauded in or of 1, 000 drachmae, D. 41.25 . In Th. 1.77 πλεονεκτεῖσθαι is impers., to be an act of πλεονεξία.
3. Pass., to be surpassed, excelled, τινι Apollod. Poliorc. 173.5 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πλεονεκτέω, πλεονέκτω; 1 aorist ἐπλεονέκτησα; 1 aorist passive subjunctive 1 person plural πλεονεκτηθῶμεν; (πλεονέκτης);

1. intransitive, to have more, or a greater part or share: Thucydides, Xenophon, Plutarch, others; to be superior, excel, surpass, have an advantage over, τίνος (genitive of person) τίνι (the dative of thing): Xenophon, Plato, Isocrates, Demosthenes, others.
2. transitive, to gain or take advantage of another, to overreach: (Herodotus 8, 112), Plato, Diodorus, Dionysius Halicarnassus, Dio Cassius, others; and so in the N. T. in 2 Corinthians 7:2; 2 Corinthians 12:17, 18; 1 Thessalonians 4:6 (see πρᾶγμα, b.); passive (cf. Buttmann, § 132, 22) ὑπό τίνος, 2 Corinthians 2:11(10).

Question 367

σωφρονέω

Answer 367

-, ἐσωφρόνησα, -, -, -
to be sober-minded, self-controlled
to be in a right state of mind, have sober judgment; to be self-controlled
Definition:
to be of a sound mind, be in one’s right mind, be sane, Mk. 5:15; Lk. 8:35; to be calm, 2 Cor. 5:13; to be sober-minded, sedate, Tit. 2:6; 1 Pet. 4:7; to be of a modest, humble mind, Rom. 12:3*

Thayer's Definition
to be of sound mind
to be in one's right mind
to exercise self control
to put a moderate estimate upon one's self, think of one's self soberly
to curb one's passions

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
σωφρον-έω,

poet. σᾰοφ- Opp. H. 3.446, AP 5.301.11 (Agath.): —

to be sound of mind, Hdt. 3.35, Mark 5:15, Gal. 15.449; ὃς ἦν φορητὸς οὐδὲ σωφρονῶν Babr. 90.4.

2. to be temperate, moderate, show self-control, Heraclit. 112, 116 (v.l.), A. Pr. 982, Pers. 829, IG 12.22.69, Antipho 2.2.5, Th. 8.24, Pl. Phdr. 244a, X. Cyr. 8.1.30; τὸ σωφρονεῖν, = cross σωφροσύνη, A. Ag. 1425, cf. 181, Ar. Nu. 1061, 1071; ἐς Ἀφροδίτην ς. E. IA 1159, cf. Ba. 314 (s. v.l.); περὶ τοὺς θεούς X. Mem. 1.1.20; of soldiers, ς. καὶ εὐτακτεῖν ib. 3.5.21, cf. Lys. 12.47; ς. καὶ ὁμονοεῖν And. 1.109; opp. ὑπερφρονέω, Romans 12:3 : with a part., πέμποντες σωφρονοῖμεν ἄν Pl. Men. 90d.
3. come to one’s senses, learn moderation, Hdt. 3.64; ς. ὑπὸ στένει A. Eu. 521 (lyr.); σωφρονοῦντες ἐν χρόνῳ ib. 1000 (lyr.); οὐ σωφρονήσεις; S. Aj. 1259; ἐσωφρόνησας Id. Ph. 1259; σεσωφρονηκώς when he had recovered his senses, Pl. Phdr. 241b.
4. Pass., τὰ σεσωφρονημένα ἐν τῷ βίῳ μοι things I had done with discretion, Aeschin. 2.4.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
σωφρονέω, σωφρόνω; 1 aorist imperative σωφρονήσατε; (σώφρων, which see); from Tragg., Xenophon, Plato down; to be of sound mind, i. e.

a. to be in one’s right mind: of one who has ceased δαιμονίζεσθαι, Mark 5:15; Luke 8:35; opposed to ἐκστηναι, 2 Corinthians 5:13, (the σωφρονων and μανεις are contrasted in Plato, de rep. i., p. 331 c.; σωφρονουσαι and μανεισαι, Phaedr., p. 244 b.; ὁ μεμηνως … ἐσωφρονησε, Apollod. 3, 5, 1, 6).
b. to exercise self-control; i. e. α. to put a moderate estimate upon oneself, think of oneself soberly: opposed to ὑπερφρονεῖν, Romans 12:3. β. to curb one’s passions, Titus 2:6; joined with νήφω (as in Lucian, Nigrin. 6) (R. V. be of sound mind and be sober), 1 Peter 4:7.

Question 368

σθενος

Answer 368

strength, might

Question 369

σκιά, ᾶς, ἡ

Answer 369

a shade, shadow, Mk. 4:32; Acts 5:15; met. a shadow, a vague outline, sketch or reflection in distinction from ἡ εἰκών, the perfect image or delineation, and τὸ σῶμα, the reality, Col. 2:17; Heb. 8:5; 10:1; gloom; σκιὰ θανάτου, death shade, the thickest darkness, Mt. 4:16; Lk. 1:79* a foreshadowing,

Thayer’s Definition
shadow
shade caused by the interception of light
an image cast by an object and representing the form of that object
a sketch, outline, adumbration

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
σκῐά, ᾶς, Ion. σκῐή, ῆς, ἡ, shadow, Od. 11.207; σκιὰ ἀντίστοιχος ὥς like the shadow that is one’s double, E. Andr. 745; ὑπὸ κίονος σκιὰν ἔπτηξεν Id. HF 973: prov., τὴν αὑτοῦ ς. δέδοικεν Ar. Fr. 77, cf. Pl. Phd. 101d .

2. reflection, image (in a bowl of oil), Sch. Il. 17.755 .
3. shade of one dead, phantom, Od. 10.495, A. Th. 992 (lyr.), S. Aj. 1257; σποδόν τε καὶ σκιάν Id. El. 1159; κατθανὼν δὲ πᾶς ἀνὴρ γῆ καὶ ς . E. Fr. 532; σκιᾷ τινι λόγους ἀνέσπα S. Aj. 301; also, of one worn to a shadow, A. Eu. 302; κακωθεὶς δ’ οὐδὲν ἄλλ’ εἰμ’ ἢ ς . Id. Niob. in Bull.Soc.Alex. No. 28p.110; φωνὴ καὶ ς. γέρων ἀνήρ E. Fr. 509: freq. in proverbs of man’s mortal estate, σκιᾶς ὄναρ ἄνθρωπος Pi. P. 8.95; εἴδωλον σκιᾶς A. Ag. 839, cf. S. Fr. 659.6; ὁρῶ γὰρ ἡμᾶς οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν εἴδωλα . . ἢ κούφην ς . Id. Aj. 126; ἄνθρωπός ἐστι πνεῦμα καὶ ς. μόνον Id. Fr. 13; οὐδέν ἐσμεν πλὴν σκιαῖς ἐοικότες Id. Fr. 945; of human affairs, εὐτυχοῦντα μὲν σκιᾷ τις ἂν πρέψειεν A. Ag. 1328 (dub.l.); οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἢ καπνοῦ ς . Id. Fr. 399; καπνοῦ σκιὰν δέδοικεν Com.Adesp. 692; of worthless things, τἄλλ’ ἐγὼ καπνοῦ σκιᾶς οὐκ ἂν πριαίμην S. Ant. 1170, cf. Ph. 946; καπνοὺς καὶ σκιάς Eup. 51; ὅσ’ ἂν γένηται ταῦτα πάντ’ ὄνου σκιά S. Fr. 331; περὶ ὄνου σκιᾶς [μάχεσθαι ] Ar. V. 191, cf. Pl. Phdr. 260c; Archipp. wrote a Com. entitled Ὄνου σκιά; ἡ ἐν Δελφοῖς ς . that phantom at Delphi, of the Amphictyonic council, D. 5.25; αἱ τοῦ δικαίου ς . mere shadows of . ., Pl. R. 517d; σκιαὶ καὶ ἐν ὕδασιν εἰκόνες ib. 510e; σκιαὶ τῶν ὄντων, ἀλλ’ οὐκ εἰδώλων ς . ib. 532c; στιγμὴ ἢ ς. τούτων D. 21.115; ἂν ἔχῃ φίλου σκιάν Men. 554 .
4. evil spirit, Hippiatr. 130, PMasp. 188.5 (vi A.D.) .

II shade of trees, etc., as a protection from heat, πετραίη τε σκιή the shade of a rock, Hes. Op. 589; ἐν σκιῇ ἑζόμενος ib. 593; ἐν συμμιγεῖ σκιᾷ Pl. Phdr. 239c; εἰ ὑπὸ σκιῇ ἔσοιτο ἡ μάχη Hdt. 7.226; ὑπὸ σκιᾶς E. Ba. 458; εἰσελθὼν ὑπὸ τὴν σκιὰν καθέζεσθαι And. 1.38; θέρους σκιὰν παρέχειν Pl. Ti. 76d; ἐν σκιᾷ, i.e. indoors, X. Smp. 2.18, cf. Cyn. 3.3; σκιὰν ὑπερτείνασα Σειρίου κυνός shade from its heat, A. Ag. 967: pl., αἱ τῶν δένδρων, αἱ τῶν πετρῶν ς ., X. Cyr. 8.8.17; ὑπὸ σκιαῖς Id. Oec. 20.18, cf. 5.9 .

III shadow in painting, τὰ λαμπρὰ τῇ σκιᾷ τρανότερα ποιοῦσι Plu. 2.863e, cf. 407a, D.H. Is. 4, Longin. 17.3; ἀνθρώπων πρῶτος ἐξευρὼν φθορὰν καὶ ἀπόχρωσιν σκιᾶς, of the painter Apollodorus, Plu. 2.346a, cf. Hsch.

2. silhouette, profile, Διόδωρος ς. Ἀντιφίλου ἐποίησεν Sammelb. 344 (Alexandria, ii B.C. ).
3. perh. coloured border on a garment, καλάσηριν ἢ ὑπόδυμα μὴ ἔχον σκιάς IG 5(1).1390.19, cf. 24 (Andania, i B.C. ), cf. Men. 561, BGU 1141.41, 43 (i B.C.) . an uninvited guest, introduced by another (Lat. umbra ), Plu. 2.707a, Ael. Fr. 110 . (Cf. Skt. châyâ´ ‘shadow’.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
σκιά, σκιᾶς, ἡ ((see σκηνή, at the beginning)), from Homer down, the Sept. for צֵל;

a. properly, shadow, i. e. shade caused by the interception of the light: Mark 4:32 (cf. Ezekiel 17:23); Acts 5:15; σκιά θανάτου, shadow of death (like umbra mortis, Ovid. metam. 5, 191, and umbra Erebi, Vergil Aen. 4, 26; 6, 404), ‘the densest darkness’ (because from of old Hades had been regarded as enveloped in thick darkness), tropically, the thick darkness of error (i. e. spiritual death; see θάνατος, 1): Matthew 4:16; Luke 1:79 (from Isaiah 9:1, where צַלְמָוֶת).
b. a shadow, i. e. an image cast by an object and representing the form of that object: opposed to σῶμα, the thing itself, Colossians 2:17; hence, equivalent to a sketch, outline, adumbration, Hebrews 8:5; opposed to εἰκών, the ‘express’ likeness, the very image, Hebrews 10:1 (as in Cicero, de off. 3, 17, 69nos veri juris solidam et expresssam effigiem nullam tenemus, umbra et imaginibus utimur).

Question 370

ἐπισκιάζω

Answer 370

I overshadow, envelop

Thayer’s Definition
to throw a shadow upon, to envelop in a shadow, to overshadow

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐπισκῐ-άζω,

1. throw a shade upon, overshadow, τῇ [πτέρυγι] τὴν Ἀσίην Hdt. 1.209. cf. Arist. GA 780a30, Thphr. CP 2.18.3, Matthew 17:5 : c.dat., Thphr. Sens. 79, Mark 9:7 : — Pass., Ph. 1.262, al.; opp. φωτίζειν, S.E. P. 1.141: — Med., -σκιάζεσθαι τὸν ἥλιον to ward off the sun’s rays, Gp. 5.29.3: metaph., conceal, obscure, ἀλήθειαν πλάσμασι μυθικοῖς Ph. 1.41, etc.; τὰ δεινὰ ἑτέροις ὀνόμασιν ἐ. Junc. ap. Stob. 4.50.95; τὴν θωπείαν, τὸν βίον, Luc. Hist.Conscr. 11, v.l. in Cal. 1: — Pass., τῇ εὐγενεία Hdn. 2.10.3; λαθραῖον ὄμμ’ ἐπεσκιασμένη keeping a hidden watch, S. Tr. 914.
2. . darken, obscure, Ph. 2.223 (Pass.): metaph., ἀφροσύνη ἐ. ψυχήν Id. 1.685, al.
3. . of the Divine presence, overshadow for protection, etc., τινί LXX Psalms 90:4(91).4; ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλήν τινος ib. 139(140).8; δύναμις ὑψίστου ἐπισκιάσει σοι Luke 1:35.
4. . Pass., to be weak-sighted, Vett.Val. 111.1.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπισκιάζω; (imperfect ἐπεσκιαζον, Luke 9:34 L marginal reading T Tr text WH); future ἐπισκιάσω; 1 aorist ἐπεσκίασα; to throw a shadow upon, to envelop in shadow, to overshadow: τίνι, Acts 5:15. From a vaporous cloud that casts a shadow the word is transferred to a shining cloud surrounding and enveloping persons with brightness: τινα, Matthew 17:5; Luke 9:34; τίνι, Mark 9:7. Tropically, of the Holy Spirit exerting creative energy upon the womb of the virgin Mary and impregnating it (a use of the word which seems to have been drawn from the familiar O. T. idea of a cloud as symbolizing the immediate presence and power of God): with the dative Luke 1:35. (In secular authors generally with an accusative of the object and in the sense of obscuring: Herodotus 1, 209; Sophocles, Aristotle, Thcophr., Philo, Lucian, Herodian, Geoponica. the Sept. for סָכַך to cover, Psalm 90:4 (); Psalm 139:8 (); for שָׁכַן, Exodus 40:29-35ἐπεσκίαζεν ἐπί τήν σκηνήν ἡ νεφέλη; (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 52, 4, 7).)

Question 371

σκοτιζομαι / σκοτίζω

Answer 371

I am covered with darkness, darkened

Thayer's Definition
to cover with darkness, to darken
to be covered with darkness, be darkened
of heavenly bodies as deprived of light
metaph.
of the eyes
of the understanding
of the mind

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
σκοτίζω,

make dark, τὸν θεὸν τὸν φωτίζοντα καὶ σκοτίζοντα τὸν κόσμον Tab.Defix.Aud. 242.13 (Carthage, iii A.D. ); get in the light of, ἐνέργειαν Gal. 18(2).698: metaph., λαβὼν δισσὰς ἐσκότισας χάριτας Ἀρχ.Δελτ. 11.57 ( Larissa ), cf. D.H. Th. 33, Them. Or. 11.153a; stupefy, σκορπίους Dsc. Eup. 2.133: — Pass., to be darkened, Plu. 2.1120e; to be blinded, σκοτισθήτωσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν LXX Psalms 68:24(69).24; τῇ διανοίᾳ Ep.Ephesians 4:18 (v.l.); χολῇ τὰς φρένας Tz. H. 8.929; to be dizzy, Aesop. 247b .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
σκοτίζω: passive, perfect participle ἐσκοτισμενος (Ephesians 4:18 R G); 1 aorist ἐσκοτίσθην; 1 future σκοτισθήσομαι; (σκότος); to cover with darkness, to darken; passive, to be covered with darkness, be darkened”: properly, of the heavenly bodies, as deprived of light ((Ecclesiastes 12:2)), Matthew 24:29; Mark 13:24; Luke 23:45 (T WH ἐκλείπω (which see 2)); Revelation 8:12; Revelation 9:2 (L T WH σκοτόω, which see); metaphorically, of the eyes, viz. of the understanding, Romans 11:10; ἡ καρδία, the mind (see καρδία, 2 b. β.), Romans 1:21; men τῇ διάνοια, Ephesians 4:18 R G. (Plutarch (adv. Col. 24, 4; Cleomed. 81, 28); Tzetzes, hist. 8, 929; the Sept. several times for חָשַׁך; (Polybius 12, 15, 10; 3Macc. 4:10; Test xii. Patr., test. Rub. § 3; test. Levi § 14).)

Question 372

ἀνίστημι

Answer 372

to raise up; to rise up

Thayer’s Definition
to cause to rise up, raise up
raise up from laying down
to raise up from the dead
to raise up, cause to be born, to cause to appear, bring forward
to rise, stand up
of persons lying down, of persons lying on the ground
of persons seated
of those who leave a place to go elsewhere
of those who prepare themselves for a journey
of the dead
at arise, appear, stand forth
of kings prophets, priests, leaders of insurgents
of those about to enter into conversation or dispute with anyone, or to undertake some business, or attempt something against others
to rise up against any one

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀνίστημι,

causal in pres. ἀνίστημι (later ἀνιστάω S.E. M. 9.61): impf. ἀνίστην: fut. ἀναστήσω, poet. ἀνστήσω: aor. 1 ἀνέστησα, ἄνστησα, Aeol. 3 pl. ὄστασαν Hsch.: pf. ἀνέστακα LXX 1 Samuel 15:12, Arr. Epict. 1.4.30: also in aor. 1 Med. ἀνεστησάμην (v. infr. 1.5, 111.6).

I

1. make to stand up, raise up, γέροντα δὲ χειρὸς ἀνίστη he raised the old man up by his hand, Il. 24.515, cf. Od. 14.319; τί μ’ αὖ.. ἐξ ἑδρας ἀνίστατε; S. Aj. 788; ἀ. τινὰ ἐκ τῆς κλίνης Pl. Prt. 317e; ὀρθὸν ἀ. τινά X. Mem. 1.4.11; ἀπὸ τοῦ καθαρμοῦ τινα D. 18.259.
2. raisefrom sleep, wake up, Il. 10.32, etc.; εἰς ἐκκλησίαν ἀ. τινά Ar. Ec. 740; ἀ. τινὰ ὠμόϋπνον Eup. 305: metaph., ἀ. νόσον S. Tr. 979.
3. raise from the dead, οὐδέ μιν ἀνστήσεις Il. 24.551, cf. A. Ag. 1361, S. El. 139; from misery or misfortune, Id. Ph. 666, Aeschin. 1.67.
4. produce a witness, etc. (cf. 111.6), προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀ. ὁ Θεός Acts 3:22, al.
5. after Hom., also of things, set up, build, στήλας v.l. in Hdt. 2.102; πύργους X. Cyr. 7.5.12, etc.; τρόπαια Διί E. Ph. 572; ἀνδριάντα ἐς Δελφούς Philipp. ap. D. 12.21; so ἀ. τινὰ χρυσοῦν, χαλκοῦν (in pure Attic ἱστάναι), set up a golden, brazen statue of him, Plu. 2.170e, Brut. 1 (Pass., v. infr. B): — so in aor. 1 Med., ἀναστήσασθαι πόλιν build oneself a city, Hdt. 1.165; ἀνεστήσαντο δὲ βωμούς they set them up altars, Call. Dian. 199. build up again, restore, τείχη D. 20.68: metaph., θεῶν τιμάς E. HF 852.
6. put up for sale, Hdt. 1.196.

II rouse to action, stir up, ἀλλ’ ἴθι νῦν Αἴαντα.. ἄνστησον Il. 10.176, cf. 179, 15.64, etc.: c. dat. pers., raise up against another, τούτῳ δὲ πρόμον ἄλλον ἀναστήσουσιν ib. 7.116 (v. infr. B. 1.5): rouse to arms, raise troops, Th. 2.68, 96; ἀ. πόλεμον ἐπί τινα Plu. Cor. 21; ἀναστήσας ἦγε στρατόν he called up his troops and marched them, Th. 4.93, cf. 112, etc.

III

1. make people rise, break up an assembly by force, Il. 1.191; but ἐκκλησίαν ἀναστῆσαι adjourn it, X. HG 2.4.42.
2. make people emigrate, transplant (cf. infr. B. 11.2), ἔνθεν ἀναστήσας ἄγε Od. 6.7; ἀνίστασαν τοὺς δήμους Hdt. 9.73; Αἰγινήτας ἐξ Αἰγίνης Th. 2.27; even γαῖαν ἀναστήσειν A.R. 1.1349; οἴκους Plu. Publ. 21; also ἀ. τινὰ ἐκ τῆς ἐργασίας D. 18.129.
3. make suppliants rise and leave sanctuary, Hdt. 5.71, Th. 1.137, S. OC 276, etc.: also ἀ. στρατόπεδον ἐκ χώρας make an army decamp, Plb. 29.27.10; τὰ πράγματα ἀνίστησί τινα Plu. Alc. 31.
4. ἀ. ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα make to ascend the tribune, Id. 2.784c, cf. Cam. 32.
5. of sportsmen, put up game, X. An. 1.5.3, cf. Cyr. 2.4.20 (Pass.), Cyn. 6.23, D.Chr. 2.2.
6. μάρτυρα ἀναστής ασθαί τινα call him as one’s witness, Pl. Lg. 937a. intr. in pres. and impf. ἀνίσταμαι, -μην, in fut. ἀναστήσομαι, in aor. 2 ἀνέστην (but ἀναστῶ, for ἀναστήσω, Crates Com. 4D.), imper. ἄστηθι (for ἄν-στηθι) Herod. 8.1, part. ἀστάς IG 4.951.112 (Epid.): pf. ἀνέστηκα, Att. plpf. ἀνεστήκη; also pf. ἀνεστέασι Hdt. 3.62: aor. Pass. ἀνεστάθην, Aeol. part. ὀσταθείς Hsch.: —

I

1. stand up, rise, esp. to speak, τοῖσι δ’ ἀνέστη Il. 1.68, 101, etc.; ἐν μέσσοισι 19.77: in Att. c. fut. part., ἀ. λέξων, κατηγορήσων, etc.: so c. inf., ἀνέστη μαντεύεσθαι Od. 20.380: in part., ἀναστὰς εἶπε E. Or. 885; παραινέσεις ἐποιοῦντο ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ἀνιστάμενοι Th. 8.76; also, rise from one’s seat as a mark of respect, θεοὶ δ’ ἅμα πάντες ἀνέσταν Il. 1.533; ἀπὸ βωμοῦ (cf. A. 111.3) Aeschin. 1.84.
2. rise from bed or sleep, ἐξ εὐνῆς ἀνστᾶσα Il. 14.336, cf. A. Eu. 124; εὐνῆθεν Od. 20.124; ὄρθρου ἀ. Hes. Op. 577; ὀψέ Ar. V. 217; οὐδ’ ἀνιστάμην ἐκ κλίνης, of a sick person, And. 1.64: abs., rise from sleep, Hdt. 1.31.
3. rise from the dead, Il. 21.56, cf. 15.287, Hdt. 3.62, A. Ag. 569; παρὰ τῶν πλειόνων Ar. Ec. 1073.
4. rise from an illness, recover, ἐκ τῆς νούσου Hdt. 1.22, cf. Pl. La. 195c: abs., Th. 2.49.
5. rise as a champion, Il. 23.709; θανάτων χώρᾳ πύργος ἀνέστα [Oedipus] S. OT 1201: hence c. dat., stand up [to fight against..], Ἀγκαῖον.., ὅς μοι ἀνέστη Il. 23.635; μή τίς τοι.. ἄλλος ἀναστῇ Od. 18.334; Τυφῶνα θοῦρον πᾶσιν ὃς ἀνέστη θεοῖς A. Pr. 354 codd.; v. supr. A. 11.
6. rise up, rear itself, πύργοι E. Ph. 824 (lyr.), cf. Plb. 16.1.5; of statues, etc., to be set up, Plu. 2.91a, 198f: metaph., μή τι ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀναστήῃ κακόν Pi. P. 4.155; πόλεμος D.H. 3.23; θορύβου ἀναστάντος App. BC 1.56.
7. to be set up, βασιλεύς as king, Hdt. 3.66 codd.
8. of a river, rise, ἐξ ὀρέων Plu. Pomp. 34.
9. pf. part., γῆ γηλόφοισιν ἀνεστηκυῖα Arr. Ind. 4.7: metaph., lofty, ἀ. τὴν ψυχὴν γενόμενος Eun. Hist. p.233 D.

II rise to go, set out, go away, εἰς Ἄργος E. Heracl. 59, cf. Th. 1.87, 7.49, 50; ἀνίστατο εἰς οἴκημά τι ὡς λουσόμενος Pl. Phd. 116a.

2. to be compelled to migrate (supr. A. 111.2), ἐξ Ἄρνης ἀναστάντες ὑπὸ Θεσσαλῶν Th. 1.12, cf. 8: of a country, to be depopulated, χώρα ἀνεστηκυῖα Hdt. 5.29; πόλις.. πᾶσ’ ἀνέστηκεν δορί E. Hec. 494; ἡσυχάσασα ἡ Ἑλλὰς καὶ οὐκέτι ἀνισταμένη no longer subject to migration, Th. 1.12; τὴν ἀσφάλειαν.. περιείδετ’ ἀνασταθεῖσαν D. 19.84.
3. of a law-court, rise, Id. 21.221.
4. cease, οὐκ, ἀνέστη ἕως ἐνίκησε σκορπίσαι Psalm.Solom. 4.13.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀνίστημι: future ἀναστήσω; 1 aorist ἀνέστησα; 2 aorist ἀνέστην, imperative ἀνάστηθι and (Acts 12:7; Ephesians 5:14 and L WH text in Acts 9:11) ἀνάστα (Winers Grammar, § 14, 1 h.; (Buttmann, 47 (40))); middle, present ἀνισταμαι; future ἀναστήσομαι; (from Homer down);

I. Transitively, in the present 1 aorist and future active, to cause to rise, raise up (הֵקִים):
a. properly, of one lying down: Acts 9:41.
b. to raise up from death: John 6:39f, 44, 54; Acts 2:32; Acts 13:34 (so in Greek writings).
c. to raise up, cause to be born: σπέρμα offspring (Genesis 38:8), Matthew 22:24 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 33 (32)); τόν Χριστόν, Acts 2:30 Rec. to cause to appear, bring forward, τινα τίνι one for anyone’s succor: προφήτην, Acts 3:22; Acts 7:37; τόν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Acts 3:26.
II. Intransitively, in the perfect pluperfect and 2 aorist active, and in the middle;
1. to rise, stand up; used a. of persons lying down (on a couch or bed): Mark 1:35; Mark 5:42; Luke 8:55; Luke 11:7; Acts 9:34, 40. of persons lying on tht ground: Mark 9:27; Luke 17:19; Luke 22:46; Acts 9:6.
b. of persons seated: Luke 4:16 (ἀνέστη ἀναγνῶναι); Matthew 26:62; Mark 14:60; Acts 23:9.
c. of those who leave a place to go elsewhere: Matthew 9:9; Mark 2:14; ( R G); Luke 4:38; Luke 23:1; Acts 9:30. Hence, of those who prepare themselves for a journey (German sich aufmachen): Mark 7:24; Mark 10:1; Luke 1:39; Luke 15:18, 20; Acts 10:20; Acts 22:10. In the same way the Hebrew קוּם (especially וַיָּקָם) is put before verbs of going, departing, etc., according to the well known oriental custom to omit nothing contributing to the full pictorial delineation of an action or event; hence, formerly וַיָקָם and ἀναστάς were sometimes incorrectly said to be redundant; cf. Winer’s Grammar, 608 (565). ἀναστῆναι ἀπό to rise up from something, i. e. from what one has been doing while either sitting or prostrate on the ground: Luke 22:45.
d. of the dead; 2 aorist, with ἐκ νεκρῶν added: Matthew 17:9 R G WH marginal reading; Mark 9:9; Mark 12:25; Luke 16:31; Luke 24:46; John 20:9; Ephesians 5:14 (here figuratively); with ἐκ νεκρῶν omitted: Mark 8:31; Mark 16:9; Luke 9:8, 19 (22 L T Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading); Luke 24:7; Romans 14:9 Rec.; so (without ἐκ νεκρῶν) in the future middle also: Matthew 12:41; (, L WH marginal reading); Matthew 20:19 (R G L Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading); Mark 10:34; Luke 11:32; Luke 18:33; John 11:23; 1 Thessalonians 4:16.
2. to arise, appear, stand forth; of kings, prophets, priests, leaders of insurgents: Acts 5:36; Acts 7:18. middle, Romans 15:12; Hebrews 7:11, 15. of those about to enter into conversation or dispute with anyone, Luke 10:25; Acts 6:9; or to undertake some business, Acts 5:6; or to attempt something against others, Acts 5:17. Hence, ἀναστῆναι ἐπί τινα to rise up against anyone: Mark 3:26 (עַל קוּם). (Synonym: see ἐγείρω, at the end Compare: ἐπανίστημι, ἐξανίστημι.)

Question 373

ἐνίστημι

Answer 373

I am at hand, am present

Thayer's Definition
to place in or among, to put in
to be upon, impend, threaten
close at hand
present

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐνίστημι,

I causal in pres., fut. and aor. 1 Act., and aor. 1 Med.: —

1. put, place in, ἵππον ἐν λίθοις ἐνιστάναι X. Eq.Mag. 1.16; στήλας ἐνίστη ἐς τὰς χώρας Hdt. 2.102; εἰς αὐτὴν (sc. τὴν πόλιν) ἡνίοχον ἐνστῆσαι Pl. Plt. 266e; τοὺς ἱπποκόμους εἰς (i.e. amongst) τοὺς ἱππέας ἐ. X. Eq.Mag. 5.6: c. dat., ἱστὸν ἐνεστήσαντο μεσόδμῃ A.R. 1.563.
2. in Law, institute an heir, ἐ. κληρονόμους τοὺς υἱούς PMasp. 151.75 (vi A. D.).
3. aor. 1 Med., also, begin, ὅσαι τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτ’ ἐνεστήσαντο Ar. Lys. 268; οὐδὲν πώποτε τῶν πραγμάτων ἐνεστήσασθ’ ὀρθῶς D. 10.21; ὁ τοιοῦτον ἀγῶν’ ἐνστησάμενος Id. 18.4; ἐ. τὸ πρᾶγμα, Lat. rem instituere, Arist. Pr. 951a28; ἀρχὰς τῆς γενέσεως Thphr. HP 7.10.4; ὀργὴν καὶ μῖσος πρός τινα ἐνστήσασθαι to begin to show.., Plb. 1.82.9; πρᾶξιν Plu. Arat. 16: c. inf., D.S. 14.53.
4. ἐνστήσασθαι τὸ μέγεθος determine the size, Ph. Bel. 50.29. Pass., with aor. 2, pf., and plpf.
5. Act.: — to be set in, stand in, λὁχοις E. Supp. 896; ἐν τῷ νηῷ Hdt. 2.91: abs., πύλαι ἐνεστᾶσι ἑκατόν Id. 1.179, cf. Pl. Ti. 50d, etc.
6. enter upon, take possession of, ὁ νικάσας ἐν τὰν οὐσίαν ἐνίσταται τὰν τοῦ ἁλόντος Foed. Delph.Pell. 2 B 14.

II to be appointed, σοῦ ἐνεστεῶτος βασιλέος Hdt. 1.120, cf. 6.59; ἐς ἀρχήν Id. 3.68; ἐς τυραννίδας Id. 2.147.

III

1. to be upon, threaten, c. dat. pers., τοιούτων τοῖσι Σπαρτιήτῃσι ἐνεστεώτων πρηγμάτων Id. 1.83; τὸν πόλεμον τὸν ἐνστάντα σοὶ καὶ τῇ πόλει Isoc. 5.2; in war, press hard, τινί Plb. 3.97.1: abs., begin, [ τοῦ θέρους] ἐνισταμένου Thphr. HP 9.8.2; ἐνισταμένου τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ LXX 3 Ki. 12.24; to be at hand, arise, ὁ τότ’ ἐνστὰς πόλεμος D. 18.89, cf. 139, Plb. 1.71.4; τοῦ πολέμου πρὸς Φίλιππον ὑμῖν ἐνεστηκότος Aeschin. 2.58: esp. in pf. part., pending, present, μιᾶς ἐνεστώσης δίκης Ar. Nu. 779, cf. Isa 11.45, D. 33.14; ὁ νῦν ἐνεστηκὼς ἀγών Lycurg. 7; so οὐδενὸς ἡμῖν ἐνεστῶτος πρὸς αὐτούς PStrassb. 91.21 (i B.C.); of Time, instant, present, τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνός Philipp. ap. D. 18.157; ἡ ἐνεστῶσα κακία, ἀνάγκη, PPetr. 2p.60, 1 Corinthians 7:26; κατὰ τὸν ἐ. καιρόν Arist. Rh. 1366b23; ἀγαθὸν ἐνεστὼς ἢ μέλλον Stoic. 3.94; cf. ἐνεστάναι τὸν πάντα χρόνον ὡς τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν ἐνεστηκέναι λέγομεν Apollod.Stoic. 3.260.
2. esp. Gramm., ὁ ἐνεστὼς (sc. χρόνος) the present tense, Stoic. 2.48, D.T. 638.22, A.D. Pron. 58.7, al.; also ἐνεστῶσα συντέλεια the state of completion expressed by the perfect tense, Id. Synt. 205.15: also in aor., τοῦ ποτὲ ἐνστάντος when the moment has arrived, Plot. 4.3.13; τὰ ἐνεστηκότα πράγματα present circumstances, X. HG 2.1.6; so τὰ ἐνεστῶτα Plb. 2.26.3.
3. stand in the way, resist, block, τοῖς ποιουμένοις Th. 8.69; τῇ φυγῇ Plu. Lu 13; τῇ αὐξήσει Id. Rom. 25; πρὸς πᾶσάν τινι πολιτείαν Id. Arist. 3, cf. Mar 22: abs., stand in the way, Th. 3.23; in argument, ἐνέστηκεν ὃ νυνδὴ Κέβης ἔλεγε Pl. Phd. 77b; ὁ ἐνεστηκώς the opponent in a lawsuit, SIG 45.28 (Halic., v B.C.).
4. in Logic, object, τῷ καθόλου Arist. Top. 157b3; πρὸς τὸν ἔξω λόγον Id. APo. 76b26: abs., Id. Rh. 1402b24,al.; ἐ. ὅτι.. Id. APr. 69b6; ὡς.. Id. EN 1172b35, A.D. Synt. 176.23.
5. of the Roman tribunes, exercise the right of intercessio, veto, Plb. 6.16.4, Plu. TG 10,al. of fluids, congeal, freeze, ὕδωρ ἐνεστηκός Thphr. CP 5.13.1; become impacted in, ἐνιστάμενον ἐπὶ τὰ τοῦ στομάχου στενά (sc. γάλα) Dsc. Alex. 26.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐνεστως, see ἐνίστημι.

STRONGS NT 1764: ἐνίστημι ἐνίστημι: perfect ἐνέστηκα, participle ἐνεστηκώς (Hebrews 9:9), and by syncope ἐνεστως; future middle ἐνστήσομαι; to place in or among; to put in; in perfect, pluperfect, 2 aorist, and in middle (properly, as it were to stand in sight, stand near) to be upon, impend, threaten: 2 Thessalonians 2:2; future middle 2 Timothy 3:1. perfect participle close at hand, 1 Corinthians 7:26; as often in Greek writings (in the grammarians ὁ ἐνεστως namely, χρόνος is the present tense (cf. Philo de plant. Noë § 27 τριμερης χρόνος, ὅς εἰς τόν παρεληλυθότα καί ἐνεστῶτα καί μέλλοντα τέμνεσθαι πέφυκεν)), present: ὁ καιρός ὁ ἐνεστως, Hebrews 9:9; τά ἐνεστῶτα opposed to τά μέλλοντα, Romans 8:38; 1 Corinthians 3:22; ὁ ἐνεστως αἰών πονηρός in tacit contrast with τῷ μέλλοντι αἰῶνι, Galatians 1:4 (Basil., epistle 57 ad Melet (iii., p. 151 c., Benedict. edition) ὠφέλιμα διδαγματα ἤ ἐφοδια πρός τέ τόν ἐνεστῶτα αἰῶνα καί τόν μέλλοντα). (Many (so R. V.) would adopt the meaning present in 2 Thessalonians 2:2 and 1 Corinthians 7:26 also; but cf. Meyer on Galatians, the passage cited.)

Question 374

ἐφίστημι

Answer 374

I stand over, come upon

to place at, place upon, place over
to stand by, be present
to stand over one, place one's self above
used esp. of persons coming upon one suddenly 1b
an angel, of the advent of angels 1b
of dreams
of evils coming upon one
to be at hand
be ready,
of time
to come upon 1d
of rain

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐφίστημι,

Ion. ἐπ-: causal in pres., impf., fut., and aor. 1 (also in the later pf. and plpf. ἐφέστᾰκα, ἐφεστάκειν [ᾰ ], v. infr. 11.1, VI. 2):

I set, place upon, τεῖχος τείχει Th. 2.75; τι ἐπί τινος Pl. Criti. 116a; τι ἐπί τινι X. HG 3.1.7; ὅρους ἐπὶ οἰκίαν D. 41.6: metaph., ἐ. τὴν ἐκεῖ μοῖραν βίῳ Pl. R. 498c; ἀνάγκην τινί D.H. 1.16.

II

1. set over, μ’ Ἀπόλλων τῷδ’ ἐπέστησεν τέλει A. Ag. 1202; φύλακ’ ἐπέστησεν βοτ Id. Supp. 303; ἐ. τινὰ ὕπαρχόν τισι Hdt. 5.27; τινὰ παιδαγωγόν τινι Pl. Alc. 1.122b, cf. X. Lac. 2.1; τινὰ πεντηκοντόρῳ Id. An. 5.1.15; τινὰ τοῖς πράγμασι Isoc. 2.27; τὸν νόμον Arist. Pol. 1292b28; ἐπὶ [συμμάχων] τινά Plb. 2.65.9; ἐφεστάκει τινὰς πρὸς χρείαν Id. 10.20.5; κύνα ἐπὶ ποίμνην D. 26.22; τινὰ ἐπὶ τὰς εὐθύνας Id. 18.112: c. inf., βουλὴν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τῆς εὐκοσμίας Isoc. 7.37: — Pass., to be appointed, instituted, PTeb. 61 (b).358 (ii B. C.), etc.
2. bring in, ἡ τύχη ἐπιστήσασα Ῥωμαίους Plb. 15.20.6; Φίλιππον ἐ. τοῖς πράγμασι to let him have a hand in the business, D. 19.34.
3. bring in, cause, occasion, κατάπληξίν τισι D.S. 14.62; κίνδυνον, ἀγῶνά τινι, App. Hann. 55, Syr. 10; ἡ τύχη λοιμικὴν διάθεσιν ἐπέστησε Γαλάταις Plb. 2.20.7.

III

1. set up, establish, ἀγῶνα Hdt. 1.167, 6.38: c. acc. et inf., ordain, prescribe, ὁ νόμος ἐφίστησι τὰ λοιπὰ κρίνειν τοὺς ἄρχοντας Arist. Pol. 1287a26; ἐπιστήσατε quid facere debeamus, Plin. 6.31.12. set by or near to, ἐπιστήσαντες κύκλῳ τὸ σῆμα ἱππέας Hdt. 4.72; esp. place in rear, of troops, τὴν φάλαγγα τούτοις κατόπιν ἐ. Plb. 1.33.6, cf. 1.26. 14. stop, cause to halt, ἐπιστῆσαι τὸ στράτευμα X. Cyr. 4.2.18; τὴν ὁδόν, τὴν πορείαν, D.S. 17.112, Plu. Cim. 1; τοὺς ἱππέας τοῦ πρόσω Arr. An. 5.16.1; ἐ. τὴν ὁρμήν check it, Plb. 16.34.2; τὴν διήγησιν interrupt it, Id. 7.11.1; check, ἔμμηνα Dsc. 1.125, cf. POxy. 1088.20 (i A. D.): abs., ἐπιστήσας (sc. ἑαυτόν) having halted, X. An. 1.8.15: — Pass., to be checked, stopped, PPetr. 2p.62 (iii B. C.); ἐὰν ἐφίστηται ἡ κοιλία Sor. 1.122. ἐφίστημι τὴν διάνοιαν κατά τι, περί τινος, fix one’s mind upon it, attend to it, Isoc. 9.69, Arist. Metaph. 987b3, Thphr. Char.Prooem., etc.; τὴν σκέψιν περί τινος Arist. Metaph. 1090a2; τὸν λόγον Id. Juv. 470b5; τὸν νοῦν τινι D.S. 12.1; αὑτὸν ἐπιστήσας ἐπί τι Arist. Top. 135a26: ἐπιστῆσαι abs., give attention, τούτοις ἐπιστήσαντες Id. Mu. 391a26; περί τινος Id. GC 315b18; περί τι Id. HA 487a13; ἐπί τι Plb. 1.65.5, etc.; ἐπιστήσασι μᾶλλον λεκτέον one must speak with more care and accuracy, Arist. Pol. 1335b3, cf. EN 1144a22; πότερον.. ἤ Jul. ad Them. 265b; ὅτι.. Sor. 1.97 (hence ἐπίσταμαι, ἐπιστήμη, qq.v.).
2. c. acc. pers., arrest the attention of, Plu. TG 17, cf. 2.17e, Gal. 18(2).105; ἐπιστῆσαί τινα ἐπί τι call his attention to, Plb. 2.61.11, cf. 4.34.9; τοῦ καιροῦ τοῦ κατὰ τὴν διήγησιν ἐφεστακότος ἡμᾶς ἐπί τι having led us to.., Id. 10.21.2, cf. 31.23.1: hence, object, Plot. 1.4.5. intr. in Med. and Pass., ἐφίσταμαι, aor. 1 ἐπεστάθην [ S. ] Fr. [1127.5], E. Hipp. 819, IT 1375, etc., with pf., plpf. (Aeol. plpf. 3 sg. ἐπήστᾱκε Schwyzer 646.16 (Cyme, ii B. C.): Dor. plpf. 3 pl. ἐφεστάκεον [ᾱ ] SIG 241.146 (Delph., iv B. C.)), and aor. 2 Act.: (the causal tenses are not found in Hom., the Med. or Pass. only in impf. ἐφίστατο Il. 11.644; elsewh. always aor. 2 or pf. Act. with inf. ἐφεστάμεναι Od. 24.380): —
3. stand upon, τεῖχος.. ῥύατ’ ἐφεσταότες Il. 18.515; πύργῳ ἐφεστήκει 6.373; δίφρῳ ἐφεσταότος 17.609, etc.; ἐπέστη βηλῷ ἔπι λιθέῳ 23.201; ἡ.. ἐπισταθεῖσα ὀρθή Arist. Metaph. 1051a28; ἐπὶ τὰς.. σχεδίας Plb. 3.46.8.
4. to be imposed upon, μόχθων τῶν ἐφεστώτων ἐμοί S. Tr. 1170.
5. stand on the top or surface, τὸ ἐπιστάμενον [τοῦ γάλακτος ], i. e. cream, Hdt. 4.2; λιπαρότητες ἄνω ἐφιστάμεναι Hp. Prog. 12; ἐ. καθάπερ ὀρρὸς [γάλακτι ] Dsc. 1.72; of vapour, form, Arist. Juv. 469b31. II to be set over, ἐφίσταται πύλαις A. Th. 538; οἷός τε πολλοῖς προβατίοις ἐφεστάναι Ar. V. 955; οἷοι νῷν ἐφεστᾶσι σκοποί S. Aj. 945; ἄρχοντες ἐφ’ ἑκάστῳ μέρει ἐ. X. Hier. 9.5; ἐπί τινος Pl. R. 460b; ἐπὶ τῆς πολιτείας D. 19.298: rarely c. gen., τὸν ἐπεστεῶτα τῆς διώρυχος Hdt. 7.117; ὅσοι θεοῦ χρημάτων ἐφέστασαν E. Andr. 1098: abs. in part., ὁ ἐφεστηκώς the person in authority, the officer in command, X. Oec. 21.9; οἱ ἐφεστῶτες, Ion. οἱ ἐπεστεῶτες, Hdt. 2.148, S. Aj. 1072, X. Mem. 3.5.19.

III

1. stand by or near, ὣς πυκνοὶ ἐφέστασαν ἀλλήλοισιν Il. 13.133; ἐπ’ ἄκρῳ χείλει ἐφεσταότες, ἐ. παρὰ τάφρῳ, 12.52, 199; θύρῃσιν ἐφίστατο 11.644; ἐπὶ τὰς πύλας, ἐπὶ τὰς θύρας, Hdt. 3.77, Pl. Smp. 212d; ἐπὶ τοῖς προθύροις Id. Phlb. 64c; esp. of dreams or visions, appear to, εὕδοντι ἐπέστη ὄνειρος Hdt. 1.34, cf. 7.14; ὄναρ κεφαλῆφιν ἐπέστη Il. 10.496; ἐπιστᾶσα τῆς νυκτός Isoc. 10.65; ἄγγελος ἐπέστη αὐτοῖς.Luke 2:9 : abs., stand by, Hdt. 3.78; πολλῶν ἐφεστώτων App. Syr. 10; ἤμην ἐφεστώς Acts 22:20; οἱ λέβητες ἐπεστεῶτες Hdt. 1.59; ὁ ἀντίδικος ἐφέστηκε Pl. Tht. 172e, cf. Aeschin. 3.79; without hostile sense, ἐπέστης S. OC 558, cf. Luke 2:38, etc.; of troops, to be posted after or behind, κατόπιν ἐ. τοῖς θηρίοις Plb. 16.18.7.
2. in hostile sense, stand against, τὰ φρονέοντες ἐφέστασαν ἀλλήλοισιν Il. 15.703, cf. 5.624; ἔνθα μένος πνείοντες ἐφέστασαν Od. 22.203, cf. 24.380; appear before, of an army, ἐπὶ τῇ πόλι Hdt. 4.203; ἐπὶ τὸ βασίλειον Isoc. 9.58; come upon suddenly or by surprise, Th. 8.69; ἐξαίφνης ἐπιστὰς τοῖς γιγνομένοις Isoc. 8.41, cf. D. 6.5, Luc. DDeor. 17.1; εἰς τοὺς ὄχλους Isoc. 18.9; so of events, etc., αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐ. ὄλεθρος 1 Thessalonians 5:3, cf. Luke 21:34; διὰ τὸν ἐφεστῶτα ζόφον Plb. 18.20.7; διὰ τὸν ὑετὸν τὸν ἐφεστῶτα Acts 28:2.
3. metaph., of events, spring upon one, occur, πρίν μοι τύχη τοιάδ’ ἐπέστη S. OT 777, cf. Th. 3.82; in pf., impend, be at hand, τὸν ἐφεστηκότα κίνδυνον τῇ πόλει D. 18.176; ὁ καιρός.. ἐφέστηκε 2 Timothy 4:6; περὶ τοῦ βασιλέως.. ὁ λόγος ἐφέστηκε νῦν Arist. Pol. 1287a2, cf. Metaph. 999a25; of a more remote future, to be in store, lie in wait for, κῆρες ἐφεστᾶσιν θανάτοιο Il. 12.326.
4. halt, stop, as in a march, ἄλλοτε καὶ ἄλλοτε ἐφιστάμενος X. An. 2.4.26 (cf. A. V); ἐπιστὰς περιέμεινα Pl. Smp. 172a: c. gen., ἐ. τοῦ πλοῦ Th. 2.91. fix one’s mind on, give one’s attention to, σφαγῇ E. Andr. 547; τῇ τρύγῃ PFlor. 236.4 (iii A. D.); ἐπί τι Isoc. 10.29, D. 18.60; τοῖς πράγμασιν.. ἐπιστάντες Id. 4.12; ἐπιστάς abs. (sc. τοῖς πράγμασι), Id. 18.233; διὰ ταῦτ’ ἐγρήγορεν, ἐφέστηκεν Id. 6.19. aor. 1 Med. in causal sense, set up, τὰς θύρας X. Ages. 8.7; set, post, φρουροὺς ἐπεστησάμην Id. Cyr. 8.2.19; τέλος ἐπιστήσασθαι, Lat. finem imponere, Pl. Lg. 802a: pres. is once so used, τοῦ με τήνδ’ ἐφίστασαι βάσιν; why dost thou cause me to halt ? S. Tr. 339.
5. ἐπιστησάμενος, intr., having been ἐπιστάτης, IGRom. 4.1265 (Thyatira).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐφίστημι: 2 aorist ἐπέστην, participle ἐπιστάς, imperative ἐπίστηθι; perfect participle ἐφεστώς; to place at, place upon, place over; in the N. T. only in the middle (present indicative 3 person singular ἐπίσταται (for ἐφίσταται), 1 Thessalonians 5:3 T Tr WH; see references under the word ἀφειδον) and the intransitive tenses of the active, viz. perfect and 2 aorist (see ἀνίστημι); to stand by, be present: Luke 2:38; Acts 22:20; ἐπάνω with the genitive of person to stand over one, place oneself above, Luke 4:39; used especially of persons coming upon one suddenly: simply, Luke 10:40; Luke 20:1; Acts 6:12; Acts 22:13; Acts 23:27; of an angel, Acts 12:7; with the dative of person, Acts 4:1; Acts 23:11; of the advent of angels, Luke 2:9; Luke 24:4 (of Hephaestus, Lucian, dial. deor. 17, 1; frequently of dreams, as Homer, Iliad 10, 496; 23, 106; Herodotus 1, 34; others); with the dative of place, Acts 17:5; followed by ἐπί; with the accusative of place, Acts 10:17; Acts 11:11; of evils coming upon one: with the dative of person, 1 Thessalonians 5:3 (see above); ἐπί τινα, Luke 21:34 (Wis. 6:9 Wis. 19:1; Sophocles O. R. 777; Thucydides 3, 82). equivalent to to be at hand i. e. be ready: 2 Timothy 4:2, cf. Leo at the passage (Euripides, Andr. 547; Demosthenes, p. 245, 11). to be at hand i. e. impend: of time, 2 Timothy 4:6. to come on, of rain, Acts 28:2. (Compare: κατεφιστημι, συνεφίστημι.)

Question 375

ἐπιστάτης

Answer 375

a master

Thayer’s Definition
any sort of superintendent or overseer

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐπιστᾰτ-ης, ου, ὁ, (ἐφίσταμαι)

I

1. one who stands near or by: hence, like ἱκέτης, suppliant, οὐ σύ γ’ ἂν.. σῷ ἐπιστάτῃ οὐδ’ ἅλα δοίης Od. 17.455.
2. . in battle-order, one’s rear-rank man, X. Cyr. 3.3.50, 8.1.10, al.. also, even numbers in a λόχος, Ascl. Tact. 2.3, Arr. Tact. 6.6.

II.

1. one who stands or is mounted upon, ἁρμάτων ἐ., of a charioteer, S. El. 702, E. Ph. 1147; ἐλεφάντων ἐ., of the driver, Plb. 1.40.11.
2. . one who is set over, chief, commander, A. Th. 816 (815); ὅπλων Id. Pers. 379; ποιμνίων ἐ. S. Aj. 27; ἐρετμῶν ἐ. E. Hel. 1267; θύματος ἐ. Id. Hec. 223; but ταύρων πυρπνόων ζεύγλῃσι mastering them with.., Id. Med. 478; ἐνόπτρων καὶ μύρων, of the Trojans, Id. Or. 1112; ἐ. Κολωνοῦ, of a tutelary god, S. OC 889; [ καιρὸς] ἀνδράσιν μέγιστος ἔργου παντός ἐστ’ ἐ. Id. El. 76; also in Prose, ἐ. γενέσθαι τῶν λόγων ἴσους καὶ κοινούς judges, And. 4.7; ποίας ἐργασίας ἐ.; Answ. ἐ. τοῦ ποιῆσαι δεινὸν λέγειν (where it = ἐπιστήμων) Pl. Prt. 312d; πραγμάτων Isoc. 4.121; ἐπιστάται ἄθλων stewards of games, Pl. Lg. 949a, cf. X. Lac. 8.4; of a pilot, Id. Oec. 21.3; supervisor of training, Pl. R. 412a, X. Mem. 3.5.18 (pl.); ἐ. τῶν παίδων IG 12(1).43 (Rhodes); τῶν ἐφήβων Inscr.Prien. 112.73 (i B.C.): voc. ἐπιστάτα, = Rabbi, Luke 5:5, al.

III.

1. president of a board or assembly: at Athens, ἐ. τῶν πρυτάνεων chairman of βουλή and ἐκκλησία in cent. v, Arist. Ath. 44.1, later, keeper of Treasury or Archives, IG 3.841, etc.; ἐ. τῶν προέδρων chairman of βουλή and ἐκκλησία from cent.iv, Aeschin. 3.39, D. 22.9, etc.; ἐ. ὁ ἐκ τῶν προέδρων IG 22.204.31 (iv B.C.); in other Greek states, ib.12(1).731 (Rhodes), 12(7).515.116, 125 (Amorgos), etc.; ἐ. τῶν νομοθετῶν ib.22.222; τῶν δικα[στῶν ] LW 1539 (Erythrae).
2. . overseer, superintendent, in charge of any public building or works, τοῦ νεὼ τοῦ ἐν πόλει, i.e. of the temple of Athena Polias, IG 12.372; ἱεροῦ UPZ 42.22 (ii B.C.); ἐ. τῶν ἔργων clerk of the works, D. 18.114, LXX Exodus 1:11 (pl.); τῶν δημοσίων ἔργων Aeschin. 3.14; τοῦ ναυτικοῦ ib.222; τῆς Ἀκαδημείας Hyp. Dem.Fr. 7; τοῦ Μουσείου OGI 104.4 (ii B.C.); τῶν κοπρώνων D. 25.49.
3. . governor, administrator, τῆς πόλεως OGI 254.3 (Babylon, ii B.C.), cf. IG 12(3).320.7 (Thera, iii B.C.), OGI 479.7 (Dorylaeum, ii A.D.); κώμης local magistrate, Arch.Pap. 4.38.
4. . = προστάτης, Lat. patronus, IG 14.1317.. in Ar. Av. 437, = χυτρόπους, Ar.Byz. ap. Eust. 1827.45; other explanations, ibid., cf.Sch.Ar.l.c.: τοὐπιστάτου is fr. ἐπίστατος, = πυρίστατος, Anon. ap. Eust. 1827.56: dub. sens. in BpW 1892.514; cf. ἐπίστατον.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπιστάτης, ἐπιστατου, ὁ (ἐφίστημι), any sort of a superintendent or overseer (often so in secular writings, and several times in the Sept., as Exodus 1:11; Exodus 5:14; 1 Kings 5:16; 2 Kings 25:19; Jeremiah 36:26 (); 2 Chronicles 2:2; 2 Chronicles 31:12); a master, used in this sense for רַבִּי by the disciples (cf. Luke 17:13) when addressing Jesus, who called him thus not from the fact that he was a teacher, but because of his authority (Bretschneider); found only in Luke 5:5; Luke 8:24, 45; Luke 9:33, 49; Luke 17:13.

Question 376

καθίστημι

Answer 376

I set, constitute

Thayer’s Definition
to set, place, put
to set one over a thing (in charge of it)
to appoint one to administer an office
to set down as, constitute, to declare, show to be
to constitute, to render, make, cause to be
to conduct or bring to a certain place
to show or exhibit one’s self
come forward as

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
καθίστημι,

I

1. in causal sense: — Act., in pres., impf., fut., and pf. καθέστᾰκα Hyp. Eux. 28, LXX Jeremiah 1:10, D.H. Dem. 54, D.S. 32.11, etc.; once καθέστηκα PHib. 1.82i14 (iii B. C.): plpf. -εστάκει Demetr. Sceps. ap. Ath. 15.697d: — also in Med., fut. (Paus. 3.5.1), aor. 1, more rarely pres. (infr. A. 11.2): — set down, κρητῆρα καθίστα Il. 9.202; νῆα κατάστησον bring it to land, Od. 12.185; κ. δίφρους place, station them, before starting for the race, S. El. 710; ποῖ [ δεῖ ] καθιστάναι πόδα; E. Ba. 184; κ. τινὰ εἰς τὸ φανερόν X. An. 7.7.22; set up, erect, of stones, Inscr.Cypr. 94, 95 H.: — Med., [ λαῖφος ] κατεστήσαντο βοεῦσι steadied it, h.Ap. 407.
2. bring down to a place, τούς μ’ ἐκέλευσα Πύλονδε καταστῆσαι Od. 13.274: generally, bring, κ. τινὰ ἐς Νάξον Hdt. 1.64, cf. Th. 4.78; esp. bring back, πάλιν αὐτὸν κ. ἐς τὸ τεῖχος σῶν καὶ ὑγιᾶ Id. 3.34; κ. τοὺς Ἕλληνας εἰς Ἰωνίαν πάλιν X. An. 1.4.13; without πάλιν, replace, restore, ἐς φῶς σὸν κ. βίον E. Alc. 362; ἃς (sc. τὰς κόρας) οὐδ’ ὁ Μελάμπους.. καταστήσειεν ἄν cure their squint, Alex. 112.5; ἰκτεριῶντας κ. Dsc. 4.1; τὸ σῶμα restore the general health, Hp. Mul. 2.133: — Med., κατεστήσαντο (v.l. for κατεκτήσαντο) εὐδαιμονίαν Isoc. 4.62: — Pass., οὐκ ἂν ἀντὶ πόνων Χάρις καθίσταιτο would be returned, Th. 4.86.
3. bring before a ruler or magistrate, Hdt. 1.209, PRyl. 65.10 (i B. C.), etc.; τινὰ ἐπί τινα PCair.Zen. 202.6 (iii B. C.), POxy. 281.24 (i A. D.).

II

1. set in order, array, of soldiers, X. An. 1.10.10; set as guards, προφυλακάς ib. 3.2.1, etc.
2. ordain, appoint, κατέστησε τύραννον εἶναι παῖδα τὸν ἑωυτοῦ Hdt. 5.94, cf. 25: usu. without the inf., κ. τινὰ ὕπαρχον Id. 7.105; ἄλλον [ ἄρχοντα ] ἀντὶ αὐτοῦ X. Cyr. 3.1.12, etc.; βασιλέα ἐπί τινας LXX 1 Samuel 8:5, al.; τινὰ ἐς μοναρχίαν E. Supp. 352; ἐπὶ τὰς ἀρχάς Isoc. 12.132; τινὰ τύραννον Ar. Av. 1672; κ. ἐγγυητάς Hdt. 1.196, Ar. Ec. 1064; δικαστάς, ἐπιμελητάς, νομοθέτας, Id. Pl. 917, X. Cyr. 8.1.9, D. 3.10 (sed leg. καθίσατε, cf. καθίζω 1.4); of games, etc., γυμνικοὺς ἀγῶνας κ. Isoc. 4.1: rarely c. inf., οἱ καθιστάντες μουσικῇ.. παιδεύειν Pl. R. 410b: — so in Pass., κυβερνᾶν κατασταθείς X. Mem. 1.7.3: aor. Med., appoint for oneself, τύραννον καταστησάμενοι παρὰ. σφίσι αὐτοῖσι Hdt. 5.92.á; ἄρχοντας X. An. 3.1.39, etc. esp. of laws, constitutions, ceremonies, etc., establish, νόμους, τελετάς, E. Or. 892, Ba. 21, etc.; πολιτείαν, δημοκρατίαν, Arist. Ath. 7.1, Decr.ib. 29.3; ὀλιγαρχίαν Lys. 12.42; also, set in order, arrange, πολιτείαν Pl. R. 590e: — also in Med., τοῦτο βουλευτήριον φρούρημα γῆς καθίσταμαι A. Eu. 706; τὴν Ἱππίου καθίσταμαι τυραννίδα Ar. V. 502; καθίστατο τὰ περὶ τὴν Μυτιλήνην ᾗ αὐτῷ ἐδόκει Th. 3.35; πόλεις ἐπὶ τὸ ὠφέλιμον Id. 1.76; [ Εὔβοιαν ] ὁμολογίᾳ ib. 114; πρὸς ἐμὲ τὸ πρᾶγμα καταστήσασθαι settle it with me, D. 21.90.
3. bring into a certain state, τινὰ ἐς ἀπόνοιαν Th. 1.82; ἐς ἀπορίαν Id. 7.75; εἰς ἀνάγκην Lys. 3.3; εἰς αἰσχύνην Pl. Sph. 230d; εἰς ἐρημίαν φίλων Id. Phdr. 232d; εἰς ἀγῶνα Id. Ap. 24c; τινὰ εἰς ἀσφάλειαν Isoc. 5.123; τίνας εἰς ἀγῶνα καθέστακα; Hyp. Eux. 28, cf. Lycurg. 2; κ. τινὰ ἐν ἀγῶνι καὶ κινδύνῳ Antipho 5.61; τὴν πόλιν ἐν πολέμῳ Pl. Mx. 242a; τοὺς φίλους ἐν ἀκινδύνῳ X. Cyr. 4.5.28; κ. ἑαυτὸν ἐς κρίσιν present himself for trial, Th. 1.131, cf. Lycurg. 6; κ. τινὰ εἰς τοὺς ἀρχικούς reckon him as one of.., X. Mem. 2.1.9.
4. c. dupl. acc., make, render so and so, ψευδῆ γ’ ἐμαυτόν S. Ant. 657; ἡ ἐπιθυμία κ. τινὰ ἀμνήμονα Antipho 2.1.7; τὸ πιστὸν ὑμᾶς ἀπιστοτέρους κ. Th. 1.68; κ. τι φανερόν, σαφές, Id. 2.42, 1.32; τινὸς ἐπίπονον τὸν βίον κ. Isoc. 10.17: c. part., κλαίοντα καθιστάναι τινά bring one to tears, E. Andr. 635: rarely c. inf., κ. τινὰ φεύγειν make him fly, Th. 2.84, cf. E. Alc. 283, Luc. Charid. 8: — Pass., ἀνάγκη τὴν ναυμαχίαν πεζομαχίαν καθίστασθαι Th. 2.89.
5. Med., get for oneself, τὴν ζόην καταστήσασθαι ἀπ’ ἔργων ἀνοσιωτάτων Hdt. 8.105.
6. make, in periphrases, πάννυχοι.. διάπλοον καθίστασαν A. Pers. 382: —

Med., κρυφαῖον ἔκπλουν οὐδαμῇ καθίστατο ib. 385. intr. in aor. 2, pf. καθέστηκα, and plpf. of Act. (also fut. καθεστήξω Th. 3.37, 102), and all tenses of Med. (exc. aor. 1) and Pass.: pf. καθέσταμαι in later Greek, IG 22.1006.24 (ii B. C.), LXX Numbers 3:32, etc.: —

1. to be set, set oneself down, settle, ἐς [ Αἴγιναν ] Hdt. 3.131, cf. Th. 4.75; [ ὀδύναι ] καθίσταντο ἐς ὑπογάστριον Hp. Epid. 7.97; of joints, ἐξίσταται ἀνωδύνως καὶ κ. goes out of joint and in again, Id. Art. 8; κ. ἐς Ῥήγιον to make R. a base of operations, Th. 3.86; simply, to be come to a place, ὅποι καθέσταμεν S. OC 23. come before another, stand in his presence, Pi. P. 4.135; λέξον καταστάς A. Pers. 295 (unless it be taken in signf. 4), cf. Hdt. 1.152; κ. ἐς ὄψιν τινός Id. 7.29; καταστάντες ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας ἔλεγον Id. 3.46, cf. 156; καταστὰς ἐπὶ τὸ πλῆθος ἔλεγε Th. 4.84.
2. to be set as guard, ὑπό τινος Hdt. 7.59, cf. S. OC 356, X. An. 4.5.19, etc.; to be appointed, δεσπότης.. καθέστηκα E. HF 142; στρατηλάτης νέος καταστάς Id. Supp. 1216; κ. Χορηγὸς εἰς Θαργήλια, στρατηγός, etc., Antipho 6.11, Isoc. 4.35, etc.; οἱ πρόβουλοι καθεστᾶσιν ἐπὶ τοῖς βουλευταῖς Arist. Pol. 1299b37; δικτάτωρ.. καθε [ στάμενος τὸ τέταρτον ], = Lat. dictator designatus quartum, of Caesar, IG 12(2).35b7 (Mytil.).
3. deposit a sediment, Hp. Epid. 1.2, 7.
4. also, stand or become quiet or calm, of water, ὅταν ἡ λίμνη καταστῇ Ar. Eq. 865, cf. PHolm. 16.3; θάλασσα γαληνὴ καὶ κ. Plb. 21.31.10; πνεῦμα λεῖον καὶ καθεστηκός calm and settled, Ar. Ra. 1003; ὁ θόρυβος κατέστη subsided, Hdt. 3.80; of laughter, Philostr. VA 3.4; of a swelling, Hp. Prog. 7; ἕως τὰ πράγματα κατασταίη Lys. 13.25; also of persons, καταστάς composedly, A. Pers. 295 (but v. supr. 1b); [ ἡ ψυχὴ ] καθίσταται καὶ ἠρεμίζεται Arist. Ph. 248a2; ὁρῶμεν [ τοὺς ἐνθουσιαστικοὺς ].. καθισταμένους Id. Pol. 1342a10; καθεστηκυίας τῆς διανοίας Ocell. 4.13; καθεστῶτι προσώπῳ with composed, calm countenance, Plu. Fab. 17; μαίνεσθαι καὶ ἔξω τοῦ καθεστηκότος εἶναι Luc. Philops. 5; τίς ἂν καθεστηκὼς φήσαιε; what person of mature judgement would say.. ? Phld. Po. 5.15; ἡ καθεστηκυῖα ἡλικία middle age, Th. 2.36; ἡλικία μέση καὶ κ. Pl. 316c; οἱ καθεστηκότες those of middle age, Hp. Aph. 1.13: also, with metaphor from wine, mellow, of persons, Alex. 45.8.
5. come into a certain state, become, and in pf. and plpf., to have become, be, ἀντὶ φίλου πολέμιόν τινι κ. Hdt. 1.87; οἱ μὲν ὀφθαλμῶν ἰητροὶ κατεστέασι, οἱ δὲ κεφαλῆς Id. 2.84; ἔμφρων καθίσταται S. Aj. 306; τῶν ἄνωθεν ὑπόπτων καθεστώτων Epicur. Sent. 13; ἐς μάχην Hdt. 3.45; ἐς πόλεμον ὑμῖν καὶ μάχην κ. E. HF 1168; ἐς πάλην καθίσταται δορὸς τὸ πρᾶγμα Id. Heracl. 159; ἐς τὴν ἴησιν Hp. Prorrh. 2.12; ἐς τὸ αὐτό they recover, Id. Coac. 160 (later abs., καταστῆναι καὶ μηδενὸς ἔτι φαρμάκου δεηθῆναι Gal. Vict.Att. 1); ἐς τοὺς κινδύνους Antipho 2.3.1; ἐς φόβον Hdt. 8.12, Th. 2.81; ἐς δέος, λύπην, Id. 4.108, 7.75; ἐς φυγήν Id. 2.81; ἐς ἔχθραν τινί Isoc. 9.67; εἰς ὁμόνοιαν, εἰς πολλὴν ἀθυμίαν, Lys. 18.18, 12.3; καταστῆναι ἐς συνήθειάν τινος τὴν πόλιν ποιεῖν make the city become accustomed to it, Aeschin. 1.165; ἀντιστασιώτης κατεστήκεε had been, Hdt. 1.92, cf. 9.37; ἐν δείματι μεγάλῳ κατέστασαν Id. 7.138; καταστάντων σφι εὖ τῶν πρηγμάτων ib. 132; τίνι τρόπῳ καθέστατε; in what case are ye? S. OT 10; φονέα με φησὶ.. καθεστάναι ib. 703; ἄπαρνος δ’ οὐδενὸς καθίστατο Id. Ant. 435; κρυπτὸς καταστάς E. Andr. 1064; οἱ ἐν τούτῳ τῆς ἡλικίας καθεστῶτες ἐν ᾧ.. Antipho 2.1.1; ἐν οἵῳ τρόπῳ [ἡ τῶν Ἀθηναίων ἀρχὴ] κατέστη how it came into being, Th. 1.97, cf. 96; ἀρξάμενος εὐθὺς καθισταμένου (sc. τοῦ πολέμου) from its first commencement, Id. 1.1.
6. to be established or instituted, prevail, καί σφι μαντήϊον Διὸς κατέστηκε Hdt. 2.29; ἄγραι.. πολλαὶ κατεστᾶσι ib. 70, cf. 1.200; ὅδε σφι νόμος κατεστήκεε ib. 197; βροτοῖσιν ὃς καθέστηκεν νόμος E. Hipp. 91: c. inf., θεὸν Ἀμφιάραον πρώτοις Ὠρωπίοις κατέστη νομίζειν Paus. 1.34.2: pf. part., existing, established, prevailing, τὸν νῦν κατεστεῶτα κόσμον Hdt 1.65; ἦν κατεστηκὸς οὐδὲν φόρου πέρι Id. 3.89; τοὺς κατεστεῶτας τριηκοσίους the regular 300, Id. 7.205; οἱ καθεστῶτες νόμοι S. Ant. 1113, Ar. Nu. 1400; τὰ καθεστῶτα the present state of life, S. Ant. 1160; also, existing laws, usages, τὰ τότε κ., τά ποτε κ., Pl. Lg. 798b, Isoc. 7.56; ἐπὶ τοῖσι κατεστεῶσι ἔνεμε τὴν πόλιν Hdt. 1.59.
7. of purchases, cost, πλέον ἢ ὅσου ἐμοὶ κατέστησαν more than they stood me in, And. 2.11, cf. Plu. 2.349a.
8. stand against, oppose, πρός τινα dub. l. in Plb. 23.18.5: — Pass., Τιτήνεσσι κατέσταθεν Hes. Th. 674. aor. 1 Med. and sts. pres. Med. are used in trans. sense, v. supr. A. 11.2sq.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καθίστημι (also καθιστάω, whence the participle καθιστῶντες Acts 17:15 R G; and καθιστάνω, whence καθιστάνοντες Acts 17:15 L T Tr WH; see ἵστημι, at the beginning); future καταστήσω; 1 aorist κατέστησα; passive, present καθισταμαι; 1 aorist κατεστάθην; 1 future κατασταθήσομαι; the Sept. for הֵשִׂים, הֵקִים, הִפְקִיד, הִתְיַצֵּב, הֶעֱמִיד, נָתַן; (properly, to set down, put down), to set, place, put:

a. τινα ἐπί τίνος, to set one over a thing (in charge of it), Matthew 24:45; Matthew 25:21, 23; Luke 12:42; Acts 6:3; also ἐπί τίνι, Matthew 24:47; Luke 12:44; ἐπί τί, Hebrews 2:7 Rec. from Psalm 8:7.
b. τινα, to appoint one to administer an office (cf. German bestellen): πρεσβυτέρους, Titus 1:5; τινα εἰς τό with an infinitive, to appoint to do something, Hebrews 8:3; τά πρός τόν Θεόν to conduct the worship of God, Hebrews 5:1; followed by ἵνα, ibid.; τινα with a predicate accusative indicating the office to be administered (to make one so and so; cf. Winers Grammar, § 32, 4b.; Buttmann, § 131, 7) (so very often in Greek writings from Herodotus down), Luke 12:14; Acts 7:10, 27, 35; Hebrews 7:28.
c. “to set down as, constitute (Latinsisto), equivalent to to declare, show to be”: passive with ἁμαρτωλός, δίκαιος, Romans 5:19 (cf. Prof. T. Dwight in New Englander for 1867, p. 590ff; Dietzsch, Adam u. Christus (Bonn, 1871), p. 188).
d. “to constitute (Latinsisto) equivalent to to render, make, cause to be”: τινα οὐκ ἀργόν, οὐδέ ἀκαρπον, i. e. (by litotes) laborious and fruitful, 2 Peter 1:8.
e. to conduct or bring to a certain place: τινα, Acts 17:15 (2 Chronicles 28:15 for הֵבִיא; Joshua 6:23; 1 Samuel 5:3; Homer, Odyssey 13, 274; Xenophon, an. 4, 8, 8 and in other secular authors).
f. Middle to show or exhibit oneself; come forward as: with a predicate nominative, James 4:4; ἡ γλῶσσα … ἡ σπιλοῦσα, James 3:6. (Compare: ἀντικαθίστημι, ἀποκαθίστημι.)

Question 377

ἀποκαθίστημι / αποκαθιστανω

Answer 377

I set up again, restore to its former state

Thayer’s Definition
to restore to its former state
to be in its former state

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀποκαθίστημι,

fut. -καταστήσω: aor. ἀποκατέστησα, later ἀπεκατέστησα PTeb. 413.4 (ii/iii A.D.): pf. -καθέστᾰκα Plb. 21.11.9, SIG 798.7 (i A.D.): —

I

1. re-establish, restore, reinstate, X. Lac. 6.3; τὰν πολιτείαν Decr.Byz. ap. D. 18.90; πολίτας Plu. Alex. 7; συνθήκας εἰς τὸ ἐξ ἀρχῆς D.H. 3.23; ἀ. τινί τι restore, return it to one, Plb. 3.98.7, D.S. 18.65, etc.; ἀ. εἰς αὐτάν (sc. φύσιν) Ti.Locr. 100c, cf. Arist. MM 1204b37; εἰς τὸ αὐτό Id. Metaph. 1074a3; εἰς ἀκέραιον, = restituere in integrum, CIL 1.203; τινὰ ἐς οἶκον Plb. 8.27.6, cf. Thphr. Char. 7.6; ἀ. σαυτὸν εἰς ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον carry yourself back.., Plu. 2.610d; ἐπί.. D.S. 5.23; cure, δασυσμοὺς φωνῆς Dsc. 1.64, etc.
2. pay what is due, ἀργύριον LXX Genesis 23:16.
3. hand over, deliver, τοῖς φυλακίταις τὸ σῶμα PSI 4.359.9 (iii B. C.).
4. in drill, restore a formation, etc., εἰς ὀρθὸν ἀ., = εἰς ὀρθὸν ἀποδοῦναι, Ael. Tact. 26.3 (cf. ἀποδίδωμι 11.3); ἀποκατάστησον as you were! Ascl. Tact. 12.11, etc.

II Pass., with pf. ἀποκαθέστᾰμαι, aor.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀποκαθίστημι, ἀποκαθιστάω (Mark 9:12 ἀποκαθιστᾳ R G), and ἀποκαθιστάνω (Mark 9:12 L T Tr (but WH ἀποκατιστάνω, see their Appendix, p. 168); Acts 1:6; cf. Winers Grammar, 78 (75); (Buttmann, 44f (39))); future ἀποκαταστήσω; 2 aorist ἀπεκατέστην (with double augment (cf. Exodus 4:7; Jeremiah 23:8), Mark 8:25 T Tr WH); 1 aorist passive ἀποκατεσταθην or, according to the better reading, with double augment ἀπεκατεσταθην, Matthew 12:13; Mark 3:5; Luke 6:10 (Ignatius ad Smyrn. 11 [ET]; cf. (WHs Appendix, p. 162); Winers Grammar, 72 (69f); (Buttmann, 35 (31)); Mullach, p. 22); as in Greek writings to restore to its former state; 2 aorist active to be in its former state: used of parts of the body restored to health, Matthew 12:13; Mark 3:5; Luke 6:10; of a man cured of blindness, Mark 8:25; of the restoration of dominion, Acts 1:6 (1 Macc. 15:3); of the restoration of a disturbed order of affairs, Matthew 17:11; Mark 9:12; of a man at a distance from his friends and to be restored to them, Hebrews 13:19.

Question 378

μεθίστημι / μεθιστάνω

Answer 378

I transfer, remove

Thayer's Definition
to transpose, transfer, remove from one place to another
of change of situation or place
to remove from the office of a steward
to depart from life, to die

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
μεθίστημι: causal, in pres. and impf., fut. and aor. 1,

I

1. place in another way, change, τοι ταῦτα μεταστήσω I will change thee this present, i. e. give another instead, Od. 4.612; μ. τὰ νόμιμα πάντα Hdt. 1.65; ὄνομα, τύχην, E. Ba. 296, Heracl. 935; τὸ μέγα εἰς οὐδὲν χρόνος μ. Id. Fr. 304 (lyr.); μ. νόμους X. HG 5.4.64; ταύτην τὴν πολιτείαν Pl. R. 562c; ἐκ τοῦ παρόντος κόσμου τὴν πόλιν μεταστήσας Th. 8.48; ἐς ὀλιγαρχίαν μ. [τὴν πολιτείαν ] X. HG 2.3.24; ἐξ ὀλιγαρχίας ἐς τὸ δημοκρατεῖσθαι μ. τοὺς Βυζαντίους ib. 4.8.27; τὰ ἐκεῖ πάντα πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους ib. 2.2.5; also ἐκ τῆς καθεστηκυίας ἄλλην μ. [πολιτείαν ] introduce a new polity, Arist. Pol. 1301b8; μ. βασιλείαν ἀντὶ τυραννίδος Pl. 319d.
2. c. gen. partit., οὐ μεθίστησι τοῦ χρώματος he changes [nothing] of his colour, Ar. Eq. 398 (lyr.).

II of persons,

1. set free, τινὰ νόσου S. Ph. 463; κακῶν, πόνων, E. Hel. 1442, IT 991, cf. 775; ὕπνου Id. Or. 133.
2. remove by killing, αὑτόν J. AJ 18.6.2: so in Med., τὸν ἄνθρωπον ib. 18.9.5.
3. remove from one place to another, Th. 4.57; ὠστράκιζον καὶ μεθίστασαν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως Arist. Pol. 1284a21; ἐς ἄλλην χθόνα μ. πόδα E. Ba. 49: — aor. 1 Med. μεταστήσασθαι remove from oneself or from one’s presence, Hdt. 1.89, 8.101, And. 1.12, Th. 1.79; banish, Aeschin. 3.129; μ. φρουρὰς ἐκ πόλεων Plb. 18.44.4. Pass., with aor. 1 μετεστάθην [ᾰ ] E. El. 1202 (lyr.), D. 26.6, also aor. 2, pf., and plpf. Act.:

I of persons,

1. stand among or in the midst of, c. dat., ἑτάροισι μεθίστατο Il. 5.514.
2. change one’s position, τυράννοις ἐκποδὼν μεθίστασο make way for them, E. Ph. 40; depart, παλαιὸν εἰς ἴχνος A. Supp. 538 (lyr.); ἐκ τῆς τάξιος Hdt. 9.58; ἐκ τυραννικοῦ κύκλου S. Aj. 750; ἔξω τῆς οἰκουμένης Aeschin. 3.165; ἐκ φωτὸς εἰς σκότος μ. Pl. R. 518a: c. gen., δεῦρ’ Ἰωλκίας χθονός E. Med. 551; θρόνων Id. Ph. 75; μ. φυγῇ Id. Med. 1295: abs., μετάσταθ’, ἀπόβαθι S. OC 162 (lyr.), cf. D. 23.69; ὅταν μεταστῇ [ὄλβος ] S. Fr. 646.6.
3. c. gen. rei, change, cease from, κότου A. Eu. 900; ξηρῶν τρόπων Ar. V. 1451 (lyr.), cf. Pl. 365; λύπης, κακῶν, E. Alc. 1122, Hel. 856; μ. βίου die, Id. Alc. 21 (also μ. alone, J. AJ 17.4.2, Plu. 2.1104c; ἑκὼν μ. commit suicide, Vett. Val.94.9); μ. φρενῶν change from one’s former mind, change one’s mind, E. Ba. 944.
4. go over to another party, revolt, Th. 1.35, etc.; ἀπό τινος Id. 8.76; παρά or πρός τινα, Id. 1.107, 130.
5. to be banished, ὑπό τινων D. 26.6.

II

1. of things, change, alter, either for the better, τῆς τύχης εὖ μετεστεώσης Hdt. 1.118; ἐς τὸ λῷον.. μεθέστηκεν κέαρ E. Med. 911; or for the worse, ἐξ ἧς [πολιτείας] ἡ ὀλιγαρχία μετέστη from which oligarchy arose by a change, Pl. R. 553e, cf. X. HG 2.3.24, Arist. Pol. 1301a22, Plb. 6.9.10; εἴ τι μὴ δαίμων.. μεθέστηκε στρατῷ hath changed for them, A. Pers. 158 (troch.); νέος μεθέστηκ’ ἐκ γέροντος E. Heracl. 796.
2. Medic., of pains, change position, εἰς τὴν ἄνω χώραν Gal. 16.652.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μεθίστημι and (in 1 Corinthians 13:2 R G WH (cf. ἵστημι)) μεθιστάνω; 1 aorist μετέστησα; 1 aorist passive subjunctive μετασταθῶ; from Homer down; properly, to transpose, transfer, remote from one place to another: properly, of change of situation or place, ὄρη, 1 Corinthians 13:2 (Isaiah 54:10); τινα εἰς τί, Colossians 1:13; τινα (T Tr WH add ἐκ, so L in brackets) τῆς οἰκονομίας, to remove from the office of steward, passive Luke 16:4 (τῆς χρείας, 1 Macc. 11:63); τινα ἐκ τοῦ ζῆν, to remove from life, Diodorus 2, 57, 5; 4, 55, 1; with ἐκ τοῦ ζῆν omitted, Acts 13:22 (in Greek writings also in the middle and in the intransitive tenses of the active to depart from life, to die, Euripides, Alc. 21; Polybius 32, 21, 3; Heliodorus 4, 14). metaphorically, τινα, without adjunct (cf. German verrücken (English pervert), i. e. to lead aside (A. V. turn away) to other tenets: Acts 19:26 (τήν καρδίαν τοῦ λαοῦ, Joshua 14:8).

Question 379

παρίστημι

Answer 379

I am present, stand by

to stand beside, stand by or near, to be at hand, be present
to stand by
to stand beside one, a bystander
to appear
to be at hand, stand ready
to stand by to help, to succour
to be present
to have come
of time

Thayer's Definition
to place beside or near
to set at hand
to present
to proffer
to provide
to place a person or thing at one's disposal
to present a person for another to see and question
to present or show
to bring to, bring near
metaph. i.e to bring into one's fellowship or intimacy
to present (show) by argument, to prove

Question 380

ἔκστασις

Answer 380

bewilderment, a trance

Thayer’s Definition
any casting down of a thing from its proper place or state, displacement
a throwing of the mind out of its normal state, alienation of mind, whether such as makes a lunatic or that of a man who by some sudden emotion is transported as it were out of himself, so that in this rapt condition, although he is awake, his mind is drawn off from all surrounding objects and wholly fixed on things divine that he sees nothing but the forms and images lying within, and thinks that he perceives with his bodily eyes and ears realities shown him by God.
amazement, the state of one who, either owing to the importance or the novelty of an event, is thrown into a state of blended fear and wonderment

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἔκστᾰσις, εως, ἡ,

(ἐξίστημι)

I displacement, ἄρθρων Hp. Art. 56; πᾶσα κίνησις ἔ. ἐστι τοῦ κινουμένου Arist. de An. 406b13: hence, change, εἰς ἀντικείμενα Id. GA 768a27; αἱ κακίαι ἐ. Id. Ph. 247a3; ἔ. ἐστιν ἐν τῇ γενέσει τὸ παρὰ φύσιν τοῦ κατὰ φύσιν Id. Cael. 286a19; ἔ. τῆς φύσεως degeneracy, Thphr. CP 3.1.6; opp. στάσις, Plot. 6.3.2; movement outwards, ἔ. ἀπὸ τοῦ παράγοντος Dam. Pr. 97 bis; ἔ. εἰς τὸ ἔξω ib. 401; [σῶμα] ἐν ἐκστάσει λαβὸν τὴν ὑπόστασιν Porph. Sent. 36; differentiation, ἔ. καὶ πιῆθος Plot. 6.7.17; αἱ εἰς πλῆθος ἐ. Procl. in Ti. 2.203 D.

II

1. standing aside, Arist. Rh. 1361a37 (pl.). = Lat. cessio bonorum, CPR 20ii9 (iii A.D.); ἔ. χρημάτων Porph. Abst. 1.53; a tax on cessions, BGU 914.6 (ii A.D.), PLond. 2.305.2 (PTeb. ii p.184).
2. distraction of mind, from terror, astonishment, anger, etc., Hp. Aph. 7.5, Prorrh. 2.9; ἔ. σιγῶσα Id. Coac. 65; ἔ. μανική Arist. Cat. 10a1; ἔ. τῶν λογισμῶν Plu. So 8; νοῦ Plot. 5.3.7; τὰ μηδὲ προσδοκώμεν’ ἔκστασιν φέρει Men. 149, cf. Epit. 472, Epicur. Fr. 113; εἰς ἔ. ἄγειν Longin. 1.4.
3. entrancement, astonishment, Luke 5:26, Mark 5:42.
4. trance, Acts 10:10, Acts 22:17; ecstasy, Plot. 6.9.11; ἔ. καὶ μανία Herm. in Phdr. p.103A. drunken excitement, Corn. ND 30.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἔκστασις, ἐκστάσεως, ἡ (ἐξίστημι);

1. universally, in Greek writing, any casting down of a thing from its proper place or state; displacement (Aristotle, Plutarch).
2. a throwing of the mind out of its normal state, alienation of mind, whether such as makes a lunatic (διανοίας, Deuteronomy 28:28; τῶν λογισμῶν, Plutarch, Sol. 8), or that of the man who by some sudden emotion is transported as it were out of himself, so that in this rapt condition, although he is awake, his mind is so drawn off from all surrounding objects and wholly fixed on things divine that he sees nothing but the forms and images lying within, and thinks that he perceives with his bodily eyes and ears realities shown him by God (Philo,quis rerum divin. heres § 53 (cf. 51; B. D. under the word, Trance; Delitzsch, Psychol. 5:5)): ἐπέπεσεν (Rec., others ἐγένετο) ἐπ’ ἔκστασις, Acts 10:10; εἶδεν ἐν ἐκστάσει ὅραμα, Acts 11:5; γενέσθαι ἐν ἐκστάσει, Acts 22:17, cf. 2 Corinthians 12:2f.
3. In the O. T. and the New amazement (cf. Longinus, 1, 4; Stobaeus, flor. tit. 104, 7), the state of one who, either owing to the importance or the novelty of an event, is thrown into a state of blended fear and wonder: εἶχεν αὐτάς τρόμος καί ἔκστασις, Mark 16:8; ἐξέστησαν ἐκστάσει μεγάλη, Mark 5:42 (Ezekiel 26:16); ἔκστασις ἔλαβεν ἅπαντας, Luke 5:26; ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καί ἐκστάσεως, Acts 3:10; (for חֲרָדָה, trembling, Genesis 27:33; 1 Samuel 14:15, etc.; פַּחַד, fear, 2 Chronicles 14:14, etc.).

Question 381

ὑπόστασις

Answer 381

substance, confidence

Thayer’s Definition
a setting or placing under
thing put under, substructure, foundation
that which has foundation, is firm
that which has actual existence
a substance, real being
the substantial quality, nature, of a person or thing
the steadfastness of mind, firmness, courage, resolution
confidence, firm trust, assurance

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑπόστᾰσις, εως, ἡ,

(ὑφίστημι, ὑφίσταμαι): as an act, standing under, supporting, ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ μηροῦ καὶ ὁ αὐχὴν τοῦ ἄρθρου.. ὑπὸ συχνῷ μέρει τοῦ ἰσχίου τὴν ὑ. πεποίηται Hp. Art. 55; [ τοὺς προσθίους πόδας] ἔχουσιν.. οὐ μόνον ἕνεχ’ ὑποστάσεως τοῦ βάρους Arist. PA 659a24; ἐνεπάγην εἰς ἰλὺν βυθοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ὑ. LXX Psalms 68:3(69).3.

2. resistance, τοῦ κύματος Arist. Mete. 368b12 (unless = settling down); so perh. in Hp. Off. 3, Ael. Fr. 59.
3. lying in ambush, S. Fr. 719. as a thing,

I in liquids, that which settles at the bottom, sediment, Hp. Steril. 242, Arist. HA 551b29, Mete. 382b14, Thphr. HP 9.8.3; esp. of sediment in the urine, Hp. Coac. 146, 389, Aph. 4.69, al., Gal. 6.252, al.; but the urine itself is called ἡ ὑ. ἡ εἰς τὴν κύστιν, Arist. Mete. 358a8; ἡ τῆς ὑγρᾶς τροφῆς ὑ. Id. PA 647b28; ἐκ τῶν νεφρῶν ἡ γιγνομένη ὑ. ib. 671b20; also of the dry excrement, ἡ τῆς ξηρᾶς τροφῆς ὑ. ib. 647b28, cf. 677a15, Mete. 358b9. an accumulation of pus, abscess, Hp. Art. 40.

2. νέφους ὑποστάσεις cloud- cumuli, D.S. 1.38.
3. a kind of jelly or thick soup, in pl., Men. 462.10 (cf. Poll. 6.60), Orib. 4.8.1.
4. metaph. of time, duration, ἡ στιγμιαία τῶν καιρῶν ὑ. Gal. 19.187; μνήσθητι τίς μου ἡ ὑ. remember how short my time is, LXX Psalms 89:48(88).48; ἡ ὑ. μου ὡσεὶ οὐθὲν ἐνώπιόν σου mine age is as nothing before thee, ib. 38(39).6; ἐφ’ ὅσον αὐτοῦ (sc. Ἕκτορος) ἡ ὑ. τῶν χρόνων ὑπῆρχεν as long as his store of years lasted, Vett.Val. 347.14.
5. coming into existence, origin, ἡ ὑ. μου ἐν τοῖς κατωτάτω τῆς γῆς LXX Psalms 139:15(138).15; περὶ τοῦ γένους.. τῶν Ἰουδαίων.. ὅτι.. τὴν πρώτην ὑ. ἔσχεν ἰδίαν J. Revelation 1:1; ἀκμὴ οὐδὲ ἔχει γενέσεως ὑ. καθ’ ἑαυτήν has no power of originating by itself, Hermog. Id. 1.10.

II foundation or substructure of a temple, etc., LXX Nahum 2:7, D.S. 1.66, 13.82; ὑποστάσεις ἐπάλξεων lower part of a crenellated wall, Ph. Bel. 84.9; ὑ. ξύλου is f.l. for ὑπότασις ξ. in Hp. Mochl. 25.

2. metaph. of a narrative, speech, or poem, ground-work, subject-matter, argument, Plb. 4.2.1, D.S. 1.3, etc.
3. plan, purpose, Id. 16.32; κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν ὑ. Id. 1.28, 15.70; πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν ὑ. Id. 1.3; οἱ Αἰγύπτιοι.. ἰδίᾳ τινὶ ὑ. κεχρημένοι εἰσί (sc. in their calendar) Gem. 8.16, cf. 25; κατὰ τὴν Καίσαρος ὑ. BMus.Inscr. 892.21 (Halic., i B. C. /i A. D.).
4. confidence, courage, resolution, steadiness, of soldiers, Plb. 4.50.10, 6.55.2; hope, ἔστι μοι ὑ. τοῦ γενηθῆναί με ἀνδρί LXX Ruth 1:12; ἀπώλετο ἡ ὑ. αὐτῆς ib. Ezekiel 19:5, cf. Hebrews 3:14; ἡ ὑ. τῆς καυχήσεως 2 Corinthians 11:17; cf. 2 Corinthians 9:4; ἔστιν δὲ πίστις ἐλπιζομένων ὑπόστασις confidence in things hoped for, Hebrews 11:1 (unless substance be the right sense here).
5. undertaking, promise, οἱ ὑπογεγραμμένοι γεωργοὶ ἐπέδωκαν ἡμῖν ὑπόστασιν PEleph. 15.3 (iii B. C.), cf. PTheb.Bank 1.8 (ii B. C.), PTeb. 61 (b). 194 (ii B. C.).
6. Astrol., τὰ τούτου (sc. κλήρου τύχης) τετράγωνα ὑπόστασις (fort. -στάσεις) [λέγεται ] Serapio in Cat.Cod.Astr. 8(4).227.

III substantial nature, substance, δύσσχιστα, τῷ κολλώδη τὴν ὑ. ἔχειν woods hard to cleave, because of their resinous substance, Thphr. CP 5.16.4; ἡ τοῦ γεώδους ὑ. ib. 6.7.4.

2. substance, actual existence, reality (οἱ νεώτεροι τῶν φιλοσόφων ἀντὶ τῆς οὐσίας τῇ λέξει τῆς ὑ. ἐχρήσαντο Socr. Hebrews 3:7), opp. semblance, φαντασίαν μὲν ἔχειν πλούτου, ὑ. δὲ μή Artem. 3.14; τῶν ἐν ἀέρι φαντασμάτων τὰ μέν ἐστι κατ’ ἔμφασιν, τὰ δὲ καθ’ ὑπόστασιν (substantial, actual), Arist. Mu. 395a30, cf. Placit. 3.6, D.L. 7.135, 9.91; so ὑποστάσεις are the substances of which the reflections (αἱ κατοπτρικαὶ ἐμφάσεις) appear in the mirror, Placit. 4.14.2; ὑ. ἔχειν have substantial existence, Demetr.Lac. Herc. 1055.14, S.E. P. 2.94, 176, M.Ant. 9.42; ἰδίᾳ χρησάμενον ὑποστάσει (ὑποτάσει cod.), πρὸς ἰδίαν ὑ. φυτευθέντα,

a separate existence, Sor. 1.96, cf. 33; ὑπόστασιν μὴ ἔχειν Id. 2.57; ὑποστάσεις τε καὶ μεταβολαί M.Ant. 9.1, cf. 10.5; [ ἡ παρασιτικὴ] διαφέρει καὶ τῆς ῥητορικῆς καὶ τῆς φιλοσοφίας.. κατὰ τὴν ὑ. (in respect of reality) · ἡ μὲν γὰρ ὑφέστηκεν, αἱ δὲ οὔ Luc. Par. 27; κατ’ ἰδίαν ὑ. καὶ οὐσίαν S.E. M. 9.338.

3. real nature, essence, χαρακτὴρ τῆς ὑ. Hebrews 1:3. as a Rhet. figure, the full expression or expansion of an idea, Hermog. Id. 1.11, Aristid. Rh. 1p.479S., Syrian. in Hermog. 1.60 R. = ὑπόστημα 111, camp, LXX 1 Kings 13:23, LXX 1 Kings 14:4. wealth, substance, property, ib. De. 11.6, Jeremiah 10:17, POxy. 1274.15 (iii A. D.), BGU 1020.16 (vi A. D.), etc.
4. pl., title deeds, documents recording ownership of property, POxy. 237 viii 26 (ii A. D.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑπόστασις, ὑποστάσεως, ἡ (ὑφίστημι), a word very common in Greek authors, especially from Aristotle onward, in widely different senses, of which only those will be noticed which serve to illustrate N. T. usage;

1. a setting or placing under; thing put under, substructure, foundation: Psalm 68:3 (); τοῦ οἴκου, Ezekiel 43:11; τοῦ τάφου, Diodorus 1, 66.
2. that which has foundation, is firm; hence,
   a. that which has actual existence; a substance, real being: τῶν ἐν ἀερι φαντασμάτων τά μέν ἐστι κατ’ ἐμφασιν, τά δέ καθ’ ὑπόστασιν, Aristotle, de mundo, 4, 19, p. 395{a}, 30; φαντασίαν μέν ἔχειν πλούτου, ὑπόστασιν δέ μή, Artemidorus Daldianus, oneir. 3, 14; (ἡ αὐγή) ὑπόστασιν ἰδίαν οὐκ ἔχει, γεννᾶται δέ ἐκ φλογός, Philo de incorruptibil. mundi § 18; similarly in other writings (cf. Sophocles Lexicon, under the word, 5; Liddell and Scott, under the word, III. 2).
   b. the substantial quality, nature, of any person or thing: τοῦ Θεοῦ (R. V. substance), Hebrews 1:3 (Wis. 16:21; ἴδε … τίνος ὑποστάσεως ἤ τίνος εἴδους τυγχάνουσιν οὕς ἐρεῖτε καί νομιζετε Θεούς, Epist. ad’ Diogn. 2, 1 [ET]; (cf. Suicer, Thesaurus, under the word)).
   c. steadiness of mind, firmness, courage resolution (οἱ δέ Ῥόδιοι θεωροῦντες τήν τόν Βυζαντινων ὑπόστασιν, Polybius 4, 50, 10; οὐχ οὕτω τήν δύναμιν, ὡς τήν ὑπόστασιν αὐτοῦ καί τολμᾶν καταπεπληγμενων τῶν ἐναντίων, id. 6, 55, 2; add, Diodorus 16, 32f; Josephus, Antiquities 18, 1, 6); confidence, firm trust, assurance: 2 Corinthians 9:4; 2 Corinthians 11:17; Hebrews 3:14; Hebrews 11:1 (for תִּקְוָה, Ruth 1:12; Ezekiel 19:5; for תּוחֶלֶת, Psalm 38:8 ()). Cf. Bleek, Br. an d. Hebrew ii. 1, pp. 60ff, 462ff; Schlatter, Glaube im N. T., p. 581.

Question 382

ἀκαταστασία

Answer 382

instability, disturbance, revolution

Thayer’s Definition
instability, a state of disorder, disturbance, confusion

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀκατα-στᾰσία, ἡ,

I instability, anarchy, confusion, Stoic. 3.99, Plb. 1.70.1, Nic.Dam. Vit.Caes. 28, etc.: pl., LXX Proverbs 26:28, D.H. 6.31, 2 Corinthians 6:5.

II unsteadiness, τοῦ σώματος Chrysipp.Stoic. 3.121; ἀ. καὶ μανία Plb. 7.4.8: pl., Man. 5.57.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀκαταστασία, (ας, ἡ (ἀκατάστατος), instability, a state of disorder, disturbance, confusion: 1 Corinthians 14:33; James 3:16; (Clement of Rome, 1 Cor. 14, 1 [ET]; (Proverbs 26:28; Tobit 4:13)); plural disturbances, disorders: of dissensions, 2 Corinthians 12:20; of seditions, 2 Corinthians 6:5 (Cf. Meyer at the passage); of the tumults or commotions of war, Luke 21:9 (Polybius, Dionysius Halicarnassus).

Question 383

διαστέλλομαι

Answer 383

divide, distinguish, define; admonish, order, charge

Thayer’s Definition
to draw asunder, divide, distinguish, dispose, order
to open one’s self i.e. one’s mind, to set forth distinctly
to admonish, order, charge

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
διαστεìλλομαι

Middle voice from G1223 and G4724

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διαστέλλω: to draw asunder, divide, distinguish, dispose, order, (Plato, Polybius, Diodorus, Strabo, Plutarch; often in the Sept.); passive τό διαστελλόμενον, the injunction: Hebrews 12:20 (2 Macc. 14:28). Middle, (present διαστέλλομαι); imperfect διεστελλομην; 1 aorist διεστειλαμην; to open oneself, i. e. one’s mind, to set forth distinctly, (Aristotle, Polybius); hence, in the N. T. (so Ezekiel 3:18, 19; Judith 11:12) to admonish, order, charge: τίνι, Mark 8:15; Acts 15:24; followed by (ἵνα (cf. Buttmann, 237 (204)), Matthew 16:20 R T Tr WH marginal reading; Mark 7:36; Mark 9:9; διεστείλατο πολλά, ἵνα etc. Mark 5:43.

Thayer’s Expanded Greek Definition, Electronic Database.
Copyright © 2002, 2003, 2006, 2011 by Biblesoft, Inc.
All rights rserved. Used by permission. BibleSoft.com
Abbott-Smith Manual Greek Lexicon of the New Testament
δια -στελλω ,
[in LXX for H914 hi. (Deuteronomy 10:8, al.), H2095 hi. (Ezekiel 3:18-19, al.), and 19 other words];
1. to divide, distinguish, define.
2. to command, charge expressly: pass., τὸ διαστελλόμενον , Hebrews 12:20. Mid, in late Gk. with same sense (so Ez, l.c.; et al. in LXX; MM, s.v.); a. dat. pers., Mark 8:15, Acts 15:24; seq. ἵνα , Matthew 16:20, Mark 5:43; Mark 7:36; Mark 9:9.†

Question 384

στολή

Answer 384

a long robe, a festal robe

hayer’s Definition
an equipment
an equipment in clothes, clothing
spec. a loose outer garment for men extending to the feet, worn by kings, priests, and persons of rank

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
στολ-ή, ἡ,

Aeol. σπολά (q.v.): ( στέλλω ): —

equipment, fitting out, στρατοῦ A. Supp. 764 .

2. armament, Id. Pers. 1018 (lyr.).

II equipment in clothes, raiment, ib. 192; σχῆμα Ἑλλάδος ς . S. Ph. 224, cf. E. Heracl. 130; ἱππάδα στολὴν ἐνεσταλμένοι Hdt. 1.80; ς. ἱππική Ar. Ec. 846; Σκυθική Hdt. 4.78; Θρῃκία E. Rh. 313; Μηδική X. Cyr. 8.1.40; γυναικεία Ar. Th. 851, cf. 92; τοξική Pl. Lg. 833b; στολὴν ἔχειν ἢν ἂμ βούληται SIG 1003.14 (Priene, ii B.C. ): metaph. of birds, ς. πτερῶν Ach.Tat. 1.15 .

2. garment, robe, S. OC 1357, 1597, PCair.Zen. 54.32 (pl.), 263.4, 8 (iii B.C.), BGU 1860.4 (i B.C.), etc.; ς. θηρός, of the lion’s skin which Heracles wore, E. HF 465; ἐν ς. περιπατεῖν in full dress, M.Ant. 1.7 (v.l. -λίῳ ap. Suid. ), cf. Mark 12:38 .
3. act of dressing, μετὰ τὴν ς . Orib. Syn. 5.21 .

III ( στέλλω IV) check to motion, pressure, τοῦ ἀέρος Epicur. Nat. 11.11, cf. 14.4 .

2. reduction, diminution, τῶν σιτίων Herod.Med. ap. Aët. 5.129 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
στολή, στολῆς, ἡ (στέλλω (which see) to prepare, equip, 2 perfect

1. an equipment (Aeschylus).
2. an equipment in clothes, clothing; specifically, a loose outer garment for men which extended to the feet (cf. English stole (Dict. of Chris. Antiq. under the word)), worn by kings (Jonah 3:6), priests, and persons of rank: Mark 12:38; Mark 16:5; Luke 15:22; Luke 20:46; Revelation 6:11; Revelation 7:9, 13 (14{a},14{b} Rec.; Revelation 22:14 L T Tr WH). (Tragg., Xenophon, Plato, and following; the Sept. chiefly for בֶּגֶד.) (Cf. Trench, § l.)

Question 385

διαστρέφω

Answer 385

(act.) to subvert, pervert, make turn away; (pass.) to be perverted, depraved, turned from the truth
Definition:
to distort, turn away;, met. to pervert, corrupt, Mt. 17:17; Lk. 9:41; to turn out of the way, cause to make defection, Lk. 23:2; Acts 13:8; διεστραμμένος, perverse, corrupt, erroneous

Thayer’s Definition
to distort, turn aside
to oppose, plot against the saving purposes and plans of God
to turn aside from the right path, to pervert, corrupt

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
διαστρέφω,

I

1. turn different ways, twist about, τὰ σώματα, as in the dance, X. Smp. 7.3; δ. τὸ πρόσωπον to distort it, Plu. 2.535a: — mostly Pass., to be distorted or twisted, of the eyes, limbs, etc., Hp. Aph. 4.49; ἡ ῥὶς δ. Id. Art. 38; μέλη διεστραμμένα Pl. Grg. 524c; to be warped, τὰ διεστραμμένα τῶν ξύλων Arist. EN 1109b6: also of persons, to have one’s eyes distorted, or to have one’s neck twisted (Scholl. give both interprr.), εὐδαιμονίζω δ’ εἰ διαστραφήσομαι; Ar. Eq. 175; so ἀπολαύσομαί τί γ’ εἰ δ. Id. Av. 177; of the eyes, διεστράφην ἰδών Id. Ach. 15; τὰ ὄμματα διαστρέφεσθαι Arist. Pr. 960a13; without ὄμματα, ib. 9, cf. 957b7; ὁ διεστραμμένος, opp. ὁ τυφλός, Eup. 276.3; διεστρ. τοὺς πόδας with the feet twisted, Paus. 5.18.1, cf. Arist. Pr. 896b5: of torture, τῇ κλίμακι διαστρέφονται Com.Adesp. 422; διεστράφησαν τὸν στόμαχον had their stomachs turned, Jul. Or. 6.190d.
2. metaph., distort, pervert, [ τρόπον χρηστόν ] E. Fr. 597; τοὺς νόμους Isaiah 11:4; τὸν δικαστήν Arist. Rh. 1354a24; ὑπόληψιν Id. EN 1140b14; τῶν διαστρεφόντων (sc. παθῶν) Phld. Lib. p.32 O.; διαστρέψαντες τἀληθῆ having misrepresented it, D. Prooem. 46.2: — Pass., διαστραφῆναι τὴν διάνοιαν Luc. Vit. Auct. 24; γενεὰ διεστραμμένη perverse, LXX De. 32.5.

II turn aside, divert, ἴχνος τὸ πρόσθεν φρενῶν A. Supp. 1017.

III sens. obsc., = βινεῖν, Eup. 7 D.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διαστρέφω; 1 aorist infinitive διαστρέψαι; passive participle διεστραμμένος (cf. WHs Appendix, p. 170f); from Aeschylus down;

a. to distort, turn aside: τάς ὁδούς κυρίου τάς εὐθείας, figuratively (Proverbs 10:10), to oppose, plot against, the saving purposes and plans of God, Acts 13:10. Hence,
b. to turn aside from the right path, to pervert, corrupt: τό ἔθνος, Luke 23:2 (Polybius 5, 41, 1; 8, 24, 3); τινα ἀπό τίνος, to corrupt and so turn one aside from, etc. Acts 13:8 (Exodus 5:4;voluptates animum detorquent a virtute, Cicero); διεστραμμένος, perverse, corrupt, wicked: Matthew 17:17; Luke 9:41; Acts 20:30; Philippians 2:15.

Question 386

τάσσω

Answer 386

τάξομαι, ἔταξα, τέταχα, τέταγμαι, ἐτάχθην
I arrange, appoint, order
(act./mid.) to appoint, determine, arrange; devote; (pass.) to be established, appointed, assigned
Definition:
to arrange; to set, appoint, in a certain station, Lk. 7:8; Rom. 13:1; to set, devote, to a pursuit, 1 Cor. 16:15; to dispose, frame, for an object, Acts 13:48; to arrange, appoint, place or time, Mt. 28:16; Acts 28:23; to allot, assign, Acts 22:10; to settle, decide, Acts 15:2*

Thayer’s Definition
to put in order, to station
to place in a certain order, to arrange, to assign a place, to appoint
to assign (appoint) a thing to one
to appoint, ordain, order
to appoint on one’s own responsibility or authority
to appoint mutually, i.e. agree upon

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τάσσω,

A. Ag. 332, etc.; Att. τάρφ-ττω Pl. Prt. 262e, etc.: fut. τάξω A. Th. 285, etc.: aor. ἔταξα Id. Supp. 986, etc.: pf. τέτᾰχα X. Oec. 4.5, (συν-) Pl. Lg. 625c: plpf. ἐτετάχει Plb. 5.65.7: — Med., fut. τάξομαι (in pass. sense) LXX Exodus 29:43 : aor. ἐταξάμην Hdt. 3.13, Th. 2.83, etc.: — Pass., fut. ταχθήσομαι D.S. 11.41, (ἐπι-) Th. 1.140, etc.; later τᾰγήσομαι (ἐν-) Orib. 8.1, (ὑπο-) 1 Corinthians 15:28; 1 Corinthians 3:1-23 f ut. τετάξομαι E. IT 1046, Th. 5.71, Ar. Av. 637: aor. ἐτάχθην A. Eu. 279, etc.; later ἐτάγην [ᾰ ] SIG 708.9 (Istropolis, ii B.C.), Plu. 2.965e, Perict. ap. Stob. 4.25.50, etc.: pf. τέταγμαι Pi. O. 2.30, etc.; 3 pl. τετάχαται Th. 3.13, (ἀντι-) X. An. 4.8.5: 3 pl. plpf. ἐτετάχατο Th. 5.6, 7.4: —

draw up in order of battle, form, array, marshal, both of troops and ships, τὴν στρατιήν Hdt. 1.191; τοὺς ὁπλίτας Th. 4.9; νεῶν στῖφος ἐν στίχοις τρισίν A. Pers. 366; πολεμίων στίχας E. Heracl. 676; τ. εἰς μάχην στρατιάν X. Cyr. 1.6.43: abs., Isoc. 18.47: — Pass., to be drawn up, ἐς μάχην Hdt. 1.80; οὐδένα κόσμον ταχθέντες Id. 9.69; ἐπὶ τεττάρων ταχθῆναι in four lines, X. An. 1.2.15; ἐπὶ μιᾶς, of ships, Id. HG 1.6.29; ἐπὶ κέρως Eub. 67.4; κατὰ μίαν ναῦν τεταγμένοι in line, Th. 2.84; ἐπὶ ὀκτώ, of troops, Id. 6.67: abs., τεταγμένοι in rank and file, Id. 2.81 (so metaph., τὸ ἐν τῷ τεταγμένῳ ὄν the rank and file, opp. Senators and Equites, D.C. 49.12); στράτευμα τεταγμένον, opp. ἄτακτον, X. Mem. 3.1.7: — Med., fall in, form in order of battle, freq. in Th., 1.48, 4.11, etc.; ὡς ἐς μάχην 2.20; ἐτάξαντο κύκλον τῶν νεῶν formed in a circle, ib. 83, cf. 3.78; ἐτάξαντο οὐ πάντες ὁμοίως 5.68; εἴκοσι ναυσὶ ἐτάξαντο 3.77 (but in 2.90 trans., ἐπὶ τεσσάρων ταξάμενοι τὰς ναῦς having drawn up their ships in four lines, cf. E. Heracl. 664).

2. post, station, τὰς καμήλους ἀντία τῆς ἵππου Hdt. 1.80, cf. E. Ph. 749; τινὰς ἐπί τινας one group against another, X. Cyr. 2.1.9 (but τ. τινὰ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἱππέας set him over them, to command them, Id. HG 3.4.20); ἑαυτὸν ὑμῖν τάξαι παρέσχεν for enrolment, Lys. 31.9, cf. Lycurg. 43: — Pass., to be posted or stationed, τῇ οὐδεὶς ἐτέτακτο Hdt. 1.84, cf. A. Pers. 381; ἐς τὸ ὄρος Hdt. 7.212; but ἐς τὸ πεζόν or ἐς π. τετάχθαι to serve among the infantry, ib. 21, 81; ἐς τὸν ναυτικὸν στρατὸν -θέντες ib. 203: c. gen., τῆς πρώτης τάξεως (or simply τῆς πρώτης) τεταγμένος Lys. 14.11, 16.15: c. acc. cogn., τάξιν τινὰ ταχθῆναι Pl. Phdr. 247a, etc.; δεξιὸν τεταγμένους κέρας E. Supp. 657: freq. folld. by Preps. (cf. infr. 11.1, etc.), ταχθῆναι or τετάχθαι ἐπί τινα or τινας against another, Th. 3.78, etc.; ἐπί τινι or τισι A. Th. 448, Th. 2.70, 3.13, etc.; also, to be posted at a place, ἐφ’ ἑπτὰ πύλαις ταχθέντες ἴσοι πρὸς ἴσους S. Ant. 142 (anap.); ἐπ’ εὐωνύμῳ κέρατι on the left wing, X. Oec. 4.19; ἐπὶ τοῦ λαιοῦ κέρως Plb. 1.34.4; τ. κατά τινα over against.., Hdt. 8.85, X. An. 2.3.19; τ. μετά τινα behind him.., Id. HG 7.2.4 (so ἐπί τινι Id. Lac. 13.7); μετά τινος with him, by his side, Plb. 2.67.2, etc., cf. Th. 2.63; σύν τινι X. An. 3.2.17, etc.; παρὰ τὸν ποταμόν Hdt. 9.15; περὶ τὸ Ἥραιον ib. 69; ἀμφὶ τὴν Κέον Id. 8.76.

II appoint to any service, military or civil, the latter being metaph. from the former, ἄρχοντας X. HG 7.1.24; τινὰ ἐπί τινι Id. Cyr. 8.6.17, D. 17.20, etc.; ἐπὶ τὰς πράξεις Isoc. 5.151, cf. Pl. Ly. 209b, etc.; ἀξιῶ σε τάξαι με ἐπί τινος PCair.Zen. 447.3 (iii B.C.): also τ. ἑαυτὸν ἐπί τι undertake a task, Pl. R. 371c, D. 8.71, etc.; πρός τι X. Mem. 2.4.6: — Pass., οἱ τεταγμένοι βραβῆς S. El. 709, cf. 759; πρέσβεις ταχθέντες D. 19.69; τετάχθαι ἐπί τινι to be appointed to a service, Hdt. 1.191, 2.38, A. Pers. 298, E. Ion 1040, X. Cyr. 4.6.1; ἐπί τι Ar. Av. 637, X. Cyr. 1.4.24, etc.; also ἐπί τινος Hdt. 5.109 (ἐπ’ οὗ, v.l. ὅκου), D. 10.46; τὸν ἐπὶ τῆς σφαγῆς τεταγμένον Plu. Cleom. 38, cf. Plb. 3.12.5; ὁ πρὸς τοῖς γράμμασι τεταγμένος secretary, Id. 15.27.7; οἱ πρὸς ταῖς φυλακαῖς (tolls) τετ. PCair.Zen. 31.15 (iii B.C.).

2. c. acc. et inf., appoint or order one to do or be, τάττετ’ ἐμὲ ἡγεῖσθαι X. An. 3.1.25, cf. Cyr. 7.3.1, Hdt. 3.25, S. OC 639, E. Hec. 223, etc.: — Pass., μοῖρα ἡ ταχθεῖσα.. φρουρέειν Hdt. 4.133, cf. 8.13, A. Eu. 279, 639, etc.; τασσόμενος πορεύεσθαι X. Cyr. 4.5.11, etc.; τοῦτο τετάγμεθα (sc. ποιεῖν) E. Alc. 49; also τεταγμένος κίοι A. Supp. 504; ὁ ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον ταχθείς (sc. κῆρυξ) ordered to Egypt, Hdt. 3.62, cf. 68, 6.48.
3. also τ. τινί c. inf., Id. 2.124, X. Cyr. 1.5.5, etc.: impers., ἴωμεν.., ἵν’ ἡμῖν τέτακται (sc. ἰέναι) S. Ph. 1181 (lyr.); οἷς ἐτέτακτο παραβοηθεῖν Th. 3.22; τοῖς δὲ ἕπεσθαι τέτακται X. Lac. 11.6: also with inf. omitted, κόσμον φυλάσσουσ’ ὅντιν’ ἂν τάξῃ πόλις (sc. φυλάσσειν) E. Supp. 245, cf. 460, Hel. 1390, etc.
4. assign to a duty or class of dutiful persons, ἐν πᾶσιν ἐμαυτὸν ἔταττον D. 18.221; εἰς ὑπηρετικὴν αὑτοὺς τ. Pl. Plt. 289e; πρός τινας τάξαι αὑτόν Din. 3.18; σὺν ἐμοὶ τ. σεαυτήν D.H. 8.47; τ. ἐμαυτὸν εἰς τάξιν τινά X. Mem. 2.8; τινὰς εἰς τοὺς ἀρχικούς ib. 7; εἰς τὴν δουλείαν ἐμαυτόν ib. 11; τ. ἑαυτόν τινων εἶναι range oneself with.., D. 19.302: — Pass., πρὸς τὴν ξυμμαχίαν ταχθῆναι to join it, Th. 3.86.

III c. acc. rei, place in a certain order or relative position, χωρὶς ἑκάτερα τ. Hdt. 7.36; τίνα μέσον τάξω λόγον; E. El. 908; πρῶτον καὶ τελευταῖον τὸ κάλλιστον τ. X. Mem. 3.1.9; τὰ τυφλὰ τοῦ σώματος καὶ ἄοπλα ἐναντία τάττειν τοῖς πολεμίοις Id. Cyr. 3.3.45; τοὺς πόδας [τοῦ ἐμβρύου] κατ’ εὐθὺ τοῦ στομίου τῆς ὑστέρας τάσσειν Sor. 2.60; μὴ κατὰ ἄνεμον τῶν οἰκημάτων τάττειν τὴν ἅλω Gp. 2.26.1; τάξας.. ἀπὸ μὲν δύσεως μίαν θυρίδα φωτὸς ἕνεκεν ib.14.6.6; [ κηρίας] τὴν μεσότητα τάσσειν ὑπὸ τὸ γένειον PMed.Lond. 155ii 29, cf. Sor. Fasc. 25. al.; εἰς ταὐτὸ τ. τὴν εὐτυχίαν τῇ εὐδαιμονίᾳ Arist. EN 1099b7; Λυδοὺς.. πρὸς ἅπαντας range over against, Pl. Plt. 262e; τὴν σοφιστικὴν περὶ τὸ μὴ ὂν ἔταξεν Arist. Metaph. 1026b15, cf. Top. 125b21; c. inf., [ Ὅμηρον] ἐν τοῖς.. σοφωτάτοις εἶναι τάττομεν Aeschin. 1.142; οὐκ εὐλόγως τὸ τοιοῦτον σημεῖον ἐν τοῖς φρενιτικοῖς τάττει Gal. 16.521, cf. 18(2).238; τ. τι ἐπί τινος apply a term to a certain sense, Ath. 1.21a: — Pass., τετάχθαι κατά τινος D.H. 2.48; ἔμπροσθεν τ. τινός Pl. Lg. 631d, cf. X. Mem. 3.1.7, etc. with an inf. and Adj., lay down, rule to be so and so, ἅπερ ἂν.. αἰσχρὰ εἶναι καὶ κακὰ τάττῃ Pl. Lg. 728a; τά τε δίκαια ταχθέντ’ εἶναι καὶ ἄδικα Id. Plt. 305b.

2. ordain, prescribe, τ. τὰ περὶ τὰ τέκνα Arist. Pol. 1262b6: abs., ὁ νόμος οὕτω τ. Pl. La. 199a; οὕτω τ. ὁ λόγος Arist. EN 1119b17: — Pass., τὸ ταττόμενον Ar. Ec. 766; τὸ ταχθὲν τελεῖν S. Aj. 528; τὰ τεταγμένα X. Cyr. 1.2.5, etc.; τὰ τετ. ἄγειν the things appointed to them for conveying, ib. 8.5.4; τῆς τροφῆς ἡ βελτίστη τέτακται τοῖς ἐλευθέροις Arist. GA 744b18; ἐν τῷ τεταγμένῳ εἶναι to be fulfilling one’s obligations, IG 12.57.47, 22.116.48, X. Cyr. 6.2.37.
3. of taxes or payments, assess, τὸν φόρον ταῖς πόλεσι And. 4.11, cf. Aeschin. 2.23, D. 23.209; ταῖσδε ἔταξαν οἱ τάκται IG 12.218.45; so τ. τῷ ναύτῃ δραχμήν X. HG 1.5.4: with inf. added, χρήματα τοῖς πᾶσι τάξαντες φέρειν Th. 1.19, etc. (Pass., φόρον ἐτάχθησαν φέρειν Hdt. 3.97); τάσσειν ἀργυρίου πολλοῦ fix a high price, Th. 4.26: — Pass., τὸ ταχθὲν τίμημα Pl. R. 551b; εἰσφέρειν τὸ τεταγμένον Arist. Pol. 1272a14: — Med., take a payment on oneself, i.e. agree to pay it, φόρον τάξασθαι Hdt. 3.13, 4.35; χρήματα ἀποδοῦναι ταξάμενοι Th. 1.101; χρήματα ταξάμενοι κατὰ χρόνους ἀποδοῦναι agreeing to pay by instalments, ib. 117, cf. 3.70; πόλεις αὐταὶ ταξάμεναι IG 12.212.72, cf. 211 vi 6; also τάξασθαι ἐς τὴν δωρεήν Hdt. 3.97 (but also, much like Act., ἐτάξατο φόρους οἱ προσιέναι ib. 89). Med., generally, agree upon, settle, ταξαμένους.. δέχεσθαι μισθὸν τῆς φυλακῆς Pl. R. 416e; τὰς τιμάς Id. Lg. 743e, cf. 844b, 844c, al.; τέταγμαι ποιμέσιν, οἵ μοι δώσουσιν τιμήν PMich.Zen. 56.19 (iii B.C.); votum expld. as εὐχή, ὃ τάττεταί τις θεῷ, Gloss.: c. inf. fut., PEnteux. 54.5 (iii B.C.), Plb. 18.7.7, al. Med., pay, τῆς δὲ τιμῆς τάξονται παραχρῆμα τὸ δ μέρος, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν ἐν ἔτεσι γ PEleph. 14.18 (iii B.C.), cf. PEnteux. 60.9, 89.7, PMich.Zen. 79.9, PCair.Zen. 649.16 (all iii B.C.), PAmh. 2.31.1, 52.1, Ostr.Bodl. i 46, 96, al., PLond. 3.1201.1, 1202.1 (all ii B.C.).
4. impose punishments, τ. δίκην Ar. V. 1420, etc.; τ. ζημίας, τιμωρίας, Pl. Lg. 876c, D. 20.143; τῷ κλέψαντι θάνατον Lycurg. 65: — also in Med., Hdt. 2.65. impose laws, οὓς [νόμους] ἔταξε αὐτοῖς ὁ νομοθέτης Pl. Lg. 772c.
5. in pf. part. Pass., fixed, settled, prescribed, ὁ τεταγμένος χρόνος (like τακτός) Hdt. 2.41, etc.; ὥρα E. Ba. 723; ἡμέρα X. Cyr. 1.2.4; ἔτη Pl. Lg. 810b; ἡ τετ. χώρα X. Cyr. 5.3.40; αἱ τετ. θυσίαι the regular offerings, Id. HG 3.3.4; οἱ ἐπὶ τούτῳ τετ. [νόμοι ] Pl. Cri. 50d; ἡ τετ. δίαιτα prescribed, Id. R. 404a; τὰ τετ. ὀνόματα received, Isoc. 9.9; τετ. τέχνη regular, Id. 13.12; τεταγμένον, opp. ἄτακτον, Arist. Cael. 280a8; νὺξ τὰ τεταγμέν’ ἀπέχει Lyr.Alex. Adesp. 37.6; of geom. figures, regular, i.e. equilateral and equiangular, Papp. 306.2, 8, al.–cf. τεταγμένως.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τάσσω: 1 aorist ἔταξα; perfect infinitive τεταχέναι (Acts 18:2 T Tr marginal reading); passive, present participle τασσόμενος; perfect 3 person singular τέτακταί, participle τεταγμένος; 1 aorist middle ἐταξαμην; from (Pindar, Aeschylus), Herodotus down; the Sept. for שׂוּם, and occasionally for נָתַן, צִוָּה, שׁוּת, etc.; to put in place; to station;

a. “to place in a certain order (Xenophon, mem. 3, 1, 7 (9)), to arrange, to assign a place, to appoint”: τινα, passive, αἱ ἐξουσία ὑπό Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσιν (A. V. ordained), Romans 13:1; (καιρούς, Acts 17:26 Lachmann); ἑαυτόν, εἰς διακονίαν τίνι, to consecrate (R. V. set) oneself to minister unto one, 1 Corinthians 16:15 (ἐπί τήν διακονίαν, Plato, de rep. 2, p. 371 c.; εἰς τήν δουλείαν, Xenophon, mem. 2, 1, 11); ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι εἰς ζωήν αἰώνιον, as many as were appointed (A. V. ordained) (by God) to obtain eternal life, or to whom God bad decreed eternal life, Acts 13:48; τινα ὑπό τινα, to put one under another’s control (A. V. set under), passive, Matthew 8:9 L WH in brackets, the Sinaiticus manuscript; Luke 7:8 (ὑπό τινα, Polybius 3, 16, 3; 5, 65, 7; Diodorus 2, 26, 8; 4, 9, 5); τίνι τί, to assign (appoint) a thing to one, passive, Acts 22:10 (Xenophon, de rep. Lac. 11, 6).
b. to appoint, ordain, order: followed by the accusative with an infinitive, Acts 15:2; ( T Tr marginal reading); (followed by an infinitive, Xenophon, Hier. 10, 4; Cyril 4, 5, 11). Middle (as often in Greek writings) properly, to appoint on one’s own responsibility or authority: οὗ ἐτάξατο αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς namely, πορεύεσθαι, Matthew 28:16; to appoint mutually, i. e. agree upon: ἡμέραν (Polybius 18, 19, 1, etc.), Acts 28:23. (Compare: ἀνατάσσω (ἀνατάσσομαι), ἀντιτάσσω, ἀποτάσσω, διατάσσω, ἐπιδιατάσσω (ἐπιδιατάσσομαι), ἐπιτάσσω, προτάσσω, προστάσσω, συντάσσω, ὑποτάσσω. Synonym: see κελεύω, at the end.)

Question 387

αντιτάσσομαι/ἀντιτάσσω

Answer 387

to draw up battle formations and engage, to set oneself up in opposition against, resist, oppose, rebel, resist
Definition:
to post in adverse array, as an army; mid. to set oneself in opposition, resist, Acts 18:6; Rom. 13:2; Jas. 5:6; to be averse, Jas. 4:6; 1 Pet. 5:5*
to compose (v.) arrange, draw up, classify

Thayer’s Definition
to range in battle against
to oppose one’s self, resist

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀντιτάσσω or ἀντιτάττω: (present middle ἀντιτάσσομαι); to range in battle against; middle to oppose oneself, resist: τίνι, Romans 13:2; James 4:6; James 5:6; 1 Peter 5:5; cf. Proverbs 3:34. absolutely, Acts 18:6. (Used by Greek writings from Aeschylus down.)

Question 388

ἀποτάσσομαι/ἀποτάσσω

Answer 388

-, ἀπέταξα, -, -, -
I separate myself, take leave of, forsake
to say good-by, leave; give up, renounce, forsake
Definition:
middle: to take leave of, bid farewell to, Lk. 9:61; Acts 18:18, 21; 2 Cor. 2:13; to dismiss, send away, Mk. 6:46; fig: to renounce, forsake, Lk. 14:33
ἀποτάσσω: to set apart, to separate; in the N. T. only in the middle ἀποτάσσομαι; 1 aorist ἀπεταξαμην;

1. properly, to separate oneself, withdraw oneself from anyone, i. e. to take leave of, bid farewell to (Vulg. valefacio (etc.)): τίνι, Mark 6:46; Luke 9:61; Acts 18:18, 21 (here L T Tr omit the dative); 2 Corinthians 2:13. (That the early Greek writers never so used the word, but said ἀσπάζεσθαι τινα, is shown by Lobeck ad Phryn., p. 23f; (cf. Winers Grammar, 23 (22); Buttmann, 179 (156)).)
2. tropically, to renounce, forsake: τίνι, Luke 14:33. (So also Josephus, Antiquities 11, 6, 8; Phil. alleg. iii. § 48; ταῖς τοῦ φροντισι, Eusebius, h. e. 2, 17, 5; (τῷ βίῳ, Ignatius ad Philadelph. 11, 1 [ET]; cf. Hermas, mand. 6, 2, 9 [ET]; Clement of Rome, 2 Cor. 6, 4 and 5 [ET] where see Gebh. and Harn. for other examples, also Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word).)
   For the NT meaning “;take leave of,”; “;bid farewell to,”; as 2 Corinthians 2:13, cf. BGU III. 884ii. 12 (ii/iii A.D. πρὶν οὖν ἀπέλθῃς πρὸς Χαιρήμονα, ἀνά (βαινε) πρός με, ἵνα σοι ἀποτάξομαι, “;may say goodbye to you,”; P Oxy VII. 1070.55 (iii/A.D.) Εὐδ [αίμων ] αὐτῷ ἀπετάξατο [λ ]έγων ὅτι ἐν τῷ παρόντι οὐ σχολάζομεν ὲτέροις ἐξερχόμενοι, “;Eudaemon parted with him, saying, ‘At present we are not at leisure and are visiting others’”; (Ed.). The meaning is stronger in P Oxy II. 298.31 (i/A.D.) ἐπεὶ ἀποτάξασθαι αὐτῷ θελω, where the context shows that the idea is “;get rid of.”;

The active ἀποτάσσω, which is not found in the NT, is “;to appoint,”; as in P Oxy III. 475.27 (A.D. 182) ἀποτάξαι ἕνα τῶν περὶ σὲ ὑπηρετῶν εἰς τὴν Σενέπτα, and in passive P Fay 12.27 (c. B.C. 103) τοὺς ἀ ̣ποτεταγμένους τῆι κατοικίᾳ χρηματιστάς, “;the assize-judges appointed for the settlement,”; or “;command,”; BGU IV. 1061.9 (B.C. 14) τὴν ἀποτεταγμένην πρὸς τῆι τηρήσει θυρωρόν, P Fay 20.20 (iii/iv A.D.) εἰ ἀποτέτακται τὸν Αὐτοκράτορα ὁρᾶν πᾶσιν αὐτοῖς. . . τὰ τῆς βασιλείας διοικοῦντα, “;if they have all been commanded to watch the Emperor administering the affairs of his kingdom.”;

Question 389

διατάσσω

Answer 389

Thayer’s Definition
to arrange, appoint, ordain, prescribe, command, give order (especially for the sake of keeping order or organization)

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
διατάσσω,

Att. διά-ττω, pf. διατέτᾰχα BGU 1151.6 (i B. C.), prob. in OGI 326.27 (Teos): —

I

1. appoint or ordain severally, dispose, εὖ δὲ ἕκαστα ἀθανάτοις διέταξε Hes. Th. 74; ἀνθρώποισι νόμον δ. Id. Op. 276; appoint to separate offices, δ. τοὺς μὲν οἰκίας οἰκοδομέειν, τοὺς δὲ δορυφόρους εἶναι Hdt. 1.114; δ. τι εἶναι Pl. Ti. 45b; τίνας εἶναι χρεὼν τῶν ἐπιστημῶν.. ἡ πολιτικὴ δ. Arist. EN 1094b1: abs., make arrangements, πρὸς τὸ συμπῖπτον ἀεὶ δ. X. Cyr. 8.5.16: — Med., arrange for oneself, classify, Pl. Phdr. 271b; τινὶ περί τινος Plb. 5.21.1; undertake, pledge oneself, πρός τινα c. fut. inf., ib. 14.11; also in act. sense, περὶ θυσιῶν OGI 331.53 (Pergam.): — Pass., to be appointed, constituted, Pl. Lg. 932a; παρὰ τὰ -τεταγμένα contrary to orders, BGU 1022.17 (ii A. D.): c. inf., v.l. in Hdt. 1.110: c. acc., δ. γῆν to be appointed to cultivate, POxy. 899.22 (200 A. D.).
2. esp. draw up an army, set in array, Hdt. 6.107, Th. 4.103; διέταξε χωρὶς ἑκάστους εἶναι Hdt. 1.103: — Med., διαταξάμενοι posting themselves in battle-order, Ar. V. 360, Th. 8.104, X. HG 7.1.20: — pf. Pass., διατετάχθαι to be in battleorder, Hdt. 7.178, Th. 4.31; διετέτακτο Hdt. 6.112 (but in med. sense, J. AJ 12.5.4).

II Med., make teslamentary dispositions, περί τινος Plu. 2.1129a; order by will, c. inf., AP 11.133 (Lucill.); bequeath, BGU 1151.6 (i B. C.): — Pass., to be bequeathed, PFay. 97.13 (i A. D.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διατάσσω; 1 aorist διέταξα; perfect infinitive διατεταχέναι (Acts 18:2 (not Tdf.)); passive, perfect preposition διατεταχέναι; 1 aorist participle διατεταγμένος; 2 aorist participle διαταχθεις; middle, present διατάσσομαι; future διατάξομαι; 1 aorist διεταξάμην; (on the force of διά cf. German verordnen, (Latindisponere, Winers De verb. comp. etc. Part v., p. 7f)); to arrange, appoint, ordain, prescribe, give order: τίνι, Matthew 11:1; 1 Corinthians 16:1; followed by an accusative with an infinitive, Luke 8:55; Acts 18:2 (here T τεταχέναι Tr marginal reading brackets δια(; τίνι followed by an infinitive 1 Corinthians 9:14); τί, passive, ὁ νόμος διαταγείς δἰ ἀγγέλων (see διαταγή): Galatians 3:19 (Hesiod, Works, 274); τίνι τί, passive: Luke 3:18; Luke 17:9 (Rec.),10; Acts 23:31. Middle: 1 Corinthians 7:17; οὕτω ἦν διατεταγμένος (cf. Winers Grammar, 262 (246); (Buttmann, 193 (167))), Acts 20:13; τίνι, Titus 1:5; τί, 1 Corinthians 11:34; τίνι, followed by an infinitive: Acts 7:44; Acts 24:23. (Compare: ἐπιδιατάσσομαι.)

Question 390

ἐπιτάσσω

Answer 390

-, ἐπέταξα, -, ἐπιτέταγμαι, -

command, enjoin, charge
ἐπιτάσσω; 1 aorist ἐπέταξα; (τάσσω); to enjoin upon, order, command, charge: absolutely, Luke 14:22; τίνι, Mark 1:27; Mark 9:25; Luke 4:36; Luke 8:25; τίνι τό ἀνῆκον, Philemon 1:8; τίνι followed by the infinitive, Mark 6:39; Luke 8:31; Acts 23:2; followed by an accusative and infinitive Mark 6:27; followed by direct discourse, Mark 9:25. (Several times in the Sept.; Greek writings from Herodotus down.) (Synonym: see κελεύω, at the end.)

ἐπιτάσσω, Att. ἐπιτάρ-ττω,

I put upon one as a duty, enjoin, τι Hdt. 5.111, S. OC 839, etc.; τί τινι, as ἐ. ἄεθλόν τινι Hdt. 4.43, cf. 1.155; ἐπέταξε πόνους ἄλλοισιν ἄλλους B. Fr. 9; ἐπιτάξαντος τᾷ πόλει Γαλλίου σῖτον καὶ Ἀνχαρίου ἱμάτια SIG 748.25 (i B.C.): c. dat. pers. et inf., order one to do, ἐ. τοῖσι μὲν πεζὸν στρατὸν..παρέχειν Hdt. 4.83, cf. 3.159, Ar. V. 69, And. 3.11, etc.: rarely c. acc. et inf., enjoin or order that.., X. Lac. 5.8; with the case omitted, ἐ. ἀποφορὴν ἐπιτελέειν Hdt. 2.109, cf. 137: abs., impose commands, Th. 1.140, al.; τινί on one, S. Ant. 664: —

1. Pass., accept orders, submit to commands, εἰ ‘πιταξόμεσθα δή E. Supp. 521; ἐπιταττόμενος Ar. V. 686: c. inf., οἱ ἐπιταττόμενοι γαμεῖν Pl. Lg. 925e: c. acc. rei, ἄλλο τι ἐπιταχθήσεσθε Th. 1.140; of things, to be ordered, ὁ στρατὸς ὁ -θεὶς ἑκάστοισι Hdt. 6.95; so Λακεδαιμονίοις..ναῦς ἐπετάχθησαν ποιεῖσθαι Th. 2.7 s. v.l.; τὰ ἐπιτασσόμενα ἐπετέλεον orders given, Hdt. 1.115; τἀπιταχθέντα Pl. Ti. 20b, al.; κατὰ νόμον τὸν ἐπιταχθησόμενον Id. Lg. 740c; δικαίωσις τοῖς πέλας -ομένη dictated, Th. 1.141: Math., τὸ ἐπιταχθέν what was prescribed, Euc. 4.1, al.; πλευρὰς ἔχον ὅσας ἄν τις ἐπιτάξῃ with as many sides as you please, Papp. 290.26.
2. use the imperative mood, εὔχεσθαι οἰόμενος ἐπιτάττει εἰπὼν μῆνιν ἄειδε θεά.. τὸ γὰρ κελεῦσαι, φησί,..ἐπίταξίς ἐστιν Arist. Po. 1456b16; opp. κελεύειν, IG 12.76.33.

II

1. place next or beside, [Σαγάρτιοι] ἐπετετάχατο ἐς τοὺς Πέρσας Hdt. 7.85; ἐπετέτακτο Ἀριστοκράτει Περικλῆς X. HG 1.6.29: — Med., τοὺς ἱππέας ἐπετάξαντο ἐπὶ τῷ δεξιῷ they had the cavalry placed next, Th. 6.67.
2. place behind, ὄπισθεν τοῦ πεζοῦ τὴν ἵππον Hdt. 1.80, cf. Pl. R. 471d (Pass.): — Med., ἐπιτάξασθαι τῇ φάλαγγι λόχους X. An. 6.5.9: — Pass., τοῖσι μυρίοισι ἐπετέτακτο ἵππος Περσέων μυρίη Hdt. 7.41, cf. Plu. Luc. 31, Ael. Tact. 29.8, Arr. Tact. 25.10; Ἀράβιοι ἔσχατοι ἐπετετάχατο Hdt. 7.87. Gramm., place after, in Pass., αὐτὸς πάσῃ ἀντωνυμίᾳ -τάσσεται A.D. Pron. 34.10, cf. Synt. 138.23.
3. set in command over, τινί Arr. An. 1.24.1: — Pass., οἱ ἐπιτεταγμένοι set as guards over the wagons, Th. 5.72; ταῖς βασιλικαῖς ἐπιστολαῖς -ταχθείς Philostr. VS 2.24.1, cf. Jul. Or. 2.63d.

επετάγη επεταξας επέταξας ἐπέταξας επέταξε επεταξεν επέταξεν ἐπέταξεν επιτάξαντος επιταξη επιτάξη ἐπιτάξῃ επιτάξης επιτασσει επιτάσσει ἐπιτάσσει επιτασσειν επιτάσσειν ἐπιτάσσειν επιτασσω ἐπιτάσσω επιτάσσων epetaxas epétaxas epetaxen epétaxen epitassei epitássei epitassein epitássein epitasso epitassō epitásso epitássō epitaxe epitaxē epitáxei epitáxēi

Question 391

ἐπιταγή, ῆς, ἡ

Answer 391

an injunction, mandate, command

command, order; authority
Definition:
injunction, 1 Cor. 7:6, 25; 2 Cor. 8:8; a decree, Rom. 16:26; 1 Tim. 1:1; Tit. 1:3; authoritativeness, strictness, Tit. 2:15*

ἐπι-τᾰγή, ἡ,

(ἐπιτάσσω) = -ταγμα, Plb. 13.4.3, LXX 1 Esdras 1:18; ϝόμων ἐπιταγαί D.S. 1.70; τὰς ἐ. δυσχερῶς φέροντες Plb. 21.6.1; 1. imposition of taxes, αἱ ἐ. τῶν εἰσφορῶν D.H. 4.19.

2. esp. of oracles or divine commands, κατ’ ἐπιταγήν SIG 1153 (Athens); κατ’ ἐ. τοῦ θεοῦ JHS 26.28, etc.; κατ’ ἐ. τοῦ αἰωνίου θεοῦ Romans 16:26; 1 Corinthians 7:6.

επιταγην επιταγήν ἐπιταγήν ἐπιταγὴν επιταγης επιταγής ἐπιταγῆς epitagen epitagēn epitagḗn epitagḕn epitages epitagês epitagēs epitagē̂s

Question 392

τάξις, εως, ἡ

Answer 392

an arrangement, order, right order, office

order, succession; kind, nature
Definition:
order, regular disposition, arrangement; order, series, succession, Lk. 1:8; an order, distinctive class, as of priests, Heb. 5:6, 10; 6:20; 7:11(2x), 17; order, good order, 1 Cor. 14:40; orderliness, well-regulated conduct, Col. 2:5*

τάξις, τάξεως, ἡ (τάσσω), from Aeschylus and Herodotus down;

1. an arranging, arrangement.
2. order, i. e. a fixed succession observing also a fixed time: Luke 1:8.
3. due or right order: κατά τάξιν, in order, 1 Corinthians 14:40; orderly condition, Colossians 2:5 (some give it here a military sense, ‘orderly array’, see στερέωμα, c.).
4. the post, rank, or position which one holds in civil or other affairs; and since this position generally depends on one’s talents, experience, resources, τάξις becomes equivalent to character, fashion, quality, style, (2 Macc. 9:18 2Macc. 1:19; οὐ γάρ ἱστορίας, ἀλλά κουρεακης λαλιᾶς ἐμοί δοκοῦσι τάξιν ἔχειν, Polybius 3, 20, 5): κατά τήν τάξιν (for which in Hebrews 7:15 we have κατά τήν ὁμοιότητα) Μελχισέδεκ, after the manner of the priesthood (A. V. order) of Melchizedek (according to the Sept. of Psalm 109:5 () עַל־דִּבְרָתִי), Hebrews 5:6, 10; Hebrews 6:20; Hebrews 7:11, 17, 21 (where T Tr WH omit the phrase).

arranging, arrangement: I in military sense: 1 drawing up in rank and file, order or disposition of an army, Th. 5.68 (init.), 7.5, etc.; τὰ ἀμφὶ τάξεις rules for it, tactics, X. An. 2.1.7; τ. καὶ ἀντίταξις Phld. Piet. 12.

2. battle array, order of battle, κατὰ τάξιν Hdt. 8.86; ἐν τάξει Th. 4.72, etc.; ἐς τάξιν καθίστασθαι, ἀνάγειν, ib. 93, Ar. Av. 400 (anap.); ἵνα μὴ διασπασθείη ἡ τ. Th. 5.70; of ships, ἀποπλῶσαι ἐκ τῆς τάξιος Hdt. 6.14.
3. a single rank or line of soldiers, ἐπὶ τάξιας ὀλίγας γίγνεσθαι to be drawn up a few lines deep, ib. 111, cf. 9.31; ἐλύθησαν αἱ τ. τῶν Περσῶν Pl. La. 191c.
4. body of soldiers, A. Pers. 298, S. OC 1311; esp. at Athens, the quota of infantry furnished by each φυλή (cf. ταξίαρχος 11), Lys. 16.16; but freq. of smaller bodies, company, X. An. 1.2.16, 6.5.11, etc.; ἱππέων τ. ib. 1.8.21; so of ships, squadron, A. Pers. 380: generally, band, company, φιλία γὰρ ἥδε τ., of the chorus, Id. Pr. 128 (lyr.); ἐμφανίσας μοι ἐν ᾗ ἔσομαι τάξει PCair.Zen. 409.6 (iii B.C.). esp. a contingent of 128 men, Ascl. Tact. 2.8, Arr. Tact. 10.2, Ael. Tact. 9.3. in late Gr., membership of the militia palatina (cf. ταξεώτης), Lib. Or. 27.17.
5. post or place in the line of battle, ἀξιεύμεθα ταύτης τῆς τ. Hdt. 9.26, cf. 27; ἐν τῇ τ. εἶχε ἑωυτόν Id. 1.82; μένειν ἐν τῇ ἑωυτοῦ τ. Id. 3.158; τ. φυλάξων E. Rh. 664; ἡ τ. φυλακτέα X. Cyr. 5.3.43; ᾗ ἕκαστος τὴν τ. εἶχεν Id. An. 4.3.29; τῆς πρώτης τ. τεταγμένος Lys. 14.11, cf. Th. 5.68 (fin.); ἐκλιπόντας τὴν τ. Hdt. 5.75, cf. 9.21; λείπειν τὴν τ. And. 1.74, Pl. Ap. 29a, D. 13.34, 15.32, Aeschin. 3.159, etc.; παραχωρεῖν τῆς τάξεως D. 3.36, etc.; but ἡγεμὼν ἔξω τάξεων officer on the unattached list, Arch.Pap. 3.188, cf. Sammelb. 599, OGI 69 (Coptos); so οἱ ἔξω τάξεως staff-officers, aides-de-camp, D.S. 19.22.

II generally, arrangement, order, ἡμερῶν τ. εἰς μηνῶν περιόδους Pl. Lg. 809d; ἡ τῶν ὅλων τ. X. Cyr. 8.7.22; disposition, τῆς ψυχῆς Gorg. Hel. 14: Rhet., disposition, opp. λέξις, Arist. Rh. 1414a29; ἡ τ. τοῦ λόγου Aeschin. 3.205, cf. D. 18.2, Sor. 1.18, Gal. Libr.Ord. 1; ὕστερον τῇ τ. D. 3.15, cf. Gal. 6.68, 16.533; ἐν τ. εἶναι, = μένειν, Pl. Tht. 153e; τ. καὶ ἠρεμία Arist. EE 1218a23; εἰ τὰ γυμνάσια ἔχοι τὴν τ. ἐνταῦθα Id. Pol. 1331a37; difft. from θέσις or mere position, Id. Ph. 188a24, Thphr. Sens. 60 (θέσεως τ. Gal. 6.194; τ. θέσεως is dub. l. in 16.709); ἡ κατὰ τ. τινὰ βασιλεία, opp. ἀόριστος τυραννίς, Arist. Rh. 1366a2; καὶ τοῦτο κατὰ τ., ἕως.. and so on, until.., Sor. 2.62.

2. order, regularity, εἰς τ. ἄγειν ἐκ τῆς ἀταξίας Pl. Ti. 30a; τ. καὶ κόσμος Id. Grg. 504a; οὔτε νόμος οὔτε τ. Id. Lg. 875c, cf. R. 587a; τ. περιόδου Epicur. Ephesians 2 p.42U.; διὰ τάξεως γίγνεσθαι Pl. Lg. 780a; τάξιν ἔχειν to be regular, Thphr. HP 3.9.6; ἐν τάξει in an orderly manner, Pl. Lg. 637e; so τάξει SIG 741.12 (Nysa, i B.C., rendering of Lat. ordine).
3. ordinance, κατὰ τὴν τ. τοῦ νόμου Pl. Lg. 925b; παρὰ τὴν τοῦ νομοθέτου τ. Id. Plt. 305c, etc. prescription, τὴν τοῦ λυσιτελοῦντος τοῖς σώμασι ποιεῖσθαι τ. Id. Plt. 294e; recipe, cj. in PHolm. 2.2.
4. τ. τοῦ φόρου assessment of tribute, X. Ath. 3.5, cf. IG 12.63.2, al.; τῶν ὀφειλημάτων περὶ τῆς πράξεως ib.57.13, cf. Lex ap. D. 24.45; τ. τῆς ὑδρείας a ration of water, Pl. Lg. 844b.
5. political order, constitution, τ. Κρητική, Λακωνική, etc., Arist. Pol. 1271b40, cf. Ath. 3.1, al.

III metaph. from 1.5, post, rank, position, station, ὑπὸ χθόνα τάξιν ἔχουσα A. Eu. 396 (lyr.); ἡ τῶν ἀκοντιζόντων τ. Antipho 3.2.7; ἰδία τοῦ βίου τ. Isoc. 6.2; ἀνὴρ τῆς πρώτης τ. CIG 2767.4 (Aphrodisias); οἰκέτου τ. D. 18.258, cf. PGnom. 43, 196 (ii A.D.), Mitteis Chr. 372 v 18 (ii A.D.); τ. ἔχοντος ἐν τῷ Μουσείῳ Sammelb. 6674.10 (ii A.D.); ἐν τῇ Θετταλῶν τάξει ranging herself with the T., D. 18.63; ἐν ἐχθροῦ τ. as an enemy, Id. 20.81, etc.; ἐν ἐπηρείας τάξει by way of insult, Id. 18.13; ἀδύνατον εἶχεν τ. occupied an impossible position, i.e. was unthinkable, Hyp. (?) Oxy. 1607.60; τὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἑλόμενον τάξιν πολιτεύεσθαι championship of your cause, D. 18.138, cf. Ephesians 3:15; ἐγὼ τὴν τῆς εὐνοίας τ… οὐκ ἔλιπον post of patriotism, Id. 18.173. order, class of men, X. Mem. 2.1.7; function, D. 13.19.

2. list, register, ὅπως ταγῇ αὐτοῦ τὸ ὄνομα ἐν τῇ τῶν τετελευτηκότων τ. Sammelb. 7359.15, cf. 7404.6, PSI 9.1064.38, 10.1141.10 (all ii A.D.); ἡ τ. τῶν κατοχίμων PTeb. 318.21 (ii A.D.); τ. λαογράφων PLond. 2.182b2 (ii A.D.).
3. account, ἰδίας τάξεως POxy. 61.8 (iii A.D.), cf. PLond. 3.1107.26, 30 (iii A.D.).
4. payment, ib. 966.3 (iv A.D., cf. Arch.Pap. 4.533).
5. category of land, κατοικικὴ τ. BGU 379.12 (i A.D.), cf. Wilcken Chr. 341.15 (ii A.D.), etc. reduction of hernia by manipulation, Gal. 14.781. degree of heating power in drugs, Id. 11.571,787, cf. Gorg. Hel. 14. treatise, ἐν τῇ ὑστέρᾳ τ. Ps.-Democr. ap. Zos.Alch. p.153 B. fixed point of time, term, κατ’ ἐνιαυτὸν ἢ κατά τινα ἄλλην τ. ἢ χρόνον Arist. Pol. 1261a34; end (or perh. date fixed for the end), μέχρι τάξεως αὐτῆς τῆς τρύγης Sammelb. 5810.15 (iv A.D.).

ταξει τάξει τάξεως ταξιν τάξιν τάξις

Question 393

συντελέω

Answer 393

συντελέσω, συνετέλεσα, -, -, συνετελέσθην

to finish, accomplish; (pass.) to be fulfilled, be over, accomplished
Definition:
pr. to bring to an end altogether; to finish, end, Lk. 4:13; to consummate, Rom. 9:28; to ratify a covenant, Heb. 8:8; pass. to be terminated, Lk. 4:2; Acts 21:27; to be fully realized, Mk. 13:4*

Thayer's Definition
to end together or at the same time
to end completely
bring to an end, finish, complete
to accomplish, bring to fulfilment
to come to pass
to effect, make, (conclude)
to finish
to make an end of
to bring to an end
destroy

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
συντελ-έω,

fut. -έσω SIG 1044.27 (Halic.. iv/iii B.C.), Att. συντελῶ BCH 54.270 (Rhamnus, iii B.C.): —

bring to an end, complete, ς. τὴν δαπάνην make up the whole expense, D. 14.20; ς. εἰς τὰ ἑκατὸν ἅρματα make up the number of the chariots to one hundred, X. Cyr. 6.1.50; of a workman, ς. γεῖσον finish it off, Lys. Fr. 185 S. (Pass.), cf. IG 12.372 E 14; στέφανον Test. ap. D. 21.22; ναῦς Plb. 1.21.3 (Pass.); ς. ταχύ finish it in a hurry, Alex. 149.12; ς. τὴν ἐπίνοιαν accomplish it, Plb. 4.81.3; λόγον LXX Isaiah 10:22, Gal. 15.59: — Med.. Plb. 1.9.6, PFay. 12.8 (ii B.C.), D.S. 1.59; ἵνα περὶ ὧν καταπέπλευκας συντετελεσμένος.. ἀναπλεύσῃς PSI 6.614.9 (iii B.C.), cf. Plb. 5.100.9: — Pass., Inscr.Délos 502 A 15 (iii B.C.), PCair.Zen. 124.7 (iii B.C.), D.S. 12.26, Mark 13:4, etc.; λιθάρια συντετελεσμένα PHolm. 5.4. Act., c. inf., ς. καταφαγεῖν finish eating, LXX Genesis 43:2, cf. Si. 24.28: c. part., ib. Numbers 4:15; Numbers 4:3 Ki. 8.54. perpetrate, βίαιόν τι BGU 1818.21 (i B.C.): — Med., περὶ ὧν συντετέλεσται, τυχεῖν αὐτὸν.. τιμωρίας PEnteux. 50.7 (iii B.C.), cf. Klio 16.150 (Delph., ii B.C.): — Pass., SIG 684.5 (Dyme, ii B.C.), BGU 1762.7, al. (i B.C.).

2. Pass., to be caused, brought about, freq. in Epicur., πλεοναχῶς ς., of a plurality of causes, Ephesians 2:1-22 p.37U., cf. p.50 U.; simply, occur, happen, τὰς συντελουμένας.. φάσεις Ptol. Phas. p.10 H.
3. celebrate or hold sacred rites, ἁγιστείας Pl. Ax. 371d; θυσίας SIG 1044.27, al., Supp.Epigr. 1.366.29 (Samos, iii B.C.); τὴν ἡμέραν Epicur. Fr. 217; τὸν ἀγῶνα, τὴν πανήγυριν, D.S. 11.29, 17.16; τὰ Ἴσθμια Plu. Ages. 21; τοὺς κός μους παρὰ τῇ Μητρί Michel 537 (Cyzicus, i B.C.): — Pass., θυσία τῷ Διὶ ς. Arist. Mir. 844a35, cf. PEnteux. 6.6 (iii B.C.).
4. make an end of, destroy, LXX 2 Chronicles 20:23.

II pay towards common expenses, contribute, ς. ἑξήκοντα τάλαντα Aeschin. 3.95; but mostly without the sum expressed, ἐν ταῖς εἰσφοραῖς ς. εἰς τὸν πόλεμον contribute by payment of the εἰσφοραί towards the war, D. 20.28.

2. generally, contribute, πρὸς or εἰς τὴν γένεσιν, Arist. GA 715a12, HA 509a29; πρὸς μίαν ἀρχήν Id. PA 669b19; πρὸς ἓν ἅπαντα ς. Id. EN 1096b28; εἰς ἀνάδοσιν τροφῆς Gal. 15.196: also c. dat., to be of service, be profitable, help, τῷ βίῳ Alex. 271; τῇ λεπτυνούσῃ διαίτῃ Gal. Vict.Att. 6; τινὶ πρός τι Luc. Alex. 36: — Pass., to be contributed, εἴς τι Arist. GA 725a5, al.
3. ὧν οὐδὲν εἰς τὴν ἐξαλλαγὴν ς. τῆς ἐπιμελείας none of which make for (require) a change of treatment, Sor. 2.17.

III since at Athens all citizens were classed acc. to their rateable property, and the contributions to which they were liable, ς. εἰς.. meant to belong to a class, be counted in it (cf. τελέω 11.3), ς. εἰς ἄνδρας Isoc. 12.212; εἰς τοὺς νόθους D. 23.213; ἐς τὸ μετοικικόν, ἐς τὸ συνέδριον, Luc. Bis Acc. 9, Deor.Conc. 15: c. dat., ς. τῷ χορῷ Alciphr. 3.71.

2. ς. ἐς Ἀθήνας, ἐς Ὀρχομενόν, εἰς τὸ Ἀρκαδικόν, used of communities united in or to a state, Th. 2.15, 4.76, X. HG 7.4.12: c. dat., ς. Θηβαίοις Isoc. 14.8, cf. Plu. Arat. 34: abs., Μακεδονίας καὶ τῶν συντελούντων the tributaries, ib. 54: cf. sq. 111.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
συντελέω, συντέλω; future συντελέσω; 1 aorist συνετέλεσα; passive, present infinitive συντελεῖσθαι; 1 aorist συνετελεσθην (John 2:3 T WH ‘rejected’ marginal reading), participle (συντελεσθεις; from Thucydides and Xenophon down; the Sept. often for כִּלָּה; also sometimes for תָּמַם, עָשָׂה, etc.;

1. to end together or at the same time.
2. to end completely; bring to an end, finish, complete: τούς λόγους, Matthew 7:28 R G; τόν πειρασμόν, Luke 4:13; ἡμέρας, passive, Luke 4:2; Acts 21:27 (Job 1:5; Tobit 10:7).
3. to accomplish, bring to fulfilment; passive, to come to pass, Mark 13:4; λόγον, a word, i. e. a prophecy, Romans 9:28 (ῤῆμα, Lamentations 2:17).
4. to effect, make (cf. our conclude): διαθήκη, Hebrews 8:8 (Jeremiah 41:8, 15 ().
5. to finish, i. e. in a use foreign to Greek writings, to make an end of: συνετελέσθη ὁ οἶνος τοῦ γάμου (was at an end with), John 2:3 Tdf. after the Sinaiticus manuscript (Ezekiel 7:15 for אָכַל; to bring to an end, destroy, for כִּלָּה, Jeremiah 14:12; Jeremiah 16:4).

Question 394

συντέλεια

Answer 394

completion, consummation

Thayer’s Definition
completion, consummation, end

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
συντέλεια, ἡ, (συντελέω 11) joint contribution for the public burdens, χρημάτων ς. ποιῆσαι D. 18.237; ς. φόρου D.C. 42.6; εἰς ς. ἄγειν τὰς χορηγίας, i.e. to leave the choregia to be defrayed by subscription, not by a single person, D. 20.23; μικρᾶς ς. ἑκάστῳ γιγνομένης ibid.; πρὸς ς. χρημάτων Arist. Rh.Al. 1423b1.

2. metaph., Pl. Lg. 905b; ἡ παρὰ τοῦ διδασκάλου ς., i.e. instruction, Aristid. 2.226 J.
3. = collatio, (compulsory) provision of recruits, εἰς τὴν τῶν τειρώνων ς. KeilPremerstein Dritter Bericht p.87 (inc. loc.); συντελείας βουργαρίων.. ἄνεσιν prob. in SIG 880.52 (Pizus, iii A.D., cf. JRS 8.26 sqq.).

II at Athens, a body of citizens who contributed jointly to bear public burdens (cf. συντελής 1), Antipho Fr. 56; αἱ ς. τῶν τριηράρχων Decr. ap. D. 18.105, cf. 106.

2. generally, company, ὦ ξυντέλεια (sc. θεῶν), of the gods, who separately were called τέλειοι, A. Th. 251, cf. Sch. ad loc.
3. union of communities grouped together or united to a larger state, Plb. 5.94.1, D.S. 5.80, Plu. Comp.Phil.Flam. 1, Paus. 7.15.2, OGI 565.13 (Oenoanda).

III the consummation of a scheme, opp. ἐπιβολή, Plb. 1.3.3, cf. 3.1.5; ς. ἐπιτεθεικὼς τοῖς ἔργοις Id. 11.33.7; ς. σχεῖν, λαμβάνειν, Id. 1.4.3, 4.28.3, cf. SIG 695.13 (Magn. Mae., ii B.C.), Plu. Per. 13; εἰς ς. ἐλθεῖν Plb. 2.40.6; ἡ ς. τῆς ἐπιβολῆς Id. 5.32.3; ἡ ς. τοῦ ἀγῶνος IG 7.2712.78, 82 (Acraephia); τοῦ πολέμου OGI 327.6 (Pergam., ii B.C.), Plb. 4.28.5; τῶν ἔργων PPetr. 3p.109 (iii B.C.); τὰν τῶν μυστηρίων καὶ τᾶν θυσιᾶν ς. IG 5(1).1390.184 (Andania, i B.C.); καταθύμιος λογισμῶν συντέλεια Vett.Val. 173.11; completion, end, τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ LXX De. 11.12; τοῦ διεληλυθότος ἔτους POxy. 1270.42 (ii A.D.); αἰῶνος Matthew 13:39; ποιῆσαι εἰς ς. make an end of, LXX Ezekiel 20:17; ἀνέβη ς. τῆς πόλεως εἰς οὐρανόν ib. Jd. 20.40; full realization, τῶν τελῶν Phld. Rh. 2.86 S. unjust gain, LXX 1 Samuel 8:3; = κακία, Hsch. in Grammar, completed action, Demetr. Eloc. 214, A.D. Synt. 205.14, EM 472.23. = ἐντελέχεια, reality, Ocell. 2.3.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
συντέλεια, συντελείας, ἡ (συντελής), completion, consummation, end (so in Greek writings from Polybius on; the Sept. chiefly for כָּלָה; for קֵץ in Daniel 12:4, 13; in other senses from Aeschylus down): αἰῶνος or τοῦ αἰῶνος, Matthew 13:39, 40 L T Tr WH, ; ; τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, Matthew 13:40 R G; τῶν αἰώνων, Hebrews 9:26 (see αἰών, 3, p. 19b bottom (cf. Hermas, sim. 9, 12, 3 [ET] and Hilgenfeld at the passage)); καιροῦ and καιρῶν, Daniel 9:27; Daniel 12:4; τῶν ἡμερῶν, ibid. ; ἀνθρώπου, of his death, Sir. 11:27 (25); cf. .

Question 395

τέλειος, -α, -ον

Answer 395

perfect, mature, finished
Definition:
brought to completion; fully accomplished, fully developed, Jas. 1:4a; fully realized, thorough, 1 Jn. 4:18; complete, entire, as opposed to what is partial and limited, 1 Cor. 13:10; full grown of ripe age, 1 Cor. 14:20; Eph. 4:13; Heb. 5:14; fully accomplished in Christian enlightenment, 1 Cor. 2:6; Phil. 3:15; Col. 1:28; perfect in some point of character, without shortcoming in respect of a certain standard, Mt. 5:48; 19:21; Col. 4:12; Jas. 1:4b; 3:2; perfect, consummate, Rom. 12:2; Jas. 1:17, 25; compar. of higher excellence and efficiency, Heb. 9:11*

Thayer's Definition
brought to its end, finished
wanting nothing necessary to completeness
perfect
that which is perfect
consummate human integrity and virtue
of men
full grown, adult, of full age, mature

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τέλειος and τέλεος, α, ον, in Trag., Att., and Dor. also ος, ον, A. Eu. 382 (lyr.), Pl. Phlb. 67a, Arist. EN 1153b16, SIG 265 (Delph., iv B.C.), etc.: the form τέλειος is alone used by Hom., neither form in Hes.; τέλεος is alone used by Hdt., exc. in 9.110; in Trag. and Att. both forms occur; Att. Inscrr. up to the end of iii B.C. have only τέλεος, IG 12.76.39, al., and τέλεος, τελέως, τελεῶ are recommended by Thom. Mag. p.358R.; τέλειος first in IG 22.2314.51, al. (early ii B.C.), freq. in Papyri (PCair.Zen. 429.13, al. (iii B.C.), etc.), but the neut. used as Adv. is sts. τέλεον (BGU 903.12 (ii A.D.), etc., τέλειον POxy. 707.31 (ii A.D.), etc.): the form τέλεως, acc. τέλεων, with pl. τέλεῳ, is found in SIG 1025.61, 1026.14 (Cos, iv/iii B.C.), dub. in Schwyzer 734 (Zeleia) and Herod. 7.20: the form τέληον in GDI 4963 (Crete): (τέλος): — perfect, of victims, entire, without spot or blemish, ἀρνῶν αἰγῶν τε τελείων Il. 1.66, cf. 24.34; βοτὸν τ. Riv.Fil. 56.265 (Cyrene); τὸνς ϝεξήκοντα τελέονς ὄϝινς (acc. pl.) SIG 56.30 (Argos, v. B.C.); of sacrifices, ἱερὰ τ. perfect, of full tale or number, or performed with all rites, Th. 5.47, Lexap. And. 1.97, D. 59.60; τελέους ἀεὶ τελετὰς τελούμενος τέλεος ὄντως.. γίγνεται Pl. Phdr. 249c; in Il. 8.247, 24.315, αἰετὸς τελειότατος πετεηνῶν is prob. the surest bird of augury (cf. τελήεις). in Dialects, = κύριος, fully constituted, valid, ἐν ἀγορᾷ τελείῳ Schwyzer 324.1 (Delph., iv B.C.), SIG 265 (ibid.), etc.; ἀλιαίᾳ ἔδοξε τελείᾳ ib.594.3 (Mycenae, ii B.C.); authoritative, final, ἁ δέ κα ϝράτρα ἁ δαμοσία τελεία εἴε δικάδο σα Schwyzer 412 (Elis); τὸ θέθμιον.. τέλεον εἶμεν IG 9(1).334.47 (Locr., v B.C.); so in Trag., τελεία ψῆφος a final decision, A. Supp. 739, S. Ant. 632.

2. of animals, full-grown, τέλεον νεαροῖς ἐπιθύσας A. Ag. 1504 (anap., and so perh. αἶγες τ. in Il. ll.cc.); ἐπ’ οὗ θύεται τὰ τ. τῶν προβάτων, opp. γαλαθηνά, Hdt. 1.183, cf. SIG 1015.31 (Halic.), Pherecr. 44, PCair.Zen. 429.13, al. (iii B.C.), Sammelb. 5277.5 (iii A.D.), etc.; τ. ζῷον defined in Gal. 7.677; as Subst., τέλειον καὶ δέκα ἄρνες SIG 1024.35 (Myconus, iii/ii B.C.); τ. ἵππος, opp. πῶλος, Pl. Lg. 834c; τ. ἅρμα a chariot drawn by horses, opp. ἅρμα πωλικόν, CIG 2758 111.D2 (Aphrodisias), SIG 840 (Olympia, ii A.D.), Luc. Tim. 50; τελέᾳ συνωρίδι IG 5(2).549.2, al. (Arc., iv B.C.); τελέῳ τεθρίππῳ ib. 5; κέλητι τελέῳ ib. 550.29; κέλητι τελείῳ ib. 7.1772.14, cf. 16; of trees, Thphr. CP 3.7.5, POxy. 909.18 (iii A.D.); εἰκὼν τελεία life-sized, GDI 4942b7 (Crete, ii B.C.); of a torsionengine, full-sized, opp. to the model of one, Ph. Bel. 55.30: of human beings, full-grown, adult, Pl. Lg. 929c, X. Cyr. 1.2.4, 12, 14, BGU 1100.10 (i B.C.), POxy. 485.30 (ii A.D.), Sor. 1.10, al. married, τέλειοι οἱ γεγαμηκότες Paus.Gr. Fr. 306; Ἥρα Τελεία is so expld. at Stymphalus, Paus. 8.22.2, cf. Aristocl.Hist. 5 (ap.Sch. Theoc. 15.64); v. infr. 11.
3. of persons, accomplished, perfect in his kind, in relation to quality, Isoc. 12.32,242; ἱστοριῶν συγγραφέα τέλειον Supp.Epigr. 1.400 (Samos, ii A.D.); τ. σοφιστής Pl. Cra. 403e; τ. εἴς τι Id. Phdr. 269e (Sup.); κατὰ πάντα Id. Ti. 30d; πρός τι Id. Lg. 647d, 678b, Isoc. 12.9, etc.; ἔν τινι Id. Ephesians 4:3 (Sup.); οἱ τ. δογματικοί Gal. 15.60; but ἡ τελεία μαῖα the trained or qualified midwife, distd. from ἡ ἀρίστη (the trained and experienced midwife), Sor. 1.4. of things, φάρμακον τελεώτατον Pl. Criti. 106b; τ. ἀρετή, φιλία, etc., Arist. EN 1129b30, 1156b34, al.; of a syllogism in the 1st figure, the other figures being ἀτελεῖς, Id. APr. 27a1, etc.; τὸ τελεώτατον ἐκεῖνο γυμνάσιον, ὂ δὴ καὶ κατασκευὴν ὀνομάζουσι Gal. 6.169, cf. 208: even of evils, τ. νόσημα a serious, dangerous illness, Hp. Prorrh. 2.30; τελειοτάτη κακία Gal. 16.500; ἀδικία τελέα, τελεωτάτη, absolute, Pl. R. 348b, 344a; συνθέσεις λευκὰς τελείας δέκα τρεῖς thirteen complete white suits, PHamb. 10.14 (ii A.D.); τ. ἀποζυγή complete divorce, PGrenf. 2.76.19 (iv A.D.); ὕνις τελεία, κράβακτος ξύλινος τ., etc., PTeb. 406.19, al. (iii A.D.); of land, fully inundated, opp. ἀβροχικός, PMasp. 107.13, al. (vi A.D.), prob. in PFlor. 286.23 (vi A.D.).
4. of prayers, vows, etc., fulfilled, accomplished, εὐχωλαί Pi. Fr. 122.15; τέλειον ἐπ’ εὐχᾷ ἐσλόν Id. P. 9.89; τελεία γένεος Οἰδίπου τ’ ἀρά A. Th. 832 (lyr.); μὰ τὴν τ. τῆς ἐμῆς παιδὸς Δίκην Id. Ag. 1432; τέλεα εὔγματα Ar. Th. 353 (lyr.); of omens or predictions, ὄψις ὀνείρου οὐ τελέη a vision which imported nothing, Hdt. 1.121; τ. σύμβολον h.Merc. 526 (s. v.l.); τ. τὸ ἐνύπνιον ἀποτετέλεσται Pl. R. 443b.
5. of numbers, full, complete, τελέους ἑπτὰ μῆνας Ar. Lys. 104; τ. ἐνιαυτός the great year, Pl. Ti. 39d. in Arithm., of perfect numbers, which are equal to the sum of their divisors, as 6 = 3 + 2 + 1; 28 = 14 + 7 + 4 + 2 + 1, Id. R. 546b, Euc. 7 Def. 23, Theo Sm.p.45 H., Nicom. Ar. 1.16: — but 9 is τ. ὅτι ἐκ τελείου τοῦ γ γίνεται, Theol.Ar. 58 (3 is τ. because it has ἀρχή, μέσον, τέλος, ib. 14).
6. τ. κρατήρ, i.e. the third bowl offered to Ζεὺς Σωτήρ, Ar. Fr. 526, E. Fr. 148. II of the gods, having power to fulfil prayer, all-powerful (as implied in A. Ag. 973, Ζεῦ Ζεῦ τέλειε, τὰς ἐμὰς εὐχὰς τέλει), Ζεὺς τ. Pi. O. 13.115, P. 1.67; τ. ὕψιστον Δία A. Eu. 28; τελέων τελειότατον κράτος, Ζεῦ Id. Supp. 526 (lyr.); of Hera ζυγία, the presiding goddess of marriage (v. supr. 1.2 b, τέλος 1.6), Pi. N. 10.18, A. Eu. 214, Fr. 383, Ar. Th. 973 (lyr.); of Apollo, Theoc. 25.22 (Sup.); of the Eumenides, A. Eu. 382 (lyr.); Μοῖραι Supp.Epigr. 3.400.9 (Delph., iii B.C.): generally, θεοὶ τέλειοι τέλειαί τε A. Th. 167 (lyr.); πῦρ τέλεον ἄρρητον Lyr.Alex.Adesp. 36.14: also ἀνὴρ τ. the head or lord of the house, A. Ag. 972.

III = τελευταῖος, last, S. Tr. 948 (lyr.). τέλειον, τό, a royal banquet, as a transl. of the Pers. τυκτά, Hdt. 9.110. ἡ τελεία (sc. στιγμή) the full point, D.T. 630.6; so τελείαν δεῖ στίξαι Herm. in Phdr. p.84 A.

2. ἡ τελεία (sc. ἀντίδοτος) the perfect antidote, effective against all poisons, Scrib. Larg.177. Τέλεος (sc. μήν (, ὁ, name of a month at Epidaurus, IG 42(1).109 ii 114.

Adv. τελέως finally, absolutely, with full authority, A. Eu. 320, 953 (both anap.).

2. completely, absolutely, thoroughly, τ. ἐς ἀσθενὲς ἔρχεται Hdt. 1.120; τ. ἐκκλησιάσαιμεν perfectly, Ar. Th. 329 (lyr.); τ. ἄφρων Isaiah 12:4; ἔρια τ. ῥυπαρά PCair.Zen. 287 (iii B.C.); τ. μ’ ὑπῆλθε completely deceived me, Epicr. 9; τ. ἑστιᾶν perfectly, X. Smp. 2.2; τ. κινήσεται absolutely, Pl. Tht. 182c; τ. γὰρ ἡμᾶς ἐνώχλει he was a perfect nuisance to us, PCair.Zen. 637.4 (iii B.C.); τ. γυμνάζειν put a person through the τέλειον γυμνάσιον, Gal. 6.286; μέσα τ. completely neutral, Id. 18(2).59, cf. 79, al.–This is the only form of the Adv. allowed by Thom.Mag.p.358 R., but τελείως is found in Gorg. Hel. 18, Isoc. 13.18, Pl. Def. 411d, Arist. Metaph. 1021b26, PPetr. 3p.114 (iii B.C.), LXX Ju. 11.6, Gal. 16.639, etc.
3. the neut. τέλεον is also used as Adv. in later Prose, Luc. Merc.Cond. 5, App. BC 1.8, Sor. 2.56, etc. Comp. and Sup.: Hom. uses only τελειότατος: in Prose τελεώτερος, -ώτατος prevail, though the other forms occur in Arist. EN 1097a30, 1174b22. Comp. Adv. τελεώτερον Pl. R. 520b (τελειοτέρως Sch. Il. 2.350, v.l. in Procl. Inst. 18); τελεώτατα Pl. R. 351b.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τέλειος, τελεία, τέλειον (τέλος), in classic Greek sometimes also τέλειος, τέλειον (cf. Winers Grammar, § 11,1), from Homer down, the Sept. several times for שָׁלֵם, תָּמִים, etc.; properly, brought to its end, finished; lacking nothing necessary to completeness; perfect: ἔργον, James 1:4; ἡ ἀγάπη, 1 John 4:18; ὁ νόμος, James 1:25; (δώρημα, James 1:17); τελειοτερα σκηνή, a more perfect (excellent) tabernacle, Hebrews 9:11; τό τέλειον, substantively, that which is perfect: consummate human integrity and virtue, Romans 12:2 (others take it here as an adjective belonging to θέλημα); the perfect state of all things, to be ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven, 1 Corinthians 13:10; of men, full-grown, adult; of full age, mature (Aeschylus Ag. 1504; Plato, legg. 11, p. 929{c}): Hebrews 5:14; τέλειος ἀνήρ (Xenophon, Cyril 1, 2, 4f; 8, 7, 6; Philo de cherub. § 32; opposed to παιδίον νήπιον, Polybius 5, 29, 2; for other examples from other authors see Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebrew ii., 2, p. 133f), μέχρι … εἰς ἄνδρα τέλειον, until we rise to the same level of knowledge which we ascribe to a full-grown man, until we can be likened to a full-grown man, Ephesians 4:13 (opposed to νήπιοι, 14); τέλειοι ταῖς φρεσί (opposed to παιδία and νηπιαζοντες ταῖς φρεσί), 1 Corinthians 14:20 (here A. V. men); absolutely, οἱ τέλειοι, the perfect, i. e. the more intelligent, ready to apprehend divine things, 1 Corinthians 2:6 (R. V. marginal reading full-grown) (opposed to νήπιοι ἐν Χριστῷ, ; in simple opposed to νήπιος, Philo de legg. alleg. i. § 30; for מֵבִין, opposed to μαντανων, 1 Chronicles 25:8; (cf. Lightfoot on Colossians 1:28; Philippians 3:15)); of mind and character, one who has reached the proper height of virtue and integrity: Matthew 5:48; Matthew 19:21; Philippians 3:15 (cf. Lightfoot as above); James 1:4; in an absolute sense, of God: Matthew 5:48; τέλειος ἀνήρ, James 3:2 (τέλειος δίκαιος, Sir. 44:17); as respects understanding and goodness, Colossians 4:12; τέλειος ἄνθρωπος ἐν Χριστῷ, Colossians 1:28 (cf. Lightfoot as the synonym above: see ὁλόκληρος, and Trench, § xxii.).

Question 396

τελειόω

Answer 396

-, ἐτελείωσα, τετελείωκα, τετελείωμαι, ἐτελειώθην

to perfect, complete, finish; (pass.) to reach a goal, be fulfilled, completed, made perfect
Definition:
to execute fully, discharge, Jn. 4:34; 5:36; 17:4; to reach the end of, run through, finish, Lk. 2:43; Acts 20:24; to consummate, place in a condition of finality, Heb. 7:19; to perfect a person, advance a person to final completeness of character, Heb. 2:10; 5:9; 7:28; to perfect a person, advance a person to a completeness of its kind, which needs no further provision, Heb. 9:9; 10:1, 14; pass. to receive fulfillment, Jn. 19:28; to be brought to the goal, to reach the end of one’s course, Lk. 13:32; Phil. 3:12; Heb. 11:40; 12:23; to be fully developed, 2 Cor. 12:9; Jas. 2:22; 1 Jn. 2:5; 4:12, 17; to be completely organized, to be closely embodied, Jn. 17:23

Thayer's Definition
to make perfect, complete
to carry through completely, to accomplish, finish, bring to an end
to complete (perfect)
add what is yet wanting in order to render a thing full
to be found perfect
to bring to the end (goal) proposed
to accomplish
bring to a close or fulfilment by event
of the prophecies of the scriptures

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τελει-όω and τελεόω

(the latter always in Hdt., and the prevailing form in Att. Prose, v. infr., and cf. τέλειος init.): —

make perfect, complete:

I of things, acts, works, time, make perfect, complete, accomplish, πάντα ἐτελέωσε ποιήσας Hdt. 1.120; τελεώσαντες τὰς σπονδάς having completed the libations, Th. 6.32; τελειοῖ τὴν ἐνέργειαν ἡ ἡδονή Arist. EN 1174b23; τ. βίου ἐνιαυτούς complete the tale of years, App.Anth. 2.281 (Philadelphia); τὸ ἔργον John 4:34; τὰς ἡμέρας Luke 2:43; τὸν δρόμον Acts 20:24; τὸν περὶ παιδοτροφίας λόγον ἐνθάδε τελειοῦμεν Sor. 1.126: — Med., Iamb. VP 29.158, Protr. 20: — Pass., to be accomplished, Hdt. 1.160, S. Tr. 1257; ἐπειδὴ χρόνος ἐτελεώθη Pl. Plt. 272d; τελεωθέντων ἀμφοτέροισι when both men had their wishes accomplished, Hdt. 5.11. execute a legal instrument, make it valid by completing it, PCair.PreIsa 43.10 (i A.D.), PAmh. 2.111.16 (ii A.D.), BGU 578.21 (ii A.D.), 1657.6 (iii A.D.).

2. in Logic, τ. τὸ εἶδος complete, make perfect the form or species, Arist. EN 1174a16: — Pass., of syllogisms, to be made perfect (by reduction to the 1st figure, the other figures being ἀτελεῖς), Id. APr. 29a16, 30, al.
3. Pass., of prophecies, to be fulfilled, John 19:28.

II bring to perfection or consummation, ἐπιγενόμενα δὲ ταῦτα τῷ Δαρείῳ ἐτελέωσέ μιν sealed his success, in his claim to the monarchy, Hdt. 3.86; τελειῶσαι λόχον make the ambush successful, S. OC 1089 (lyr.): — Pass., to be made perfect, attain perfection, Id. El. 1510 (anap.); esp. by reaching maturity in point of age, Pl. Smp. 192a, R. 466e, 487a, 498b, etc.; so of the embryo, plants, come to maturity, Arist. GA 776a31, Thphr. HP 8.2.6, Sor. 1.33, al., Gal. 6.531; τελειωθέντος [μειρακίου] κατὰ τὸ μέγεθος ib.162.

2. in Pass. also, τελειωθῆναι, = γῆμαι, Paus.Gr. Fr. 306, cf. τέλειος 1.2b, τέλος 1.6.
3. Pass., to be made perfect, of true Christians, Hebrews 11:40, Hebrews 12:23.
4. Pass., die, IG 14.628 (Rhegium). III intr., bring fruit to maturity, come to maturity, Arist. GA 757b24.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τελειόω (in secular authors also τελεόω, which Herodotus uses everywhere (and which is the prevailing form in Attic prose (Liddell and Scott)); other writers use both forms indifferently), τελείω: 1 aorist ετελείωσα; perfect τετελείωκα; passive (or middle), present τελειοῦμαι; perfect τετελείωμαι; 1 aorist ἐτελειωθην; (τέλειος); from Herodotus, Sophocles, Thucydides, and Plato down; equivalent to τέλειον ποιῶ, to make perfect or complete;

1. to carry through completely; to accomplish, finish, bring to an end: τόν, Acts 20:24; τό ἔργον, John 4:34; John 5:36; John 17:4,(Nehemiah 6:16; τόν οἶκον, 2 Chronicles 8:16); τάς ἡμέρας, Luke 2:43; middle (present cf. Buttmann, 38 (33)) τελειοῦμαι, I finish complete, what was given me to do, Luke 13:32 (some (so A. V.) take it here as passive, I am perfected (understanding it of his death; cf. Ellicott, Life of our Lord, Lect. vi., p. 242 n{1}; Keim, ii., 615 n^1)).
2. to complete (perfect), i. e. add what is yet lacking in order to render a thing full: τήν ἀγάπην, passive, 1 John 2:5; 1 John 4:12, 17; ἡ δύναμις μου ἐν ἀσθένεια τελειοῦται, my power shows itself most efficacious in them that are weak, 2 Corinthians 12:9 R G; ἐκ τῶν ἔργων ἡ πίστις ἐτελειώθη, by works faith was perfected, made such as it ought to be, James 2:22; τετελείωται τίς ἐν τῇ ἀγάπη, one has been made perfect in love, his love lacks nothing, 1 John 4:18 (οἱ τελειωθεντες ἐν ἀγάπη, Clement of Rome, 1 Cor. 50, 3 [ET]; (τελειῶσαι τήν ἐκκλησίαν σου ἐν τῇ ἀγάπη σου, ‘Teaching’ etc. 10, 5 [ET])); ἵνα ὠσί τετελειωμένοι εἰς ἕν, that they may be perfected into one, i. e. perfectly united, John 17:23. τινα, to bring one’s character to perfection: ἤδη τετελείωμαι, I am already made perfect, Philippians 3:12 (Wis. 4:13; ὦ ψυχή … ὅταν τελειωθης καί βραβειων καί στεφάνων ἀξιωθης, Philo de legg. alleg. 3, 23; ψυχή … τελειωθεισα ἐν ἀρετῶν ἀθλοις καί ἐπί τόν ὅρον ἐφικομενη τοῦ καλοῦ, id. de somn. 1, 21; equivalent to to be footpad perfect, Sir. 34:10 (Sir. 31:10).
3. to bring to the end (goal) proposed: οὐδέν, Hebrews 7:19; τινα, (to perfect or consummate) i. e. to raise to the state befitting him: so of God exalting Jesus to the state of heavenly majesty, Hebrews 2:10; in the passive, Hebrews 5:9; Hebrews 7:28; to raise to the state of heavenly blessedness those who put their faith in the expiatory death of Christ, passive, Hebrews 11:40; Hebrews 12:23 ((Act. Petr. et Paul. § 88, Tdf. edition, p. 39; Act. Barnab. § 9, id., p. 68; cf. ‘Teaching’ etc. 16, 2 [ET]); with μαρτυρίῳ added, of the death of the apost. Paul, Eusebius, h. e. 2, 22, 2 (cf. Heinichen’s note on 7, 15, 5)); to make one, meet for future entrance on this state and give him a sure hope of it even here on earth, Hebrews 10:1, 14; τινα κατά συνείδησιν, Hebrews 9:9; cf. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebrews 2:1, p. 297ff; C. R. Köstlin, Lehrbegriff des Evang. u. der Briefe Johannis (Berl. 1843), p. 421ff; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des Hebrew-Br., § 42, p. 340ff; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 344f. (English translation, ii, p. 72ff).
4. to accomplish, i. e. bring to a close or fulfilment by event: τήν γραφήν, the prophecies of Scripture, passive, John 19:28 (cf. Winers Grammar, 459 (428); Buttmann, § 151, 20).

Question 397

τελευτάω

Answer 397

[τελευτήσω, ἐτελεύτησα, τετελεύτηκα, -, -]

to finish, bring to and end, close
to have an end or close, come to an end, to die

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τελευτ-άω,

fut. -ήσω E. Tr. 1029, etc.: pf. τετελεύτηκα Pl. Men. 75e, al.: — Pass., fut. Med. τελευτήσομαι always in pass. sense, Il. 13.100, Od. 8.510, 9.511, E. Hipp. 370 (lyr.): aor. ἐτελευτήθην Il. 15.74: —

bring to pass, accomplish, ὄφρα.. τελευτήσω τάδε ἔργα Il. 8.9; τ. ἃ μενοινᾷς Od. 2.275; ἐπὴν ταῦτα τελευτήσῃς τε καὶ ἔρξῃς 1.293, cf. 2.306; γάμον τ. 24.126; fulfil an oath or promise, wish or hope, τ. ἐέλδωρ 21.200; τ. ὅσ’ ὑπέστης Il. 13.375; οὐ Ζεὺς ἄνδρεσσι νοήματα πάντα τελευτᾷ 18.328, cf. Od. 3.56, 62; ὅρκια Call. Aet. 3.1.29; τελευτᾶν τινι κακὸν ἦμαρ bring about an evil day for one, Od. 15.524; τ. πόνους Δαναοῖς Pi. P. 1.54, cf. E. Ph. 1581 (lyr.); οἷ τ. λόγον Id. Tr. 1029; τὸ δ’ ἔνθεν ποῖ τελευτῆσαί με χρή; to what end must I bring it? S. OC 476; Ζεὺς ὅ τι νεύσῃ, τοῦτο τελευτᾷ E. Alc. 979 (lyr.), etc.: — Pass., to be fulfilled, come to pass, happen, ll. cc. sub init.; πρίν γε τὸ Πηλεΐδαο τελευτηθῆναι ἐέλδωρ Il. 15.74; πρὶν τελευτηθῇ φόνος E. Or. 1218.

2. finish, σχεδίην.. ἐπηγκενίδεσσι Od. 5.253; ἐπεί ῥ’ ὄμοσέν τε, τελεύτησέν τε τὸν ὅρκον had sworn and completed (made binding) the oath, 2.378, etc.; ἡσύχιμον ἁμέραν τ. close a peaceful day, Pi. O. 2.33; ἄρξομαι ἐκ βολβοῖο τελευτήσω δ’ ἐπὶ θύννον (sc. τὸ δεῖπνον) Pl.Com. 173.6 (hex.).
3. esp. τ. τὸν αἰῶνα finish life, i.e. die, Hdt. 1.32, 9.17, etc.; τ. βίον A. Ag. 929, S. Fr. 646 codd. (sed leg. δρόμον), E. Hec. 419, Pl. Prt. 351b; ὑπ’ ἄλλου τ. τὸν βίον, i.e. to be killed, Id. Lg. 870e: also (after the analogy of παύομαι) c. gen., τελευτᾶν τοῦ ἀνθρωπίνου βίου make an end of life, X. Cyr. 8.7.17; so λόγου τ. Th. 3.59; ἐπαίνου τ. ἐς τάδε ἔπη ib. 104. freq. abs., end life, die, Hdt. 1.66, 3.38, 40, al., Pl. R. 614b, al.; πρὶν τελευτήσαντ’ ἴδῃς before you see him dead, S. Fr. 662; τ. μάχῃ A. Th. 617; νούσῳ Hdt. 1.161; γήραϊ Id. 6.24; τ. ὑπό τινος die by another’s hand or means, ib. 92; δόλῳ ὑπό τινος Id. 4.78; ὑπὸ αἰχμῆς σιδηρέης Id. 1.39; ὑπ’ ἀλλαλοφόνοις χερσίν A. Th. 930 (lyr.); ἐκ τῆς πληγῆς Pl. Lg. 877b; of animals, Arist. PA 667b11, PMich.Zen. 67.25 (iii B.C.).

II intr. (as always in Prose, except in signf. 1.3a):

1 to be accomplished, λόγων κορυφαί Pi. O. 7.68 (as v.l. for τελεύταθεν) ; ἐλπίδες E. Ba. 908 (lyr.).

2. come to an end, A. Ag. 635, etc.: esp. of Time, τελευτῶντος τοῦ μηνός, τοῦ θέρους, Th. 2.4, 32, etc.: of actions, events, etc., τ. ἡ ναυμαχία ἐς νύκτα Id. 1.51, etc. with words indicating the kind of end or outcome, ἢν ὁ πόλεμος κατὰ νόον τ. Hdt. 9.45, cf. 7.47; εὖ τ. A. Supp. 211; πτωχοὶ τ. end by being beggars, Pl. R. 552c; οὕτως τ. Th. 1.110, 138; τ. ἔς τι come to a certain end, issue in, αἱ εὐτυχίαι ἐς τοῦτο ἐτελεύτησαν Hdt. 3.125; τ. ἐς τὠυτὸ γράμμα end in the same letter, Id. 1.139, cf. Th. 2.51, 4.48, Pl. R. 618a; εἰς ἄνδρας ἐκ μειρακίων τ. Id. Tht. 173b; ποῖ (ἐς τί) τελευτᾶν (φασι); came to what end? A. Pers. 735 (troch.), cf. Ch. 528, Pl. Lg. 630b; also τ. ἐπί τι Id. R. 510d, Smp. 211c.
3. die, v. supr. 1.3b.
4. the part. τελευτῶν, ῶσα, ῶν, is used with Verbs like an Adv., to finish with, at the end, at last, as τελευτῶν ἔλεγε Hdt. 3.75; κἂν ἐγίγνετο πληγὴ τελευτῶσα there would have been a fray to finish with, S. Ant. 261; τελευτῶν.. ἐξεβλήθη Ar. Eq. 524 (anap.); τὰς ὀλοφύρσεις τελευτῶντες ἐξέκαμνον at last they got tired of mourning, Th. 2.51, cf. 47; ἢν δέῃ τελευτῶντα τὴν στρωμνὴν ἐξαργυρῶσαι Id. 8.81; sts. with another part., τὴν τυραννίδα χαλεπὴν τελευτῶσαν γενομένην having at last become.., Th. 6.53, cf. Pl. Phdr. 228b; πόλεις ἐπάγοντες καὶ τελευτῶντες Λακεδαιμονίους Lys. 12.60.
5. of local limits and the like, μέχρι Σολόεντος ἄκρης, ἣ τελευτᾷ τῆς Λιβύης Hdt. 2.32; τελευτῶντος τοῦ Λαβυρίνθου ἔχεται πυραμίς ib. 148; τῇ ἡ Κνιδίη χώρη ἐς τὴν ἤπειρον τ. Id. 1.174, cf. 2.33, 4.39, IG 12.900, Pl. Men. 75e.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τελευτάω, τελεύτω; 1 aorist ἐτελεύτησα; perfect participle τετελευτηκώς (John 11:39 L T Tr WH); (τελευτή; from Homer down;

1. transitive, to finish; to bring to an end or close: τόν βίον, to finish life, to die, often from Aesehyl. and Herodotus down.
2. intransitive (cf. Buttmann, § 130, 4) to have an end or close, come to an end; hence, to die, very often so from Aeschylus and Herodotus down (the Sept. for מוּת), and always in the N. T.: Matthew 2:19; Matthew 9:18; Matthew 22:25; Mark 9:41, 46 ((these two vss. T WH omit; Tr brackets)),48; Luke 7:2; John 11:39 L T Tr WH; Acts 2:29; Acts 7:15; Hebrews 11:22; θανάτῳ τελευτάτω (in imitation of the Hebrew יוּמָת מות, Exodus 21:12, 15-17,etc.) (A. V. let him die the death i. e.) let him surely die (Winers Grammar, 339 (319); Buttmann, § 133, 22), Matthew 15:4; Mark 7:10.

Question 398

δεκατέσσαρες

Answer 398

fourteen

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
δεκᾰτέσσᾰρες, α, v. δέκα.

δέκᾰ, οἱ, αἱ, τά, indecl., ten, Il. 2.372, Od. 9.160, etc.; οἱ δ. the Ten, Isoc. 18.6; ἡ τῶν δ. τυραννίς Arist. Ath. 41.2; also οἱ δ. the Attic Orators, Philostr. VS 2.1.14; τὰ δέκα [ἔτη] ἀφ’ ἥβης those who are ten years past 20 (the age of military service), X. HG 3.4.23; δ. ἄνδρες, = Lat. decemviri, App. Hann. 56: compds. (not in early writers, but usu. in Hellenistic Gr.) δεκᾰ-είς, Tab.Heracl. 2.34, Plu. Numbers 3:1-51 :

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δεκατέσσαρες, δεκατεσσάρων, οἱ, αἱ, δεκατεσσαρα, τά, fourteen: Matthew 1:17; 2 Corinthians 12:2; Galatians 2:1. (Genesis 31:41; Tobit 8:19 Tobit 10:7; Polybius 1, 36, 11; cf. δεκαδύο.)

Question 399

τράπεζα, -ης, ἡ

Answer 399

table
Definition:
a table, an eating table, Mt. 15:27; Mk. 7:28; Heb. 9:2; by impl. a meal, feast, Rom. 11:9; 1 Cor. 10:21; a table or counter of a money changer, Mt. 21:12; a bank, Lk. 19:23; by impl. pl. money matters, Acts 6:2

Thayer’s Definition
a table
a table on which food is placed, an eating place
the table in the temple at Jerusalem on which the consecrated loaves were placed
equiv. to the food placed upon the table
to set a table
put food before one
a banquet, feast
the table or stand of a money changer, where he sits, exchanging different kinds of money for a fee (agio), and paying back with interest loans or deposits

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τράπεζ-α [τρᾰ], ης, ἡ,

Dor. τράπεσδα Alcm. 74b: —

table, esp. dining-table, eating-table, freq. in Hom., Τηλεμάχοιο τ., ἐμὴ τ., Od. 17.333, 447, cf. IG 12.330.4, Men. 518.2; τ. παραθεῖναι Hdt. 6.139, Alex. 171; παρέκειτο τ. Il. 24.476; τ. εἰσφέρειν, ἐπάγειν, Ar. V. 1216, Anaxandr. 2 (but ἐσῄρετο is prob. cj.); ἡ τ. εἰσῄρετο Ar. Ra. 518; τ. ἀφαιρεῖν Od. 19.61, X. Smp. 2.1 (Pass.); αἴρειν Men. 273, cf. 451; ἐκφέρειν Pl.Com. 69.2; ξενίη τ. the hospitable board, ἴστω Ζεύς.. ξενίη τε τ. Od. 14.158, cf. 21.28; ᾔσχυνε ξενίαν τ. κλοπαῖσι A. Ag. 401 (lyr.), cf. 701 (lyr.); ὅρκον μέγαν, ἅλας τε καὶ τράπεζαν Archil. 96, cf. Wilcken Chr. 11.58 (ii B. C.); ἡ ξενικὴ τ. Aeschin. 3.224; τοὺς τῆς πόλεως ἅλας καὶ τὴν δημοσίαν τ. Id. 2.22; δέξασθαι τραπέζῃ καὶ κοίτῃ entertain at bed and board, Hdt. 5.20; κοίτης μεθέξουσα καὶ τραπέζης μόνον Plu. Brut. 13; ἐπὶ τὰς αὐτὰς τ. ἰέναι Antipho 2.1.10; τράπεζαν Περσικὴν παρετίθετο he kept a table in the Persian fashion, Th. 1.130; τ. κοσμεῖν X. Cyr. 8.2.6, etc.; εἰς ἀλλοτρίαν τ. ἀποβλέπειν live at other men’s table, at their expense, Id. An. 7.2.33; τὴν τ. ἀνατρέπειν upset the table, D. 19.198; prov. of a spendthrift, And. 1.130; table dedicated to the gods, on which meats and offerings were set out, IG 12.190.4, 840.19, 22.1245.6, 1534.163, 1933.2, Din. 3.2; τ. ἱερά PCair.Zen. 708 (iii B. C.); ἐπὶ τὴν τ. τῶν Διοσκόρων ib. 569.24 (iii B. C.); τ. Κυρίου, τ. δαιμονίων, 1 Corinthians 10:21.

2. table, as implying what is upon it, meal, ἄνομος τ. Hdt. 1.162, cf. E. Alc. 2, X. An. 7.3.22; also βορᾶς τ. S. OT 1464; Συρακοσίων τ., prov. of luxurious living, Ar. Fr. 216, cf. Pl. R. 404d; Σικελικαὶ τ. prov. ap. Jul. Or. 6.203a; πολυτελὴς τ. Epicur. Ephesians 3 p.64U.; δεύτεραι τ. the second course, Plu. 2.133e, Ath. 14.639b; cf. τράγημα.

II money-changer’s counter, ἐν ἀγορᾷ ἐπὶ τῶν τ. Pl. Revelation 17:1-18 c, cf. Plu. 2.70f; αἱ τ. τῶν κολλυβιστῶν Matthew 21:12; most freq. bank, Lys 9.5, etc.; ἡ ἐργασία ἡ τῆς τ. the right to operate the bank, D. 36.6; ἡ ἐγγύη ἡ ἐπὶ τὴν τ. security given to the bank, Id. 33.10; δοῦναι ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τ. Luke 19:23; τὸ ἐπὶ τὴν τ. χρέως D. 33.24; οἱ ἐπὶ ταῖς τ. bankers, Isoc. 17.2; κατασκευάζεσθαι τράπεζαν set up a bank, Isa Fr. 66; τῆς τ. ἀνασκευασθείσης the bank having been broken, D. 33.9; δημοσία τ. public bank at Delos, IG 22.2336.180 (i B. C.); in Egypt, POxy. 835 (Aug.), etc.; βασιλικὴ τ. in Egypt, PEleph. 27.22 (iii B. C.), PTeb. 27.70 (ii B. C.), etc.; χειριστὴς τῆς ἐν τῇ Πολέμωνος μερίδι τ. PEnteux. 38.1 (iii B. C.); opp. ἰδιωτικὴ τ. POxy. 305 (i A. D.), etc.; κολλυβιστικαὶ τ. ib. 1411.4 (iii A. D.).

III any table or flat surface on which a thing rests: as, 1 cross bench in which the mast is fixed, Sch. Il. 15.729; τ. δολωνική, v. δολωνικός.

2. platform on which slaves were exposed for sale, Ar. Fr. 874.
3. tablet or slab with a relief or inscription, τ. χαλκῆ Orac. ap. D. 21.53, cf. Paus. 8.31.3; at a tomb, Plu. 2.838c.
4. plinth of a statue, CIG 4702.7 (Egypt, iv B. C.). lamp- stand, PSI 4.428.39 (iii B. C.).
5. nether millstone, BGU 251.17 (i A. D.), Poll. 7.19.
6. part of a torsion engine, prob. the plinth, Ph. Bel. 54.2, Hero Bel. 100.1.
7. part of the liver, Nic. Th. 560, Polyaen. 4.20, Ruf. Onom. 180.
8. shoulder-blade, Poll. 2.177.
9. grinding surface of the teeth, ib. 93, Ruf. Onom. 54. (The word is shortd. from τετράπεζα; hence the question καὶ πόθεν ἐγὼ τρίπουν τ. λήψομαι; as if this were an absurdity, Ar. Fr. 530; τ. τρισκελεῖς Cratin. 301: — so τρίπεζα, τρέπεδδα (qq. v.), of three-legged tables.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τράπεζα, τραπέζης, ἡ (from τέτρα, and πέζα a foot), from Homer Idown, the Sept. for שֻׁלְחָן, a table;

1.

a. a table on which food is placed, an eating-table: Matthew 15:27; Mark 7:28; Luke 16:21; Luke 19:23; Luke 22:21, 30; the table in the temple at Jerusalem on which the consecrated loaves were placed (see πρόθεσις, 1), Hebrews 9:2.
b. equivalent to the food placed upon the table (cf. Fritzsche on Additions to ): παρατιθέναι πραπεζαν (like the Latinmensam apponere (cf. our ‘to set a good table’)), to set a table, i. e., food, before one (Thucydides 1, 130; Aelian v. h. 2, 17), Acts 16:34; διακονεῖν, ταῖς τραπέζαις (see διακονέω, 3), Acts 6:2.
c. a banquet, feast (from Herodotus down): Romans 11:9 (from Psalm 68:23 ()); μετέχειν τραπέζης δαιμονίων, to partake of a feast prepared by ((?) see below) demons (the idea is this: the sacrifices of the Gentiles inure to the service of demons who employ them in preparing feasts for their worshippers; accordingly one who participates in those feasts, enters into communion and fellowship with the demons); κυρίου, to partake of a feast prepared by ((?) see below) the Lord (just as when he first instituted the supper), 1 Corinthians 10:21 (but it seems more natural to take the genitives δαιμονίων and κυρίου simply as possessive (cf. Winers Grammar, 189 (178); Buttmann, § 127, 27), and to modify the above interpretation accordingly).
2. the table or stand of a money-changer, where he sits, exchanging different kinds of money for a fee (agio), and paying back with interest loans or deposits (Lysias, Isocrates, Demosthenes, Aristotle, Josephus, Plutarch, others): Matthew 21:12; Mark 11:15; John 2:15; τό ἀργύριον διδόναι ἐπί (τήν) τράπεζαν, to put the money into a (the) bank at interest, Luke 19:23.

Question 400

ἀτιμία, ας, ἡ

Answer 400

dishonor, disgrace, shame; common use
Definition:
dishonor, infamy, Rom. 1:26; shame, 1 Cor. 11:14; meanness, vileness, 1 Cor. 15:43; 2 Cor. 6:8; a dishonorable use, Rom. 9:21; 2 Tim. 2:20; κατὰ ἀτιμιαν, slightingly, disparagingly, 2 Cor. 11:21

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀτῑμ-ία,

Ion. -ιη, ἡ,

I

1. dishonour, disgrace, ἀτιμίῃσιν ἰάλλειν Od. 13.142, Pi. O. 4.21, S. El. 1035, etc.; ἐν ἀτιμίῃ τινὰ ἔχειν Hdt. 3.3; ἀτιμίην προστιθέναι τινί Id. 7.11; ὄνειδος καὶ ἀ. ἔχειν ib. 231; ἀτιμίης κυρεῖν πρός τινος ib. 158; θεῶν ἀ. dishonour done to the gods, E. Heracl. 72, Pl. Hipparch. 229c; οὐκ ἀτιμίᾳ σέθεν A. Eu. 796: pl., ταῖς μεγίσταις κολάζειν ἀ. Pl. Plt. 309a, cf. 310e, R. 492d, al.; ὕβρεις καὶ ἀτιμίας D. 18.205, 21.23; indignities, Arist. Pol. 1336b11.
2. deprivation of privileges, A. Eu. 394 (lyr.); esp. of civic rights, And. 1.74, X. Lac. 9.6, D. 9.44; coupled with θάνατος and φυγή, IG 1.27a74.

II of things, ἐσθημάτων ἀ., i.e. sorry garb, A. Pers. 847; κόμη.. ἀτιμίας πλέως Cratin. 9. [ ἀτιμῑη Hom. l.c., Tyrt. 10.10.]

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀτιμία, ἀτιμίας, ἡ (ἄτιμος), dishonor, ignominy, disgrace (from Homer down): 1 Corinthians 11:14; opposed to δόξα, 2 Corinthians 6:8; 1 Corinthians 15:43 (ἐν ἀτιμία namely, ὄν, in a state of disgrace, used of the unseemliness and offensiveness of a dead body); κατ’ ἀτιμίαν equivalent to ἀτιμως, with contempt namely, of myself, 2 Corinthians 11:21 (R. V. by way of disparagement, cf. κατά, II. at the end); πάθη ἀτιμίας base lusts, vile passions, Romans 1:26, cf. Winers Grammar, § 34, 3b.; (Buttmann, § 132, 10). εἰς ἀτιμίαν for a dishonorable use, of vessels, opposed to τιμή: Romans 9:21; 2 Timothy 2:20.

Question 401

ἔντιμος, ον

Answer 401

held in honor, precious, prized
highly valued, honored, precious
Definition:
honored, estimable, dear, Lk. 7:2; 14:8; Phil. 2:29; highly-valued, precious, costly, 1 Pet. 2:4, 6*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἔντῑμ-ος, ον, (τιμή),

I

1 of persons, in honour, honoured, opp. ἄτιμος, Pl. Euthd. 281c, etc.; τινί by another, S. El. 239 (lyr.), Ant. 25, etc.; παρά τινι Pl. Ti. 21e: c. dat. rei, honoured with, σπονδαῖς E. Or. 1688 (anap.); in office, Pl. R. 564d; of men of high rank in Persia, X. Cyr. 3.1.8, al.; opp. ἄδοξοι, D. 3.29; = ἐπίτιμος, Decr. ap. eund. 59.104.

2. of things, τὰ θεῶν ἔ. what is honoured in their sight, their ordinances or attributes, S. Ant. 77; ἔ. ποιῆσαι τὴν τέχνην hold it in honour, Isoc. 4.159; ἔ. ποιεῖν τι Arist. Pol. 1286b15; ἔργα - ότερα (opp. ἀναγκαιότερα) ib. 1255b28; δαπανήματα -ότατα Id. EN 1122b35; χώρα ἔ. place of honour, Pl. Epin. 985e; ἔ. ἀπόλυσις, = Lat. honesta missio, PHamb. 1.31.19 (ii A. D.).
3. Adv. -μως, ἄγειν τι Pl. R. 528c, cf. Satyr. Vit.Eur.Fr. 39xviii27 (Pass.); ἔχειν τι Pl. R. 528b; also ἐ. ἔχειν to be in honour, X. An. 2.1.7: Sup. -ότατα D.C. 63.17; -μως ἀπολελυμένος, = Lat. missus honesta missione, POxy. 1471.6 (i A. D.), al.

II doing honour, honourable (to a person), λόγος Pl. Lg. 855a.

III valuable, highly valued, [ χώρα ] Arist. Mete. 352a12 (Comp.), cf. PLond. 5.1708.33 (vi A. D.); of currency, accepted in exchange, opp. ἀδόκιμον, νόμισμα Pl. Lg. 742a.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἔντιμος, ἔντιμον (τιμή), held in honor, prized; hence, precious: λίθος, 1 Peter 2:4, 6 (Isaiah 28:16); honorable, noble, Luke 14:8; τίνι, dear to one, Luke 7:2; ἔντιμον ἔχειν τινα to hold one dear or in honor, to value highly, Philippians 2:29. ((Sophocles, Plato, others).)

Question 402

ὑψηλός, -ή, -όν

Answer 402

high, mighty; proud, arrogant; highly valued; (compar.) more exalted
Definition:
high, lofty, elevated, Mt. 4:8; 17:1; τὰ ὑψηλά, the highest heaven, Heb. 1:3; upraised, Acts 13:17; met. highly esteemed, Lk. 16:15; φρονειν τὰ ὑψηλά, to have lofty thoughts, be proud, arrogant, Rom. 12:16

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑψηλός, ή, όν

(also -ός, όν Demetr.Troezen. 1 Diels): Comp. and Sup. -ότερος, -ότατος, and irreg. -έστατος Paus. 5.13.9: (ὕψι, ὕψος): —

high, lofty, θάλαμος Od. 1.426; πύργος Il. 3.384, etc.; of a highland country, χώρη ὀρεινὴ.. καὶ ὑψηλή Hdt. 1.110; ὑψλὰ χωρία Th. 3.97; and ὑψηλά alone, Pl. Lg. 732c; ἐφ’ ὑψηλοῦ εἶναι, καθῆσθαι, X. HG 4.5.4, Luc. Rh.Proverbs 6:1-35; ἐν ὑψηλῷ τινι καταστάς Plu. Eum. 17; ἀπὸ ὑψηλοῦ κρεμασθείς Pl. Tht. 175d; ἀφ’ ὑψηλοτέρου καθορῶντες X. HG 6.2.29; ἐποικοδομήσαντες ὑψηλότερον [τὸ τεῖχος ] Th. 7.4. Adv., -λῶς καθήμενος Pherecr. 64.

II metaph., high, lofty, stately, proud, ὄλβος, ἀρεταί, κλέος, Pi. O. 2.22, 5.1, P. 3.111; τέχνη θεσπεσία τις καὶ ὑ. Pl. Euthd. 289e; ὑ. καὶ χαύνη ἐλπίς Id. 341e; ὑψηλὰ κομπεῖν talk high and boastfully, S. Aj. 1230.

2. of persons, opp. δυσδαίμων, E. Hel. 418; ἀφ’ ὑψηλῶν βραχὺν ᾤκισε Id. Heracl. 613 (lyr.); ἐπὶ τοῖς ἐμοῖς κακοῖς ὑ. εἶναι Id. Hipp. 730; ἐπὶ τούτοις ὑ. ἐξαρεῖν αὑτόν Pl. R. 494d, cf. And. 3.7, Aeschin. 2.174; [ δαίμονα] ὑ. αἴρειν E. Supp. 555; τὸ νέον ἅπαν ὑ. καὶ θρασύ Metrod. Fr. 57; αὑτὸν παρέχειν -ότερον λημμάτων Luc. Nigr. 25; ὑ. τῷ ἤθει Plu. Dio 4.
3. upraised, i.e. mighty, ἐν βραχίονι -λῷ LXX Exodus 6:1, al.
4. of poets, sublime, Longin. 40.2; τὰ -ότερα the loftier, sublimer thoughts or language, Id. 43.3; ὑ. λέξις, λόγος, D.H. Lys. 13, Plu. Per. 5. Adv. -λῶς Gal. 10.12.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑψηλός, ὑψηλή, ὑψηλόν (ὕψι on high, ὕψος) (from Homer down), high; lofty;

a. properly, of place: ὄρος, Matthew 4:8; Matthew 17:1; Mark 9:2; Luke 4:5 R G L brackets; Revelation 21:10; τεῖχος, Revelation 21:12; neuter τά ὑψηλά (the heights of heaven; the Sept. for מָרום, Psalm 92:4 (); Psalm 112:5 (); Isaiah 33:5; Isaiah 57:15), heaven (A. V. on high; cf. Buttmann, § 124, 8 d.), Hebrews 1:3; exalted on high: ὑψηλότερος τῶν οὐρανῶν (made higher than the heavens), of Christ raised to the right hand of God, Hebrews 7:26 (cf. Ephesians 4:10); μετά βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ, with a high (uplifted) arm, i. e. with signal power, Acts 13:17 (the Sept. often ἐν βραχίονι ὑψηλῷ for נְטוּיָה בִּזְרועַ, as in Exodus 6:6; Deuteronomy 5:15).
b. metaphorically, eminent, exulted: in influence and honor, Luke 16:15; ὑψηλά φρονεῖν, to set the mind on, to seek, high things (as honors and riches), to be aspiring, Romans 12:16; also Romans 11:20 L marginal reading T Tr WH; 1 Timothy 6:17 T WH marginal reading; (Lucian, Icaromen. 11, Hermot. 5).

Question 403

ὕψιστος, -η, -ον

Answer 403

highest, most exalted; (as a title of God) the Most High
Definition:
highest, loftiest, most elevated;, τὰ ὕψιστα, from the Hebrew, the highest heaven, Mt. 21:9; Mk. 11:10; met. ὁ ὕψιστος, the Most High, Mk. 5:7

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὕψιστος, η, ον,

Sup. without any Posit. in use: (ὕψι, ὑψοῦ): —

highest, loftiest, of places, A. Pr. 720, A.R. 2.1026, etc.; ἐν τοῖς ὑ., i. e. in heaven above, Matthew 21:9, Luke 2:14.

2. of Zeus, highest, Pi. N. 1.60, 11.2, A. Eu. 28; Ζηνὸς ὕψιστον σέβας S. Ph. 1289: one of the gates of Thebes was called Ὕψισται from his temple there, Paus. 9.8.5:

of Jahweh. ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὕ. LXX Genesis 14:18, cf. ep Deuteronomy 32:8, OGI 96.7 (Egypt, ii B. C.), SIG 1181 (Rhenea, ii B. C.), etc.

3. of things, στέφανος, κέρδος, Pi. P. 1.100, I. 1.51; κακῶν ὕψιστα A. Pers. 331, 807; ὕ. ἐν βροτοῖς φόβος Id. Supp. 479.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὕψιστος, ὑψιστη, ὕψιστον (superlative; from ὕψι on high), in Greek writings mostly poetic, highest, most high;

a. of place: neuter τά ὑψιστα (the Sept. for מְרומִים), the highest regions, i. e. heaven (see ὑψηλός, a.), Matthew 21:9; Mark 11:10; Luke 2:14; Luke 19:38, (Job 16:19; Isaiah 57:15).
b. of rank: of God, ὁ Θεός ὁ ὕψιστος, the most high God, Mark 5:7; Luke 8:28; Acts 16:17; Hebrews 7:1; (Genesis 14:18; Philo de leg. ad Gaium § 23); and simply ὁ ὕψιστος, the Most High, Acts 7:48; mid without the article (cf. Buttmann, § 124, 8 b. note; (WH. Introductory § 416)), Luke 1:32, 35, 76; Luke 6:35, and very often in Sir.; (Hebrew אֶלְיון, עֶלְיון אֵל, עֶלְיון אֱלֹהִים, עֶליון יְהוָה; Ζεύς ὕψιστος, Pindar Nem. 1, 90; 11, 2; Aeschylus Eum. 28).

Question 404

ὕψος, ους, τό

Answer 404

height, high position, heaven

height, Eph. 3:18; Rev. 21:16; met. exaltation, dignity, eminence, Jas. 1:9; from the Hebrew, the height of heaven, Lk. 1:78; 24:49; Eph. 4:8*

height, ὕψος κρεῖσσον ἐκπηδήματος A. Ag. 1376; εἰς ὕ. αἴρειν τινά E. Ph. 404; κυπαρίττων ὕψη καὶ κάλλη Pl. Lg. 625c; ὕ. ἔχειν, λαμβάνειν, rise some height, Th. 1.91, 4.13, cf. 2.75; ἀφ’ ὕψους [με] δισκοβόλησε Epigr.Gr. 336 (Alexandria Troas): pl., Pl. Ti. 44d: abs. ὕψος, in height, opp. μῆκος, εὖρος, πλάτος, Hdt. 1.50, 178, IG 12.372.24, 22.1666 A 79, PMich.Zen. 38.12, al. (iii B. C.); so ἐς ὕψος Hdt. 2.13, 155.

II metaph., summit, crown, ὕ. ἀμαθίας Pl. 351d; σεμνότητος Arist. Mu. 398a12.

2. sublimity, grandeur, τῶν λόγων Metrod. Herc. 831.8, cf. Longin. 1.1, al.: pl., Id. 3.4, 7.4.

υψει ύψει ὕψει ύψεσι υψέων ύψη υψος ύψος ὕψος υψους ύψους ὕψους hypsei hýpsei hypsos hýpsos hypsous hýpsous upsei upsos upsous

Question 405

ἐπιφάνεια, ας, ἡ

Answer 405

an appearance or manifestation, especially of a deity

appearing, appearance; usually referring to the return of Christ, cf. the English word epiphany
Definition:
appearance, manifestation, 1 Tim. 6:14; 2 Tim. 1:10; glorious display, 2 Thess. 2:8; 2 Tim. 4:1, 8; Tit. 2:13*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐπιφάν-εια [ᾰ], ἡ,

I

1. appearance, coming into light or view, τῆς ἡμέρας day-break, dawn, Plb. 3.94.3; in war, sudden appearance of an enemy, Aen.Tact. 31.8, Plb. 1.54.2, Ascl. Tact. 12.10(pl.), Onos. 22.3 (pl.).
2. esp. of deities appearing to a worshipper, manifestation, D.H. 2.68, Plu. Them. 30; advent, D.S. 2.47; τὰς ὑπ’ αὐτῆς (sc. Ἀρτέμιδος) γενομένας ἐναργεῖς ἐ. SIG 867.35 (Ephesus, ii A.D.); a manifestation of divine power, τὰς ἐ. τᾶς Παρθένου Klio 16.204 (Chersonesus, iii B.C.), cf. LXX 2 Maccabees 15:27, D.S. 1.25.
3. the first coming of Christ, 2 Timothy 1:10; the second, 1 Timothy 6:14,al.
4. of the accession of Caligula, Inscr.Cos 391.
5. appearance, aspect, οἰκετικὴ ἐ. Myro 2 J.; κατὰ τὴν ἐ., distd.fr. κατὰ τὴν ἐπίφασιν, Plb. 25.3.6.

II

1. visible surface of a body, superficies, Democr. 155 (pl.), Arist. Cat. 5a2, Metaph. 1002a4, Ph. 209a8, Sens. 439a31, Euc. 1 Deff., Ph. Bel. 70.27, Damian. Opt. 11; ἡ κατὰ πρόσωπον ἐ. the front, Plb. 1.22.10; κατὰ τὰς ἐ. μάχεσθαι to fight in front, Id. 3.116.10; ἐ. ἡ ἐκ δεξιῶν Arr. Tact. 21.3; αἱ τρεῖς ἐ. τῆς πόλεως its three visible sides, Plb. 4.70.9; the surface or skin of the body, D.S. 3.29, Pap. in AJP 24.327, Gal. 16.530, etc.; μυδῶντα τὴν ἐ. Luc. Philops. 11; τῆς ἔνδον ἐ. τῶν ἐντέρων Gal. 18(1).2.
2. outward show, fame, distinction, esp. arising from something unexpected, Pl. Alc. 1.124c; ἐ.ποιεῖν to create a sensation, Isaiah 7:13 : in pl., Isoc. 6.104, D.S. 19.1; τὰ πρὸς ἐπιφάνειαν καὶ δόξαν ἀνήκοντα OGI 763.19 (Milet., ii B.C.), cf. Arr. Epict. 3.22.29.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐπιφάνεια, ἐπιφανείας, ἡ (ἐπιφανής), an appearing, appearance (Tertullian apparentia); often used by the Greeks of a glorious manifestation of the gods, and especially of their advent to help; in 2 Macc. of signal deeds and events betokening the presence and power of God as helper; cf. Grimm on Maccabees, p. 60f, 75 (but especially the thorough exposition by Prof. Abbot (on Titus 2:13 Note B) in the Journal of the Society for Biblical Literature and Exegesis, i., p. 16f (1882)). In the N. T. the ‘advent’ of Christ — not only that which has already taken place and by which his presence and power appear in the saving light he has shed upon mankind, 2 Timothy 1:10 (note the word φωτίσαντος in this passage); but also that illustrious return from heaven to earth hereafter to occur: 1 Timothy 6:14; 2 Timothy 4:1, 8; Titus 2:13 (on which see especially Prof. Abbot as above); ἡ ἐπιφάνεια (i. e. the breaking forth) τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ, 2 Thessalonians 2:8. (Cf. Trench, § xciv.)

Question 406

ἀφανίζω

Answer 406

-, -, -, -, ἠφανίσθην

to destroy, disfigure; to perish, vanish, disappear
Definition:
to remove out of sight, cause to disappear;, pass. to disappear, vanish, Jas. 4:14; by impl. to destroy, consume, so that nothing shall be left visible, Mt. 6:19, 20; met. to spoil, deform, disfigure, Mt. 6:16; to perish, Acts 13:41*

Thayer’s Definition
to snatch out of sight, to put out of view, to make unseen
to cause to vanish away, to destroy, consume
to deprive of lustre, render unsightly
to disfigure

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀφᾰν-ίζω,

Att. fut. -ῐῶ X. An. 3.2.11, Pl. Tht. 184a: pf. ἠφάνικα D. 36.18: —

I

1. make unseen, hide, νεφέλη.. ἠφάνισεν ἥλιον X. An. 3.4.8; hush up, ἔργον Pl. Smp. 217e: hence, lose sight of, Eub. 107.18; ἀ. τὸ συμφορώτατον do away with, reject, Hp. VM 21 (v.l. for ἀφαιρέοντας); make away with a person, Hdt. 3.126, X. Mem. 1.2.53, Th. 4.80; μή μ’ ἀφανίσῃ λαβών Men. Epit. 210: — Pass., τὴν γνώμην μηδὲν.. ἀφανισθεῖσαν in no part concealed or suppressed, Th. 7.8.
2. do away with, remove, ἄχος S. OC 1712 (lyr.); τινὰ πόλεος carry one off from the city, E. Ph. 1041 (lyr.); Μούσας ἀ. Ar. Nu. 972; ἀ. αὑτὸν εἰς τὸν νεών disappear into the temple, Id. Pl. 741.
3. destroy, Ἀθήνας X. An. 3.2.11, cf. Plb. 1.81.6, LXX De. 7.2; ὅλως ἀ. ἱερά D. 21.147, cf. Epigr.Gr. 376.8 (Aezani).
4. obliterate writing, Th. 6.54; footsteps, X. Cyn. 5.3, etc.; traces of bloodshed, Antipho 5.45; spirit away a witness, ib.52; get rid of, δίκην Ar. Nu. 760.
5. secrete, steal, X. Oec. 14.2.
6. obscure, mar one’s good name, etc., πατρικὰς ἀρετάς, ἀξίωσιν, δόξαν, Th. 7.69, 2.61: in good sense, ἀ. ἀγαθῷ κακόν wipe out ill deeds by good, ib. 42; δύσκλειαν Id. 3.58; τὰ χρώματα ἀ. ἐκ τοῦ σώματος, of the wasting effect of grief, Antiph. 98; τρίχα βαφῇ ἀ. disguise it by dyeing, Ael. VH 7.20; ἀ. τὰ πρόσωπα (cf. ἀπρόσωπος), of artificial disfigurement, Matthew 6:16, cf. LXX Joel 2:20, Zechariah 7:14. spoil, οἶνον, ὕδωρ, Sor. 1.90, Gal. 9.645.
7. make away with property, etc., ἀργύριον, ναυτικόν, ἀνθρώπους, Aeschin. 1.101, 3.222, D. 28.12; ἀ. τὴν οὐσίαν Aeschin. 1.103; but, conceal the existence of, ἐργαστήριον, οὐσίαν, D. 27.26,44.
8. drain a cup of wine, Eub. 82.
9. ἀφανίσαι· σκεπάσαι, προνομεῦσαι, Hsch.

II Pass.,

1. disappear, be missing, Hdt. 4.8, 124, S. Ant. 255; of persons buried by a sand-storm, Hdt. 3.26; or lost at sea, Th. 8.38, X. HG 1.6.33; ἀ. κατὰ τῆς θαλάσσης, of islands, Hdt. 7.6; ὑποβρύχιος ἠφ. Plu. Crass. 19; ἀ. ἐκ τῶν Θρηίκων Hdt. 4.95; ἐξ ἀνθρώπων Lys. 2.11; ἀ. εἰς ὕλην disappear into it, X. Cyn. 10.23; καταγελασθὲν ἠφανίσθη was laughed down and disappeared, Th. 3.83.
2. live retired, X. Ages. 9.1.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀφανίζω; (passive, present ἀφανίζομαι); 1 aorist ἠφανίσθην; (ἀφανής);

a. to snatch out of sight, to put out of view, to make unseen (Xenophon, an. 3, 4, 8 ἥλιον νεφέλη παρακαλύψασα ἠφανισε namely, τήν πόλιν, Plato, Phil. 66 a. ἀφανιζοντες κρύπτομεν).
b. to cause to vanish away, to destroy, consume: Matthew 6:19f (often so in Greek writings and the Sept. (cf. Buttmann, § 130, 5)); passive to perish: Acts 13:41 (Luth.vor Schrecken vergehen); to vanish away, James 4:14 (Herodotus 7, 6; 167; Plato and following).
c. to deprive of lustre, render unsightly; to disfigure: τό πρόσωπον, Matthew 6:16.

Question 407

ἐμφανίζω

Answer 407

ἐμφανίσω, ἐνεφάνισα, -, -, ἐνεφανίσθην

Definition:
to cause to appear clearly; to communicate, report, Acts 23:15, 22; to bring charges against, Acts 24:1; 25:2, 15, to manifest, intimate plainly, Heb. 11:14; to reveal, make known, Jn. 14:21, 22; pass. to appear, be visible, Mt. 27:53; to present one’s self, Heb. 9:24*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἐμφαν-ίζω,

Att. fut. -ιῶ E. Fr. 797: pf. ἐμπεφάνικα PSI 4.400.2 (iii B. C.): —

1. show forth, manifest, exhibit, αὐτὸς αὑτόν E.l.c., cf. Philoch. 20, Plb. 30.17.2, etc.; ἐ. τινὰ ἐπίορκον, ἐχθρόν, exhibit or represent him as.., X. Ages. 1.12, D. 14.36; ἐ. οὐκ οὖσαν ἀγαθὸν τὴν ἡδονήν Arist. EN 1173b31; πᾶν σύμπτωμα Metrod. 10: — Med., exhibit in court, PMasp. 32.33 (vi A.D.): — Pass., to become visible, be manifested, τινί LXX Wi. 1.2, Matthew 27:53, Ph. 1.107, J. AJ 1.13.1, D.L. 1.7.
2. make clear or plain, Pl. Sph. 244a, Men. Sam. 140, etc.; ἄστρα ἡμῖν τῆς νυκτὸς τὰς ὥρας ἐ. X. Mem. 4.3.4: with a relat., τὰ παθήματα δι’ ἃς αἰτίας γέγονε ἐ. Pl. Ti. 61c; ἐ. τοῦτο ὅτι.. X. Cyr. 8.1.26.
3. declare, explain, Arist. APr. 46a24; give orders, τινὶ ποιεῖν τι Plb. 6.35.8; report, περί τινος SIG 412.4 (Delph., iii B.C.), cf. UPZ 42.18 (ii B. C.), IG 9(2).517.5 (Larissa), Michel 431.6 (Iasus), etc.: — Pass., GDI 2502 B 41 (Delph., iv B. C.).
4. lay an information against, τινά Arg. Ar. Lys.: — Pass., ὁ -ισθείς Charond. ap. Stob. 4.2.24.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἐμφανίζω (see ἐν, III. 3); future ἐμφανίσω (Buttmann, 37 (32)); 1 aorist ἐνεφανισα; 1 aorist passive ἐνεφανίσθην; from Xenophon, and Plato down; (ἐμφανής);

1. to manifest, exhibit to view: ἑαυτόν τίνι, properly, to present oneself to the sight of another, manifest oneself to (Exodus 33:13), John 14:22; metaphorically of Christ giving evidence by the action of the Holy Spirit on the souls of the disciples that he is alive in heaven, John 14:21. Passive to Show oneself, come to view, appear, be manifest: τίνι (of spectres, Wis. 17:4; αὐτοῖς Θεούς ἐμφανίζεσθαι λέγοντες, Diag. Laërtius prooem. 7; so of God, Josephus, Antiquities 1, 13, 1), Matthew 27:53; τῷ προσώπῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ, of Christ appearing before God in heaven, Hebrews 9:24; (of God imparting to souls the knowledge of himself, Wis. 1:2; Theophilus of Antioch ad Autol. 1, 2, 4).
2. to indicate, disclose, declare, make known: followed by ὅτι, Hebrews 11:14; with the dative of person Acts 23:15; τί πρός τινα, Acts 23:22; τί κατά τίνος, to report or declare a thing against a person, to inform against one, Acts 24:1; Acts 25:2; περί τίνος, about one, Acts 25:15. (Synonym: see δηλόω.)

Question 408

ὑπερήφανος, ον

Answer 408

haughty, disdainful
proud, arrogant
Definition:
assuming, haughty, arrogant, Lk. 1:51; Rom. 1:30; 2 Tim. 3:2; Jas. 4:6; 1 Pet. 5:5*

Thayer’s Definition
showing one’s self above others, overtopping, conspicuous above others, pre-eminent
with an overweening estimate of one’s means or merits, despising others or even treating them with contempt, haughty

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὑπερήφᾰν-ος, ον,

Dor. ὑπερά- Pi. P. 2.28, B. 16.49: —

mostly in bad sense, overweening, arrogant, Hes. Th. 149, Pi., B. ll. cc., A. Pr. 405 (lyr.), Isoc. 12.196, D. 4.9, Phld. Vit. p.10 J., etc.; Κύριος ὑπερηφάνοις ἀντιτάσσεται LXX Proverbs 3:34; ὑβρισταὶ καὶ ὑ. Arist. Rh. 1390b33; -ώτεροι.. καὶ ἀλογιστότεροι ib. 1391a33; οἰκίαι -ώτεραι D. 13.30. Adv., -νως ἔχειν bear oneself proudly, Pl. R. 399b, Tht. 175b; ὑ. ζῶντες living sumptuously, prodigally, Isoc. 4.152, Pl. Lg. 691a; ὀψωνεῖν.. οὐχὶ μετρίως.., ἀλλ’ ὑ. Diph. 32.20; of a dish, ὑ. ὄζειν Alex. 261.6 (but also, insolently, brutally, μαστιγοῦν τινα prob. in PCair.Zen. 80.4 (iii B. C.)). — This sense appears in Hom. in the part. ὑπερηφανέων (q. v.).

2. rarely in good sense, magnificent, splendid, σοφία, ἔργον, Pl. Phd. 96a, Smp. 217e; ὑ. τι διαπραττομένη Id. Grg. 511d; ποτήρια χρυσᾶ.., ὑπερήφανα Philippid. 27; πράξεις ὑ. τὸ μέγεθος Plu. Fab. 26; sublime, Dam. Proverbs 3:1-35. Adv. -νως, ἀγωνιζόμενος Plu. Ages. 34.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὑπερήφανος, ὑπερηφάνου (from ὑπέρ and φαίνομαι, with the connective (or the epic extension (cf. Curtius, § 392)), ἡ; cf. ὑπερηφερης, δυσηλεγής, τανηλεγης εὐηγενής), from Hesiod down;

1. showing oneself above others, overtopping, conspicuous above others, pre-eminent (Plato, Plutarch, others).
2. especially in a bad sense, “with an overweening estimate of one’s means or merits, despising others or even treating them with contempt, haughty” (cf. Westcott, Epistles of St. John, p. 64{b}): Romans 1:30; 2 Timothy 3:2; opposed to ταπεινοί, James 4:6; 1 Peter 5:5 (in these two passages after Proverbs 3:34); with διάνοια καρδίας added, Luke 1:51. (The Sept. for זֵד, רָם, גֵּאֶה, etc.; often in the O. T. Apocrypha.) (See Trench, Synonyms, § xxix.; Schmidt, chapter 176, 8.)
   STRONGS NT 5244a: ὑπερλίαν ὑπερλίαν (formed like ὑπεράγαν, ὑπέρευ), and written separately ὑπέρ λίαν (so R Tr (cf. Winers Grammar, § 50, 7 Note; Buttmann, § 146, 4)), over much; pre-eminently: οἱ ὑπερλίαν ἀπόστολοι, the most eminent apostles, 2 Corinthians 11:5; 2 Corinthians 12:11.

Question 409

συμφωνέω

Answer 409

συμφωνήσω, συνεφώνησα, -, -, συνεφωνήθην

to agree with; to match, fit in with
Definition:
to sound together, to be in unison, be in accord;, trop. to agree with, accord with in purport, Acts 15:15; to harmonize with, suit with, Lk. 5:36; to agree with, make an agreement, Mt. 18:19; 20:2, 13; Acts 5:9*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
συμφων-έω, sound together, be in harmony or unison (cf. συμφωνία), ἐκ πασῶν μία ἁρμονία συμφωνεῖ Pl. R. 617b, cf. Thphr. Sens. 85, Arist. Pr. 919b2, Ion Eleg. 3; of reed-tongues, to be of the same quality, Thphr. HP 4.11.7; κιθαρισταὶ ς. Callix. 2; cf. συμφωνία 111: — Pass., τὰ συμφωνούμενα consonants (lit. things which are sounded with vowels), D.H. Dem. 43.

II metaph., harmonize with, ποῖα ποίοις ς. τῶν γενῶν Pl. Sph. 253b, cf. Phd. 101d, Arist. EN 1107a32; ς. τοῖς εἰρημένοις Pl. R. 398c; τὰ ἔργα οὐ ς. τοῖς λόγοις Id. La. 193e; συμφωνοῦντα τοῖς ἔργοις in harmony with practical experience, Gal. 19.217; ἐπιθυμίαι οὐ ς. ἀλλήλαις Isoc. 5.87; οὐ συμφωνοῦσι.. φροντίδες μακαριότητι Epicur. Ephesians 1 p.28U.; also ταῦτα πρὸς ἄλληλα ς. συμφωνίαν τὴν ἀρίστην Arist. Pol. 1334b10; hold or express the same opinions, ταῦτα συμφωνοῦσι πάντες Thphr. CP 6.9.2; ἔντισι Pl. Phdr. 263b; περί τινος or τινων, Democr. 107, D.H. 2.47: — Med., Thphr. CP 1.1.1: — Pass., to be agreed to, παρὰ πᾶσι D.S. 1.20; εἰ συνεφωνεῖτο πάντα τοῖς γράψασι περὶ τροφῆς Gal. 6.454, cf. 15.107: c. inf., ἡ ἔφοδος ς. γενέσθαι D.H. 1.74: impers., τὴν ἁρπαγὴν γεγονέναι συμπεφώνηται D.S. 5.69, cf. Gal. 6.391; ς. ὅτι.. D.S. 1.26.

2. make an agreement or bargain with any one, ἰδίᾳ ς. πρὸς αὐτούς PCair.Zen. 302.13 (iii B.C.); συμφωνήσας Ἡρακλείδης μετὰ Θοτέως ib. 330.2 (iii B.C.); περί τινος Plb. 2.15.5; ς. τινὶ δηναρίου for a denarius, Matthew 20:13 : — Pass., συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι Acts 5:9; ὥστε.. D.S. 14.26; τὸ συμφωνηθέν the agreement, Id. 30.19; τὰ συμφωνηθέντα IG 42(1).77.20 (Epid., ii B.C.); τὰ εἴκοσι τάλαντα τὰ συμφωνηθέντα ib.22.844.9 (iii B.C.); ἀπέχω τὴν συμπεφωνημένην αὐτοῦ τιμήν BGU 1643.20 (ii A.D.).
3. unite for a bad purpose, conspire, τοῖς πένησι ἐπὶ τοὺς μέσους Arist. Pol. 1297a1.

III agree in saying, ὡς πάντα καλῶς κεῖται Pl. Lg. 634e; ὅτι οὐκ ἀσφαλές ἐστι Arist. Mir. 838b34. to be satisfactory, συμφωνεῖ μοι πάντα, ὡς πρόκειται PAmh. 2.149.22 (vi A.D.), cf. PLips. 26.13 (iv A.D.), etc.

2. of remedies, to be suitable, Archig. ap. Aët. 9.35, Gal. 11.806.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
συμφωνέω, συμφώνω; future συμφωνήσω ((Matthew 18:19 T Tr; Luke 5:36 L T Tr text WH)); 1 aorist συνεφώνησα; 1 aorist passive, συνεφωνήθην; from Plato and Aristotle down; properly, to sound together, be in accord; of sounds and of musical instruments. In the N. T. tropically, to be in accord, to harmonize, i. e., a. to agree together: περί (as respects) τίνος, Matthew 18:19 (Dionysius Halicarnassus 2, 47); τίνι, with a thing, Acts 15:15 (often in Greek authors); to agree i. e. correspond, of things congruous in nature, Luke 5:36; passive, συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν, followed by an infinitive, it was agreed between you to etc. Acts 5:9.

b. to agree with one in making a bargain, to make an agreement, to bargain, (Polybius, Diodorus): μετά τίνος ἐκ δηναρίου (see ἐκ, II. 4), Matthew 20:2; with a dative of the person and genitive of the price, ibid. 13, (συνεφώνησεν μετ’ αὐτοῦ τριῶν λιτρων ἀσήμου ἀργυρίου, Act. Thom. § 2).

Question 410

πρόφασις, εως, ἡ

Answer 410

excuse; pretense, show, cover; motive, reason, or cause
Definition:
pr. that which appears in front, that which is put forward to hide the true state of things; a fair show or pretext, Acts 27:30; a specious cloak, Mt. 23:13; 1 Thess. 2:5; an excuse, Jn. 15:22

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πρόφᾰσ-ις, εως, ἡ,

( προφαίνω )

motive or cause alleged, whether truly or falsely: then, actual motive or cause, whether alleged or not: I alleged motive, plea, without implication of truth or falsity, ἐπὶ σμικρῇ π . Thgn. 323; νόστου π. γλυκεροῦ κώλυεν μεῖναι Pi. P. 4.32; κατὰ θεωρίης πρόφασιν ἐκπλώσας Hdt. 1.29; π. ἔχων, ὡς . . Id. 6.133; καὶ ἐπὶ μεγάλῃ καὶ ἐπὶ βραχείᾳ π . whether the plea put forward be a trifle or a weighty matter, Th. 1.141; τῆς αἰτίας τὴν π . the plea in the case, the basis of the charge, Lys. 9.7; τοιαύτας ἔχοντες π. καὶ αἰτίας pleas and motives, Th. 3.13; π. ἐπιεικής ib. 9; ἀναγκαῖαι Is. 4.20, D. 54.17; προφάσεις ἀληθεῖς λέγοντος pleading what was in fact true, And. 4.17 .

2. falsely alleged motive (or cause), pretext, pretence, excuse, π. ἰδίης ἀβουλίης an excuse for . ., Democr. 119; οὔτε τιν’ ἔχων π. οὔτε λόγον εὐτράπελον Ar. V. 468 (lyr.); καλλίστην εἶναι π., τιμωρεῖσθαι μὲν δοκεῖν, ἔργῳ δὲ χρηματίζεσθαι Lys. 12.6: abs. in acc., πρόφασιν in pretence, ostensibly, στενάχοντο γυναῖκες Πάτροκλον π., σφῶν δ’ αὐτῶν κήδε’ ἑκάστη Il. 19.302, cf. Hdt. 5.33, E. IA 362 (troch.), Ar. Eq. 466, etc.; opp. τὸ ἀληθές, Th. 6.33: in dat., προφάσει Id. 3.86; προφάσει τῶν δημοσίων on the pretence that public debts are owing, OGI 669.15 (Egypt, i A.D. ); προφάσιος [εἵνεκεν], προφάσεως ἕνεκα, Hdt. 4.135, Antipho 6.14; προφάσεως χάριν Arist. Pol. 1297a14; ἐκ μικρᾶς π . Plb. 2.17.3; ἐπὶ προφάσιος Hdt. 7.150: folld. by an inf., αὕτη γὰρ ἦν σοι π. ἐκβαλεῖν ἐμέ for casting me out, S. Ph. 1034; οὔτε . . ἔστιν οὐδεμία π. τοῦ μὴ δρᾶν Pl. Ti. 20c; π. τοῖς δειλοῖς ἔχει μὴ ἰέναι gives them an excuse or plea for not going, Id. R. 469c; οὐδεμία σοι π. ἐστιν ὡς . . X. Cyr. 2.2.15; εὑρὼν π . BGU 1024 vi 21 (iv A.D.) .

phrases, πρόφασιν διδόναι, ἐνδοῦναι, allow, afford an excuse, D. 43.53, 18.158; οὐκ ἐνδώσομεν π. οὐδενὶ κακῷ γενέσθαι Th. 2.87; π. μηδεμίαν θέμενος making no excuse, Thgn. 364; π. προτεῖναι put forward a pretext, Hdt. 1.156; π. τὴν Παυσανίεω ὕβριν προϊσχόμενοι Id. 8.3; προφάσεις παρέχειν Ar. Av. 581, cf. D. 10.35, 18.156; προφάσιας εἷλκον kept making pretences, Hdt. 6.86; πάσας π. ἕλκουσιν Ar. Lys. 726; π. δέχεσθαι Pl. Cra. 421d (cf. ἀγών 111.5 ); π. εὑρίσκειν τοῦ ἀδικήματος Antipho 5.65; π. καλῶς εὑρημένη Archipp. 36; ἔχθρας π. ζητήσουσιν Pl. Phdr. 234a, cf. PCair.Zen. 270.9 (iii B.C.); π. τινὰ πρεσβείας πορισάμενοι Pl. Ep. 350a; π. κατασκευάσαι X. Cyr. 2.4.17; ἔχει προφάσεις it is excusable, ib. 3.1.27; πρόφασιν ταύτην τῆς διαφορᾶς ποιούμενος Pl. Ep. 349d; προφάσεις εὐλόγους εἰλήφεσαν D. 18.152; ἐχόμενος προφάσιος Hdt. 6.94; ἐπιλαβέσθαι Id. 3.36, 6.49; τὰς π. ἀφελεῖν D. 2.27; προφάσεως δεῖσθαι Arist. Rh. 1373a3: personified, τὰν Ἐπιμαθέος ὀψινόου θυγατέρα Π . Pi. P. 5.28 . elliptically, μή μοι πρόφασιν no excuse, no shuffling, Ar. Ach. 345; μὴ προφάσεις ἐνταῦθά μοι Alex. 127.1 .

II the actual motive, purpose, or cause, whether alleged or not, οὔτ’ εὐνῆς πρόφασιν κεχρημένος οὔτε τευ ἄλλου Il. 19.262; ἐπ’ αὐτομολίας προφάσει ἀπέρχονται Th. 7.13; τὸ ἐκ προφάσεως τῶν . . στρατιωτῶν δηληγατευθὲν μέτρον ἐλαίου for the purpose of . ., PLips. 64.2, cf. 8 (iv A.D.); τὴν ἀληθεστάτην π., ἀφανεστάτην δὲ λόγῳ Th. 1.23, cf. 6.6, D. 18.156, SIG 888.138 (Scaptopara, iii A.D., pl.):

esp. as a medical t.t., external exciting cause, ἐκ πάσης π. ἐκτιτ ρώσκουσι they miscarry on any provocation, Hp. Aph. 3.12, cf. Epid. 3.3, 3.17 . ιά, Acut.(Sp. ) 6; τοὺς δ’ ἄλλους ἀπ’ οὐδεμιᾶς π . . . τῆς κεφαλῆς θέρμαι . . ἐλάμβανε Th. 2.49: pl., Hp. Aër. 16, Fract. 15, al.: generally, cause, σμικρὰ π. ἔξωθεν Pl. R. 556e; βραχεῖα π . Hp. Coac. 477; ἀπὸ μηδεμιᾶς π. ἔξωθεν ἀξιολόγου Diocl.Fr. 82; φανερὴ π . Hp. Aph. 2.41, cf. X. HG 6.4.33; ἐπεὶ δέ οἱ ἔδεε κακῶς γενέσθαι, ἐγένετο ἀπὸ προφάσιος τὴν ἐγὼ . . ἀπηγήσομαι Hdt. 2.161, cf. 4.145, 7.230; ἄνθρωπός εἰμι, τοῦτο δ’ αὐτὸ τῷ βίῳ π. μεγίστην εἰς τὸ λυπεῖσθαι φέρει Diph. 106, cf. Men. 230, 811, Philem. 194; βραχείας προφάσεως ἔδει μόνον ἐφ’ ᾗ . . δεξόμεθα . . it needed but a little to move us to . ., E. IA 1180 .
2. occasion, θοἰμάτιον δεικνὺς τοδὶ πρόφασιν ἔφασκον, ὦ γύναι, λίαν σπαθᾷς I said à propos, . . I took occasion to say . ., Ar. Nu. 55; ἐπὶ τῇ ἐμῇ π . à propos of me, Lys. 6.19; ἐπὶ τῇ π. τῆς ἐμαυτοῦ ἀρχῆς on the occasion of my accession, PFay. 20.11 (iii/iv A.D.) .

III persuasion, suggestion, dub.l.in S. Tr. 662 (lyr.). preface, τὰς σημειώσεις ὑπὸ μίαν ἐκθησόμεθα π . Dsc. Ther. 3.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πρόφασις, προφασεως, ἡ (προφαίνω, i. e. properly, ‘to cause to shine before’ (or ‘forth’; but many derive πρόφασις directly from προφημι)), from Homer down;

a. a pretext (alleged reason, pretended cause): τῆς πλεονεξίας, such as covetousness is accustomed to use, 1 Thessalonians 2:5 ((A. V. cloak of covetousness) the meaning being, that he had never misused his apostolic office in order to disguise or to hide avaricious designs); πρόφασιν ἔχειν (a phrase frequent in Greek authors, cf. Passow, under the word πρόφασις 1 b. vol. ii., p. 1251b; (Liddell and Scott, under the word, I. 3 e.)) περί τῆς ἁμαρτίας, John 15:22 (A. V. marginal reading R. V. excuse).
b. show: προφάσει ὡς κτλ. (A. V.) under color as though they would etc. Acts 27:30; προφάσει (A. V. for a pretence), in pretence, ostensibly: Matthew 23:14-13Rec.; Mark 12:40; Luke 20:47; Philippians 1:18.

Question 411

φωτεινός

Answer 411

shining, brilliant

Thayer's Definition
light
composed of light
of a bright character
full of light
well lit

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
φωτεινός, ή, όν,

(φῶς)

shining, bright, ἥλιος X. Mem. 4.3.4; σκοτεινὰ καὶ φ. [σώματα ] ib. 3.10.1, cf. LXX Si. 17.31 (Comp.), Plu. 2. 1110b, Hierocl. in CA 26p.478M.; ἀήρ Ath.Med. ap. Orib. 9.5.2; οἴκημα Sor. 2.10, al.

II metaph., clear, distinct, λόγος Plu. 2.9b (Comp., s.v.l.); also in moral sense, Hierocl. in CA 3p.424M.; ὅταν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου ἁπλοῦς ᾖ, καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου φ. ἐστιν Luc. 11.34, cf. 36.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
φωτεινός (WH φωτινος, see Iota), φωτεινή, φωτεινόν (φῶς), light, i. e. composed of light, of a bright character: νεφέλη, Matthew 17:5 (not Griesbach); οἱ ὀφθαλμοί κυρίου μυριοπλασίως ἡλίου φωτεινότεροι, Sir. 23:19. full of light, well lighted, opposed to σκοτεινός, Matthew 6:22; Luke 11:34, 36, (τά σκοτεινά καί τά φωτεινα σώματα, Xenophon, mem. 3, 10, 1).

Question 412

ἀποφέρω

Answer 412

I carry off, bear away

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀποφέρω,

Hom. only in fut. -οίσω (Dor. -οισῶ Ar. Ach. 779, Med. -οίσομαι Theoc. 1.3, Luc. Bis Acc. 33) and Ion. aor. ἀπένεικα: Att. aor. -ήνεγκα Th. 5.10: aor. 2 -ήνεγκον Ar. Ach. 582, etc.: pf. -ενήνοχα D. 27.20: —

I carry off or away, τεύχεα δέ σφ’ ἀπένεικαν Od. 16.360, etc.; of a wind, Il. 14.255, Hdt. 4.179: metaph., Plu. 2.374e; of a disease, Hdt. 3.66, 6.27; generally, ἀ. σῆμα S. Tr. 614; βρέφος ἐς ἄντρον E. Ion 16, cf. Mark 15:1, etc.: —

1. Pass., to be carried from one’s course, ὑπ’ ἀνέμων Hdt. 2.114, cf. 116; ἀπενεχθέντες ἐς Αιβύην Th. 7.50, cf. 6.104.
2. exhale, evaporate, Anon.Lond. 22.25: — Pass., to be wafted, Plu. 2.681a.

II carry or bring back, αὖτις ἀποίσετον ὠκέες ἵπποι Il. 5.257; ἂψ Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἀποίσειν 10.337; ἀ. οἴκαδις Ar. Ach. 779: — so in Pass., of oracles, ταῦτα ἀπενειχθέντα Hdt. 1.66, 158, 160: but in Pass.,

1. also of persons, return, Id. 4.164, Th., etc.; ἀπηνέχθη εἰς.. ἔτι ζῶν was carried home, of a sick man, X. HG 3.3.1; τεθνεὼς ἐκ δεσμωτηρίου ἀ. Lys. 12.18.
2. pay back, return, Hdt. 1.196, etc.: hence, pay what is due as tribute, etc., Id. 4.35, 5.84, Th. 5.31.
3. bring in, return, of slaves let out to labour for their master’s profit, v.l. Aeschin. 1.97, cf. Philostr. Her. 2.
4. generally, bring, hand over as required, τί τινι Hdt. 4.64; ὅπλα X. Cyr. 7.5.34; εἰς τὰ δημόσια ἀ. ἱερὰ τὰ ἴδια Pl. Lg. 910c.

III hand in an accusation, render accounts, returns, etc., ἀ. παρανόμων (sc. γραφήν) πρὸς τὸν ἄρχοντα Docum. ap. D. 18.54, cf. 52.30; ἀπήνεγκε παρανόμων (sc. γραφήν) Δημοσθένει Decr. ap. D. 18.105; λόγον.. ἀπενήνοχεν ἀναλωμάτων D. 27.20; λόγον πρὸς τοὺς λογιστάς, λόγον τῇ πόλει, Aeschin. 3.22; ἀ. τοὺς ἱππεύσαντας hand in a list of.., Lys. 16.6; ναύτας D. 50.6; ἀ. ἐν τῷ λόγῳ δεδωκώς having entered in the account, Id. 49.16: —

1. Pass., to be returned as so and so, ἀπηνέχθη ἀνώμοτος Id. 21.86; διαιτητὴς ἀπενηνεγμένος Id. 52.30.
2. deliver a letter, Id. 34.8.

I

1. bring home, receive as wages, Luc. Tim. 12 (which others refer to signf. 11.2). Med., take away with one, Hdt. 1.132, Isoc. 6.74, etc.; carry off a prize, μετὰ Πᾶνα τὸ δεύτερον ἆθλον ἀποισῇ Theoc.l.c.; κάλλευς πρῶτ’ ἀπενεγκαμέναν APl. 4.166 (Even.); ἀ. δόξαν Hdn. 1.5.7; carry home delicacies from a banquet, Luc. Symp. 38 (less freq. in Act., Id. Nigr. 25).
2. take for oneself, gain, obtain, λέχη ἀλλότρια E. El. 1089 codd.; receive to oneself, μόρον Id. Ph. 595.
3. obtain a decision, win a lawsuit, δίκην κενὴν θελόντων ἀ. Inscr.Prien. 111.150 (i B.C.).

II bring back for oneself, ὀπίσω Hdt. 7.152; ἀ. σημεῖα τοῦ θυμῷ μάχεσθαι X. Ages. 6.2; ἀ. βίον μητρί, i.e. return to her alive, E. Ph. 1161; νόστον Id. IA 298 (lyr.). Intr. in Act., be off, ἀπόφερ’ ἐς κόρακας Ar. Pax 1221.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀποφέρω: 1 aorist ἀπήνεγκα; 2 aorist infinitive ἀπενεγκεῖν; passive (present infinitive ἀποφέρεσθαι); 1 aorist infinitive ἀπενεχθῆναι; (from Homer down); to carry off, take away: τινα, with the idea of violence included, Mark 15:1; εἰς τόπον τινα, Revelation 17:3; Revelation 21:10; passive Luke 16:22. to carry or bring away (Latindefero): τί εἰς with an accusative of place, 1 Corinthians 16:3; τί ἀπό τίνος ἐπί τινα, with passive, Acts 19:12 (L T Tr WH for Rec. ἐπιφέρεσθαι).

Question 413

προσφορά

Answer 413

an offering, a sacrifice

Thayer’s Definition
the act of offering, a bringing to
that which is offered, a gift, a present. In the NT a sacrifice, whether bloody or not: offering for sin, expiatory offering

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
προσφορ-ά, ἡ,

(προσφέρω)

bringing to, applying, τῶν κλιμάκων Plb. 5.16.7; application, use, Pl. Lg. 638c .

2. presenting, offering, ib. 792a; οἱ ἄρτοι τῆς π . shew bread, LXX 3 Ki. 7.48 .

II (from Pass. ) that which is added, increase, τῶν ἡμαρτημένων ἄκη μέν ἐστι π. δ’ οὐκ ἔστ’ ἔτι S. OC 1270; bounty, benefit, ib. 581; wedding present, Thphr. Char. 30.19; offering, LXX Psalms 39:1-13(40).7, al., Acts 21:26 : pl., ib. 24.17, J. AJ 11.4.1, Stud.Pal. 1.7.27 (v A.D.), etc.; offerings for the dead, PMonac. 8.5, 23 (vi A.D.), PLond. 5.1708.62 (vi A.D.); deed of gift, esp. of donatio propter nuptias, Mitteis Chr. 288.8 (ii A.D.), PTeb. 351.1 (ii A.D.), PRyl. 155.20 (ii A.D.) .

2. income, revenue, Antipho Fr. 31, J. AJ 19.8.2 .

III (from Med. ) taking of food, Arist. Somn.Vig. 458a22, Metaph. 1000a14, Thphr. HP 7.9.4, 8.4.4, Od. 5; ἡ τοῦ ὑγροῦ π . Arist. PA 671a13; πόσεις καὶ -φοραί Plu. 2.129e .

2. food, victuals, Hp. Aph. 2.33 (pl.), Thphr. CP 4.9.6, Orph. Fr. 49.87 .
3. flavour, Thphr. HP 4.8.11, Ath. 1.33f; bouquet, Thphr. HP 9.19.1 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
προσφορά, προσφοράς, ἡ (προσφέρω), offering; i. e. 1. the act of offering, a bringing to (Plato, Aristotle, Polybius). 2. that which is offered, a gift, a present (Sophocles O. C. 1270; Theophrastus, char. 30 under the end). In the N. T. a sacrifice (A. V. offering), whether bloody or not: Acts 21:26; Acts 24:17; Ephesians 5:2; Hebrews 10:5, 8, 14,(Sir. 14:11 Sir. 31:21 (Sir. 34:19); Sir. 32:1, 6 (Sir. 35:8); once for מִנְחָה, Psalm 39:7 (); περί ἁμαρτίας, offering for sin, expiatory sacrifice, Hebrews 10:18; with the genitive of the object, τοῦ σώματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ Hebrews 10:10; τῶν ἐθνῶν, the sacrifice which I offer in turning the Gentiles to God, Romans 15:16.

Question 414

φορέω

Answer 414

I bear, carry, wear

Thayer’s Definition
to bear constantly, wear
of clothing, garments, armour

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
φορ-έω,

subj. 3 sg. φορέῃσι Od. 5.328, 9.10; inf. φορῆναι (as if from Φόρημι) Il. 2.107, 7.149, Od. 17.224; φορήμεναι Il. 15.310: impf. ἐφόρεο[]ν Od. 22.456, 3 sg. ἐφόρει Il. 4.137; Ion. φορέεσκον 2.770, 13.372: fut. φορήσω Scol. 9 (cf. Ar. Lys. 632), X. Vect. 4.32; later φορέσω LXX Proverbs 16:23 : aor. ἐφόρησα IG 42(1).121.95 (Epid., iv B. C.), Call. Dian. 213, φόρησα Il. 19.11, (δια-, ἐκ-) Isa 6.43, 42; later ἐφόρεσα LXX Si. 11.5, f.l. in Isa 4.7, Aristid. Or. 48(24).80, Sammelb. 7247.33 (iii/iv A. D.): — Med., fut. φορήσομαι Hsch.; in pass. sense, Plu. 2.398d: aor. ἐφορησάμην (ἐξ-) Isa 6.39: — Pass., Aeol. pres. φορήμεθα Alc. 18.4: aor. ἐφορήθην (ἐν-) Plu. 2.703b: pf. πεφόρημαι Pl. Ti. 52a; plpf. πεφόρητο Orph. A. 816: — Frequentat. of φέρω, implying repeated or habitual action, ἵπποι οἳ φορέεσκον ἀμύμονα Πηλεΐωνα Il. 2.770, cf. 10.323; τά τε νῆες φορέουσι Od. 2.390; of a slave, ὕδωρ ἐφόρει 10.358, cf. Il. 6.457; μέθυ οἰνοχόος φ. Od. 9.10; θαλλὸν ἐρίφοισι φ. 17.224; of the wind, bear to and fro, bear along, ἄνεμος ἄχνας φορέει Il. 5.499, cf. 21.337, Od. 5.328; σώματα.. κύμαθ’ ἁλὸς.. φορέουσι 12.68; τόφρα δέ μ’ αἰεὶ κῦμα φ. 6.171; so ἀγγελίας ἐφόρεε conveyed messages habitually, served as a messenger. Hdt. 3.34 (nisi leg. ἐσεφόρεε) ; φ. θρεπτήρια, of Oedipus carrying about food in a wallet, like a beggar, S. OC 1262; λόγχαν ἔτη ἐφόρησε ἓξ ἐν τᾷ γνάθῳ IG 42(1).121.95 (Epid.. iv B. C.): abs., ἐγ γαστρὶ ἐφόρει τρία ἔτη was pregnant, ib. 14: — Pass., v. infr.11.
2. most commonly of clothes, armour, and the like, bear constantly, wear, [ σκῆπτρον] ἐν παλάμῃς φ. δικασπόλοι Il. 1.238; μίτρης ἣν ἐφόρει 4.137; θώρηξ χάλκεος, ὃν φορέεσκε 13.372, cf. Od. 15.127, Hdt. 1.71, etc.; φ. ἐσθήματα S. El. 269; στολάς Id. OC 1357; ζεῦγος ἐμβάδων Ar. Eq. 872; ἱμάτιον Id. Pl. 991, Pl. Tht. 197b; δακτύλιον Ar. Pl. 883.
3. of features, qualities, etc., of mind or body, possess, hold, bear, ἀγλαΐας φ. to be pompous or splendid, Od. 17.245; φ. ὄνομα S. Fr. 658; ἦθος Id. Ant. 705; δόξαν Arch.Pap. 1.220 (ii B. C.); ἕνα γομφίον μόνον φ. Ar. Pl. 1059; γλῶτταν Pl.Com. 51; ἀπόνοιαν φορεῖς you are mad, PGrenf. 1.53.15 (iv A. D.); with gen. or adj. added, σκέλεα φ. γεράνου Hdt. 2.76; ἰσχυρὰς φ. τὰς κεφαλάς Id. 3.12, cf. 101; ποδώκη τὸν τρόπον φ. Trag.Adesp. 519; γένειον διηλιφὲς φ. S. Fr. 564; ὑπόπτερον δέμας φ. E. Hel. 619; λῆμα θούριον φ. Ar. Eq. 757; ῥύγχος φ. ὕειον Anaxil. 11; καλάμινα σκέλη φ. Pl. Com.184; ὥσπερ σέλινον οὖλα τὰ σκέλη φ. Com.Adesp. 208; τὸ στόμ’ ὡς κομψὸν φ. Alex. 98.21 (troch.).
4. bear, suffer, Phld. Lib. pp.59,62 O. (dub. l. in both), Plu. 2.692d, Opp. C. 1.298.
5. of Time, extend, last, ἃ φορεῖ ἐπὶ ἡμέρας δεκαπέντε dub. sens. in PFlor. 384.54 (v A. D.).

II Pass., to be borne along, ἐν ῥοθίοις A. Th. 362 (lyr.); φορούμενος πρὸς οὖδας S. El. 752; κόνις δ’ ἄνω φορεῖθ’ ib. 715; ἄνω τε καὶ κάτω φ. E. Supp. 689; πολλοῖς διαύλοις κυμάτων φ. Id. Hec. 29, cf. Plu. 2.398d; πεφορημένον ἀεί always in motion, Pl. Ti. 52a: hence, to be storm-tossed, νᾶϊ φορήμεθα σὺν μελαίνᾳ Alc. 18.4, cf. Ar. Pax 144; ποσσὶ φ. Theoc. 1.83, cf. Bion 1.23: metaph., δόξαις φορεῖται τοπαζόμενα Pl. Epin. 976a.

2. to be carried away, Th. 2.76; simply, to be shifted, Dam. Pr. 293.

III Med., fetch for oneself, fetch regularly, E. El. 309; λευκανίηνδε φορεύμενος putting food into one’s mouth, A.R. 2.192.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
φορέω, φορῶ; future φορέσω (1 Corinthians 15:49 R G WH marginal reading); 1 aorist ἐφορεσα (later forms for the earlier φορήσω and ἐφόρησα, cf. Alexander Buttmann (1873) Ausf. Spr. ii. 315; Kühner (and especially Veitch) under the word; Winers Grammar, § 13, 3{c}; (Buttmann, 37 (32))); (frequent. of φέρω, and differing from it by denoting not the simple and transient act of bearing, but a continuous or habitual bearing; cf. Lob. ad Phryn., p. 585f; Hermann on Sophocles Electr. 715; (Trench, § lviii.; Schmidt, chapter 105, 6); accordingly, ἀγγελιην φέρειν means ‘to carry a (single) message’, Herodotus 3, 53 and 122; ἀγγελιην φορηιν, ‘to serve as (fill the office of) a messenger’, Herodotus 3, 34; hence, we are said φόρειν those things which we carry about with us or wear, as e. g. our clothing); from Homer down; to bear constantly, wear: of clothing, garments, armor, etc., Matthew 11:8; John 19:5; Romans 13:4 (on this last passage, see μάχαιρα, 2); 1 Corinthians 15:49 (see above, and WH. Introductory § 404); James 2:3 (Sir. 11:5 Sir. 40:4).

Question 415

καρποφορέω

Answer 415

I bear fruit

Thayer’s Definition
to bear fruit
to bear, bring forth, deeds
to bear fruit of one’s self

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
καρποφορ-έω,

bear fruit, X. Vect. 1.3, Arist. GA 755b10, Ph. 1.602, al., Orph. Fr. 255: metaph., of virtue, Ph. 1.154; τῷ θεῷ Romans 7:4; also τῷ θανάτῳ ib. 5: — Med., Colossians 1:6, BMus.Inscr. 918 (Halic.): — Pass., Ptol. Tetr. 80.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καρποφορέω, καρποφόρω; 1 aorist ἐκαρποφόρησα; present passive participle καρποφορουμενος; (καρποφόρος, which see); to bear fruit; (Vulg. fructifico; Columella (), Tertullian);

a. properly, ((Xenophon, Aristotle), Theophrastus, de hist. plant. 3, 3, 7; Diodorus 2, 49): χόρτον, Mark 4:28 (φυτά, Wis. 10:7).
b. metaphorically, to bear, bring forth, deeds: thus of men who show their knowledge of religion by their conduct, Matthew 13:23; Mark 4:20; Luke 8:15; ἐν (for R G L Tr marginal reading WH marginal reading ἐν (cf. Buttmann, 103 (90), see εἷς, 4 a.)) τριάκοντα etc. namely, καρποις, Mark 4:20 T Tr text WH text (see ἐν, I. 5 f.); ἐν παντί ἔργῳ ἀγαθῷ, Colossians 1:10; τίνι (dative commodi]) to one who reaps the fruit, i. e. fruit acceptable to him, τῷ Θεῷ, Romans 7:4; τῷ θανάτῳ, i. e. (without the figure) to produce works rewarded with death, Romans 7:5; in middle to bear fruit of oneself, Colossians 1:6 (cf. Lightfoot at the passage).

Question 416

πληροφορέω

Answer 416

to accomplish, fill, fulfill, satisfy fully, fully persuade or be persuaded

Thayer’s Definition
to bear or bring full, to make full
to cause a thing to be shown to the full
to fulfil the ministry in every part
to carry through to the end, accomplish
things that have been accomplished
to fill one with any thought, conviction, or inclination
to make one certain, to persuade, convince one
to be persuaded, persuaded, fully convinced or assured
to render inclined or bent on

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πληροφορ-έω,

bring full measure: satisfy fully, PAmh. 2.66.42 (ii A. D.), PMag.Lond. 121.910; esp. assure, τινὰ ὅρκοις Ctes. Fr. 29.39, cf. Cod Just. 1.1.7.23 .

2. fulfil, τὴν διακονίαν 2 Timothy 4:5; τὸ πατρῷον συνάλλαγμα Arch.Pap. 5.383 (i/ii A. D.): — Pass., to be fulfilled, Ev.Luke 1:1, Vett.Val. 43.18 .
3. pay in full, POxy. 1473.8 ( Pass., iii A. D. ), etc.

II Pass., of persons, have full satisfaction, to be fully assured, ὅτι . . Ep.Romans 4:21 : abs., ib. 14.5 .

2. π. τοῦ ποιῆσαι to be fully bent on doing, LXX Ecclesiastes 8:11 .

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πληροφορέω, πληροφόρω: (1 aorist imperative πληροφόρησον, infinitive πληροφορησαι (Romans 15:13 L marginal reading); passive, present imperative πληροθορείσθω; perfect participle πεπληροφορημενος; 1 aorist participle πληροφορηθείς); (from the unused adjective πληροθορος, and this from πλήρης and φέρω); to bear or bring full, to make full;

a. to cause a thing to be shown to the full: τήν διακονίαν, i. e. to fulfil the ministry in every respect, 2 Timothy 4:5 (cf. πληροῦν τήν διακονίαν, Acts 12:25); also τό κήρυγμα, 2 Timothy 4:17.
b. “to carry through to the end, accomplish: πράγματα πεπληροφορημενα, things that have been accomplished (Itala and Vulg. completae), Luke 1:1 (cf. ὡς ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, Acts 19:21) (cf. Meyer edition Weiss at the passage).
c. τινα, to fill one with any thought, conviction, or inclination: (Romans 15:13 L marginal reading (followed by ἐν with the dative of thing): others, πληρόω, which see, 1); hence, to make one certain, to persuade, convince, one (πολλαῖς οὖν λόγοις καί ὅρκοις πληροθορησαντες Μεγαβυζον, extracted from Ctesias () in Photius, p. 41, 29 ((edited by Bekker); but on this passive, see Lightfoot as below)); passive, to be persuaded, Romans 14:5; πληροθορηθεις, persuaded, fully convinced or assured, Romans 4:21; also πεπληροθορήμενοι, Colossians 4:12 L T Tr WH; οἱ ἀπόστολοι … πληροθορηθεντες διά τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ καί πιστωθενθες ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ, Clement of Rome, 1 Cor. 42, 3 [ET]; frequent so in ecclesiastical writings; to render inclined or bent on, ἐπληροθορηθη καρδία … τοῦ ποιῆσαι τό πονηρόν, Ecclesiastes 8:11 (cf. Test xii. Patr., test. Gad 2). The word is treated of fully by Bleek, Brief an d. Hebrews 2:2, p. 233ff; Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. Deutsche TheoI. for 1871, p. 38ff; (Lightfoot’s Commentary on Colossians 4:12. Cf. also Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word.)

Question 417

φορτίον

Answer 417

a burden, load

Thayer’s Definition
a burden, load
of the freight or lading of a ship
metaph.
of burdensome rites
of the obligations Christ lays upon his followers, and styles a “burden” by way of the contrast to the precepts of the Pharisees, the observance of which was most oppressive
faults of the conscience which oppress the soul

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
φορτ-ίον, τό,

load, burden, freight, Sapph. Supp. 9.13 (pl.), Alc. Supp. 26.1, Ar. Pl. 352, Lys. 312, X. Mem. 3.13.6, An. 7.1.37, al., Lycurg. 96, Aq. 2 Samuel 15:33; λιβανωτικὰ φ. OGI 132.11 (Alexandria, ii B. C.); φέρων ἀνθράκων φ. Ar. Ach. 214 (lyr.); φ. βαστάζειν Teles p.10H.

2. pl., wares, merchandise, Hes. Op. 643, 693, Hdt. 1.1, 2.179, al., Ar. Ach. 899, 910, V. 1398, Ra. 573, Hyp. Ath. 6. esp. of agricultural produce, crops, PRLaws 43.14, al. (iii B. C.), PTeb. 105.24 (ii B. C.), etc.
3. of a child in the womb, X. Mem. 2.2.5; ἔρωτος f.l. in Anacr. 170.
4. metaph., μεῖζον φ. ἢ καθ’ αὑτὸν αἰρόμενον taking too heavy a burden upon him, D. 11.14; μέγα τὸ φ. Antiph. 3; οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν βαρύτερον τῶν φορτίων.. γυναικός Id. 329; οὔτοι τὸ γῆράς ἐστιν.. τῶν φ. μέγιστον Anaxandr. 53; τὸ φ. μου ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν Matthew 11:30; χρυσοῦν φ., of wealth, Secund. Sent. 9. (Dim. only in form, commonly used for φόρτος in Com. and Prose; wrongly condemned as un-Attic by Moer. p.393 P., Thom.Mag. p.16R.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
φορτίον, φορτίου, τό (diminutive of φόρτος, but diminutive only in form not in significance; cf. Alexander Buttmann (1873) Ausf. Spr. ii; p. 440; (Winers Grammar, § 2, 1 d. at the end)), from Hesiod down, the Sept. for מַשָׂא, a burden, load: of the freight or lading of a ship (often so in Greek writings from Hesiod, Works, 645, 695 down), Acts 27:10 G L T Tr WH. Metaphorically: of burdensome rites, plural (Matthew 23:4); Luke 11:46; of the obligations Christ lays upon his followers, and styles a ‘burden’ by way of contrast to the precepts of the Pharisees the observance of which was most oppressive, Matthew 11:30 (αὐτός μόνος δύναται βαστάσαι Ζηνωνος φορτίον, (Diogenes Laërtius 7, 5, 4 (171); see ζυγός, 1 b.); of faults, the consciousness of which oppresses the soul, Galatians 6:5 (yet cf. Lightfoot at the passage Synonym: see ὄγκος, at the end.)

Question 418

καταφρονέω

Answer 418

to despise, look down on, scorn, show contempt

pr. to look down on; to scorn, despise, Mt. 18:10; Rom. 2:4; to slight, Mt. 6:24; Lk. 16:13; 1 Cor. 11:22; 1 Tim. 4:12; 6:2; 2 Pet. 2:10; to disregard, Heb. 12:2*

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
καταφρον-έω,

I

1. look down upon, think slightly of, τινος Hdt. 4.134, Th. 7.63, etc.; τῶν παρόντων καταφρονῶν, τῶν ἀπόντων ἐπιθυμῶν Lys. 12.78; κ. τοῦ κινδύνου Pl. Ap. 28c; τῆς τέχνης Id. Grg. 512c, al.; καύματος καὶ ψύχους Ephor. 149 J.; κυνηγεσίων X. Cyn. 1.18; θεῶν E. Ba. 199, Antiph. 262; τῶν πτωχῶν Men. 301.10; οὐ δεῖ διαβολῆς κ. Id. 88.1.
2. c. acc., regard slightly, despise, E. Ba. 503; τοὺς ἐπιόντας Th. 6.34: — Pass., to be despised, ὑπό τινων Pl. R. 556d; εἰς τὰ πολεμικὰ καταφρονούμενοι X. HG 7.4.30: fut. - φρονηθήσομαι Isoc. 6.95, Aeschin. 1.176: also in med. form - φρονήσομαι Pl. Hp.Ma. 281c: aor. - εφρονήθην Isoc. 6.108, Pl. Euthd. 273d.
3. abs., to be disdainful, deal contemptuously, Th. 2.11, Amphis 1.3, Arist. Rh. 1378b15; τὸ -φρονοῦν contempt, D.H. 5.44.
4. c. inf., think contemptuously that.., presume, καταφρονήσαντες Ἀρκάδων κρέσσονες εἶναι Hdt. 1.66; καταφρονοῦντες κἂν προαισθέσθαι Th. 3.83: also c. acc., - φρονήσαντες ταῦτα Hdt. 8.10.
5. c. acc. et gen., like καταγιγνώσκω, κ. τῶν Ἀθηναίων ἀδυνασίαν Th. 8.8.

II c.acc.rei, fix one’s thoughts upon, aim at, τὴν τυραννίδα Hdt. 1.59; τοὺς βύστακας μὴ καταφρόνει do not think of your moustache, do not aim at having one (because the Spartans had to shave the upper lip, cf. μύσταξ), Antiph. 44.

III come to one’s senses, Hp. Morb.Sacr. 15, Nat.Mul. 3 (prob.l.), Plu. 2.165f.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
καταφρονέω, καταφρόνω; future καταφρονήσω; 1 aorist κατεφρόνησα; (from Herodotus down); to contemn, despise, disdain, think little or nothing of: with the genitive of the object (Buttmann, § 132, 15), Matthew 6:24; Matthew 18:10; Luke 16:13; Romans 2:4; 1 Corinthians 11:22; 1 Timothy 4:12; 1 Timothy 6:2; 2 Peter 2:10; Hebrews 12:2.

Question 419

σωφρονέω

Answer 419

I am sober-minded, self-controlled

Thayer's Definition
to be of sound mind
to be in one's right mind
to exercise self control
to put a moderate estimate upon one's self, think of one's self soberly
to curb one's passions

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
σωφρον-έω,

poet. σᾰοφ- Opp. H. 3.446, AP 5.301.11 (Agath.): —

to be sound of mind, Hdt. 3.35, Mark 5:15, Gal. 15.449; ὃς ἦν φορητὸς οὐδὲ σωφρονῶν Babr. 90.4.

2. to be temperate, moderate, show self-control, Heraclit. 112, 116 (v.l.), A. Pr. 982, Pers. 829, IG 12.22.69, Antipho 2.2.5, Th. 8.24, Pl. Phdr. 244a, X. Cyr. 8.1.30; τὸ σωφρονεῖν, = cross σωφροσύνη, A. Ag. 1425, cf. 181, Ar. Nu. 1061, 1071; ἐς Ἀφροδίτην ς. E. IA 1159, cf. Ba. 314 (s. v.l.); περὶ τοὺς θεούς X. Mem. 1.1.20; of soldiers, ς. καὶ εὐτακτεῖν ib. 3.5.21, cf. Lys. 12.47; ς. καὶ ὁμονοεῖν And. 1.109; opp. ὑπερφρονέω, Romans 12:3 : with a part., πέμποντες σωφρονοῖμεν ἄν Pl. Men. 90d.
3. come to one’s senses, learn moderation, Hdt. 3.64; ς. ὑπὸ στένει A. Eu. 521 (lyr.); σωφρονοῦντες ἐν χρόνῳ ib. 1000 (lyr.); οὐ σωφρονήσεις; S. Aj. 1259; ἐσωφρόνησας Id. Ph. 1259; σεσωφρονηκώς when he had recovered his senses, Pl. Phdr. 241b.
4. Pass., τὰ σεσωφρονημένα ἐν τῷ βίῳ μοι things I had done with discretion, Aeschin. 2.4.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
σωφρονέω, σωφρόνω; 1 aorist imperative σωφρονήσατε; (σώφρων, which see); from Tragg., Xenophon, Plato down; to be of sound mind, i. e.

a. to be in one’s right mind: of one who has ceased δαιμονίζεσθαι, Mark 5:15; Luke 8:35; opposed to ἐκστηναι, 2 Corinthians 5:13, (the σωφρονων and μανεις are contrasted in Plato, de rep. i., p. 331 c.; σωφρονουσαι and μανεισαι, Phaedr., p. 244 b.; ὁ μεμηνως … ἐσωφρονησε, Apollod. 3, 5, 1, 6).
b. to exercise self-control; i. e. α. to put a moderate estimate upon oneself, think of oneself soberly: opposed to ὑπερφρονεῖν, Romans 12:3. β. to curb one’s passions, Titus 2:6; joined with νήφω (as in Lucian, Nigrin. 6) (R. V. be of sound mind and be sober), 1 Peter 4:7.

Question 420

ταπεινοφροσύνη

Answer 420

lowliness of mind, humility

Thayer’s Definition
the having a humble opinion of one’s self
a deep sense of one’s (moral) littleness
modesty, humility, lowliness of mind

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τᾰπεινο-φροσύνη, ἡ,

humility, Ephesians 4:2, al.; mean-spiritedness, J. BJ 4.9.2, Arr. Epict. 3.24.56.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ταπεινοφροσύνη, ταπεινοφροσύνης, ἡ (ταπεινόφρων; opposed to μεγαλοφροσύνη, ὑψηλοφροσύνη (cf. Winers Grammar, 99 (94))), “the having a humble opinion of oneself; a deep sense of one’s (moral) littleness; modesty, humility, lowliness of mind”; (Vulg. humilitas, Luth. Demuth): Acts 20:19; Ephesians 4:2; Philippians 2:3; Colossians 3:12; 1 Peter 5:5; used of an affected and ostentatious humility in Colossians 2:18, 23. (The word occurs neither in the O. T., nor in secular authors — (but in Josephus, b. j. 4, 9, 2 in the sense of pusillanimity; also Epictetus diss. 3, 24, 56 in a bad sense. See Trench, N. T. Synonyms, § xlii.; Lightfoot on Philippians, the passage cited; Zezschwitz, Profangräcität, as above w., pp. 20, 62; Winer’s Grammar, 26).)

STRONGS NT 5012a: ταπεινόφρων ταπεινόφρων, ταπεινοφρον (ταπεινός and φρήν), humble-minded, i. e. having a modest opinion of oneself: 1 Peter 3:8, where Rec. φιλόφρονες. (Proverbs 29:23; in a bad sense, pusillanimous, mean-spirited, μικρούς ἡ τύχῃ καί περιδηις ποιεῖ καί ταπεινόφρονας, Plutarch, de Alex. fort. 2, 4; (de tranquill. animi 17. See Winer’s Grammar, § 34, 3 and references under the word ταπεινοφροσύνη, at the end).)

Question 421

φύλλον

Answer 421

a leaf

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
φύλλον, τό

leaf; in and Hdt. always in pl. leaves, or collectively foliage, φύλλα καὶ ὄζους Il. 1.234, al.; φύλλα δ’ ἔραζε χέει Hes. Op. 421; τὰ φ. καταδρέποντες κατήσθιον Hdt. 8.115; ὅσσα τε χθὼν ἠρινὰ φ. ἀναπέμπει Pi. P. 9.46; ψυχὰς ἐδάη.. οἷά τε φύλλ’ ἄνεμος δονεῖ B. 5.65; sg., S. OC 701 (lyr.), Thphr. HP 1.10.6, etc.; οἵη περ φύλλων γενεή, τοίη δὲ καὶ ἀνδρῶν Il. 6.146, cf. Mimn. 2.1; φύλλων γενεᾷ προσόμοιοι Ar. Av. 685 (anap.); φύλλοις βάλλειν E. Hec. 574; πλεκτὰ φύλλα wreathed leaves, Id. Hipp. 807; φύλλον ἐλαίας, poet. for ἐλάα, S.l.c.: metaph. of choral songs, φύλλ’ ἀοιδᾶν Pi. I. 4(3).27; of leaves used as voting-papers, IG 12(5).595 A 12 (Ceos, iii/ii B. C.).

2. of flowers, petal, [ ῥόδον] ἔχον ἑξήκοντα φύλλα Hdt. 8.138; ὑακίνθινα φ., λειμώνια φ., Theoc. 11.26, 18.39.

II plant, in general, φ. ὂν ἐπινηχόμενον τῷ ὕδατι Dsc. 1.12, cf. Numen. ap. Ath. 9.371b; ἡ κατὰ φύλλον (with or without γεωμετρία) survey according to plants, i. e. crops grown, PTeb. 38.3, 78.4 (ii B. C.): ποτίσαι εἰς φύλλον ib. 72.362, 105.32 (ii B. C.): esp. of medicinal herbs, φ. εἴ τι νώδυνον κάτοιδε S. Ph. 44; ἠπίοισι φ. ib. 698 (lyr.), cf. 649.

2. as a name of definite species: = βρυωνία, dog Mercury, Mercurialis perennis, Thphr. HP 9.18.5, Dsc. 3.125. the leaf-like fruit of silphium, Hp. Nat.Mul. 72, Thphr. HP 6.3.1, Polyaen. 4.3.32. = λευκάκανθα, Dsc. 3.19.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
φύλλον, φύλλου, τό (φύω), a leaf: Matthew 21:19; Matthew 24:32; Mark 11:13; Mark 13:28; Revelation 22:2. (From Homer down.)

Question 422

χάριν

Answer 422

( accusative of the substantive, χάρις used absolutely) on account of, for the sake of
but also in this spelling, gratitude
grace or favor, beauty, charm, favor performed

properly, in favor of, for lite pleasure of: χάριν ἑκτορος like the Latin abl.gratia, it takes on completely the nature of a preposition, and is joined to the genitive, for, on account of, for the sake of; τούτου χάριν, on this account, for this cause; οὗ χάριν, for which cause; χάριν τίνος; for what cause? wherefore?; Except in 1 John 3:12, χάριν is everywhere in the N. T. placed after the genitive, as it generally is in secular authors; in the O. T. Apocrypha it is placed sometimes before, sometimes after

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
χάριν, v. cross χάρις A. VI. I.

χάρις [ᾰ], ἡ, gen. χάρῐτος: acc. χάριν [ῑ in arsi, Il. 5.874 ], etc.; also χάριτα Hdt. 6.41, 9.107, E. El. 61, Hel. 1378, X. HG 3.5.16, Phylarch. 24 J., PGen. 47.17 (iv A.D.), etc. (un-Attic, acc. to Moer.p.414P.): χάριταν Gloss.: pl. χάριτες; dat. χάρισι, χαρίτεσσι, Od. 6.237, Il. 17.51, Pi. O. 7.93: (χαίρω): — grace: I in objective sense, outward grace or fauour, beauty, prop. of persons or their portraits, θεσπεσίην δ’ ἄρα τῷ γε χάριν κατεχεύατ’ Ἀθήνη Od. 2.12, etc.; χάριν ἀμφιχέαι κεφαλῇ Hes. Op. 65; εὐμόρφων δὲ κολοσσῶν ἔχθεται χ. ἀνδρί A. Ag. 417 (lyr.): pl., graces, κάλλεϊ καὶ χάρισι στίλβων Od. 6.237; ὄσσοις χάριτας Ἀφροδίτης ἔχων E. Ba. 236; μετὰ χαρίτων gracefully, Th. 2.41: less freq. of things, χ. δ’ ἀπελάμπετο πολλή, of ear-rings, Il. 14.183; of works, ἔργοισι χάριν καὶ κῦδος ὀπάζει Od. 15.320; of words, οὔ οἱ χ. ἀμφιπεριστέφεται ἐπέεσσιν 8.175; πλείστη δὲ χ. κατὰ μέτρον ἰούσης [γλώσσης ] Hes. Op. 720; ταὶ Διωνύσου σὺν βοηλάτα χάριτες διθυράμβῳ Pi. O. 13.19; ἡ τῶν λόγων χ. D. 4.38, cf. D.H. Comp. 23; μῦθοι πληθόμενοι χαρίτων AP 9.186 (Antip.Thess.).

2. glory, Φερενίκου χ. Pi. O. 1.18, cf. 8.57, 80.

II in subjective sense, grace or favour felt, whether on the part of the doer or the receiver (both senses appear in such phrases as ὅτ’.. ἡ χάρις χάριν φέροι S. OC 779; χάρις χάριν γάρ ἐστιν ἡ τίκτουσ’ ἀεί Id. Aj. 522, cf. E. Hel. 1234, Arist. Rh. 1385a16):

1 on the part of the doer, grace, kindness, goodwill, τινος for or towards one, Hes. Op. 190; τῶν Μεσσηνίων χάριτι πεισθείς Th. 3.95; οὐ χάριτι τῇ ἐμῇ not for any kind feeling towards me, Antipho 5.41: abs., εἰ δέ τις μείζων χ. A. Supp. 960; τῆς παλαιᾶς χ. ἐκβεβλημένη S. Aj. 808; ἦ μεγάλα χ. δώρῳ σύν ὀλίγῳ Theoc. 28.24; χ. εὑρεῖν ἐναντίον τοῦ θεοῦ LXX Genesis 6:8, al.; χάριν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν δῆμον Plu. Dem. 7; partiality, favour, μήτε ἔλεον μήτε συγγνώμην μήτε χ. μηδεμίαν περὶ πλείονος ποιήσασθαι τῶν νόμων Lys. 14.40; οὐ συμφωνοῦσιν ὀργαὶ καὶ χάριτες μακαριότητι Epicur. i p.28 U., cf. Pl. Lg. 740c.

2. more freq. on the part of the receiver, sense of favour received, thankfulness, gratitude, χάριν καὶ κῦδος ἄροιο Il. 4.95; ἀρέομαι πὰρ Σαλαμῖνος Ἀθαναίων χ. Pi. P. 1.76; τινος for a thing, οὐδέ τίς ἐστι χάρις μετόπισθ’ εὐεργέων Od. 4.695, cf. 22.319; ἀντὶ πόνων χ. Th. 4.86: less freq. c. inf., οὐκ ἄρα τις χάρις ἦεν μάρνασθαι one has, it seems, no thanks for fighting, Il. 9.316, 17.147; οἵ οἱ ἀπεμνήσαντο χ. εὐεργεσιάων Hes. Th. 503, cf. Th. 1.137; χάριν φέρειν τινί Pi. O. 10(11).17; χ. τροφεῦσιν ἀμείβων A. Ag. 728 (lyr.); φιλότητος ἀμειβόμεναι χ. S. El. 134 (lyr.); χάριν εἰδέναι τινί to acknowledge a sense of favour, feel grateful, once in Hom., ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι ἰδέω χ. ἤματα πάντα Il. 14.235; freq. in Prose, Hdt. 3.21, Lys. 2.23, Isoc. 4.175, etc.; τούτων for a thing, X. Cyr. 1.6.11, etc.; τοῖς διαπεπραγμένοις Plu. Alex. 62; μοι χ. οἶδεν ἐπὶ τούτοις Luc. Bis Acc. 17; χ. προσειδέναι Pl. Revelation 20:1-15 a; ἀποδιδόναι Id. R. 338a; τινὰ ἀποστερῆσαι χάριτος Id. Hp.Mi. 372c; later χ. γνῶναι Philostr. VA 2.17; πολλὴν γνοῦσα χ. X.Ephesians 3:5; χ. ἐπίσταμαι πᾶσι Charito 3.4, cf. 8.5, Poll. 5.142, Jul. Or. 8.246c; also τῶν παροιχομένων ἔχειν σφι μεγάλην χ. Hdt. 7.120, cf. 1.71, E. Heracl. 767 (lyr.), IT 847 (lyr.), Lys. 16.1, Hyp. Ath. 5: c. part., χ. ἔχειν σωθέντες X. An. 2.5.14; also χάριτας ἔχων πατρός owing him a debt of gratitude, E. Or. 244: but ἀσπασμάτων χάριν τίν’ ἕξει; what thanks will she have for.. ? Id. Hec. 830; χ. ἂν ἐν τούτῳ μείζω ἔτι ἔσχεν Th. 8.87; χ. ὀφείλειν to owe gratitude, be beholden, τοῖς θεοῖς S. Ant. 331, cf. X. Cyr. 3.2.30; προσοφείλειν D. 3.31; χ. οὐδεμία ἐφαίνετο πρὸς Ἀθηναίων Hdt. 5.90; χάριν ἀθάνατον καταθέσθαι to lay up a store of undying gratitude, Id. 7.178, cf. 6.41; τῇ πόλει χ. καταθέσθαι Antipho 5.61, cf. Th. 1.33; χάριν λαβεῖν τινος receive thanks from one, S. OT 1004, etc.; ἀπολαβεῖν παρά τινων Lys. 20.31; τινος for a thing, X. Mem. 2.2.5, Aeschin. 2.4; διπλῆν ἐξ ἐμοῦ κτήσει χάριν S. Ph. 1370; κἀπ’ ἐμοῦ κτήσει χ. Id. Tr. 471; κομίσασθαι χ. Th. 3.58; χάριτος τυχεῖν Lycurg. 135; ἀπέχειν χάριτας Call. Epigr. 51.4, etc.; τοῖς θεοῖς χάρις (sc. ἐστί) ὅτι.., thank the gods that.., X. An. 3.3.14, Cyr. 7.5.72; χ. τινί τινος Luc. Tim. 36; τινὶ ὑπέρ τινος Plu. 2.1122a.
3. favour, influence, opp. force, χάριτι τὸ πλέον ἢ φόβῳ Th. 1.9; χ. καὶ δεήσει, opp. ἀπειλῇ, Plu. Sull. 38.
4. love-charm, philtre, Luc. Alex. 5, Merc.Cond. 40.

III in concrete sense, a favour done or returned, boon, χάριν φέρειν τινί confer a favour on one, do a thing to oblige him, Il. 5.211, 874, 9.613, Od. 5.307, E. IT 14, Or. 239, And. 2.24 (so in Med., of the recipient, ib. 9); ἄλλοις χ. φέροντες Th. 3.54; χάριν θέσθαι or τίθεσθαί τινι, Hdt. 9.60, 107, A. Pr. 782, E. Hec. 1211, etc.; προσθέσθαι S. OC 767; χ. ὑπουργῆσαί τινι A. Pr. 635; παρασχεῖν S. OC 1183; πράσσειν E. Ion 36, 896 (lyr.); δράσας Th. 2.40; ἀνύσαι prob. in S. Tr. 995 (anap.); νέμειν Id. Aj. 1371; χ. δοῦναί τινι A. Pr. 821, S. OC 1489 (but χ. δοῦναι, = χαρίζεσθαι (1.2), indulge, humour, ὀργῇ ib. 855; γαστρί Cratin. 317); χ. χαρίζεσθαι, v. χαρίζομαι 1.1: χ. ἀνθυπουργεῖν return a favour, S. Fr. 339; τίνειν A. Pr. 985, Ag. 821; χάριτας πατρῴας ἐκτίνων E. Or. 453, cf. Pl. Mx. 242c, etc.; χ. ἀποδιδόναι τινί Lys. 12.60, 28.17; ἀντί τινος X. Ages. 2.29; ὑπέρ τινος Isoc. 4.56; τῶν ἔργων τὰς χάριτας ἀποδ. τινί Lys. 31.24; χάριτας ἀντιδιδόναι Th. 3.63; opp. χάριν ἀπαιτεῖν to ask the repayment of a boon, E. Hec. 276, cf. Lys. 18.23, D. 20.156; χάριτας ἀπ. Lycurg. 139; χάριν ἐξαιτεῖσθαι S. OC 586; χ. ἀποστερεῖν withhold a return for what one has received, Pl. Grg. 520c; τὰς αὑτοῦ εἰς τοὺς φίλους χ. the favours one has done them, Id. Lg. 729d; χ. ἄχαρις α thankless favour, one which receives, or deserves, no thanks, A. Pr. 545 (lyr.); χ. ἀχάριτος Id. Ch. 42 (lyr.), E. Ph. 1757 (lyr.). grant made in legal form, POxy. 273.14 (i A.D.), PGrenf. 2.70.5 (iii A.D.), etc.; αἱ τῶν Σεβαστῶν χ. imperial grants, OGI 669.44 (Egypt, i A.D.).

2. esp. in erotic sense, of favours granted (v. χαρίζομαι 1.3), ἀλόχου χάριν ἰδεῖν Il. 11.243, cf. A. Ag. 1206: more freq. in pl., X. Hier. 1.34, 7.6, etc.; βίᾳ δ’ ἔπραξας χάριτας ἢ πείσας κόρην; Trag.Adesp. 402; in full, χάριτες ἀφροδισίων ἐρώτων Pi. Fr. 128, cf. Pl. Phdr. 254a, al. gratification, delight, τινος in or from a thing, συμποσίου Pi. O. 7.5; ϝίκας Id. O. 10(11).78; ὕπνου χ. E. Or. 159 (lyr.); even χ. γόων Id. Supp. 79 (lyr.); also concrete, of things, a delight, Pi. I. 2.19 (pl.); τὰν βοτρυώδη Διονύσου χ. οἴνας E. Ba. 535 (lyr.), cf. Ar. Nu. 311 (lyr.), Jul. Or. 3.125b; ἔνοπτρα, παρθένων χάριτας E. Tr. 1108 (lyr.): abs., Ἔρως.. εἰσάγων γλυκεῖαν χ. Id. Hipp. 527 (lyr.); opp. λύπη, S. El. 821, E. Hel. 655 (lyr.); opp. πόνος, S. OC 232 (lyr.); θανεῖν πολλὴ χάρις A. Ag. 550, cf. 1304; βίου χ. μεθεῖσα E. Med. 227; οὐδεμίαν ἔχω τῷ βίῳ χάριν Ar. Lys. 865; τοῖς δὲ σιτίοις χ. οὐδεμίαν οἶδ’ ἐσθίων ib. 869; less freq. in Prose, χ. καὶ ἡδονή Pl. Grg. 462c, cf. D. 20.26; τοσαύτην ἔχει χ. Isoc. 9.10.

δαιμόνων χάρις homage due to them, their worship, majesty, A. Ag. 182 (lyr.); ἀθίκτων χ. ib. 371 (lyr.); ὅρκων E. Med. 439 (lyr.).

2. thank-offering, εὐκταία χ. τινός, opp. a common gift, A. Ag. 1387, cf. X. Hier. 8.4; ἔπεμψε χαίτην κουρίμην χ. πατρός A. Ch. 180, cf. 517; τιμὴ καὶ γέρα καὶ χ. Pl. Euthphr. 15a, cf. La. 187a.

Special usages:

1 acc. sg. as Adv., χ. τινός in any one’s favour, for his pleasure, for his sake, χ. Ἕκτορος Il. 15.744; ψεύδεσθαι γλώσσης χ. for one’s tongue’s pleasure, i.e. for talking’s sake, Hes. Op. 709, cf. A. Ch. 266; rarely with Art., τὴν Ἀθηναίων χάριν ἐστρατεύοντο Hdt. 5.99. as Pr, sts. before its case (once in Pi., P. 2.70; χάριν πλησμονῆς Pl. Phdr. 241c; χ. φιλίας Epicur. Sent.Vat. 28; χ. τίνος; LXX 2 Chronicles 7:21, cf. POxy. 743.29 (i B. C.), etc.), but mostly after, for the sake of, on behalf of, on account of, κακά νιν ἕλοιτο μοῖρα δυσπότμου χάριν χλιδᾶς S. OT 888 (lyr.); τοῦ χάριν; for what reason? Ar. Pl. 53; συγχωρῶ τοῦ λόγου χ. Pl. R. 475a; so ἐμὴν χάριν, χάριν σήν, for my, thy pleasure or sake, A. Pers. 1046 (lyr.), E. HF 1238, etc.; κείνου τε καὶ σὴν ἐξ ἴσου κοινὴν χ. S. Tr. 485: less freq. with the Art., τὴν σὴν δ’ ἥκω χ. Id. Ph. 1413 (anap.); σοῦ τε τήν τ’ ἐμὴν χ. E. Ph. 762: — pleon., τίνος χάριν ἕνεκα; Pl. Lg. 701d; also χάριν τινός as far as regards.., as to.., ἔπους σμικροῦ χ. S. OC 443; δακρύων χάριν if tears would serve, Id. Fr. 557.6; χ. θανάτου πόλιν ἀτείχιστον οἰκοῦμεν Epicur. Sent.Vat. 31; also, about, ἔπεμφεν ἐπὶ τὴν πενθεράν σου χ. τοῦ κτήματος about the farm, PFay. 126.5 (ii/iii A. D.). — Orig. an acc. in apposition with the sentence, as in Il. 15.744, etc., being a favour, since it is (was) a favour, as is evident in κακῆς γυναικὸς χάριν ἄχαριν ἀπώλετο E. IT 566; τινὸς νίκας ἀκάρπωτον χ. S. Aj. 176 (lyr.).

2. with Preps.: εἰς χάριν to do a pleasure, οὐδὲν ἐς χ. πράσσων Id. OT 1353 (lyr.); ἐς χ. τίθεσθαί τι Plu. Mar. 46; μηδὲ κρίσιν εἰς χ. ἕλκε Ps.-Phoc. 9 (but ἐς τὴν τῶν ξυμμάχων χ. in such a way as to earn thanks.. Th. 3.37); also κατὰ χάριν Pl. Lg. 740c; χάριτος ἕνεκα ib. 771d. πράσσειν τί τινι πρὸς χάριν S. OC 1776 (anap.); δρᾶσαι E. Hel. 1281; τοῖσι πολλοῖς πρὸς χάριν λέγειν τι Id. Hec. 257, cf. X. Mem. 4.4.4, HG 6.3.7, Isoc. 2.18, D. 8.1 (but πρὸς χ. βορᾶς for the sake of it, S. Ant. 30); πρὸς χ., opp. κλαίων, Id. OT 1152: — but πρὸς χ. εὐσεβίας, just like χάριν, Pi. O. 8.8; τίνος νόμου ταῦτα πρὸς χ. λέγω; S. Ant. 908; πρὸς ἰσχύος χ. E. Med. 538; πρὸς χ. alone, as a favour, freely, πρὸς χ. τε κοὐ βίᾳ S. Fr. 28; but κορέσαι στόμα πρὸς χ. to their heart’s content, Id. Ph. 1156 (lyr.). ἐν χάριτι κρίνειν τινά to decide from partiality to one, Theoc. 5.69; but also, for one’s gratification, pleasure, ἐν χάριτι διδόναι or ποιεῖν τινί τι, X. Oec. 8.10, Pl. Phd. 115b: παραλαμβάνειν ἐν χάρισιν gratefully, Id. Lg. 796b. διὰ χαρίτων εἶναι or γίγνεσθαί [τινι ] to be pleasing to one, X. Hier. 9.1, 2. ἐθελοντὶ καὶ μετὰ χάριτος of pure good will, Plb. 2.22.5, etc.; ἐθελούσιοι καὶ χάριτος ἕνεκα ἐξιόντες X. Cyr. 4.2.11. metaph. of the cypress, Gp. 11.4.1; of some kind of myrtle, Sch. Il. 17.51; of salt, ὅτι τὸ ἀναγκαῖον ἡδὺ ποιοῦσιν (sc. ἅλες) Plu. 2.685a. Χάρις, ἡ, as a mythological pr. n. declined like χάρις, save that the acc. is generally Χάριτα (exc. AP 5.148 (Mel.), Luc. DDeor. 15.1, Paus. 9.35.4): poet. dat. pl. Χαρίτεσσι Il. 17.51, Pi. N. 9.54; Χάρισσιν ib. 5.54: — Charis, wife of Hephaestus, Il.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
χάριν, accusative of the substantive, χάρις used absolutely; properly, in favor of, for lite pleasure of: χάριν ἑκτορος, Homer, Iliad 15, 744, others; 1 Macc. 9:10; Judith 8:19; like the Latin abl.gratia, it takes on completely the nature of a preposition, and is joined to the genitive, for, on account of, for the sake of; Galatians 3:19 (on which see παραβοσις); 1 Timothy 5:14; Titus 1:11; Jude 1:16; τούτου χάριν, on this account, for this cause, Ephesians 3:1 (Xenophon, mem. 1, 2, 54); τούτου χάριν ἵνα, Ephesians 3:14 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 566 (526)); Titus 1:5; οὗ χάριν, for which cause, Luke 7:47; χάριν τίνος; for what cause? wherefore? 1 John 3:12. Except in 1 John 3:12, χάριν is everywhere in the N. T. placed after the genitive, as it generally is in secular authors (cf. Passow, under the word, I. 3 a., p. 2416{b}; Herm. ad Vig., p. 701); in the O. T. Apocrypha it is placed sometimes before, sometimes after; cf. Wahl, Clavis Apocr., under the word 6 b.; Grimm on 1 Macc. 3:29.

Question 423

χαρίζομαι

Answer 423

Thayer’s Definition
to do something pleasant or agreeable (to one), to do a favour to, gratify
to show one’s self gracious, kind, benevolent
to grant forgiveness, to pardon
to give graciously, give freely, bestow
to forgive
graciously to restore one to another
to preserve for one a person in peril
~~~
to do one a solid
I give freely, forgive
Thayer’s Expanded Definition
χαρίζομαι; deponent middle; future χαρίσομαι (Romans 8:32; Lucian,

d. mar. 9, 1, for which Greek writers commonly use the Attic χαιουσμαι (cf. WHs Appendix, p. 163f; Buttmann, 37 (32); Winer’s Grammar, § 15, under the word)); perfect κεχάρισμαι; 1 aorist ἐχαρισάμην; 1 aorist passive, ἐχαρίσθην (Acts 3:14; 1 Corinthians 2:12; Philippians 1:29 (cf. Buttmann, 52 (46))); future passive, χαρισθήσομαι with a passive significance (Philemon 1:22); (χάρις); often in Greek writings from Homer down; to do something pleasant or agreeable (to one), to do a favor to, gratify;
a. universally, to show oneself gracious, kind, benevolent: τίνι, Galatians 3:18 (others, (supply τήν κληρονομίαν and) refer this to c. below).
b. to grant forgiveness, to pardon: 2 Corinthians 2:7; with a dative of the person, Ephesians 4:32; Colossians 3:13; with an accusative of the thing, 2 Corinthians 2:10 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 39, 1 b. and 3 N. 3); τίνι τήν ἀδικίαν, 2 Corinthians 12:13; τά παραπτώματα, Colossians 2:13.
c. to give graciously, give freely, bestow: τίνι τί, Luke 7:21; Romans 8:32; Philippians 2:9; passive, 1 Corinthians 2:12; Philippians 1:29; where a debt is referred to, to forgive (cf.
b. above), Luke 7:42f; τίνι τινα, graciously to restore one to another who desires his safety (e. g. a captive (R. V. grant)), passive, Acts 3:14; Philemon 1:22; or to preserve for one a person in peril, Acts 27:24; τινα τίνι, to give up to another one whom he may punish or put to death, Acts 25:11 ((cf. R. V. marginal reading)); with the addition of εἰς ἀπώλειαν, Acts 25:16.

Question 424

χάρισμα

Answer 424

a gift, particularly that of or from grace or favor, almost exclusively a gift as a result of divine grace or favor

Thayer’s Definition
a favour with which one receives without any merit of his own
the gift of divine grace
the gift of faith, knowledge, holiness, virtue
the economy of divine grace, by which the pardon of sin and eternal salvation is appointed to sinners in consideration of the merits of Christ laid hold of by faith
grace or gifts denoting extraordinary powers, distinguishing certain Christians and enabling them to serve the church of Christ, the reception of which is due to the power of divine grace operating on their souls by the Holy Spirit

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
χᾰρ-ισμα, ατος, τό,

grace, favour, θεοῦ Ph. 1.102, cf. Fr. 84 H.; esp. in NT, gift of God’s grace, 1 Corinthians 12:4, al.; opp. ὀψώνια, Romans 6:23; later, generally, favour bestowed, BGU 1044.4 (pl., iv A. D.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
χάρισμα, χαρίσματος, τό (χαρίζομαι), a gift of grace; a favor which one receives without any merit of his own; in the N. T. (where (except 1 Peter 4:10) used only by Paul) the gift of divine grace (so also in Philo de alleg. legg. iii. § 24 at the end δωρεά καί εὐεργεσία καί χάρισμα Θεοῦ τά πάντα ὅσα ἐν κόσμῳ καί αὐτός ὁ κόσμος ἐστιν); used of the natural gift of continence, due to the grace of God as creator, 1 Corinthians 7:7; deliverance from great peril to life, τό εἰς ἡμᾶς χάρισμα bestowed upon us, 2 Corinthians 1:11; the gift of faith, knowledge, holiness, virtue, Romans 1:11; the economy of divine grace, by which the pardon of sin and eternal salvation is appointed to sinners in consideration of the merits of Christ laid hold of by faith, Romans 5:15; Romans 6:23; plural of the several blessings of the Christian salvation, Romans 11:29; in the technical Pauline sense χαρίσματα (A. V. gifts) denote “extraordinary powers, distinguishing certain Christians and enabling them to serve the church of Christ, the reception of which is due to the power of divine grace operating in their souls by the Holy Spirit” (cf. Cremer in Herzog edition 2 vol. v. 10ff, under the word Geistesgaben): Romans 12:6; 1 Corinthians 1:7; 1 Corinthians 12:4, 31; 1 Peter 4:10; χαρίσματα ἰαμάτων, 1 Corinthians 12:9, 28, 30; specifically, the sum of those powers requisite for the discharge of the office of an evangelist: 1 Timothy 4:14; 2 Timothy 1:6. ((Of temporal blessings, ‘Teaching 1, 5 [ET] (cf. δώρημα in Hermas, mand. 2, 4 [ET])); ecclesiastical writings.)

Question 425

τετρακισχίλιοι

Answer 425

four thousand

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τετρᾰκισ-χίλιοι [ ῑλ], αι,

a, four thousand, Hdt. 2.9, al.; by tmesis, τετράκις γὰρ χίλιοι Th. 6.31: Lacon. τετρᾰκινχήλιοι IG 5(1).1 (Sparta, v B.C.); Cyrenaic τετρᾰκιχήλιοι Abh.Berl.Akad. 1925(5).25; Boeot. πετρᾰκισχείλιη fem., q.v.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τετρακισχίλιοι, τετρακισχιλιαι, τετρακισχίλια, (τετράκις and χίλιοι), four thousand: Matthew 15:38; Matthew 16:10; Mark 8:9, 20; Acts 21:38. ((Herodotus, Aristophanes, Thucydides, others.))

Question 426

πεντακισχίλιοι

Answer 426

five thousand

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πεντᾰκισ-χίλιοι [χῑ], αι, α,

five thousand, Hdt. 1.194, Pl. Lg. 738a: in sg., π. ἀσπίς five thousand men-at-arms, Luc. DMeretr. 9.4; π. ἵππος LXX 1 Maccabees 4:28 : — Dor. form πεντακιχήλιοι Abh.Berl.Akad. 1925(5).25 (Cyrene, iii B.C.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πεντακισχίλιοι, πεντακισχίλιαι, πεντακισχίλια, five times a thousand, five thousand: Matthew 14:21; Matthew 16:9; Mark 6:44; Mark 8:19; Luke 9:14; John 6:10. (Herodotus, Plato, others.)

Question 427

χρῄζω

Answer 427

I have need of

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
χρῄζω,

Thgn. 958, A. Pr. 376, Ar. Nu. 891 (anap.), Th. 3.109, etc.; in Att. hardly found exc. in pres. and impf. (but v. infr. 11): and Ion. χρηΐζω, as always in Hom., and Hdt. 1.41, 5.19, 30, 9.87; written χρηιίζω, SIG 57.41 (Milet., v B. C.); also χρεΐζω, Herod. 7.64; Dor. χρῄζω SIG 56.23 (Argos, v B. C.); also χρήζω ib.1006.3 (Cos, iii B. C.); χρείζω ib.953.27 (Calymna, ii B. C.): sicil. Dor. χρῄσδω Theoc. 8.11; Megar. Dor. χρῄδδω Ar. Ach. 734: fut. χρῄσω Ti.Locr. 99a, Ion. χρηΐσω Hdt. 7.38: aor. Ion. χρηΐσαι prob. Id. 5.65; part. χρηΐσας ib. 20, 7.38: (χρή): —

want, lack, have need of, c. gen., χρηΐζοντα.. ἰητῆρος Il. 11.835; εἴρετο.. ὅττευ χρηΐζων ἱκόμην Od. 17.121, cf. 558; οὐδ’ ἐμοῦ διδασκάλου χρῄζεις A. Pr. 376; δύο χρῄσει [μεσοτάτων ] Ti.Locr. l. c.: abs. in part. χρηΐζων needy, poor, Od. 11.340, Hes. Op. 351.

2. desire, long for, crave, χρηΐζειν ἀπεόντος ib. 367; τοῦτον ὦν δοκέω.. ποιήσειν ὧν ἂν χρηΐζωμεν Hdt. 5.30; χρημάτων χ. Id. 9.87; βορᾶς A. Ch. 530; τοῦ μακροῦ χ. βίου Soph. Aj. 473: rarely c. acc., πᾶν μᾶλλον δοκέων μιν χρηΐσειν ἢ τὸ ἐδεήθη Hdt. 7.38; ὥστ’ ἄλλα χρῄζειν S. OT 595, cf. E. Supp. 123; an inf. may freq. be supplied, φράζε.. ὅ τι χρῄζεις (sc. φράζειν) Ar. Nu. 359, cf. 453 (both anap.); ἴθ’ ὅποι χρῄζεις (sc. ἰέναι) ib. 891 (anap.), cf. Th. 751, A. Pr. 928, S. OT 365; τί δῆτα χρῄζεις; ib. 622, OC 643. c. acc. pers. et inf., ask or desire that one should do a thing, Hdt. 1.41, 112, 152, al.; so c. gen. pers. et inf., desire of one to do, Id. 5.19, 65, 9.55; in Trag., c. inf. only, desire to do a thing, A. Pr. 235, 285, al., S. OT 91, E. Hec. 347, etc.: rare in Prose, Th. 3.109, X. Cyr. 1.6.15. c. dupl. gen. pers. et rei, τῶνδε ἐγὼ ὑμέων χρηΐζων συνέλεξα hdt. 7.53. χρῄζειν παρά τινος c. inf., Ps.- Hdt. Vit.Hom. 17.
3. part. χρῄζων is used abs. for εἰ χρῄζει, if one will, if one chooses, Thgn. 958, A. Ch. 340 (anap.); ἄλλα φανεῖ χρῄζων (sc. Ἑρμῆς) if propitious, ib. [815] (lyr.); ἢν τὸν θεὸν χρῄζοντ’ ἔχῃ E. Supp. 597; ποταγγελλέτω ὁ χρῄζων, = ὁ βουλόμενος, IG 12(1).677.34 (Ialysus); also τὸ χρῇζον your solicitation, E.IA 1017.

II Pass., χρησθείς is f. l. in S. Ant. 24.

χρῄζω, = χράω (B) A. 1, deliver an oracle, foretell, only in E. Hel. 516 (lyr.; leg. χρήσασ’).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
χρῄζω; (χρή); from Homer down; to have need of, to be in want of: with a genitive of the object (Winer’s Grammar, § 30, 8 a.), Matthew 6:32; Luke 11:8; Luke 12:30; Romans 16:2 (here with the genitive of a person); 2 Corinthians 3:1.

Question 428

χρῆμα

Answer 428

goods, money, riches, need, needs

Thayer’s Definition
a thing, a matter, affair, event, business
spec. money, riches

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
χρῆμα, ατος, τό:

(χράομαι): —

need, in the phrase παρὰ χ. or παραχρῆμα (q. v.); a thing that one needs or uses, cf. X. Oec. 1.9 sq. (pl.): hence in pl., goods, property (χρήματα λέγομεν πάντα ὅσων ἡ ἀξία νομίσματι μετρεῖται Arist. EN 1119b26), Od. 2.78, 203, al. (never in Il.), Hes. Op. 320, 407, etc.; of temple- treasures, heirlooms, etc., Mnemos. 57.208 (Argos, vi B. C.); τὰ ἱρὰ χ. τῆς Ἀθηναίης Hdt. 2.28, cf. 9.81; θησαυρούς.. ἄλλα τε χρύσεα ἄφατα χ. Id. 7.190; πολλῶν χ. ἐξαίρετον ἄνθος A. Ag. 954; πειρῶ τὸν πλοῦτον χρήματακαὶ κτήματα κατασκευάζειν· ἔστι δὲ χ. μὲν τοῖς ἀπολαύειν ἐπισταμένοις, κ. δὲ τοῖς κτᾶσθαι δυναμένοις Isoc. 1.28; τοῖς σκεύεσι καὶ τοῖς χρήμασιν ἀποθήκη Th. 6.97; πρόβατα καὶ ἄλλα χ. X. An. 5.2.4; τὰ ἀνδράποδα.. καὶ χρήματα τὰ πλεῖστα ἀπέδρα αὐτούς ib. 7.8.12: prov., χρήματα ψυχὴ πέλεται.. βροτοῖσι a man’s money is his life, Hes. Op. 686; χρήματ’ ἄνηρ ‘ money makes the man’, Alc. 49, Pi. I. 2.11; ἐν χρήμασιν οἰκεῖ πατρώοις A. Eu. 757, cf. Ch. 135; also χρημάτων πένητες E. El. 37; τὰ χρήματ’ ἐνεχυράζομαι Ar. Nu. 241; χρήματα πορίζειν Id. Ec. 236; ἄτιμοι ἦσαν τὰ σώματα, τὰ δὲ χ. εἶχον And. 1.74; χρημάτων ἥσσων Democr. 50; χρημάτων κρείσσων Th. 2.60; χρήμασι νικώμενος ibid.; χρημάτων ἀδωρότατος ib. 65; ἐλπίδα χρήμασιν ὠνητήν Id. 3.40; μήτε χρημάτων φειδομένους μήτε πόνων Pl. Phd. 78a; ζημιοῦσθαι χρήμασιν Id. Lg. 721b; even of debts, διαλῦσαι τὰ χ. D. 20.12; δεθέντ’ ἐπὶ χρήμασιν ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ Id. 24.168. — Acc. to Poll. 9.87 the Ion. used also the sg. in this sense, and so we find, ἐπὶ κόσῳ ἂν χρήματι..; for how much money.. ? Answ. ἐπ’ οὐδενί, Hdt. 3.38; ταύτην (sc. τὴν χλανίδα) πωλέω μὲν οὐδενὸς χ. δίδωμι δὲ ἄλλως ib. 139; also in Thgn. 197, χ. δ’ ὃ μὲν Διόθεν καὶ σὺν δίκῃ ἀνδρὶ γένηται; in Att., οὐδενὸς ἂν χ. δεξάμενοι at no price, And. 2.4; and in later Prose, fund, sum of money, Arch. f. Religionswiss. 10.211 (Cos, ii B. C.); τὸ πλῆθος τοῦ χ. D.S. 13.106, cf. Acts 4:37, Luc. VH 1.20; χρήματα merchandise, Heraclit. 90, X. HG 1.6.37, Th. 3.74; property, substance, Berl.Sitzb. 1927.161 (Cyrene).

II generally, thing, matter, affair, esp. in and Ion., h.Merc. 332, Hes. Op. 344, 402; χρημάτων ἄελπτον οὐδέν Archil. 74; πάντων χ. δικαιότατον Mimn. 8; πρῶτον χρημάτων πάντων Hdt. 7.145; ἀντὶ πάντων χ. on every account, And. 2.21; δεινότατον ἁπάντων χρημάτων ib. 1; πᾶν χ. ἐκίνεε ‘left no stone unturned’, Hdt. 5.96; τεκμαίρει χρῆμ’ ἕκαστον ‘deeds show the man’, Pi. O. 6.74; πάντων χ. μέτρον ἄνθρωπος Protag. 1; περαίνεται τὸ χ. the issue is being decided, Plu. Caes. 47: pl., simply, things, ὁμοῦ πάντα χ. ἦν Anaxag. 1, cf. Pl. Cra. 440a, Euthd. 294d, Plot. 4.2.1.

2. χρῆμα is freq. expressed where it might be omitted, δεινὸν χ. ἐποιεῦντο Hdt. 8.16; οἷόν τι χ. ποιήσειε ib. 138; ἐς ἀφανὲς χ. ἀποστέλλειν ἀποικίην to send out a colony without any certain destination, Id. 4.150; freq. in Trag., τί χρῆμα; = τί; what? τί χ. λεύσσω; A. Pr. 300, Ch. 10; or why? E. Alc. 512; so in gen., τοῦ χ. (sc. ἕνεκα); Ar. Nu. 1223; τί χ. δρᾷς; S. Aj. 288, cf. Ph. 1231; τί χ. πάσχει; E. Hipp. 909; τί δ’ ἐστὶ χρῆμα; what is the matter? A. Ch. 885; πικρόν τί μοι δοκεῖ χ. εἶναι Pl. Grg. 485b; ἡδύ Id. Tht. 209e, al.; μάλιστα χρημάτων most of anything, i. e. certainly, Anon. Oxy. 1611.68 (iii A. D.); cf. χρέος 11.2.
3. used in periphrases to express something strange or extraordinary of its kind, ὑὸς χ. μέγα a huge monster of a boar, Hdt. 1.36; ἦν τοῦ χειμῶνος χ. ἀφόρητον Id. 7.188; τὸ χ. τῶν νυκτῶν ὅσον what a business the nights are! Ar. Numbers 2:1-34; λιπαρὸν τὸ χ. τῆς πόλεως what a grand city! Id. Av. 826, cf. Lys. 83; κλέπτον τὸ χ. τἀνδρός a thievish sort of fellow, Id. V. 933; τὸ χ. τοῦ νοσήματος Id. Lys. 1085; μακάριον.. λέγεις τυράννου χ. your tyrant- creature, Pl. R. 567e; χ. θαυμαστὸν γυναικός Plu. Ant. 31: without a gen., ἔλαφον, καλόν τι χ. καὶ μέγα X. Cyr. 1.4.8; σοφόν τοι χρῆμ’ ἄνθρωπος truly a clever creature is he! Theoc. 15.83; κοῦφον χ. ποιητής ἐστιν καὶ πτηνὸν καὶ ἱερόν, of the poet, Pl. Ion 534b; χ. καλόν τι such a fine thing! Theoc. 15.23; also in a periphrastic use, οὐδὲν χ. τοῦ ἀγκῶνος κάμψαι δύνανται cannot bend the elbow at all, Hp. Fract. 42. so, to express a great number or mass, as we say, a deal, a heap of.., πολλόν τι χ. τῶν τέκνων, χ. πολλὸν ἀρδίων, νεῶν, Hdt. 3.109, 4.81, 6.43; χ. πολλόν τι χρυσοῦ Id. 3.130; σμικρὸν τὸ χ. τοῦ βίου E. Supp. 953; ὅσον τὸ χ. παρνόπων what a lot of locusts! Ar. Ach. 150; ὅσον τὸ χ. τοῦ πλακοῦντος Id. Eq. 1219; πολὺ χ. τεμαχῶν Id. Pl. 894; τὸ χ. τῶν κόπων ὅσον what a lot of them! Id. Ra. 1278; τῶν λαμπάδων ὅσον τὸ χ. Id. Th. 281; also of persons, χ. θηλειῶν woman kind, E. Ph. 198; σφενδονητῶν πάμπολύ τι χ. X. Cyr. 2.1.5; μέγα χ. Λακαινᾶν Theoc. 18.4: without a gen., ὅσον τὸ χ. ἐπὶ δεῖπνον ἦλθε what a crowd.. ! Ar. Pax 1192.

III (χράω (B) A)

oracle, Emp. 115.1.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
χρῆμα, χρηματος, τό (χράομαι), in Greek writings whatever is for use, whatever one uses, a thing, matter, affair, event, business; specifically, money (rarely so in the singular in secular authors, as Herodotus 3, 38; Diodorus 13, 106 (cf. Liddell and Scott, under the word I. under the end)): Acts 4:37; plural riches (often in Greek writings from Homer, Odyssey 2, 78; 16, 315 etc. down), Mark 10:24 (T WH omit; Tr marginal reading brackets the clause); οἱ τά χρήματα ἔχοντες, they that have riches, Mark 10:23; Luke 18:24; money, Acts 8:18, 20; Acts 24:26 (for כֶּסֶף, silver, Job 27:17; for נִכָסִים, riches, Joshua 22:8; 2 Chronicles 1:11f).

Question 429

χρηματίζω

Answer 429

negotiate, have dealings with, transact business, manage public affairs; to advise or counsel - especially about public matters; to make answer (in an oracle), give an answer, to warn, reveal; passive, I am warned by God; I receive a name, am called

1) to transact business, esp. to manage public affairs
1a) to advise or consult with one about public affairs
1b) to make answer to those who ask for advice, present enquiries
or requests, etc.
1b1) of judges, magistrates, rulers, kings
2) to give a response to those consulting an oracle, to give a
divine command or admonition, to teach from heaven
2a) to be divinely commanded, admonished, instructed
2b) to be the mouthpiece of divine revelations, to promulgate the
commands of God
3) to assume or take to one’s self a name from one’s public business
3a) to receive a name or title, be called

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
χρημᾰτ-ίζω,

fut. -ίσω Romans 7:3, Att. χρημᾰτ-ιῶ Lycurg. 37: pf. κεχρημάτικα Din. 1.103, OGI 106.7 (Egypt, ii B. C.): (χρῆμα): —

Prose Verb, negotiate, have dealings, esp. in money matters (in this sense mostly Med. (v. infr.11)), Th. 1.87, 5.61, Plb. 5.81.5; χ. τι Th. 6.62, Isoc. 4.157, Plu. Them. 18.

2. of public assemblies, deliberate, περὶ Εὐριπίδου ὅ τι χρὴ παθεῖν Ar. Th. 377, cf. Arist. Pol. 1298b29, Rh. 1359b3, Lexap. D. 21.8; τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν δημοσίων Plu. Tim. 38; περὶ ὧν ἂν ἅπαξ γνῷ τὸ δικαστήριον, πάλινχρηματίσαι D. 24.55; of presiding officers, conduct business, Decr. ap. D. 18.75, cf. Aeschin. 1.23; of the βουλή, D. 18.169; ὅσα δεῖ χρηματίσαι τὴν βουλήν Arist. Ath. 43.3. c. dat., transact business with, τῇ βουλῇ, τῷ δήμῳ, X. Ath. 3.1; negotiate with, πόλεσι περὶ φιλίας Th. 5.5: abs., ib. 61; ἰδίᾳ χ., of intriguing persons, D. 19.278; χ. ὑπὲρ δημοσίων καὶ κοινῶν πραγμάτων Ael. VH 3.4: — Med., X. Ath. 3.3.
3. give audience to, πρεσβευταῖς Plb. 3.66.6, cf. Jul. Or. 1.13a.
4. of an oracle, give a response to those who consult it, LXX Jeremiah 26:2(33).2, al., D.S. 15.10, JAJ 11.8.4, Plu. 2.435c, Porph. Abst. 2.48; δι’ ὕδατος Iamb. Myst. 3.11; of gods, give ear to, χ. τοῖς εὐχομένοις Luc. Pseudol. 8: — Pass., receive an answer, warning, in NT of divine warnings or revelations, Matthew 2:12, etc.; ὑπ’ ἀγγέλου Acts 10:22; ἦν αὐτῷ κεχρηματισμένον a warning had been given him, Luke 2:26; χ. ὑπὸ δαιμονίων καὶ φαντασίας εἰδώλων Vett.Val. 67.5.
5. issue ordinances, etc., χ. ἀπορρήσεις Ph. 2.438; administer justice, ἐν τῷ Προσωπίτῃ OGI l.c.; ταῖς πόλεσι App. Hisp. 98. issue orders for payment, pay, ἀπὸ τῆς.. τραπέζης PGrenf. 2.23.4 (ii B. C.); τιϝι Ostr.Bodl. i248 (ii B. C.); λόγον χ. ἐς τὰ δαμόσια γράμματα furnish an account.., Arch. f. Religionswiss. 10.211 (Cos, ii B. C.): — Pass., ἐχρηματίσθη πολλὰ διάφορα he was furnished with large sums, Aristeas 9.
6. take cognizance of, decide upon petitions, [ ἐντευξιν] χ. PEnteux. 75.9 (iii B. C.), PFay. 12.28 (ii B. C.); ἔντευξις κεχρηματισμένη PPetr. 2p.3 (iii B. C.).
7. generally, have dealings with, stand in any relation to a person, οὐδὲν αὐτῷ (sic legendum videtur) πρὸς γένος ἐχρημάτιζεν Ctes. Fr. 29.2: hence even μόλις ταῖς ἀναγκαίαις [ὀρέξεσι] χ. to be influenced, affected by them, Plu. 2.125b.
8. Astrol., operate, of influences, Vett.Val. 5.7.

II Med., χρηματίζομαι: fut. Att. -ιοῦμαι Lys. 29.14, etc.: pf. κεχρημάτισμαι Din. 1.15: — negotiate or transact business for oneself or to one’s own profit, make money, οἰόμενοι χρηματιεῖσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ μαχεῖσθαι Th. 7.13; χρηματιούμενος ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς ὑμᾶς φιλοτιμησόμενος Lys. l.c.; οἱ χρηματισάμενοι Pl. R. 330c; ἄλλῳ χ. καὶ οὐχ αὑτῷ Id. Grg. 452e; esp. by base arts, ἐξ αὐτῆς τῆς πόλεως Din. l. c., cf. Isa 9.25; χ. ἀπό τινος to make money of or from a thing, Pl. Sph. 225e; ἀπὸ τῶν κοινῶν Arist. Pol. 1286b14; ἀπὸ γεωμετρίας Iamb. Comm.Math. 25; ἔκ τινος Lys. 25.3; ἐ, φιλοσοφίας Isoc. 11.1; also c. acc. cogn., χ. τὸν ἐκ γῆς χρηματισμόν Id. Lg. 949e, cf. Grg. 467d; χρήματα X. Cyr. 3.3.5.

2. generally, transact business, have dealings with.., τινι Hdt. 3.118, 7.163.
3. c. acc. rei, χ. τὸ νόμισμα traffic in money, like a money-lender or banker, Arist. Pol. 1257b34; but c. acc. pers., χ. τινας make money out of any one, i. e. get it from them by extortion, Plb. 32.5.13; so χ. παρὰ τῶν νεωτέρων Isoc. 10.6.

III in later writers, from Plb. downwards, the Act. χρηματίζω takes some special senses: 1 to take and bear a title or name, to be called or styled so and so, χρηματίζειν βασιλεύς Plb. 5.57.2, 30.2.4, cf. Aristeas 298; Πτολεμαῖος.. νέος Διόνυσος χ. D.S. 1.44; ἐχρημάτιζε Χαλκηδόνιος, Κρητικός, Str. 13.1.55, App. Sic. 6; νέα Ἶσις ἐχρημάτιζε Plu. Ant. 54; μὴ πατρόθεν, ἀλλ’ ἀπὸ μητέρων χ. to call themselves not after their fathers, but after their mothers, Id. 2.248d; χ. ἀπὸ τοῦ δήμου Harp. s.v. δημοτευόμενος; χ. τοὺς μαθητὰς Χριστιανούς Acts 11:26; τιμῆς καὶ πίστεως χ. ἄξιοι to be deemed.., App. BC 2.111.

2. generally, to be called, μοιχαλίς Romans 7:3 : μήτηρ Ph. 1.440; καὶ ὡς χ. ‘and so forth’ (omitting some of the writer’s names), POxy. 100.1 (ii A. D.), etc.; also c. dat., ἀεὶ -ίζων τῷ προκειμένῳ ὀνοματίῳ ib. 2131.8 (iii A. D.).
3. change or be changed, εἴς τι Gp. 12.1.9.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
χρηματίζω; future χρηματίσω (Romans 7:3 (cf. Buttmann, 37 (33)); in Greek writings everywhere the Attic χρηματιω, so too Jeremiah 32:16 (); Jeremiah 33:2 (); 1 aorist ἐχρηματισμα; perfect passive, κεχρηματισμαι; 1 aorist passive, ἐχρηματίσθην; (χρῆμα business); in prose writings from Herodotus down;

1. “to transact business, especially to manage public affairs; to advise or consult with one about public affairs; to make answer to those who ask advice, present inquiries or requests,” etc.; used of judges, magistrates, rulers, kings. Hence, in some later Greek writings,
2. to give a response to those consulting an oracle (Diodorus 3, 6; 15, 10; Plutarch, mor., p. 435 c. (i. e. de defect. oracc. 46); several times in Lucian); hence, used of God in Josephus, Antiquities 5, 1, 14; 10, 1, 3; 11, 8, 4; universally, (dropping all reference to a previous consultation), to give a divine command or admonition, to teach from heaven ((Jeremiah 32:16 ())): with a dative of the person Job 40:3; passive followed by an infinitive (A. V. revealed etc.), Luke 2:26 (χρηματίζειν λόγους πρός τινα, Jeremiah 37:2 ()); passive, to be divinely commanded, admonished, instructed (R. V. warned of God), Matthew 2:12, 22; Acts 10:22; Hebrews 8:5; Hebrews 11:7 (this passive use is hardly found elsewhere except in Josephus, Antiquities 3, 8, 8; (11, 8, 4); cf. Buttmann, § 134, 4; (Winers Grammar, § 39, 1 a.)); to be the mouthpiece of divine revelations, to promulge the commands of God, (τίνι, Jeremiah 33:2 (); Jeremiah 36:23 (): of Moses, Hebrews 12:25 (R. V. warned).
3. to assume or take to oneself a name from one’s public business (Polybius, Diodorus, Plutarch, others); universally, to receive a name or title, be called: Acts 11:26; Romans 7:3 (Josephus, Antiquities (8, 6, 2); 13, 11, 3; b. j. 2, 18, 7; (c. Apion. 2, 3, 1; Philo, quod deus immut. § 25 at the end; leg. ad Gaium § 43); Ἀντίοχον τόν Ἐπιφανῆ χρηματίζοντα, Diodorus in Müller’s fragment vol. ii, p. 17, no. 21:4; Ἰάκωβον τόν χρηματισαντα ἀδελφόν τοῦ κυρίου, Acta Philippi at the beginning, p. 75; Tdf. edition; Ἰακώβου … ὅν καί ἀδελφόν τοῦ Χριστοῦ χρηματίσαι οἱ Θειοι λόγοι περιέχουσιν, Eus. h. e. 7, 19; (cf. Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word, 2)).

Question 430

χωρίον

Answer 430

a place, field

Thayer’s Definition
a space, a place, a region, a district
a piece of ground, a field, land

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
χωρ-ίον, τό,

Dim. (only in form, cf. χ. μέγιστον Th. 2.19) of χῶρος and χώρα:

1 place, spot, district, very freq. in Prose from Hdt. down wards, e.g. 2.8, 10, 29, Th. 2.54; also in Com., as Ar. Nu. 209, etc.; never in Trag.: ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ χ. from the same spot, Hdt. 1.11; χ. ἔρημον, χ. χαλεπὰ καὶ πετρώδη, Th. 4.9; χ. ἱππάσιμα X. Cyr. 1.4.14: pl., sites, οἰκίσαι χωρία Th. 1.12.

2. town, ib. 100, etc.; χωρίων κατάληψις Pl. Grg. 455b, cf. Lys. 28.7, etc.
3. landed property, estate, Th. 1.106, Pl. Lg. 844b, Lys. 7.4, IG 12.325.10; used with ἀγρός, X. HG 2.4.1, etc.
4. place of business, office, D. 45.33.
5. space, room, Th. 1.63, etc.; esp. in Geom., space enclosed by lines, area, figure, Pl. Men. 82b sq., Ar. Nu. 152, Euc. Dat. 55, Papp. 240.17: esp. rectangle, Archim. Con.Sph. 2, al.
6. passage in a book, Hdt. 2.117 (unless interpol.), Luc. Hist.Conscr. 12, Ath. 15.672a, Simp. inCael. 126.4. subject, Th. 1.97: pl., topics, Lycurg. 31.
7. Medic., part of the body, Hp. Fract. 2, cf. Aph. 1.21 (pl.); τὸ χ. τὸ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἥπατος periphr. for the gall-bladder, Id. Morb. 4.36.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
χωρίον, χωρίου, τό (diminutive of χῶρος; or χώρα), from Herodotus down;

1. a space, a place; a region, district.
2. a piece of ground, a field, land (Thucydides, Xenophon, Plato, others): Matthew 26:36; Mark 14:32; John 4:5 (A. V. parcel of ground); Acts 1:18; Acts 4:34 (plural lands); ; a farm, estate: plural Acts 28:7. (Synonym: see τόπος, at the end.)

Question 431

χωρέω

Answer 431

to make room, make room for another by withdrawing, retiring, or going forward; yield; hold; proceed

Thayer’s Definition
to leave space (which may be filled or occupied by another), to make room, give place, yield
to retire
metaph. to betake one’s self, turn one’s self
to go forward, advance, proceed, succeed
to have space or room for receiving or holding something

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
χωρ-έω,

Anacr. 108, etc.; fut. χωρήσω Il. 16.629, Hdt. 5.89, 8.68. β, Hp. Nat.Puer. 18, and in later Prose, as D.H. 4.9, Luc. DDeor. 20.15, etc.; Att. only in Th. 1.82 (exc. in compds., ἀνα-χωρήσω Id. 7.72, ἀπο- X. Eq.Mag. 6.2, προ- Th. 3.4, προς- Id. 2.2, συγ- Id. 1.140, etc.); elsewh. in Trag. and Att. always in med. form, χωρήσομαι, A. Th. 476, S. El. 404, Th. 2.20, etc., and freq. in compds.: aor. ἐχώρησα, χώρησα, Il. 15.655, h.Cer. 430, Th. 4.120, etc.: pf. κεχώρηκα Hdt. 1.120, 122, Th. 1.122, Hp. Acut. 19, etc.: — Pass., fut. χωρηθήσομαι (συγ-) Plb. 15.17.5: aor. ἐχωρήθην (συν-) X. HG 3.2.31, D. 38.4: pf. κεχώρηται (παρα-) D.H. 11.52, (συγ-) Pl. Phlb. 15a: (χῶρος): —

make room for another, give way, withdraw, ἐχώρησαν πάλιν αὖτις Il. 17.533; γαῖα ἔνερθε χώρησεν the earth gave way from beneath, i. e. opened, h.Cer. l.c.; χ. πρύμναν, = κρούεσθαι πρύμναν, put back, retire, E. Andr. 1120; χωρεῖτε begone! A. Eu. 196, cf. E. Or. 1678, Med. 820, etc. — The uncom pounded word does not occur in Od. and only fut. and aor. in Il. — Construction: 1 c. gen. rei vel loci, χώρησεν τυτθὺν ἐπάλξιος Il. 12.406; νεῶν ἐχώρησαν 15.655; νεκροῦ χωρήσουσι 16.629; also νηῶν ἄπο.. ἐχώρησαν προτὶ Ἴλιον 13.724; ἀπὸ κρατερῆς ὑσμίνης χωρήσαντες 18.244; ἔξω τῶνδε δωμάτων χωρεῖτε A. Eu. 180; ἐκ πυλῶν Id. Th. 476; ἐκ προαστίου S. El. 1432.

2. c. dat. pers., give way to one, make way for him, retire before him, οὐδ’ ἂν Ἀχιλλῆϊ χωρήσειεν Il. 13.324, cf. 17.101.

II after Hom., go forward, advance, τὸ πῦρ.. πρόσω κεχώρηκεν Call. in PSI 11.1216.34; simply, go or come, Hdt. 1.10, etc.; go on one’s journey, travel, S. OT 750; χ. ἐπ’ ἀδελφεοῦ βίαν Pi. N. 10.73, etc.; ἐς ναῦν A. Pers. 379; χ. πρὸς ἔργον come to action, S. Aj. 116, Ar. Ra. 884; χ. πρὸς ἧπαρ go to one’s heart, S. Aj. 938; χωρῶν ἀπείλει νῦν go and threaten, Id. OC 1038; διὰ φόνου χ. E. Andr. 176; τὰ τοξεύματα ἐχώρει διὰ τῶν ἀσπίδων, of weapons, X. An. 4.2.28; τὸ ὕδωρ κατὰ τὰς τάφρους ἐχώρει it went off by.., Id. Cyr. 7.5.16; ἄνω ποταμῶν χωροῦσι παγαί E. Med. 410 (lyr.), cf. X. HG 2.4.10; χώρει κάτω go downwards, i.e. beginning from the upper parts of the body, A. Pr. 74; διὰ στόμα χωροῦντα.. ἀφρόν E. Med. 1174; χ. κύκλῳ [ὁ ποταυός ] Pl. Phd. 113b; ὁμόσε χ. τισί to join battle, Th. 6.101, Ar. Lys. 451, cf. ὁμόσε 1.2; χ. ὁμόσε τοῖς λόγοις E. Or. 921; χ. δειπνήσων Ar. Fr. 272; πρὸς τὸ ἱερὸν χωρῆσαι δρόμῳ Th. 1.134; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω S. El. 1491, Ph. 674; χώρει, ξέν’, ἔξω Id. OC 824: of Time, νὺξ ἐχώρει the night was passing, near an end, A. Pers. 384; βιοστερὴς χ. wander about, S. OC 747: Medic., of excretions, τὰ χωρέοντα μὴ τῷ πλήθει τεκμαίρεσθαι, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἂν χωρέῃ οἷα δεῖ Hp. Aph. 1.23; also of the menses, Id. Mul. 1.2: c. acc. loci, Κεκροπίαν χθόνα χ. E. Ion 1572. to be in motion or flux, πάντα χωρεῖ Heraclit. ap. Pl. Cra. 402a, cf. Hp. Vict. 1.5.

2. go forward, make progress, τοὔργον οὐ χωρεῖ πρόσω A. Dict. in PSI 11.1209.16; πῶς οὖν οὐ χωρεῖ τοὔργον; Ar. Pax 472 (lyr.); χωρεῖ.. τὸ πρᾶγμα ib. 509; τόκοι χωροῦσιν Id. Numbers 18:1-32; χωρεῖ τὸ κακόν Id. V. 1483, Nu. 907 (both anap.).
3. come to an issue, turn out in a certain manner, παρὰ σμικρὰ.. κεχώρηκε have come to little, of the event of oracles, Hdt. 1.120; εὐτυχέως χ. Id. 3.39; κακῶς χ. turn out ill, Pl. Lg. 684e; δόξα δ’ ἐχώρει δίχα E. Hec. 117 (anap.), cf. Hel. 759: freq. abs., advance, succeed, Hdt. 3.42, 5.89; πάντα διὰ πράξεων καὶ.. ἀγώνων κεχωρηκότα.. Ῥωμαίοις Onos. Praef. 8; τὰ πράγματα χωρεῖ κατὰ λόγον Plb. 28.17.12; ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμὸς οὐ χωρεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν John 8:37 (unless in signf. 111. infr.); also, to be possible, οὐ γάρ οἱ χωρεῖ περιβαλεῖν κτλ. Ael. VH 1.3 (sed leg. ἐγχωρεῖ).
4. to be spread abroad, ἡ φάτις κεχώρηκε a report spread, Hdt. 1.122; διὰ πάντων οὕτως ἐχώρει τίς ἕψεται; “” X. Cyr. 3.3.62; κλαυθμὸς διὰ πάντων ἐχώρει Plu. Rom. 19; ὄνομα δόξῃ διὰ πάντων ἀνθρώπων κεχωρηκός a name spread abroad, ib. 1.
5. of money, to be spent, τὰς μὲν δαπάνας χωρεῖν ἐντελεῖς ἐκ τῶν οἴκων, τὰ δὲ ἔργα μὴ τελείσθαι λυσιτελούντως πρὸς τὴν δαπάνην X. Oec. 20.21; τὰ προσγεινόμενα χωρήσει εἰς ἃ ἂν ὁ δῆμος θελήσῃ IG 5(1).18 B 6 (Sparta), cf. 1432.4 (Messene, i B. C. /i A. D.).

III trans., have room for a thing, hold, contain, freq. of measures, κρητὴρ χωρέων ἀμφορέας ἑξακοσίους Hdt. 1.51, cf. 192, 4.61, Ar. Nu. 1238, Pl. Smp. 214a; οὐκ ἐχώρησεν αὐτοὺς ἡ πόλις Th. 2.17, cf. D. 21.200, Aeschin. 3.164, E. Hipp. 941; οὐκ ἐχώρει αὐτοὺς ἡ γῆ κατοικεῖν ἅμα LXX Genesis 13:6; ποτήρια.. οὐχὶ χωροῦντ’ οὐδὲ κόγχην Pherecr. 143.3 (troch.); κοτύλας χ. δέκα Men. Kol.Fr. 2, cf. Diph. 96, etc.; χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς take us into your hearis! 2 Corinthians 7:2; οὐ πάντες χωροῦσι τὸν λόγον τοῦτον find room for.., Matthew 19:11 (so perh. intr., John 8:37, v. supr. 11.3); to be capable of, τὸ Κάτωνος φρόνημα Plu. Cat.Mi. 64: c. inf., to be capable of doing, οὐ χωρεῖ μεγάλην διδαχὴν ἀδίδακτος ἀκούειν (v. l. for ἀκουή) Ps.-Phoc. 89; δωρεὰν ὅσην οὐκ ἐχωρήσατε αἰτεῖσθαι IG 7.2713.11 (Acraeph., Oratio Neronis).

2. impers., ὅταν μηκέτι χωρῇ αὐταῖς ἐργαζομέναις [ταῖς μελίτταις ] when there is no more room for them, Arist. HA 626b11.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
χωρέω, χώρω; future infinitive χωρήσειν (John 21:25 Tr WH); 1 aorist ἐχώρησα; (χῶρος, a place, space, and this from ΧΑΩ, cf. χώρα);

1. properly, to leave a space (which may be occupied or filled by another), to make room, give place, yield (Homer, Iliad 12, 406; 16, 592; others); to retire, pass: of a thing, εἰς τί, Matthew 15:17. metaphorically, to betake oneself, turn oneself: εἰς μετνοιαν, 2 Peter 3:9 (A. V. come; cf. μετάνοια, p. 406a).
2. to go forward, advance, proceed (properly, νύξ, Aeschylus Pers. 384); to make progress, gain ground, succeed (Plato, Eryx., p. 398 b.; legg. 3, p. 684 e.; (χωρεῖ τό κακόν, Aristophanes nub. 907, vesp. 1483; others); Polybius 10, 35, 4; 28, 15, 12; others): ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμός οὐ χωρεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν, gaineth no ground among you or within you (R. V. hath not free course (with marginal reading hath no place) in you), John 8:37 (cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars 3:at the passage).
3. to have space or room for receiving or holding something (German fassen); properly: τί, a thing to fill the vacant space, John 21:25 (not Tdf.); of a space large enough to hold a certain number of people, Mark 2:2 (Genesis 13:6 (cf. Plutarch, praec. ger. reipub. 8, 5, p. 804 b.)); of measures, which hold a certain quantity, John ii 6; 1 Kings 7:24 (38); 2 Chronicles 4:5, and in Greek writings from Herodotus down. Metaphorically, to receive with the mind or understanding, to understand (τό Κατωνος φρωνημα, Plutarch, Cat. min. 64; ὅσον αὐτῷ ἡ ψυχή χωρεῖ, Aelian v. h. 3, 9); to be ready to receive, keep in mind, and practise: τόν λέγων τοῦτον, this saying, Matthew 19:11f ((cf. Plutarch, Lycurgus, 13, 5)); τινα, to receive one into one’s heart, make room for one in one’s heart, 2 Corinthians 7:2. (Compare: ἀναχωρέω, ἀποχωρέω, ἐκχωρέω, ὑποχωρέω. Synonym: cf. ἔρχομαι.)

Question 432

ἀναχωρέω

Answer 432

I depart

Thayer's Definition
to go back, return
to withdraw
so as to leave a room
of those who through fear seek some other place, or shun sight

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἀναχωρ-έω,

Locr., Cret. ἀνχ-,

I

1. go back, πόλινδε ἂψ ἀναχωρήσουσιν Il. 10.210, cf. Od. 17.461. walk backwards, of oxen feeding, Hdt. 4.183.
2. in Il., mostly, retire, withdraw from battle, ἀλλά σ’ ἔγωγ’ ἀναχωρήσαντα κελεύω ἐς πληθὺν ἰέναι Il. 17.30; τόφρ’ ἀναχωρείτω 11.189, cf. 4.305, 20.335, etc.: in Prose, μάχης οὔσης εἰς τοὐπίσω ἀ. Lys. 14.6; φυγῇ ἀ. Pl. Smp. 221a; generally, retire, withdraw, μεγάροιο μυχόνδε Od. 22.270; ὀπίσω ἀ. Hdt. 5.94, etc.; ἐς τοὔπισθεν Ar. Pl. 1208; ἀνεκεχωρήκεσαν they had retired or returned, Th. 8.15, cf. IG 9(1).334 (Locr.): with Preps. denoting motion to or from, ἐς τὴν ἀκρόπολιν Hdt. 3.143; ἐπ’ οἴκου Th. 1.30; ὑπὸ Βοιωτῶν ἐς Ἀθήνας were forced by them to retire to.., Hdt. 5.61; ἀπό Pl. Smp. l.c.

II come back or revert to the rightful heir, ἡ βασιληΐη ἀνεχώρησε ἐς τὸν παῖδα Hdt. 7.4; ἡ ποινὴ ἀ. εἰς ἡμᾶς Antipho 2.1.3, cf. Leg.Gort. 11.10.

III metaph.,

1. withdraw, retire, ἐξ αἰσθήσεων Pl. Phd. 83a; ἀ. ἐκ τῶν πραγμάτων retire from public life, from the world, Plb. 29.25.5, cf. Cic. Att. 9.4.2, Matthew 2:14,al.: abs., withdraw, retire, Pl. Smp. 175a, cf. Ar. Nu. 524; ἀνακεχωρηκυῖα χώρα inland spot, Thphr. HP 9.7.4; ἀ. ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Plb. 2.11.16; ἀνακεχωρηκός ῥῆμα, ὄνομα obsolete, D.H. Rh. 10.7; recondite, ἱστορία Phld. Rh. 1.157S. = συγχωρέω, πάντες ἀνεχώρησαν συμπεραίνεσθαι τὸ μίασμα Procop. Arc. 10.
2. strike, refuse to work, PTeb. 26.18, 41.4, al.; ἀνακεχωρηκότα σώματα ib.5.6.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀναχωρέω, ἀναχόρω; 1 aorist ἀνεχώρησα; (frequent in Greek writings);

1. to go back, return: Matthew 2:12f (others refer this to next entry).
2. to withdraw;
   a. universally, so as to leave room: Matthew 9:24.
   b. of those who through fear seek some other place, or shun sight: Matthew 2:14, 22; Matthew 4:12; Matthew 12:15; Matthew 14:13; Matthew 15:21; Matthew 27:5; Mark 3:7; John 6:15 (Tdf. φεύγει); Acts 23:19 (κατ’ ἰδίαν); Acts 26:31.

Question 433

ψεῦδος

Answer 433

a lie

Thayer's Definition
a lie
conscious and intentional falsehood
in a broad sense, whatever is not what it seems to be
of perverse, impious, deceitful precepts

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ψεῦδος, εος, τό,

dat. pl. ψεύδεσσι, v. cross ψευδής 1.2: (ψεύδω): —

falsehood, lie, ψεύδεα.. ἐτύμοισιν ὁμοῖα Od. 19.203, Hes. Th. 27; ψεῦδός κεν φαῖμεν Il. 2.81; ψεῦδος δ’ οὐκ ἐρέει Od. 3.20; εἴ τε ψεῦδος ὑπόσχεσις εἴ τε καὶ οὐκί whether the promise be a lie or no, Il. 2.349; οὔτι ψεῦδος ἐμὰς ἄτας κατέλεξας 9.115; ψεύδεσσιν θέλγειν τινά 21.276, cf. 23.576, Od. 14.387; οὐ ψεύδεϊ τέγξω λόγον Pi. O. 4.19; ψ. ποικίλα, αἰόλον ψ., Id. O. 1.29, N. 8.25; ψ. γλυκύ a sweet deceit, Id. P. 2.37; ψεῦδος οὐδὲν ὧν λέγω S. El. 1220; οὐδὲν ἕρπει ψ. εἰς γῆρας χρόνου Id. Fr. 62; εἴ τι ψεῦδος εἴρηκα Antipho 3.4.2; ψ. ἐπιφέρειν Aeschin. 3.41: ψ. λέγειν distd. fr. ψεύδεσθαι, Stoic. 2.42.

2. in Logic, false conclusion, fallacy, συλλογισμὸς τοῦ ψεύδους Arist. APr. 61b3; συμβαίνει ψ. ib. 37a36: — in NT of what is opposed to religious truth, false doctrine, Romans 1:25; ποιῶν βδέλυγμα καὶ ψ., i.e. doing what is repugnant to the true faith, Revelation 21:27; of false anatomical doctrine, τὸ οἴεσθαι.. ψ. ἐστι Sor. 1.17.

II in Theoc. 12.24 ψεύδεα are spots, pimples on the nose; supposed to be characteristic of liars, cf. Sch. ad loc.; cf. ψυδράκιον.

2. white spots on the fingernails, Alex.Aphr. Pr.Anecd. 2.58.

III In Pl. ψεῦδος is freq. opp. ἀληθές, Grg. 505e, R. 382d, Euthd. 272b, al.; so almost like an Adj. (cf. ψευδής init.), ὄνομα ψεῦδος καὶ ἀληθὲς λέγειν Cra. 385c; παράδοξόν τε καὶ ψεῦδος ὄνομα Plt. 281b: cf. E. Heracl. 462 codd.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ψεῦδος, ψευδοῦς, τό, from Homer down, the Sept. for כָּזָב שֶׁקֶר, כַּחַשׁ, a lie; conscious and intentional falsehood: universally, Revelation 14:5 (where Rec. δόλος); opposed to ἡ ἀλήθεια, John 8:44; Ephesians 4:25; οὐκ ἐστι ψεῦδος, opposed to ἀληθές ἐστιν, is no lie, 1 John 2:27; τέρατα ψευδοῦς (A. V. lying wonders) exhibited for the treacherous purpose of deceiving men, 2 Thessalonians 2:9; in a broad sense, whatever is not what it professes to be: so of perverse, impious, deceitful precepts, 2 Thessalonians 2:11; 1 John 2:21; of idolatry, Romans 1:25; ποιεῖν ψεῦδος, to act in accordance with the precepts and principles of idolatry, Revelation 21:27; Revelation 22:15 (cf. Revelation 21:8 and p. 526b middle).

Question 434

ψεύστης

Answer 434

a liar

Thayer’s Definition
a liar
one who breaks faith
a false and faithless man

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ψεύσ-της, ου, ὁ, (ψεύδω)

liar, cheat, Il. 24.261; ἀνὴρ ψ. Hdt. 7.209, cf. LXX Si. 15.8: c. gen. rei, ὧν.. ψεῦσται φανούμεθα wherein we shall be found to be liars, S. Ant. 1195, cf. Arist. EN 1127b16, AP 12.70 (Mel.), Phld. Herc. 1457.12.

2. Adj., = cross ψευδής, lying, false, ψ. λόγος Pi. N. 5.29; ψεύστης δ’ οτος ἔπεστι λίθος, of a cenotaph, AP 7.273 (Leon.); τὸν ψεύσταν δέ με τύμβον.. θέντο· τί θαῦμα; Κρῆτες ὅπου ψεῦσται, καὶ Διός ἐστι τάφος ib. 275 (Gaet.), alluding to Κρῆτες ἀεὶ ψεῦσται, Epimenid. 1, which is cited by Call. Jov. 8, Titus 1:12.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ψεύστης, ψευστου, ὁ (ψεύδω), from Homer down, a liar: John 8:44, 55; 1 John 1:10; 1 John 2:4, 22; 1 John 4:20; 1 John 5:10; 1 Timothy 1:10; Titus 1:12; (Revelation 21:8 Lachmann (others ψευδής, which see)); one who breaks faith, a false or faithless man (see ψεῦσμα), Romans 3:4 cf. Proverbs 19:22.

Question 435

εἰμι

εἰμί

Answer 435

I am

Question 436

εἶ

Answer 436

you are
or
you are going, you are on your way, you go

Present Active Indicative of εἶμι (ἰ), GO
First Person Singular	εἶμι
Second Person Singular	εἶ
Third Person Singular	εἶσι
Second Person Dual	ἴτον
Third Person Dual	ἴτον
First Person Plural	ἴμεν
Second Person Plural	ἴτε
Third Person Plural	ἴᾱσι

Present Active Indicative of εἰμί (ἐσ), BE
First Person Singular	εἰμί
Second Person Singular	εἶ
Third Person Singular	ἐστί
Second Person Dual	ἐστόν
Third Person Dual	ἐστόν
First Person Plural	ἐσμέν
Second Person Plural	ἐστέ
Third Person Plural	εἰσί

Question 437

ἐστί(ν)

Answer 437

he/she/it is

Question 438

ἐσμέν

Answer 438

we are

Question 439

ἐστέ

Answer 439

y’all are

Question 440

εἰσί(ν)

Answer 440

they are

Question 441

τρίβος

Answer 441

a worn way, a path

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
τρίβος [ῐ], ἡ,

but ὁ in E. Or. 1251, 1258, El. 103, Plu. Arat. 22: (τρίβω): —

worn or beaten track, ἐν τρίβῳ μάλιστα οἰκημένοι in the path (of the war), Hdt. 8.140. β’ (so ἐν τ. τοῦ πολέμου κείμενος D.H. 6.34, 11.54); τ. ἁμαξήρης E. Or. 1251; λεπτὴν τ. ἐξανύσαντες Theoc. 25.156; ἡ τ. τῆς ἀτραποῦ the track of the path, D.S. 17.49; διασχισθέντες [τῆς ὁδοῦ] τρίβῳ τινί by following a track, X. Cyr. 4.5.13.

2. metaph., path, h.Merc. 448; ποίην τις βιότοιο τάμοι τρίβον; AP 9.359 (Posidipp.); βιότου τ. ὁδεύειν Anacreont. 38.2; ποίην τις πρὸς ἔρωτας ἴοι τρίβον; AP 5.301.1 (Agath.); τῆς αἰτίας ἴχνος καὶ τ. track, Plu. 2.68o f: pl., τρίβοι ἐρώτων A. Supp. 1042 (lyr.).

II rubbing, attrition, Id. Ag. 391 (lyr.); τ. κρηπῖδος the rubbing of a shoe, Aret. SD 2.12.

2. socket, friction-joint, ἡ κεφαλὴ τοῦ βραχίονος.. τρίβον ἑωυτῇ πεποιημένη Hp. Art. 7, cf. 55; τὸ ἔθος τρίβον ποιεῖ Id. Mochl. 41; area of friction or pressure of a bandage, Id. Off. 8.
3. delay, A. Ag. 197 (lyr.).

III bodily exercise, Nic. Al. 592 (pl.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
τρίβος, τρίβου, ἡ (τρίβῳ to rub), a worn way, a path: Matthew 3:3; Mark 1:3; Luke 3:4, from Isaiah 40:3. (Homer hymn. Merc. 448; Herodotus, Euripides, Xenophon, others; the Sept. for נְתִיבָה, אֹרַח, מְסִלָּה, דֶּרֶך, etc.)

Question 442

εὐθύς

Answer 442

straight, level, immediately, upright, sincere

Thayer’s Definition
straight, level
straight forward, upright, true, sincere
straightway, immediately, forthwith

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
εὐθύς, εῖα, ύ,

Ion. and ἰθύς (q.v.: so always in Hom.and Hdt.),

I

1. straight, direct, whether vertically or horizontally, opp. σκολιός, καμπύλος, Pl. Tht. 194b, R. 602c, etc.; κατὰ τὸ εὐθὺ ἑστάναι stands still with reference to the vertical, of a spinning top, ib. 436e; εὐ. πλόος, ὁδοί, Pi. O. 6.103, N. 1.25, etc.; εὐθυτέρα ὁδός X. Cyr. 1.3.4; ὁδοὺς εὐθείας ἔτεμε Th. 2.100; ῥόμβος ἀκόντων Pi. O. 13.93; εὐθείᾳ (sc. ὁδῷ) by the straight road, Pl. Lg. 716a; εὐθεῖαν ἕρπε A. Fr. 195; τὴν εὐ. E. Med. 384; ἐπ’ εὐθείας D.S. 19.38, Ascl. Tact. 2.6, Plot. 2.1.8; so also εἰς τὸ εὐ.βλέπειν X. Eq. 7.17, etc.; πλήρης τοῦ εὐθέος tired of going straight forward, ib. 14; ἡ ἐς τὸ εὐ. τῆς ῥητορικῆς ὁδός the direct road to.., Luc. Rh. Proverbs 10:1-32; κατ’ εὐθύ on level ground, LXX 3 Ki. 21.23; but ἡ κατ’ εὐ. τάσις in the direct line, Apollon.Cit. 2; on the same side, Gal. 8.62; also, opp. εἰς τὸ ἐντός, Plot. 6.7.14.
2. in moral sense, straightforward, frank, of persons, εὐθὺν χρὴ τὸν ἑταῖρον ἔμμεν καὶ μὴ σκολιὰ φρονεῖν Scol. 16; κοινᾶνι παρ’ εὐθυτάτῳ Pi. P. 3.28; ῥῆτραι Tyrt. 4.6; τόλμα Pi. O. 13.12; δίκα Id. N. 10.12; κρῖνε δ’ εὐθεῖαν δίκην A. Eu. 433, cf. Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. 1911.134 (Gonni); ὁ εὐθὺς λόγος E. Hipp. 492; τὸ εὐ. τε καὶ τὸ ἐλεύθερον Pl. Tht. 173a; ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐθέος λέγειν to speak straight out, Th. 3.43; ἐκ τοῦ εὐ. ὑπουργεῖν outright, openly, without reserve, Id. 1.34; ἐκ τοῦ εὐ., opp. δι’ αἰνιγμάτων, Paus. 8.8.3: in fem., τὴν εὐθεῖάν τινι συνειπεῖν Plu. Cic. 7; ἁπλῶς καὶ δι’ εὐθείας Id. 2.408e; ἀπ’ εὐθείας ib.57a, Fab. 3; κατ’ εὐθεῖαν by direct reasoning, Dam. Pr. 432; μηδὲν ἐξ εὐθείας παρέχει (an amulet) does no good directly, Sor. 2.42.
3. εὐθεῖα, ἡ, as Subst., (sc. γραμμή) straight line, Arist. APr. 49b35, al., Euc. 1 Def. 7, al.; ἐπ’ εὐθείας εἶναι lie in a straight line, Archim. Con.Sph. 7, al.; ἐπὶ τὴν αὐτὴν εὐ., ἐπὶ τῆς αὐτῆς εὐ. ἐκτείνειν, in the same line, Plb. 3.113.2, 3; ἐπὶ μίαν εὐ. ib. 8: Comp., εὐθυτέρα ἡ γραμμὴ γίνεται Arist. Mech. 855a24. (sc. πτῶσις) nominative case, D.T. 636.5, A.D. Pron. 6.11, etc.; κατ’ εὐθύ in the nominative, Arist. SE 182a3. as Adv., εὐθύς and εὐθύ, the former prop. of Time, the latter of Place, Phryn. 119, etc.

I εὐθύ, of Place,

1. straight, usu. of motion or direction, εὐθὺ Πύλονδε straight to.., h.Merc. 342; εὐθὺ πρὸς τὰ νυμφικὰ λέχη S. OT 1242; εὐ. [τὴν ἐπὶ] Βαβυλῶνος straight towards.., X. Cyr. 5.2.37: and so c. gen., εὐ. τῶν κυρηβίων, εὐθὺ Πελλήνης, Ar. Eq. 254, Av. 1421; εὐ.τοῦ Διός Id. Pax 68; εὐ. τοὐρόφου Eup. 47; εὐ. τῆς σωτηρίας Ar. Pax 301, cf. Th. 8.88, etc.; ἀποθανούμενος ᾔει εὐ. τοῦ δαιμονίου in opposition to.., Pl. Thg. 129a (s.v.l.); cf. ἰθύς. νῆσον οἰκεῖ εὐθὺ Ἴστρου opposite.., Max.Tyr. 15.7.
2. = ἁπλῶς, simply, καλεῖν Thphr. HP 3.8.2, cf. 9.13.2.
3. rarely of Time, Philoch. 144, Arist. Rh. 1414b25, UPZ 77.27 (ii B.C.), PGrenf. 1.1.24 (ii B.C.), Aristeas 24, Luc. Nav. 22.

II εὐθύς,

1 of Time, straightway, forthwith, Pi. O. 8.41; ὁ δ’ εὐ. ὡς ἤκουσε A. Pers. 361; ὁ δ’ εὐ. ἐξῴμωξεν S. Aj. 317; τὸ μὲν εὐ. τὸ δὲ καὶ διανοούμενον Th. 1.1, cf. 5.3, 7.77; joined with other adverbial words, τάχα δ’ εὐ. ἰών Pi. P. 4.83; εὐ. κατὰ τάχος Th. 6.101; εὐ. παραχρῆμα (v. sub παραχρῆμα) ; εὐ. ἀπ’ αρχῆς Ar. Pax 84 (anap.); εὐ. ἐξ ἀρχῆς X. Cyr. 7.2.16; ἐξ ἀρχῆς εὐ. Arist. Pol. 1287b10; εὐ. κατ’ ἀρχάς Pl. Ti. 24b; ἀφ’ ἑσπέρας εὐ. ἤδη Luc. Gall. 1; εὐ. ἐκ νέου, ἐκ παιδός, even from one’s youth, Pl. R. 485d, 519a; εὐ. ἐκ παιδίου X. Cyr. 1.6.20: with a part., εὐ. νέοι ὄντες Th. 2.39; εὐ. ἥκων X. An. 4.7.2; εὐ. ἀπεκτονώς D. 23.127; τοῦ θέρους εὐ. ἀρχομένου just at the beginning of summer, Th. 2.47; ἀρξάμενος εὐ. καθισταμένου [τοῦ πολέμου ] from the very beginning of the war, Id. 1.1; εὐ. ἀποβεβηκότι immediately on disembarking, Id. 4.43; εὐ. γενομένοις at the moment of birth, Pl. Tht. 186b: metaph., at once, naturally, ὑπάρχει εὐθὺς γένη ἔχον τὸ ὄν Being falls at once into genera, Arist. Metaph. 1004a5, cf. Po. 1452a14: with Subst., ἡ τῶν Ἰταλιωτῶν εὐθὺς φυγή Hdn. 8.1.5.

2. less freq. in a local relation, ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως εὐ. just above the city, Th. 6.96; παρ’ αὐτὴν εὐ. ὁ ἔσπλους ἐστίν directly past it (the mole), Id. 8.90; ἐγγύτατα τούτου εὐ. ἐχομένη immediately adjoining this, ibid., cf. Theoc. 25.23; εὐ. ἐπὶ τὴν γέφυραν Foed. ap. Th. 4.118, cf. X. Cyr. 7.2.1, 2, 2.4.24, Ages. 1.29; τὴν εὐ. Ἄργους κἀπιδαυρίας ὁδόν the road leading straight to Argos, E. Hipp. 1197 (condemned by Phot.); εὐ. Λυκείου Pherecr. 110, cf. Arist. HA 498a32, etc.
3. of Manner, directly, simply, v.l. in Pl. Men. 100a.
4. like αὐτίκα 11: for instance, to take the first example that occurs, ὥσπερ ζῷον εὐθύς Arist. Pol. 1277a6, cf. Cael. 284b10, etc.; οἷον εὐθύς Cleom. 1.1, D.Chr. 11.145. regul. Adv. εὐθέως, used just as εὐθύς, S. Aj. 31, OC 994, E. Fr. 31, Pl. Phd. 63a, etc.; αἰσθόμενος εὐθέως
5. as soon as he perceived, Lys. 3.11; ἐπεὶ εὐθέως ᾔσθοντο X. HG 3.2.4; εὐθέως παραχρῆμα Antipho 1.20, D. 52.6.
6. = εὐθύς B. 11.4, οἷον εὐθέως as for example, Plb. 6.52.1, 12.5.6 (dub. sens. in Hp. Art. 55); so εὐ. alone, Ph. 2.589. (εὐθέως is the commoner form in later Greek, PCair.Zen. 34.17 (iii B.C.), etc.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
εὐθύς, εὐθεῖα, εὐθύ, the Sept. for יָשָׁר (from Pindar down), straight;

a. properly, straight, level: of a way (Matthew 3:3); Mark 1:3; Luke 3:4; Acts 9:11; εἰς εὐθεῖαν (L T Tr WH εἰς εὐθείας), namely, ὁδόν (an ellipsis common also in classical Greek cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 64, 5), Luke 3:5; εὐθεῖα ὁδός the straight, the right way, is figuratively used of true religion as a rule of life leading to its goal, i. e. to salvation, 2 Peter 2:15; αἱ ὁδοί κυρίου, the right and saving purposes of God, Acts 13:10 (Song of the Three Children, verse 3).
b. tropically, straightforward, upright, true, sincere (as often in secular authors): καρδία, Acts 8:21 (εὐθεῖς τῇ καρδία often in the Psalms, as Psalm 7:11; Psalm 31:11 (); ()).

Question 443

δερμάτινος

Answer 443

made of skin, leathern

δερμᾰτ-ινος, η, ον,

of skin, leathern, ἠρτύναντο δ’ ἐρετμὰ τροποῖς ἐν δ. Od. 4.782; ἀσπίς Hdt. 7.79; ὑμήν Arist. Fr. 335; πλοῖα Str. 16.4.19; ζώνη Mark 1:6; ὑποδήματα IG 5(1).1390.23 (Andania, i B. C.); τεύχη Inscr.Prien. 114.11,30 (i B. C.); ὄγκος Ph. 1.100; χιτών (of the human skin), Porph. Abst. 2.46.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
δερμάτινος, δερματινη, δερμάτινον (δέρμα), made of skin, leather (Vulg. pelliceus): Matthew 3:4; Mark 1:6; cf. 2 Kings 1:8. (Homer, Herodotus, Plato, Strabo, others.)

Question 444

ὀσφῦς

Answer 444

the hip, waist, loins, body; belt

Thayer's Definition
the hip (loin)
to gird, gird about, the loins
a loin, the (two) loins
the place where the Hebrews thought the generative power (semen) resided

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ὀσφῦς, ἡ,

gen. ὀσφύος: acc. ὀσφῦν, also ὀσφύα AP 12.213 (Strat.): —
1. lion or loins, lower part of the back, Epich. 80, Hp. Aët. 20, Aph. 3.23, Arist. HA 493a22, al.; opp. κῶλα, ὦμοι, A. Pr. 497, Hdt. 2.40; loin of a victim, SIG 57.9 (Milet., v B. C.), 1037.2 (iv/iii B. C.), Pherecr. 23.4, Ar. Pax 1053, Lys. 964, Men. 319.12; of wasps, ἔχουσι κέντρον ἐκ τῆς ὀ. Ar. V. 225, cf. 740 (anap.); of a horse, X. Eq. 1.12; of a fish, Antiph. 132.6 (anap.).
2. Hellenist., metaph., ὁ καρπὸς τῆς ὀ., of a son, Acts 2:30, cf. LXX Genesis 35:11, al.
3. περιζώννυσθαι or ἀναζώννυσθαι τὴν ὀσφύν gird up one’s loins, ib. Jeremiah 1:17; βυσσίνῳ ib. Daniel 10:5, cf. Luke 12:35. [ ῡ in nom. and acc. sg., which are accented ὀσφῦς, ὀσφῦν by Hdn.Gr. 2.937; ὀσφύς, -ύν freq. in codd., and this may be admitted for late writers: cf. ὀφρῦς.]

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ὀσφύς (or ὀσφύς, so R Tr in Ephesians 6:14; G in Matthew 3:4; cf. Chandler §§ 658, 659; Tdf. Proleg., p. 101), ὀσφύος, ἡ, from Aeschylus and Herodotus down;

1. the hip (loin), as that part of the body where the ζώνη was worn (the Sept. for מָתְנַיִם): Matthew 3:4; Mark 1:6; hence, περιζωννυσθαι τάς ὀσφύας, to gird, gird about, the loins, Luke 12:35; Ephesians 6:14; and ἀναζωννυσθαι τάς ὀσφύας (to gird up the loins), 1 Peter 1:13; on the meaning of these metaphorical, phrases see ἀναζώννυμι.
2. a loin, the Sept. several times for חֲלָצַיִם, the (two) loins, where the Hebrews thought the generative power (semen) resided (?); hence, καρπός τῆς ὀσφύος, fruit of the loins, offspring, Acts 2:30 (see καρπός, 1 at the end); ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος τίνος, to come forth out of one’s loins i. e. derive one’s origin or descent from one, Hebrews 7:5 (see ἐξέρχομαι, 2 b.); ἔτι ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τίνος, to be yet in the loins of someone (an ancestor), Hebrews 7:10.

Question 445

ἀκρίς

Answer 445

a locust, particularly that species which especially infests oriental countries, stripping fields and trees.

Thayer’s Definition
a locust, particularly that species which especially infests oriental countries, stripping fields and trees. Numberless swarms of them almost every spring are carried by the wind from Arabia into Palestine, and having devastated that country, migrate to regions farther north, until they perish by falling into the sea. The Orientals accustomed to feed upon locusts, either raw or roasted and seasoned with salt (or prepared in other ways), and the Israelites also were permitted to eat them.

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἄκρις, ιος, ἡ, (ἄκρος)

Noun, hill-top, mountain peak, Hom. only in Od., always in pl., ἄκριες ἠνεμόεσσαι windy mountain tops, Od. 9.400, cf. h.Cer. 382; δι’ ἄκριας through hill-country, Od. 10.281: — sg., Περγαμίης ὑπὲρ ἄκριος Epigr.Gr. 1035.8 (Pergam.).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἀκρίς, (ίδος, ἡ (from Homer down), a locust, particularly that species which especially infests oriental countries, stripping fields and trees. Numberless swarms of them almost every spring are carried by the wind from Arabia into Palestine, and having devastated that country migrate to regions farther north, until they perish by falling into the sea. The Orientals are accustomed to feed upon locusts, either raw or roasted and seasoned with salt (or prepared in other ways), and the Israelites also (according to Leviticus 11:22) were permitted to eat them; (cf. Winers RWB under the word Heuschrecken; Furrer in Schenkel iii., p. 78f; (BB. DD., under the word; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 313ff)): Matthew 3:4; Mark 1:6. A marvelous and infernal kind of locusts is described in Revelation 9:3, 7, cf. Revelation 9:2, 5f, 8-12; see Dusterdieck at the passage.

Question 446

μέλι

Answer 446

honey

μέλῐ, τό,

gen. ῐτος, etc.; dat. μέλι Philox. 3.17; gen. pl. μελίτων Emp. 128.7 (nisi leg. μελιτῶν, cf. μελιτόν): —

I

1. honey, Od. 20.69, etc.; μ. χλωρόν Il. 11.631, Od. 10.234, Xenoph. 38.1; ξανθόν Simon. 47; παμφαές A. Pers. 612; τὸ μέλι τἀττικόν Ar. Pax 252, cf. Men. 708; various kinds, Thphr. Fr. 190; said to be made from the palm (φοῖνιξ), Hdt. 1.193, cf. 4.194; μ. θανάτου σύμβολον Porph. Antr. 18.
2. in comparisons, of anything sweet, esp. of eloquence, μέλιτος γλυκίων ῥέεν αὐδή Il. 1.249, cf. Pi. O. 10 (11). 98; Σοφοκλέους τοῦ μέλιτι κεχριμένου Ar. Fr. 581; ὕπνος γλυκίων μέλιτος Mosch. 2.3; ἡ τῶν ἀνδρῶν [χολή] ἐστι πρὸς ἐκείνην μέλι Alex. 146.6: prov. μήτε μοι μ. μήτε μέλισσα, of those who refuse to take ‘the rough with the smooth’, Sapph. 113.

II sweet gum collected from certain trees, manna, Arist. Mir. 831b23; τὸ ὕον μ. Polyaen. 4.3.32; μ. ἄγριον, μαινόμενον, D.S. 19.94, Str. 12.3.18. (Cf. Goth. milip, Lat. mel.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
μέλι, μέλιτος, τό, the Sept. for דְּבַשׁ (from Homer down). honey: Revelation 10:9f; ἄγριον (which see), Matthew 3:4; Mark 1:6.

Question 447

πτύον

Answer 447

a winnowing shovel

πτύον [ ῠ], τό,

winnowing-shovel, fan, Il. 13.588 (in poet. gen. πτυόφιν ), A. Fr. 210, S. Fr. 1084, Theoc. 7.156, Porph. Antr. 35: — πτέον is Att. acc. to Ael. Dion. Fr. 288, Poll. 1.245, etc.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πτύον, πτυου, τό, frequent in classical Greek from Homer down, Attic πτεον Winers Grammar, 24 ((perhaps from the root, pu, ‘to cleanse’; cf. Curtius, p. 498f)), a winnowing-shovel (A. V. fan; cf. B. D. under the word , at the end; Rich, Dict. of Antiq., see under the words, ventilabrum, pala 2, vannus): Matthew 3:12; Luke 3:17.

Question 448

ἅλων

Answer 448

a ground plot or threshing floor, i.e. a place in the field made hard after the harvest by a roller, where grain was threshed out

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἅλων, ωνος, ἡ, = cross ἅλως (usu. in sense 1), rare in nom., Thphr. Sign. 31 (pl., in sense 11.1), LXX Hosea 9:2, BGU 651.5 (ii A.D.); more freq. in oblique cases, BCH 39.55 (Arcad., iv B.C., in sense of plantation (?)), PLille 13.3, Arist. Vent. 973a14, LXX Genesis 50:10, etc.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἅλων, (ωνος, ἡ (in the Sept. also ὁ, cf. Ruth 3:2; Job 39:12), equivalent to ἡ ἅλως, genitive ἅλω, a ground-plot or threshing-floor, i. e., a place in the field itself, made hard after the harvest by a roller, where the grain was threshed out: Matthew 3:12; Luke 3:17. In both these passages, by metonymy of the container for the thing contained, ἅλων is the heap of grain, the flooring, already indeed threshed out, but still mixed with chaff and straw, like Hebrew גֹּרֶן, Ruth 3:2; Job 39:12 (the Sept. in each place ἅλωνα); (others adhere to the primary meaning. Used by Aristotle, de vent. 3, Works, 2:973{a} 14).

Question 449

ἄχυρον

Answer 449

chaff, bran, husks

a stalk of grain from which the kernels have been beaten out
2) straw broken up by a threshing machine, chaff

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἄχῠρον [ ᾰ], τό,

mostly in pl. ἄχυρα,

I chaff, bran, husks left after threshing or grinding, Hdt. 4.72, Pherecr. 161, Antiph. 226.2, X. Oec. 18.1; ἐν τοῖς ἀ. κυλινδομένην Hermipp. 47: sg., Thphr. HP 8.4.1, Matthew 3:12, etc.: prov., ὄνος εἰς ἄχυρα ‘pig in clover’, of unexpected good fortune, Philem. 188, cf. Ar. Fr. 76: metaph., ἄχυρα τῶν ἀστῶν, of μέτοικοι, Id. Ach. 508; ἄχυρα ἀπὸ τοῦ τοίχου ἀποσπᾶν, of dying persons, Hp. Prog. 4.

II in pl., ἄ. χρυσοχοϊκά slag from gold-smelting, PHolm. 5.7.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἄχυρον, ἀχύρου, τό, “a stalk of grain from which the kernels have been beaten out; straw broken up by a threshing-machine, chaff”: Matthew 3:12; Luke 3:17. (In Greek writings from Herodotus 4, 72; Xenophon, oec. 18. 1, 2, 6 down; mostly in plural τά ἄχυρα; in Job 21:18 the Sept. also of the chaff accustomed to being driven away by the wind.)

Question 450

ἄσβεστος

Answer 450

unquenched, unquenchable
1a) of eternal hell fire to punish the damned

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
ἄσβεστος, ον, also η, ον Il. 16.123: —

I unquenchable, inextinguishable, φλόξ Il. l. c.; not quenched, πῦρ ἄ. D.H. 3.67, Plu. Numbers 9:1-23; κλέος Od. 4.584; γέλως Il. 1.599; βοή 11.50; ἐργμάτων ἀκτὶς καλῶν ἄ. αἰεί Pi. I. 4(3).42; ἄ. πόρος ὠκεανοῦ ocean’s ceaseless flow, A. Pr. 532 (lyr.); πῦρ, of hell, Mark 9:43.

II as Subst., ἄσβεστος (sc. τίτανος), ἡ,

1. unslaked lime, Dsc. 5.115, Plu. Sert. 17, Eum. 16; ἄ. κονία Lyc. ap. Orib. 8.25.16.
2. a mineral or gem, Plin. HN 37.146. ἀσβεστώδης· tofus, Gloss.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
ἄσβεστος, ἄσβεστον (σβέννυμι), unquenched (Ovid,inexstinctus), unquenchable (Vulg. inexstinguibilis): πῦρ, Matthew 3:12; Luke 3:17; Mark 9:43, and R G L brackets in 45. (Often in Homer; πῦρ ἄσβεστος of the perpetual fire of Vesta, Dionysius Halicarnassus, Antiquities 1, 76; (of the fire on the altar, Philo de ebriet. § 34 (Mang. i. 378); de vict. off. § 5 (Mang. 2:254); of the fire of the magi, Strabo 15 (3) 15; see also Plutarch, symp. 50:7, probl. 4; Aelian nat. an. 5, 3; cf. Heinichen on Eusebius, h. e. 6, 41, 15).)

Question 451

διακωλύω

Answer 451

to hinder, prevent

διακωλ-ύω [ῡ ],

hinder, prevent, τινὰ μὴ ποιεῖν Hdt. 8.144, cf. Lys. 20.36; δ. σε ὀρφανὸν εἶναι E. Hec. 148; δ. τὰ ἱερὰ μὴ γίγνεσθαι Antipho 5.82; δ. ἄδικα γίγνεσθαι Pl. Ap. 31e; δ. τινά Th. 8.92, Matthew 3:14; δ. τινά τι (sc. ποιεῖν) Pl. 315d; δ. τινά τινος D.S. 20.79; δ. φόνον S. OC 1771 (lyr.); δ. τὸ πρᾶγμα Alc.Com. 3, cf. Arist. EN 1159b6: — Pass., Th. 1.101; διακωλυθεὶς τοῦ σκοποῦ τυχεῖν Antipho 3.2.7: ἂ διεκωλύθη (sc. ποιεῖν) D. 18.60.

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διακωλύω: imperfect διεκωλυον; (διά in this compound does not denote effort as is commonly said, but separation, Latindis, cf. German verhindern, Latinprohibere; cf. διακλειω, to separate by shutting, shut out; cf. Winers De verb. comp. etc. Part v., p. 17f); to hinder, prevent: τινα, Matthew 3:14 (on the tense cf. Winers Grammar, § 40, 3 c.; Buttmann, 205 (178)). (From Sophocles and Thucydides down.)

Question 452

πρέπω

Answer 452

to stand out, to be conspicuous, to be eminent
2) to be becoming, seemly, fit

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
πρέπ-ω, impf. ἔπρεπον, which were the tenses chiefly in use: fut. πρέψω A. Eu. 995 (anap.), Pl. Plt. 269c, 288c: aor. ἔπρεψα Id. Chrm. 158c: —

prop. of impressions on the senses,

1 on the eye, to be clearly seen, to be conspicuous among a number, ὁ δ’ ἔπρεπε καὶ διὰ πάντων Il. 12.104; μετὰ δὲ π. ἀγρομένοισιν Od. 8.172, Hes. Th. 92; to be distinguished in or by a thing, φάρεσιν μελαγχίμοις A. Ch. 12, cf. Th. 124 (lyr.), E. Alc. 512, 1050; π. παρηῒς φοινίοις ἀμυγμοῖς A. Ch. 24 (lyr.); shine forth, show itself, πειρῶντι χρυσὸς ἐν βασάνῳ π. Pi. P. 10.67; πανσέληνος ἐν σάκει π. A. Th. 390, cf. Pers. 239 (troch.), Ag. 389 (lyr.); πρέπουσά θ’ ὡς ἐν γραφαῖς ib. 242 (lyr.); ἐπί τοι πρέπει ὄμμασιν αἰδώς h.Cer. 214; Ζεὺς πρέπων δι’ αἰθέρος E. Hel. 216 (lyr.): sts. c. part., to be clearly seen as doing or being, ὁ φρυκτὸς ἀγγέλλων πρέπει A. Ag. 30; σπλάγχνα . . πρέπουσ’ ἔχοντες ib. 1222, cf. Eu. 995 (anap.).

2. on the ear, βοὰ π. the cry sounds loud and clear, Pi. N. 3.67, cf. A. Ag. 321 .
3. on the smell, to be strong or rank, ὅμοιος ἀτμὸς ὥσπερ ἐκ τάφου π. ib. 1311 .

II to be conspicuously like, resemble, π. τινὶ εἶδος to be like one in form, Pi. P. 2.38; πρέποντα . . ταύρῳ δέμας A. Supp. 301; εἴ τι σῇ δοκεῖ πρέπειν γυναικί E. Alc. 1121; πρέπεις . . θυγατέρων μορφὴν μιᾷ Id. Ba. 917: c. inf., τοῦδε γὰρ δράμημα φωτὸς Περσικὸν πρέπει μαθεῖν his running is like Persian to behold, A. Pers. 247, cf. Supp. 719; more freq. with ὡς or ὥστε, πρέπει ὡς τύραννος εἰσορᾶν S. El. 664; ὡς πένθιμος πρέπεις ὁρᾶν E. Supp. 1056; πρέπει γ’ ὥστε θὴρ ἄγραυλος φόβῃ Id. Ba. 1188 (lyr.). III to be conspicuously fitting, beseem, c. dat. pers., θνατὰ θνατοῖσι πρέπει Pi. I. 5(4).16; τοῖς ὀλβίοις γε καὶ τὸ νικᾶσθαι πρέπει A. Ag. 941, cf. Pl. Chrm. 158c, etc.; with Preps., ποῦ τάδ’ ἐν χρηστοῖς πρέπει; E. Heracl. 510; οἷα δὴ εἰς πλῆθος πρέπει X. Cyr. 2.1.24: c. part., ὅ τι γιγνόμενον ἂν πρέποι Pl. Epin. 976c, cf. Plt. 269c, 288c; πρέποι γὰρ ἂν (sc. λεχθεῖσα ) Id. Sph. 219c .

2. freq. in part., ὕμνοι πρέποντες γάμοις Id. R. 460a, etc.; esp. in part. neut., πρέπον τε εἶναι καὶ ἁρμόττειν Id. Grg. 503e; ἤν τι ἄλλο π. δοκῇ εἶναι Th. 6.25; τὸ π. τῇ γραφῇ Plb. 2.40.3: rarely c. gen., π. ἦν δαίμονος τοὐμοῦ τόδε S. Aj. 534, cf. Plu. Caes. 14, Thom.Mag. p.306R.; τὸ π. that which is seemly, propriety, Pl. Hp.Ma. 294a; πρὸς τὸ μέτριον καὶ τὸ π. Id. Plt. 284e, etc.: pl., πρέποντα πάσχειν Antipho 3.3.9; πρέποντα τῇ συγγενείᾳ ποιοῦντες Isoc. 10.23 .
3. rarely with personal subject, πρέπων ἔφυς πρὸ τῶνδε φωνεῖν art the fit person to . ., S. OT 9; Πομπήϊος . . πάνυ τοῖς ἔπεσι πρέπων suiting them, Plu. Pomp. 72, cf. Publ. 17 .
4. mostly impers., πρέπει it is fitting, both of outward circumstances and moral fitness, c. dat. pers. et inf., Hdt. 9.79, etc.; οὐ πρέπει νῷν . . δάσασθαι Pi. P. 4.147; πρέπει ἐσλοῖσιν ὑμνεῖσθαι Id. Fr. 121, cf. A. Ag. 483 (lyr.), E. Hipp. 115, etc.: with inf. unexpressed, πρέπει γοῦν σοι [ἀποκρίνεσθαι ] X. HG 4.1.37 . c. acc. pers. et inf., πρέπει τὸν Αἰνησιδάμου ἐγκωμίων τε μελέων λυρᾶν τε τυγχανέμεν Pi. O. 2.46, cf. A. Supp. 203, S. Tr. 728, Th. 1.86, etc. c. inf. only, πρέπει γαρυέμεν Pi. N. 7.82, cf. P. 5.43, A. Th. 656, Ag. 636, etc. with inf. understood, an acc. may be subject, ἀπήλλαξαν οὕτω ὡς κείνους ἔπρεπε Hdt. 8.68 . α’, cf. A. Supp. 195, Pl. Prt. 312b; or object, τείσασθαι οὕτως, ὡς κείνους [τείσασθαι] πρέπει Hdt. 4.139; so with dat. of indirect object, Id. 8.114 . trans., liken, τινί τι A. Ag. 1328 (ap. Phot. ).

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
πρέπω; imperfect 3 person singular ἔπρεπε;

1. to stand out, to be conspicuous, to be eminent; so from Homer, Iliad 12, 104 down.
2. to be becoming, seemly, fit (from Pindar, Aeschylus, Herodotus down): πρέπει τίνι with a subject nominative, Hebrews 7:26 (Psalm 32:1 (); ὁ or ἅ πρέπει, which becometh, befitteth, 1 Timothy 2:10; Titus 2:1; impersonally, καθώς πρέπει τίνι, Ephesians 5:3; πρέπον ἐστιν followed by the infinitive, Matthew 3:15; Hebrews 2:10; followed by an accusative with the infinitive 1 Corinthians 11:13. On its construction cf. Alexander Buttmann (1873) § 142, 2.

Question 453

λέγω

Answer 453

say, said, the most general term for speaking in the NT, translated contextually with more specific words such as say, tell; ask, answer

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Jn. 8:27; to tell, declare, narrate, Mt. 21:27; Mk. 10:32; to express, Heb. 5:11; to put forth, propound, Lk. 5:36; 13:6; Jn. 16:29; to mean, to intend to signify, 1 Cor. 1:12; 10:29; to say, declare, affirm, maintain, Mt. 3:9; 5:18; Mk. 12:18; Acts 17:7; 26:22; 1 Cor. 1:10; to enjoin, Acts 15:24; 21:21; Rom. 2:22; to term, designate, cull, Mt. 19:17; Mk. 12:37; Lk. 20:37; 23:2; 1 Cor. 8:5; to call by a name, Mt. 2:23; pass. to be further named, to be surnamed, Mt. 1:16; to be explained, interpreted, Jn. 4:25; 20:16, 24; in NT σὺ λέγεις, you say, a form of affirmative answer to a question Mt. 27:11; Mk. 15:2; Jn. 18:37

Thayer's Definition
to say, to speak
affirm over, maintain
to teach
to exhort, advise, to command, direct
to point out with words, intend, mean, mean to say
to call by name, to call, name
to speak out, speak of, mention

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
λέγω

(A), lay, pres. erroneously inferred from λέξομαι, ἔλεκτο, etc.; v. cross λέχομαι.

λέγω

(B),

I

1. pick up, etc.: tenses for signf. 1 and 11, fut. λέξω Od. 24.224: aor. ἔλεξα A. Pers. 292: — Med., fut. in pass. sense λέξομαι E. Alc. 322: aor. ἐλεξάμην Il. 21.27 (trans.); ἐλέγμην Od. 9.335; λέκτο 4.451: — Pass., aor. ἐλέχθην Il. 3.188: also post- Hom. in these senses, but only in compos., esp. with ἀπο-, ἐκ-, κατα-, συν -; post- Hom. pf. εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν -), Pass. εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (v. the compds.); also fut. λεγήσομαι (συλ -): aor. 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν -): — gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν Il. 23.239, cf. Od. 24. 72, Pi. P. 8.53; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, Od. 18.359 (ubi v. Sch., cf. λογάς 2), cf. 24.224: — Med., gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε Il. 8.507; ὀστέα λευκὰ λέγοντο 24.793; φάρμακα λέξασθαι A.R. 3.807.
2. Med., choose for oneself, pick out, λέξαιτο.. ἄνδρας ἀρίστους Od. 24.108; κούρους Il. 21.27: — Pass., to be chosen, εἰ.. λεγοίμεθα πάντες ἄριστοι 13.276.

II

1. count, tell, ἐν δ’ ἡμέας λέγε κήτεσιν he counted us among the seals, Od. 4.452; and in aor. Med., Il. 2.125; ἐγὼ πέμπτος μετὰ τοῖσιν ἐλέγμην I reckoned myself.., Od. 9.335; λέκτο δ’ ἀριθμόν he told him over the number, 4.451: — Pass., μετὰ τοῖσιν ἐλέχθην I was counted among these, Il. 3.188. so, but not freq., after Hom., λ. ποντιᾶν ψάφων ἀριθμόν Pi. O. 13.46, cf. A. Ag. 570; καθ’ ἓν ἕκαστον λ. Isoc. 2.45; also καὶ σὲ δ’ ἐν τούτοις λέγω count you among.., A. Pr. 973; λ. τινὰ οὐδαμοῦ count him as naught, S. Ant. 183; κέρδος λ., εἰ.. count it gain, that.., ib. 462: — Med., λέξατο πάντας [ναύτας ] Pi. P. 4.189: — Pass., λέγεσθαι ἐν τοῖς ἱππικωτάτοις X. Oec. 11.20; ἐνὶ πρώτῃσι λέγεσθαι Call. Del. 16: fut. Med. in pass. sense, ἐν τοῖς οὐκέτ’ οὖσι λέξομαι E. l.c.
2. recount, tell over, οὔ τι διαπρήξαιμι λέγων ἐμὰ κήδεα Od. 14.197; σὺ δέ μοι λέγε θέσκελα ἔργα 11.374; τὰ ἕκαστα λέγων 12.165; ὅσα τ’ αὐτὸς.. ἐμόγησε, πάντ’ ἔλεγ ‘ 23.308: so in Trag., λ. τύχας, πάθη, μόχθους, etc., A. Pr. 633, Pers. 292, Ag. 555, etc.; also Ἀγαμέμνονι.. λέγ’ ὀνείδεα repeated reproaches against him, Il. 2.222; so perh. ψεύδεα πολλὰ λ. Hes. Th. 27 (but v. infr. 111): — Med., τί σε χρὴ ταῦτα λέγεσθαι; why need’st thou tell the tale thereof? Il. 13.275; and so, μηκέτι ταῦτα λεγώμεθα νηπύτιοι ὥς ib. 292, cf. Od. 3.240, 13.296; μηκέτι νῦν δήθ’ αὖθι λεγώμεθα Il. 2.435.

III say, speak, first in Hes. Th. 27 (v. supr. 11.2): fut. λέξω Emp. 38.1, A. Ag. 859, Hdt. 4.14, Th. 2.48, Antipho 6.33, etc.: aor. ἔλεξα Anacr. 45, Pl. Sph. 217e, Antipho 1.15 (rare in Pl. and the Orators, common in some dialects, as Boeotian, IG 7.504.2 (Tanagra), Thessalian, ib.9(2).461.21, Ionic, v.l. in Hp. Aër. 12): pf. λέλεχα Gal. 16.249, λέλεγα and λέλογας Hsch. (εἴρηκα in correct writers): — Pass., fut. λεχθήσομαι Th. 5.86, Pl. Ti. 67c, etc.: also fut. Med. in pass. sense, S. OC 1186, E. Hec. 906 (lyr.), etc.; and λελέξομαι Th. 3.53 (v.l. λέξεται), Pl. R. 457b: aor. ἐλέχθην (never ἐλέγην in this sense) S. OT 1442, Th. 6.32, etc.: pf. λέλεγμαι Pi. N. 8.20, Hdt. 2.21, S. Ph. 389, etc. (εἴλεγμαι in this sense only in compd. δι -): rare in compds. (only ἀντιλέγω, ἐπιλέγω, καταλέγω, προλέγω), the pres. in most compds. being supplied by ἀγορεύω, the fut. by ἐρῶ, the aor. by εἶπον, the pf. by εἴρηκα:

1 say, speak, never in Hom., first in Hes. l.c., freq. from Hdt. and Trag. downwds.; of all kinds of oral communications, ἐκέλευε λέγειν εἴ τι θέλοι Hdt. 8.58; so λέγοις ἄν speak, say on, Pl. Plt. 268e, etc.; λ. μῦθον A. Pers. 698 (troch.); ψευδῆ λ. Id. Ag. 625; ἀληθῆ λ. Pl. Phlb. 12b (so in Pass., λόγος λέλεκται πᾶς S. Ph. 389); of oracles, say, declare, Hdt. 8.136; ὥσπερ τοὔνομα λέγει indicates, Pl. Prt. 312c: with Preps., λ. ἀμφί τινος A. Th. 1017, E. Hec. 580; περί τινος Xenoph. 34.2, Democr. 165, S. Aj. 151 (anap.), Th. 2.48; ὑπέρ τινος in his defence, S. El. 555, X. HG 1.7.16; κατά τινος against him, Thgn. 1240a, X. HG 1.5.2; λ. ἐπί τισι εὐχὰς ἀγαθάς express good wishes for them, A. Supp. 625 (anap.); λ. τά τινος take his part, D. 8.64; λ. πρός τι in reference or in answer to.., S. Ant. 753, etc.; εἴς τι X. Mem. 1.5.1.

2. c. acc. et inf., say that.., Pi. P. 2.59, etc.: with neg. οὐ, Pl. R. 348c, etc., but μή ib. 346e, X. Smp. 4.5 (Pass.), and usu. in later Gr., LXX Genesis 38:22; λ. μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν Matthew 22:23 : freq. also folld. by ὡς, ὅτι (generally so in the Act. voice) when the subject of the relative clause may become the object of the principal Verb, γυναῖκα λέγουσιν, ὡς κάθηται.. X. Cyr. 7.3.5, etc.: rarely c. part., λ. Οἰδίπουν ὀλωλότα speak of him as dead, S. OC 1580; λέγουσιν ἡμᾶς ὡς ὀλωλότας A. Ag. 672; λέξασ’ ἀδελφῷ σ’ ἐνθάδ’ ὄντα E. Hel. 888: — Pass., λέξεται ἔχων Id. IT 1047, cf. A. Ag. 170 (cj.).
3. λέγειν τινά τι say something of another, esp. κακὰ λ. τινά speak ill of him, revile him, Hdt. 8.61; ἀγαθὰ λ. τινάς Ar. Ec. 435; τὰ ἔσχατα, τὰ ἀπόρρητα λ. ἀλλήλους, X. Mem. 2.2.9, D. 18.123; also εὖ or κακῶς λ. τινά, A. Ag. 445 (lyr.), S. El. 524, cf. 1028; εὖ λ. τὸν εὖ λέγοντα X. Mem. 2.3.8.
4. call by name, ἃς τρέμομεν λ. S. OC 128 (lyr.): c. dupl. acc., call so and so, λέγοιμ’ ἂν ἄνδρα τόνδε τῶν σταθμῶν κύνα A. Ag. 896, cf. S. OC 939 codd., Hdt. 1.32, etc.
5. λ. τινὰ ποιεῖν τι tell, command one to do, A. Ch. 553, S. Ph. 101, X. Cyr. 4.1.22, etc.: so with τινι, S. OC 840, D. 19.150 (no obj. expressed in A. Ag. 925, S. OC 856); λέγε τὸν ἐρωτῶντα ἵνα.. εἴπῃ σοι.. Astramps. Orac. p.1 H.; ὡς ὁ νόμος λέγει D. 22.20; ὁ λέγων μὴ μοιχεύειν Romans 2:22.
6. λ. τι say something, i.e. speak to the point or purpose, βούλῃ λέγειν τι, καὶ λέγων μηδὲν κλύειν; S. Ant. 757; λέγω τι; am I right ? the answer being λέγεις, Id. OT 1475; κινδυνεύεις τι λέγειν Pl. Cra. 404a; ἴσως ἄν τι λέγοις X. Mem. 2.1.12, cf. Cyr. 1.4.20; opp. οὐδὲν λέγει has no meaning, no authority, οὐδὲν λ. τὸ σωφρόνως τραφῆναι Ar. Eq. 334, cf. V. 75; οὐδὲν λέγεις nonsense ! Id. Th. 625; but οὐδὲν λέγειν, also, say what is not, lie, Id. Av. 66, Pl. Ap. 30b; also εὖ γε λέγεις, εὖ λέγεις, εὖ ἂν λέγοις, good news!, that is well !, ib. 24e, Grg. 447b, Prt. 310b; καλῶς, ὀρθῶς λ., you are right, X. Mem. 3.3.4, 3.6.8; κοὔπω λέγω and what is more, Herod. 7.44; τί λέγεις; τὸν ἔποπα παῖ καλεῖς; Ar. Av. 57, cf. Ec. 298 (lyr.).
7. pleon., ἔφη λέγων Hdt. 3.156, 5.36; ἔλεγε φάς Id. 1.122; ἔφασκε λέγων Ar. Av. 472; ἦ δ’ ὃς λέγων Id. V. 795; ὡς ἔφη λέγων S. Aj. 757; καὶ λέγων εἶπεν οὕτω πως D. 8.74, etc.
8. at the beginning of letters or documents, Ἄμασις Πολυκράτεϊ ὧδε λέγει.., Μαρδόνιος τάδε λέγει.., etc., Hdt. 3.40, 8.140. ά, etc.; τὰ γράμματα ἔλεγε τάδε Id. 1.124, etc.; γράμμασι λέγον τάδε, of an inscription, Th. 6.54: in roman edicts, Μάρκος Μέττιος Ῥοῦφος.. λέγει POxy. 237 viii 28 (i A.D.).
9. wish to say, mean, οὔτοι γυναῖκας ἀλλὰ Γοργόνας λέγω A. Eu. 48; τί τοῦτο λέγει, πρὸ Πύλοιο; what does πρὸ Πύλοιο mean? Ar. Eq. 1059, cf. 1021, 1375, Ec. 989, Pl. Phd. 60e: freq. in Platonic dialogue, πῶς λέγεις; how do you mean ? in what sense do you say this? Ap. 24e, al.; ἢ πῶς λέγομεν; or what do we mean to say? Grg. 480b; πῶς δὴ οὖν αὐτὸ λέγεις; Phdr. 265c; ποῖόν τί ποτε ἄρα λέγοντ ές φασι.. what they can possibly mean by saying.., Tht. 181c, al.: c. dupl. acc., τοιοῦτόν τι σὲ λέγειν τὸ κρεῖττον Grg. 489d, al.: freq. (esp. in Trag.) to explain more fully, εἴσω κομίζου καὶ σύ, Κασάνδραν λέγω you, I mean Cassandra, A. Ag. 1035; ὁ μάντις, υἱὸν Οἰκλέους λ. Id. Th. 609, cf. 658 (v.l.), Pr. 946; ποταμός, Ἀχελῷον λέγω S. Tr. 9, cf. 1220, Ph. 1261, E. Ph. 987; ἐμὲ λέγων meaning me, Isoc. 12.215; τὸ δ’ ὑμεῖς ὅταν λέγω, τὴν πόλιν λ. D. 18.88: sts., however, the word after λέγω is put in appos. with the word to be expld., Ἀντικλείας.., τῆς σῆς λέγω τοι μητρός A. Fr. 175, cf. Th. 658 cod. M; περὶ τῶνδε.., λέγω δὲ Φωκέων D. 19.152; παρ’ ὧν.., τούτων τῶν τὴν Ἀσίαν οἰκούντων λέγω Id. 8.24, cf. Pl. Smp. 202b: abs., μηδενὸς ὄντος ἐν [τῇ χώρᾳ] λέγω D. 1.27. περὶ ἃς (sc. ἀπολαύσεις) λέγομεν τὸν σώφρονα in regard to which we use the term ‘temperate’, Arist. EN 1148a5, cf. Pl. Grg. 494b.
10. ὡς λέγουσι as they say, S. Ant. 23, etc.; ὡς λ. μοι Id. OC 1161: — Pass., λέγεται it is said, c.acc.et inf., X. Mem. 1.2.30, al.; but also πατρὸς λέγεται γενέσθαι.. Id. Cyr. 1.2.1; θανεῖν ἐλέχθη he was said to have been killed, S. OT 292; so λεγόμενον ἐρέω Pi. P. 5.108: τὸ λεγόμενον abs., as the saying goes, Th. 7.68, cf. Pl. Grg. 447a, Smp. 217e, etc.; τὸ λ. δὴ τοῦτο Id. Grg. 514e: ὁ λεγόμενος γραῶν ὕθλος the so-called.., Id. Tht. 176b; οἱ λ. αὐτόνομοι εἶναι X. HG 6.3.8; οἱ λ. ὅτι.. of whom it is said that.., Id. Cyr. 8.6.16.
11. of orators, speak (emphatically), λέγειν δεινός S. OT 545, X. Cyr. 1.5.9, etc.; λέγειν ἠσκηκότες S. Fr. 963, cf. Eup. 95 (v. λαλέω) ; λ. τε καὶ πράσσειν δυνατώτατος Th. 1.139; οἱ ἐν τῷ πλήθει λέγειν δυνάμενοι Isoc. 3.8, cf. D. 19.286; plead one’s cause in a court of law, Id. 23.78; δίκας λέγειν ὑπέρ τινος speak as an advocate for.., Din. 1.111.
12. boast of, tell of, τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ῥώμην X. Cyr. 1.3.10; in Poets, sing of, θέλω λ. Ἀτρείδας Anacreont. 23.1.
13. recite what is written, λαβὲ τὸ βιβλίον καὶ λέγε Pl. Tht. 143c; and freq. in Oratt., as λέγε τὸν νόμον D. 21.8 and 10, etc.; of lectures, ἀκούσατέ μου σχόλια λέγοντος Arr. Epict. 3.21.6, cf. 15.8 (the sense of Lat. lego, read, occurs only in the compds. ἀναλέγομαι, ἐπιλέγομαι).
14. say or send word by another, X. An. 1.9.25, 7.4.5.
15. maintain as a thesis, οἱ τὰς ἰδέας λέγοντες Arist. Ph. 193b36, Metaph. 1036b14.
16. nominate, Lat. dicere [dictatorem ], D.C. Fr. 36.26 (Pass.). (Cf. Lat. lègo, legio, legulus (‘olivegatherer’).)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
εἶπον, 2 aorist active from an obsolete present ἘΠΩ (late epic and in composition; see Veitch) (cf. ἔπος (Curtius, § 620)), Ionic ἘΙΠΩ (like ἐρωτάω, εἰρωτάω; ἑλίσσω, εἱλίσσω; subjunctive εἴπω, imperative εἶπε, infinitive εἰπεῖν, prcp. εἰπών; 1 aorist εἶπα (John 10:34 R G T Tr WH, from Psalm 81:6 (); Acts 26:15 L T Tr WH; Hebrews 3:10 Lachmann from Psalm 94:10 (); add (Mark 9:18 T WH Tr text); Job 29:18; Job 32:8, etc.; Sir. 24:31 (29); 1 Macc. 6:11, etc.; cf. Kühner, 1:817 (especially Veitch, under the word, pp. 232; 233)), 2 person εἶπας (Matthew 26:25,(64); Mark 12:32 (not T WH; John 4:17 where T WH again εἶπες; Luke 20:39)), 3 person plural εἶπαν (often in L T Tr WH (i. e. out of the 127 instances in which the choice lies between 3 person plural εἶπον of the Rec. and εἶπαν, the latter ending has been adopted by L in 56, by T in 82, by Tr in 74, by WH in 104, cf. Tdf. Proleg., p. 123), e. g. Matthew 12:2; Matthew 27:6; John 18:30, etc.); impv: εἶπον (Mark 13:4 L T Tr WH; Luke 10:40 T WH Tr marginal reading; Acts 28:26 G L T Tr WH (also Matthew 4:3 WH; T WH; T WH Tr marginal reading; WH; Luke 20:2 T Tr WH; 22:() T Tr WH; John 10:24 T WH), for the Attic εἶπον, cf. W § 6, 1 k.; (Chandler § 775); Fritzsche on Mark, p. 515ff; (but Winer’s (p. 85 (81)) regards εἶπον as imperative of the 2nd aorist; cf., too, Lob. ad Phryn., p. 348; Buttmann, 57 (50); especially Fritzsche, the passage cited)), in the remaining persons εἰπάτω (Revelation 22:17), ἐιπατα (Matt. (); , etc.; Mark (); ; (Luke 10:10; Luke 13:32; Luke 20:3; Colossians 4:17)), εἰπάτωσαν (Acts 24:20) also frequent in Attic (Veitch, under the word; WH’s Appendix, p. 164; Rutherford, New Phryn., p. 219); participle, after the form chiefly Ionic, εἶπας ((John 11:28 Tr WH); Acts 7:37 L T Tr WH (also )); the future ἐρῶ is from the epic present εἴρω (cf. Lob. Technol., p. 137); on the other hand, from Ρ᾽ΑΩ come perfect εἴρηκα, 3 person plural εἰρήκασιν (Acts 17:28), εἴρηκαν (Revelation 19:3; see γίνομαι), infinitive εἰρηκέναι, Hebrews 10:15 L T Tr WH; passive, perfect 3 person singular εἴρηται, preposition εἰρημένον; pluperfect ἐιρήκειν 1 aorist ἐρρέθην (Revelation 6:11; Revelation 9:4 and R G T WH in Matthew 5:21ff; L T Tr WH in Romans 9:12, 26; Galatians 3:16) (strict (cf. Veitch, p. 575)) Attic ἐρρήθην (Matthew 5:21ff L Tr; R G in Romans 9:12, 26; Galatians 3:16; (cf. Buttmann, 57 (50); WH’s Appendix, p. 166)), participle ῤηθείς, ῤηθέν; the Sept. for אָמַר; to speak, say, whether orally or by letter;

1. with an accusative of the object;
   a. with the accusative of the thing: εἰπεῖν λόγον, Matthew 8:8 Rec.; John 2:22 (L T Tr WH); ; ῤῆμα, Mark 14:72 (Knapp, et al.); εἰπεῖν λόγον εἰς τινα, equivalent to βλασφημεῖν, Luke 12:10; also κατά τίνος, Matthew 12:32; ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, so to say (a phrase frequent in classical Greek, cf. Weiske, De pleonasmis gr., p. 47; Matthiae, § 545; Delitzsch on Heb. as below; (Kühner, § 585, 3; Krüger, § 55, 1, 2; Goodwin § 100; Winer’s Grammar, 449 (419); 317 (298))), Hebrews 7:9 (opposed to ἀκριβεῖ λόγῳ, Plato, rep. 1, 311 b.); τήν ἀλήθειαν, Mark 5:33; ἀλήθειαν ἐρῶ, 2 Corinthians 12:6; τοῦτο ἀληθές εἴρηκας, John 4:18 (Winer’s Grammar, 464 (433) n.); τί εἴπω; what shall I say? (the expression of one who is in doubt what to say), John 12:27; πῶς ἐρεῖ τό ἀμήν; … 1 Corinthians 14:16; τί ἐροῦμεν; or τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν; what shall we say? i. e. what reply can we make? or, to what does that bring us? only in the Epistle to the Romans (Winer’s Grammar, § 40, 6) viz., Romans 3:5; Romans 6:1; Romans 7:7; Romans 9:14, 30; with πρός ταῦτα added, Romans 8:31; εἰπεῖν τί περί τίνος, John 7:39; John 10:41. Sayings from the O. T. which are quoted in the New are usually introduced as follows: τό ῤηθέν ὑπό τοῦ (L T Tr WH omit τοῦ) κυρίου διά τοῦ προφήτου, Matthew 1:22; Matthew 2:15; ὑπό τοῦ Θεοῦ, Matthew 22:31; ὑπό τοῦ προφήτου Rec. Matthew 27:35, cf. Matthew 2:17; τό ῤηθέν διά τίνος, Matthew 2:17 L T Tr WH, Matthew 2:23; Matthew 4:14; Matthew 8:17; Matthew 12:17; Matthew 13:35; Matthew 21:4; Matthew 27:9; τό εἰρημένον διά τοῦ προφήτου. Acts 2:16; τό εἰρημένον, Luke 2:24; Acts 13:40; Romans 4:18; ἐρρέθη, Matthew 5:21, etc.; καθώς εἴρηκεν, Hebrews 4:3.
   b. with the accusative of the person to speak of, designate by words: ὅν εἶπον, John 1:15 ((not WH text); Buttmann, 377 (323); cf. Romans 4:1 WH text (say of)); ὁ ῤηθείς, Matthew 3:3. εἰπεῖν τινα καλῶς, to speak well of one, praise him, Luke 6:26 (ἐν εἰπεῖν τινα, Homer, Odyssey 1, 302); κακῶς, to speak ill of one, Acts 23:5 from Exodus 22:28; cf. Kühner, § 409, 2; 411, 5; (Winer’s Grammar, § 32, 1 b. β.; Buttmann, 146 (128)).
   c. with an ellipsis of the accusative αὐτό (see αὐτός, II. 3): Luke 22:67; John 9:27; John 21:4, etc. σύ εἶπας (namely, αὐτό), i. e. you have just expressed it in words; that’s it; it is just as you say: Matthew 26:25, 64 (a rabbinical formula; for examples cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein on Matthew 26:25; others seem to regard the answer as noncommittal, e. g. Origen on Matthew 26:64 (Works, 3:910 De la Rue edition); Wunsche, Erlaut. der Evang. aus Talmud, as above, with on Matthew 26:25; but cf. the ἐγώ εἰμί of Mark 14:62; in Matthew 26:64 WH marginal reading take it interrogatively).
2. the person, to whom a thing is said, is indicated a. by a dative: εἰπεῖν τί τίνι, Luke 7:40, and very often; εἶπον ὑμῖν namely, αὐτό, I (have just) told it you; this is what I mean; let this be the word: Matthew 28:7; cf. Bernhardy (1829), p. 381; (Jelf, § 403, 1; Godwin § 19, 5; especially (for examples) Herm. Vig., p. 746). τίνι περί τίνος (cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 47, 4), Matthew 17:13; John 18:34. to say anything to one by way of censure, Matthew 21:3; to cast in one’s teeth, ἐρεῖτε μοι τήν παραβολήν Luke 4:23. to tell what anything means, e. g. τό μυστήριον, Revelation 17:7.
   b. by the use of a preposition: πρός τινα (cf. Buttmann, 172 (150); Krüger, § 48, 7, 13), to say (a thing) to one, as Luke 4:23; Luke 5:4; Luke 12:16, and many other places in Luke; to say a thing in reference to one (Winer’s Grammar, 405 (378)), Mark 12:12; Luke 18:9; Luke 20:19.
3. εἶπον, to say, speak, simply and without an accusative of the object, i. e. merely to declare in words, to use language;
   a. with the addition of an adverb or of some other adjunct: ὁμοίως, Matthew 26:35; ὡσαύτως, Matthew 21:30; καθώς, Matthew 28:6; Luke 24:24; John 1:23; John 7:38; εἶπε διά παραβολῆς, making use of a parable (see διά, A. III. 3) he spake, Luke 8:4; ἐν παραβολαῖς, Matthew 22:1; with an instrumental dative: εἶπε λόγῳ, say in (using only) a (single) word, namely, that my servant shall be healed, Matthew 8:8 (where Rec. λόγον); Luke 7:7.
   b. with the words spoken added in direct discourse; so a hundred times in the historical books of the N. T., as Matthew 9:4; Matthew 8:32; ( L Tr WH), etc.; 1 Corinthians 12:15; (2 Corinthians 4:6 L text T Tr WH (cf. 4 below)); Hebrews 1:5; Hebrews 3:10; Hebrews 10:7 ( L T Tr WH), ; ; James 2:3, 11; Jude 1:9; Revelation 7:14; πέμψας εἶπεν he said by a messenger or messengers, Matthew 11:2f The following and other phrases are frequent in the Synoptic Gospels: ὁ δέ ἀποκριθείς εἶπεν, as Matthew 4:4; Matthew 15:13; καί ἀποκριθείς εἶπεν Matthew 24:4; ἀποκριθεῖσα ἡ μήτηρ εἶπεν, Luke 1:60; ἀποκριθείς ὁ Σίμων εἶπεν, Luke 7:43, etc.; ἀποκριθέντες δέ εἶπον (εἶπαν T Tr WH), Luke 20:24; but John usually writes ἀπεκρίθη καί εἶπεν: John 1:48 (); (R G), ; (R G L brackets), (L Tr marginal reading omit; WH brackets καί εἶπεν); ; — (εἶπαν αὐτῷ λέγοντες, Mark 8:28 T WH Tr marginal reading, cf. ).
   c. followed by ὅτι: Matthew 28:7; Mark 16:7; John 6:36; John 7:42; John 8:55; John 11:40; John 16:15; John 18:8; 1 John 1:6, 8, 10; 1 Corinthians 1:15; 1 Corinthians 14:23; 1 Corinthians 15:27 (L brackets; WH marginal reading omits ὅτι.
   d. followed by an accusative and infinitive: τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν Ἀβραάμ τόν πατέρα ἡμῶν εὑρηκέναι (WH text omits; Tr marginal reading brackets εὑρηκέναι; cf. 1 b. above) κατά σάρκα; Romans 4:1.
4. εἰπεῖν sometimes involves in it the idea of commanding (cf. Buttmann, 27f (237)): followed by the infinitive, εἶπε δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν, Mark 5:43; εἶπε τῷ ἀδελφῷ μου μερίσασθαι μετ’ ἐμοῦ τήν κληρονομίαν, Luke 12:13; ὅσα ἄν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν (namely, τηρεῖν (inserted in R G)), τηρεῖτε, Matthew 23:3 (Wis. 9:8). followed by the accusative and infinitive, ὁ εἶπον ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψαι, 2 Corinthians 4:6 (R G L marginal reading, cf. Buttmann, 273f (235); but L text T Tr WH read λάμψει, thus changing the construction from the accusative with an infinitive to direct discourse, see 3 b. above); εἶπεν αὐτῷ (for ἑαυτῷ, see αὑτοῦ) φωνηθῆναι τούς δούλους τούτους, be commanded to be called for him (i. e., to him) these servants, Luke 19:15; cf. Winers Grammar, § 44, 3 b.; Krüger, § 55, 3, 13. followed by ἵνα with the subjunctive: Matthew 4:3; Matthew 20:21; Luke 4:3; to εἰπεῖν is added a dative of the person bidden to do something, Mark 3:9; Luke 10:40 cf. 4:3; Revelation 6:11; Revelation 9:4. “Moreover, notice that ἵνα and ὄφρα are often used by the later poets after verbs of commanding;” Hermann ad Vig., p. 849; cf. Winers Grammar, § 44, 8; (Buttmann, 237 (204)). 5 B a Hebraism εἰπεῖν ἐν ἑαυτῷ (בְּלִבּו אָמַר, Deuteronomy 8:17; Psalm 10:6 (); Psalm 13:1 (); Esther 6:6) is equivalent to to think (because thinking is a silent soliloquy): Matthew 9:3; Luke 7:39; Luke 16:3; Luke 18:4 (elsewhere also λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ); and εἰπεῖν ἐν τῇ καρδία αὐτοῦ amounts to the same, Luke 12:45; Romans 10:6; but in other passages εἶπον, ἔλεγον, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς is, equivalent to ἐν ἀλλήλοις: Matthew 21:38; see λέγω, II. 1 d.
5. εἰπεῖν τινα with a predicate accusative, to call, style, one:ἐκείνους εἶπε Θεούς, John 10:35; ὑμᾶς εἴρηκα φίλους, John 15:15; (Homer, Odyssey 19, 334; Xenophon, Apology Socrates § 15; Lucian, Tim. § 20). (Compare: ἀντεῖπον, ἀπεῖπον, προεῖπον.)

Question 454

διά

Answer 454

(gen. ) through, by means of; (acc.) because of, for the sake of, therefore
(1) gen., through, used of place or medium, Mt. 7:13; Lk. 6:1; 2 Cor. 11:33; through, of time, during, in the course of, Heb. 2:15; Acts 5:19; through, of immediate agency, causation, instrumentality, by means of, by, Jn. 1:3; Acts 3:18; of means or manner, through, by, with, Lk. 8:4; 2 Cor. 5:7; 8:8; of state or condition, in a state of, Rom. 4:11; (2) acc., used of causation which is not direct and immediate in the production of a result, on account of, because of, for the sake of, with a view to, Mk. 2:27; Jn. 1:31; rarely, through, while subject to a state of untoward circumstances, Gal. 4:13

Thayer's Definition
through
of place
with
in
of time
throughout
during
of means
by
by the means of
through
the ground or reason by which something is or is not done
by reason of
on account of
because of for this reason
therefore
on this account

Liddell-Scott-Jones Definitions
διά,

poet. διαί (Aeol. ζά, q.v.), Pr governing gen. and acc. — Rad. sense, through; never anastroph. [Prop. δῐᾰ: but Hom. uses ῑ at the beginning of a line, Il. 3.357, 4.135, al.: also ᾱ, metri gr., freq. in Hom., for which A. uses διαί in lyr., Ag. 448, al.]

WITH GEN.

I of Place or Space:

1 of motion in a line, from one end to the other, right through, in Hom. freq. of the effect of weapons, διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε.. ἔγχος καὶ διὰ θώρηκος.. Il. 3.357; δουρὶ βάλεν Δάμασον κυνέης διά 12.183; δι’ ὤμου.. ἔγχος ἦλθεν 4.481; in Prose, τιτρώσκειν διὰ τοῦ θώρακος X. An. 1.8.26; διὰ τοῦ ὀρόφου ἐφαίνετο πῦρ ib. 7.4.16: also of persons, διὰ Σκαιῶν πεδίονδ’ ἔχον ὠκέας ἵππους out through the Scaean gate, Il. 3.263; δι’ ἠέρος αἰθέρ’ ἵκανεν quite through the lower air even to the ether, Il. 14.288, cf. 2.458; διὰ Τρώων πέτετο straight through them, 13.755; δι’ ὄμματος.. λείβων δάκρυον S. OC 1250, etc.: also in Compos. with πρό and ἐκ, v. διαπρό, διέκ: in adverbial phrases, διὰ πασῶν (sc. χορδῶν), v. διαπασῶν: διὰ πάσης throughout, Th. 1.14; διὰ κενῆς idly, Id. 4.126, etc. (cf. 111.1.c).

2. of motion through a space, but not in a line, throughout, ouer, ἑπόμεσθα διὰ πεδίοιο Il. 11.754; δι’ ὄρεσφι 10.185, al.; ὀδύνη διὰ χροὸς ἦλθε through all his frame, 11.398; τεῦχε βοὴν διὰ ἄστεος Od. 10.118; δι’ ὁμίλου Il. 6.226, etc.; θορύβου διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόντος X. An. 1.8.16, cf. 2.4.26, etc.; later, in quoting an authority, ἱστορεῖ δ. τῆς δευτέρας in the course of.., Ath. 10.438b.
3. in the midst of, Il. 9.468; κεῖτο τανυσσάμενος δ. μήλων Od. 9.298; between, δ. τῶν πλευρέων ταμόντα Hp. Morb. 2.61: hence, of pre-eminence, ἔπρεπε καὶ δ. πάντων Il. 12.104; τετίμακε δι’ ἀνθρώπων Pi. I. 4(3).37; εὐδοκιμέοντι δ. πάντων Hdt. 6.63, cf. 1.25, etc.
4. in Prose, sts. of extension, along, παρήκει δ. τῆσδε τῆς θαλάσσης ἡ ἀκτή Id. 4.39 (but πέταται δ. θαλάσσας across the sea, Pi. N. 6.48); λόφος, δι’ οὗ τὸ σταύρωμα περιεβέβληντο X. HG 7.4.22.
5. in Prose, of Intervals of Space, δ. τριήκοντα δόμων at intervals of thirty layers, i. e. after every thirtieth layer, Hdt. 1.179; δ. δέκα ἐπάλξεων at every tenth battlement, Th. 3.21; cf. infr. 11.3: of a single interval, δ. πέντε σταδίων at a distance of five stades, Hdt. 7.30, cf. 198; δ. τοσούτου μᾶλλον ἢ δ. πολλῶν ἡμερῶν ὁδοῦ at so short a distance, etc., Th. 2.29; δ. πολλοῦ at a great distance apart, Id. 3.94; δ. πλείστου Id. 2.97; δι’ ἐλάσσονος Id. 3.51; ὕδατα δ. μακροῦ ἀλόμενα Hp. Aër. 9, etc.

II of Time,

1 of duration from one end of a period to the other, throughout, δ. παντὸς [τοῦ χρόνου ] Hdt. 9.13; δι’ ὅλου τοῦ αἰῶνος Th. 1.70; δι’ αἰῶνος S. El. 1024; δι’ ἡμέρας ὅλης Ar. Pax 27; δι’ ὅλης τῆς νυκτός X. An. 4.2.4, etc.: without an Adj., δι’ ἡμέρης all day long, Hdt. 1.97; δ. νυκτός Th. 2.4, X. An. 4.6.22 (but δ. νυκτός in the course of the night, by night, Acts 5:19, PRyl. 138.15 (i A. D.), etc.); δ. νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας Pl. R. 343b; δι’ ἐνιαυτοῦ, δι’ ἔτους, Ar. Fr. 569.8, V. 1058; δ. βίου Pl. Smp. 183e, etc.; δ. τέλους from beginning to end, A. Pr. 275, Pl. R. 519c, etc.: with Adjs. alone, δ. παντός continually, A. Ch. 862 (lyr.), etc.; δι’ ὀλίγου for a short time, Th. 1.77; δ. μακροῦ E. Hec. 320; ὁ δ. μέσου χρόνος Hdt. 8.27.

2. of the interval which has passed between two points of Time, δ. χρόνου πολλοῦ or δ. πολλοῦ χρ. after a long time, Id. 3.27, Ar. Pl. 1045; δ. μακρῶν χρόνων Pl. Ti. 22d: without an Adj., δ. χρόνου after a time, S. Ph. 758, X. Cyr. 1.4.28, etc.; δι’ ἡμερῶν after several days, Mark 2:1; and with Adjs. alone, δι’ ὀλίγου Th. 5.14; οὐ δ. μακροῦ Id. 6.15, 91; δ. πολλοῦ Luc. Nigr. 2, etc.: with Numerals, δι’ ἐτέων εἴκοσι Hdt. 6.118, cf. OGI 56.38 (iii B. C.), etc.: but δ. τῆς ἑβδόμης till the seventh day, Luc. Hist.Conscr. 21: also distributively, χρόνος δ. χρόνου προὔβαινε time after time, S. Ph. 285; ἄλλος δι’ ἄλλου E. Andr. 1248.
3. of successive Intervals, δ. τρίτης ἡμέρης every other day, Hdt. 2.37; δ. τρίτου ἔτεος ib. 4, etc.; δ. πεντετηρίδος every four years (with inclusive reckoning), Id. 3.97; δι’ ἔτους πέμπτου, of the Olympic games, Ar. Pl. 584 (but δι’ ἑνδεκάτου ἔτεος in the course of the eleventh year, Hdt. 1.62).

III

1. causal, through, by, of the Agent, δι’ ἀλλέλων or -ου ἐπικηρυκεύεσθαι, ποιεῖσθαι, by the mouth of.., Id. 1.69, 6.4, cf. 1.113; δι’ ἑρμηνέως λέγειν X. An. 2.3.17, etc.; τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ Κυρίου δ. τοῦ προφήτου.Matthew 1:22; δι’ ἑκόντων ἀλλ’ οὐ δ. βίας ποιεῖσθαι Pl. Phlb. 58b; πεσόντ’ ἀλλοτρίας διαὶ γυναικός by her doing, A. Ag. 448 (lyr.); ἐκ θεῶν γεγονὼς δ. βασιλέων πεφυκώς X. Cyr. 7.2.24; δι’ ἑαυτοῦ ποιεῖν τι of oneself, not by another’s agency, ib. 1.1.4, etc.; but also, by oneself alone, unassisted, D. 15.14, cf. 22.38. of the Instrument or Means, δ. χειρῶν by hand (prop. by holding between the hands), δι’ ὁσίων χ. θιγών S. OC 470; also δ. χερῶν λαβεῖν, δ. χειρὸς ἔχειν in the hand, Id. Ant. 916, 1258 (but τὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων δ. χειρὸς ἔχειν to keep a firm hand on, Th. 2.13); δ. στέρνων ἔχειν S. Ant. 639; ἡ ἀκούουσα πηγὴ δι’ ὤτων Id. OT 1387; δ. στόματος ἔχειν X. Cyr. 1.4.25; δ. μνήμης ἔχειν Luc. Cat. 9; αἱ δ. τοῦ σώματος ἡδοναί X. Mem. 1.5.6; δ. λόγων συγγίγνεσθαι to hold intercourse by word, Pl. Plt. 272b; δ. λόγου ἀπαγγέλλειν Acts 15:27; δι’ ἐπιστολῶν 2 Corinthians 10:9, POxy. 1070.15 (iii A. D.). of Manner (where διά with its Noun freq. serves as an Adv.), δ. μέθης ποιήσασθαι τὴν συνουσίαν Pl. Smp. 176e; παίω δι’ ὀργῆς through passion, in passion, S. OT 807; δ. τάχους, = ταχέως, Id. Aj. 822, Th. 1.63 (but δ. ταχέων ib. 80, al.); δ. σπουδῆς in haste, hastily, E. Ba. 212; δι’ αἰδοῦς with reverence, respectfully, ib. 441; δ. ψευδῶν ἔπη lying words, Id. Hel. 309; αἱ δ. καρτερίας ἐπιμέλειαι long-continued exertions, X. Mem. 2.1.20; δι’ ἀκριβείας, δ. πάσης ἀκρ., Pl. Ti. 23d, Lg. 876c; δ. σιγῆς Id. Grg. 450c; δ. ξυμφορῶν ἡ ξύμβασις ἐγένετο Th. 6.10; οὐ δι’ αἰνιγμάτων, ἀλλ’ ἐναργῶς γέγραπται Aeschin. 3.121; δι’ αἵματος, οὐ δ. μέλανος τοὺς νόμους ὁ Δράκων ἔγραψεν Plu. Sol. 17: also with Adjs., δ. βραχέων, δ. μακρῶν τοὺς λόγους ποιεῖσθαι, Isoc. 14.3, Pl. Grg. 449b; ἀποκρίνεσθαι δ. βραχυτάτων ibid. d; cf. infr. IV.
2. in later Prose, of Material out of which a thing is made, κατασκευάζειν εἴδωλα δι’ ἐλέφαντος καὶ χρυσοῦ D.S. 17.115; θυσίαι δι’ ἀλφίτου καὶ σπονδῆς πεποιημέναι Plu. Numbers 8:1-26; βρώματα δ. μέλιτος καὶ γάλακτος γιγνόμενα Ath. 14.646e; οἶνος δ. βουνίου Dsc. 5.46. διά τινος ἔχειν, εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι, to express conditions or states, ἀγὼν διὰ πάσης ἀγωνίης ἔχων extending through every kind of contest, Hdt. 2.91; δι’ ἡσυχίης εἶναι Id. 1.206; δι’ ὄχλου εἶναι to be trouble some, Ar. Ec. 888; δ. φόβου εἶναι Th. 6.59; δι’ ἀπεχθείας γίγνεσθαι X. Hier. 9.2; ἡ ἐπιμέλεια δ. χάριτος γίγνεται ibid.; δ. μιᾶς γνώμης γίγνεσθαι Isoc. 4.138. with Verbs of motion, δ. μάχης ἐλεύσονται will engage in battle, Hdt. 6.9; ἐλθεῖν Th. 4.92; δ. παντὸς πολέμου, δ. φιλίας ἰέναι τινί, X. An. 3.2.8; δ. δίκης ἰέναι τινί go to law with.., S. Ant. 742, cf. Th. 6.60; δ. τύχης ἰέναι S. OT 773; δι’ ὀργῆς ἥκειν Id. OC 905; ἐμαυτῷ δ. λόγων ἀφικόμην I held converse with myself, E. Med. 872; δ. λόγων, δ. γλώσσης ἰέναι come to open speech, Id. Tr. 916, Supp. 112; δ. φιλημάτων ἰέναι come to kissing, Id. Andr. 416; δ. δικαιοσύνης ἰέναι καὶ σωφροσύνης Pl. Prt. 323a, etc.; δ. πυρὸς ἰέναι (v. πῦρ): in pass. sense, δι’ ἀπεχθείας ἐλθεῖν τινι to be hated by.., A. Pr. 121 (anap.). with trans. Verbs, δι’ αἰτίας ἔχειν or ἄγειν τινά hold in fault, Th. 2.60, Ael. VH 9.32; δι’ ὀργῆς ἔχειν τινά Th. 2.37, etc.; δ. φυλακῆς ἔχειν τι Id. 7.8; δι’ οἴκτου ἔχειν τινά, δι’ αἰσχύνης ἔχειν τι, E. Hec. 851, IT 683; δ. πένθους τὸ γῆρας διάγειν X. Cyr. 4.6.6; δι’ οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθαί τι S. OC 584.

WITH Acc.

I of Place, only Poet., in same sense as διά c. gen.:

1 through, ἓξ δὲ δ. πτύχας ἦλθε.. χαλκός Il. 7.247; ἤϊξε δ. δρυμὰ.. καὶ ὕλην 11.118, cf. 23.122, etc.; δ. τάφρον ἐλαύνειν across it, 12.62; δ. δώματα ποιπνύοντα 1.600; ἐπὶ χθόνα καὶ δ. πόντον βέβακεν Pi. I. 4(3).41; φεύγειν δ. κῦμ’ ἅλιον A. Supp. 14 (anap.).

2. through, among, in, οἴκεον δι’ ἄκριας Od. 9.400; ἄραβος δὲ δ. στόμα γίγνετ’ ὀδόντων Il. 10.375 (but μῦθον, ὃν.. δ. στόμα.. ἄγοιτο through his mouth, 14.91; so δ. στόμα ὄσσαν ἱεῖσαι Hes. Th. 65; ἀεὶ γὰρ ἡ γυνή σ’ ἔχει δ. στόμα Ar. Lys. 855); δ. κρατερὰς ὑσμίνας Hes. Th. 631; νόμοι δι’ αἰθέρα τεκνωθέντες S. OT 867 (lyr.). II of Time, also Poet., δ. νύκτα Il. 2.57, etc.; δ. γλυκὺν ὕπνον during sweet sleep, Mosch. 4.91.

III causal:

1 of persons, thanks to, by aid of, νικῆσαι δ… Ἀθήνην Od. 8.520, cf. 13.121; δ. δμῳὰς.. εἷλον 19.154; δ. σε by thy fault or service, S. OC 1129, Ar. Pl. 145, cf. 160, 170: in Prose, by reason of, on account of, δ’ ἡμᾶς Th. 1.41, cf. X. An. 7.6.33, D. 18.249; οὐ δι’ ἐμαυτόν And. 1.144; so εἰ μὴ διά τινα if it had not been for.., εἰ μὴ δι’ ἄνδρας ἀγαθούς Lys. 12.60; Μιλτιάδην εἰς τὸ βάραθρον ἐμβαλεῖν ἐψηφίσαντο, καὶ εἰ μὴ δ. τὸν πρύτανιν ἐνέπεσεν ἄν Pl. Grg. 516e, cf. D. 19.74; εἰ μὴ δ. τὴν ἐκείνου μέλλησιν Th. 2.18, cf. Ar. V. 558; πλέον’ ἔλπομαι λόγον Ὀδυσσέος ἢ πάθαν γενέσθαι δι’ Ὅμηρον Pi. N. 7.21.

2. of things, to express the Cause, Occasion, or Purpose, δι’ ἐμὴν ἰότητα because of my will, Il. 15.41; Διὸς μεγάλου δ. βουλάς Od. 8.82; δι’ ἀφραδίας for, through want of thought, 19.523; δι’ ἀτασθαλίας 23.67; δι’ ἔνδειαν by reason of poverty, X. An. 7.8.6; δ. καῦμα, δ. χειμῶνα, ib. 1.7.6; δι’ ἄγνοιαν καὶ ἀμαθίαν Pl. Prt. 360b, etc.: freq. also with neut. Adjs., δ. τί; wherefore?; δ. τοῦτο, δ. ταῦτα on this account; δι’ ὅ, δι’ ἅ on which account; δ. πολλά for many reasons, etc.
3. = ἕνεκα, to express Purpose, δἰ ἀχθηδόνα for the sake of vexing, Th. 4.40, cf. 5.53; δ. τὴν τούτου σαφήνειαν with a view to clearing this up, Pl. R. 524c, cf. Arist. EN 1172b21; αὐτή δι’ αὑτήν for its own sake, Pl. R. 367b, etc.

WITHOUT CASE as Adv. throughout, δ. πρό (v. supr. A.I.I); δ. δ’ ἀμπερές Il. 11.377.

IN COMPO S.:

I through, right through, of Space, διαβαίνω, διέχω, διιππεύω.

II in different directions, as in διαπέμπω, διαφορέω; of separation, asunder, διαιρέω, διαλύω; of difference or disagreement, at variance, διαφωνέω, διαφέρω; or simply mutual relation, one with another, διαγωνίζομαι, διάδω, διαθέω, διαπίνω, διαφιλοτιμέομαι.

III pre-eminence, διαπρέπω, διαφέρω. completion, to the end, utterly, διεργάζομαι, διαμάχομαι, διαπράττω, διαφθείρω: of Time, διαβιόω. to add strength, thoroughly, out and out, διαγαληνίζω, etc.; cf. ζά. of mixture, between, partly, esp. in Adj., as διάλευκος, διάχρυσος, διάχλωρος, etc. of leaving an interval or breach, διαλείπω, διαναπαύω. (Cogn. with δύο, δίς.)

Thayer’s Expanded Definition
διά (“written δἰ before a vowel, except in proper names and 2 Corinthians 5:7; Romans 8:10” Tdf. Proleg., p. 94), akin to δίς and Latindis in composition, properly, denoting a division into two or more parts; a preposition taking the genitive and the accusative. In its use the biblical writers differ in no respect from the Greek; cf. Winer’s Grammar, 377ff (353ff); 398 (372)f

A. with the genitive: through;

I. of place;
1. properly, after verbs denoting an extension, or a motion, or an act, that occurs through any place: δἰ ἄλλης ὁδοῦ ἀναχωρεῖν, Matthew 2:12; δἰ ἀνύδρων τόπων, Matthew 12:43; διά τῆς Σαμαρείας, John 4:4; διά τῆς θύρας, John 10:1f; add, Matthew 19:24; Mark 2:23; Mark 10:25; Mark 11:16; Luke 4:30; Luke 5:19; Luke 18:25; 2 Corinthians 11:33; Hebrews 9:11; Hebrews 11:29, etc.; δἰ ὑμῶν, through your city, Romans 15:28; (on διά πάντων, Acts 9:32, see πᾶς, II. 1); ὁ διά πάντων, diffusing his saving influence through all, Ephesians 4:6; σῴζεσθαι διά πυρός, 1 Corinthians 3:15; διασῴζεσθαι δἰ ὕδατος, 1 Peter 3:20 (Ev. Nicod. c. 9, p. 568f, Thilo edition (p. 228, Tdf. edition) διά θαλάσσης ὡς διά ξηρᾶς); βλέλπειν δἰ ἐσόπτρου, 1 Corinthians 13:12 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 380 (356)). Add the adverbial phrase δἰ ὅλου from top to bottom, throughout, John 19:23 (metaphorically, in every way, 1 Macc. 6:18). From this use of the preposition has come
2. its tropical use of state or condition in which (properly, passing through which as through a space) one does or suffers something, where we, with a different conception, employ with, in, etc. (German bei, unter, mit): ὁ διά γράμματος καί περιτομῆς παραβάτης νόμου , Romans 2:27 (Winers Grammar, 380 (355)); οἱ πιστεύοντες :2di) ἀκροβυστίας who believe, though uncircumcised (see ἀκροβυστία , a.), Romans 4:11; διά προσκόμματος ἐσθίειν , with offence, or so as to be an offence (cf. Winers Grammar, 380 (356), and see πρόσκομμα ), Romans 14:20; διά πίστεως περιπατεῖν , οὐ διά εἴδους (see εἶδος , 1), 2 Corinthians 5:7; τά διά (Lachmann marginal reading (cf. Tr marginal reading) τά ἰδίᾳ (see Meyer at the passage)) τοῦ σώματος ;, done in the body (i. e. while we were clothed with our earthly body (others take διά here instrumentally; see III. 2 below)), 2 Corinthians 5:10; διά πολλῶν δακρύων , 2 Corinthians 2:4; διά δόξης , clothed with glory, 2 Corinthians 3:11; ἔρχεσθαι , ἐισέρχεσθαι διά τίνος with a thing, Hebrews 9:12; 1 John 5:6 (but cf. Winer’s Grammar, 380 (355)); δἰ ὑπομονῆς, Romans 8:25 (διά πένθους τό γῆρας διάγειν, Xenophon, Cyril 4, 6, 6; cf. Mattiae ii., p. 1353).
II. of Time (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 380 (356); Ellicott or Meyer on Galatians 2:1; Fritzsche as below);
1. of continued time; hence,
a. of the time throughout (during) which anything is done: Matthew 26:61; Mark 14:58; δἰ ὅλης (τῆς R G) νυκτός, Luke 5:5; διά παντός τοῦ ζῆν, Hebrews 2:15; διά παντός (so L WH Tr (except Mark 5:5; Luke 24:53)), or written together διαπαντός (so G T (except in Matt.); cf. Winers Grammar, 46 (45); Lipsius, Gram. Unters., p. 125), continually, always: Matthew 18:10; Mark 5:5; Luke 24:53; Acts 2:25 (from Psalm 15:8 ()); ; Romans 11:10 (from Psalm 68:24 ()); 2 Thessalonians 3:16; Hebrews 9:6; Hebrews 13:15 (often in Greek writings).
b. of the time within which a thing is done: διά τῆς νυκτός (L T Tr WH διά νυκτός), by night, Acts 5:19; Acts 16:9; Acts 17:10; Acts 23:31, (Palaeph. 1, 10); δἰ ἡμερῶν τεσσαράκοντα, repeatedly within the space of forty days, Acts 1:3; — (denying this use of the preposition, C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opuscc., p. 164f would refer these instances to the use noted under a. (see Winer’s, Ellicott, Meyer as above)).
2. of time elapsed, and which has, so to say, been passed through: Galatians 2:1 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 380 (356)); δἰ ἡμερῶν (some) days having intervened, after (some) days, Mark 2:1; δἰ ἐτῶν πλειόνων, Acts 24:17; examples from Greek authors in Fritzsche on Mark, p. 50; (Winers Grammar, 380 (356); Liddell and Scott, under the word, A. II. 2; Sophocles’ Lexicon, under the word, 2; Field, Otium Norv. iii, p. 14).
III. of the Means or Instrument by which anything is effected; because what is done by means of person or thing seems to pass as it were through the same (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 378 (354)).
1. of one who is the author of the action as well as its instrument, or of the efficient cause: δἰ αὐτοῦ (i. e. τοῦ Θεοῦ) τά πάντα namely, ἐστιν or ἐγένετο, Romans 11:36; also δἰ οὗ, Hebrews 2:10; δἰ οὗ ἐκλήθητε, 1 Corinthians 1:9; add (Galatians 4:7 L T Tr WH, see below); Hebrews 7:21 (ἡ ἰατρικη πᾶσα διά τοῦ Θεοῦ τούτου, i. e. Aesculapius, κυβερναται, Plato, symp., p. 186 e.; cf. Fritzsche on Romans, vol. i., p. 15 (and for examples Sophocles Lexicon, under the word, 1)); of him to whom that is due which anyone has or has done; hence equivalent to by the fault of anyone: δἰ οὗ τό σκάνδαλον ἔρχεται, Matthew 18:7; δἰ ἑνός ἀνθρώπου ἡ ἁμαρτία … εἰσῆλθε, Romans 5:12, cf. Romans 5:16-19; ἠσθένει διά τῆς σαρκός, Romans 8:3; by the merit, aid, favor of anyone: ἐν ζωή βασιλεύσουσι διά, etc. Romans 5:17, cf. Romans 5:18; 1 Corinthians 15:21; διά τοῦ Χριστοῦ, and the like: Romans 5:1f Romans 5:11; Acts 10:43; Galatians 4:7 (Rec., but see above); δοκάζειν τόν Θεόν διά Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 Peter 4:11, and εὐχαριστεῖν τῷ Θεῷ διά Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Romans 1:8; Romans 7:25 (where L T Tr WH text χάρις τῷ Θεῷ); Colossians 3:17 — because the possibility both of glorifying God and of giving thanks to him is due to the kindness of Christ: καυχᾶσθαι ἐν τῷ Θεῷ διά Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Romans 5:11; ἀναπαύεσθαι διά τίνος, Philemon 1:7; οἱ πεπιστευκότες διά τῆς χαριστος, Acts 18:27; πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες διά σου … διά τῆς σής προνοίας, Acts 24:2 (3); ὑπερνικαν διά τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, Romans 8:37; περισσεύειν διά τίνος, by the increase which comes from one, Philippians 1:26; 2 Corinthians 1:5; 2 Corinthians 9:12; διά τῆς ὑμῶν δεήσεως, Philippians 1:19; add, Philemon 1:22 Romans 1:12; 2 Corinthians 1:4; Galatians 4:23; 1 Peter 1:5.
2. of the instrument used to accomplish a thing, or of the instrumental cause in the stricter sense: — with the genitive of person by the service, the intervention of, anyone; with the genitive of thing, “by means of with the help of, anything;
a. in passages where a subject expressly mentioned is said to do or to have done a thing by some person or by some thing: Mark 16:20 (τοῦ κυρίου τόν λόγον βεβαιοῦντος διά τῶν σημείων); Luke 1:70; Acts 1:16; Acts 2:22 (τέρασι καί σημείοις, οἷς ἐποίησε δἰ αὐτοῦ ὁ Θεός); Acts 8:20; Acts 10:36; Acts 15:28 (γράψαντες διά χειρός αὐτῶν); Acts 20:28; Acts 21:19; Acts 28:25; Romans 2:16; Romans 3:31; Romans 7:13; ( Rec.bez elz L edition min. T WH text); Romans 15:18; Romans 16:18; 1 Corinthians 1:21 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 381 (357)); 1 Corinthians 2:10; 1 Corinthians 4:15; 1 Corinthians 6:14; 1 Corinthians 14:9, 19 (R G); ; 2 Corinthians 1:4; 2 Corinthians 4:14 R G; (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 381 (357)); ; Ephesians 1:5; Ephesians 2:16; Colossians 1:20, 22; Colossians 2:8; 1 Thessalonians 4:14; 2 Thessalonians 2:14; Titus 3:5; Hebrews 1:2, 3 (R G); ; Revelation 1:1; γῆ ἐξ ὕδατος (material cause) καί δἰ ὕδατος συνεστῶσα τῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ λόγῳ, 2 Peter 3:5 (Winers Grammar, 419 (390) cf. 217 (204)).
b. in passages in which the author or principal cause is not mentioned, but is easily understood from the nature of the case, or from the context: Romans 1:12; 1 Corinthians 11:12 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 381 (357)); Philippians 1:20; 1 Thessalonians 3:7; 2 Thessalonians 2:2, 15; Hebrews 11:39 (cf. Winer’s Grammar, as above, also § 50, 3); ; 1 Peter 1:7; διά πολλῶν μαρτύρων, by the mediation (intervention) of many witnesses, they being summoned for that purpose (cf. Winers Grammar, 378 (354); A. V. among), 2 Timothy 2:2. Where it is evident from the religious conceptions of the Bible that God is the author or first cause: John 11:4; Acts 5:12; Ephesians 3:10; Ephesians 4:16; Colossians 2:19; 2 Timothy 1:6; Hebrews 10:10; 2 Peter 3:6; σῴζεσθαι διά πίστεως, Ephesians 2:8; συνεγείρεσθαι διά τῆς πίστεως, Colossians 2:12; δικαιοῦσθαι διά τῆς πίστεως, Galatians 2:16, cf. Romans 3:30; in the phrases διά τοῦ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, and the like: John 1:17; John 3:17; Acts 13:38; Romans 1:5; Romans 5:9; 1 Corinthians 15:57; 1 John 4:9; Philippians 1:11; διά τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, 1 Corinthians 15:2; Ephesians 3:6; διά λόγου Θεοῦ, 1 Peter 1:23, cf. 1 Peter 1:3; διά νόμου, Romans 3:27; Romans 4:13; δἰ ἀποκαλύψεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Galatians 1:12, cf. Galatians 1:15f; διά τοῦ (ἁγίου) πνεύματος, Romans 5:5; 1 Corinthians 7:8; Ephesians 3:16; πιστεύειν διά τίνος (see πιστεύω, 1 b. γ), John 1:7; 1 Corinthians 3:5; σημεῖον γέγονε δἰ αὐτῶν, Acts 4:16; ὁ λόγος δἰ ἀγγέλων λαληθείς, Hebrews 2:2, cf. Galatians 3:19; ὁ νόμος διά Μωϋσέως ἐδόθη, John 1:17; in passages in which something is said to have been spoken through the O. T. prophets, or some one of them (cf. Lightfoot Fresh Revision etc., p. 121f): Matthew 2:5, 17 L T Tr WH, Matthew 2:23; (Matthew 3:3 L T Tr WH); Matthew 4:14; Matthew 8:17; Matthew 12:17; Matthew 21:4; Matthew 24:15; Matthew 27:9; Acts 2:16; or to have been so written: Luke 18:31; with the added mention of the first cause: ὑπό τοῦ κυρίου διά τοῦ προφήτου, Matthew 1:22; Matthew 2:15, cf. Luke 1:70; Acts 1:16; Acts 28:25; Romans 1:2; in passages relating to the Logos: πάντα δἰ αὐτοῦ (i. e., through the Divine Logos (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 379 (355))) ἐγένετο or ἐκτίσθη: John 1:3; 1 Corinthians 8:6 (where he is expressly distinguished from the first cause: ἐξ αὐτοῦ (Winer’s Grammar, 419 (391))); Colossians 1:16 (Winer’s Grammar, the passage cited), cf. Hebrews 1:2 (Philo de cherub. § 35). The instrumental cause and the principal are distinguished in 1 Corinthians 11:12 (διά τῆς γυναικός … ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ); Galatians 1:1 (ἀπ’ ἀνθρώπων … δἰ ἀνθρώπου (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 418 (390))).
3. with the genitive of a thing διά is used to denote the manner in which a thing is done, or the formal cause: εἶπε διά παραβολῆς, Luke 8:4; εἶπε δἰ ὁρματος, Acts 18:9; ἀπαγγέλλειν διά λόγου, by word of mouth, Acts 15:27; τῷ λόγῳ δἰ ἐπιστολῶν, 2 Corinthians 10:11, cf. 2 Thessalonians 2:15; πίστις ἐνεργουμένη δἰ ἀγάπης, Galatians 5:6; κεχάρισται δἰ ἐπαγγελίας, Galatians 3:18; δουλεύειν διά τῆς ἀγάπης, Galatians 5:13; ἐπιστέλλειν διά βραχέων, Hebrews 13:22; γράφειν δἰ ὀλίγων, 1 Peter 5:12 (Plato, Gorgias, p. 449 b. διά μακρῶν λόγους ποιεῖσθαι (see ὀλίγος, at the end; cf. Winer’s Grammar, § 51, 1 b.)); διά χάρτου καί μέλανος, 2 John 1:12; διά μέλανος καί καλάμου, 3 John 1:13 (Plutarch, Sol. 17, 3). To this head I should refer also the use of διά τίνος in exhortations etc. where one seeks to strengthen his exhortation by the mention of a thing or a person held sacred by those whom he is admonishing (διά equivalent to by an allusion to, by reminding you of (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 381 (357))): Romans 12:1 15:30; 1 Corinthians 1:10; 2 Corinthians 10:1; 1 Thessalonians 4:2 (yet cf. Winer’s Grammar, 379 (355) note); 2 Thessalonians 3:12 R G.
B. with the accusative (Winer’s Grammar, 398f (372f)).

I. of place; through; often so in the Greek poets, once in the N. T. according to L T Tr WH viz. Luke 17:11 διά μέσον Σαμαρείας, for R G διά μέσου Σαμαρείας (but see μέσος, 2).
II. of the Ground or Reason on account of which anything is or is not done; by reason of because of (German aus Grund).
1. of the reason for which a thing is done, or of the efficient reason, when for greater perspicuity it may be rendered by (cf. Kühner, § 434 Anm.);
a. with the accusative of the thing: δἰ ἥν, viz. τήν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμέραν (properly, by reason of which day, i. e. because it will come (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 400 (373))), 2 Peter 3:12; διά τόν λόγον (properly, by reason of the word, i. e. because the word has cleansing power), John 15:3; διά τό θέλημα σου (Vulg. proptar voluntatem tuam, i. e. because thou didst will it), Revelation 4:11; add, Revelation 12:11; Revelation 13:14 (ἀναβιώσκεται διά τήν τοῦ πατρός φύσιν, Plato, symp., p. 203 e.); cf. Grimm on 2 Macc. 3:1.
b. with the accusative of the person, by whose will, agency, favor, fault, anything is or is done: διά τόν πατέρα … δἰ ἐμέ (properly, because the father lives … because I live (cf. Winer’s Grammar, 399 (373))), John 6:57; διά τόν ὑπταξαντα, by the will of him who subjected it, opposed to οὐχ ἑκοῦσα, Romans 8:20 (cf. Winer’s 399 (373) note); μή εἴπῃς ὅτι διά κύριον ἀπέστην, Sir. 15:11; so too in the Greek writings of every age; cf. Krüger, § 68, 23; Grimm on 2 Macc. 6:25. Much more often
2. of the reason or cause on account of which anything is or is done, or ought to be done; on account of, because of;
a. in the phrases διά τοῦτο, for this cause; for this reason; therefore; on this account; since this is so: Matthew 6:25; Matthew 12:27, 31; Matthew 13:13, etc.; Mark 6:14; Mark 11:24; Luke 11:49; Luke 14:20; John 6:65; John 9:23; Acts 2:26; Romans 1:26; Romans 4:16; Romans 5:12; Romans 13:6; Romans 15:9; 1 Corinthians 4:17; 1 Corinthians 11:10, 30; 2 Corinthians 4:1; Ephesians 1:15; Ephesians 5:17; Ephesians 6:13; Colossians 1:9; 1 Thessalonians 2:13; 1 Thessalonians 3:5, 7; 2 Thessalonians 2:11; 2 Timothy 2:10; Hebrews 1:9; Hebrews 2:1; 1 John 4:5; 3 John 1:10; Revelation 7:15; Revelation 12:12; Revelation 18:8. followed by ὅτι, for this cause … because, therefore … because: John 5:16, 18; John 8:47; John 10:17; John 12:18, 39; 1 John 3:1; cf. Tholuck edition 7 on John 10:17 (he questions, at least for John 10:17 and John 12:39, the canon of Meyer (on 12:39), Luthardt (on John 10:17), others, that in this phrase in John the τοῦτο always looks backward) in the opposite order (when the words that precede with ὅτι are to be emphasized): John 15:19. It indicates the end and purpose, being followed either by ἵνα, 2 Corinthians 13:10; 1 Timothy 1:16; Philemon 1:15, (in the opposite order, John 1:31); or by ὅπως, Hebrews 9:15. διά τί (so L Tr WH) and written together διατί (so G T; cf. Winers Grammar, 45; (Lipsius, Gram. Unters., p. 126), why? wherefore? Matthew 9:11, 14; Matthew 13:10; Matthew 17:19; Mark 2:18; Luke 5:30; John 7:45; Acts 5:3; Romans 9:32; 1 Corinthians 6:7; Revelation 17:7. δἰ ἥν αἰτίαν, see αἰτία, 1. τίς ἡ αἰτία, δἰ ἥν, Acts 10:21; Acts 23:28; διά ταύτην τήν αἰτίαν, Acts 28:20; διά ταῦτα, Ephesians 5:6, etc.
b. used, with the accusative of any noun, of the mental affection by which one is impelled to some act (English for; cf. Winer’s Grammar, 399 (372) διά φθόνον, because prompted by envy, for envy, Matthew 27:18; Mark 15:10; διά τόν φόβον τίνος, John 7:13; John 19:38; John 20:19; Revelation 18:10, 15; διά τήν πολλήν ἀγάπην, Ephesians 2:4. of any other cause on account of which one is said to do or to have done something — as in Matthew 14:3, 9; Matthew 15:3, 6; John 4:39, 41; John 12:11; John 14:11; Acts 28:2; Romans 3:25 (διά τήν πάρεσιν τῶν προγεγονότων ἁμαρτημάτων because of the pretermission etc., i. e. because he had left the sins unpunished); Romans 6:19; Romans 15:15; 2 Corinthians 9:14; Galatians 4:13 (δἰ ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκός, on account of an infirmity of the flesh, i. e. detained among you by sickness; cf. Wieseler (or Lightfoot) at the passage); — or to suffer or have suffered something, Matthew 24:9; Matthew 27:19; Luke 23:19, 25; Acts 21:35; 2 Corinthians 4:11; Colossians 3:6; 1 Peter 3:14; Revelation 1:9; Revelation 6:9; — or to have obtained something, Hebrews 2:9; Hebrews 5:14; 1 John 2:12; — or to be or to become something, Romans 8:10 11:28; Ephesians 4:18; Hebrews 5:12 (Winer’s Grammar, 399 (373)); Hebrews 7:18. of the impeding cause, where by reason of some person or thing something is said to have been impossible: Matthew 13:58; Matthew 17:20; Mark 2:4; Luke 5:19; Luke 8:19; Acts 21:34; Hebrews 3:19; Hebrews 4:6. διά with the accusative of a person is often equivalent to for the benefit of (English for the sake of): Mark 2:27; John 11:42; John 12:30; 1 Corinthians 11:9; Hebrews 1:14; Hebrews 6:7 διά τούς ἐκλεκτούς, Matthew 24:22; Mark 13:20; 2 Timothy 2:10; διά Χριστόν for Christ’s sake, to promote his cause, 1 Corinthians 4:10; δἰ ὑμᾶς, John 12:30; 2 Corinthians 4:15; 2 Corinthians 8:9; Philippians 1:24; 1 Thessalonians 1:5. διά τινα, because of the example set by one: 2 Corinthians 2:10; Romans 2:24; 2 Peter 2:2; διά τόν Χριστόν, for Christ, to become a partner of Christ, Philippians 3:7 (equivalent to ἵνα Χριστόν κερδήσω, Philippians 3:8).
c. διά τό, because that, for that, is placed before the infinitive — either standing alone, as Luke 9:7; Hebrews 7:23; — or having a subject accusative expressed, as Matthew 24:12; Mark 5:4; Luke 2:4; Luke 19:11; Acts 4:2; Acts 12:20; Acts 18:2; Acts 27:4, 9; Acts 28:18; Philippians 1:7; Hebrews 7:24; Hebrews 10:2; James 4:2; — or with its subject accusative evident from the context, as Matthew 13:6; Mark 4:6; Luke 11:8; Luke 18:5; Luke 23:8; Acts 8:11; Acts 18:3.
C. In Composition διά indicates:

1. a passing through space or time, through, (διαβαίνω, διέρχομαι, διϋλίζω, etc.); hence,
2. continuity of time (διαμένω, διατελέω, διατηρέω), and completeness of action (διακαθαρίζω, διαζώννυμι).
3. distribution (διαδίδωμι, διαγγέλλω, διαφημίζω).
4. separation (διαλύω, διαιρέω).
5. rivalry and endeavor (διαπίνω, διακατελέγχομαι; cf. Herm. ad Vig., p. 854; (Winer. as below, p. 6)).
6. transition from one state to another (διαλλάσσω, διορθόω). (Cf. Winer, De verb. comp. etc. Part v.; Valckenaer on Herodotus 5, 18; Cattier. Gazophyl. edition Abresch, Cant. 1810, p. 39; A. Rieder, Ueb. d. mit mehr als ein. prap. zusammeng. verba im N. T., p. 17f) No one of the N. T. writers makes more frequent use of verbs compounded with διά than Luke, (see the list in Winer, as above, p. 3 note; on their construction Winers Grammar, § 52, 4, 8).